Consent Manager Tag v2.0 (for TCF 2.0) -->
Farnell PDF
AT42QT1010 Datasheet - Atmel - Farnell Element 14
AT42QT1010 Datasheet - Atmel - Atmel - Farnell Element 14
- Revenir à l'accueil
Farnell Element 14 :
See the trailer for the next exciting episode of The Ben Heck show. Check back on Friday to be among the first to see the exclusive full show on element…
Connect your Raspberry Pi to a breadboard, download some code and create a push-button audio play project.
Puce électronique / Microchip :
Sans fil - Wireless :
Texas instrument :
Ordinateurs :
Logiciels :
Tutoriels :
Autres documentations :
![[TXT]](http://www.audentia-gestion.fr/icons/text.gif)
Farnell-CLRC632-NXP-..> 20-Dec-2014 10:22 2.6M
Farnell-7491181012-O..> 20-Dec-2014 10:22 2.6M
Farnell-LPC4350-30-2..> 20-Dec-2014 10:21 1.4M
Farnell-LPC178x-7x-N..> 20-Dec-2014 10:21 1.6M
Farnell-Data-Sheet-J..> 20-Dec-2014 10:21 1.0M
Farnell-LPC81xM-NXP-..> 20-Dec-2014 10:20 1.2M
Farnell-Data-Sheet-J..> 20-Dec-2014 10:20 1.2M
Farnell-SL3S1003_101..> 20-Dec-2014 10:06 2.0M
Farnell-NT3H1101-NT3..> 20-Dec-2014 10:06 2.3M
Farnell-LPC1769-68-6..> 20-Dec-2014 10:06 2.2M
Farnell-SL3S1203_121..> 20-Dec-2014 10:01 2.0M
Farnell-PN512-NXP-Se..> 20-Dec-2014 10:01 1.9M
Farnell-MMBZxVCL-MMB..> 20-Dec-2014 09:53 1.6M
Farnell-Datasheet-NX..> 20-Dec-2014 09:52 1.6M
Farnell-IP4251_52_53..> 20-Dec-2014 09:51 1.6M
Farnell-BC846DS2-NXP..> 20-Dec-2014 09:48 1.2M
Farnell-BAT54J-Schot..> 20-Dec-2014 09:47 1.1M
Farnell-PMEG3010EP-N..> 20-Dec-2014 09:47 1.1M
Farnell-AVR172-Senso..> 20-Dec-2014 09:47 1.2M
Farnell-PBSS5320X-NX..> 20-Dec-2014 09:47 1.6M
Farnell-ATtiny2313-A..> 20-Dec-2014 09:47 1.6M
Farnell-SG2525A-SG35..> 20-Dec-2014 09:39 1.0M
Farnell-PMBT3906-PNP..> 20-Dec-2014 09:39 1.0M
Farnell-PDTB123TT-NX..> 20-Dec-2014 09:39 1.0M
Farnell-PIC12F529T39..> 20-Dec-2014 09:39 1.0M
Farnell-PSMN011-80YS..> 20-Dec-2014 09:39 1.1M
Farnell-PESD5V0F1BL-..> 20-Dec-2014 09:39 1.1M
Farnell-MB85RS128B-F..> 20-Dec-2014 09:38 1.1M
Farnell-SMAJ-STMicro..> 13-Oct-2014 07:07 734K
Farnell-L6562-STMicr..> 13-Oct-2014 07:07 754K
Farnell-LM139-LM239-..> 13-Oct-2014 07:07 771K
Farnell-L4978-STMicr..> 13-Oct-2014 07:07 783K
Farnell-ST1S10PHR-ST..> 13-Oct-2014 07:06 820K
Farnell-TIP41C-TIP42..> 13-Oct-2014 07:06 829K
Farnell-MC34063ABD-T..> 13-Oct-2014 07:06 844K
Farnell-ESM6045DV-ST..> 13-Oct-2014 07:06 850K
Farnell-TIP102-TIP10..> 13-Oct-2014 07:06 853K
Farnell-ST3232B-ST32..> 13-Oct-2014 07:06 867K
Farnell-STM32F030x4-..> 13-Oct-2014 07:06 1.1M
Farnell-STM32F103x8-..> 13-Oct-2014 07:06 1.0M
Farnell-STM32F405xx-..> 13-Oct-2014 07:05 1.4M
Farnell-STM32F205xx-..> 13-Oct-2014 07:05 1.7M
Farnell-STP16NF06L-n..> 13-Oct-2014 07:05 1.7M
Farnell-STP80NF55L-0..> 13-Oct-2014 07:05 1.7M
Farnell-LM217-LM317-..> 13-Oct-2014 07:04 1.7M
Farnell-LM2904-LM290..> 13-Oct-2014 07:04 1.7M
Farnell-L78-Positive..> 13-Oct-2014 07:04 1.8M
Farnell-VND920P-E-ST..> 13-Oct-2014 07:04 1.8M
Farnell-LM350-STMicr..> 13-Oct-2014 07:03 1.8M
![[ ]](http://www.audentia-gestion.fr/icons/layout.gif)
Smart_street_lightin..> 13-Oct-2014 07:03 1.6M
Farnell-Smart-street..> 13-Oct-2014 07:02 1.8M
Farnell-ULN2001-ULN2..> 13-Oct-2014 07:02 1.9M
Farnell-ULQ2001-ULQ2..> 13-Oct-2014 07:02 1.9M
Farnell-L6384E-STMic..> 13-Oct-2014 07:02 1.9M
Farnell-AN2794-Appli..> 13-Oct-2014 07:01 1.0M
Farnell-STEVAL-TDR02..> 13-Oct-2014 07:01 960K
Farnell-TL084-TL084A..> 11-Oct-2014 15:54 1.7M
Farnell-TDA7296-STMi..> 11-Oct-2014 15:54 1.7M
Farnell-L78-STMicroe..> 11-Oct-2014 15:49 1.6M
Farnell-LM158-LM258-..> 11-Oct-2014 15:49 1.6M
Farnell-LF351-STMicr..> 11-Oct-2014 15:49 1.7M
Farnell-L293B-STMicr..> 11-Oct-2014 15:49 1.7M
Farnell-NE556-SA556-..> 11-Oct-2014 15:48 1.7M
Farnell-SO967460-PDF..> 11-Oct-2014 12:05 2.9M
Farnell-Everything-Y..> 11-Oct-2014 12:05 1.5M
![[ ]](http://www.audentia-gestion.fr/icons/unknown.gif)
cookiechoices.js 27-Sep-2014 12:40 6.0K
Farnell-ULN2803A-Rev..> 09-Sep-2014 19:26 2.9M
Analog-Devices-Convo..> 09-Sep-2014 08:26 2.1M
Analog-Devices-Convo..> 09-Sep-2014 08:25 2.2M
Analog-Devices-Convo..> 09-Sep-2014 08:25 2.2M
Analog-Devices-ADMC4..> 09-Sep-2014 08:23 2.3M
Analog-Devices-Wi-Fi..> 09-Sep-2014 08:23 2.3M
Analog-Devices-ADMC2..> 09-Sep-2014 08:21 2.4M
Analog-Devices-ADC-S..> 09-Sep-2014 08:21 2.4M
Analog-Devices-Visua..> 09-Sep-2014 08:18 2.5M
Analog-Devices-ANF32..> 09-Sep-2014 08:18 2.6M
Farnell-Compensating..> 09-Sep-2014 08:16 2.6M
Farnell-Compensating..> 09-Sep-2014 08:16 2.6M
Farnell-LM7805-Fairc..> 09-Sep-2014 08:13 2.7M
Farnell-AD620-Rev-H-..> 09-Sep-2014 08:13 2.6M
Farnell-Datasheet-FT..> 09-Sep-2014 08:10 2.8M
Farnell-MAX4661-MAX4..> 09-Sep-2014 08:10 2.8M
Farnell-OPA627-Texas..> 09-Sep-2014 08:08 2.8M
Farnell-REF19x-Serie..> 09-Sep-2014 08:08 2.8M
Farnell-Data-Sheet-M..> 09-Sep-2014 08:05 2.8M
Analog-Devices-Digit..> 08-Sep-2014 18:03 2.0M
Analog-Devices-Digit..> 08-Sep-2014 18:02 2.1M
Analog-Devices-Basic..> 08-Sep-2014 17:49 1.9M
Farnell-AD9833-Rev-E..> 08-Sep-2014 17:49 1.8M
Farnell-The-Discrete..> 08-Sep-2014 17:44 1.8M
Electronique-Basic-o..> 08-Sep-2014 17:43 1.8M
Analog-Devices-AN300..> 08-Sep-2014 17:42 2.0M
Analog-Devices-The-C..> 08-Sep-2014 17:41 1.9M
Analog-Devices-Intro..> 08-Sep-2014 17:39 1.9M
Analog-Devices-Compl..> 08-Sep-2014 17:38 2.0M
Analog-Devices-Gloss..> 08-Sep-2014 17:36 2.0M
Farnell-ADuM1300-ADu..> 08-Sep-2014 08:11 1.7M
Farnell-AD586BRZ-Ana..> 08-Sep-2014 08:09 1.6M
Farnell-ADuM1200-ADu..> 08-Sep-2014 08:09 1.6M
Farnell-NA555-NE555-..> 08-Sep-2014 07:51 1.5M
Farnell-AD9834-Rev-D..> 08-Sep-2014 07:32 1.2M
Farnell-MSP430F15x-M..> 08-Sep-2014 07:32 1.3M
Farnell-AD736-Rev-I-..> 08-Sep-2014 07:31 1.3M
Farnell-AD8307-Data-..> 08-Sep-2014 07:30 1.3M
Farnell-Single-Chip-..> 08-Sep-2014 07:30 1.5M
Farnell-Quadruple-2-..> 08-Sep-2014 07:29 1.5M
Farnell-ADE7758-Rev-..> 08-Sep-2014 07:28 1.7M
Farnell-MAX3221-Rev-..> 08-Sep-2014 07:28 1.8M
Farnell-USB-to-Seria..> 08-Sep-2014 07:27 2.0M
Farnell-AD8313-Analo..> 08-Sep-2014 07:26 2.0M
Farnell-SN54HC164-SN..> 08-Sep-2014 07:25 2.0M
Farnell-AD8310-Analo..> 08-Sep-2014 07:24 2.1M
Farnell-AD8361-Rev-D..> 08-Sep-2014 07:23 2.1M
Farnell-2N3906-Fairc..> 08-Sep-2014 07:22 2.1M
Farnell-AD584-Rev-C-..> 08-Sep-2014 07:20 2.2M
Farnell-ADE7753-Rev-..> 08-Sep-2014 07:20 2.3M
Farnell-TLV320AIC23B..> 08-Sep-2014 07:18 2.4M
Farnell-STM32F405xxS..> 27-Aug-2014 18:27 1.8M
Farnell-fx-3650P-fx-..> 29-Jul-2014 10:42 1.5M
Farnell-MSP430-Hardw..> 29-Jul-2014 10:36 1.1M
Farnell-LM324-Texas-..> 29-Jul-2014 10:32 1.5M
Farnell-LM386-Low-Vo..> 29-Jul-2014 10:32 1.5M
Farnell-NE5532-Texas..> 29-Jul-2014 10:32 1.5M
Farnell-Hex-Inverter..> 29-Jul-2014 10:31 875K
Farnell-AT90USBKey-H..> 29-Jul-2014 10:31 902K
Farnell-AT89C5131-Ha..> 29-Jul-2014 10:31 1.2M
Farnell-MSP-EXP430F5..> 29-Jul-2014 10:31 1.2M
Farnell-Explorer-16-..> 29-Jul-2014 10:31 1.3M
Farnell-TMP006EVM-Us..> 29-Jul-2014 10:30 1.3M
Farnell-Gertboard-Us..> 29-Jul-2014 10:30 1.4M
Farnell-LMP91051-Use..> 29-Jul-2014 10:30 1.4M
Farnell-Thermometre-..> 29-Jul-2014 10:30 1.4M
Farnell-user-manuel-..> 29-Jul-2014 10:29 1.5M
Farnell-TLV320AIC325..> 28-Jul-2014 17:45 2.9M
Farnell-2-GBPS-Diffe..> 28-Jul-2014 17:42 2.7M
Farnell-LMT88-2.4V-1..> 28-Jul-2014 17:42 2.8M
Farnell-Octal-Genera..> 28-Jul-2014 17:42 2.8M
Farnell-Dual-MOSFET-..> 28-Jul-2014 17:41 2.8M
Farnell-SN54LV4053A-..> 28-Jul-2014 17:20 5.9M
Farnell-TAS1020B-USB..> 28-Jul-2014 17:19 6.2M
Farnell-TPS40060-Wid..> 28-Jul-2014 17:19 6.3M
Farnell-TL082-Wide-B..> 28-Jul-2014 17:16 6.3M
Farnell-RF-short-tra..> 28-Jul-2014 17:16 6.3M
Farnell-maxim-integr..> 28-Jul-2014 17:14 6.4M
Farnell-TSV6390-TSV6..> 28-Jul-2014 17:14 6.4M
Farnell-Fast-Charge-..> 28-Jul-2014 17:12 6.4M
Farnell-NVE-datashee..> 28-Jul-2014 17:12 6.5M
Farnell-Excalibur-Hi..> 28-Jul-2014 17:10 2.4M
Farnell-Excalibur-Hi..> 28-Jul-2014 17:10 2.4M
Farnell-REF102-10V-P..> 28-Jul-2014 17:09 2.4M
Farnell-TMS320F28055..> 28-Jul-2014 17:09 2.7M
Farnell-ULINKpro-Deb..> 25-Jul-2014 12:35 5.9M
Farnell-WIRE-WRAP-50..> 25-Jul-2014 12:34 5.9M
Farnell-MICROCHIP-PI..> 25-Jul-2014 12:34 6.7M
Farnell-OMRON-INDUST..> 25-Jul-2014 12:32 6.9M
Farnell-OMRON-INDUST..> 25-Jul-2014 12:31 6.9M
Farnell-TYCO-ELECTRO..> 25-Jul-2014 12:30 6.9M
Farnell-Power-suppli..> 25-Jul-2014 12:29 7.0M
Farnell-Schroff-A108..> 25-Jul-2014 12:27 2.8M
Farnell-Schroff-Main..> 25-Jul-2014 12:26 2.9M
Farnell-Schroff-mult..> 25-Jul-2014 12:26 2.9M
Farnell-Quick-Start-..> 25-Jul-2014 12:25 3.0M
Farnell-PiFace-Digit..> 25-Jul-2014 12:25 3.0M
Farnell-PicoScope-se..> 25-Jul-2014 12:24 3.0M
Farnell-Trust-Digita..> 25-Jul-2014 12:24 3.0M
Farnell-Jeu-multi-la..> 25-Jul-2014 12:23 3.0M
Farnell-PicoScope-42..> 25-Jul-2014 12:23 3.0M
Farnell-LD-WSECO16-P..> 25-Jul-2014 12:22 3.1M
Farnell-Circuit-Impr..> 25-Jul-2014 12:22 3.1M
Farnell-MULTICOMP-Ra..> 22-Jul-2014 12:57 5.9M
Farnell-RASPBERRY-PI..> 22-Jul-2014 12:35 5.9M
Farnell-Dremel-Exper..> 22-Jul-2014 12:34 1.6M
Farnell-STM32F103x8-..> 22-Jul-2014 12:33 1.6M
Farnell-BD6xxx-PDF.htm 22-Jul-2014 12:33 1.6M
Farnell-L78S-STMicro..> 22-Jul-2014 12:32 1.6M
Farnell-RaspiCam-Doc..> 22-Jul-2014 12:32 1.6M
Farnell-SB520-SB5100..> 22-Jul-2014 12:32 1.6M
Farnell-iServer-Micr..> 22-Jul-2014 12:32 1.6M
Farnell-LUMINARY-MIC..> 22-Jul-2014 12:31 3.6M
Farnell-TEXAS-INSTRU..> 22-Jul-2014 12:31 2.4M
Farnell-TEXAS-INSTRU..> 22-Jul-2014 12:30 4.6M
Farnell-CLASS 1-or-2..> 22-Jul-2014 12:30 4.7M
Farnell-TEXAS-INSTRU..> 22-Jul-2014 12:29 4.8M
Farnell-Evaluating-t..> 22-Jul-2014 12:28 4.9M
Farnell-LM3S6952-Mic..> 22-Jul-2014 12:27 5.9M
Farnell-Keyboard-Mou..> 22-Jul-2014 12:27 5.9M
Farnell-0050375063-D..> 18-Jul-2014 17:03 2.5M
Farnell-Mini-Fit-Jr-..> 18-Jul-2014 17:03 2.5M
Farnell-43031-0002-M..> 18-Jul-2014 17:03 2.5M
Farnell-0433751001-D..> 18-Jul-2014 17:02 2.5M
Farnell-Cube-3D-Prin..> 18-Jul-2014 17:02 2.5M
Farnell-MTX-Compact-..> 18-Jul-2014 17:01 2.5M
Farnell-MTX-3250-MTX..> 18-Jul-2014 17:01 2.5M
Farnell-ATtiny26-L-A..> 18-Jul-2014 17:00 2.6M
Farnell-MCP3421-Micr..> 18-Jul-2014 17:00 1.2M
Farnell-LM19-Texas-I..> 18-Jul-2014 17:00 1.2M
Farnell-Data-Sheet-S..> 18-Jul-2014 17:00 1.2M
Farnell-LMH6518-Texa..> 18-Jul-2014 16:59 1.3M
Farnell-AD7719-Low-V..> 18-Jul-2014 16:59 1.4M
Farnell-DAC8143-Data..> 18-Jul-2014 16:59 1.5M
Farnell-BGA7124-400-..> 18-Jul-2014 16:59 1.5M
Farnell-SICK-OPTIC-E..> 18-Jul-2014 16:58 1.5M
Farnell-LT3757-Linea..> 18-Jul-2014 16:58 1.6M
Farnell-LT1961-Linea..> 18-Jul-2014 16:58 1.6M
Farnell-PIC18F2420-2..> 18-Jul-2014 16:57 2.5M
Farnell-DS3231-DS-PD..> 18-Jul-2014 16:57 2.5M
Farnell-RDS-80-PDF.htm 18-Jul-2014 16:57 1.3M
Farnell-AD8300-Data-..> 18-Jul-2014 16:56 1.3M
Farnell-LT6233-Linea..> 18-Jul-2014 16:56 1.3M
Farnell-MAX1365-MAX1..> 18-Jul-2014 16:56 1.4M
Farnell-XPSAF5130-PD..> 18-Jul-2014 16:56 1.4M
Farnell-DP83846A-DsP..> 18-Jul-2014 16:55 1.5M
Farnell-SL3ICS1002-1..> 16-Jul-2014 09:05 2.5M
Farnell-MCOC1-Farnel..> 16-Jul-2014 09:04 1.0M
Farnell-SL3S1203_121..> 16-Jul-2014 09:04 1.1M
Farnell-PN512-Full-N..> 16-Jul-2014 09:03 1.4M
Farnell-SL3S4011_402..> 16-Jul-2014 09:03 1.1M
Farnell-LPC408x-7x 3..> 16-Jul-2014 09:03 1.6M
Farnell-PCF8574-PCF8..> 16-Jul-2014 09:03 1.7M
Farnell-LPC81xM-32-b..> 16-Jul-2014 09:02 2.0M
Farnell-LPC1769-68-6..> 16-Jul-2014 09:02 1.9M
Farnell-Download-dat..> 16-Jul-2014 09:02 2.2M
Farnell-LPC3220-30-4..> 16-Jul-2014 09:02 2.2M
Farnell-LPC11U3x-32-..> 16-Jul-2014 09:01 2.4M
Farnell-Full-Datashe..> 15-Jul-2014 17:08 951K
Farnell-pmbta13_pmbt..> 15-Jul-2014 17:06 959K
Farnell-EE-SPX303N-4..> 15-Jul-2014 17:06 969K
Farnell-Datasheet-NX..> 15-Jul-2014 17:06 1.0M
Farnell-Datasheet-Fa..> 15-Jul-2014 17:05 1.0M
Farnell-MIDAS-un-tra..> 15-Jul-2014 17:05 1.0M
Farnell-SERIAL-TFT-M..> 15-Jul-2014 17:05 1.0M
Farnell-TMR-2-series..> 15-Jul-2014 16:48 787K
Farnell-DC-DC-Conver..> 15-Jul-2014 16:48 781K
Farnell-Full-Datashe..> 15-Jul-2014 16:47 803K
Farnell-TMLM-Series-..> 15-Jul-2014 16:47 810K
Farnell-TEL-5-Series..> 15-Jul-2014 16:47 814K
Farnell-TXL-series-t..> 15-Jul-2014 16:47 829K
Farnell-TEP-150WI-Se..> 15-Jul-2014 16:47 837K
Farnell-AC-DC-Power-..> 15-Jul-2014 16:47 845K
Farnell-TIS-Instruct..> 15-Jul-2014 16:47 845K
Farnell-TOS-tracopow..> 15-Jul-2014 16:47 852K
Farnell-TCL-DC-traco..> 15-Jul-2014 16:46 858K
Farnell-TIS-series-t..> 15-Jul-2014 16:46 875K
Farnell-TMR-2-Series..> 15-Jul-2014 16:46 897K
Farnell-TMR-3-WI-Ser..> 15-Jul-2014 16:46 939K
Farnell-TEN-8-WI-Ser..> 15-Jul-2014 16:46 939K
Farnell-SOURIAU-Cont..> 08-Jul-2014 19:04 3.0M
Farnell-T672-3000-Se..> 08-Jul-2014 18:59 2.0M
Farnell-tesa®pack63..> 08-Jul-2014 18:56 2.0M
Farnell-Encodeur-USB..> 08-Jul-2014 18:56 2.0M
Farnell-CC2530ZDK-Us..> 08-Jul-2014 18:55 2.1M
Farnell-2020-Manuel-..> 08-Jul-2014 18:55 2.1M
Farnell-Synchronous-..> 08-Jul-2014 18:54 2.1M
Farnell-Arithmetic-L..> 08-Jul-2014 18:54 2.1M
Farnell-NA555-NE555-..> 08-Jul-2014 18:53 2.2M
Farnell-4-Bit-Magnit..> 08-Jul-2014 18:53 2.2M
Farnell-LM555-Timer-..> 08-Jul-2014 18:53 2.2M
Farnell-L293d-Texas-..> 08-Jul-2014 18:53 2.2M
Farnell-SN54HC244-SN..> 08-Jul-2014 18:52 2.3M
Farnell-MAX232-MAX23..> 08-Jul-2014 18:52 2.3M
Farnell-High-precisi..> 08-Jul-2014 18:51 2.3M
Farnell-SMU-Instrume..> 08-Jul-2014 18:51 2.3M
Farnell-900-Series-B..> 08-Jul-2014 18:50 2.3M
Farnell-BA-Series-Oh..> 08-Jul-2014 18:50 2.3M
Farnell-UTS-Series-S..> 08-Jul-2014 18:49 2.5M
Farnell-270-Series-O..> 08-Jul-2014 18:49 2.3M
Farnell-UTS-Series-S..> 08-Jul-2014 18:49 2.8M
Farnell-Tiva-C-Serie..> 08-Jul-2014 18:49 2.6M
Farnell-UTO-Souriau-..> 08-Jul-2014 18:48 2.8M
Farnell-Clipper-Seri..> 08-Jul-2014 18:48 2.8M
Farnell-851-Series-P..> 08-Jul-2014 18:47 3.0M
Farnell-HIP4081A-Int..> 07-Jul-2014 19:47 1.0M
Farnell-ISL6251-ISL6..> 07-Jul-2014 19:47 1.1M
Farnell-DG411-DG412-..> 07-Jul-2014 19:47 1.0M
Farnell-3367-ARALDIT..> 07-Jul-2014 19:46 1.2M
Farnell-ICM7228-Inte..> 07-Jul-2014 19:46 1.1M
Farnell-Data-Sheet-K..> 07-Jul-2014 19:46 1.2M
Farnell-Silica-Gel-M..> 07-Jul-2014 19:46 1.2M
Farnell-TKC2-Dusters..> 07-Jul-2014 19:46 1.2M
Farnell-CRC-HANDCLEA..> 07-Jul-2014 19:46 1.2M
Farnell-760G-French-..> 07-Jul-2014 19:45 1.2M
Farnell-Decapant-KF-..> 07-Jul-2014 19:45 1.2M
Farnell-1734-ARALDIT..> 07-Jul-2014 19:45 1.2M
Farnell-Araldite-Fus..> 07-Jul-2014 19:45 1.2M
Farnell-fiche-de-don..> 07-Jul-2014 19:44 1.4M
Farnell-safety-data-..> 07-Jul-2014 19:44 1.4M
Farnell-A-4-Hardener..> 07-Jul-2014 19:44 1.4M
Farnell-CC-Debugger-..> 07-Jul-2014 19:44 1.5M
Farnell-SmartRF06-Ev..> 07-Jul-2014 19:43 1.6M
Farnell-CC2531-USB-H..> 07-Jul-2014 19:43 1.8M
Farnell-Alimentation..> 07-Jul-2014 19:43 1.8M
Farnell-BK889B-PONT-..> 07-Jul-2014 19:42 1.8M
Farnell-User-Guide-M..> 07-Jul-2014 19:41 2.0M
Farnell-SL59830-Inte..> 06-Jul-2014 10:11 1.0M
Farnell-ALF1210-PDF.htm 06-Jul-2014 10:06 4.0M
Farnell-AD7171-16-Bi..> 06-Jul-2014 10:06 1.0M
Farnell-Low-Noise-24..> 06-Jul-2014 10:05 1.0M
Farnell-ESCON-Featur..> 06-Jul-2014 10:05 938K
Farnell-74LCX573-Fai..> 06-Jul-2014 10:05 1.9M
Farnell-1N4148WS-Fai..> 06-Jul-2014 10:04 1.9M
Farnell-FAN6756-Fair..> 06-Jul-2014 10:04 850K
Farnell-Datasheet-Fa..> 06-Jul-2014 10:04 861K
Farnell-ES1F-ES1J-fi..> 06-Jul-2014 10:04 867K
Farnell-QRE1113-Fair..> 06-Jul-2014 10:03 879K
Farnell-2N7002DW-Fai..> 06-Jul-2014 10:03 886K
Farnell-FDC2512-Fair..> 06-Jul-2014 10:03 886K
Farnell-FDV301N-Digi..> 06-Jul-2014 10:03 886K
Farnell-S1A-Fairchil..> 06-Jul-2014 10:03 896K
Farnell-BAV99-Fairch..> 06-Jul-2014 10:03 896K
Farnell-74AC00-74ACT..> 06-Jul-2014 10:03 911K
Farnell-NaPiOn-Panas..> 06-Jul-2014 10:02 911K
Farnell-LQ-RELAYS-AL..> 06-Jul-2014 10:02 924K
Farnell-ev-relays-ae..> 06-Jul-2014 10:02 926K
Farnell-ESCON-Featur..> 06-Jul-2014 10:02 931K
Farnell-Amplifier-In..> 06-Jul-2014 10:02 940K
Farnell-Serial-File-..> 06-Jul-2014 10:02 941K
Farnell-Both-the-Del..> 06-Jul-2014 10:01 948K
Farnell-Videk-PDF.htm 06-Jul-2014 10:01 948K
Farnell-EPCOS-173438..> 04-Jul-2014 10:43 3.3M
Farnell-Sensorless-C..> 04-Jul-2014 10:42 3.3M
Farnell-197.31-KB-Te..> 04-Jul-2014 10:42 3.3M
Farnell-PIC12F609-61..> 04-Jul-2014 10:41 3.7M
Farnell-PADO-semi-au..> 04-Jul-2014 10:41 3.7M
Farnell-03-iec-runds..> 04-Jul-2014 10:40 3.7M
Farnell-ACC-Silicone..> 04-Jul-2014 10:40 3.7M
Farnell-Series-TDS10..> 04-Jul-2014 10:39 4.0M
Farnell-Q48-PDF.htm 23-Jun-2014 10:29 2.1M
Farnell-Panasonic-15..> 23-Jun-2014 10:29 2.1M
Farnell-BZX384-serie..> 23-Jun-2014 10:29 2.1M
Farnell-AN10361-Phil..> 23-Jun-2014 10:29 2.1M
Farnell-KSZ8851SNL-S..> 23-Jun-2014 10:28 2.1M
Farnell-BF545A-BF545..> 23-Jun-2014 10:28 2.1M
Farnell-PIC18F2455-2..> 23-Jun-2014 10:27 3.1M
Farnell-PMBT4403-PNP..> 23-Jun-2014 10:27 3.1M
Farnell-24AA024-24LC..> 23-Jun-2014 10:26 3.1M
Farnell-Leaded-Trans..> 23-Jun-2014 10:26 3.2M
Farnell-SSC7102-Micr..> 23-Jun-2014 10:25 3.2M
Farnell-Fastrack-Sup..> 23-Jun-2014 10:25 3.3M
Farnell-BC847DS-NXP-..> 23-Jun-2014 10:24 3.3M
Farnell-HI-70300-Sol..> 14-Jun-2014 18:27 2.4M
Farnell-Davum-TMC-PD..> 14-Jun-2014 18:27 2.4M
Farnell-Repartiteurs..> 14-Jun-2014 18:26 2.5M
Farnell-Documentatio..> 14-Jun-2014 18:26 2.5M
Farnell-Fiche-de-don..> 14-Jun-2014 18:26 2.5M
Farnell-SPLC780A1-16..> 14-Jun-2014 18:25 2.5M
Farnell-Construction..> 14-Jun-2014 18:25 2.5M
Farnell-Alimentation..> 14-Jun-2014 18:24 2.5M
Farnell-C.A-6150-C.A..> 14-Jun-2014 18:24 2.5M
Farnell-Fluke-1730-E..> 14-Jun-2014 18:23 2.5M
Farnell-Ponts-RLC-po..> 14-Jun-2014 18:23 3.3M
Farnell-Serie-Standa..> 14-Jun-2014 18:23 3.3M
Farnell-FDS-ITW-Spra..> 14-Jun-2014 18:22 3.3M
Farnell-HFE1600-Data..> 14-Jun-2014 18:22 3.3M
Farnell-TDK-Lambda-H..> 14-Jun-2014 18:21 3.3M
Farnell-HC49-4H-Crys..> 14-Jun-2014 18:20 3.3M
Farnell-Avvertenze-e..> 14-Jun-2014 18:20 3.3M
Farnell-Ceramic-tran..> 14-Jun-2014 18:19 3.4M
Farnell-ADL6507-PDF.htm 14-Jun-2014 18:19 3.4M
Farnell-PMEG4002EL-N..> 14-Jun-2014 18:18 3.4M
Farnell-Midas-Active..> 14-Jun-2014 18:17 3.4M
Farnell-Molex-83421-..> 14-Jun-2014 18:17 3.4M
Farnell-Molex-COMMER..> 14-Jun-2014 18:16 3.4M
Farnell-10TPB47M-End..> 14-Jun-2014 18:16 3.4M
Farnell-U2270B-PDF.htm 14-Jun-2014 18:15 3.4M
Farnell-SVPE-series-..> 14-Jun-2014 18:15 2.0M
Farnell-F28069-Picco..> 14-Jun-2014 18:14 2.0M
Farnell-Termometros-..> 14-Jun-2014 18:14 2.0M
Farnell-Cordless-dri..> 14-Jun-2014 18:13 2.0M
Farnell-Battery-GBA-..> 14-Jun-2014 18:13 2.0M
Farnell-CD4536B-Type..> 14-Jun-2014 18:13 2.0M
Farnell-0430300011-D..> 14-Jun-2014 18:13 2.0M
Farnell-Mistral-PDF.htm 14-Jun-2014 18:12 2.1M
Farnell-Connectors-N..> 14-Jun-2014 18:12 2.1M
Farnell-XPS-AC-Octop..> 14-Jun-2014 18:11 2.1M
Farnell-Midas-MCCOG4..> 14-Jun-2014 18:11 2.1M
Farnell-V4N-PDF.htm 14-Jun-2014 18:11 2.1M
Farnell-Signal-PCB-R..> 14-Jun-2014 18:11 2.1M
Farnell-PIC24FJ256GB..> 14-Jun-2014 09:51 2.4M
Farnell-DC-Fan-type-..> 14-Jun-2014 09:51 1.8M
Farnell-12mm-Size-In..> 14-Jun-2014 09:50 2.4M
Farnell-10BQ060-PDF.htm 14-Jun-2014 09:50 2.4M
Farnell-An-Improved-..> 14-Jun-2014 09:49 2.5M
Farnell-ATmega640-VA..> 14-Jun-2014 09:49 2.5M
Farnell-LME49725-Pow..> 14-Jun-2014 09:49 2.5M
Farnell-Produit-3430..> 14-Jun-2014 09:48 2.5M
Farnell-USB-Buccanee..> 14-Jun-2014 09:48 2.5M
Farnell-DC-Fan-type-..> 14-Jun-2014 09:48 2.5M
Farnell-Fiche-de-don..> 14-Jun-2014 09:47 2.5M
Farnell-Nilï¬-sk-E-..> 14-Jun-2014 09:47 2.5M
Farnell-MX670-MX675-..> 14-Jun-2014 09:46 2.5M
Farnell-Tektronix-AC..> 13-Jun-2014 18:44 1.5M
Farnell-PMBT3906-PNP..> 13-Jun-2014 18:44 1.5M
Farnell-PESD5V0F1BL-..> 13-Jun-2014 18:43 1.5M
Farnell-PMEG4010CEH-..> 13-Jun-2014 18:43 1.6M
Farnell-PESD9X5.0L-P..> 13-Jun-2014 18:43 1.6M
Farnell-BTA204-800C-..> 13-Jun-2014 18:42 1.6M
Farnell-BYV29F-600-N..> 13-Jun-2014 18:42 1.6M
Farnell-Low-cost-Enc..> 13-Jun-2014 18:42 1.7M
Farnell-BC846DS-NXP-..> 13-Jun-2014 18:42 1.6M
Farnell-IP4252CZ16-8..> 13-Jun-2014 18:41 1.7M
Farnell-BUJD203AX-NX..> 13-Jun-2014 18:41 1.7M
Farnell-Download-dat..> 13-Jun-2014 18:40 1.8M
Farnell-BT151-650R-N..> 13-Jun-2014 18:40 1.7M
Farnell-OXPCIE958-FB..> 13-Jun-2014 18:40 1.8M
Farnell-ATtiny26-L-A..> 13-Jun-2014 18:40 1.8M
Farnell-Microchip-MC..> 13-Jun-2014 18:27 1.8M
Farnell-Pompes-Charg..> 24-Apr-2014 20:23 3.3M
Farnell-Alimentation..> 01-Apr-2014 07:42 3.4M
Farnell-C.A 8332B-C...> 01-Apr-2014 07:40 3.4M
Farnell-ALF1225-12-V..> 01-Apr-2014 07:40 3.4M
Farnell-CS5532-34-BS..> 01-Apr-2014 07:39 3.5M
Farnell-ALF2412-24-V..> 01-Apr-2014 07:39 3.4M
Sefram-GUIDE_SIMPLIF..> 29-Mar-2014 11:46 422K
Sefram-CAT_ENREGISTR..> 29-Mar-2014 11:46 461K
Sefram-SP270.pdf-PDF..> 29-Mar-2014 11:46 464K
Sefram-7866HD.pdf-PD..> 29-Mar-2014 11:46 472K
Sefram-GUIDE_SIMPLIF..> 29-Mar-2014 11:46 481K
Sefram-CAT_MESUREURS..> 29-Mar-2014 11:46 435K
Sefram-GUIDE_SIMPLIF..> 29-Mar-2014 11:46 442K
Farnell-Portable-Ana..> 29-Mar-2014 11:16 2.8M
Farnell-CC2560-Bluet..> 29-Mar-2014 11:14 2.8M
Farnell-Ferric-Chlor..> 29-Mar-2014 11:14 2.8M
Farnell-MCF532x-7x-E..> 29-Mar-2014 11:14 2.8M
Farnell-A-True-Syste..> 29-Mar-2014 11:13 3.3M
Farnell-ELMA-PDF.htm 29-Mar-2014 11:13 3.3M
Farnell-SMBJ-Transil..> 29-Mar-2014 11:12 3.3M
Farnell-6517b-Electr..> 29-Mar-2014 11:12 3.3M
Farnell-Amplificateu..> 29-Mar-2014 11:11 3.3M
Farnell-ir1150s_fr.p..> 29-Mar-2014 11:11 3.3M
Farnell-De-la-puissa..> 29-Mar-2014 11:10 3.3M
Farnell-BK2650A-BK26..> 29-Mar-2014 11:10 3.3M
Farnell-Lubrifiant-a..> 26-Mar-2014 18:00 2.7M
Farnell-Circuit-Note..> 26-Mar-2014 18:00 2.8M
Farnell-Circuit-Note..> 26-Mar-2014 18:00 2.8M
Farnell-Current-Tran..> 26-Mar-2014 17:59 2.7M
Farnell-Current-Tran..> 26-Mar-2014 17:59 2.7M
Farnell-Current-Tran..> 26-Mar-2014 17:58 2.7M
Farnell-Current-Tran..> 26-Mar-2014 17:58 2.7M
Farnell-Supercapacit..> 26-Mar-2014 17:57 2.7M
Farnell-GALVA-MAT-Re..> 26-Mar-2014 17:57 2.7M
Farnell-GALVA-A-FROI..> 26-Mar-2014 17:56 2.7M
Farnell-1907-2006-PD..> 26-Mar-2014 17:56 2.7M
Farnell-ARALDITE-CW-..> 26-Mar-2014 17:56 2.7M
Farnell-06-6544-8-PD..> 26-Mar-2014 17:56 2.7M
Farnell-Miniature-Ci..> 26-Mar-2014 17:55 2.8M
Farnell-ARADUR-HY-13..> 26-Mar-2014 17:55 2.8M
Farnell-LOCTITE-3463..> 25-Mar-2014 08:19 3.0M
Farnell-LCW-CQ7P.CC-..> 25-Mar-2014 08:19 3.2M
Farnell-ATtiny20-PDF..> 25-Mar-2014 08:19 3.6M
Farnell-3M-VolitionT..> 25-Mar-2014 08:18 3.3M
Farnell-EMC1182-PDF.htm 25-Mar-2014 08:17 3.0M
Farnell-MC3510-PDF.htm 25-Mar-2014 08:17 3.0M
Farnell-Directive-re..> 25-Mar-2014 08:16 3.0M
Farnell-Loctite3455-..> 25-Mar-2014 08:16 3.0M
Farnell-LOCTITE-542-..> 25-Mar-2014 08:15 3.0M
Farnell-5910-PDF.htm 25-Mar-2014 08:15 3.0M
Farnell-china_rohs_o..> 21-Mar-2014 10:04 3.9M
Farnell-Cles-electro..> 21-Mar-2014 08:13 3.9M
Farnell-ARALDITE-201..> 21-Mar-2014 08:12 3.7M
Farnell-Premier-Farn..> 21-Mar-2014 08:11 3.8M
Farnell-celpac-SUL84..> 21-Mar-2014 08:11 3.8M
Farnell-S-TRI-SWT860..> 21-Mar-2014 08:11 3.8M
Farnell-3M-Polyimide..> 21-Mar-2014 08:09 3.9M
Farnell-Strangkuhlko..> 21-Mar-2014 08:09 3.9M
Farnell-Reglement-RE..> 21-Mar-2014 08:08 3.9M
Farnell-techfirst_se..> 21-Mar-2014 08:08 3.9M
Farnell-Septembre-20..> 20-Mar-2014 17:46 3.7M
Farnell-Telemetres-l..> 20-Mar-2014 17:46 3.7M
Farnell-Multi-Functi..> 20-Mar-2014 17:38 3.0M
Farnell-testo-470-Fo..> 20-Mar-2014 17:38 3.0M
Farnell-Novembre-201..> 20-Mar-2014 17:38 3.3M
Farnell-testo-205-20..> 20-Mar-2014 17:37 3.0M
Farnell-Panasonic-Ra..> 20-Mar-2014 17:37 2.6M
Farnell-Panasonic-Ne..> 20-Mar-2014 17:36 2.6M
Farnell-Panasonic-EC..> 20-Mar-2014 17:36 2.6M
Farnell-Panasonic-Id..> 20-Mar-2014 17:35 2.6M
Farnell-cree-Xlamp-X..> 20-Mar-2014 17:35 2.7M
Farnell-cree-Xlamp-X..> 20-Mar-2014 17:34 2.8M
Farnell-ADSP-21362-A..> 20-Mar-2014 17:34 2.8M
Farnell-AD524-PDF.htm 20-Mar-2014 17:33 2.8M
Farnell-MPXV7002-Rev..> 20-Mar-2014 17:33 2.8M
Farnell-cree-Xlamp-m..> 20-Mar-2014 17:32 2.9M
Farnell-cree-Xlamp-m..> 20-Mar-2014 17:32 2.9M
Farnell-50A-High-Pow..> 20-Mar-2014 17:31 2.9M
Farnell-cree-Xlamp-X..> 20-Mar-2014 17:31 2.9M
Farnell-Series-2600B..> 20-Mar-2014 17:30 3.0M
Farnell-ECO-Series-T..> 20-Mar-2014 08:14 2.5M
Farnell-PDTA143X-ser..> 20-Mar-2014 08:12 2.6M
Farnell-Panasonic-TS..> 20-Mar-2014 08:12 2.6M
Farnell-Radial-Lead-..> 20-Mar-2014 08:12 2.6M
Farnell-GN-RELAYS-AG..> 20-Mar-2014 08:11 2.6M
Farnell-Panasonic-Y3..> 20-Mar-2014 08:11 2.6M
Farnell-Panasonic-EZ..> 20-Mar-2014 08:10 2.6M
Farnell-ATMEL-8-bit-..> 19-Mar-2014 18:04 2.1M
Farnell-USB1T11A-PDF..> 19-Mar-2014 18:03 2.1M
Farnell-OSLON-SSL-Ce..> 19-Mar-2014 18:03 2.1M
Farnell-Atmel-ATmega..> 19-Mar-2014 18:03 2.2M
Farnell-PBSS5160T-60..> 19-Mar-2014 18:03 2.1M
Farnell-MICROCHIP-PI..> 19-Mar-2014 18:02 2.5M
Farnell-Ed.081002-DA..> 19-Mar-2014 18:02 2.5M
Farnell-Instructions..> 19-Mar-2014 18:01 2.5M
Farnell-Serie-PicoSc..> 19-Mar-2014 18:01 2.5M
Farnell-F42202-PDF.htm 19-Mar-2014 18:00 2.5M
Farnell-propose-plus..> 11-Mar-2014 08:19 2.8M
Farnell-Haute-vitess..> 11-Mar-2014 08:17 2.4M
Farnell-Controle-de-..> 11-Mar-2014 08:16 2.8M
Farnell-NXP-TEA1703T..> 11-Mar-2014 08:15 2.8M
Farnell-XPS-MC16-XPS..> 11-Mar-2014 08:15 2.8M
Farnell-MC21605-PDF.htm 11-Mar-2014 08:14 2.8M
Farnell-WetTantalum-..> 11-Mar-2014 08:14 2.8M
Farnell-ES2333-PDF.htm 11-Mar-2014 08:14 2.8M
Farnell-SB175-Connec..> 11-Mar-2014 08:14 2.8M
Farnell-Cannon-ZD-PD..> 11-Mar-2014 08:13 2.8M
Farnell-YAGEO-DATA-S..> 11-Mar-2014 08:13 2.8M
Farnell-ATMEL-8-bit-..> 11-Mar-2014 07:55 2.1M
Farnell-NXP-PCA9555 ..> 11-Mar-2014 07:54 2.2M
Farnell-MICREL-KSZ88..> 11-Mar-2014 07:54 2.2M
Farnell-Microship-PI..> 11-Mar-2014 07:53 2.2M
Farnell-EPCOS-Sample..> 11-Mar-2014 07:53 2.2M
Farnell-NXP-BT136-60..> 11-Mar-2014 07:52 2.3M
Farnell-NTE_SEMICOND..> 11-Mar-2014 07:52 2.3M
Farnell-L-efficacite..> 11-Mar-2014 07:52 2.3M
Farnell-LUXEON-Guide..> 11-Mar-2014 07:52 2.3M
Farnell-Realiser-un-..> 11-Mar-2014 07:51 2.3M
Farnell-SOT-23-Multi..> 11-Mar-2014 07:51 2.3M
Farnell-ZigBee-ou-le..> 11-Mar-2014 07:50 2.4M
Farnell-Les-derniers..> 11-Mar-2014 07:50 2.3M
Farnell-Conception-d..> 11-Mar-2014 07:49 2.4M
Farnell-Puissance-ut..> 11-Mar-2014 07:49 2.4M
Farnell-MOLEX-43160-..> 10-Mar-2014 17:21 1.9M
Farnell-MOLEX-87439-..> 10-Mar-2014 17:21 1.9M
Farnell-MOLEX-43020-..> 10-Mar-2014 17:21 1.9M
Farnell-NXP-PBSS9110..> 10-Mar-2014 17:21 1.9M
Farnell-TEKTRONIX-DP..> 10-Mar-2014 17:20 2.0M
Farnell-uC-OS-III-Br..> 10-Mar-2014 17:20 2.0M
Farnell-CIRRUS-LOGIC..> 10-Mar-2014 17:20 2.1M
Farnell-NXP-PSMN7R0-..> 10-Mar-2014 17:19 2.1M
Farnell-MOLEX-39-00-..> 10-Mar-2014 17:19 1.9M
Farnell-manual-bus-p..> 10-Mar-2014 16:29 1.9M
Farnell-Molex-Crimp-..> 10-Mar-2014 16:27 1.7M
Farnell-The-essentia..> 10-Mar-2014 16:27 1.7M
Farnell-OMRON-Master..> 10-Mar-2014 16:26 1.8M
Farnell-Proskit-SS-3..> 10-Mar-2014 16:26 1.8M
Farnell-BYV79E-serie..> 10-Mar-2014 16:19 1.6M
Farnell-NXP-74VHC126..> 10-Mar-2014 16:17 1.6M
Farnell-NXP-PSMN1R7-..> 10-Mar-2014 16:17 1.6M
Farnell-FICHE-DE-DON..> 10-Mar-2014 16:17 1.6M
Farnell-HUNTSMAN-Adv..> 10-Mar-2014 16:17 1.7M
Farnell-NXP-PMBFJ620..> 10-Mar-2014 16:16 1.7M
Farnell-Pico-Spox-Wi..> 10-Mar-2014 16:16 1.7M
9541I–AT42–05/2013
Features
Number of Keys:
One – configurable as either a single key or a proximity sensor
Technology:
Patented spread-spectrum charge-transfer (direct mode)
Key outline sizes:
6 mm × 6 mm or larger (panel thickness dependent); widely different sizes and
shapes possible
Electrode design:
Solid or ring electrode shapes
PCB Layers required:
One
Electrode materials:
Etched copper, silver, carbon, Indium Tin Oxide (ITO)
Electrode substrates:
PCB, FPCB, plastic films, glass
Panel materials:
Plastic, glass, composites, painted surfaces (low particle density metallic
paints possible)
Panel thickness:
Up to 12 mm glass, 6 mm plastic (electrode size and Cs dependent)
Key sensitivity:
Settable via capacitor (Cs)
Interface:
Digital output, active high
Moisture tolerance:
Increased moisture tolerance based on hardware design and firmware tuning
Operating Voltage:
1.8 V – 5.5 V; 17 µA at 1.8 V typical
Package:
6-pin SOT23-6 RoHS compliant
8-pin UDFN/USON RoHS compliant
Signal processing:
Self-calibration, auto drift compensation, noise filtering
Applications:
Control panels, consumer appliances, proximity sensor applications, toys,
lighting controls, mechanical switch or button,
Patents:
QTouch® (patented charge-transfer method)
HeartBeat (monitors health of device)
Atmel AT42QT1010
Single-key QTouch® Touch Sensor IC
DATASHEETAT42QT1010 [DATASHEET] 2
9541I–AT42–05/2013
1. Pinout and Schematic
1.1 Pinout Configurations
1.1.1 6-pin SOT23-6
1.1.2 8-pin UDFN/USON
Pin 1 ID
OUT
SNS
VDD
SYNC/
MODE
SNSK
VSS
1 6
5
3 4
2
Pin 1 ID
OUT
SNSK
VSS
SNS
VDD
SYNC/MODE
N/C
N/C
4
3
2
1 8
7
6
5AT42QT1010 [DATASHEET] 3 9541I–AT42–05/2013
1.2 Pin Descriptions
1.2.1 6-pin SOT23-6
I Input only O Output only, push-pull I/O Input/output
OD Open drain output P Ground or power
1.2.2 8-pin UDFN/USON
I Input only O Output only, push-pull I/O Input/output
OD Open drain output P Ground or power
Table 1-1. Pin Listing
Name Pin Type Comments If Unused, Connect To...
OUT 1 O Output state –
VSS 2 P Supply ground –
SNSK 3 I/O Sense pin Cs + Key
SNS 4 I/O Sense pin Cs
VDD 5 P Power –
SYNC 6 I SYNC and Mode Input Pin is either SYNC/Slow/Fast Mode, depending on logic
level applied (see Section 3.1 on page 7)
Table 1-2. Pin Listing
Name Pin Type Comments If Unused, Connect To...
SNSK 1 I/O Sense pin Cs + Key
N/C 2 – No connection –
N/C 3 – No connection –
VSS 4 P Supply ground –
OUT 5 O Output state –
SYNC/
MODE 6 I SYNC and Mode Input Pin is either SYNC/Slow/Fast Mode, depending on logic
level applied (see Section 3.1 on page 7)
VDD 7 P Power –
SNS 8 I/O Sense pin CsAT42QT1010 [DATASHEET] 4
9541I–AT42–05/2013
1.3 Schematics
1.3.1 6-pin SOT23-6
Figure 1-1. Basic Circuit Configuration
1.3.2 8-pin UDFN/USON
Figure 1-2. Basic Circuit Configuration
Cs
OUT
VDD
SNSK
SNS
SYNC/MODE
VSS
2
6
4
1 3
5
VDD
Rs
Cx
SENSE
ELECTRODE
Note: A bypass capacitor should be tightly wired
between Vdd and Vss and kept close to pin 5.
Cs
OUT
VDD
SNSK
SNS
SYNC/MODE
VSS
4
6
8
5 1
7
Vdd
Rs
Cx
SENSE
ELECTRODE
Note: A bypass capacitor should be tightly wired
between Vdd and Vss and kept close to pin 5.
2
3
NC
NCAT42QT1010 [DATASHEET] 5 9541I–AT42–05/2013
2. Overview of the AT42QT1010
2.1 Introduction
The AT42QT1010 (QT1010) is a digital burst mode charge-transfer (QT™) sensor that is capable of detecting nearproximity
or touch, making it ideal for implementing touch controls.
With the proper electrode and circuit design, the self-contained digital IC will project a touch or proximity field to
several centimeters through any dielectric like glass, plastic, stone, ceramic, and even most kinds of wood. It can
also turn small metal-bearing objects into intrinsic sensors, making them responsive to proximity or touch. This
capability, coupled with its ability to self-calibrate, can lead to entirely new product concepts.
The QT1010 is designed specifically for human interfaces, like control panels, appliances, toys, lighting controls, or
anywhere a mechanical switch or button may be found. It includes all hardware and signal processing functions
necessary to provide stable sensing under a wide variety of changing conditions. Only a single low-cost capacitor is
required for operation.
2.2 Basic Operation
Figure 1-1 on page 4 and Figure 1-2 on page 4 show basic circuits.
The QT1010 employs bursts of charge-transfer cycles to acquire its signal. Burst mode permits power consumption
in the microamp range, dramatically reduces RF emissions, lowers susceptibility to EMI, and yet permits excellent
response time. Internally the signals are digitally processed to reject impulse noise, using a “consensus” filter which
requires four consecutive confirmations of a detection before the output is activated.
The QT switches and charge measurement hardware functions are all internal to the QT1010.
2.3 Electrode Drive
For optimum noise immunity, the electrode should only be connected to SNSK.
In all cases the rule Cs >> Cx must be observed for proper operation; a typical load capacitance (Cx) ranges from
5 – 20 pF while Cs is usually about 2 – 50 nF.
Increasing amounts of Cx destroy gain, therefore it is important to limit the amount of stray capacitance on both SNS
terminals. This can be done, for example, by minimizing trace lengths and widths and keeping these traces away
from power or ground traces or copper pours.
The traces and any components associated with SNS and SNSK will become touch sensitive and should be treated
with caution to limit the touch area to the desired location.
A series resistor, Rs, should be placed in line with SNSK to the electrode to suppress ESD and EMC effects.
2.4 Sensitivity
2.4.1 Introduction
The sensitivity on the QT1010 is a function of things like the value of Cs, electrode size and capacitance, electrode
shape and orientation, the composition and aspect of the object to be sensed, the thickness and composition of any
overlaying panel material, and the degree of ground coupling of both sensor and object.
2.4.2 Increasing Sensitivity
In some cases it may be desirable to increase sensitivity; for example, when using the sensor with very thick panels
having a low dielectric constant, or when the device is used as a proximity sensor. Sensitivity can often be increased
by using a larger electrode or reducing panel thickness. Increasing electrode size can have diminishing returns, as
high values of Cx will reduce sensor gain. AT42QT1010 [DATASHEET] 6
9541I–AT42–05/2013
The value of Cs also has a dramatic effect on sensitivity, and this can be increased in value with the trade-off of
slower response time and more power. Increasing the electrode's surface area will not substantially increase touch
sensitivity if its diameter is already much larger in surface area than the object being detected. Panel material can
also be changed to one having a higher dielectric constant, which will better help to propagate the field.
In the case of proximity detection, usually the object being detected is on an approaching hand, so a larger surface
area can be effective.
Ground planes around and under the electrode and its SNSK trace will cause high Cx loading and destroy gain. The
possible signal-to-noise ratio benefits of ground area are more than negated by the decreased gain from the circuit,
and so ground areas around electrodes are discouraged. Metal areas near the electrode will reduce the field strength
and increase Cx loading and should be avoided, if possible. Keep ground away from the electrodes and traces.
2.4.3 Decreasing Sensitivity
In some cases the QT1010 may be too sensitive. In this case gain can be easily lowered further by decreasing Cs.
2.4.4 Proximity Sensing
By increasing the sensitivity, the QT1010 can be used as a very effective proximity sensor, allowing the presence of
a nearby object (typically a hand) to be detected.
In this scenario, as the object being sensed is typically a hand, very large electrode sizes can be used, which is
extremely effective in increasing the sensitivity of the detector. In this case, the value of Cs will also need to be
increased to ensure improved sensitivity, as mentioned in Section 2.4.2. Note that, although this affects the
responsiveness of the sensor, it is less of an issue in proximity sensing applications; in such applications it is
necessary to detect simply the presence of a large object, rather than a small, precise touch.AT42QT1010 [DATASHEET] 7 9541I–AT42–05/2013
3. Operation Specifics
3.1 Run Modes
3.1.1 Introduction
The QT1010 has three running modes which depend on the state of the SYNC pin (high or low).
3.1.2 Fast Mode
The QT1010 runs in Fast mode if the SYNC pin is permanently high. In this mode the QT1010 runs at maximum
speed at the expense of increased current consumption. Fast mode is useful when speed of response is the prime
design requirement. The delay between bursts in Fast mode is approximately 1 ms, as shown in Figure 3-1.
Figure 3-1. Fast Mode Bursts (SYNC Held High)
3.1.3 Low Power Mode
The QT1010 runs in Low Power (LP) mode if the SYNC pin is held low. In this mode it sleeps for approximately
80 ms at the end of each burst, saving power but slowing response. On detecting a possible key touch, it temporarily
switches to Fast mode until either the key touch is confirmed or found to be spurious (via the detect integration
process). It then returns to LP mode after the key touch is resolved, as shown in Figure 3-2.
Figure 3-2. Low Power Mode (SYNC Held Low)
SNSK
SYNC
~1 ms
sleep sleep
SYNC
SNSK sleep
fast detect
integrator
OUT
Key
~80 ms
touchAT42QT1010 [DATASHEET] 8
9541I–AT42–05/2013
3.1.4 SYNC Mode
It is possible to synchronize the device to an external clock source by placing an appropriate waveform on the SYNC
pin. SYNC mode can synchronize multiple QT1010 devices to each other to prevent cross-interference, or it can be
used to enhance noise immunity from low frequency sources such as 50Hz or 60Hz mains signals.
The SYNC pin is sampled at the end of each burst. If the device is in Fast mode and the SYNC pin is sampled high,
then the device continues to operate in Fast mode (Figure 3-1 on page 7). If SYNC is sampled low, then the device
goes to sleep. From then on, it will operate in SYNC mode (Figure 3-2). Therefore, to guarantee entry into SYNC
mode the low period of the SYNC signal should be longer than the burst length (Figure 3-3).
Figure 3-3. SYNC Mode (Triggered by SYNC Edges)
However, once SYNC mode has been entered, if the SYNC signal consists of a series of short pulses (>10 µs) then
a burst will only occur on the falling edge of each pulse (Figure 3-4) instead of on each change of SYNC signal, as
normal (Figure 3-3).
In SYNC mode, the device will sleep after each measurement burst (just as in LP mode) but will be awakened by a
change in the SYNC signal in either direction, resulting in a new measurement burst. If SYNC remains unchanged
for a period longer than the LP mode sleep period (about 80 ms), the device will resume operation in either Fast or
LP mode depending on the level of the SYNC pin (Figure 3-3).
There is no detect integrator (DI) in SYNC mode (each touch is a detection) but the Max On-duration will depend on
the time between SYNC pulses; see Section 3.3 and Section 3.4 on page 9. Recalibration timeout is a fixed number
of measurements so will vary with the SYNC period.
Figure 3-4. SYNC Mode (Short Pulses)
SYNC
SYNC
SNSK
SNSK
slow mode sleep period
sleep
sleep
sleep sleep
sleep sleep
Revert to Fast Mode
Revert to Slow Mode
slow mode sleep period
SNSK
SYNC
>10 sμ >10 sμ >10 sμAT42QT1010 [DATASHEET] 9 9541I–AT42–05/2013
3.2 Threshold
The internal signal threshold level is fixed at 10 counts of change with respect to the internal reference level, which in
turn adjusts itself slowly in accordance with the drift compensation mechanism.
The QT1010 employs a hysteresis dropout of two counts of the delta between the reference and threshold levels.
3.3 Max On-duration
If an object or material obstructs the sense pad the signal may rise enough to create a detection, preventing further
operation. To prevent this, the sensor includes a timer which monitors detections. If a detection exceeds the timer
setting the sensor performs a full recalibration. This is known as the Max On-duration feature and is set to ~60s (at
3V in LP mode). This will vary slightly with Cs and if SYNC mode is used. As the internal timebase for Max Onduration
is determined by the burst rate, the use of SYNC can cause dramatic changes in this parameter depending
on the SYNC pulse spacing. For example, at 60Hz SYNC mode the Max On-duration will be ~6s at 3V.
3.4 Detect Integrator
It is desirable to suppress detections generated by electrical noise or from quick brushes with an object. To
accomplish this, the QT1010 incorporates a detect integration (DI) counter that increments with each detection until
a limit is reached, after which the output is activated. If no detection is sensed prior to the final count, the counter is
reset immediately to zero. In the QT1010, the required count is four. In LP mode the device will switch to Fast mode
temporarily in order to resolve the detection more quickly; after a touch is either confirmed or denied the device will
revert back to normal LP mode operation automatically.
The DI can also be viewed as a “consensus filter” that requires four successive detections to create an output.
3.5 Forced Sensor Recalibration
The QT1010 has no recalibration pin; a forced recalibration is accomplished when the device is powered up or after
the recalibration timeout. However, supply drain is low so it is a simple matter to treat the entire IC as a controllable
load; driving the QT1010's Vdd pin directly from another logic gate or a microcontroller port will serve as both power
and “forced recalibration”. The source resistance of most CMOS gates and microcontrollers is low enough to provide
direct power without problem.
3.6 Drift Compensation
Signal drift can occur because of changes in Cx and Cs over time. It is crucial that drift be compensated for,
otherwise false detections, non-detections, and sensitivity shifts will follow.
Drift compensation (Figure 3-5) is performed by making the reference level track the raw signal at a slow rate, but
only while there is no detection in effect. The rate of adjustment must be performed slowly, otherwise legitimate
detections could be ignored. The QT1010 drift compensates using a slew-rate limited change to the reference level;
the threshold and hysteresis values are slaved to this reference.
Once an object is sensed, the drift compensation mechanism ceases since the signal is legitimately high, and
therefore should not cause the reference level to change.AT42QT1010 [DATASHEET] 10
9541I–AT42–05/2013
Figure 3-5. Drift Compensation
The QT1010 drift compensation is asymmetric; the reference level drift-compensates in one direction faster than it
does in the other. Specifically, it compensates faster for decreasing signals than for increasing signals. Increasing
signals should not be compensated for quickly, since an approaching finger could be compensated for partially or
entirely before even approaching the sense electrode. However, an obstruction over the sense pad, for which the
sensor has already made full allowance, could suddenly be removed leaving the sensor with an artificially elevated
reference level and thus become insensitive to touch. In this latter case, the sensor will compensate for the object's
removal very quickly, usually in only a few seconds.
With large values of Cs and small values of Cx, drift compensation will appear to operate more slowly than with the
converse. Note that the positive and negative drift compensation rates are different.
3.7 Response Time
The QT1010's response time is highly dependent on run mode and burst length, which in turn is dependent on Cs
and Cx. With increasing Cs, response time slows, while increasing levels of Cx reduce response time. The response
time will also be a lot slower in LP or SYNC mode due to a longer time between burst measurements.
3.8 Spread Spectrum
The QT1010 modulates its internal oscillator by ±7.5% during the measurement burst. This spreads the generated
noise over a wider band, reducing emission levels. This also reduces susceptibility since there is no longer a single
fundamental burst frequency.
3.9 Output Features
3.9.1 Output
The output of the QT1010 is active-high upon detection. The output will remain active-high for the duration of the
detection, or until the Max On-duration expires, whichever occurs first. If a Max On-duration timeout occurs first, the
sensor performs a full recalibration and the output becomes inactive (low) until the next detection.
3.9.2 HeartBeat Output
The QT1010 output has a HeartBeat “health” indicator superimposed on it in all modes. This operates by taking the
output pin into a three-state mode for 15 µs, once before every QT burst. This output state can be used to determine
that the sensor is operating properly, using one of several simple methods, or it can be ignored.
The HeartBeat indicator can be sampled by using a pull-up resistor on the OUT pin (Figure 3-6), and feeding the
resulting positive-going pulse into a counter, flip flop, one-shot, or other circuit. The pulses will only be visible when
the chip is not detecting a touch.
Threshold
Signal
Hysteresis
Reference
OutputAT42QT1010 [DATASHEET] 11 9541I–AT42–05/2013
Figure 3-6. Obtaining HeartBeat Pulses with a Pull-up Resistor (SOT23-6)
If the sensor is wired to a microcontroller as shown in Figure 3-7 on page 11, the microcontroller can reconfigure the
load resistor to either Vss or Vdd depending on the output state of the QT1010, so that the pulses are evident in
either state.
Figure 3-7. Using a Microcontroller to Obtain HeartBeat Pulses in Either Output State (SOT23-6)
Electromechanical devices like relays will usually ignore the short HeartBeat pulse. The pulse also has too low a duty
cycle to visibly affect LEDs. It can be filtered completely if desired, by adding an RC filter to the output, or if
interfacing directly and only to a high-impedance CMOS input, by doing nothing or at most adding a small noncritical
capacitor from OUT to Vss.
3.9.3 Output Drive
The OUT pin is active high and can sink or source up to 2 mA. When a large value of Cs (>20 nF) is used the OUT
current should be limited to <1 mA to prevent gain-shifting side effects, which happen when the load current creates
voltage drops on the die and bonding wires; these small shifts can materially influence the signal level to cause
detection instability.
OUT
VDD
SNSK
SNS
SYNC/MODE
VSS
2
6
4
1 3
5
VDD
HeartBeat" Pulse Ro
OUT SNSK
SNS
SYNC/MODE 6
4
1 3 Ro
Microcontroller
Port_M.x
Port_M.yAT42QT1010 [DATASHEET] 12
9541I–AT42–05/2013
4. Circuit Guidelines
4.1 More Information
Refer to Application Note QTAN0002, Secrets of a Successful QTouch Design and the Touch Sensors Design Guide
(both downloadable from the Atmel website), for more information on construction and design methods.
4.2 Sample Capacitor
Cs is the charge sensing sample capacitor. The required Cs value depends on the thickness of the panel and its
dielectric constant. Thicker panels require larger values of Cs. Typical values are 2 nF to 50 nF depending on the
sensitivity required; larger values of Cs demand higher stability and better dielectric to ensure reliable sensing.
The Cs capacitor should be a stable type, such as X7R ceramic or PPS film. For more consistent sensing from unit
to unit, 5% tolerance capacitors are recommended. X7R ceramic types can be obtained in 5% tolerance at little or no
extra cost. In applications where high sensitivity (long burst length) is required the use of PPS capacitors is
recommended.
For battery powered operation a higher value sample capacitor is recommended (typical value 8.2 nF).
4.3 UDFN/USON Package Restrictions
The central pad on the underside of the UDFN/USON chip is connected to ground. Do not run any tracks underneath
the body of the chip, only ground.
4.4 Power Supply and PCB Layout
See Section 5.2 on page 14 for the power supply range. At 3 V current drain averages less than 500 µA in Fast
mode.
If the power supply is shared with another electronic system, care should be taken to ensure that the supply is free of
digital spikes, sags, and surges which can adversely affect the QT1010. The QT1010 will track slow changes in Vdd,
but it can be badly affected by rapid voltage fluctuations. It is highly recommended that a separate voltage regulator
be used just for the QT1010 to isolate it from power supply shifts caused by other components.
If desired, the supply can be regulated using a Low Dropout (LDO) regulator, although such regulators often have
poor transient line and load stability. See Application Note QTAN0002, Secrets of a Successful QTouch™ Design for
further information.
Parts placement: The chip should be placed to minimize the SNSK trace length to reduce low frequency pickup,
and to reduce stray Cx which degrades gain. The Cs and Rs resistors (see Figure 1-1 on page 4) should be placed
as close to the body of the chip as possible so that the trace between Rs and the SNSK pin is very short, thereby
reducing the antenna-like ability of this trace to pick up high frequency signals and feed them directly into the chip. A
ground plane can be used under the chip and the associated discrete components, but the trace from the Rs resistor
and the electrode should not run near ground, to reduce loading.
For best EMC performance the circuit should be made entirely with SMT components.
Electrode trace routing: Keep the electrode trace (and the electrode itself) away from other signal, power, and
ground traces including over or next to ground planes. Adjacent switching signals can induce noise onto the sensing
signal; any adjacent trace or ground plane next to, or under, the electrode trace will cause an increase in Cx load and
desensitize the device.
Note: For proper operation a 100 nF (0.1 µF) ceramic bypass capacitor must be used directly between Vdd and
Vss, to prevent latch-up if there are substantial Vdd transients; for example, during an ESD event. The
bypass capacitor should be placed very close to the Vss and Vdd pins.AT42QT1010 [DATASHEET] 13 9541I–AT42–05/2013
4.5 Power On
On initial power up, the QT1010 requires approximately 100 ms to power on to allow power supplies to stabilize.
During this time the OUT pin state is not valid and should be ignored.AT42QT1010 [DATASHEET] 14
9541I–AT42–05/2013
5. Specifications
5.1 Absolute Maximum Specifications
5.2 Recommended Operating Conditions
5.3 AC Specifications
Operating temperature –40°C to +85°C
Storage temperature –55°C to +125°C
VDD 0 to +6.5 V
Max continuous pin current, any control or drive pin ±20 mA
Short circuit duration to Vss, any pin Infinite
Short circuit duration to Vdd, any pin Infinite
Voltage forced onto any pin –0.6V to (Vdd + 0.6) V
CAUTION: Stresses beyond those listed under Absolute Maximum Specifications may cause permanent damage to
the device. This is a stress rating only and functional operation of the device at these or other conditions beyond those
indicated in the operational sections of this specification is not implied. Exposure to absolute maximum specification
conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability
VDD +1.8 to 5.5 V
Short-term supply ripple + noise ±20 mV
Long-term supply stability ±100 mV
Cs value 2 to 50 nF
Cx value 5 to 50 pF
Vdd = 3.0 V, Cs = 4.7 nF, Cx = 5 pF, Ta = recommended range, unless otherwise noted
Parameter Description Min Typ Max Units Notes
TRC Recalibration time – 200 – ms Cs, Cx dependent
TPC Charge duration – 3.05 – µs ±7.5% spread spectrum variation
TPT Transfer duration – 9.0 – µs ±7.5% spread spectrum variation
TG1 Time between end of burst and
start of the next (Fast mode) – 1.2 – ms
TG2 Time between end of burst and
start of the next (LP mode) – 80 – ms Increases with decreasing VDD
See Figure 5-1 on page 15AT42QT1010 [DATASHEET] 15 9541I–AT42–05/2013
Figure 5-1. TG2 – Time Between Bursts (LP Mode)
Figure 5-2. TBL – Burst Length
TBL Burst length – 2.45 – ms
VDD, Cs and Cx dependent. See
Section 4.2 for capacitor
selection.
TR Response time – – 100 ms
THB HeartBeat pulse width – 15 – µs
Vdd = 3.0 V, Cs = 4.7 nF, Cx = 5 pF, Ta = recommended range, unless otherwise noted
Parameter Description Min Typ Max Units NotesAT42QT1010 [DATASHEET] 16
9541I–AT42–05/2013
5.4 Signal Processing
5.5 DC Specifications
Vdd = 3.0V, Cs = 4.7 nF, Cx = 5 pF, Ta = recommended range, unless otherwise noted
Description Min Typ Max Units Notes
Threshold differential 10 counts
Hysteresis 2 counts
Consensus filter length 4 samples
Max on-duration 60 seconds (At 3 V in LP mode) Will vary
in SYNC mode and with Vdd
Vdd = 3.0V, Cs = 4.7 nF, Cx = 5 pF, Ta = recommended range, unless otherwise noted
Parameter Description Min Typ Max Units Notes
VDD Supply voltage 1.8 5.5 V
IDD Supply current, Fast mode –
203.0
246.0
378.5
542.5
729.0
– µA
1.8 V
2.0 V
3.0 V
4.0 V
5.0 V
IDDI Supply current, LP mode –
16.5
19.5
34.0
51.5
73.5
– µA
1.8 V
2.0 V
3.0 V
4.0 V
5.0 V
VDDS Supply turn-on slope 10 – – V/s Required for proper start-up
VIL Low input logic level – – 0.2 × Vdd
0.3 × Vdd V Vdd = 1.8 V – 2.4 V
Vdd = 2.4 V – 5.5 V
VHL High input logic level 0.7 × Vdd
0.6 × Vdd – – V Vdd = 1.8 V – 2.4 V
Vdd = 2.4 V – 5.5 V
VOL Low output voltage – – 0.5 V OUT, 4 mA sink
VOH High output voltage 2.3 – – V OUT, 1 mA source
IIL Input leakage current – <0.05 1 µA
CX Load capacitance range 2 – 50 pF
AR Acquisition resolution – 9 14 bitsAT42QT1010 [DATASHEET] 17 9541I–AT42–05/2013
5.6 Mechanical Dimensions
5.6.1 6-pin SOT23-6
9524D–AT42–05/2013
Features
Number of QTouch® Keys:
Up to four
Discrete Outputs:
Four discrete outputs indicating individual key touch
Technology:
Patented spread-spectrum charge-transfer (direct mode)
Electrode Design:
Simple self-capacitance style (refer to the Touch Sensors Design Guide)
Electrode Materials:
Etched copper, silver, carbon, Indium Tin Oxide (ITO)
Electrode Substrates:
PCB, FPCB, plastic films, glass
Panel Materials:
Plastic, glass, composites, painted surfaces (low particle density metallic
paints possible)
Panel Thickness:
Up to 10 mm glass, 5 mm plastic (electrode size dependent)
Key Sensitivity:
Fixed key threshold, sensitivity adjusted via sample capacitor value
Adjacent Key Suppression
Patented Adjacent Key Suppression® (AKS®) technology to enable accurate
key detection
Interface:
Pin-per-key outputs, plus debug mode to observe sensor signals
Moisture Tolerance:
Increased moisture tolerance based on hardware design and firmware tuning
Signal Processing:
Self-calibration, auto drift compensation, noise filtering
Applications:
Mobile, consumer, white goods, toys, kiosks, POS, and so on
Power:
1.8 V – 5.5 V
Package:
20-pin 3 x 3 mm VQFN RoHS compliant
Atmel AT42QT1040
Four-key QTouch® Touch Sensor IC
DATASHEETAT42QT1040 [DATASHEET] 2
9524D–AT42–05/2013
1. Pinout and Schematic
1.1 Pinout Configuration
NC
NC
VSS
VDD
NC
SNS2
SNSK1
SNS1
SNSK0
SNS0 OUT0
OUT1
1
2
3
4
5 11
12
13
14
15
20 19 18 17 16
6 7 8 9 10
QT1040 OUT3
OUT2
SNSK3
SNSK2
NC
NC
NC
SNS3AT42QT1040 [DATASHEET] 3 9524D–AT42–05/2013
1.2 Pin Descriptions
I/O CMOS input and output OD CMOS open drain output P Ground or power
Table 1-1. Pin Listing
Pin Name Type Function Notes If Unused...
1 SNS2 I/O Sense pin To Cs2 Leave open
2 SNSK1 I/O Sense pin and option detect To Cs1 and option resistor +
key
Connect to option
resistor*
3 SNS1 I/O Sense pin To Cs1 Leave open
4 SNSK0 I/O Sense pin and option detect To Cs0 and option resistor +
key
Connect to option
resistor*
5 SNS0 I/O Sense pin To Cs0 Leave open
6 N/C – – –
7 N/C – – –
8 Vss P Supply ground –
9 Vdd P Power –
10 N/C – – –
11 OUT0 OD Out 0 Alternative function: Debug
CLK Leave open
12 OUT1 OD Out 1 Alternative function: Debug
DATA Leave open
13 OUT3 OD Out 3 Leave open
14 OUT2 OD Out 2 Leave open
15 SNSK3 I/O Sense pin To Cs3 + key Leave open
16 SNS3 I/O Sense pin To Cs3 Leave open
17 N/C – – –
18 N/C – – –
19 N/C – – –
20 SNSK2 I/O Sense pin To Cs2 + key Leave open
* Option resistor should always be fitted even if channel is unused and Cs capacitor is not fixed.AT42QT1040 [DATASHEET] 4
9524D–AT42–05/2013
1.3 Schematic
Figure 1-1. Typical Circuit
Suggested regulator manufacturers:
Torex (XC6215 series)
Seiko (S817 series)
BCDSemi (AP2121 series)
For component values in Figure 1-1 check the following sections:
Section 3.1 on page 7: Cs capacitors (Cs0 – Cs3)
Section 3.5 on page 7: Voltage levels
Section 3.3 on page 7: LED traces
SLOW
FAST
OFF
LED3
LED2
LED1
LED0
VDD
VDD
2
1
3
J2
VDD
2
1
3
J1
ON
2 2
5 5
4 4
3 3
1 1
J3
VDD 9 VSS 8
N/C 19
N/C 10
OUT2 14
SNSK3 15
SNSK2 20
SNSK1 2
SNSK0 4
N/C 18
N/C 7
N/C 17
OUT1 12
OUT0 11
SNS3 16
SNS1 3
N/C 6
OUT3 13 SNS0 5
SNS2 1
SPEED SELECT
AKS SELECT
NOTES:
1) The central pad on the underside of the VQFN chip is a Vss pin and should be connected
to ground. Do not put any other tracks underneath the body of the chip.
2) It is important to place all Cs and Rs components physically near to the chip.
Add a 100 nF capacitor close to pin 9.
QT1040
Creg Creg
VREG
Follow regulator manufacturer's
recommended values for input
and output bypass capacitors (Creg).
Key0
Key1
Key2
Key3
VUNREG
GND
Cs0
Cs1
Cs2
Cs3
RL0
RL1
RL2
RL3
RAKS
RFS
Rs0
Rs1
Rs2
Rs3
Example use of output pinsAT42QT1040 [DATASHEET] 5 9524D–AT42–05/2013
2. Overview of the AT42QT1040
2.1 Introduction
The AT42QT1040 (QT1040) is a digital burst mode charge-transfer (QT™) capacitive sensor driver designed for
touch-key applications. The device can sense from one to four keys; one to three keys can be disabled by not
installing their respective sense capacitors. Any of the four channels can be disabled in this way.
The device includes all signal processing functions necessary to provide stable sensing under a wide variety of
changing conditions, and the outputs are fully de-bounced. Only a few external parts are required for operation.
The QT1040 modulates its bursts in a spread-spectrum fashion in order to heavily suppress the effects of external
noise, and to suppress RF emissions.
2.2 Signal Processing
2.2.1 Detect Threshold
The internal signal threshold level is fixed at 10 counts of change with respect to the internal reference level. This in
turn adjusts itself slowly in accordance with the drift compensation mechanism. See Section 3.1 on page 7 for details
on how to adjust the sensitivity of each key.
When going out of detect there is a hysteresis element to the detection. The signal threshold must drop below 8
counts of change with respect to the internal reference level to register as un-touched.
2.2.2 Detection Integrator
The device features a detection integration mechanism, which acts to confirm a detection in a robust fashion. A perkey
counter is incremented each time the key has exceeded its threshold, and a key is only finally declared to be
touched when this counter reaches a fixed limit of 5. In other words, the device has to exceed its threshold, and stay
there for 5 acquisitions in succession without going below the threshold level, before the key is declared to be
touched.
2.2.3 Burst Length Limitations
Burst length is the number of times the charge transfer process is performed on a given channel; that is, the number
of pulses it takes to measure the key capacitance.
The maximum burst length is 2048 pulses. The recommended design is to use a capacitor that gives a signal of
<1000 pulses. Longer bursts take more time and use more power.
Note that the keys are independent of each other. It is therefore possible, for example, to have a signal of 100 on one
key and a signal of 1000 on another.
Refer to Application Note QTAN0002, Secrets of a Successful QTouch Design (downloadable from the Atmel
website), for more information on using a scope to measure the pulses and hence determine the burst length. Refer
also to the Touch Sensors Design Guide.
2.2.4 Adjacent Key Suppression Technology
The device includes the Atmel-patented Adjacent Key Suppression (AKS) technology, to allow the use of tightly
spaced keys on a keypad with no loss of selectability by the user.
There is one global AKS group, implemented so that only one key in the group may be reported as being touched at
any one time.
The use of AKS is selected by connecting a 1 M resistor between Vdd and the SNSK0 pin (see Section 4.1 on
page 9 for more information). When AKS is disabled, any combinations of keys can enter detect.AT42QT1040 [DATASHEET] 6
9524D–AT42–05/2013
2.2.5 Auto Drift Compensation
Signal drift can occur because of changes in Cx and Cs over time. It is crucial that drift be compensated for,
otherwise false detections, non-detections, and sensitivity shifts will follow.
Drift compensation is performed by making the reference level track the raw signal at a slow rate, but only while
there is no detection in effect. The rate of adjustment must be performed slowly otherwise legitimate detections could
be ignored.
Once an object is sensed and a key is in detect, the drift compensation mechanism ceases, since the signal is
legitimately high and should not therefore cause the reference level to change.
The QT1040 drift compensation is asymmetric, that is, the reference level drift-compensates in one direction faster
than it does in the other. Specifically, it compensates faster for decreasing (towards touch) signals than for
increasing (away from touch) signals. The reason for this difference in compensation rates is that increasing signals
should not be compensated for quickly, since a nearby finger could be compensated for partially or entirely before
even approaching the sense electrode. However, decreasing signals need to be compensated for more quickly. For
example, an obstruction over the sense pad (for which the sensor has already made full allowance) could suddenly
be removed, leaving the sensor with an artificially elevated reference level and thus become insensitive to touch. In
this latter case, the sensor will compensate for the object's removal very quickly, usually in only a few seconds.
Negative drift (that is, towards touch) occurs at a rate of ~3 seconds, while positive drift occurs at a rate of
~1 second.
Drifting only occurs when no keys are in detect state.
2.2.6 Response Time
The QT1040 response time is highly dependent on run mode and burst length, which in turn is dependent on Cs and
Cx. With increasing Cs, response time slows, while increasing levels of Cx reduce response time. The response time
will also be slower in slow mode due to a longer time between burst measurements. This mode offers an increased
detection latency in favor of reduced average current consumption.
2.2.7 Spread Spectrum
The QT1040 modulates its internal oscillator by ±7.5% during the measurement burst. This spreads the generated
noise over a wider band reducing emission levels. This also reduces susceptibility since there is no longer a single
fundamental burst frequency.
2.2.8 Max On-duration
If an object or material obstructs the sense pad, the signal may rise enough to create a detection, preventing further
operation. To prevent this, the sensor includes a timer known as the Max On-duration feature which monitors
detections. If a detection exceeds the timer setting, the sensor performs an automatic recalibration. Max On-duration
is set to ~30s.AT42QT1040 [DATASHEET] 7 9524D–AT42–05/2013
3. Wiring and Parts
3.1 Cs Sample Capacitors
Cs0 – Cs3 are the charge sensing sample capacitors; normally they are identical in nominal value. The optimal Cs
values depend on the corresponding keys electrode design, the thickness of the panel and its dielectric constant.
Thicker panels require larger values of Cs. Values can be in the range 2.2 nF (for faster operation) to 22 nF (for best
sensitivity); typical values are 4.7 nF to 10 nF.
The value of Cs should be chosen such that a light touch on a key mounted in a production unit or a prototype panel
causes a reliable detection. The chosen Cs value should never be so large that the key signals exceed ~1000, as
reported by the chip in the debug data.
The Cs capacitors must be X7R or PPS film type, for stability. For consistent sensitivity, they should have a 10%
tolerance. Twenty percent tolerance may cause small differences in sensitivity from key to key and unit to unit. If a
key is not used, the Cs capacitor may be omitted.
3.2 Rs Resistors
The series resistors Rs0 – Rs3 are in line with the electrode connections (close to the QT1040 chip) and are used to
limit electrostatic discharge (ESD) currents and to suppress radio frequency (RF) interference. A typical value is
4.7 k, but up to 20 k can be used if it is found to be of benefit.
Although these resistors may be omitted, the device may become susceptible to external noise or radio frequency
interference (RFI). For details on how to select these resistors refer to Application Note QTAN0002, Secrets of a
Successful QTouch Design, and the Touch Sensors Design Guide, both downloadable from the Touch Technology
area of the Atmel website, www.atmel.com.
3.3 LED Traces and Other Switching Signals
For advice on LEDs and nearby traces, refer to Application Note QTAN0002, Secrets of a Successful QTouch
Design, and the Touch Sensors Design Guide, both downloadable from the Touch Technology area of Atmel’s
website, www.atmel.com.
3.4 PCB Cleanliness
Modern no-clean flux is generally compatible with capacitive sensing circuits.
3.5 Power Supply
See Section 5.2 on page 15 for the power supply range. If the power supply fluctuates slowly with temperature, the
device tracks and compensates for these changes automatically with only minor changes in sensitivity. If the supply
voltage drifts or shifts quickly, the drift compensation mechanism is not able to keep up, causing sensitivity
anomalies or false detections.
The usual power supply considerations with QT parts apply to the device. The power should be clean and come from
a separate regulator if possible. However, this device is designed to minimize the effects of unstable power, and
except in extreme conditions should not require a separate Low Dropout (LDO) regulator.
CAUTION: If a PCB is reworked to correct soldering faults relating to the device, or
to any associated traces or components, be sure that you fully understand the
nature of the flux used during the rework process. Leakage currents from
hygroscopic ionic residues can stop capacitive sensors from functioning. If you
have any doubts, a thorough cleaning after rework may be the only safe option.AT42QT1040 [DATASHEET] 8
9524D–AT42–05/2013
See under Figure 1.3 on page 4 for suggested regulator manufacturers.
It is assumed that a larger bypass capacitor (for example, 1 µF) is somewhere else in the power circuit; for example,
near the regulator.
To assist with transient regulator stability problems, the QT1040 waits 500 µs any time it wakes up from a sleep state
(that is, in Sleep mode) before acquiring, to allow Vdd to fully stabilize.
3.6 VQFN Package Restrictions
The central pad on the underside of the VQFN chip should be connected to ground. Do not run any tracks
underneath the body of the chip, only ground. Figure 3-1 shows an example of good/bad tracking.
Figure 3-1. Examples of Good and Bad Tracking
Caution: A regulator IC shared with other logic can result in erratic operation and is
not advised.
A single ceramic 0.1 µF bypass capacitor, with short traces, should be placed very
close to the power pins of the IC. Failure to do so can result in device oscillation, high
current consumption, erratic operation, and so on.
Example of GOOD tracking Example of BAD trackingAT42QT1040 [DATASHEET] 9 9524D–AT42–05/2013
4. Detailed Operations
4.1 Adjacent Key Suppression
The use of AKS is selected by the connection of a 1 M resistor (RAKS resistor) between the SNSK0 pin and either
Vdd (AKS mode on) or Vss (AKS mode off).
Note: Changing the RAKS option will affect the sensitivity of the particular key. Always check that the sensitivity is
suitable after a change. Retune Cs0 if necessary.
4.2 Discrete Outputs
There are four discrete outputs (channels 0 to 3), located on pins OUT0 to OUT3. An output pin goes active when
the corresponding key is touched. The outputs are open-drain type and are active-low.
On the OUT2 pin there is a ~500 ns low pulse occurring approximately 20 ms after a power-up/reset (see Figure 4-1
for an example oscilloscope trace of this pulse at two zoom levels). This pulse may need to be considered from the
system design perspective.
The discrete outputs have sufficient current sinking capability to directly drive LEDs. Try to limit the sink current to
less than 5 mA per output and be cautious if connecting LEDs to a power supply other than Vdd; if the LED supply is
higher than Vdd it may cause erratic behavior of the QT1040 and back-power the QT1040 through its I/O pins.
Table 4-1. RAKS Resistor
RAKS Connected To... Mode
Vdd AKS on
Vss AKS off
The RAKS resistor should always be connected to either Vdd or Vss and should not be
changed during operation of the device.AT42QT1040 [DATASHEET] 10
9524D–AT42–05/2013
Figure 4-1. ~500 ns Pulse On OUT2 Pin
4.3 Speed Selection
Speed selection is determined by a 1 M resistor (RFS resistor) connected between SNSK1 and either Vdd (Fast
Mode) or Vss (Slow Mode).
In Fast Mode, the device sleeps for 16 ms between burst acquisitions. In Slow Mode, the device sleeps for 64 ms
between acquisitions. Hence, Slow Mode conserves more power but results in slightly less responsiveness.
Note: The RFS resistor should always be connected to either Vdd or Vss and not changed during operation of the
device. Changing the RFS option will affect the sensitivity of the particular key. Always check that the
sensitivity is suitable after a change. Retune Cs1 if necessary.
4.4 Moisture Tolerance
The presence of water (condensation, sweat, spilt water, and so on) on a sensor can alter the signal values
measured and thereby affect the performance of any capacitive device. The moisture tolerance of QTouch devices
can be improved by designing the hardware and fine-tuning the firmware following the recommendations in the
application note Atmel AVR3002: Moisture Tolerant QTouch Design (www.atmel.com/Images/doc42017.pdf).
Pulse on OUT2
SNS0K
OUT2
SNS0K
OUT2
Power-on/ ~20 ms
Reset
Table 4-2. RFS Resistor
RFS Connected To Mode
Vdd Fast mode
Vss Slow modeAT42QT1040 [DATASHEET] 11 9524D–AT42–05/2013
4.5 Calibration
Calibration is the process by which the sensor chip assesses the background capacitance on each channel. During
calibration, a number of samples are taken in quick succession to get a baseline for the channel reference value.
Calibration takes place ~50 ms after power is applied to the device. Calibration also occurs if the Max On-duration is
exceeded or a positive re-calibration occurs.
4.6 Debug Mode
An added feature to this device is a debug option whereby internal parameters from the IC can be clocked out and
monitored externally.
Debug mode is entered by shorting the CS3 capacitor (SNSK3 and SNS3 pins) on power-up and removing the short
within 5 seconds.
Note: If the short is not removed within 5 seconds, debug mode is still entered, but with Channel 3 unusable until
a re-calibration occurs. Note that as Channel 3 will show as being in detect, a recalibration will occur after
Max On-duration (~30 seconds).
Debug CLK pin (OUT0) and Debug Data pin (OUT1) float while debug data is not being output and are driven
outputs once debug output starts (that is, not open drain).
The serial data is clocked out at a rate of ~200 kHz, MSB first, as in Table 4-3.
Table 4-3. Serial Data Output
Byte Purpose Notes
0 Frame Number Framing index number 0-255
1 Chip Version Upper nibble: major revision
Lower nibble: minor revision
2 Reference 0 Low Byte
Unsigned 16-bit integer
3 Reference 0 High Byte
4 Reference 1 Low Byte
Unsigned 16-bit integer
5 Reference 1 High Byte
6 Reference 2 Low Byte
Unsigned 16-bit integer
7 Reference 2 High Byte
8 Reference 3 Low Byte
Unsigned 16-bit integer
9 Reference 3 High Byte
10 Signal 0 Low Byte
Unsigned 16-bit integer
11 Signal 0 High Byte
12 Signal 1 Low Byte
Unsigned 16-bit integer
13 Signal 1 High Byte
14 Signal 2 Low Byte
Unsigned 16-bit integer
15 Signal 2 High Byte
16 Signal 3 Low Byte
Unsigned 16-bit integer
17 Signal 3 High ByteAT42QT1040 [DATASHEET] 12
9524D–AT42–05/2013
Bit 7: This bit is set during calibration
Bits 4 – 6: Contains the number of keys active
Bits 0 – 3: Show the touch status of the corresponding keys
Figure 4-2 to Figure 4-5 show the usefulness of the debug data out feature. Channels can be monitored and tweaked
to the specific application with great accuracy.
18 Delta 0 Low Byte
Signed 16-bit integer
19 Delta 0 High Byte
20 Delta 1 Low Byte
Signed 16-bit integer
21 Delta 1 High Byte
22 Delta 2 Low Byte
Signed 16-bit integer
23 Delta 2 High Byte
24 Delta 3 Low Byte
Signed 16-bit integer
25 Delta 3 High Byte
26 Flags Various operational flags
27 Flags2 Unsigned bytes
28 Status Byte Unsigned byte. See Table 4-4
29 Frame Number Repeat of framing index number in
byte 0
Table 4-4. Status Byte (Byte 28)
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
CAL Number of Keys (2 – 4) Key 3 Key 2 Key 1 Key 0
Table 4-3. Serial Data Output (Continued)
Byte Purpose NotesAT42QT1040 [DATASHEET] 13 9524D–AT42–05/2013
Figure 4-2. Byte Clocked Out (~5 µs Period)
Figure 4-3. Byte Following Byte (~ 30 µs Period)
Figure 4-4. Full Debug Send (30 Bytes)AT42QT1040 [DATASHEET] 14
9524D–AT42–05/2013
Figure 4-5. Debug Lines Floating Between Debug Data Sends (30 Bytes, ~2 ms to Send)AT42QT1040 [DATASHEET] 15 9524D–AT42–05/2013
5. Specifications
5.1 Absolute Maximum Specifications
5.2 Recommended Operating Conditions
5.3 DC Specifications
Vdd –0.5 to +6.0 V
Max continuous pin current, any control or drive pin ±10 mA
Voltage forced onto any pin –0.5 V to (Vdd + 0.5) V
Operating temperature –40°C to +85°C
Storage temperature –55°C to +125°C
Vdd 1.8 V to 5.5 V
Supply ripple + noise ±20 mV maximum
Cx capacitance per key 2 to 20 pF
Vdd = 5.0 V, Cs = 4.7 nF, Ta = recommended range, unless otherwise noted
Parameter Description Min Typ Max Units Notes
Vil Low input logic level –0.5 – 0.3 V
Vih High input logic level 0.6 × Vdd Vdd Vdd + 0.5 V
Vol Low output voltage 0 – 0.7 V 10 mA sink current
Voh High output voltage 0.8 × Vdd – Vdd V 10 mA source current
Iil Input leakage current – <0.05 1 µA
Rrst Internal RST pull-up resistor 20 – 50 k
CAUTION: Stresses beyond those listed under Absolute Maximum Specifications may cause permanent damage
the device. This is a stress rating only and functional operation of the device at these or other conditions beyo
those indicated in the operational sections of this specification is not implied. Exposure to absolute maximu
specification conditions for extended periods may affect device reliabilityAT42QT1040 [DATASHEET] 16
9524D–AT42–05/2013
5.4 Timing Specifications
5.5 Power Consumption
Parameter Description Min Typ Max Units Notes
TBS Burst duration – 3.5 – ms Cx = 5 pF, Cs = 18 nF
Fc Burst center frequency – 119 – kHz
Fm Burst modulation, percentage –7.5 – +7.5 %
TPW Burst pulse width – 2 – µs
Vdd (V) AKS Mode (RAKS) Speed (RFS) Power Consumption (µA)
1.8
Off Slow 31
Off Fast 104
On Slow 36
On Fast 114
3.3
Off Slow 100
Off Fast 340
On Slow 117
On Fast 380
5.0
Off Slow 215
Off Fast 710
On Slow 245
On Fast 800AT42QT1040 [DATASHEET] 17 9524D–AT42–05/2013
5.6 Mechanical Dimensions
Features
• High performance, low power AVR® 8-bit Microcontroller
• Advanced RISC architecture
– 135 powerful instructions – most single clock cycle execution
– 32 × 8 general purpose working registers
– Fully static operation
– Up to 16MIPS throughput at 16MHz
– On-chip 2-cycle multiplier
• Non-volatile program and data memories
– 64/128Kbytes of in-system self-programmable flash
• Endurance: 100,000 write/erase cycles
– Optional Boot Code section with independent lock bits
• USB boot loader programmed by default in the factory
• In-system programming by on-chip boot program hardware activated after
reset
• True read-while-write operation
• All supplied parts are pre-programed with a default USB bootloader
– 2K/4K (64K/128K flash version) bytes EEPROM
• Endurance: 100,000 write/erase cycles
– 4K/8K (64K/128K flash version) bytes internal SRAM
– Up to 64Kbytes optional external memory space
– Programming lock for software security
• JTAG (IEEE std. 1149.1 compliant) interface
– Boundary-scan capabilities according to the JTAG standard
– Extensive on-chip debug support
– Programming of flash, EEPROM, fuses, and lock bits through the JTAG interface
• USB 2.0 full-speed/low-speed device and on-the-go module
– Complies fully with:
– Universal serial bus specification REV 2.0
– On-the-go supplement to the USB 2.0 specification rev 1.0
– Supports data transfer rates up to 12Mbit/s and 1.5Mbit/s
• USB full-speed/low speed device module with interrupt on transfer completion
– Endpoint 0 for control transfers: up to 64-bytes
– Six programmable endpoints with in or out directions and with bulk, interrupt or
isochronous transfers
– Configurable endpoints size up to 256bytes in double bank mode
– Fully independent 832bytes USB DPRAM for endpoint memory allocation
– Suspend/resume interrupts
– Power-on reset and USB bus reset
– 48MHz PLL for full-speed bus operation
– USB bus disconnection on microcontroller request
• USB OTG reduced host:
– Supports host negotiation protocol (HNP) and session request protocol (SRP) for
OTG dual-role devices
– Provide status and control signals for software implementation of HNP and SRP
– Provides programmable times required for HNP and SRP
• Peripheral features
– Two 8-bit timer/counters with separate prescaler and compare mode
– Two16-bit timer/counter with separate prescaler, compare- and capture mode
8-bit Atmel
Microcontroller
with
64/128Kbytes
of ISP Flash
and USB
Controller
AT90USB646
AT90USB647
AT90USB1286
AT90USB1287
7593L–AVR–09/122
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
– Real time counter with separate oscillator
– Four 8-bit PWM channels
– Six PWM channels with programmable resolution from 2 to 16 bits
– Output compare modulator
– 8-channels, 10-bit ADC
– Programmable serial USART
– Master/slave SPI serial interface
– Byte oriented 2-wire serial interface
– Programmable watchdog timer with separate on-chip oscillator
– On-chip analog comparator
– Interrupt and wake-up on pin change
• Special microcontroller features
– Power-on reset and programmable brown-out detection
– Internal calibrated oscillator
– External and internal interrupt sources
– Six sleep modes: Idle, ADC Noise Reduction, Power-save, Power-down, Standby, and Extended Standby
• I/O and packages
– 48 programmable I/O lines
– 64-lead TQFP and 64-lead QFN
• Operating voltages
– 2.7 - 5.5V
• Operating temperature
– Industrial (-40°C to +85°C)
• Maximum frequency
– 8MHz at 2.7V - industrial range
– 16MHz at 4.5V - industrial range3
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
1. Pin configurations
Figure 1-1. Pinout Atmel AT90USB64/128-TQFP.
AT90USB90128/64
TQFP64
(INT.7/AIN.1/UVcon) PE7
UVcc
D-
D+
UGnd
UCap
VBus
(IUID) PE3
(SS/PCINT0) PB0
(INT.6/AIN.0) PE6
(PCINT1/SCLK) PB1
(PDI/PCINT2/MOSI) PB2
(PDO/PCINT3/MISO) PB3
(PCINT4/OC.2A) PB4
(PCINT5/OC.1A) PB5
(PCINT6/OC.1B) PB6
(PCINT7/OC.0A/OC.1C) PB7
(INT4/TOSC1) PE4
(INT.5/TOSC2) PE5
RESET
VCC
GND
XTAL2
XTAL1
(OC0B/SCL/INT0) PD0
(OC2B/SDA/INT1) PD1
(RXD1/INT2) PD2
(TXD1/INT3) PD3
(ICP1) PD4
(XCK1) PD5
PA3 (AD3)
PA4 (AD4)
PA5 (AD5)
PA6 (AD6)
PA7 (AD7)
PE2 (ALE/HWB)
PC7 (A15/IC.3/CLKO)
PC6 (A14/OC.3A)
PC5 (A13/OC.3B)
PC4 (A12/OC.3C)
PC3 (A11/T.3)
PC2 (A10)
PC1 (A9)
PC0 (A8)
PE1 (RD)
PE0 (WR)
AVCC
GND
AREF
PF0 (ADC0)
PF1 (ADC1)
PF2 (ADC2)
PF3 (ADC3)
PF4 (ADC4/TCK)
PF5 (ADC5/TMS)
PF6 (ADC6/TDO)
PF7 (ADC7/TDI)
GND
VCC
PA0 (AD0)
PA1 (AD1)
PA2 (AD2)
(T1) PD6
(T0) PD7
INDEX CORNER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
324
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 1-2. Pinout Atmel AT90USB64/128-QFN.
Note: The large center pad underneath the MLF packages is made of metal and internally connected to
GND. It should be soldered or glued to the board to ensure good mechanical stability. If the center
pad is left unconnected, the package might loosen from the board.
2
3
1
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
16 33
15
47
46
48
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
AT90USB128/64
(64-lead QFN top view)
INDEX CORNER
AVCC
G
N
D
AREF
PF0 (ADC0)
PF1 (ADC1)
PF2 (ADC2)
PF3 (ADC3)
PF4 (ADC4/TCK)
PF5 (ADC5/TMS)
PF6 (ADC6/TDO)
PF7 (ADC7/TDI)
G
N
D
VCC
PA0 (AD0)
PA1 (AD1)
PA2 (AD2)
(INT.7/AIN.1/UVcon) PE7
UVcc
D-
D+
UGnd
UCap
VBus
(IUID) PE3
(SS/PCINT0) PB0
(INT.6/AIN.0) PE6
(PCINT1/SCLK) PB1
(PDI/PCINT2/MOSI) PB2
(PDO/PCINT3/MISO) PB3
(PCINT4/OC.2A) PB4
(PCINT5/OC.1A) PB5
(PCINT6/OC.1B) PB6
(PCI
NT7/OC.0A/OC.1C) PB7
(INT4/TOSC1) PE4
(INT.5/TOSC2) PE5
VCC
G
N
D
XTAL2
XTAL1
(OC0B/SCL/I
NT0) PD0
(OC2B/SDA/I
NT1) PD1
(RXD1/I
NT2) PD2
(TXD1/I
NT3) PD3
(ICP1) PD4
(XCK1) PD5
(T1) PD6
(T0) PD7
RESET
PA3 (AD3)
PA4 (AD4)
PA5 (AD5)
PA6 (AD6)
PA7 (AD7)
PE2 (ALE/HWB)
PC7 (A15/IC.3/CLKO)
PC6 (A14/OC.3A)
PC5 (A13/OC.3B)
PC4 (A12/OC.3C)
PC3 (A11/T.3)
PC2 (A10)
PC1 (A9)
PC0 (A8)
PE1 (RD)
PE0 (WR)5
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
2. Overview
The Atmel® AVR® AT90USB64/128 is a low-power CMOS 8-bit microcontroller based on the
Atmel® AVR® enhanced RISC architecture. By executing powerful instructions in a single clock
cycle, the AT90USB64/128 achieves throughputs approaching 1MIPS per MHz allowing the system
designer to optimize power consumption versus processing speed.6
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
2.1 Block diagram
Figure 2-1. Block diagram.
The AVR core combines a rich instruction set with 32 general purpose working registers. All the
32 registers are directly connected to the Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU), allowing two independent
registers to be accessed in one single instruction executed in one clock cycle. The resulting
PROGRAM
COUNTER
ST ACK
POINTER
PROGRAM
FLASH
MCU CONTROL
REGISTER SRAM
GENERAL
PURPOSE
REGISTERS
INSTRUCTION
REGISTER
TIMER/
COUNTERS
INSTRUCTION
DECODER
DATA DIR.
REG. PORTB
DATA DIR.
REG. PORTE
DATA DIR.
REG. PORT A
DATA DIR.
REG. PORTD
DATA REGISTER
PORTB
DATA REGISTER
PORTE
DATA REGISTER
PORT A
DATA REGISTER
PORTD
INTERRUPT
UNIT
EEPROM
USART1 SPI
ST ATUS
REGISTER
Z
Y
X
ALU
POR TE DRIVERS POR TB DRIVERS
POR TF DRIVERS POR TA DRIVERS
POR TD DRIVERS
POR TC DRIVERS
PE7 - PE0 PB7 - PB0
PF7 - PF0 PA7 - P A0
RESET
VCC
AGND
GND
AREF
XT AL1
XT AL2
CONTROL
LINES
+
-
ANALOG
COMP ARATOR
PC7 - PC0
INTERNAL
OSCILLA TOR
WATCHDOG
TIMER
8-BIT DA TA BUS
AVCC
USB
TIMING AND
CONTROL
OSCILLA TOR
CALIB. OSC
DATA DIR.
REG. PORT C
DATA REGISTER
PORT C
ON-CHIP DEBUG
JTAG TAP
PROGRAMMING
LOGIC
BOUNDARYSCAN
DATA DIR.
REG. PORT F
DATA REGISTER
PORT F
ADC
POR - BOD
RESET
PD7 - PD0
TWO-WIRE SERIAL
INTERFACE
PLL7
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
architecture is more code efficient while achieving throughputs up to ten times faster than conventional
CISC microcontrollers.
The Atmel AT90USB64/128 provides the following features: 64/128Kbytes of In-System Programmable
Flash with Read-While-Write capabilities, 2K/4Kbytes EEPROM, 4K/8K bytes
SRAM, 48 general purpose I/O lines, 32 general purpose working registers, Real Time Counter
(RTC), four flexible Timer/Counters with compare modes and PWM, one USART, a byte oriented
2-wire Serial Interface, a 8-channels, 10-bit ADC with optional differential input stage with
programmable gain, programmable Watchdog Timer with Internal Oscillator, an SPI serial port,
IEEE std. 1149.1 compliant JTAG test interface, also used for accessing the On-chip Debug system
and programming and six software selectable power saving modes. The Idle mode stops
the CPU while allowing the SRAM, Timer/Counters, SPI port, and interrupt system to continue
functioning. The Power-down mode saves the register contents but freezes the Oscillator, disabling
all other chip functions until the next interrupt or Hardware Reset. In Power-save mode,
the asynchronous timer continues to run, allowing the user to maintain a timer base while the
rest of the device is sleeping. The ADC Noise Reduction mode stops the CPU and all I/O modules
except Asynchronous Timer and ADC, to minimize switching noise during ADC
conversions. In Standby mode, the Crystal/Resonator Oscillator is running while the rest of the
device is sleeping. This allows very fast start-up combined with low power consumption. In
Extended Standby mode, both the main Oscillator and the Asynchronous Timer continue to run.
The device is manufactured using the Atmel high-density nonvolatile memory technology. The
On-chip ISP Flash allows the program memory to be reprogrammed in-system through an SPI
serial interface, by a conventional nonvolatile memory programmer, or by an On-chip Boot program
running on the AVR core. The boot program can use any interface to download the
application program in the application Flash memory. Software in the Boot Flash section will
continue to run while the Application Flash section is updated, providing true Read-While-Write
operation. By combining an 8-bit RISC CPU with In-System Self-Programmable Flash on a
monolithic chip, the AT90USB64/128 is a powerful microcontroller that provides a highly flexible
and cost effective solution to many embedded control applications.
The AT90USB64/128 AVR is supported with a full suite of program and system development
tools including: C compilers, macro assemblers, program debugger/simulators, in-circuit emulators,
and evaluation kits.8
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
2.2 Pin descriptions
2.2.1 VCC
Digital supply voltage.
2.2.2 GND
Ground.
2.2.3 AVCC
Analog supply voltage.
2.2.4 Port A (PA7..PA0)
Port A is an 8-bit bidirectional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The
Port A output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source
capability. As inputs, Port A pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up
resistors are activated. The Port A pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active,
even if the clock is not running.
Port A also serves the functions of various special features of the Atmel AT90USB64/128 as
listed on page 78.
2.2.5 Port B (PB7..PB0)
Port B is an 8-bit bidirectional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The
Port B output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source
capability. As inputs, Port B pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up
resistors are activated. The Port B pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active,
even if the clock is not running.
Port B has better driving capabilities than the other ports.
Port B also serves the functions of various special features of the AT90USB64/128 as listed on
page 79.
2.2.6 Port C (PC7..PC0)
Port C is an 8-bit bidirectional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The
Port C output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source
capability. As inputs, Port C pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up
resistors are activated. The Port C pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active,
even if the clock is not running.
Port C also serves the functions of special features of the AT90USB64/128 as listed on page 82.
2.2.7 Port D (PD7..PD0)
Port D is an 8-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The
Port D output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source
capability. As inputs, Port D pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up
resistors are activated. The Port D pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active,
even if the clock is not running.
Port D also serves the functions of various special features of the AT90USB64/128 as listed on
page 83. 9
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
2.2.8 Port E (PE7..PE0)
Port E is an 8-bit bidirectional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The
Port E output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source
capability. As inputs, Port E pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up
resistors are activated. The Port E pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active,
even if the clock is not running.
Port E also serves the functions of various special features of the AT90USB64/128 as listed on
page 86.
2.2.9 Port F (PF7..PF0)
Port F serves as analog inputs to the A/D Converter.
Port F also serves as an 8-bit bidirectional I/O port, if the A/D Converter is not used. Port pins
can provide internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The Port F output buffers have symmetrical
drive characteristics with both high sink and source capability. As inputs, Port F pins
that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up resistors are activated. The Port F
pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active, even if the clock is not running. If the
JTAG interface is enabled, the pull-up resistors on pins PF7(TDI), PF5(TMS), and PF4(TCK) will
be activated even if a reset occurs.
Port F also serves the functions of the JTAG interface.
2.2.10 DUSB
Full speed / Low Speed Negative Data Upstream Port. Should be connected to the USB Dconnector
pin with a serial 22Ω resistor.
2.2.11 D+
USB Full speed / Low Speed Positive Data Upstream Port. Should be connected to the USB D+
connector pin with a serial 22Ω resistor.
2.2.12 UGND
USB Pads Ground.
2.2.13 UVCC
USB Pads Internal Regulator Input supply voltage.
2.2.14 UCAP
USB Pads Internal Regulator Output supply voltage. Should be connected to an external capacitor
(1µF).
2.2.15 VBUS
USB VBUS monitor and OTG negociations.
2.2.16 RESET
Reset input. A low level on this pin for longer than the minimum pulse length will generate a
reset, even if the clock is not running. The minimum pulse length is given in Table 9-1 on page
58. Shorter pulses are not guaranteed to generate a reset.
2.2.17 XTAL1
Input to the inverting Oscillator amplifier and input to the internal clock operating circuit.10
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
2.2.18 XTAL2
Output from the inverting oscillator amplifier.
2.2.19 AVCC
AVCC is the supply voltage pin for Port F and the A/D Converter. It should be externally connected
to VCC, even if the ADC is not used. If the ADC is used, it should be connected to VCC
through a low-pass filter.
2.2.20 AREF
This is the analog reference pin for the A/D Converter.
3. Resources
A comprehensive set of development tools, application notes and datasheets are available for
download on http://www.atmel.com/avr.
4. About code examples
This documentation contains simple code examples that briefly show how to use various parts of
the device. Be aware that not all C compiler vendors include bit definitions in the header files
and interrupt handling in C is compiler dependent. Please confirm with the C compiler documentation
for more details.
These code examples assume that the part specific header file is included before compilation.
For I/O registers located in extended I/O map, "IN", "OUT", "SBIS", "SBIC", "CBI", and "SBI"
instructions must be replaced with instructions that allow access to extended I/O. Typically
"LDS" and "STS" combined with "SBRS", "SBRC", "SBR", and "CBR".11
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
5. AVR CPU core
5.1 Introduction
This section discusses the AVR core architecture in general. The main function of the CPU core
is to ensure correct program execution. The CPU must therefore be able to access memories,
perform calculations, control peripherals, and handle interrupts.
5.2 Architectural overview
Figure 5-1. Block diagram of the AVR architecture.
In order to maximize performance and parallelism, the AVR uses a Harvard architecture – with
separate memories and buses for program and data. Instructions in the program memory are
executed with a single level pipelining. While one instruction is being executed, the next instruction
is pre-fetched from the program memory. This concept enables instructions to be executed
in every clock cycle. The program memory is In-System Re-programmable Flash memory.
Flash
program
memory
Instruction
register
Instruction
decoder
Program
counter
Control lines
32 x 8
general
purpose
registrers
ALU
Status
and control
I/O lines
EEPROM
Data bus 8-bit
Data
SRAM
Direct addressing
Indirect addressing
Interrupt
unit
SPI
unit
Watchdog
timer
Analog
comparator
I/O Module 2
I/O Module1
I/O Module n12
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
The fast-access Register File contains 32 × 8-bit general purpose working registers with a single
clock cycle access time. This allows single-cycle Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU) operation. In a typical
ALU operation, two operands are output from the Register File, the operation is executed,
and the result is stored back in the Register File – in one clock cycle.
Six of the 32 registers can be used as three 16-bit indirect address register pointers for Data
Space addressing – enabling efficient address calculations. One of the these address pointers
can also be used as an address pointer for look up tables in Flash program memory. These
added function registers are the 16-bit X-, Y-, and Z-register, described later in this section.
The ALU supports arithmetic and logic operations between registers or between a constant and
a register. Single register operations can also be executed in the ALU. After an arithmetic operation,
the Status Register is updated to reflect information about the result of the operation.
Program flow is provided by conditional and unconditional jump and call instructions, able to
directly address the whole address space. Most AVR instructions have a single 16-bit word format.
Every program memory address contains a 16- or 32-bit instruction.
Program Flash memory space is divided in two sections, the Boot Program section and the
Application Program section. Both sections have dedicated Lock bits for write and read/write
protection. The SPM instruction that writes into the Application Flash memory section must
reside in the Boot Program section.
During interrupts and subroutine calls, the return address Program Counter (PC) is stored on the
Stack. The Stack is effectively allocated in the general data SRAM, and consequently the Stack
size is only limited by the total SRAM size and the usage of the SRAM. All user programs must
initialize the SP in the Reset routine (before subroutines or interrupts are executed). The Stack
Pointer (SP) is read/write accessible in the I/O space. The data SRAM can easily be accessed
through the five different addressing modes supported in the AVR architecture.
The memory spaces in the AVR architecture are all linear and regular memory maps.
A flexible interrupt module has its control registers in the I/O space with an additional Global
Interrupt Enable bit in the Status Register. All interrupts have a separate Interrupt Vector in the
Interrupt Vector table. The interrupts have priority in accordance with their Interrupt Vector position.
The lower the Interrupt Vector address, the higher the priority.
The I/O memory space contains 64 addresses for CPU peripheral functions as Control Registers,
SPI, and other I/O functions. The I/O Memory can be accessed directly, or as the Data
Space locations following those of the Register File, 0x20 - 0x5F. In addition, the Atmel
AT90USB64/128 has Extended I/O space from 0x60 - 0xFF in SRAM where only the
ST/STS/STD and LD/LDS/LDD instructions can be used.
5.3 ALU – Arithmetic Logic Unit
The high-performance AVR ALU operates in direct connection with all the 32 general purpose
working registers. Within a single clock cycle, arithmetic operations between general purpose
registers or between a register and an immediate are executed. The ALU operations are divided
into three main categories – arithmetic, logical, and bit-functions. Some implementations of the
architecture also provide a powerful multiplier supporting both signed/unsigned multiplication
and fractional format. See the “Instruction set summary” on page 423 for a detailed description.13
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
5.4 Status register
The status register contains information about the result of the most recently executed arithmetic
instruction. This information can be used for altering program flow in order to perform conditional
operations. Note that the status register is updated after all ALU operations, as specified in the
Instruction Set Reference. This will in many cases remove the need for using the dedicated compare
instructions, resulting in faster and more compact code.
The status register is not automatically stored when entering an interrupt routine and restored
when returning from an interrupt. This must be handled by software.
The AVR status register – SREG – is defined as:
• Bit 7 – I: Global Interrupt Enable
The Global Interrupt Enable bit must be set for the interrupts to be enabled. The individual interrupt
enable control is then performed in separate control registers. If the Global Interrupt Enable
Register is cleared, none of the interrupts are enabled independent of the individual interrupt
enable settings. The I-bit is cleared by hardware after an interrupt has occurred, and is set by
the RETI instruction to enable subsequent interrupts. The I-bit can also be set and cleared by
the application with the SEI and CLI instructions, as described in the instruction set reference.
• Bit 6 – T: Bit Copy Storage
The Bit Copy instructions BLD (Bit LoaD) and BST (Bit STore) use the T-bit as source or destination
for the operated bit. A bit from a register in the Register File can be copied into T by the
BST instruction, and a bit in T can be copied into a bit in a register in the Register File by the
BLD instruction.
• Bit 5 – H: Half Carry Flag
The Half Carry Flag H indicates a Half Carry in some arithmetic operations. Half Carry Is useful
in BCD arithmetic. See the “Instruction set summary” on page 423 for detailed information.
• Bit 4 – S: Sign Bit, S = N ⊕ V
The S-bit is always an exclusive or between the Negative Flag N and the Two’s Complement
Overflow Flag V. See the “Instruction set summary” on page 423 for detailed information.
• Bit 3 – V: Two’s Complement Overflow Flag
The Two’s Complement Overflow Flag V supports two’s complement arithmetics. See the
“Instruction set summary” on page 423 for detailed information.
• Bit 2 – N: Negative Flag
The Negative Flag N indicates a negative result in an arithmetic or logic operation. See the
“Instruction set summary” on page 423 for detailed information.
• Bit 1 – Z: Zero Flag
The Zero Flag Z indicates a zero result in an arithmetic or logic operation. See the “Instruction
set summary” on page 423 for detailed information.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
I T H S V N Z C SREG
Read/write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 014
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
• Bit 0 – C: Carry Flag
The Carry Flag C indicates a carry in an arithmetic or logic operation. See the “Instruction set
summary” on page 423 for detailed information.
5.5 General purpose register file
The register file is optimized for the AVR Enhanced RISC instruction set. In order to achieve the
required performance and flexibility, the following input/output schemes are supported by the
register file:
• One 8-bit output operand and one 8-bit result input
• Two 8-bit output operands and one 8-bit result input
• Two 8-bit output operands and one 16-bit result input
• One 16-bit output operand and one 16-bit result input
Figure 5-2 shows the structure of the 32 general purpose working registers in the CPU.
Figure 5-2. AVR CPU general purpose working registers.
Most of the instructions operating on the Register File have direct access to all registers, and
most of them are single cycle instructions.
As shown in Figure 5-2, each register is also assigned a data memory address, mapping them
directly into the first 32 locations of the user Data Space. Although not being physically implemented
as SRAM locations, this memory organization provides great flexibility in access of the
registers, as the X-, Y-, and Z-pointer registers can be set to index any register in the file.
5.5.1 The X-register, Y-register, and Z-register
The registers R26..R31 have some added functions to their general purpose usage. These registers
are 16-bit address pointers for indirect addressing of the data space. The three indirect
address registers X, Y, and Z are defined as described in Figure 5-3.
7 0 Addr.
R0 0x00
R1 0x01
R2 0x02
…
R13 0x0D
General R14 0x0E
purpose R15 0x0F
working R16 0x10
registers R17 0x11
…
R26 0x1A X-register Low byte
R27 0x1B X-register High byte
R28 0x1C Y-register Low byte
R29 0x1D Y-register High byte
R30 0x1E Z-register Low byte
R31 0x1F Z-register High byte15
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 5-3. The X-, Y-, and Z-registers.
In the different addressing modes these address registers have functions as fixed displacement,
automatic increment, and automatic decrement (see the instruction set reference for details).
5.6 Stack pointer
The Stack is mainly used for storing temporary data, for storing local variables and for storing
return addresses after interrupts and subroutine calls. The Stack Pointer Register always points
to the top of the Stack. Note that the Stack is implemented as growing from higher memory locations
to lower memory locations. This implies that a Stack PUSH command decreases the Stack
Pointer.
The Stack Pointer points to the data SRAM Stack area where the Subroutine and Interrupt
Stacks are located. This Stack space in the data SRAM must be defined by the program before
any subroutine calls are executed or interrupts are enabled. The Stack Pointer must be set to
point above 0x0100. The initial value of the stack pointer is the last address of the internal
SRAM. The Stack Pointer is decremented by one when data is pushed onto the Stack with the
PUSH instruction, and it is decremented by three when the return address is pushed onto the
Stack with subroutine call or interrupt. The Stack Pointer is incremented by one when data is
popped from the Stack with the POP instruction, and it is incremented by three when data is
popped from the Stack with return from subroutine RET or return from interrupt RETI.
The AVR Stack Pointer is implemented as two 8-bit registers in the I/O space. The number of
bits actually used is implementation dependent. Note that the data space in some implementations
of the AVR architecture is so small that only SPL is needed. In this case, the SPH Register
will not be present.
15 XH XL 0
X-register 7 07 0
R27 (0x1B) R26 (0x1A)
15 YH YL 0
Y-register 7 07 0
R29 (0x1D) R28 (0x1C)
15 ZH ZL 0
Z-register 70 7 0
R31 (0x1F) R30 (0x1E)
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
SP15 SP14 SP13 SP12 SP11 SP10 SP9 SP8 SPH
SP7 SP6 SP5 SP4 SP3 SP2 SP1 SP0 SPL
76543210
Read/write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
1111111116
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
5.6.1 RAMPZ - Extended Z-pointer register for ELPM/SPM
For ELPM/SPM instructions, the Z-pointer is a concatenation of RAMPZ, ZH, and ZL, as shown
in Figure 5-4. Note that LPM is not affected by the RAMPZ setting.
Figure 5-4. The Z-pointer used by ELPM and SPM.
The actual number of bits is implementation dependent. Unused bits in an implementation will
always read as zero. For compatibility with future devices, be sure to write these bits to zero.
5.7 Instruction execution timing
This section describes the general access timing concepts for instruction execution. The AVR
CPU is driven by the CPU clock clkCPU, directly generated from the selected clock source for the
chip. No internal clock division is used.
Figure 5-5 shows the parallel instruction fetches and instruction executions enabled by the Harvard
architecture and the fast-access Register File concept. This is the basic pipelining concept
to obtain up to 1 MIPS per MHz with the corresponding unique results for functions per cost,
functions per clocks, and functions per power-unit.
Figure 5-5. The parallel instruction fetches and instruction executions.
Figure 5-6 shows the internal timing concept for the Register File. In a single clock cycle an ALU
operation using two register operands is executed, and the result is stored back to the destination
register.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
RAMPZ7 RAMPZ6 RAMPZ5 RAMPZ4 RAMPZ3 RAMPZ2 RAMPZ1 RAMPZ0 RAMPZ
Read/write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit (individually) 7 0 7 0 7 0
RAMPZ ZH ZL
Bit (Z-pointer) 23 16 15 8 7 0
clk
1st instruction fetch
1st instruction execute
2nd instruction fetch
2nd instruction execute
3rd instruction fetch
3rd instruction execute
4th instruction fetch
T1 T2 T3 T4
CPU17
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 5-6. Single cycle ALU operation.
5.8 Reset and interrupt handling
The AVR provides several different interrupt sources. These interrupts and the separate Reset
Vector each have a separate program vector in the program memory space. All interrupts are
assigned individual enable bits which must be written logic one together with the Global Interrupt
Enable bit in the Status Register in order to enable the interrupt. Depending on the Program
Counter value, interrupts may be automatically disabled when Boot Lock bits BLB02 or BLB12
are programmed. This feature improves software security. See the section “Memory programming”
on page 359 for details.
The lowest addresses in the program memory space are by default defined as the Reset and
Interrupt Vectors. The complete list of vectors is shown in “Interrupts” on page 68. The list also
determines the priority levels of the different interrupts. The lower the address the higher is the
priority level. RESET has the highest priority, and next is INT0 – the External Interrupt Request
0. The Interrupt Vectors can be moved to the start of the Boot Flash section by setting the IVSEL
bit in the MCU Control Register (MCUCR). Refer to “Interrupts” on page 68 for more information.
The Reset Vector can also be moved to the start of the Boot Flash section by programming the
BOOTRST Fuse, see “Memory programming” on page 359.
When an interrupt occurs, the Global Interrupt Enable I-bit is cleared and all interrupts are disabled.
The user software can write logic one to the I-bit to enable nested interrupts. All enabled
interrupts can then interrupt the current interrupt routine. The I-bit is automatically set when a
Return from Interrupt instruction – RETI – is executed.
There are basically two types of interrupts. The first type is triggered by an event that sets the
Interrupt Flag. For these interrupts, the Program Counter is vectored to the actual Interrupt Vector
in order to execute the interrupt handling routine, and hardware clears the corresponding
Interrupt Flag. Interrupt Flags can also be cleared by writing a logic one to the flag bit position(s)
to be cleared. If an interrupt condition occurs while the corresponding interrupt enable bit is
cleared, the Interrupt Flag will be set and remembered until the interrupt is enabled, or the flag is
cleared by software. Similarly, if one or more interrupt conditions occur while the Global Interrupt
Enable bit is cleared, the corresponding Interrupt Flag(s) will be set and remembered until the
Global Interrupt Enable bit is set, and will then be executed by order of priority.
The second type of interrupts will trigger as long as the interrupt condition is present. These
interrupts do not necessarily have Interrupt Flags. If the interrupt condition disappears before the
interrupt is enabled, the interrupt will not be triggered.
When the AVR exits from an interrupt, it will always return to the main program and execute one
more instruction before any pending interrupt is served.
Total execution time
Register operands fetch
ALU operation execute
Result write back
T1 T2 T3 T4
clkCPU18
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Note that the Status Register is not automatically stored when entering an interrupt routine, nor
restored when returning from an interrupt routine. This must be handled by software.
When using the CLI instruction to disable interrupts, the interrupts will be immediately disabled.
No interrupt will be executed after the CLI instruction, even if it occurs simultaneously with the
CLI instruction. The following example shows how this can be used to avoid interrupts during the
timed EEPROM write sequence.
When using the SEI instruction to enable interrupts, the instruction following SEI will be executed
before any pending interrupts, as shown in this example.
Assembly code example
in r16, SREG ; store SREG value
cli ; disable interrupts during timed sequence
sbi EECR, EEMPE ; start EEPROM write
sbi EECR, EEPE
out SREG, r16 ; restore SREG value (I-bit)
C code example
char cSREG;
cSREG = SREG; /* store SREG value */
/* disable interrupts during timed sequence */
__disable_interrupt();
EECR |= (1< CSn2:0 > 1). The number of system clock cycles from
when the timer is enabled to the first count occurs can be from 1 to N+1 system clock cycles,
where N equals the prescaler divisor (8, 64, 256, or 1024).
It is possible to use the prescaler reset for synchronizing the Timer/Counter to program execution.
However, care must be taken if the other Timer/Counter that shares the same prescaler
also uses prescaling. A prescaler reset will affect the prescaler period for all Timer/Counters it is
connected to.
13.3 External clock source
An external clock source applied to the Tn pin can be used as Timer/Counter clock (clkTn). The
Tn pin is sampled once every system clock cycle by the pin synchronization logic. The synchronized
(sampled) signal is then passed through the edge detector. Figure 13-1 shows a functional
equivalent block diagram of the Tn synchronization and edge detector logic. The registers are
clocked at the positive edge of the internal system clock (clkI/O). The latch is transparent in the
high period of the internal system clock.
The edge detector generates one clkTn pulse for each positive (CSn2:0 = 7) or negative (CSn2:0
= 6) edge it detects.
Figure 13-1. Tn/T0 pin sampling.
The synchronization and edge detector logic introduces a delay of 2.5 to 3.5 system clock cycles
from an edge has been applied to the Tn pin to the counter is updated.
Enabling and disabling of the clock input must be done when Tn has been stable for at least one
system clock cycle, otherwise it is a risk that a false Timer/Counter clock pulse is generated.
Tn_sync
(To clock
select logic)
Synchronization Edge detector
D Q D Q
LE
Tn D Q
clkI/O97
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Each half period of the external clock applied must be longer than one system clock cycle to
ensure correct sampling. The external clock must be guaranteed to have less than half the system
clock frequency (fExtClk < fclk_I/O/2) given a 50/50% duty cycle. Since the edge detector uses
sampling, the maximum frequency of an external clock it can detect is half the sampling frequency
(Nyquist sampling theorem). However, due to variation of the system clock frequency
and duty cycle caused by Oscillator source (crystal, resonator, and capacitors) tolerances, it is
recommended that maximum frequency of an external clock source is less than fclk_I/O/2.5.
An external clock source can not be prescaled.
Figure 13-2. Prescaler for synchronous Timer/Counters
13.4 GTCCR – General Timer/Counter Control Register
• Bit 7 – TSM: Timer/Counter Synchronization Mode
Writing the TSM bit to one activates the Timer/Counter Synchronization mode. In this mode, the
value that is written to the PSRASY and PSRSYNC bits is kept, hence keeping the corresponding
prescaler reset signals asserted. This ensures that the corresponding Timer/Counters are
halted and can be configured to the same value without the risk of one of them advancing during
configuration. When the TSM bit is written to zero, the PSRASY and PSRSYNC bits are cleared
by hardware, and the Timer/Counters start counting simultaneously.
• Bit 0 – PSRSYNC: Prescaler Reset for Synchronous Timer/Counters
When this bit is one, Timer/Counter0 and Timer/Counter1 and Timer/Counter3 prescaler will be
Reset. This bit is normally cleared immediately by hardware, except if the TSM bit is set. Note
that Timer/Counter0, Timer/Counter1 and Timer/Counter3 share the same prescaler and a reset
of this prescaler will affect all timers.
PSR10
Clear
Tn
Tn
clkI/O
Synchronization
Synchronization
TIMER/COUNTERn CLOCK SOURCE
clkTn
TIMER/COUNTERn CLOCK SOURCE
clkTn
CSn0
CSn1
CSn2
CSn0
CSn1
CSn2
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TSM – – – – – PSRASY PSRSYNC GTCCR
Read/write R/W R R R R R R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 098
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
14. 8-bit Timer/Counter0 with PWM
Timer/Counter0 is a general purpose 8-bit Timer/Counter module, with two independent Output
Compare Units, and with PWM support. It allows accurate program execution timing (event management)
and wave generation. The main features are:
• Two independent output compare units
• Double buffered output compare registers
• Clear timer on compare match (auto reload)
• Glitch free, phase correct pulse width modulator (PWM)
• Variable PWM period
• Frequency generator
• Three independent interrupt sources (TOV0, OCF0A, and OCF0B)
14.1 Overview
A simplified block diagram of the 8-bit Timer/Counter is shown in Figure 14-1. For the actual
placement of I/O pins, refer to “Pinout Atmel AT90USB64/128-TQFP.” on page 3. CPU accessible
I/O Registers, including I/O bits and I/O pins, are shown in bold. The device-specific I/O
Register and bit locations are listed in the “8-bit Timer/Counter register description” on page 108.
Figure 14-1. 8-bit Timer/Counter block diagram.
14.1.1 Registers
The Timer/Counter (TCNT0) and Output Compare Registers (OCR0A and OCR0B) are 8-bit
registers. Interrupt request (abbreviated to Int.Req. in the figure) signals are all visible in the
Timer Interrupt Flag Register (TIFR0). All interrupts are individually masked with the Timer Interrupt
Mask Register (TIMSK0). TIFR0 and TIMSK0 are not shown in the figure.
The Timer/Counter can be clocked internally, via the prescaler, or by an external clock source on
the T0 pin. The Clock Select logic block controls which clock source and edge the Timer/Counter
uses to increment (or decrement) its value. The Timer/Counter is inactive when no clock source
is selected. The output from the Clock Select logic is referred to as the timer clock (clkT0).
Clock select
Timer/Counter
DATA BUS
OCRnA
OCRnB
=
=
TCNTn
Waveform
generation
Waveform
generation
OCnA
OCnB
=
Fixed
TOP
value
Control logic
= 0
TOP BOTTOM
Count
Clear
Direction
TOVn
(int.req.)
OCnA
(int.req.)
OCnB
(Int.Req.)
TCCRnA TCCRnB
Tn Edge
detector
(From prescaler)
clkTn99
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
The double buffered Output Compare Registers (OCR0A and OCR0B) are compared with the
Timer/Counter value at all times. The result of the compare can be used by the Waveform Generator
to generate a PWM or variable frequency output on the Output Compare pins (OC0A and
OC0B). See “Output compare unit” on page 100. for details. The Compare Match event will also
set the Compare Flag (OCF0A or OCF0B) which can be used to generate an Output Compare
interrupt request.
14.1.2 Definitions
Many register and bit references in this section are written in general form. A lower case “n”
replaces the Timer/Counter number, in this case 0. A lower case “x” replaces the Output Compare
Unit, in this case Compare Unit A or Compare Unit B. However, when using the register or
bit defines in a program, the precise form must be used, that is, TCNT0 for accessing
Timer/Counter0 counter value and so on.
The definitions in the table below are also used extensively throughout the document.
14.2 Timer/Counter clock sources
The Timer/Counter can be clocked by an internal or an external clock source. The clock source
is selected by the Clock Select logic which is controlled by the Clock Select (CS02:0) bits
located in the Timer/Counter Control Register (TCCR0B). For details on clock sources and prescaler,
see “Timer/Counter0, Timer/Counter1, and Timer/Counter3 prescalers” on page 96.
14.3 Counter unit
The main part of the 8-bit Timer/Counter is the programmable bi-directional counter unit. Figure
14-2 shows a block diagram of the counter and its surroundings.
Figure 14-2. Counter unit block diagram.
BOTTOM The counter reaches the BOTTOM when it becomes 0x00.
MAX The counter reaches its MAXimum when it becomes 0xFF (decimal 255).
TOP The counter reaches the TOP when it becomes equal to the highest value in the
count sequence. The TOP value can be assigned to be the fixed value 0xFF
(MAX) or the value stored in the OCR0A Register. The assignment is dependent
on the mode of operation.
DATA BUS
TCNTn Control logic
count
TOVn
(int.req.)
Clock select
top
Tn Edge
detector
(From prescaler)
clkTn
bottom
direction
clear100
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Signal description (internal signals):
count Increment or decrement TCNT0 by 1.
direction Select between increment and decrement.
clear Clear TCNT0 (set all bits to zero).
clkTn Timer/Counter clock, referred to as clkT0 in the following.
top Signalize that TCNT0 has reached maximum value.
bottom Signalize that TCNT0 has reached minimum value (zero).
Depending of the mode of operation used, the counter is cleared, incremented, or decremented
at each timer clock (clkT0). clkT0 can be generated from an external or internal clock source,
selected by the Clock Select bits (CS02:0). When no clock source is selected (CS02:0 = 0) the
timer is stopped. However, the TCNT0 value can be accessed by the CPU, regardless of
whether clkT0 is present or not. A CPU write overrides (has priority over) all counter clear or
count operations.
The counting sequence is determined by the setting of the WGM01 and WGM00 bits located in
the Timer/Counter Control Register (TCCR0A) and the WGM02 bit located in the Timer/Counter
Control Register B (TCCR0B). There are close connections between how the counter behaves
(counts) and how waveforms are generated on the Output Compare outputs OC0A and OC0B.
For more details about advanced counting sequences and waveform generation, see “Modes of
operation” on page 103.
The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV0) is set according to the mode of operation selected by
the WGM02:0 bits. TOV0 can be used for generating a CPU interrupt.
14.4 Output compare unit
The 8-bit comparator continuously compares TCNT0 with the Output Compare Registers
(OCR0A and OCR0B). Whenever TCNT0 equals OCR0A or OCR0B, the comparator signals a
match. A match will set the Output Compare Flag (OCF0A or OCF0B) at the next timer clock
cycle. If the corresponding interrupt is enabled, the Output Compare Flag generates an Output
Compare interrupt. The Output Compare Flag is automatically cleared when the interrupt is executed.
Alternatively, the flag can be cleared by software by writing a logical one to its I/O bit
location. The Waveform Generator uses the match signal to generate an output according to
operating mode set by the WGM02:0 bits and Compare Output mode (COM0x1:0) bits. The
maximum and bottom signals are used by the Waveform Generator for handling the special
cases of the extreme values in some modes of operation (“Modes of operation” on page 103).
Figure 14-3 on page 101 shows a block diagram of the Output Compare unit. 101
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 14-3. Output Compare Unit, block diagram.
The OCR0x Registers are double buffered when using any of the Pulse Width Modulation
(PWM) modes. For the normal and Clear Timer on Compare (CTC) modes of operation, the double
buffering is disabled. The double buffering synchronizes the update of the OCR0x Compare
Registers to either top or bottom of the counting sequence. The synchronization prevents the
occurrence of odd-length, non-symmetrical PWM pulses, thereby making the output glitch-free.
The OCR0x Register access may seem complex, but this is not case. When the double buffering
is enabled, the CPU has access to the OCR0x Buffer Register, and if double buffering is disabled
the CPU will access the OCR0x directly.
14.4.1 Force output compare
In non-PWM waveform generation modes, the match output of the comparator can be forced by
writing a one to the Force Output Compare (FOC0x) bit. Forcing Compare Match will not set the
OCF0x Flag or reload/clear the timer, but the OC0x pin will be updated as if a real Compare
Match had occurred (the COM0x1:0 bits settings define whether the OC0x pin is set, cleared or
toggled).
14.4.2 Compare match blocking by TCNT0 write
All CPU write operations to the TCNT0 Register will block any Compare Match that occur in the
next timer clock cycle, even when the timer is stopped. This feature allows OCR0x to be initialized
to the same value as TCNT0 without triggering an interrupt when the Timer/Counter clock is
enabled.
14.4.3 Using the output compare unit
Since writing TCNT0 in any mode of operation will block all Compare Matches for one timer
clock cycle, there are risks involved when changing TCNT0 when using the Output Compare
Unit, independently of whether the Timer/Counter is running or not. If the value written to TCNT0
equals the OCR0x value, the Compare Match will be missed, resulting in incorrect waveform
generation. Similarly, do not write the TCNT0 value equal to BOTTOM when the counter is
down-counting.
OCFnx (int.req.)
= (8-bit comparator)
OCRnx
OCnx
DATA BUS
TCNTn
WGMn1:0
Waveform generator
top
FOCn
COMnX1:0
bottom102
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
The setup of the OC0x should be performed before setting the Data Direction Register for the
port pin to output. The easiest way of setting the OC0x value is to use the Force Output Compare
(FOC0x) strobe bits in Normal mode. The OC0x Registers keep their values even when
changing between Waveform Generation modes.
Be aware that the COM0x1:0 bits are not double buffered together with the compare value.
Changing the COM0x1:0 bits will take effect immediately.
14.5 Compare Match Output Unit
The Compare Output mode (COM0x1:0) bits have two functions. The Waveform Generator uses
the COM0x1:0 bits for defining the Output Compare (OC0x) state at the next Compare Match.
Also, the COM0x1:0 bits control the OC0x pin output source. Figure 14-4 shows a simplified
schematic of the logic affected by the COM0x1:0 bit setting. The I/O Registers, I/O bits, and I/O
pins in the figure are shown in bold. Only the parts of the general I/O Port Control Registers
(DDR and PORT) that are affected by the COM0x1:0 bits are shown. When referring to the
OC0x state, the reference is for the internal OC0x Register, not the OC0x pin. If a system reset
occur, the OC0x Register is reset to “0”.
Figure 14-4. Compare Match Output Unit, schematic.
The general I/O port function is overridden by the Output Compare (OC0x) from the Waveform
Generator if either of the COM0x1:0 bits are set. However, the OC0x pin direction (input or output)
is still controlled by the Data Direction Register (DDR) for the port pin. The Data Direction
Register bit for the OC0x pin (DDR_OC0x) must be set as output before the OC0x value is visible
on the pin. The port override function is independent of the Waveform Generation mode.
The design of the Output Compare pin logic allows initialization of the OC0x state before the output
is enabled. Note that some COM0x1:0 bit settings are reserved for certain modes of
operation. See “8-bit Timer/Counter register description” on page 108.
14.5.1 Compare output mode and waveform generation
The Waveform Generator uses the COM0x1:0 bits differently in Normal, CTC, and PWM modes.
For all modes, setting the COM0x1:0 = 0 tells the Waveform Generator that no action on the
OC0x Register is to be performed on the next Compare Match. For compare output actions in
PORT
DDR
D Q
D Q
OCnx
OCnx Pin
D Q Waveform
generator
COMnx1
COMnx0
0
1
DATA BUS
FOCn
clkI/O103
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
the non-PWM modes refer to Table 14-1 on page 109. For fast PWM mode, refer to Table 14-2
on page 109, and for phase correct PWM refer to Table 14-3 on page 109.
A change of the COM0x1:0 bits state will have effect at the first Compare Match after the bits are
written. For non-PWM modes, the action can be forced to have immediate effect by using the
FOC0x strobe bits.
14.6 Modes of operation
The mode of operation, that is, the behavior of the Timer/Counter and the Output Compare pins,
is defined by the combination of the Waveform Generation mode (WGM02:0) and Compare Output
mode (COM0x1:0) bits. The Compare Output mode bits do not affect the counting sequence,
while the Waveform Generation mode bits do. The COM0x1:0 bits control whether the PWM output
generated should be inverted or not (inverted or non-inverted PWM). For non-PWM modes
the COM0x1:0 bits control whether the output should be set, cleared, or toggled at a Compare
Match (See “Compare Match Output Unit” on page 102.).
For detailed timing information see “Timer/Counter timing diagrams” on page 107.
14.6.1 Normal mode
The simplest mode of operation is the Normal mode (WGM02:0 = 0). In this mode the counting
direction is always up (incrementing), and no counter clear is performed. The counter simply
overruns when it passes its maximum 8-bit value (TOP = 0xFF) and then restarts from the bottom
(0x00). In normal operation the Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV0) will be set in the same
timer clock cycle as the TCNT0 becomes zero. The TOV0 Flag in this case behaves like a ninth
bit, except that it is only set, not cleared. However, combined with the timer overflow interrupt
that automatically clears the TOV0 Flag, the timer resolution can be increased by software.
There are no special cases to consider in the Normal mode, a new counter value can be written
anytime.
The Output Compare Unit can be used to generate interrupts at some given time. Using the Output
Compare to generate waveforms in Normal mode is not recommended, since this will
occupy too much of the CPU time.
14.6.2 Clear Timer on Compare Match (CTC) mode
In Clear Timer on Compare or CTC mode (WGM02:0 = 2), the OCR0A Register is used to
manipulate the counter resolution. In CTC mode the counter is cleared to zero when the counter
value (TCNT0) matches the OCR0A. The OCR0A defines the top value for the counter, hence
also its resolution. This mode allows greater control of the Compare Match output frequency. It
also simplifies the operation of counting external events.
The timing diagram for the CTC mode is shown in Figure 14-5 on page 104. The counter value
(TCNT0) increases until a Compare Match occurs between TCNT0 and OCR0A, and then counter
(TCNT0) is cleared.104
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 14-5. CTC mode, timing diagram.
An interrupt can be generated each time the counter value reaches the TOP value by using the
OCF0A Flag. If the interrupt is enabled, the interrupt handler routine can be used for updating
the TOP value. However, changing TOP to a value close to BOTTOM when the counter is running
with none or a low prescaler value must be done with care since the CTC mode does not
have the double buffering feature. If the new value written to OCR0A is lower than the current
value of TCNT0, the counter will miss the Compare Match. The counter will then have to count to
its maximum value (0xFF) and wrap around starting at 0x00 before the Compare Match can
occur.
For generating a waveform output in CTC mode, the OC0A output can be set to toggle its logical
level on each Compare Match by setting the Compare Output mode bits to toggle mode
(COM0A1:0 = 1). The OC0A value will not be visible on the port pin unless the data direction for
the pin is set to output. The waveform generated will have a maximum frequency of fOC0 =
fclk_I/O/2 when OCR0A is set to zero (0x00). The waveform frequency is defined by the following
equation:
The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024).
As for the Normal mode of operation, the TOV0 Flag is set in the same timer clock cycle that the
counter counts from MAX to 0x00.
14.6.3 Fast PWM mode
The fast Pulse Width Modulation or fast PWM mode (WGM02:0 = 3 or 7) provides a high frequency
PWM waveform generation option. The fast PWM differs from the other PWM option by
its single-slope operation. The counter counts from BOTTOM to TOP then restarts from BOTTOM.
TOP is defined as 0xFF when WGM2:0 = 3, and OCR0A when WGM2:0 = 7. In noninverting
Compare Output mode, the Output Compare (OC0x) is cleared on the Compare Match
between TCNT0 and OCR0x, and set at BOTTOM. In inverting Compare Output mode, the output
is set on Compare Match and cleared at BOTTOM. Due to the single-slope operation, the
operating frequency of the fast PWM mode can be twice as high as the phase correct PWM
mode that use dual-slope operation. This high frequency makes the fast PWM mode well suited
for power regulation, rectification, and DAC applications. High frequency allows physically small
sized external components (coils, capacitors), and therefore reduces total system cost.
In fast PWM mode, the counter is incremented until the counter value matches the TOP value.
The counter is then cleared at the following timer clock cycle. The timing diagram for the fast
TCNTn
OCn
(Toggle)
OCnx Interrupt Flag Set
Period 1 2 3 4
(COMnx1:0 = 1)
f
OCnx
f
clk_I/O
2 ⋅ ⋅ N ( ) 1 + OCRnx = -------------------------------------------------105
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
PWM mode is shown in Figure 14-6. The TCNT0 value is in the timing diagram shown as a histogram
for illustrating the single-slope operation. The diagram includes non-inverted and
inverted PWM outputs. The small horizontal line marks on the TCNT0 slopes represent Compare
Matches between OCR0x and TCNT0.
Figure 14-6. Fast PWM mode, timing diagram.
The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV0) is set each time the counter reaches TOP. If the interrupt
is enabled, the interrupt handler routine can be used for updating the compare value.
In fast PWM mode, the compare unit allows generation of PWM waveforms on the OC0x pins.
Setting the COM0x1:0 bits to two will produce a non-inverted PWM and an inverted PWM output
can be generated by setting the COM0x1:0 to three: Setting the COM0A1:0 bits to one allows
the OC0A pin to toggle on Compare Matches if the WGM02 bit is set. This option is not available
for the OC0B pin (see Table 14-2 on page 109). The actual OC0x value will only be visible on
the port pin if the data direction for the port pin is set as output. The PWM waveform is generated
by setting (or clearing) the OC0x Register at the Compare Match between OCR0x and
TCNT0, and clearing (or setting) the OC0x Register at the timer clock cycle the counter is
cleared (changes from TOP to BOTTOM).
The PWM frequency for the output can be calculated by the following equation:
The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024).
The extreme values for the OCR0A Register represents special cases when generating a PWM
waveform output in the fast PWM mode. If the OCR0A is set equal to BOTTOM, the output will
be a narrow spike for each MAX+1 timer clock cycle. Setting the OCR0A equal to MAX will result
in a constantly high or low output (depending on the polarity of the output set by the COM0A1:0
bits.)
A frequency (with 50% duty cycle) waveform output in fast PWM mode can be achieved by setting
OC0x to toggle its logical level on each Compare Match (COM0x1:0 = 1). The waveform
generated will have a maximum frequency of fOC0 = fclk_I/O/2 when OCR0A is set to zero. This
TCNTn
OCRnx update and
TOVn Interrupt Flag Set
Period 1 2 3
OCnx
OCnx
(COMnx1:0 = 2)
(COMnx1:0 = 3)
OCRnx Interrupt Flag Set
4 5 6 7
f
OCnxPWM
f
clk_I/O
N ⋅ 256 = ------------------106
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
feature is similar to the OC0A toggle in CTC mode, except the double buffer feature of the Output
Compare unit is enabled in the fast PWM mode.
14.6.4 Phase correct PWM mode
The phase correct PWM mode (WGM02:0 = 1 or 5) provides a high resolution phase correct
PWM waveform generation option. The phase correct PWM mode is based on a dual-slope
operation. The counter counts repeatedly from BOTTOM to TOP and then from TOP to BOTTOM.
TOP is defined as 0xFF when WGM2:0 = 1, and OCR0A when WGM2:0 = 5. In noninverting
Compare Output mode, the Output Compare (OC0x) is cleared on the Compare Match
between TCNT0 and OCR0x while up-counting, and set on the Compare Match while downcounting.
In inverting Output Compare mode, the operation is inverted. The dual-slope operation
has lower maximum operation frequency than single slope operation. However, due to the symmetric
feature of the dual-slope PWM modes, these modes are preferred for motor control
applications.
In phase correct PWM mode the counter is incremented until the counter value matches TOP.
When the counter reaches TOP, it changes the count direction. The TCNT0 value will be equal
to TOP for one timer clock cycle. The timing diagram for the phase correct PWM mode is shown
on Figure 14-7. The TCNT0 value is in the timing diagram shown as a histogram for illustrating
the dual-slope operation. The diagram includes non-inverted and inverted PWM outputs. The
small horizontal line marks on the TCNT0 slopes represent Compare Matches between OCR0x
and TCNT0.
Figure 14-7. Phase correct PWM mode, timing diagram.
The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV0) is set each time the counter reaches BOTTOM. The
Interrupt Flag can be used to generate an interrupt each time the counter reaches the BOTTOM
value.
In phase correct PWM mode, the compare unit allows generation of PWM waveforms on the
OC0x pins. Setting the COM0x1:0 bits to two will produce a non-inverted PWM. An inverted
PWM output can be generated by setting the COM0x1:0 to three: Setting the COM0A0 bits to
TOVn Interrupt Flag Set
OCnx Interrupt Flag Set
1 2 3
TCNTn
Period
OCnx
OCnx
(COMnx1:0 = 2)
(COMnx1:0 = 3)
OCRnx update107
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
one allows the OC0A pin to toggle on Compare Matches if the WGM02 bit is set. This option is
not available for the OC0B pin (see Table 14-3 on page 109). The actual OC0x value will only be
visible on the port pin if the data direction for the port pin is set as output. The PWM waveform is
generated by clearing (or setting) the OC0x Register at the Compare Match between OCR0x
and TCNT0 when the counter increments, and setting (or clearing) the OC0x Register at Compare
Match between OCR0x and TCNT0 when the counter decrements. The PWM frequency for
the output when using phase correct PWM can be calculated by the following equation:
The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024).
The extreme values for the OCR0A Register represent special cases when generating a PWM
waveform output in the phase correct PWM mode. If the OCR0A is set equal to BOTTOM, the
output will be continuously low and if set equal to MAX the output will be continuously high for
non-inverted PWM mode. For inverted PWM the output will have the opposite logic values.
At the very start of period 2 in Figure 14-7 on page 106 OCnx has a transition from high to low
even though there is no Compare Match. The point of this transition is to guarantee symmetry
around BOTTOM. There are two cases that give a transition without Compare Match.
• OCR0A changes its value from MAX, like in Figure 14-7 on page 106. When the OCR0A
value is MAX the OCn pin value is the same as the result of a down-counting Compare
Match. To ensure symmetry around BOTTOM the OCn value at MAX must correspond to the
result of an up-counting Compare Match
• The timer starts counting from a value higher than the one in OCR0A, and for that reason
misses the Compare Match and hence the OCn change that would have happened on the
way up
14.7 Timer/Counter timing diagrams
The Timer/Counter is a synchronous design and the timer clock (clkT0) is therefore shown as a
clock enable signal in the following figures. The figures include information on when Interrupt
Flags are set. Figure 14-8 contains timing data for basic Timer/Counter operation. The figure
shows the count sequence close to the MAX value in all modes other than phase correct PWM
mode.
Figure 14-8. Timer/Counter timing diagram, no prescaling.
Figure 14-9 on page 108 shows the same timing data, but with the prescaler enabled.
f
OCnxPCPWM
f
clk_I/O
N ⋅ 510 = ------------------
clkTn
(clkI/O/1)
TOVn
clkI/O
TCNTn MAX - 1 MAX BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1108
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 14-9. Timer/Counter timing diagram, with prescaler (fclk_I/O/8).
Figure 14-10 shows the setting of OCF0B in all modes and OCF0A in all modes except CTC
mode and PWM mode, where OCR0A is TOP.
Figure 14-10. Timer/Counter timing diagram, setting of OCF0x, with prescaler (fclk_I/O/8).
Figure 14-11 shows the setting of OCF0A and the clearing of TCNT0 in CTC mode and fast
PWM mode where OCR0A is TOP.
Figure 14-11. Timer/Counter timing diagram, clear timer on Compare Match mode, with prescaler
(fclk_I/O/8)
14.8 8-bit Timer/Counter register description
14.8.1 TCCR0A – Timer/Counter Control Register A
TOVn
TCNTn MAX - 1 MAX BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1
clkI/O
clkTn
(clkI/O/8)
OCFnx
OCRnx
TCNTn
OCRnx Value
OCRnx - 1 OCRnx OCRnx + 1 OCRnx + 2
clkI/O
clkTn
(clkI/O/8)
OCFnx
OCRnx
TCNTn
(CTC)
TOP
TOP - 1 TOP BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1
clkI/O
clkTn
(clkI/O/8)
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
COM0A1 COM0A0 COM0B1 COM0B0 – – WGM01 WGM00 TCCR0A
Read/write R/W R/W R/W R/W R R R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0109
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
• Bits 7:6 – COM01A:0: Compare Match Output A Mode
These bits control the Output Compare pin (OC0A) behavior. If one or both of the COM0A1:0
bits are set, the OC0A output overrides the normal port functionality of the I/O pin it is connected
to. However, note that the Data Direction Register (DDR) bit corresponding to the OC0A pin
must be set in order to enable the output driver.
When OC0A is connected to the pin, the function of the COM0A1:0 bits depends on the
WGM02:0 bit setting. Table 14-1 shows the COM0A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM02:0 bits
are set to a normal or CTC mode (non-PWM).
Table 14-2 shows the COM0A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM01:0 bits are set to fast PWM
mode.
Note: 1. A special case occurs when OCR0A equals TOP and COM0A1 is set. In this case, the Compare
Match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See “Fast PWM mode” on page 104
for more details.
Table 14-3 shows the COM0A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM02:0 bits are set to phase correct
PWM mode.
Note: 1. A special case occurs when OCR0A equals TOP and COM0A1 is set. In this case, the Compare
Match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See “Phase correct PWM mode” on
page 106 for more details.
Table 14-1. Compare Output mode, non-PWM mode.
COM0A1 COM0A0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC0A disconnected.
0 1 Toggle OC0A on Compare Match
1 0 Clear OC0A on Compare Match
1 1 Set OC0A on Compare Match
Table 14-2. Compare Output mode, Fast PWM mode (1).
COM0A1 COM0A0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC0A disconnected.
0 1 WGM02 = 0: Normal Port Operation, OC0A Disconnected.
WGM02 = 1: Toggle OC0A on Compare Match.
1 0 Clear OC0A on Compare Match, set OC0A at TOP
1 1 Set OC0A on Compare Match, clear OC0A at TOP
Table 14-3. Compare Output mode, phase correct PWM mode (1).
COM0A1 COM0A0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC0A disconnected.
0 1 WGM02 = 0: Normal Port Operation, OC0A Disconnected.
WGM02 = 1: Toggle OC0A on Compare Match.
1 0 Clear OC0A on Compare Match when up-counting. Set OC0A on Compare
Match when down-counting.
1 1 Set OC0A on Compare Match when up-counting. Clear OC0A on Compare
Match when down-counting.110
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
• Bits 5:4 – COM0B1:0: Compare Match Output B mode
These bits control the Output Compare pin (OC0B) behavior. If one or both of the COM0B1:0
bits are set, the OC0B output overrides the normal port functionality of the I/O pin it is connected
to. However, note that the Data Direction Register (DDR) bit corresponding to the OC0B pin
must be set in order to enable the output driver.
When OC0B is connected to the pin, the function of the COM0B1:0 bits depends on the
WGM02:0 bit setting. Table 14-1 shows the COM0A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM02:0 bits
are set to a normal or CTC mode (non-PWM).
Table 14-2 shows the COM0B1:0 bit functionality when the WGM02:0 bits are set to fast PWM
mode.
Note: 1. A special case occurs when OCR0B equals TOP and COM0B1 is set. In this case, the Compare
Match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See “Fast PWM mode” on page 104
for more details.
Table 14-3 shows the COM0B1:0 bit functionality when the WGM02:0 bits are set to phase correct
PWM mode.
Note: 1. A special case occurs when OCR0B equals TOP and COM0B1 is set. In this case, the Compare
Match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See “Phase correct PWM mode” on
page 106 for more details.
• Bits 3, 2 – Res: Reserved bits
These bits are reserved bits in the Atmel AT90USB64/128 and will always read as zero.
Table 14-4. Compare Output mode, non-PWM mode.
COM01 COM00 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC0B disconnected.
0 1 Toggle OC0B on Compare Match
1 0 Clear OC0B on Compare Match
1 1 Set OC0B on Compare Match
Table 14-5. Compare Output mode, fast PWM mode (1).
COM01 COM00 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC0B disconnected.
0 1 Reserved.
1 0 Clear OC0B on Compare Match, set OC0B at TOP.
1 1 Set OC0B on Compare Match, clear OC0B at TOP.
Table 14-6. Compare Output mode, phase correct PWM mode (1).
COM0A1 COM0A0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC0B disconnected.
0 1 Reserved.
1 0 Clear OC0B on Compare Match when up-counting. Set OC0B on Compare
Match when down-counting.
1 1 Set OC0B on Compare Match when up-counting. Clear OC0B on Compare
Match when down-counting.111
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
• Bits 1:0 – WGM01:0: Waveform Generation Mode
Combined with the WGM02 bit found in the TCCR0B Register, these bits control the counting
sequence of the counter, the source for maximum (TOP) counter value, and what type of waveform
generation to be used, see Table 14-7. Modes of operation supported by the Timer/Counter
unit are: Normal mode (counter), Clear Timer on Compare Match (CTC) mode, and two types of
Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) modes (see “Modes of operation” on page 103).
Notes: 1. MAX = 0xFF
2. BOTTOM = 0x00
14.8.2 TCCR0B – Timer/Counter Control Register B
• Bit 7 – FOC0A: Force Output Compare A
The FOC0A bit is only active when the WGM bits specify a non-PWM mode.
However, for ensuring compatibility with future devices, this bit must be set to zero when
TCCR0B is written when operating in PWM mode. When writing a logical one to the FOC0A bit,
an immediate Compare Match is forced on the Waveform Generation unit. The OC0A output is
changed according to its COM0A1:0 bits setting. Note that the FOC0A bit is implemented as a
strobe. Therefore it is the value present in the COM0A1:0 bits that determines the effect of the
forced compare.
A FOC0A strobe will not generate any interrupt, nor will it clear the timer in CTC mode using
OCR0A as TOP.
The FOC0A bit is always read as zero.
• Bit 6 – FOC0B: Force Output Compare B
The FOC0B bit is only active when the WGM bits specify a non-PWM mode.
However, for ensuring compatibility with future devices, this bit must be set to zero when
TCCR0B is written when operating in PWM mode. When writing a logical one to the FOC0B bit,
an immediate Compare Match is forced on the Waveform Generation unit. The OC0B output is
changed according to its COM0B1:0 bits setting. Note that the FOC0B bit is implemented as a
Table 14-7. Waveform Generation Mode bit description.
Mode WGM2 WGM1 WGM0
Timer/Counter mode of
operation TOP
Update of
OCRx at
TOV flag
set on (1)(2)
0 0 0 0 Normal 0xFF Immediate MAX
1 0 0 1 PWM, phase correct 0xFF TOP BOTTOM
2 0 1 0 CTC OCRA Immediate MAX
3 0 1 1 Fast PWM 0xFF TOP MAX
4 1 0 0 Reserved – – –
5 1 0 1 PWM, phase correct OCRA TOP BOTTOM
6 1 1 0 Reserved – – –
7 1 1 1 Fast PWM OCRA TOP TOP
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
FOC0A FOC0B – – WGM02 CS02 CS01 CS00 TCCR0B
Read/write W W R R R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0112
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
strobe. Therefore it is the value present in the COM0B1:0 bits that determines the effect of the
forced compare.
A FOC0B strobe will not generate any interrupt, nor will it clear the timer in CTC mode using
OCR0B as TOP.
The FOC0B bit is always read as zero.
• Bits 5:4 – Res: Reserved bits
These bits are reserved bits and will always read as zero.
• Bit 3 – WGM02: Waveform Generation Mode
See the description in the “TCCR0A – Timer/Counter Control Register A” on page 108.
• Bits 2:0 – CS02:0: Clock Select
The three Clock Select bits select the clock source to be used by the Timer/Counter.
If external pin modes are used for the Timer/Counter0, transitions on the T0 pin will clock the
counter even if the pin is configured as an output. This feature allows software control of the
counting.
14.8.3 TCNT0 – Timer/Counter Register
The Timer/Counter Register gives direct access, both for read and write operations, to the
Timer/Counter unit 8-bit counter. Writing to the TCNT0 Register blocks (removes) the Compare
Match on the following timer clock. Modifying the counter (TCNT0) while the counter is running,
introduces a risk of missing a Compare Match between TCNT0 and the OCR0x Registers.
14.8.4 OCR0A – Output Compare Register A
Table 14-8. Clock Select bit description.
CS02 CS01 CS00 Description
0 0 0 No clock source (Timer/Counter stopped)
0 0 1 clkI/O/(No prescaling)
0 1 0 clkI/O/8 (From prescaler)
0 1 1 clkI/O/64 (From prescaler)
1 0 0 clkI/O/256 (From prescaler)
1 0 1 clkI/O/1024 (From prescaler)
1 1 0 External clock source on T0 pin. Clock on falling edge.
1 1 1 External clock source on T0 pin. Clock on rising edge.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TCNT0[7:0] TCNT0
Read/write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
OCR0A[7:0] OCR0A
Read/write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0113
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
The Output Compare Register A contains an 8-bit value that is continuously compared with the
counter value (TCNT0). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare interrupt, or to
generate a waveform output on the OC0A pin.
14.8.5 OCR0B – Output Compare Register B
The Output Compare Register B contains an 8-bit value that is continuously compared with the
counter value (TCNT0). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare interrupt, or to
generate a waveform output on the OC0B pin.
14.8.6 TIMSK0 – Timer/Counter Interrupt Mask Register
• Bits 7..3, 0 – Res: Reserved bits
These bits are reserved bits and will always read as zero.
• Bit 2 – OCIE0B: Timer/Counter Output Compare Match B Interrupt Enable
When the OCIE0B bit is written to one, and the I-bit in the Status Register is set, the
Timer/Counter Compare Match B interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed if
a Compare Match in Timer/Counter occurs, that is, when the OCF0B bit is set in the
Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register – TIFR0.
• Bit 1 – OCIE0A: Timer/Counter0 Output Compare Match A Interrupt Enable
When the OCIE0A bit is written to one, and the I-bit in the Status Register is set, the
Timer/Counter0 Compare Match A interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed
if a Compare Match in Timer/Counter0 occurs, that is, when the OCF0A bit is set in the
Timer/Counter 0 Interrupt Flag Register – TIFR0.
• Bit 0 – TOIE0: Timer/Counter0 Overflow Interrupt Enable
When the TOIE0 bit is written to one, and the I-bit in the Status Register is set, the
Timer/Counter0 Overflow interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed if an
overflow in Timer/Counter0 occurs, that is, when the TOV0 bit is set in the Timer/Counter 0 Interrupt
Flag Register – TIFR0.
14.8.7 TIFR0 – Timer/Counter 0 Interrupt Flag Register
• Bits 7..3, 0 – Res: Reserved bits
These bits are reserved bits in the Atmel AT90USB64/128 and will always read as zero.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
OCR0B[7:0] OCR0B
Read/write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
– – – – – OCIE0B OCIE0A TOIE0 TIMSK0
Read/write R R R R R R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
– – – – – OCF0B OCF0A TOV0 TIFR0
Read/write R R R R R R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0114
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
• Bit 2 – OCF0B: Timer/Counter 0 Output Compare B Match Flag
The OCF0B bit is set when a Compare Match occurs between the Timer/Counter and the data in
OCR0B – Output Compare Register0 B. OCF0B is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding
interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, OCF0B is cleared by writing a logic one to
the flag. When the I-bit in SREG, OCIE0B (Timer/Counter Compare B Match Interrupt Enable),
and OCF0B are set, the Timer/Counter Compare Match Interrupt is executed.
• Bit 1 – OCF0A: Timer/Counter 0 Output Compare A Match Flag
The OCF0A bit is set when a Compare Match occurs between the Timer/Counter0 and the data
in OCR0A – Output Compare Register0. OCF0A is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding
interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, OCF0A is cleared by writing a logic one to
the flag. When the I-bit in SREG, OCIE0A (Timer/Counter0 Compare Match Interrupt Enable),
and OCF0A are set, the Timer/Counter0 Compare Match Interrupt is executed.
• Bit 0 – TOV0: Timer/Counter0 Overflow Flag
The bit TOV0 is set when an overflow occurs in Timer/Counter0. TOV0 is cleared by hardware
when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, TOV0 is cleared by
writing a logic one to the flag. When the SREG I-bit, TOIE0 (Timer/Counter0 Overflow Interrupt
Enable), and TOV0 are set, the Timer/Counter0 Overflow interrupt is executed.
The setting of this flag is dependent of the WGM02:0 bit setting. Refer to Table 14-7, “Waveform
Generation Mode bit description.” on page 111.115
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
15. 16-bit Timer/Counter (Timer/Counter1 and Timer/Counter3)
The 16-bit Timer/Counter unit allows accurate program execution timing (event management),
wave generation, and signal timing measurement. The main features are:
• True 16-bit design (that is, allows 16-bit PWM)
• Three independent output compare units
• Double buffered output compare registers
• One input capture unit
• Input capture noise canceler
• Clear timer on compare match (auto reload)
• Glitch-free, phase correct pulse width modulator (PWM)
• Variable PWM period
• Frequency generator
• External event counter
• Ten independent interrupt sources (TOV1, OCF1A, OCF1B, OCF1C, ICF1, TOV3, OCF3A, OCF3B,
OCF3C, and ICF3)
15.1 Overview
Most register and bit references in this section are written in general form. A lower case “n”
replaces the Timer/Counter number, and a lower case “x” replaces the Output Compare unit
channel. However, when using the register or bit defines in a program, the precise form must be
used, that is, TCNT1 for accessing Timer/Counter1 counter value and so on.
A simplified block diagram of the 16-bit Timer/Counter is shown in Figure 15-1 on page 116. For
the actual placement of I/O pins, see “Pinout Atmel AT90USB64/128-TQFP.” on page 3. CPU
accessible I/O Registers, including I/O bits and I/O pins, are shown in bold. The device-specific
I/O Register and bit locations are listed in the “16-bit Timer/Counter (Timer/Counter1 and
Timer/Counter3)” on page 115.
The Power Reduction Timer/Counter1 bit, PRTIM1, in “PRR0 – Power Reduction Register 0” on
page 54 must be written to zero to enable Timer/Counter1 module.
The Power Reduction Timer/Counter3 bit, PRTIM3, in “PRR1 – Power Reduction Register 1” on
page 55 must be written to zero to enable Timer/Counter3 module.116
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 15-1. 16-bit Timer/Counter block diagram (1).
Note: 1. Refer to Figure 1-1 on page 3, Table 11-6 on page 79, and Table 11-9 on page 82 for
Timer/Counter1 and 3 and 3 pin placement and description.
15.1.1 Registers
The Timer/Counter (TCNTn), Output Compare Registers (OCRnA/B/C), and Input Capture Register
(ICRn) are all 16-bit registers. Special procedures must be followed when accessing the 16-
bit registers. These procedures are described in the section “Accessing 16-bit registers” on page
117. The Timer/Counter Control Registers (TCCRnA/B/C) are 8-bit registers and have no CPU
access restrictions. Interrupt requests (shorten as Int.Req.) signals are all visible in the Timer
Interrupt Flag Register (TIFRn). All interrupts are individually masked with the Timer Interrupt
Mask Register (TIMSKn). TIFRn and TIMSKn are not shown in the figure since these registers
are shared by other timer units.
The Timer/Counter can be clocked internally, via the prescaler, or by an external clock source on
the Tn pin. The Clock Select logic block controls which clock source and edge the Timer/Counter
uses to increment (or decrement) its value. The Timer/Counter is inactive when no clock source
is selected. The output from the clock select logic is referred to as the timer clock (clkTn).
The double buffered Output Compare Registers (OCRnA/B/C) are compared with the
Timer/Counter value at all time. The result of the compare can be used by the Waveform Generator
to generate a PWM or variable frequency output on the Output Compare pin (OCnA/B/C).
ICFn (Int.Req.)
TOVn
(int.req.)
Clock select
Timer/Counter
DATABUS
ICRn
=
=
=
TCNTn
Waveform
generation
Waveform
generation
Waveform
generation
OCnA
OCnB
OCnC
Noise
canceler
ICPn
=
Fixed
TOP
values
Edge
detector
Control logic
= 0
TOP BOTTOM
Count
Clear
Direction
OCFnA
(Int.Req.)
OCFnB
(Int.Req.)
OCFnC
(Int.Req.)
TCCRnA TCCRnB TCCRnC
( From Analog
Comparator Ouput )
Tn Edge
detector
(From prescaler)
TCLK
OCRnC
OCRnB
OCRnA117
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
See “Output Compare units” on page 124.. The compare match event will also set the Compare
Match Flag (OCFnA/B/C) which can be used to generate an Output Compare interrupt request.
The Input Capture Register can capture the Timer/Counter value at a given external (edge triggered)
event on either the Input Capture pin (ICPn) or on the Analog Comparator pins (see
“Analog Comparator” on page 304) The Input Capture unit includes a digital filtering unit (Noise
Canceler) for reducing the chance of capturing noise spikes.
The TOP value, or maximum Timer/Counter value, can in some modes of operation be defined
by either the OCRnA Register, the ICRn Register, or by a set of fixed values. When using
OCRnA as TOP value in a PWM mode, the OCRnA Register can not be used for generating a
PWM output. However, the TOP value will in this case be double buffered allowing the TOP
value to be changed in run time. If a fixed TOP value is required, the ICRn Register can be used
as an alternative, freeing the OCRnA to be used as PWM output.
15.1.2 Definitions
The following definitions are used extensively throughout the document:
15.2 Accessing 16-bit registers
The TCNTn, OCRnA/B/C, and ICRn are 16-bit registers that can be accessed by the AVR CPU
via the 8-bit data bus. The 16-bit register must be byte accessed using two read or write operations.
Each 16-bit timer has a single 8-bit register for temporary storing of the high byte of the 16-
bit access. The same Temporary Register is shared between all 16-bit registers within each 16-
bit timer. Accessing the low byte triggers the 16-bit read or write operation. When the low byte of
a 16-bit register is written by the CPU, the high byte stored in the Temporary Register, and the
low byte written are both copied into the 16-bit register in the same clock cycle. When the low
byte of a 16-bit register is read by the CPU, the high byte of the 16-bit register is copied into the
Temporary Register in the same clock cycle as the low byte is read.
Not all 16-bit accesses uses the Temporary Register for the high byte. Reading the OCRnA/B/C
16-bit registers does not involve using the Temporary Register.
To do a 16-bit write, the high byte must be written before the low byte. For a 16-bit read, the low
byte must be read before the high byte.
The following code examples show how to access the 16-bit timer registers assuming that no
interrupts updates the temporary register. The same principle can be used directly for accessing
the OCRnA/B/C and ICRn Registers. Note that when using “C”, the compiler handles the 16-bit
access.
BOTTOM The counter reaches the BOTTOM when it becomes 0x0000.
MAX The counter reaches its MAXimum when it becomes 0xFFFF (decimal 65535).
TOP
The counter reaches the TOP when it becomes equal to the highest value in the
count sequence. The TOP value can be assigned to be one of the fixed values:
0x00FF, 0x01FF, or 0x03FF, or to the value stored in the OCRnA or ICRn
Register. The assignment is dependent of the mode of operation.118
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Note: 1. See “About code examples” on page 10.
The assembly code example returns the TCNTn value in the r17:r16 register pair.
It is important to notice that accessing 16-bit registers are atomic operations. If an interrupt
occurs between the two instructions accessing the 16-bit register, and the interrupt code
updates the temporary register by accessing the same or any other of the 16-bit Timer Registers,
then the result of the access outside the interrupt will be corrupted. Therefore, when both
the main code and the interrupt code update the temporary register, the main code must disable
the interrupts during the 16-bit access.
Assembly code examples (1)
...
; Set TCNTn to 0x01FF
ldi r17,0x01
ldi r16,0xFF
out TCNTnH,r17
out TCNTnL,r16
; Read TCNTn into r17:r16
in r16,TCNTnL
in r17,TCNTnH
...
C code examples (1)
unsigned int i;
...
/* Set TCNTn to 0x01FF */
TCNTn = 0x1FF;
/* Read TCNTn into i */
i = TCNTn;
...119
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
The following code examples show how to do an atomic read of the TCNTn Register contents.
Reading any of the OCRnA/B/C or ICRn Registers can be done by using the same principle.
Note: 1. See “About code examples” on page 10.
The assembly code example returns the TCNTn value in the r17:r16 register pair.
Assembly code example (1)
TIM16_ReadTCNTn:
; Save global interrupt flag
in r18,SREG
; Disable interrupts
cli
; Read TCNTn into r17:r16
in r16,TCNTnL
in r17,TCNTnH
; Restore global interrupt flag
out SREG,r18
ret
C code example (1)
unsigned int TIM16_ReadTCNTn( void )
{
unsigned char sreg;
unsigned int i;
/* Save global interrupt flag */
sreg = SREG;
/* Disable interrupts */
__disable_interrupt();
/* Read TCNTn into i */
i = TCNTn;
/* Restore global interrupt flag */
SREG = sreg;
return i;
}120
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
The following code examples show how to do an atomic write of the TCNTn Register contents.
Writing any of the OCRnA/B/C or ICRn Registers can be done by using the same principle.
Note: 1. See “About code examples” on page 10.
The assembly code example requires that the r17:r16 register pair contains the value to be written
to TCNTn.
15.2.1 Reusing the Temporary High Byte register
If writing to more than one 16-bit register where the high byte is the same for all registers written,
then the high byte only needs to be written once. However, note that the same rule of atomic
operation described previously also applies in this case.
15.3 Timer/Counter clock sources
The Timer/Counter can be clocked by an internal or an external clock source. The clock source
is selected by the Clock Select logic which is controlled by the Clock Select (CSn2:0) bits
located in the Timer/Counter control Register B (TCCRnB). For details on clock sources and
prescaler, see Section “Timer/Counter0, Timer/Counter1, and Timer/Counter3 prescalers” on
page 96.
Assembly code example (1)
TIM16_WriteTCNTn:
; Save global interrupt flag
in r18,SREG
; Disable interrupts
cli
; Set TCNTn to r17:r16
out TCNTnH,r17
out TCNTnL,r16
; Restore global interrupt flag
out SREG,r18
ret
C code example (1)
void TIM16_WriteTCNTn( unsigned int i )
{
unsigned char sreg;
unsigned int i;
/* Save global interrupt flag */
sreg = SREG;
/* Disable interrupts */
__disable_interrupt();
/* Set TCNTn to i */
TCNTn = i;
/* Restore global interrupt flag */
SREG = sreg;
}121
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
15.4 Counter unit
The main part of the 16-bit Timer/Counter is the programmable 16-bit bi-directional counter unit.
Figure 15-2 shows a block diagram of the counter and its surroundings.
Figure 15-2. Counter unit block diagram.
Signal description (internal signals):
Count Increment or decrement TCNTn by 1.
Direction Select between increment and decrement.
Clear Clear TCNTn (set all bits to zero).
clkTn Timer/Counter clock.
TOP Signalize that TCNTn has reached maximum value.
BOTTOM Signalize that TCNTn has reached minimum value (zero).
The 16-bit counter is mapped into two 8-bit I/O memory locations: Counter High (TCNTnH) containing
the upper eight bits of the counter, and Counter Low (TCNTnL) containing the lower eight
bits. The TCNTnH Register can only be indirectly accessed by the CPU. When the CPU does an
access to the TCNTnH I/O location, the CPU accesses the high byte temporary register (TEMP).
The temporary register is updated with the TCNTnH value when the TCNTnL is read, and
TCNTnH is updated with the temporary register value when TCNTnL is written. This allows the
CPU to read or write the entire 16-bit counter value within one clock cycle via the 8-bit data bus.
It is important to notice that there are special cases of writing to the TCNTn Register when the
counter is counting that will give unpredictable results. The special cases are described in the
sections where they are of importance.
Depending on the mode of operation used, the counter is cleared, incremented, or decremented
at each timer clock (clkTn). The clkTn can be generated from an external or internal clock source,
selected by the Clock Select bits (CSn2:0). When no clock source is selected (CSn2:0 = 0) the
timer is stopped. However, the TCNTn value can be accessed by the CPU, independent of
whether clkTn is present or not. A CPU write overrides (has priority over) all counter clear or
count operations.
The counting sequence is determined by the setting of the Waveform Generation mode bits
(WGMn3:0) located in the Timer/Counter Control Registers A and B (TCCRnA and TCCRnB).
There are close connections between how the counter behaves (counts) and how waveforms
are generated on the Output Compare outputs OCnx. For more details about advanced counting
sequences and waveform generation, see Section “Modes of operation” on page 127.
TEMP (8-bit)
DATA BUS (8-bit)
TCNTn (16-bit counter)
TCNTnH (8-bit) TCNTnL (8-bit) Control logic
Count
Clear
Direction
TOVn
(Int.Req.)
Clock select
TOP BOTTOM
Tn Edge
detector
(From prescaler)
clkTn122
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOVn) is set according to the mode of operation selected by
the WGMn3:0 bits. TOVn can be used for generating a CPU interrupt.
15.5 Input Capture unit
The Timer/Counter incorporates an Input Capture unit that can capture external events and give
them a time-stamp indicating time of occurrence. The external signal indicating an event, or multiple
events, can be applied via the ICPn pin or alternatively, for the Timer/Counter1 only, via the
Analog Comparator unit. The time-stamps can then be used to calculate frequency, duty-cycle,
and other features of the signal applied. Alternatively the time-stamps can be used for creating a
log of the events.
The Input Capture unit is illustrated by the block diagram shown in Figure 15-3. The elements of
the block diagram that are not directly a part of the input capture unit are gray shaded. The small
“n” in register and bit names indicates the Timer/Counter number.
Figure 15-3. Input Capture Unit block diagram.
Note: The Analog Comparator Output (ACO) can only trigger the Timer/Counter1 ICP – not
Timer/Counter3, 4, or 5.
When a change of the logic level (an event) occurs on the Input Capture Pin (ICPn), alternatively
on the analog Comparator output (ACO), and this change confirms to the setting of the edge
detector, a capture will be triggered. When a capture is triggered, the 16-bit value of the counter
(TCNTn) is written to the Input Capture Register (ICRn). The Input Capture Flag (ICFn) is set at
the same system clock as the TCNTn value is copied into ICRn Register. If enabled (TICIEn =
1), the input capture flag generates an input capture interrupt. The ICFn flag is automatically
cleared when the interrupt is executed. Alternatively the ICFn flag can be cleared by software by
writing a logical one to its I/O bit location.
ICFn (int.req.)
Analog
comparator
WRITE ICRn (16-bit register)
ICRnH (8-bit)
Noise
canceler
ICPn
Edge
detector
TEMP (8-bit)
DATA BUS (8-bit)
ICRnL (8-bit)
TCNTn (16-bit counter)
TCNTnH (8-bit) TCNTnL (8-bit)
ACO* ACIC* ICNC ICES123
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Reading the 16-bit value in the Input Capture Register (ICRn) is done by first reading the low
byte (ICRnL) and then the high byte (ICRnH). When the low byte is read the high byte is copied
into the high byte Temporary Register (TEMP). When the CPU reads the ICRnH I/O location it
will access the TEMP Register.
The ICRn Register can only be written when using a Waveform Generation mode that utilizes
the ICRn Register for defining the counter’s TOP value. In these cases the Waveform Generation
mode (WGMn3:0) bits must be set before the TOP value can be written to the ICRn
Register. When writing the ICRn Register the high byte must be written to the ICRnH I/O location
before the low byte is written to ICRnL.
For more information on how to access the 16-bit registers refer to Section “Accessing 16-bit
registers” on page 117.
15.5.1 Input Capture Trigger Source
The main trigger source for the input capture unit is the Input Capture Pin (ICPn).
Timer/Counter1 can alternatively use the analog comparator output as trigger source for the
input capture unit. The Analog Comparator is selected as trigger source by setting the analog
Comparator Input Capture (ACIC) bit in the Analog Comparator Control and Status Register
(ACSR). Be aware that changing trigger source can trigger a capture. The input capture flag
must therefore be cleared after the change.
Both the Input Capture Pin (ICPn) and the Analog Comparator output (ACO) inputs are sampled
using the same technique as for the Tn pin (Figure 13-1 on page 96). The edge detector is also
identical. However, when the noise canceler is enabled, additional logic is inserted before the
edge detector, which increases the delay by four system clock cycles. Note that the input of the
noise canceler and edge detector is always enabled unless the Timer/Counter is set in a Waveform
Generation mode that uses ICRn to define TOP.
An input capture can be triggered by software by controlling the port of the ICPn pin.
15.5.2 Noise Canceler
The Noise Canceler improves noise immunity by using a simple digital filtering scheme. The
noise canceler input is monitored over four samples, and all four must be equal for changing the
output that in turn is used by the edge detector.
The noise canceler is enabled by setting the Input Capture Noise Canceler (ICNCn) bit in
Timer/Counter Control Register B (TCCRnB). When enabled the noise canceler introduces additional
four system clock cycles of delay from a change applied to the input, to the update of the
ICRn Register. The noise canceler uses the system clock and is therefore not affected by the
prescaler.
15.5.3 Using the Input Capture unit
The main challenge when using the Input Capture unit is to assign enough processor capacity
for handling the incoming events. The time between two events is critical. If the processor has
not read the captured value in the ICRn Register before the next event occurs, the ICRn will be
overwritten with a new value. In this case the result of the capture will be incorrect.
When using the Input Capture interrupt, the ICRn Register should be read as early in the interrupt
handler routine as possible. Even though the Input Capture interrupt has relatively high
priority, the maximum interrupt response time is dependent on the maximum number of clock
cycles it takes to handle any of the other interrupt requests.124
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Using the Input Capture unit in any mode of operation when the TOP value (resolution) is
actively changed during operation, is not recommended.
Measurement of an external signal’s duty cycle requires that the trigger edge is changed after
each capture. Changing the edge sensing must be done as early as possible after the ICRn
Register has been read. After a change of the edge, the Input Capture Flag (ICFn) must be
cleared by software (writing a logical one to the I/O bit location). For measuring frequency only,
the clearing of the ICFn Flag is not required (if an interrupt handler is used).
15.6 Output Compare units
The 16-bit comparator continuously compares TCNTn with the Output Compare Register
(OCRnx). If TCNT equals OCRnx the comparator signals a match. A match will set the Output
Compare Flag (OCFnx) at the next timer clock cycle. If enabled (OCIEnx = 1), the Output Compare
Flag generates an Output Compare interrupt. The OCFnx Flag is automatically cleared
when the interrupt is executed. Alternatively the OCFnx Flag can be cleared by software by writing
a logical one to its I/O bit location. The Waveform Generator uses the match signal to
generate an output according to operating mode set by the Waveform Generation mode
(WGMn3:0) bits and Compare Output mode (COMnx1:0) bits. The TOP and BOTTOM signals
are used by the Waveform Generator for handling the special cases of the extreme values in
some modes of operation (see “Modes of operation” on page 127)
A special feature of Output Compare unit A allows it to define the Timer/Counter TOP value (that
is, counter resolution). In addition to the counter resolution, the TOP value defines the period
time for waveforms generated by the Waveform Generator.
Figure 15-4 shows a block diagram of the Output Compare unit. The small “n” in the register and
bit names indicates the device number (n = n for Timer/Counter n), and the “x” indicates Output
Compare unit (A/B/C). The elements of the block diagram that are not directly a part of the Output
Compare unit are gray shaded.
Figure 15-4. Output Compare Unit, block diagram.
OCFnx (int.req.)
= (16-bit comparator )
OCRnx buffer (16-bit register)
OCRnxH buf. (8-bit)
OCnx
TEMP (8-bit)
DATA BUS (8-bit)
OCRnxL buf. (8-bit)
TCNTn (16-bit counter)
TCNTnH (8-bit) TCNTnL (8-bit)
WGMn3:0 COMnx1:0
OCRnx (16-bit register)
OCRnxH (8-bit) OCRnxL (8-bit)
Waveform generator
TOP
BOTTOM125
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
The OCRnx Register is double buffered when using any of the twelve Pulse Width Modulation
(PWM) modes. For the Normal and Clear Timer on Compare (CTC) modes of operation, the
double buffering is disabled. The double buffering synchronizes the update of the OCRnx Compare
Register to either TOP or BOTTOM of the counting sequence. The synchronization
prevents the occurrence of odd-length, non-symmetrical PWM pulses, thereby making the output
glitch-free.
The OCRnx Register access may seem complex, but this is not case. When the double buffering
is enabled, the CPU has access to the OCRnx Buffer Register, and if double buffering is disabled
the CPU will access the OCRnx directly. The content of the OCR1x (Buffer or Compare)
Register is only changed by a write operation (the Timer/Counter does not update this register
automatically as the TCNT1 and ICR1 Register). Therefore OCR1x is not read via the high byte
temporary register (TEMP). However, it is a good practice to read the low byte first as when
accessing other 16-bit registers. Writing the OCRnx Registers must be done via the TEMP Register
since the compare of all 16 bits is done continuously. The high byte (OCRnxH) has to be
written first. When the high byte I/O location is written by the CPU, the TEMP Register will be
updated by the value written. Then when the low byte (OCRnxL) is written to the lower eight bits,
the high byte will be copied into the upper 8-bits of either the OCRnx buffer or OCRnx Compare
Register in the same system clock cycle.
For more information of how to access the 16-bit registers refer to Section “Accessing 16-bit registers”
on page 117.
15.6.1 Force Output Compare
In non-PWM Waveform Generation modes, the match output of the comparator can be forced by
writing a one to the Force Output Compare (FOCnx) bit. Forcing compare match will not set the
OCFnx Flag or reload/clear the timer, but the OCnx pin will be updated as if a real compare
match had occurred (the COMn1:0 bits settings define whether the OCnx pin is set, cleared or
toggled).
15.6.2 Compare Match Blocking by TCNTn write
All CPU writes to the TCNTn Register will block any compare match that occurs in the next timer
clock cycle, even when the timer is stopped. This feature allows OCRnx to be initialized to the
same value as TCNTn without triggering an interrupt when the Timer/Counter clock is enabled.
15.6.3 Using the Output Compare unit
Since writing TCNTn in any mode of operation will block all compare matches for one timer clock
cycle, there are risks involved when changing TCNTn when using any of the Output Compare
channels, independent of whether the Timer/Counter is running or not. If the value written to
TCNTn equals the OCRnx value, the compare match will be missed, resulting in incorrect waveform
generation. Do not write the TCNTn equal to TOP in PWM modes with variable TOP
values. The compare match for the TOP will be ignored and the counter will continue to 0xFFFF.
Similarly, do not write the TCNTn value equal to BOTTOM when the counter is counting down.
The setup of the OCnx should be performed before setting the Data Direction Register for the
port pin to output. The easiest way of setting the OCnx value is to use the Force Output Compare
(FOCnx) strobe bits in Normal mode. The OCnx Register keeps its value even when
changing between Waveform Generation modes.
Be aware that the COMnx1:0 bits are not double buffered together with the compare value.
Changing the COMnx1:0 bits will take effect immediately.126
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
15.7 Compare Match Output unit
The Compare Output mode (COMnx1:0) bits have two functions. The Waveform Generator uses
the COMnx1:0 bits for defining the Output Compare (OCnx) state at the next compare match.
Secondly the COMnx1:0 bits control the OCnx pin output source. Figure 15-5 shows a simplified
schematic of the logic affected by the COMnx1:0 bit setting. The I/O Registers, I/O bits, and I/O
pins in the figure are shown in bold. Only the parts of the general I/O Port Control Registers
(DDR and PORT) that are affected by the COMnx1:0 bits are shown. When referring to the
OCnx state, the reference is for the internal OCnx Register, not the OCnx pin. If a system reset
occur, the OCnx Register is reset to “0”.
Figure 15-5. Compare Match Output unit, schematic.
The general I/O port function is overridden by the Output Compare (OCnx) from the Waveform
Generator if either of the COMnx1:0 bits are set. However, the OCnx pin direction (input or output)
is still controlled by the Data Direction Register (DDR) for the port pin. The Data Direction
Register bit for the OCnx pin (DDR_OCnx) must be set as output before the OCnx value is visible
on the pin. The port override function is generally independent of the Waveform Generation
mode, but there are some exceptions. Refer to Table 15-1 on page 137, Table 15-2 on page
137, and Table 15-3 on page 138 for details.
The design of the Output Compare pin logic allows initialization of the OCnx state before the output
is enabled. Note that some COMnx1:0 bit settings are reserved for certain modes of
operation. See “16-bit Timer/Counter (Timer/Counter1 and Timer/Counter3)” on page 115.
The COMnx1:0 bits have no effect on the Input Capture unit.
15.7.1 Compare Output mode and Waveform generation
The Waveform Generator uses the COMnx1:0 bits differently in normal, CTC, and PWM modes.
For all modes, setting the COMnx1:0 = 0 tells the Waveform Generator that no action on the
OCnx Register is to be performed on the next compare match. For compare output actions in the
PORT
DDR
D Q
D Q
OCnx
OCnx pin
D Q Waveform
generator
COMnx1
COMnx0
0
1
DATA BUS
FOCnx
clkI/O127
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
non-PWM modes refer to Table 15-1 on page 137. For fast PWM mode refer to Table 15-2 on
page 137, and for phase correct and phase and frequency correct PWM refer to Table 15-3 on
page 138.
A change of the COMnx1:0 bits state will have effect at the first compare match after the bits are
written. For non-PWM modes, the action can be forced to have immediate effect by using the
FOCnx strobe bits.
15.8 Modes of operation
The mode of operation, that is, the behavior of the Timer/Counter and the Output Compare pins,
is defined by the combination of the Waveform Generation mode (WGMn3:0) and Compare Output
mode (COMnx1:0) bits. The Compare Output mode bits do not affect the counting sequence,
while the Waveform Generation mode bits do. The COMnx1:0 bits control whether the PWM output
generated should be inverted or not (inverted or non-inverted PWM). For non-PWM modes
the COMnx1:0 bits control whether the output should be set, cleared or toggle at a compare
match (see “Compare Match Output unit” on page 126).
For detailed timing information refer to “Timer/Counter timing diagrams” on page 134.
15.8.1 Normal mode
The simplest mode of operation is the Normal mode (WGMn3:0 = 0). In this mode the counting
direction is always up (incrementing), and no counter clear is performed. The counter simply
overruns when it passes its maximum 16-bit value (MAX = 0xFFFF) and then restarts from the
BOTTOM (0x0000). In normal operation the Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOVn) will be set in
the same timer clock cycle as the TCNTn becomes zero. The TOVn Flag in this case behaves
like a 17th bit, except that it is only set, not cleared. However, combined with the timer overflow
interrupt that automatically clears the TOVn Flag, the timer resolution can be increased by software.
There are no special cases to consider in the Normal mode, a new counter value can be
written anytime.
The Input Capture unit is easy to use in Normal mode. However, observe that the maximum
interval between the external events must not exceed the resolution of the counter. If the interval
between events are too long, the timer overflow interrupt or the prescaler must be used to
extend the resolution for the capture unit.
The Output Compare units can be used to generate interrupts at some given time. Using the
Output Compare to generate waveforms in Normal mode is not recommended, since this will
occupy too much of the CPU time.
15.8.2 Clear Timer on Compare Match (CTC) mode
In Clear Timer on Compare or CTC mode (WGMn3:0 = 4 or 12), the OCRnA or ICRn Register
are used to manipulate the counter resolution. In CTC mode the counter is cleared to zero when
the counter value (TCNTn) matches either the OCRnA (WGMn3:0 = 4) or the ICRn (WGMn3:0 =
12). The OCRnA or ICRn define the top value for the counter, hence also its resolution. This
mode allows greater control of the compare match output frequency. It also simplifies the operation
of counting external events.
The timing diagram for the CTC mode is shown in Figure 15-6 on page 128. The counter value
(TCNTn) increases until a compare match occurs with either OCRnA or ICRn, and then counter
(TCNTn) is cleared.128
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 15-6. CTC mode, timing diagram.
An interrupt can be generated at each time the counter value reaches the TOP value by either
using the OCFnA or ICFn Flag according to the register used to define the TOP value. If the
interrupt is enabled, the interrupt handler routine can be used for updating the TOP value. However,
changing the TOP to a value close to BOTTOM when the counter is running with none or a
low prescaler value must be done with care since the CTC mode does not have the double buffering
feature. If the new value written to OCRnA or ICRn is lower than the current value of
TCNTn, the counter will miss the compare match. The counter will then have to count to its maximum
value (0xFFFF) and wrap around starting at 0x0000 before the compare match can occur.
In many cases this feature is not desirable. An alternative will then be to use the fast PWM mode
using OCRnA for defining TOP (WGMn3:0 = 15) since the OCRnA then will be double buffered.
For generating a waveform output in CTC mode, the OCnA output can be set to toggle its logical
level on each compare match by setting the Compare Output mode bits to toggle mode
(COMnA1:0 = 1). The OCnA value will not be visible on the port pin unless the data direction for
the pin is set to output (DDR_OCnA = 1). The waveform generated will have a maximum frequency
of fOCnA = fclk_I/O/2 when OCRnA is set to zero (0x0000). The waveform frequency is
defined by the following equation:
The N variable represents the prescaler factor (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024).
As for the Normal mode of operation, the TOVn Flag is set in the same timer clock cycle that the
counter counts from MAX to 0x0000.
15.8.3 Fast PWM mode
The fast Pulse Width Modulation or fast PWM mode (WGMn3:0 = 5, 6, 7, 14, or 15) provides a
high frequency PWM waveform generation option. The fast PWM differs from the other PWM
options by its single-slope operation. The counter counts from BOTTOM to TOP then restarts
from BOTTOM. In non-inverting Compare Output mode, the Output Compare (OCnx) is set on
the compare match between TCNTn and OCRnx, and cleared at TOP. In inverting Compare
Output mode output is cleared on compare match and set at TOP. Due to the single-slope operation,
the operating frequency of the fast PWM mode can be twice as high as the phase correct
and phase and frequency correct PWM modes that use dual-slope operation. This high frequency
makes the fast PWM mode well suited for power regulation, rectification, and DAC
applications. High frequency allows physically small sized external components (coils, capacitors),
hence reduces total system cost.
TCNTn
OCnA
(Toggle)
OCnA Interrupt Flag Set
or ICFn Interrupt Flag Set
(interrupt on TOP)
Period 1 2 3 4
(COMnA1:0 = 1)
f
OCnA
f
clk_I/O
2 ⋅ ⋅ N ( ) 1 + OCRnA = --------------------------------------------------129
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
The PWM resolution for fast PWM can be fixed to 8-, 9-, or 10-bit, or defined by either ICRn or
OCRnA. The minimum resolution allowed is 2-bit (ICRn or OCRnA set to 0x0003), and the maximum
resolution is 16-bit (ICRn or OCRnA set to MAX). The PWM resolution in bits can be
calculated by using the following equation:
In fast PWM mode the counter is incremented until the counter value matches either one of the
fixed values 0x00FF, 0x01FF, or 0x03FF (WGMn3:0 = 5, 6, or 7), the value in ICRn (WGMn3:0 =
14), or the value in OCRnA (WGMn3:0 = 15). The counter is then cleared at the following timer
clock cycle. The timing diagram for the fast PWM mode is shown in Figure 15-7. The figure
shows fast PWM mode when OCRnA or ICRn is used to define TOP. The TCNTn value is in the
timing diagram shown as a histogram for illustrating the single-slope operation. The diagram
includes non-inverted and inverted PWM outputs. The small horizontal line marks on the TCNTn
slopes represent compare matches between OCRnx and TCNTn. The OCnx Interrupt Flag will
be set when a compare match occurs.
Figure 15-7. Fast PWM mode, timing diagram.
The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOVn) is set each time the counter reaches TOP. In addition
the OCnA or ICFn Flag is set at the same timer clock cycle as TOVn is set when either OCRnA
or ICRn is used for defining the TOP value. If one of the interrupts are enabled, the interrupt handler
routine can be used for updating the TOP and compare values.
When changing the TOP value the program must ensure that the new TOP value is higher or
equal to the value of all of the Compare Registers. If the TOP value is lower than any of the
Compare Registers, a compare match will never occur between the TCNTn and the OCRnx.
Note that when using fixed TOP values the unused bits are masked to zero when any of the
OCRnx Registers are written.
The procedure for updating ICRn differs from updating OCRnA when used for defining the TOP
value. The ICRn Register is not double buffered. This means that if ICRn is changed to a low
value when the counter is running with none or a low prescaler value, there is a risk that the new
ICRn value written is lower than the current value of TCNTn. The result will then be that the
counter will miss the compare match at the TOP value. The counter will then have to count to the
MAX value (0xFFFF) and wrap around starting at 0x0000 before the compare match can occur.
The OCRnA Register however, is double buffered. This feature allows the OCRnA I/O location
RFPWM
log( ) TOP + 1
log( ) 2 = -----------------------------------
TCNTn
OCRnx / TOP Update
and TOVn Interrupt Flag
Set and OCnA Interrupt
Flag Set or ICFn
Interrupt Flag Set
(Interrupt on TOP)
Period 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OCnx
OCnx
(COMnx1:0 = 2)
(COMnx1:0 = 3)130
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
to be written anytime. When the OCRnA I/O location is written the value written will be put into
the OCRnA Buffer Register. The OCRnA Compare Register will then be updated with the value
in the Buffer Register at the next timer clock cycle the TCNTn matches TOP. The update is done
at the same timer clock cycle as the TCNTn is cleared and the TOVn Flag is set.
Using the ICRn Register for defining TOP works well when using fixed TOP values. By using
ICRn, the OCRnA Register is free to be used for generating a PWM output on OCnA. However,
if the base PWM frequency is actively changed (by changing the TOP value), using the OCRnA
as TOP is clearly a better choice due to its double buffer feature.
In fast PWM mode, the compare units allow generation of PWM waveforms on the OCnx pins.
Setting the COMnx1:0 bits to two will produce a non-inverted PWM and an inverted PWM output
can be generated by setting the COMnx1:0 to three (see Table on page 137). The actual OCnx
value will only be visible on the port pin if the data direction for the port pin is set as output
(DDR_OCnx). The PWM waveform is generated by setting (or clearing) the OCnx Register at
the compare match between OCRnx and TCNTn, and clearing (or setting) the OCnx Register at
the timer clock cycle the counter is cleared (changes from TOP to BOTTOM).
The PWM frequency for the output can be calculated by the following equation:
The N variable represents the prescaler divider (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024).
The extreme values for the OCRnx Register represents special cases when generating a PWM
waveform output in the fast PWM mode. If the OCRnx is set equal to BOTTOM (0x0000) the output
will be a narrow spike for each TOP+1 timer clock cycle. Setting the OCRnx equal to TOP
will result in a constant high or low output (depending on the polarity of the output set by the
COMnx1:0 bits.)
A frequency (with 50% duty cycle) waveform output in fast PWM mode can be achieved by setting
OCnA to toggle its logical level on each compare match (COMnA1:0 = 1). This applies only
if OCR1A is used to define the TOP value (WGM13:0 = 15). The waveform generated will have
a maximum frequency of fOCnA = fclk_I/O/2 when OCRnA is set to zero (0x0000). This feature is
similar to the OCnA toggle in CTC mode, except the double buffer feature of the Output Compare
unit is enabled in the fast PWM mode.
15.8.4 Phase correct PWM mode
The phase correct Pulse Width Modulation or phase correct PWM mode (WGMn3:0 = 1, 2, 3,
10, or 11) provides a high resolution phase correct PWM waveform generation option. The
phase correct PWM mode is, like the phase and frequency correct PWM mode, based on a dualslope
operation. The counter counts repeatedly from BOTTOM (0x0000) to TOP and then from
TOP to BOTTOM. In non-inverting Compare Output mode, the Output Compare (OCnx) is
cleared on the compare match between TCNTn and OCRnx while upcounting, and set on the
compare match while downcounting. In inverting Output Compare mode, the operation is
inverted. The dual-slope operation has lower maximum operation frequency than single slope
operation. However, due to the symmetric feature of the dual-slope PWM modes, these modes
are preferred for motor control applications.
The PWM resolution for the phase correct PWM mode can be fixed to 8-, 9-, or 10-bit, or defined
by either ICRn or OCRnA. The minimum resolution allowed is 2-bit (ICRn or OCRnA set to
f
OCnxPWM
f
clk_I/O
N ⋅ ( ) 1 + TOP = -----------------------------------131
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
0x0003), and the maximum resolution is 16-bit (ICRn or OCRnA set to MAX). The PWM resolution
in bits can be calculated by using the following equation:
In phase correct PWM mode the counter is incremented until the counter value matches either
one of the fixed values 0x00FF, 0x01FF, or 0x03FF (WGMn3:0 = 1, 2, or 3), the value in ICRn
(WGMn3:0 = 10), or the value in OCRnA (WGMn3:0 = 11). The counter has then reached the
TOP and changes the count direction. The TCNTn value will be equal to TOP for one timer clock
cycle. The timing diagram for the phase correct PWM mode is shown on Figure 15-8. The figure
shows phase correct PWM mode when OCRnA or ICRn is used to define TOP. The TCNTn
value is in the timing diagram shown as a histogram for illustrating the dual-slope operation. The
diagram includes non-inverted and inverted PWM outputs. The small horizontal line marks on
the TCNTn slopes represent compare matches between OCRnx and TCNTn. The OCnx Interrupt
Flag will be set when a compare match occurs.
Figure 15-8. Phase correct PWM mode, timing diagram.
The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOVn) is set each time the counter reaches BOTTOM. When
either OCRnA or ICRn is used for defining the TOP value, the OCnA or ICFn Flag is set accordingly
at the same timer clock cycle as the OCRnx Registers are updated with the double buffer
value (at TOP). The Interrupt Flags can be used to generate an interrupt each time the counter
reaches the TOP or BOTTOM value.
When changing the TOP value the program must ensure that the new TOP value is higher or
equal to the value of all of the Compare Registers. If the TOP value is lower than any of the
Compare Registers, a compare match will never occur between the TCNTn and the OCRnx.
Note that when using fixed TOP values, the unused bits are masked to zero when any of the
OCRnx Registers are written. As the third period shown in Figure 15-8 illustrates, changing the
TOP actively while the Timer/Counter is running in the phase correct mode can result in an
unsymmetrical output. The reason for this can be found in the time of update of the OCRnx RegRPCPWM
log( ) TOP + 1
log( ) 2 = -----------------------------------
OCRnx/TOP Update and
OCnA Interrupt Flag Set
or ICFn Interrupt Flag Set
(interrupt on TOP)
1 2 3 4
TOVn Interrupt Flag Set
(interrupt on Bottom)
TCNTn
Period
OCnx
OCnx
(COMnx1:0 = 2)
(COMnx1:0 = 3)132
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
ister. Since the OCRnx update occurs at TOP, the PWM period starts and ends at TOP. This
implies that the length of the falling slope is determined by the previous TOP value, while the
length of the rising slope is determined by the new TOP value. When these two values differ the
two slopes of the period will differ in length. The difference in length gives the unsymmetrical
result on the output.
It is recommended to use the phase and frequency correct mode instead of the phase correct
mode when changing the TOP value while the Timer/Counter is running. When using a static
TOP value there are practically no differences between the two modes of operation.
In phase correct PWM mode, the compare units allow generation of PWM waveforms on the
OCnx pins. Setting the COMnx1:0 bits to two will produce a non-inverted PWM and an inverted
PWM output can be generated by setting the COMnx1:0 to three (see Table 15-3 on page 138).
The actual OCnx value will only be visible on the port pin if the data direction for the port pin is
set as output (DDR_OCnx). The PWM waveform is generated by setting (or clearing) the OCnx
Register at the compare match between OCRnx and TCNTn when the counter increments, and
clearing (or setting) the OCnx Register at compare match between OCRnx and TCNTn when
the counter decrements. The PWM frequency for the output when using phase correct PWM can
be calculated by the following equation:
The N variable represents the prescaler divider (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024).
The extreme values for the OCRnx Register represent special cases when generating a PWM
waveform output in the phase correct PWM mode. If the OCRnx is set equal to BOTTOM the
output will be continuously low and if set equal to TOP the output will be continuously high for
non-inverted PWM mode. For inverted PWM the output will have the opposite logic values. If
OCR1A is used to define the TOP value (WGM13:0 = 11) and COM1A1:0 = 1, the OC1A output
will toggle with a 50% duty cycle.
15.8.5 Phase and frequency correct PWM mode
The phase and frequency correct Pulse Width Modulation, or phase and frequency correct PWM
mode (WGMn3:0 = 8 or 9) provides a high resolution phase and frequency correct PWM waveform
generation option. The phase and frequency correct PWM mode is, like the phase correct
PWM mode, based on a dual-slope operation. The counter counts repeatedly from BOTTOM
(0x0000) to TOP and then from TOP to BOTTOM. In non-inverting Compare Output mode, the
Output Compare (OCnx) is cleared on the compare match between TCNTn and OCRnx while
upcounting, and set on the compare match while downcounting. In inverting Compare Output
mode, the operation is inverted. The dual-slope operation gives a lower maximum operation frequency
compared to the single-slope operation. However, due to the symmetric feature of the
dual-slope PWM modes, these modes are preferred for motor control applications.
The main difference between the phase correct, and the phase and frequency correct PWM
mode is the time the OCRnx Register is updated by the OCRnx Buffer Register, (see Figure 15-
8 on page 131 and Figure 15-9 on page 133).
The PWM resolution for the phase and frequency correct PWM mode can be defined by either
ICRn or OCRnA. The minimum resolution allowed is 2-bit (ICRn or OCRnA set to 0x0003), and
f
OCnxPCPWM
f
clk_I/O
2 ⋅ ⋅ N TOP = ----------------------------133
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
the maximum resolution is 16-bit (ICRn or OCRnA set to MAX). The PWM resolution in bits can
be calculated using the following equation:
In phase and frequency correct PWM mode the counter is incremented until the counter value
matches either the value in ICRn (WGMn3:0 = 8), or the value in OCRnA (WGMn3:0 = 9). The
counter has then reached the TOP and changes the count direction. The TCNTn value will be
equal to TOP for one timer clock cycle. The timing diagram for the phase correct and frequency
correct PWM mode is shown on Figure 15-9. The figure shows phase and frequency correct
PWM mode when OCRnA or ICRn is used to define TOP. The TCNTn value is in the timing diagram
shown as a histogram for illustrating the dual-slope operation. The diagram includes noninverted
and inverted PWM outputs. The small horizontal line marks on the TCNTn slopes represent
compare matches between OCRnx and TCNTn. The OCnx Interrupt Flag will be set when a
compare match occurs.
Figure 15-9. Phase and frequency correct PWM mode, timing diagram.
The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOVn) is set at the same timer clock cycle as the OCRnx
Registers are updated with the double buffer value (at BOTTOM). When either OCRnA or ICRn
is used for defining the TOP value, the OCnA or ICFn Flag set when TCNTn has reached TOP.
The Interrupt Flags can then be used to generate an interrupt each time the counter reaches the
TOP or BOTTOM value.
When changing the TOP value the program must ensure that the new TOP value is higher or
equal to the value of all of the Compare Registers. If the TOP value is lower than any of the
Compare Registers, a compare match will never occur between the TCNTn and the OCRnx.
As Figure 15-9 shows the output generated is, in contrast to the phase correct mode, symmetrical
in all periods. Since the OCRnx Registers are updated at BOTTOM, the length of the rising
and the falling slopes will always be equal. This gives symmetrical output pulses and is therefore
frequency correct.
RPFCPWM
log( ) TOP + 1
log( ) 2 = -----------------------------------
OCRnx/TOP Updateand
TOVn Interrupt Flag Set
(interrupt on Bottom)
OCnA Interrupt Flag Set
or ICFn Interrupt Flag Set
(interrupt on TOP)
1 2 3 4
TCNTn
Period
OCnx
OCnx
(COMnx1:0 = 2)
(COMnx1:0 = 3)134
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Using the ICRn Register for defining TOP works well when using fixed TOP values. By using
ICRn, the OCRnA Register is free to be used for generating a PWM output on OCnA. However,
if the base PWM frequency is actively changed by changing the TOP value, using the OCRnA as
TOP is clearly a better choice due to its double buffer feature.
In phase and frequency correct PWM mode, the compare units allow generation of PWM waveforms
on the OCnx pins. Setting the COMnx1:0 bits to two will produce a non-inverted PWM and
an inverted PWM output can be generated by setting the COMnx1:0 to three (see Table 15-3 on
page 138). The actual OCnx value will only be visible on the port pin if the data direction for the
port pin is set as output (DDR_OCnx). The PWM waveform is generated by setting (or clearing)
the OCnx Register at the compare match between OCRnx and TCNTn when the counter increments,
and clearing (or setting) the OCnx Register at compare match between OCRnx and
TCNTn when the counter decrements. The PWM frequency for the output when using phase
and frequency correct PWM can be calculated by the following equation:
The N variable represents the prescaler divider (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024).
The extreme values for the OCRnx Register represents special cases when generating a PWM
waveform output in the phase correct PWM mode. If the OCRnx is set equal to BOTTOM the
output will be continuously low and if set equal to TOP the output will be set to high for noninverted
PWM mode. For inverted PWM the output will have the opposite logic values. If OCR1A
is used to define the TOP value (WGM13:0 = 9) and COM1A1:0 = 1, the OC1A output will toggle
with a 50% duty cycle.
15.9 Timer/Counter timing diagrams
The Timer/Counter is a synchronous design and the timer clock (clkTn) is therefore shown as a
clock enable signal in the following figures. The figures include information on when Interrupt
Flags are set, and when the OCRnx Register is updated with the OCRnx buffer value (only for
modes utilizing double buffering). Figure 15-10 shows a timing diagram for the setting of OCFnx.
Figure 15-10. Timer/Counter timing diagram, setting of OCFnx, no prescaling.
Figure 15-11 on page 135 shows the same timing data, but with the prescaler enabled.
f
OCnxPFCPWM
f
clk_I/O
2 ⋅ ⋅ N TOP = ----------------------------
clkTn
(clkI/O/1)
OCFnx
clkI/O
OCRnx
TCNTn
OCRnx value
OCRnx - 1 OCRnx OCRnx + 1 OCRnx + 2135
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 15-11. Timer/Counter timing diagram, setting of OCFnx, with prescaler (fclk_I/O/8).
Figure 15-12 shows the count sequence close to TOP in various modes. When using phase and
frequency correct PWM mode the OCRnx Register is updated at BOTTOM. The timing diagrams
will be the same, but TOP should be replaced by BOTTOM, TOP-1 by BOTTOM+1 and so on.
The same renaming applies for modes that set the TOVn Flag at BOTTOM.
Figure 15-12. Timer/Counter timing diagram, no prescaling.
Figure 15-13 on page 136 shows the same timing data, but with the prescaler enabled.
OCFnx
OCRnx
TCNTn
OCRnx value
OCRnx - 1 OCRnx OCRnx + 1 OCRnx + 2
clkI/O
clkTn
(clkI/O/8)
TOVn (FPWM)
and ICFn (if used
as TOP)
OCRnx
(update at TOP)
TCNTn
(CTC and FPWM)
TCNTn
(PC and PFC PWM) TOP - 1 TOP TOP - 1 TOP - 2
Old OCRnx value New OCRnx value
TOP - 1 TOP BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1
clkTn
(clkI/O/1)
clkI/O136
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 15-13. Timer/Counter timing diagram, with prescaler (fclk_I/O/8).
15.10 16-bit Timer/Counter register description
15.10.1 TCCR1A – Timer/Counter1 Control Register A
15.10.2 TCCR3A – Timer/Counter3 Control Register A
• Bit 7:6 – COMnA1:0: Compare Output Mode for Channel A
• Bit 5:4 – COMnB1:0: Compare Output Mode for Channel B
• Bit 3:2 – COMnC1:0: Compare Output Mode for Channel C
The COMnA1:0, COMnB1:0, and COMnC1:0 control the output compare pins (OCnA, OCnB,
and OCnC respectively) behavior. If one or both of the COMnA1:0 bits are written to one, the
OCnA output overrides the normal port functionality of the I/O pin it is connected to. If one or
both of the COMnB1:0 bits are written to one, the OCnB output overrides the normal port functionality
of the I/O pin it is connected to. If one or both of the COMnC1:0 bits are written to one,
the OCnC output overrides the normal port functionality of the I/O pin it is connected to. However,
note that the Data Direction Register (DDR) bit corresponding to the OCnA, OCnB or
OCnC pin must be set in order to enable the output driver.
TOVn (FPWM)
and ICFn (if used
as TOP)
OCRnx
(update at TOP)
TCNTn
(CTC and FPWM)
TCNTn
(PC and PFC PWM)
TOP - 1 TOP TOP - 1 TOP - 2
Old OCRnx value New OCRnx value
TOP - 1 TOP BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1
clkI/O
clk Tn
(clkI/O /8)
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
COM1A1 COM1A0 COM1B1 COM1B0 COM1C1 COM1C0 WGM11 WGM10 TCCR1A
Read/write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
COM3A1 COM3A0 COM3B1 COM3B0 COM3C1 COM3C0 WGM31 WGM30 TCCR3A
Read/write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0137
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
When the OCnA, OCnB or OCnC is connected to the pin, the function of the COMnx1:0 bits is
dependent of the WGMn3:0 bits setting. Table 15-1 shows the COMnx1:0 bit functionality when
the WGMn3:0 bits are set to a normal or a CTC mode (non-PWM).
Table 15-2 shows the COMnx1:0 bit functionality when the WGMn3:0 bits are set to the fast
PWM mode.
Note: A special case occurs when OCRnA/OCRnB/OCRnC equals TOP and
COMnA1/COMnB1/COMnC1 is set. In this case the compare match is ignored, but the set or clear
is done at TOP. See “Fast PWM mode” on page 104. for more details.
Table 15-3 on page 138 shows the COMnx1:0 bit functionality when the WGMn3:0 bits are set to
the phase correct and frequency correct PWM mode.
Table 15-1. Compare Output mode, non-PWM.
COMnA1/COMnB1/
COMnC1
COMnA0/COMnB0/
COMnC0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OCnA/OCnB/OCnC
disconnected.
0 1 Toggle OCnA/OCnB/OCnC on compare match.
1 0 Clear OCnA/OCnB/OCnC on compare match (set
output to low level).
1 1 Set OCnA/OCnB/OCnC on compare match (set
output to high level).
Table 15-2. Compare Output mode, fast PWM.
COMnA1/COMnB1/
COMnC0
COMnA0/COMnB0/
COMnC0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OCnA/OCnB/OCnC
disconnected.
0 1
WGM13:0 = 14 or 15: Toggle OC1A on Compare
Match, OC1B and OC1C disconnected (normal port
operation). For all other WGM1 settings, normal port
operation, OC1A/OC1B/OC1C disconnected.
1 0 Clear OCnA/OCnB/OCnC on compare match, set
OCnA/OCnB/OCnC at TOP
1 1 Set OCnA/OCnB/OCnC on compare match, clear
OCnA/OCnB/OCnC at TOP138
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Note: A special case occurs when OCRnA/OCRnB/OCRnC equals TOP and
COMnA1/COMnB1//COMnC1 is set. See “Phase correct PWM mode” on page 106. for more
details.
• Bit 1:0 – WGMn1:0: Waveform Generation mode
Combined with the WGMn3:2 bits found in the TCCRnB Register, these bits control the counting
sequence of the counter, the source for maximum (TOP) counter value, and what type of waveform
generation to be used, see Table 15-4 on page 138. Modes of operation supported by the
Timer/Counter unit are: Normal mode (counter), Clear Timer on Compare match (CTC) mode,
and three types of Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) modes. (See “Modes of operation” on page
103.).
Table 15-3. Compare Output mode, phase correct and phase and frequency correct PWM.
COMnA1/COMnB/
COMnC1
COMnA0/COMnB0/
COMnC0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OCnA/OCnB/OCnC
disconnected.
0 1
WGM13:0 = 8, 9 10 or 11: Toggle OC1A on
Compare Match, OC1B and OC1C
disconnected (normal port operation). For all
other WGM1 settings, normal port operation,
OC1A/OC1B/OC1C disconnected.
1 0
Clear OCnA/OCnB/OCnC on compare
match when up-counting. Set
OCnA/OCnB/OCnC on compare match
when counting down.
1 1
Set OCnA/OCnB/OCnC on compare match
when up-counting. Clear
OCnA/OCnB/OCnC on compare match
when counting down.
Table 15-4. Waveform Generation mode bit description (1).
Mode WGMn3
WGMn2
(CTCn)
WGMn1
(PWMn1)
WGMn0
(PWMn0)
Timer/Counter mode of
operation TOP
Update of
OCRnx at
TOVn flag
set on
0 0 0 0 0 Normal 0xFFFF Immediate MAX
1 0 0 0 1 PWM, phase correct, 8-bit 0x00FF TOP BOTTOM
2 0 0 1 0 PWM, phase correct, 9-bit 0x01FF TOP BOTTOM
3 0 0 1 1 PWM, phase correct, 10-bit 0x03FF TOP BOTTOM
4 0 1 0 0 CTC OCRnA Immediate MAX
5 0 1 0 1 Fast PWM, 8-bit 0x00FF TOP TOP
6 0 1 1 0 Fast PWM, 9-bit 0x01FF TOP TOP
7 0 1 1 1 Fast PWM, 10-bit 0x03FF TOP TOP
81 0 0 0 PWM, phase and frequency
Correct ICRn BOTTOM BOTTOM
91 0 0 1 PWM, phase and frequency
Correct OCRnA BOTTOM BOTTOM
10 1 0 1 0 PWM, phase correct ICRn TOP BOTTOM139
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Note: 1. The CTCn and PWMn1:0 bit definition names are obsolete. Use the WGMn2:0 definitions. However, the functionality and
location of these bits are compatible with previous versions of the timer.
15.10.3 TCCR1B – Timer/Counter1 Control Register B
15.10.4 TCCR3B – Timer/Counter3 Control Register B
• Bit 7 – ICNCn: Input Capture Noise Canceler
Setting this bit (to one) activates the Input Capture Noise Canceler. When the Noise Canceler is
activated, the input from the Input Capture Pin (ICPn) is filtered. The filter function requires four
successive equal valued samples of the ICPn pin for changing its output. The input capture is
therefore delayed by four Oscillator cycles when the noise canceler is enabled.
• Bit 6 – ICESn: Input Capture Edge Select
This bit selects which edge on the Input Capture Pin (ICPn) that is used to trigger a capture
event. When the ICESn bit is written to zero, a falling (negative) edge is used as trigger, and
when the ICESn bit is written to one, a rising (positive) edge will trigger the capture.
When a capture is triggered according to the ICESn setting, the counter value is copied into the
Input Capture Register (ICRn). The event will also set the Input Capture Flag (ICFn), and this
can be used to cause an Input Capture Interrupt, if this interrupt is enabled.
When the ICRn is used as TOP value (see description of the WGMn3:0 bits located in the
TCCRnA and the TCCRnB Register), the ICPn is disconnected and consequently the input capture
function is disabled.
• Bit 5 – Reserved bit
This bit is reserved for future use. For ensuring compatibility with future devices, this bit must be
written to zero when TCCRnB is written.
• Bit 4:3 – WGMn3:2: Waveform Generation mode
See TCCRnA Register description.
11 1 0 1 1 PWM, phase correct OCRnA TOP BOTTOM
12 1 1 0 0 CTC ICRn Immediate MAX
13 1 1 0 1 (Reserved) – – –
14 1 1 1 0 Fast PWM ICRn TOP TOP
15 1 1 1 1 Fast PWM OCRnA TOP TOP
Table 15-4. Waveform Generation mode bit description (1). (Continued)
Mode WGMn3
WGMn2
(CTCn)
WGMn1
(PWMn1)
WGMn0
(PWMn0)
Timer/Counter mode of
operation TOP
Update of
OCRnx at
TOVn flag
set on
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ICNC1 ICES1 – WGM13 WGM12 CS12 CS11 CS10 TCCR1B
Read/write R/W R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ICNC3 ICES3 – WGM33 WGM32 CS32 CS31 CS30 TCCR3B
Read/write R/W R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0140
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
• Bit 2:0 – CSn2:0: Clock Select
The three clock select bits select the clock source to be used by the Timer/Counter, see Figure
14-8 on page 107 and Figure 14-9 on page 108.
If external pin modes are used for the Timer/Countern, transitions on the Tn pin will clock the
counter even if the pin is configured as an output. This feature allows software control of the
counting.
15.10.5 TCCR1C – Timer/Counter1 Control Register C
15.10.6 TCCR3C – Timer/Counter3 Control Register C
• Bit 7 – FOCnA: Force Output Compare for Channel A
• Bit 6 – FOCnB: Force Output Compare for Channel B
• Bit 5 – FOCnC: Force Output Compare for Channel C
The FOCnA/FOCnB/FOCnC bits are only active when the WGMn3:0 bits specifies a non-PWM
mode. When writing a logical one to the FOCnA/FOCnB/FOCnC bit, an immediate compare
match is forced on the waveform generation unit. The OCnA/OCnB/OCnC output is changed
according to its COMnx1:0 bits setting. Note that the FOCnA/FOCnB/FOCnC bits are implemented
as strobes. Therefore it is the value present in the COMnx1:0 bits that determine the
effect of the forced compare.
A FOCnA/FOCnB/FOCnC strobe will not generate any interrupt nor will it clear the timer in Clear
Timer on Compare Match (CTC) mode using OCRnA as TOP.
The FOCnA/FOCnB/FOCnB bits are always read as zero.
• Bit 4:0 – Reserved bits
These bits are reserved for future use. For ensuring compatibility with future devices, these bits
must be written to zero when TCCRnC is written.
Table 15-5. Clock Select bit description.
CSn2 CSn1 CSn0 Description
0 0 0 No clock source. (Timer/Counter stopped)
0 0 1 clkI/O/1 (no prescaling
0 1 0 clkI/O/8 (from prescaler)
0 1 1 clkI/O/64 (from prescaler)
1 0 0 clkI/O/256 (from prescaler)
1 0 1 clkI/O/1024 (from prescaler)
1 1 0 External clock source on Tn pin. Clock on falling edge
1 1 1 External clock source on Tn pin. Clock on rising edge
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
FOC1A FOC1B FOC1C – – – – – TCCR1C
Read/write W W W R R R R R
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
FOC3A FOC3B FOC3C – – – – – TCCR3C
Read/write W W W R R R R R
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0141
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
15.10.7 TCNT1H and TCNT1L – Timer/Counter1
15.10.8 TCNT3H and TCNT3L – Timer/Counter3
The two Timer/Counter I/O locations (TCNTnH and TCNTnL, combined TCNTn) give direct
access, both for read and for write operations, to the Timer/Counter unit 16-bit counter. To
ensure that both the high and low bytes are read and written simultaneously when the CPU
accesses these registers, the access is performed using an 8-bit temporary High Byte Register
(TEMP). This temporary register is shared by all the other 16-bit registers. See “Accessing 16-bit
registers” on page 117.
Modifying the counter (TCNTn) while the counter is running introduces a risk of missing a compare
match between TCNTn and one of the OCRnx Registers.
Writing to the TCNTn Register blocks (removes) the compare match on the following timer clock
for all compare units.
15.10.9 OCR1AH and OCR1AL – Output Compare Register 1 A
15.10.10 OCR1BH and OCR1BL – Output Compare Register 1 B
15.10.11 OCR1CH and OCR1CL – Output Compare Register 1 C
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TCNT1[15:8] TCNT1H
TCNT1[7:0] TCNT1L
Read/write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TCNT3[15:8] TCNT3H
TCNT3[7:0] TCNT3L
Read/write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
OCR1A[15:8] OCR1AH
OCR1A[7:0] OCR1AL
Read/write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
OCR1B[15:8] OCR1BH
OCR1B[7:0] OCR1BL
Read/write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
OCR1C[15:8] OCR1CH
OCR1C[7:0] OCR1CL
Read/write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0142
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
15.10.12 OCR3AH and OCR3AL – Output Compare Register 3 A
15.10.13 OCR3BH and OCR3BL – Output Compare Register 3 B
15.10.14 OCR3CH and OCR3CL – Output Compare Register 3 C
The Output Compare Registers contain a 16-bit value that is continuously compared with the
counter value (TCNTn). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare interrupt, or to
generate a waveform output on the OCnx pin.
The Output Compare Registers are 16-bit in size. To ensure that both the high and low bytes are
written simultaneously when the CPU writes to these registers, the access is performed using an
8-bit temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This temporary register is shared by all the other
16-bit registers. See “Accessing 16-bit registers” on page 117.
15.10.15 ICR1H and ICR1L – Input Capture Register 1
15.10.16 ICR3H and ICR3L – Input Capture Register 3
The Input Capture is updated with the counter (TCNTn) value each time an event occurs on the
ICPn pin (or optionally on the Analog Comparator output for Timer/Counter1). The Input Capture
can be used for defining the counter TOP value.
The Input Capture Register is 16-bit in size. To ensure that both the high and low bytes are read
simultaneously when the CPU accesses these registers, the access is performed using an 8-bit
temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This temporary register is shared by all the other 16-bit
registers. See “Accessing 16-bit registers” on page 117.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
OCR3A[15:8] OCR3AH
OCR3A[7:0] OCR3AL
Read/write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
OCR3B[15:8] OCR3BH
OCR3B[7:0] OCR3BL
Read/write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
OCR3C[15:8] OCR3CH
OCR3C[7:0] OCR3CL
Read/write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ICR1[15:8] ICR1H
ICR1[7:0] ICR1L
Read/write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ICR3[15:8] ICR3H
ICR3[7:0] ICR3L
Read/write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0143
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
15.10.17 TIMSK1 – Timer/Counter1 Interrupt Mask Register
15.10.18 TIMSK3 – Timer/Counter3 Interrupt Mask Register
• Bit 5 – ICIEn: Timer/Countern, Input Capture Interrupt Enable
When this bit is written to one, and the I-flag in the Status Register is set (interrupts globally
enabled), the Timer/Countern Input Capture interrupt is enabled. The corresponding Interrupt
Vector (see “Interrupts” on page 68) is executed when the ICFn Flag, located in TIFRn, is set.
• Bit 3 – OCIEnC: Timer/Countern, Output Compare C Match Interrupt Enable
When this bit is written to one, and the I-flag in the Status Register is set (interrupts globally
enabled), the Timer/Countern Output Compare C Match interrupt is enabled. The corresponding
Interrupt Vector (see “Interrupts” on page 68) is executed when the OCFnC Flag, located in
TIFRn, is set.
• Bit 2 – OCIEnB: Timer/Countern, Output Compare B Match Interrupt Enable
When this bit is written to one, and the I-flag in the Status Register is set (interrupts globally
enabled), the Timer/Countern Output Compare B Match interrupt is enabled. The corresponding
Interrupt Vector (see “Interrupts” on page 68) is executed when the OCFnB Flag, located in
TIFRn, is set.
• Bit 1 – OCIEnA: Timer/Countern, Output Compare A Match Interrupt Enable
When this bit is written to one, and the I-flag in the Status Register is set (interrupts globally
enabled), the Timer/Countern Output Compare A Match interrupt is enabled. The corresponding
Interrupt Vector (see “Interrupts” on page 68) is executed when the OCFnA Flag, located in
TIFRn, is set.
• Bit 0 – TOIEn: Timer/Countern, Overflow Interrupt Enable
When this bit is written to one, and the I-flag in the Status Register is set (interrupts globally
enabled), the Timer/Countern Overflow interrupt is enabled. The corresponding Interrupt Vector
(see “Interrupts” on page 68) is executed when the TOVn Flag, located in TIFRn, is set.
15.10.19 TIFR1 – Timer/Counter1 Interrupt Flag Register
15.10.20 TIFR3 – Timer/Counter3 Interrupt Flag Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
– – ICIE1 – OCIE1C OCIE1B OCIE1A TOIE1 TIMSK1
Read/write R R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
– – ICIE3 – OCIE3C OCIE3B OCIE3A TOIE3 TIMSK3
Read/write R R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
– – ICF1 – OCF1C OCF1B OCF1A TOV1 TIFR1
Read/write R R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
– – ICF3 – OCF3C OCF3B OCF3A TOV3 TIFR3
Read/write R R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0144
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
• Bit 5 – ICFn: Timer/Countern, Input Capture Flag
This flag is set when a capture event occurs on the ICPn pin. When the Input Capture Register
(ICRn) is set by the WGMn3:0 to be used as the TOP value, the ICFn Flag is set when the counter
reaches the TOP value.
ICFn is automatically cleared when the Input Capture Interrupt Vector is executed. Alternatively,
ICFn can be cleared by writing a logic one to its bit location.
• Bit 3– OCFnC: Timer/Countern, Output Compare C Match Flag
This flag is set in the timer clock cycle after the counter (TCNTn) value matches the Output
Compare Register C (OCRnC).
Note that a Forced Output Compare (FOCnC) strobe will not set the OCFnC Flag.
OCFnC is automatically cleared when the Output Compare Match C Interrupt Vector is executed.
Alternatively, OCFnC can be cleared by writing a logic one to its bit location.
• Bit 2 – OCFnB: Timer/Counter1, Output Compare B Match Flag
This flag is set in the timer clock cycle after the counter (TCNTn) value matches the Output
Compare Register B (OCRnB).
Note that a Forced Output Compare (FOCnB) strobe will not set the OCFnB Flag.
OCFnB is automatically cleared when the Output Compare Match B Interrupt Vector is executed.
Alternatively, OCFnB can be cleared by writing a logic one to its bit location.
• Bit 1 – OCF1A: Timer/Counter1, Output Compare A Match Flag
This flag is set in the timer clock cycle after the counter (TCNTn value matches the Output Compare
Register A (OCRnA).
Note that a Forced Output Compare (FOCnA) strobe will not set the OCFnA Flag.
OCFnA is automatically cleared when the Output Compare Match A Interrupt Vector is executed.
Alternatively, OCFnA can be cleared by writing a logic one to its bit location.
• Bit 0 – TOVn: Timer/Countern, Overflow Flag
The setting of this flag is dependent of the WGMn3:0 bits setting. In Normal and CTC modes,
the TOVn Flag is set when the timer overflows. Refer to Table 15-4 on page 138 for the TOVn
Flag behavior when using another WGMn3:0 bit setting.
TOVn is automatically cleared when the Timer/Countern Overflow Interrupt Vector is executed.
Alternatively, TOVn can be cleared by writing a logic one to its bit location.145
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
16. 8-bit Timer/Counter2 with PWM and asynchronous operation
Timer/Counter2 is a general purpose, single channel, 8-bit Timer/Counter module. The main
features are:
• Single channel counter
• Clear timer on compare match (auto reload)
• Glitch-free, phase correct pulse width modulator (PWM)
• Frequency generator
• 10-bit clock prescaler
• Overflow and compare match interrupt sources (TOV2, OCF2A and OCF2B)
• Allows clocking from external 32kHz watch crystal independent of the I/O clock
16.1 Overview
A simplified block diagram of the 8-bit Timer/Counter is shown in Figure 16-1. For the actual
placement of I/O pins, see “Pin configurations” on page 3. CPU accessible I/O Registers, including
I/O bits and I/O pins, are shown in bold. The device-specific I/O Register and bit locations
are listed in the “8-bit Timer/Counter register description” on page 156.
The Power Reduction Timer/Counter2 bit, PRTIM2, in “PRR0 – Power Reduction Register 0” on
page 54 must be written to zero to enable Timer/Counter2 module.
Figure 16-1. 8-bit Timer/Counter, block diagram.
Timer/counter
DATA BUS
OCRnA
OCRnB
=
=
TCNTn
Waveform
generation
Waveform
generation
OCnA
OCnB
=
Fixed
TOP
value
Control logic
= 0
TOP BOTTOM
Count
Clear
Direction
TOVn
(int.req.)
OCnA
(int.req.)
OCnB
(int.req.)
TCCRnA TCCRnB
clkTn
ASSRn
Synchronization unit
Prescaler
T/C oscillator
clkI/O
clkASY
asynchronous mode
select (ASn)
Synchronized status flags
TOSC1
TOSC2
Status flags
clkI/O146
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
16.1.1 Registers
The Timer/Counter (TCNT2) and Output Compare Register (OCR2A and OCR2B) are 8-bit registers.
Interrupt request (abbreviated to Int.Req.) signals are all visible in the Timer Interrupt Flag
Register (TIFR2). All interrupts are individually masked with the Timer Interrupt Mask Register
(TIMSK2). TIFR2 and TIMSK2 are not shown in the figure.
The Timer/Counter can be clocked internally, via the prescaler, or asynchronously clocked from
the TOSC1/2 pins, as detailed later in this section. The asynchronous operation is controlled by
the Asynchronous Status Register (ASSR). The Clock Select logic block controls which clock
source the Timer/Counter uses to increment (or decrement) its value. The Timer/Counter is inactive
when no clock source is selected. The output from the Clock Select logic is referred to as the
timer clock (clkT2).
The double buffered Output Compare Register (OCR2A and OCR2B) are compared with the
Timer/Counter value at all times. The result of the compare can be used by the Waveform Generator
to generate a PWM or variable frequency output on the Output Compare pins (OC2A and
OC2B). See “Output Compare unit” on page 147. for details. The compare match event will also
set the Compare Flag (OCF2A or OCF2B) which can be used to generate an Output Compare
interrupt request.
16.1.2 Definitions
Many register and bit references in this document are written in general form. A lower case “n”
replaces the Timer/Counter number, in this case 2. However, when using the register or bit
defines in a program, the precise form must be used, that is, TCNT2 for accessing
Timer/Counter2 counter value and so on.
The definitions in the table below are also used extensively throughout the section.
16.2 Timer/Counter clock sources
The Timer/Counter can be clocked by an internal synchronous or an external asynchronous
clock source. The clock source clkT2 is by default equal to the MCU clock, clkI/O. When the AS2
bit in the ASSR Register is written to logic one, the clock source is taken from the Timer/Counter
Oscillator connected to TOSC1 and TOSC2. For details on asynchronous operation, see “ASSR
– Asynchronous Status Register” on page 161. For details on clock sources and prescaler, see
“Timer/Counter prescaler” on page 164.
16.3 Counter unit
The main part of the 8-bit Timer/Counter is the programmable bi-directional counter unit. Figure
16-2 on page 147 shows a block diagram of the counter and its surrounding environment.
BOTTOM The counter reaches the BOTTOM when it becomes zero (0x00).
MAX The counter reaches its MAXimum when it becomes 0xFF (decimal 255).
TOP The counter reaches the TOP when it becomes equal to the highest value in the
count sequence. The TOP value can be assigned to be the fixed value 0xFF
(MAX) or the value stored in the OCR2A Register. The assignment is dependent
on the mode of operation.147
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 16-2. Counter unit block diagram.
Signal description (internal signals):
count Increment or decrement TCNT2 by 1.
direction Selects between increment and decrement.
clear Clear TCNT2 (set all bits to zero).
clkTn Timer/Counter clock, referred to as clkT2 in the following.
top Signalizes that TCNT2 has reached maximum value.
bottom Signalizes that TCNT2 has reached minimum value (zero).
Depending on the mode of operation used, the counter is cleared, incremented, or decremented
at each timer clock (clkT2). clkT2 can be generated from an external or internal clock source,
selected by the Clock Select bits (CS22:0). When no clock source is selected (CS22:0 = 0) the
timer is stopped. However, the TCNT2 value can be accessed by the CPU, regardless of
whether clkT2 is present or not. A CPU write overrides (has priority over) all counter clear or
count operations.
The counting sequence is determined by the setting of the WGM21 and WGM20 bits located in
the Timer/Counter Control Register (TCCR2A) and the WGM22 located in the Timer/Counter
Control Register B (TCCR2B). There are close connections between how the counter behaves
(counts) and how waveforms are generated on the Output Compare outputs OC2A and OC2B.
For more details about advanced counting sequences and waveform generation, see “Modes of
operation” on page 150.
The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV2) is set according to the mode of operation selected by
the WGM22:0 bits. TOV2 can be used for generating a CPU interrupt.
16.4 Output Compare unit
The 8-bit comparator continuously compares TCNT2 with the Output Compare Register
(OCR2A and OCR2B). Whenever TCNT2 equals OCR2A or OCR2B, the comparator signals a
match. A match will set the Output Compare Flag (OCF2A or OCF2B) at the next timer clock
cycle. If the corresponding interrupt is enabled, the Output Compare Flag generates an Output
Compare interrupt. The Output Compare Flag is automatically cleared when the interrupt is executed.
Alternatively, the Output Compare Flag can be cleared by software by writing a logical
one to its I/O bit location. The Waveform Generator uses the match signal to generate an output
according to operating mode set by the WGM22:0 bits and Compare Output mode (COM2x1:0)
bits. The max and bottom signals are used by the Waveform Generator for handling the special
cases of the extreme values in some modes of operation (“Modes of operation” on page 150).
Figure 15-10 on page 134 shows a block diagram of the Output Compare unit.
DATA BUS
TCNTn Control logic
count
TOVn
(int.req.)
bottom top
direction
clear
TOSC1
T/C
oscillator
TOSC2
Prescaler
clkI/O
clk Tn148
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 16-3. Output Compare unit, block diagram.
The OCR2x Register is double buffered when using any of the Pulse Width Modulation (PWM)
modes. For the Normal and Clear Timer on Compare (CTC) modes of operation, the double
buffering is disabled. The double buffering synchronizes the update of the OCR2x Compare
Register to either top or bottom of the counting sequence. The synchronization prevents the
occurrence of odd-length, non-symmetrical PWM pulses, thereby making the output glitch-free.
The OCR2x Register access may seem complex, but this is not case. When the double buffering
is enabled, the CPU has access to the OCR2x Buffer Register, and if double buffering is disabled
the CPU will access the OCR2x directly.
16.4.1 Force output compare
In non-PWM waveform generation modes, the match output of the comparator can be forced by
writing a one to the Force Output Compare (FOC2x) bit. Forcing compare match will not set the
OCF2x Flag or reload/clear the timer, but the OC2x pin will be updated as if a real compare
match had occurred (the COM2x1:0 bits settings define whether the OC2x pin is set, cleared or
toggled).
16.4.2 Compare Match Blocking by TCNT2 Write
All CPU write operations to the TCNT2 Register will block any compare match that occurs in the
next timer clock cycle, even when the timer is stopped. This feature allows OCR2x to be initialized
to the same value as TCNT2 without triggering an interrupt when the Timer/Counter clock is
enabled.
16.4.3 Using the Output Compare unit
Since writing TCNT2 in any mode of operation will block all compare matches for one timer clock
cycle, there are risks involved when changing TCNT2 when using the Output Compare channel,
independently of whether the Timer/Counter is running or not. If the value written to TCNT2
equals the OCR2x value, the compare match will be missed, resulting in incorrect waveform
generation. Similarly, do not write the TCNT2 value equal to BOTTOM when the counter is
downcounting.
OCFnx (int.req.)
= (8-bit comparator)
OCRnx
OCnx
DATA BUS
TCNTn
WGMn1:0
Waveform generator
top
FOCn
COMnX1:0
bottom149
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
The setup of the OC2x should be performed before setting the Data Direction Register for the
port pin to output. The easiest way of setting the OC2x value is to use the Force Output Compare
(FOC2x) strobe bit in Normal mode. The OC2x Register keeps its value even when
changing between Waveform Generation modes.
Be aware that the COM2x1:0 bits are not double buffered together with the compare value.
Changing the COM2x1:0 bits will take effect immediately.
16.5 Compare Match Output unit
The Compare Output mode (COM2x1:0) bits have two functions. The Waveform Generator uses
the COM2x1:0 bits for defining the Output Compare (OC2x) state at the next compare match.
Also, the COM2x1:0 bits control the OC2x pin output source. Figure 16-4 shows a simplified
schematic of the logic affected by the COM2x1:0 bit setting. The I/O Registers, I/O bits, and I/O
pins in the figure are shown in bold. Only the parts of the general I/O Port Control Registers
(DDR and PORT) that are affected by the COM2x1:0 bits are shown. When referring to the
OC2x state, the reference is for the internal OC2x Register, not the OC2x pin.
Figure 16-4. Compare Match Output unit, schematic.
The general I/O port function is overridden by the Output Compare (OC2x) from the Waveform
Generator if either of the COM2x1:0 bits are set. However, the OC2x pin direction (input or output)
is still controlled by the Data Direction Register (DDR) for the port pin. The Data Direction
Register bit for the OC2x pin (DDR_OC2x) must be set as output before the OC2x value is visible
on the pin. The port override function is independent of the Waveform Generation mode.
The design of the Output Compare pin logic allows initialization of the OC2x state before the output
is enabled. Note that some COM2x1:0 bit settings are reserved for certain modes of
operation. See “8-bit Timer/Counter register description” on page 156.
PORT
DDR
D Q
D Q
OCnx
OCnx pin
D Q Waveform
generator
COMnx1
COMnx0
0
1
DATA BU
S
FOCnx
clkI/O150
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
16.5.1 Compare Output mode and Waveform generating
The Waveform Generator uses the COM2x1:0 bits differently in normal, CTC, and PWM modes.
For all modes, setting the COM2x1:0 = 0 tells the Waveform Generator that no action on the
OC2x Register is to be performed on the next compare match. For compare output actions in the
non-PWM modes refer to Table 16-4 on page 157. For fast PWM mode, refer to Table 16-5 on
page 158, and for phase correct PWM refer to Table 16-6 on page 158.
A change of the COM2x1:0 bits state will have effect at the first compare match after the bits are
written. For non-PWM modes, the action can be forced to have immediate effect by using the
FOC2x strobe bits.
16.6 Modes of operation
The mode of operation, that is, the behavior of the Timer/Counter and the Output Compare pins,
is defined by the combination of the Waveform Generation mode (WGM22:0) and Compare Output
mode (COM2x1:0) bits. The Compare Output mode bits do not affect the counting sequence,
while the Waveform Generation mode bits do. The COM2x1:0 bits control whether the PWM output
generated should be inverted or not (inverted or non-inverted PWM). For non-PWM modes
the COM2x1:0 bits control whether the output should be set, cleared, or toggled at a compare
match (see “Compare Match Output unit” on page 149).
For detailed timing information refer to Section “Timer/Counter timing diagrams” on page 154.
16.6.1 Normal mode
The simplest mode of operation is the Normal mode (WGM22:0 = 0). In this mode the counting
direction is always up (incrementing), and no counter clear is performed. The counter simply
overruns when it passes its maximum 8-bit value (TOP = 0xFF) and then restarts from the bottom
(0x00). In normal operation the Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV2) will be set in the same
timer clock cycle as the TCNT2 becomes zero. The TOV2 Flag in this case behaves like a ninth
bit, except that it is only set, not cleared. However, combined with the timer overflow interrupt
that automatically clears the TOV2 Flag, the timer resolution can be increased by software.
There are no special cases to consider in the Normal mode, a new counter value can be written
anytime.
The Output Compare unit can be used to generate interrupts at some given time. Using the Output
Compare to generate waveforms in Normal mode is not recommended, since this will
occupy too much of the CPU time.
16.6.2 Clear Timer on Compare Match (CTC) mode
In Clear Timer on Compare or CTC mode (WGM22:0 = 2), the OCR2A Register is used to
manipulate the counter resolution. In CTC mode the counter is cleared to zero when the counter
value (TCNT2) matches the OCR2A. The OCR2A defines the top value for the counter, hence
also its resolution. This mode allows greater control of the compare match output frequency. It
also simplifies the operation of counting external events.
The timing diagram for the CTC mode is shown in Table 16-5 on page 151. The counter value
(TCNT2) increases until a compare match occurs between TCNT2 and OCR2A, and then counter
(TCNT2) is cleared.151
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 16-5. CTC mode, timing diagram.
An interrupt can be generated each time the counter value reaches the TOP value by using the
OCF2A Flag. If the interrupt is enabled, the interrupt handler routine can be used for updating
the TOP value. However, changing TOP to a value close to BOTTOM when the counter is running
with none or a low prescaler value must be done with care since the CTC mode does not
have the double buffering feature. If the new value written to OCR2A is lower than the current
value of TCNT2, the counter will miss the compare match. The counter will then have to count to
its maximum value (0xFF) and wrap around starting at 0x00 before the compare match can
occur.
For generating a waveform output in CTC mode, the OC2A output can be set to toggle its logical
level on each compare match by setting the Compare Output mode bits to toggle mode
(COM2A1:0 = 1). The OC2A value will not be visible on the port pin unless the data direction for
the pin is set to output. The waveform generated will have a maximum frequency of fOC2A =
fclk_I/O/2 when OCR2A is set to zero (0x00). The waveform frequency is defined by the following
equation:
The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 32, 64, 128, 256, or 1024).
As for the Normal mode of operation, the TOV2 Flag is set in the same timer clock cycle that the
counter counts from MAX to 0x00.
16.6.3 Fast PWM mode
The fast Pulse Width Modulation or fast PWM mode (WGM22:0 = 3 or 7) provides a high frequency
PWM waveform generation option. The fast PWM differs from the other PWM option by
its single-slope operation. The counter counts from BOTTOM to TOP then restarts from BOTTOM.
TOP is defined as 0xFF when WGM22:0 = 3, and OCR2A when MGM22:0 = 7. In noninverting
Compare Output mode, the Output Compare (OC2x) is cleared on the compare match
between TCNT2 and OCR2x, and set at BOTTOM. In inverting Compare Output mode, the output
is set on compare match and cleared at BOTTOM. Due to the single-slope operation, the
operating frequency of the fast PWM mode can be twice as high as the phase correct PWM
mode that uses dual-slope operation. This high frequency makes the fast PWM mode well suited
for power regulation, rectification, and DAC applications. High frequency allows physically small
sized external components (coils, capacitors), and therefore reduces total system cost.
TCNTn
OCnx
(Toggle)
OCnx Interrupt Flag Set
Period 1 2 3 4
(COMnx1:0 = 1)
f
OCnx
f
clk_I/O
2 ⋅ ⋅ N ( ) 1 + OCRnx = -------------------------------------------------152
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
In fast PWM mode, the counter is incremented until the counter value matches the TOP value.
The counter is then cleared at the following timer clock cycle. The timing diagram for the fast
PWM mode is shown in Figure 16-6. The TCNT2 value is in the timing diagram shown as a histogram
for illustrating the single-slope operation. The diagram includes non-inverted and
inverted PWM outputs. The small horizontal line marks on the TCNT2 slopes represent compare
matches between OCR2x and TCNT2.
Figure 16-6. Fast PWM mode, timing diagram.
The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV2) is set each time the counter reaches TOP. If the interrupt
is enabled, the interrupt handler routine can be used for updating the compare value.
In fast PWM mode, the compare unit allows generation of PWM waveforms on the OC2x pin.
Setting the COM2x1:0 bits to two will produce a non-inverted PWM and an inverted PWM output
can be generated by setting the COM2x1:0 to three. TOP is defined as 0xFF when WGM2:0 = 3,
and OCR2A when WGM2:0 = 7 (See Table 16-2 on page 157). The actual OC2x value will only
be visible on the port pin if the data direction for the port pin is set as output. The PWM waveform
is generated by setting (or clearing) the OC2x Register at the compare match between
OCR2x and TCNT2, and clearing (or setting) the OC2x Register at the timer clock cycle the
counter is cleared (changes from TOP to BOTTOM).
The PWM frequency for the output can be calculated by the following equation:
The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 32, 64, 128, 256, or 1024).
The extreme values for the OCR2A Register represent special cases when generating a PWM
waveform output in the fast PWM mode. If the OCR2A is set equal to BOTTOM, the output will
be a narrow spike for each MAX+1 timer clock cycle. Setting the OCR2A equal to MAX will result
in a constantly high or low output (depending on the polarity of the output set by the COM2A1:0
bits.)
A frequency (with 50% duty cycle) waveform output in fast PWM mode can be achieved by setting
OC2x to toggle its logical level on each compare match (COM2x1:0 = 1). The waveform
TCNTn
OCRnx Update and
TOVn Interrupt Flag Set
Period 1 2 3
OCnx
OCnx
(COMnx1:0 = 2)
(COMnx1:0 = 3)
OCRnx Interrupt Flag Set
4 5 6 7
f
OCnxPWM
f
clk_I/O
N ⋅ 256 = ------------------153
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
generated will have a maximum frequency of foc2 = fclk_I/O/2 when OCR2A is set to zero. This feature
is similar to the OC2A toggle in CTC mode, except the double buffer feature of the Output
Compare unit is enabled in the fast PWM mode.
16.6.4 Phase correct PWM mode
The phase correct PWM mode (WGM22:0 = 1 or 5) provides a high resolution phase correct
PWM waveform generation option. The phase correct PWM mode is based on a dual-slope
operation. The counter counts repeatedly from BOTTOM to TOP and then from TOP to BOTTOM.
TOP is defined as 0xFF when WGM22:0 = 1, and OCR2A when MGM22:0 = 5. In noninverting
Compare Output mode, the Output Compare (OC2x) is cleared on the compare match
between TCNT2 and OCR2x while upcounting, and set on the compare match while downcounting.
In inverting Output Compare mode, the operation is inverted. The dual-slope operation has
lower maximum operation frequency than single slope operation. However, due to the symmetric
feature of the dual-slope PWM modes, these modes are preferred for motor control
applications.
In phase correct PWM mode the counter is incremented until the counter value matches TOP.
When the counter reaches TOP, it changes the count direction. The TCNT2 value will be equal
to TOP for one timer clock cycle. The timing diagram for the phase correct PWM mode is shown
on Figure 16-7. The TCNT2 value is in the timing diagram shown as a histogram for illustrating
the dual-slope operation. The diagram includes non-inverted and inverted PWM outputs. The
small horizontal line marks on the TCNT2 slopes represent compare matches between OCR2x
and TCNT2.
Figure 16-7. Phase correct PWM mode, timing diagram.
The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV2) is set each time the counter reaches BOTTOM. The
Interrupt Flag can be used to generate an interrupt each time the counter reaches the BOTTOM
value.
In phase correct PWM mode, the compare unit allows generation of PWM waveforms on the
OC2x pin. Setting the COM2x1:0 bits to two will produce a non-inverted PWM. An inverted PWM
TOVn Interrupt Flag Set
OCnx Interrupt Flag Set
1 2 3
TCNTn
Period
OCnx
OCnx
(COMnx1:0 = 2)
(COMnx1:0 = 3)
OCRnx update154
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
output can be generated by setting the COM2x1:0 to three. TOP is defined as 0xFF when
WGM2:0 = 3, and OCR2A when MGM2:0 = 7 (see Table 16-3 on page 157). The actual OC2x
value will only be visible on the port pin if the data direction for the port pin is set as output. The
PWM waveform is generated by clearing (or setting) the OC2x Register at the compare match
between OCR2x and TCNT2 when the counter increments, and setting (or clearing) the OC2x
Register at compare match between OCR2x and TCNT2 when the counter decrements. The
PWM frequency for the output when using phase correct PWM can be calculated by the following
equation:
The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 32, 64, 128, 256, or 1024).
The extreme values for the OCR2A Register represent special cases when generating a PWM
waveform output in the phase correct PWM mode. If the OCR2A is set equal to BOTTOM, the
output will be continuously low and if set equal to MAX the output will be continuously high for
non-inverted PWM mode. For inverted PWM the output will have the opposite logic values.
At the very start of period 2 in Figure 16-7 on page 153 OCnx has a transition from high to low
even though there is no Compare Match. The point of this transition is to guarantee symmetry
around BOTTOM. There are two cases that give a transition without Compare Match.
• OCR2A changes its value from MAX, like in Figure 16-7 on page 153. When the OCR2A
value is MAX the OCn pin value is the same as the result of a down-counting compare match.
To ensure symmetry around BOTTOM the OCn value at MAX must correspond to the result
of an up-counting Compare Match
• The timer starts counting from a value higher than the one in OCR2A, and for that reason
misses the Compare Match and hence the OCn change that would have happened on the
way up
16.7 Timer/Counter timing diagrams
The following figures show the Timer/Counter in synchronous mode, and the timer clock (clkT2)
is therefore shown as a clock enable signal. In asynchronous mode, clkI/O should be replaced by
the Timer/Counter Oscillator clock. The figures include information on when Interrupt Flags are
set. Figure 16-8 contains timing data for basic Timer/Counter operation. The figure shows the
count sequence close to the MAX value in all modes other than phase correct PWM mode.
Figure 16-8. Timer/Counter timing diagram, no prescaling.
f
OCnxPCPWM
f
clk_I/O
N ⋅ 510 = ------------------
clkTn
(clkI/O/1)
TOVn
clkI/O
TCNTn MAX - 1 MAX BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1155
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 16-9 shows the same timing data, but with the prescaler enabled.
Figure 16-9. Timer/Counter timing diagram, with prescaler (fclk_I/O/8).
Figure 16-10 shows the setting of OCF2A in all modes except CTC mode.
Figure 16-10. Timer/Counter timing diagram, setting of OCF2A, with prescaler (fclk_I/O/8).
Figure 16-11 on page 156 shows the setting of OCF2A and the clearing of TCNT2 in CTC mode.
TOVn
TCNTn MAX - 1 MAX BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1
clkI/O
clkTn
(clkI/O/8)
OCFnx
OCRnx
TCNTn
OCRnx value
OCRnx - 1 OCRnx OCRnx + 1 OCRnx + 2
clkI/O
clkTn
(clkI/O/8)156
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 16-11. Timer/Counter timing diagram, clear timer on compare match mode, with prescaler
(fclk_I/O/8).
16.8 8-bit Timer/Counter register description
16.8.1 TCCR2A – Timer/Counter Control Register A
• Bits 7:6 – COM2A1:0: Compare Match Output A mode
These bits control the Output Compare pin (OC2A) behavior. If one or both of the COM2A1:0
bits are set, the OC2A output overrides the normal port functionality of the I/O pin it is connected
to. However, note that the Data Direction Register (DDR) bit corresponding to the OC2A pin
must be set in order to enable the output driver.
When OC2A is connected to the pin, the function of the COM2A1:0 bits depends on the
WGM22:0 bit setting. Table 16-1 shows the COM2A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM22:0 bits
are set to a normal or CTC mode (non-PWM).
OCFnx
OCRnx
TCNTn
(CTC)
TOP
TOP - 1 TOP BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1
clkI/O
clkTn
(clkI/O/8)
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
COM2A1 COM2A0 COM2B1 COM2B0 – – WGM21 WGM20 TCCR2A
Read/write R/W R/W R/W R/W R R R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Table 16-1. Compare output mode, non-PWM mode.
COM2A1 COM2A0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC2A disconnected
0 1 Toggle OC2A on Compare Match
1 0 Clear OC2A on Compare Match
1 1 Set OC2A on Compare Match157
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Table 16-2 shows the COM2A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM21:0 bits are set to fast PWM
mode.
Note: 1. A special case occurs when OCR2A equals TOP and COM2A1 is set. In this case, the Compare
Match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See “Fast PWM mode” on page 151
for more details.
Table 16-3 shows the COM2A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM22:0 bits are set to phase correct
PWM mode.
Note: 1. A special case occurs when OCR2A equals TOP and COM2A1 is set. In this case, the Compare
Match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See “Phase correct PWM mode” on
page 153 for more details.
• Bits 5:4 – COM2B1:0: Compare Match Output B mode
These bits control the Output Compare pin (OC2B) behavior. If one or both of the COM2B1:0
bits are set, the OC2B output overrides the normal port functionality of the I/O pin it is connected
to. However, note that the Data Direction Register (DDR) bit corresponding to the OC2B pin
must be set in order to enable the output driver.
When OC2B is connected to the pin, the function of the COM2B1:0 bits depends on the
WGM22:0 bit setting. Table 16-4 shows the COM2B1:0 bit functionality when the WGM22:0 bits
are set to a normal or CTC mode (non-PWM).
Table 16-2. Compare Output mode, fast PWM mode (1).
COM2A1 COM2A0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC2A disconnected
0 1 WGM22 = 0: Normal Port Operation, OC0A Disconnected.
WGM22 = 1: Toggle OC2A on Compare Match.
1 0 Clear OC2A on Compare Match, set OC2A at TOP
1 1 Set OC2A on Compare Match, clear OC2A at TOP
Table 16-3. Compare Output mode, phase correct PWM mode (1).
COM2A1 COM2A0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC2A disconnected
0 1 WGM22 = 0: Normal Port Operation, OC2A Disconnected.
WGM22 = 1: Toggle OC2A on Compare Match.
1 0 Clear OC2A on Compare Match when up-counting. Set OC2A on Compare
Match when down-counting.
1 1 Set OC2A on Compare Match when up-counting. Clear OC2A on Compare
Match when down-counting.
Table 16-4. Compare Output mode, non-PWM mode.
COM2B1 COM2B0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC2B disconnected
0 1 Toggle OC2B on Compare Match
1 0 Clear OC2B on Compare Match
1 1 Set OC2B on Compare Match158
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Table 16-5 shows the COM2B1:0 bit functionality when the WGM22:0 bits are set to fast PWM
mode.
Note: 1. A special case occurs when OCR2B equals TOP and COM2B1 is set. In this case, the Compare
Match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See “Fast PWM mode” on page 151
for more details.
Table 16-6 shows the COM2B1:0 bit functionality when the WGM22:0 bits are set to phase correct
PWM mode.
Note: 1. A special case occurs when OCR2B equals TOP and COM2B1 is set. In this case, the Compare
Match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See “Phase correct PWM mode” on
page 153 for more details.
• Bits 3, 2 – Res: Reserved bits
These bits are reserved bits in the Atmel AT90USB64/128 and will always read as zero.
• Bits 1:0 – WGM21:0: Waveform Generation mode
Combined with the WGM22 bit found in the TCCR2B Register, these bits control the counting
sequence of the counter, the source for maximum (TOP) counter value, and what type of waveform
generation to be used, see Table 16-7. Modes of operation supported by the Timer/Counter
unit are: Normal mode (counter), Clear Timer on Compare Match (CTC) mode, and two types of
Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) modes (see “Modes of operation” on page 150).
Table 16-5. Compare Output mode, fast PWM mode (1).
COM2B1 COM2B0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC2B disconnected.
0 1 Reserved
1 0 Clear OC2B on Compare Match, set OC2B at TOP
1 1 Set OC2B on Compare Match, clear OC2B at TOP
Table 16-6. Compare Output mode, phase correct PWM mode (1).
COM2B1 COM2B0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC2B disconnected
0 1 Reserved
1 0 Clear OC2B on Compare Match when up-counting. Set OC2B on Compare
Match when down-counting
1 1 Set OC2B on Compare Match when up-counting. Clear OC2B on Compare
Match when down-counting
Table 16-7. Waveform Generation mode bit description.
Mode WGM2 WGM1 WGM0
Timer/Counter
mode of operation TOP
Update of
OCRx at
TOV flag
set on (1)(2)
0 0 0 0 Normal 0xFF Immediate MAX
1 0 0 1 PWM, phase correct 0xFF TOP BOTTOM
2 0 1 0 CTC OCRA Immediate MAX
3 0 1 1 Fast PWM 0xFF TOP MAX
4 1 0 0 Reserved – – –159
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Notes: 1. MAX= 0xFF
2. BOTTOM= 0x00
16.8.2 TCCR2B – Timer/Counter Control Register B
• Bit 7 – FOC2A: Force Output Compare A
The FOC2A bit is only active when the WGM bits specify a non-PWM mode.
However, for ensuring compatibility with future devices, this bit must be set to zero when
TCCR2B is written when operating in PWM mode. When writing a logical one to the FOC2A bit,
an immediate Compare Match is forced on the Waveform Generation unit. The OC2A output is
changed according to its COM2A1:0 bits setting. Note that the FOC2A bit is implemented as a
strobe. Therefore it is the value present in the COM2A1:0 bits that determines the effect of the
forced compare.
A FOC2A strobe will not generate any interrupt, nor will it clear the timer in CTC mode using
OCR2A as TOP.
The FOC2A bit is always read as zero.
• Bit 6 – FOC2B: Force Output Compare B
The FOC2B bit is only active when the WGM bits specify a non-PWM mode.
However, for ensuring compatibility with future devices, this bit must be set to zero when
TCCR2B is written when operating in PWM mode. When writing a logical one to the FOC2B bit,
an immediate Compare Match is forced on the Waveform Generation unit. The OC2B output is
changed according to its COM2B1:0 bits setting. Note that the FOC2B bit is implemented as a
strobe. Therefore it is the value present in the COM2B1:0 bits that determines the effect of the
forced compare.
A FOC2B strobe will not generate any interrupt, nor will it clear the timer in CTC mode using
OCR2B as TOP.
The FOC2B bit is always read as zero.
• Bits 5:4 – Res: Reserved bits
These bits are reserved bits in the AT90USB64/128 and will always read as zero.
• Bit 3 – WGM22: Waveform Generation mode
See the description in the “TCCR2A – Timer/Counter Control Register A” on page 156.
5 1 0 1 PWM, phase correct OCRA TOP BOTTOM
6 1 1 0 Reserved – – –
7 1 1 1 Fast PWM OCRA TOP TOP
Table 16-7. Waveform Generation mode bit description. (Continued)
Mode WGM2 WGM1 WGM0
Timer/Counter
mode of operation TOP
Update of
OCRx at
TOV flag
set on (1)(2)
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
FOC2A FOC2B – – WGM22 CS22 CS21 CS20 TCCR2B
Read/write W W R R R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0160
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
• Bit 2:0 – CS22:0: Clock Select
The three Clock Select bits select the clock source to be used by the Timer/Counter, see Table
16-8.
16.8.3 TCNT2 – Timer/Counter Register
The Timer/Counter Register gives direct access, both for read and write operations, to the
Timer/Counter unit 8-bit counter. Writing to the TCNT2 Register blocks (removes) the Compare
Match on the following timer clock. Modifying the counter (TCNT2) while the counter is running,
introduces a risk of missing a Compare Match between TCNT2 and the OCR2x Registers.
16.8.4 OCR2A – Output Compare Register A
The Output Compare Register A contains an 8-bit value that is continuously compared with the
counter value (TCNT2). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare interrupt, or to
generate a waveform output on the OC2A pin.
16.8.5 OCR2B – Output Compare Register B
The Output Compare Register B contains an 8-bit value that is continuously compared with the
counter value (TCNT2). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare interrupt, or to
generate a waveform output on the OC2B pin.
Table 16-8. Clock Select bit description.
CS22 CS21 CS20 Description
0 0 0 No clock source (Timer/Counter stopped)
0 0 1 clkT2S/(no prescaling)
0 1 0 clkT2S/8 (from prescaler)
0 1 1 clkT2S/32 (from prescaler)
1 0 0 clkT2S/64 (from prescaler)
1 0 1 clkT2S/128 (from prescaler)
1 1 0 clkT2S/256 (from prescaler)
1 1 1 clkT2S/1024 (from prescaler)
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TCNT2[7:0] TCNT2
Read/write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
OCR2A[7:0] OCR2A
Read/write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
OCR2B[7:0] OCR2B
Read/write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0161
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
16.9 Asynchronous operation of the Timer/Counter
16.9.1 ASSR – Asynchronous Status Register
• Bit 6 – EXCLK: Enable External Clock Input
When EXCLK is written to one, and asynchronous clock is selected, the external clock input buffer
is enabled and an external clock can be input on Timer Oscillator 1 (TOSC1) pin instead of a
32 kHz crystal. Writing to EXCLK should be done before asynchronous operation is selected.
Note that the crystal Oscillator will only run when this bit is zero.
• Bit 5 – AS2: Asynchronous Timer/Counter2
When AS2 is written to zero, Timer/Counter2 is clocked from the I/O clock, clkI/O. When AS2 is
written to one, Timer/Counter2 is clocked from a crystal Oscillator connected to the Timer Oscillator
1 (TOSC1) pin. When the value of AS2 is changed, the contents of TCNT2, OCR2A,
OCR2B, TCCR2A and TCCR2B might be corrupted.
• Bit 4 – TCN2UB: Timer/Counter2 Update Busy
When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously and TCNT2 is written, this bit becomes set.
When TCNT2 has been updated from the temporary storage register, this bit is cleared by hardware.
A logical zero in this bit indicates that TCNT2 is ready to be updated with a new value.
• Bit 3 – OCR2AUB: Output Compare Register2 Update Busy
When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously and OCR2A is written, this bit becomes set.
When OCR2A has been updated from the temporary storage register, this bit is cleared by hardware.
A logical zero in this bit indicates that OCR2A is ready to be updated with a new value.
• Bit 2 – OCR2BUB: Output Compare Register2 Update Busy
When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously and OCR2B is written, this bit becomes set.
When OCR2B has been updated from the temporary storage register, this bit is cleared by hardware.
A logical zero in this bit indicates that OCR2B is ready to be updated with a new value.
• Bit 1 – TCR2AUB: Timer/Counter Control Register2 Update Busy
When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously and TCCR2A is written, this bit becomes set.
When TCCR2A has been updated from the temporary storage register, this bit is cleared by
hardware. A logical zero in this bit indicates that TCCR2A is ready to be updated with a new
value.
• Bit 0 – TCR2BUB: Timer/Counter Control Register2 Update Busy
When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously and TCCR2B is written, this bit becomes set.
When TCCR2B has been updated from the temporary storage register, this bit is cleared by
hardware. A logical zero in this bit indicates that TCCR2B is ready to be updated with a new
value.
If a write is performed to any of the five Timer/Counter2 Registers while its update busy flag is
set, the updated value might get corrupted and cause an unintentional interrupt to occur.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
– EXCLK AS2 TCN2UB OCR2AUB OCR2BUB TCR2AUB TCR2BUB ASSR
Read/write R R/W R/W R R R R R
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0162
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
The mechanisms for reading TCNT2, OCR2A, OCR2B, TCCR2A and TCCR2B are different.
When reading TCNT2, the actual timer value is read. When reading OCR2A, OCR2B, TCCR2A
and TCCR2B the value in the temporary storage register is read.
16.9.2 Asynchronous operation of Timer/Counter2
When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously, some considerations must be taken.
• Warning: When switching between asynchronous and synchronous clocking of
Timer/Counter2, the Timer Registers TCNT2, OCR2x, and TCCR2x might be corrupted. A
safe procedure for switching clock source is:
a. Disable the Timer/Counter2 interrupts by clearing OCIE2x and TOIE2.
b. Select clock source by setting AS2 as appropriate.
c. Write new values to TCNT2, OCR2x, and TCCR2x.
d. To switch to asynchronous operation: Wait for TCN2UB, OCR2xUB, and TCR2xUB.
e. Clear the Timer/Counter2 Interrupt Flags.
f. Enable interrupts, if needed.
• The CPU main clock frequency must be more than four times the Oscillator frequency
• When writing to one of the registers TCNT2, OCR2x, or TCCR2x, the value is transferred to a
temporary register, and latched after two positive edges on TOSC1. The user should not
write a new value before the contents of the temporary register have been transferred to its
destination. Each of the five mentioned registers have their individual temporary register,
which means that, for example, writing to TCNT2 does not disturb an OCR2x write in
progress. To detect that a transfer to the destination register has taken place, the
Asynchronous Status Register – ASSR has been implemented
• When entering Power-save or ADC Noise Reduction mode after having written to TCNT2,
OCR2x, or TCCR2x, the user must wait until the written register has been updated if
Timer/Counter2 is used to wake up the device. Otherwise, the MCU will enter sleep mode
before the changes are effective. This is particularly important if any of the Output Compare2
interrupt is used to wake up the device, since the Output Compare function is disabled during
writing to OCR2x or TCNT2. If the write cycle is not finished, and the MCU enters sleep mode
before the corresponding OCR2xUB bit returns to zero, the device will never receive a
compare match interrupt, and the MCU will not wake up
• If Timer/Counter2 is used to wake the device up from Power-save or ADC Noise Reduction
mode, precautions must be taken if the user wants to re-enter one of these modes: The
interrupt logic needs one TOSC1 cycle to be reset. If the time between wake-up and reentering
sleep mode is less than one TOSC1 cycle, the interrupt will not occur, and the
device will fail to wake up. If the user is in doubt whether the time before re-entering Powersave
or ADC Noise Reduction mode is sufficient, the following algorithm can be used to
ensure that one TOSC1 cycle has elapsed:
a. Write a value to TCCR2x, TCNT2, or OCR2x.
b. Wait until the corresponding Update Busy Flag in ASSR returns to zero.
c. Enter Power-save or ADC Noise Reduction mode.
• When the asynchronous operation is selected, the 32.768kHz Oscillator for Timer/Counter2
is always running, except in Power-down and Standby modes. After a Power-up Reset or
wake-up from Power-down or Standby mode, the user should be aware of the fact that this
Oscillator might take as long as one second to stabilize. The user is advised to wait for at
least one second before using Timer/Counter2 after power-up or wake-up from Power-down
or Standby mode. The contents of all Timer/Counter2 Registers must be considered lost after 163
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
a wake-up from Power-down or Standby mode due to unstable clock signal upon start-up, no
matter whether the Oscillator is in use or a clock signal is applied to the TOSC1 pin
• Description of wake up from Power-save or ADC Noise Reduction mode when the timer is
clocked asynchronously: When the interrupt condition is met, the wake up process is started
on the following cycle of the timer clock, that is, the timer is always advanced by at least one
before the processor can read the counter value. After wake-up, the MCU is halted for four
cycles, it executes the interrupt routine, and resumes execution from the instruction following
SLEEP
• Reading of the TCNT2 Register shortly after wake-up from Power-save may give an incorrect
result. Since TCNT2 is clocked on the asynchronous TOSC clock, reading TCNT2 must be
done through a register synchronized to the internal I/O clock domain. Synchronization takes
place for every rising TOSC1 edge. When waking up from Power-save mode, and the I/O
clock (clkI/O) again becomes active, TCNT2 will read as the previous value (before entering
sleep) until the next rising TOSC1 edge. The phase of the TOSC clock after waking up from
Power-save mode is essentially unpredictable, as it depends on the wake-up time. The
recommended procedure for reading TCNT2 is thus as follows:
a. Write any value to either of the registers OCR2x or TCCR2x.
b. Wait for the corresponding Update Busy Flag to be cleared.
c. Read TCNT2.
• During asynchronous operation, the synchronization of the Interrupt Flags for the
asynchronous timer takes 3 processor cycles plus one timer cycle. The timer is therefore
advanced by at least one before the processor can read the timer value causing the setting of
the Interrupt Flag. The Output Compare pin is changed on the timer clock and is not
synchronized to the processor clock
16.9.3 TIMSK2 – Timer/Counter2 Interrupt Mask Register
• Bit 2 – OCIE2B: Timer/Counter2 Output Compare Match B Interrupt Enable
When the OCIE2B bit is written to one and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the
Timer/Counter2 Compare Match B interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed
if a compare match in Timer/Counter2 occurs, that is, when the OCF2B bit is set in the
Timer/Counter2 Interrupt Flag Register – TIFR2.
• Bit 1 – OCIE2A: Timer/Counter2 Output Compare Match A Interrupt Enable
When the OCIE2A bit is written to one and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the
Timer/Counter2 Compare Match A interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed
if a compare match in Timer/Counter2 occurs, that is, when the OCF2A bit is set in the
Timer/Counter2 Interrupt Flag Register – TIFR2.
• Bit 0 – TOIE2: Timer/Counter2 Overflow Interrupt Enable
When the TOIE2 bit is written to one and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the
Timer/Counter2 Overflow interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed if an
overflow in Timer/Counter2 occurs, that is, when the TOV2 bit is set in the Timer/Counter2 Interrupt
Flag Register – TIFR2.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
– – – – – OCIE2B OCIE2A TOIE2 TIMSK2
Read/write R R R R R R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0164
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
16.9.4 TIFR2 – Timer/Counter2 Interrupt Flag Register
• Bit 2 – OCF2B: Output Compare Flag 2 B
The OCF2B bit is set (one) when a compare match occurs between the Timer/Counter2 and the
data in OCR2B – Output Compare Register2. OCF2B is cleared by hardware when executing
the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, OCF2B is cleared by writing a logic
one to the flag. When the I-bit in SREG, OCIE2B (Timer/Counter2 Compare match Interrupt
Enable), and OCF2B are set (one), the Timer/Counter2 Compare match Interrupt is executed.
• Bit 1 – OCF2A: Output Compare Flag 2 A
The OCF2A bit is set (one) when a compare match occurs between the Timer/Counter2 and the
data in OCR2A – Output Compare Register2. OCF2A is cleared by hardware when executing
the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, OCF2A is cleared by writing a logic
one to the flag. When the I-bit in SREG, OCIE2A (Timer/Counter2 Compare match Interrupt
Enable), and OCF2A are set (one), the Timer/Counter2 Compare match Interrupt is executed.
• Bit 0 – TOV2: Timer/Counter2 Overflow Flag
The TOV2 bit is set (one) when an overflow occurs in Timer/Counter2. TOV2 is cleared by hardware
when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, TOV2 is cleared
by writing a logic one to the flag. When the SREG I-bit, TOIE2A (Timer/Counter2 Overflow Interrupt
Enable), and TOV2 are set (one), the Timer/Counter2 Overflow interrupt is executed. In
PWM mode, this bit is set when Timer/Counter2 changes counting direction at 0x00.
16.10 Timer/Counter prescaler
Figure 16-12. Prescaler for Timer/Counter2.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
– – – – – OCF2B OCF2A TOV2 TIFR2
Read/write R R R R R R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
10-BIT T/C PRESCALER
TIMER/COUNTER2 CLOCK SOURCE
clkI/O clkT2S
TOSC1
AS2
CS20
CS21
CS22
clkT2S/8
clkT2S/64
clkT2S/128
clkT2S/1024
clkT2S/256
clkT2S/32
0 PSRASY
Clear
clkT2165
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
The clock source for Timer/Counter2 is named clkT2S. clkT2S is by default connected to the main
system I/O clock clkIO. By setting the AS2 bit in ASSR, Timer/Counter2 is asynchronously
clocked from the TOSC1 pin. This enables use of Timer/Counter2 as a Real Time Counter
(RTC). When AS2 is set, pins TOSC1 and TOSC2 are disconnected from Port C. A crystal can
then be connected between the TOSC1 and TOSC2 pins to serve as an independent clock
source for Timer/Counter2. The Oscillator is optimized for use with a 32.768kHz crystal. Applying
an external clock source to TOSC1 is not recommended.
For Timer/Counter2, the possible prescaled selections are: clkT2S/8, clkT2S/32, clkT2S/64,
clkT2S/128, clkT2S/256, and clkT2S/1024. Additionally, clkT2S as well as 0 (stop) may be selected.
Setting the PSRASY bit in GTCCR resets the prescaler. This allows the user to operate with a
predictable prescaler.
16.10.1 GTCCR – General Timer/Counter Control Register
• Bit 1 – PSRASY: Prescaler Reset Timer/Counter2
When this bit is one, the Timer/Counter2 prescaler will be reset. This bit is normally cleared
immediately by hardware. If the bit is written when Timer/Counter2 is operating in asynchronous
mode, the bit will remain one until the prescaler has been reset. The bit will not be cleared by
hardware if the TSM bit is set. Refer to the description of the Section “GTCCR – General
Timer/Counter Control Register” on page 97 for a description of the Timer/Counter Synchronization
mode.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TSM – – – – – PSRASY
PSRSY
NC
GTCCR
Read/write R/W R R R R R R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0166
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
17. Output Compare Modulator (OCM1C0A)
17.1 Overview
The Output Compare Modulator (OCM) allows generation of waveforms modulated with a carrier
frequency. The modulator uses the outputs from the Output Compare Unit C of the 16-bit
Timer/Counter1 and the Output Compare Unit of the 8-bit Timer/Counter0. For more details
about these Timer/Counters see “Timer/Counter0, Timer/Counter1, and Timer/Counter3 prescalers”
on page 96 and “8-bit Timer/Counter2 with PWM and asynchronous operation” on page
145.
Figure 17-1. Output Compare Modulator, block diagram.
When the modulator is enabled, the two output compare channels are modulated together as
shown in the block diagram (Figure 17-1).
17.2 Description
The Output Compare unit 1C and Output Compare unit 2 shares the PB7 port pin for output. The
outputs of the Output Compare units (OC1C and OC0A) overrides the normal PORTB7 Register
when one of them is enabled (that is, when COMnx1:0 is not equal to zero). When both OC1C
and OC0A are enabled at the same time, the modulator is automatically enabled.
The functional equivalent schematic of the modulator is shown on Figure 17-2. The schematic
includes part of the Timer/Counter units and the port B pin 7 output driver circuit.
Figure 17-2. Output Compare Modulator, schematic.
OC1C
Pin
OC1C /
OC0A / PB7
Timer/Counter 1
Timer/Counter 0 OC0A
PORTB7 DDRB7
D Q D Q
Pin
COMA01
COMA00
DATABUS
OC1C /
OC0A/ PB7
COM1C1
COM1C0
Modulator
1
0
OC1C
D Q
OC0A
D Q
(From Waveform generator)
(From Waveform generator)
0
1
Vcc167
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
When the modulator is enabled the type of modulation (logical AND or OR) can be selected by
the PORTB7 Register. Note that the DDRB7 controls the direction of the port independent of the
COMnx1:0 bit setting.
17.2.1 Timing example
Figure 17-3 illustrates the modulator in action. In this example the Timer/Counter1 is set to operate
in fast PWM mode (non-inverted) and Timer/Counter0 uses CTC waveform mode with toggle
Compare Output mode (COMnx1:0 = 1).
Figure 17-3. Output Compare Modulator, timing diagram.
In this example, Timer/Counter2 provides the carrier, while the modulating signal is generated
by the Output Compare unit C of the Timer/Counter1.
The resolution of the PWM signal (OC1C) is reduced by the modulation. The reduction factor is
equal to the number of system clock cycles of one period of the carrier (OC0A). In this example
the resolution is reduced by a factor of two. The reason for the reduction is illustrated in Figure
17-3 at the second and third period of the PB7 output when PORTB7 equals zero. The period 2
high time is one cycle longer than the period 3 high time, but the result on the PB7 output is
equal in both periods.
1 2
OC0A
(CTC mode)
OC1C
(FPWM mode)
PB7
(PORTB7 = 0)
PB7
(PORTB7 = 1)
(Period) 3
clk I/O168
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
18. SPI – Serial Peripheral Interface
The Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) allows high-speed synchronous data transfer between the
Atmel AT90USB64/128 and peripheral devices or between several AVR devices. The
AT90USB64/128 SPI includes the following features:
• Full-duplex, three-wire synchronous data transfer
• Master or slave operation
• LSB first or MSB first data transfer
• Seven programmable bit rates
• End of transmission interrupt flag
• Write collision flag protection
• Wake-up from Idle mode
• Double speed (CK/2) Master SPI mode
USART can also be used in Master SPI mode, see “USART in SPI mode” on page 202.
The Power Reduction SPI bit, PRSPI, in “PRR0 – Power Reduction Register 0” on page 54 must
be written to zero to enable SPI module.
Figure 18-1. SPI block diagram (1).
Note: 1. Refer to Figure 1-1 on page 3, and Table 11-6 on page 79 for SPI pin placement.
The interconnection between Master and Slave CPUs with SPI is shown in Figure 18-2 on page
169. The system consists of two shift Registers, and a Master clock generator. The SPI Master
initiates the communication cycle when pulling low the Slave Select SS pin of the desired Slave. SPI2X SPI2X
DIVIDER
/2/4/8/16/32/64/128169
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Master and Slave prepare the data to be sent in their respective shift Registers, and the Master
generates the required clock pulses on the SCK line to interchange data. Data is always shifted
from Master to Slave on the Master Out – Slave In, MOSI, line, and from Slave to Master on the
Master In – Slave Out, MISO, line. After each data packet, the Master will synchronize the Slave
by pulling high the Slave Select, SS, line.
When configured as a Master, the SPI interface has no automatic control of the SS line. This
must be handled by user software before communication can start. When this is done, writing a
byte to the SPI Data Register starts the SPI clock generator, and the hardware shifts the eight
bits into the Slave. After shifting one byte, the SPI clock generator stops, setting the end of
Transmission Flag (SPIF). If the SPI Interrupt Enable bit (SPIE) in the SPCR Register is set, an
interrupt is requested. The Master may continue to shift the next byte by writing it into SPDR, or
signal the end of packet by pulling high the Slave Select, SS line. The last incoming byte will be
kept in the Buffer Register for later use.
When configured as a Slave, the SPI interface will remain sleeping with MISO tri-stated as long
as the SS pin is driven high. In this state, software may update the contents of the SPI Data
Register, SPDR, but the data will not be shifted out by incoming clock pulses on the SCK pin
until the SS pin is driven low. As one byte has been completely shifted, the end of Transmission
Flag, SPIF is set. If the SPI Interrupt Enable bit, SPIE, in the SPCR Register is set, an interrupt
is requested. The Slave may continue to place new data to be sent into SPDR before reading
the incoming data. The last incoming byte will be kept in the Buffer Register for later use.
Figure 18-2. SPI Master-slave interconnection.
The system is single buffered in the transmit direction and double buffered in the receive direction.
This means that bytes to be transmitted cannot be written to the SPI Data Register before
the entire shift cycle is completed. When receiving data, however, a received character must be
read from the SPI Data Register before the next character has been completely shifted in. Otherwise,
the first byte is lost.
In SPI Slave mode, the control logic will sample the incoming signal of the SCK pin. To ensure
correct sampling of the clock signal, the frequency of the SPI clock should never exceed fosc/4.
When the SPI is enabled, the data direction of the MOSI, MISO, SCK, and SS pins is overridden
according to Table 18-1 on page 170. For more details on automatic port overrides, refer to
“Alternate port functions” on page 76.
SHIFT
ENABLE170
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Note: 1. See “Alternate functions of Port B” on page 79 for a detailed description of how to define the
direction of the user defined SPI pins.
The following code examples show how to initialize the SPI as a Master and how to perform a
simple transmission. DDR_SPI in the examples must be replaced by the actual Data Direction
Register controlling the SPI pins. DD_MOSI, DD_MISO and DD_SCK must be replaced by the
actual data direction bits for these pins. For example, if MOSI is placed on pin PB5, replace
DD_MOSI with DDB5 and DDR_SPI with DDRB.
Table 18-1. SPI pin overrides (1).
Pin Direction, master SPI Direction, slave SPI
MOSI User defined Input
MISO Input User defined
SCK User defined Input
SS User defined Input171
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Note: 1. See “About code examples” on page 10.
Assembly code example (1)
SPI_MasterInit:
; Set MOSI and SCK output, all others input
ldi r17,(1<>8);
UBRRLn = (unsigned char)baud;
/* Enable receiver and transmitter */
UCSRnB = (1<> 1) & 0x01;
return ((resh << 8) | resl);
}188
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
The Receive Complete (RXCn) Flag indicates if there are unread data present in the receive buffer.
This flag is one when unread data exist in the receive buffer, and zero when the receive
buffer is empty (that is, does not contain any unread data). If the Receiver is disabled (RXENn =
0), the receive buffer will be flushed and consequently the RXCn bit will become zero.
When the Receive Complete Interrupt Enable (RXCIEn) in UCSRnB is set, the USART Receive
Complete interrupt will be executed as long as the RXCn Flag is set (provided that global interrupts
are enabled). When interrupt-driven data reception is used, the receive complete routine
must read the received data from UDRn in order to clear the RXCn Flag, otherwise a new interrupt
will occur once the interrupt routine terminates.
19.6.4 Receiver error flags
The USART Receiver has three error flags: Frame Error (FEn), Data OverRun (DORn) and Parity
Error (UPEn). All can be accessed by reading UCSRnA. Common for the Error Flags is that
they are located in the receive buffer together with the frame for which they indicate the error
status. Due to the buffering of the Error Flags, the UCSRnA must be read before the receive buffer
(UDRn), since reading the UDRn I/O location changes the buffer read location. Another
equality for the Error Flags is that they can not be altered by software doing a write to the flag
location. However, all flags must be set to zero when the UCSRnA is written for upward compatibility
of future USART implementations. None of the Error Flags can generate interrupts.
The Frame Error (FEn) Flag indicates the state of the first stop bit of the next readable frame
stored in the receive buffer. The FEn Flag is zero when the stop bit was correctly read (as one),
and the FEn Flag will be one when the stop bit was incorrect (zero). This flag can be used for
detecting out-of-sync conditions, detecting break conditions and protocol handling. The FEn
Flag is not affected by the setting of the USBSn bit in UCSRnC since the Receiver ignores all,
except for the first, stop bits. For compatibility with future devices, always set this bit to zero
when writing to UCSRnA.
The Data OverRun (DORn) Flag indicates data loss due to a receiver buffer full condition. A
Data OverRun occurs when the receive buffer is full (two characters), it is a new character waiting
in the Receive Shift Register, and a new start bit is detected. If the DORn Flag is set there
was one or more serial frame lost between the frame last read from UDRn, and the next frame
read from UDRn. For compatibility with future devices, always write this bit to zero when writing
to UCSRnA. The DORn Flag is cleared when the frame received was successfully moved from
the Shift Register to the receive buffer.
The Parity Error (UPEn) Flag indicates that the next frame in the receive buffer had a Parity
Error when received. If Parity Check is not enabled the UPEn bit will always be read zero. For
compatibility with future devices, always set this bit to zero when writing to UCSRnA. For more
details see “Parity bit calculation” on page 181 and “Parity Checker” on page 188.
19.6.5 Parity Checker
The Parity Checker is active when the high USART Parity mode (UPMn1) bit is set. Type of Parity
Check to be performed (odd or even) is selected by the UPMn0 bit. When enabled, the Parity
Checker calculates the parity of the data bits in incoming frames and compares the result with
the parity bit from the serial frame. The result of the check is stored in the receive buffer together
with the received data and stop bits. The Parity Error (UPEn) Flag can then be read by software
to check if the frame had a Parity Error.189
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
The UPEn bit is set if the next character that can be read from the receive buffer had a Parity
Error when received and the Parity Checking was enabled at that point (UPMn1 = 1). This bit is
valid until the receive buffer (UDRn) is read.
19.6.6 Disabling the Receiver
In contrast to the Transmitter, disabling of the Receiver will be immediate. Data from ongoing
receptions will therefore be lost. When disabled (that is, the RXENn is set to zero) the Receiver
will no longer override the normal function of the RxDn port pin. The Receiver buffer FIFO will be
flushed when the Receiver is disabled. Remaining data in the buffer will be lost
19.6.7 Flushing the receive buffer
The receiver buffer FIFO will be flushed when the Receiver is disabled, that is, the buffer will be
emptied of its contents. Unread data will be lost. If the buffer has to be flushed during normal
operation, due to for instance an error condition, read the UDRn I/O location until the RXCn Flag
is cleared. The following code example shows how to flush the receive buffer.
Note: 1. See “About code examples” on page 10.
19.7 Asynchronous data reception
The USART includes a clock recovery and a data recovery unit for handling asynchronous data
reception. The clock recovery logic is used for synchronizing the internally generated baud rate
clock to the incoming asynchronous serial frames at the RxDn pin. The data recovery logic samples
and low pass filters each incoming bit, thereby improving the noise immunity of the
Receiver. The asynchronous reception operational range depends on the accuracy of the internal
baud rate clock, the rate of the incoming frames, and the frame size in number of bits.
19.7.1 Asynchronous clock recovery
The clock recovery logic synchronizes internal clock to the incoming serial frames. Figure 19-5
on page 190 illustrates the sampling process of the start bit of an incoming frame. The sample
rate is 16 times the baud rate for Normal mode, and eight times the baud rate for Double Speed
mode. The horizontal arrows illustrate the synchronization variation due to the sampling process.
Note the larger time variation when using the Double Speed mode (U2Xn = 1) of
operation. Samples denoted zero are samples done when the RxDn line is idle (that is, no communication
activity).
Assembly code example (1)
USART_Flush:
sbis UCSRnA, RXCn
ret
in r16, UDRn
rjmp USART_Flush
C code example (1)
void USART_Flush( void )
{
unsigned char dummy;
while ( UCSRnA & (1<
USBE=1
ID=1
Clock stopped
FRZCLK=1
Macro off
USBE=0
USBE=0
Host
USBE=0
HW
RESET
USBE=1
ID=0
AT90USB647/1287 only
AT90USB646/1286 forced mode247
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
22.4.3 Interrupts
Two interrupts vectors are assigned to USB interface.
Figure 22-10. USB interrupt system.
See Section 23.17, page 272 and Section 24.15, page 291 for more details on the Host and
Device interrupts.
USB general
& OTG interrupt
USB device
interrupt
USB host
interrupt
USB general
interrupt vector
Endpoint
interrupt
Pipe
interrupt
USB endpoint/pipe
interrupt vector248
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 22-11. USB general interrupt vector sources.
IDTE
USBCON.1
IDTI
USBINT.1
VBUSTI
USBINT.0 VBUSTE
USBCON.0
STOI
OTGINT.5 STOE
OTGIEN.5
HNPERRI
OTGINT.4 HNPERRE
OTGIEN.4
ROLEEXI
OTGINT.3 ROLEEXE
OTGIEN.3
BCERRI
OTGINT.2 BCERRE
OTGIEN.2
VBERRI
OTGINT.1 VBERRE
OTGIEN.1
SRPI
OTGINT.0 SRPE
OTGIEN.0
USB general
interrupt vector
UPRSMI
UDINT.6 UPRSME
UDIEN.6
EORSMI
UDINT.5 EORSME
UDIEN.5
WAKEUPI
UDINT.4 WAKEUPE
UDIEN.4
EORSTI
UDINT.3 EORSTE
UDIEN.3
SOFI
UDINT.2 SOFE
UDIEN.2
SUSPI
UDINT.0 SUSPE
UDIEN.0
HWUPE
UHIEN.6
HWUPI
UHINT.6
HSOFI
UHINT.5 HSOFE
UHIEN.5
RXRSMI
UHINT.4 RXRSME
UHIEN.4
RSMEDI
UHINT.3 RSMEDE
UHIEN.3
RSTI
UHINT.2 RSTE
UHIEN.2
DDISCI
UHINT.1 DDISCE
UHIEN.1
DCONNI
UHINT.0 DCONNE
UHIEN.0
USB device
interrupt
USB host
interrupt
USB general
interrupt vector
Asynchronous interrupt source
(allows the CPU to wake up from power down mode)249
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 22-12. USB endpoint/pipe Interrupt vector sources.
FLERRE
UEIENX.7
OVERFI
UESTAX.6
UNDERFI
UESTAX.5
NAKINI
UEINTX.6 NAKINE
UEIENX.6
NAKOUTI
UEINTX.4 TXSTPE
UEIENX.4
RXSTPI
UEINTX.3 RXSTPE
UEIENX.3
RXOUTI
UEINTX.2 RXOUTE
UEIENX.2
STALLEDI
UEINTX.1 STALLEDE
UEIENX.1
EPINT
UEINT.X
Endpoint 0
Endpoint 1
Endpoint 2
Endpoint 3
Endpoint 4
Endpoint 5
Endpoint interrupt
TXINI
UEINTX.0 TXINE
UEIENX.0
FLERRE
UPIEN.7
UNDERFI
UPSTAX.5
OVERFI
UPSTAX.6
NAKEDI
UPINTX.6 NAKEDE
UPIEN.6
PERRI
UPINTX.4 PERRE
UPIEN.4
TXSTPI
UPINTX.3 TXSTPE
UPIEN.3
TXOUTI
UPINTX.2 TXOUTE
UPIEN.2
RXSTALLI
UPINTX.1 RXSTALLE
UPIEN.1
RXINI
UPINTX.0 RXINE
UPIEN.0
FLERRE
UPIEN.X
PIPE 0
PIPE 1
PIPE 2
PIPE 3
PIPE 4
PIPE 5
Pipe interrupt
USB endpoint/pipe
interrupt vector
Endpoint 6
PIPE 6250
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 22-13. USB general and OTG controller interrupt system.
There are two kinds of interrupts: processing (that is, their generation are part of the normal processing)
and exception (errors).
Processing interrupts are generated when such events occur:
• USB ID Pad change detection (insert, remove)(IDTI)
• VBUS plug-in detection (insert, remove) (VBUSTI)
• SRP detected(SRPI)
• Role Exchanged(ROLEEXI)
Exception Interrupts are generated with the following events:
• Drop on VBus Detected(VBERRI)
• Error during the B-Connection(BCERRI)
• HNP Error(HNPERRI)
• Time-out detected during Suspend mode(STOII)
22.5 Power modes
22.5.1 Idle mode
In this mode, the CPU core is halted (CPU clock stopped). The Idle mode is taken wether the
USB controller is running or not. The CPU “wakes up” on any USB interrupts.
22.5.2 Power down
In this mode, the oscillator is stopped and halts all the clocks (CPU and peripherals). The USB
controller “wakes up” when:
• the WAKEUPI interrupt is triggered in the Peripheral mode (HOST cleared)
IDTE
USBCON.1
IDTI
USBINT.1
VBUSTI
USBINT.0 VBUSTE
USBCON.0
STOI
OTGINT.5 STOE
OTGIEN.5
HNPERRI
OTGINT.4 HNPERRE
OTGIEN.4
ROLEEXI
OTGINT.3 ROLEEXE
OTGIEN.3
BCERRI
OTGINT.2 BCERRE
OTGIEN.2
VBERRI
OTGINT.1 VBERRE
OTGIEN.1
SRPI
OTGINT.0 SRPE
OTGIEN.0
USB general & OTG
interrupt vector
Asynchronous interrupt source
(allows the CPU to wake up from power down mode251
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
• the HWUPI interrupt is triggered in the Host mode (HOST set)
• the IDTI interrupt is triggered
• the VBUSTI interrupt is triggered
22.5.3 Freeze clock
The firmware has the ability to reduce the power consumption by setting the FRZCLK bit, which
freeze the clock of USB controller. When FRZCLK is set, it is still possible to access to the following
registers:
• USBCON, USBSTA, USBINT
• UDCON (detach, ...)
• UDINT
• UDIEN
• UHCON
• UHINT
• UHIEN
Moreover, when FRZCLK is set, only the following interrupts may be triggered:
• WAKEUPI
• IDTI
• VBUSTI
• HWUPI
22.6 Speed control
22.6.1 Device mode
When the USB interface is configured in device mode, the speed selection (Full Speed or Low
Speed) depends on the UDP/UDM pull-up. The LSM bit in UDCON register allows to select an
internal pull up on UDM (Low Speed mode) or UDP (Full Speed mode) data lines.
Figure 22-14. Device mode speed selection.
RPU
DETACH
UDCON.0
UDP
UDM
RPU
LSM
UDCON.2
UCAP USB
regulator252
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
22.6.2 Host mode
When the USB interface is configured in host mode, internal Pull Down resistors are activated on
both UDP UDM lines and the interface detects the type of connected device.
22.7 Memory management
The controller does only support the following memory allocation management.
The reservation of a Pipe or an Endpoint can only be made in the increasing order (Pipe/Endpoint
0 to the last Pipe/Endpoint). The firmware shall thus configure them in the same order.
The reservation of a Pipe or an Endpoint “ki
” is done when its ALLOC bit is set. Then, the hardware
allocates the memory and inserts it between the Pipe/Endpoints “ki-1” and “ki+1”. The “ki+1”
Pipe/Endpoint memory “slides” up and its data is lost. Note that the “ki+2” and upper Pipe/Endpoint
memory does not slide.
Clearing a Pipe enable (PEN) or an Endpoint enable (EPEN) does not clear either its ALLOC bit,
or its configuration (EPSIZE/PSIZE, EPBK/PBK). To free its memory, the firmware should clear
ALLOC. Then, the “ki+1” Pipe/Endpoint memory automatically “slides” down. Note that the “ki+2”
and upper Pipe/Endpoint memory does not slide.
The following figure illustrates the allocation and reorganization of the USB memory in a typical
example:
Table 22-1. Allocation and reorganization USB memory flow.
• First, Pipe/Endpoint 0 to Pipe/Endpoint 5 are configured, in the growing order. The memory
of each is reserved in the DPRAM
• Then, the Pipe/Endpoint 3 is disabled (EPEN=0), but its memory reservation is internally kept
by the controller
• Its ALLOC bit is cleared: the Pipe/Endpoint 4 “slides” down, but the Pipe/Endpoint 5 does not
“slide”
• Finally, if the firmware chooses to reconfigure the Pipe/Endpoint 3, with a bigger size. The
controller reserved the memory after the endpoint 2 memory and automatically “slide” the
Pipe/Endpoint 4. The Pipe/Endpoint 5 does not move and a memory conflict appear, in that
Free memory
0
1
2
3
4
5
EPEN=1
ALLOC=1
Free memory
0
1
2
4
5
EPEN=0
(ALLOC=1)
Free memory
0
1
2
4
5
Pipe/Endpoints
activation
Pipe/Endpoint
Disable
Free its memory
(ALLOC=0)
Free memory
0
1
2
3 (bigger size)
5
Pipe/Endpoint
Activatation
Lost memory
4 Conflict253
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
both Pipe/Endpoint 4 and 5 use a common area. The data of those endpoints are potentially
lost
Note that:
• the data of Pipe/Endpoint 0 are never lost whatever the activation or deactivation of the
higher Pipe/Endpoint. Its data is lost if it is deactivated
• Deactivate and reactivate the same Pipe/Endpoint with the same parameters does not lead
to a “slide” of the higher endpoints. For those endpoints, the data are preserved
• CFGOK is set by hardware even in the case where there is a “conflict” in the memory
allocation
22.8 PAD suspend
The next figures illustrates the pad behaviour:
• In the “idle” mode, the pad is put in low power consumption mode
• In the “active” mode, the pad is working
Figure 22-15. Pad behaviour.
The SUSPI flag indicated that a suspend state has been detected on the USB bus. This flag
automatically put the USB pad in Idle. The detection of a non-idle event sets the WAKEUPI flag
and wakes-up the USB pad.
Moreover, the pad can also be put in the “idle” mode if the DETACH bit is set. It come back in
the active mode when the DETACH bit is cleared.
Idle mode
Active mode
USBE=1
& DETACH=0
& suspend
USBE=0
| DETACH=1
| suspend
SUSPI Suspend detected = USB pad power down Clear suspend by software
Resume = USB pad wake-up
WAKEUPI Clear resume by software
PAD status
Active Power Down Active254
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
22.9 OTG timers customizing
It is possible to refine some OTG timers thanks to the OTGTCON register that contains the
PAGE bits to select the timer and the VALUE bits to adjust the value. User should refer to lastest
releases of the OTG specification to select compliant timings.
• PAGE=00b: AWaitVrise time-out. [OTG]. In Host mode, once VBUSREQ has been set to “1”,
if no VBUS is detected on VBUS pin after this AWaitVrise delay then the VBERRI error flag is
set.
– VALUE=00bTime-out is set to 20ms
– VALUE=01bTime-out is set to 50ms
– VALUE=10bTime-out is set to 70ms
– VALUE=11bTime-out is set to 100ms
• PAGE=01b: VbBusPulsing. [OTG]. In Device mode, this delay corresponds to the pulse
duration on Vbus during a SRP.
– VALUE=00bTime-out is set to 15ms
– VALUE=01bTime-out is set to 23ms
– VALUE=10bTime-out is set to 31ms
– VALUE=11bTime-out is set to 40ms
• PAGE=10b: PdTmOutCnt. [OTG]. In Device mode, when a SRP has been requested to be
sent by the firmware, this delay is waited by the hardware after VBUS has gone below the
“session_valid” threshold voltage and before initiating the first pulse. This delay should be
considered as an approximation of USB lines discharge (pull-down resistors vs. line
capacitance) in order to wait that VBUS has gone below the “b_session_end” threshold
voltae, as defined in the OTG specification.
– VALUE=00bTime-out is set to 93ms
– VALUE=01bTime-out is set to 105ms
– VALUE=10bTime-out is set to 118ms
– VALUE=11bTime-out is set to 131ms
• PAGE=11b: SRPDetTmOut. [OTG]. In Host mode, this delay is the minimum pulse duration
required to detect and accept a valid SRP from a Device.
– VALUE=00bTime-out is set to 1µs
– VALUE=01bTime-out is set to 100µs
– VALUE=10bTime-out is set to 1ms
– VALUE=11bTime-out is set to 11ms255
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
22.10 Plug-in detection
The USB connection is detected by the VBUS pad, thanks to the following architecture:
Figure 22-16. Plug-in detection input block diagram.
The control logic of the VBUS pad outputs a signal regarding the VBUS voltage level:
• The “Session_valid” signal is active high when the voltage on the VBUS pad is higher or
equal to 1.4V. If lower than 1.4V, the signal is not active
• The “Vbus_valid” signal is active high when the voltage on the VBUS pad is higher or equal to
4.4V. If lower than 4.4V, the signal is not active
• The VBUS status bit is set when VBUS is greater than “Vbus_valid”. The VBUS status bit is
cleared when VBUS falls below “Session_valid” (hysteresis behavior)
• The VBUSTI flag is set each time the VBUS bit state changes
22.10.1 Peripheral mode
The USB peripheral cannot attach to the bus while VBUS bit is not set.
22.10.2 Host mode
The Host must use the UVCON pin to drive an external power switch or regulator that powers
the Vbus line. The UVCON pin is automatically asserted and set high by hardware when
UVCONE and VBUSREQ bits are set by firmware.
If a device connects (pull-up on DP or DM) within 300ms of Vbus delivery, the DCONNI flag will
rise. But, once VBUSREQ bit has been set, if no peripheral connection is detected within 300ms,
the BCERRI flag (and interrupt) will rise and Vbus delivery will be stopped (UVCON cleared).
If that behavior represents a limitation for the Host application, the following work-around may be
used :
1. UVCONE and VBUSREQ must be cleared.
2. VBUSHWC must be set (to disable hardware control of UVCON pin).
3. PORTE,7 pin (alternate function of UVCON pin) must be set by firmware.
4. a device connection will be detected thanks to the SRPI flag (that may usually be used
to detect a DP/DM pulse sent by an OTG B-Device that requests a new session).
VBUSTI
USBINT.0
VBUS VBUS
USBSTA.0
VSS
VDD
Pad logic
Logic
Session_valid RPU RPU
VBus_pulsing
VBus_discharge
Vbus_valid256
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
22.11 ID detection
The ID pin transition is detected thanks to the following architecture:
Figure 22-17. ID detection input block diagram.
The ID pin can be used to detect the USB mode (Peripheral or Host) or software selected. This
allows the UID pin to be used has general purpose I/O even when USB interface is enable.
When the UID pin is selected, by default, (no A-plug or B-plug), the macro is in the Peripheral
mode (internal pull-up). The IDTI interrupt is triggered when a A-plug (Host) is plugged or
unplugged. The interrupt is not triggered when a B-plug (Periph) is plugged or unplugged.
ID detection is independent of USB global interface enable.
22.12 Registers description
22.12.1 USB general registers
• 7 – UIMOD: USB Mode bit
This bit has no effect when the UIDE bit is set (external UID pin activated). Set to enable the
USB device mode. Clear to enable the USB host mode
• 6 – UIDE: UID pin Enable
Set to enable the USB mode selection (peripheral/host) through the UID pin. Clear to enable the
USB mode selection (peripheral/host) with UIMOD bit register.
UIDE should be modified only when the USB interface is disabled (USBE bit cleared).
• 5 – Reserved
The value read from this bit is always 0. Do not set this bit.
• 4 – UVCONE: UVCON pin Enable
Set to enable the UVCON pin control. Clear to disable the UVCON pin control. This bit should be
set only when the USB interface is enable.
RPU
UIMOD
UHWCON.7
UID
ID
USBSTA.1
Internal pull up
VDD
UIDE
UHWCON.6
1
0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
UIMOD UIDE UVCONE UVREGE UHWCON
Read/write R/W R/W R R/W R R R R/W
Initial value 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0257
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
• 3-1 – Reserved
The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits.
• 0 – UVREGE: USB pad regulator Enable
Set to enable the USB pad regulator. Clear to disable the USB pad regulator.
• 7 – USBE: USB macro Enable bit
Set to enable the USB controller. Clear to disable and reset the USB controller, to disable the
USB transceiver and to disable the USB controller clock inputs.
• 6 – HOST: HOST bit
Set to enable the Host mode. Clear to enable the device mode.
• 5 – FRZCLK: Freeze USB Clock bit
Set to disable the clock inputs (the ”Resume Detection” is still active). This reduces the power
consumption. Clear to enable the clock inputs.
• 4 – OTGPADE: OTG Pad Enable
Set to enable the OTG pad. Clear to disable the OTG pad. The OTG pad is actually the VBUS
pad.
Note that this bit can be set/cleared even if USBE=0. That allows the VBUS detection even if the
USB macro is disabled. This pad must be enabled in both Host and Device modes in order to
allow USB operation (attaching, transmitting...).
• 3-2 – Reserved
The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits.
• 1 – IDTE: ID Transition Interrupt Enable bit
Set this bit to enable the ID Transition interrupt generation. Clear this bit to disable the ID Transition
interrupt generation.
• 0 – VBUSTE: VBUS Transition Interrupt Enable bit
Set this bit to enable the VBUS Transition interrupt generation.
Clear this bit to disable the VBUS Transition interrupt generation.
• 7-4 - Reserved
The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
USBE HOST FRZCLK OTGPADE - - IDTE VBUSTE USBCON
Read/write R/W R/W R/W R/W R R R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
- - - - SPEED ID VBUS USBSTA
Read/write R R R R R R R R
Initial value 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0258
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
• 3 – SPEED: Speed Status Flag
This should be read only when the USB controller operates in host mode, in device mode the
value read from this bit is undeterminated.
Set by hardware when the controller is in FULL-SPEED mode. Cleared by hardware when the
controller is in LOW-SPEED mode.
• 2 – Reserved
The value read from this bit is always 0. Do not set this bit.
• 1 – ID: IUD pin flag
The value read from this bit indicates the state of the UID pin.
• 0 – VBUS: VBus flag
The value read from this bit indicates the state of the VBUS pin. This bit can be used in device
mode to monitor the USB bus connection state of the application. See Section 22.10, page 255
for more details.
7-2 - Reserved
The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits.
1 – IDTI: D Transition Interrupt flag
Set by hardware when a transition (high to low, low to high) has been detected on the UID pin.
Shall be cleared by software.
• 0 – VBUSTI: IVBUS Transition Interrupt flag
Set by hardware when a transition (high to low, low to high) has been detected on the VBUS
pad.
Shall be cleared by software.
• 7-6 - Reserved
The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits.
• 5 – HNPREQ: HNP Request bit
Set to initiate the HNP when the controller is in the Device mode (B). Set to accept the HNP
when the controller is in the Host mode (A).
Clear otherwise.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
- - - - - - IDTI VBUSTI USBINT
Read/write R R R R R R R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
- - HNPREQ SRPREQ SRPSEL VBUSHWC VBUSREQ VBUSRQC OTGCON
Read/write R R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0259
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
• 4 – SRPREQ: SRP Request bit
Set to initiate the SRP when the controller is in Device mode. Cleared by hardware when the
controller is initiating a SRP.
• 3 – SRPSEL: SRP Selection bit
Set to choose VBUS pulsing as SRP method.
Clear to choose data line pulsing as SRP method.
• 2 – VBUSHWC: VBus Hardware Control bit
Set to disable the hardware control over the UVCON pin.
Clear to enable the hardware control over the UVCON pin.
See for more details
• 1 – VBUSREQ: VBUS Request bit
Set to assert the UVCON pin in order to enable the VBUS power supply generation. This bit
shall be used when the controller is in the Host mode.
Cleared by hardware when VBUSRQC is set.
• 0 – VBUSRQC: VBUS Request Clear bit
Set to deassert the UVCON pin in order to enable the VBUS power supply generation. This bit
shall be used when the controller is in the Host mode.
Cleared by hardware immediately after the set.
• 7 – Reserved
This bit is reserved and always set.
• 6-5 – PAGE: Timer page access bit
Set/clear to access a special timer register. See Section 22.9, page 254 for more details.
• 4-3 - Reserved
The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits.
• 1-0 – VALUE: Value bit
Set to initialize the new value of the timer. See Section 22.9, page 254 for more details.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
- PAGE - - - VALUE OTGTCON
Read/write R R/W R/W R R R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0260
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
• 7-6 - Reserved
The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits.
• 5 – STOE: Suspend Time-out Error Interrupt Enable bit
Set to enable the STOI interrupt. Clear to disable the STOI interrupt.
• 4 – HNPERRE: HNP Error Interrupt Enable bit
Set to enable the HNPERRI interrupt. Clear to disable the HNPERRI interrupt.
• 3 – ROLEEXE: Role Exchange Interrupt Enable bit
Set to enable the ROLEEXI interrupt. Clear to disable the ROLEEXI interrupt.
• 2 – BCERRE: B-Connection Error Interrupt Enable bit
Set to enable the BCERRI interrupt. Clear to disable the BCERRI interrupt.
• 1 – VBERRE: VBus Error Interrupt Enable bit
Set to enable the VBERRI interrupt. Clear to disable the VBERRI interrupt.
• 0 – SRPE: SRP Interrupt Enable bit
Set to enable the SRPI interrupt. Clear to disable the SRPI interrupt.
• 7-6 - Reserved
The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits.
• 5 – STOI: Suspend Time-out Error Interrupt flag
Set by hardware when a time-out error (more than 150ms) has been detected after a suspend.
Shall be cleared by software.
• 4 – HNPERRI: HNP Error Interrupt flag
Set by hardware when an error has been detected during the protocol. Shall be cleared by
software.
• 3 – ROLEEXI: Role Exchange Interrupt flag
Set by hardware when the USB controller has successfully swapped its mode, due to an HNP
negotiation: Host to Device or Device to Host. However the mode selection bit (Host/Device) is
unchanged and must be changed by firmware in order to reach the correct RAM locations and
events bits. Shall be cleared by software.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
- - STOE HNPERRE ROLEEXE BCERRE VBERRE SRPE OTGIEN
Read/write R R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
- - STOI HNPERRI ROLEEXI BCERRI VBERRI SRPI OTGINT
Read/write R R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0261
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
• 2 – BCERRI: B-Connection Error Interrupt flag
Set by hardware when an error occur during the B-Connection (that is, if Peripheral has not connected
after 300ms of Vbus delivery request). Shall be cleared by software.
• 1 – VBERRI: V-Bus Error Interrupt flag
Set by hardware when a drop on VBus has been detected. Shall be cleared by software.
• 0 – SRPI: SRP Interrupt flag
Set by hardware when a SRP has been detected. Shall be used in the Host mode only. Shall be
cleared by software.
22.13 USB Software Operating modes
Depending on the USB operating mode, the software should perform some the following
operations:
Power On the USB interface
• Power-On USB pads regulator
• Configure PLL interface
• Enable PLL and wait PLL lock
• Enable USB interface
• Configure USB interface (USB speed, Endpoints configuration...)
• Wait for USB VBUS information connection
• Attach USB device
Power Off the USB interface
• Detach USB interface
• Disable USB interface
• Disable PLL
• Disable USB pad regulator
Suspending the USB interface
• Clear Suspend Bit
• Freeze USB clock
• Disable PLL
• Be sure to have interrupts enable to exit sleep mode
• Make the MCU enter sleep mode
Resuming the USB interface
• Enable PLL
• Wait PLL lock
• Unfreeze USB clock
• Clear Resume information262
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
23. USB device operating modes
23.1 Introduction
The USB device controller supports full speed and low speed data transfers. In addition to the
default control endpoint, it provides six other endpoints, which can be configured in control, bulk,
interrupt or isochronous modes:
• Endpoint 0:programmable size FIFO up to 64 bytes, default control endpoint
• Endpoints 1 programmable size FIFO up to 256 bytes in ping-pong mode
• Endpoints 2 to 6: programmable size FIFO up to 64 bytes in ping-pong mode
The controller starts in the “idle” mode. In this mode, the pad consumption is reduced to the
minimum.
23.2 Power-on and reset
The next diagram explains the USB device controller main states on power-on:
Figure 23-1. USB device controller states after reset.
The reset state of the Device controller is:
• the macro clock is stopped in order to minimize the power consumption (FRZCLK set)
• the USB device controller internal state is reset (all the registers are reset to their default
value. Note that DETACH is set.)
• the endpoint banks are reset
• the D+ or D- pull up are not activated (mode Detach)
The D+ or D- pull-up will be activated as soon as the DETACH bit is cleared and VBUS is
present.
The macro is in the ‘Idle’ state after reset with a minimum power consumption and does not
need to have the PLL activated to enter in this state.
The USB device controller can at any time be reset by clearing USBE (disable USB interface).
23.3 Endpoint reset
An endpoint can be reset at any time by setting in the UERST register the bit corresponding to
the endpoint (EPRSTx). This resets:
• the internal state machine on that endpoint
• the Rx and Tx banks are cleared and their internal pointers are restored
Reset
Idle
HW
RESET
USBE=0
USBE=0
USBE=1
UID=1263
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
• the UEINTX, UESTA0X and UESTA1X are restored to their reset value
The data toggle field remains unchanged.
The other registers remain unchanged.
The endpoint configuration remains active and the endpoint is still enabled.
The endpoint reset may be associated with a clear of the data toggle command (RSTDT bit) as
an answer to the CLEAR_FEATURE USB command.
23.4 USB reset
When an USB reset is detected on the USB line, the next operations are performed by the
controller:
• all the endpoints are disabled
• the default control endpoint remains configured (see Section 23.3, page 262 for more details)
23.5 Endpoint selection
Prior to any operation performed by the CPU, the endpoint must first be selected. This is done
by setting the EPNUM2:0 bits (UENUM register) with the endpoint number which will be managed
by the CPU.
The CPU can then access to the various endpoint registers and data.
23.6 Endpoint activation
The endpoint is maintained under reset as long as the EPEN bit is not set.
The following flow must be respected in order to activate an endpoint:264
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 23-2. Endpoint activation flow.
As long as the endpoint is not correctly configured (CFGOK cleared), the hardware does not
acknowledge the packets sent by the host.
CFGOK is will not be sent if the Endpoint size parameter is bigger than the DPRAM size.
A clear of EPEN acts as an endpoint reset (see Section 23.3, page 262 for more details). It also
performs the next operation:
• The configuration of the endpoint is kept (EPSIZE, EPBK, ALLOC kept)
• It resets the data toggle field
• The DPRAM memory associated to the endpoint is still reserved
See Section 22.7, page 252 for more details about the memory allocation/reorganization.
23.7 Address setup
The USB device address is set up according to the USB protocol:
• the USB device, after power-up, responds at address 0
• the host sends a SETUP command (SET_ADDRESS(addr))
• the firmware records that address in UADD, but keep ADDEN cleared
• the USB device sends an IN command of 0 bytes (IN 0 Zero Length Packet)
• then, the firmware can enable the USB device address by setting ADDEN. The only accepted
address by the controller is the one stored in UADD
ADDEN and UADD shall not be written at the same time.
UADD contains the default address 00h after a power-up or USB reset.
Endpoint
Activation
CFGOK=1
ERROR
No
Yes
Endpoint activated
Activate the endpoint
Select the endpoint
EPEN=1
UENUM
EPNUM=x
Test the correct endpoint
configuration
UECFG1X ALLOC
EPSIZE
EPBK
Configure:
- the endpoint size
- the bank parametrization
Allocation and reorganization of
the memory is made on-the-fly
UECFG0X EPDIR
EPTYPE
...
Configure:
- the endpoint direction
- the endpoint type265
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
ADDEN is cleared by hardware:
• after a power-up reset
• when an USB reset is received
• or when the macro is disabled (USBE cleared)
When this bit is cleared, the default device address 00h is used.
23.8 Suspend, wake-up and resume
After a period of 3ms during which the USB line was inactive, the controller switches to the fullspeed
mode and triggers (if enabled) the SUSPI (suspend) interrupt. The firmware may then set
the FRZCLK bit.
The CPU can also, depending on software architecture, enter in the idle mode to lower again the
power consumption.
There are two ways to recover from the “Suspend” mode:
• First one is to clear the FRZCLK bit. This is possible if the CPU is not in the Idle mode
• Second way, if the CPU is “idle”, is to enable the WAKEUPI interrupt (WAKEUPE set). Then,
as soon as an non-idle signal is seen by the controller, the WAKEUPI interrupt is triggered.
The firmware shall then clear the FRZCLK bit to restart the transfer
There are no relationship between the SUSPI interrupt and the WAKEUPI interrupt: the WAKEUPI
interrupt is triggered as soon as there are non-idle patterns on the data lines. Thus, the
WAKEUPI interrupt can occurs even if the controller is not in the “suspend” mode.
When the WAKEUPI interrupt is triggered, if the SUSPI interrupt bit was already set, it is cleared
by hardware.
When the SUSPI interrupt is triggered, if the WAKEUPI interrupt bit was already set, it is cleared
by hardware.
23.9 Detach
The reset value of the DETACH bit is 1.
It is possible to re-enumerate a device, simply by setting and clearing the DETACH bit.
• Setting DETACH will disconnect the pull-up on the D+ or D- pad (depending on full or low
speed mode selected). Then, clearing DETACH will connect the pull-up on the D+ or D- pad
Figure 23-3. Detach a device in full-speed.
EN=1
D +
UVREF
D -
Detach, then
Attach EN=1
D +
UVREF
D -266
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
23.10 Remote Wake-up
The “Remote Wake-up” (or “upstream resume”) request is the only operation allowed to be sent
by the device on its own initiative. Anyway, to do that, the device should first have received a
DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP request from the host.
• First, the USB controller must have detected the “suspend” state of the line: the remote wakeup
can only be sent when a SUSPI flag is set
• The firmware has then the ability to set RMWKUP to send the “upstream resume” stream.
This will automatically be done by the controller after 5ms of inactivity on the USB line
• When the controller starts to send the “upstream resume”, the UPRSMI interrupt is triggered
(if enabled). SUSPI is cleared by hardware
• RMWKUP is cleared by hardware at the end of the “upstream resume”
• If the controller detects a good “End Of Resume” signal from the host, an EORSMI interrupt
is triggered (if enabled)
23.11 STALL request
For each endpoint, the STALL management is performed using two bits:
– STALLRQ (enable stall request)
– STALLRQC (disable stall request)
– STALLEDI (stall sent interrupt)
To send a STALL handshake at the next request, the STALLRQ request bit has to be set. All following
requests will be handshak’ed with a STALL until the STALLRQC bit is set.
Setting STALLRQC automatically clears the STALLRQ bit. The STALLRQC bit is also immediately
cleared by hardware after being set by software. Thus, the firmware will never read this bit
as set.
Each time the STALL handshake is sent, the STALLEDI flag is set by the USB controller and the
EPINTx interrupt will be triggered (if enabled).
The incoming packets will be discarded (RXOUTI and RWAL will not be set).
The host will then send a command to reset the STALL: the firmware just has to set the STALLRQC
bit and to reset the endpoint.
23.11.1 Special consideration for control endpoints
A SETUP request is always ACK’ed.
If a STALL request is set for a Control Endpoint and if a SETUP request occurs, the SETUP
request has to be ACK’ed and the STALLRQ request and STALLEDI sent flags are automatically
reset (RXSETUPI set, TXIN cleared, STALLED cleared, TXINI cleared...).
This management simplifies the enumeration process management. If a command is not supported
or contains an error, the firmware set the STALL request flag and can return to the main
task, waiting for the next SETUP request.
This function is compliant with the Chapter 8 test that may send extra status for a
GET_DESCRIPTOR. The firmware sets the STALL request just after receiving the status. All
extra status will be automatically STALL’ed until the next SETUP request.267
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
23.11.2 STALL handshake and retry mechanism
The Retry mechanism has priority over the STALL handshake. A STALL handshake is sent if the
STALLRQ request bit is set and if there is no retry required.
23.12 CONTROL endpoint management
A SETUP request is always ACK’ed. When a new setup packet is received, the RXSTPI interrupt
is triggered (if enabled). The RXOUTI interrupt is not triggered.
The FIFOCON and RWAL fields are irrelevant with CONTROL endpoints. The firmware shall
thus never use them on that endpoints. When read, their value is always 0.
CONTROL endpoints are managed by the following bits:
• RXSTPI is set when a new SETUP is received. It shall be cleared by firmware to
acknowledge the packet and to clear the endpoint bank
• RXOUTI is set when a new OUT data is received. It shall be cleared by firmware to
acknowledge the packet and to clear the endpoint bank
• TXINI is set when the bank is ready to accept a new IN packet. It shall be cleared by firmware
to send the packet and to clear the endpoint bank
23.12.1 Control write
Figure 23-4 shows a control write transaction. During the status stage, the controller will not necessary
send a NAK at the first IN token:
• If the firmware knows the exact number of descriptor bytes that must be read, it can then
anticipate on the status stage and send a ZLP for the next IN token
• or it can read the bytes and poll NAKINI, which tells that all the bytes have been sent by the
host, and the transaction is now in the status stage
Figure 23-4. Control write transaction.
23.12.2 Control read
Figure 23-5 on page 268 shows a control read transaction. The USB controller has to manage
the simultaneous write requests from the CPU and the USB host.
SETUP
RXSTPI
RXOUTI
TXINI
USB line
HW SW
OUT
HW SW
OUT
HW SW
IN IN
NAK
SW
SETUP STATUS DATA268
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 23-5. Control read transaction.
A NAK handshake is always generated at the first status stage command.
When the controller detect the status stage, all the data writen by the CPU are erased, and
clearing TXINI has no effects.
The firmware checks if the transmission is complete or if the reception is complete.
The OUT retry is always ack’ed. This reception:
- set the RXOUTI flag (received OUT data)
- set the TXINI flag (data sent, ready to accept new data)
software algorithm:
set transmit ready
wait (transmit complete OR Receive complete)
if receive complete, clear flag and return
if transmit complete, continue
Once the OUT status stage has been received, the USB controller waits for a SETUP request.
The SETUP request have priority over any other request and has to be ACK’ed. This means that
any other flag should be cleared and the fifo reset when a SETUP is received.
WARNING: the byte counter is reset when the OUT Zero Length Packet is received. The firmware
has to take care of this.
23.13 OUT endpoint management
OUT packets are sent by the host. All the data can be read by the CPU, which acknowledges or
not the bank when it is empty.
23.13.1 Overview
The Endpoint must be configured first.
Each time the current bank is full, the RXOUTI and the FIFOCON bits are set. This triggers an
interrupt if the RXOUTE bit is set. The firmware can acknowledge the USB interrupt by clearing
the RXOUTI bit. The Firmware read the data and clear the FIFOCON bit in order to free the current
bank. If the OUT Endpoint is composed of multiple banks, clearing the FIFOCON bit will
switch to the next bank. The RXOUTI and FIFOCON bits are then updated by hardware in accordance
with the status of the new bank.
SETUP
RXSTPI
RXOUTI
TXINI
USB line
HW SW
IN
HW SW
IN OUT OUT
NAK
SW
SW
HW
Wr Enable
HOST
Wr Enable
CPU
SETUP STATUS DATA269
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
RXOUTI shall always be cleared before clearing FIFOCON.
The RWAL bit always reflects the state of the current bank. This bit is set if the firmware can
read data from the bank, and cleared by hardware when the bank is empty.
Figure 23-6. Example with 1 and 2 OUT data bank.
23.13.2 Detailed description
The data are read by the CPU, following the next flow:
• When the bank is filled by the host, an endpoint interrupt (EPINTx) is triggered, if enabled
(RXOUTE set) and RXOUTI is set. The CPU can also poll RXOUTI or FIFOCON, depending
on the software architecture
• The CPU acknowledges the interrupt by clearing RXOUTI
• The CPU can read the number of byte (N) in the current bank (N=BYCT)
• The CPU can read the data from the current bank (“N” read of UEDATX)
• The CPU can free the bank by clearing FIFOCON when all the data is read, that is:
– after “N” read of UEDATX
– as soon as RWAL is cleared by hardware
If the endpoint uses two banks, the second one can be filled by the HOST while the current one
is being read by the CPU. Then, when the CPU clear FIFOCON, the next bank may be already
ready and RXOUTI is set immediately.
23.14 IN endpoint management
IN packets are sent by the USB device controller, upon an IN request from the host. All the data
can be written by the CPU, which acknowledge or not the bank when it is full.
OUT DATA
(to bank 0) ACK
RXOUTI
FIFOCON
HW
OUT DATA
(to bank 0) ACK
HW
SW
SW
SW
read data from CPU
BANK 0
OUT DATA
(to bank 0) ACK
RXOUTI
FIFOCON
HW
OUT DATA
(to bank 1) ACK
SW
SW
Example with 2 OUT data banks
read data from CPU
BANK 0
HW
SW
read data from CPU
BANK 0
read data from CPU
BANK 1
NAK270
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
23.14.1 Overview
The Endpoint must be configured first.
The TXINI bit is set by hardware when the current bank becomes free. This triggers an interrupt
if the TXINE bit is set. The FIFOCON bit is set at the same time. The CPU writes into the FIFO
and clears the FIFOCON bit to allow the USB controller to send the data. If the IN Endpoint is
composed of multiple banks, this also switches to the next data bank. The TXINI and FIFOCON
bits are automatically updated by hardware regarding the status of the next bank.
TXINI shall always be cleared before clearing FIFOCON.
The RWAL bit always reflects the state of the current bank. This bit is set if the firmware can
write data to the bank, and cleared by hardware when the bank is full.
Figure 23-7. Example with 1 and 2 IN data bank.
23.14.2 Detailed description
The data are written by the CPU, following the next flow:
• When the bank is empty, an endpoint interrupt (EPINTx) is triggered, if enabled (TXINE set)
and TXINI is set. The CPU can also poll TXINI or FIFOCON, depending the software
architecture choice
• The CPU acknowledges the interrupt by clearing TXINI
• The CPU can write the data into the current bank (write in UEDATX)
• The CPU can free the bank by clearing FIFOCON when all the data are written, that is:
– after “N” write into UEDATX
– as soon as RWAL is cleared by hardware
IN DATA
(bank 0) ACK
TXINI
FIFOCON
HW
write data from CPU
BANK 0
Example with 2 IN data banks
SW
SW SW
SW
IN
IN DATA
(bank 0) ACK
TXINI
FIFOCON write data from CPU
BANK 0
SW
SW SW
SW
IN DATA
(bank 1) ACK
write data from CPU
BANK 0
write data from CPU
BANK 1
SW
HW
write data from CPU
BANK0
NAK271
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
If the endpoint uses two banks, the second one can be read by the HOST while the current is
being written by the CPU. Then, when the CPU clears FIFOCON, the next bank may be already
ready (free) and TXINI is set immediately.
23.14.2.1 Abort
An “abort” stage can be produced by the host in some situations:
• In a control transaction: ZLP data OUT received during a IN stage
• In an isochronous IN transaction: ZLP data OUT received on the OUT endpoint during a IN
stage on the IN endpoint
• ...
The KILLBK bit is used to kill the last “written” bank. The best way to manage this abort is to perform
the following operations:
Table 23-1. Abort flow.
23.15 Isochronous mode
23.15.1 Underflow
An underflow can occur during IN stage if the host attempts to read a bank which is empty. In
this situation, the UNDERFI interrupt is triggered.
An underflow can also occur during OUT stage if the host send a packet while the banks are
already full. Typically, he CPU is not fast enough. The packet is lost.
It is not possible to have underflow error during OUT stage, in the CPU side, since the CPU
should read only if the bank is ready to give data (RXOUTI=1 or RWAL=1)
23.15.2 CRC error
A CRC error can occur during OUT stage if the USB controller detects a bad received packet. In
this situation, the STALLEDI interrupt is triggered. This does not prevent the RXOUTI interrupt
from being triggered.
Endpoint
Abort
Abort done
Abort is based on the fact
that no banks are busy,
meaning that nothing has to
be sent.
Disable the TXINI interrupt.
Endpoint
reset
NBUSYBK
=0
Yes
Clear
UEIENX.
TXINE
No
KILLBK=1
KILLBK=1 Yes
Kill the last written
bank.
Wait for the end of the
procedure.
No272
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
23.16 Overflow
In Control, Isochronous, Bulk or Interrupt Endpoint, an overflow can occur during OUT stage, if
the host attempts to write in a bank that is too small for the packet. In this situation, the OVERFI
interrupt is triggered (if enabled). The packet is acknowledged and the RXOUTI interrupt is also
triggered (if enabled). The bank is filled with the first bytes of the packet.
It is not possible to have overflow error during IN stage, in the CPU side, since the CPU should
write only if the bank is ready to access data (TXINI=1 or RWAL=1).
23.17 Interrupts
Figure 23-8 shows all the interrupts sources.
Figure 23-8. USB device controller interrupt system.
There are two kinds of interrupts: processing (that is, their generation are part of the normal processing)
and exception (errors).
Processing interrupts are generated when:
• VBUS plug-in detection (insert, remove)(VBUSTI)
• Upstream resume(UPRSMI)
• End of resume(EORSMI)
• Wake up(WAKEUPI)
• End of reset (Speed Initialization)(EORSTI)
• Start of frame(SOFI, if FNCERR=0)
• Suspend detected after 3ms of inactivity(SUSPI)
Exception Interrupts are generated when:
• CRC error in frame number of SOF(SOFI, FNCERR=1)
UPRSMI
UDINT.6 UPRSME
UDIEN.6
EORSMI
UDINT.5 EORSME
UDIEN.5
WAKEUPI
UDINT.4 WAKEUPE
UDIEN.4
EORSTI
UDINT.3 EORSTE
UDIEN.3
SOFI
UDINT.2 SOFE
UDIEN.2
SUSPI
UDINT.0 SUSPE
UDIEN.0
USB device
interrupt273
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 23-9. USB device controller endpoint interrupt system.
Processing interrupts are generated when:
• Ready to accept IN data(EPINTx, TXINI=1)
• Received OUT data(EPINTx, RXOUTI=1)
• Received SETUP(EPINTx, RXSTPI=1)
Exception Interrupts are generated when:
• Stalled packet(EPINTx, STALLEDI=1)
• CRC error on OUT in isochronous mode(EPINTx, STALLEDI=1)
• Overflow in isochronous mode(EPINTx, OVERFI=1)
• Underflow in isochronous mode(EPINTx, UNDERFI=1)
• NAK IN sent(EPINTx, NAKINI=1)
• NAK OUT sent(EPINTx, NAKOUTI=1)
23.18 Registers
23.18.1 USB device general registers
EPINT
UEINT.X
Endpoint 0
Endpoint 1
Endpoint 2
Endpoint 3
Endpoint 4
Endpoint 5
Endpoint interrupt
Endpoint 6
FLERRE
UEIENX.7
OVERFI
UESTAX.6
UNDERFI
UESTAX.5
NAKINI
UEINTX.6 NAKINE
UEIENX.6
NAKOUTI
UEINTX.4 TXSTPE
UEIENX.4
RXSTPI
UEINTX.3 TXOUTE
UEIENX.3
RXOUTI
UEINTX.2 RXOUTE
UEIENX.2
STALLEDI
UEINTX.1 STALLEDE
UEIENX.1
TXINI
UEINTX.0 TXINE
UEIENX.0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
----- LSM RMWKUP DETACH UDCON
Read/write R R R R R R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1274
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
• 7-3 - Reserved
The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits.
• 2 - LSM - USB Device Low Speed Mode selection
When configured USB is configured in device mode, this bit allows to select the USB the USB
Low Speed or Full Speed Mod.
Clear to select full speed mode (D+ internal pull-up will be activate with the ATTACH bit will be
set) .
Set to select low speed mode (D- internal pull-up will be activate with the ATTACH bit will be
set). This bit has no effect when the USB interface is configured in HOST mode.
• 1- RMWKUP - Remote Wake-up bit
Set to send an “upstream-resume” to the host for a remote wake-up (the SUSPI bit must be set).
Cleared by hardware when signalling finished. Clearing by software has no effect.
See Section 23.10, page 266 for more details.
• 0 - DETACH - Detach bit
Set to physically detach de device (disconnect internal pull-up on D+ or D-).
Clear to reconnect the device. See Section 23.9, page 265 for more details.
• 7 - Reserved
The value read from this bits is always 0. Do not set this bit.
• 6 - UPRSMI - Upstream Resume Interrupt flag
Set by hardware when the USB controller is sending a resume signal called “Upstream
Resume”. This triggers an USB interrupt if UPRSME is set.
Shall be cleared by software (USB clocks must be enabled before). Setting by software has no
effect.
• 5 - EORSMI - End Of Resume Interrupt flag
Set by hardware when the USB controller detects a good “End Of Resume” signal initiated by
the host. This triggers an USB interrupt if EORSME is set.
Shall be cleared by software. Setting by software has no effect.
• 4 - WAKEUPI - Wake-up CPU Interrupt flag
Set by hardware when the USB controller is re-activated by a filtered non-idle signal from the
lines (not by an upstream resume). This triggers an interrupt if WAKEUPE is set. This interrupt
should be enable only to wake up the CPU core from power down mode.
Shall be cleared by software (USB clock inputs must be enabled before). Setting by software
has no effect.
See Section 23.8, page 265 for more details.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
- UPRSMI EORSMI WAKEUPI EORSTI SOFI - SUSPI UDINT
Read/write
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0275
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
• 3 - EORSTI - End Of Reset Interrupt flag
Set by hardware when an “End Of Reset” has been detected by the USB controller. This triggers
an USB interrupt if EORSTE is set.
Shall be cleared by software. Setting by software has no effect.
• 2 - SOFI - Start Of Frame Interrupt flag
Set by hardware when an USB “Start Of Frame” PID (SOF) has been detected (every 1ms). This
triggers an USB interrupt if SOFE is set.
• 1 - Reserved
The value read from this bits is always 0. Do not set this bit
• 0 - SUSPI - Suspend Interrupt flag
Set by hardware when an USB “Suspend” ‘idle bus for three frame periods: a J state for 3ms) is
detected. This triggers an USB interrupt if SUSPE is set.
Shall be cleared by software. Setting by software has no effect.
See Section 23.8, page 265 for more details.
The interrupt bits are set even if their corresponding ‘Enable’ bits is not set.
• 7 - Reserved
The value read from this bits is always 0. Do not set this bit.
• 6 - UPRSME - Upstream Resume Interrupt Enable bit
Set to enable the UPRSMI interrupt.
Clear to disable the UPRSMI interrupt.
• 5 - EORSME - End Of Resume Interrupt Enable bit
Set to enable the EORSMI interrupt.
Clear to disable the EORSMI interrupt.
• 4 - WAKEUPE - Wake-up CPU Interrupt Enable bit
Set to enable the WAKEUPI interrupt. For correct interrupt handle execution, this interrupt
should be enable only before entering power-down mode.
Clear to disable the WAKEUPI interrupt.
• 3 - EORSTE - End Of Reset Interrupt Enable bit
Set to enable the EORSTI interrupt. This bit is set after a reset.
Clear to disable the EORSTI interrupt.
• 2 - SOFE - Start Of Frame Interrupt Enable bit
Set to enable the SOFI interrupt.
Clear to disable the SOFI interrupt.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
- UPRSME EORSME WAKEUPE EORSTE SOFE - SUSPE UDIEN
Read/write
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0276
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
• 1 - Reserved
The value read from this bits is always 0. Do not set this bit
• 0 - SUSPE - Suspend Interrupt Enable Bit
Set to enable the SUSPI interrupt.
Clear to disable the SUSPI interrupt.
• 7 - ADDEN - Address Enable Bit
Set to activate the UADD (USB address).
Cleared by hardware. Clearing by software has no effect.
See Section 23.7, page 264 for more details.
• 6-0 - UADD6:0 - USB Address Bits
Load by software to configure the device address.
• 7-3 - Reserved
The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits.
• 2-0 - FNUM10:8 - Frame Number Upper Value
Set by hardware. These bits are the three MSB of the 11-bits Frame Number information. They
are provided in the last received SOF packet. FNUM is updated if a corrupted SOF is received.
• Frame Number Lower Value
Set by hardware. These bits are the eight LSB of the 11-bits Frame Number information.
• 7-5 - Reserved
The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits.
• 4 - FNCERR -Frame Number CRC Error flag
Set by hardware when a corrupted Frame Number in start of frame packet is received.
This bit and the SOFI interrupt are updated at the same time.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ADDEN UADD6:0 UDADDR
Read/write W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
- - - - - FNUM10:8 UDFNUMH
Read/write R R R R R R R R
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
FNUM7:0 UDFNUML
Read/write R R R R R R R R
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
- - - FNCERR - - - - UDMFN
Read/write R
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0277
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
• 3-0 - Reserved
The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits.
23.18.2 USB device endpoint registers
• 7-3 - Reserved
The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits.
• 2-0 - EPNUM2:0 Endpoint Number bits
Load by software to select the number of the endpoint which shall be accessed by the CPU. See
Section 23.5, page 263 for more details.
EPNUM = 111b is forbidden.
• 7 - Reserved
The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits.
• 6-0 - EPRST6:0 - Endpoint FIFO Reset bits
Set to reset the selected endpoint FIFO prior to any other operation, upon hardware reset or
when an USB bus reset has been received. See Section 23.3, page 262 for more information
Then, clear by software to complete the reset operation and start using the endpoint.
• 7-6 - Reserved
The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits.
• 5 - STALLRQ - STALL Request Handshake bit
Set to request a STALL answer to the host for the next handshake.
Cleared by hardware when a new SETUP is received. Clearing by software has no effect.
See Section 23.11, page 266 for more details.
• 4 - STALLRQC - STALL Request Clear Handshake bit
Set to disable the STALL handshake mechanism.
Cleared by hardware immediately after the set. Clearing by software has no effect.
See Section 23.11, page 266 for more details.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
- - - - - EPNUM2:0 UENUM
Read/write R R R R R R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
- EPRST6 EPRST5 EPRST4 EPRST3 EPRST2 EPRST1 EPRST0 UERST
Read/write R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
- - STALLRQ STALLRQC RSTDT - - EPEN UECONX
Read/write R R W W W R R R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0278
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
• RSTDT - Reset Data Toggle bit
Set to automatically clear the data toggle sequence:
For OUT endpoint: the next received packet will have the data toggle 0.
For IN endpoint: the next packet to be sent will have the data toggle 0.
Cleared by hardware instantaneously. The firmware does not have to wait that the bit is cleared.
Clearing by software has no effect.
• 2 - Reserved
The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits.
• 1 - Reserved
The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits.
• 0 - EPEN - Endpoint Enable bit
Set to enable the endpoint according to the device configuration. Endpoint 0 shall always be
enabled after a hardware or USB reset and participate in the device configuration.
Clear this bit to disable the endpoint. See Section 23.6, page 263 for more details.
• 7-6 - EPTYPE1:0 - Endpoint Type bits
Set this bit according to the endpoint configuration:
00b: Control10b: Bulk
01b: Isochronous11b: Interrupt
• 5-4 - Reserved
The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits.
• 3-2 - Reserved for test purpose
The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits.
• 1 - Reserved
The value read from this bits is always 0. Do not set this bit.
• 0 - EPDIR - Endpoint Direction bit
Set to configure an IN direction for bulk, interrupt or isochronous endpoints.
Clear to configure an OUT direction for bulk, interrupt, isochronous or control endpoints.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
EPTYPE1:0 - - - - - EPDIR UECFG0X
Read/write R/W R/W R R R R R R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0279
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
• 7 - Reserved
The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits.
• 6-4 - EPSIZE2:0 - Endpoint Size bits
Set this bit according to the endpoint size:
000b: 8 bytes 100b: 128 bytes (only for endpoint 1)
001b: 16 bytes 101b: 256 bytes (only for endpoint 1)
010b: 32 bytes 110b: Reserved. Do not use this configuration
011b: 64 bytes 111b: Reserved. Do not use this configuration
• 3-2 - EPBK1:0 - Endpoint Bank bits
Set this field according to the endpoint size:
00b: One bank
01b: Double bank
1xb: Reserved. Do not use this configuration
• 1 - ALLOC - Endpoint Allocation bit
Set this bit to allocate the endpoint memory.
Clear to free the endpoint memory.
See Section 23.6, page 263 for more details.
• 0 - Reserved
The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits.
• 7 - CFGOK - Configuration Status flag
Set by hardware when the endpoint X size parameter (EPSIZE) and the bank parametrization
(EPBK) are correct compared to the max FIFO capacity and the max number of allowed bank.
This bit is updated when the bit ALLOC is set.
If this bit is cleared, the user should reprogram the UECFG1X register with correct EPSIZE and
EPBK values.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
- EPSIZE2:0 EPBK1:0 ALLOC - UECFG1X
Read/write R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CFGOK OVERFI UNDERFI - DTSEQ1:0 NBUSYBK1:0 UESTA0X
Read/write R R/W R/W R/W R R R R
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0280
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
• 6 - OVERFI - Overflow Error Interrupt flag
Set by hardware when an overflow error occurs in an isochronous endpoint. An interrupt
(EPINTx) is triggered (if enabled).
See Section 23.15, page 271 for more details.
Shall be cleared by software. Setting by software has no effect.
• 5 - UNDERFI - Flow Error Interrupt flag
Set by hardware when an underflow error occurs in an isochronous endpoint. An interrupt
(EPINTx) is triggered (if enabled).
See Section 23.15, page 271 for more details.
Shall be cleared by software. Setting by software has no effect.
• 4 - Reserved
The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits.
• 3-2 - DTSEQ1:0 - Data Toggle Sequencing flag
Set by hardware to indicate the PID data of the current bank:
00b Data0
01b Data1
1xb Reserved
For OUT transfer, this value indicates the last data toggle received on the current bank.
For IN transfer, it indicates the Toggle that will be used for the next packet to be sent. This is not
relative to the current bank.
• 1-0 - NBUSYBK1:0 - Busy Bank flag
Set by hardware to indicate the number of busy bank.
For IN endpoint, it indicates the number of busy bank(s), filled by the user, ready for IN transfer.
For OUT endpoint, it indicates the number of busy bank(s) filled by OUT transaction from the
host.
00b All banks are free
01b One busy bank
10b Two busy banks
11b Reserved
• 7-3 - Reserved
The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
- - - - - CTRLDIR CURRBK1:0 UESTA1X
Read/write R R R R R R R R
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0281
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
• 2 - CTRLDIR - Control Direction (flag, and bit for debug purpose)
Set by hardware after a SETUP packet, and gives the direction of the following packet:
- 1 for IN endpoint
- 0 for OUT endpoint
Can not be set or cleared by software.
• 1-0 - CURRBK1:0 - Current Bank (all endpoints except Control endpoint) flag
Set by hardware to indicate the number of the current bank:
00b Bank0
01b Bank1
1xb Reserved
Can not be set or cleared by software.
• 7 - FIFOCON - FIFO Control bit
For OUT and SETUP Endpoint:
Set by hardware when a new OUT message is stored in the current bank, at the same time than
RXOUT or RXSTP.
Clear to free the current bank and to switch to the following bank. Setting by software has no
effect.
For IN Endpoint:
Set by hardware when the current bank is free, at the same time than TXIN.
Clear to send the FIFO data and to switch the bank. Setting by software has no effect.
• 6 - NAKINI - NAK IN Received Interrupt flag
Set by hardware when a NAK handshake has been sent in response of a IN request from the
host. This triggers an USB interrupt if NAKINE is sent.
Shall be cleared by software. Setting by software has no effect.
• 5 - RWAL - Read/Write Allowed flag
Set by hardware to signal:
- for an IN endpoint: the current bank is not full, that is, the firmware can push data into the FIFO,
- for an OUT endpoint: the current bank is not empty, that is, the firmware can read data from the
FIFO.
The bit is never set if STALLRQ is set, or in case of error.
Cleared by hardware otherwise.
This bit shall not be used for the control endpoint.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
FIFOCON NAKINI RWAL NAKOUTI RXSTPI RXOUTI STALLEDI TXINI UEINTX
Read/write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0282
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
• 4 - NAKOUTI - NAK OUT Received Interrupt flag
Set by hardware when a NAK handshake has been sent in response of a OUT/PING request
from the host. This triggers an USB interrupt if NAKOUTE is sent.
Shall be cleared by software. Setting by software has no effect.
• 3 - RXSTPI - Received SETUP Interrupt flag
Set by hardware to signal that the current bank contains a new valid SETUP packet. An interrupt
(EPINTx) is triggered (if enabled).
Shall be cleared by software to handshake the interrupt. Setting by software has no effect.
This bit is inactive (cleared) if the endpoint is an IN endpoint.
• 2 - RXOUTI / KILLBK - Received OUT Data Interrupt flag
Set by hardware to signal that the current bank contains a new packet. An interrupt (EPINTx) is
triggered (if enabled).
Shall be cleared by software to handshake the interrupt. Setting by software has no effect.
Kill Bank IN bit
Set this bit to kill the last written bank.
Cleared by hardware when the bank is killed. Clearing by software has no effect.
See page 271 for more details on the Abort.
• 1 - STALLEDI - STALLEDI Interrupt flag
Set by hardware to signal that a STALL handshake has been sent, or that a CRC error has been
detected in a OUT isochronous endpoint.
Shall be cleared by software. Setting by software has no effect.
• 0 - TXINI - Transmitter Ready Interrupt flag
Set by hardware to signal that the current bank is free and can be filled. An interrupt (EPINTx) is
triggered (if enabled).
Shall be cleared by software to handshake the interrupt. Setting by software has no effect.
This bit is inactive (cleared) if the endpoint is an OUT endpoint.
• 7 - FLERRE - Flow Error Interrupt Enable flag
Set to enable an endpoint interrupt (EPINTx) when OVERFI or UNDERFI are sent.
Clear to disable an endpoint interrupt (EPINTx) when OVERFI or UNDERFI are sent.
• 6 - NAKINE - NAK IN Interrupt Enable bit
Set to enable an endpoint interrupt (EPINTx) when NAKINI is set.
Clear to disable an endpoint interrupt (EPINTx) when NAKINI is set.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
FLERRE NAKINE - NAKOUTE RXSTPE RXOUTE STALLEDE TXINE UEIENX
Read/write R/W R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0283
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
• 5 - Reserved
The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits.
• 4 - NAKOUTE - NAK OUT Interrupt Enable bit
Set to enable an endpoint interrupt (EPINTx) when NAKOUTI is set.
Clear to disable an endpoint interrupt (EPINTx) when NAKOUTI is set.
• 3 - RXSTPE - Received SETUP Interrupt Enable flag
Set to enable an endpoint interrupt (EPINTx) when RXSTPI is sent.
Clear to disable an endpoint interrupt (EPINTx) when RXSTPI is sent.
• 2 - RXOUTE - Received OUT Data Interrupt Enable flag
Set to enable an endpoint interrupt (EPINTx) when RXOUTI is sent.
Clear to disable an endpoint interrupt (EPINTx) when RXOUTI is sent.
• 1 - STALLEDE - Stalled Interrupt Enable flag
Set to enable an endpoint interrupt (EPINTx) when STALLEDI is sent.
Clear to disable an endpoint interrupt (EPINTx) when STALLEDI is sent.
• 0 - TXINE - Transmitter Ready Interrupt Enable flag
Set to enable an endpoint interrupt (EPINTx) when TXINI is sent.
Clear to disable an endpoint interrupt (EPINTx) when TXINI is sent.
• 7-0 - DAT7:0 -Data bits
Set by the software to read/write a byte from/to the endpoint FIFO selected by EPNUM.
• 7-3 - Reserved
The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits.
• 2-0 - BYCT10:8 - Byte count (high) bits
Set by hardware. This field is the MSB of the byte count of the FIFO endpoint. The LSB part is
provided by the UEBCLX register.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DAT D7 DAT D6 DAT D5 DAT D4 DAT D3 DAT D2 DAT D1 DAT D0 UEDATX
Read/write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
- - - - - BYCT D10 BYCT D9 BYCT D8 UEBCHX
Read/write R R R R R R R R
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0284
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
• 7-0 - BYCT7:0 - Byte Count (low) bits
Set by the hardware. BYCT10:0 is:
- (for IN endpoint) increased after each writing into the endpoint and decremented after each
byte sent,
- (for OUT endpoint) increased after each byte sent by the host, and decremented after each
byte read by the software.
• 7 - Reserved
The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits.
• 6-0 - EPINT6:0 - Endpoint Interrupts bits
Set by hardware when an interrupt is triggered by the UEINTX register and if the corresponding
endpoint interrupt enable bit is set.
Cleared by hardware when the interrupt source is served.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
BYCT D7 BYCT D6 BYCT D5 BYCT D4 BYCT D3 BYCT D2 BYCT D1 BYCT D0 UEBCLX
Read/write R R R R R R R R
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
- EPINT D6 EPINT D5 EPINT D4 EPINT D3 EPINT D2 EPINT D1 EPINT D0 UEINT
Read/write R R R R R R R R
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0285
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
24. USB host operating modes
This mode is available only on Atmel AT90USB647/1287 products.
24.1 Pipe description
For the USB Host controller, the term of Pipe is used instead of Endpoint for the USB Device
controller. A Host Pipe corresponds to a Device Endpoint, as described in the USB specification.
Figure 24-1. Pipes and endpoints in a USB system.
In the USB Host controller, a Pipe will be associated to a Device Endpoint, considering the
Device Configuration Descriptors.
24.2 Detach
The reset value of the DETACH bit is 1. Thus, the firmware has the responsibility of clearing this
bit before switching to the Host mode (HOST set).
24.3 Power-on and reset
Figure 24-2 explains the USB host controller main states on power-on.
Figure 24-2. USB host controller states after reset.
Host
Ready
Host
Idle
Device
disconnection
Device
connection
Clock stopped
Macro off
Device
disconnection
Host
Suspend
SOFE=1
SOFE=0286
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
USB host controller state after an hardware reset is ‘Reset’. When the USB controller is enabled
and the USB Host controller is selected, the USB controller is in ‘Idle’ state. In this state, the
USB Host controller waits for the Device connection, with a minimum power consumption.
The USB Pad should be in Idle mode. The macro does not need to have the PLL activated to
enter in ‘Host Ready’ state.
The Host controller enters in Suspend state when the USB bus is in Suspend state, that is, when
the Host controller doesn’t generate the Start of Frame. In this state, the USB consumption is
minimum. The Host controller exits to the Suspend state when starting to generate the SOF over
the USB line.
24.4 Device detection
A Device is detected by the USB controller when the USB bus if different from D+ and D- low. In
other words, when the USB Host Controller detects the Device pull-up on the D+ line. To enable
this detection, the Host Controller has to provide the Vbus power supply to the Device.
The Device Disconnection is detected by the USB Host controller when the USB Idle correspond
to D+ and D- low on the USB line.
24.5 Pipe selection
Prior to any operation performed by the CPU, the Pipe must first be selected. This is done by
setting PNUM2:0 bits (UPNUM register) with the Pipe number which will be managed by the
CPU.
The CPU can then access to the various Pipe registers and data.
24.6 Pipe configuration
The following flow (see Figure 24-3 on page 287) must be respected in order to activate a Pipe.287
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 24-3. Pipe activation flow.
Once the Pipe is activated (EPEN set) and, the hardware is ready to send requests to the
Device.
When configured (CFGOK = 1), only the Pipe Token (PTOKEN) and the polling interval for Interrupt
pipe can be modified.
A Control type pipe supports only one bank. Any other value will lead to a configuration error
(CFGOK = 0).
A clear of PEN will reset the configuration of the Pipe. All the corresponding Pipe registers are
reset to there reset values. Please refer to “Memory management” on page 252 for more details.
Note: The firmware has to configure the Default Control Pipe with the following parameters:
• Type: Control
• Token: SETUP
• Data bank: 1
• Size: 64 Bytes
The firmware asks for eight bytes of the Device Descriptor sending a GET_DESCRIPTOR
request. These bytes contains the MaxPacketSize of the Device default control endpoint and the
firmware re-configures the size of the Default Control Pipe with this size parameter.
Pipe
Activ ation
UPCONX
PENABLE=1
UPCFG0X PTYPE
PTOKEN
PEPNUM
CFGOK=1
ERROR
No
Yes
UPCFG2X
INTFRQ
(interrupt only)
Pipe activ ated
and f reezed
UPCFG1X
PSIZE
PBK
CFGMEM
Enable the pipe
Select the Pipe type:
* Type (Control, Bulk, Interrupt)
* Token (IN, OUT, SETUP)
* Endpoint number
Configure the Pipe memory:
* Pipe size
* Number of banks
Configure the polling interval
for Interrupt pipe288
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
24.7 USB reset
The USB controller sends a USB Reset when the firmware set the RESET bit. The RSTI bit is
set by hardware when the USB Reset has been sent. This triggers an interrupt if the RSTE has
been set.
When a USB Reset has been sent, all the Pipe configuration and the memory allocation are
reset. The General Host interrupt enable register is left unchanged.
If the bus was previously in suspend mode (SOFEN = 0), the USB controller automatically
switches to the resume mode (HWUPI is set) and the SOFEN bit is set by hardware in order to
generate SOF immediately after the USB Reset.
24.8 Address setup
Once the Device has answer to the first Host requests with the default address (0), the Host
assigns a new address to the device. The Host controller has to send a USB reset to the device
and perform a SET ADDRESS control request, with the new address to be used by the Device.
This control request ended, the firmware write the new address into the UHADDR register. All
following requests, on every Pipes, will be performed using this new address.
When the Host controller send a USB reset, the UHADDR register is reset by hardware and the
following Host requests will be performed using the default address (0).
24.9 Remote wake-up detection
The Host Controller enters in Suspend mode when clearing the SOFEN bit. No more Start Of
Frame is sent on the USB bus and the USB Device enters in Suspend mode 3ms later.
The Device awakes the Host Controller by sending an Upstream Resume (Remote Wake-Up
feature). The Host Controller detects a non-idle state on the USB bus and set the HWUPI bit. If
the non-Idle correspond to an Upstream Resume (K state), the RXRSMI bit is set by hardware.
The firmware has to generate a downstream resume within 1ms and for at least 20ms by setting
the RESUME bit.
Once the downstream Resume has been generated, the SOFEN bit is automatically set by hardware
in order to generate SOF immediately after the USB resume.
24.10 USB pipe reset
The firmware can reset a Pipe using the pipe reset register. The configuration of the pipe and
the data toggle remains unchanged. Only the bank management and the status bits are reset to
their initial values.
To completely reset a Pipe, the firmware has to disable and then enable the pipe.
24.11 Pipe data access
In order to read or to write into the Pipe Fifo, the CPU selects the Pipe number with the UPNUM
register and performs read or write action on the UPDATX register.
Host
Ready
Host
Suspend
SOFE=1
or HWUP=1
SOFE=0289
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
24.12 Control pipe management
A Control transaction is composed of three phases:
• SETUP
• Data (IN or OUT)
• Status (OUT or IN)
The firmware has to change the Token for each phase.
The initial data toggle is set for the corresponding token (ONLY for Control Pipe):
• SETUP: Data0
• OUT: Data1
• IN: Data1 (expected data toggle)
24.13 OUT pipe management
The Pipe must be configured and not frozen first.
Note: if the firmware decides to switch to suspend mode (clear SOFEN) even if a bank is ready
to be sent, the USB controller will automatically exit from Suspend mode and the bank will be
sent.
The TXOUT bit is set by hardware when the current bank becomes free. This triggers an interrupt
if the TXOUTE bit is set. The FIFOCON bit is set at the same time. The CPU writes into the
FIFO and clears the FIFOCON bit to allow the USB controller to send the data.
If the OUT Pipe is composed of multiple banks, this also switches to the next data bank. The
TXOUT and FIFOCON bits are automatically updated by hardware regarding the status of the
next bank.290
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 24-4. Example with OUT data banks.
24.14 IN Pipe management
The Pipe must be configured first.
When the Host requires data from the device, the firmware has to determine first the IN mode to
use using the INMODE bit:
• INMODE = 0. The INRQX register is taken in account. The Host controller will perform
(INRQX+1) IN requests on the selected Pipe before freezing the Pipe. This mode avoids to
have extra IN requests on a Pipe
• INMODE = 1. The USB controller will perform infinite IN request until the firmware freezes the
Pipe
The IN request generation will start when the firmware clear the PFREEZE bit.
Each time the current bank is full, the RXIN and the FIFOCON bits are set. This triggers an interrupt
if the RXINE bit is set. The firmware can acknowledge the USB interrupt by clearing the
RXIN bit. The Firmware read the data and clear the FIFOCON bit in order to free the current
OUT DATA
(bank 0) ACK
TXOUT
FIFOCON
HW
Example with 1 OUT data bank
write data from CPU
BANK 0
Example with 2 OUT data banks
SW
SW SW
SW
OUT
OUT DATA
(bank 0) ACK
TXOUT
FIFOCON
write data from CPU
BANK 0
SW
SW SW
SW
OUT DATA
(bank 1) ACK
write data from CPU
BANK 0
write data from CPU
BANK 1
SW
HW
write data from CPU
BANK0
Example with 2 OUT data banks
OUT DATA
(bank 0) ACK
TXOUT
FIFOCON
write data from CPU
BANK 0
SW
SW SW
write data from CPU SW
BANK 1
SW
HW
write data from CPU
BANK0
OUT DATA
(bank 1) ACK291
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
bank. If the IN Pipe is composed of multiple banks, clearing the FIFOCON bit will switch to the
next bank. The RXIN and FIFOCON bits are then updated by hardware in accordance with the
status of the new bank.
Figure 24-5. Example with IN data banks.
24.14.1 CRC error (isochronous only)
A CRC error can occur during IN stage if the USB controller detects a bad received packet. In
this situation, the STALLEDI/CRCERRI interrupt is triggered. This does not prevent the RXINI
interrupt from being triggered.
24.15 Interrupt system
Figure 24-6. USB host controller interrupt system.
IN DATA
(to bank 0) ACK
RXIN
FIFOCON
HW
IN DATA
(to bank 0) ACK
HW
SW
SW
SW
Example with 1 IN data bank
read data from CPU
BANK 0
IN DATA
(to bank 0) ACK
RXIN
FIFOCON
HW
IN DATA
(to bank 1) ACK
SW
SW
Example with 2 IN data banks
read data from CPU
BANK 0
HW
SW
read data from CPU
BANK 0
read data from CPU
BANK 1
HWUPE
UHIEN.6
HWUPI
UHINT.6
HSOFI
UHINT.5 HSOFE
UHIEN.5
RXRSMI
UHINT.4 RXRSME
UHIEN.4
RSMEDI
UHINT.3 RSMEDE
UHIEN.3
RSTI
UHINT.2 RSTE
UHIEN.2
DDISCI
UHINT.1 DDISCE
UHIEN.1
DCONNI
UHINT.0 DCONNE
UHIEN.0
USB host
interrupt292
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 24-7. USB device controller pipe interrupt system.
24.16 Registers
24.16.1 General USB host registers
• 7-3 - Reserved
The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits.
• 2 - RESUME - Send USB Resume
Set this bit to generate a USB Resume on the USB bus.
Cleared by hardware when the USB Resume has been sent. Clearing by software has no effect.
This bit should be set only when the start of frame generation is enable (SOFEN bit set).
• 1 - RESET - Send USB Reset
Set this bit to generate a USB Reset on the USB bus.
Cleared by hardware when the USB Reset has been sent. Clearing by software has no effect.
Refer to the USB reset section for more details.
• 0 - SOFEN - Start Of Frame Generation Enable
Set this bit to generate SOF on the USB bus in full speed mode and keep-alive in low speed
mode.
Clear this bit to disable the SOF generation and to leave the USB bus in Idle state.
FLERRE
UPIEN.7
UNDERFI
UPSTAX.5
OVERFI
UPSTAX.6
NAKEDI
UPINTX.6 NAKEDE
UPIEN.6
PERRI
UPINTX.4 PERRE
UPIEN.4
TXSTPI
UPINTX.3 TXSTPE
UPIEN.3
TXOUTI
UPINTX.2 TXOUTE
UPIEN.2
RXSTALLI
UPINTX.1 RXSTALLE
UPIEN.1
RXINI
UPINTX.0 RXINE
UPIEN.0
FLERRE
UPIEN.7
PIPE 0
PIPE 1
PIPE 2
PIPE 3
PIPE 4
PIPE 5
Pipe interrupt
PIPE 6
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
----- RESUME RESET SOFEN UHCON
Read/write R R R R R R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0293
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
• 7 - Reserved
The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits.
• 6 - HWUPI - Host Wake-Up Interrupt
Set by hardware when a non-idle state is detected on the USB bus.This interrupt should be
enable only to wake up the CPU core from power down mode.
Shall be clear by software to acknowledge the interrupt. Setting by software has no effect.
• 5 - HSOFI - Host Start Of Frame Interrupt
Set by hardware when a SOF is issued by the Host controller. This triggers a USB interrupt
when HSOFE is set. When using the host controller in low speed mode, this bit is also set when
a keep-alive is sent.
Shall be cleared by software to acknowledge the interrupt. Setting by software has no effect.
• 4 - RXRSMI - Upstream Resume Received Interrupt
Set by hardware when an Upstream Resume has been received from the Device.
Shall be cleared by software. Setting by software has no effect.
• 3 - RSMEDI - Downstream Resume Sent Interrupt
Set by hardware when a Downstream Resume has been sent to the Device.
Shall be cleared by software. Setting by software has no effect.
• 2 - RSTI - USB Reset Sent Interrupt
Set by hardware when a USB Reset has been sent to the Device.
Shall be cleared by software. Setting by software has no effect.
• 1 - DDISCI - Device Disconnection Interrupt
Set by hardware when the device has been removed from the USB bus.
Shall be cleared by software. Setting by software has no effect.
• 0 - DCONNI - Device Connection Interrupt
Set by hardware when a new device has been connected to the USB bus.
Shall be cleared by software. Setting by software has no effect.
• 7 - Reserved
The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
- HWUPI HSOFI RXRSMI RSMEDI RSTI DDISCI DCONNI UHINT
Read/write R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
HWUPE HSOFE RXRSME RSMEDE RSTE DDISCE DCONNE UHIEN
Read/write R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0294
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
• 6 - HWUPE - Host Wake-Up Interrupt Enable
Set this bit to enable HWUP interrupt.For correct interrupt handle execution, this interrupt should
be enable only before entering power-down mode.
Clear this bit to disable HWUP interrupt.
• 5 - HSOFE - Host Start Of frame Interrupt Enable
Set this bit to enable HSOF interrupt.
Clear this bit to disable HSOF interrupt.
• 4 - RXRSME -Upstream Resume Received Interrupt Enable
Set this bit to enable the RXRSMI interrupt.
Clear this bit to disable the RXRSMI interrupt.
• 3 - RSMEDE - Downstream Resume Sent Interrupt Enable
Set this bit to enable the RSMEDI interrupt.
Clear this bit to disable the RSMEDI interrupt.
• 2 - RSTE - USB Reset Sent Interrupt Enable
Set this bit to enable the RSTI interrupt.
Clear this bit to disable the RSTI interrupt.
• 1 - DDISCE - Device Disconnection Interrupt Enable
Set this bit to enable the DDISCI interrupt.
Clear this bit to disable the DDISCI interrupt.
• 0 - DCONNE - Device Connection Interrupt Enable
Set this bit to enable the DCONNI interrupt.
Clear this bit to disable the DCONNI interrupt.
• 7 - Reserved
The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits.
• 6-0 - HADDR6:0 - USB Host Address
These bits contain the address of the USB Device.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
HADDR6 HADDR5 HADDR4 HADDR3 HADDR2 HADDR1 HADDR0 HADDR6 UHADDR
Read/write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0295
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
• 7-4 - Reserved
The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits.
• 3-0 - FNUM10:8 - Frame Number
The value contained in this register is the current SOF number.
This value can be modified by software.
• 7-0 - FNUM7:0 - Frame Number
The value contained in this register is the current SOF number.
This value can be modified by software.
• 7-0 - FLEN7:0 - Frame Length
The value contained the data frame length transmited.
24.16.2 USB Host Pipe registers
• 7-3 - Reserved
The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits.
• 2-0 - PNUM2:0 - Pipe Number
Select the pipe using this register. The USB Host registers ended by a X correspond then to this
number.
This number is used for the USB controller following the value of the PNUMD bit.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
- - - - - FNUM10 FNUM9 FNUM8 UHFNUMH
Read/write R R R R R R R R
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
FNUM7 FNUM6 FNUM5 FNUM4 FNUM3 FNUM2 FNUM1 FNUM0 UHFNUML
Read/write R R R R R R R R
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
FLEN7 FLEN6 FLEN5 FLEN4 FLEN3 FLEN2 FLEN1 FLEN0 UHFLEN
Read/write R R R R R R R R
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PNUM2 PNUM1 PNUM0 UPNUM
Read/write RW RW RW
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0296
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
• 7 - Reserved
The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits.
• 6 - P6RST - Pipe 6 Reset
Set this bit to 1 and reset this bit to 0 to reset the Pipe 6.
• 5 - P5RST - Pipe 5 Reset
Set this bit to 1 and reset this bit to 0 to reset the Pipe 5.
• 4 - P4RST - Pipe 4 Reset
Set this bit to 1 and reset this bit to 0 to reset the Pipe 4.
• 3 - P3RST - Pipe 3 Reset
Set this bit to 1 and reset this bit to 0 to reset the Pipe 3.
• 2 - P2RST - Pipe 2 Reset
Set this bit to 1 and reset this bit to 0 to reset the Pipe 2.
• 1 - P1RST - Pipe 1 Reset
Set this bit to 1 and reset this bit to 0 to reset the Pipe 1.
• 0 - P0RST - Pipe 0 Reset
Set this bit to 1 and reset this bit to 0 to reset the Pipe 0.
• 7 - Reserved
The value read from this bit is always 0. Do not set this bit.
• 6 - PFREEZE - Pipe Freeze
Set this bit to Freeze the Pipe requests generation.
Clear this bit to enable the Pipe request generation.
This bit is set by hardware when:
- the pipe is not configured
- a STALL handshake has been received on this Pipe
- An error occurs on the Pipe (UPINTX.PERRI = 1)
- (INRQ+1) In requests have been processed
This bit is set at 1 by hardware after a Pipe reset or a Pipe enable.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
- P6RST P5RST P4RST P3RST P2RST P1RST P0RST UPRST
Read/write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
- PFREEZE INMODE - RSTDT - - PEN UPCONX
Read/write RW RW RW RW
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0297
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
• 5 - INMODE - IN Request mode
Set this bit to allow the USB controller to perform infinite IN requests when the Pipe is not frozen.
Clear this bit to perform a pre-defined number of IN requests. This number is stored in the UINRQX
register.
• 4 - Reserved
The value read from this bit is always 0. Do not set this bit.
• 3 - RSTDT - Reset Data Toggle
Set this bit to reset the Data Toggle to its initial value for the current Pipe.
Cleared by hardware when proceed. Clearing by software has no effect.
• 2 - Reserved
The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits.
• 1 - Reserved
The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits.
• 0 - PEN - Pipe Enable
Set to enable the Pipe.
Clear to disable and set the pipe.
• 7-6 - PTYPE1:0 - Pipe Type
Select the type of the Pipe:
- 00: Control
- 01: Isochronous
- 10: Bulk
- 11: Interrupt
• 5-4 - PTOKEN1:0 - Pipe Token
Select the Token to associate to the Pipe
- 00: SETUP
- 01: IN
- 10: OUT
- 11: reserved
• 3-0 - PEPNUM3:0 - Pipe Endpoint Number
Set this field according to the Pipe configuration. Set the number of the Endpoint targeted by the
Pipe. This value is from 0 and 15.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PTYPE1 PTYPE0 PTOKEN1 PTOKEN0 PEPNUM3 PEPNUM2 PEPNUM1 PEPNUM0 UPCFG0X
Read/write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0298
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
• 7 - Reserved
The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits.
• 6-4 - PSIZE2:0 - Pipe Size
Select the size of the Pipe:
- 000: 8 - 100: 128 (only for endpoint 1)
- 001: 16 - 101: 256 (only for endpoint 1)
- 010: 32 - 110: Reserved. Do not use this configuration.
- 011: 64 - 111: Reserved. Do not use this configuration.
• 3-2 - PBK1:0 - Pipe Bank
Select the number of bank to declare for the current Pipe.
- 00: 1 bank
- 01: 2 banks
- 10: invalid
- 11: invalid
• ALLOC - Configure Pipe Memory
Set to configure the pipe memory with the characteristics.
Clear to update the memory allocation. Refer to the Memory Management chapter for more
details.
7 - Reserved
The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits.
• 7 - INTFRQ7:0 - Interrupt Pipe Request Frequency
These bits are the maximum value in millisecond of the polling period for an Interrupt Pipe.
This value has no effect for a non-Interrupt Pipe.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
- PSIZE2:0 PBK1:0 ALLOC - UPCFG1X
Read/write R RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
INTFRQ7 INTFRQ6 INTFRQ5 INTFRQ4 INTFRQ3 INTFRQ2 INTFRQ1 INTFRQ0 UPCFG2X
Read/write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0299
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
• 7 - CFGOK - Configure Pipe Memory OK
Set by hardware if the required memory configuration has been successfully performed.
Cleared by hardware when the pipe is disabled. The USB reset and the reset pipe have no effect
on the configuration of the pipe.
• 6 - OVERFI - Overflow
Set by hardware when a the current Pipe has received more data than the maximum length of
the current Pipe. An interrupt is triggered if the FLERRE bit is set.
Shall be cleared by software. Setting by software has no effect.
• 5 - UNDERFI - Underflow
Set by hardware when a transaction underflow occurs in the current isochronous or interrupt
Pipe. The Pipe can’t send the data flow required by the device. A ZLP will be sent instead. An
interrupt is triggered if the FLERRE bit is set.
Shall be cleared by software. Setting by software has no effect.
Note: the Host controller has to send a OUT packet, but the bank is empty. A ZLP will be sent
and the UNDERFI bit is set.
• 4 - Reserved
The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits.
• 3-2 - DTSEQ1:0 - Toggle Sequencing flag
Set by hardware to indicate the PID data of the current bank:
00b Data0
01b Data1
1xb Reserved.
For OUT Pipe, this value indicates the next data toggle that will be sent. This is not relative to the
current bank.
For IN Pipe, this value indicates the last data toggle received on the current bank.
• 1-0 - NBUSYBK1:0 - Busy Bank flag
Set by hardware to indicate the number of busy bank.
For OUT Pipe, it indicates the number of busy bank(s), filled by the user, ready for OUT transfer.
For IN Pipe, it indicates the number of busy bank(s) filled by IN transaction from the Device.
00b All banks are free
01b 1 busy bank
10b 2 busy banks
11b Reserved.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CFGOK OVERFI UNDERFI - DTSEQ1:0 NBUSYBK UPSTAX
Read/write R RW RW R R R R
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0300
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
• 7-0 - INRQ7:0 - IN Request Number Before Freeze
Enter the number of IN transactions before the USB controller freezes the pipe. The USB controller
will perform (INRQ+1) IN requests before to freeze the Pipe. This counter is automatically
decreased by 1 each time a IN request has been successfully performed.
This register has no effect when the INMODE bit is set (infinite IN requests generation till the
pipe is not frozen).
• 7-6 - Reserved
The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits.
• 5 - COUNTER1:0 - Error counter
This counter is increased by the USB controller each time an error occurs on the Pipe. When this
value reaches 3, the Pipe is automatically frozen.
Clear these bits by software.
• 4 - CRC16 - CRC16 Error
Set by hardware when a CRC16 error has been detected.
Shall be cleared by software. Setting by software has no effect.
• 3 - TIMEOUT - Time-out Error
Set by hardware when a time-out error has been detected.
Shall be cleared by software. Setting by software has no effect.
• 2 - PID - PID Error
Set by hardware when a PID error has been detected.
Shall be cleared by software. Setting by software has no effect.
• 1 - DATAPID - Data PID Error
Set by hardware when a data PID error has been detected.
Shall be cleared by software. Setting by software has no effect.
• 0 - DATATGL - Bad Data Toggle
Set by hardware when a data toggle error has been detected.
Shall be cleared by software. Setting by software has no effect.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
INRQ7 INRQ6 INRQ5 INRQ4 INRQ3 INRQ2 INRQ1 INRQ0 UPINRQX
Read/write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
- COUNTER1:0 CRC16 TIMEOUT PID DATAPID DATATGL UPERRX
Read/write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0301
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
• 7 - FIFOCON - FIFO Control
For OUT and SETUP Pipe:
Set by hardware when the current bank is free, at the same time than TXOUT or TXSTP.
Clear to send the FIFO data and to switch the bank. Setting by software has no effect.
For IN Pipe:
Set by hardware when a new IN message is stored in the current bank, at the same time than
RXIN.
Clear to free the current bank and to switch to the following bank. Setting by software has no
effect.
• 6 - NAKEDI - NAK Handshake received
Set by hardware when a NAK has been received on the current bank of the Pipe. This triggers
an interrupt if the NAKEDE bit is set in the UPIENX register.
Shall be clear to handshake the interrupt. Setting by software has no effect.
• 5 - RWAL - Read/Write Allowed
OUT Pipe:
Set by hardware when the firmware can write a new data into the Pipe FIFO.
Cleared by hardware when the current Pipe FIFO is full.
IN Pipe:
Set by hardware when the firmware can read a new data into the Pipe FIFO.
Cleared by hardware when the current Pipe FIFO is empty.
This bit is also cleared by hardware when the RXSTALL or the PERR bit is set
• 4 - PERRI -PIPE Error
Set by hardware when an error occurs on the current bank of the Pipe. This triggers an interrupt
if the PERRE bit is set in the UPIENX register. Refers to the UPERRX register to determine the
source of the error.
Automatically cleared by hardware when the error source bit is cleared.
• 3 - TXSTPI - SETUP Bank ready
Set by hardware when the current SETUP bank is free and can be filled. This triggers an interrupt
if the TXSTPE bit is set in the UPIENX register.
Shall be cleared to handshake the interrupt. Setting by software has no effect.
• 2 - TXOUTI -OUT Bank ready
Set by hardware when the current OUT bank is free and can be filled. This triggers an interrupt if
the TXOUTE bit is set in the UPIENX register.
Shall be cleared to handshake the interrupt. Setting by software has no effect.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
FIFOCON NAKEDI RWAL PERRI TXSTPI TXOUTI RXSTALLI RXINI UPINTX
Read/write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0302
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
• 1 - RXSTALLI / CRCERR - STALL Received / Isochronous CRC Error
Set by hardware when a STALL handshake has been received on the current bank of the Pipe.
The Pipe is automatically frozen. This triggers an interrupt if the RXSTALLE bit is set in the UPIENX
register.
Shall be cleared to handshake the interrupt. Setting by software has no effect.
For Isochronous Pipe:
Set by hardware when a CRC error occurs on the current bank of the Pipe. This triggers an interrupt
if the TXSTPE bit is set in the UPIENX register.
Shall be cleared to handshake the interrupt. Setting by software has no effect.
• 0 - RXINI - IN Data received
Set by hardware when a new USB message is stored in the current bank of the Pipe. This triggers
an interrupt if the RXINE bit is set in the UPIENX register.
Shall be cleared to handshake the interrupt. Setting by software has no effect.
• 7 - FLERRE - Flow Error Interrupt enable
Set to enable the OVERFI and UNDERFI interrupts.
Clear to disable the OVERFI and UNDERFI interrupts.
• 6 - NAKEDE -NAK Handshake Received Interrupt Enable
Set to enable the NAKEDI interrupt.
Clear to disable the NAKEDI interrupt.
• 5 - Reserved
The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits.
• 4 - PERRE -PIPE Error Interrupt Enable
Set to enable the PERRI interrupt.
Clear to disable the PERRI interrupt.
• 3 - TXSTPE - SETUP Bank ready Interrupt Enable
Set to enable the TXSTPI interrupt.
Clear to disable the TXSTPI interrupt.
• 2 - TXOUTE - OUT Bank ready Interrupt Enable
Set to enable the TXOUTI interrupt.
Clear to disable the TXOUTI interrupt.
• 1 - RXSTALLE - STALL Received Interrupt Enable
Set to enable the RXSTALLI interrupt.
Clear to disable the RXSTALLI interrupt.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
FLERRE NAKEDE - PERRE TXSTPE TXOUTE RXSTALLE RXINE UPIENX
Read/write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0303
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
• 0 - RXINE - IN Data received Interrupt Enable
Set to enable the RXINI interrupt.
Clear to disable the RXINI interrupt.
• 7-0 - PDAT7:0 - Pipe Data bits
Set by the software to read/write a byte from/to the Pipe FIFO selected by PNUM.
• 7-3 - Reserved
The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits.
• 2-0 - PBYCT10:8 - Byte count (high) bits
Set by hardware. This field is the MSB of the byte count of the FIFO endpoint. The LSB part is
provided by the UPBCLX register.
• 7-0 - PBYCT7:0 - Byte Count (low) bits
Set by the hardware. PBYCT10:0 is:
- (for OUT Pipe) increased after each writing into the Pipe and decremented after each byte
sent,
- (for IN Pipe) increased after each byte received by the host, and decremented after each byte
read by the software.
• 7 - Reserved
The value read from these bits is always 0. Do not set these bits.
• 6-0 - PINT6:0 - Pipe Interrupts bits
Set by hardware when an interrupt is triggered by the UPINTX register and if the corresponding
endpoint interrupt enable bit is set.
Cleared by hardware when the interrupt source is served.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PDAT7 PDAT6 PDAT5 PDAT4 PDAT3 PDAT2 PDAT1 PDAT0 UPDATX
Read/write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
- - - - - PBYCT10 PBYCT9 PBYCT8 UPBCHX
Read/write R R R
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PBYCT7 PBYCT6 PBYCT5 PBYCT4 PBYCT3 PBYCT2 PBYCT1 PBYCT0 UPBCLX
Read/write R R R R R R R R
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
- PINT6 PINT5 PINT4 PINT3 PINT2 PINT1 PINT0 UPINT
Read/write
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0304
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
25. Analog Comparator
The Analog Comparator compares the input values on the positive pin AIN0 and negative pin
AIN1. When the voltage on the positive pin AIN0 is higher than the voltage on the negative pin
AIN1, the Analog Comparator output, ACO, is set. The comparator’s output can be set to trigger
the Timer/Counter1 Input Capture function. In addition, the comparator can trigger a separate
interrupt, exclusive to the Analog Comparator. The user can select Interrupt triggering on comparator
output rise, fall or toggle. A block diagram of the comparator and its surrounding logic is
shown in Figure 25-1.
The Power Reduction ADC bit, PRADC, in “PRR0 – Power Reduction Register 0” on page 54
must be disabled by writing a logical zero to be able to use the ADC input MUX.
Figure 25-1. Analog Comparator block diagram (2).
Notes: 1. See Table 25-2 on page 306.
2. Refer to Figure 1-1 on page 3 and Table 11-6 on page 79 for Analog Comparator pin
placement.
25.0.1 ADCSRB – ADC Control and Status Register B
• Bit 6 – ACME: Analog Comparator Multiplexer Enable
When this bit is written logic one and the ADC is switched off (ADEN in ADCSRA is zero), the
ADC multiplexer selects the negative input to the Analog Comparator. When this bit is written
logic zero, AIN1 is applied to the negative input of the Analog Comparator. For a detailed
description of this bit, see “Analog Comparator multiplexed input” on page 306.
25.0.2 ACSR – Analog Comparator Control and Status Register
ACBG
BANDGAP
REFERENCE
ADC MULTIPLEXER
OUTPUT
ACME
ADEN
(1)
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
– ACME – – - ADTS2 ADTS1 ADTS0 ADCSRB
Read/write R R/W R R R R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ACD ACBG ACO ACI ACIE ACIC ACIS1 ACIS0 ACSR
Read/write R/W R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 N/A 0 0 0 0 0305
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
• Bit 7 – ACD: Analog Comparator Disable
When this bit is written logic one, the power to the Analog Comparator is switched off. This bit
can be set at any time to turn off the Analog Comparator. This will reduce power consumption in
Active and Idle mode. When changing the ACD bit, the Analog Comparator Interrupt must be
disabled by clearing the ACIE bit in ACSR. Otherwise an interrupt can occur when the bit is
changed.
• Bit 6 – ACBG: Analog Comparator Bandgap Select
When this bit is set, a fixed bandgap reference voltage replaces the positive input to the Analog
Comparator. When this bit is cleared, AIN0 is applied to the positive input of the Analog Comparator.
See “Internal voltage reference” on page 62.
• Bit 5 – ACO: Analog Comparator Output
The output of the Analog Comparator is synchronized and then directly connected to ACO. The
synchronization introduces a delay of 1 - 2 clock cycles.
• Bit 4 – ACI: Analog Comparator Interrupt Flag
This bit is set by hardware when a comparator output event triggers the interrupt mode defined
by ACIS1 and ACIS0. The Analog Comparator interrupt routine is executed if the ACIE bit is set
and the I-bit in SREG is set. ACI is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt
handling vector. Alternatively, ACI is cleared by writing a logic one to the flag.
• Bit 3 – ACIE: Analog Comparator Interrupt Enable
When the ACIE bit is written logic one and the I-bit in the Status Register is set, the Analog Comparator
interrupt is activated. When written logic zero, the interrupt is disabled.
• Bit 2 – ACIC: Analog Comparator Input Capture Enable
When written logic one, this bit enables the input capture function in Timer/Counter1 to be triggered
by the Analog Comparator. The comparator output is in this case directly connected to the
input capture front-end logic, making the comparator utilize the noise canceler and edge select
features of the Timer/Counter1 Input Capture interrupt. When written logic zero, no connection
between the Analog Comparator and the input capture function exists. To make the comparator
trigger the Timer/Counter1 Input Capture interrupt, the ICIE1 bit in the Timer Interrupt Mask
Register (TIMSK1) must be set.
• Bits 1, 0 – ACIS1, ACIS0: Analog Comparator Interrupt Mode Select
These bits determine which comparator events that trigger the Analog Comparator interrupt. The
different settings are shown in Table 25-1.
When changing the ACIS1/ACIS0 bits, the Analog Comparator Interrupt must be disabled by
clearing its Interrupt Enable bit in the ACSR Register. Otherwise an interrupt can occur when the
bits are changed.
Table 25-1. ACIS1/ACIS0 settings.
ACIS1 ACIS0 Interrupt mode
0 0 Comparator Interrupt on Output Toggle
0 1 Reserved
1 0 Comparator Interrupt on Falling Output Edge
1 1 Comparator Interrupt on Rising Output Edge306
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
25.1 Analog Comparator multiplexed input
It is possible to select any of the ADC7..0 pins to replace the negative input to the Analog Comparator.
The ADC multiplexer is used to select this input, and consequently, the ADC must be
switched off to utilize this feature. If the Analog Comparator Multiplexer Enable bit (ACME in
ADCSRB) is set and the ADC is switched off (ADEN in ADCSRA is zero), and MUX2..0 in
ADMUX select the input pin to replace the negative input to the Analog Comparator, as shown in
Table 25-2. If ACME is cleared or ADEN is set, AIN1 is applied to the negative input to the Analog
Comparator.
25.1.1 DIDR1 – Digital Input Disable Register 1
• Bit 1, 0 – AIN1D, AIN0D: AIN1, AIN0 Digital Input Disable
When this bit is written logic one, the digital input buffer on the AIN1/0 pin is disabled. The corresponding
PIN Register bit will always read as zero when this bit is set. When an analog signal is
applied to the AIN1/0 pin and the digital input from this pin is not needed, this bit should be written
logic one to reduce power consumption in the digital input buffer.
Table 25-2. Analog Comparator multiplexed input.
ACME ADEN MUX2..0 Analog Comparator negative input
0 x xxx AIN1
1 1 xxx AIN1
1 0 000 ADC0
1 0 001 ADC1
1 0 010 ADC2
1 0 011 ADC3
1 0 100 ADC4
1 0 101 ADC5
1 0 110 ADC6
1 0 111 ADC7
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
– – – – – – AIN1D AIN0D DIDR1
Read/write R R R R R R R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0307
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
26. ADC – Analog to Digital Converter
26.1 Features
• 10-bit resolution
• 0.5 LSB integral non-linearity
• ±2 LSB absolute accuracy
• 65 - 260µs conversion time
• Up to 15ksps at maximum resolution
• Eight multiplexed single ended input channels
• Seven differential input channels
• Optional left adjustment for ADC result readout
• 0 - VCC ADC input voltage range
• Selectable 2.56V ADC reference voltage
• Free running or single conversion mode
• ADC start conversion by auto triggering on interrupt sources
• Interrupt on ADC conversion complete
• Sleep mode noise canceler
26.2 Overview
The Atmel AT90USB64/128 features a 10-bit successive approximation ADC. The ADC is connected
to an 8-channel Analog Multiplexer which allows eight single-ended voltage inputs
constructed from the pins of Port F. The single-ended voltage inputs refer to 0V (GND).
The device also supports 16 differential voltage input combinations. Two of the differential inputs
(ADC1, ADC0 and ADC3, ADC2) are equipped with a programmable gain stage, providing
amplification steps of 0 dB (1×), 20 dB (10×), or 46 dB (200×) on the differential input voltage
before the A/D conversion. Seven differential analog input channels share a common negative
terminal (ADC1), while any other ADC input can be selected as the positive input terminal. If 1×
or 10× gain is used, 8-bit resolution can be expected. If 200× gain is used, 7-bit resolution can
be expected.
The ADC contains a Sample and Hold circuit which ensures that the input voltage to the ADC is
held at a constant level during conversion. A block diagram of the ADC is shown in Figure 26-1
on page 308.
The ADC has a separate analog supply voltage pin, AVCC. AVCC must not differ more than ±0.3V
from VCC. See the paragraph “ADC noise canceler” on page 314 on how to connect this pin.
Internal reference voltages of nominally 2.56V or AVCC are provided on-chip. The voltage reference
may be externally decoupled at the AREF pin by a capacitor for better noise performance.308
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 26-1. Analog to digital converter block schematic.
ADC CONVERSION
COMPLETE IRQ
8-BIT DATA BUS
15 0
ADC MULTIPLEXER
SELECT (ADMUX)
ADC CTRL. & STATUS
REGISTER (ADCSRA)
ADC DATA REGISTER
(ADCH/ADCL)
MUX2
ADIE
ADATE
ADEN
ADSC
ADIF ADIF
MUX1
MUX0
ADPS2
ADPS1
ADPS0
MUX3
CONVERSION LOGIC
10-BIT DAC
+
-
SAMPLE & HOLD
COMPARATOR
INTERNAL
REFERENCE
MUX DECODER MUX4
AVCC
ADC7
ADC6
ADC5
ADC4
ADC3
ADC2
ADC1
ADC0
REFS1
REFS0
ADLAR
+
-
CHANNEL SELECTION
GAIN SELECTION
ADC[9:0]
ADC MULTIPLEXER
OUTPUT
DIFFERENTIAL
AMPLIFIER
AREF
BANDGAP
REFERENCE
PRESCALER
SINGLE ENDED / DIFFERENTIAL SELECTION
GND
POS.
INPUT
MUX
NEG.
INPUT
MUX
TRIGGER
SELECT
ADTS[2:0]
INTERRUPT
FLAGS
ADHSM
START309
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
26.3 Operation
The ADC converts an analog input voltage to a 10-bit digital value through successive approximation.
The minimum value represents GND and the maximum value represents the voltage on
the AREF pin minus 1 LSB. Optionally, AVCC or an internal 2.56V reference voltage may be connected
to the AREF pin by writing to the REFSn bits in the ADMUX Register. The internal
voltage reference may thus be decoupled by an external capacitor at the AREF pin to improve
noise immunity.
The analog input channel and differential gain are selected by writing to the MUX bits in
ADMUX. Any of the ADC input pins, as well as GND and a fixed bandgap voltage reference, can
be selected as single ended inputs to the ADC. A selection of ADC input pins can be selected as
positive and negative inputs to the differential amplifier.
The ADC is enabled by setting the ADC Enable bit, ADEN in ADCSRA. Voltage reference and
input channel selections will not go into effect until ADEN is set. The ADC does not consume
power when ADEN is cleared, so it is recommended to switch off the ADC before entering power
saving sleep modes.
The ADC generates a 10-bit result which is presented in the ADC Data Registers, ADCH and
ADCL. By default, the result is presented right adjusted, but can optionally be presented left
adjusted by setting the ADLAR bit in ADMUX.
If the result is left adjusted and no more than 8-bit precision is required, it is sufficient to read
ADCH. Otherwise, ADCL must be read first, then ADCH, to ensure that the content of the Data
Registers belongs to the same conversion. Once ADCL is read, ADC access to Data Registers
is blocked. This means that if ADCL has been read, and a conversion completes before ADCH is
read, neither register is updated and the result from the conversion is lost. When ADCH is read,
ADC access to the ADCH and ADCL Registers is re-enabled.
The ADC has its own interrupt which can be triggered when a conversion completes. The ADC
access to the Data Registers is prohibited between reading of ADCH and ADCL, the interrupt
will trigger even if the result is lost.
26.4 Starting a conversion
A single conversion is started by writing a logical one to the ADC Start Conversion bit, ADSC.
This bit stays high as long as the conversion is in progress and will be cleared by hardware
when the conversion is completed. If a different data channel is selected while a conversion is in
progress, the ADC will finish the current conversion before performing the channel change.
Alternatively, a conversion can be triggered automatically by various sources. Auto Triggering is
enabled by setting the ADC Auto Trigger Enable bit, ADATE in ADCSRA. The trigger source is
selected by setting the ADC Trigger Select bits, ADTS in ADCSRB (See description of the ADTS
bits for a list of the trigger sources). When a positive edge occurs on the selected trigger signal,
the ADC prescaler is reset and a conversion is started. This provides a method of starting conversions
at fixed intervals. If the trigger signal is still set when the conversion completes, a new
conversion will not be started. If another positive edge occurs on the trigger signal during conversion,
the edge will be ignored. Note that an interrupt flag will be set even if the specific
interrupt is disabled or the Global Interrupt Enable bit in SREG is cleared. A conversion can thus
be triggered without causing an interrupt. However, the interrupt flag must be cleared in order to
trigger a new conversion at the next interrupt event. 310
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 26-2. ADC auto trigger logic.
Using the ADC Interrupt Flag as a trigger source makes the ADC start a new conversion as soon
as the ongoing conversion has finished. The ADC then operates in Free Running mode, constantly
sampling and updating the ADC Data Register. The first conversion must be started by
writing a logical one to the ADSC bit in ADCSRA. In this mode the ADC will perform successive
conversions independently of whether the ADC Interrupt Flag, ADIF is cleared or not.
If Auto Triggering is enabled, single conversions can be started by writing ADSC in ADCSRA to
one. ADSC can also be used to determine if a conversion is in progress. The ADSC bit will be
read as one during a conversion, independently of how the conversion was started.
26.5 Prescaling and conversion timing
Figure 26-3. ADC prescaler.
By default, the successive approximation circuitry requires an input clock frequency between
50kHz and 200kHz to get maximum resolution. If a lower resolution than 10 bits is needed, the
input clock frequency to the ADC can be higher than 200kHz to get a higher sample rate. Alternatively,
setting the ADHSM bit in ADCSRB allows an increased ADC clock frequency at the
expense of higher power consumption.
The ADC module contains a prescaler, which generates an acceptable ADC clock frequency
from any CPU frequency above 100kHz. The prescaling is set by the ADPS bits in ADCSRA.
The prescaler starts counting from the moment the ADC is switched on by setting the ADEN bit
ADSC
ADIF
SOURCE 1
SOURCE n
ADTS[2:0]
CONVERSION
LOGIC
PRESCALER
START CLKADC
.
.
.
. EDGE
DETECTOR
ADATE
7-BIT ADC PRESCALER
ADC CLOCK SOURCE
CK
ADPS0
ADPS1
ADPS2
CK/128
CK/2
CK/4
CK/8
CK/16
CK/32
CK/64
Reset
ADEN
START311
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
in ADCSRA. The prescaler keeps running for as long as the ADEN bit is set, and is continuously
reset when ADEN is low.
When initiating a single ended conversion by setting the ADSC bit in ADCSRA, the conversion
starts at the following rising edge of the ADC clock cycle. See “Differential channels” on page
312 for details on differential conversion timing.
A normal conversion takes 13 ADC clock cycles. The first conversion after the ADC is switched
on (ADEN in ADCSRA is set) takes 25 ADC clock cycles in order to initialize the analog circuitry.
The actual sample-and-hold takes place 1.5 ADC clock cycles after the start of a normal conversion
and 13.5 ADC clock cycles after the start of an first conversion. When a conversion is
complete, the result is written to the ADC Data Registers, and ADIF is set. In Single Conversion
mode, ADSC is cleared simultaneously. The software may then set ADSC again, and a new
conversion will be initiated on the first rising ADC clock edge.
When Auto Triggering is used, the prescaler is reset when the trigger event occurs. This assures
a fixed delay from the trigger event to the start of conversion. In this mode, the sample-and-hold
takes place two ADC clock cycles after the rising edge on the trigger source signal. Three additional
CPU clock cycles are used for synchronization logic.
In Free Running mode, a new conversion will be started immediately after the conversion completes,
while ADSC remains high. For a summary of conversion times, see Table 26-1 on page
312.
Figure 26-4. ADC timing diagram, first conversion (single conversion mode).
Figure 26-5. ADC timing diagram, single conversion.
Sign and MSB of result
LSB of result
ADC clock
ADSC
Sample & hold
ADIF
ADCH
ADCL
Cycle number
ADEN
1 2 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 1 2
First conversion Next
conversion
3
MUX and REFS
update
MUX
and REFS
update
Conversion
complete
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Sign and MSB of result
LSB of result
ADC clock
ADSC
ADIF
ADCH
ADCL
Cycle number 1 2
One conversion Next conversion
3
Sample & hold
MUX and REFS
update
Conversion
complete MUX and REFS
update312
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 26-6. ADC timing diagram, auto triggered conversion.
Figure 26-7. ADC timing diagram, free running conversion.
26.5.1 Differential channels
When using differential channels, certain aspects of the conversion need to be taken into
consideration.
Differential conversions are synchronized to the internal clock CKADC2 equal to half the ADC
clock frequency. This synchronization is done automatically by the ADC interface in such a way
that the sample-and-hold occurs at a specific phase of CKADC2. A conversion initiated by the
user (that is, all single conversions, and the first free running conversion) when CKADC2 is low will
take the same amount of time as a single ended conversion (13 ADC clock cycles from the next
prescaled clock cycle). A conversion initiated by the user when CKADC2 is high will take 14 ADC
clock cycles due to the synchronization mechanism. In Free Running mode, a new conversion is
initiated immediately after the previous conversion completes, and since CKADC2 is high at this
time, all automatically started (that is, all but the first) Free Running conversions will take 14
ADC clock cycles.
Table 26-1. ADC conversion time.
Condition First conversion
Normal conversion,
single ended
Auto triggered
conversion
Sample & Hold
(Cycles from Start of Conversion) 14.5 1.5 2
Conversion Time
(Cycles) 25 13 13.5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Sign and MSB of result
LSB of result
ADC clock
Trigger
Source
ADIF
ADCH
ADCL
Cycle number 1 2
One conversion Next conversion
Conversion
complete Prescaler
reset
ADATE
Prescaler
reset
Sample &
hold
MUX and REFS
update
11 12 13
Sign and MSB of result
LSB of result
ADC clock
ADSC
ADIF
ADCH
ADCL
Cycle number 1 2
One conversion Next conversion
3 4
Conversion
complete
Sample & hold
MUX and REFS
update313
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
If differential channels are used and conversions are started by Auto Triggering, the ADC must
be switched off between conversions. When Auto Triggering is used, the ADC prescaler is reset
before the conversion is started. Since the stage is dependent of a stable ADC clock prior to the
conversion, this conversion will not be valid. By disabling and then re-enabling the ADC between
each conversion (writing ADEN in ADCSRA to “0” then to “1”), only extended conversions are
performed. The result from the extended conversions will be valid. See “Prescaling and conversion
timing” on page 310 for timing details.
The gain stage is optimized for a bandwidth of 4kHz at all gain settings. Higher frequencies may
be subjected to non-linear amplification. An external low-pass filter should be used if the input
signal contains higher frequency components than the gain stage bandwidth. Note that the ADC
clock frequency is independent of the gain stage bandwidth limitation. For example, the ADC
clock period may be 6µs, allowing a channel to be sampled at 12ksps, regardless of the bandwidth
of this channel.
26.6 Changing channel or reference selection
The MUXn and REFS1:0 bits in the ADMUX Register are single buffered through a temporary
register to which the CPU has random access. This ensures that the channels and reference
selection only takes place at a safe point during the conversion. The channel and reference
selection is continuously updated until a conversion is started. Once the conversion starts, the
channel and reference selection is locked to ensure a sufficient sampling time for the ADC. Continuous
updating resumes in the last ADC clock cycle before the conversion completes (ADIF in
ADCSRA is set). Note that the conversion starts on the following rising ADC clock edge after
ADSC is written. The user is thus advised not to write new channel or reference selection values
to ADMUX until one ADC clock cycle after ADSC is written.
If Auto Triggering is used, the exact time of the triggering event can be indeterministic. Special
care must be taken when updating the ADMUX Register, in order to control which conversion
will be affected by the new settings.
If both ADATE and ADEN is written to one, an interrupt event can occur at any time. If the
ADMUX Register is changed in this period, the user cannot tell if the next conversion is based
on the old or the new settings. ADMUX can be safely updated in the following ways:
a. When ADATE or ADEN is cleared.
b. During conversion, minimum one ADC clock cycle after the trigger event.
c. After a conversion, before the interrupt flag used as trigger source is cleared.
When updating ADMUX in one of these conditions, the new settings will affect the next ADC
conversion.
Special care should be taken when changing differential channels. Once a differential channel
has been selected, the stage may take as much as 125µs to stabilize to the new value. Thus
conversions should not be started within the first 125µs after selecting a new differential channel.
Alternatively, conversion results obtained within this period should be discarded.
The same settling time should be observed for the first differential conversion after changing
ADC reference (by changing the REFS1:0 bits in ADMUX).
The settling time and gain stage bandwidth is independent of the ADHSM bit setting.314
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
26.6.1 ADC input channels
When changing channel selections, the user should observe the following guidelines to ensure
that the correct channel is selected:
• In Single Conversion mode, always select the channel before starting the conversion. The
channel selection may be changed one ADC clock cycle after writing one to ADSC. However,
the simplest method is to wait for the conversion to complete before changing the channel
selection
• In Free Running mode, always select the channel before starting the first conversion. The
channel selection may be changed one ADC clock cycle after writing one to ADSC. However,
the simplest method is to wait for the first conversion to complete, and then change the
channel selection. Since the next conversion has already started automatically, the next
result will reflect the previous channel selection. Subsequent conversions will reflect the new
channel selection
When switching to a differential gain channel, the first conversion result may have a poor accuracy
due to the required settling time for the automatic offset cancellation circuitry. The user
should preferably disregard the first conversion result.
26.6.2 ADC voltage reference
The reference voltage for the ADC (VREF) indicates the conversion range for the ADC. Single
ended channels that exceed VREF will result in codes close to 0x3FF. VREF can be selected as
either AVCC, internal 2.56V reference, or external AREF pin.
AVCC is connected to the ADC through a passive switch. The internal 2.56V reference is generated
from the internal bandgap reference (VBG) through an internal amplifier. In either case, the
external AREF pin is directly connected to the ADC, and the reference voltage can be made
more immune to noise by connecting a capacitor between the AREF pin and ground. VREF can
also be measured at the AREF pin with a high impedant voltmeter. Note that VREF is a high
impedant source, and only a capacitive load should be connected in a system.
If the user has a fixed voltage source connected to the AREF pin, the user may not use the other
reference voltage options in the application, as they will be shorted to the external voltage. If no
external voltage is applied to the AREF pin, the user may switch between AVCC and 2.56V as
reference selection. The first ADC conversion result after switching reference voltage source
may be inaccurate, and the user is advised to discard this result.
If differential channels are used, the selected reference should not be closer to AVCC than indicated
in Table 31-5 on page 397.
26.7 ADC noise canceler
The ADC features a noise canceler that enables conversion during sleep mode to reduce noise
induced from the CPU core and other I/O peripherals. The noise canceler can be used with ADC
Noise Reduction and Idle mode. To make use of this feature, the following procedure should be
used:315
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
a. Make sure that the ADC is enabled and is not busy converting. Single Conversion
mode must be selected and the ADC conversion complete interrupt must be
enabled.
b. Enter ADC Noise Reduction mode (or Idle mode). The ADC will start a conversion
once the CPU has been halted.
c. If no other interrupts occur before the ADC conversion completes, the ADC interrupt
will wake up the CPU and execute the ADC Conversion Complete interrupt
routine. If another interrupt wakes up the CPU before the ADC conversion is complete,
that interrupt will be executed, and an ADC Conversion Complete interrupt
request will be generated when the ADC conversion completes. The CPU will
remain in active mode until a new sleep command is executed.
Note that the ADC will not be automatically turned off when entering other sleep modes than Idle
mode and ADC Noise Reduction mode. The user is advised to write zero to ADEN before entering
such sleep modes to avoid excessive power consumption.
If the ADC is enabled in such sleep modes and the user wants to perform differential conversions,
the user is advised to switch the ADC off and on after waking up from sleep to prompt an
extended conversion to get a valid result.
26.7.1 Analog input circuitry
The analog input circuitry for single ended channels is illustrated in Figure 26-8. An analog
source applied to ADCn is subjected to the pin capacitance and input leakage of that pin, regardless
of whether that channel is selected as input for the ADC. When the channel is selected, the
source must drive the S/H capacitor through the series resistance (combined resistance in the
input path).
The ADC is optimized for analog signals with an output impedance of approximately 10kΩ or
less. If such a source is used, the sampling time will be negligible. If a source with higher impedance
is used, the sampling time will depend on how long time the source needs to charge the
S/H capacitor, with can vary widely. The user is recommended to only use low impedant sources
with slowly varying signals, since this minimizes the required charge transfer to the S/H
capacitor.
If differential gain channels are used, the input circuitry looks somewhat different, although
source impedances of a few hundred kΩ or less is recommended.
Signal components higher than the Nyquist frequency (fADC/2) should not be present for either
kind of channels, to avoid distortion from unpredictable signal convolution. The user is advised
to remove high frequency components with a low-pass filter before applying the signals as
inputs to the ADC.
Figure 26-8. Analog input circuitry.
ADCn
I
IH
1..100kΩ
CS/H= 14pF
VCC/2
I
IL316
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
26.7.2 Analog noise canceling techniques
Digital circuitry inside and outside the device generates EMI which might affect the accuracy of
analog measurements. If conversion accuracy is critical, the noise level can be reduced by
applying the following techniques:
a. Keep analog signal paths as short as possible. Make sure analog tracks run over
the analog ground plane, and keep them well away from high-speed switching digital
tracks.
b. The AVCC pin on the device should be connected to the digital VCC supply voltage
via an LC network as shown in Figure 26-9.
c. Use the ADC noise canceler function to reduce induced noise from the CPU.
d. If any ADC port pins are used as digital outputs, it is essential that these do not
switch while a conversion is in progress.
Figure 26-9. ADC power connections.
26.7.3 Offset compensation schemes
The gain stage has a built-in offset cancellation circuitry that nulls the offset of differential measurements
as much as possible. The remaining offset in the analog path can be measured
directly by selecting the same channel for both differential inputs. This offset residue can be then
subtracted in software from the measurement results. Using this kind of software based offset
correction, offset on any channel can be reduced below one LSB.
26.7.4 ADC accuracy definitions
An n-bit single-ended ADC converts a voltage linearly between GND and VREF in 2n steps
(LSBs). The lowest code is read as 0, and the highest code is read as 2n
-1.
Several parameters describe the deviation from the ideal behavior:
VCC
GND
100nF
Analog ground plane
(ADC0) PF0
(ADC7) PF7
(ADC1) PF1
(ADC2) PF2
(ADC3) PF3
(ADC4) PF4
(ADC5) PF5
(ADC6) PF6
AREF
GND
AVCC
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
1
51
NC
(AD0) PA0
10μH317
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
• Offset: The deviation of the first transition (0x000 to 0x001) compared to the ideal transition
(at 0.5 LSB). Ideal value: 0 LSB
Figure 26-10. Offset error.
• Gain Error: After adjusting for offset, the Gain Error is found as the deviation of the last
transition (0x3FE to 0x3FF) compared to the ideal transition (at 1.5 LSB below maximum).
Ideal value: 0 LSB
Figure 26-11. Gain error.
• Integral non-linearity (INL): After adjusting for offset and gain error, the INL is the maximum
deviation of an actual transition compared to an ideal transition for any code. Ideal value: 0
LSB
Output code
VREF Input voltage
Ideal ADC
Actual ADC
Offset
error
Output code
VREF Input voltage
Ideal ADC
Actual ADC
Gain
error318
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 26-12. Integral non-linearity (INL).
• Differential Non-linearity (DNL): The maximum deviation of the actual code width (the interval
between two adjacent transitions) from the ideal code width (1 LSB). Ideal value: 0 LSB
Figure 26-13. Differential non-linearity (DNL).
• Quantization Error: Due to the quantization of the input voltage into a finite number of codes,
a range of input voltages (1 LSB wide) will code to the same value. Always ±0.5 LSB.
• Absolute Accuracy: The maximum deviation of an actual (unadjusted) transition compared to
an ideal transition for any code. This is the compound effect of offset, gain error, differential
error, non-linearity, and quantization error. Ideal value: ±0.5 LSB.
26.8 ADC conversion result
After the conversion is complete (ADIF is high), the conversion result can be found in the ADC
Result Registers (ADCL, ADCH).
Output code
VREF Input voltage
Ideal ADC
Actual ADC
INL
Output code
0x3FF
0x000
0 VREF Input voltage
DNL
1 LSB319
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
For single ended conversion, the result is:
where VIN is the voltage on the selected input pin and VREF the selected voltage reference (see
Table 26-3 on page 322 and Table 26-4 on page 322). 0x000 represents analog ground, and
0x3FF represents the selected reference voltage minus one LSB.
If differential channels are used, the result is:
where VPOS is the voltage on the positive input pin, VNEG the voltage on the negative input pin,
GAIN the selected gain factor and VREF the selected voltage reference. The result is presented
in two’s complement form, from 0x200 (-512d) through 0x1FF (+511d). Note that if the user
wants to perform a quick polarity check of the result, it is sufficient to read the MSB of the result
(ADC9 in ADCH). If the bit is one, the result is negative, and if this bit is zero, the result is positive.
Figure 26-14 shows the decoding of the differential input range.
Table 82 shows the resulting output codes if the differential input channel pair (ADCn - ADCm) is
selected with a reference voltage of VREF.
ADC
VIN ⋅ 1024
VREF
= --------------------------
ADC
VPOS VNEG ( ) – ⋅ ⋅ GAIN 512
VREF
= ------------------------------------------------------------------------320
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 26-14. Differential measurement range.
0
Output code
0x1FF
0x000
VREF Differential input
voltage (volts)
0x3FF
0x200
- VREF321
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Example 1:
– ADMUX = 0xED (ADC3 - ADC2, 10× gain, 2.56V reference, left adjusted result)
– Voltage on ADC3 is 300mV, voltage on ADC2 is 500mV.
– ADCR = 512 × 10 × (300 - 500) / 2560 = -400 = 0x270
– ADCL will thus read 0x00, and ADCH will read 0x9C.
Writing zero to ADLAR right adjusts the result: ADCL = 0x70, ADCH = 0x02.
Example 2:
– ADMUX = 0xFB (ADC3 - ADC2, 1× gain, 2.56V reference, left adjusted result)
– Voltage on ADC3 is 300mV, voltage on ADC2 is 500mV.
– ADCR = 512 × 1 × (300 - 500) / 2560 = -41 = 0x029.
– ADCL will thus read 0x40, and ADCH will read 0x0A.
Writing zero to ADLAR right adjusts the result: ADCL = 0x00, ADCH = 0x29.
26.9 ADC register description
26.9.1 ADMUX – ADC Multiplexer Selection Register
• Bit 7:6 – REFS1:0: Reference Selection bits
These bits select the voltage reference for the ADC, as shown in Table 26-3 on page 322. If
these bits are changed during a conversion, the change will not go in effect until this conversion
Table 26-2. Correlation between input voltage and output codes.
VADCn Read code Corresponding decimal value
VADCm + VREF /GAIN 0x1FF 511
VADCm + 0.999 VREF /GAIN 0x1FF 511
VADCm + 0.998 VREF /GAIN 0x1FE 510
... ... ...
VADCm + 0.001 VREF /GAIN 0x001 1
VADCm 0x000 0
VADCm - 0.001 VREF /GAIN 0x3FF -1
... ... ...
VADCm - 0.999 VREF /GAIN 0x201 -511
VADCm - VREF /GAIN 0x200 -512
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
REFS1 REFS0 ADLAR MUX4 MUX3 MUX2 MUX1 MUX0 ADMUX
Read/write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0322
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
is complete (ADIF in ADCSRA is set). The internal voltage reference options may not be used if
an external reference voltage is being applied to the AREF pin.
• Bit 5 – ADLAR: ADC Left Adjust Result
The ADLAR bit affects the presentation of the ADC conversion result in the ADC Data Register.
Write one to ADLAR to left adjust the result. Otherwise, the result is right adjusted. Changing the
ADLAR bit will affect the ADC Data Register immediately, regardless of any ongoing conversions.
For a complete description of this bit, see “ADCL and ADCH – The ADC data register” on
page 324.
• Bits 4:0 – MUX4:0: Analog Channel Selection bits
The value of these bits selects which combination of analog inputs are connected to the ADC.
These bits also select the gain for the differential channels. See Table 26-4 for details. If these
bits are changed during a conversion, the change will not go in effect until this conversion is
complete (ADIF in ADCSRA is set).
Table 26-3. Voltage reference selections for ADC.
REFS1 REFS0 Voltage reference selection
0 0 AREF, internal VREF turned off
0 1 AVCC with external capacitor on AREF pin
1 0 Reserved
1 1 Internal 2.56V Voltage Reference with external capacitor on AREF pin
Table 26-4. Input channel and gain selections.
MUX4..0 Single ended input Positive differential input Negative differential input Gain
00000 ADC0
N/A
00001 ADC1
00010 ADC2
00011 ADC3
00100 ADC4
00101 ADC5
00110 ADC6
00111 ADC7323
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
26.9.2 ADCSRA – ADC Control and Status Register A
• Bit 7 – ADEN: ADC Enable
Writing this bit to one enables the ADC. By writing it to zero, the ADC is turned off. Turning the
ADC off while a conversion is in progress, will terminate this conversion.
• Bit 6 – ADSC: ADC Start Conversion
In Single Conversion mode, write this bit to one to start each conversion. In Free Running mode,
write this bit to one to start the first conversion. The first conversion after ADSC has been written
after the ADC has been enabled, or if ADSC is written at the same time as the ADC is enabled,
01000
N/A
(ADC0 / ADC0 / 10x)
01001 ADC1 ADC0 10×
01010 (ADC0 / ADC0 / 200x)
01011 ADC1 ADC0 200×
01100 (Reserved - ADC2 / ADC2 / 10x)
01101 ADC3 ADC2 10×
01110 (ADC2 / ADC2 / 200x)
01111 ADC3 ADC2 200×
10000 ADC0 ADC1 1×
10001 (ADC1 / ADC1 / 1x)
10010 ADC2 ADC1 1×
10011 ADC3 ADC1 1×
10100 ADC4 ADC1 1×
10101 ADC5 ADC1 1×
10110 ADC6 ADC1 1×
10111 ADC7 ADC1 1×
11000 ADC0 ADC2 1×
11001 ADC1 ADC2 1×
11010 (ADC2 / ADC2 / 1x)
11011 ADC3 ADC2 1×
11100 ADC4 ADC2 1×
11101 ADC5 ADC2 1×
11110 1.1V (VBand Gap) N/A
11111 0V (GND)
Table 26-4. Input channel and gain selections. (Continued)
MUX4..0 Single ended input Positive differential input Negative differential input Gain
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ADEN ADSC ADATE ADIF ADIE ADPS2 ADPS1 ADPS0 ADCSRA
Read/write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0324
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
will take 25 ADC clock cycles instead of the normal 13. This first conversion performs initialization
of the ADC.
ADSC will read as one as long as a conversion is in progress. When the conversion is complete,
it returns to zero. Writing zero to this bit has no effect.
• Bit 5 – ADATE: ADC Auto Trigger Enable
When this bit is written to one, Auto Triggering of the ADC is enabled. The ADC will start a conversion
on a positive edge of the selected trigger signal. The trigger source is selected by setting
the ADC Trigger Select bits, ADTS in ADCSRB.
• Bit 4 – ADIF: ADC Interrupt Flag
This bit is set when an ADC conversion completes and the Data Registers are updated. The
ADC Conversion Complete Interrupt is executed if the ADIE bit and the I-bit in SREG are set.
ADIF is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively,
ADIF is cleared by writing a logical one to the flag. Beware that if doing a Read-ModifyWrite
on ADCSRA, a pending interrupt can be disabled. This also applies if the SBI and CBI
instructions are used.
• Bit 3 – ADIE: ADC Interrupt Enable
When this bit is written to one and the I-bit in SREG is set, the ADC Conversion Complete Interrupt
is activated.
• Bits 2:0 – ADPS2:0: ADC Prescaler Select Bits
These bits determine the division factor between the XTAL frequency and the input clock to the
ADC.
26.9.3 ADCL and ADCH – The ADC data register
26.9.3.1 ADLAR = 0
Table 26-5. ADC prescaler selections.
ADPS2 ADPS1 ADPS0 Division factor
000 2
001 2
010 4
011 8
1 0 0 16
1 0 1 32
1 1 0 64
1 1 1 128
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
– – – – – – ADC9 ADC8 ADCH
ADC7 ADC6 ADC5 ADC4 ADC3 ADC2 ADC1 ADC0 ADCL
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read/write R R R R R R R R
RRRRRRRR
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
00000000325
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
26.9.3.2 ADLAR = 1
When an ADC conversion is complete, the result is found in these two registers. If differential
channels are used, the result is presented in two’s complement form.
When ADCL is read, the ADC Data Register is not updated until ADCH is read. Consequently, if
the result is left adjusted and no more than 8-bit precision (7 bit + sign bit for differential input
channels) is required, it is sufficient to read ADCH. Otherwise, ADCL must be read first, then
ADCH.
The ADLAR bit in ADMUX, and the MUXn bits in ADMUX affect the way the result is read from
the registers. If ADLAR is set, the result is left adjusted. If ADLAR is cleared (default), the result
is right adjusted.
• ADC9:0: ADC Conversion Result
These bits represent the result from the conversion, as detailed in “ADC conversion result” on
page 318.
26.9.4 ADCSRB – ADC Control and Status Register B
• Bit 7 – ADHSM: ADC High Speed Mode
Writing this bit to one enables the ADC High Speed mode. This mode enables higher conversion
rate at the expense of higher power consumption.
• Bit 2:0 – ADTS2:0: ADC Auto Trigger Source
If ADATE in ADCSRA is written to one, the value of these bits selects which source will trigger
an ADC conversion. If ADATE is cleared, the ADTS2:0 settings will have no effect. A conversion
will be triggered by the rising edge of the selected interrupt flag. Note that switching from a trigger
source that is cleared to a trigger source that is set, will generate a positive edge on the
trigger signal. If ADEN in ADCSRA is set, this will start a conversion. Switching to Free Running
mode (ADTS[2:0]=0) will not cause a trigger event, even if the ADC Interrupt Flag is set.
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
ADC9 ADC8 ADC7 ADC6 ADC5 ADC4 ADC3 ADC2 ADCH
ADC1 ADC0 – ––––– ADCL
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read/write R R R R R R R R
RRRRRRRR
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
00000000
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ADHSM ACME – – – ADTS2 ADTS1 ADTS0 ADCSRB
Read/write R/W R/W R R R R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Table 26-6. ADC auto trigger source selections.
ADTS2 ADTS1 ADTS0 Trigger source
0 0 0 Free running mode
0 0 1 Analog comparator
0 1 0 External interrupt request 0
0 1 1 Timer/Counter0 compare match326
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
26.9.5 DIDR0 – Digital Input Disable Register 0
• Bit 7:0 – ADC7D..ADC0D: ADC7:0 Digital Input Disable
When this bit is written logic one, the digital input buffer on the corresponding ADC pin is disabled.
The corresponding PIN Register bit will always read as zero when this bit is set. When an
analog signal is applied to the ADC7..0 pin and the digital input from this pin is not needed, this
bit should be written logic one to reduce power consumption in the digital input buffer.
1 0 0 Timer/Counter0 overflow
1 0 1 Timer/Counter1 compare match B
1 1 0 Timer/Counter1 overflow
1 1 1 Timer/Counter1 capture event
Table 26-6. ADC auto trigger source selections. (Continued)
ADTS2 ADTS1 ADTS0 Trigger source
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ADC7D ADC6D ADC5D ADC4D ADC3D ADC2D ADC1D ADC0D DIDR0
Read/write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0327
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
27. JTAG interface and on-chip debug system
27.0.1 Features
• JTAG (IEEE std. 1149.1 compliant) interface
• Boundary-scan capabilities according to the IEEE std. 1149.1 (JTAG) standard
• Debugger access to:
– All internal peripheral units
– Internal and external RAM
– The internal register file
– Program counter
– EEPROM and flash memories
• Extensive on-chip debug support for break conditions, including
– AVR break instruction
– Break on change of program memory flow
– Single step break
– Program memory break points on single address or address range
– Data memory break points on single address or address range
• Programming of flash, EEPROM, fuses, and lock bits through the JTAG interface
• On-chip debugging supported by Atmel AVR Studio®
27.1 Overview
The AVR IEEE std. 1149.1 compliant JTAG interface can be used for
• Testing PCBs by using the JTAG Boundary-scan capability
• Programming the non-volatile memories, Fuses and Lock bits
• On-chip debugging
A brief description is given in the following sections. Detailed descriptions for Programming via
the JTAG interface, and using the Boundary-scan Chain can be found in the sections “Programming
via the JTAG interface” on page 377 and “IEEE 1149.1 (JTAG) boundary-scan” on page
333, respectively. The On-chip Debug support is considered being private JTAG instructions,
and distributed within Atmel and to selected third party vendors only.
Figure 27-1 on page 328 shows a block diagram of the JTAG interface and the On-chip Debug
system. The TAP Controller is a state machine controlled by the TCK and TMS signals. The TAP
Controller selects either the JTAG Instruction Register or one of several Data Registers as the
scan chain (Shift Register) between the TDI – input and TDO – output. The Instruction Register
holds JTAG instructions controlling the behavior of a Data Register.
The ID-Register, Bypass Register, and the Boundary-scan Chain are the Data Registers used
for board-level testing. The JTAG Programming Interface (actually consisting of several physical
and virtual Data Registers) is used for serial programming via the JTAG interface. The Internal
Scan Chain and Break Point Scan Chain are used for On-chip debugging only.
27.2 TAP – Test Access Port
The JTAG interface is accessed through four of the AVR’s pins. In JTAG terminology, these pins
constitute the Test Access Port – TAP. These pins are:
• TMS: Test mode select. This pin is used for navigating through the TAP-controller state
machine
• TCK: Test Clock. JTAG operation is synchronous to TCK328
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
• TDI: Test Data In. Serial input data to be shifted in to the Instruction Register or Data Register
(Scan Chains)
• TDO: Test Data Out. Serial output data from Instruction Register or Data Register
The IEEE std. 1149.1 also specifies an optional TAP signal; TRST – Test ReSeT – which is not
provided.
When the JTAGEN Fuse is unprogrammed, these four TAP pins are normal port pins, and the
TAP controller is in reset. When programmed, the input TAP signals are internally pulled high
and the JTAG is enabled for Boundary-scan and programming. The device is shipped with this
fuse programmed.
For the On-chip Debug system, in addition to the JTAG interface pins, the RESET pin is monitored
by the debugger to be able to detect external reset sources. The debugger can also pull
the RESET pin low to reset the whole system, assuming only open collectors on the reset line
are used in the application.
Figure 27-1. Block diagram.
TAP
CONTROLLER
TDI
TDO
TCK
TMS
FLASH
MEMORY
AVR CPU
DIGITAL
PERIPHERAL
UNITS
JTAG / AVR CORE
COMMUNICATION
INTERFACE
BREAKPOINT
UNIT FLOW CONTROL
UNIT
OCD STATUS
AND CONTROL
INTERNAL
SCAN
CHAIN
M
U
X
INSTRUCTION
REGISTER
ID
REGISTER
BYPASS
REGISTER
JTAG PROGRAMMING
INTERFACE
PC
Instruction
Address
Data
BREAKPOINT
SCAN CHAIN
ADDRESS
DECODER
ANALOG
PERIPHERIAL
UNITS
I/O PORT 0
I/O PORT n
BOUNDARY SCAN CHAIN
Analog inputs
Control & clock lines
DEVICE BOUNDARY329
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 27-2. TAP controller state diagram.
27.3 TAP Controller
The TAP Controller is a 16-state finite state machine that controls the operation of the Boundaryscan
circuitry, JTAG programming circuitry, or On-chip Debug system. The state transitions
depicted in Figure 27-2 depend on the signal present on TMS (shown adjacent to each state
transition) at the time of the rising edge at TCK. The initial state after a Power-on Reset is TestLogic-Reset.
As a definition in this document, the LSB is shifted in and out first for all Shift Registers.
Assuming Run-Test/Idle is the present state, a typical scenario for using the JTAG interface is:
• At the TMS input, apply the sequence 1, 1, 0, 0 at the rising edges of TCK to enter the Shift
Instruction Register – Shift-IR state. While in this state, shift the four bits of the JTAG
instructions into the JTAG Instruction Register from the TDI input at the rising edge of TCK.
The TMS input must be held low during input of the three LSBs in order to remain in the ShiftIR
state. The MSB of the instruction is shifted in when this state is left by setting TMS high.
While the instruction is shifted in from the TDI pin, the captured IR-state 0x01 is shifted out on
the TDO pin. The JTAG Instruction selects a particular Data Register as path between TDI
and TDO and controls the circuitry surrounding the selected Data Register
Test-logic-reset
Run-test/idle
Shift-DR
Exit1-DR
Pause-DR
Exit2-DR
Update-DR
Select-IR scan
Capture-IR
Shift-IR
Exit1-IR
Pause-IR
Exit2-IR
Update-IR
Select-DR scan
Capture-DR
0
1
0 11 1
0 0
0 0
1 1
1 0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1 0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0 0
1 1330
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
• Apply the TMS sequence 1, 1, 0 to re-enter the Run-Test/Idle state. The instruction is latched
onto the parallel output from the Shift Register path in the Update-IR state. The Exit-IR,
Pause-IR, and Exit2-IR states are only used for navigating the state machine
• At the TMS input, apply the sequence 1, 0, 0 at the rising edges of TCK to enter the Shift
Data Register – Shift-DR state. While in this state, upload the selected Data Register
(selected by the present JTAG instruction in the JTAG Instruction Register) from the TDI input
at the rising edge of TCK. In order to remain in the Shift-DR state, the TMS input must be
held low during input of all bits except the MSB. The MSB of the data is shifted in when this
state is left by setting TMS high. While the Data Register is shifted in from the TDI pin, the
parallel inputs to the Data Register captured in the Capture-DR state is shifted out on the
TDO pin
• Apply the TMS sequence 1, 1, 0 to re-enter the Run-Test/Idle state. If the selected Data
Register has a latched parallel-output, the latching takes place in the Update-DR state. The
Exit-DR, Pause-DR, and Exit2-DR states are only used for navigating the state machine
As shown in the state diagram, the Run-Test/Idle state need not be entered between selecting
JTAG instruction and using Data Registers, and some JTAG instructions may select certain
functions to be performed in the Run-Test/Idle, making it unsuitable as an Idle state.
Note: Independent of the initial state of the TAP Controller, the Test-Logic-Reset state can always be
entered by holding TMS high for five TCK clock periods.
For detailed information on the JTAG specification, refer to the literature listed in “Bibliography”
on page 332.
27.4 Using the Boundary-scan chain
A complete description of the Boundary-scan capabilities are given in the section “IEEE 1149.1
(JTAG) boundary-scan” on page 333.
27.5 Using the on-chip debug system
As shown in Figure 27-1 on page 328, the hardware support for on-chip debugging consists
mainly of
• A scan chain on the interface between the internal AVR CPU and the internal peripheral units
• Break Point unit
• Communication interface between the CPU and JTAG system
All read or modify/write operations needed for implementing the Debugger are done by applying
AVR instructions via the internal AVR CPU Scan Chain. The CPU sends the result to an I/O
memory mapped location which is part of the communication interface between the CPU and the
JTAG system.
The Break Point Unit implements Break on Change of Program Flow, Single Step Break, two
Program Memory Break Points, and two combined Break Points. Together, the four Break
Points can be configured as either:
• Four single program memory break points
• Three single program memory break point + one single data memory break point
• Two single program memory break points + two single data memory break points
• Two single program memory break points + one program memory break point with mask
(“range Break Point”)331
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
• Two single program memory break points + one data memory break point with mask (“range
Break Point”)
A debugger, like the Atmel AVR Studio, may however use one or more of these resources for its
internal purpose, leaving less flexibility to the end-user.
A list of the On-chip Debug specific JTAG instructions is given in “On-chip debug specific JTAG
instructions” on page 331.
The JTAGEN Fuse must be programmed to enable the JTAG Test Access Port. In addition, the
OCDEN Fuse must be programmed and no Lock bits must be set for the On-chip debug system
to work. As a security feature, the On-chip debug system is disabled when either of the LB1 or
LB2 Lock bits are set. Otherwise, the On-chip debug system would have provided a back-door
into a secured device.
The AVR Studio enables the user to fully control execution of programs on an AVR device with
On-chip Debug capability, AVR In-Circuit Emulator, or the built-in AVR Instruction Set Simulator.
AVR Studio supports source level execution of Assembly programs assembled with Atmel Corporation’s
AVR Assembler and C programs compiled with third party vendors’ compilers.
AVR Studio runs under Microsoft® Windows® 95/98/2000 and Microsoft Windows NT.
For a full description of the Atmel AVR Studio, please refer to the AVR Studio User Guide. Only
highlights are presented in this document.
All necessary execution commands are available in AVR Studio, both on source level and on
disassembly level. The user can execute the program, single step through the code either by
tracing into or stepping over functions, step out of functions, place the cursor on a statement and
execute until the statement is reached, stop the execution, and reset the execution target. In
addition, the user can have an unlimited number of code Break Points (using the BREAK
instruction) and up to two data memory Break Points, alternatively combined as a mask (range)
Break Point.
27.6 On-chip debug specific JTAG instructions
The On-chip debug support is considered being private JTAG instructions, and distributed within
ATMEL and to selected third party vendors only. Instruction opcodes are listed for reference.
27.6.1 PRIVATE0; 0x8
Private JTAG instruction for accessing On-chip debug system.
27.6.2 PRIVATE1; 0x9
Private JTAG instruction for accessing On-chip debug system.
27.6.3 PRIVATE2; 0xA
Private JTAG instruction for accessing On-chip debug system.
27.6.4 PRIVATE3; 0xB
Private JTAG instruction for accessing On-chip debug system.332
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
27.7 On-chip Debug related Register in I/O memory
27.7.1 OCDR – On-chip Debug Register
The OCDR Register provides a communication channel from the running program in the microcontroller
to the debugger. The CPU can transfer a byte to the debugger by writing to this
location. At the same time, an internal flag; I/O Debug Register Dirty – IDRD – is set to indicate
to the debugger that the register has been written. When the CPU reads the OCDR Register the
seven LSB will be from the OCDR Register, while the MSB is the IDRD bit. The debugger clears
the IDRD bit when it has read the information.
In some AVR devices, this register is shared with a standard I/O location. In this case, the OCDR
Register can only be accessed if the OCDEN Fuse is programmed, and the debugger enables
access to the OCDR Register. In all other cases, the standard I/O location is accessed.
Refer to the debugger documentation for further information on how to use this register.
27.8 Using the JTAG programming capabilities
Programming of AVR parts via JTAG is performed via the 4-pin JTAG port, TCK, TMS, TDI, and
TDO. These are the only pins that need to be controlled/observed to perform JTAG programming
(in addition to power pins). It is not required to apply 12V externally. The JTAGEN Fuse
must be programmed and the JTD bit in the MCUCR Register must be cleared to enable the
JTAG Test Access Port.
The JTAG programming capability supports:
• Flash programming and verifying
• EEPROM programming and verifying
• Fuse programming and verifying
• Lock bit programming and verifying
The Lock bit security is exactly as in parallel programming mode. If the Lock bits LB1 or LB2 are
programmed, the OCDEN Fuse cannot be programmed unless first doing a chip erase. This is a
security feature that ensures no back-door exists for reading out the content of a secured
device.
The details on programming through the JTAG interface and programming specific JTAG
instructions are given in the section “Programming via the JTAG interface” on page 377.
27.9 Bibliography
For more information about general Boundary-scan, the following literature can be consulted:
• IEEE: IEEE Std. 1149.1-1990. IEEE Standard Test Access Port and Boundary-scan
Architecture, IEEE, 1993.
• Colin Maunder: The Board Designers Guide to Testable Logic Circuits, Addison-Wesley,
1992.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
MSB/IDRD LSB OCDR
Read/write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0333
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
28. IEEE 1149.1 (JTAG) boundary-scan
28.1 Features
• JTAG (IEEE std. 1149.1 compliant) interface
• Boundary-scan capabilities according to the JTAG standard
• Full scan of all port functions as well as analog circuitry having off-chip connections
• Supports the optional IDCODE instruction
• Additional public AVR_RESET instruction to reset the AVR
28.2 System overview
The Boundary-scan chain has the capability of driving and observing the logic levels on the digital
I/O pins, as well as the boundary between digital and analog logic for analog circuitry having
off-chip connections. At system level, all ICs having JTAG capabilities are connected serially by
the TDI/TDO signals to form a long Shift Register. An external controller sets up the devices to
drive values at their output pins, and observe the input values received from other devices. The
controller compares the received data with the expected result. In this way, Boundary-scan provides
a mechanism for testing interconnections and integrity of components on Printed Circuits
Boards by using the four TAP signals only.
The four IEEE 1149.1 defined mandatory JTAG instructions IDCODE, BYPASS, SAMPLE/PRELOAD,
and EXTEST, as well as the AVR specific public JTAG instruction AVR_RESET can be
used for testing the Printed Circuit Board. Initial scanning of the Data Register path will show the
ID-Code of the device, since IDCODE is the default JTAG instruction. It may be desirable to
have the AVR device in reset during test mode. If not reset, inputs to the device may be determined
by the scan operations, and the internal software may be in an undetermined state when
exiting the test mode. Entering reset, the outputs of any port pin will instantly enter the high
impedance state, making the HIGHZ instruction redundant. If needed, the BYPASS instruction
can be issued to make the shortest possible scan chain through the device. The device can be
set in the reset state either by pulling the external RESET pin low, or issuing the AVR_RESET
instruction with appropriate setting of the Reset Data Register.
The EXTEST instruction is used for sampling external pins and loading output pins with data.
The data from the output latch will be driven out on the pins as soon as the EXTEST instruction
is loaded into the JTAG IR-Register. Therefore, the SAMPLE/PRELOAD should also be used for
setting initial values to the scan ring, to avoid damaging the board when issuing the EXTEST
instruction for the first time. SAMPLE/PRELOAD can also be used for taking a snapshot of the
external pins during normal operation of the part.
The JTAGEN Fuse must be programmed and the JTD bit in the I/O Register MCUCR must be
cleared to enable the JTAG Test Access Port.
When using the JTAG interface for Boundary-scan, using a JTAG TCK clock frequency higher
than the internal chip frequency is possible. The chip clock is not required to run.
28.3 Data registers
The Data Registers relevant for Boundary-scan operations are:
• Bypass Register
• Device Identification Register
• Reset Register
• Boundary-scan Chain334
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
28.3.1 Bypass register
The Bypass register consists of a single Shift register stage. When the Bypass register is
selected as path between TDI and TDO, the register is reset to 0 when leaving the Capture-DR
controller state. The Bypass register can be used to shorten the scan chain on a system when
the other devices are to be tested.
28.3.2 Device Identification register
Figure 28-1 shows the structure of the Device Identification register.
Figure 28-1. The Format of the Device Identification register.
28.3.2.1 Version
Version is a 4-bit number identifying the revision of the component. The JTAG version number
follows the revision of the device. Revision A is 0x0, revision B is 0x1 and so on.
28.3.2.2 Part number
The part number is a 16-bit code identifying the component. The JTAG Part Number for Atmel
AT90USB64/128 is listed in Table 28-1.
28.3.2.3 Manufacturer ID
The Manufacturer ID is a 11-bit code identifying the manufacturer. The JTAG manufacturer ID
for ATMEL is listed in Table 28-2.
28.3.3 Reset register
The Reset Register is a test Data Register used to reset the part. Since the AVR tri-states Port
Pins when reset, the Reset Register can also replace the function of the un-implemented
optional JTAG instruction HIGHZ.
A high value in the Reset Register corresponds to pulling the external Reset low. The part is
reset as long as there is a high value present in the Reset Register. Depending on the fuse settings
for the clock options, the part will remain reset for a reset time-out period (refer to “Clock
sources” on page 41) after releasing the Reset Register. The output from this Data Register is
not latched, so the reset will take place immediately, as shown in Figure 28-2 on page 335.
MSB LSB
Bit 31 28 27 12 11 1 0
Device ID Version Part number Manufacturer ID 1
4 bits 16 bits 11 bits 1-bit
Table 28-1. AVR JTAG part number.
Part number JTAG part number (hex)
AVR USB 0x9782
Table 28-2. Manufacturer ID.
Manufacturer JTAG manufacturer ID (hex)
ATMEL 0x01F335
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 28-2. Reset register.
28.3.4 Boundary-scan Chain
The Boundary-scan Chain has the capability of driving and observing the logic levels on the digital
I/O pins, as well as the boundary between digital and analog logic for analog circuitry having
off-chip connections.
See “Boundary-scan chain” on page 337 for a complete description.
28.4 Boundary-scan specific JTAG instructions
The Instruction Register is 4-bit wide, supporting up to 16 instructions. Listed below are the
JTAG instructions useful for Boundary-scan operation. Note that the optional HIGHZ instruction
is not implemented, but all outputs with tri-state capability can be set in high-impedant state by
using the AVR_RESET instruction, since the initial state for all port pins is tri-state.
As a definition in this datasheet, the LSB is shifted in and out first for all Shift Registers.
The OPCODE for each instruction is shown behind the instruction name in hex format. The text
describes which Data Register is selected as path between TDI and TDO for each instruction.
28.4.1 EXTEST; 0x0
Mandatory JTAG instruction for selecting the Boundary-scan Chain as Data Register for testing
circuitry external to the AVR package. For port-pins, Pull-up Disable, Output Control, Output
Data, and Input Data are all accessible in the scan chain. For Analog circuits having off-chip
connections, the interface between the analog and the digital logic is in the scan chain. The contents
of the latched outputs of the Boundary-scan chain is driven out as soon as the JTAG IRRegister
is loaded with the EXTEST instruction.
The active states are:
• Capture-DR: Data on the external pins are sampled into the Boundary-scan Chain
• Shift-DR: The Internal Scan Chain is shifted by the TCK input
• Update-DR: Data from the scan chain is applied to output pins
28.4.2 IDCODE; 0x1
Optional JTAG instruction selecting the 32-bit ID-Register as Data Register. The ID-Register
consists of a version number, a device number and the manufacturer code chosen by JEDEC.
This is the default instruction after power-up.
D Q From
TDI
ClockDR · AVR_RESET
To
TDO
From other internal and
external reset sources
Internal reset336
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
The active states are:
• Capture-DR: Data in the IDCODE Register is sampled into the Boundary-scan Chain
• Shift-DR: The IDCODE scan chain is shifted by the TCK input
28.4.3 SAMPLE_PRELOAD; 0x2
Mandatory JTAG instruction for pre-loading the output latches and taking a snap-shot of the
input/output pins without affecting the system operation. However, the output latches are not
connected to the pins. The Boundary-scan Chain is selected as Data Register.
The active states are:
• Capture-DR: Data on the external pins are sampled into the Boundary-scan Chain
• Shift-DR: The Boundary-scan Chain is shifted by the TCK input
• Update-DR: Data from the Boundary-scan chain is applied to the output latches. However,
the output latches are not connected to the pins
28.4.4 AVR_RESET; 0xC
The AVR specific public JTAG instruction for forcing the AVR device into the Reset mode or
releasing the JTAG reset source. The TAP controller is not reset by this instruction. The one bit
Reset Register is selected as Data Register. Note that the reset will be active as long as there is
a logic “one” in the Reset Chain. The output from this chain is not latched.
The active states are:
• Shift-DR: The Reset Register is shifted by the TCK input
28.4.5 BYPASS; 0xF
Mandatory JTAG instruction selecting the Bypass Register for Data Register.
The active states are:
• Capture-DR: Loads a logic “0” into the Bypass Register
• Shift-DR: The Bypass Register cell between TDI and TDO is shifted
28.5 Boundary-scan Related Register in I/O memory
28.5.1 MCUCR – MCU Control Register
The MCU Control Register contains control bits for general MCU functions.
• Bits 7 – JTD: JTAG Interface Disable
When this bit is zero, the JTAG interface is enabled if the JTAGEN Fuse is programmed. If this
bit is one, the JTAG interface is disabled. In order to avoid unintentional disabling or enabling of
the JTAG interface, a timed sequence must be followed when changing this bit: The application
software must write this bit to the desired value twice within four cycles to change its value. Note
that this bit must not be altered when using the On-chip Debug system.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
JTD – – PUD – – IVSEL IVCE MCUCR
Read/write R/W R R R/W R R R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0337
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
28.5.2 MCUSR – MCU Status Register
The MCU Status Register provides information on which reset source caused an MCU reset.
• Bit 4 – JTRF: JTAG Reset Flag
This bit is set if a reset is being caused by a logic one in the JTAG Reset Register selected by
the JTAG instruction AVR_RESET. This bit is reset by a Power-on Reset, or by writing a logic
zero to the flag.
28.6 Boundary-scan chain
The Boundary-scan chain has the capability of driving and observing the logic levels on the digital
I/O pins, as well as the boundary between digital and analog logic for analog circuitry having
off-chip connection.
28.6.1 Scanning the digital port pins
Figure 28-3 on page 338 shows the Boundary-scan Cell for a bi-directional port pin. The pull-up
function is disabled during Boundary-scan when the JTAG IC contains EXTEST or
SAMPLE_PRELOAD. The cell consists of a bi-directional pin cell that combines the three signals
Output Control - OCxn, Output Data - ODxn, and Input Data - IDxn, into only a two-stage
Shift Register. The port and pin indexes are not used in the following description
The Boundary-scan logic is not included in the figures in the datasheet. Figure 28-4 on page 339
shows a simple digital port pin as described in the section “I/O-ports” on page 71. The Boundaryscan
details from Figure 28-3 on page 338 replaces the dashed box in Figure 28-4 on page 339.
When no alternate port function is present, the Input Data - ID - corresponds to the PINxn Register
value (but ID has no synchronizer), Output Data corresponds to the PORT Register, Output
Control corresponds to the Data Direction - DD Register, and the Pull-up Enable - PUExn - corresponds
to logic expression PUD · DDxn · PORTxn.
Digital alternate port functions are connected outside the dotted box in Figure 28-4 on page 339
to make the scan chain read the actual pin value. For analog function, there is a direct connection
from the external pin to the analog circuit. There is no scan chain on the interface between
the digital and the analog circuitry, but some digital control signal to analog circuitry are turned
off to avoid driving contention on the pads.
When JTAG IR contains EXTEST or SAMPLE_PRELOAD the clock is not sent out on the port
pins even if the CKOUT fuse is programmed. Even though the clock is output when the JTAG IR
contains SAMPLE_PRELOAD, the clock is not sampled by the boundary scan.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
– – – JTRF WDRF BORF EXTRF PORF MCUSR
Read/write R R R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 See bit description338
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 28-3. Boundary-scan cell for bi-directional port pin with pull-up function.
D Q D Q
G
0
1 0
1
D Q D Q
G
0
1 0
1
0
1
Port Pin (PXn)
ShiftDR To next cell EXTEST Vcc
Output control (OC)
Output data (OD)
Input data (ID)
From last cell ClockDR UpdateDR
FF1 LD1
FF0 LD0
0
1
Pull-up enable (PUE)339
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 28-4. General port pin schematic diagram.
28.6.2 Scanning the RESET pin
The RESET pin accepts 5V active low logic for standard reset operation, and 12V active high
logic for High Voltage Parallel programming. An observe-only cell as shown in Figure 28-5 is
inserted for the 5V reset signal.
Figure 28-5. Observe-only cell.
CLK
RPx
RRx
WRx
RDx
WDx
PUD
SYNCHRONIZER
WDx: WRITE DDRx
WRx: WRITE PORTx
RRx: READ PORTx REGISTER
RPx: READ PORTx PIN
PUD: PULLUP DISABLE
CLK : I/O CLOCK
RDx: READ DDRx
D
L
Q
Q
RESET
RESET
Q
D Q
Q
Q D
CLR
PORTxn
Q
Q D
CLR
DDxn
PINxn
DATA BUS
SLEEP
SLEEP: SLEEP CONTROL
Pxn
I/O
I/O
See Boundary-scan
description for details!
PUExn
OCxn
ODxn
IDxn
PUExn: PULLUP ENABLE for pin Pxn
OCxn: OUTPUT CONTROL for pin Pxn
ODxn: OUTPUT DATA to pin Pxn
IDxn: INPUT DATA from pin Pxn
0
1
D Q
From
previous
cell
ClockDR
ShiftDR
To
next
cell
From system pin To system logic
FF1340
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
28.7 Atmel AT90USB64/128 Boundary-scan order
Table 28-3 shows the Scan order between TDI and TDO when the Boundary-scan chain is
selected as data path. Bit 0 is the LSB; the first bit scanned in, and the first bit scanned out. The
scan order follows the pin-out order as far as possible. Therefore, the bits of Port A and Port Fis
scanned in the opposite bit order of the other ports. Exceptions from the rules are the Scan
chains for the analog circuits, which constitute the most significant bits of the scan chain regardless
of which physical pin they are connected to. In Figure 28-3 on page 338, PXn. Data
corresponds to FF0, PXn. Control corresponds to FF1, PXn. Bit 4, 5, 6 and 7 of Port F is not in
the scan chain, since these pins constitute the TAP pins when the JTAG is enabled. The USB
pads are not included in the boundary-scan.
Table 28-3. AT90USB64/128 Boundary-scan order.
Bit number Signal name Module
88 PE6.Data
Port E
87 PE6.Control
86 PE7.Data
85 PE7.Control
84 PE3.Data
83 PE3.Control
82 PB0.Data
Port B
81 PB0.Control
80 PB1.Data
79 PB1.Control
78 PB2.Data
77 PB2.Control
76 PB3.Data
75 PB3.Control
74 PB4.Data
73 PB4.Control
72 PB5.Data
71 PB5.Control
70 PB6.Data
69 PB6.Control
68 PB7.Data
67 PB7.Control
66 PE4.Data
PORTE
65 PE4.Control
64 PE5.Data
63 PE5.Control
62 RSTT Reset Logic (observe only)341
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
61 PD0.Data
Port D
60 PD0.Control
59 PD1.Data
58 PD1.Control
57 PD2.Data
56 PD2.Control
55 PD3.Data
54 PD3.Control
53 PD4.Data
52 PD4.Control
51 PD5.Data
50 PD5.Control
49 PD6.Data
48 PD6.Control
47 PD7.Data
46 PD7.Control
45 PE0.Data
Port E
44 PE0.Control
43 PE1.Data
42 PE1.Control
41 PC0.Data
Port C
40 PC0.Control
39 PC1.Data
38 PC1.Control
37 PC2.Data
36 PC2.Control
35 PC3.Data
34 PC3.Control
33 PC4.Data
32 PC4.Control
31 PC5.Data
30 PC5.Control
29 PC6.Data
28 PC6.Control
27 PC7.Data
26 PC7.Control
Table 28-3. AT90USB64/128 Boundary-scan order. (Continued)
Bit number Signal name Module342
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
28.8 Boundary-scan description language files
Boundary-scan Description Language (BSDL) files describe Boundary-scan capable devices in
a standard format used by automated test-generation software. The order and function of bits in
the Boundary-scan Data Register are included in this description. BSDL files are available for
Atmel AT90USB64/128.
25 PE2.Data
Port E
24 PE2.Control
23 PA7.Data
Port A
22 PA7.Control
21 PA6.Data
20 PA6.Control
19 PA5.Data
18 PA5.Control
17 PA4.Data
16 PA4.Control
15 PA3.Data
14 PA3.Control
13 PA2.Data
12 PA2.Control
11 PA1.Data
10 PA1.Control
9 PA0.Data
8 PA0.Control
7 PF3.Data
Port F
6 PF3.Control
5 PF2.Data
4 PF2.Control
3 PF1.Data
2 PF1.Control
1 PF0.Data
0 PF0.Control
Table 28-3. AT90USB64/128 Boundary-scan order. (Continued)
Bit number Signal name Module343
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
29. Boot Loader support – read-while-write self-programming
The Boot Loader Support provides a real Read-While-Write Self-Programming mechanism for
downloading and uploading program code by the MCU itself. This feature allows flexible application
software updates controlled by the MCU using a Flash-resident Boot Loader program. The
Boot Loader program can use any available data interface and associated protocol to read code
and write (program) that code into the Flash memory, or read the code from the program memory.
The program code within the Boot Loader section has the capability to write into the entire
Flash, including the Boot Loader memory. The Boot Loader can thus even modify itself, and it
can also erase itself from the code if the feature is not needed anymore. The size of the Boot
Loader memory is configurable with fuses and the Boot Loader has two separate sets of Boot
Lock bits which can be set independently. This gives the user a unique flexibility to select different
levels of protection. General information on SPM and ELPM is provided in See “AVR CPU
core” on page 11.
29.1 Boot Loader features
• Read-while-write self-programming
• Flexible boot memory size
• High security (separate boot lock bits for a flexible protection)
• Separate fuse to select reset vector
• Optimized page (1) size
• Code efficient algorithm
• Efficient read-modify-write support
Note: 1. A page is a section in the Flash consisting of several bytes (see Table 30-11 on page 364)
used during programming. The page organization does not affect normal operation.
29.2 Application and Boot Loader flash sections
The Flash memory is organized in two main sections, the Application section and the Boot
Loader section (see Figure 29-2 on page 346). The size of the different sections is configured by
the BOOTSZ Fuses as shown in Table 29-8 on page 357 and Figure 29-2 on page 346. These
two sections can have different level of protection since they have different sets of Lock bits.
29.2.1 Application section
The Application section is the section of the Flash that is used for storing the application code.
The protection level for the Application section can be selected by the application Boot Lock bits
(Boot Lock bits 0), see Table 29-2 on page 347. The Application section can never store any
Boot Loader code since the SPM instruction is disabled when executed from the Application
section.
29.2.2 BLS – Boot Loader section
While the Application section is used for storing the application code, the The Boot Loader software
must be located in the BLS since the SPM instruction can initiate a programming when
executing from the BLS only. The SPM instruction can access the entire Flash, including the
BLS itself. The protection level for the Boot Loader section can be selected by the Boot Loader
Lock bits (Boot Lock bits 1), see Table 29-3 on page 347.
29.3 Read-while-write and no read-while-write flash sections
Whether the CPU supports Read-While-Write or if the CPU is halted during a Boot Loader software
update is dependent on which address that is being programmed. In addition to the two344
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
sections that are configurable by the BOOTSZ Fuses as described above, the Flash is also
divided into two fixed sections, the Read-While-Write (RWW) section and the No Read-WhileWrite
(NRWW) section. The limit between the RWW- and NRWW sections is given in Table 29-
1 and Figure 29-1 on page 345. The main difference between the two sections is:
• When erasing or writing a page located inside the RWW section, the NRWW section can be
read during the operation
• When erasing or writing a page located inside the NRWW section, the CPU is halted during
the entire operation
Note that the user software can never read any code that is located inside the RWW section during
a Boot Loader software operation. The syntax “Read-While-Write section” refers to which
section that is being programmed (erased or written), not which section that actually is being
read during a Boot Loader software update.
29.3.1 RWW – Read-While-Write section
If a Boot Loader software update is programming a page inside the RWW section, it is possible
to read code from the Flash, but only code that is located in the NRWW section. During an ongoing
programming, the software must ensure that the RWW section never is being read. If the
user software is trying to read code that is located inside the RWW section (i.e., by load program
memory, call, or jump instructions or an interrupt) during programming, the software might end
up in an unknown state. To avoid this, the interrupts should either be disabled or moved to the
Boot Loader section. The Boot Loader section is always located in the NRWW section. The
RWW Section Busy bit (RWWSB) in the Store Program Memory Control and Status Register
(SPMCSR) will be read as logical one as long as the RWW section is blocked for reading. After
a programming is completed, the RWWSB must be cleared by software before reading code
located in the RWW section. See “SPMCSR – Store Program Memory Control and Status Register”
on page 349. for details on how to clear RWWSB.
29.3.2 NRWW – No Read-While-Write section
The code located in the NRWW section can be read when the Boot Loader software is updating
a page in the RWW section. When the Boot Loader code updates the NRWW section, the CPU
is halted during the entire Page Erase or Page Write operation.
Table 29-1. Read-While-Write features.
Which section does the Zpointer
address during the
programming?
Which section can
be read during
programming?
Is the CPU
halted?
Read-While-Write
supported?
RWW section NRWW section No Yes
NRWW section None Yes No345
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 29-1. Read-While-Write vs. no Read-While-Write.
Read-While-Write
(RWW) section
No Read-While-Write
(NRWW) section
Z-pointer
Addresses RWW
section
Z-pointer
addresses NRWW
section
CPU is halted
during the operation
Code located in
NRWW section.
Can be read during
the operation346
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 29-2. Memory sections.
Note: 1. The parameters in the figure above are given in Table 29-8 on page 357.
29.4 Boot Loader lock bits
If no Boot Loader capability is needed, the entire Flash is available for application code. The
Boot Loader has two separate sets of Boot Lock bits which can be set independently. This gives
the user a unique flexibility to select different levels of protection.
The user can select:
• To protect the entire Flash from a software update by the MCU
• To protect only the Boot Loader Flash section from a software update by the MCU
• To protect only the Application Flash section from a software update by the MCU
• Allow software update in the entire Flash
See Table 29-2 on page 347 and Table 29-3 on page 347 for further details. The Boot Lock bits
can be set by software and in Serial or in Parallel Programming mode. They can only be cleared
by a Chip Erase command only. The general Write Lock (Lock Bit mode 2) does not control the
programming of the Flash memory by SPM instruction. Similarly, the general Read/Write Lock
(Lock Bit mode 1) does not control reading nor writing by (E)LPM/SPM, if it is attempted.
0x0000
Flashend
Program memory
BOOTSZ = '11'
Application flash section
Boot loader flash section Flashend
Program memory
BOOTSZ = '10'
0x0000
Program memory
BOOTSZ = '01'
Program memory
BOOTSZ = '00'
Application flash section
Boot loader flash section
0x0000
Flashend
Application flash section
Flashend
End RWW
Start NRWW
Application flash section
Boot loader flash section
Boot loader flash section
End RWW
Start NRWW
End RWW
Start NRWW
0x0000
End RWW, end application
Start NRWW, start boot loader
Application flash section Application flash section
Application flash section
Read-While-Write section No Read-While-Write section Read-While-Write section No Read-While-Write section
Read-While-Write section No Read-While-Write section Read-While-Write section No Read-While-Write section
End application
Start boot loader
End application
Start boot loader
End application
Start boot loader347
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Note: 1. “1” means unprogrammed, “0” means programmed.
Note: 1. “1” means unprogrammed, “0” means programmed.
29.5 Entering the Boot Loader program
The boot loader can be executed with three different conditions:
29.5.1 Regular application conditions.
A jump or call from the application program. This may be initiated by a trigger such as a command
received via USART, SPI or USB.
29.5.2 Boot Reset fuse
The Boot Reset Fuse (BOOTRST) can be programmed so that the Reset Vector is pointing to
the Boot Flash start address after a reset. In this case, the Boot Loader is started after a reset.
After the application code is loaded, the program can start executing the application code. Note
that the fuses cannot be changed by the MCU itself. This means that once the Boot Reset Fuse
is programmed, the Reset Vector will always point to the Boot Loader Reset and the fuse can
only be changed through the serial or parallel programming interface.
Table 29-2. Boot Lock Bit0 protection modes (application section) (1).
BLB0 Mode BLB02 BLB01 Protection
1 11 No restrictions for SPM or (E)LPM accessing the
Application section.
2 1 0 SPM is not allowed to write to the Application section.
3 00
SPM is not allowed to write to the Application section, and
(E)LPM executing from the Boot Loader section is not
allowed to read from the Application section. If Interrupt
Vectors are placed in the Boot Loader section, interrupts
are disabled while executing from the Application section.
4 01
(E)LPM executing from the Boot Loader section is not
allowed to read from the Application section. If Interrupt
Vectors are placed in the Boot Loader section, interrupts
are disabled while executing from the Application section.
Table 29-3. Boot Lock Bit1 protection modes (boot loader section) (1).
BLB1 Mode BLB12 BLB11 Protection
1 11 No restrictions for SPM or (E)LPM accessing the Boot
Loader section.
2 1 0 SPM is not allowed to write to the Boot Loader section.
3 00
SPM is not allowed to write to the Boot Loader section,
and (E)LPM executing from the Application section is not
allowed to read from the Boot Loader section. If Interrupt
Vectors are placed in the Application section, interrupts
are disabled while executing from the Boot Loader section.
4 01
(E)LPM executing from the Application section is not
allowed to read from the Boot Loader section. If Interrupt
Vectors are placed in the Application section, interrupts
are disabled while executing from the Boot Loader section.348
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Note: 1. “1” means unprogrammed, “0” means programmed.
29.5.3 External hardware conditions
The Hardware Boot Enable Fuse (HWBE) can be programmed (see Table 29-5) so that upon
special hardware conditions under reset, the boot loader execution is forced after reset.
Note: 1. “1” means unprogrammed, “0” means programmed.
When the HWBE fuse is enable the ALE/HWB pin is configured as input during reset and sampled
during reset rising edge. When ALE/HWB pin is ‘0’ during reset rising edge, the reset vector
will be set as the Boot Loader Reset address and the Boot Loader will be executed (see Figure
29-3).
Figure 29-3. Boot process description.
Table 29-4. Boot reset fuse (1).
BOOTRST Reset address
1 Reset Vector = Application reset (address 0x0000)
0 Reset Vector = Boot loader reset (see Table 29-8 on page 357)
Table 29-5. Hardware boot enable fuse (1).
HWBE Reset address
1 ALE/HWB pin can not be used to force boot loader execution after reset
0 ALE/HWB pin is used during reset to force boot loader execution after reset
HWBE
BOOTRST ?
Ext. hardware
conditions ?
Reset vector = Application reset Reset vector = Boot loader reset
?
RESET
ALE/HWB
t
SHRH t
HHRH349
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
29.5.4 SPMCSR – Store Program Memory Control and Status Register
The Store Program Memory Control and Status Register contains the control bits needed to control
the Boot Loader operations.
• Bit 7 – SPMIE: SPM Interrupt Enable
When the SPMIE bit is written to one, and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the SPM
ready interrupt will be enabled. The SPM ready Interrupt will be executed as long as the SPMEN
bit in the SPMCSR Register is cleared.
• Bit 6 – RWWSB: Read-While-Write Section Busy
When a Self-Programming (Page Erase or Page Write) operation to the RWW section is initiated,
the RWWSB will be set (one) by hardware. When the RWWSB bit is set, the RWW section
cannot be accessed. The RWWSB bit will be cleared if the RWWSRE bit is written to one after a
Self-Programming operation is completed. Alternatively the RWWSB bit will automatically be
cleared if a page load operation is initiated.
• Bit 5 – SIGRD: Signature Row Read
If this bit is written to one at the same time as SPMEN, the next LPM instruction within three
clock cycles will read a byte from the signature row into the destination register. see “Reading
the Signature Row from software” on page 354 for details. An SPM instruction within four cycles
after SIGRD and SPMEN are set will have no effect. This operation is reserved for future use
and should not be used.
• Bit 4 – RWWSRE: Read-While-Write Section Read Enable
When programming (Page Erase or Page Write) to the RWW section, the RWW section is
blocked for reading (the RWWSB will be set by hardware). To re-enable the RWW section, the
user software must wait until the programming is completed (SPMEN will be cleared). Then, if
the RWWSRE bit is written to one at the same time as SPMEN, the next SPM instruction within
four clock cycles re-enables the RWW section. The RWW section cannot be re-enabled while
the Flash is busy with a Page Erase or a Page Write (SPMEN is set). If the RWWSRE bit is written
while the Flash is being loaded, the Flash load operation will abort and the data loaded will
be lost.
• Bit 3 – BLBSET: Boot Lock Bit Set
If this bit is written to one at the same time as SPMEN, the next SPM instruction within four clock
cycles sets Boot Lock bits, according to the data in R0. The data in R1 and the address in the Zpointer
are ignored. The BLBSET bit will automatically be cleared upon completion of the Lock
bit set, or if no SPM instruction is executed within four clock cycles.
An (E)LPM instruction within three cycles after BLBSET and SPMEN are set in the SPMCSR
Register, will read either the Lock bits or the Fuse bits (depending on Z0 in the Z-pointer) into the
destination register. See “Reading the Fuse and Lock bits from software” on page 353 for
details.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SPMIE RWWSB SIGRD RWWSRE BLBSET PGWRT PGERS SPMEN SPMCSR
Read/write R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0350
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
• Bit 2 – PGWRT: Page Write
If this bit is written to one at the same time as SPMEN, the next SPM instruction within four clock
cycles executes Page Write, with the data stored in the temporary buffer. The page address is
taken from the high part of the Z-pointer. The data in R1 and R0 are ignored. The PGWRT bit
will auto-clear upon completion of a Page Write, or if no SPM instruction is executed within four
clock cycles. The CPU is halted during the entire Page Write operation if the NRWW section is
addressed.
• Bit 1 – PGERS: Page Erase
If this bit is written to one at the same time as SPMEN, the next SPM instruction within four clock
cycles executes Page Erase. The page address is taken from the high part of the Z-pointer. The
data in R1 and R0 are ignored. The PGERS bit will auto-clear upon completion of a Page Erase,
or if no SPM instruction is executed within four clock cycles. The CPU is halted during the entire
Page Write operation if the NRWW section is addressed.
• Bit 0 – SPMEN: Store Program Memory Enable
This bit enables the SPM instruction for the next four clock cycles. If written to one together with
either RWWSRE, BLBSET, PGWRT’ or PGERS, the following SPM instruction will have a special
meaning, see description above. If only SPMEN is written, the following SPM instruction will
store the value in R1:R0 in the temporary page buffer addressed by the Z-pointer. The LSB of
the Z-pointer is ignored. The SPMEN bit will auto-clear upon completion of an SPM instruction,
or if no SPM instruction is executed within four clock cycles. During Page Erase and Page Write,
the SPMEN bit remains high until the operation is completed.
Writing any other combination than “10001”, “01001”, “00101”, “00011” or “00001” in the lower
five bits will have no effect.
Note: Only one SPM instruction should be active at any time.
29.6 Addressing the flash during self-programming
The Z-pointer is used to address the SPM commands. The Z pointer consists of the Z-registers
ZL and ZH in the register file, and RAMPZ in the I/O space. The number of bits actually used is
implementation dependent. Note that the RAMPZ register is only implemented when the program
space is larger than 64kBytes.
Since the Flash is organized in pages (see Table 30-11 on page 364), the Program Counter can
be treated as having two different sections. One section, consisting of the least significant bits, is
addressing the words within a page, while the most significant bits are addressing the pages.
This is shown in Figure 29-4 on page 351. Note that the Page Erase and Page Write operations
are addressed independently. Therefore it is of major importance that the Boot Loader software
addresses the same page in both the Page Erase and Page Write operation. Once a programming
operation is initiated, the address is latched and the Z-pointer can be used for other
operations.
The (E)LPM instruction use the Z-pointer to store the address. Since this instruction addresses
the Flash byte-by-byte, also bit Z0 of the Z-pointer is used.
Bit 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
RAMPZ RAMPZ7 RAMPZ6 RAMPZ5 RAMPZ4 RAMPZ3 RAMPZ2 RAMPZ1 RAMPZ0
ZH (R31) Z15 Z14 Z13 Z12 Z11 Z10 Z9 Z8
ZL (R30) Z7 Z6 Z5 Z4 Z3 Z2 Z1 Z0
76543210351
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 29-4. Addressing the flash during SPM (1).
Note: 1. The different variables used in Figure 29-4 are listed in Table 29-10 on page 358.
29.7 Self-programming the flash
The program memory is updated in a page by page fashion. Before programming a page with
the data stored in the temporary page buffer, the page must be erased. The temporary page buffer
is filled one word at a time using SPM and the buffer can be filled either before the Page
Erase command or between a Page Erase and a Page Write operation:
Alternative 1, fill the buffer before a Page Erase
• Fill temporary page buffer
• Perform a Page Erase
• Perform a Page Write
Alternative 2, fill the buffer after Page Erase
• Perform a Page Erase
• Fill temporary page buffer
• Perform a Page Write
If only a part of the page needs to be changed, the rest of the page must be stored (for example
in the temporary page buffer) before the erase, and then be rewritten. When using alternative 1,
the Boot Loader provides an effective Read-Modify-Write feature which allows the user software
to first read the page, do the necessary changes, and then write back the modified data. If alternative
2 is used, it is not possible to read the old data while loading since the page is already
erased. The temporary page buffer can be accessed in a random sequence. It is essential that
the page address used in both the Page Erase and Page Write operation is addressing the same
PROGRAM MEMORY
23 1 0
Z - POINTER
BIT
0
ZPAGEMSB
WORD ADDRESS
WITHIN A PAGE
PAGE ADDRESS
WITHIN THE FLASH
ZPCMSB
INSTRUCTION WORD
PAGE PCWORD[PAGEMSB:0]:
00
01
02
PAGEEND
PAGE
PCPAGE PCWORD
PCMSB PAGEMSB
PROGRAM COUNTER352
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
page. See “Simple Assembly Code example for a Boot Loader” on page 355 for an assembly
code example.
29.7.1 Performing page erase by SPM
To execute Page Erase, set up the address in the Z-pointer, write “X0000011” to SPMCSR and
execute SPM within four clock cycles after writing SPMCSR. The data in R1 and R0 is ignored.
The page address must be written to PCPAGE in the Z-register. Other bits in the Z-pointer will
be ignored during this operation.
• Page Erase to the RWW section: The NRWW section can be read during the Page Erase
• Page Erase to the NRWW section: The CPU is halted during the operation
29.7.2 Filling the Temporary Buffer (page loading)
To write an instruction word, set up the address in the Z-pointer and data in R1:R0, write
“00000001” to SPMCSR and execute SPM within four clock cycles after writing SPMCSR. The
content of PCWORD in the Z-register is used to address the data in the temporary buffer. The
temporary buffer will auto-erase after a Page Write operation or by writing the RWWSRE bit in
SPMCSR. It is also erased after a system reset. Note that it is not possible to write more than
one time to each address without erasing the temporary buffer.
If the EEPROM is written in the middle of an SPM Page Load operation, all data loaded will be
lost.
29.7.3 Performing a Page Write
To execute Page Write, set up the address in the Z-pointer, write “X0000101” to SPMCSR and
execute SPM within four clock cycles after writing SPMCSR. The data in R1 and R0 is ignored.
The page address must be written to PCPAGE. Other bits in the Z-pointer must be written to
zero during this operation.
• Page Write to the RWW section: The NRWW section can be read during the Page Write
• Page Write to the NRWW section: The CPU is halted during the operation
29.7.4 Using the SPM interrupt
If the SPM interrupt is enabled, the SPM interrupt will generate a constant interrupt when the
SPMEN bit in SPMCSR is cleared. This means that the interrupt can be used instead of polling
the SPMCSR Register in software. When using the SPM interrupt, the Interrupt Vectors should
be moved to the BLS section to avoid that an interrupt is accessing the RWW section when it is
blocked for reading. How to move the interrupts is described in “Interrupts” on page 68.
29.7.5 Consideration while updating BLS
Special care must be taken if the user allows the Boot Loader section to be updated by leaving
Boot Lock bit11 unprogrammed. An accidental write to the Boot Loader itself can corrupt the
entire Boot Loader, and further software updates might be impossible. If it is not necessary to
change the Boot Loader software itself, it is recommended to program the Boot Lock bit11 to
protect the Boot Loader software from any internal software changes.
29.7.6 Prevent reading the RWW section during self-programming
During Self-Programming (either Page Erase or Page Write), the RWW section is always
blocked for reading. The user software itself must prevent that this section is addressed during
the self programming operation. The RWWSB in the SPMCSR will be set as long as the RWW
section is busy. During Self-Programming the Interrupt Vector table should be moved to the BLS353
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
as described in “Interrupts” on page 68, or the interrupts must be disabled. Before addressing
the RWW section after the programming is completed, the user software must clear the
RWWSB by writing the RWWSRE. See “Simple Assembly Code example for a Boot Loader” on
page 355 for an example.
29.7.7 Setting the Boot Loader Lock bits by SPM
To set the Boot Loader Lock bits, write the desired data to R0, write “X0001001” to SPMCSR
and execute SPM within four clock cycles after writing SPMCSR. The only accessible Lock bits
are the Boot Lock bits that may prevent the Application and Boot Loader section from any software
update by the MCU.
See Table 29-2 on page 347 and Table 29-3 on page 347 for how the different settings of the
Boot Loader bits affect the Flash access.
If bits 5..2 in R0 are cleared (zero), the corresponding Boot Lock bit will be programmed if an
SPM instruction is executed within four cycles after BLBSET and SPMEN are set in SPMCSR.
The Z-pointer is don’t care during this operation, but for future compatibility it is recommended to
load the Z-pointer with 0x0001 (same as used for reading the lOck bits). For future compatibility it
is also recommended to set bits 7, 6, 1, and 0 in R0 to “1” when writing the Lock bits. When programming
the Lock bits the entire Flash can be read during the operation.
29.7.8 EEPROM Write prevents writing to SPMCSR
Note that an EEPROM write operation will block all software programming to Flash. Reading the
Fuses and Lock bits from software will also be prevented during the EEPROM write operation. It
is recommended that the user checks the status bit (EEPE) in the EECR Register and verifies
that the bit is cleared before writing to the SPMCSR Register.
29.7.9 Reading the Fuse and Lock bits from software
It is possible to read both the Fuse and Lock bits from software. To read the Lock bits, load the
Z-pointer with 0x0001 and set the BLBSET and SPMEN bits in SPMCSR. When an (E)LPM
instruction is executed within three CPU cycles after the BLBSET and SPMEN bits are set in
SPMCSR, the value of the Lock bits will be loaded in the destination register. The BLBSET and
SPMEN bits will auto-clear upon completion of reading the Lock bits or if no (E)LPM instruction
is executed within three CPU cycles or no SPM instruction is executed within four CPU cycles.
When BLBSET and SPMEN are cleared, (E)LPM will work as described in the Instruction set
Manual.
The algorithm for reading the Fuse Low byte is similar to the one described above for reading
the Lock bits. To read the Fuse Low byte, load the Z-pointer with 0x0000 and set the BLBSET
and SPMEN bits in SPMCSR. When an (E)LPM instruction is executed within three cycles after
the BLBSET and SPMEN bits are set in the SPMCSR, the value of the Fuse Low byte (FLB) will
be loaded in the destination register as shown below. Refer to Table 30-5 on page 361 for a
detailed description and mapping of the Fuse Low byte.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R0 1 1 BLB12 BLB11 BLB02 BLB01 1 1
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Rd – – BLB12 BLB11 BLB02 BLB01 LB2 LB1
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Rd FLB7 FLB6 FLB5 FLB4 FLB3 FLB2 FLB1 FLB0354
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Similarly, when reading the Fuse High byte, load 0x0003 in the Z-pointer. When an (E)LPM
instruction is executed within three cycles after the BLBSET and SPMEN bits are set in the
SPMCSR, the value of the Fuse High byte (FHB) will be loaded in the destination register as
shown below. Refer to Table 30-4 on page 361 for detailed description and mapping of the Fuse
High byte.
When reading the Extended Fuse byte, load 0x0002 in the Z-pointer. When an (E)LPM instruction
is executed within three cycles after the BLBSET and SPMEN bits are set in the SPMCSR,
the value of the Extended Fuse byte (EFB) will be loaded in the destination register as shown
below. Refer to Table 30-3 on page 360 for detailed description and mapping of the Extended
Fuse byte.
Fuse and Lock bits that are programmed, will be read as zero. Fuse and Lock bits that are
unprogrammed, will be read as one.
29.7.10 Reading the Signature Row from software
To read the Signature Row from software, load the Z-pointer with the signature byte address
given in Table 29-6 on page 354 and set the SIGRD and SPMEN bits in SPMCSR. When an
LPM instruction is executed within three CPU cycles after the SIGRD and SPMEN bits are set in
SPMCSR, the signature byte value will be loaded in the destination register. The SIGRD and
SPMEN bits will auto-clear upon completion of reading the Signature Row Lock bits or if no LPM
instruction is executed within three CPU cycles. When SIGRD and SPMEN are cleared, LPM will
work as described in the Instruction set Manual.
AT90USB64/128 includes a unique 10-bytes serial number located in the signature row. This
unique serial number can be used as a USB serial number in the device enumeration process.
The pointer addresses to access this unique serial number are given in Table 29-6 on page 354.
Note: All other addresses are reserved for future use.
29.7.11 Preventing flash corruption
During periods of low VCC, the Flash program can be corrupted because the supply voltage is
too low for the CPU and the Flash to operate properly. These issues are the same as for board
level systems using the Flash, and the same design solutions should be applied.
A Flash program corruption can be caused by two situations when the voltage is too low. First, a
regular write sequence to the Flash requires a minimum voltage to operate correctly. Secondly,
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Rd FHB7 FHB6 FHB5 FHB4 FHB3 FHB2 FHB1 FHB0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Rd – – – – – EFB2 EFB1 EFB0
Table 29-6. Signature Row addressing.
Signature byte Z-pointer address
Device Signature Byte 1 0x0000
Device Signature Byte 2 0x0002
Device Signature Byte 3 0x0004
RC Oscillator Calibration Byte 0x0001
Unique Serial Number From 0x000E to 0x0018355
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
the CPU itself can execute instructions incorrectly, if the supply voltage for executing instructions
is too low.
Flash corruption can easily be avoided by following these design recommendations (one is
sufficient):
1. If there is no need for a Boot Loader update in the system, program the Boot Loader
Lock bits to prevent any Boot Loader software updates.
2. Keep the AVR RESET active (low) during periods of insufficient power supply voltage.
This can be done by enabling the internal Brown-out Detector (BOD) if the operating
voltage matches the detection level. If not, an external low VCC reset protection circuit
can be used. If a reset occurs while a write operation is in progress, the write operation
will be completed provided that the power supply voltage is sufficient.
3. Keep the AVR core in Power-down sleep mode during periods of low VCC. This will prevent
the CPU from attempting to decode and execute instructions, effectively protecting
the SPMCSR Register and thus the Flash from unintentional writes.
29.7.12 Programming time for flash when using SPM
The calibrated RC Oscillator is used to time Flash accesses. Table 29-7 shows the typical programming
time for Flash accesses from the CPU.
29.7.13 Simple Assembly Code example for a Boot Loader
;- the routine writes one page of data from RAM to Flash
; the first data location in RAM is pointed to by the Y-pointer
; the first data location in Flash is pointed to by the Z-pointer
;- error handling is not included
;- the routine must be placed inside the Boot space
; (at least the Do_spm sub routine). Only code inside NRWW section can
; be read during Self-Programming (Page Erase and Page Write).
;- registers used: r0, r1, temp1 (r16), temp2 (r17), looplo (r24),
; loophi (r25), spmcsrval (r20)
; storing and restoring of registers is not included in the routine
; register usage can be optimized at the expense of code size
;- it is assumed that either the interrupt table is moved to the Boot
; loader section or that the interrupts are disabled.
.equ PAGESIZEB = PAGESIZE*2 ;PAGESIZEB is page size in BYTES, not words
.org SMALLBOOTSTART
Write_page:
; Page Erase
ldi spmcsrval, (1< 2 CPU clock cycles for fck < 12MHz, 3 CPU clock cycles for fck >= 12MHz
High: > 2 CPU clock cycles for fck < 12MHz, 3 CPU clock cycles for fck >= 12MHz
30.8.1 Serial programming algorithm
When writing serial data to the Atmel AT90USB64/128, data is clocked on the rising edge of
SCK. When reading data from the AT90USB64/128, data is clocked on the falling edge of SCK.
See Figure 30-11 on page 375 for timing details.
To program and verify the AT90USB64/128 in the serial programming mode, the following
sequence is recommended (See four byte instruction formats in Table 30-16 on page 376):
1. Power-up sequence:
Apply power between VCC and GND while RESET and SCK are set to “0”. In some systems,
the programmer can not guarantee that SCK is held low during power-up. In this
case, RESET must be given a positive pulse of at least two CPU clock cycles duration
after SCK has been set to “0”.
2. Wait for at least 20ms and enable serial programming by sending the Programming
Enable serial instruction to pin PDI.
Table 30-14. Pin mapping serial programming.
Symbol Pins (TQFP-64) I/O Description
PDI PB2 I Serial Data in
PDO PB3 O Serial Data out
SCK PB1 I Serial Clock
VCC
GND
XTAL1
SCK
PDO
PDI
RESET
+1.8 - 5.5V
AVCC
+1.8 - 5.5V(2)375
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
3. The serial programming instructions will not work if the communication is out of synchronization.
When in sync. the second byte (0x53), will echo back when issuing the
third byte of the Programming Enable instruction. Whether the echo is correct or not, all
four bytes of the instruction must be transmitted. If the 0x53 did not echo back, give
RESET a positive pulse and issue a new Programming Enable command.
4. The Flash is programmed one page at a time. The memory page is loaded one byte at
a time by supplying the 7 LSB of the address and data together with the Load Program
Memory Page instruction. To ensure correct loading of the page, the data low byte must
be loaded before data high byte is applied for a given address. The Program Memory
Page is stored by loading the Write Program Memory Page instruction with the address
lines 15..8. Before issuing this command, make sure the instruction Load Extended
Address Byte has been used to define the MSB of the address. The extended address
byte is stored until the command is re-issued, i.e., the command needs only be issued
for the first page, and when crossing the 64KWord boundary. If polling (RDY/BSY) is not
used, the user must wait at least tWD_FLASH before issuing the next page. (See Table 30-
15.) Accessing the serial programming interface before the Flash write operation completes
can result in incorrect programming.
5. The EEPROM array is programmed one byte at a time by supplying the address and
data together with the appropriate Write instruction. An EEPROM memory location is
first automatically erased before new data is written. If polling is not used, the user must
wait at least tWD_EEPROM before issuing the next byte. (See Table 30-15.) In a chip
erased device, no 0xFFs in the data file(s) need to be programmed.
6. Any memory location can be verified by using the Read instruction which returns the
content at the selected address at serial output PDO. When reading the Flash memory,
use the instruction Load Extended Address Byte to define the upper address byte,
which is not included in the Read Program Memory instruction. The extended address
byte is stored until the command is re-issued, that is, the command needs only be
issued for the first page, and when crossing the 64KWord boundary.
7. At the end of the programming session, RESET can be set high to commence normal
operation.
8. Power-off sequence (if needed):
Set RESET to “1”.
Turn VCC power off.
Figure 30-11. Serial programming waveforms.
Table 30-15. Minimum wait delay before writing the next Flash or EEPROM location.
Symbol Minimum wait delay
tWD_FLASH 4.5ms
tWD_EEPROM 9.0ms
tWD_ERASE 9.0ms
MSB
MSB
LSB
LSB
SERIAL CLOCK INPUT
(SCK)
SERIAL DATA INPUT
(MOSI)
(MISO)
SAMPLE
SERIAL DATA OUTPUT376
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Table 30-16. Serial programming instruction set.
Instruction
Instruction format
Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Operation
Programming Enable 1010 1100 0101 0011 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx Enable Serial Programming after
RESET goes low.
Chip Erase 1010 1100 100x xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx Chip Erase EEPROM and Flash.
Load Extended Address Byte
0100 1101 0000 0000 cccc cccc xxxx xxxx Defines Extended Address Byte for
Read Program Memory and Write
Program Memory Page.
Read Program Memory
0010 H000 aaaa aaaa bbbb bbbb oooo oooo Read H (high or low) data o from
Program memory at word address
c:a:b.
Load Program Memory Page
0100 H000 xxxx xxxx xxbb bbbb iiii iiii Write H (high or low) data i to Program
Memory page at word address b. Data
low byte must be loaded before Data
high byte is applied within the same
address.
Write Program Memory Page 0100 1100 aaaa aaaa bbxx xxxx xxxx xxxx Write Program Memory Page at
address c:a:b.
Read EEPROM Memory 1010 0000 0000 aaaa bbbb bbbb oooo oooo Read data o from EEPROM memory at
address a:b.
Write EEPROM Memory 1100 0000 0000 aaaa bbbb bbbb iiii iiii Write data i to EEPROM memory at
address a:b.
Load EEPROM Memory
Page (page access)
1100 0001 0000 0000 0000 00bb iiii iiii Load data i to EEPROM memory page
buffer. After data is loaded, program
EEPROM page.
Write EEPROM Memory
Page (page access)
1100 0010 0000 aaaa bbbb bb00 xxxx xxxx Write EEPROM page at address a:b.
Read Lock bits
0101 1000 0000 0000 xxxx xxxx xxoo oooo Read Lock bits. “0” = programmed, “1”
= unprogrammed. See Table 30-1 on
page 359 for details.
Write Lock bits
1010 1100 111x xxxx xxxx xxxx 11ii iiii Write Lock bits. Set bits = “0” to
program Lock bits. See Table 30-1 on
page 359 for details.
Read Signature Byte 0011 0000 000x xxxx xxxx xxbb oooo oooo Read Signature Byte o at address b.
Write Fuse bits 1010 1100 1010 0000 xxxx xxxx iiii iiii Set bits = “0” to program, “1” to
unprogram.
Write Fuse High bits 1010 1100 1010 1000 xxxx xxxx iiii iiii Set bits = “0” to program, “1” to
unprogram.
Write Extended Fuse Bits
1010 1100 1010 0100 xxxx xxxx iiii iiii Set bits = “0” to program, “1” to
unprogram. See Table 30-3 on page
360 for details.
Read Fuse bits 0101 0000 0000 0000 xxxx xxxx oooo oooo Read Fuse bits. “0” = programmed, “1”
= unprogrammed.
Read Fuse High bits 0101 1000 0000 1000 xxxx xxxx oooo oooo Read Fuse High bits. “0” = programmed,
“1” = unprogrammed. 377
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Note: a = address high bits, b = address low bits, c = address extended bits, H = 0 - Low byte, 1 - High Byte, o = data out, i = data in,
x = don’t care.
30.8.2 Serial programming characteristics
For characteristics of the Serial Programming module see “SPI timing characteristics” on page
395.
30.9 Programming via the JTAG interface
Programming through the JTAG interface requires control of the four JTAG specific pins: TCK,
TMS, TDI, and TDO. Control of the reset and clock pins is not required.
To be able to use the JTAG interface, the JTAGEN Fuse must be programmed. The device is
default shipped with the fuse programmed. In addition, the JTD bit in MCUCR must be cleared.
Alternatively, if the JTD bit is set, the external reset can be forced low. Then, the JTD bit will be
cleared after two chip clocks, and the JTAG pins are available for programming. This provides a
means of using the JTAG pins as normal port pins in Running mode while still allowing In-System
Programming via the JTAG interface. Note that this technique can not be used when using
the JTAG pins for Boundary-scan or On-chip Debug. In these cases the JTAG pins must be dedicated
for this purpose.
During programming the clock frequency of the TCK Input must be less than the maximum frequency
of the chip. The System Clock Prescaler can not be used to divide the TCK Clock Input
into a sufficiently low frequency.
As a definition in this datasheet, the LSB is shifted in and out first of all Shift Registers.
30.9.1 Programming specific JTAG instructions
The Instruction Register is 4-bit wide, supporting up to 16 instructions. The JTAG instructions
useful for programming are listed below.
The OPCODE for each instruction is shown behind the instruction name in hex format. The text
describes which Data Register is selected as path between TDI and TDO for each instruction.
The Run-Test/Idle state of the TAP controller is used to generate internal clocks. It can also be
used as an idle state between JTAG sequences. The state machine sequence for changing the
instruction word is shown in Figure 30-12 on page 378.
Read Extended Fuse Bits
0101 0000 0000 1000 xxxx xxxx oooo oooo Read Extended Fuse bits. “0” = programmed,
“1” = unprogrammed. See
Table 30-3 on page 360 for details.
Read Calibration Byte 0011 1000 000x xxxx 0000 0000 oooo oooo Read Calibration Byte
Poll RDY/BSY
1111 0000 0000 0000 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxo If o = “1”, a programming operation is
still busy. Wait until this bit returns to
“0” before applying another command.
Table 30-16. Serial programming instruction set. (Continued)
Instruction
Instruction format
Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Operation378
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 30-12. State machine sequence for changing the instruction word.
30.9.2 AVR_RESET (0xC)
The AVR specific public JTAG instruction for setting the AVR device in the Reset mode or taking
the device out from the Reset mode. The TAP controller is not reset by this instruction. The one
bit Reset Register is selected as Data Register. Note that the reset will be active as long as there
is a logic “one” in the Reset Chain. The output from this chain is not latched.
The active states are:
• Shift-DR: The Reset Register is shifted by the TCK input
30.9.3 PROG_ENABLE (0x4)
The AVR specific public JTAG instruction for enabling programming via the JTAG port. The 16-
bit Programming Enable Register is selected as Data Register. The active states are the
following:
• Shift-DR: The programming enable signature is shifted into the Data Register
• Update-DR: The programming enable signature is compared to the correct value, and
Programming mode is entered if the signature is valid
Test-logic-reset
Run-test/idle
Shift-DR
Exit1-DR
Pause-DR
Exit2-DR
Update-DR
Select-IR scan
Capture-IR
Shift-IR
Exit1-IR
Pause-IR
Exit2-IR
Update-IR
Select-DR scan
Capture-DR
0
1
0 11 1
0 0
0 0
1 1
1 0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1 0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0 0
1 1379
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
30.9.4 PROG_COMMANDS (0x5)
The AVR specific public JTAG instruction for entering programming commands via the JTAG
port. The 15-bit Programming Command Register is selected as Data Register. The active
states are the following:
• Capture-DR: The result of the previous command is loaded into the Data Register
• Shift-DR: The Data Register is shifted by the TCK input, shifting out the result of the previous
command and shifting in the new command
• Update-DR: The programming command is applied to the Flash inputs
• Run-Test/Idle: One clock cycle is generated, executing the applied command
30.9.5 PROG_PAGELOAD (0x6)
The AVR specific public JTAG instruction to directly load the Flash data page via the JTAG port.
An 8-bit Flash Data Byte Register is selected as the Data Register. This is physically the eight
LSBs of the Programming Command Register. The active states are the following:
• Shift-DR: The Flash Data Byte Register is shifted by the TCK input
• Update-DR: The content of the Flash Data Byte Register is copied into a temporary register.
A write sequence is initiated that within 11 TCK cycles loads the content of the temporary
register into the Flash page buffer. The AVR automatically alternates between writing the low
and the high byte for each new Update-DR state, starting with the low byte for the first
Update-DR encountered after entering the PROG_PAGELOAD command. The Program
Counter is pre-incriminated before writing the low byte, except for the first written byte. This
ensures that the first data is written to the address set up by PROG_COMMANDS, and
loading the last location in the page buffer does not make the program counter increment into
the next page
30.9.6 PROG_PAGEREAD (0x7)
The AVR specific public JTAG instruction to directly capture the Flash content via the JTAG port.
An 8-bit Flash Data Byte Register is selected as the Data Register. This is physically the 8 LSBs
of the Programming Command Register. The active states are the following:
• Capture-DR: The content of the selected Flash byte is captured into the Flash Data Byte
Register. The AVR automatically alternates between reading the low and the high byte for
each new Capture-DR state, starting with the low byte for the first Capture-DR encountered
after entering the PROG_PAGEREAD command. The Program Counter is post-incremented
after reading each high byte, including the first read byte. This ensures that the first data is
captured from the first address set up by PROG_COMMANDS, and reading the last location
in the page makes the program counter increment into the next page
• Shift-DR: The Flash Data Byte Register is shifted by the TCK input
30.9.7 Data Registers
The Data Registers are selected by the JTAG instruction registers described in section “Programming
specific JTAG instructions” on page 377. The Data Registers relevant for
programming operations are:
• Reset Register
• Programming Enable Register
• Programming Command Register
• Flash Data Byte Register380
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
30.9.8 Reset Register
The Reset Register is a Test Data Register used to reset the part during programming. It is
required to reset the part before entering Programming mode.
A high value in the Reset Register corresponds to pulling the external reset low. The part is reset
as long as there is a high value present in the Reset Register. Depending on the Fuse settings
for the clock options, the part will remain reset for a Reset Time-out period (refer to “Clock
sources” on page 41) after releasing the Reset Register. The output from this Data Register is
not latched, so the reset will take place immediately, as shown in Figure 9-1 on page 58.
30.9.9 Programming Enable Register
The Programming Enable Register is a 16-bit register. The contents of this register is compared
to the programming enable signature, binary code 0b1010_0011_0111_0000. When the contents
of the register is equal to the programming enable signature, programming via the JTAG
port is enabled. The register is reset to 0 on Power-on Reset, and should always be reset when
leaving Programming mode.
Figure 30-13. Programming enable register.
30.9.10 Programming Command Register
The Programming Command Register is a 15-bit register. This register is used to serially shift in
programming commands, and to serially shift out the result of the previous command, if any. The
JTAG Programming Instruction Set is shown in Table 30-17 on page 382. The state sequence
when shifting in the programming commands is illustrated in Figure 30-15 on page 385.
TDI
TDO
D
A
T
A
= D Q
ClockDR & PROG_ENABLE
Programming enable
0xA370381
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 30-14. Programming Command register.
TDI
TDO
S
T
R
O
B
E
S
A
D
D
R
E
S
S
/
D
A
T
A
Flash
EEPROM
fuses
lock bits382
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Table 30-17. JTAG programming instruction set.
a = address high bits, b = address low bits, c = address extended bits, H = 0 - Low byte, 1 - High Byte, o = data out, i =
data in, x = don’t care.
Instruction TDI sequence TDO sequence Notes
1a. Chip Erase
0100011_10000000
0110001_10000000
0110011_10000000
0110011_10000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
1b. Poll for Chip Erase Complete 0110011_10000000 xxxxxox_xxxxxxxx (2)
2a. Enter Flash Write 0100011_00010000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
2b. Load Address Extended High Byte 0001011_cccccccc xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (10)
2c. Load Address High Byte 0000111_aaaaaaaa xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
2d. Load Address Low Byte 0000011_bbbbbbbb xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
2e. Load Data Low Byte 0010011_iiiiiiii xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
2f. Load Data High Byte 0010111_iiiiiiii xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
2g. Latch Data
0110111_00000000
1110111_00000000
0110111_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
(1)
2h. Write Flash Page
0110111_00000000
0110101_00000000
0110111_00000000
0110111_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
(1)
2i. Poll for Page Write Complete 0110111_00000000 xxxxxox_xxxxxxxx (2)
3a. Enter Flash Read 0100011_00000010 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
3b. Load Address Extended High Byte 0001011_cccccccc xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (10)
3c. Load Address High Byte 0000111_aaaaaaaa xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
3d. Load Address Low Byte 0000011_bbbbbbbb xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
3e. Read Data Low and High Byte
0110010_00000000
0110110_00000000
0110111_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_oooooooo
xxxxxxx_oooooooo
Low byte
High byte
4a. Enter EEPROM Write 0100011_00010001 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
4b. Load Address High Byte 0000111_aaaaaaaa xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (10)
4c. Load Address Low Byte 0000011_bbbbbbbb xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
4d. Load Data Byte 0010011_iiiiiiii xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
4e. Latch Data
0110111_00000000
1110111_00000000
0110111_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
(1)
4f. Write EEPROM Page
0110011_00000000
0110001_00000000
0110011_00000000
0110011_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
(1)383
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
4g. Poll for Page Write Complete 0110011_00000000 xxxxxox_xxxxxxxx (2)
5a. Enter EEPROM Read 0100011_00000011 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
5b. Load Address High Byte 0000111_aaaaaaaa xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (10)
5c. Load Address Low Byte 0000011_bbbbbbbb xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
5d. Read Data Byte
0110011_bbbbbbbb
0110010_00000000
0110011_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_oooooooo
6a. Enter Fuse Write 0100011_01000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
6b. Load Data Low Byte (6) 0010011_iiiiiiii xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (3)
6c. Write Fuse Extended Byte
0111011_00000000
0111001_00000000
0111011_00000000
0111011_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
(1)
6d. Poll for Fuse Write Complete 0110111_00000000 xxxxxox_xxxxxxxx (2)
6e. Load Data Low Byte (7) 0010011_iiiiiiii xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (3)
6f. Write Fuse High Byte
0110111_00000000
0110101_00000000
0110111_00000000
0110111_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
(1)
6g. Poll for Fuse Write Complete 0110111_00000000 xxxxxox_xxxxxxxx (2)
6h. Load Data Low Byte (7) 0010011_iiiiiiii xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (3)
6i. Write Fuse Low Byte
0110011_00000000
0110001_00000000
0110011_00000000
0110011_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
(1)
6j. Poll for Fuse Write Complete 0110011_00000000 xxxxxox_xxxxxxxx (2)
7a. Enter Lock Bit Write 0100011_00100000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
7b. Load Data Byte (9) 0010011_11iiiiii xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (4)
7c. Write Lock Bits
0110011_00000000
0110001_00000000
0110011_00000000
0110011_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
(1)
7d. Poll for Lock Bit Write complete 0110011_00000000 xxxxxox_xxxxxxxx (2)
8a. Enter Fuse/Lock Bit Read 0100011_00000100 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
8b. Read Extended Fuse Byte (6) 0111010_00000000
0111011_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_oooooooo
8c. Read Fuse High Byte (7) 0111110_00000000
0111111_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_oooooooo
Table 30-17. JTAG programming instruction set. (Continued)
a = address high bits, b = address low bits, c = address extended bits, H = 0 - Low byte, 1 - High Byte, o = data out, i =
data in, x = don’t care.
Instruction TDI sequence TDO sequence Notes384
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Notes: 1. This command sequence is not required if the seven MSB are correctly set by the previous command sequence (which is
normally the case).
2. Repeat until o = “1”.
3. Set bits to “0” to program the corresponding Fuse, “1” to un-program the Fuse.
4. Set bits to “0” to program the corresponding Lock bit, “1” to leave the Lock bit unchanged.
5. “0” = programmed, “1” = un-programmed.
6. The bit mapping for Fuses Extended byte is listed in Table 30-3 on page 360.
7. The bit mapping for Fuses High byte is listed in Table 30-4 on page 361.
8. The bit mapping for Fuses Low byte is listed in Table 30-5 on page 361.
9. The bit mapping for Lock bits byte is listed in Table 30-1 on page 359.
10. Address bits exceeding PCMSB and EEAMSB (Table 30-11 on page 364 and Table 30-12 on page 365) are don’t care.
11. All TDI and TDO sequences are represented by binary digits (0b...).
8d. Read Fuse Low Byte (8) 0110010_00000000
0110011_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_oooooooo
8e. Read Lock Bits (9) 0110110_00000000
0110111_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxoooooo (5)
8f. Read Fuses and Lock Bits
0111010_00000000
0111110_00000000
0110010_00000000
0110110_00000000
0110111_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_oooooooo
xxxxxxx_oooooooo
xxxxxxx_oooooooo
xxxxxxx_oooooooo
(5)
Fuse Ext. byte
Fuse High byte
Fuse Low byte
Lock bits
9a. Enter Signature Byte Read 0100011_00001000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
9b. Load Address Byte 0000011_bbbbbbbb xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
9c. Read Signature Byte 0110010_00000000
0110011_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_oooooooo
10a. Enter Calibration Byte Read 0100011_00001000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
10b. Load Address Byte 0000011_bbbbbbbb xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
10c. Read Calibration Byte 0110110_00000000
0110111_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_oooooooo
11a. Load No Operation Command 0100011_00000000
0110011_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
Table 30-17. JTAG programming instruction set. (Continued)
a = address high bits, b = address low bits, c = address extended bits, H = 0 - Low byte, 1 - High Byte, o = data out, i =
data in, x = don’t care.
Instruction TDI sequence TDO sequence Notes385
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 30-15. State machine sequence for changing/reading the data word.
30.9.11 Flash Data Byte Register
The Flash Data Byte Register provides an efficient way to load the entire Flash page buffer
before executing Page Write, or to read out/verify the content of the Flash. A state machine sets
up the control signals to the Flash and senses the strobe signals from the Flash, thus only the
data words need to be shifted in/out.
The Flash Data Byte Register actually consists of the 8-bit scan chain and a 8-bit temporary register.
During page load, the Update-DR state copies the content of the scan chain over to the
temporary register and initiates a write sequence that within 11 TCK cycles loads the content of
the temporary register into the Flash page buffer. The AVR automatically alternates between
writing the low and the high byte for each new Update-DR state, starting with the low byte for the
first Update-DR encountered after entering the PROG_PAGELOAD command. The Program
Counter is pre-incremented before writing the low byte, except for the first written byte. This
ensures that the first data is written to the address set up by PROG_COMMANDS, and loading
the last location in the page buffer does not make the Program Counter increment into the next
page.
During Page Read, the content of the selected Flash byte is captured into the Flash Data Byte
Register during the Capture-DR state. The AVR automatically alternates between reading the
low and the high byte for each new Capture-DR state, starting with the low byte for the first CapTest-logic-reset
Run-test/idle
Shift-DR
Exit1-DR
Pause-DR
Exit2-DR
Update-DR
Select-IR scan
Capture-IR
Shift-IR
Exit1-IR
Pause-IR
Exit2-IR
Update-IR
Select-DR scan
Capture-DR
0
1
0 11 1
0 0
0 0
1 1
1 0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1 0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0 0
1 1386
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
ture-DR encountered after entering the PROG_PAGEREAD command. The Program Counter is
post-incremented after reading each high byte, including the first read byte. This ensures that
the first data is captured from the first address set up by PROG_COMMANDS, and reading the
last location in the page makes the program counter increment into the next page.
Figure 30-16. Flash Data Byte Register.
The state machine controlling the Flash Data Byte Register is clocked by TCK. During normal
operation in which eight bits are shifted for each Flash byte, the clock cycles needed to navigate
through the TAP controller automatically feeds the state machine for the Flash Data Byte Register
with sufficient number of clock pulses to complete its operation transparently for the user.
However, if too few bits are shifted between each Update-DR state during page load, the TAP
controller should stay in the Run-Test/Idle state for some TCK cycles to ensure that there are at
least 11 TCK cycles between each Update-DR state.
30.9.12 Programming algorithm
All references below of type “1a”, “1b”, and so on, refer to Table 30-17 on page 382.
30.9.13 Entering Programming mode
1. Enter JTAG instruction AVR_RESET and shift 1 in the Reset Register.
2. Enter instruction PROG_ENABLE and shift 0b1010_0011_0111_0000 in the Programming
Enable Register.
30.9.14 Leaving Programming mode
1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
2. Disable all programming instructions by using no operation instruction 11a.
3. Enter instruction PROG_ENABLE and shift 0b0000_0000_0000_0000 in the programming
Enable Register.
4. Enter JTAG instruction AVR_RESET and shift 0 in the Reset Register.
TDI
TDO
D
A
T
A
Flash
EEPROM
fuses
lock bits
STROBES
ADDRESS
State
machine387
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
30.9.15 Performing Chip Erase
1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
2. Start Chip Erase using programming instruction 1a.
3. Poll for Chip Erase complete using programming instruction 1b, or wait for tWLRH_CE
(refer to Table 30-13 on page 373).
30.9.16 Programming the Flash
Before programming the Flash a Chip Erase must be performed, see “Performing Chip Erase”
on page 387.
1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
2. Enable Flash write using programming instruction 2a.
3. Load address Extended High byte using programming instruction 2b.
4. Load address High byte using programming instruction 2c.
5. Load address Low byte using programming instruction 2d.
6. Load data using programming instructions 2e, 2f and 2g.
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 for all instruction words in the page.
8. Write the page using programming instruction 2h.
9. Poll for Flash write complete using programming instruction 2i, or wait for tWLRH (refer to
Table 30-13 on page 373).
10. Repeat steps 3 to 9 until all data have been programmed.
A more efficient data transfer can be achieved using the PROG_PAGELOAD instruction:
1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
2. Enable Flash write using programming instruction 2a.
3. Load the page address using programming instructions 2b, 2c and 2d. PCWORD (refer
to Table 30-11 on page 364) is used to address within one page and must be written as
0.
4. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_PAGELOAD.
5. Load the entire page by shifting in all instruction words in the page byte-by-byte, starting
with the LSB of the first instruction in the page and ending with the MSB of the last
instruction in the page. Use Update-DR to copy the contents of the Flash Data Byte
Register into the Flash page location and to auto-increment the Program Counter
before each new word.
6. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
7. Write the page using programming instruction 2h.
8. Poll for Flash write complete using programming instruction 2i, or wait for tWLRH (refer to
Table 30-13 on page 373).
9. Repeat steps 3 to 8 until all data have been programmed.
30.9.17 Reading the Flash
1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
2. Enable Flash read using programming instruction 3a.
3. Load address using programming instructions 3b, 3c and 3d.
4. Read data using programming instruction 3e.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all data have been read.
A more efficient data transfer can be achieved using the PROG_PAGEREAD instruction:388
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
2. Enable Flash read using programming instruction 3a.
3. Load the page address using programming instructions 3b, 3c and 3d. PCWORD (refer
to Table 30-11 on page 364) is used to address within one page and must be written as
0.
4. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_PAGEREAD.
5. Read the entire page (or Flash) by shifting out all instruction words in the page (or
Flash), starting with the LSB of the first instruction in the page (Flash) and ending with
the MSB of the last instruction in the page (Flash). The Capture-DR state both captures
the data from the Flash, and also auto-increments the program counter after each word
is read. Note that Capture-DR comes before the shift-DR state. Hence, the first byte
which is shifted out contains valid data.
6. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
7. Repeat steps 3 to 6 until all data have been read.
30.9.18 Programming the EEPROM
Before programming the EEPROM a Chip Erase must be performed, see “Performing Chip
Erase” on page 387.
1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
2. Enable EEPROM write using programming instruction 4a.
3. Load address High byte using programming instruction 4b.
4. Load address Low byte using programming instruction 4c.
5. Load data using programming instructions 4d and 4e.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for all data bytes in the page.
7. Write the data using programming instruction 4f.
8. Poll for EEPROM write complete using programming instruction 4g, or wait for tWLRH
(refer to Table 30-13 on page 373).
9. Repeat steps 3 to 8 until all data have been programmed.
Note that the PROG_PAGELOAD instruction can not be used when programming the EEPROM.
30.9.19 Reading the EEPROM
1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
2. Enable EEPROM read using programming instruction 5a.
3. Load address using programming instructions 5b and 5c.
4. Read data using programming instruction 5d.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all data have been read.
Note that the PROG_PAGEREAD instruction can not be used when reading the EEPROM.
30.9.20 Programming the Fuses
1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
2. Enable Fuse write using programming instruction 6a.
3. Load data high byte using programming instructions 6b. A bit value of “0” will program
the corresponding fuse, a “1” will un-program the fuse.
4. Write Fuse High byte using programming instruction 6c.
5. Poll for Fuse write complete using programming instruction 6d, or wait for tWLRH (refer to
Table 30-13 on page 373).389
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
6. Load data low byte using programming instructions 6e. A “0” will program the fuse, a “1”
will unprogram the fuse.
7. Write Fuse low byte using programming instruction 6f.
8. Poll for Fuse write complete using programming instruction 6g, or wait for tWLRH (refer to
Table 30-13 on page 373).
30.9.21 Programming the Lock Bits
1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
2. Enable Lock bit write using programming instruction 7a.
3. Load data using programming instructions 7b. A bit value of “0” will program the corresponding
lock bit, a “1” will leave the lock bit unchanged.
4. Write Lock bits using programming instruction 7c.
5. Poll for Lock bit write complete using programming instruction 7d, or wait for tWLRH (refer
to Table 30-13 on page 373).
30.9.22 Reading the Fuses and Lock Bits
1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
2. Enable Fuse/Lock bit read using programming instruction 8a.
3. To read all Fuses and Lock bits, use programming instruction 8e.
To only read Fuse High byte, use programming instruction 8b.
To only read Fuse Low byte, use programming instruction 8c.
To only read Lock bits, use programming instruction 8d.
30.9.23 Reading the Signature Bytes
1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
2. Enable Signature byte read using programming instruction 9a.
3. Load address 0x00 using programming instruction 9b.
4. Read first signature byte using programming instruction 9c.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 with address 0x01 and address 0x02 to read the second and third
signature bytes, respectively.
30.9.24 Reading the Calibration Byte
1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
2. Enable Calibration byte read using programming instruction 10a.
3. Load address 0x00 using programming instruction 10b.
4. Read the calibration byte using programming instruction 10c.390
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
31. Electrical characteristics for Atmel AT90USB64/128
31.1 Absolute maximum ratings*
31.2 DC characteristics
Operating temperature..................................... -40°C to +85°C *NOTICE: Stresses beyond those listed under “Absolute
maximum ratings” may cause permanent damage
to the device. This is a stress rating only and
functional operation of the device at these or
other conditions beyond those indicated in the
operational sections of this specification is not
implied. Exposure to absolute maximum rating
conditions for extended periods may affect
device reliability.
Storage temperature...................................... -65°C to +150°C
Voltage on any pin except RESET and VBUS
with respect to ground (7) .............................-0.5V to VCC+0.5V
Voltage on RESET with respect to ground ......-0.5V to +13.0V
Voltage on VBUS with respect to ground...........-0.5V to +6.0V
Maximum operating voltage............................................ +6.0V
DC current per I/O pin.................................................. 40.0mA
DC current VCC and GND pins .................................. 200.0mA
TA = -40°C to 85°C, VCC = 2.7V to 5.5V (unless otherwise noted).
Symbol Parameter Condition Min. (5) Typ. Max. (5) Units
VIL
Input Low Voltage,Except
XTAL1 and Reset pin VCC = 2.7V - 5.5V -0.5 0.2VCC (1)
V
VIL1
Input Low Voltage,
XTAL1 pin VCC = 2.7V - 5.5V -0.5 0.1VCC (1)
VIL2
Input Low Voltage,
RESET pin VCC = 2.7V - 5.5V -0.5 0.1VCC (1)
VIH
Input High Voltage,
Except XTAL1 and
RESET pins
VCC = 2.7V - 5.5V 0.6VCC (2) VCC + 0.5
VIH1
Input High Voltage,
XTAL1 pin VCC = 2.7V - 5.5V 0.7VCC (2) VCC + 0.5
VIH2
Input High Voltage,
RESET pin VCC = 2.7V - 5.5V 0.9VCC (2) VCC + 0.5
VOL Output Low Voltage (3) IOL = 10mA, VCC = 5V
IOL = 5mA, VCC = 3V
0.3
0.2
0.7
0.5
VOH Output High Voltage (4) IOH = -20mA, VCC = 5V
IOH = -10mA, VCC = 3V
4.2
2.3
4.5
2.6
IIL
Input Leakage
Current I/O Pin
VCC = 5.5V, pin low
(absolute value) 1
µA
IIH
Input Leakage
Current I/O Pin
VCC = 5.5V, pin high
(absolute value) 1
RRST Reset Pull-up Resistor 30 60
kΩ
RPU I/O Pin Pull-up Resistor 20 50391
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Note: 1. "Max" means the highest value where the pin is guaranteed to be read as low
2. "Min" means the lowest value where the pin is guaranteed to be read as high
3. Although each I/O port can sink more than the test conditions (20mA at VCC = 5V, 10mA at VCC = 3V) under steady state
conditions (non-transient), the following must be observed:
Atmel AT90USB64/128:
1.)The sum of all IOL, for ports A0-A7, G2, C4-C7 should not exceed 100mA.
2.)The sum of all IOL, for ports C0-C3, G0-G1, D0-D7 should not exceed 100mA.
3.)The sum of all IOL, for ports G3-G5, B0-B7, E0-E7 should not exceed 100mA.
4.)The sum of all IOL, for ports F0-F7 should not exceed 100mA.
If IOL exceeds the test condition, VOL may exceed the related specification. Pins are not guaranteed to sink current greater
than the listed test condition.
4. Although each I/O port can source more than the test conditions (20mA at VCC = 5V, 10mA at VCC = 3V) under steady state
conditions (non-transient), the following must be observed:
AT90USB64/128:
1)The sum of all IOH, for ports A0-A7, G2, C4-C7 should not exceed 100mA.
2)The sum of all IOH, for ports C0-C3, G0-G1, D0-D7 should not exceed 100mA.
3)The sum of all IOH, for ports G3-G5, B0-B7, E0-E7 should not exceed 100mA.
4)The sum of all IOH, for ports F0-F7 should not exceed 100mA.
5. All DC Characteristics contained in this datasheet are based on simulation and characterization of other AVR microcontrollers
manufactured in the same process technology. These values are preliminary values representing design targets, and
will be updated after characterization of actual silicon
6. Values with “PRR1 – Power Reduction Register 1” disabled (0x00).
ICC Power Supply Current (6)
Active 4MHz, VCC = 3V
(AT90USB64/128) 2.5 5
mA
Active 8MHz, VCC = 3V
(AT90USB64/128) 5 10
Active 8MHz, VCC = 5V
(AT90USB64/128) 10 18
Active 16MHz, VCC = 5V
(AT90USB64/128) 19 30
Icc Power-down mode
WDT enabled, BOD
enabled, VCC = 3V, 25°C 30
µA WDT enabled, BOD
disabled, VCC = 3V, 25°C 10
WDT disabled, BOD
disabled, VCC = 3V, 25°C 2
VACIO
Analog Comparator
Input Offset Voltage
VCC = 5V
Vin = VCC/2 10 40 mV
IACLK
Analog Comparator
Input Leakage Current
VCC = 5V
Vin = VCC/2 -50 50 nA
tACID
Analog Comparator
Propagation Delay
VCC = 2.7V
VCC = 4.0V
750
500 ns
Iq USB Regulator Quiescent
Current UVCC >3.6V, I = 0mA 10 30 µA
Vusb USB Regulator Output
Voltage (Ucap) UVCC >3.6V, I = 40mA (8) 3.0 3.3 3.5 V
TA = -40°C to 85°C, VCC = 2.7V to 5.5V (unless otherwise noted). (Continued)
Symbol Parameter Condition Min. (5) Typ. Max. (5) Units392
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
7. As specified on the USB Electrical chapter of USB Specifications 2.0, the D+/D- pads can withstand voltages down to -1V
applied through a 39Ω resistor
8. USB Peripheral consumes up to 50mA from the regulator or UVCC pin when USB is used at full-load
31.3 External clock drive waveforms
Figure 31-1. External clock drive waveforms.
31.4 External clock drive
Note: All DC characteristics contained in this datasheet are based on simulation and characterization of
other AVR microcontrollers manufactured in the same process technology. These values are preliminary
values representing design targets, and will be updated after characterization of actual
silicon.
31.5 Maximum speed vs. VCC
Maximum frequency is depending on VCC. As shown in Figure 31-2 on page 393, the maximum
frequency vs. VCC curve is linear between 2.7V < VCC < 5.5V.
VIL1
VIH1
Table 31-1. External clock drive.
Symbol Parameter
VCC=1.8-5.5V VCC=2.7-5.5V VCC=4.5-5.5V
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Units
1/tCLCL
Oscillator
Frequency 0 2 0 8 0 16 MHz
tCLCL Clock Period 500 125 62.5
tCHCX High Time 200 50 25 ns
t
CLCX Low Time 200 50 25
tCLCH Rise Time 2.0 1.6 0.5
μs
tCHCL Fall Time 2.0 1.6 0.5
ΔtCLCL
Change in period
from one clock
cycle to the next
2 2 2%393
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 31-2. Maximum frequency vs. VCC, Atmel AT90USB64/128.
31.6 2-wire serial interface characteristics
Table 31-2 describes the requirements for devices connected to the 2-wire Serial Bus. The AT90USB64/128 2-wire Serial
Interface meets or exceeds these requirements under the noted conditions.
Timing symbols refer to Figure 31-3 on page 394.
16MHz
8MHz
Table 31-2. 2-wire serial bus requirements.
Symbol Parameter Condition Min Max Units
VIL Input Low-voltage -0.5 0.3 VCC
V VIH Input High-voltage 0.7 VCC VCC + 0.5
Vhys
(1) Hysteresis of Schmitt Trigger Inputs 0.05 VCC (2) –
VOL (1) Output Low-voltage 3mA sink current 0 0.4
tr
(1) Rise Time for both SDA and SCL 20 + 0.1Cb
(3)(2) 300
tof ns (1) Output Fall Time from VIHmin to VILmax 10pF < Cb < 400pF (3) 20 + 0.1Cb
(3)(2) 250
tSP (1) Spikes Suppressed by Input Filter 0 50 (2)
Ii Input Current each I/O Pin 0.1VCC < Vi
< 0.9VCC -10 10 µA
Ci
(1) Capacitance for each I/O Pin – 10 pF
fSCL SCL Clock Frequency fCK (4) > max(16fSCL, 250kHz) (5) 0 400 kHz
Rp Value of Pull-up resistor
fSCL ≤ 100kHz
fSCL > 100kHz
VCC – 0.4V
3mA ---------------------------- 1000ns
Cb
-------------------
Ω
VCC – 0.4V
3mA ---------------------------- 300ns
Cb
----------------394
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Notes: 1. In Atmel AT90USB64/128, this parameter is characterized and not 100% tested.
2. Required only for fSCL >100kHz.
3. Cb = capacitance of one bus line in pF.
4. fCK = CPU clock frequency
5. This requirement applies to all AT90USB64/128 2-wire Serial Interface operation. Other devices connected to the 2-wire
Serial Bus need only obey the general fSCL requirement.
6. The actual low period generated by the AT90USB64/128 2-wire Serial Interface is (1/fSCL - 2/fCK), thus fCK must be greater
than 6MHz for the low time requirement to be strictly met at fSCL = 100kHz.
7. The actual low period generated by the AT90USB64/128 2-wire Serial Interface is (1/fSCL - 2/fCK), thus the low time requirement
will not be strictly met for fSCL > 308kHz when fCK = 8MHz. Still, AT90USB64/128 devices connected to the bus may
communicate at full speed (400kHz) with other AT90USB64/128 devices, as well as any other device with a proper tLOW
acceptance margin.
Figure 31-3. 2-wire serial bus timing.
tHD;STA Hold Time (repeated) START Condition
fSCL ≤ 100kHz 4.0 –
µs
fSCL > 100kHz 0.6 –
tLOW Low Period of the SCL Clock
fSCL ≤ 100kHz (6) 4.7 –
fSCL > 100kHz (7) 1.3 –
tHIGH High period of the SCL clock
fSCL ≤ 100kHz 4.0 –
fSCL > 100kHz 0.6 –
tSU;STA
Set-up time for a repeated START
condition
fSCL ≤ 100kHz 4.7 –
fSCL > 100kHz 0.6 –
tHD;DAT Data hold time
fSCL ≤ 100kHz 0 3.45
fSCL > 100kHz 0 0.9
tSU;DAT Data setup time
fSCL ≤ 100kHz 250 –
ns
fSCL > 100kHz 100 –
tSU;STO Setup time for STOP condition
fSCL ≤ 100kHz 4.0 –
µs
fSCL > 100kHz 0.6 –
tBUF
Bus free time between a STOP and
START condition
fSCL ≤ 100kHz 4.7 –
fSCL > 100kHz 1.3 –
Table 31-2. 2-wire serial bus requirements. (Continued)
Symbol Parameter Condition Min Max Units
t
SU;STA
t
LOW
t
HIGH
t
LOW
t
of
t
HD;STA t
HD;DAT t
SU;DAT t
SU;STO
t
BUF
SCL
SDA
t
r395
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
31.7 SPI timing characteristics
See Figure 31-4 and Figure 31-5 on page 396 for details.
Note: 1. In SPI Programming mode the minimum SCK high/low period is:
- 2 tCLCL for fCK <12MHz
- 3 tCLCL for fCK >12MHz
Figure 31-4. SPI interface timing requirements (master mode).
Table 31-3. SPI timing parameters.
Description Mode Min. Typ. Max.
1 SCK period Master See Table 18-4 on
page 174
ns
2 SCK high/low Master 50% duty cycle
3 Rise/Fall time Master 3.6
4 Setup Master 10
5 Hold Master 10
6 Out to SCK Master 0.5 × tsck
7 SCK to out Master 10
8 SCK to out high Master 10
9 SS low to out Slave 15
10 SCK period Slave 4 × tck
11 SCK high/low (1) Slave 2 × tck
12 Rise/Fall time Slave 1.6 µs
13 Setup Slave 10
ns
14 Hold Slave tck
15 SCK to out Slave 15
16 SCK to SS high Slave 20
17 SS high to tri-state Slave 10
18 SS low to SCK Slave 20
MOSI
(Data output)
SCK
(CPOL = 1)
MISO
(Data input)
SCK
(CPOL = 0)
SS
MSB LSB
MSB LSB
...
...
6 1
2 2
4 5 3
7 8396
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 31-5. SPI interface timing requirements (slave mode).
31.8 Hardware boot entrance timing characteristics
Figure 31-6. Hardware boot timing requirements.
MISO
(Data output)
SCK
(CPOL = 1)
MOSI
(Data input)
SCK
(CPOL = 0)
SS
MSB LSB
MSB LSB
...
...
10
11 11
13 14 12
15 17
9
X
16
Table 31-4. Hardware boot timings.
Symbol Parameter Min. Max.
tSHRH HWB low Setup before Reset High 0
tHHRH HWB low Hold after Reset High
StartUpTime (SUT)
+
Time Out Delay (TOUT)
RESET
ALE/HWB
t
SHRH t
HHRH397
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
31.9 ADC characteristics
Table 31-5. ADC characteristics.
Symbol Parameter Condition Min. Typ. Max. Units
Resolution
Single Ended Conversion 10
Bits
Differential Conversion
Gain = 1× or 10× 8
Differential Conversion
Gain = 200× 7
Absolute accuracy (Including
INL, DNL, quantization error,
gain and offset error)
Single Ended Conversion
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
ADC clock = 200kHz
1.5
LSB
Single Ended Conversion
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
ADC clock = 1MHz
Single Ended Conversion
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
ADC clock = 200kHz
Noise Reduction Mode
1.5
Single Ended Conversion
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
ADC clock = 1MHz
Noise Reduction Mode
Absolute accuracy
Gain = 1×, 10×, 200×
VREF = 4V, VCC = 5V
ADC Clock = 50 - 200kHz
1
Integral Non-Linearity (INL)
Single Ended Conversion
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
ADC clock = 200kHz
0.5 1
Integral Non-Linearity (INL)
(Accuracy after calibration for
offset and gain error)
Gain = 1×, 10×, 200×
VREF = 4V, VCC = 5V
ADC Clock = 50 - 200kHz
0.5 1
Differential Non-Linearity (DNL)
Single Ended Conversion
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
ADC clock = 200kHz
0.3 1
Gain Error
Single Ended Conversion
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
ADC clock = 200kHz
-2 0 +2
Gain = 1×, 10×, 200× -2 0 +2
Offset Error
Single Ended Conversion
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
ADC clock = 200kHz
-2 1 +2
Gain = 1×, 10×, 200×
VREF = 4V, VCC = 5V
ADC Clock = 50 - 200kHz
-1 0 +1
Conversion Time Free Running Conversion 65 260 µs
Clock Frequency Single Ended Conversion 50 1000 kHz398
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
AVCC Analog Supply Voltage VCC - 0.3 VCC + 0.3
V
VREF Reference Voltage Single Ended Conversion 2.0 AVCC
Differential Conversion 2.0 AVCC - 0.5
VIN Input Voltage
Single ended channels 0 VREF
Differential Conversion 0 AVCC
Input Bandwidth
Single Ended Channels 38,5
kHz
Differential Channels 4
VINT1 Internal Voltage Reference 1.1V 1.0 1.1 1.2
V
VINT2 Internal Voltage Reference 2.56V 2.4 2.56 2.8
RREF Reference Input Resistance 32 kΩ
RAIN Analog Input Resistance 100 MΩ
Table 31-5. ADC characteristics. (Continued)
Symbol Parameter Condition Min. Typ. Max. Units399
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
31.10 External data memory timing
Notes: 1. This assumes 50% clock duty cycle. The half period is actually the high time of the external clock, XTAL1.
2. This assumes 50% clock duty cycle. The half period is actually the low time of the external clock, XTAL1.
Table 31-6. External data memory characteristics, 4.5 - 5.5 Volts, no wait-state.
Symbol Parameter
8MHz oscillator Variable oscillator
Min. Max. Min. Max. Unit
0 1/tCLCL Oscillator Frequency 0.0 16 MHz
1 tLHLL ALE Pulse Width 115 1.0tCLCL-10
ns
2 tAVLL Address Valid A to ALE Low 57.5 0.5tCLCL-5 (1)
3a tLLAX_ST
Address Hold After ALE Low,
write access 5 5
3b tLLAX_LD
Address Hold after ALE Low,
read access 5 5
4 tAVLLC Address Valid C to ALE Low 57.5 0.5tCLCL-5 (1)
5 tAVRL Address Valid to RD Low 115 1.0tCLCL-10
6 tAVWL Address Valid to WR Low 115 1.0tCLCL-10
7 tLLWL ALE Low to WR Low 47.5 67.5 0.5tCLCL-15 (2) 0.5tCLCL+5 (2)
8 tLLRL ALE Low to RD Low 47.5 67.5 0.5tCLCL-15 (2) 0.5tCLCL+5 (2)
9 tDVRH Data Setup to RD High 40 40
10 tRLDV Read Low to Data Valid 75 1.0tCLCL-50
11 tRHDX Data Hold After RD High 0 0
12 tRLRH RD Pulse Width 115 1.0tCLCL-10
13 tDVWL Data Setup to WR Low 42.5 0.5tCLCL-20 (1)
14 tWHDX Data Hold After WR High 115 1.0tCLCL-10
15 tDVWH Data Valid to WR High 125 1.0tCLCL
16 tWLWH WR Pulse Width 115 1.0tCLCL-10
Table 31-7. External data memory characteristics, 4.5 - 5.5 Volts, 1 cycle wait-state.
Symbol Parameter
8MHz oscillator Variable oscillator
Min. Max. Min. Max. Unit
0 1/tCLCL Oscillator Frequency 0.0 16 MHz
10 tRLDV Read Low to Data Valid 200 2.0tCLCL-50
ns
12 tRLRH RD Pulse Width 240 2.0tCLCL-10
15 tDVWH Data Valid to WR High 240 2.0tCLCL
16 tWLWH WR Pulse Width 240 2.0tCLCL-10400
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Table 31-8. External data memory characteristics, 4.5 - 5.5 Volts, SRWn1 = 1, SRWn0 = 0.
Symbol Parameter
4MHz oscillator Variable oscillator
Min. Max. Min. Max. Unit
0 1/tCLCL Oscillator Frequency 0.0 16 MHz
10 tRLDV Read Low to Data Valid 325 3.0tCLCL-50
ns
12 tRLRH RD Pulse Width 365 3.0tCLCL-10
15 tDVWH Data Valid to WR High 375 3.0tCLCL
16 tWLWH WR Pulse Width 365 3.0tCLCL-10
Table 31-9. External data memory characteristics, 4.5 - 5.5 Volts, SRWn1 = 1, SRWn0 = 1.
Symbol Parameter
4MHz oscillator Variable oscillator
Min. Max. Min. Max. Unit
0 1/tCLCL Oscillator Frequency 0.0 16 MHz
10 tRLDV Read Low to Data Valid 325 3.0tCLCL-50
ns
12 tRLRH RD Pulse Width 365 3.0tCLCL-10
14 tWHDX Data Hold After WR High 240 2.0tCLCL-10
15 tDVWH Data Valid to WR High 375 3.0tCLCL
16 tWLWH WR Pulse Width 365 3.0tCLCL-10
Table 31-10. External data memory characteristics, 2.7 - 5.5 Volts, no wait-state.
Symbol Parameter
4MHz oscillator Variable oscillator
Min. Max. Min. Max. Unit
0 1/tCLCL Oscillator Frequency 0.0 8 MHz
1 tLHLL ALE Pulse Width 235 tCLCL-15
ns
2 tAVLL Address Valid A to ALE Low 115 0.5tCLCL-10 (1)
3a tLLAX_ST
Address Hold After ALE Low,
write access 5 5
3b tLLAX_LD
Address Hold after ALE Low,
read access 5 5
4 tAVLLC Address Valid C to ALE Low 115 0.5tCLCL-10 (1)
5 tAVRL Address Valid to RD Low 235 1.0tCLCL-15
6 tAVWL Address Valid to WR Low 235 1.0tCLCL-15
7 tLLWL ALE Low to WR Low 115 130 0.5tCLCL-10 (2) 0.5tCLCL+5 (2)
8 tLLRL ALE Low to RD Low 115 130 0.5tCLCL-10 (2) 0.5tCLCL+5 (2)
9 tDVRH Data Setup to RD High 45 45
10 tRLDV Read Low to Data Valid 190 1.0tCLCL-60
11 tRHDX Data Hold After RD High 0 0401
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Notes: 1. This assumes 50% clock duty cycle. The half period is actually the high time of the external clock, XTAL1.
2. This assumes 50% clock duty cycle. The half period is actually the low time of the external clock, XTAL1.
12 tRLRH RD Pulse Width 235 1.0tCLCL-15
ns
13 tDVWL Data Setup to WR Low 105 0.5tCLCL-20 (1)
14 tWHDX Data Hold After WR High 235 1.0tCLCL-15
15 tDVWH Data Valid to WR High 250 1.0tCLCL
16 tWLWH WR Pulse Width 235 1.0tCLCL-15
Table 31-10. External data memory characteristics, 2.7 - 5.5 Volts, no wait-state. (Continued)
Symbol Parameter
4MHz oscillator Variable oscillator
Min. Max. Min. Max. Unit
Table 31-11. External data memory characteristics, 2.7 - 5.5 Volts, SRWn1 = 0, SRWn0 = 1.
Symbol Parameter
4MHz oscillator Variable oscillator
Min. Max. Min. Max. Unit
0 1/tCLCL Oscillator Frequency 0.0 8 MHz
10 tRLDV Read Low to Data Valid 440 2.0tCLCL-60
ns
12 tRLRH RD Pulse Width 485 2.0tCLCL-15
15 tDVWH Data Valid to WR High 500 2.0tCLCL
16 tWLWH WR Pulse Width 485 2.0tCLCL-15
Table 31-12. External data memory characteristics, 2.7 - 5.5 Volts, SRWn1 = 1, SRWn0 = 0.
Symbol Parameter
4MHz oscillator Variable oscillator
Min. Max. Min. Max. Unit
0 1/tCLCL Oscillator Frequency 0.0 8 MHz
10 tRLDV Read Low to Data Valid 690 3.0tCLCL-60
ns
12 tRLRH RD Pulse Width 735 3.0tCLCL-15
15 tDVWH Data Valid to WR High 750 3.0tCLCL
16 tWLWH WR Pulse Width 735 3.0tCLCL-15
Table 31-13. External data memory characteristics, 2.7 - 5.5 Volts, SRWn1 = 1, SRWn0 = 1.
Symbol Parameter
4MHz oscillator Variable oscillator
Min. Max. Min. Max. Unit
0 1/tCLCL Oscillator Frequency 0.0 8 MHz
10 tRLDV Read Low to Data Valid 690 3.0tCLCL-60
ns
12 tRLRH RD Pulse Width 735 3.0tCLCL-15
14 tWHDX Data Hold After WR High 485 2.0tCLCL-15
15 tDVWH Data Valid to WR High 750 3.0tCLCL
16 tWLWH WR Pulse Width 735 3.0tCLCL-15402
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 31-7. External memory timing (SRWn1 = 0, SRWn0 = 0.
Figure 31-8. External memory timing (SRWn1 = 0, SRWn0 = 1).
ALE
T1 T2 T3
Write Read
WR
T4
A15:8 Prev. addr. Address
DA7:0 Prev. data Address XX Data
RD
DA7:0 (XMBK = 0) Address Data
System clock (CLK CPU)
1
4
2
7
6
3a
3b
5
8 12
16
13
10
11
14
15
9
ALE
T1 T2 T3
Write Read
WR
T5
A15:8 Prev. addr. Address
DA7:0 Prev. data Address XX Data
RD
DA7:0 (XMBK = 0) Address Data
System clock (CLK CPU)
1
4
2
7
6
3a
3b
5
8 12
16
13
10
11
14
15
9
T4403
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 31-9. External memory timing (SRWn1 = 1, SRWn0 = 0).
Figure 31-10. External memory timing (SRWn1 = 1, SRWn0 = 1).
The ALE pulse in the last period (T4-T7) is only present if the next instruction accesses the RAM (internal
or external).
ALE
T1 T2 T3
Write Read
WR
T6
A15:8 Prev. addr. Address
DA7:0 Prev. data Address XX Data
RD
DA7:0 (XMBK = 0) Address Data
System clock (CLK CPU)
1
4
2
7
6
3a
3b
5
8 12
16
13
10
11
14
15
9
T4 T5
ALE
T1 T2 T3
Write Read
WR
T7
A15:8 Prev. addr. Address
DA7:0 Prev. data Address XX Data
RD
DA7:0 (XMBK = 0) Address Data
System clock (CLK CPU)
1
4
2
7
6
3a
3b
5
8 12
16
13
10
11
14
15
9
T4 T5 T6404
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
32. Atmel AT90USB64/128 typical characteristics
The following charts show typical behavior. These figures are not tested during manufacturing.
All current consumption measurements are performed with all I/O pins configured as inputs and
with internal pull-ups enabled. A sine wave generator with rail-to-rail output is used as clock
source.
All Active- and Idle current consumption measurements are done with all bits in the PRR registers
set and thus, the corresponding I/O modules are turned off. Also the Analog Comparator is
disabled during these measurements.
The power consumption in Power-down mode is independent of clock selection.
The current consumption is a function of several factors such as: operating voltage, operating
frequency, loading of I/O pins, switching rate of I/O pins, code executed and ambient temperature.
The dominating factors are operating voltage and frequency.
The current drawn from capacitive loaded pins may be estimated (for one pin) as CL×VCC×f
where CL = load capacitance, VCC = operating voltage and f = average switching frequency of I/O
pin.
The parts are characterized at frequencies higher than test limits. Parts are not guaranteed to
function properly at frequencies higher than the ordering code indicates.
The difference between current consumption in Power-down mode with Watchdog Timer
enabled and Power-down mode with Watchdog Timer disabled represents the differential current
drawn by the Watchdog Timer.405
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
32.1 Input voltage levels
Figure 32-1. Input low voltage vs. VCC, all I/Os excluding DP/DM, XTAL1 and reset.
Figure 32-2. Input high voltage vs. VCC, all I/Os excluding DP/DM, XTAL1 and reset.
0.50
0.75
1.00
1.25
1.50
1.75
2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5
VCC (V)
Thres hold (V)
85
25
-40
0.50
0.75
1.00
1.25
1.50
1.75
2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5
VCC (V)
Thres hold (V)
85
25
-40406
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
32.2 Output voltage levels
Figure 32-3. Output low voltage vs. output current, all I/Os excluding DP/DM, VCC = 3V.
Figure 32-4. Output low voltage vs. output current, all I/Os excluding DP/DM, VCC = 5V.
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.2
0 5 10 15 20
I
OL (mA)
VOL (V)
85
25
-40
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0 5 10 15 20
I
OL (mA)
VOL (V)
85
25
-40407
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 32-5. Output high voltage vs. output current, all I/Os excluding DP/DM, VCC = 3V.
Figure 32-6. Output high voltage vs. output current, all I/Os excluding DP/DM, VCC = 5V.
1.8
2.0
2.2
2.4
2.6
2.8
3.0
0 5 10 15 20
I
OH (mA)
VOH (V)
85
25
-40
4.2
4.4
4.6
4.8
5.0
0 5 10 15 20
I
OH (mA)
VOH (V)
85
25
-40408
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
32.3 Power-down supply current
Figure 32-7. Power-down supply current vs. VCC, with BOD disabled, WDT disabled, T = 25°C.
Figure 32-8. Power-down supply current vs. VCC, with BOD disabled, WDT enabled, T = 25°C.
0
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (µA)
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (µA)409
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 32-9. Power-down supply current vs. VCC, with BOD enabled, WDT enabled, T = 25°C.
32.4 Power-save supply current
Figure 32-10. Power-save supply current vs. VCC, with BOD & WDT disabled, T = 25°C.
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (µA)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (µA)410
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
32.5 Idle supply current
Figure 32-11. Idle supply current vs. frequency, T = 25°C.
32.6 Active supply current
Figure 32-12. Active supply current vs. frequency, T = 25°C.
0
5
10
15
20
246 8 10 12 14 16
Frequency (MHz)
ICC (mA)
5.5
5.0
4.5
3.3
2.7
0
5
10
15
20
25
246 8 10 12 14 16
Frequency (MHz)
ICC (mA)
5.5
5.0
4.5
3.3
2.7411
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
32.7 Reset supply current
Figure 32-13. Reset supply current vs. frequency.
32.8 I/O pull-up current
Figure 32-14. I/O pull-up current vs. pin voltage, VCC = 5V.
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Frequency (MHz)
ICC (mA)
5.5
5.0
4.5
3.3
2.7
-20
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
012345
VOP (V)
IOP (uA)
85
25
-40412
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 32-15. Reset pull-up current vs. pin voltage, VCC = 5V.
32.9 Bandgap voltage
Figure 32-16. Bandgap voltage vs. temperature.
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
012345
VRESET (V)
IRESET (µA)
85
25
-40
1.080
1.085
1.090
1.095
1.100
1.105
1.110
1.115
-40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Temperature (°C)
Bandgap voltage (V)
5.5
5.0
4.5
4.0
3.6
2.7413
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
32.10 Internal ARef voltage
Figure 32-17. Internal ARef reference voltage vs. temperature, VCC = 2.7-5.5V.
32.11 USB regulator
Figure 32-18. USB regulator quiescent current vs. input voltage, no load.
2.54
2.56
2.58
2.60
2.62
2.64
-40 -20 0 20 40 60 80
Temperature (°C)
Tens ion Vref Inter (V)
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0
Voltage (V)
ICC (µA)414
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 32-19. USB regulator output voltage vs. input voltage, load = 75Ω.
Note: The 75Ω load is equivalent to the maximum average consumption of the USB peripheral in operation
(full bus load).
32.12 BOD levels
Figure 32-20. BOD voltage (2.4V level) vs. temperature.
2.6
2.8
3.0
3.2
3.4
3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5
Input Voltage (V)
Output voltage (V)
85
25
-40
2.42
2.44
2.46
2.48
2.50
2.52
2.54
-40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Temperature (°C)
Thres hold (V)
Rising Vcc
Falling Vcc415
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 32-21. BOD voltage (3.4V level) vs. temperature.
Figure 32-22. BOD voltage (4.3V level) vs. temperature.
3.42
3.44
3.46
3.48
3.50
3.52
3.54
3.56
-40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Temperature (°C)
Thres hold (V)
Rising Vcc
Falling Vcc
4.34
4.36
4.38
4.40
4.42
4.44
4.46
4.48
4.50
-40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Temperature (°C)
Thres hold (V)
Rising Vcc
Falling Vcc416
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
32.13 Watchdog timer frequency
Figure 32-23. WDT oscillator frequency vs. VCC.
32.14 Internal RC oscillator frequency
Figure 32-24. RC oscillator frequency vs. OSCCAL, T = 25°C.
108
110
112
114
116
118
120
122
124
2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5
VCC (V)
FRC (kHz)
85
25
-40
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
-1 15 31 47 63 79 95 111 127 143 159 175 191 207 223 239 255
OSCCAL (X1)
FRC (MHz)417
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Figure 32-25. RC oscillator frequency vs. VCC.
Figure 32-26. RC oscillator frequency vs. temperature.
7.8
7.9
8.0
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5
VCC (V)
FRC (MHz)
85
25
-40
7.8
8.0
8.2
8.4
8.6
8.8
-40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Temperature (°C)
FRC (MHz)
5.5
4.0
3.3
3.0
2.7418
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
32.15 Power-on reset
Figure 32-27. Power-on reset level vs. temperature.
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
-40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Temperature (°C)
POR Voltage (V)419
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
33. Register summary
Address Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Page
(0xFF) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xFE) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xFD) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xFC) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xFB) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xFA) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xF9) OTGTCON PAGE VALUE
(0xF8) UPINT PINT7:0
(0xF7) UPBCHX - - - - - PBYCT10:8
(0xF6) UPBCLX PBYCT7:0
(0xF5) UPERRX - COUNTER1:0 CRC16 TIMEOUT PID DATAPID DATATGL
(0xF4) UEINT EPINT6:0
(0xF3) UEBCHX - - - - - BYCT10:8
(0xF2) UEBCLX BYCT7:0
(0xF1) UEDATX DAT7:0
(0xF0) UEIENX FLERRE NAKINE - NAKOUTE RXSTPE RXOUTE STALLEDE TXINE
(0xEF) UESTA1X - - - - - CTRLDIR CURRBK1:0
(0xEE) UESTA0X CFGOK OVERFI UNDERFI - DTSEQ1:0 NBUSYBK1:0
(0xED) UECFG1X EPSIZE2:0 EPBK1:0 ALLOC
(0xEC) UECFG0X EPTYPE1:0 - - EPDIR
(0xEB) UECONX STALLRQ STALLRQC RSTDT EPEN
(0xEA) UERST EPRST6:0
(0xE9) UENUM EPNUM2:0
(0xE8) UEINTX FIFOCON NAKINI RWAL NAKOUTI RXSTPI RXOUTI STALLEDI TXINI
(0xE7) Reserved - - - -
(0xE6) UDMFN FNCERR
(0xE5) UDFNUMH FNUM10:8
(0xE4) UDFNUML FNUM7:0
(0xE3) UDADDR ADDEN UADD6:0
(0xE2) UDIEN UPRSME EORSME WAKEUPE EORSTE SOFE SUSPE
(0xE1) UDINT UPRSMI EORSMI WAKEUPI EORSTI SOFI SUSPI
(0xE0) UDCON LSM RMWKUP DETACH
(0xDF) OTGINT STOI HNPERRI ROLEEXI BCERRI VBERRI SRPI
(0xDE) OTGIEN STOE HNPERRE ROLEEXE BCERRE VBERRE SRPE
(0xDD) OTGCON HNPREQ SRPREQ SRPSEL VBUSHWC VBUSREQ VBUSRQC
(0xDC) Reserved
(0xDB) Reserved
(0xDA) USBINT IDTI VBUSTI
(0xD9) USBSTA SPEED ID VBUS
(0xD8) USBCON USBE HOST FRZCLK OTGPADE IDTE VBUSTE
(0xD7) UHWCON UIMOD UIDE UVCONE UVREGE
(0xD6) Reserved
(0xD5) Reserved
(0xD4) Reserved
(0xD3) Reserved
(0xD2) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xD1) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xD0) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xCF) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xCE) UDR1 USART1 I/O Data Register
(0xCD) UBRR1H - - - - USART1 Baud Rate Register High Byte
(0xCC) UBRR1L USART1 Baud Rate Register Low Byte
(0xCB) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xCA) UCSR1C UMSEL11 UMSEL10 UPM11 UPM10 USBS1 UCSZ11 UCSZ10 UCPOL1
(0xC9) UCSR1B RXCIE1 TXCIE1 UDRIE1 RXEN1 TXEN1 UCSZ12 RXB81 TXB81
(0xC8) UCSR1A RXC1 TXC1 UDRE1 FE1 DOR1 PE1 U2X1 MPCM1
(0xC7) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xC6) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xC5) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xC4) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xC3) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xC2) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xC1) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xC0) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xBF) Reserved - - - - - - - -420
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
(0xBE) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xBD) TWAMR TWAM6 TWAM5 TWAM4 TWAM3 TWAM2 TWAM1 TWAM0 -
(0xBC) TWCR TWINT TWEA TWSTA TWSTO TWWC TWEN - TWIE
(0xBB) TWDR 2-wire Serial Interface Data Register
(0xBA) TWAR TWA6 TWA5 TWA4 TWA3 TWA2 TWA1 TWA0 TWGCE
(0xB9) TWSR TWS7 TWS6 TWS5 TWS4 TWS3 - TWPS1 TWPS0
(0xB8) TWBR 2-wire Serial Interface Bit Rate Register
(0xB7) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xB6) ASSR - EXCLK AS2 TCN2UB OCR2AUB OCR2BUB TCR2AUB TCR2BUB
(0xB5) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xB4) OCR2B Timer/Counter2 Output Compare Register B
(0xB3) OCR2A Timer/Counter2 Output Compare Register A
(0xB2) TCNT2 Timer/Counter2 (8 Bit)
(0xB1) TCCR2B FOC2A FOC2B - - WGM22 CS22 CS21 CS20
(0xB0) TCCR2A COM2A1 COM2A0 COM2B1 COM2B0 - - WGM21 WGM20
(0xAF) UPDATX PDAT7:0
(0xAE) UPIENX FLERRE NAKEDE - PERRE TXSTPE TXOUTE RXSTALLE RXINE
(0xAD) UPCFG2X INTFRQ7:0
(0xAC) UPSTAX CFGOK OVERFI UNDERFI DTSEQ1:0 NBUSYBK1:0
(0xAB) UPCFG1X PSIZE2:0 PBK1:0 ALLOC
(0xAA) UPCFG0X PTYPE1:0 PTOKEN1:0 PEPNUM3:0
(0xA9) UPCONX PFREEZE INMODE RSTDT PEN
(0xA8) UPRST PRST6:0
(0xA7) UPNUM PNUM2:0
(0xA6) UPINTX FIFOCON NAKEDI RWAL PERRI TXSTPI TXOUTI RXSTALLI RXINI
(0xA5) UPINRQX INRQ7:0
(0xA4) UHFLEN FLEN7:0
(0xA3) UHFNUMH FNUM10:8
(0xA2) UHFNUML FNUM7:0
(0xA1) UHADDR HADD6:0
(0xA0) UHIEN HWUPE HSOFE RXRSME RSMEDE RSTE DDISCE DCONNE
(0x9F) UHINT HWUPI HSOFI RXRSMI RSMEDI RSTI DDISCI DCONNI
(0x9E) UHCON RESUME RESET SOFEN
(0x9D) OCR3CH Timer/Counter3 - Output Compare Register C High Byte
(0x9C) OCR3CL Timer/Counter3 - Output Compare Register C Low Byte
(0x9B) OCR3BH Timer/Counter3 - Output Compare Register B High Byte
(0x9A) OCR3BL Timer/Counter3 - Output Compare Register B Low Byte
(0x99) OCR3AH Timer/Counter3 - Output Compare Register A High Byte
(0x98) OCR3AL Timer/Counter3 - Output Compare Register A Low Byte
(0x97) ICR3H Timer/Counter3 - Input Capture Register High Byte
(0x96) ICR3L Timer/Counter3 - Input Capture Register Low Byte
(0x95) TCNT3H Timer/Counter3 - Counter Register High Byte
(0x94) TCNT3L Timer/Counter3 - Counter Register Low Byte
(0x93) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x92) TCCR3C FOC3A FOC3B FOC3C - - - - -
(0x91) TCCR3B ICNC3 ICES3 - WGM33 WGM32 CS32 CS31 CS30
(0x90) TCCR3A COM3A1 COM3A0 COM3B1 COM3B0 COM3C1 COM3C0 WGM31 WGM30
(0x8F) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x8E) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x8D) OCR1CH Timer/Counter1 - Output Compare Register C High Byte
(0x8C) OCR1CL Timer/Counter1 - Output Compare Register C Low Byte
(0x8B) OCR1BH Timer/Counter1 - Output Compare Register B High Byte
(0x8A) OCR1BL Timer/Counter1 - Output Compare Register B Low Byte
(0x89) OCR1AH Timer/Counter1 - Output Compare Register A High Byte
(0x88) OCR1AL Timer/Counter1 - Output Compare Register A Low Byte
(0x87) ICR1H Timer/Counter1 - Input Capture Register High Byte
(0x86) ICR1L Timer/Counter1 - Input Capture Register Low Byte
(0x85) TCNT1H Timer/Counter1 - Counter Register High Byte
(0x84) TCNT1L Timer/Counter1 - Counter Register Low Byte
(0x83) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x82) TCCR1C FOC1A FOC1B FOC1C - - - - -
(0x81) TCCR1B ICNC1 ICES1 - WGM13 WGM12 CS12 CS11 CS10
(0x80) TCCR1A COM1A1 COM1A0 COM1B1 COM1B0 COM1C1 COM1C0 WGM11 WGM10
(0x7F) DIDR1 - - - - - - AIN1D AIN0D
(0x7E) DIDR0 ADC7D ADC6D ADC5D ADC4D ADC3D ADC2D ADC1D ADC0D
(0x7D) - - - - - - - - -
Address Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Page421
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
(0x7C) ADMUX REFS1 REFS0 ADLAR MUX4 MUX3 MUX2 MUX1 MUX0
(0x7B) ADCSRB ADHSM ACME - - - ADTS2 ADTS1 ADTS0
(0x7A) ADCSRA ADEN ADSC ADATE ADIF ADIE ADPS2 ADPS1 ADPS0
(0x79) ADCH ADC Data Register High byte
(0x78) ADCL ADC Data Register Low byte
(0x77) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x76) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x75) XMCRB XMBK - - - - XMM2 XMM1 XMM0
(0x74) XMCRA SRE SRL2 SRL1 SRL0 SRW11 SRW10 SRW01 SRW00
(0x73) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x72) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x71) TIMSK3 - - ICIE3 - OCIE3C OCIE3B OCIE3A TOIE3
(0x70) TIMSK2 - - - - - OCIE2B OCIE2A TOIE2
(0x6F) TIMSK1 - - ICIE1 - OCIE1C OCIE1B OCIE1A TOIE1
(0x6E) TIMSK0 - - - - - OCIE0B OCIE0A TOIE0
(0x6D) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x6C) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x6B) PCMSK0 PCINT7 PCINT6 PCINT5 PCINT4 PCINT3 PCINT2 PCINT1 PCINT0
(0x6A) EICRB ISC71 ISC70 ISC61 ISC60 ISC51 ISC50 ISC41 ISC40
(0x69) EICRA ISC31 ISC30 ISC21 ISC20 ISC11 ISC10 ISC01 ISC00
(0x68) PCICR - - - - - - - PCIE0
(0x67) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x66) OSCCAL Oscillator Calibration Register
(0x65) PRR1 PRUSB - - - PRTIM3 - - PRUSART1
(0x64) PRR0 PRTWI PRTIM2 PRTIM0 - PRTIM1 PRSPI - PRADC
(0x63) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x62) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x61) CLKPR CLKPCE - - - CLKPS3 CLKPS2 CLKPS1 CLKPS0
(0x60) WDTCSR WDIF WDIE WDP3 WDCE WDE WDP2 WDP1 WDP0
0x3F (0x5F) SREG I T H S V N Z C
0x3E (0x5E) SPH SP15 SP14 SP13 SP12 SP11 SP10 SP9 SP8
0x3D (0x5D) SPL SP7 SP6 SP5 SP4 SP3 SP2 SP1 SP0
0x3C (0x5C) Reserved - - - - - - - -
0x3B (0x5B) RAMPZ - - - - - - RAMPZ1 RAMPZ0
0x3A (0x5A) Reserved - - - - - - - -
0x39 (0x59) Reserved - - - - - - - -
0x38 (0x58) Reserved - - - - - - - -
0x37 (0x57) SPMCSR SPMIE RWWSB SIGRD RWWSRE BLBSET PGWRT PGERS SPMEN
0x36 (0x56) Reserved - - - - - - - -
0x35 (0x55) MCUCR JTD - - PUD - - IVSEL IVCE
0x34 (0x54) MCUSR - - - JTRF WDRF BORF EXTRF PORF
0x33 (0x53) SMCR - - - - SM2 SM1 SM0 SE
0x32 (0x52) Reserved - - - - - - - -
0x31 (0x51) OCDR/
MONDR
OCDR7 OCDR6 OCDR5 OCDR4 OCDR3 OCDR2 OCDR1 OCDR0
Monitor Data Register
0x30 (0x50) ACSR ACD ACBG ACO ACI ACIE ACIC ACIS1 ACIS0
0x2F (0x4F) Reserved - - - - - - - -
0x2E (0x4E) SPDR SPI Data Register
0x2D (0x4D) SPSR SPIF WCOL - - - - - SPI2X
0x2C (0x4C) SPCR SPIE SPE DORD MSTR CPOL CPHA SPR1 SPR0
0x2B (0x4B) GPIOR2 General Purpose I/O Register 2
0x2A (0x4A) GPIOR1 General Purpose I/O Register 1
0x29 (0x49) PLLCSR - - - PLLP2 PLLP1 PLLP0 PLLE PLOCK
0x28 (0x48) OCR0B Timer/Counter0 Output Compare Register B
0x27 (0x47) OCR0A Timer/Counter0 Output Compare Register A
0x26 (0x46) TCNT0 Timer/Counter0 (8 Bit)
0x25 (0x45) TCCR0B FOC0A FOC0B - - WGM02 CS02 CS01 CS00
0x24 (0x44) TCCR0A COM0A1 COM0A0 COM0B1 COM0B0 - - WGM01 WGM00
0x23 (0x43) GTCCR TSM - - - - - PSRASY PSRSYNC
0x22 (0x42) EEARH - - - - EEPROM Address Register High Byte
0x21 (0x41) EEARL EEPROM Address Register Low Byte
0x20 (0x40) EEDR EEPROM Data Register
0x1F (0x3F) EECR - - EEPM1 EEPM0 EERIE EEMPE EEPE EERE
0x1E (0x3E) GPIOR0 General Purpose I/O Register 0
0x1D (0x3D) EIMSK INT7 INT6 INT5 INT4 INT3 INT2 INT1 INT0
0x1C (0x3C) EIFR INTF7 INTF6 INTF5 INTF4 INTF3 INTF2 INTF1 INTF0
Address Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Page422
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Note: 1. For compatibility with future devices, reserved bits should be written to zero if accessed. Reserved I/O memory addresses
should never be written.
2. I/O registers within the address range $00 - $1F are directly bit-accessible using the SBI and CBI instructions. In these registers,
the value of single bits can be checked by using the SBIS and SBIC instructions.
3. Some of the status flags are cleared by writing a logical one to them. Note that the CBI and SBI instructions will operate on
all bits in the I/O register, writing a one back into any flag read as set, thus clearing the flag. The CBI and SBI instructions
work with registers 0x00 to 0x1F only.
4. When using the I/O specific commands IN and OUT, the I/O addresses $00 - $3F must be used. When addressing I/O registers
as data space using LD and ST instructions, $20 must be added to these addresses. The Atmel AT90USB64/128 is a
complex microcontroller with more peripheral units than can be supported within the 64 location reserved in Opcode for the
IN and OUT instructions. For the Extended I/O space from $60 - $1FF in SRAM, only the ST/STS/STD and LD/LDS/LDD
instructions can be used.
0x1B (0x3B) PCIFR - - - - - - - PCIF0
0x1A (0x3A) Reserved - - - - - - - -
0x19 (0x39) Reserved - - - - - - - -
0x18 (0x38) TIFR3 - - ICF3 - OCF3C OCF3B OCF3A TOV3
0x17 (0x37) TIFR2 - - - - - OCF2B OCF2A TOV2
0x16 (0x36) TIFR1 - - ICF1 - OCF1C OCF1B OCF1A TOV1
0x15 (0x35) TIFR0 - - - - - OCF0B OCF0A TOV0
0x14 (0x34) Reserved - - - - - - - -
0x13 (0x33) Reserved - - - - - - - -
0x12 (0x32) Reserved - - - - - - - -
0x11 (0x31) PORTF PORTF7 PORTF6 PORTF5 PORTF4 PORTF3 PORTF2 PORTF1 PORTF0
0x10 (0x30) DDRF DDF7 DDF6 DDF5 DDF4 DDF3 DDF2 DDF1 DDF0
0x0F (0x2F) PINF PINF7 PINF6 PINF5 PINF4 PINF3 PINF2 PINF1 PINF0
0x0E (0x2E) PORTE PORTE7 PORTE6 PORTE5 PORTE4 PORTE3 PORTE2 PORTE1 PORTE0
0x0D (0x2D) DDRE DDE7 DDE6 DDE5 DDE4 DDE3 DDE2 DDE1 DDE0
0x0C (0x2C) PINE PINE7 PINE6 PINE5 PINE4 PINE3 PINE2 PINE1 PINE0
0x0B (0x2B) PORTD PORTD7 PORTD6 PORTD5 PORTD4 PORTD3 PORTD2 PORTD1 PORTD0
0x0A (0x2A) DDRD DDD7 DDD6 DDD5 DDD4 DDD3 DDD2 DDD1 DDD0
0x09 (0x29) PIND PIND7 PIND6 PIND5 PIND4 PIND3 PIND2 PIND1 PIND0
0x08 (0x28) PORTC PORTC7 PORTC6 PORTC5 PORTC4 PORTC3 PORTC2 PORTC1 PORTC0
0x07 (0x27) DDRC DDC7 DDC6 DDC5 DDC4 DDC3 DDC2 DDC1 DDC0
0x06 (0x26) PINC PINC7 PINC6 PINC5 PINC4 PINC3 PINC2 PINC1 PINC0
0x05 (0x25) PORTB PORTB7 PORTB6 PORTB5 PORTB4 PORTB3 PORTB2 PORTB1 PORTB0
0x04 (0x24) DDRB DDB7 DDB6 DDB5 DDB4 DDB3 DDB2 DDB1 DDB0
0x03 (0x23) PINB PINB7 PINB6 PINB5 PINB4 PINB3 PINB2 PINB1 PINB0
0x02 (0x22) PORTA PORTA7 PORTA6 PORTA5 PORTA4 PORTA3 PORTA2 PORTA1 PORTA0
0x01 (0x21) DDRA DDA7 DDA6 DDA5 DDA4 DDA3 DDA2 DDA1 DDA0
0x00 (0x20) PINA PINA7 PINA6 PINA5 PINA4 PINA3 PINA2 PINA1 PINA0
Address Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Page423
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
34. Instruction set summary
Mnemonics Operands Description Operation Flags #Clocks
ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC INSTRUCTIONS
ADD Rd, Rr Add two Registers Rd ← Rd + Rr Z,C,N,V,H 1
ADC Rd, Rr Add with Carry two Registers Rd ← Rd + Rr + C Z,C,N,V,H 1
ADIW Rdl,K Add Immediate to Word Rdh:Rdl ← Rdh:Rdl + K Z,C,N,V,S 2
SUB Rd, Rr Subtract two Registers Rd ← Rd - Rr Z,C,N,V,H 1
SUBI Rd, K Subtract Constant from Register Rd ← Rd - K Z,C,N,V,H 1
SBC Rd, Rr Subtract with Carry two Registers Rd ← Rd - Rr - C Z,C,N,V,H 1
SBCI Rd, K Subtract with Carry Constant from Reg. Rd ← Rd - K - C Z,C,N,V,H 1
SBIW Rdl,K Subtract Immediate from Word Rdh:Rdl ← Rdh:Rdl - K Z,C,N,V,S 2
AND Rd, Rr Logical AND Registers Rd ← Rd • Rr Z,N,V 1
ANDI Rd, K Logical AND Register and Constant Rd ← Rd • K Z,N,V 1
OR Rd, Rr Logical OR Registers Rd ← Rd v Rr Z,N,V 1
ORI Rd, K Logical OR Register and Constant Rd ← Rd v K Z,N,V 1
EOR Rd, Rr Exclusive OR Registers Rd ← Rd ⊕ Rr Z,N,V 1
COM Rd One’s Complement Rd ← 0xFF − Rd Z,C,N,V 1
NEG Rd Two’s Complement Rd ← 0x00 − Rd Z,C,N,V,H 1
SBR Rd,K Set Bit(s) in Register Rd ← Rd v K Z,N,V 1
CBR Rd,K Clear Bit(s) in Register Rd ← Rd • (0xFF - K) Z,N,V 1
INC Rd Increment Rd ← Rd + 1 Z,N,V 1
DEC Rd Decrement Rd ← Rd − 1 Z,N,V 1
TST Rd Test for Zero or Minus Rd ← Rd • Rd Z,N,V 1
CLR Rd Clear Register Rd ← Rd ⊕ Rd Z,N,V 1
SER Rd Set Register Rd ← 0xFF None 1
MUL Rd, Rr Multiply Unsigned R1:R0 ← Rd x Rr Z,C 2
MULS Rd, Rr Multiply Signed R1:R0 ← Rd x Rr Z,C 2
MULSU Rd, Rr Multiply Signed with Unsigned R1:R0 ← Rd x Rr Z,C 2
FMUL Rd, Rr Fractional Multiply Unsigned R1:R0 ← (Rd x Rr) << 1 Z,C 2
FMULS Rd, Rr Fractional Multiply Signed R1:R0 ← (Rd x Rr) << 1 Z,C 2
FMULSU Rd, Rr Fractional Multiply Signed with Unsigned R1:R0 ← (Rd x Rr) << 1 Z,C 2
BRANCH INSTRUCTIONS
RJMP k Relative Jump PC ← PC + k + 1 None 2
IJMP Indirect Jump to (Z) PC ← Z None 2
EIJMP Extended Indirect Jump to (Z) PC ←(EIND:Z) None 2
JMP k Direct Jump PC ← k None 3
RCALL k Relative Subroutine Call PC ← PC + k + 1 None 4
ICALL Indirect Call to (Z) PC ← Z None 4
EICALL Extended Indirect Call to (Z) PC ←(EIND:Z) None 4
CALL k Direct Subroutine Call PC ← k None 5
RET Subroutine Return PC ← STACK None 5
RETI Interrupt Return PC ← STACK I 5
CPSE Rd,Rr Compare, Skip if Equal if (Rd = Rr) PC ← PC + 2 or 3 None 1/2/3
CP Rd,Rr Compare Rd − Rr Z, N,V,C,H 1
CPC Rd,Rr Compare with Carry Rd − Rr − C Z, N,V,C,H 1
CPI Rd,K Compare Register with Immediate Rd − K Z, N,V,C,H 1
SBRC Rr, b Skip if Bit in Register Cleared if (Rr(b)=0) PC ← PC + 2 or 3 None 1/2/3
SBRS Rr, b Skip if Bit in Register is Set if (Rr(b)=1) PC ← PC + 2 or 3 None 1/2/3
SBIC P, b Skip if Bit in I/O Register Cleared if (P(b)=0) PC ← PC + 2 or 3 None 1/2/3
SBIS P, b Skip if Bit in I/O Register is Set if (P(b)=1) PC ← PC + 2 or 3 None 1/2/3
BRBS s, k Branch if Status Flag Set if (SREG(s) = 1) then PC←PC+k + 1 None 1/2
BRBC s, k Branch if Status Flag Cleared if (SREG(s) = 0) then PC←PC+k + 1 None 1/2
BREQ k Branch if Equal if (Z = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRNE k Branch if Not Equal if (Z = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRCS k Branch if Carry Set if (C = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRCC k Branch if Carry Cleared if (C = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRSH k Branch if Same or Higher if (C = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRLO k Branch if Lower if (C = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRMI k Branch if Minus if (N = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRPL k Branch if Plus if (N = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRGE k Branch if Greater or Equal, Signed if (N ⊕ V= 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRLT k Branch if Less Than Zero, Signed if (N ⊕ V= 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRHS k Branch if Half Carry Flag Set if (H = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRHC k Branch if Half Carry Flag Cleared if (H = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRTS k Branch if T Flag Set if (T = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRTC k Branch if T Flag Cleared if (T = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRVS k Branch if Overflow Flag is Set if (V = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2424
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
BRVC k Branch if Overflow Flag is Cleared if (V = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRIE k Branch if Interrupt Enabled if ( I = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRID k Branch if Interrupt Disabled if ( I = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BIT AND BIT-TEST INSTRUCTIONS
SBI P,b Set Bit in I/O Register I/O(P,b) ← 1 None 2
CBI P,b Clear Bit in I/O Register I/O(P,b) ← 0 None 2
LSL Rd Logical Shift Left Rd(n+1) ← Rd(n), Rd(0) ← 0 Z,C,N,V 1
LSR Rd Logical Shift Right Rd(n) ← Rd(n+1), Rd(7) ← 0 Z,C,N,V 1
ROL Rd Rotate Left Through Carry Rd(0)←C,Rd(n+1)← Rd(n),C←Rd(7) Z,C,N,V 1
ROR Rd Rotate Right Through Carry Rd(7)←C,Rd(n)← Rd(n+1),C←Rd(0) Z,C,N,V 1
ASR Rd Arithmetic Shift Right Rd(n) ← Rd(n+1), n=0..6 Z,C,N,V 1
SWAP Rd Swap Nibbles Rd(3..0)←Rd(7..4),Rd(7..4)←Rd(3..0) None 1
BSET s Flag Set SREG(s) ← 1 SREG(s) 1
BCLR s Flag Clear SREG(s) ← 0 SREG(s) 1
BST Rr, b Bit Store from Register to T T ← Rr(b) T 1
BLD Rd, b Bit load from T to Register Rd(b) ← T None 1
SEC Set Carry C ← 1 C1
CLC Clear Carry C ← 0 C 1
SEN Set Negative Flag N ← 1 N1
CLN Clear Negative Flag N ← 0 N 1
SEZ Set Zero Flag Z ← 1 Z1
CLZ Clear Zero Flag Z ← 0 Z 1
SEI Global Interrupt Enable I ← 1 I1
CLI Global Interrupt Disable I ← 0 I 1
SES Set Signed Test Flag S ← 1 S1
CLS Clear Signed Test Flag S ← 0 S 1
SEV Set Twos Complement Overflow. V ← 1 V1
CLV Clear Twos Complement Overflow V ← 0 V 1
SET Set T in SREG T ← 1 T1
CLT Clear T in SREG T ← 0 T 1
SEH Set Half Carry Flag in SREG H ← 1 H1
CLH Clear Half Carry Flag in SREG H ← 0 H 1
DATA TRANSFER INSTRUCTIONS
MOV Rd, Rr Move Between Registers Rd ← Rr None 1
MOVW Rd, Rr Copy Register Word Rd+1:Rd ← Rr+1:Rr None 1
LDI Rd, K Load Immediate Rd ← K None 1
LD Rd, X Load Indirect Rd ← (X) None 2
LD Rd, X+ Load Indirect and Post-Inc. Rd ← (X), X ← X + 1 None 2
LD Rd, - X Load Indirect and Pre-Dec. X ← X - 1, Rd ← (X) None 2
LD Rd, Y Load Indirect Rd ← (Y) None 2
LD Rd, Y+ Load Indirect and Post-Inc. Rd ← (Y), Y ← Y + 1 None 2
LD Rd, - Y Load Indirect and Pre-Dec. Y ← Y - 1, Rd ← (Y) None 2
LDD Rd,Y+q Load Indirect with Displacement Rd ← (Y + q) None 2
LD Rd, Z Load Indirect Rd ← (Z) None 2
LD Rd, Z+ Load Indirect and Post-Inc. Rd ← (Z), Z ← Z+1 None 2
LD Rd, -Z Load Indirect and Pre-Dec. Z ← Z - 1, Rd ← (Z) None 2
LDD Rd, Z+q Load Indirect with Displacement Rd ← (Z + q) None 2
LDS Rd, k Load Direct from SRAM Rd ← (k) None 2
ST X, Rr Store Indirect (X) ← Rr None 2
ST X+, Rr Store Indirect and Post-Inc. (X) ← Rr, X ← X + 1 None 2
ST - X, Rr Store Indirect and Pre-Dec. X ← X - 1, (X) ← Rr None 2
ST Y, Rr Store Indirect (Y) ← Rr None 2
ST Y+, Rr Store Indirect and Post-Inc. (Y) ← Rr, Y ← Y + 1 None 2
ST - Y, Rr Store Indirect and Pre-Dec. Y ← Y - 1, (Y) ← Rr None 2
STD Y+q,Rr Store Indirect with Displacement (Y + q) ← Rr None 2
ST Z, Rr Store Indirect (Z) ← Rr None 2
ST Z+, Rr Store Indirect and Post-Inc. (Z) ← Rr, Z ← Z + 1 None 2
ST -Z, Rr Store Indirect and Pre-Dec. Z ← Z - 1, (Z) ← Rr None 2
STD Z+q,Rr Store Indirect with Displacement (Z + q) ← Rr None 2
STS k, Rr Store Direct to SRAM (k) ← Rr None 2
LPM Load Program Memory R0 ← (Z) None 3
LPM Rd, Z Load Program Memory Rd ← (Z) None 3
LPM Rd, Z+ Load Program Memory and Post-Inc Rd ← (Z), Z ← Z+1 None 3
ELPM Extended Load Program Memory R0 ← (RAMPZ:Z) None 3
ELPM Rd, Z Extended Load Program Memory Rd ← (Z) None 3
ELPM Rd, Z+ Extended Load Program Memory Rd ← (RAMPZ:Z), RAMPZ:Z ←RAMPZ:Z+1 None 3
Mnemonics Operands Description Operation Flags #Clocks425
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
SPM Store Program Memory (Z) ← R1:R0 None -
IN Rd, P In Port Rd ← P None 1
OUT P, Rr Out Port P ← Rr None 1
PUSH Rr Push Register on Stack STACK ← Rr None 2
POP Rd Pop Register from Stack Rd ← STACK None 2
MCU CONTROL INSTRUCTIONS
NOP No Operation None 1
SLEEP Sleep (see specific descr. for Sleep function) None 1
WDR Watchdog Reset (see specific descr. for WDR/timer) None 1
BREAK Break For On-chip Debug Only None N/A
Mnemonics Operands Description Operation Flags #Clocks426
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
35. Ordering information
35.1 Atmel AT90USB646
Notes: 1. This device can also be supplied in wafer form. Please contact your local Atmel sales office for detailed ordering information
and minimum quantities.
2. Pb-free packaging complies to the European directive for Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS directive). Also
Halide free and fully green.
3. See “Maximum speed vs. VCC” on page 392.
Speed [MHz] Power supply [V] Ordering code (2) USB interface Package (1) Operating range
16 (3) 2.7-5.5
AT90USB646-AU
AT90USB646-MU Device
MD
PS
Industrial
(-40° to +85°C)
MD
64 - lead, 14 × 14mm body size, 1.0mm body thickness
0.8mm lead pitch, thin profile plastic quad flat package (TQFP)
PS
64 - lead, 9 × 9mm body size, 0.50mm pitch
Quad flat no lead package (QFN)427
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
35.2 Atmel AT90USB647
Notes: 1. This device can also be supplied in wafer form. Please contact your local Atmel sales office for detailed ordering information
and minimum quantities.
2. Pb-free packaging complies to the European directive for Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS directive). Also
Halide free and fully green.
3. See “Maximum speed vs. VCC” on page 392.
Speed [MHz] Power supply [V] Ordering code (2) USB interface Package (1) Operating range
16 (3) 2.7-5.5
AT90USB647-AU
AT90USB647-MU USB OTG MD
PS
Industrial
(-40° to +85°C)
MD
64 - lead, 14 × 14mm body size, 1.0mm body thickness
0.8mm lead pitch, thin profile plastic quad flat package (TQFP)
PS
64 - lead, 9 × 9mm body size, 0.50mm pitch
Quad flat no lead package (QFN)428
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
35.3 Atmel AT90USB1286
Notes: 1. This device can also be supplied in wafer form. Please contact your local Atmel sales office for detailed ordering information
and minimum quantities.
2. Pb-free packaging complies to the European directive for Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS directive). Also
Halide free and fully green.
3. See “Maximum speed vs. VCC” on page 392.
Speed [MHz] Power supply [V] Ordering code (2) USB interface Package (1) Operating range
16 (3) 2.7-5.5
AT90USB1286-AU
AT90USB1286-MU Device
MD
PS
Industrial
(-40° to +85°C)
MD
64 - lead, 14 × 14mm body size, 1.0mm body thickness
0.8mm lead pitch, thin profile plastic quad flat package (TQFP)
PS
64 - lead, 9 × 9mm body size, 0.50mm pitch
Quad flat no lead package (QFN)429
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
35.4 Atmel AT90USB1287
Notes: 1. This device can also be supplied in wafer form. Please contact your local Atmel sales office for detailed ordering information
and minimum quantities.
2. Pb-free packaging complies to the European directive for Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS directive). Also
Halide free and fully green.
3. See “Maximum speed vs. VCC” on page 392.
Speed [MHz] Power supply [V] Ordering code (2) USB interface Package (1) Operating range
16 (3) 2.7-5.5
AT90USB1287-AU
AT90USB1287-MU Host (OTG) MD
PS
Industrial
(-40° to +85°C)
MD
64 - lead, 14 × 14mm body size, 1.0mm body thickness
0.8mm lead pitch, thin profile plastic quad flat package (TQFP)
PS
64 - lead, 9 × 9mm body size, 0.50mm pitch
Quad flat no lead package (QFN)430
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
36. Packaging information
36.1 TQFP64431
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128432
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
36.2 QFN64433
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128434
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
37. Errata
37.1 Atmel AT90USB1287/6 errata
37.1.1 AT90USB1287/6 errata history
Notes: 1. A blank or any alphanumeric string.
37.1.2 AT90USB1287/6 first release
• Incorrect CPU behavior for VBUSTI and IDTI interrupts routines
• USB Eye Diagram violation in low-speed mode
• Transient perturbation in USB suspend mode generates over consumption
• VBUS Session valid threshold voltage
• USB signal rate
• VBUS residual level
• Spike on TWI pins when TWI is enabled
• High current consumption in sleep mode
• Async timer interrupt wake up from sleep generate multiple interrupts
9. Incorrect CPU behavior for VBUSTI and IDTI interrupts routines
The CPU core may incorrectly execute the interrupt vector related to the VBUSTI and IDTI
interrupt flags.
Problem fix/workaround
Do not enable these interrupts, firmware must process these USB events by polling VBUSTI
and IDTI flags.
8. USB Eye Diagram violation in low-speed mode
The low to high transition of D- violates the USB eye diagram specification when transmitting
with low-speed signaling.
Problem fix/workaround
None.
7. Transient perturbation in USB suspend mode generates overconsumption
In device mode and when the USB is suspended, transient perturbation received on the
USB lines generates a wake up state. However the idle state following the perturbation does
Silicon Release 90USB1286-16MU 90USB1287-16AU 90USB1287-16MU
First Release Date Code up to 0648 Date Code up to 0714
and lots 0735 6H2726 (1) Date Code up to 0701
Second Release Date Code from 0709 to 0801
except lots 0801 7H5103 (1)
from Date Code 0722 to 0806
except lots 0735 6H2726 (1)
Date Code from 0714 to 0810
except lots 0748 7H5103 (1)
Third Release Lots 0801 7H5103 (1) and
Date Code from 0814 Date Code from 0814 Lots 0748 7H5103 (1) and
Date Code from 0814
Fourth Release TBD TBD TBD435
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
not set the SUSPI bit anymore. The internal USB engine remains in suspend mode but the
USB differential receiver is still enabled and generates a typical 300µA extra-power consumption.
Detection of the suspend state after the transient perturbation should be
performed by software (instead of reading the SUSPI bit).
Problem fix/workaround
USB waiver allows bus powered devices to consume up to 2.5mA in suspend state.
6. VBUS session valid threshold voltage
The VSession valid threshold voltage is internally connected to VBus_Valid (4.4V approx.).
That causes the device to attach to the bus only when Vbus is greater than VBusValid
instead of V_Session Valid. Thus if VBUS is lower than 4.4V, the device is detached.
Problem fix/workaround
According to the USB power drop budget, this may require connecting the device toa root
hub or a self-powered hub.
5. UBS signal rate
The average USB signal rate may sometime be measured out of the USB specifications
(12MHz ±30kHz) with short frames. When measured on a long period, the average signal
rate value complies with the specifications. This bit rate deviation does not generates communication
or functional errors.
Problem fix/workaround
None.
4. VBUS residual level
In USB device and host mode, once a 5V level has been detected to the VBUS pad, a residual
level (about 3V) can be measured on the VBUS pin.
Problem fix/workaround
None.
3. Spike on TWI pins when TWI is enabled
100ns negative spike occurs on SDA and SCL pins when TWI is enabled.
Problem fix/workaround
No known workaround, enable Atmel AT90USB64/128 TWI first versus the others nodes of
the TWI network.
2. High current consumption in sleep mode
If a pending interrupt cannot wake the part up from the selected mode, the current consumption
will increase during sleep when executing the SLEEP instruction directly after a SEI
instruction.
Problem fix/workaround
Before entering sleep, interrupts not used to wake up the part from the sleep mode should
be disabled.436
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
1. Asynchronous timer interrupt wake up from sleep generates multiple interrupts
If the CPU core is in sleep and wakes-up from an asynchronous timer interrupt and then go
back in sleep again it may wake up multiple times.
Problem fix/workaround
A software workaround is to wait with performing the sleep instruction until
TCNT2>OCR2+1.437
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
37.1.3 Atmel AT90USB1287/6 second release
• Incorrect CPU behavior for VBUSTI and IDTI interrupts routines
• USB Eye Diagram violation in low-speed mode
• Transient perturbation in USB suspend mode generates over consumption
• VBUS Session valid threshold voltage
• Spike on TWI pins when TWI is enabled
• High current consumption in sleep mode
• Async timer interrupt wake up from sleep generate multiple interrupts
7. Incorrect CPU behavior for VBUSTI and IDTI interrupts routines
The CPU core may incorrectly execute the interrupt vector related to the VBUSTI and IDTI
interrupt flags.
Problem fix/workaround
Do not enable these interrupts, firmware must process these USB events by polling VBUSTI
and IDTI flags.
6. USB Eye Diagram violation in low-speed mode
The low to high transition of D- violates the USB eye diagram specification when transmitting
with low-speed signaling.
Problem fix/workaround
None.
5. Transient perturbation in USB suspend mode generates overconsumption
In device mode and when the USB is suspended, transient perturbation received on the
USB lines generates a wake up state. However the idle state following the perturbation does
not set the SUSPI bit anymore. The internal USB engine remains in suspend mode but the
USB differential receiver is still enabled and generates a typical 300µA extra-power consumption.
Detection of the suspend state after the transient perturbation should be
performed by software (instead of reading the SUSPI bit).
Problem fix/workaround
USB waiver allows bus powered devices to consume up to 2.5mA in suspend state.
4. VBUS session valid threshold voltage
The VSession valid threshold voltage is internally connected to VBus_Valid (4.4V approx.).
That causes the device to attach to the bus only when Vbus is greater than VBusValid
instead of V_Session Valid. Thus if VBUS is lower than 4.4V, the device is detached.
Problem fix/workaround
According to the USB power drop budget, this may require connecting the device toa root
hub or a self-powered hub.
3. Spike on TWI pins when TWI is enabled
100ns negative spike occurs on SDA and SCL pins when TWI is enabled.438
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Problem fix/workaround
No known workaround, enable Atmel AT90USB64/128 TWI first versus the others nodes of
the TWI network.
2. High current consumption in sleep mode
If a pending interrupt cannot wake the part up from the selected mode, the current consumption
will increase during sleep when executing the SLEEP instruction directly after a SEI
instruction.
Problem fix/workaround
Before entering sleep, interrupts not used to wake up the part from the sleep mode should
be disabled.
1. Asynchronous timer interrupt wake up from sleep generates multiple interrupts
If the CPU core is in sleep and wakes-up from an asynchronous timer interrupt and then go
back in sleep again it may wake up multiple times.
Problem fix/workaround
A software workaround is to wait with performing the sleep instruction until
TCNT2>OCR2+1.439
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
37.1.4 Atmel AT90USB1287/6 Third Release
• Incorrect CPU behavior for VBUSTI and IDTI interrupts routines
• Transient perturbation in USB suspend mode generates over consumption
• Spike on TWI pins when TWI is enabled
• High current consumption in sleep mode
• Async timer interrupt wake up from sleep generate multiple interrupts
5. Incorrect CPU behavior for VBUSTI and IDTI interrupts routines
The CPU core may incorrectly execute the interrupt vector related to the VBUSTI and IDTI
interrupt flags.
Problem fix/workaround
Do not enable these interrupts, firmware must process these USB events by polling VBUSTI
and IDTI flags.
4. Transient perturbation in USB suspend mode generates overconsumption
In device mode and when the USB is suspended, transient perturbation received on the
USB lines generates a wake up state. However the idle state following the perturbation does
not set the SUSPI bit. The internal USB engine remains in suspend mode but the USB differential
receiver is still enabled and generates a typical 300µA extra-power consumption.
Detection of the suspend state after the transient perturbation should be performed by software
(instead of reading the SUSPI bit).
Problem fix/workaround
USB waiver allows bus powered devices to consume up to 2.5mA in suspend state.
3. Spike on TWI pins when TWI is enabled
100ns negative spike occurs on SDA and SCL pins when TWI is enabled.
Problem fix/workaround
No known workaround, enable AT90USB64/128 TWI first, before the others nodes of the
TWI network.
2. High current consumption in sleep mode
If a pending interrupt cannot wake the part up from the selected mode, the current consumption
will increase during sleep when executing the SLEEP instruction directly after a SEI
instruction.
Problem fix/workaround
Before entering sleep, interrupts not used to wake up the part from sleep mode should be
disabled.
1. Asynchronous timer interrupt wake up from sleep generates multiple interrupts
If the CPU core is in sleep mode and wakes-up from an asynchronous timer interrupt and
then goes back into sleep mode, it may wake up multiple times.440
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Problem fix/workaround
A software workaround is to wait before performing the sleep instruction: until
TCNT2>OCR2+1.441
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
37.1.5 Atmel AT90USB1287/6 Fourth Release
• Transient perturbation in USB suspend mode generates over consumption
• Spike on TWI pins when TWI is enabled
• High current consumption in sleep mode
• Async timer interrupt wake up from sleep generate multiple interrupts
4. Transient perturbation in USB suspend mode generates overconsumption
In device mode and when the USB is suspended, transient perturbation received on the
USB lines generates a wake up state. However the idle state following the perturbation does
not set the SUSPI bit. The internal USB engine remains in suspend mode but the USB differential
receiver is still enabled and generates a typical 300µA extra-power consumption.
Detection of the suspend state after the transient perturbation should be performed by software
(instead of reading the SUSPI bit).
Problem fix/workaround
USB waiver allows bus powered devices to consume up to 2.5mA in suspend state.
3. Spike on TWI pins when TWI is enabled
100ns negative spike occurs on SDA and SCL pins when TWI is enabled.
Problem fix/workaround
No known workaround, enable Atmel AT90USB64/128 TWI first, before the others nodes of
the TWI network.
2. High current consumption in sleep mode
If a pending interrupt cannot wake the part up from the selected mode, the current consumption
will increase during sleep when executing the SLEEP instruction directly after a SEI
instruction.
Problem fix/workaround
Before entering sleep, interrupts not used to wake up the part from sleep mode should be
disabled.
1. Asynchronous timer interrupt wake up from sleep generates multiple interrupts
If the CPU core is in sleep mode and wakes-up from an asynchronous timer interrupt and
then goes back into sleep mode, it may wake up multiple times.
Problem fix/workaround
A software workaround is to wait before performing the sleep instruction: until
TCNT2>OCR2+1.442
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
37.2 Atmel AT90USB646/7 errata
37.2.1 AT90USB646/7 errata history TBD
Note ‘*’ means a blank or any alphanumeric string.
37.2.2 AT90USB646/7 first release.
• Incorrect interrupt routine execution for VBUSTI, IDTI interrupts flags
• USB Eye Diagram violation in low-speed mode
• Transient perturbation in USB suspend mode generates over consumption
• Spike on TWI pins when TWI is enabled
• High current consumption in sleep mode
• Async timer interrupt wake up from sleep generate multiple interrupts
6. Incorrect CPU behavior for VBUSTI and IDTI interrupts routines
The CPU core may incorrectly execute the interrupt vector related to the VBUSTI and IDTI
interrupt flags.
Problem fix/workaround
Do not enable these interrupts, firmware must process these USB events by polling VBUSTI
and IDTI flags.
5. USB Eye Diagram violation in low-speed mode
The low to high transition of D- violates the USB eye diagram specification when transmitting
with low-speed signaling.
Problem fix/workaround
None.
4. Transient perturbation in USB suspend mode generates overconsumption
In device mode and when the USB is suspended, transient perturbation received on the
USB lines generates a wake up state. However the idle state following the perturbation does
not set the SUSPI bit anymore. The internal USB engine remains in suspend mode but the
USB differential receiver is still enabled and generates a typical 300µA extra-power consumption.
Detection of the suspend state after the transient perturbation should be
performed by software (instead of reading the SUSPI bit).
Problem fix/workaround
USB waiver allows bus powered devices to consume up to 2.5mA in suspend state.
3. Spike on TWI pins when TWI is enabled
100ns negative spike occurs on SDA and SCL pins when TWI is enabled.
Silicon Release 90USB646-16MU 90USB647-16AU 90USB647-16MU
First Release
Second Release443
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
Problem fix/workaround
No known workaround, enable Atmel AT90USB64/128 TWI first versus the others nodes of
the TWI network.
2. High current consumption in sleep mode
If a pending interrupt cannot wake the part up from the selected mode, the current consumption
will increase during sleep when executing the SLEEP instruction directly after a SEI
instruction.
Problem fix/workaround
Before entering sleep, interrupts not used to wake up the part from the sleep mode should
be disabled.
1. Asynchronous timer interrupt wake up from sleep generates multiple interrupts
If the CPU core is in sleep and wakes-up from an asynchronous timer interrupt and then go
back in sleep mode again it may wake up several times.
Problem fix/workaround
A software workaround is to wait with performing the sleep instruction until
TCNT2>OCR2+1.444
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
37.2.3 Atmel AT90USB646/7 Second Release.
• USB Eye Diagram violation in low-speed mode
• Transient perturbation in USB suspend mode generates over consumption
• Spike on TWI pins when TWI is enabled
• High current consumption in sleep mode
• Async timer interrupt wake up from sleep generate multiple interrupts
5. USB Eye Diagram violation in low-speed mode
The low to high transition of D- violates the USB eye diagram specification when transmitting
with low-speed signaling.
Problem fix/workaround
None.
4. Transient perturbation in USB suspend mode generates overconsumption
In device mode and when the USB is suspended, transient perturbation received on the
USB lines generates a wake up state. However the idle state following the perturbation does
not set the SUSPI bit anymore. The internal USB engine remains in suspend mode but the
USB differential receiver is still enabled and generates a typical 300µA extra-power consumption.
Detection of the suspend state after the transient perturbation should be
performed by software (instead of reading the SUSPI bit).
Problem fix/workaround
USB waiver allows bus powered devices to consume up to 2.5mA in suspend state.
3. Spike on TWI pins when TWI is enabled
100ns negative spike occurs on SDA and SCL pins when TWI is enabled.
Problem fix/workaround
No known workaround, enable Atmel AT90USB64/128 TWI first versus the others nodes of
the TWI network.
2. High current consumption in sleep mode
If a pending interrupt cannot wake the part up from the selected mode, the current consumption
will increase during sleep when executing the SLEEP instruction directly after a SEI
instruction.
Problem fix/workaround
Before entering sleep, interrupts not used to wake up the part from the sleep mode should
be disabled.
1. Asynchronous timer interrupt wake up from sleep generates multiple interrupts
If the CPU core is in sleep and wakes-up from an asynchronous timer interrupt and then go
back in sleep mode again it may wake up several times.
Problem fix/workaround
A software workaround is to wait with performing the sleep instruction until
TCNT2>OCR2+1.445
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
38. Datasheet revision history for Atmel AT90USB64/128
Please note that the referring page numbers in this section are referred to this document. The
referring revision in this section are referring to the document revision.
38.1 Changes from 7593A to 7593B
1. Changed default configuration for fuse bytes and security byte.
2. Suppression of timer 4,5 registers which does not exist.
3. Updated typical application schematics in USB section
38.2 Changes from 7593B to 7593C
1. Update to package drawings, MQFP64 and TQFP64.
38.3 Changes from 7593C to 7593D
1. For further product compatibility, changed USB PLL possible prescaler configurations.
Only 8MHz and 16MHz crystal frequencies allows USB operation (see Table 7-11 on
page 50).
38.4 Changes from 7593D to 7593E
1. Updated PLL Prescaler table: configuration words are different between AT90USB64x
and AT90USB128x to enable the PLL with a 16MHz source.
2. Cleaned up some bits from USB registers, and updated information about OTG timers,
remote wake-up, reset and connection timings.
3. Updated clock distribution tree diagram (USB prescaler source and configuration
register).
4. Cleaned up register summary.
5. Suppressed PCINT23:8 that do not exist from External Interrupts.
6. Updated Electrical Characteristics.
7. Added Typical Characteristics.
8. Update Errata section.
38.5 Changes from 7593E to 7593F
1. Removed ’Preliminary’ from document status.
2. Clarification in Stand by mode regarding USB.
38.6 Changes from 7593F to 7593G
1. Updated Errata section.
38.7 Changes from 7593G to 7593H
1. Added Signature information for 64K devices.
2. Fixed figure for typical bus powered application
3. Added min/max values for BOD levels
4. Added ATmega32U6 product
5. Update Errata section
6. Modified descriptions for HWUPE and WAKEUPE interrupts enable (these interrupts
should be enabled only to wake up the CPU core from power down mode).446
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64/128
7. Added description to access unique serial number located in Signature Row see
“Reading the Signature Row from software” on page 354.
38.8 Changes from 7593H to 7593I
1. Updated Table 9-2 in “Brown-out detection” on page 60. Unused BOD levels removed.
38.9 Changes from 7593I to 7593J
1. Updated Table 9-2 in “Brown-out detection” on page 60. BOD level 100 removed.
2. Updated “Ordering information” on page 426.
3. Removed ATmega32U6 errata section.
38.10 Changes from 7593J to 7593K
1. Corrected Figure 6-7 on page 34, Figure 6-8 on page 34 and Figure 6-9 on page 35.
2. Corrected ordering information for Section 35.3 ”Atmel AT90USB1286” on page 428,
Section 35.4 ”Atmel AT90USB1287” on page 429 andSection 35.2 ”Atmel
AT90USB647” on page 427.
3. Removed the ATmega32U6 device and updated the datasheet accordingly.
4. Updated Assembly Code Example in “Watchdog reset” on page 61.
38.11 Changes from 7593K to 7593L
1. Updated the “Ordering information” on page 426. Changed the speed from 20MHz to
16MHz.
2. Replaced ATmegaAT90USBxxxx by AT90USBxxxx through the datasheet.
3. Updated the first paragraph of “Overview” on page 307. Port A replaced by Port F.
4. Updated ADC equation in “ADC conversion result” on page 318. The equation has
1024 instead of 1023.
5. Created “Packaging Information” chapter.
6. Replaced the “QFN64” Packaging by an updated QFN64 Packaging drawing.
7. Updated “Errata” on page 434. AT90USB1286/7 has a fourth release, while
AT90USB646/7 updated with a second release.
8. In Section “Overview” on page 307, “Port A” has been replaced by “Port F” in the first
section.
9. In Section “Atmel AT90USB647” on page 427 the USB interface has been changed to
USB OTG.
10. In Section “Atmel AT90USB1286” on page 428 the USB interface has been changed to
Device.
11. In Section “Atmel AT90USB1287” on page 429 the USB interface has been changed to
Host OTG.
12. General update according to new template.i
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64X/128X
Table of contents
Features ..................................................................................................... 1
1 Pin configurations ................................................................................... 3
2 Overview ................................................................................................... 5
2.1 Block diagram ..........................................................................................................6
2.2 Pin descriptions .......................................................................................................8
3 Resources ............................................................................................... 10
4 About code examples ............................................................................ 10
5 AVR CPU core ........................................................................................ 11
5.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................11
5.2 Architectural overview ...........................................................................................11
5.3 ALU – Arithmetic Logic Unit ..................................................................................12
5.4 Status register .......................................................................................................13
5.5 General purpose register file .................................................................................14
5.6 Stack pointer .........................................................................................................15
5.7 Instruction execution timing ...................................................................................16
5.8 Reset and interrupt handling .................................................................................17
6 Atmel AVR AT90USB64/128 memories ................................................ 20
6.1 In-system re-programmable flash program memory .............................................20
6.2 SRAM data memory ..............................................................................................21
6.3 EEPROM data memory .........................................................................................24
6.4 I/O memory ............................................................................................................30
6.5 External memory interface ....................................................................................31
7 System clock and clock options .......................................................... 40
7.1 Clock systems and their distribution ......................................................................40
7.2 Clock sources ........................................................................................................41
7.3 Low power crystal oscillator ..................................................................................42
7.4 Low frequency crystal oscillator ............................................................................44
7.5 Calibrated internal RC oscillator ............................................................................45
7.6 External clock ........................................................................................................46
7.7 Clock output buffer ................................................................................................47
7.8 Timer/counter oscillator .........................................................................................47
7.9 System clock prescaler .........................................................................................47ii
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64X/128X
7.10 PLL ......................................................................................................................49
8 Power management and sleep modes ................................................. 51
8.1 Idle mode ...............................................................................................................52
8.2 ADC noise reduction mode ...................................................................................52
8.3 Power-down mode ................................................................................................52
8.4 Power-save mode .................................................................................................52
8.5 Standby mode .......................................................................................................53
8.6 Extended Standby mode .......................................................................................53
8.7 Power Reduction Register .....................................................................................54
8.8 Minimizing power consumption .............................................................................55
9 System control and reset ...................................................................... 57
9.1 Resetting the AVR .................................................................................................57
9.2 Reset sources .......................................................................................................57
9.3 Power-on reset ......................................................................................................58
9.4 External reset ........................................................................................................59
9.5 Brown-out detection ..............................................................................................60
9.6 Watchdog reset .....................................................................................................61
9.7 Internal voltage reference ......................................................................................62
9.8 Watchdog timer .....................................................................................................63
10 Interrupts ................................................................................................ 68
10.1 Interrupt vectors in AT90USB64/128 ...................................................................68
11 I/O-ports .................................................................................................. 71
11.1 Introduction ..........................................................................................................71
11.2 Ports as general digital I/O ..................................................................................72
11.3 Alternate port functions .......................................................................................76
11.4 Register description for I/O-ports ........................................................................89
12 External interrupts ................................................................................. 92
13 Timer/Counter0, Timer/Counter1, and Timer/Counter3 prescalers ... 96
13.1 Internal clock source ...........................................................................................96
13.2 Prescaler reset ....................................................................................................96
13.3 External clock source ..........................................................................................96
13.4 GTCCR – General Timer/Counter Control Register ............................................97
14 8-bit Timer/Counter0 with PWM ............................................................ 98
14.1 Overview .............................................................................................................98iii
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64X/128X
14.2 Timer/Counter clock sources ...............................................................................99
14.3 Counter unit .........................................................................................................99
14.4 Output compare unit ..........................................................................................100
14.5 Compare Match Output Unit ..............................................................................102
14.6 Modes of operation ............................................................................................103
14.7 Timer/Counter timing diagrams .........................................................................107
14.8 8-bit Timer/Counter register description ............................................................108
15 16-bit Timer/Counter (Timer/Counter1 and Timer/Counter3) ........... 115
15.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................115
15.2 Accessing 16-bit registers .................................................................................117
15.3 Timer/Counter clock sources .............................................................................120
15.4 Counter unit .......................................................................................................121
15.5 Input Capture unit ..............................................................................................122
15.6 Output Compare units .......................................................................................124
15.7 Compare Match Output unit ..............................................................................126
15.8 Modes of operation ............................................................................................127
15.9 Timer/Counter timing diagrams .........................................................................134
15.10 16-bit Timer/Counter register description ........................................................136
16 8-bit Timer/Counter2 with PWM and asynchronous operation ........ 145
16.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................145
16.2 Timer/Counter clock sources .............................................................................146
16.3 Counter unit .......................................................................................................146
16.4 Output Compare unit .........................................................................................147
16.5 Compare Match Output unit ..............................................................................149
16.6 Modes of operation ............................................................................................150
16.7 Timer/Counter timing diagrams .........................................................................154
16.8 8-bit Timer/Counter register description ............................................................156
16.9 Asynchronous operation of the Timer/Counter ..................................................161
16.10 Timer/Counter prescaler ..................................................................................164
17 Output Compare Modulator (OCM1C0A) ........................................... 166
17.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................166
17.2 Description ........................................................................................................166
18 SPI – Serial Peripheral Interface ......................................................... 168
18.1 SS Pin Functionality ..........................................................................................172
18.2 Data modes .......................................................................................................175iv
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64X/128X
19 USART ................................................................................................... 177
19.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................177
19.2 Clock generation ...............................................................................................178
19.3 Frame formats ...................................................................................................180
19.4 USART initialization ...........................................................................................181
19.5 Data transmission – The USART transmitter ....................................................182
19.6 Data reception – The USART receiver ..............................................................185
19.7 Asynchronous data reception ............................................................................189
19.8 Multi-processor Communication mode ..............................................................192
19.9 USART register description ...............................................................................193
19.10 Examples of baud rate setting .........................................................................198
20 USART in SPI mode ............................................................................. 202
20.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................202
20.2 Clock generation ...............................................................................................202
20.3 SPI data modes and timing ...............................................................................203
20.4 Frame formats ...................................................................................................203
20.5 Data transfer ......................................................................................................205
20.6 USART MSPIM register description ..................................................................207
20.7 AVR USART MSPIM vs. AVR SPI ....................................................................209
21 2-wire serial interface .......................................................................... 211
21.1 Features ............................................................................................................211
21.2 2-wire Serial Interface bus definition .................................................................211
21.3 Data transfer and frame format .........................................................................212
21.4 Multi-master bus systems, arbitration and synchronization ...............................215
21.5 Overview of the TWI module .............................................................................216
21.6 TWI register description ....................................................................................219
21.7 Using the TWI ....................................................................................................222
21.8 Transmission modes .........................................................................................225
21.9 Multi-master systems and arbitration .................................................................239
22 USB controller ...................................................................................... 241
22.1 Features ............................................................................................................241
22.2 Block diagram ....................................................................................................241
22.3 Typical application implementation ...................................................................242
22.4 General operating modes ..................................................................................246
22.5 Power modes ....................................................................................................250v
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64X/128X
22.6 Speed control ....................................................................................................251
22.7 Memory management .......................................................................................252
22.8 PAD suspend ....................................................................................................253
22.9 OTG timers customizing ....................................................................................254
22.10 Plug-in detection ..............................................................................................255
22.11 ID detection .....................................................................................................256
22.12 Registers description .......................................................................................256
22.13 USB Software Operating modes .....................................................................261
23 USB device operating modes ............................................................. 262
23.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................262
23.2 Power-on and reset ...........................................................................................262
23.3 Endpoint reset ...................................................................................................262
23.4 USB reset ..........................................................................................................263
23.5 Endpoint selection .............................................................................................263
23.6 Endpoint activation ............................................................................................263
23.7 Address setup ...................................................................................................264
23.8 Suspend, wake-up and resume .........................................................................265
23.9 Detach ...............................................................................................................265
23.10 Remote Wake-up ............................................................................................266
23.11 STALL request ................................................................................................266
23.12 CONTROL endpoint management ..................................................................267
23.13 OUT endpoint management ............................................................................268
23.14 IN endpoint management ................................................................................269
23.15 Isochronous mode ...........................................................................................271
23.16 Overflow ..........................................................................................................272
23.17 Interrupts .........................................................................................................272
23.18 Registers .........................................................................................................273
24 USB host operating modes ................................................................. 285
24.1 Pipe description .................................................................................................285
24.2 Detach ...............................................................................................................285
24.3 Power-on and reset ...........................................................................................285
24.4 Device detection ................................................................................................286
24.5 Pipe selection ....................................................................................................286
24.6 Pipe configuration ..............................................................................................286
24.7 USB reset ..........................................................................................................288vi
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64X/128X
24.8 Address setup ...................................................................................................288
24.9 Remote wake-up detection ................................................................................288
24.10 USB pipe reset ................................................................................................288
24.11 Pipe data access .............................................................................................288
24.12 Control pipe management ...............................................................................289
24.13 OUT pipe management ...................................................................................289
24.14 IN Pipe management .......................................................................................290
24.15 Interrupt system ...............................................................................................291
24.16 Registers .........................................................................................................292
25 Analog Comparator ............................................................................. 304
25.1 Analog Comparator multiplexed input ...............................................................306
26 ADC – Analog to Digital Converter ..................................................... 307
26.1 Features ............................................................................................................307
26.2 Overview ...........................................................................................................307
26.3 Operation ...........................................................................................................309
26.4 Starting a conversion .........................................................................................309
26.5 Prescaling and conversion timing ......................................................................310
26.6 Changing channel or reference selection ..........................................................313
26.7 ADC noise canceler ...........................................................................................314
26.8 ADC conversion result .......................................................................................318
26.9 ADC register description ...................................................................................321
27 JTAG interface and on-chip debug system ....................................... 327
27.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................327
27.2 TAP – Test Access Port ....................................................................................327
27.3 TAP Controller ...................................................................................................329
27.4 Using the Boundary-scan chain ........................................................................330
27.5 Using the on-chip debug system .......................................................................330
27.6 On-chip debug specific JTAG instructions .........................................................331
27.7 On-chip Debug related Register in I/O memory ................................................332
27.8 Using the JTAG programming capabilities ........................................................332
27.9 Bibliography .......................................................................................................332
28 IEEE 1149.1 (JTAG) boundary-scan ................................................... 333
28.1 Features ............................................................................................................333
28.2 System overview ...............................................................................................333
28.3 Data registers ....................................................................................................333vii
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64X/128X
28.4 Boundary-scan specific JTAG instructions ........................................................335
28.5 Boundary-scan Related Register in I/O memory ...............................................336
28.6 Boundary-scan chain .........................................................................................337
28.7 Atmel AT90USB64/128 Boundary-scan order ...................................................340
28.8 Boundary-scan description language files .........................................................342
29 Boot Loader support – read-while-write self-programming ............. 343
29.1 Boot Loader features .........................................................................................343
29.2 Application and Boot Loader flash sections ......................................................343
29.3 Read-while-write and no read-while-write flash sections ...................................343
29.4 Boot Loader lock bits .........................................................................................346
29.5 Entering the Boot Loader program ....................................................................347
29.6 Addressing the flash during self-programming ..................................................350
29.7 Self-programming the flash ...............................................................................351
30 Memory programming ......................................................................... 359
30.1 Program and data memory lock bits ..................................................................359
30.2 Fuse bits ............................................................................................................360
30.3 Signature bytes .................................................................................................362
30.4 Calibration byte .................................................................................................362
30.5 Parallel programming parameters, pin mapping, and commands .....................362
30.6 Parallel programming ........................................................................................365
30.7 Serial downloading ............................................................................................373
30.8 Serial programming pin mapping ......................................................................374
30.9 Programming via the JTAG interface ................................................................377
31 Electrical characteristics for Atmel AT90USB64/128 ....................... 390
31.1 Absolute maximum ratings* ...............................................................................390
31.2 DC characteristics .............................................................................................390
31.3 External clock drive waveforms .........................................................................392
31.4 External clock drive ...........................................................................................392
31.5 Maximum speed vs. VCC ...........................................................................................................................392
31.6 2-wire serial interface characteristics ................................................................393
31.7 SPI timing characteristics ..................................................................................395
31.8 Hardware boot entrance timing characteristics .................................................396
31.9 ADC characteristics ...........................................................................................397
31.10 External data memory timing ...........................................................................399
32 Atmel AT90USB64/128 typical characteristics ................................. 404viii
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64X/128X
32.1 Input voltage levels ............................................................................................405
32.2 Output voltage levels .........................................................................................406
32.3 Power-down supply current ...............................................................................408
32.4 Power-save supply current ................................................................................409
32.5 Idle supply current .............................................................................................410
32.6 Active supply current .........................................................................................410
32.7 Reset supply current .........................................................................................411
32.8 I/O pull-up current ..............................................................................................411
32.9 Bandgap voltage ...............................................................................................412
32.10 Internal ARef voltage .......................................................................................413
32.11 USB regulator ..................................................................................................413
32.12 BOD levels ......................................................................................................414
32.13 Watchdog timer frequency ..............................................................................416
32.14 Internal RC oscillator frequency ......................................................................416
32.15 Power-on reset ................................................................................................418
33 Register summary ................................................................................ 419
34 Instruction set summary ..................................................................... 423
35 Ordering information ........................................................................... 426
35.1 Atmel AT90USB646 ..........................................................................................426
35.2 Atmel AT90USB647 ..........................................................................................427
35.3 Atmel AT90USB1286 ........................................................................................428
35.4 Atmel AT90USB1287 ........................................................................................429
36 Packaging information ........................................................................ 430
36.1 TQFP64 .............................................................................................................430
36.2 QFN64 ...............................................................................................................432
37 Errata ..................................................................................................... 434
37.1 Atmel AT90USB1287/6 errata ...........................................................................434
37.2 Atmel AT90USB646/7 errata .............................................................................442
38 Datasheet revision history for Atmel AT90USB64/128 ..................... 445
38.1 Changes from 7593A to 7593B .........................................................................445
38.2 Changes from 7593B to 7593C .........................................................................445
38.3 Changes from 7593C to 7593D .........................................................................445
38.4 Changes from 7593D to 7593E .........................................................................445
38.5 Changes from 7593E to 7593F .........................................................................445ix
7593L–AVR–09/12
AT90USB64X/128X
38.6 Changes from 7593F to 7593G .........................................................................445
38.7 Changes from 7593G to 7593H ........................................................................445
38.8 Changes from 7593H to 7593I ..........................................................................446
38.9 Changes from 7593I to 7593J ...........................................................................446
38.10 Changes from 7593J to 7593K ........................................................................446
38.11 Changes from 7593K to 7593L .......................................................................446
Table of contents ....................................................................................... i7593L–AVR–09/12
Atmel Corporation
2325 Orchard Parkway
San Jose, CA 95131
USA
Tel: (+1)(408) 441-0311
Fax: (+1)(408) 487-2600
www.atmel.com
Atmel Asia Limited
Unit 1-5 & 16, 19/F
BEA Tower, Millennium City 5
418 Kwun Tong Road
Kwun Tong, Kowloon
HONG KONG
Tel: (+852) 2245-6100
Fax: (+852) 2722-1369
Atmel Munich GmbH
Business Campus
Parkring 4
D-85748 Garching b. Munich
GERMANY
Tel: (+49) 89-31970-0
Fax: (+49) 89-3194621
Atmel Japan
16F, Shin Osaki Kangyo Bldg.
1-6-4 Osaki Shinagawa-ku
Tokyo 104-0032
JAPAN
Tel: (+81) 3-6417-0300
Fax: (+81) 3-6417-0370
© 2012 Atmel Corporation. All rights reserved.
Atmel®, Atmel logo and combinations thereof, AVR®, AVR Studio®, and others are registered trademarks or trademarks of Atmel Corporation
or its subsidiaries. Windows® is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in U.S. and or other countries. Other terms
and product names may be trademarks of others.
Disclaimer: The information in this document is provided in connection with Atmel products. No license, express or implied, by estoppel or otherwise, to
any intellectual property right is granted by this document or in connection with the sale of Atmel products. EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE ATMEL
TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALES LOCATED ON THE ATMEL WEBSITE, ATMEL ASSUMES NO LIABILITY WHATSOEVER AND DISCLAIMS ANY
EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY WARRANTY RELATING TO ITS PRODUCTS INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL ATMEL BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS AND PROFITS,
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR LOSS OF INFORMATION) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS DOCUMENT, EVEN IF ATMEL
HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Atmel makes no representations or warranties with respect to the accuracy or completeness
of the contents of this document and reserves the right to make changes to specifications and product descriptions at any time without notice.
Atmel does not make any commitment to update the information contained herein. Unless specifically provided otherwise, Atmel products are not suitable
for, and shall not be used in, automotive applications. Atmel products are not intended, authorized, or warranted for use as components in applications
intended to support or sustain life.
Features
• High performance, low power Atmel® AVR® 8-bit microcontroller
• Advanced RISC architecture
– 131 powerful instructions – most single clock cycle execution
– 32 × 8 general purpose working registers
– Fully static operation
– Up to 20 MIPS throughput at 20MHz
– On-chip 2-cycle multiplier
• High endurance non-volatile memory segments
– 4/8/16 Kbytes of in-system self-programmable flash program memory
– 256/512/512 bytes EEPROM
– 512/1K/1Kbytes internal SRAM
– Write/erase cyles: 10,000 flash/100,000 EEPROM
– Data retention: 20 years at 85°C/100 years at 25°C()
– Optional boot code section with independent lock bits
In-system programming by on-chip boot program
True read-while-write operation
– Programming lock for software security
• QTouch® library support
– Capacitive touch buttons, sliders and wheels
– QTouch and QMatrix acquisition
– Up to 64 sense channels
• Peripheral features
– Two 8-bit timer/counters with separate prescaler and compare mode
– One 16-bit timer/counter with separate prescaler, compare mode, and capture mode
– Real time counter with separate oscillator
– Six PWM channels
– 8-channel 10-bit ADC in TQFP and QFN/MLF package
– 6-channel 10-bit ADC in PDIP Package
– Programmable serial USART
– Master/slave SPI serial interface
– Byte-oriented 2-wire serial interface (Philips I2
C compatible)
– Programmable watchdog timer with separate on-chip oscillator
– On-chip analog comparator
– Interrupt and wake-up on pin change
• Special microcontroller features
– DebugWIRE on-chip debug system
– Power-on reset and programmable brown-out detection
– Internal calibrated oscillator
– External and internal interrupt sources
– Five sleep modes: Idle, ADC noise reduction, power-save, power-down, and standby
• I/O and packages
– 23 programmable I/O lines
– 28-pin PDIP, 32-lead TQFP, 28-pad QFN/MLF and 32-pad QFN/MLF
• Operating voltage:
– 1.8V - 5.5V for Atmel ATmega48V/88V/168V
– 2.7V - 5.5V for Atmel ATmega48/88/168
• Temperature range:
– -40°C to 85°C
• Speed grade:
– ATmega48V/88V/168V: 0 - 4MHz @ 1.8V - 5.5V, 0 - 10MHz @ 2.7V - 5.5V
– ATmega48/88/168: 0 - 10MHz @ 2.7V - 5.5V, 0 - 20MHz @ 4.5V - 5.5V
• Low power consumption
– Active mode:
250µA at 1MHz, 1.8V
15µA at 32kHz, 1.8V (including oscillator)
– Power-down mode:
0.1µA at 1.8V
Note: 1. See “Data retention” on page 8 for details.
8-bit Atmel
Microcontroller
with 4/8/16K
Bytes In-System
Programmable
Flash
ATmega48/V
ATmega88/V
ATmega168/V
Rev. 2545T–AVR–05/112
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
1. Pin configurations
Figure 1-1. Pinout Atmel ATmega48/88/168.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
(PCINT19/OC2B/INT1) PD3
(PCINT20/XCK/T0) PD4
GND
VCC
GND
VCC
(PCINT6/XTAL1/TOSC1) PB6
(PCINT7/XTAL2/TOSC2) PB7
PC1 (ADC1/PCINT9)
PC0 (ADC0/PCINT8)
ADC7
GND
AREF
ADC6
AVCC
PB5 (SCK/PCINT5)
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
(PCINT21/OC0B/T1) PD5
(PCINT22/OC0A/AIN0) PD6
(PCINT23/AIN1) PD7
(PCINT0/CLKO/ICP1) PB0
(PCINT1/OC1A) PB1
(PCINT2/SS/OC1B) PB2
(PCINT3/OC2A/MOSI) PB3
(PCINT4/MISO) PB4
PD2 (INT0/PCINT18)
PD1 (TXD/PCINT17)
PD0 (RXD/PCINT16)
PC6 (RESET/PCINT14)
PC5 (ADC5/SCL/PCINT13)
PC4 (ADC4/SDA/PCINT12)
PC3 (ADC3/PCINT11)
PC2 (ADC2/PCINT10)
TQFP Top View
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
(PCINT14/RESET) PC6
(PCINT16/RXD) PD0
(PCINT17/TXD) PD1
(PCINT18/INT0) PD2
(PCINT19/OC2B/INT1) PD3
(PCINT20/XCK/T0) PD4
VCC
GND
(PCINT6/XTAL1/TOSC1) PB6
(PCINT7/XTAL2/TOSC2) PB7
(PCINT21/OC0B/T1) PD5
(PCINT22/OC0A/AIN0) PD6
(PCINT23/AIN1) PD7
(PCINT0/CLKO/ICP1) PB0
PC5 (ADC5/SCL/PCINT13)
PC4 (ADC4/SDA/PCINT12)
PC3 (ADC3/PCINT11)
PC2 (ADC2/PCINT10)
PC1 (ADC1/PCINT9)
PC0 (ADC0/PCINT8)
GND
AREF
AVCC
PB5 (SCK/PCINT5)
PB4 (MISO/PCINT4)
PB3 (MOSI/OC2A/PCINT3)
PB2 (SS/OC1B/PCINT2)
PB1 (OC1A/PCINT1)
PDIP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
32 MLF Top View
(PCINT19/OC2B/INT1) PD3
(PCINT20/XCK/T0) PD4
GND
VCC
GND
VCC
(PCINT6/XTAL1/TOSC1) PB6
(PCINT7/XTAL2/TOSC2) PB7
PC1 (ADC1/PCINT9)
PC0 (ADC0/PCINT8)
ADC7
GND
AREF
ADC6
AVCC
PB5 (SCK/PCINT5)
(PCINT21/OC0B/T1) PD5
(PCINT22/OC0A/AIN0) PD6
(PCINT23/AIN1) PD7
(PCINT0/CLKO/ICP1) PB0
(PCINT1/OC1A) PB1
(PCINT2/SS/OC1B) PB2
(PCINT3/OC2A/MOSI) PB3
(PCINT4/MISO) PB4
PD2 (INT0/PCINT18)
PD1 (TXD/PCINT17)
PD0 (RXD/PCINT16)
PC6 (RESET/PCINT14)
PC5 (ADC5/SCL/PCINT13)
PC4 (ADC4/SDA/PCINT12)
PC3 (ADC3/PCINT11)
PC2 (ADC2/PCINT10)
NOTE: Bottom pad should be soldered to ground.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
28 MLF Top View
(PCINT19/OC2B/INT1) PD3
(PCINT20/XCK/T0) PD4
VCC
GND
(PCINT6/XTAL1/TOSC1) PB6
(PCINT7/XTAL2/TOSC2) PB7
(PCINT21/OC0B/T1) PD5
(PCINT22/OC0A/AIN0) PD6
(PCINT23/AIN1) PD7
(PCINT0/CLKO/ICP1) PB0
(PCINT1/OC1A) PB1
(PCINT2/SS/OC1B) PB2
(PCINT3/OC2A/MOSI) PB3
(PCINT4/MISO) PB4
PD2 (INT0/PCINT18)
PD1 (TXD/PCINT17)
PD0 (RXD/PCINT16)
PC6 (RESET/PCINT14)
PC5 (ADC5/SCL/PCINT13)
PC4 (ADC4/SDA/PCINT12)
PC3 (ADC3/PCINT11)
PC2 (ADC2/PCINT10)
PC1 (ADC1/PCINT9)
PC0 (ADC0/PCINT8)
GND
AREF
AVCC
PB5 (SCK/PCINT5)
NOTE: Bottom pad should be soldered to ground.3
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
1.1 Pin descriptions
1.1.1 VCC
Digital supply voltage.
1.1.2 GND
Ground.
1.1.3 Port B (PB7:0) XTAL1/XTAL2/TOSC1/TOSC2
Port B is an 8-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The
Port B output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source
capability. As inputs, Port B pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up
resistors are activated. The Port B pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active,
even if the clock is not running.
Depending on the clock selection fuse settings, PB6 can be used as input to the inverting Oscillator
amplifier and input to the internal clock operating circuit.
Depending on the clock selection fuse settings, PB7 can be used as output from the inverting
Oscillator amplifier.
If the Internal Calibrated RC Oscillator is used as chip clock source, PB7..6 is used as TOSC2..1
input for the Asynchronous Timer/Counter2 if the AS2 bit in ASSR is set.
The various special features of Port B are elaborated in “Alternate functions of port B” on page
78 and “System clock and clock options” on page 27.
1.1.4 Port C (PC5:0)
Port C is a 7-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The
PC5..0 output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source
capability. As inputs, Port C pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up
resistors are activated. The Port C pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active,
even if the clock is not running.
1.1.5 PC6/RESET
If the RSTDISBL Fuse is programmed, PC6 is used as an I/O pin. Note that the electrical characteristics
of PC6 differ from those of the other pins of Port C.
If the RSTDISBL Fuse is unprogrammed, PC6 is used as a Reset input. A low level on this pin
for longer than the minimum pulse length will generate a Reset, even if the clock is not running.
The minimum pulse length is given in Table 29-3 on page 307. Shorter pulses are not guaranteed
to generate a Reset.
The various special features of Port C are elaborated in “Alternate functions of port C” on page
81.
1.1.6 Port D (PD7:0)
Port D is an 8-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The
Port D output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source
capability. As inputs, Port D pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up4
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
resistors are activated. The Port D pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active,
even if the clock is not running.
The various special features of Port D are elaborated in “Alternate functions of port D” on page
84.
1.1.7 AVCC
AVCC is the supply voltage pin for the A/D Converter, PC3:0, and ADC7:6. It should be externally
connected to VCC, even if the ADC is not used. If the ADC is used, it should be connected to VCC
through a low-pass filter. Note that PC6..4 use digital supply voltage, VCC.
1.1.8 AREF
AREF is the analog reference pin for the A/D Converter.
1.1.9 ADC7:6 (TQFP and QFN/MLF package only)
In the TQFP and QFN/MLF package, ADC7:6 serve as analog inputs to the A/D converter.
These pins are powered from the analog supply and serve as 10-bit ADC channels.5
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
2. Overview
The Atmel ATmega48/88/168 is a low-power CMOS 8-bit microcontroller based on the AVR
enhanced RISC architecture. By executing powerful instructions in a single clock cycle, the
ATmega48/88/168 achieves throughputs approaching 1 MIPS per MHz allowing the system
designer to optimize power consumption versus processing speed.
2.1 Block diagram
Figure 2-1. Block diagram.
The AVR core combines a rich instruction set with 32 general purpose working registers. All the
32 registers are directly connected to the Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU), allowing two independent
registers to be accessed in one single instruction executed in one clock cycle. The resulting
PORT D (8) PORT B (8) PORT C (7)
USART 0
8bit T/C 2
8bit T/C 0 16bit T/C 1 A/D conv.
Internal
bandgap
Analog
comp.
SPI TWI
Flash SRAM
EEPROM
Watchdog
oscillator
Watchdog
timer
Oscillator
circuits /
clock
generation
Power
supervision
POR / BOD &
RESET
GND
VCC
PROGRAM
LOGIC
debugWIRE
2
GND
AREF
AVCC
DATABUS
PD[0..7] PB[0..7] PC[0..6] ADC[6..7]
6
RESET
XTAL[1..2]
CPU6
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
architecture is more code efficient while achieving throughputs up to ten times faster than conventional
CISC microcontrollers.
The Atmel ATmega48/88/168 provides the following features: 4K/8K/16K bytes of In-System
Programmable Flash with Read-While-Write capabilities, 256/512/512 bytes EEPROM,
512/1K/1K bytes SRAM, 23 general purpose I/O lines, 32 general purpose working registers,
three flexible Timer/Counters with compare modes, internal and external interrupts, a serial programmable
USART, a byte-oriented 2-wire Serial Interface, an SPI serial port, a 6-channel 10-bit
ADC (8 channels in TQFP and QFN/MLF packages), a programmable Watchdog Timer with
internal Oscillator, and five software selectable power saving modes. The Idle mode stops the
CPU while allowing the SRAM, Timer/Counters, USART, 2-wire Serial Interface, SPI port, and
interrupt system to continue functioning. The Power-down mode saves the register contents but
freezes the Oscillator, disabling all other chip functions until the next interrupt or hardware reset.
In Power-save mode, the asynchronous timer continues to run, allowing the user to maintain a
timer base while the rest of the device is sleeping. The ADC Noise Reduction mode stops the
CPU and all I/O modules except asynchronous timer and ADC, to minimize switching noise during
ADC conversions. In Standby mode, the crystal/resonator Oscillator is running while the rest
of the device is sleeping. This allows very fast start-up combined with low power consumption.
Atmel offers the QTouch Library for embedding capacitive touch buttons, sliders and wheels
functionality into AVR microcontrollers. The patented charge-transfer signal acquisition offers
robust sensing and includes fully debounced reporting of touch keys and includes Adjacent Key
Suppression® (AKS®) technology for unambigiuous detection of key events. The easy-to-use
QTouch Suite toolchain allows you to explore, develop and debug your own touch applications.
The device is manufactured using the Atmel high density non-volatile memory technology. The
On-chip ISP Flash allows the program memory to be reprogrammed In-System through an SPI
serial interface, by a conventional non-volatile memory programmer, or by an On-chip Boot program
running on the AVR core. The Boot program can use any interface to download the
application program in the Application Flash memory. Software in the Boot Flash section will
continue to run while the Application Flash section is updated, providing true Read-While-Write
operation. By combining an 8-bit RISC CPU with In-System Self-Programmable Flash on a
monolithic chip, the Atmel ATmega48/88/168 is a powerful microcontroller that provides a highly
flexible and cost effective solution to many embedded control applications.
The ATmega48/88/168 AVR is supported with a full suite of program and system development
tools including: C Compilers, Macro Assemblers, Program Debugger/Simulators, In-Circuit Emulators,
and Evaluation kits.
2.2 Comparison between Atmel ATmega48, Atmel ATmega88, and Atmel ATmega168
The ATmega48, ATmega88 and ATmega168 differ only in memory sizes, boot loader support,
and interrupt vector sizes. Table 2-1 summarizes the different memory and interrupt vector sizes
for the three devices.
Table 2-1. Memory size summary.
Device Flash EEPROM RAM Interrupt vector size
ATmega48 4Kbytes 256Bytes 512Bytes 1 instruction word/vector
ATmega88 8Kbytes 512Bytes 1Kbytes 1 instruction word/vector
ATmega168 16Kbytes 512Bytes 1Kbytes 2 instruction words/vector7
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
ATmega88 and ATmega168 support a real Read-While-Write Self-Programming mechanism.
There is a separate Boot Loader Section, and the SPM instruction can only execute from there.
In ATmega48, there is no Read-While-Write support and no separate Boot Loader Section. The
SPM instruction can execute from the entire Flash.8
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
3. Resources
A comprehensive set of development tools, application notes and datasheets are available for
download on http://www.atmel.com/avr.
4. Data retention
Reliability Qualification results show that the projected data retention failure rate is much less
than 1 PPM over 20 years at 85°C or 100 years at 25°C.
5. About code examples
This documentation contains simple code examples that briefly show how to use various parts of
the device. These code examples assume that the part specific header file is included before
compilation. Be aware that not all C compiler vendors include bit definitions in the header files
and interrupt handling in C is compiler dependent. Please confirm with the C compiler documentation
for more details.
For I/O Registers located in extended I/O map, “IN”, “OUT”, “SBIS”, “SBIC”, “CBI”, and “SBI”
instructions must be replaced with instructions that allow access to extended I/O. Typically
“LDS” and “STS” combined with “SBRS”, “SBRC”, “SBR”, and “CBR”.
6. Capacitive touch sensing
The Atmel QTouch Library provides a simple to use solution to realize touch sensitive interfaces
on most Atmel AVR microcontrollers. The QTouch Library includes support for the QTouch and
QMatrix acquisition methods.
Touch sensing can be added to any application by linking the appropriate Atmel QTouch Library
for the AVR Microcontroller. This is done by using a simple set of APIs to define the touch channels
and sensors, and then calling the touch sensing API’s to retrieve the channel information
and determine the touch sensor states.
The QTouch Library is FREE and downloadable from the Atmel website at the following location:
www.atmel.com/qtouchlibrary. For implementation details and other information, refer to the
Atmel QTouch Library User Guide - also available for download from the Atmel website.9
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
7. AVR CPU core
7.1 Overview
This section discusses the AVR core architecture in general. The main function of the CPU core
is to ensure correct program execution. The CPU must therefore be able to access memories,
perform calculations, control peripherals, and handle interrupts.
7.2 Architectural overview
Figure 7-1. Block diagram of the AVR architecture.
In order to maximize performance and parallelism, the AVR uses a Harvard architecture – with
separate memories and buses for program and data. Instructions in the program memory are
executed with a single level pipelining. While one instruction is being executed, the next instruction
is pre-fetched from the program memory. This concept enables instructions to be executed
in every clock cycle. The program memory is In-System Reprogrammable Flash memory.
Flash
program
memory
Instruction
register
Instruction
decoder
Program
counter
Control lines
32 x 8
general
purpose
registrers
ALU
Status
and control
I/O lines
EEPROM
Data bus 8-bit
Data
SRAM
Direct addressing
Indirect addressing
Interrupt
unit
SPI
unit
Watchdog
timer
Analog
comparator
I/O module 2
I/O module 1
I/O module n10
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
The fast-access Register File contains 32 × 8-bit general purpose working registers with a single
clock cycle access time. This allows single-cycle Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU) operation. In a typical
ALU operation, two operands are output from the Register File, the operation is executed,
and the result is stored back in the Register File – in one clock cycle.
Six of the 32 registers can be used as three 16-bit indirect address register pointers for Data
Space addressing – enabling efficient address calculations. One of the these address pointers
can also be used as an address pointer for look up tables in Flash program memory. These
added function registers are the 16-bit X-register, Y-register, and Z-register, described later in
this section.
The ALU supports arithmetic and logic operations between registers or between a constant and
a register. Single register operations can also be executed in the ALU. After an arithmetic operation,
the Status Register is updated to reflect information about the result of the operation.
Program flow is provided by conditional and unconditional jump and call instructions, able to
directly address the whole address space. Most AVR instructions have a single 16-bit word format.
Every program memory address contains a 16-bit or 32-bit instruction.
Program Flash memory space is divided in two sections, the Boot Program section and the
Application Program section. Both sections have dedicated Lock bits for write and read/write
protection. The SPM instruction that writes into the Application Flash memory section must
reside in the Boot Program section.
During interrupts and subroutine calls, the return address Program Counter (PC) is stored on the
Stack. The Stack is effectively allocated in the general data SRAM, and consequently the Stack
size is only limited by the total SRAM size and the usage of the SRAM. All user programs must
initialize the SP in the Reset routine (before subroutines or interrupts are executed). The Stack
Pointer (SP) is read/write accessible in the I/O space. The data SRAM can easily be accessed
through the five different addressing modes supported in the AVR architecture.
The memory spaces in the AVR architecture are all linear and regular memory maps.
A flexible interrupt module has its control registers in the I/O space with an additional Global
Interrupt Enable bit in the Status Register. All interrupts have a separate Interrupt Vector in the
Interrupt Vector table. The interrupts have priority in accordance with their Interrupt Vector position.
The lower the Interrupt Vector address, the higher the priority.
The I/O memory space contains 64 addresses for CPU peripheral functions as Control Registers,
SPI, and other I/O functions. The I/O Memory can be accessed directly, or as the Data
Space locations following those of the Register File, 0x20 - 0x5F. In addition, the
ATmega48/88/168 has Extended I/O space from 0x60 - 0xFF in SRAM where only the
ST/STS/STD and LD/LDS/LDD instructions can be used.
7.3 ALU – Arithmetic Logic Unit
The high-performance AVR ALU operates in direct connection with all the 32 general purpose
working registers. Within a single clock cycle, arithmetic operations between general purpose
registers or between a register and an immediate are executed. The ALU operations are divided
into three main categories – arithmetic, logical, and bit-functions. Some implementations of the
architecture also provide a powerful multiplier supporting both signed/unsigned multiplication
and fractional format. See “Instruction set summary” on page 347 for a detailed description.11
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
7.4 Status register
The Status Register contains information about the result of the most recently executed arithmetic
instruction. This information can be used for altering program flow in order to perform
conditional operations. Note that the Status Register is updated after all ALU operations, as
specified in the Instruction Set Reference. This will in many cases remove the need for using the
dedicated compare instructions, resulting in faster and more compact code.
The Status Register is not automatically stored when entering an interrupt routine and restored
when returning from an interrupt. This must be handled by software.
7.4.1 SREG – AVR Status Register
The AVR Status Register – SREG – is defined as:
• Bit 7 – I: Global interrupt enable
The Global Interrupt Enable bit must be set for the interrupts to be enabled. The individual interrupt
enable control is then performed in separate control registers. If the Global Interrupt Enable
Register is cleared, none of the interrupts are enabled independent of the individual interrupt
enable settings. The I-bit is cleared by hardware after an interrupt has occurred, and is set by
the RETI instruction to enable subsequent interrupts. The I-bit can also be set and cleared by
the application with the SEI and CLI instructions, as described in the instruction set reference.
• Bit 6 – T: Bit copy storage
The Bit Copy instructions BLD (Bit LoaD) and BST (Bit STore) use the T-bit as source or destination
for the operated bit. A bit from a register in the Register File can be copied into T by the
BST instruction, and a bit in T can be copied into a bit in a register in the Register File by the
BLD instruction.
• Bit 5 – H: Half carry flag
The Half Carry Flag H indicates a Half Carry in some arithmetic operations. Half Carry Is useful
in BCD arithmetic. See the “Instruction Set Description” for detailed information.
• Bit 4 – S: Sign bit, S = N ⊕ V
The S-bit is always an exclusive or between the Negative Flag N and the Two’s Complement
Overflow Flag V. See the “Instruction Set Description” for detailed information.
• Bit 3 – V: Two’s complement overflow flag
The Two’s Complement Overflow Flag V supports two’s complement arithmetics. See the
“Instruction Set Description” for detailed information.
• Bit 2 – N: Negative flag
The Negative Flag N indicates a negative result in an arithmetic or logic operation. See the
“Instruction Set Description” for detailed information.
• Bit 1 – Z: Zero flag
The Zero Flag Z indicates a zero result in an arithmetic or logic operation. See the “Instruction
Set Description” for detailed information.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x3F (0x5F) I T H S V N Z C SREG
Read/write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 012
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
• Bit 0 – C: Carry flag
The Carry Flag C indicates a carry in an arithmetic or logic operation. See the “Instruction Set
Description” for detailed information.
7.5 General purpose register file
The register file is optimized for the AVR enhanced RISC instruction set. In order to achieve the
required performance and flexibility, the following input/output schemes are supported by the
register file:
• One 8-bit output operand and one 8-bit result input
• Two 8-bit output operands and one 8-bit result input
• Two 8-bit output operands and one 16-bit result input
• One 16-bit output operand and one 16-bit result input
Figure 7-2 shows the structure of the 32 general purpose working registers in the CPU.
Figure 7-2. AVR CPU general purpose working registers.
Most of the instructions operating on the register file have direct access to all registers, and most
of them are single cycle instructions.
As shown in Figure 7-2, each register is also assigned a data memory address, mapping them
directly into the first 32 locations of the user Data Space. Although not being physically implemented
as SRAM locations, this memory organization provides great flexibility in access of the
registers, as the X-, Y- and Z-pointer registers can be set to index any register in the file.
7 0 Addr.
R0 0x00
R1 0x01
R2 0x02
…
R13 0x0D
General R14 0x0E
purpose R15 0x0F
working R16 0x10
registers R17 0x11
…
R26 0x1A X-register low byte
R27 0x1B X-register high byte
R28 0x1C Y-register low byte
R29 0x1D Y-register high byte
R30 0x1E Z-register low byte
R31 0x1F Z-register high byte13
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
7.5.1 The X-register, Y-register, and Z-register
The registers R26..R31 have some added functions to their general purpose usage. These registers
are 16-bit address pointers for indirect addressing of the data space. The three indirect
address registers X, Y, and Z are defined as described in Figure 7-3.
Figure 7-3. The X-, Y-, and Z-registers.
In the different addressing modes these address registers have functions as fixed displacement,
automatic increment, and automatic decrement (see the instruction set reference for details).
7.6 Stack pointer
The Stack is mainly used for storing temporary data, for storing local variables and for storing
return addresses after interrupts and subroutine calls. The Stack Pointer Register always points
to the top of the Stack. Note that the Stack is implemented as growing from higher memory locations
to lower memory locations. This implies that a Stack PUSH command decreases the Stack
Pointer.
The Stack Pointer points to the data SRAM Stack area where the Subroutine and Interrupt
Stacks are located. This Stack space in the data SRAM must be defined by the program before
any subroutine calls are executed or interrupts are enabled. The Stack Pointer must be set to
point above 0x0100, preferably RAMEND. The Stack Pointer is decremented by one when data
is pushed onto the Stack with the PUSH instruction, and it is decremented by two when the
return address is pushed onto the Stack with subroutine call or interrupt. The Stack Pointer is
incremented by one when data is popped from the Stack with the POP instruction, and it is incremented
by two when data is popped from the Stack with return from subroutine RET or return
from interrupt RETI.
The AVR Stack Pointer is implemented as two 8-bit registers in the I/O space. The number of
bits actually used is implementation dependent. Note that the data space in some implementations
of the AVR architecture is so small that only SPL is needed. In this case, the SPH Register
will not be present.
15 XH XL 0
X-register 7 07 0
R27 (0x1B) R26 (0x1A)
15 YH YL 0
Y-register 7 07 0
R29 (0x1D) R28 (0x1C)
15 ZH ZL 0
Z-register 70 7 0
R31 (0x1F) R30 (0x1E)14
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
7.6.1 SPH and SPL – Stack pointer high and stack pointer low register
7.7 Instruction execution timing
This section describes the general access timing concepts for instruction execution. The AVR
CPU is driven by the CPU clock clkCPU, directly generated from the selected clock source for the
chip. No internal clock division is used.
Figure 7-4 shows the parallel instruction fetches and instruction executions enabled by the Harvard
architecture and the fast-access Register File concept. This is the basic pipelining concept
to obtain up to 1 MIPS per MHz with the corresponding unique results for functions per cost,
functions per clocks, and functions per power-unit.
Figure 7-4. The parallel instruction fetches and instruction executions.
Figure 7-5 shows the internal timing concept for the Register File. In a single clock cycle an ALU
operation using two register operands is executed, and the result is stored back to the destination
register.
Figure 7-5. Single cycle ALU operation.
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
0x3E (0x5E) SP15 SP14 SP13 SP12 SP11 SP10 SP9 SP8 SPH
0x3D (0x5D) SP7 SP6 SP5 SP4 SP3 SP2 SP1 SP0 SPL
76543210
Read/write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value RAMEND RAMEND RAMEND RAMEND RAMEND RAMEND RAMEND RAMEND
RAMEND RAMEND RAMEND RAMEND RAMEND RAMEND RAMEND RAMEND
clk
1st instruction fetch
1st instruction execute
2nd instruction fetch
2nd instruction execute
3rd instruction fetch
3rd instruction execute
4th instruction fetch
T1 T2 T3 T4
CPU
Total execution time
Register operands fetch
ALU operation execute
Result write back
T1 T2 T3 T4
clkCPU15
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
7.8 Reset and interrupt handling
The AVR provides several different interrupt sources. These interrupts and the separate Reset
Vector each have a separate program vector in the program memory space. All interrupts are
assigned individual enable bits which must be written logic one together with the Global Interrupt
Enable bit in the Status Register in order to enable the interrupt. Depending on the Program
Counter value, interrupts may be automatically disabled when Boot Lock bits BLB02 or BLB12
are programmed. This feature improves software security. See the section “Memory programming”
on page 285 for details.
The lowest addresses in the program memory space are by default defined as the Reset and
Interrupt Vectors. The complete list of vectors is shown in “Interrupts” on page 56. The list also
determines the priority levels of the different interrupts. The lower the address the higher is the
priority level. RESET has the highest priority, and next is INT0 – the External Interrupt Request
0. The Interrupt Vectors can be moved to the start of the Boot Flash section by setting the IVSEL
bit in the MCU Control Register (MCUCR). Refer to “Interrupts” on page 56 for more information.
The Reset Vector can also be moved to the start of the Boot Flash section by programming the
BOOTRST Fuse, see “Boot loader support – Read-while-write self-programming, Atmel
ATmega88 and Atmel ATmega168” on page 269.
When an interrupt occurs, the Global Interrupt Enable I-bit is cleared and all interrupts are disabled.
The user software can write logic one to the I-bit to enable nested interrupts. All enabled
interrupts can then interrupt the current interrupt routine. The I-bit is automatically set when a
Return from Interrupt instruction – RETI – is executed.
There are basically two types of interrupts. The first type is triggered by an event that sets the
Interrupt Flag. For these interrupts, the Program Counter is vectored to the actual Interrupt Vector
in order to execute the interrupt handling routine, and hardware clears the corresponding
Interrupt Flag. Interrupt Flags can also be cleared by writing a logic one to the flag bit position(s)
to be cleared. If an interrupt condition occurs while the corresponding interrupt enable bit is
cleared, the Interrupt Flag will be set and remembered until the interrupt is enabled, or the flag is
cleared by software. Similarly, if one or more interrupt conditions occur while the Global Interrupt
Enable bit is cleared, the corresponding Interrupt Flag(s) will be set and remembered until the
Global Interrupt Enable bit is set, and will then be executed by order of priority.
The second type of interrupts will trigger as long as the interrupt condition is present. These
interrupts do not necessarily have Interrupt Flags. If the interrupt condition disappears before the
interrupt is enabled, the interrupt will not be triggered.
When the AVR exits from an interrupt, it will always return to the main program and execute one
more instruction before any pending interrupt is served.
Note that the Status Register is not automatically stored when entering an interrupt routine, nor
restored when returning from an interrupt routine. This must be handled by software.
When using the CLI instruction to disable interrupts, the interrupts will be immediately disabled.
No interrupt will be executed after the CLI instruction, even if it occurs simultaneously with the
CLI instruction. The following example shows how this can be used to avoid interrupts during the
timed EEPROM write sequence.16
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
When using the SEI instruction to enable interrupts, the instruction following SEI will be executed
before any pending interrupts, as shown in this example.
7.8.1 Interrupt response time
The interrupt execution response for all the enabled AVR interrupts is four clock cycles minimum.
After four clock cycles the program vector address for the actual interrupt handling routine
is executed. During this four clock cycle period, the Program Counter is pushed onto the Stack.
The vector is normally a jump to the interrupt routine, and this jump takes three clock cycles. If
an interrupt occurs during execution of a multi-cycle instruction, this instruction is completed
before the interrupt is served. If an interrupt occurs when the MCU is in sleep mode, the interrupt
execution response time is increased by four clock cycles. This increase comes in addition to the
start-up time from the selected sleep mode.
A return from an interrupt handling routine takes four clock cycles. During these four clock
cycles, the Program Counter (two bytes) is popped back from the Stack, the Stack Pointer is
incremented by two, and the I-bit in SREG is set.
Assembly code example
in r16, SREG ; store SREG value
cli ; disable interrupts during timed sequence
sbi EECR, EEMPE ; start EEPROM write
sbi EECR, EEPE
out SREG, r16 ; restore SREG value (I-bit)
C code example
char cSREG;
cSREG = SREG; /* store SREG value */
/* disable interrupts during timed sequence */
_CLI();
EECR |= (1< xxx
... ... ... ...
22 0x015 ADC ADC conversion complete
23 0x016 EE READY EEPROM ready
24 0x017 ANALOG COMP Analog comparator
25 0x018 TWI 2-wire serial interface
26 0x019 SPM READY Store program memory ready
Table 12-1. Reset and interrupt vectors in ATmega48. (Continued)
Vector no. Program address Source Interrupt definition58
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
12.3 Interrupt vectors in Atmel ATmega88
Notes: 1. When the BOOTRST fuse is programmed, the device will jump to the boot loader address at
reset, see “Boot loader support – Read-while-write self-programming, Atmel ATmega88 and
Atmel ATmega168” on page 269.
2. When the IVSEL bit in MCUCR is set, interrupt vectors will be moved to the start of the boot
flash section. The address of each Interrupt Vector will then be the address in this table added
to the start address of the boot flash section.
Table 12-3 on page 59 shows reset and interrupt vectors placement for the various combinations
of BOOTRST and IVSEL settings. If the program never enables an interrupt source, the
Interrupt Vectors are not used, and regular program code can be placed at these locations. This
is also the case if the reset vector is in the application section while the interrupt vectors are in
the boot section or vice versa.
Table 12-2. Reset and interrupt vectors in ATmega88.
Vector no.
Program
address(2) Source Interrupt definition
1 0x000(1) RESET External pin, power-on reset, brown-out reset and watchdog system reset
2 0x001 INT0 External interrupt request 0
3 0x002 INT1 External interrupt request 1
4 0x003 PCINT0 Pin change interrupt request 0
5 0x004 PCINT1 Pin change interrupt request 1
6 0x005 PCINT2 Pin change interrupt request 2
7 0x006 WDT Watchdog time-out interrupt
8 0x007 TIMER2 COMPA Timer/Counter2 compare match A
9 0x008 TIMER2 COMPB Timer/Counter2 compare match B
10 0x009 TIMER2 OVF Timer/Counter2 overflow
11 0x00A TIMER1 CAPT Timer/Counter1 capture event
12 0x00B TIMER1 COMPA Timer/Counter1 compare match A
13 0x00C TIMER1 COMPB Timer/Coutner1 compare match B
14 0x00D TIMER1 OVF Timer/Counter1 overflow
15 0x00E TIMER0 COMPA Timer/Counter0 compare match A
16 0x00F TIMER0 COMPB Timer/Counter0 compare match B
17 0x010 TIMER0 OVF Timer/Counter0 overflow
18 0x011 SPI, STC SPI serial transfer complete
19 0x012 USART, RX USART Rx complete
20 0x013 USART, UDRE USART, data register empty
21 0x014 USART, TX USART, Tx complete
22 0x015 ADC ADC conversion complete
23 0x016 EE READY EEPROM ready
24 0x017 ANALOG COMP Analog comparator
25 0x018 TWI 2-wire serial interface
26 0x019 SPM READY Store program memory ready59
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
Note: 1. The boot reset address is shown in Table 27-6 on page 281. For the BOOTRST Fuse “1”
means unprogrammed while “0” means programmed.
The most typical and general program setup for the reset and interrupt vector addresses in
ATmega88 is:
Address Labels Code Comments
0x000 rjmp RESET ; Reset Handler
0x001 rjmp EXT_INT0 ; IRQ0 Handler
0x002 rjmp EXT_INT1 ; IRQ1 Handler
0x003 rjmp PCINT0 ; PCINT0 Handler
0x004 rjmp PCINT1 ; PCINT1 Handler
0x005 rjmp PCINT2 ; PCINT2 Handler
0x006 rjmp WDT ; Watchdog Timer Handler
0x007 rjmp TIM2_COMPA ; Timer2 Compare A Handler
0X008 rjmp TIM2_COMPB ; Timer2 Compare B Handler
0x009 rjmp TIM2_OVF ; Timer2 Overflow Handler
0x00A rjmp TIM1_CAPT ; Timer1 Capture Handler
0x00B rjmp TIM1_COMPA ; Timer1 Compare A Handler
0x00C rjmp TIM1_COMPB ; Timer1 Compare B Handler
0x00D rjmp TIM1_OVF ; Timer1 Overflow Handler
0x00E rjmp TIM0_COMPA ; Timer0 Compare A Handler
0x00F rjmp TIM0_COMPB ; Timer0 Compare B Handler
0x010 rjmp TIM0_OVF ; Timer0 Overflow Handler
0x011 rjmp SPI_STC ; SPI Transfer Complete Handler
0x012 rjmp USART_RXC ; USART, RX Complete Handler
0x013 rjmp USART_UDRE ; USART, UDR Empty Handler
0x014 rjmp USART_TXC ; USART, TX Complete Handler
0x015 rjmp ADC ; ADC Conversion Complete Handler
0x016 rjmp EE_RDY ; EEPROM Ready Handler
0x017 rjmp ANA_COMP ; Analog Comparator Handler
0x018 rjmp TWI ; 2-wire Serial Interface Handler
0x019 rjmp SPM_RDY ; Store Program Memory Ready Handler
;
0x01ARESET: ldi r16, high(RAMEND); Main program start
0x01B out SPH,r16 ; Set Stack Pointer to top of RAM
0x01C ldi r16, low(RAMEND)
0x01D out SPL,r16
0x01E sei ; Enable interrupts
0x01F xxx
Table 12-3. Reset and interrupt vectors placement in Atmel ATmega88(1).
BOOTRST IVSEL Reset address Interrupt vectors start address
1 0 0x000 0x001
1 1 0x000 Boot reset address + 0x001
0 0 Boot reset address 0x001
0 1 Boot reset address Boot reset address + 0x00160
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
When the BOOTRST fuse is unprogrammed, the boot section size set to 2Kbytes and the IVSEL
bit in the MCUCR register is set before any interrupts are enabled, the most typical and general
program setup for the reset and interrupt vector addresses in Atmel ATmega88 is:
Address Labels Code Comments
0x000 RESET: ldi r16,high(RAMEND); Main program start
0x001 out SPH,r16 ; Set Stack Pointer to top of RAM
0x002 ldi r16,low(RAMEND)
0x003 out SPL,r16
0x004 sei ; Enable interrupts
0x005 xxx
;
.org 0xC01
0xC01 rjmp EXT_INT0 ; IRQ0 Handler
0xC02 rjmp EXT_INT1 ; IRQ1 Handler
... ... ... ;
0xC19 rjmp SPM_RDY ; Store Program Memory Ready Handler
When the BOOTRST fuse is programmed and the boot section size set to 2Kbytes, the most
typical and general program setup for the reset and interrupt vector addresses in ATmega88 is:
Address Labels Code Comments
.org 0x001
0x001 rjmp EXT_INT0 ; IRQ0 Handler
0x002 rjmp EXT_INT1 ; IRQ1 Handler
... ... ... ;
0x019 rjmp SPM_RDY ; Store Program Memory Ready Handler
;
.org 0xC00
0xC00 RESET: ldi r16,high(RAMEND); Main program start
0xC01 out SPH,r16 ; Set Stack Pointer to top of RAM
0xC02 ldi r16,low(RAMEND)
0xC03 out SPL,r16
0xC04 sei ; Enable interrupts
0xC05 xxx
When the BOOTRST fuse is programmed, the boot section size set to 2Kbytes and the IVSEL
bit in the MCUCR register is set before any interrupts are enabled, the most typical and general
program setup for the reset and interrupt vector addresses in ATmega88 is:
Address Labels Code Comments
;
.org 0xC00
0xC00 rjmp RESET ; Reset handler
0xC01 rjmp EXT_INT0 ; IRQ0 Handler
0xC02 rjmp EXT_INT1 ; IRQ1 Handler
... ... ... ;
0xC19 rjmp SPM_RDY ; Store Program Memory Ready Handler
;
0xC1A RESET: ldi r16,high(RAMEND); Main program start
0xC1B out SPH,r16 ; Set Stack Pointer to top of RAM61
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
0xC1C ldi r16,low(RAMEND)
0xC1D out SPL,r16
0xC1E sei ; Enable interrupts
0xC1F xxx
12.4 Interrupt vectors in Atmel ATmega168
Notes: 1. When the BOOTRST fuse is programmed, the device will jump to the boot loader address at
reset, see “Boot loader support – Read-while-write self-programming, Atmel ATmega88 and
Atmel ATmega168” on page 269.
2. When the IVSEL bit in MCUCR is set, interrupt vectors will be moved to the start of the boot
flash section. The address of each Interrupt Vector will then be the address in this table added
to the start address of the boot flash section.
Table 12-4. Reset and interrupt vectors in ATmega168.
Vector no.
Program
address(2) Source Interrupt definition
1 0x0000(1) RESET External pin, power-on reset, brown-out reset and watchdog system reset
2 0x0002 INT0 External interrupt request 0
3 0x0004 INT1 External interrupt request 1
4 0x0006 PCINT0 Pin change interrupt request 0
5 0x0008 PCINT1 Pin change interrupt request 1
6 0x000A PCINT2 Pin change interrupt request 2
7 0x000C WDT Watchdog time-out interrupt
8 0x000E TIMER2 COMPA Timer/Counter2 compare match A
9 0x0010 TIMER2 COMPB Timer/Counter2 compare match B
10 0x0012 TIMER2 OVF Timer/Counter2 overflow
11 0x0014 TIMER1 CAPT Timer/Counter1 capture event
12 0x0016 TIMER1 COMPA Timer/Counter1 compare match A
13 0x0018 TIMER1 COMPB Timer/Coutner1 compare match B
14 0x001A TIMER1 OVF Timer/Counter1 overflow
15 0x001C TIMER0 COMPA Timer/Counter0 compare match A
16 0x001E TIMER0 COMPB Timer/Counter0 compare match B
17 0x0020 TIMER0 OVF Timer/Counter0 overflow
18 0x0022 SPI, STC SPI serial transfer complete
19 0x0024 USART, RX USART Rx complete
20 0x0026 USART, UDRE USART, data register empty
21 0x0028 USART, TX USART, Tx complete
22 0x002A ADC ADC conversion complete
23 0x002C EE READY EEPROM ready
24 0x002E ANALOG COMP Analog comparator
25 0x0030 TWI 2-wire serial interface
26 0x0032 SPM READY Store program memory ready62
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
Table 12-5 shows reset and interrupt vectors placement for the various combinations of
BOOTRST and IVSEL settings. If the program never enables an interrupt source, the interrupt
vectors are not used, and regular program code can be placed at these locations. This is also
the case if the reset vector is in the application section while the interrupt vectors are in the boot
section or vice versa.
Note: 1. The boot reset address is shown in Table 27-6 on page 281. For the BOOTRST fuse “1”
means unprogrammed while “0” means programmed.
The most typical and general program setup for the reset and interrupt vector addresses in
ATmega168 is:
Address Labels Code Comments
0x0000 jmp RESET ; Reset Handler
0x0002 jmp EXT_INT0 ; IRQ0 Handler
0x0004 jmp EXT_INT1 ; IRQ1 Handler
0x0006 jmp PCINT0 ; PCINT0 Handler
0x0008 jmp PCINT1 ; PCINT1 Handler
0x000A jmp PCINT2 ; PCINT2 Handler
0x000C jmp WDT ; Watchdog Timer Handler
0x000E jmp TIM2_COMPA ; Timer2 Compare A Handler
0x0010 jmp TIM2_COMPB ; Timer2 Compare B Handler
0x0012 jmp TIM2_OVF ; Timer2 Overflow Handler
0x0014 jmp TIM1_CAPT ; Timer1 Capture Handler
0x0016 jmp TIM1_COMPA ; Timer1 Compare A Handler
0x0018 jmp TIM1_COMPB ; Timer1 Compare B Handler
0x001A jmp TIM1_OVF ; Timer1 Overflow Handler
0x001C jmp TIM0_COMPA ; Timer0 Compare A Handler
0x001E jmp TIM0_COMPB ; Timer0 Compare B Handler
0x0020 jmp TIM0_OVF ; Timer0 Overflow Handler
0x0022 jmp SPI_STC ; SPI Transfer Complete Handler
0x0024 jmp USART_RXC ; USART, RX Complete Handler
0x0026 jmp USART_UDRE ; USART, UDR Empty Handler
0x0028 jmp USART_TXC ; USART, TX Complete Handler
0x002A jmp ADC ; ADC Conversion Complete Handler
0x002C jmp EE_RDY ; EEPROM Ready Handler
0x002E jmp ANA_COMP ; Analog Comparator Handler
0x0030 jmp TWI ; 2-wire Serial Interface Handler
0x0032 jmp SPM_RDY ; Store Program Memory Ready Handler
;
0x0033RESET: ldi r16, high(RAMEND); Main program start
Table 12-5. Reset and interrupt vectors placement in Atmel ATmega168(1).
BOOTRST IVSEL Reset address Interrupt vectors start address
1 0 0x000 0x001
1 1 0x000 Boot reset address + 0x0002
0 0 Boot reset address 0x001
0 1 Boot reset address Boot reset address + 0x000263
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
0x0034 out SPH,r16 ; Set Stack Pointer to top of RAM
0x0035 ldi r16, low(RAMEND)
0x0036 out SPL,r16
0x0037 sei ; Enable interrupts
0x0038 xxx
... ... ... ...
When the BOOTRST fuse is unprogrammed, the boot section size set to 2Kbytes and the IVSEL
bit in the MCUCR Register is set before any interrupts are enabled, the most typical and general
program setup for the reset and interrupt vector addresses in Atmel ATmega168 is:
Address Labels Code Comments
0x0000 RESET: ldi r16,high(RAMEND); Main program start
0x0001 out SPH,r16 ; Set Stack Pointer to top of RAM
0x0002 ldi r16,low(RAMEND)
0x0003 out SPL,r16
0x0004 sei ; Enable interrupts
0x0005 xxx
;
.org 0xC02
0x1C02 jmp EXT_INT0 ; IRQ0 Handler
0x1C04 jmp EXT_INT1 ; IRQ1 Handler
... ... ... ;
0x1C32 jmp SPM_RDY ; Store Program Memory Ready Handler
When the BOOTRST fuse is programmed and the boot section size set to 2Kbytes, the most
typical and general program setup for the reset and interrupt vector addresses in ATmega168 is:
Address Labels Code Comments
.org 0x0002
0x0002 jmp EXT_INT0 ; IRQ0 Handler
0x0004 jmp EXT_INT1 ; IRQ1 Handler
... ... ... ;
0x0032 jmp SPM_RDY ; Store Program Memory Ready Handler
;
.org 0x1C00
0x1C00 RESET: ldi r16,high(RAMEND); Main program start
0x1C01 out SPH,r16 ; Set Stack Pointer to top of RAM
0x1C02 ldi r16,low(RAMEND)
0x1C03 out SPL,r16
0x1C04 sei ; Enable interrupts
0x1C05 xxx
When the BOOTRST fuse is programmed, the boot section size set to 2Kbytes and the IVSEL
bit in the MCUCR register is set before any interrupts are enabled, the most typical and general
program setup for the reset and interrupt vector addresses in ATmega168 is:64
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
Address Labels Code Comments
;
.org 0x1C00
0x1C00 jmp RESET ; Reset handler
0x1C02 jmp EXT_INT0 ; IRQ0 Handler
0x1C04 jmp EXT_INT1 ; IRQ1 Handler
... ... ... ;
0x1C32 jmp SPM_RDY ; Store Program Memory Ready Handler
;
0x1C33 RESET: ldi r16,high(RAMEND); Main program start
0x1C34 out SPH,r16 ; Set Stack Pointer to top of RAM
0x1C35 ldi r16,low(RAMEND)
0x1C36 out SPL,r16
0x1C37 sei ; Enable interrupts
0x1C38 xxx
12.4.1 Moving interrupts between application and boot space, Atmel ATmega88 and Atmel ATmega168
The MCU control register controls the placement of the interrupt vector table.
12.5 Register description
12.5.1 MCUCR – MCU control register
• Bit 1 – IVSEL: Interrupt vector select
When the IVSEL bit is cleared (zero), the interrupt vectors are placed at the start of the flash
memory. When this bit is set (one), the interrupt vectors are moved to the beginning of the boot
loader section of the flash. The actual address of the start of the boot flash section is determined
by the BOOTSZ fuses. Refer to the section “Boot loader support – Read-while-write self-programming,
Atmel ATmega88 and Atmel ATmega168” on page 269 for details. To avoid
unintentional changes of interrupt vector tables, a special write procedure must be followed to
change the IVSEL bit:
a. Write the interrupt vector change enable (IVCE) bit to one.
b. Within four cycles, write the desired value to IVSEL while writing a zero to IVCE.
Interrupts will automatically be disabled while this sequence is executed. Interrupts are disabled
in the cycle IVCE is set, and they remain disabled until after the instruction following the write to
IVSEL. If IVSEL is not written, interrupts remain disabled for four cycles. The I-bit in the status
register is unaffected by the automatic disabling.
Note: If interrupt vectors are placed in the boot loader section and boot lock bit BLB02 is programmed,
interrupts are disabled while executing from the Application section. If interrupt vectors are placed
in the Application section and boot lock bit BLB12 is programmed, interrupts are disabled while
executing from the Boot Loader section. Refer to the section “Boot loader support – Read-whilewrite
self-programming, Atmel ATmega88 and Atmel ATmega168” on page 269 for details on
Boot Lock bits.
This bit is not available in Atmel ATmega48.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x35 (0x55) – – – PUD – – IVSEL IVCE MCUCR
Read/write R R R R/W R R R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 065
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
• Bit 0 – IVCE: Interrupt vector change enable
The IVCE bit must be written to logic one to enable change of the IVSEL bit. IVCE is cleared by
hardware four cycles after it is written or when IVSEL is written. Setting the IVCE bit will disable
interrupts, as explained in the IVSEL description above. See code example below.
This bit is not available in Atmel ATmega48.
Assembly code example
Move_interrupts:
; Get MCUCR
in r16, MCUCR
mov r17, r16
; Enable change of Interrupt Vectors
ori r16, (1< CSn2:0 > 1). The number of system clock
cycles from when the timer is enabled to the first count occurs can be from 1 to N+1 system
clock cycles, where N equals the prescaler divisor (8, 64, 256, or 1024).
It is possible to use the prescaler reset for synchronizing the Timer/Counter to program execution.
However, care must be taken if the other Timer/Counter that shares the same prescaler
also uses prescaling. A prescaler reset will affect the prescaler period for all Timer/Counters it is
connected to.
17.0.3 External clock source
An external clock source applied to the T1/T0 pin can be used as Timer/Counter clock
(clkT1/clkT0). The T1/T0 pin is sampled once every system clock cycle by the pin synchronization
logic. The synchronized (sampled) signal is then passed through the edge detector. Figure 17-1
shows a functional equivalent block diagram of the T1/T0 synchronization and edge detector
logic. The registers are clocked at the positive edge of the internal system clock (clkI/O). The latch
is transparent in the high period of the internal system clock.
The edge detector generates one clkT1/clkT0 pulse for each positive (CSn2:0 = 7) or negative
(CSn2:0 = 6) edge it detects.
Figure 17-1. T1/T0 pin sampling.
The synchronization and edge detector logic introduces a delay of 2.5 to 3.5 system clock cycles
from an edge has been applied to the T1/T0 pin to the counter is updated.
Tn_sync
(to clock
select logic)
Synchronization Edge detector
D Q D Q
LE
Tn D Q
clkI/O138
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
Enabling and disabling of the clock input must be done when T1/T0 has been stable for at least
one system clock cycle, otherwise it is a risk that a false Timer/Counter clock pulse is generated.
Each half period of the external clock applied must be longer than one system clock cycle to
ensure correct sampling. The external clock must be guaranteed to have less than half the system
clock frequency (fExtClk < fclk_I/O/2) given a 50/50% duty cycle. Since the edge detector uses
sampling, the maximum frequency of an external clock it can detect is half the sampling frequency
(Nyquist sampling theorem). However, due to variation of the system clock frequency
and duty cycle caused by Oscillator source (crystal, resonator, and capacitors) tolerances, it is
recommended that maximum frequency of an external clock source is less than fclk_I/O/2.5.
An external clock source can not be prescaled.
Figure 17-2. Prescaler for timer/counter0 and timer/counter1(1).
Note: 1. The synchronization logic on the input pins (T1/T0) is shown in Figure 17-1 on page 137.
PSRSYNC
Clear
clkT1 clkT0
T1
T0
clkI/O
Synchronization
Synchronization139
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
17.1 Register description
17.1.1 GTCCR – General timer/counter control register
• Bit 7 – TSM: Timer/counter synchronization mode
Writing the TSM bit to one activates the Timer/Counter Synchronization mode. In this mode, the
value that is written to the PSRASY and PSRSYNC bits is kept, hence keeping the corresponding
prescaler reset signals asserted. This ensures that the corresponding Timer/Counters are
halted and can be configured to the same value without the risk of one of them advancing during
configuration. When the TSM bit is written to zero, the PSRASY and PSRSYNC bits are cleared
by hardware, and the Timer/Counters start counting simultaneously.
• Bit 0 – PSRSYNC: Prescaler reset
When this bit is one, Timer/Counter1 and Timer/Counter0 prescaler will be Reset. This bit is normally
cleared immediately by hardware, except if the TSM bit is set. Note that Timer/Counter1
and Timer/Counter0 share the same prescaler and a reset of this prescaler will affect both
timers.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x23 (0x43) TSM – – – – – PSRASY PSRSYNC GTCCR
Read/write R/W R R R R R R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0140
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
18. 8-bit Timer/Counter2 with PWM and asynchronous operation
18.1 Features • Single channel counter
• Clear timer on compare match (auto reload)
• Glitch-free, phase correct pulse width modulator (PWM)
• Frequency generator
• 10-bit clock prescaler
• Overflow and compare match interrupt sources (TOV2, OCF2A and OCF2B)
• Allows clocking from external 32kHz watch crystal independent of the I/O clock
18.2 Overview
Timer/Counter2 is a general purpose, single channel, 8-bit Timer/Counter module. A simplified
block diagram of the 8-bit Timer/Counter is shown in Figure 18-1. For the actual placement of
I/O pins, refer to “Pinout Atmel ATmega48/88/168.” on page 2. CPU accessible I/O Registers,
including I/O bits and I/O pins, are shown in bold. The device-specific I/O Register and bit locations
are listed in the “Register description” on page 153.
The PRTIM2 bit in “Minimizing power consumption” on page 41 must be written to zero to enable
Timer/Counter2 module.
Figure 18-1. 8-bit timer/counter block diagram.
Clock select
Timer/counter
DATA BUS
OCRnA
OCRnB
=
=
TCNTn
Waveform
generation
Waveform
generation
OCnA
OCnB
=
Fixed
TOP
value
Control logic
= 0
TOP BOTTOM
Count
Clear
Direction
TOVn
(Int.req.)
OCnA
(Int.req.)
OCnB
(Int.req.)
TCCRnA TCCRnB
Tn Edge
detector
(From prescaler)
clkTn141
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
18.2.1 Registers
The Timer/Counter (TCNT2) and Output Compare Register (OCR2A and OCR2B) are 8-bit registers.
Interrupt request (shorten as Int.Req.) signals are all visible in the Timer Interrupt Flag
Register (TIFR2). All interrupts are individually masked with the Timer Interrupt Mask Register
(TIMSK2). TIFR2 and TIMSK2 are not shown in the figure.
The Timer/Counter can be clocked internally, via the prescaler, or asynchronously clocked from
the TOSC1/2 pins, as detailed later in this section. The asynchronous operation is controlled by
the Asynchronous Status Register (ASSR). The Clock Select logic block controls which clock
source he Timer/Counter uses to increment (or decrement) its value. The Timer/Counter is inactive
when no clock source is selected. The output from the Clock Select logic is referred to as the
timer clock (clkT2).
The double buffered Output Compare Register (OCR2A and OCR2B) are compared with the
Timer/Counter value at all times. The result of the compare can be used by the Waveform Generator
to generate a PWM or variable frequency output on the Output Compare pins (OC2A and
OC2B). See “Output compare unit” on page 142. for details. The compare match event will also
set the Compare Flag (OCF2A or OCF2B) which can be used to generate an Output Compare
interrupt request.
18.2.2 Definitions
Many register and bit references in this document are written in general form. A lower case “n”
replaces the Timer/Counter number, in this case 2. However, when using the register or bit
defines in a program, the precise form must be used, that is, TCNT2 for accessing
Timer/Counter2 counter value and so on.
The definitions in Table 18-1 are also used extensively throughout the section.
18.3 Timer/counter clock sources
The Timer/Counter can be clocked by an internal synchronous or an external asynchronous
clock source. The clock source clkT2 is by default equal to the MCU clock, clkI/O. When the AS2
bit in the ASSR Register is written to logic one, the clock source is taken from the Timer/Counter
Oscillator connected to TOSC1 and TOSC2. For details on asynchronous operation, see “ASSR
– Asynchronous status register” on page 159. For details on clock sources and prescaler, see
“Timer/counter prescaler” on page 152.
18.4 Counter unit
The main part of the 8-bit Timer/Counter is the programmable bi-directional counter unit. Figure
18-2 on page 142 shows a block diagram of the counter and its surrounding environment.
Table 18-1. Definitions.
BOTTOM The counter reaches the BOTTOM when it becomes zero (0x00).
MAX The counter reaches its MAXimum when it becomes 0xFF (decimal 255).
TOP The counter reaches the TOP when it becomes equal to the highest value in the
count sequence. The TOP value can be assigned to be the fixed value 0xFF
(MAX) or the value stored in the OCR2A Register. The assignment is dependent
on the mode of operation.142
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
Figure 18-2. Counter unit block diagram.
Signal description (internal signals):
count Increment or decrement TCNT2 by 1.
direction Selects between increment and decrement.
clear Clear TCNT2 (set all bits to zero).
clkTn Timer/Counter clock, referred to as clkT2 in the following.
top Signalizes that TCNT2 has reached maximum value.
bottom Signalizes that TCNT2 has reached minimum value (zero).
Depending on the mode of operation used, the counter is cleared, incremented, or decremented
at each timer clock (clkT2). clkT2 can be generated from an external or internal clock source,
selected by the Clock Select bits (CS22:0). When no clock source is selected (CS22:0 = 0) the
timer is stopped. However, the TCNT2 value can be accessed by the CPU, regardless of
whether clkT2 is present or not. A CPU write overrides (has priority over) all counter clear or
count operations.
The counting sequence is determined by the setting of the WGM21 and WGM20 bits located in
the Timer/Counter Control Register (TCCR2A) and the WGM22 located in the Timer/Counter
Control Register B (TCCR2B). There are close connections between how the counter behaves
(counts) and how waveforms are generated on the Output Compare outputs OC2A and OC2B.
For more details about advanced counting sequences and waveform generation, see “Modes of
operation” on page 145.
The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV2) is set according to the mode of operation selected by
the WGM22:0 bits. TOV2 can be used for generating a CPU interrupt.
18.5 Output compare unit
The 8-bit comparator continuously compares TCNT2 with the Output Compare Register
(OCR2A and OCR2B). Whenever TCNT2 equals OCR2A or OCR2B, the comparator signals a
match. A match will set the Output Compare Flag (OCF2A or OCF2B) at the next timer clock
cycle. If the corresponding interrupt is enabled, the Output Compare Flag generates an Output
Compare interrupt. The Output Compare Flag is automatically cleared when the interrupt is executed.
Alternatively, the Output Compare Flag can be cleared by software by writing a logical
one to its I/O bit location. The Waveform Generator uses the match signal to generate an output
according to operating mode set by the WGM22:0 bits and Compare Output mode (COM2x1:0)
bits. The max and bottom signals are used by the Waveform Generator for handling the special
cases of the extreme values in some modes of operation (“Modes of operation” on page 145).
Figure 18-3 on page 143 shows a block diagram of the Output Compare unit.
DATA BUS
TCNTn Control logic
count
TOVn
(Int.req.)
bottom top
direction
clear
TOSC1
T/C
oscillator
TOSC2
Prescaler
clkI/O
clk Tn143
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
Figure 18-3. Output compare unit, block diagram.
The OCR2x Register is double buffered when using any of the Pulse Width Modulation (PWM)
modes. For the Normal and Clear Timer on Compare (CTC) modes of operation, the double
buffering is disabled. The double buffering synchronizes the update of the OCR2x Compare
Register to either top or bottom of the counting sequence. The synchronization prevents the
occurrence of odd-length, non-symmetrical PWM pulses, thereby making the output glitch-free.
The OCR2x Register access may seem complex, but this is not case. When the double buffering
is enabled, the CPU has access to the OCR2x Buffer Register, and if double buffering is disabled
the CPU will access the OCR2x directly.
18.5.1 Force output compare
In non-PWM waveform generation modes, the match output of the comparator can be forced by
writing a one to the Force Output Compare (FOC2x) bit. Forcing compare match will not set the
OCF2x Flag or reload/clear the timer, but the OC2x pin will be updated as if a real compare
match had occurred (the COM2x1:0 bits settings define whether the OC2x pin is set, cleared or
toggled).
18.5.2 Compare match blocking by TCNT2 write
All CPU write operations to the TCNT2 Register will block any compare match that occurs in the
next timer clock cycle, even when the timer is stopped. This feature allows OCR2x to be initialized
to the same value as TCNT2 without triggering an interrupt when the Timer/Counter clock is
enabled.
18.5.3 Using the output compare unit
Since writing TCNT2 in any mode of operation will block all compare matches for one timer clock
cycle, there are risks involved when changing TCNT2 when using the Output Compare channel,
independently of whether the Timer/Counter is running or not. If the value written to TCNT2
equals the OCR2x value, the compare match will be missed, resulting in incorrect waveform
generation. Similarly, do not write the TCNT2 value equal to BOTTOM when the counter is
downcounting.
OCFnx (int.req.)
= (8-bit comparator)
OCRnx
OCnx
DATA BUS
TCNTn
WGMn1:0
Waveform generator
top
FOCn
COMnX1:0
bottom144
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
The setup of the OC2x should be performed before setting the Data Direction Register for the
port pin to output. The easiest way of setting the OC2x value is to use the Force Output Compare
(FOC2x) strobe bit in Normal mode. The OC2x Register keeps its value even when
changing between Waveform Generation modes.
Be aware that the COM2x1:0 bits are not double buffered together with the compare value.
Changing the COM2x1:0 bits will take effect immediately.
18.6 Compare match output unit
The Compare Output mode (COM2x1:0) bits have two functions. The Waveform Generator uses
the COM2x1:0 bits for defining the Output Compare (OC2x) state at the next compare match.
Also, the COM2x1:0 bits control the OC2x pin output source. Figure 18-4 shows a simplified
schematic of the logic affected by the COM2x1:0 bit setting. The I/O Registers, I/O bits, and I/O
pins in the figure are shown in bold. Only the parts of the general I/O Port Control Registers
(DDR and PORT) that are affected by the COM2x1:0 bits are shown. When referring to the
OC2x state, the reference is for the internal OC2x Register, not the OC2x pin.
Figure 18-4. Compare match output unit, schematic.
The general I/O port function is overridden by the Output Compare (OC2x) from the Waveform
Generator if either of the COM2x1:0 bits are set. However, the OC2x pin direction (input or output)
is still controlled by the Data Direction Register (DDR) for the port pin. The Data Direction
Register bit for the OC2x pin (DDR_OC2x) must be set as output before the OC2x value is visible
on the pin. The port override function is independent of the Waveform Generation mode.
The design of the Output Compare pin logic allows initialization of the OC2x state before the output
is enabled. Note that some COM2x1:0 bit settings are reserved for certain modes of
operation. See “Register description” on page 153.
PORT
DDR
D Q
D Q
OCnx
OCnx pin
D Q Waveform
generator
COMnx1
COMnx0
0
1
DATA BUS
FOCnx
clkI/O145
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
18.6.1 Compare output mode and waveform generation
The Waveform Generator uses the COM2x1:0 bits differently in normal, CTC, and PWM modes.
For all modes, setting the COM2x1:0 = 0 tells the Waveform Generator that no action on the
OC2x Register is to be performed on the next compare match. For compare output actions in the
non-PWM modes refer to Table 18-5 on page 154. For fast PWM mode, refer to Table 18-6 on
page 155, and for phase correct PWM refer to Table 18-7 on page 155.
A change of the COM2x1:0 bits state will have effect at the first compare match after the bits are
written. For non-PWM modes, the action can be forced to have immediate effect by using the
FOC2x strobe bits.
18.7 Modes of operation
The mode of operation, that is, the behavior of the Timer/Counter and the Output Compare pins,
is defined by the combination of the Waveform Generation mode (WGM22:0) and Compare Output
mode (COM2x1:0) bits. The Compare Output mode bits do not affect the counting sequence,
while the Waveform Generation mode bits do. The COM2x1:0 bits control whether the PWM output
generated should be inverted or not (inverted or non-inverted PWM). For non-PWM modes
the COM2x1:0 bits control whether the output should be set, cleared, or toggled at a compare
match (See “Compare match output unit” on page 144.).
For detailed timing information refer to “Timer/counter timing diagrams” on page 149.
18.7.1 Normal mode
The simplest mode of operation is the Normal mode (WGM22:0 = 0). In this mode the counting
direction is always up (incrementing), and no counter clear is performed. The counter simply
overruns when it passes its maximum 8-bit value (TOP = 0xFF) and then restarts from the bottom
(0x00). In normal operation the Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV2) will be set in the same
timer clock cycle as the TCNT2 becomes zero. The TOV2 Flag in this case behaves like a ninth
bit, except that it is only set, not cleared. However, combined with the timer overflow interrupt
that automatically clears the TOV2 Flag, the timer resolution can be increased by software.
There are no special cases to consider in the Normal mode, a new counter value can be written
anytime.
The Output Compare unit can be used to generate interrupts at some given time. Using the Output
Compare to generate waveforms in Normal mode is not recommended, since this will
occupy too much of the CPU time.
18.7.2 Clear timer on compare match (CTC) mode
In Clear Timer on Compare or CTC mode (WGM22:0 = 2), the OCR2A Register is used to
manipulate the counter resolution. In CTC mode the counter is cleared to zero when the counter
value (TCNT2) matches the OCR2A. The OCR2A defines the top value for the counter, hence
also its resolution. This mode allows greater control of the compare match output frequency. It
also simplifies the operation of counting external events.
The timing diagram for the CTC mode is shown in Figure 18-5 on page 146. The counter value
(TCNT2) increases until a compare match occurs between TCNT2 and OCR2A, and then counter
(TCNT2) is cleared.146
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
Figure 18-5. CTC mode, timing diagram.
An interrupt can be generated each time the counter value reaches the TOP value by using the
OCF2A Flag. If the interrupt is enabled, the interrupt handler routine can be used for updating
the TOP value. However, changing TOP to a value close to BOTTOM when the counter is running
with none or a low prescaler value must be done with care since the CTC mode does not
have the double buffering feature. If the new value written to OCR2A is lower than the current
value of TCNT2, the counter will miss the compare match. The counter will then have to count to
its maximum value (0xFF) and wrap around starting at 0x00 before the compare match can
occur.
For generating a waveform output in CTC mode, the OC2A output can be set to toggle its logical
level on each compare match by setting the Compare Output mode bits to toggle mode
(COM2A1:0 = 1). The OC2A value will not be visible on the port pin unless the data direction for
the pin is set to output. The waveform generated will have a maximum frequency of fOC2A =
fclk_I/O/2 when OCR2A is set to zero (0x00). The waveform frequency is defined by the following
equation:
The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 32, 64, 128, 256, or 1024).
As for the normal mode of operation, the TOV2 Flag is set in the same timer clock cycle that the
counter counts from MAX to 0x00.
18.7.3 Fast PWM mode
The fast Pulse Width Modulation or fast PWM mode (WGM22:0 = 3 or 7) provides a high frequency
PWM waveform generation option. The fast PWM differs from the other PWM option by
its single-slope operation. The counter counts from BOTTOM to TOP then restarts from BOTTOM.
TOP is defined as 0xFF when WGM2:0 = 3, and OCR2A when MGM2:0 = 7. In noninverting
Compare Output mode, the Output Compare (OC2x) is cleared on the compare match
between TCNT2 and OCR2x, and set at BOTTOM. In inverting Compare Output mode, the output
is set on compare match and cleared at BOTTOM. Due to the single-slope operation, the
operating frequency of the fast PWM mode can be twice as high as the phase correct PWM
mode that uses dual-slope operation. This high frequency makes the fast PWM mode well suited
for power regulation, rectification, and DAC applications. High frequency allows physically small
sized external components (coils, capacitors), and therefore reduces total system cost.
TCNTn
OCnx
(toggle)
OCnx interrupt flag set
Period 1 2 3 4
(COMnx1:0 = 1)
f
OCnx
f
clk_I/O
2 ⋅ ⋅ N ( ) 1 + OCRnx = -------------------------------------------------147
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
In fast PWM mode, the counter is incremented until the counter value matches the TOP value.
The counter is then cleared at the following timer clock cycle. The timing diagram for the fast
PWM mode is shown in Figure 18-6. The TCNT2 value is in the timing diagram shown as a histogram
for illustrating the single-slope operation. The diagram includes non-inverted and
inverted PWM outputs. The small horizontal line marks on the TCNT2 slopes represent compare
matches between OCR2x and TCNT2.
Figure 18-6. Fast PWM mode, timing diagram.
The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV2) is set each time the counter reaches TOP. If the interrupt
is enabled, the interrupt handler routine can be used for updating the compare value.
In fast PWM mode, the compare unit allows generation of PWM waveforms on the OC2x pin.
Setting the COM2x1:0 bits to two will produce a non-inverted PWM and an inverted PWM output
can be generated by setting the COM2x1:0 to three. TOP is defined as 0xFF when WGM2:0 = 3,
and OCR2A when MGM2:0 = 7. (See Table 18-3 on page 154). The actual OC2x value will only
be visible on the port pin if the data direction for the port pin is set as output. The PWM waveform
is generated by setting (or clearing) the OC2x Register at the compare match between
OCR2x and TCNT2, and clearing (or setting) the OC2x Register at the timer clock cycle the
counter is cleared (changes from TOP to BOTTOM).
The PWM frequency for the output can be calculated by the following equation:
The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 32, 64, 128, 256, or 1024).
The extreme values for the OCR2A Register represent special cases when generating a PWM
waveform output in the fast PWM mode. If the OCR2A is set equal to BOTTOM, the output will
be a narrow spike for each MAX+1 timer clock cycle. Setting the OCR2A equal to MAX will result
in a constantly high or low output (depending on the polarity of the output set by the COM2A1:0
bits.)
A frequency (with 50% duty cycle) waveform output in fast PWM mode can be achieved by setting
OC2x to toggle its logical level on each compare match (COM2x1:0 = 1). The waveform
TCNTn
OCRnx update and
TOVn interrupt flag set
Period 1 2 3
OCnx
OCnx
(COMnx1:0 = 2)
(COMnx1:0 = 3)
OCRnx interrupt flag set
4 5 6 7
f
OCnxPWM
f
clk_I/O
N ⋅ 256 = ------------------148
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
generated will have a maximum frequency of foc2 = fclk_I/O/2 when OCR2A is set to zero. This feature
is similar to the OC2A toggle in CTC mode, except the double buffer feature of the Output
Compare unit is enabled in the fast PWM mode.
18.7.4 Phase correct PWM mode
The phase correct PWM mode (WGM22:0 = 1 or 5) provides a high resolution phase correct
PWM waveform generation option. The phase correct PWM mode is based on a dual-slope
operation. The counter counts repeatedly from BOTTOM to TOP and then from TOP to BOTTOM.
TOP is defined as 0xFF when WGM2:0 = 3, and OCR2A when MGM2:0 = 7. In noninverting
Compare Output mode, the Output Compare (OC2x) is cleared on the compare match
between TCNT2 and OCR2x while upcounting, and set on the compare match while downcounting.
In inverting Output Compare mode, the operation is inverted. The dual-slope operation has
lower maximum operation frequency than single slope operation. However, due to the symmetric
feature of the dual-slope PWM modes, these modes are preferred for motor control
applications.
In phase correct PWM mode the counter is incremented until the counter value matches TOP.
When the counter reaches TOP, it changes the count direction. The TCNT2 value will be equal
to TOP for one timer clock cycle. The timing diagram for the phase correct PWM mode is shown
on Figure 18-7. The TCNT2 value is in the timing diagram shown as a histogram for illustrating
the dual-slope operation. The diagram includes non-inverted and inverted PWM outputs. The
small horizontal line marks on the TCNT2 slopes represent compare matches between OCR2x
and TCNT2.
Figure 18-7. Phase correct PWM mode, timing diagram.
The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV2) is set each time the counter reaches BOTTOM. The
Interrupt Flag can be used to generate an interrupt each time the counter reaches the BOTTOM
value.
In phase correct PWM mode, the compare unit allows generation of PWM waveforms on the
OC2x pin. Setting the COM2x1:0 bits to two will produce a non-inverted PWM. An inverted PWM
TOVn interrupt flag set
OCnx interrupt flag set
1 2 3
TCNTn
Period
OCnx
OCnx
(COMnx1:0 = 2)
(COMnx1:0 = 3)
OCRnx update149
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
output can be generated by setting the COM2x1:0 to three. TOP is defined as 0xFF when
WGM2:0 = 3, and OCR2A when MGM2:0 = 7 (See Table 18-4 on page 154). The actual OC2x
value will only be visible on the port pin if the data direction for the port pin is set as output. The
PWM waveform is generated by clearing (or setting) the OC2x Register at the compare match
between OCR2x and TCNT2 when the counter increments, and setting (or clearing) the OC2x
Register at compare match between OCR2x and TCNT2 when the counter decrements. The
PWM frequency for the output when using phase correct PWM can be calculated by the following
equation:
The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 32, 64, 128, 256, or 1024).
The extreme values for the OCR2A Register represent special cases when generating a PWM
waveform output in the phase correct PWM mode. If the OCR2A is set equal to BOTTOM, the
output will be continuously low and if set equal to MAX the output will be continuously high for
non-inverted PWM mode. For inverted PWM the output will have the opposite logic values.
At the very start of period 2 in Figure 18-7 on page 148 OCnx has a transition from high to low
even though there is no Compare Match. The point of this transition is to guarantee symmetry
around BOTTOM. There are two cases that give a transition without Compare Match.
• OCR2A changes its value from MAX, like in Figure 18-7 on page 148. When the OCR2A value
is MAX the OCn pin value is the same as the result of a down-counting compare match. To
ensure symmetry around BOTTOM the OCn value at MAX must correspond to the result of an
up-counting Compare Match
• The timer starts counting from a value higher than the one in OCR2A, and for that reason
misses the Compare Match and hence the OCn change that would have happened on the way
up
18.8 Timer/counter timing diagrams
The following figures show the Timer/Counter in synchronous mode, and the timer clock (clkT2)
is therefore shown as a clock enable signal. In asynchronous mode, clkI/O should be replaced by
the Timer/Counter Oscillator clock. The figures include information on when Interrupt Flags are
set. Figure 18-8 contains timing data for basic Timer/Counter operation. The figure shows the
count sequence close to the MAX value in all modes other than phase correct PWM mode.
Figure 18-8. Timer/counter timing diagram, no prescaling.
Figure 18-9 on page 150 shows the same timing data, but with the prescaler enabled.
f
OCnxPCPWM
f
clk_I/O
N ⋅ 510 = ------------------
clkTn
(clkI/O/1)
TOVn
clkI/O
TCNTn MAX - 1 MAX BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1150
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
Figure 18-9. Timer/counter timing diagram, with prescaler (fclk_I/O/8).
Figure 18-10 shows the setting of OCF2A in all modes except CTC mode.
Figure 18-10. Timer/counter timing diagram, setting of OCF2A, with prescaler (fclk_I/O/8).
Figure 18-11 shows the setting of OCF2A and the clearing of TCNT2 in CTC mode.
Figure 18-11. Timer/counter timing diagram, clear timer on compare match mode, with prescaler
(fclk_I/O/8).
TOVn
TCNTn MAX - 1 MAX BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1
clkI/O
clkTn
(clkI/O/8)
OCFnx
OCRnx
TCNTn
OCRnx value
OCRnx - 1 OCRnx OCRnx + 1 OCRnx + 2
clkI/O
clkTn
(clkI/O/8)
OCFnx
OCRnx
TCNTn
(CTC)
TOP
TOP - 1 TOP BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1
clkI/O
clkTn
(clkI/O/8)151
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
18.9 Asynchronous operation of Timer/Counter2
When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously, some considerations must be taken.
• Warning: When switching between asynchronous and synchronous clocking of
Timer/Counter2, the Timer Registers TCNT2, OCR2x, and TCCR2x might be corrupted. A safe
procedure for switching clock source is:
a. Disable the Timer/Counter2 interrupts by clearing OCIE2x and TOIE2.
b. Select clock source by setting AS2 as appropriate.
c. Write new values to TCNT2, OCR2x, and TCCR2x.
d. To switch to asynchronous operation: Wait for TCN2xUB, OCR2xUB, and TCR2xUB.
e. Clear the Timer/Counter2 Interrupt Flags.
f. Enable interrupts, if needed.
• The CPU main clock frequency must be more than four times the Oscillator frequency
• When writing to one of the registers TCNT2, OCR2x, or TCCR2x, the value is transferred to a
temporary register, and latched after two positive edges on TOSC1. The user should not write
a new value before the contents of the temporary register have been transferred to its
destination. Each of the five mentioned registers have their individual temporary register, which
means that, for example, writing to TCNT2 does not disturb an OCR2x write in progress. To
detect that a transfer to the destination register has taken place, the Asynchronous Status
Register – ASSR has been implemented
• When entering Power-save or ADC Noise Reduction mode after having written to TCNT2,
OCR2x, or TCCR2x, the user must wait until the written register has been updated if
Timer/Counter2 is used to wake up the device. Otherwise, the MCU will enter sleep mode
before the changes are effective. This is particularly important if any of the Output Compare2
interrupt is used to wake up the device, since the Output Compare function is disabled during
writing to OCR2x or TCNT2. If the write cycle is not finished, and the MCU enters sleep mode
before the corresponding OCR2xUB bit returns to zero, the device will never receive a
compare match interrupt, and the MCU will not wake up
• If Timer/Counter2 is used to wake the device up from Power-save or ADC Noise Reduction
mode, precautions must be taken if the user wants to re-enter one of these modes: If reentering
sleep mode within the TOSC1 cycle, the interrupt will immidiately occur and the
device wake up again. The result is multiple interrupts and wake-ups within one TOSC1 cycle
from the first interrupt. If the user is in doubt whether the time before re-entering Power-save or
ADC Noise Reduction mode is sufficient, the following algorithm can be used to ensure that
one TOSC1 cycle has elapsed:
a. Write a value to TCCR2x, TCNT2, or OCR2x.
b. Wait until the corresponding Update Busy Flag in ASSR returns to zero.
c. Enter Power-save or ADC Noise Reduction mode.
• When the asynchronous operation is selected, the 32.768kHz Oscillator for Timer/Counter2 is
always running, except in Power-down and Standby modes. After a Power-up Reset or wakeup
from Power-down or Standby mode, the user should be aware of the fact that this Oscillator
might take as long as one second to stabilize. The user is advised to wait for at least one
second before using Timer/Counter2 after power-up or wake-up from Power-down or Standby
mode. The contents of all Timer/Counter2 Registers must be considered lost after a wake-up
from Power-down or Standby mode due to unstable clock signal upon start-up, no matter
whether the Oscillator is in use or a clock signal is applied to the TOSC1 pin152
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
• Description of wake up from Power-save or ADC Noise Reduction mode when the timer is
clocked asynchronously: When the interrupt condition is met, the wake up process is started
on the following cycle of the timer clock, that is, the timer is always advanced by at least one
before the processor can read the counter value. After wake-up, the MCU is halted for four
cycles, it executes the interrupt routine, and resumes execution from the instruction following
SLEEP
• Reading of the TCNT2 Register shortly after wake-up from Power-save may give an incorrect
result. Since TCNT2 is clocked on the asynchronous TOSC clock, reading TCNT2 must be
done through a register synchronized to the internal I/O clock domain. Synchronization takes
place for every rising TOSC1 edge. When waking up from Power-save mode, and the I/O clock
(clkI/O) again becomes active, TCNT2 will read as the previous value (before entering sleep)
until the next rising TOSC1 edge. The phase of the TOSC clock after waking up from Powersave
mode is essentially unpredictable, as it depends on the wake-up time. The recommended
procedure for reading TCNT2 is thus as follows:
a. Write any value to either of the registers OCR2x or TCCR2x.
b. Wait for the corresponding Update Busy Flag to be cleared.
c. Read TCNT2.
During asynchronous operation, the synchronization of the Interrupt Flags for the asynchronous
timer takes 3 processor cycles plus one timer cycle. The timer is therefore advanced by at least
one before the processor can read the timer value causing the setting of the Interrupt Flag. The
Output Compare pin is changed on the timer clock and is not synchronized to the processor
clock.
18.10 Timer/counter prescaler
Figure 18-12. Prescaler for Timer/Counter2.
10-BIT T/C PRESCALER
TIMER/COUNTER2 CLOCK SOURCE
clkI/O clkT2S
TOSC1
AS2
CS20
CS21
CS22
clkT2S/8
clkT2S/64
clkT2S/128
clkT2S/1024
clkT2S/256
clkT2S/32
PSRASY 0
Clear
clkT2153
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
The clock source for Timer/Counter2 is named clkT2S. clkT2S is by default connected to the main
system I/O clock clkIO. By setting the AS2 bit in ASSR, Timer/Counter2 is asynchronously
clocked from the TOSC1 pin. This enables use of Timer/Counter2 as a Real Time Counter
(RTC). When AS2 is set, pins TOSC1 and TOSC2 are disconnected from Port C. A crystal can
then be connected between the TOSC1 and TOSC2 pins to serve as an independent clock
source for Timer/Counter2. The Oscillator is optimized for use with a 32.768kHz crystal.
For Timer/Counter2, the possible prescaled selections are: clkT2S/8, clkT2S/32, clkT2S/64,
clkT2S/128, clkT2S/256, and clkT2S/1024. Additionally, clkT2S as well as 0 (stop) may be selected.
Setting the PSRASY bit in GTCCR resets the prescaler. This allows the user to operate with a
predictable prescaler.
18.11 Register description
18.11.1 TCCR2A – Timer/counter control register A
• Bits 7:6 – COM2A1:0: Compare match output A mode
These bits control the Output Compare pin (OC2A) behavior. If one or both of the COM2A1:0
bits are set, the OC2A output overrides the normal port functionality of the I/O pin it is connected
to. However, note that the Data Direction Register (DDR) bit corresponding to the OC2A pin
must be set in order to enable the output driver.
When OC2A is connected to the pin, the function of the COM2A1:0 bits depends on the
WGM22:0 bit setting. Table 18-2 shows the COM2A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM22:0 bits
are set to a normal or CTC mode (non-PWM).
Table 18-3 on page 154 shows the COM2A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM21:0 bits are set
to fast PWM mode.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(0xB0) COM2A1 COM2A0 COM2B1 COM2B0 – – WGM21 WGM20 TCCR2A
Read/write R/W R/W R/W R/W R R R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Table 18-2. Compare output mode, non-PWM mode.
COM2A1 COM2A0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC2A disconnected
0 1 Toggle OC2A on compare match
1 0 Clear OC2A on compare match
1 1 Set OC2A on compare match154
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
Note: 1. A special case occurs when OCR2A equals TOP and COM2A1 is set. In this case, the Compare
Match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See “Fast PWM mode” on page 146
for more details.
Table 18-4 shows the COM2A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM22:0 bits are set to phase correct
PWM mode.
Note: 1. A special case occurs when OCR2A equals TOP and COM2A1 is set. In this case, the Compare
Match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See “Phase correct PWM mode” on
page 148 for more details.
• Bits 5:4 – COM2B1:0: Compare match output B mode
These bits control the Output Compare pin (OC2B) behavior. If one or both of the COM2B1:0
bits are set, the OC2B output overrides the normal port functionality of the I/O pin it is connected
to. However, note that the Data Direction Register (DDR) bit corresponding to the OC2B pin
must be set in order to enable the output driver.
When OC2B is connected to the pin, the function of the COM2B1:0 bits depends on the
WGM22:0 bit setting. Table 18-5 shows the COM2B1:0 bit functionality when the WGM22:0 bits
are set to a normal or CTC mode (non-PWM).
Table 18-3. Compare output mode, fast PWM mode(1).
COM2A1 COM2A0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC2A disconnected
0 1 WGM22 = 0: Normal port operation, OC0A disconnected
WGM22 = 1: Toggle OC2A on compare match
1 0 Clear OC2A on compare match, set OC2A at BOTTOM,
(non-inverting mode)
1 1 Set OC2A on compare match, clear OC2A at BOTTOM,
(inverting mode)
Table 18-4. Compare output mode, phase correct PWM Mode(1).
COM2A1 COM2A0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC2A disconnected
0 1 WGM22 = 0: Normal port operation, OC2A disconnected
WGM22 = 1: Toggle OC2A on compare match
1 0 Clear OC2A on compare match when up-counting
Set OC2A on compare match when down-counting
1 1 Set OC2A on compare match when up-counting
Clear OC2A on compare match when down-counting
Table 18-5. Compare output mode, non-PWM mode.
COM2B1 COM2B0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC2B disconnected
0 1 Toggle OC2B on compare match
1 0 Clear OC2B on compare match
1 1 Set OC2B on compare match155
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
Table 18-6 shows the COM2B1:0 bit functionality when the WGM22:0 bits are set to fast PWM
mode.
Note: 1. A special case occurs when OCR2B equals TOP and COM2B1 is set. In this case, the Compare
Match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See “Phase correct PWM mode” on
page 148 for more details.
Table 18-7 shows the COM2B1:0 bit functionality when the WGM22:0 bits are set to phase correct
PWM mode.
Note: 1. A special case occurs when OCR2B equals TOP and COM2B1 is set. In this case, the Compare
Match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See “Phase correct PWM mode” on
page 148 for more details.
• Bits 3, 2 – Res: Reserved bits
These bits are reserved bits in the Atmel ATmega48/88/168 and will always read as zero.
• Bits 1:0 – WGM21:0: Waveform generation mode
Combined with the WGM22 bit found in the TCCR2B Register, these bits control the counting
sequence of the counter, the source for maximum (TOP) counter value, and what type of waveform
generation to be used, see Table 18-8 on page 156. Modes of operation supported by the
Timer/Counter unit are: Normal mode (counter), Clear Timer on Compare Match (CTC) mode,
and two types of Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) modes (see “Modes of operation” on page
145).
Table 18-6. Compare output mode, fast PWM mode(1).
COM2B1 COM2B0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC2B disconnected
0 1 Reserved
1 0 Clear OC2B on compare match, set OC2B at BOTTOM,
(non-inverting mode)
1 1 Set OC2B on compare match, clear OC2B at BOTTOM,
(invertiing mode)
Table 18-7. Compare output mode, phase correct PWM mode(1).
COM2B1 COM2B0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC2B disconnected
0 1 Reserved
1 0 Clear OC2B on compare match when up-counting
Set OC2B on compare match when down-counting
1 1 Set OC2B on compare match when up-counting
Clear OC2B on compare match when down-counting156
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
Notes: 1. MAX= 0xFF
2. BOTTOM= 0x00
18.11.2 TCCR2B – Timer/counter control register B
• Bit 7 – FOC2A: Force output compare A
The FOC2A bit is only active when the WGM bits specify a non-PWM mode.
However, for ensuring compatibility with future devices, this bit must be set to zero when
TCCR2B is written when operating in PWM mode. When writing a logical one to the FOC2A bit,
an immediate Compare Match is forced on the Waveform Generation unit. The OC2A output is
changed according to its COM2A1:0 bits setting. Note that the FOC2A bit is implemented as a
strobe. Therefore it is the value present in the COM2A1:0 bits that determines the effect of the
forced compare.
A FOC2A strobe will not generate any interrupt, nor will it clear the timer in CTC mode using
OCR2A as TOP.
The FOC2A bit is always read as zero.
• Bit 6 – FOC2B: Force output compare B
The FOC2B bit is only active when the WGM bits specify a non-PWM mode.
However, for ensuring compatibility with future devices, this bit must be set to zero when
TCCR2B is written when operating in PWM mode. When writing a logical one to the FOC2B bit,
an immediate Compare Match is forced on the Waveform Generation unit. The OC2B output is
changed according to its COM2B1:0 bits setting. Note that the FOC2B bit is implemented as a
strobe. Therefore it is the value present in the COM2B1:0 bits that determines the effect of the
forced compare.
Table 18-8. Waveform generation mode bit description.
Mode WGM2 WGM1 WGM0
Timer/counter
mode of
operation TOP
Update of
OCRx at
TOV flag
set on(1)(2)
0 0 0 0 Normal 0xFF Immediate MAX
10 0 1 PWM,
phase correct 0xFF TOP BOTTOM
2 0 1 0 CTC OCRA Immediate MAX
3 0 1 1 Fast PWM 0xFF BOTTOM MAX
4 1 0 0 Reserved – – –
51 0 1 PWM,
phase correct OCRA TOP BOTTOM
6 1 1 0 Reserved – – –
7 1 1 1 Fast PWM OCRA BOTTOM TOP
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(0xB1) FOC2A FOC2B – – WGM22 CS22 CS21 CS20 TCCR2B
Read/write W W R R R R R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0157
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
A FOC2B strobe will not generate any interrupt, nor will it clear the timer in CTC mode using
OCR2B as TOP.
The FOC2B bit is always read as zero.
• Bits 5:4 – Res: Reserved bits
These bits are reserved bits in the Atmel ATmega48/88/168 and will always read as zero.
• Bit 3 – WGM22: Waveform generation mode
See the description in the “TCCR2A – Timer/counter control register A” on page 153.
• Bit 2:0 – CS22:0: Clock select
The three Clock Select bits select the clock source to be used by the Timer/Counter, see Table
18-9.
If external pin modes are used for the Timer/Counter0, transitions on the T0 pin will clock the
counter even if the pin is configured as an output. This feature allows software control of the
counting.
18.11.3 TCNT2 – Timer/counter register
The Timer/Counter Register gives direct access, both for read and write operations, to the
Timer/Counter unit 8-bit counter. Writing to the TCNT2 Register blocks (removes) the Compare
Match on the following timer clock. Modifying the counter (TCNT2) while the counter is running,
introduces a risk of missing a Compare Match between TCNT2 and the OCR2x Registers.
18.11.4 OCR2A – Output compare register A
Table 18-9. Clock select bit description.
CS22 CS21 CS20 Description
0 0 0 No clock source (timer/counter stopped)
0 0 1 clkT2S/(no prescaling)
0 1 0 clkT2S/8 (from prescaler)
0 1 1 clkT2S/32 (from prescaler)
1 0 0 clkT2S/64 (from prescaler)
1 0 1 clkT2S/128 (from prescaler)
1 1 0 clkT2S/256 (from prescaler)
1 1 1 clkT2S/1024 (from prescaler)
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(0xB2) TCNT2[7:0] TCNT2
Read/write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(0xB3) OCR2A[7:0] OCR2A
Read/write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0158
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
The Output Compare Register A contains an 8-bit value that is continuously compared with the
counter value (TCNT2). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare interrupt, or to
generate a waveform output on the OC2A pin.
18.11.5 OCR2B – Output compare register B
The Output Compare Register B contains an 8-bit value that is continuously compared with the
counter value (TCNT2). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare interrupt, or to
generate a waveform output on the OC2B pin.
18.11.6 TIMSK2 – Timer/Counter2 interrupt mask register
• Bit 2 – OCIE2B: Timer/Counter2 output compare match B interrupt enable
When the OCIE2B bit is written to one and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the
Timer/Counter2 Compare Match B interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed
if a compare match in Timer/Counter2 occurs, that is, when the OCF2B bit is set in the
Timer/Counter 2 Interrupt Flag Register – TIFR2.
• Bit 1 – OCIE2A: Timer/Counter2 output compare match A interrupt enable
When the OCIE2A bit is written to one and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the
Timer/Counter2 Compare Match A interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed
if a compare match in Timer/Counter2 occurs, that is, when the OCF2A bit is set in the
Timer/Counter 2 Interrupt Flag Register – TIFR2.
• Bit 0 – TOIE2: Timer/Counter2 overflow interrupt enable
When the TOIE2 bit is written to one and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the
Timer/Counter2 Overflow interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed if an
overflow in Timer/Counter2 occurs, that is, when the TOV2 bit is set in the Timer/Counter2 Interrupt
Flag Register – TIFR2.
18.11.7 TIFR2 – Timer/Counter2 interrupt flag register
• Bit 2 – OCF2B: Output compare flag 2 B
The OCF2B bit is set (one) when a compare match occurs between the Timer/Counter2 and the
data in OCR2B – Output Compare Register2. OCF2B is cleared by hardware when executing
the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, OCF2B is cleared by writing a logic
one to the flag. When the I-bit in SREG, OCIE2B (Timer/Counter2 Compare match Interrupt
Enable), and OCF2B are set (one), the Timer/Counter2 Compare match Interrupt is executed.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(0xB4) OCR2B[7:0] OCR2B
Read/write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(0x70) – – – – – OCIE2B OCIE2A TOIE2 TIMSK2
Read/write R R R R R R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x17 (0x37) – – – – – OCF2B OCF2A TOV2 TIFR2
Read/write R R R R R R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0159
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
• Bit 1 – OCF2A: Output compare flag 2 A
The OCF2A bit is set (one) when a compare match occurs between the Timer/Counter2 and the
data in OCR2A – Output Compare Register2. OCF2A is cleared by hardware when executing
the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, OCF2A is cleared by writing a logic
one to the flag. When the I-bit in SREG, OCIE2A (Timer/Counter2 Compare match Interrupt
Enable), and OCF2A are set (one), the Timer/Counter2 Compare match Interrupt is executed.
• Bit 0 – TOV2: Timer/Counter2 overflow flag
The TOV2 bit is set (one) when an overflow occurs in Timer/Counter2. TOV2 is cleared by hardware
when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, TOV2 is cleared
by writing a logic one to the flag. When the SREG I-bit, TOIE2A (Timer/Counter2 Overflow Interrupt
Enable), and TOV2 are set (one), the Timer/Counter2 Overflow interrupt is executed. In
PWM mode, this bit is set when Timer/Counter2 changes counting direction at 0x00.
18.11.8 ASSR – Asynchronous status register
• Bit 7 – RES: Reserved bit
This bit is reserved and will always read as zero.
• Bit 6 – EXCLK: Enable external clock input
When EXCLK is written to one, and asynchronous clock is selected, the external clock input buffer
is enabled and an external clock can be input on Timer Oscillator 1 (TOSC1) pin instead of a
32kHz crystal. Writing to EXCLK should be done before asynchronous operation is selected.
Note that the crystal Oscillator will only run when this bit is zero.
• Bit 5 – AS2: Asynchronous Timer/Counter2
When AS2 is written to zero, Timer/Counter2 is clocked from the I/O clock, clkI/O. When AS2 is
written to one, Timer/Counter2 is clocked from a crystal Oscillator connected to the Timer Oscillator
1 (TOSC1) pin. When the value of AS2 is changed, the contents of TCNT2, OCR2A,
OCR2B, TCCR2A and TCCR2B might be corrupted.
• Bit 4 – TCN2UB: Timer/Counter2 update busy
When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously and TCNT2 is written, this bit becomes set.
When TCNT2 has been updated from the temporary storage register, this bit is cleared by hardware.
A logical zero in this bit indicates that TCNT2 is ready to be updated with a new value.
• Bit 3 – OCR2AUB: Output compare Register2 update busy
When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously and OCR2A is written, this bit becomes set.
When OCR2A has been updated from the temporary storage register, this bit is cleared by hardware.
A logical zero in this bit indicates that OCR2A is ready to be updated with a new value.
• Bit 2 – OCR2BUB: Output compare Register2 update busy
When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously and OCR2B is written, this bit becomes set.
When OCR2B has been updated from the temporary storage register, this bit is cleared by hardware.
A logical zero in this bit indicates that OCR2B is ready to be updated with a new value.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(0xB6) – EXCLK AS2 TCN2UB OCR2AUB OCR2BUB TCR2AUB TCR2BUB ASSR
Read/write R R/W R/W R R R R R
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0160
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
• Bit 1 – TCR2AUB: Timer/counter control Register2 update busy
When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously and TCCR2A is written, this bit becomes set.
When TCCR2A has been updated from the temporary storage register, this bit is cleared by
hardware. A logical zero in this bit indicates that TCCR2A is ready to be updated with a new
value.
• Bit 0 – TCR2BUB: Timer/counter control Register2 update busy
When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously and TCCR2B is written, this bit becomes set.
When TCCR2B has been updated from the temporary storage register, this bit is cleared by
hardware. A logical zero in this bit indicates that TCCR2B is ready to be updated with a new
value.
If a write is performed to any of the five Timer/Counter2 Registers while its update busy flag is
set, the updated value might get corrupted and cause an unintentional interrupt to occur.
The mechanisms for reading TCNT2, OCR2A, OCR2B, TCCR2A and TCCR2B are different.
When reading TCNT2, the actual timer value is read. When reading OCR2A, OCR2B, TCCR2A
and TCCR2B the value in the temporary storage register is read.
18.11.9 GTCCR – General timer/counter control register
• Bit 1 – PSRASY: Prescaler reset Timer/Counter2
When this bit is one, the Timer/Counter2 prescaler will be reset. This bit is normally cleared
immediately by hardware. If the bit is written when Timer/Counter2 is operating in asynchronous
mode, the bit will remain one until the prescaler has been reset. The bit will not be cleared by
hardware if the TSM bit is set. Refer to the description of the “Bit 7 – TSM: Timer/counter synchronization
mode” on page 139 for a description of the Timer/Counter Synchronization mode.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x23 (0x43) TSM – – – – – PSRASY PSRSYNC GTCCR
Read/write R/W R R R R R R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0161
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
19. SPI – Serial peripheral interface
19.1 Features • Full-duplex, three-wire synchronous data transfer
• Master or slave operation
• LSB first or MSB first data transfer
• Seven programmable bit rates
• End of transmission interrupt flag
• Write collision flag protection
• Wake-up from idle mode
• Double speed (CK/2) master SPI mode
19.2 Overview
The Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) allows high-speed synchronous data transfer between the
Atmel ATmega48/88/168 and peripheral devices or between several AVR devices.
The USART can also be used in Master SPI mode, see “USART in SPI mode” on page 199. The
PRSPI bit in “Minimizing power consumption” on page 41 must be written to zero to enable SPI
module.162
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
Figure 19-1. SPI block diagram(1).
Note: 1. Refer to Figure 1-1 on page 2, and Table 14-3 on page 78 for SPI pin placement.
The interconnection between Master and Slave CPUs with SPI is shown in Figure 19-2 on page
163. The system consists of two shift Registers, and a Master clock generator. The SPI Master
initiates the communication cycle when pulling low the Slave Select SS pin of the desired Slave.
Master and Slave prepare the data to be sent in their respective shift Registers, and the Master
generates the required clock pulses on the SCK line to interchange data. Data is always shifted
from Master to Slave on the Master Out – Slave In, MOSI, line, and from Slave to Master on the
Master In – Slave Out, MISO, line. After each data packet, the Master will synchronize the Slave
by pulling high the Slave Select, SS, line.
When configured as a Master, the SPI interface has no automatic control of the SS line. This
must be handled by user software before communication can start. When this is done, writing a
byte to the SPI Data Register starts the SPI clock generator, and the hardware shifts the eight
bits into the Slave. After shifting one byte, the SPI clock generator stops, setting the end of
Transmission Flag (SPIF). If the SPI Interrupt Enable bit (SPIE) in the SPCR Register is set, an
interrupt is requested. The Master may continue to shift the next byte by writing it into SPDR, or
signal the end of packet by pulling high the Slave Select, SS line. The last incoming byte will be
kept in the Buffer Register for later use.
When configured as a Slave, the SPI interface will remain sleeping with MISO tri-stated as long
as the SS pin is driven high. In this state, software may update the contents of the SPI Data
Register, SPDR, but the data will not be shifted out by incoming clock pulses on the SCK pin
until the SS pin is driven low. As one byte has been completely shifted, the end of Transmission SPI2X SPI2X
DIVIDER
/2/4/8/16/32/64/128163
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
Flag, SPIF is set. If the SPI Interrupt Enable bit, SPIE, in the SPCR Register is set, an interrupt
is requested. The Slave may continue to place new data to be sent into SPDR before reading
the incoming data. The last incoming byte will be kept in the Buffer Register for later use.
Figure 19-2. SPI master-slave interconnection.
The system is single buffered in the transmit direction and double buffered in the receive direction.
This means that bytes to be transmitted cannot be written to the SPI Data Register before
the entire shift cycle is completed. When receiving data, however, a received character must be
read from the SPI Data Register before the next character has been completely shifted in. Otherwise,
the first byte is lost.
In SPI Slave mode, the control logic will sample the incoming signal of the SCK pin. To ensure
correct sampling of the clock signal, the minimum low and high periods should be:
Low periods: Longer than 2 CPU clock cycles.
High periods: Longer than 2 CPU clock cycles.
When the SPI is enabled, the data direction of the MOSI, MISO, SCK, and SS pins is overridden
according to Table 19-1. For more details on automatic port overrides, refer to “Alternate port
functions” on page 76.
Note: See “Alternate functions of port B” on page 78 for a detailed description of how to define the direction
of the user defined SPI pins.
The following code examples show how to initialize the SPI as a Master and how to perform a
simple transmission. DDR_SPI in the examples must be replaced by the actual Data Direction
Register controlling the SPI pins. DD_MOSI, DD_MISO and DD_SCK must be replaced by the
actual data direction bits for these pins. For example if MOSI is placed on pin PB3, replace
DD_MOSI with DDB3 and DDR_SPI with DDRB.
Table 19-1. SPI pin overrides(Note:).
Pin Direction, master SPI Direction, slave SPI
MOSI User defined Input
MISO Input User defined
SCK User defined Input
SS User defined Input
SHIFT
ENABLE164
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
Note: 1. See ”About code examples” on page 8.
Assembly code example(1)
SPI_MasterInit:
; Set MOSI and SCK output, all others input
ldi r17,(1<>8);
UBRR0L = (unsigned char)ubrr;
Enable receiver and transmitter */
UCSR0B = (1<> 1) & 0x01;
return ((resh << 8) | resl);
}184
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
20.7.3 Receive complete flag and interrupt
The USART Receiver has one flag that indicates the Receiver state.
The Receive Complete (RXCn) Flag indicates if there are unread data present in the receive buffer.
This flag is one when unread data exist in the receive buffer, and zero when the receive
buffer is empty (that is, does not contain any unread data). If the Receiver is disabled (RXENn =
0), the receive buffer will be flushed and consequently the RXCn bit will become zero.
When the Receive Complete Interrupt Enable (RXCIEn) in UCSRnB is set, the USART Receive
Complete interrupt will be executed as long as the RXCn Flag is set (provided that global interrupts
are enabled). When interrupt-driven data reception is used, the receive complete routine
must read the received data from UDRn in order to clear the RXCn Flag, otherwise a new interrupt
will occur once the interrupt routine terminates.
20.7.4 Receiver error flags
The USART Receiver has three Error Flags: Frame Error (FEn), Data OverRun (DORn) and
Parity Error (UPEn). All can be accessed by reading UCSRnA. Common for the Error Flags is
that they are located in the receive buffer together with the frame for which they indicate the
error status. Due to the buffering of the Error Flags, the UCSRnA must be read before the
receive buffer (UDRn), since reading the UDRn I/O location changes the buffer read location.
Another equality for the Error Flags is that they can not be altered by software doing a write to
the flag location. However, all flags must be set to zero when the UCSRnA is written for upward
compatibility of future USART implementations. None of the Error Flags can generate interrupts.
The Frame Error (FEn) Flag indicates the state of the first stop bit of the next readable frame
stored in the receive buffer. The FEn Flag is zero when the stop bit was correctly read (as one),
and the FEn Flag will be one when the stop bit was incorrect (zero). This flag can be used for
detecting out-of-sync conditions, detecting break conditions and protocol handling. The FEn
Flag is not affected by the setting of the USBSn bit in UCSRnC since the Receiver ignores all,
except for the first, stop bits. For compatibility with future devices, always set this bit to zero
when writing to UCSRnA.
The Data OverRun (DORn) Flag indicates data loss due to a receiver buffer full condition. A
Data OverRun occurs when the receive buffer is full (two characters), it is a new character waiting
in the Receive Shift Register, and a new start bit is detected. If the DORn Flag is set there
was one or more serial frame lost between the frame last read from UDRn, and the next frame
read from UDRn. For compatibility with future devices, always write this bit to zero when writing
to UCSRnA. The DORn Flag is cleared when the frame received was successfully moved from
the Shift Register to the receive buffer.
The Parity Error (UPEn) Flag indicates that the next frame in the receive buffer had a Parity
Error when received. If Parity Check is not enabled the UPEn bit will always be read zero. For
compatibility with future devices, always set this bit to zero when writing to UCSRnA. For more
details see “Parity bit calculation” on page 176 and “Parity checker” on page 184.
20.7.5 Parity checker
The Parity Checker is active when the high USART Parity mode (UPMn1) bit is set. Type of Parity
Check to be performed (odd or even) is selected by the UPMn0 bit. When enabled, the Parity
Checker calculates the parity of the data bits in incoming frames and compares the result with
the parity bit from the serial frame. The result of the check is stored in the receive buffer together
with the received data and stop bits. The Parity Error (UPEn) Flag can then be read by software
to check if the frame had a Parity Error.185
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
The UPEn bit is set if the next character that can be read from the receive buffer had a Parity
Error when received and the Parity Checking was enabled at that point (UPMn1 = 1). This bit is
valid until the receive buffer (UDRn) is read.
20.7.6 Disabling the receiver
In contrast to the Transmitter, disabling of the Receiver will be immediate. Data from ongoing
receptions will therefore be lost. When disabled (that is, the RXENn is set to zero) the Receiver
will no longer override the normal function of the RxDn port pin. The Receiver buffer FIFO will be
flushed when the Receiver is disabled. Remaining data in the buffer will be lost
20.7.7 Flushing the receive buffer
The receiver buffer FIFO will be flushed when the Receiver is disabled, that is, the buffer will be
emptied of its contents. Unread data will be lost. If the buffer has to be flushed during normal
operation, due to for instance an error condition, read the UDRn I/O location until the RXCn Flag
is cleared. The following code example shows how to flush the receive buffer.
Note: 1. See ”About code examples” on page 8.
20.8 Asynchronous data reception
The USART includes a clock recovery and a data recovery unit for handling asynchronous data
reception. The clock recovery logic is used for synchronizing the internally generated baud rate
clock to the incoming asynchronous serial frames at the RxDn pin. The data recovery logic samples
and low pass filters each incoming bit, thereby improving the noise immunity of the
Receiver. The asynchronous reception operational range depends on the accuracy of the internal
baud rate clock, the rate of the incoming frames, and the frame size in number of bits.
20.8.1 Asynchronous clock recovery
The clock recovery logic synchronizes internal clock to the incoming serial frames. Figure 20-5
on page 186 illustrates the sampling process of the start bit of an incoming frame. The sample
rate is 16 times the baud rate for Normal mode, and eight times the baud rate for Double Speed
mode. The horizontal arrows illustrate the synchronization variation due to the sampling process.
Note the larger time variation when using the Double Speed mode (U2Xn = 1) of
operation. Samples denoted zero are samples done when the RxDn line is idle (that is, no communication
activity).
Assembly code example(1)
USART_Flush:
sbis UCSRnA, RXCn
ret
in r16, UDRn
rjmp USART_Flush
C code example(1)
void USART_Flush( void )
{
unsigned char dummy;
while ( UCSRnA & (1< 2 CPU clock cycles for fck < 12MHz, 3 CPU clock cycles for fck >= 12MHz
High: > 2 CPU clock cycles for fck < 12MHz, 3 CPU clock cycles for fck >= 12MHz
VCC
GND
XTAL1
SCK
MISO
MOSI
RESET
+1.8V - 5.5V
AVCC
+1.8V - 5.5V(2)299
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
28.8.1 Serial programming pin mapping
28.8.2 Serial programming algorithm
When writing serial data to the Atmel ATmega48/88/168, data is clocked on the rising edge of
SCK.
When reading data from the ATmega48/88/168, data is clocked on the falling edge of SCK. See
Figure 28-9 on page 302 for timing details.
To program and verify the ATmega48/88/168 in the serial programming mode, the following
sequence is recommended (See Serial Programming Instruction set in Table 28-17 on page
300):
1. Power-up sequence:
Apply power between VCC and GND while RESET and SCK are set to “0”. In some systems,
the programmer can not guarantee that SCK is held low during power-up. In this
case, RESET must be given a positive pulse of at least two CPU clock cycles duration
after SCK has been set to “0”.
2. Wait for at least 20ms and enable serial programming by sending the Programming
Enable serial instruction to pin MOSI.
3. The serial programming instructions will not work if the communication is out of synchronization.
When in sync. the second byte (0x53), will echo back when issuing the third
byte of the Programming Enable instruction. Whether the echo is correct or not, all four
bytes of the instruction must be transmitted. If the 0x53 did not echo back, give RESET a
positive pulse and issue a new Programming Enable command.
4. The Flash is programmed one page at a time. The memory page is loaded one byte at a
time by supplying the 6 LSB of the address and data together with the Load Program
Memory Page instruction. To ensure correct loading of the page, the data low byte must
be loaded before data high byte is applied for a given address. The Program Memory
Page is stored by loading the Write Program Memory Page instruction with the 7 MSB of
the address. If polling (RDY/BSY) is not used, the user must wait at least tWD_FLASH before
issuing the next page (see Table 28-16 on page 300). Accessing the serial programming
interface before the Flash write operation completes can result in incorrect programming.
5. A: The EEPROM array is programmed one byte at a time by supplying the address and
data together with the appropriate Write instruction. An EEPROM memory location is first
automatically erased before new data is written. If polling (RDY/BSY) is not used, the
user must wait at least tWD_EEPROM before issuing the next byte (see Table 28-16 on page
300). In a chip erased device, no 0xFFs in the data file(s) need to be programmed.
B: The EEPROM array is programmed one page at a time. The Memory page is loaded
one byte at a time by supplying the 6 LSB of the address and data together with the Load
EEPROM Memory Page instruction. The EEPROM Memory Page is stored by loading
the Write EEPROM Memory Page Instruction with the 7 MSB of the address. When using
EEPROM page access only byte locations loaded with the Load EEPROM Memory Page
instruction is altered. The remaining locations remain unchanged. If polling (RDY/BSY) is
not used, the used must wait at least tWD_EEPROM before issuing the next byte (See Table
Table 28-15. Pin mapping serial programming.
Symbol Pins I/O Description
MOSI PB3 I Serial Data in
MISO PB4 O Serial Data out
SCK PB5 I Serial Clock300
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
28-16 on page 300). In a chip erased device, no 0xFF in the data file(s) need to be
programmed.
6. Any memory location can be verified by using the Read instruction which returns the content
at the selected address at serial output MISO.
7. At the end of the programming session, RESET can be set high to commence normal
operation.
8. Power-off sequence (if needed):
Set RESET to “1”.
Turn VCC power off.
28.8.3 Serial programming instruction set
Table 28-17 and Figure 28-8 on page 302 describes the instruction set.
Table 28-16. Typical wait delay before writing the next flash or EEPROM location.
Symbol Minimum wait delay
tWD_FLASH 4.5ms
tWD_EEPROM 3.6ms
tWD_ERASE 9.0ms
Table 28-17. Serial programming instruction set (hexadecimal values).
Instruction/operation
Instruction format
Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4
Programming enable $AC $53 $00 $00
Chip erase (program memory/EEPROM) $AC $80 $00 $00
Poll RDY/BSY $F0 $00 $00 data byte out
Load instructions
Load extended address byte(1) $4D $00 Extended adr $00
Load program memory page, high byte $48 $00 adr LSB high data byte in
Load program memory page, low byte $40 $00 adr LSB low data byte in
Load EEPROM memory page (page access) $C1 $00 0000 000aa data byte in
Read instructions
Read program memory, high byte $28 adr MSB adr LSB high data byte out
Read program memory, low byte $20 adr MSB adr LSB low data byte out
Read EEPROM memory $A0 0000 00aa aaaa aaaa data byte out
Read lock bits $58 $00 $00 data byte out
Read signature byte $30 $00 0000 000aa data byte out
Read fuse bits $50 $00 $00 data byte out
Read fuse high bits $58 $08 $00 data byte out
Read extended fuse bits $50 $08 $00 data byte out
Read calibration byte $38 $00 $00 data byte out301
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
Notes: 1. Not all instructions are applicable for all parts.
2. a = address.
3. Bits are programmed ‘0’, unprogrammed ‘1’.
4. To ensure future compatibility, unused fuses and lock bits should be unprogrammed (‘1’).
5. Refer to the correspondig section for fuse and lock bits, calibration and signature bytes and page size.
6. Instructions accessing program memory use a word address. This word may be random within the page range.
7. See htt://www.atmel.com/avr for application notes regarding programming and programmers.
If the LSB in RDY/BSY data byte out is ‘1’, a programming operation is still pending. Wait until
this bit returns ‘0’ before the next instruction is carried out.
Within the same page, the low data byte must be loaded prior to the high data byte.
After data is loaded to the page buffer, program the EEPROM page, see Figure 28-8.
Write instructions(6)
Write program memory page $4C adr MSB adr LSB $00
Write EEPROM memory $C0 0000 00aa aaaa aaaa data byte in
Write EEPROM memory page (page access) $C2 0000 00aa aaaa aa00 $00
Write lock bits $AC $E0 $00 data byte in
Write fuse bits $AC $A0 $00 data byte in
Write fuse high bits $AC $A8 $00 data byte in
Write extended fuse bits $AC $A4 $00 data byte in
Table 28-17. Serial programming instruction set (hexadecimal values). (Continued)
Instruction/operation
Instruction format
Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4302
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
Figure 28-8. Serial programming instruction example.
28.8.4 SPI serial programming characteristics
Figure 28-9. Serial programming waveforms.
For characteristics of the SPI module see “SPI timing characteristics” on page 309.
Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4
Adr MSB Adr LSB
Bit 15 B 0
Serial programming instruction
Program memory/
EEPROM memory
Page 0
Page 1
Page 2
Page N-1
Page buffer
Write program memory page/
Write EEPROM memory page
Load program memory page (high/low byte)/
Load EEPROM memory page (page access)
Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4
Bit 15 B 0
Adr MSB Adr LSB
Page offset
Page number
Adr MSB Adr LSB
MSB
MSB
LSB
LSB
SERIAL CLOCK INPUT
(SCK)
SERIAL DATA INPUT
(MOSI)
(MISO)
SAMPLE
SERIAL DATA OUTPUT303
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
29. Electrical characteristics
29.1 Absolute maximum ratings*
29.2 DC characteristics
Operating temperature................................... -55°C to +125°C *NOTICE: Stresses beyond those listed under “Absolute
Maximum Ratings” may cause permanent damage
to the device. This is a stress rating only and
functional operation of the device at these or
other conditions beyond those indicated in the
operational sections of this specification is not
implied. Exposure to absolute maximum rating
conditions for extended periods may affect
device reliability.
Storage temperature...................................... -65°C to +150°C
Voltage on any pin except RESET
with respect to ground .................................-0.5V to VCC+0.5V
Voltage on RESET with respect to ground ......-0.5V to +13.0V
Maximum operating voltage.............................................. 6.0V
DC current per I/O pin.................................................. 40.0mA
DC current VCC and GND pins .................................. 200.0mA
TA = -40°C to 85°C, VCC = 1.8V to 5.5V (unless otherwise noted).
Symbol Parameter Condition Minimum Typical Maximum Units
VIL
Input low voltage, except
XTAL1 and RESET pin
VCC = 1.8V - 2.4V
VCC = 2.4V - 5.5V
-0.5
-0.5
0.2VCC(1)
0.3VCC(1)
V
VIH
Input high voltage, except
XTAL1 and RESET pins
VCC = 1.8V - 2.4V
VCC = 2.4V - 5.5V
0.7VCC(2)
0.6VCC(2)
VCC + 0.5
VCC + 0.5
VIL1
Input low voltage,
XTAL1 pin VCC = 1.8V - 5.5V -0.5 0.1VCC(1)
VIH1
Input high voltage,
XTAL1 pin
VCC = 1.8V - 2.4V
VCC = 2.4V - 5.5V
0.8VCC(2)
0.7VCC(2)
VCC + 0.5
VCC + 0.5
VIL2
Input low voltage,
RESET pin VCC = 1.8V - 5.5V -0.5 0.2VCC(1)
VIH2
Input high voltage,
RESET pin VCC = 1.8V - 5.5V 0.9VCC(2) VCC + 0.5
VIL3
Input low voltage,
RESET pin as I/O
VCC = 1.8V - 2.4V
VCC = 2.4V - 5.5V
-0.5
-0.5
0.2VCC(1)
0.3VCC(1)
VIH3
Input high voltage,
RESET pin as I/O
VCC = 1.8V - 2.4V
VCC = 2.4V - 5.5V
0.7VCC(2)
0.6VCC(2)
VCC + 0.5
VCC + 0.5
VOL
Output low voltage(3),
RESET pin as I/O
I
OL = 20mA, VCC = 5V
IOL = 6mA, VCC = 3V
0.7
0.5
VOH
Output high voltage(4),
RESET pin as I/O
I
OH = -20mA, VCC = 5V
I
OH = -10mA, VCC = 3V
4.2
2.3
IIL
Input leakage
current I/O pin
VCC = 5.5V, pin low
(absolute value) 1
µA
I
IH
Input leakage
current I/O pin
VCC = 5.5V, pin high
(absolute value) 1
RRST Reset pull-up resistor 30 60
kΩ
RPU I/O pin pull-up resistor 20 50304
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
Notes: 1. “Max” means the highest value where the pin is guaranteed to be read as low
2. “Min” means the lowest value where the pin is guaranteed to be read as high
3. Although each I/O port can sink more than the test conditions (20mA at VCC = 5V, 10mA at VCC = 3V) under steady state
conditions (non-transient), the following must be observed:
ATmega48/88/168:
1] The sum of all IOL, for ports C0 - C5, ADC7, ADC6 should not exceed 100mA.
2] The sum of all IOL, for ports B0 - B5, D5 - D7, XTAL1, XTAL2 should not exceed 100mA.
3] The sum of all IOL, for ports D0 - D4, RESET should not exceed 100mA.
If IOL exceeds the test condition, VOL may exceed the related specification. Pins are not guaranteed to sink current greater
than the listed test condition.
4. Although each I/O port can source more than the test conditions (20mA at VCC = 5V, 10mA at VCC = 3V) under steady state
conditions (non-transient), the following must be observed:
ATmega48/88/168:
1] The sum of all IOH, for ports C0 - C5, D0- D4, ADC7, RESET should not exceed 150mA.
2] The sum of all IOH, for ports B0 - B5, D5 - D7, ADC6, XTAL1, XTAL2 should not exceed 150mA.
If IIOH exceeds the test condition, VOH may exceed the related specification. Pins are not guaranteed to source current
greater than the listed test condition.
5. Values with “Minimizing power consumption” on page 41 enabled (0xFF).
ICC
Power supply current(5)
Active 1MHz, VCC = 2V
(Atmel ATmega48/88/168V) 0.55
mA
Active 4MHz, VCC = 3V
(Atmel ATmega48/88/168L) 3.5
Active 8MHz, VCC = 5V
(Atmel ATmega48/88/168) 12
Idle 1MHz, VCC = 2V
(ATmega48/88/168V) 0.25 0.5
Idle 4MHz, VCC = 3V
(ATmega48/88/168L) 1.5
Idle 8MHz, VCC = 5V
(ATmega48/88/168) 5.5
Power-down mode
WDT enabled, VCC = 3V 8 15
µA
WDT disabled, VCC = 3V 1 2
VACIO
Analog comparator
input offset voltage
VCC = 5V
Vin = VCC/2 10 40 mV
IACLK
Analog comparator
input leakage current
VCC = 5V
Vin = VCC/2 -50 50 nA
t
ACID
Analog comparator
propagation delay
VCC = 2.7V
VCC = 4.0V
750
500 ns
TA = -40°C to 85°C, VCC = 1.8V to 5.5V (unless otherwise noted). (Continued)
Symbol Parameter Condition Minimum Typical Maximum Units305
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
29.3 Speed grades
Maximum frequency is dependent on VCC. As shown in Figure 29-1 and Figure 29-2, the Maximum
Frequency vs. VCC curve is linear between 1.8V < VCC < 2.7V and between 2.7V < VCC <
4.5V.
Figure 29-1. Maximum frequency vs. VCC, Atmel ATmega48V/88V/168V.
Figure 29-2. Maximum frequency vs. VCC, ATmega48/88/168.
10MHz
4MHz
1.8V 2.7V 5.5V
Safe operating area
20MHz
10MHz
2.7V 4.5V 5.5V
Safe operating area306
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
29.4 Clock characteristics
29.4.1 Calibrated internal RC oscillator accuracy
Notes: 1. Voltage range for Atmel ATmega48V/88V/168V.
2. Voltage range for Atmel ATmega48/88/168.
29.4.2 External clock drive waveforms
Figure 29-3. External clock drive waveforms.
29.4.3 External clock drive
Table 29-1. Calibration accuracy of internal RC oscillator.
Frequency VCC Temperature Calibration accuracy
Factory calibration 8.0MHz 3V 25°C ±10%
User calibration 7.3MHz - 8.1MHz 1.8V - 5.5V(1)
2.7V - 5.5V(2) -40°C - 85°C ±1%
VIL1
VIH1
Table 29-2. External clock drive.
Symbol Parameter
VCC = 1.8V - 5.5V VCC = 2.7V - 5.5V VCC = 4.5V - 5.5V
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Units
1/tCLCL
Oscillator
frequency 0 4 0 10 0 20 MHz
tCLCL Clock period 250 100 50
tCHCX High time 100 40 20 ns
tCLCX Low time 100 40 20
tCLCH Rise time 2.0 1.6 0.5
μs
tCHCL Fall time 2.0 1.6 0.5
ΔtCLCL
Change in period
from one clock
cycle to the next
2 2 2%307
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
29.5 System and reset characteristics
Note: 1. The power-on reset will not work unless the supply voltage has been below VPOT (falling).
Notes: 1. VBOT may be below nominal minimum operating voltage for some devices. For devices where this is the case, the device is
tested down to VCC = VBOT during the production test. This guarantees that a brown-out reset will occur before VCC drops to
a voltage where correct operation of the microcontroller is no longer guaranteed. The test is performed using
BODLEVEL = 110 and BODLEVEL = 101 for Atmel ATmega48V/88V/168V, and BODLEVEL = 101 and BODLEVEL = 100
for Atmel ATmega48/88/168.
Table 29-3. Reset, brown-out and internal voltage characteristics.
Symbol Parameter Condition Min. Typ. Max. Units
VPOT
Power-on reset threshold voltage (rising) 0.7 1.0 1.4
V
Power-on reset threshold voltage (falling)(1) 0.05 0.9 1.3
VPONSR Power-on slope rate 0.01 4.5 V/ms
VRST RESET pin threshold voltage 0.2VCC 0.9VCC V
tRST Minimum pulse width on RESET pin 2.5 µs
VHYST Brown-out detector hysteresis 50 mV
tBOD Min pulse width on brown-out reset 2 µs
VBG Bandgap reference voltage VCC = 2.7
TA = 25°C 1.0 1.1 1.2 V
t
BG Bandgap reference start-up time VCC = 2.7
TA = 25°C 40 70 µs
I
BG Bandgap reference current consumption VCC = 2.7
TA = 25°C 10 µA
Table 29-4. BODLEVEL fuse coding(1).
BODLEVEL 2:0 Fuses Min. VBOT Typ. VBOT Max. VBOT Units
111 BOD disabled
110 1.7 1.8 2.0
101 2.5 2.7 2.9 V
100 4.1 4.3 4.5
011
Reserved
010
001
000308
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
29.6 2-wire serial interface characteristics
Table 29-5 describes the requirements for devices connected to the 2-wire Serial Bus. The Atmel ATmega48/88/168 2-wire
Serial Interface meets or exceeds these requirements under the noted conditions.
Timing symbols refer to Figure 29-4 on page 309.
Notes: 1. In ATmega48/88/168, this parameter is characterized and not 100% tested.
2. Required only for fSCL > 100kHz.
Table 29-5. 2-wire serial bus requirements.
Symbol Parameter Condition Min. Max. Units
VIL Input low-voltage -0.5 0.3VCC
V
VIH Input high-voltage 0.7VCC VCC + 0.5
Vhys(1) Hysteresis of schmitt trigger inputs 0.05VCC(2) –
VOL(1) Output low-voltage 3mA sink current 0 0.4
tr
(1) Rise time for both SDA and SCL 20 + 0.1Cb
(3)(2) 300
tof ns (1) Output fall time from VIHmin to VILmax 10pF < Cb < 400pF(3) 20 + 0.1Cb
(3)(2) 250
tSP(1) Spikes suppressed by input filter 0 50(2)
Ii Input current each I/O pin 0.1VCC < Vi
< 0.9VCC -10 10 µA
Ci
(1) Capacitance for each I/O pin – 10 pF
fSCL SCL clock frequency fCK(4) > max(16fSCL, 250kHz)(5) 0 400 kHz
Rp Value of pull-up resistor
fSCL ≤ 100kHz
fSCL > 100kHz
tHD;STA Hold time (repeated) START condition
fSCL ≤ 100kHz 4.0 –
µs
fSCL > 100kHz 0.6 –
tLOW Low period of the SCL clock
fSCL ≤ 100kHz 4.7 –
fSCL > 100kHz 1.3 –
tHIGH High period of the SCL clock
fSCL ≤ 100kHz 4.0 –
fSCL > 100kHz 0.6 –
tSU;STA Setup time for a repeated START condition
fSCL ≤ 100kHz 4.7 –
fSCL > 100kHz 0.6 –
tHD;DAT Data hold time
fSCL ≤ 100kHz 0 3.45
fSCL > 100kHz 0 0.9
tSU;DAT Data setup time
fSCL ≤ 100kHz 250 –
ns
fSCL > 100kHz 100 –
tSU;STO Setup time for STOP condition
fSCL ≤ 100kHz 4.0 –
µs
fSCL > 100kHz 0.6 –
tBUF
Bus free time between a STOP and START
condition
fSCL ≤ 100kHz 4.7 –
fSCL > 100kHz 1.3 –
VCC – 0.4V
3mA ---------------------------- 1000ns
Cb
-----------------
Ω
VCC – 0.4V
3mA ---------------------------- 300ns
Cb
--------------309
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
3. Cb = capacitance of one bus line in pF.
4. fCK = CPU clock frequency.
5. This requirement applies to all Atmel ATmega48/88/168 2-wire Serial Interface operation. Other devices connected to the 2-
wire Serial Bus need only obey the general fSCL requirement.
Figure 29-4. 2-wire serial bus timing.
29.7 SPI timing characteristics
See Figure 29-5 on page 310 and Figure 29-6 on page 310 for details.
Note: 1. In SPI programming mode the minimum SCK high/low period is:
- 2 tCLCL for fCK < 12MHz
- 3 tCLCL for fCK > 12MHz
t
SU;STA
t
LOW
t
HIGH
t
LOW
t
of
t
HD;STA t
HD;DAT t
SU;DAT t
SU;STO
t
BUF
SCL
SDA
t
r
Table 29-6. SPI timing parameters.
Description Mode Minimum Typical Maximum
1 SCK period Master See Table 19-5
on page 169
ns
2 SCK high/low Master 50% duty cycle
3 Rise/fall time Master 3.6
4 Setup Master 10
5 Hold Master 10
6 Out to SCK Master 0.5 • tsck
7 SCK to out Master 10
8 SCK to out high Master 10
9 SS low to out Slave 15
10 SCK period Slave 4 • tck
11 SCK high/low(1) Slave 2 • tck
12 Rise/fall time Slave 1600
13 Setup Slave 10
14 Hold Slave tck
15 SCK to out Slave 15
16 SCK to SS high Slave 20
17 SS high to tri-state Slave 10
18 SS low to SCK Slave 20310
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
Figure 29-5. SPI interface timing requirements (master mode).
Figure 29-6. SPI interface timing requirements (slave mode).
MOSI
(Data output)
SCK
(CPOL = 1)
MISO
(Data input)
SCK
(CPOL = 0)
SS
MSB LSB
MSB LSB
...
...
6 1
2 2
4 5 3
7 8
MISO
(Data output)
SCK
(CPOL = 1)
MOSI
(Data input)
SCK
(CPOL = 0)
SS
MSB LSB
MSB LSB
...
...
10
11 11
13 14 12
15 17
9
X
16311
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
29.8 ADC characteristics
Note: 1. AVCC absolute min./max.: 1.8V/5.5V
Table 29-7. ADC characteristics.
Symbol Parameter Condition Minimum Typical Maximum Units
Resolution 10 Bits
Absolute accuracy (Including
INL, DNL, quantization error,
gain and offset error)
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
ADC clock = 200kHz 2
LSB
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
ADC clock = 1MHz 4.5
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
ADC clock = 200kHz
Noise reduction mode
2
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
ADC clock = 1MHz
Noise reduction mode
4.5
Integral non-linearity (INL) VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
ADC clock = 200kHz 0.5
Differential non-linearity (DNL) VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
ADC clock = 200kHz 0.25
Gain error VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
ADC clock = 200kHz 2
Offset error VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
ADC clock = 200kHz 2
Conversion time Free running conversion 13 260 µs
Clock frequency 50 1000 kHz
AVCC(1) Analog supply voltage VCC - 0.3 VCC + 0.3
VREF Reference voltage 1.0 AVCC V
VIN Input voltage GND VREF
Input bandwidth 38.5 kHz
VINT Internal voltage reference 1.0 1.1 1.2 V
RREF Reference input resistance 32 kΩ
RAIN Analog input resistance 100 MΩ312
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
29.9 Parallel programming characteristics
Figure 29-7. Parallel programming timing, including some general timing requirements.
Figure 29-8. Parallel programming timing, loading sequence with timing requirements(1).
Note: 1. The timing requirements shown in Figure 29-7 (that is, tDVXH, tXHXL, and tXLDX) also apply to
loading operation.
Data & contol
(DATA, XA0/1, BS1, BS2)
XTAL1 t
XHXL
t
WLWH
t
DVXH t
XLDX
t
PLWL
t
WLRH
WR
RDY/BSY
PAGEL t
PHPL
t
PLBX t
BVPH
t
XLWL
t
WLBX
tBVWL
WLRL
XTAL1
PAGEL
t XLXH PLXH t t
XLPH
DATA ADDR0 (low byte) DATA (low byte) DATA (high byte) ADDR1 (low byte)
BS1
XA0
XA1
LOAD ADDRESS
(LOW BYTE)
LOAD DATA
(LOW BYTE)
LOAD DATA
(HIGH BYTE)
LOAD DATA LOAD ADDRESS
(LOW BYTE)313
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
Figure 29-9. Parallel programming timing, reading sequence (within the same page) with timing
requirements(1).
Note: 1. The timing requirements shown in Figure 29-7 on page 312 (that is, tDVXH, tXHXL, and tXLDX)
also apply to reading operation.
Table 29-8. Parallel programming characteristics, VCC = 5V ±10%.
Symbol Parameter Min. Typ. Max. Units
VPP Programming enable voltage 11.5 12.5 V
IPP Programming enable current 250 µA
tDVXH Data and control valid before XTAL1 high 67
ns
tXLXH XTAL1 low to XTAL1 high 200
tXHXL XTAL1 pulse width high 150
tXLDX Data and control hold after XTAL1 low 67
tXLWL XTAL1 low to WR low 0
tXLPH XTAL1 low to PAGEL high 0
tPLXH PAGEL low to XTAL1 high 150
tBVPH BS1 valid before PAGEL high 67
tPHPL PAGEL pulse width high 150
tPLBX BS1 hold after PAGEL low 67
tWLBX BS2/1 hold after WR low 67
tPLWL PAGEL low to WR low 67
tBVWL BS1 valid to WR low 67
tWLWH WR pulse width low 150
tWLRL WR low to RDY/BSY low 0 1 µs
tWLRH WR low to RDY/BSY high(1) 3.7 4.5
ms
tWLRH_CE WR low to RDY/BSY high for chip erase(2) 7.5 9
XTAL1
OE
DATA ADDR0 (low byte) DATA (low byte) DATA (high byte) ADDR1 (low byte)
BS1
XA0
XA1
LOAD ADDRESS
(LOW BYTE)
READ DATA
(LOW BYTE)
READ DATA
(HIGH BYTE)
LOAD ADDRESS
(LOW BYTE)
t
BVDV
t
OLDV
t
XLOL
t
OHDZ314
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
Notes: 1. tWLRH is valid for the write flash, write EEPROM, write fuse bits and write lock bits commands.
2. tWLRH_CE is valid for the chip erase command.
t
XLOL XTAL1 low to OE low 0
ns
t
BVDV BS1 valid to DATA valid 0 250
tOLDV OE low to DATA valid 250
t
OHDZ OE high to DATA tri-stated 250
Table 29-8. Parallel programming characteristics, VCC = 5V ±10%. (Continued)
Symbol Parameter Min. Typ. Max. Units315
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
30. Typical characteristics
The following charts show typical behavior. These figures are not tested during manufacturing.
All current consumption measurements are performed with all I/O pins configured as inputs and
with internal pull-ups enabled. A square wave generator with rail-to-rail output is used as clock
source.
All Active- and Idle current consumption measurements are done with all bits in the PRR register
set and thus, the corresponding I/O modules are turned off. Also the Analog Comparator is disabled
during these measurements. Table 30-1 on page 321 and Table 30-2 on page 321 show
the additional current consumption compared to ICC Active and ICC Idle for every I/O module controlled
by the Power Reduction Register. See “Power reduction register” on page 41 for details.
The power consumption in Power-down mode is independent of clock selection.
The current consumption is a function of several factors such as: operating voltage, operating
frequency, loading of I/O pins, switching rate of I/O pins, code executed and ambient temperature.
The dominating factors are operating voltage and frequency.
The current drawn from capacitive loaded pins may be estimated (for one pin) as CL*VCC*f where
CL = load capacitance, VCC = operating voltage and f = average switching frequency of I/O pin.
The parts are characterized at frequencies higher than test limits. Parts are not guaranteed to
function properly at frequencies higher than the ordering code indicates.
The difference between current consumption in Power-down mode with Watchdog Timer
enabled and Power-down mode with Watchdog Timer disabled represents the differential current
drawn by the Watchdog Timer.
30.1 Active supply current
Figure 30-1. Active supply current vs. frequency (0.1MHz - 1.0MHz).
5.5V
5.0V
4.5V
4.0V
3.3V
2.7V
1.8V
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
1.2
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Frequency (MHz)
ICC (mA)316
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
Figure 30-2. Active supply current vs. frequency (1MHz - 24MHz).
Figure 30-3. Active supply current vs. VCC (internal RC oscillator, 128kHz).
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
0 4 8 12 16 20 24
Frequency (MHz)
ICC (mA)
2.7V
1.8V
3.3V
4.0V
4.5V
5.0V
5.5V
,
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
0.02
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.1
0.12
0.14
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (mA)317
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
Figure 30-4. Active supply current vs. VCC (internal RC oscillator, 1MHz).
Figure 30-5. Active supply current vs. VCC (internal RC oscillator, 8MHz).
,
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
1.2
1.4
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (mA)
,
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (mA)318
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
Figure 30-6. Active supply current vs. VCC (32kHz external oscillator).
30.2 Idle supply current
Figure 30-7. Idle supply current vs. frequency (0.1MHz - 1.0MHz).
25°C
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (µA)
5.5V
5.0V
4.5V
4.0V
3.3V
2.7V
1.8V
0
0.02
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.1
0.12
0.14
0.16
0.18
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Frequency (MHz)
ICC (mA)319
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
Figure 30-8. Idle supply current vs. frequency (1MHz - 24MHz).
Figure 30-9. Idle supply current vs. VCC (internal RC oscillator, 128kHz).
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
0 4 8 12 16 20 24
Frequency (MHz)
ICC (mA)
2.7V
1.8V
3.3V
4.0V
4.5V
5.0V
5.5V
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
0.005
0.01
0.015
0.02
0.025
0.03
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (mA)320
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
Figure 30-10. Idle supply current vs. VCC (internal RC oscillator, 1MHz).
Figure 30-11. Idle supply current vs. VCC (internal RC oscillator, 8MHz).
,
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
0.05
0.1
0.15
0.2
0.25
0.3
0.35
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (mA)
,
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (mA)321
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
Figure 30-12. Idle supply current vs. VCC (32kHz external oscillator).
30.3 Supply current of I/O modules
The tables and formulas below can be used to calculate the additional current consumption for
the different I/O modules in Active and Idle mode. The enabling or disabling of the I/O modules
are controlled by the Power Reduction Register. See “Power reduction register” on page 41 for
details.
25°C
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (µA)
Table 30-1. Additional current consumption for the different I/O modules (absolute values).
PRR bit Typical numbers
VCC = 2V, F = 1MHz VCC = 3V, F = 4MHz VCC = 5V, F = 8MHz
PRUSART0 8.0µA 51µA 220µA
PRTWI 12µA 75µA 315µA
PRTIM2 11µA 72µA 300µA
PRTIM1 5.0µA 32µA 130µA
PRTIM0 4.0µA 24µA 100µA
PRSPI 15µA 95µA 400µA
PRADC 12µA 75µA 315µA
Table 30-2. Additional current consumption (percentage) in active and idle mode.
PRR bit
Additional current consumption
compared to active with external clock
(see Figure 30-1 on page 315 and
Figure 30-2 on page 316)
Additional current consumption
compared to Idle with external clock
(see Figure 30-7 on page 318 and
Figure 30-8 on page 319)
PRUSART0 3.3% 18%
PRTWI 4.8% 26%
PRTIM2 4.7% 25%322
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
It is possible to calculate the typical current consumption based on the numbers from Table 30-2
on page 321 for other VCC and frequency settings than listed in Table 30-1 on page 321.
30.3.0.1 Example 1
Calculate the expected current consumption in idle mode with USART0, TIMER1, and TWI
enabled at VCC = 3.0V and F = 1MHz. From Table 30-2 on page 321, third column, we see that
we need to add 18% for the USART0, 26% for the TWI, and 11% for the TIMER1 module. Reading
from Figure 30-7 on page 318, we find that the idle current consumption is ~0.075mA at VCC
= 3.0V and F = 1MHz. The total current consumption in idle mode with USART0, TIMER1, and
TWI enabled, gives:
30.3.0.2 Example 2
Same conditions as in example 1, but in active mode instead. From Table 30-2 on page 321,
second column we see that we need to add 3.3% for the USART0, 4.8% for the TWI, and 2.0%
for the TIMER1 module. Reading from Figure 30-1 on page 315, we find that the active current
consumption is ~0.42mA at VCC = 3.0V and F = 1MHz. The total current consumption in idle
mode with USART0, TIMER1, and TWI enabled, gives:
30.3.0.3 Example 3
All I/O modules should be enabled. Calculate the expected current consumption in active mode
at VCC = 3.6V and F = 10MHz. We find the active current consumption without the I/O modules
to be ~ 4.0mA (from Figure 30-2 on page 316). Then, by using the numbers from Table 30-2 on
page 321 - second column, we find the total current consumption:
PRTIM1 2.0% 11%
PRTIM0 1.6% 8.5%
PRSPI 6.1% 33%
PRADC 4.9% 26%
Table 30-2. Additional current consumption (percentage) in active and idle mode. (Continued)
PRR bit
Additional current consumption
compared to active with external clock
(see Figure 30-1 on page 315 and
Figure 30-2 on page 316)
Additional current consumption
compared to Idle with external clock
(see Figure 30-7 on page 318 and
Figure 30-8 on page 319)
ICCtotal ≈ ≈ 0.075mA • ( ) 1 0.18 0.26 0.11 +++ 0.116mA
ICCtotal ≈ ≈ 0.42mA • ( ) 1 0.033 0.048 0.02 +++ 0.46mA
ICCtotal ≈ ≈ 4.0mA • ( ) 1 0.033 0.048 0.047 0.02 0.016 0.061 0.049 + + + ++ + + 5.1mA323
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
30.4 Power-down supply current
Figure 30-13. Power-down supply current vs. VCC (watchdog timer disabled).
Figure 30-14. Power-down supply current vs. VCC (watchdog timer enabled).
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (µA)
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (µA)324
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
30.5 Power-save supply current
Figure 30-15. Power-save supply current vs. VCC (watchdog timer disabled).
30.6 Standby supply current
Figure 30-16. Standby supply current vs. VCC (low power crystal oscillator).
25°C
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (µA)
6MHz Xtal
6MHz Res.
4MHz Xtal
4MHz Res.
455kHz Res.
32kHz Xtal
2MHz Xtal
2MHz Res.
1MHz Res.
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
180
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (µA)325
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
Figure 30-17. Standby supply current vs. VCC (full swing crystal oscillator).
30.7 Pin pull-up
Figure 30-18. I/O pin pull-up resistor current vs. input voltage (VCC = 5V).
6MHz Xtal
(ckopt)
4MHz Xtal
(ckopt)
2MHz Xtal
(ckopt)
16MHz Xtal
12MHz Xtal
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (µA)
85°C 25°C
-40°C
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
0123456
VOP (V)
IOP (µA)326
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
Figure 30-19. I/O pin pull-up resistor current vs. input voltage (VCC = 2.7V).
Figure 30-20. Reset pull-up resistor current vs. reset pin voltage (VCC = 5V).
85°C 25°C
-40°C
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3
VOP (V)
IOP (µA)
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
0123456
VRESET (V)
IRESET (µA)
-40°C 25°C
85°C327
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
Figure 30-21. Reset pull-up resistor current vs. reset pin voltage (VCC = 2.7V).
30.8 Pin driver strength
Figure 30-22. I/O pin source current vs. output voltage (VCC = 5V).
-40°C
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3
VRESET (V)
IRESET (µA)
25°C
85°C
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
0123456
VOH (V)
IOH (mA)328
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
Figure 30-23. I/O pin source current vs. output voltage (VCC = 2.7V).
Figure 30-24. I/O pin source current vs. output voltage (VCC = 1.8V).
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3
VOH (V)
IOH (mA)
85°C
25°C -40°C
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2
VOH (V)
IOH (mA)329
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
Figure 30-25. I/O pin sink current vs. output voltage (VCC = 5V).
Figure 30-26. I/O pin sink current vs. output voltage (VCC = 2.7V).
85°C
25°C
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5
VOL (V)
IOL (mA)
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5
VOL (V)
IOL (mA)330
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
Figure 30-27. I/O pin sink current vs. output voltage (VCC = 1.8V).
30.9 Pin thresholds and hysteresis
Figure 30-28. I/O pin input threshold voltage vs. VCC (VIH, I/O pin read as '1').
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2
VOL (V)
IOL (mA)
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
Threshold (V)331
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
Figure 30-29. I/O pin input threshold voltage vs. VCC (VIL, I/O pin read as '0').
Figure 30-30. I/O pin input hystreresis vs. Vcc.
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
Threshold (V)
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
Input hysteresis (V)332
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
Figure 30-31. Reset input threshold voltage vs. VCC (VIH, reset pin read as '1').
Figure 30-32. Reset input threshold voltage vs. VCC (VIL, reset pin read as '0').
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
Threshold (V)
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
Threshold (V)333
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
Figure 30-33. Reset input pin hysteresis vs. VCC.
30.10 BOD thresholds and analog comparator offset
Figure 30-34. BOD thresholds vs. temperature (BODLEVEL is 4.3V).
VIL
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
Input hysteresis (mV)
4.2
4.25
4.3
4.35
4.4
4.45
4.5
-50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Temperature (°C)
Threshold (V)
Rising Vcc
Falling Vcc334
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
Figure 30-35. BOD thresholds vs. temperature (BODLEVEL is 2.7V).
Figure 30-36. BOD thresholds vs. temperature (BODLEVEL is 1.8V).
2.6
2.65
2.7
2.75
2.8
2.85
2.9
-50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Temperature (°C)
Threshold (V)
Rising Vcc
Falling Vcc
1.76
1.78
1.8
1.82
1.84
1.86
-50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Temperature (°C)
Threshold (V)
Rising Vcc
Falling Vcc335
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
Figure 30-37. Bandgap voltage vs. VCC.
Figure 30-38. Analog comparator offset voltage vs. common mode voltage (VCC = 5V).
-40°C
85°C
1.08
1.085
1.09
1.095
1.1
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 6
VCC (V)
Bandgap voltage (V)
-40°C
85°C
0
0.001
0.002
0.003
0.004
0.005
0.006
0.007
0.008
0.009
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5
Common Mode Voltage (V)
Analog comparator offset voltage (V)336
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
Figure 30-39. Analog comparator offset voltage vs. common mode voltage (VCC = 2.7V).
30.11 Internal oscillator speed
Figure 30-40. Watchdog oscillator frequency vs. VCC.
-40°C
85°C
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5
Common Mode Voltage (V)
Analog comparator offset voltage
(mV)
85°C
25°C
-40°C
95
100
105
110
115
120
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
FRC (kHz)337
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
Figure 30-41. Calibrated 8MHz RC oscillator frequency vs. temperature.
Figure 30-42. Calibrated 8MHz RC oscillator frequency vs. VCC.
5.0V
2.7V
1.8V
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
8
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
-50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Temperature (°C)
FRC (MHz)
85°C
25°C
-40°C
7.4
7.6
7.8
8
8.2
8.4
8.6
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
FRC (MHz)338
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
Figure 30-43. Calibrated 8MHz RC oscillator frequency vs. osccal value.
30.12 Current consumption of peripheral units
Figure 30-44. Brownout detector current vs. VCC.
85°C
25°C
-40°C
3.5
5.5
7.5
9.5
11.5
13.5
0 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240
OSCCAL VALUE
FRC (MHz)
85°C
25°C
-40°C
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (µA)339
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
Figure 30-45. ADC current vs. VCC (AREF = AVCC).
Figure 30-46. AREF external reference current vs. VCC.
85°C
25°C
-40°C
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (µA)
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
180
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (µA)340
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
Figure 30-47. Analog comparator current vs. VCC.
Figure 30-48. Programming current vs. VCC.
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (µA)
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (mA)
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (mA)341
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
30.13 Current consumption in reset and reset pulse width
Figure 30-49. Reset supply current vs. VCC (0.1MHz - 1.0MHz, excluding current through the
reset pull-up).
Figure 30-50. Reset supply current vs. VCC (1MHz - 24MHz, excluding current through the reset
pull-up).
5.5V
5.0V
4.5V
4.0V
3.3V
2.7V
1.8V
0
0.02
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.1
0.12
0.14
0.16
0.18
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Frequency (MHz)
ICC (mA)
,
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
0 4 8 12 16 20 24
Frequency (MHz)
ICC (mA)
2.7V
1.8V
3.3V
4.0V
4.5V
5.0V
5.5V342
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
Figure 30-51. Reset pulse width vs. VCC.
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
Pulsewidth (ns)343
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
31. Register summary
Address Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Page
(0xFF) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xFE) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xFD) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xFC) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xFB) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xFA) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xF9) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xF8) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xF7) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xF6) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xF5) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xF4) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xF3) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xF2) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xF1) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xF0) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xEF) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xEE) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xED) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xEC) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xEB) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xEA) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xE9) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xE8) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xE7) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xE6) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xE5) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xE4) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xE3) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xE2) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xE1) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xE0) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xDF) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xDE) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xDD) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xDC) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xDB) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xDA) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xD9) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xD8) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xD7) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xD6) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xD5) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xD4) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xD3) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xD2) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xD1) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xD0) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xCF) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xCE) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xCD) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xCC) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xCB) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xCA) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xC9) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xC8) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xC7) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xC6) UDR0 USART I/O data register 190
(0xC5) UBRR0H USART baud rate register high 194
(0xC4) UBRR0L USART baud rate register low 194
(0xC3) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xC2) UCSR0C UMSEL01 UMSEL00 UPM01 UPM00 USBS0 UCSZ01 /UDORD0 UCSZ00 / UCPHA0 UCPOL0 192/207
(0xC1) UCSR0B RXCIE0 TXCIE0 UDRIE0 RXEN0 TXEN0 UCSZ02 RXB80 TXB80 191
(0xC0) UCSR0A RXC0 TXC0 UDRE0 FE0 DOR0 UPE0 U2X0 MPCM0 190344
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
(0xBF) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xBE) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xBD) TWAMR TWAM6 TWAM5 TWAM4 TWAM3 TWAM2 TWAM1 TWAM0 – 239
(0xBC) TWCR TWINT TWEA TWSTA TWSTO TWWC TWEN – TWIE 236
(0xBB) TWDR 2-wire serial interface data register 238
(0xBA) TWAR TWA6 TWA5 TWA4 TWA3 TWA2 TWA1 TWA0 TWGCE 239
(0xB9) TWSR TWS7 TWS6 TWS5 TWS4 TWS3 – TWPS1 TWPS0 238
(0xB8) TWBR 2-wire serial interface bit rate register 236
(0xB7) Reserved – – – – – – –
(0xB6) ASSR – EXCLK AS2 TCN2UB OCR2AUB OCR2BUB TCR2AUB TCR2BUB 159
(0xB5) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xB4) OCR2B Timer/Counter2 output compare register B 158
(0xB3) OCR2A Timer/Counter2 output compare register A 157
(0xB2) TCNT2 Timer/Counter2 (8-bit) 157
(0xB1) TCCR2B FOC2A FOC2B – – WGM22 CS22 CS21 CS20 156
(0xB0) TCCR2A COM2A1 COM2A0 COM2B1 COM2B0 – – WGM21 WGM20 153
(0xAF) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xAE) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xAD) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xAC) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xAB) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xAA) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xA9) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xA8) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xA7) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xA6) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xA5) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xA4) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xA3) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xA2) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xA1) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xA0) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x9F) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x9E) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x9D) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x9C) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x9B) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x9A) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x99) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x98) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x97) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x96) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x95) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x94) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x93) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x92) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x91) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x90) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x8F) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x8E) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x8D) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x8C) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x8B) OCR1BH Timer/Counter1 - output compare register B high byte 134
(0x8A) OCR1BL Timer/Counter1 - output compare register B low byte 134
(0x89) OCR1AH Timer/Counter1 - output compare register A high byte 134
(0x88) OCR1AL Timer/Counter1 - output compare register A low byte 134
(0x87) ICR1H Timer/Counter1 - input capture register high byte 135
(0x86) ICR1L Timer/Counter1 - input capture register low byte 135
(0x85) TCNT1H Timer/Counter1 - counter register high byte 134
(0x84) TCNT1L Timer/Counter1 - counter register low byte 134
(0x83) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x82) TCCR1C FOC1A FOC1B – – – – – – 133
(0x81) TCCR1B ICNC1 ICES1 – WGM13 WGM12 CS12 CS11 CS10 132
(0x80) TCCR1A COM1A1 COM1A0 COM1B1 COM1B0 – – WGM11 WGM10 130
(0x7F) DIDR1 – – – – – – AIN1D AIN0D 243
(0x7E) DIDR0 – – ADC5D ADC4D ADC3D ADC2D ADC1D ADC0D 259
Address Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Page345
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
(0x7D) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x7C) ADMUX REFS1 REFS0 ADLAR – MUX3 MUX2 MUX1 MUX0 255
(0x7B) ADCSRB – ACME – – – ADTS2 ADTS1 ADTS0 258
(0x7A) ADCSRA ADEN ADSC ADATE ADIF ADIE ADPS2 ADPS1 ADPS0 256
(0x79) ADCH ADC data register high byte 258
(0x78) ADCL ADC data register low byte 258
(0x77) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x76) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x75) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x74) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x73) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x72) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x71) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x70) TIMSK2 – – – – – OCIE2B OCIE2A TOIE2 158
(0x6F) TIMSK1 – – ICIE1 – – OCIE1B OCIE1A TOIE1 135
(0x6E) TIMSK0 – – – – – OCIE0B OCIE0A TOIE0 106
(0x6D) PCMSK2 PCINT23 PCINT22 PCINT21 PCINT20 PCINT19 PCINT18 PCINT17 PCINT16 70
(0x6C) PCMSK1 – PCINT14 PCINT13 PCINT12 PCINT11 PCINT10 PCINT9 PCINT8 70
(0x6B) PCMSK0 PCINT7 PCINT6 PCINT5 PCINT4 PCINT3 PCINT2 PCINT1 PCINT0 70
(0x6A) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x69) EICRA – – – – ISC11 ISC10 ISC01 ISC00 67
(0x68) PCICR – – – – – PCIE2 PCIE1 PCIE0
(0x67) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x66) OSCCAL Oscillator calibration register 37
(0x65) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x64) PRR PRTWI PRTIM2 PRTIM0 – PRTIM1 PRSPI PRUSART0 PRADC 41
(0x63) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x62) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x61) CLKPR CLKPCE – – – CLKPS3 CLKPS2 CLKPS1 CLKPS0 37
(0x60) WDTCSR WDIF WDIE WDP3 WDCE WDE WDP2 WDP1 WDP0 53
0x3F (0x5F) SREG I T H S V N Z C 11
0x3E (0x5E) SPH – – – – – (SP10) 5. SP9 SP8 13
0x3D (0x5D) SPL SP7 SP6 SP5 SP4 SP3 SP2 SP1 SP0 13
0x3C (0x5C) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x3B (0x5B) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x3A (0x5A) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x39 (0x59) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x38 (0x58) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x37 (0x57) SPMCSR SPMIE (RWWSB)5. – (RWWSRE)5. BLBSET PGWRT PGERS SELFPRGEN 283
0x36 (0x56) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x35 (0x55) MCUCR – – – PUD – – IVSEL IVCE
0x34 (0x54) MCUSR – – – – WDRF BORF EXTRF PORF
0x33 (0x53) SMCR – – – – SM2 SM1 SM0 SE 39
0x32 (0x52) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x31 (0x51) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x30 (0x50) ACSR ACD ACBG ACO ACI ACIE ACIC ACIS1 ACIS0 242
0x2F (0x4F) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x2E (0x4E) SPDR SPI data register 170
0x2D (0x4D) SPSR SPIF WCOL – – – – – SPI2X 169
0x2C (0x4C) SPCR SPIE SPE DORD MSTR CPOL CPHA SPR1 SPR0 168
0x2B (0x4B) GPIOR2 General purpose I/O register 2 26
0x2A (0x4A) GPIOR1 General purpose I/O register 1 26
0x29 (0x49) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x28 (0x48) OCR0B Timer/Counter0 output compare register B
0x27 (0x47) OCR0A Timer/Counter0 output compare register A
0x26 (0x46) TCNT0 Timer/Counter0 (8-bit)
0x25 (0x45) TCCR0B FOC0A FOC0B – – WGM02 CS02 CS01 CS00
0x24 (0x44) TCCR0A COM0A1 COM0A0 COM0B1 COM0B0 – – WGM01 WGM00
0x23 (0x43) GTCCR TSM – – – – – PSRASY PSRSYNC 139/160
0x22 (0x42) EEARH (EEPROM address register high byte) 5. 22
0x21 (0x41) EEARL EEPROM address register low byte 22
0x20 (0x40) EEDR EEPROM data register 22
0x1F (0x3F) EECR – – EEPM1 EEPM0 EERIE EEMPE EEPE EERE 22
0x1E (0x3E) GPIOR0 General purpose I/O register 0 26
0x1D (0x3D) EIMSK – – – – – – INT1 INT0 68
0x1C (0x3C) EIFR – – – – – – INTF1 INTF0 68
Address Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Page346
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
Note: 1. For compatibility with future devices, reserved bits should be written to zero if accessed. Reserved I/O memory addresses
should never be written.
2. I/O Registers within the address range 0x00 - 0x1F are directly bit-accessible using the SBI and CBI instructions. In these
registers, the value of single bits can be checked by using the SBIS and SBIC instructions.
3. Some of the Status Flags are cleared by writing a logical one to them. Note that, unlike most other AVRs, the CBI and SBI
instructions will only operate on the specified bit, and can therefore be used on registers containing such Status Flags. The
CBI and SBI instructions work with registers 0x00 to 0x1F only.
4. When using the I/O specific commands IN and OUT, the I/O addresses 0x00 - 0x3F must be used. When addressing I/O
Registers as data space using LD and ST instructions, 0x20 must be added to these addresses. The Atmel
ATmega48/88/168 is a complex microcontroller with more peripheral units than can be supported within the 64 location
reserved in Opcode for the IN and OUT instructions. For the Extended I/O space from 0x60 - 0xFF in SRAM, only the
ST/STS/STD and LD/LDS/LDD instructions can be used.
5. Only valid for ATmega88/168
0x1B (0x3B) PCIFR – – – – – PCIF2 PCIF1 PCIF0
0x1A (0x3A) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x19 (0x39) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x18 (0x38) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x17 (0x37) TIFR2 – – – – – OCF2B OCF2A TOV2 158
0x16 (0x36) TIFR1 – – ICF1 – – OCF1B OCF1A TOV1 136
0x15 (0x35) TIFR0 – – – – – OCF0B OCF0A TOV0
0x14 (0x34) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x13 (0x33) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x12 (0x32) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x11 (0x31) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x10 (0x30) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x0F (0x2F) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x0E (0x2E) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x0D (0x2D) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x0C (0x2C) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x0B (0x2B) PORTD PORTD7 PORTD6 PORTD5 PORTD4 PORTD3 PORTD2 PORTD1 PORTD0 88
0x0A (0x2A) DDRD DDD7 DDD6 DDD5 DDD4 DDD3 DDD2 DDD1 DDD0 88
0x09 (0x29) PIND PIND7 PIND6 PIND5 PIND4 PIND3 PIND2 PIND1 PIND0 88
0x08 (0x28) PORTC – PORTC6 PORTC5 PORTC4 PORTC3 PORTC2 PORTC1 PORTC0 87
0x07 (0x27) DDRC – DDC6 DDC5 DDC4 DDC3 DDC2 DDC1 DDC0 87
0x06 (0x26) PINC – PINC6 PINC5 PINC4 PINC3 PINC2 PINC1 PINC0 87
0x05 (0x25) PORTB PORTB7 PORTB6 PORTB5 PORTB4 PORTB3 PORTB2 PORTB1 PORTB0 87
0x04 (0x24) DDRB DDB7 DDB6 DDB5 DDB4 DDB3 DDB2 DDB1 DDB0 87
0x03 (0x23) PINB PINB7 PINB6 PINB5 PINB4 PINB3 PINB2 PINB1 PINB0 87
0x02 (0x22) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x01 (0x21) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x0 (0x20) Reserved – – – – – – – –
Address Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Page347
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
32. Instruction set summary
Mnemonics Operands Description Operation Flags #Clocks
ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC INSTRUCTIONS
ADD Rd, Rr Add two registers Rd ← Rd + Rr Z, C, N, V, H 1
ADC Rd, Rr Add with carry two registers Rd ← Rd + Rr + C Z, C, N, V, H 1
ADIW Rdl,K Add immediate to word Rdh:Rdl ← Rdh:Rdl + K Z, C, N, V, S 2
SUB Rd, Rr Subtract two registers Rd ← Rd - Rr Z, C, N, V, H 1
SUBI Rd, K Subtract constant from register Rd ← Rd - K Z, C, N, V, H 1
SBC Rd, Rr Subtract with carry two registers Rd ← Rd - Rr - C Z, C, N, V, H 1
SBCI Rd, K Subtract with carry constant from reg. Rd ← Rd - K - C Z, C, N, V, H 1
SBIW Rdl,K Subtract immediate from Word Rdh:Rdl ← Rdh:Rdl - K Z, C, N, V, S 2
AND Rd, Rr Logical AND registers Rd ← Rd • Rr Z, N, V 1
ANDI Rd, K Logical AND register and constant Rd ← Rd • K Z, N, V 1
OR Rd, Rr Logical OR registers Rd ← Rd v Rr Z, N, V 1
ORI Rd, K Logical OR register and constant Rd ← Rd v K Z, N, V 1
EOR Rd, Rr Exclusive OR registers Rd ← Rd ⊕ Rr Z, N, V 1
COM Rd One’s complement Rd ← 0xFF − Rd Z, C, N, V 1
NEG Rd Two’s complement Rd ← 0x00 − Rd Z, C, N, V, H 1
SBR Rd,K Set bit(s) in register Rd ← Rd v K Z, N, V 1
CBR Rd,K Clear bit(s) in register Rd ← Rd • (0xFF - K) Z, N, V 1
INC Rd Increment Rd ← Rd + 1 Z, N, V 1
DEC Rd Decrement Rd ← Rd − 1 Z, N, V 1
TST Rd Test for zero or minus Rd ← Rd • Rd Z, N, V 1
CLR Rd Clear register Rd ← Rd ⊕ Rd Z, N, V 1
SER Rd Set register Rd ← 0xFF None 1
MUL Rd, Rr Multiply unsigned R1:R0 ← Rd x Rr Z, C 2
MULS Rd, Rr Multiply signed R1:R0 ← Rd x Rr Z, C 2
MULSU Rd, Rr Multiply signed with unsigned R1:R0 ← Rd x Rr Z, C 2
FMUL Rd, Rr Fractional multiply unsigned R1:R0 ← (Rd x Rr) << 1 Z, C 2
FMULS Rd, Rr Fractional multiply signed R1:R0 ← (Rd x Rr) << 1 Z, C 2
FMULSU Rd, Rr Fractional multiply signed with unsigned R1:R0 ← (Rd x Rr) << 1 Z, C 2
BRANCH INSTRUCTIONS
RJMP k Relative jump PC ← PC + k + 1 None 2
IJMP Indirect jump to (Z) PC ← Z None 2
JMP(1) k Direct jump PC ← k None 3
RCALL k Relative subroutine call PC ← PC + k + 1 None 3
ICALL Indirect call to (Z) PC ← Z None 3
CALL(1) k Direct subroutine call PC ← k None 4
RET Subroutine return PC ← STACK None 4
RETI Interrupt return PC ← STACK I 4
CPSE Rd,Rr Compare, skip if equal if (Rd = Rr) PC ← PC + 2 or 3 None 1/2/3
CP Rd,Rr Compare Rd − Rr Z, N, V, C, H 1
CPC Rd,Rr Compare with carry Rd − Rr − C Z, N, V, C, H 1
CPI Rd,K Compare register with immediate Rd − K Z, N, V, C, H 1
SBRC Rr, b Skip if bit in register cleared if (Rr(b)=0) PC ← PC + 2 or 3 None 1/2/3
SBRS Rr, b Skip if bit in register is set if (Rr(b)=1) PC ← PC + 2 or 3 None 1/2/3
SBIC P, b Skip if bit in I/O register cleared if (P(b)=0) PC ← PC + 2 or 3 None 1/2/3
SBIS P, b Skip if bit in I/O register is set if (P(b)=1) PC ← PC + 2 or 3 None 1/2/3
BRBS s, k Branch if status flag set if (SREG(s) = 1) then PC←PC+k + 1 None 1/2
BRBC s, k Branch if status flag cleared if (SREG(s) = 0) then PC←PC+k + 1 None 1/2
BREQ k Branch if equal if (Z = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRNE k Branch if not equal if (Z = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRCS k Branch if carry set if (C = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRCC k Branch if carry cleared if (C = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRSH k Branch if same or higher if (C = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRLO k Branch if lower if (C = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRMI k Branch if minus if (N = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRPL k Branch if plus if (N = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRGE k Branch if greater or equal, signed if (N ⊕ V= 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRLT k Branch if less than zero, signed if (N ⊕ V= 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRHS k Branch if half carry flag set if (H = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRHC k Branch if half carry flag cleared if (H = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRTS k Branch if T flag set if (T = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRTC k Branch if T flag cleared if (T = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRVS k Branch if overflow flag is set if (V = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRVC k Branch if overflow flag is cleared if (V = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2348
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
BRIE k Branch if interrupt enabled if ( I = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRID k Branch if interrupt disabled if ( I = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BIT AND BIT-TEST INSTRUCTIONS
SBI P,b Set bit in I/O register I/O(P,b) ← 1 None 2
CBI P,b Clear bit in I/O register I/O(P,b) ← 0 None 2
LSL Rd Logical shift left Rd(n+1) ← Rd(n), Rd(0) ← 0 Z, C, N, V 1
LSR Rd Logical shift right Rd(n) ← Rd(n+1), Rd(7) ← 0 Z, C, N, V 1
ROL Rd Rotate left through carry Rd(0)←C,Rd(n+1)← Rd(n),C←Rd(7) Z, C, N, V 1
ROR Rd Rotate right through carry Rd(7)←C,Rd(n)← Rd(n+1),C←Rd(0) Z, C, N, V 1
ASR Rd Arithmetic shift right Rd(n) ← Rd(n+1), n=0..6 Z, C, N, V 1
SWAP Rd Swap nibbles Rd(3..0)←Rd(7..4),Rd(7..4)←Rd(3..0) None 1
BSET s Flag set SREG(s) ← 1 SREG(s) 1
BCLR s Flag clear SREG(s) ← 0 SREG(s) 1
BST Rr, b Bit store from register to T T ← Rr(b) T 1
BLD Rd, b Bit load from T to register Rd(b) ← T None 1
SEC Set carry C ← 1 C1
CLC Clear carry C ← 0 C 1
SEN Set negative flag N ← 1 N1
CLN Clear negative flag N ← 0 N 1
SEZ Set zero flag Z ← 1 Z1
CLZ Clear zero flag Z ← 0 Z 1
SEI Global interrupt enable I ← 1 I1
CLI Global interrupt disable I ← 0 I 1
SES Set signed test flag S ← 1 S1
CLS Clear signed test flag S ← 0 S 1
SEV Set Twos complement overflow V ← 1 V1
CLV Clear Twos complement overflow V ← 0 V 1
SET Set T in SREG T ← 1 T1
CLT Clear T in SREG T ← 0 T 1
SEH Set half carry flag in SREG H ← 1 H1
CLH Clear half carry flag in SREG H ← 0 H 1
DATA TRANSFER INSTRUCTIONS
MOV Rd, Rr Move between registers Rd ← Rr None 1
MOVW Rd, Rr Copy register Word Rd+1:Rd ← Rr+1:Rr None 1
LDI Rd, K Load immediate Rd ← K None 1
LD Rd, X Load indirect Rd ← (X) None 2
LD Rd, X+ Load indirect and post-inc. Rd ← (X), X ← X + 1 None 2
LD Rd, - X Load indirect and pre-dec. X ← X - 1, Rd ← (X) None 2
LD Rd, Y Load indirect Rd ← (Y) None 2
LD Rd, Y+ Load indirect and post-inc. Rd ← (Y), Y ← Y + 1 None 2
LD Rd, - Y Load indirect and pre-dec. Y ← Y - 1, Rd ← (Y) None 2
LDD Rd,Y+q Load indirect with displacement Rd ← (Y + q) None 2
LD Rd, Z Load indirect Rd ← (Z) None 2
LD Rd, Z+ Load indirect and post-inc. Rd ← (Z), Z ← Z+1 None 2
LD Rd, -Z Load indirect and pre-dec. Z ← Z - 1, Rd ← (Z) None 2
LDD Rd, Z+q Load indirect with displacement Rd ← (Z + q) None 2
LDS Rd, k Load direct from SRAM Rd ← (k) None 2
ST X, Rr Store indirect (X) ← Rr None 2
ST X+, Rr Store indirect and post-inc. (X) ← Rr, X ← X + 1 None 2
ST - X, Rr Store indirect and pre-dec. X ← X - 1, (X) ← Rr None 2
ST Y, Rr Store indirect (Y) ← Rr None 2
ST Y+, Rr Store indirect and post-inc. (Y) ← Rr, Y ← Y + 1 None 2
ST - Y, Rr Store indirect and pre-dec. Y ← Y - 1, (Y) ← Rr None 2
STD Y+q,Rr Store indirect with displacement (Y + q) ← Rr None 2
ST Z, Rr Store indirect (Z) ← Rr None 2
ST Z+, Rr Store indirect and post-inc. (Z) ← Rr, Z ← Z + 1 None 2
ST -Z, Rr Store indirect and pre-dec. Z ← Z - 1, (Z) ← Rr None 2
STD Z+q,Rr Store indirect with displacement (Z + q) ← Rr None 2
STS k, Rr Store direct to SRAM (k) ← Rr None 2
LPM Load program memory R0 ← (Z) None 3
LPM Rd, Z Load program memory Rd ← (Z) None 3
LPM Rd, Z+ Load program memory and post-inc Rd ← (Z), Z ← Z+1 None 3
SPM Store program memory (Z) ← R1:R0 None -
IN Rd, P In port Rd ← P None 1
OUT P, Rr Out port P ← Rr None 1
PUSH Rr Push register on stack STACK ← Rr None 2
Mnemonics Operands Description Operation Flags #Clocks349
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
Note: 1. These instructions are only available in Atmel ATmega168.
POP Rd Pop register from stack Rd ← STACK None 2
MCU CONTROL INSTRUCTIONS
NOP No operation None 1
SLEEP Sleep (See specific descr. for sleep function) None 1
WDR Watchdog reset (See specific descr. for WDR/timer) None 1
BREAK Break For on-chip debug only None N/A
Mnemonics Operands Description Operation Flags #Clocks350
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
33. Ordering information
33.1 Atmel ATmega48
Note: 1. This device can also be supplied in wafer form. Please contact your local Atmel sales office for detailed ordering information
and minimum quantities.
2. Pb-free packaging alternative, complies to the European Directive for Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS directive).
Also Halide free and fully Green.
3. See Figure 29-1 on page 305 and Figure 29-2 on page 305.
4. NiPdAu lead finish.
5. Tape & Reel.
Speed (MHz) Power supply Ordering code(2) Package(1) Operational range
10(3) 1.8V - 5.5V
ATmega48V-10AUR(5)
ATmega48V-10MUR(5)
ATmega48V-10AU
ATmega48V-10MMU
ATmega48V-10MMUR(5)
ATmega48V-10MMH(4)
ATmega48V-10MMHR(4)(5)
ATmega48V-10MU
ATmega48V-10PU
32A
32M1-A
32A
28M1
28M1
28M1
28M1
32M1-A
28P3
Industrial
(-40°C to 85°C)
20(3) 2.7V - 5.5V
ATmega48-20AUR(5)
ATmega48-20MUR(5)
ATmega48-20AU
ATmega48-20MMU
ATmega48-20MMUR(5)
ATmega48-20MMH(4)
ATmega48-20MMHR(4)(5)
ATmega48-20MU
ATmega48-20PU
32A
32M1-A
32A
28M1
28M1
28M1
28M1
32M1-A
28P3
Industrial
(-40°C to 85°C)
Package type
32A 32-lead, thin (1.0mm) plastic quad flat package (TQFP)
28M1 28-pad, 4 × 4 × 1.0 body, lead pitch 0.45mm quad flat no-lead/micro lead frame package (QFN/MLF)
32M1-A 32-pad, 5 × 5 × 1.0 body, lead pitch 0.50mm quad flat no-lead/micro lead frame package (QFN/MLF)
28P3 28-lead, 0.300” wide, plastic dual inline package (PDIP)351
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
33.2 Atmel ATmega88
Note: 1. This device can also be supplied in wafer form. Please contact your local Atmel sales office for detailed ordering information
and minimum quantities.
2. Pb-free packaging alternative, complies to the European Directive for Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS directive).
Also Halide free and fully Green.
3. See Figure 29-1 on page 305 and Figure 29-2 on page 305.
4. Tape & reel
Speed (MHz) Power supply Ordering code(2) Package(1) Operational range
10(3) 1.8V - 5.5V
ATmega88V-10AUR(4)
ATmega88V-10MUR(4)
ATmega88V-10AU
ATmega88V-10MU
ATmega88V-10PU
32A
32M1-A
32A
32M1-A
28P3
Industrial
(-40°C to 85°C)
20(3) 2.7V - 5.5V
ATmega88-20AUR(4)
ATmega88-20MUR(4)
ATmega88-20AU
ATmega88-20MU
ATmega88-20PU
32A
32M1-A
32A
32M1-A
28P3
Industrial
(-40°C to 85°C)
Package type
32A 32-lead, thin (1.0mm) plastic quad flat package (TQFP)
32M1-A 32-pad, 5 × 5 × 1.0 body, lead pitch 0.50mm quad flat no-lead/micro lead frame package (QFN/MLF)
28P3 28-lead, 0.300” wide, plastic dual inline package (PDIP)352
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
33.3 Atmel ATmega168
Note: 1. This device can also be supplied in wafer form. Please contact your local Atmel sales office for detailed ordering information
and minimum quantities.
2. Pb-free packaging alternative, complies to the European Directive for Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS directive).
Also Halide free and fully Green.
3. See Figure 29-1 on page 305 and Figure 29-2 on page 305.
4. Tape & reel
Speed (MHz)(3) Power supply Ordering code(2) Package(1) Operational range
10 1.8V - 5.5V
ATmega168V-10AUR(4)
ATmega168V-10MUR(4)
ATmega168V-10AU
ATmega168V-10MU
ATmega168V-10PU
32A
32M1-A
32A
32M1-A
28P3
Industrial
(-40°C to 85°C)
20 2.7V - 5.5V
ATmega168-20AUR(4)
ATmega168-20MUR(4)
ATmega168-20AU
ATmega168-20MU
ATmega168-20PU
32A
32M1-A
32A
32M1-A
28P3
Industrial
(-40°C to 85°C)
Package type
32A 32-lead, thin (1.0mm) plastic quad flat package (TQFP)
32M1-A 32-pad, 5 × 5 × 1.0 body, lead pitch 0.50mm quad flat no-lead/micro lead frame package (QFN/MLF)
28P3 28-lead, 0.300” wide, plastic dual inline package (PDIP)353
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
34. Packaging information
34.1 32A
2325 Orchard Parkway
San Jose, CA 95131
TITLE DRAWING NO.
R
REV.
32A, 32-lead, 7 x 7mm Body Size, 1.0mm Body Thickness,
0.8 mm Lead Pitch, Thin Profile Plastic Quad Flat Package (TQFP) 32A C
2010-10-20
PIN 1 IDENTIFIER
0°~7°
PIN 1
L
C
A1 A2 A
D1
D
e E1 E
B
Notes:
1. This package conforms to JEDEC reference MS-026, Variation ABA.
2. Dimensions D1 and E1 do not include mold protrusion. Allowable
protrusion is 0.25mm per side. Dimensions D1 and E1 are maximum
plastic body size dimensions including mold mismatch.
3. Lead coplanarity is 0.10mm maximum.
A – – 1.20
A1 0.05 – 0.15
A2 0.95 1.00 1.05
D 8.75 9.00 9.25
D1 6.90 7.00 7.10 Note 2
E 8.75 9.00 9.25
E1 6.90 7.00 7.10 Note 2
B 0.30 – 0.45
C 0.09 – 0.20
L 0.45 – 0.75
e 0.80 TYP
COMMON DIMENSIONS
(Unit of Measure = mm)
SYMBOL MIN NOM MAX NOTE354
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
34.2 28M1
TITLE GPC DRAWING NO. REV.
Package Drawing Contact:
packagedrawings@atmel.com ZBV B 28M1
28M1, 28-pad, 4 x 4 x 1.0mm Body, Lead Pitch 0.45mm,
2.4 x 2.4mm Exposed Pad, Thermally Enhanced
Plastic Very Thin Quad Flat No Lead Package (VQFN)
10/24/08
SIDE VIEW
Pin 1 ID
BOTTOM VIEW
TOP VIEW
Note: The terminal #1 ID is a Laser-marked Feature.
D
E
e
K
A1
C
A
D2
E2
y
L
1
2
3
b
1
2
3
0.45 COMMON DIMENSIONS
(Unit of Measure = mm)
SYMBOL MIN NOM MAX NOTE
A 0.80 0.90 1.00
A1 0.00 0.02 0.05
b 0.17 0.22 0.27
C 0.20 REF
D 3.95 4.00 4.05
D2 2.35 2.40 2.45
E 3.95 4.00 4.05
E2 2.35 2.40 2.45
e 0.45
L 0.35 0.40 0.45
y 0.00 – 0.08
K 0.20 – –
R 0.20
0.4 Ref
(4x)355
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
34.3 32M1-A
2325 Orchard Parkway
San Jose, CA 95131
TITLE DRAWING NO.
R
REV.
32M1-A, 32-pad, 5 x 5 x 1.0mm Body, Lead Pitch 0.50mm, 32M1-A E
5/25/06
3.10mm Exposed Pad, Micro Lead Frame Package (MLF)
COMMON DIMENSIONS
(Unit of Measure = mm)
SYMBOL MIN NOM MAX NOTE
D1
D
E1 E
b e
A3
A2
A1
A
D2
E2
0.08 C
L
1
2
3
P
P
0
1
2
3
A 0.80 0.90 1.00
A1 – 0.02 0.05
A2 – 0.65 1.00
A3 0.20 REF
b 0.18 0.23 0.30
D
D1
D2 2.95 3.10 3.25
4.90 5.00 5.10
4.70 4.75 4.80
4.70 4.75 4.80
4.90 5.00 5.10
E
E1
E2 2.95 3.10 3.25
e 0.50 BSC
L 0.30 0.40 0.50
P – – 0.60
– – 12o
Note: JEDEC Standard MO-220, Fig. 2 (Anvil Singulation), VHHD-2.
TOP VIEW
SIDE VIEW
BOTTOM VIEW
0
Pin 1 ID
Pin #1 Notch
(0.20 R)
K 0.20 – –
K
K356
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
34.4 28P3
2325 Orchard Parkway
San Jose, CA 95131
TITLE DRAWING NO.
R
REV.
28P3, 28-lead (0.300"/7.62mm Wide) Plastic Dual
Inline Package (PDIP) 28P3 B
09/28/01
PIN
1
E1
A1
B
REF
E
B1
C
L
SEATING PLANE
A
0º ~ 15º
D
e
eB
B2
(4 PLACES)
COMMON DIMENSIONS
(Unit of Measure = mm)
SYMBOL MIN NOM MAX NOTE
A – – 4.5724
A1 0.508 – –
D 34.544 – 34.798 Note 1
E 7.620 – 8.255
E1 7.112 – 7.493 Note 1
B 0.381 – 0.533
B1 1.143 – 1.397
B2 0.762 – 1.143
L 3.175 – 3.429
C 0.203 – 0.356
eB – – 10.160
e 2.540 TYP
Note: 1. Dimensions D and E1 do not include mold Flash or Protrusion.
Mold Flash or Protrusion shall not exceed 0.25mm (0.010"). 357
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
35. Errata
35.1 Errata Atmel ATmega48
The revision letter in this section refers to the revision of the ATmega48 device.
35.1.1 Rev. D
• Interrupts may be lost when writing the timer registers in the asynchronous timer
1. Interrupts may be lost when writing the timer registers in the asynchronous timer
The interrupt will be lost if a timer register that is synchronous timer clock is written when the
asynchronous Timer/Counter register (TCNTx) is 0x00.
Problem fix/workaround
Always check that the asynchronous Timer/Counter register neither have the value 0xFF nor
0x00 before writing to the asynchronous Timer Control Register (TCCRx), asynchronous
Timer Counter Register (TCNTx), or asynchronous Output Compare Register (OCRx).
35.1.2 Rev. C
• Reading EEPROM when system clock frequency is below 900kHz may not work
• Interrupts may be lost when writing the timer registers in the asynchronous timer
1. Reading EEPROM when system clock frequency is below 900kHz may not work
Reading Data from the EEPROM at system clock frequency below 900kHz may result in
wrong data read.
Problem fix/workaround
Avoid using the EEPROM at clock frequency below 900kHz.
2. Interrupts may be lost when writing the timer registers in the asynchronous timer
The interrupt will be lost if a timer register that is synchronous timer clock is written when the
asynchronous Timer/Counter register (TCNTx) is 0x00.
Problem fix/workaround
Always check that the asynchronous Timer/Counter register neither have the value 0xFF nor
0x00 before writing to the asynchronous Timer Control Register (TCCRx), asynchronous
Timer Counter Register (TCNTx), or asynchronous Output Compare Register (OCRx).
35.1.3 Rev. B
• Interrupts may be lost when writing the timer registers in the asynchronous timer
1. Interrupts may be lost when writing the timer registers in the asynchronous timer
The interrupt will be lost if a timer register that is synchronous timer clock is written when the
asynchronous Timer/Counter register (TCNTx) is 0x00.
Problem fix/workaround
Always check that the asynchronous Timer/Counter register neither have the value 0xFF nor
0x00 before writing to the asynchronous Timer Control Register (TCCRx), asynchronous
Timer Counter Register (TCNTx), or asynchronous Output Compare Register (OCRx).358
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
35.1.4 Rev A
• Part may hang in reset
• Wrong values read after erase only operation
• Watchdog timer interrupt disabled
• Start-up time with crystal oscillator is higher than expected
• High power consumption in power-down with external clock
• Asynchronous oscillator does not stop in power-down
• Interrupts may be lost when writing the timer registers in the asynchronous timer
1. Part may hang in reset
Some parts may get stuck in a reset state when a reset signal is applied when the internal
reset state-machine is in a specific state. The internal reset state-machine is in this state for
approximately 10ns immediately before the part wakes up after a reset, and in a 10ns window
when altering the system clock prescaler. The problem is most often seen during InSystem
Programming of the device. There are theoretical possibilities of this happening also
in run-mode. The following three cases can trigger the device to get stuck in a reset-state:
- Two succeeding resets are applied where the second reset occurs in the 10ns window
before the device is out of the reset-state caused by the first reset.
- A reset is applied in a 10ns window while the system clock prescaler value is updated by
software.
- Leaving SPI-programming mode generates an internal reset signal that can trigger this
case.
The two first cases can occur during normal operating mode, while the last case occurs only
during programming of the device.
Problem fix/workaround
The first case can be avoided during run-mode by ensuring that only one reset source is
active. If an external reset push button is used, the reset start-up time should be selected
such that the reset line is fully debounced during the start-up time.
The second case can be avoided by not using the system clock prescaler.
The third case occurs during In-System programming only. It is most frequently seen when
using the internal RC at maximum frequency.
If the device gets stuck in the reset-state, turn power off, then on again to get the device out
of this state.
2. Wrong values read after erase only operation
At supply voltages below 2.7V, an EEPROM location that is erased by the Erase Only operation
may read as programmed (0x00).
Problem fix/workaround
If it is necessary to read an EEPROM location after Erase Only, use an Atomic Write operation
with 0xFF as data in order to erase a location. In any case, the Write Only operation can
be used as intended. Thus no special considerations are needed as long as the erased location
is not read before it is programmed.359
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
3. Watchdog timer interrupt disabled
If the watchdog timer interrupt flag is not cleared before a new timeout occurs, the watchdog
will be disabled, and the interrupt flag will automatically be cleared. This is only applicable in
interrupt only mode. If the Watchdog is configured to reset the device in the watchdog timeout
following an interrupt, the device works correctly.
Problem fix/workaround
Make sure there is enough time to always service the first timeout event before a new
watchdog timeout occurs. This is done by selecting a long enough time-out period.
4. Start-up time with crystal oscillator is higher than expected
The clock counting part of the start-up time is about two times higher than expected for all
start-up periods when running on an external Crystal. This applies only when waking up by
reset. Wake-up from power down is not affected. For most settings, the clock counting parts
is a small fraction of the overall start-up time, and thus, the problem can be ignored. The
exception is when using a very low frequency crystal like for instance a 32kHz clock crystal.
Problem fix/workaround
No known workaround.
5. High power consumption in power-down with external clock
The power consumption in power down with an active external clock is about 10 times
higher than when using internal RC or external oscillators.
Problem fix/workaround
Stop the external clock when the device is in power down.
6. Asynchronous oscillator does not stop in power-down
The Asynchronous oscillator does not stop when entering power down mode. This leads to
higher power consumption than expected.
Problem fix/workaround
Manually disable the asynchronous timer before entering power down.
7. Interrupts may be lost when writing the timer registers in the asynchronous timer
The interrupt will be lost if a timer register that is synchronous timer clock is written when the
asynchronous Timer/Counter register (TCNTx) is 0x00.
Problem fix/workaround
Always check that the asynchronous Timer/Counter register neither have the value 0xFF nor
0x00 before writing to the asynchronous Timer Control Register (TCCRx), asynchronous
Timer Counter Register (TCNTx), or asynchronous Output Compare Register (OCRx).360
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
35.2 Errata Atmel ATmega88
The revision letter in this section refers to the revision of the ATmega88 device.
35.2.1 Rev. D
• Interrupts may be lost when writing the timer registers in the asynchronous timer
1. Interrupts may be lost when writing the timer registers in the asynchronous timer
The interrupt will be lost if a timer register that is synchronous timer clock is written when the
asynchronous Timer/Counter register (TCNTx) is 0x00.
Problem fix/workaround
Always check that the asynchronous Timer/Counter register neither have the value 0xFF nor
0x00 before writing to the asynchronous Timer Control Register (TCCRx), asynchronous
Timer Counter Register (TCNTx), or asynchronous Output Compare Register (OCRx).
35.2.2 Rev. B/C
Not sampled.
35.2.3 Rev. A
• Writing to EEPROM does not work at low operating voltages
• Part may hang in reset
• Interrupts may be lost when writing the timer registers in the asynchronous timer
1. Writing to EEPROM does not work at low operating voltages
Writing to the EEPROM does not work at low voltages.
Problem fix/workaround
Do not write the EEPROM at voltages below 4.5 Volts.
This will be corrected in rev. B.
2. Part may hang in reset
Some parts may get stuck in a reset state when a reset signal is applied when the internal
reset state-machine is in a specific state. The internal reset state-machine is in this state for
approximately 10ns immediately before the part wakes up after a reset, and in a 10ns window
when altering the system clock prescaler. The problem is most often seen during InSystem
Programming of the device. There are theoretical possibilities of this happening also
in run-mode. The following three cases can trigger the device to get stuck in a reset-state:
- Two succeeding resets are applied where the second reset occurs in the 10ns window
before the device is out of the reset-state caused by the first reset.
- A reset is applied in a 10ns window while the system clock prescaler value is updated by
software.
- Leaving SPI-programming mode generates an internal reset signal that can trigger this
case.
The two first cases can occur during normal operating mode, while the last case occurs only
during programming of the device.361
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
Problem fix/workaround
The first case can be avoided during run-mode by ensuring that only one reset source is
active. If an external reset push button is used, the reset start-up time should be selected
such that the reset line is fully debounced during the start-up time.
The second case can be avoided by not using the system clock prescaler.
The third case occurs during In-System programming only. It is most frequently seen when
using the internal RC at maximum frequency.
If the device gets stuck in the reset-state, turn power off, then on again to get the device out
of this state.
3. Interrupts may be lost when writing the timer registers in the asynchronous timer
The interrupt will be lost if a timer register that is synchronous timer clock is written when the
asynchronous Timer/Counter register (TCNTx) is 0x00.
Problem fix/workaround
Always check that the asynchronous Timer/Counter register neither have the value 0xFF nor
0x00 before writing to the asynchronous Timer Control Register (TCCRx), asynchronous
Timer Counter Register (TCNTx), or asynchronous Output Compare Register (OCRx).
35.3 Errata Atmel ATmega168
The revision letter in this section refers to the revision of the ATmega168 device.
35.3.1 Rev C
• Interrupts may be lost when writing the timer registers in the asynchronous timer
1. Interrupts may be lost when writing the timer registers in the asynchronous timer
The interrupt will be lost if a timer register that is synchronous timer clock is written when the
asynchronous Timer/Counter register (TCNTx) is 0x00.
Problem fix/workaround
Always check that the asynchronous Timer/Counter register neither have the value 0xFF nor
0x00 before writing to the asynchronous Timer Control Register (TCCRx), asynchronous
Timer Counter Register (TCNTx), or asynchronous Output Compare Register (OCRx).
35.3.2 Rev B
• Part may hang in reset
• Interrupts may be lost when writing the timer registers in the asynchronous timer
1. Part may hang in reset
Some parts may get stuck in a reset state when a reset signal is applied when the internal
reset state-machine is in a specific state. The internal reset state-machine is in this state for
approximately 10ns immediately before the part wakes up after a reset, and in a 10ns window
when altering the system clock prescaler. The problem is most often seen during InSystem
Programming of the device. There are theoretical possibilities of this happening also
in run-mode. The following three cases can trigger the device to get stuck in a reset-state:
- Two succeeding resets are applied where the second reset occurs in the 10ns window
before the device is out of the reset-state caused by the first reset.362
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
- A reset is applied in a 10ns window while the system clock prescaler value is updated by
software.
- Leaving SPI-programming mode generates an internal reset signal that can trigger this
case.
The two first cases can occur during normal operating mode, while the last case occurs only
during programming of the device.
Problem fix/workaround
The first case can be avoided during run-mode by ensuring that only one reset source is
active. If an external reset push button is used, the reset start-up time should be selected
such that the reset line is fully debounced during the start-up time.
The second case can be avoided by not using the system clock prescaler.
The third case occurs during In-System programming only. It is most frequently seen when
using the internal RC at maximum frequency.
If the device gets stuck in the reset-state, turn power off, then on again to get the device out
of this state.
2. Interrupts may be lost when writing the timer registers in the asynchronous timer
The interrupt will be lost if a timer register that is synchronous timer clock is written when the
asynchronous Timer/Counter register (TCNTx) is 0x00.
Problem fix/workaround
Always check that the asynchronous Timer/Counter register neither have the value 0xFF nor
0x00 before writing to the asynchronous Timer Control Register (TCCRx), asynchronous
Timer Counter Register (TCNTx), or asynchronous Output Compare Register (OCRx).
35.3.3 Rev A
• Wrong values read after erase only operation
• Part may hang in reset
• Interrupts may be lost when writing the timer registers in the asynchronous timer
1. Wrong values read after erase only operation
At supply voltages below 2.7V, an EEPROM location that is erased by the Erase Only operation
may read as programmed (0x00).
Problem fix/workaround
If it is necessary to read an EEPROM location after Erase Only, use an Atomic Write operation
with 0xFF as data in order to erase a location. In any case, the Write Only operation can
be used as intended. Thus no special considerations are needed as long as the erased location
is not read before it is programmed.
2. Part may hang in reset
Some parts may get stuck in a reset state when a reset signal is applied when the internal
reset state-machine is in a specific state. The internal reset state-machine is in this state for
approximately 10ns immediately before the part wakes up after a reset, and in a 10ns window
when altering the system clock prescaler. The problem is most often seen during InSystem
Programming of the device. There are theoretical possibilities of this happening also
in run-mode. The following three cases can trigger the device to get stuck in a reset-state:363
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
- Two succeeding resets are applied where the second reset occurs in the 10ns window
before the device is out of the reset-state caused by the first reset.
- A reset is applied in a 10ns window while the system clock prescaler value is updated by
software.
- Leaving SPI-programming mode generates an internal reset signal that can trigger this
case.
The two first cases can occur during normal operating mode, while the last case occurs only
during programming of the device.
Problem fix/workaround
The first case can be avoided during run-mode by ensuring that only one reset source is
active. If an external reset push button is used, the reset start-up time should be selected
such that the reset line is fully debounced during the start-up time.
The second case can be avoided by not using the system clock prescaler.
The third case occurs during In-System programming only. It is most frequently seen when
using the internal RC at maximum frequency.
If the device gets stuck in the reset-state, turn power off, then on again to get the device out
of this state.
2. Interrupts may be lost when writing the timer registers in the asynchronous timer
The interrupt will be lost if a timer register that is synchronous timer clock is written when the
asynchronous Timer/Counter register (TCNTx) is 0x00.
Problem fix/workaround
Always check that the asynchronous Timer/Counter register neither have the value 0xFF nor
0x00 before writing to the asynchronous Timer Control Register (TCCRx), asynchronous
Timer Counter Register (TCNTx), or asynchronous Output Compare Register (OCRx).364
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
36. Datasheet revision history
Please note that the referring page numbers in this section are referred to this document. The
referring revision in this section are referring to the document revision.
36.1 Rev. 2545T-04/11
36.2 Rev. 2545S-07/10
36.3 Rev. 2545R-07/09
36.4 Rev. 2545Q-06/09
36.5 Rev. 2545P-02/09
1. Ordering information has been updated by removing AI and MI and added AUR and
MUR (tape & reel).
2. Added and corrected cross references and short-cuts.
3. Document updated according to new Atmel standard.
4. QTouch Library Support Features
1. Note 6 and Note 7 in Table 29-5, “2-wire serial bus requirements.,” on page 308 have
been removed.
2. Document updated according to Atmel standard.
1. Updated “Errata” on page 357.
2. Updated the last page with the Atmel new addresses.
1. Removed the heading “About”. The subsections of this sectionis now separate sections,
“Resources”, “Data Retention” and “About Code Examples”
2. Updated “Ordering information” on page 350.
1. Removed Power-off slope rate from Table 29-3 on page 307. 365
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
36.6 Rev. 2545O-02/09
36.7 Rev. 2545N-01/09
36.8 Rev. 2545M-09/07
36.9 Rev. 2545L-08/07
36.10 Rev. 2545K-04/07
36.11 Rev. 2545J-12/06
1. Changed minimum Power-on Reset Threshold Voltage (falling) to 0.05V in Table 29-
3 on page 307.
2. Removed section “Power-on slope rate” from “System and reset characteristics” on
page 307.
1. Updated “Features” on page 1 and added the note “Not recommended for new
designs”.
2. Merged the sections Resources, Data Retention and About Code Examples under
one common section, “Resources” on page 8.
3. Updated Figure 9-4 on page 35.
4. Updated “System clock prescaler” on page 36.
5. Updated “Alternate functions of port B” on page 78.
6. Added section “” on page 307.
7. Updated “Pin thresholds and hysteresis” on page 330.
1. Added “Data retention” on page 8.
2. Updated “ADC characteristics” on page 311.
3. “Preliminary“ removed through the datasheet.
1. Updated “Features” on page 1.
2. Updated code example in “MCUCR – MCU control register” on page 64.
3. Updated “System and reset characteristics” on page 307.
4. Updated Note in Table 9-3 on page 30, Table 9-5 on page 31, Table 9-8 on page 34,
Table 9-10 on page 34.
1. Updated “Interrupts” on page 56.
2. Updated“Errata Atmel ATmega48” on page 357 .
3. Changed description in “Analog-to-digital converter” on page 244.
1. Updated “Features” on page 1.366
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
36.12 Rev. 2545I-11/06
36.13 Rev. 2545H-10/06
36.14 Rev. 2545G-06/06
2. Updated Table 1-1 on page 2.
3. Updated “Ordering information” on page 350.
4. Updated “Packaging information” on page 353.
1. Updated “Features” on page 1.
2. Updated Features in “2-wire serial interface” on page 209.
3. Fixed typos in Table 29-3 on page 307.
1. Updated typos.
2. Updated “Features” on page 1.
3. Updated “Calibrated internal RC oscillator” on page 33.
4. Updated “System control and reset” on page 45.
5. Updated “Brown-out detection” on page 47.
6. Updated “Fast PWM mode” on page 121.
7. Updated bit description in “TCCR1C – Timer/Counter1 control register C” on page
133.
8. Updated code example in “SPI – Serial peripheral interface” on page 161.
9. Updated Table 15-3 on page 101, Table 15-6 on page 102, Table 15-8 on page 103,
Table 16-2 on page 130, Table 16-3 on page 131, Table 16-4 on page 132, Table 18-
3 on page 154, Table 18-6 on page 155, Table 18-8 on page 156, and Table 28-5 on
page 287.
10. Added Note to Table 26-1 on page 265, Table 27-5 on page 279, and Table 28-17 on
page 300.
11. Updated “Setting the boot loader lock bits by SPM” on page 277.
12. Updated “Signature bytes” on page 288
13. Updated “Electrical characteristics” on page 303.
14. Updated “Errata” on page 357.
1. Added Addresses in Registers.
2. Updated “Calibrated internal RC oscillator” on page 33.
3. Updated Table 9-12 on page 35, Table 10-1 on page 39, Table 11-1 on page 54,
Table 14-3 on page 78.
4. Updated “ADC noise reduction mode” on page 40.
5. Updated note for Table 10-2 on page 43.
6. Updatad “Bit 2 - PRSPI: Power reduction serial peripheral interface” on page 44.
7. Updated “TCCR0B – Timer/counter control register B” on page 104.
8. Updated “Fast PWM mode” on page 121.
9. Updated “Asynchronous operation of Timer/Counter2” on page 151.
10. Updated “SPI – Serial peripheral interface” on page 161.367
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
36.15 Rev. 2545F-05/05
36.16 Rev. 2545E-02/05
36.17 Rev. 2545D-07/04
11. Updated “UCSRnA – USART MSPIM control and status register n A” on page 206.
12. Updated note in “Bit rate generator unit” on page 216.
13. Updated “Bit 6 – ACBG: Analog comparator bandgap select” on page 242.
14. Updated Features in “Analog-to-digital converter” on page 244.
15. Updated “Prescaling and conversion timing” on page 247.
16. Updated “Limitations of debugWIRE” on page 261.
17 Added Table 29-1 on page 306.
18. Updated Figure 16-7 on page 122, Figure 30-45 on page 339.
19. Updated rev. A in “Errata Atmel ATmega48” on page 357.
20. Added rev. C and D in “Errata Atmel ATmega48” on page 357.
1. Added Section 3. “Resources” on page 8
2. Update Section 9.6 “Calibrated internal RC oscillator” on page 33.
3. Updated Section 28.8.3 “Serial programming instruction set” on page 300.
4. Table notes in Section 29.2 “DC characteristics” on page 303 updated.
5. Updated Section 35. “Errata” on page 357.
1. MLF-package alternative changed to “Quad Flat No-Lead/Micro Lead Frame Package
QFN/MLF”.
2. Updated “EECR – The EEPROM control register” on page 22.
3. Updated “Calibrated internal RC oscillator” on page 33.
4. Updated “External clock” on page 35.
5. Updated Table 29-3 on page 307, Table 29-6 on page 309, Table 29-2 on page 306
and Table 28-16 on page 300
6. Added “Pin change interrupt timing” on page 66
7. Updated “8-bit timer/counter block diagram.” on page 90.
8. Updated “SPMCSR – Store program memory control and status register” on page
267.
9. Updated “Enter programming mode” on page 291.
10. Updated “DC characteristics” on page 303.
11. Updated “Ordering information” on page 350.
12. Updated “Errata Atmel ATmega88” on page 360 and “Errata Atmel ATmega168” on
page 361.
1. Updated instructions used with WDTCSR in relevant code examples.
2. Updated Table 9-5 on page 31, Table 29-4 on page 307, Table 27-9 on page 282,
and Table 27-11 on page 283.
3. Updated “System clock prescaler” on page 36.368
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
36.18 Rev. 2545C-04/04
36.19 Rev. 2545B-01/04
4. Moved “TIMSK2 – Timer/Counter2 interrupt mask register” on page 158 and
“TIFR2 – Timer/Counter2 interrupt flag register” on page 158 to
“Register description” on page 153.
5. Updated cross-reference in “Electrical interconnection” on page 210.
6. Updated equation in “Bit rate generator unit” on page 216.
7. Added “Page size” on page 289.
8. Updated “Serial programming algorithm” on page 299.
9. Updated Ordering Information for “Atmel ATmega168” on page 352.
10. Updated “Errata Atmel ATmega88” on page 360 and “Errata Atmel ATmega168” on
page 361.
11. Updated equation in “Bit rate generator unit” on page 216.
1. Speed Grades changed: 12MHz to 10MHz and 24MHz to 20MHz
2. Updated “Speed grades” on page 305.
3. Updated “Ordering information” on page 350.
4. Updated “Errata Atmel ATmega88” on page 360.
1. Added PDIP to “I/O and Packages”, updated “Speed Grade” and Power Consumption
Estimates in 36.“Features” on page 1.
2. Updated “Stack pointer” on page 13 with RAMEND as recommended Stack Pointer
value.
3. Added section “Power reduction register” on page 41 and a note regarding the use of
the PRR bits to 2-wire, Timer/Counters, USART, Analog Comparator and ADC
sections.
4. Updated “Watchdog timer” on page 49.
5. Updated Figure 16-2 on page 130 and Table 16-3 on page 131.
6. Extra Compare Match Interrupt OCF2B added to features in section “8-bit
Timer/Counter2 with PWM and asynchronous operation” on page 140
7. Updated Table 10-1 on page 39, Table 24-5 on page 259, Table 28-4 to Table 28-7
on page 286 to 288 and Table 24-1 on page 249. Added note 2 to Table 28-1 on page
285. Fixed typo in Table 13-1 on page 67.
8. Updated whole “Typical characteristics” on page 315.
9. Added item 2 to 5 in “Errata Atmel ATmega48” on page 357.
10. Renamed the following bits:
- SPMEN to SELFPRGEN
- PSR2 to PSRASY
- PSR10 to PSRSYNC
- Watchdog Reset to Watchdog System Reset
11. Updated C code examples containing old IAR syntax.
12. Updated BLBSET description in “SPMCSR – Store program memory control and status
register” on page 283.i
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
Table of contents
Features ..................................................................................................... 1
1 Pin configurations ................................................................................... 2
1.1Pin descriptions .........................................................................................................3
2 Overview ................................................................................................... 5
2.1Block diagram ............................................................................................................5
2.2Comparison between Atmel ATmega48, Atmel ATmega88, and Atmel ATmega168 .
6
3 Resources ................................................................................................. 8
4 Data retention ........................................................................................... 8
5 About code examples .............................................................................. 8
6 Capacitive touch sensing ........................................................................ 8
7 AVR CPU core .......................................................................................... 9
7.1Overview ...................................................................................................................9
7.2Architectural overview ...............................................................................................9
7.3ALU – Arithmetic Logic Unit ....................................................................................10
7.4Status register .........................................................................................................11
7.5General purpose register file ...................................................................................12
7.6Stack pointer ...........................................................................................................13
7.7Instruction execution timing .....................................................................................14
7.8Reset and interrupt handling ...................................................................................15
8 AVR memories ....................................................................................... 17
8.1Overview .................................................................................................................17
8.2In-system reprogrammable flash program memory .................................................17
8.3SRAM data memory ................................................................................................19
8.4EEPROM data memory ...........................................................................................20
8.5I/O memory ..............................................................................................................21
8.6Register description .................................................................................................22
9 System clock and clock options .......................................................... 27
9.1Clock systems and their distribution ........................................................................27
9.2Clock sources ..........................................................................................................28
9.3Low power crystal oscillator ....................................................................................29
9.4Full swing crystal oscillator ......................................................................................31ii
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
9.5Low frequency crystal oscillator ..............................................................................33
9.6Calibrated internal RC oscillator ..............................................................................33
9.7128kHz internal oscillator ........................................................................................34
9.8External clock ..........................................................................................................35
9.9Clock output buffer ..................................................................................................35
9.10Timer/counter oscillator .........................................................................................36
9.11System clock prescaler .........................................................................................36
9.12Register description ...............................................................................................37
10 Power management and sleep modes ................................................. 39
10.1Sleep modes .........................................................................................................39
10.2Idle mode ...............................................................................................................39
10.3ADC noise reduction mode ...................................................................................40
10.4Power-down mode ................................................................................................40
10.5Power-save mode .................................................................................................40
10.6Standby mode .......................................................................................................41
10.7Power reduction register .......................................................................................41
10.8Minimizing power consumption .............................................................................41
10.9Register description ...............................................................................................43
11 System control and reset ...................................................................... 45
11.1Resetting the AVR .................................................................................................45
11.2Reset sources .......................................................................................................45
11.3Power-on reset ......................................................................................................46
11.4External reset ........................................................................................................47
11.5Brown-out detection ..............................................................................................47
11.6Watchdog system reset .........................................................................................48
11.7Internal voltage reference ......................................................................................48
11.8Watchdog timer .....................................................................................................49
11.9Register description ...............................................................................................53
12 Interrupts ................................................................................................ 56
12.1Overview ...............................................................................................................56
12.2Interrupt vectors in ATmega48 ..............................................................................56
12.3Interrupt vectors in Atmel ATmega88 ....................................................................58
12.4Interrupt vectors in Atmel ATmega168 ..................................................................61
12.5Register description ...............................................................................................64
13 External interrupts ................................................................................. 66iii
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
13.1Pin change interrupt timing ....................................................................................66
13.2Register description ...............................................................................................67
14 I/O-ports .................................................................................................. 71
14.1Overview ...............................................................................................................71
14.2Ports as general digital I/O ....................................................................................72
14.3Alternate port functions .........................................................................................76
14.4Register description ...............................................................................................87
15 8-bit Timer/Counter0 with PWM ............................................................ 89
15.1Features ................................................................................................................89
15.2Overview ...............................................................................................................89
15.3Timer/counter clock sources .................................................................................91
15.4Counter unit ...........................................................................................................91
15.5Output compare unit ..............................................................................................92
15.6Compare match output unit ...................................................................................93
15.7Modes of operation ................................................................................................94
15.8Timer/counter timing diagrams ..............................................................................99
15.9Register description .............................................................................................101
16 16-bit Timer/Counter1 with PWM ........................................................ 108
16.1Features ..............................................................................................................108
16.2Overview .............................................................................................................108
16.3Accessing 16-bit registers ...................................................................................110
16.4Timer/counter clock sources ...............................................................................113
16.5Counter unit .........................................................................................................114
16.6Input capture unit .................................................................................................115
16.7Output compare units ..........................................................................................116
16.8Compare match output unit .................................................................................118
16.9Modes of operation ..............................................................................................119
16.10Timer/counter timing diagrams ..........................................................................127
16.11Register description ...........................................................................................130
17 Timer/Counter0 and Timer/Counter1 prescalers .............................. 137
17.1Register description .............................................................................................139
18 8-bit Timer/Counter2 with PWM and asynchronous operation ........ 140
18.1Features ..............................................................................................................140
18.2Overview .............................................................................................................140iv
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
18.3Timer/counter clock sources ...............................................................................141
18.4Counter unit .........................................................................................................141
18.5Output compare unit ............................................................................................142
18.6Compare match output unit .................................................................................144
18.7Modes of operation ..............................................................................................145
18.8Timer/counter timing diagrams ............................................................................149
18.9Asynchronous operation of Timer/Counter2 ........................................................151
18.10Timer/counter prescaler ....................................................................................152
18.11Register description ...........................................................................................153
19 SPI – Serial peripheral interface ......................................................... 161
19.1Features ..............................................................................................................161
19.2Overview .............................................................................................................161
19.3SS pin functionality ..............................................................................................166
19.4Data modes .........................................................................................................166
19.5Register description .............................................................................................168
20 USART0 ................................................................................................. 171
20.1Features ..............................................................................................................171
20.2Overview .............................................................................................................171
20.3Clock generation .................................................................................................172
20.4Frame formats .....................................................................................................175
20.5USART initialization .............................................................................................176
20.6Data transmission – The USART transmitter ......................................................179
20.7Data reception – The USART receiver ................................................................181
20.8Asynchronous data reception ..............................................................................185
20.9Multi-processor communication mode .................................................................188
20.10Register description ...........................................................................................190
20.11Examples of baud rate setting ...........................................................................194
21 USART in SPI mode ............................................................................. 199
21.1Features ..............................................................................................................199
21.2Overview .............................................................................................................199
21.3Clock generation .................................................................................................199
21.4SPI data modes and timing .................................................................................200
21.5Frame formats .....................................................................................................201
21.6Data transfer ........................................................................................................203
21.7AVR USART MSPIM vs. AVR SPI ......................................................................205v
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
21.8Register description .............................................................................................206
22 2-wire serial interface .......................................................................... 209
22.1Features ..............................................................................................................209
22.22-wire serial interface bus definition ....................................................................209
22.3Data transfer and frame format ...........................................................................210
22.4Multi-master bus systems, arbitration and synchronization .................................213
22.5Overview of the TWI module ...............................................................................216
22.6Using the TWI ......................................................................................................218
22.7Transmission modes ...........................................................................................222
22.8Multi-master systems and arbitration ...................................................................235
22.9Register description .............................................................................................236
23 Analog comparator .............................................................................. 241
23.1Overview .............................................................................................................241
23.2Analog comparator multiplexed input ..................................................................241
23.3Register description .............................................................................................242
24 Analog-to-digital converter ................................................................. 244
24.1Features ..............................................................................................................244
24.2Overview .............................................................................................................244
24.3Starting a conversion ...........................................................................................246
24.4Prescaling and conversion timing ........................................................................247
24.5Changing channel or reference selection ............................................................249
24.6ADC noise canceler .............................................................................................250
24.7ADC conversion result .........................................................................................255
24.8Register description .............................................................................................255
25 debugWIRE on-chip debug system .................................................... 260
25.1Features ..............................................................................................................260
25.2Overview .............................................................................................................260
25.3Physical interface ................................................................................................260
25.4Software break points ..........................................................................................261
25.5Limitations of debugWIRE ...................................................................................261
25.6Register description .............................................................................................261
26 Self-programming the flash, Atmel ATmega48 ................................. 262
26.1Overview .............................................................................................................262
26.2Addressing the flash during self-programming ....................................................263vi
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
26.3Register description .............................................................................................267
27 Boot loader support – Read-while-write self-programming, Atmel
ATmega88 and Atmel ATmega168 269
27.1Features ..............................................................................................................269
27.2Overview .............................................................................................................269
27.3Application and boot loader flash sections ..........................................................269
27.4Read-while-write and no read-while-write flash sections .....................................270
27.5Boot loader lock bits ............................................................................................272
27.6Entering the boot loader program ........................................................................273
27.7Addressing the flash during self-programming ....................................................274
27.8Self-programming the flash .................................................................................275
27.9Register description .............................................................................................283
28 Memory programming ......................................................................... 285
28.1Program and data memory lock bits ....................................................................285
28.2Fuse bits ..............................................................................................................286
28.3Signature bytes ...................................................................................................288
28.4Calibration byte ...................................................................................................288
28.5Page size .............................................................................................................289
28.6Parallel programming parameters, pin mapping, and commands .......................289
28.7Parallel programming ..........................................................................................291
28.8Serial downloading ..............................................................................................298
29 Electrical characteristics ..................................................................... 303
29.1Absolute maximum ratings* .................................................................................303
29.2DC characteristics ...............................................................................................303
29.3Speed grades ......................................................................................................305
29.4Clock characteristics ...........................................................................................306
29.5System and reset characteristics ........................................................................307
29.62-wire serial interface characteristics ..................................................................308
29.7SPI timing characteristics ....................................................................................309
29.8ADC characteristics .............................................................................................311
29.9Parallel programming characteristics ..................................................................312
30 Typical characteristics ........................................................................ 315
30.1Active supply current ...........................................................................................315
30.2Idle supply current ...............................................................................................318
30.3Supply current of I/O modules .............................................................................321vii
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
30.4Power-down supply current .................................................................................323
30.5Power-save supply current ..................................................................................324
30.6Standby supply current ........................................................................................324
30.7Pin pull-up ...........................................................................................................325
30.8Pin driver strength ...............................................................................................327
30.9Pin thresholds and hysteresis .............................................................................330
30.10BOD thresholds and analog comparator offset .................................................333
30.11Internal oscillator speed ....................................................................................336
30.12Current consumption of peripheral units ...........................................................338
30.13Current consumption in reset and reset pulse width .........................................341
31 Register summary ................................................................................ 343
32 Instruction set summary ..................................................................... 347
33 Ordering information ........................................................................... 350
33.1Atmel ATmega48 .................................................................................................350
33.2Atmel ATmega88 .................................................................................................351
33.3Atmel ATmega168 ...............................................................................................352
34 Packaging information ........................................................................ 353
34.132A ......................................................................................................................353
34.228M1 ...................................................................................................................354
34.332M1-A ................................................................................................................355
34.428P3 ....................................................................................................................356
35 Errata ..................................................................................................... 357
35.1Errata Atmel ATmega48 ......................................................................................357
35.2Errata Atmel ATmega88 ......................................................................................360
35.3Errata Atmel ATmega168 ....................................................................................361
36 Datasheet revision history .................................................................. 364
36.1Rev. 2545T-04/11 ................................................................................................364
36.2Rev. 2545S-07/10 ...............................................................................................364
36.3Rev. 2545R-07/09 ...............................................................................................364
36.4Rev. 2545Q-06/09 ...............................................................................................364
36.5Rev. 2545P-02/09 ...............................................................................................364
36.6Rev. 2545O-02/09 ...............................................................................................365
36.7Rev. 2545N-01/09 ...............................................................................................365
36.8Rev. 2545M-09/07 ...............................................................................................365viii
2545T–AVR–05/11
ATmega48/88/168
36.9Rev. 2545L-08/07 ................................................................................................365
36.10Rev. 2545K-04/07 .............................................................................................365
36.11Rev. 2545J-12/06 ..............................................................................................365
36.12Rev. 2545I-11/06 ...............................................................................................366
36.13Rev. 2545H-10/06 .............................................................................................366
36.14Rev. 2545G-06/06 .............................................................................................366
36.15Rev. 2545F-05/05 ..............................................................................................367
36.16Rev. 2545E-02/05 .............................................................................................367
36.17Rev. 2545D-07/04 .............................................................................................367
36.18Rev. 2545C-04/04 .............................................................................................368
36.19Rev. 2545B-01/04 .............................................................................................368
Table of contents ....................................................................................... i2545T–AVR–05/11
Atmel Corporation
2325 Orchard Parkway
San Jose, CA 95131
USA
Tel: (+1)(408) 441-0311
Fax: (+1)(408) 487-2600
www.atmel.com
Atmel Asia Limited
Unit 1-5 & 16, 19/F
BEA Tower, Millennium City 5
418 Kwun Tong Road
Kwun Tong, Kowloon
HONG KONG
Tel: (+852) 2245-6100
Fax: (+852) 2722-1369
Atmel Munich GmbH
Business Campus
Parkring 4
D-85748 Garching b. Munich
GERMANY
Tel: (+49) 89-31970-0
Fax: (+49) 89-3194621
Atmel Japan
9F, Tonetsu Shinkawa Bldg.
1-24-8 Shinkawa
Chuo-ku, Tokyo 104-0033
JAPAN
Tel: (+81)(3) 3523-3551
Fax: (+81)(3) 3523-7581
© 2011 Atmel Corporation. All rights reserved.
Atmel®, Atmel logo and combinations thereof, AVR® and others are registered trademarks or trademarks of Atmel Corporation or its
subsidiaries. Other terms and product names may be trademarks of others.
Disclaimer: The information in this document is provided in connection with Atmel products. No license, express or implied, by estoppel or otherwise, to
any intellectual property right is granted by this document or in connection with the sale of Atmel products. EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE ATMEL
TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALES LOCATED ON THE ATMEL WEBSITE, ATMEL ASSUMES NO LIABILITY WHATSOEVER AND DISCLAIMS ANY
EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY WARRANTY RELATING TO ITS PRODUCTS INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL ATMEL BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS AND PROFITS,
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR LOSS OF INFORMATION) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS DOCUMENT, EVEN IF ATMEL
HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Atmel makes no representations or warranties with respect to the accuracy or completeness
of the contents of this document and reserves the right to make changes to specifications and product descriptions at any time without notice.
Atmel does not make any commitment to update the information contained herein. Unless specifically provided otherwise, Atmel products are not suitable
for, and shall not be used in, automotive applications. Atmel products are not intended, authorized, or warranted for use as components in applications
intended to support or sustain life.
Rev. 8207L-AT42-05/12
Atmel QTouch Library
User Guide
Supports QTouch® and QMatrix® acquisition for Keys, Sliders
and Rotors 2 8207L-AT42-05/12
Rev. 8207L-AT42-05/12
Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS ..............................................................................................................................2
1 PREFACE..............................................................................................................................................8
2 INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................................9
3 OVERVIEW ........................................................................................................................................10
4 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS.........................................................................................11
4.1 DEFINITIONS...................................................................................................................................11
5 GENERIC QTOUCH LIBRARIES...................................................................................................12
5.1 INTRODUCTION...............................................................................................................................12
5.2 ACQUISITION METHODS .................................................................................................................13
5.2.1 QTouch acquisition method...................................................................................................13
5.2.1.1 Sensor schematics for a QTouch acquisition method design............................................................ 14
5.2.2 QMatrix acquisition method ..................................................................................................14
5.2.3 Sensor schematics for a QMatrix acquisition method design................................................15
5.3 GLOBAL SETTINGS COMMON TO ALL SENSORS OF A SPECIFIC ACQUISITION METHOD......................15
5.3.1 Recalibration Threshold ........................................................................................................16
5.3.2 Detect Integration..................................................................................................................16
5.3.3 Drift Hold Time .....................................................................................................................16
5.3.4 Maximum ON Duration .........................................................................................................17
5.3.5 Positive / Negative Drift ........................................................................................................17
5.3.6 Positive Recalibration Delay .................................................................................................18
5.4 SENSOR SPECIFIC SETTINGS ............................................................................................................18
5.4.1 Detect threshold.....................................................................................................................18
5.4.2 Hysteresis...............................................................................................................................18
5.4.3 Position Resolution................................................................................................................19
5.4.4 Position Hysteresis ................................................................................................................19
5.4.5 Adjacent Key Suppression (AKS)...........................................................................................20
5.5 USING THE SENSORS.......................................................................................................................20
5.5.1 Avoiding Cross-talk ...............................................................................................................20
5.5.2 Multiple measurements..........................................................................................................20
5.5.3 Guard Channel ......................................................................................................................21
5.6 QTOUCH API AND USAGE..............................................................................................................22
5.6.1 QTouch Library API..............................................................................................................22
5.6.2 touch_api.h - public header file.............................................................................................22
5.6.3 Type Definitions and enumerations used in the library.........................................................22
5.6.3.1 Typedefs........................................................................................................................................... 22
5.6.3.2 Enumerations ................................................................................................................................... 22
5.6.3.2.1 sensor_type_t.............................................................................................................................. 22
5.6.3.2.2 aks_group_t................................................................................................................................ 23
5.6.3.2.3 channel_t.................................................................................................................................... 23
5.6.3.2.4 hysteresis_t................................................................................................................................. 23
5.6.3.2.5 resolution_t................................................................................................................................. 24
5.6.3.2.6 recal_threshold_t........................................................................................................................ 24
5.6.4 Data structures......................................................................................................................25
5.6.4.1 qt_touch_status_t.............................................................................................................................. 25
5.6.4.2 qt_touch_lib_config_data_t.............................................................................................................. 25
5.6.4.3 qt_touch_lib_measure_data_t........................................................................................................... 26
5.6.4.4 qt_burst_lengths............................................................................................................................... 26
5.6.4.5 tag_sensor_t ..................................................................................................................................... 27
5.6.4.6 qt_lib_siginfo_t ................................................................................................................................ 27
5.6.5 Public Functions....................................................................................................................283
5.6.5.1 qt_set_parameters............................................................................................................................. 28
5.6.5.2 qt_enable_key .................................................................................................................................. 29
5.6.5.3 qt_enable_rotor ................................................................................................................................ 29
5.6.5.4 qt_enable_slider ............................................................................................................................... 30
5.6.5.5 qt_init_sensing ................................................................................................................................. 30
5.6.5.6 qt_measure_sensors.......................................................................................................................... 31
5.6.5.7 qt_calibrate_sensing......................................................................................................................... 31
5.6.5.8 qt_reset_sensing ............................................................................................................................... 32
5.6.5.9 qt_get_sensor_delta.......................................................................................................................... 32
5.6.5.10 qt_get_library_sig ........................................................................................................................ 32
5.6.6 Sequence of Operations and Using the API...........................................................................33
5.6.6.1 Channel Numbering ......................................................................................................................... 33
5.6.6.1.1 Channel numbering when using QTouch acquisition method .................................................... 33
5.6.6.1.2 Channel numbering when using QMatrix acquisition method ................................................... 39
5.6.6.2 Sensor Numbering............................................................................................................................ 41
5.6.6.3 Filtering Signal Measurements......................................................................................................... 42
5.6.6.4 Allocating unused Port Pins for User Application............................................................................ 43
5.6.6.5 Disabling and Enabling of Pull-up for AVR devices........................................................................ 44
5.6.7 Constraints.............................................................................................................................44
5.6.7.1 QTouch acquisition method constraints........................................................................................... 44
5.6.7.2 QMatrix acquisition method constraints........................................................................................... 45
5.6.7.3 Design Guidelines for QMatrix acquisition method systems ........................................................... 46
5.6.8 Frequency of operation (Vs) Charge cycle/dwell cycle times: ..............................................46
5.6.9 Interrupts...............................................................................................................................47
5.6.10 Integrating QTouch libraries in your application .................................................................48
5.6.10.1 Directory structure of the library files.......................................................................................... 48
5.6.10.2 Integrating QTouch acquisition method libraries in your application.......................................... 50
5.6.10.2.1 Example for 8bit AVR ............................................................................................................. 52
5.6.10.2.2 Example for ATSAM ............................................................................................................... 54
5.6.10.2.3 Checklist of items for integrating QTouch acquisition method libraries.................................. 55
5.6.10.3 Integrating QMatrix acquisition method libraries in your application ......................................... 55
5.6.10.3.1 Example for 8bit AVR ............................................................................................................. 55
5.6.10.3.2 Example for 32bit AVR ........................................................................................................... 62
5.6.10.3.3 Checklist of items for integrating QMatrix Capacitive sensing libraries.................................. 66
5.6.10.4 Common checklist items.............................................................................................................. 66
5.6.10.4.1 Configuring the stack size for the application .......................................................................... 66
5.6.11 Example project files .............................................................................................................67
5.6.11.1 Using the Sample projects ........................................................................................................... 68
5.6.11.2 Example applications for QTouch acquisition method libraries.................................................. 68
5.6.11.2.1 Selecting the right configuration .............................................................................................. 68
5.6.11.2.2 Changing the settings to match your device ............................................................................. 69
5.6.11.2.3 Changing the library configuration parameters ........................................................................ 70
5.6.11.2.4 Using the example projects ...................................................................................................... 72
5.6.11.3 Example applications for QMatrix acquisition method libraries.................................................. 73
5.6.11.3.1 Selecting the right configuration .............................................................................................. 73
5.6.11.3.2 Changing the library configuration parameters ........................................................................ 74
5.6.11.3.3 Using the example projects ...................................................................................................... 75
5.6.11.4 Adjusting the Stack size when using IAR IDE ............................................................................ 76
5.6.11.5 Optimization levels...................................................................................................................... 76
5.6.11.6 Debug Support in Example applications...................................................................................... 77
5.6.11.6.1 Debug Support in the sample applications for EVK2080 and QT600 boards .......................... 77
5.6.11.6.2 How to turn on the debug option.............................................................................................. 77
5.6.11.6.3 Debug Interface if USB Bridge board is not available ............................................................. 78
5.7 LIBRARY VARIANTS .......................................................................................................................79
5.7.1 QTouch Acquisition method library variants.........................................................................79
5.7.1.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................... 79
5.7.1.2 Support for different compiler tool chains........................................................................................ 79
5.7.1.3 QTouch Acquisition method library naming conventions................................................................ 79
5.7.1.3.1 Naming convention for libraries to be used with GCC tool chain.............................................. 79
5.7.1.3.2 Naming convention for libraries to be used with IAR Embedded Workbench........................... 80
5.7.1.4 QTouch acquisition method library variants .................................................................................... 804 8207L-AT42-05/12
5.7.1.5 Port combinations supported for SNS and SNSK pin configurations............................................... 81
5.7.1.5.1 Tips on pin assignments for the sensor design using one pair of SNS/SNSK ports ................... 81
5.7.1.5.2 Port combinations supported for two port pair SNS and SNSK pin configurations................... 83
5.7.1.6 Sample applications and Memory requirements for QTouch acquisition method libraries.............. 84
5.7.2 QMatrix acquisition method library variants........................................................................84
5.7.2.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................... 84
5.7.2.2 Support for different compiler tool chains........................................................................................ 84
5.7.2.3 QMatrix Acquisition method library naming conventions............................................................... 84
5.7.2.4 QMatrix acquisition method library variants.................................................................................... 87
5.7.2.4.1 Devices supported for QMatrix Acquisition............................................................................... 87
5.8 PIN CONFIGURATION FOR QTOUCH LIBRARIES .............................................................................87
5.8.1 Pin Configuration for QTouch Acquisition Method ..............................................................87
5.8.1.1 Rules for configurable SNS-SNSK Mask Generation...................................................................... 88
5.8.1.1.1 Example for 8 channel interport mask Calculation with one port pair ....................................... 89
5.8.1.1.2 Example for 8 channel intraport mask Calculation with two port pairs...................................... 90
5.8.1.1.3 Example for 12 channel intraport-interport mask Calculation with two port pairs.................... 91
5.8.1.1.4 Example for 16 channel intreport-interport mask Calculation with two port pairs.................... 92
5.8.1.2 How to Use QTouch Studio For Pin Configurability ....................................................................... 93
5.8.2 Pin Configuration for QMatrix Acquisition Method............................................................101
5.8.2.1 Configuration Rules: ...................................................................................................................... 101
5.8.2.2 How to use QTouch Studio for Pin Configurability:...................................................................... 102
5.9 MISRA COMPLIANCE REPORT.....................................................................................................109
5.9.1 What is covered ...................................................................................................................110
5.9.2 Target Environment.............................................................................................................110
5.9.3 Deviations from MISRA C Standards..................................................................................110
5.9.3.1 QTouch acquisition method libraries ............................................................................................. 110
5.9.3.2 QMatrix acquisition method libraries............................................................................................. 111
5.10 KNOWN ISSUES.............................................................................................................................111
5.11 CHECKLIST...................................................................................................................................112
6 DEVICE SPECIFIC LIBRARIES ...................................................................................................113
6.1 INTRODUCTION.............................................................................................................................113
6.2 DEVICES SUPPORTED ....................................................................................................................113
6.3 QTOUCH LIBRARY FOR AT32UC3L DEVICES ..............................................................................113
6.3.1 Salient Features of QTouch Library for UC3L....................................................................113
6.3.1.1 QMatrix method sensor.................................................................................................................. 113
6.3.1.2 QTouch method sensor................................................................................................................... 113
6.3.1.3 Autonomous QTouch sensor.......................................................................................................... 114
6.3.1.4 Additional Features........................................................................................................................ 114
6.3.2 Device variants supported for UC3L...................................................................................114
6.3.3 Development tool support for UC3L ...................................................................................114
Table 8 Development tool support for UC3L QTouch Library ................................................................... 114
6.3.4 Overview of QTouch Library API for UC3L .......................................................................115
Figure 35 Overview diagram of QTouch Library for UC3L ....................................................................... 115
6.3.5 Acquisition method support for UC3L.................................................................................116
Table 9 Acquisition method specific API.................................................................................................... 116
6.3.6 API State machine for UC3L ...............................................................................................116
Figure 36 State Diagram of QTouch Library for UC3L .............................................................................. 117
6.3.7 QMatrix method sensor operation for UC3L.......................................................................117
6.3.7.1 QMatrix method pin selection for UC3L........................................................................................ 117
Table 10 QMatrix Resistive drive pin option .............................................................................................. 118
6.3.7.2 QMatrix method Schematic for UC3L........................................................................................... 118
6.3.7.2.1 Internal Discharge mode .......................................................................................................... 118
6.3.7.2.2 External Discharge mode ......................................................................................................... 119
6.3.7.2.3 SMP Discharge Mode .............................................................................................................. 119
6.3.7.2.4 VDIVEN Voltage Divider Enable option................................................................................. 119
6.3.7.2.5 SYNC pin option...................................................................................................................... 119
Figure 37 QMatrix method schematic ......................................................................................................... 120
6.3.7.3 QMatrix method hardware resource requirement for UC3L .......................................................... 121
6.3.7.4 QMatrix method Channel and Sensor numbering for UC3L.......................................................... 1215
Figure 38 QMatrix channel numbering for UC3L....................................................................................... 121
6.3.7.5 QMatrix method API Flow for UC3L............................................................................................ 121
Figure 39 QMatrix API Flow diagram for UC3L........................................................................................ 122
6.3.7.6 QMatrix method Disable and Re-enable Sensor for UC3L............................................................ 124
6.3.8 QTouch Group A/B method sensor operation for UC3L .....................................................124
6.3.8.1 QTouch Group A/B method pin selection for UC3L...................................................................... 124
Table 11 QTouch Resistive drive pin option ............................................................................................... 125
6.3.8.2 QTouch Group A/B method Schematic for UC3L ......................................................................... 125
6.3.8.2.1 Resistive Drive option.............................................................................................................. 125
6.3.8.2.2 SYNC pin option...................................................................................................................... 125
Figure 40 QTouch Group A/B and Autonomous QTouch schematic arrangement ..................................... 126
6.3.8.3 QTouch Group A/B method hardware resource requirement for UC3L ........................................ 126
6.3.8.4 QTouch Group A/B method Channel and Sensor numbering for UC3L........................................ 127
Figure 41 QTouch method Channel/Sensor numbering............................................................................... 127
Figure 42 QTouch method Channel/Sensor numbering when Group A and B are used together................ 127
6.3.8.5 QTouch Group A/B method API Flow for UC3L.......................................................................... 128
Figure 43 QTouch method API Flow diagram ............................................................................................ 129
6.3.8.6 QTouch Group A/B method Disable and Re-enable Sensor for UC3L.......................................... 130
6.3.9 Autonomous QTouch sensor operation for UC3L ...............................................................130
6.3.9.1 Autonomous QTouch Sensor pin selection for UC3L.................................................................... 130
6.3.9.2 Autonomous QTouch sensor Schematic for UC3L........................................................................ 130
6.3.9.3 Autonomous QTouch method hardware resource requirement for UC3L...................................... 130
Table 12 Sleep mode support for Autonomous QTouch ............................................................................. 130
6.3.9.4 Autonomous QTouch Sensor API Flow for UC3L ........................................................................ 131
Figure 44 Autonomous QTouch API Flow diagram.................................................................................... 131
6.3.9.5 Autonomous QTouch method Enable and Disable Sensor for UC3L ............................................ 131
6.3.10 Raw acquisition mode support for UC3L ............................................................................132
Figure 45 Raw acquisition mode API Flow diagram................................................................................... 132
6.3.11 Library Configuration parameters for UC3L ......................................................................133
Table 13 QTouch Library for UC3L Configuration parameters.................................................................. 133
6.3.12 Example projects for QTouch Library for UC3L.................................................................134
6.3.12.1 Example Project usage............................................................................................................... 134
Figure 46 GNU Example project usage with AVR32 Studio ...................................................................... 134
Figure 47 IAR Example project usage with IAR Embedded Workbench for AVR32................................. 134
6.3.12.2 QMatrix Example Project .......................................................................................................... 135
6.3.12.3 QTouch Group A Example Project............................................................................................ 135
6.3.12.4 Autonomous QTouch Example Project ..................................................................................... 135
6.3.13 Code and Data Memory requirements for UC3L ................................................................136
6.3.13.1 QMatrix method memory requirement ...................................................................................... 136
Table 14 Typical Code and Data memory for Standalone QMatrix operation ........................................... 136
6.3.13.2 QTouch Group A/B method memory requirement .................................................................... 136
Table 15 Typical Code and Data memory for Standalone QTouch Group A/B operation .......................... 137
6.3.13.3 Autonomous QTouch memory requirement .............................................................................. 137
Table 16 Minimum Code and Data for Standalone Autonomous QTouch sensor....................................... 137
6.3.14 Public header files of QTouch Library for UC3L................................................................137
6.3.15 Type Definitions and enumerations used in the library.......................................................137
6.3.15.1 Typedefs .................................................................................................................................... 137
6.3.15.1.1 touch_acq_status_t ................................................................................................................. 138
6.3.15.1.2 touch_qt_grp_t ....................................................................................................................... 138
6.3.15.2 Enumerations............................................................................................................................. 138
6.3.15.2.1 touch_ret_t.............................................................................................................................. 139
6.3.15.2.2 touch_lib_state_t .................................................................................................................... 139
6.3.15.2.3 touch_acq_mode_t ................................................................................................................. 140
6.3.15.2.4 sensor_type_t.......................................................................................................................... 140
6.3.15.2.5 aks_group_t............................................................................................................................ 140
6.3.15.2.6 hysteresis_t............................................................................................................................. 140
6.3.15.2.7 recal_threshold_t.................................................................................................................... 141
6.3.15.2.8 resolution_t............................................................................................................................. 141
6.3.15.2.9 at_status_change_t ................................................................................................................. 142
6.3.15.2.10 x_pin_options_t.................................................................................................................... 142
6.3.15.2.11 y_pin_options_t.................................................................................................................... 1426 8207L-AT42-05/12
6.3.15.2.12 qt_pin_options_t................................................................................................................... 142
6.3.15.2.13 general_pin_options_t .......................................................................................................... 142
6.3.16 Data structures....................................................................................................................143
6.3.16.1 sensor_t...................................................................................................................................... 143
6.3.16.2 touch_global_param_t ............................................................................................................... 143
6.3.16.3 touch_filter_data_t..................................................................................................................... 144
6.3.16.4 touch_measure_data_t ............................................................................................................... 144
6.3.16.5 touch_qm_param_t .................................................................................................................... 144
6.3.16.6 touch_at_param_t ...................................................................................................................... 145
6.3.16.7 touch_qt_param_t ...................................................................................................................... 146
6.3.16.8 touch_at_status .......................................................................................................................... 146
6.3.16.9 touch_qm_dma_t ....................................................................................................................... 146
6.3.16.10 touch_qm_pin_t......................................................................................................................... 146
6.3.16.11 touch_at_pin_t ........................................................................................................................... 147
6.3.16.12 touch_qt_pin_t........................................................................................................................... 147
6.3.16.13 touch_qm_reg_t ......................................................................................................................... 148
6.3.16.14 touch_at_reg_t ........................................................................................................................... 149
6.3.16.15 touch_qt_reg_t........................................................................................................................... 149
6.3.16.16 touch_qm_config_t.................................................................................................................... 149
6.3.16.17 touch_at_config_t ...................................................................................................................... 150
6.3.16.18 touch_qt_config_t...................................................................................................................... 151
6.3.16.19 touch_general_config_t.............................................................................................................. 151
6.3.16.20 touch_config_t ........................................................................................................................... 152
6.3.16.21 touch_info_t............................................................................................................................... 152
6.3.17 Public Functions of QTouch Library for UC3L...................................................................152
6.3.17.1 QMatrix API.............................................................................................................................. 152
6.3.17.1.1 touch_qm_sensors_init........................................................................................................... 152
6.3.17.1.2 touch_qm_sensor_config........................................................................................................ 153
6.3.17.1.3 touch_qm_sensor_update_config ........................................................................................... 154
6.3.17.1.4 touch_qm_sensor_get_config................................................................................................. 154
6.3.17.1.5 touch_qm_channel_udpate_burstlen ...................................................................................... 154
6.3.17.1.6 touch_qm_update_global_param............................................................................................ 155
6.3.17.1.7 touch_qm_get_global_param ................................................................................................. 155
6.3.17.1.8 touch_qm_sensors_calibrate................................................................................................... 155
6.3.17.1.9 touch_qm_sensors_start_acquisition...................................................................................... 156
6.3.17.1.10 touch_qm_get_libinfo .......................................................................................................... 156
6.3.17.1.11 touch_qm_sensor_get_delta ................................................................................................. 157
6.3.17.2 QTouch Group A and QTouch Group B API ............................................................................ 157
6.3.17.2.1 touch_qt_sensors_init............................................................................................................. 157
6.3.17.2.2 touch_qt_sensor_config.......................................................................................................... 158
6.3.17.2.3 touch_qt_sensor_update_config ............................................................................................. 158
6.3.17.2.4 touch_qt_sensor_get_config................................................................................................... 159
6.3.17.2.5 touch_qt_update_global_param.............................................................................................. 159
6.3.17.2.6 touch_qt_get_global_param ................................................................................................... 159
6.3.17.2.7 touch_qt_sensors_calibrate..................................................................................................... 160
6.3.17.2.8 touch_qt_sensors_start_acquisition ........................................................................................ 160
6.3.17.2.9 touch_qt _sensor_ disable....................................................................................................... 161
6.3.17.2.10 touch_qt _sensor_ reenable .................................................................................................. 161
6.3.17.2.11 touch_qt_get_libinfo ............................................................................................................ 162
6.3.17.2.12 touch_qt_sensor_get_delta ................................................................................................... 162
6.3.18 Autonomous touch API ........................................................................................................162
6.3.18.1.1 touch_at_sensor_init............................................................................................................... 162
6.3.18.1.2 touch_at_sensor_enable.......................................................................................................... 163
6.3.18.1.3 touch_at_sensor_disable......................................................................................................... 163
6.3.18.1.4 touch_at_sensor_update_config ............................................................................................. 163
6.3.18.1.5 touch_at_sensor_get_config ................................................................................................... 164
6.3.18.1.6 touch_at_get_libinfo............................................................................................................... 164
6.3.18.2 Common API............................................................................................................................. 164
6.3.18.2.1 touch_event_dispatcher.......................................................................................................... 164
6.3.18.2.2 touch_deinit............................................................................................................................ 164
6.3.19 Integrating QTouch libraries for AT32UC3L in your application ......................................165
6.3.20 MISRA Compliance Report of QTouch Library for UC3L ..................................................1657
6.3.21 What is covered ...................................................................................................................165
6.3.22 Target Environment.............................................................................................................165
6.3.23 Deviations from MISRA C Standards..................................................................................165
6.3.24 Known Issues with QTouch Library for UC3L ....................................................................166
6.4 QTOUCH LIBRARY FOR ATTINY20 DEVICE ..................................................................................167
6.4.1 Salient Features of QTouch Library for ATtiny20...............................................................167
6.4.1.1 QTouch method sensor................................................................................................................... 167
6.4.2 Compiler tool chain support for ATtiny20...........................................................................167
Table 17 Compiler tool chains support for ATtiny20 QTouch Library....................................................... 167
6.4.3 Overview of QTouch Library for ATtiny20..........................................................................167
Figure 48 Schematic overview of QTouch on Tiny20................................................................................. 168
6.4.4 API Flow diagram for ATtiny20 ..........................................................................................168
Figure 49 Linker configuration options for Tiny20 ..................................................................................... 168
Figure 50 QTouch method for Tiny20 API Flow diagram .......................................................................... 169
6.4.5 QTouch Library configuration parameters for ATtiny20 ....................................................169
Table 18 QTouch Library for ATtiny20 Configuration parameters............................................................. 170
6.4.6 QTouch Library ATtiny20 Example projects.......................................................................171
6.4.7 QTouch Library ATtiny20 code and data memory requirements ........................................171
Table 19 QTouch Library for ATtiny20 Memory requirements.................................................................. 171
6.5 QTOUCH LIBRARY FOR ATTINY40 DEVICE ..................................................................................172
6.5.1 Salient Features of QTouch Library for ATtiny40...............................................................172
6.5.1.1 QTouch method sensor................................................................................................................... 172
6.5.2 Compiler tool chain support for ATtiny40...........................................................................173
Table 20 Compiler tool chains support for ATtiny40 QTouch Library....................................................... 173
6.5.3 Overview of QTouch Library for ATtiny40..........................................................................173
Figure 51 Schematic overview of QTouch on Tiny40................................................................................. 173
6.5.4 API Flow diagram for ATtiny40 ..........................................................................................174
Figure 52 QTouch method for Tiny40 API Flow diagram .......................................................................... 175
6.5.5 QTouch Library configuration parameters for ATtiny40 ....................................................175
Table 21 QTouch Library for ATtiny40 Configuration parameters............................................................. 176
6.5.6 QTouch Library ATtiny40 Example projects.......................................................................177
6.5.7 QTouch Library ATtiny40 code and data memory requirements ........................................177
Table 22 QTouch Library for ATtiny40 Memory requirements.................................................................. 177
6.5.8 Interrupt Handling in QTouch ADC....................................................................................177
7 GENERIC QTOUCH LIBRARIES FOR 2K DEVICES...............................................................178
7.1 INTRODUCTION.............................................................................................................................178
7.2 DEVICES SUPPORTED ....................................................................................................................178
7.3 SALIENT FEATURES OF QTOUCH LIBRARY FOR 2K DEVICES........................................................178
7.4 LIBRARY VARIANTS .....................................................................................................................178
7.5 QTOUCH API FOR 2K DEVICES AND USAGE.................................................................................178
7.5.1 touch_api_2kdevice.h - public header file ...........................................................................178
7.5.2 Sequence of Operations and Using the API.........................................................................179
7.5.2.1 Channel Numbering ....................................................................................................................... 179
7.5.2.1.1 Channel numbering when routing SNS and SNSK pins to different ports............................... 179
7.5.2.1.2 Channel numbering when routing SNS and SNSK pins to the same port ................................ 180
7.5.2.2 Rules For Configuring SNS and SNSK masks for 2K Devices...................................................... 180
7.5.2.2.1 Configuring SNS and SNSK masks in case of Interport: ......................................................... 180
7.5.2.2.2 Configuring SNS and SNSK masks in case of Intraport: ......................................................... 181
7.5.3 Integrating QTouch libraries for 2K Devices in your application.......................................181
7.6 MISRA COMPLIANCE REPORT.....................................................................................................182
7.6.1 What is covered ...................................................................................................................182
7.6.2 Target Environment.............................................................................................................182
7.6.3 Deviations from MISRA C Standards..................................................................................182
7.6.3.1 QTouch acquisition method libraries for 2K devices..................................................................... 182
8 REVISION HISTORY......................................................................................................................183
DISCLAIMER ...........................................................................................................................................1858 8207L-AT42-05/12
1 Preface
This manual contains information that enables customers to implement capacitive touch solutions
on ATMEL AVR® microcontrollers and ARM®
-based AT91SAM microcontrollers using ATMEL
QTouch libraries. This guide is a functional description of the library software, its programming
interface and it also describes its use on the supported reference systems.
Use of this software is bound by the Software License Agreement included with the Library. This
user guide is applicable for Atmel QTouch® Library 5.0 .
Related documents from ATMEL
Documents related to QTouch capacitive sensing solutions from ATMEL are
• TS2080A/B data sheet.
• QT600 users guide
• Release Notes for ATMEL QTouch libraries.
• A library selection excel workbook that is used for the selection of the appropriate library
variant from the package available under in the install directory. The default location is
C:\Program Files\Atmel\Atmel_QTouch_Libraries_5.x\
• Capacitive touch sensor design guide
http://www.atmel.com/dyn/resources/prod_documents/doc10620.pdf .
If you need Assistance
For assistance with QTouch capacitive sensing software libraries and related issues, contact your
local ATMEL sales representative or send an email to touch@atmel.com for AVR libraries and
at91support@atmel.com for SAM libraries.9
2 Introduction
ATMEL QTouch Library is a royalty free software library (available for GCC and IAR compiler tool
chains) for developing touch applications on standard AVR and SAM microcontrollers. Customers
can link the library into their applications in order to provide touch sensing capability in their
projects. The Library can be used to develop single chip solutions for control applications which
have touch sensing capabilities, or to develop standalone touch sensing solutions which interface
with other host or control devices.
Features of ATMEL QTouch Library include
• Capacitive touch sensing using patented charge-transfer signal acquisition for robust
sensing.
• Support for a wide range of 8- and 32-bit AVRs.
• Support for 32-bit ARM microcontrollers.
• Support for 8-bit tiny AVRs having flash of 2K bytes.
• Support both QTouch and QMatrix acquisition methods and autonomous touch for UC3L.
• Support up to 64 touch sense channels for generic libraries and up to 136 channels for
UC3L libraries.
• Flexible choice of touch sensing functionality (keys, sliders, wheels) in a variety of
combinations.
• Includes Adjacent Key Suppression® (AKS®
) technology for the unambiguous detection of
key events.
• Support for both IAR and GCC compiler tool chains.
• A comparison of various features and parameters between QTouch Libraries for Generic
8-bit and 32-bit AVRs as well as Device Specific Libraries is provided in the table below.
Feature Comparison between Generic QTouch Libraries and Device Specific Libraries
Parameter/Func
tionality
Generic
Libraries,
Tiny_Meg
a_Xmega
Tiny 2K
Libraries
Tiny20
Libraries
Tiny40
Libraries
Generic
Libraries,
32 Bit
AVR
UC3L
Libraries
ATSAM
Libraries
Technology QTouch,
QMatrix
QTouch QTouchADC
QTouchADC
QTouch,
QMatrix
QTouch,
QMatrix
QTouch
Rotors/Sliders
Support
Yes No No No Yes Yes Yes
Filter Callback Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Library Status
Flags
Yes Yes No Yes(Only
Burst Again
Flag)
Yes Yes Yes
Library
Signature
Yes No No No Yes Yes Yes
Calibrate
Sensing
Yes Yes (Only
burst_again
flag)
No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Reset Sensing Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Sensor Deltas Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Maximum AKS
Groups
7 7 1 7 7 7 710 8207L-AT42-05/12
Maximum
Channels, QT
16 4 5 12 32 17 32
Maximum
Rotors/Sliders,
QT
4 0 0 0 8 8
Maximum
Channels, QM
64 0 0 0 64 64 0
Maximum
Rotors/Sliders,
QM
8 0 0 0 8 0
Autonomous
Touch
No No No No No Yes No
Sensor
Reconfiguratio
n
Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes
Frequency
Hopping SS
Enabled
Always If
_POWER_
OPTIMIZA
TION = 0
Never Never Always Programma
ble
Always
Delay Cycles
Parameter
QT_DELAY
_CLCYES
(QT
Values: 1 to
255
QM Values:
1,2,3,4,5,10
,25,50)
QT_DELAY
_CLCYES
(Value: 1 to
255)
DEF_CHA
RGE_SHA
RE_DELAY
(Value: 1 to
255)
DEF_QT_C
HARGE_S
HARE_DEL
AY
(Value: 1 to
255)
QT_DELAY
_CYCLES
(QT Values
: 1 to 255
QM Values:
1,2,3,4,5,10
,25,50)
xx_CHLEN,
xx_SELEN
(QT/QM
Value: 3 to
255)
QT_DELAY
_CLCYES
(Value: 3 to
255)
Debug Interface
Enable Macro
_DEBUG_I
NTERFAC
E_
None NDEBUG _DEBUG_
QTOUCH_
STUDIO_
_DEBUG_I
NTERFAC
E_
DEF_TOU
CH_QDEB
UG_ENAB
LE
_DEBUG_I
NTERFAC
E_
This user guide describes the content, design and use of the QTouch Libraries. This should be
read in conjunction with all of the applicable documents listed below
• Device datasheet for the selected ATMEL device used for touch sensing.
• Data sheet for the selected evaluation board.
• A library selection guide that is used for the selection of the appropriate library from the
released package. Default path:
C:\ Program Files\Atmel\Atmel_QTouch_Libaries_5.x\Library_Selection_Guide.xls
The intended readers of this document are engineers, who use the QTouch Library on ATMEL
microcontrollers to realize capacitive touch sensing solutions.
3 Overview
This chapter gives a brief introduction to each of the chapters that make up this document
1. Preface
2. Introduction: Provides an introduction to the scope and use of the QTouch Library.
3. Overview: This chapter
4. Abbreviations and Definitions: Provides a description of the abbreviations and
definitions used in this document
5. Generic QTouch Libraries: Provides an overview of the QTouch libraries and the
different acquisition methods for generic ATMEL devices.
6. Device Specific Libraries: Provides an overview of the QTouch libraries and the
different acquisition methods for ATMEL devices specific for touch sensing.
7. Revision History: Provides a revision history of this document11
4 Abbreviations and Definitions
4.1 Definitions
• AVR: refers to a device(s) in the tinyAVR®, megaAVR®, XMEGA™ and UC3
microcontroller family.
• ARM: refers to a device in the ATSAM ARM® basedmicrocontroller family.
• ATMEL QTouch Library: The combination of libraries for both touch sensing acquisition
methods (QTouch and QMatrix).
• QTouch Technology: A type of capacitive touch sensing technology using self
capacitance - each channel has only one electrode.
• QMatrix Technology: A type of capacitive touch sensing technology using mutual
capacitance – each channel has an drive electrode (X) and an receive electrode (Y).
• Sensor: A channel or group of channels used to form a touch sensor. Sensors are of 3
types (keys, rotors or sliders).
• KEY: a single channel forms a single KEY type sensor, also known as a BUTTON
• ROTOR, also known as a WHEEL, a group of channels forms a ROTOR sensor to detect
angular position of touch.
o A Rotor is composed of 3 channels for a QTouch acquisition method.
o A Rotor can be composed of 3 to 8 channels for QMatrix acquisition method.
• SLIDER, a group of channels forms a SLIDER sensor to detect the linear position of
touch.
o A Slider is composed of 3 channels for a QTouch acquisition method.
o A Slider can be composed of 3 to 8 channels for QMatrix acquisition method.
• AKS: Adjacent Key Suppression. See Section 5.4.5
• SNS PIN: Sense line for capacitive measurement using the QTouch Technology -
connected to Cs.
• SNSK PIN: Sense Key line for capacitive measurement using the QTouch Technology -
connected to channel electrode through Rs.
• X Line: The drive electrode (or drive line) used for QMatrix Technology.
• Y Line: The receive electrode (or receive line) used for QMatrix Technology.
• Port Pair: A combination of SNS port and SNSK port to which sensors are connected for
QTouch technology. The SNS and SNSK ports used in a port pair can be located in the
same AVR Port (8 pins for 4 sensors), or they may be in different 2 different AVR Ports
(8+8 pins for 8 sensors).
• Charge Cycle Period: It is the width of the charging pulse applied to the channel
capacitor.
• Dwell Cycle: In a QMatrix acquisition method, the duration in which charge coupled from
X to Y is captured.
• Acquisition: A single capacitive measurement process.
• Electrode: Electrodes are typically areas of copper on a printed circuit board but can also
be areas of clear conductive indium tin oxide (ITO) on a glass or plastic touch screen.12 8207L-AT42-05/12
• Intra-port: A configuration for QTouch acquisition method libraries, when the sensor SNS
and SNSK pins are available on the same port.
• Inter-port: A configuration for QTouch acquisition method libraries, when the sensor SNS
and SNSK pins are available on distinct ports.
5 Generic QTouch Libraries
5.1 Introduction
ATMEL QTouch provides a simple to use solution to realize touch sensing solutions on a range of
supported ATMEL AVR Microcontrollers. The QTouch libraries provide support for both QTouch
and QMatrix acquisition methods.
Touch sensing using QMatrix or QTouch acquisition methods can be added to an application by
linking the appropriate ATMEL QTouch Library for the AVR Microcontroller and using a simple set
of API to define the touch channels and sensors and then calling the touch sensing API’s
periodically (or based on application needs) to retrieve the channel information and determine
touch sensor states.
Figure 5-1 shows a typical configuration of channels when using an AVR and using the ATMEL
QTouch Library. The ATMEL QTouch Library has been added to a host application running on an
AVR microcontroller. The sample configuration illustrates using the library that supports eight
touch channels numbered 0 to 7. The sensors are configured in the following order,
• Sensor 0 on channels 0 to 2 have been configured as a rotor sensor.
• Sensor 1 on channels 3 to 5 have been configured as a slider sensor.
• Sensor 2 on channel 6 is configured as key sensor.
• Sensor 3 on channel 7 is configured as key sensor.
The host application uses the QTouch Library API’s to configure these channels and sensors,
and to initiate detection of a touch using capacitive measurements.
channel 0
channel 1
channel 2
channel 3
channel 4
channel 5
channel 6
channel 7
Atmel QTouch
Library
Host
Application
sensor0
sensor1
sensor2
sensor3
Figure 5-1 : Typical interface of the ATMEL QTouch library with the host application.
The QTouch libraries use minimal resources of the microcontroller. The sampling of the sensors
is controlled by the QTouch library, while the sampling period is controlled by the application
(possibly using timers, sleep periods, varying the CPU clock, external events like interrupts or
communications, etc).13
5.2 Acquisition Methods
There are two methods available for touch acquisition namely
1. QTouch acquisition method.
2. QMatrix acquisition method.
Libraries for AVR microcontrollers include both acquisition methods. Libraries for ATSAM
microcontrollers include only QTouch acquisition method.
5.2.1 QTouch acquisition method
The QTouch acquisition method charges an electrode of unknown capacitance to a known
potential. The resulting charge is transferred into a measurement capacitor (Cs). The cycle is
repeated until the voltage across Cs reaches a voltage Vih. The signal level is the number of
charge transfer cycles it took to reach that voltage. Placing a finger on the touch surface
introduces external capacitance that increases the amount of charge transferred each cycle,
reducing the total number of cycles required for Cs to reach the voltage. When the signal level
(number of cycles) goes below the present threshold, then the sensor is reported to be in
detected.
QTouch acquisition method sensors can drive single or multiple keys. Where multiple keys are
used, each key can be set for an individual sensitivity level. Keys of different sizes and shapes
can be used to meet both functional and aesthetic requirements.
NOTE: It is recommended to keep the size of the keys larger than 6mmx6mm to ensure reliable
and robust measurements, although actual key design requirements also depend on panel
thickness and material. Refer to the ATMEL Capacitive touch sensor design guide for details.
QTouch acquisition method can be used in two ways
• normal touch contact (i.e. when pressing buttons on a panel), and
• high sensitivity proximity mode (i.e. when a panel lights up before you actually contact it).
Figure 5-2 : QTouch Acquisition
QTouch circuits offers high signal-to-noise ratio, very good low power performance, and the
easiest sensor layout.14 8207L-AT42-05/12
5.2.1.1 Sensor schematics for a QTouch acquisition method design
Electrode
Microcontroller
Used for touch
application
PB1
PC1
SNSK
SNS
Sampling
capacitor
Rs
Cs
Rs- 1k
Cs- 22nF
----------------
Port requirements:
SNS: generic I/O pin
SNSK: generic I/O pin
Rs- Series resistor, Cs – Sample capacitor, PB1- PortB bit1, and PC1- PortC bit1
Typical
values:
Figure 5-3 : Schematics for a QTouch acquisition method design
5.2.2 QMatrix acquisition method
QMatrix devices detect touch using a scanned passive matrix of electrode sets. A single QMatrix
device can drive a large number of keys, enabling a very low cost-per-key to be achieved.
Figure 5-4 : QMatrix Acquisition method15
QMatrix uses a pair of sensing electrodes for each channel. One is an emitting electrode into
which a charge consisting of logic pulses is driven in burst mode. The other is a receive electrode
that couples to the emitter via the overlying panel dielectric. When a finger touches the panel the
field coupling is changed, and touch is detected. The drive electrode (or drive line) used for
QMatrix charge transfer is labeled as the X line. The receiver electrode (or receive line) used for
QMatrix charge transfer is labeled as the Y line.
QMatrix circuits offer good immunity to moisture films, extreme levels of temperature stability,
superb low power characteristics, and small IC package sizes for a given key count.
5.2.3 Sensor schematics for a QMatrix acquisition method design
Atmel MCU
X0
...
Xn
Y0A
...
YmA
...
Y0B
YmB
SMP
Vref
RX0
RXn
RY0
RYm
CS0 CSm
RYB0 RYBm
Sensor
0,0
Sensor
n,0
Sensor
n,m
Sensor
0,m
Sensors,
X,Y
Typical values:
RX: 1k
RY: 1k
CS: 4.7nF
RYB: 470k
----------------------------------
Port-pin count =
n + (2 * m) + 2
n – number of X lines
m – number of Y lines
----------------------------------
Port requirements:
X: Configurable I/O pin
YA:Configurable I/O pin (*)
YB: ADC port (*)
SMP: Configurable I/O pin
Vref: AIN0 (Comparator)
(*): The port I/O pin should
be in consecutive order
Figure 5-5 : Schematics for a QMatrix acquisition method design
5.3 Global settings common to all sensors of a specific
acquisition method
The touch sensing using QTouch library could be fine tuned by using a number of configurable
settings. This section explains the settings that are common to all sensors of a specific acquisition
method like QMatrix or QTouch.16 8207L-AT42-05/12
For example, if recalibration threshold (one of the global settings) of QMatrix acquisition method
is set as 1, all QMatrix sensors will have recalibration threshold of 1.
5.3.1 Recalibration Threshold
Recalibration threshold is the level above which automatic recalibration occurs. Recalibration
threshold is expressed as a percentage of the detection threshold setting. This setting is an
enumerated value and its settings are as follows:
• Setting of 0 = 100% of detect threshold (RECAL_100)
• Setting of 1 = 50% of detect threshold (RECAL_50)
• Setting of 2 = 25% of detect threshold (RECAL_25)
• Setting of 3 = 12.5% of detect threshold (RECAL_12_5)
• Setting of 4 = 6.25% of detect threshold (RECAL_6_25)
However, an absolute value of 4 is the hard limit for this setting. For example, if the detection
threshold is say, 40 and the Recalibration threshold value is set to 4. This implies an absolute
value of 2 (40 * 6.25% = 2.5), but this is hard limited to 4.
Setting Variable name Data
Type
Unit Min Max Typical
Recalibration threshold qt_recal_threshold uint8_t Enum 4 Detect
threshold
1
5.3.2 Detect Integration
The QTouch Library features a detect integration mechanism, which acts to confirm detection in a
robust fashion. The detect integrator (DI) acts as a simple signal filter to suppress false detections
caused by spurious events like electrical noise.
A counter is incremented each time the sensor delta has exceeded its threshold and stayed there
for a specific number of acquisitions, without going below the threshold levels. When this counter
reaches a preset limit (the DI value) the sensor is finally declared to be touched. If on any
acquisition the delta is not seen to exceed the threshold level, the counter is cleared and the
process has to start from the beginning. The DI process is applicable to a ‘release’ (going out of
detect) event as well.
For example, if the DI value is 10, then the device has to exceed its threshold and stay there for
10 acquisitions in succession without going below the threshold level, before the sensor is
declared to be touched.
Setting Variable
name
Data Type Unit Min Max Typical
D
I
qt_
di
uint8_
t
Cycle
s
0 25
5
4
5.3.3 Drift Hold Time
Drift Hold Time (DHT) is used to restrict drift on all sensors while one or more sensors are
activated. It defines the length of time the drift is halted after a key detection.17
This feature is useful in cases of high density keypads where touching a key or floating a finger
over the keypad would cause untouched keys to drift, and therefore create a sensitivity shift, and
ultimately inhibit any touch detection.
Setting Variable name Data Type Unit Min Max Typical
Drift hold time qt_drift_hold_time uint8_t 200 ms 1 255 20 (4s)
5.3.4 Maximum ON Duration
If an object unintentionally contacts a sensor resulting in a touch detection for a prolonged interval
it is usually desirable to recalibrate the sensor in order to restore its function, perhaps after a time
delay of some seconds.
The Maximum on Duration timer monitors such detections; if detection exceeds the timer’s
settings, the sensor is automatically recalibrated. After a recalibration has taken place, the
affected sensor once again functions normally even if it still in contact with the foreign object.
Max on duration can be disabled by setting it to zero (infinite timeout) in which case the channel
never recalibrates during a continuous detection (but the host could still command it).
Setting Variable name Data Type Unit Min Max Typical
Maximum ON Duration qt_max_on_duration uint8_t 200 ms 0 255 30 (6s)
5.3.5 Positive / Negative Drift
Drift in a general sense means adjusting reference level (of a sensor) to allow compensation for
temperature (or other factor) effect on physical sensor characteristics. Decreasing reference level
for such compensation is called Negative drift & increasing reference level is called Positive drift.
Specifically, the drift compensation should be set to compensate faster for increasing signals than
for decreasing signals.
Signals can drift because of changes in physical sensor characteristics over time and
temperature. It is crucial that such drift be compensated for; otherwise false detections and
sensitivity shifts can occur.
Drift compensation occurs only while there is no detection in effect. Once a finger is sensed, the
drift compensation mechanism ceases since the signal is legitimately detecting an object. Drift
compensation works only when the signal in question has not crossed the ‘Detect threshold’ level.
The drift compensation mechanism can be asymmetric; it can be made to occur in one direction
faster than it does in the other simply by changing the appropriate setup parameters.
Signal values of a sensor tend to decrease when an object (touch) is approaching it or a
characteristic change of sensor over time and temperature. Decreasing signals should not be
compensated for quickly, as an approaching finger could be compensated for partially or entirely
before even touching the channel (negative drift).
However, an object over the channel which does not cause detection, and for which the sensor
has already made full allowance (over some period of time), could suddenly be removed leaving
the sensor with an artificially suppressed reference level and thus become insensitive to touch. In
the latter case, the sensor should compensate for the object’s removal by raising the reference
level relatively quickly (positive drift).18 8207L-AT42-05/12
Setting Variable name Data Type Unit Min Max Typical
Negative Drift qt_neg_drift_rate uint8_t 200 ms 1 127 20 (4s)
Positive Drift qt_pos_drift_rate uint8_t 200 ms 1 127 5 (1s)
5.3.6 Positive Recalibration Delay
If any key is found to have a significant drop in signal delta, (on the negative side), it is deemed to
be an error condition. If this condition persists for more than the positive recalibration delay, i.e.,
qt_pos_recal_delay period, then an automatic recalibration is carried out.
A counter is incremented each time the sensor delta is equal to the positive recalibration
threshold and stayed there for a specific number of acquisitions. When this counter reaches a
preset limit (the PRD value) the sensor is finally recalibrated. If on any acquisition the delta is
seen to be greater than the positive recalibration threshold level, the counter is cleared and the
positive drifting is performed.
For example, if the PRD value is 10, then the delta has to drop below the recalibration threshold
and stay there for 10 acquisitions in succession without going below the threshold level, before
the sensor is declared to be recalibrated.
Setting Variable name Data Type Unit Min Max Typical
Positive
Recalibration
Delay
qt_pos_recal_delay uint8_t cycles 1 255 3
5.4 Sensor specific settings
Apart from global settings as mentioned in the section above, touch sensing using QTouch library
could also be fine tuned by more number of configurable settings.
This section explains the settings that are specific to each sensor. For example, sensor 0 can
have a detect threshold (one of the sensor specific setting) that is different from sensor 1.
5.4.1 Detect threshold
A sensor’s negative (detect) threshold defines how much its signal must drop below its reference
level to qualify as a potential touch detect. The final detection confirmation must however satisfy
the Detect Integrator (DI) limit. Larger threshold values desensitize sensors since the signal must
change more (i.e. requires larger touch) in order to exceed the threshold level. Conversely, lower
threshold levels make sensors more sensitive.
Threshold setting depends on the amount of signal swing that occurs when a sensor is touched.
Thicker front panels or smaller electrodes usually have smaller signal swing on touch, thus
require lower threshold levels.
Setting Variable name Data Type Unit Min Max Typical
Threshold threshold uint8_t counts 3 255 10 – 20
5.4.2 Hysteresis
This setting is sensor detection hysteresis value. It is expressed as a percentage of the sensor
detection threshold setting. Once a sensor goes into detect its threshold level is reduced (by the 19
hysteresis value) in order to avoid the sensor dither in and out of detect if the signal level is close
to original threshold level.
• Setting of 0 = 50% of detect threshold value (HYST_50)
• Setting of 1 = 25% of detect threshold value (HYST_25)
• Setting of 2 = 12.5% of detect threshold value (HYST_12_5)
• Setting of 3 = 6.25% of detect threshold value (HYST_6_25)
Setting Variable name Data Type Unit Min Max Typical
Hysteresis detect_hysteresis uint8_t (2 bits) Enum HYST_6_25 HYST_50 HYST_6_25
5.4.3 Position Resolution
The rotor or slider needs the position resolution (angle resolution in case of rotor and linear
resolution in case of slider) to be set. Resolution is the number of bits needed to report the
position of rotor or slider. It can have values from 2bits to 8 bits.
Setting Variable
name
Data
Type
Unit Min Reported
position
Max Reported
position
Typica
l
Position
Resoluti
on
position_
resolution
uint8_t
(3 bits)
- 2 bits 0 – 3 8 bits 0-255 8
5.4.4 Position Hysteresis
In case of QMatrix, the rotor or slider needs the position hysteresis (angle hysteresis in case of
rotor and linear hysteresis in case of slider) to be set. It is the number of positions the user has to
move back, before touch position is reported when the direction of scrolling is changed and
during the first scrolling after the touch down.
Hysteresis can range from 0 (1 position) to 7 ( 8 positions). The hysteresis is carried out at 8 bits
resolution internally and scaled to desired resolution; therefore at resolutions lower than 8 bits
there might be a difference of 1 reported position from the hysteresis setting, depending on where
the touch is detected.
At lower resolutions, where skipping of the reported positions is observed, hysteresis can be set
to 0 (1 position). At Higher resolutions (6 ..8bits) , it would be recommended to have a hysteresis
of at least 2 positions or more.
NOTE:
It is not valid to have a hysteresis value more than the available bit positions in the resolution.
Ex: do not have a hysteresis value of 5 positions with a resolution of 2 bits (4 positions).
Setting Variable name Data Type Unit Min Max Typical
Position
Hysteresis
position_hysteresis uint8_t (3 bits) - 0 7 3
NOTE:
Position hysteresis is not valid (unused) in case of QTouch acquisition method libraries.20 8207L-AT42-05/12
5.4.5 Adjacent Key Suppression (AKS)
In designs where the sensors are close together or set for high sensitivity, multiple sensors might
report detect simultaneously if touch is near them. To allow applications to determine the
intended single touch, the touch library provides the user the ability to configure a certain number
of sensors in an AKS group.
When a group of sensors are in the same AKS group, then only the first strongest sensor will
report detection. The sensor reporting detection will continue to report detection even if another
sensor’s delta becomes stronger. The sensor stays in detect until its delta falls below its detection
threshold, and then if any more sensors in the AKS group are still in detect then the strongest will
report detection. So at any given time only one sensor from each AKS group will be reported to
be in detect.
The library provides the ability to configure any sensor to be included in any one of the Adjacent
Key Suppression Groups (AKS Group).
Setting Variable name Data Type Unit Min Max Typical
AKS Group aks_group uint8_t (3 bits) Enum 0 (off) 7 0 (off)
5.5 Using the Sensors
5.5.1 Avoiding Cross-talk
In ATMEL QTouch library variants that use QTouch acquisition technology, adjacent sensors are
not measured at the same time. This prevents interference due to cross-talk between adjacent
channels, but at the same time some sensor configurations take longer to measure than others.
For example, if an 8-channel device is configured to support 8 keys, then the library will measure
the keys on channels 0, 2, 4, and 6 parallely, followed by keys on channels 1, 3, 5, and 7. If the
same device is configured, say, to support 4 keys, putting them either on all the odd channels or
on all the even channels means that they can all be measured simultaneously.
This means the library calls are faster, and the device can use less power. So, it is recommended
that the appropriate channel numbers are used when using less than the maximum number of
channels available for the device to ensure optimum performance. In a similar sense for faster
execution and reduced power consumption, it is also advisable to use intra-port sensor
configuration instead of inter-port sensor configuration while using 4 channels on the same port.
5.5.2 Multiple measurements
The library will not automatically perform multiple measurements on a sensor (Ex: To resolve for
instance Detect Integration or recalibration.). The user is given the option to perform the
measurement multiple times if certain conditions are met. This will enable the user to implement
the time critical code thereby making the qt_measure_sensors() a non-blocking API .The host
application has to perform multiple measurements, based on the need. The global flag
QTLIB_BURST_AGAIN indicating that multiple measurements are needed is passed to the user.
This is BIT8 of the return value from the qt_measure_sensors( ) API. The main_.c
has the example usage to perform multiple measurements.
If QTLIB_BURST_AGAIN = 1, multiple measurements are needed to
To compensate for drift
Resolve re-calibration
Resolve calibration.
Resolve detect integration.21
If QTLIB_BURST_AGAIN = 0, multiple measurements are not needed and the user can execute
the host application code. Apart from QTLIB_BURST_AGAIN, various flags are provided to the
user to perform the multiple measurements based on the need of the host application to act to
specific situation. Description of the these flags can be found in the section5.6.5.6
Note: To maintain robustness and timing of the touch sensing measurement, it is recommended
that the user calls the qt_measure_sensors() immediately if the flag QT_BURST_AGAIN=1.
However, the user is allowed to run time- critical section (not more than few instructions) of the
host application comprising on the touch sensing timing.
5.5.3 Guard Channel
Guard channel in Qtouch Acquisition Method allows one key to be configured as a guard channel
to help prevent false detection. Guard channel keys should be more sensitive than the other keys
(physically bigger or larger Cs).To enable key as guard channel, the designated key is connected
to a sensor pad which detects the presence of touch and overrides any output from the other
keys using the AKS feature.
The key can be configured to have a guard channel function by adjusting a number of
independent settings. The Guard channel is designed so that it is likely to be activated unless a
key is accurately touched.
The guard channel sensor must be set up so that it is slightly more sensitive than the keys that it
surrounds. The exact amount of increase depends on the application and is best determined by
experimentation.
There are three methods of increasing the sensor sensitivity that can be used in combination:
1. Increasing the size of the sensor.
2. Increasing the value of the Sample Capacitor (Cs).
3. Adjust the detection threshold for the sensor.
The sensor size and capacitor values should be altered to establish the base sensitivity for the
sensor. Once these values have been established, the detection threshold can be used to fine
tune the sensor.
MCU with
SNS and
SNSK
Pins 22 8207L-AT42-05/12
The Above figure illustrates how a Guard sensor/key is to be visualized.It has six keys and five
keys are surrounded by a Guard Channel.
Please refer QTAN0031 for further information on Guard Channel.
http://www.atmel.com/dyn/resources/prod_documents/QTAN0031(2).pdf
5.6 QTouch API and Usage
The Atmel QTouch library provides support for many devices. This chapter explains the touch
library for such devices without any hardware support.
5.6.1 QTouch Library API
This section describes the QTouch library Application Programming Interface (API) for touch
sensing using QTouch and QMatrix acquisition methods.
Using the API, Touch sensors and the associated channels can be defined. Once touch sensing
has been initiated by the user, the host application can use the API to make touch measurements
and determine the status of the sensors.
5.6.2 touch_api.h - public header file
The touch_api.h header file is the public header file which needs to be included in users
application and it has the type definitions and function prototypes of the API’s listed in sections
5.6.3 , 5.6.4 and 5.6.5
The touch_api.h header file is located in the library distribution in the following directory.
• ..\Atmel_QTouch_Libraries_5.x\Generic_QTouch_Libraries\include
5.6.3 Type Definitions and enumerations used in the library
5.6.3.1 Typedefs
This section lists the type definitions used in the library.
Typedef Notes
uint8_t unsigned 8-bit integer
int8_t signed 8-bit integer
uint16_t unsigned 16-bit integer
int16_t signed 16-bit integer
uint32_t unsigned 32-bit integer
threshold_t unsigned 8-bit integer
used for setting a sensor detection threshold
5.6.3.2 Enumerations
This section lists the enumerations used in the QTouch Library.
5.6.3.2.1 sensor_type_t
Enumeration sensor_type_t
Use Define the type of the sensor
Values Comment
SENSOR_TYPE_UNASSIGNED Channel is not assigned to any sensor
SENSOR_TYPE_KEY Sensor is of type KEY
SENSOR_TYPE_ROTOR Sensor is of type ROTOR23
SENSOR_TYPE_SLIDER Sensor is of type SLIDER
5.6.3.2.2 aks_group_t
Enumeration aks_group_t
Use Defines the Adjacent Key Suppression (AKS) groups each sensor may be
associated with ( see section 5.3.4 Maximum ON Duration)
AKS is selectable by the system designer
7 AKS groups are supported by the library
Values Comment
NO_AKS_GROUP NO AKS group selected for the sensor
AKS_GROUP_1 AKS Group number 1
AKS_GROUP_2 AKS Group number 2
AKS_GROUP_3 AKS Group number 3
AKS_GROUP_4 AKS Group number 4
AKS_GROUP_5 AKS Group number 5
AKS_GROUP_6 AKS Group number 6
AKS_GROUP_7 AKS Group number 7
5.6.3.2.3 channel_t
Enumeration channel_t
Use The channel numbers used in the library.
When using the QTouch acquisition method, the channel numbers have a one
to one mapping to the pin numbers of the port being used.
When using the QMatrix acquisition method, the channel numbers are ordered
in a matrix sequence
Values Comment
CHANNEL_0 Channel number : 0
CHANNEL_1 Channel number : 1
CHANNEL_2 Channel number : 2
CHANNEL_3 Channel number : 3
..... Channel number: ..
Upto CHANNEL ( N-1 ) Channel number N-1 : for an N Channel library
The maximum number of channels supported is dependent on the library variant. Possible values
of N are as listed below
Acquisition method Device type Possible values of N
( Maximum number of channels )
QTouch acquisition 8-bit 4,8,16
32-bit 8, 16, 32
QMatrix Acquisition 8-bit 8,16,32,64
5.6.3.2.4 hysteresis_t
Enumeration Hysteresis_t
Use Defines the sensor detection hysteresis value. This is expressed as a
percentage of the sensor detection threshold.
This is configurable per sensor.
HYST_x = hysteresis value is x percent of detection threshold value (rounded 24 8207L-AT42-05/12
down).
Note that a minimum value of 2 is used as a hard limit. Example: if detection
threshold = 20, then:
HYST_50 = 10 (50 percent of 20)
HYST_25 = 5 (25 percent of 20)
HYST_12_5 = 2 (12.5 percent of 20)
HYST_6_25 = 2 (6.25 percent of 20 = 1, but set to the hard limit of 2)
5.6.3.2.5 resolution_t
Enumeration resolution_t
Use For rotors and sliders, the resolution of the reported angle or position.
RES_x_BIT = rotor/slider reports x-bit values.
Example: if slider resolution is RES_7_BIT, then reported positions are in the
range 0…127.
Values Comment
RES_1_BIT 1 bit resolution : reported positions range 0 – 1
RES_2_BIT 2 bit resolution : reported positions range 0 – 3
RES_3_BIT 3 bit resolution : reported positions range 0 – 7
RES_4_BIT 4 bit resolution : reported positions range 0 – 15
RES_5_BIT 5 bit resolution : reported positions range 0 – 31
RES_6_BIT 6 bit resolution : reported positions range 0 – 63
RES_7_BIT 7 bit resolution : reported positions range 0 – 127
RES_8_BIT 8 bit resolution : reported positions range 0 – 255
5.6.3.2.6 recal_threshold_t
Enumeration recal_threshold_t
Use A sensor recalibration threshold. This is expressed as a percentage of the
sensor detection threshold.
This is for automatic recovery from false conditions, such as a calibration while
sensors were touched, or a significant step change in power supply voltage.
If the false condition persists the library will recalibrate according to the settings
of the recalibration threshold.
This setting is applicable to all the configured sensors.
Usage :
RECAL_x = recalibration threshold is x percent of detection threshold value
(rounded down).
Note: a minimum value of 4 is used.
Example: if detection threshold = 40, then:
RECAL_100 = 40 ( 100 percent of 40)
RECAL_50 = 20 ( 50 percent of 40)
RECAL_25 = 10 ( 25 percent of 40)
RECAL_12_5 = 5 ( 12.5 percent of 40)
RECAL_6_25 = 4 ( 6.25 percent of 40 = 2, but value is limited to 4)
Values Comment
Values Comment
HYST_50 50% Hysteresis
HYST_25 25% Hysteresis
HYST_12_5 12.5% Hysteresis
HYST_6_25 6.25% Hysteresis25
RECAL_100 100% recalibration threshold
RECAL_50 50% recalibration threshold
RECAL_25 25% recalibration threshold
RECAL_12_5 12.5% recalibration threshold
RECAL_6_25 6.25% recalibration threshold
5.6.4 Data structures
This section lists the data structures that hold sensor status, settings, and diagnostics information
5.6.4.1 qt_touch_status_t
Structure qt_touch_status_t
Input / Output Output from the Library
Use Holds the status ( On/ Off ) of the sensors and the linear and angular positions
of sliders and rotors respectively
Fields Comment
sensor_states[] For Sensor, the sensor_states. Bit “n” = state of nth sensor :
Bit Value 0 - indicates the sensor is not in detect
Bit Value 1 - indicates the sensor is in detect
rotor_slider_values[] Rotors angles or slider positions if rotors and sliders are used. These
values are valid when sensor states shows that the corresponding rotor or
slider is in detect
The macro that can get the sensor state when the sensor number is provided can be something
as below:
#define GET_SENSOR_STATE(SENSOR_NUMBER)
qt_measure_data.qt_touch_status.sensor_states[(SENSOR_NUMBER/8)] &
(1 << (SENSOR_NUMBER % 8))
The host application can use this macro to act accordingly, the following example shows how to
toggle a IO pin (PD2) based on the sensor0 state.( Set PD2 if sensor0 is in detect, and clear PD2
if sensor0 is not in detect)
Ex: /*Set pin PD2 direction as output*/
DDRD |= (1u << PORTD2);
if (GET_SENSOR_STATE(0) !=0)
{ PORTD |= (1u << PORTD2); /* Set PORTD2 */
}
else {
PORTD &= ~(1u << PORTD2); /* Clear PORTD2 */
}
5.6.4.2 qt_touch_lib_config_data_t
Structure qt_touch_lib_config_data_t
Input / Output Input to the library26 8207L-AT42-05/12
Use Global Configuration data settings for the library.
Fields Type Comment
qt_recal_threshold recal_threshold_t Sensor recalibration threshold. Default: RECAL_50 (recalibration
threshold = 50 percent of detection threshold. Refer to section
5.3.1 Recalibration Threshold more details
qt_di uint8_t Sensor detect integration (DI) limit. Default value: 4. Refer to
section 5.3.2 Detect Integration for more details
qt_drift_hold_time uint8_t Sensor drift hold time in units of 200 ms. Default value: 20 (20 x
200 ms = 4s), that is hold off drifting for 4 seconds after leaving
detect. Refer to section 5.3.3 Drift Hold Time for more details
qt_max_on_duration uint8_t Sensor maximum on duration in units of 200 ms. For example:
150 = recalibrate after 30s (150 x 200 ms). 0 = recalibration
disabled Default value: 0 (recalibration disabled). Refer to
section 5.3.4 Maximum ON Duration for more details.
qt_neg_drift_rate uint8_t Sensor negative drift rate in units of 200 ms. Default value: 20
(20 x 200 ms = 4s per LSB). Refer to section 5.3.5 Positive /
Negative Drift for more details
qt_pos_drift_rate uint8_t Sensor positive drift rate in units of 200 ms. Default value: 5 (5 x
200 ms = 1s per LSB). Refer to section 5.3.5 Positive / Negative
Drift for more details
qt_pos_recal_delay uint8_t Sensor positive recalibration delay. Default: 3. Refer to section
5.3.6 for more details.
The measurement limit for touch sensing using QTouch acquisition method is hard coded as
8192.
The QTouch library exports a variable of this type so that the user can specify the threshold
parameters for the library. The API qt_set_parameters() should be called to apply the parameters
specified.
extern qt_touch_lib_config_data_t qt_config_data;
5.6.4.3 qt_touch_lib_measure_data_t
Structure qt_touch_lib_measure_data_t
Input / Output Output from the library
Use Data structure which holds the sensor and channel states and values.
Fields Type Comment
channel_signals uint16_t The measured signal on each channel.
channel_references uint16_t The reference signal for each channel.
qt_touch_status qt_touch_status_t The state and position of the configured sensors
The QTouch library exports a variable of this type which can be accessed to retrieve the touch
status of all the sensors.
extern qt_touch_lib_measure_data_t qt_measure_data;
5.6.4.4 qt_burst_lengths
Structure qt_burst_lengths
Input / Output Input to the library
Use NOTE: Applicable only to the QMatrix acquisition method libraries
This data structure is used to specify the burst lengths for each of the QMatrix
channels27
Fields Type Comment
qt_burst_lengths[] uint8_t The burst length for each of the QMatrix channel in units of pulses. Default
value: 64 pulses.
These values can be configured for each channel individually.
The signal gain for each sensor is controlled by circuit parameters as well as the burst length.
The burst length is simply the number of times the charge-transfer (‘QT’) process is performed on
a given sensor. Each QT process is simply the pulsing of an X line once, with a corresponding Y
line enabled to capture the resulting charge passed through the sensor’s capacitance Cx.
The QMatrix acquisition method library exports a variable of this type which can be accessed to
set the burst length for each of the QMatrix channels
extern uint8_t qt_burst_lengths[QT_NUM_CHANNELS];
5.6.4.5 tag_sensor_t
Structure tag_sensor_t
Input / Output Output from the library
Use Data structure which holds the internal sensor state variables used by the
library.
Fields Type Comment
State uint8_t internal sensor state
general_counter uint8_t general purpose counter: used for calibration, drifting, etc
ndil_counter uint8_t drift Integration counter
Threshold uint8_t sensor detection threshold. Refer to section 5.4.1 Detect threshold for more
details
type_aks_pos_hyst uint8_t holds information for sensor type, AKS group, positive recalibration flag, and
hysteresis value
Bit fields Use
B1 : B0 Hysteresis. Refer to section 5.4.2 Hysteresis for more
details
B2 positive recalibration flag
B5:B3 AKS group. Refer to section 5.4.5 for more details
B7:B6 sensor type
from_channel uint8_t starting channel number for sensor
to_channel uint8_t ending channel number for sensor
Index uint8_t index for array of rotor/slider values
5.6.4.6 qt_lib_siginfo_t
Structure qt_lib_siginfo_t
Input / Output Output from the library
Use Data structure which holds the information about the library variant and its
version information.
qt_lib_siginfo_t structure definition for a QTouch acquisition method library variant
Fields Type Comment
library_version uint16_t Holds the library version information.
Bit fields Use
B3 : B0 Patch version of the library
B7 : B4 Minor version of the library
B15:B8 Major version of the library28 8207L-AT42-05/12
lib_sig_lword uint16_t Holds the general information about the library
Bit fields Use
B1 : B0 Library Type :
00 : QTouch acquisition method
01 : QMatrix acquisition method
B2 Compiler tool chain used
0 – GCC
1 – IAR
B9 : B3 Maximum number of channels
supported by the library
B10 0 – Library supports only keys
1 – Library supports keys and
rotors
B15 : B11 Maximum number of rotors and
sliders supported by the library
lib_sig_hword uint16_t Reserved
qt_lib_siginfo_t structure definitions for a QMatrix acquisition method library variant
Fields Type Comment
library_version uint16_t Holds the library version information.
Bit fields Use
B3 : B0 Patch version of the library
B7 : B4 Minor version of the library
B15:B8 Major version of the library
lib_sig_lword uint16_t Holds the general information about the library
Bit fields Use
B1 : B0 Library Type :
00 : QTouch acquisition method
01 : QMatrix acquisition method
B2 Compiler tool chain used
0 – GCC
1 – IAR
B9 : B3 Maximum number of channels
supported by the library
B10 0 – Library supports only keys
1 – Library supports keys and
rotors
B15 : B11 Maximum number of rotors and
sliders supported by the library
lib_sig_hword uint16_t Holds information about the X and Y lines for a QMatrix library variant
Bit fields Use
B4 : B0 Number of X Lines
B8 : B5 Number of Y Lines
B9 0
5.6.5 Public Functions
This section lists the public functions available in the QTouch libraries and its usage.
5.6.5.1 qt_set_parameters
This function is used to initialize the global configuration settings in the variable
qt_config_data of the QTouch and QMatrix acquisition method libraries.
void qt_set_parameters ( void )29
Arguments Type Comment
Void - This function will initialize the parameters required by the library to default values .But
the default values can be changed by the user by modifying the global threshold
values as defined in qt_touch_lib_config_data_t . See section 0 for details.
NOTE:
• This function can be called any time to apply the threshold parameters of the library as
specified by modifying the global data structure qt_config_data exported by the library.
5.6.5.2 qt_enable_key
This function is used to configure a channel as a key.
void qt_enable_key (
channel_t channel ,
aks_group_t aks_group ,
threshold_t detect_threshold ,
hysteresis_t detect_hysteresis
)
Arguments Type Comment
Channel channel_t Specifies the channel number to be configured for use as a “key”
aks_group aks_group Specifies the aks group associated with the sensor being configured as
“key”
detect_threshold threshold_t Specifies the detect threshold for the sensor
detect_hysteresis hysteresis_t Specifies the detection hysteresis for the sensor
5.6.5.3 qt_enable_rotor
This function is used to configure a set of channels as a rotor.
void qt_enable_rotor (
channel_t from_channel ,
channel_t to_channel ,
aks_group_t aks_group ,
threshold_t detect_threshold ,
hysterisis_t detect_hysterisis ,
resoulution_t angle_resolution ,
uint8_t angle_hysterisis
)
Arguments Type Comment
from_channel Channel_t Specifies the starting channel number to be configured for use as a “Rotor”
to_channel Channel_t Specifies the end channel number to be configured for use as a “Rotor”
aks_group aks_group Specifies the aks group associated with the sensor being configured as
“ROTOR”
detect_threshold threshold_t Specifies the detect threshold for the sensor
detect_hysterisis hysterisis_t Specifies the detection hysteresis for the sensor
angle_resolution resolution_t Specifies the resolution of the reported angle value
angle_hysterisis uint8_t Specifies the hysteresis of the reported angle value
NOTE:
• A “Rotor” sensor requires contiguous channel numbers.
• The rotor / slider number depends on the order in which the rotor or sliders are enabled.
The first rotor or slider enabled will use “rotor_slider_values[0]”, the second will use
“rotor_slider_values[1]”, and so on. The reported rotor value is valid when the rotor is
reported as being in detect.30 8207L-AT42-05/12
• In case of QMatrix acquisition method library, the from_channel and to_channel can be
between 3 to 8 channel numbers apart (i.e. it can support 3 to 8 channel rotors).
• In case of QTouch acquisition method library, the from_channel and to_channel can be 3
channels apart (i.e. can support only 3 channel rotors).
5.6.5.4 qt_enable_slider
This function is used to configure a set of channels as a rotor.
void qt_enable_slider (
channel_t from_channel ,
channel_t to_channel ,
aks_group_t aks_group ,
threshold_t detect_threshold ,
hysterisis_t detect_hysterisis ,
resolution_t position_resolution ,
uint8_t position_hysteresis
)
Arguments Type Comment
from_channel Channel_t Specifies the starting channel number to be configured for use as a
“Slider”
to_channel Channel_t Specifies the end channel number to be configured for use as a “Slider”
aks_group aks_group Specifies the aks group associated with the sensor being configured as
“Slider”
detect_threshold threshold_t Specifies the detect threshold for the sensor
detect_hysterisis hysterisis_t Specifies the detection hysteresis for the sensor
position_resolution resolution_t Specifies the resolution of the reported position value
position_hysterisis uint8_t Specifies the hysteresis of the reported position value
NOTE:
• A “Slider” sensor requires a contiguous numbers of channels.
• The rotor / slider number depends on the order in which the rotor or sliders are enabled.
The first rotor or slider enabled will use “rotor_slider_values[0]”, the second will use.
“rotor_slider_values[1]”, and so on. The reported rotor value is valid when the slider is
reported as being in detect.
• In case of QMatrix acquisition method library, the from_channel and to_channel can be
between 3 to 8 channels apart (i.e. it can support 3 to 8 channel sliders).
• In case of QTouch acquisition method library, the from_channel and to_channel can be 3
channels apart (i.e. can support only 3 channel sliders).
5.6.5.5 qt_init_sensing
This function is used to initialize the touch sensing for all enabled channels. All required sensors
should be configured before calling this function.
void qt_init_sensing ( void )
Arguments Type Comment
Void - -
NOTE:
• All sensors must be configured (using qt_enable_key, qt_enable_rotor or
qt_enable_slider ) before calling this function.
• This functions initializes all the configured sensors, performs calibration.31
5.6.5.6 qt_measure_sensors
This function performs a capacitive measurement on all enabled sensors. The measured signals
for each sensor are then processed to check for user touches, releases, changes in rotor angle
and changes in slider position.
unit16_t qt_measure_sensors( uint16_t current_time_ms )
Arguments Type Comment
current_time_ms uint16 The current time in milliseconds
Return
Value
Comment
uint16_t Returns the status of the Library as a combination of the following bit fields.
Return value Bit
definition
Comments
QTLIB_NO_ACTIVITY 0x0000 No activity detected on any of the
sensors
QTLIB_IN_DETECT 0x0001 At least one sensor is in detect
QTLIB_STATUS_CHANGE 0x0002 At least one sensor has changed
ON/OFF state since the last call to
qt_measure_sensor()
QTLIB_ROTOR_SLIDER_POS_CHANGE 0x0004 At least one rotor/slider has changed
position since the last call to
qt_measure_sensors()
QTLIB_CHANNEL_REF_CHANGE 0x0008 At least one reference value has
changed since last call to
qt_measure_sensors()
QTLIB_BURST_AGAIN 0x0100 Flag to indicate Multiple measurements
needed.
QTLIB_RESOLVE_CAL 0x0200 Multiple measurements needed to
resolve calibration. Call
qt_measure_sensors( ) once again.
QTLIB_RESOLVE_FILTERIN 0x0400 Multiple measurements needed to
resolve filtering. Call
qt_measure_sensors( ) once again.
QTLIB_RESOLVE_DI 0x0800 Multiple measurements needed to
resolve detect integration. Call
qt_measure_sensors( ) once again.
QTLIB_RESOLVE_POS_RECAL 0x1000 Multiple measurements needed to
resolve positive recalibration. Call
qt_measure_sensors( ) once again.
NOTE:
• All sensors must be configured (using qt_enable_key or qt_enable_rotor or
qt_enable_slider) and initialized by calling qt_init_sensing before calling this function.
5.6.5.7 qt_calibrate_sensing
This function forces a recalibration of all enabled sensors.
void qt_calibrate_sensing( void )
Arguments Type Comment
Void - -32 8207L-AT42-05/12
NOTE:
• Recalibration may be useful if, for example, it is desired to globally recalibrate all sensors
on a change in application operating mode.
• This function must be called only when the sensors have been configured and initialized.
5.6.5.8 qt_reset_sensing
This function disables all sensors and resets all configuration settings (for example, “qt_di”) to
their default values.
void qt_reset_sensing( void )
Arguments Type Comment
Void - -
NOTE:
• This may be useful if it is desired to dynamically reconfigure sensing. After calling this
function, any required sensors must be re-enabled, filter callback needs to be reinitialized,
and “qt_init_sensing()” must be called before “qt_measure_sensors()” is called
again.
• In case of QMatrix, the burst lengths for all channels are set to zero.
5.6.5.9 qt_get_sensor_delta
This function returns the delta value for a given channel.
int16_t qt_get_sensor_delta( uint8_t sensor_number )
Arguments Type Comment
sensor_number unit8_t sensor id for which the delta is required
Return type Comment
int16_t The delta value of the sensor specified
NOTE:
• All sensors must be configured (using qt_enable_key or qt_enable_rotor or
qt_enable_slider) and initialized by calling qt_init_sensing before calling this function.
5.6.5.10 qt_get_library_sig
This function is used to retrieve the library version and signature from the library.
void qt_get_library_sig( qt_lib_siginfo_t *lib_sig_ptr )
Arguments Type Comment
lib_sig_ptr qt_lib_siginfo_t * Pointer to the structure which needs to be
updated with the library signature
information
NOTE:
• The function qt_measure_sensors() should have been called at least once prior to calling
this function. 33
5.6.6 Sequence of Operations and Using the API
Figure 6 illustrates the sequence of operations required to be performed to add touch to an end
application. By using the simple API’s as illustrated in the sequence flowchart, the user can add
touch sensing in his design.
5.6.6.1 Channel Numbering
5.6.6.1.1 Channel numbering when using QTouch acquisition method
QTouch acquisition method libraries require 2 GPIO pins per channel. QTouch libraries can be
configured to use 1 to 16 channels requiring 2 to 32 pins respectively. There are two options
provided for connecting the SNS and SNSK pins.
1. The SNS and SNSK pins are connected to separate ports. ( i.e. Interport)
2. The SNS and SNSK pins are connected to the same port. ( i.e. Intraport)
The following list provides a look at various combinations supported by various 8bit AVR
libraries released for each device.
When pin configurability is not used:
• 4-channel library – supports up to 4 channels using 4 consecutive pins on different SNS
and SNSK ports (or) supports up to 4 channels using 8 consecutive pins on the same
port used for both SNS and SNSK lines. This library requires 1 or 2 ports.
• 8-channel library – supports up to 8 channels using 8 consecutive pins on different SNS
and SNSK ports (or) supports up to 8 channels using 16 pins spread over two ports (SNS
and SNSK are on alternate pins) with SNS1 and SNSK1 pins on the first port and SNS2
and SNSK2 pins on the second port. This library requires 2 ports.
• 12-channel library (available only for 8bit AVR devices) – supports up to 12 channels out
of which, 8 channels with 8 consecutive pins for SNS1 and SNSK1 are available on
different ports and the other 4 channels with 8 consecutive pins available on the same
port for both SNS and SNSK lines. This library requires a total of 3 ports.
• 16-channel library – supports up to 16 channels out of which, 8 channels with 8
consecutive pins for SNS1 and SNSK1 are available on different ports and the other 8
channels with 8 consecutive pins are available on a different pair of SNS2 and SNSK2
ports. This library requires a total of 4 ports.
When pin configurability is used:
• 4-channel library – supports up to 4 channels using any 4 pins on different SNS and
SNSK ports (or) supports up to 4 channels using pins on the same port used for both
SNS and SNSK lines. This library requires 1 or 2 ports.
• 8-channel library – supports up to 8 channels using 8 pins on different SNS and SNSK
ports (or) supports up to 8 channels using pins spread over two ports (SNS and SNSK
are on alternate pins) with SNS1 and SNSK1 pins on the first port and SNS2 and SNSK2
pins on the second port. This library requires 2 ports.
• 12-channel library (available only for 8bit AVR devices) – supports up to 12 channels out
of which, 8 channels with 8 pins for SNS1 and SNSK1 are available on different ports and
the other 4 channels with 8 pins available on the same port for both SNS and SNSK
lines. This library requires a total of 3 ports.
• 16-channel library – supports up to 16 channels out of which, 8 channels with 8 pins for
SNS1 and SNSK1 are available on different ports and the other 8 channels with 8 pins
are available on a different pair of SNS2 and SNSK2 ports. This library requires a total of
4 ports.34 8207L-AT42-05/12
Note:
When a library supports 4 channels using 8 consecutive pins on the same port, the SNS and
SNSK pins are allocated alternately. This is valid for all the libraries mentioned above.
Usage of intraport configuration requires more code memory than the interport configuration.
The values mentioned in the Library_selection_Guide.xls are for interport configurations. The
memory consumption for intra-port will be higher to the values mentioned in the
Library_selection_Guide.xls
The configurations on pin configurability should be used in conjunction with the rules for
assigning the pins that are described in section 5.8.2
For UC3 and ATSAM libraries, an n- channel library supports up to n channels using n
consecutive pins on different SNS and SNSK ports (or) supports up to n/2 channels using (n)
consecutive pins on the same port used for both SNS and SNSK lines. This library requires 1 or 2
UC3 or ATSAM ports. In addition to this, for the ATSAM libraries the pins can be configured on 3
ports based on the configuration selected.
NOTE:
Some of the devices in UC3 family has ports having more than 32 pins or less than 32
pins.In those devices, the mapping is given as below:
GPIO Port0 -> A
GPIO Port1 -> B
GPIO Port2 -> C
GPIO Port3 -> X
Example SNS=A and SNSK=X, So channel 0 will be (SNS0 = GPIO0_Pin0 and SNSK0 =
GPIO3_Pin0 ).
Similarly,Example SNS=X and SNSK=X, So channel 0 will be (SNS0 = GPIO3_Pin0 and SNSK0
= GPIO3_Pin1 ).35
qt_reset_sensing()
qt_enable_xxx()
qt_init_sensing()
qt_set_parameters()
init_timer_isr()
check qt_touch_status
The host application (optionally) calls “qt_reset_sensing( )”
to reset all channels and touch sensing parameters to their
default states. This step is only required if the host wants to
dynamically reconfigure the library at runtime
The host application calls “qt_enable_key( )”, “qt_enable_rotor( )”
and/or “qt_enable_slider()” as required to configure the touch
sensors
The host application qt_set_parameters() to initialize the threshold
parameters for the library. If the user needs to change the thresholds,
edit the global data structure qt_config_data prior to calling this API
The host application periodically calls
“qt_measure_sensors( )” to make capacitive measurements.
check the global status variable “qt_touch_status” to see if any
sensors are in detect, and the angle or position of any enabled
rotors or sliders
The host application initializes the timer module required for
capacitive measurement
The host application calls qt_init_sensing() to calibrate all the
configured channels and prepare the sensors for capacitive
measurement
qt_measure_sensors()
Is
QTLIB_BURST_A
GAIN=1
No
Yes
Time-critical host
application code
Check if multiple measurements are needed or not:
To resolve calibration
To resolve DI
To resolve positive recalibration
To compensate for drift
Non-Time critical host application code
Part of host application
which cannot wait till multiple
measurements are complete (should
be as minimal as possible)
Host application which can be executed after
the completion of multiple measurements
for all the channels
Figure 5-6: Sequence of operations to add Touch capability36 8207L-AT42-05/12
5.6.6.1.1.1 Channel numbering when routing SNS and SNSK pins to different ports
Figure 5-7 illustrates a sample QTouch capacitive sensing solution which uses four ports (two
port pairs ) on a device for routing the SNS and SNSK lines required.
When SNS and SNSK pins are available on different ports, the channel numbering follows the pin
numbering in the ports selected, when pin configurability is not used.
• The channel numbers follow the pin numbers starting with the LSB (pin 0 is channel 0
and pin 7 is channel 7).
• When a library on corresponding device is configured to use more than two ports for SNS
and SNSK pins, the channel numbers in the second set of SNS/SNSK port pair continue
from the preceding pair as illustrated in Figure 5-7(pin 0 of next port pair is channel 8 and
pin 7 of the next port pair is channel 15).
• Support for more than one pair of SNS and SNSK ports are not available for UC3™
devices.
• SNS pins within a single port and SNSK pins within another single port can only be used
as channels for slider/rotor. Slider/Rotor channels cannot share SNS/SNSK pins on
different ports.
• Since the channel numbers are fixed to the pins of the SNS and SNSK ports, if the
design calls for use of a subset of the pins available in the SNS and SNSK ports, the user
has to skip the channel numbers of the unused SNS and SNSK pins.
o For example, on a 8 channel configuration using a single pair of SNS and SNSK
ports, if pin 2 is not used for touch sensing ( on both SNS and SNSK ports),
channel number 2 is unavailable and care should be taken while configuring the
channels and sensors to avoid using this channel.37
channel 0
channel 1
channel 2
channel 3
channel 4
channel 5
channel 6
channel 7
sensor0
sensor1
sensor2
sensor3
Port A
All SNSK pins
terminated
on this port
Pin 0
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 3
Pin 4
Pin 5
Pin 6
Pin 7
Port B
All SNS pins
terminated
on this port
Pin 0
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 3
Pin 4
Pin 5
Pin 6
Pin 7
channel 0
channel 1
channel 2
channel 3
channel 4
channel 5
channel 6
channel 7
channel 8
channel 9
channel 10
channel 11
channel 12
channel 13
channel 14
channel 15
sensor4
sensor5
sensor6
sensor7
Port C
All SNSK pins
terminated
on this port
Pin 0
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 3
Pin 4
Pin 5
Pin 6
Pin 7
Port D
All SNS pins
terminated
on this port
Pin 0
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 3
Pin 4
Pin 5
Pin 6
Pin 7
channel 8
channel 9
channel 10
channel 11
channel 12
channel 13
channel 14
channel 15
SNS – SNSK
Port Pair one
SNS – SNSK
Port Pair two
Figure 5-7 : channel numbering for QTouch acquisition method when the SNS and SNSK
pins are connected to different ports.
5.6.6.1.1.2 Channel numbering when routing SNS and SNSK pins to different ports with
pin configurability
When SNS and SNSK pins are available on different ports, the channel numbering
follows the pin numbering in the ports selected based on SNS_array and SNSK_array
bits enabled.The pins which needs to be used for touch should be provided in the Pin
Configurator Wizard in QTouch Studio and the pin configurator Wizard tool will generate
the SNS_array and SNSK_array masks and channel numbering will be based on which
pins are enabled for touch in consecutive way.Below is an example to illustrate the same:
Example: 38 8207L-AT42-05/12
SNS and SNSK pins are configured with few rules keeping in mind as illustrated in
section
Pins A0 ,A1,A4 and A6 of PORT A are SNS pins and pins B2,B3,B5,B7 are SNSK pins of
PORT B.
Channel 0 will be forming a SNS-SNSK pair as A0B2.
Channel 1 will be forming a SNS-SNSK pair as A1B3
Channel 2 will be forming a SNS-SNSK pair as A4B5
Channel 3 will be forming a SNS-SNSK pair as A6B7.
The channel numbering is not dependent on the pin numbering.
5.6.6.1.1.3 Channel numbering when routing SNS and SNSK pins to the same port
When SNS and SNSK pins are connected to the same port, the even pin numbers will be used as
SNS pins and the odd pins will be used as the SNSK pins.
• The number of channels supported will be limited 4 channels for an 8-bit device and 16
channels for a 32-bit device (e.g. UC3).
• For e.g., for a 4 channel configuration where the SNS and SNSK pins are connected to
Port B, the port pins 0&1 are used for channel 0.
• The channel number is derived from the position of the pins used for SNS and SNSK
lines for any channel.
channel number = floor( [SNS(or SNSK) pin number] / 2 )
o For e.g., pins 4 and 5 are connected to a SNS/SNSK pair and the channel number
associated with the SNS/SNSK pin is 2.
channel 0
sensor1
sensor2
Port A
All
SNSK
and
SNS pins
terminated
on the same port
Pin 0
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 3
Pin 4
Pin 5
Pin 6
Pin 7
SNSK pin
SNS pin
SNSK pin
SNS pin
SNSK pin
SNS pin
SNSK pin
SNS pin
channel 1
channel 2
channel 3
Figure 5-8 : Channel numbering for QTouch acquisition method when the SNS and SNSK
pins are connected to the same port
5.6.6.1.1.4 Channel numbering when routing SNS and SNSK pins to the same port with
pin configurability
When SNS and SNSK pins are connected to the same port, different pins can be used as SNS
and SNSK pins.But SNS and SNSK pins are configured with few rules keeping in mind as
illustrated in section
Example:
Pins A0 ,A3 and A5 of PORT A are SNS pins and pins A2,A4,A7 are SNSK pins of PORT
A.
Channel 0 will be forming a SNS-SNSK pair as A0A2.39
Channel 1 will be forming a SNS-SNSK pair as A3A4
Channel 2 will be forming a SNS-SNSK pair as A5A7.
The channel numbering is not dependent on the pin numbering.
5.6.6.1.2 Channel numbering when using QMatrix acquisition method
Figure 5-9 illustrates a QMatrix capacitive sensing solution which uses 4 X lines and 4 Y lines
thereby providing a 16 channel solution.
Note:
1. All channels selected for a specific rotor or slider should be on a single Y line.
2. The choice of ports for X and Y lines is left to the user to based on the availability of the
pins available in the particular device selected. Please refer to the section 5.8.2 for more
details configuring of touch sensing pins for QMatrix.
The channel numbering for QMatrix configuration follows a matrix pattern with the channel
numbers starting from 0 for the matrix intersection (X0Y0 ) and increasing along the X lines for a
given Y line ( Channel 1 is X1Y0 ) and then moving on to the row number 0 for the next column.
Table 1 lists the possible channel numbers and the associated X/Y line associations for the
different configurations of QMatrix library variants.
A group of channels form a sensor and the sensor numbering is determined by the order in which
the user defines the association of channels and uses them as a sensor.
The channel numbering is fixed for a specific library variant based on the number of X and Y lines
used whereas the sensor numbering is determined at the time of usage based on the order in
which the user defines the association of the channels to create a sensor.
Ch 0
X0
X3
X2
X1
Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3
QMatrix Channels
QMatrix also supports such rotor/slider configuration.
The channels selected for a Rotor / Slider MUST be on a single YA/YB line.
KEY
ROTOR/SLIDER
Ch 1
Ch 2
Ch 3
Ch 4
Ch 5
Ch 6
Ch 7
Ch 8
Ch 9
Ch 10
Ch 11
Ch 12
Ch 13
Ch 14
Ch 15
Figure 5-9: Channel Numbering for QMatrix acquisition method libraries40 8207L-AT42-05/12
Table 1 : Channel numbers for QMatrix configurations
Line label 4
channel
configur
ation
(4 x 1)
8
channel
configurat
ion
(4 x 2)
16
channel
Configura
tion
(8 x 2)
16
channel
Configura
tion
(4 x 4)
32
channel
configurat
ion
(8 x 4)
56
channel
configurat
ion
(8 x 7)
64
channel
configurat
ion
(8 x 8)
Channel 0 X0Y0 X0Y0 X0Y0 X0Y0 X0Y0 X0Y0 X0Y0
Channel 1 X1Y0 X1Y0 X1Y0 X1Y0 X1Y0 X1Y0 X1Y0
Channel 2 X2Y0 X2Y0 X2Y0 X2Y0 X2Y0 X2Y0 X2Y0
Channel 3 X3Y0 X3Y0 X3Y0 X3Y0 X3Y0 X3Y0 X3Y0
Channel 4 N/A X0Y1 X4Y0 X0Y1 X4Y0 X4Y0 X4Y0
Channel 5 N/A X1Y1 X5Y0 X1Y1 X5Y0 X5Y0 X5Y0
Channel 6 N/A X2Y1 X6Y0 X2Y1 X6Y0 X6Y0 X6Y0
Channel 7 N/A X3Y1 X7Y0 X3Y1 X7Y0 X7Y0 X7Y0
Channel 8 N/A N/A X0Y1 X0Y2 X0Y1 X0Y1 X0Y1
Channel 9 N/A N/A X1Y1 X1Y2 X1Y1 X1Y1 X1Y1
Channel 10 N/A N/A X2Y1 X2Y2 X2Y1 X2Y1 X2Y1
Channel 11 N/A N/A X3Y1 X3Y2 X3Y1 X3Y1 X3Y1
Channel 12 N/A N/A X4Y1 X0Y3 X4Y1 X4Y1 X4Y1
Channel 13 N/A N/A X5Y1 X1Y3 X5Y1 X5Y1 X5Y1
Channel 14 N/A N/A X6Y1 X2Y3 X6Y1 X6Y1 X6Y1
Channel 15 N/A N/A X7Y1 X3Y3 X7Y1 X7Y1 X7Y1
Channel 16 N/A N/A N/A N/A X0Y2 X0Y2 X0Y2
Channel 17 N/A N/A N/A N/A X1Y2 X1Y2 X1Y2
Channel 18 N/A N/A N/A N/A X2Y2 X2Y2 X2Y2
Channel 19 N/A N/A N/A N/A X3Y2 X3Y2 X3Y2
Channel 20 N/A N/A N/A N/A X4Y2 X4Y2 X4Y2
Channel 21 N/A N/A N/A N/A X5Y2 X5Y2 X5Y2
Channel 22 N/A N/A N/A N/A X6Y2 X6Y2 X6Y2
Channel 23 N/A N/A N/A N/A X7Y2 X7Y2 X7Y2
Channel 24 N/A N/A N/A N/A X0Y3 X0Y3 X0Y3
Channel 25 N/A N/A N/A N/A X1Y3 X1Y3 X1Y3
Channel 26 N/A N/A N/A N/A X2Y3 X2Y3 X2Y3
Channel 27 N/A N/A N/A N/A X3Y3 X3Y3 X3Y3
Channel 28 N/A N/A N/A N/A X4Y3 X4Y3 X4Y3
Channel 29 N/A N/A N/A N/A X5Y3 X5Y3 X5Y3
Channel 30 N/A N/A N/A N/A X6Y3 X6Y3 X6Y3
Channel 31 N/A N/A N/A N/A X7Y3 X7Y3 X7Y3
Channel 32 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A X0Y4 X0Y4
Channel 33 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A X1Y4 X1Y4
Channel 34 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A X2Y4 X2Y4
Channel 35 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A X3Y4 X3Y4
Channel 36 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A X4Y4 X4Y4
Channel 37 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A X5Y4 X5Y4
Channel 38 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A X6Y4 X6Y4
Channel 39 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A X7Y4 X7Y4
Channel 40 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A X0Y5 X0Y5
Channel 41 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A X1Y5 X1Y5
Channel 42 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A X2Y5 X2Y5
Channel 43 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A X3Y5 X3Y5
Channel 44 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A X4Y5 X4Y5
Channel 45 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A X5Y5 X5Y5
Channel 46 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A X6Y5 X6Y5
Channel 47 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A X7Y5 X7Y5
Channel 48 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A X0Y6 X0Y6
Channel 49 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A X1Y6 X1Y6
Channel 50 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A X2Y6 X2Y6
Channel 51 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A X3Y6 X3Y641
Channel 52 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A X4Y6 X4Y6
Channel 53 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A X5Y6 X5Y6
Channel 54 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A X6Y6 X6Y6
Channel 55 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A X7Y6 X7Y6
Channel 56 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A X0Y7
Channel 57 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A X1Y7
Channel 58 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A X2Y7
Channel 59 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A X3Y7
Channel 60 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A X4Y7
Channel 61 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A X5Y7
Channel 62 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A X6Y7
Channel 63 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A X7Y7
5.6.6.2 Sensor Numbering
The ordering and numbering of sensors is related to the order in which the sensors are enabled.
This is independent of the acquisition method (QMatrix or QTouch acquisition method libraries).
For example, consider this code snippet:
….
/* enable slider */
qt_enable_slider (CHANNEL_0, CHANNEL_2, AKS_GROUP_1, 16,
HYST_6_25, RES_8_BIT, 0);
/* enable rotor */
qt_enable_rotor (CHANNEL_3, CHANNEL_5, AKS_GROUP_1, 16, HYST_6_25,
RES_8_BIT, 0);
/* enable keys */
qt_enable_key (CHANNEL_6, AKS_GROUP_2, 10, HYST_6_25);
qt_enable_key (CHANNEL_7, AKS_GROUP_2, 10, HYST_6_25);
In the case above, the slider on channels 0 to 2 will be sensor 0, the rotor on channels 3-to-5 is
sensor 1 and the keys on channels 6 and 7 are sensor numbers 3 and 4 respectively.
When the touch status is reported or queried, the corresponding sensor positions and status
indicate the touch status. For example, the slider is in detect if “qt_measure_data.
qt_touch_status.sensor_states” bit position 0 is set. Similarly, the rotor on channels 3 to 5 is
sensor 1, and the keys on channels 6 and 7 are sensors 2 and 3 respectively.
However, the code could be re-arranged as follows to give a different sensor numbering.
/* enable rotor */
qt_enable_rotor (CHANNEL_3, CHANNEL_5, NO_AKS_GROUP, 16,
HYST_6_25, RES_8_BIT, 0);
/* enable keys */
qt_enable_key (CHANNEL_6, AKS_GROUP_2, 10, HYST_6_25);
qt_enable_key (CHANNEL_7, AKS_GROUP_2, 10, HYST_6_25);
/* enable slider */
qt_enable_slider (CHANNEL_0, CHANNEL_2, NO_AKS_GROUP, 16,
HYST_6_25, RES_8_BIT, 0);
Now, the rotor is sensor 0, the keys are sensors 1 and 2, and the slider is sensor 3.42 8207L-AT42-05/12
So, the order in which the user enables the sensors is the order in which the sensors are
numbered. Depending on the user requirements, the sensors can be configured in the preferred
order.
NOTE: In case of QMatrix, the channels on the Unused X lines (or) unused Y lines should be
ignored and not to be used as arguments in this API.
Ex: If the host application needs only 24 channels , there are two possible options.
1. In 32 (8x4 configuration), if X6 and X7 are unused, channel6, channel7,
channel14, channel15, channel 22, channel23, channel30, channel 31
cannot be used
2. In 32 (8x4 configuration), if Y3 is unused, channe24, channel25,
channel26, channel27, channel 28, channel29, channel30, channel 31
cannot be used
5.6.6.3 Filtering Signal Measurements
The ATMEL QTouch Library API provides a function pointer called “qt_filter_callback”. The user
can use this hook to apply filter functions to the measured signal values.
If the pointer is non-NULL, the library calls the function after library has made capacitive channel
measurements, but before the library has processed the channel information and determining the
sensor states.
channel 0
channel 1
channel 2
channel 3
channel 4
channel 5
channel 6
channel 7
QTouch/QMatrix Channel Acquisition Method
optional qt_filter_callback() function
channel_signals[]
modified channel_signals[]
post-processing
modified channel_signals[]
qt_touch_status.sensor_states[]
qt_touch_status_rotor_slider_values[]
Figure 5-10 : Block diagram to represent usage of filter callback function
Example: Averaging the Last Four Signal Values
1. Add a static variable in the main module: 43
/* filter for channel signals */
static uint16_t filter[QT_NUM_CHANNELS][4];
2. Add a filter function prototype to the main module:
/* example signal filtering function */
static void filter_data_mean_4( void );
3. When configuring the ATMEL QTouch library, set the callback function pointer:
/* set callback function */
qt_filter_callback = filter_data_mean_4;
4. Add the filter function:
void filter_data_mean_4( void )
{
uint8_t i;
/*
* Shift previously stored channel signal data.
* Store new channel signal data.
* Set library channel signal data = mean of last 4 values.
*/
for( i = 0u; i < QT_NUM_CHANNELS; i++ )
{
filter[i][0] = filter[i][1];
filter[i][1] = filter[i][2];
filter[i][2] = filter[i][3];
filter[i][3] = qt_measure_data.channel_signals[i];
qt_measure_data.channel_signals[i] = ( ( filter[i][0] +
filter[i][1] +
filter[i][2] +
filter[i][3] ) / 4u );
}
}
The signal values processed by the ATMEL QTouch Library are now the mean of the last four
actual signal values.
5.6.6.4 Allocating unused Port Pins for User Application
The GPIO pins within a port that are not used for QTouch or QMatrix acquisition methods can be
used for user application. The usage of pins for QTouch is based on the channels that are being
configured while enabling the sensors (keys/rotors/sliders).
The example below configuring 4 keys, a rotor and a slider shows how the pin configurability is
achieved by configuring the sensor channels. The code snippet configures a specific 10 channels
of a 16 channel library based on the GPIO port pins available for QTouch™.
Port Configuration:
#define SNSK1 C
#define SNS1 D
#define SNSK2 A
#define SNS2 B
Channel/Pin Configuration:
/* enable a key on channel 0 */
qt_enable_key( CHANNEL_0, AKS_GROUP_2, 10u, HYST_6_25 );44 8207L-AT42-05/12
/* enable a slider on channels 2 to 4 */
qt_enable_slider( CHANNEL_2, CHANNEL_4, AKS_GROUP_1, 16u, HYST_6_25,
RES_8_BIT, 0u );
/* enable a key on channel 6 */
qt_enable_key( CHANNEL_6, AKS_GROUP_2, 10u, HYST_6_25 );
/* enable a key on channel 7 */
qt_enable_key( CHANNEL_7, AKS_GROUP_2, 10u, HYST_6_25 );
/* enable a rotor on channels 12 to14 */
qt_enable_rotor( CHANNEL_12, CHANNEL_14, AKS_GROUP_1, 16u,
HYST_6_25, RES_8_BIT, 0u );
/* enable a key on channel 15 */
qt_enable_key( CHANNEL_15, AKS_GROUP_2, 10u, HYST_6_25 );
The channel numbers 0,2,3,4,6,7 are allocated to pins 0,2,3,4,6,7 of (D,C) port pair respectively.
Pins 1 and 5 of ports C and D can be used for user application. Similarly the channel numbers
12,13,14,15 are allocated to pins 4,5,6,7 of (B,A) port pair respectively. Pins 1, 2, 3 and 4 of ports
B and A are again unused by the QTouch library and can be used for user application.
5.6.6.5 Disabling and Enabling of Pull-up for AVR devices
The Pull-up circuit available (in AVR devices) for each GPIO pin has to be disabled before
QTouch acquisition is performed. For tinyAVR and megaAVR devices the Pull-up circuit for all
GPIO port pins are enabled and disabled together. When user needs to configure the pins that
are not used by QTouch library for his application, he may enable the Pull-up circuit after QTouch
measurements are performed and disable them before the touch acquisition starts once again (as
shown in the code snippet below).
/* Disable pull-ups for all pins */
MCUCR |= (1u << PUD); //MCUCR_PUD = 1u;
/* perform QTouch measurements */
qt_measure_sensors ( current_time_ms_touch );
/* Enable pull-ups for all pins */
MCUCR &= ~ (1u << PUD); //MCUCR_PUD = 0u;
For XMEGA devices the Pull-up circuit for each individual GPIO port pins can be configured
individually, by writing to the PINnCTRL register of the ports being used.
5.6.7 Constraints
5.6.7.1 QTouch acquisition method constraints
QTouch acquisition method libraries are available for different port combinations.
Some of the key constraints while configuring the sensors are
• Rotors/sliders have to be connected on three adjacent channels. (e.g. (1,2,3) or (3,4,5)
…) within the same port. Possible combinations are (0,1,2), (1,2,3) for a configuration
which supports 4 channels. Possible combinations (0,1,2), (1,2,3), (2,3,4), (3,4,5), (4,5,6),
(5,6,7) for a configuration which supports 8 channels. 45
• If two port pairs are used for the design, all the channels for a sensor have to be
connected on a single port pair. Combining channels from multiple ports is not possible
when designing sensors. e.g. It is not possible to have a rotor with channel numbers (
7,8,9 ) on a 16 channel library variant which uses two port-pairs.
Note: The above constraints are explained with respect to 8bit AVR. The same could be extended
to 32bit AVR and ATSAM for 32 channel libraries where each port has 32 pins.
5.6.7.2 QMatrix acquisition method constraints
QMatrix acquisition method libraries are available for a set of AVRs The library variants can be
configured to have port and pin assignments for X, Ya, Yb and SMP. Please refer to section 5.8.2
for port-pin configurability.
Some of the key constraints are
• The QMatrix acquisition method libraries internally use TIMER1 for the operation,
TIMER1 will not be available for critical sections of the code where the library is called.
But resources are available to the host application when the normal user’s application is
running.
• In case of XMEGA™ devices, the resources are used internal to the library and hence
cannot be used by the host application
o Timer/Counter 1 on PORTC (TCC1)
o Analog Comparator on PORTA (ACA)
o Event System Channel0 (EVSYS_CH0)
• The sensor channel number and the relation with X and Y lines strictly follows from the
table provided in the section Table 1.
• A rotor /slider sensor can be configured with 3 to 8 channels per rotor or slider depending
on the requirement of the application subject to the total number of channels available in
the library variant selected as listed below.
Number of
channels
X x Y Maximum Channels per ROTOR_SLIDER
4 4 x 1 4
8 4 x 2 4
16 4 x 4 4
16 8 x 2 8
32 8 x 4 8
56 8 x 7 8
64 8 x 8 8
• For example, 16 channel libraries with 4X and 4Y lines supports maximum of 4 channels
per Rotor/Slider. But, a 16 channel with 8X and 2Y lines supports maximum of 8
channels per Rotor/Slider.
• If the lines of the Drive and Receive electrode (X lines or the Y lines) share the same
lines with the JTAG, JTAG needs to be disabled. Please check the data sheet to ensure
that there are no conflicts between the X/Y lines and JTAG lines used for the device.
• YB line for a particular device cannot be changed and it has to be the configured to be
the ADC port of the selected device.
• The AIN0 pin of the device needs to be connected to the GND.
• In case of XMEGA devices, the reference pin for input to analog comparator is Pin7 of
PORTA with all the combinations of libraries supported. Hence, this needs to be
connected to GND
• Proper grounding should be taken care when the controller board and touch sensing
board are different.46 8207L-AT42-05/12
• The channels used for an individual rotor or slider should all be on the same Y line.
• The maximum number of Rotors / Sliders supported by the QMatrix acquisition method
depends on the configuration. Refer to the Library_Selection_Guide.xls for details.
• Vcc should be kept at 4.5V or lower for reliable operation
5.6.7.3 Design Guidelines for QMatrix acquisition method systems
AVR Microcontrollers can use a number of clock sources, ranging from high precision external
crystals to less accurate resonators down to simple external RC circuits. Most AVR devices also
come with integrated RC oscillators. This provides a system clock source without additional cost
or board space. When using internal RC oscillators some considerations need to be taken. The
accuracy i.e. frequency of CMOS RC oscillators will vary slightly from device to device due to
process variance.
QMatrix acquisition method uses an internal timer to measure the discharge time of a capacitor,
and any frequency variation or fluctuation in the RC Oscillator will thus show up as a variance in
the measurement data. The application should for this reason be designed and tuned to allow for
such variance in the internal RC oscillator frequency. For most AVR microcontrollers, the rated
accuracy of the internal RC oscillator is 2%, and to have some headroom and guarantee a robust
and stable system, the designer should aim to follow these design rules:
Reference Value should be in the 150-300 range
Typical delta when touched should be at least 10% of the Reference Value
Recommended threshold should be at least 5% of the reference value and at least 50%
of the typical delta (Higher value gives better robustness)
Hysteresis should be as high as possible in noisy systems (50%)
DI should be set to at least 4
If the design of the system does not comply with the rules above, special attention should be
taken when testing it to make sure that the design meets the desired performance. In systems
with big signal values and small deltas (i.e. less than 10%) it is recommended to either change
component values to conform to the 10% delta rule, or change to a higher precision clock source.
QTouch Studio is the preferred tool when checking and validating any QTouch Designs.
5.6.8 Frequency of operation (Vs) Charge cycle/dwell cycle times:
The library needs different charge / dwell cycles based on the operation and design. The
charge/dwell cycles are determined by the QT_DELAY_CYCLES parameter defined by the user.
The recommended range of charge/dwell cycle times that the user must select based on the
operating clock frequency of the Microcontroller is provided in the table below.
Fine tuning of the QT_DELAY_CYCLES to match the sensor design may be done by monitoring
the reference levels, and finding the charge/dwell time where the reference level has reached
>99% of maximum reference value seen. For QTouch acquisition method, the reference value will
decrease as the QT_DELAY_CYCLES is increased. For QMatrix acquisition method, the
reference value will increase with increase in QT_DELAY_CYCLES. If the cycle time is not
optimum, the design may experience temperature sensitivity.
Possible values:
The following table lists the possible values of QT_DELAY_CYCLES for both QTouch and
QMatrix acquisition method libraries.
Acquisition method Possible values47
QTouch Any value from 1- 255 for 8bit AVR
3,4,5,10,25,50 for UC3 and ATSAM
libraries
QMatrix 1,2,3,4,5,10,25,50
Example:
When operating at 4 MHz, 1~10 cycle charge times are recommended (0.125us to 1.25us).
Table 2 : Frequency of operation
Frequency of
Microcontroller
(MHz))
microcontroller Cycle time
(us)
Suitable Charge Cycle times (or)
Suitable Dwell Cycle times
(us)
1 1 1 to 2 cycles (1us to 2us)
2 0.5 1 to 5 cycles (0.5us to 2.5us)
4 0.25 1 to 10 cycles (0.25us to 2.5us)
8 0.125 1 to 10 cycles (0.125us to 1.25us)
10 0.1 2 to 25 cycles (0.2us to 2.5us)
16 0.0625 2 to 25 cycles (0.125us to 1.5625us)
20 0.05 3 to 50 cycles (0.15us to 2.5us)
48 0.02083 5~50 cycles (0.104us to 1.04us)
>48 <0.02083 5 to < 50 (up to 255 cycles for 8bit AVR)
Note:
• For UC3 and ATSAM devices, 1 & 2 charge cycle delay times are not supported.
If the microcontroller is only used for Touch detection then running at the lowest frequency
possible for the desired touch response may provide the best power and EMC performance. If it
is also used for other functions then running at a higher frequency may be necessary. In some
power critical applications it may be worth switching the frequency on the fly, such as lowering the
frequency during touch detect API instead of using long cycle times, and then switching to a
higher frequency for non-touch code. It is necessary to carefully design timer operation when
change frequencies.
5.6.9 Interrupts
This section illustrates the usage of interrupts during qt_measure_sensors call.
The library disables interrupts for time-critical periods during touch sensing. These periods are
generally only a few cycles long, and so host application interrupts should remain responsive
during touch sensing. However, any interrupt service routines (ISRs) during touch sensing should
be as short as possible to avoid affecting the touch measurements or the application
responsiveness.
Interrupts are disabled once for each signal count/burst pulse and this is typically 65 instruction
cycles when Delay cycles (QT_DELAY_CYCLE=1).
The number of times interrupts are disabled during one measurement will depend on signal count
of a channel as well as the number of channels and port configuration like interport (SNS and
SNSK on different port)/intraport (SNS and SNSK on same port).
Example:
4 channel intraport case:
Channel0 is formed by PA0 and PA1 pin with signal count 300.
Channel1 is formed by PA2 and PA3 pin with signal count 200.
Channel2 is formed by PA4 and PA5 pin with signal count 25048 8207L-AT42-05/12
Channel3 is formed by PA6 and PA7 pin with signal count 150
In the above case, the no of times interrupts disabled will be 300 (maximum signal count) as all
four channels burst together in case of intraport.
4 channel interport case:
Channel0 is formed by PA0 and PB0 pin with signal count 300.
Channel1 is formed by PA1 and PB1 pin with signal count 200.
Channel2 is formed by PA2 and PB2 pin with signal count 250
Channel3 is formed by PA3 and PB3 pin with signal count 150
In the above case, as bursting happens in odd and even pairs, so maximum signal counts in case
of both even and odd channels will be taken. Maximum signal count out of even channels
channel0 and channel2 is 300 and maximum signal count out of odd channels channel1 and
channel3 is 250.So total number of times interrupts disabled will be (300 + 250 = 550).
The recommended maximum ISR execution time is 1msec.If ISR time exceeds 1 ms then it may
result in charge leakage which will further lead to rise in signal value. Noise observed in the signal
value will increase. The 1msec ISR limit applies to the total time spent in an ISR during one
acquisition period, and applies only to QTouch and QMatrix. One acquisition period is the time to
complete one burst sequence. This will be the time required to do the 300 pulses situation in the
first example above. In the second example above the 1msec limitation applies to the 300 and
then the 250 pulses; 1msec of total ISR can occur during the 300 and another 1msec ISR can
occur during the 250. This is all about self discharge happening while doing a burst. In the
example below it would be perfectly OK to have a 1msec ISR happening every 5 msec.
If the ISR load is constant and synced with the acquisition (meaning the ISR takes a constant
amount of time and executes in the same amount of time during each burst sequence), the signal
will not suffer at all since the self discharge will be the same every time the acquisition is run. If
there is a strong variation in the total ISR execution time during acquisition this will appear as
noise in the signal due to the variable self discharge of the sample cap.
The time to execute one measurement will depend on various parameters like sampling
capacitor, operating voltage, and different software parameters like QT_DELAY_CYCLES, CPU
frequency.
For single button with below parameters
Sampling Capacitor = 10 nf
CPU Freq= 4 MHZ
VCC= 5V
QT_DELAY_CYCLES=1
Qtouch takes around 2.6 msec for one channel.
Please note that none of the API functions should be called from a user interrupt.
5.6.10 Integrating QTouch libraries in your application
This section illustrates the key steps required in integrating the QTouch library in your application.
5.6.10.1 Directory structure of the library files
The QTouch library directory structure is as listed below
What Where Comments
Root
installation
Default directory is
C:\Program
Files\Atmel\Atmel_QTouch_Libraries_5.x\Generic_QTouch_Libraries
This is the default
directory path but the user
can install the directory in
desired location.
Header file ..\include touch_api.h is located in
this 49
directory.touch_api_2kdev
ic.h for 2K devices support
is also added in this
directory
Configurati
on and
assembler
routines
for
acquisition
QTouch acquisition
method libraries
8-bit
devices
..\Atmel_QTouch_Libraries_5.x\
Generic_QTouch_Libraries
\AVR_Tiny_Mega_XMega\QTouch\co
mmon_files
qt_asm_avr.h
qt_asm_tiny_mega.S
qt_asm_xmega.S
qt_asm_avr_config_2kdev
ice.h
qt_asm_tiny_mega_2kdev
ice.S
UC3 Not needed for UC3 devices
ATSAM Not needed for ATSAM devices
QMatrix acquisition
method libraries
8-bit
devices
..\Atmel_QTouch_Libraries_5.x\
Generic_QTouch_Libraries
\AVR_Tiny_Mega_XMega\QMatrix\co
mmon_files
qm_asm_avr.h
qm_asm_tiny_mega.S
qm_asm_m8535_m16.S
qm_asm_xmega.S
qm_asm_tiny_mega_m64
_v3g4_avr51g1.S
UC3 ..\Atmel_QTouch_Libraries_5.x\
Generic_QTouch_Libraries\32bit_AV
R\UC3\QMatrix\common_files
touch_config.h
touch_qm_config32_asse
mbler.h
qm_asm_uc3c_gcc.x
qm_asm_uc3c_iar.s82
Library
files
QTouch acquisition
method libraries
8-bit
devices ..\Atmel_QTouch_Libraries_5.x\
Generic_QTouch_Libraries
\AVR_Tiny_Mega_XMega\QTouch\lib
rary_files
All libraries ( .r90 for IAR
and .a for GCC) for the
supported 8 bit devices
are in this location.
Also r82 libraries for AVR
32 bit devices are also
here
UC3 ..\Atmel_QTouch_Libraries_5.x\
Generic_QTouch_Libraries
\32bit_AVR\UC3\QTouch\library_files
ATSAM ..\Atmel_QTouch_Libraries_5.x\
Generic_QTouch_Libraries
\AT91SAM\SAM3\QTouch\library_file
s
..\Atmel_QTouch_Libraries_5.x\
Generic_QTouch_Libraries
\AT91SAM\SAM4\QTouch\library_file
s
QMatrix acquisition
method libraries
8-bit
devices ..\Atmel_QTouch_Libraries_5.x\
Generic_QTouch_Libraries
\AVR_Tiny_Mega_XMega\QMatrix\lib
rary_files
UC3 ..\Atmel_QTouch_Libraries_5.x\
Generic_QTouch_Libraries\32bit_AV
R\UC3\QMatrix\library_files
Example
Projects
QTouch acquisition
method libraries
8-bit
devices ..\Atmel_QTouch_Libraries_5.x\
Generic_QTouch_Libraries
\AVR_Tiny_Mega_XMega\QTouch\ex
ample_projects
All example projects using
the libraries above (IAR
and GCC) for the
supported devices are in 50 8207L-AT42-05/12
UC3 ..\Atmel_QTouch_Libraries_5.x\
Generic_QTouch_Libraries
\32bit_AVR\UC3\QTouch\example_pr
ojects
this location
ATSAM ..\Atmel_QTouch_Libraries_5.x\
Generic_QTouch_Libraries\AT91SA
M\SAM3\QTouch\example_projects
..\Atmel_QTouch_Libraries_5.x\
Generic_QTouch_Libraries\AT91SA
M\SAM4\QTouch\example_projects\S
AM4S_XPLAINED_DEMO_APPLICA
TION1
QMatrix acquisition
method libraries
8-bit
devices ..\Atmel_QTouch_Libraries_5.x\
Generic_QTouch_Libraries
\AVR_Tiny_Mega_XMega\QMatrix\ex
ample_projects
UC3 ..\Atmel_QTouch_Libraries_5.x\
Generic_QTouch_Libraries\32bit_AV
R\UC3\QMatrix\example_projects
5.6.10.2 Integrating QTouch acquisition method libraries in your application
The following steps illustrate how to add QTouch acquisition method support in your application.
1) QTouch acquisition method library variants are offered for IAR and AVR Studio/GCC tool
chains. First step is to select the compiler tool chain to be used based on the code and
data memory requirements. The list of supported compiler tool chains can be found in
5.7.1.2.
Use the library selection guide (C:\ Program Files\Atmel\Atmel_QTouch_Libaries_5.x\
Library_Selection_Guide.xls) to select the QTouch acquisition method library variant
required for the device.
a. There are specific library variants distributed for each microcontroller. You would
need the following parameters to identify the right library variant to be used in
your application
i. The microcontroller to be used for the application.
ii. The acquisition method to be used for the application.
iii. The number of channels you need for the application.
iv. Whether Rotor and/or Slider support required in the application.
v. The number of rotors and/or slider needed for the application.
b. There are specific variants of the library which is pre-built with a specific
configuration set supported. Use the library selection guide (C:\ Program
Files\Atmel\ Atmel_QTouch_Libaries_5.x\Library_Selection_Guide.xls) to find the
sample project using the QTouch acquisition method library variant.
2) Define the constants and symbol names required
a. The next step is to define certain constants and symbols required in the host
application files where the touch API is going to be used.
b. The constant/symbol names are as listed in the table below.
c. The constant/symbol definitions can be placed in the touch_config.h file. The
user may modify these defined values based on the requirements.
Table 3 : Constant and symbol name definitions required to use the QTouch acquisition
method libraries
Symbol / Constant name Range of values Comments
_QTOUCH_ This macro has to be defined in
order to use QTouch libraries.51
SNS1 & SNSK1 Refer to library selection guide. To be used if only single
port pair is needed for the
design.
SNS1 – SNSK1
&
SNS2 – SNSK2
Refer to library selection guide. To be used if two port pairs
are needed for the design.
_SNS1_SNSK1_SAME_PORT_ Comment/uncomment define To be enabled if the same
port is used for SNSK1 and
SNS1 pins for QTouch. If
SNSK1 and SNS1 pins are
on different ports then this
definition is not required.
_SNS2_SNSK2_SAME_PORT_ Comment/uncomment define To be enabled if the same
port is used for SNSK2 and
SNS2 pins for QTouch. If
SNSK1 and SNS1 pins are
on different ports then this
definition is not required.
QT_NUM_CHANNELS 4, 8, 12, 16 for tinyAVR,
megaAVR and XMEGA device
libraries and 8, 16, 32 for UC3
device libraries.
_ROTOR_SLIDER_ Rotor / slider can be added to
the design, if this macro is
enabled.
A library with rotor / slider
functionality already
available needs to be
selected if this macro is to
be enabled.
QT_DELAY_CYCLES 1 to 255 Please refer to section
5.6.8.
_POWER_OPTIMIZATION_
(Required only for ATtiny and ATmega
libraries. ATxmega and UC3 libraries by
default optimized for power without any
limitations)
0 or 1 Used to reduce the power
consumed by the library.
When power optimization is
enabled the unused pins,
within a port used for
QTouch, may not be usable
for interrupt driven
applications. Spread
spectrum noise reduction is
also disabled when power
optimization is enabled.
_TOUCH_ARM_ To be defined when using
ATSAM libraries
For ATSAM libraries only.
QTOUCH_STUDIO_MASKS This macro needs to be defined
if QTouch Studio Pin
Configurator Wizard.is used to
generate the SNS and SNSK
masks.
Please refer to section 5.8.1
_STATIC_PORT_PIN_CONF_ This macro needs to be defined
only in case of 4 and 8 channel
libraries with interport
configuration and pin
configurability.
Please refer to section 5.8.1
4) Using QTouch API’s in your application to add touch functionality52 8207L-AT42-05/12
a. The clock, host application and other peripherals needed by the host application
needs to be initialized.
b. In your application, create, initialize and configure the sensors.
i. The APIs of interest are qt_enable_key/rotor/slider().see sections 5.6.5.2,
5.6.5.3 and 5.6.5.4.
c. The channel configuration parameters need to be set by calling the
qt_set_parameters() ( see section 5.6.5.1.
d. Once the sensors are configured, qt_init_sensing() has to be called to trigger the
initialization of the sensors with the configuration defined in steps above.
d. Provide timing for the QTouch libraries to operate. i,e the QTouch libraries do not
use any timer resources of the microcontroller. The Host application has to
provide the required timing and also call the API’s at the appropriate intervals to
perform touch sense detect operations.
NOTE: The ATSAM example applications provided with the libraries illustrate the
usage for the evaluation kits supported by the library. Please refer to the main.c files
for reference.
5) Adding the necessary source files
The following files are to be added along with the touch library and user application
before compilation:
• ATtiny, ATmega devices - touch_api.h, qt_asm_avr.h, touch_config.h and
qt_asm_tiny_mega.S
• ATxmega devices - touch_api.h, qt_asm_avr.h, touch_config.h and
qt_asm_xmega.S
• UC3 devices – touch_api.h
• ATSAM devices - touch_api.h and touch_qt_config.h
6) General application notes
• The clock, host application and other peripherals needed by the host application
needs to be initialized.
• Ensure that there are no conflicts between the resources used by the touch
library and the host application.
• Ensure that the stack size for your application is adjusted to factor in the stack
depth required for the operation of the touch libraries.
5.6.10.2.1 Example for 8bit AVR
The example below will explain in detail the steps to follow for library selection.
Criteria Selection Notes
Microcontroller ATMega1280
IDE and compiler tool chain
used AVR STUDIO® IDE
and GNU compiler
The GCC compiled variant of the libraries for the
device selected needs to be used.
Number of Keys required
for the application
3 Each key requires 1 QTouch acquisition channel
Rotors and sliders required Yes
Number of Rotors and
Sliders required
3 Each rotor / slider will require 3 channels.
Number of Channels
required for the application
( should be the sum of all
channels required for all the
keys ,rotors and sliders
used in the design )
12 3 Keys + ( 3 rotors x 3 channels per rotor/slider )
12 channels
Charge cycle time required
for the design
1 cycle Assuming the device is configured with a clock
frequency of 4Mhz
Number of ports needed 3 ports This is determined based on the number of
channels required and the routing required for the
channels SNS and SNSK pins to the ports
For this design, 24 pins are required and we need 53
3 ports to support the sensors.
Choice of ports available
for the design
SNS/
SNSK
Pair1
ports
SNS1 Port
: A
The choice of ports for the port pairs is limited and
can be found in the section 5.7.1.5
SNSK1 Port
: A
SNS/
SNSK
Pair 2
ports
SNS2 Port
: B
SNSK2 Port
: C
Is there a need for reduced
power consumption (and
reduced execution time)?
_POWER_
OPTIMIZATION_ = 1
Enabling _POWER_OPTIMIZATION_ will lead to
a 40% reduction in power consumed by the
library, but at the expense of reduced external
noise immunity. When power optimization is
enabled, the unused pins within a port used for
QTouch, may not be usable for interrupt driven
applications. This option is available only for
ATtiny and ATmega devices.
SNS1 and SNSK1 pins use
the same port.
_SNS1_SNSK1_SAME
_PORT_
The _SNS1_SNSK1_SAME_PORT_ symbol
needs to be defined as port A is used for both
SNS1 and SNSK1 pins.
Given the above requirements for the applications, the first step is to select the right library
variant required.
Step 1: Selecting the right library variant
Referring to the library selection guide, we see that there are a few variants of libraries supported
for ATmega1280. Since the application requires 12 channels and rotor slider support, one has to
select a library variant which supports at least 12 channels or more along with 3 Rotors/Sliders.
Hence we select the 12 channel library variant for GCC complier which supports the required
number of sensors/channels. This works out to be libavr51g1_12qt_k_3rs.a
Step 2: Defining the constants / symbols in the project space
In the host application file (say main.c), define the following constants and symbols
#define QTOUCH_
#define QT_NUM_CHANNELS 12
#define SNSK1 A
#define SNS1 A
#define SNSK2 B
#define SNS2 C
#define QT_DELAY_CYCLES 1
#define _POWER_OPTIMIZATION_ 1
#define _SNS1_SNSK1_SAME_PORT_
NOTE: The above definitions are available in touch_config.h file. Alternatively, you can
define these in your IDE’s project options or have them defined in a separate header file.
Step 3: Usage of library API’s
Now, you can use the touch API’s to create, initialize and perform touch sensing. Please refer to
the sample applications in section 5.6.11.2 for reference. These sample applications illustrate the
usage of the API’s and the sequence of operation.
Step 4: Adding necessary source files for compilation54 8207L-AT42-05/12
The source files needed for compiling your application along with the touch library are
touch_api.h, touch_config.h and qt_asm_tiny_mega.S.
5.6.10.2.2 Example for ATSAM
The example below will explain in detail the steps to follow for library selection.
Criteria Selection Notes
Microcontroller AT91SAM3S
IDE and compiler tool chain used IAR Workbench and GNU compiler The GCC compiled
variant of the libraries for
the device selected needs
to be used.
Number of Keys required for the
application
3 Each key requires 1
QTouch acquisition
channel
Rotors and sliders required Yes
Number of Rotors and Sliders required 3 Each rotor / slider will
require 3 channels.
Number of Channels required for the
application ( should be the sum of all
channels required for all the keys ,rotors
and sliders used in the design )
12 3 Keys + ( 3 rotors x 3
channels per rotor/slider )
12 channels
Charge cycle time required for the design 5 cycles Assuming the device is
configured with a clock
frequency of 48Mhz
Number of SNS/SNSK port pairs needed 2 pairs This is determined based
on the free PIO of the
board
Choice of ports available for the design SNS/SNSK
Pair1 port
SNS1 Port: A The choice of ports for
the port pairs is limited
and can be found in the
section 5.7.1.5 SNSK1 Port: A
SNS/SNSK
Pair 2 port
SNS2 Port: B
SNSK2 Port: B
Given the above requirements for the applications, the first step is to select the right library
variant required.
Step 1: Selecting the right library variant
Referring to the library selection guide, we see that there are a few variants of libraries supported
for AT91SAM3S. One library is for IAR and the other is for GNU. If we want to use IAR
Workbench, we use the library name: libsam3s-32qt-k-8rs-iar.a.
Step 2: Defining the constants / symbols in the project space
In IAR, change preprocessor options by adding the good defines:
_TOUCH_ARM_
_QTOUCH_
SNS1=B
SNSK1=B
SNS2=A
SNSK2=A
QT_NUM_CHANNELS=32
_ROTOR_SLIDER_
QT_DELAY_CYCLES=1055
_SNS1_SNSK1_SAME_PORT_
_SNS2_SNSK2_SAME_PORT_
Step3: Usage of library API’s
Now, you can use the touch API’s to create, initialize and perform touch sensing.
5.6.10.2.3 Checklist of items for integrating QTouch acquisition method libraries
The following is a checklist of items which needs to be ensured when integrating QTouch
acquisition method libraries
The clock prescaler register (e.g. CLKPR, XDIV) needs to be configured correctly based
on the device selected. Some devices have clock frequency selection based on fuses. It
has to be ensured the fuses are set correctly in such cases.
It is recommended to disable PULL-UP resistor on all port pins used for touch sensing on
the device selected (e.g. PUD bit in MCUCR, SFIOR for a few of the tinyAVR and
megaAVR devices Please refer to the Data sheet of the selected device).
The 16 bit timer in each device has been used for performing touch measurements
periodically. The datasheet for all the devices have to be checked to ensure that the
correct timer peripheral and its registers are used (file: main.c).
The interrupt vector macro may also change from device to device and this needs to be
verified in the datasheet for the device used.
Check if the timer is configured correctly to support the measurement period needed (e.g.
25msec or 50 msec).
The sample applications for the evaluation kits and supported devices illustrate the
proper initialization sequence and usage of the timer resources (file: main.c). Please use
this as a reference for your application design.
The host application must provide the current time to the library. This information is passed to the
library as an argument to the function qt_measure_sensors()”. This is used for time-based library
operations such as drift compensation.
5.6.10.3 Integrating QMatrix acquisition method libraries in your application
5.6.10.3.1 Example for 8bit AVR
Based on the application design needs, the user needs to select the right library variant and the
configuration to be used along with the variant. This section illustrates the steps required to select
the right QMatrix acquisition method library variant and configuration for your application. QMatrix
acquisition method library Variants are offered for IAR and AVR-GCC tool chains. First step is to
select the compiler tool chain for which the libraries are required. The list of supported compiler
tool chains can be found in section 5.7.2.2
There are specific library variants distributed for each microcontroller. For your design, you would
need the following information to select the correct library variant
a. Device to be used for the design
b. The number of touch sensing channels needed by the application – Then identify the
Maximum number of channels required for the design that are supported by the library.
c. Number of X lines to be used in the design
a. The ports on which your design permits to have the X lines
b. The X lines can be spread on a maximum of three ports, the more ports used the
more is the code memory requirement by the library.
d. Number of Y lines to be used in the design
a. The port-pins ports on which your design permits to have the Y lines56 8207L-AT42-05/12
e. Do you need support for Rotors and/or Sliders in your design
a. If yes, how many rotors/sliders would be needed?
b. Based on a) above, identify the maximum number of rotors sliders that the library
supports
f. Which compiler platform you intend to use to integrate the libraries – IAR or AVR -GCC
Follow the steps listed below to arrive at the right library variant
1) Select the device from the list of supported devices listed in 5.7.2.4.1
2) Select the right library variant for the device selected from the selection guide available
in
C:\ Program Files\Atmel\Atmel_QTouch_Libaries_5.x\Library_Selection_Guide.xls
Each variant supports
a. a specific number of channels,
b. Supports a specific configuration of X x Y matrix pins ( eg 4 x 2 for 4 - X pins & 2
- Y pins )
c. has support for Rotor / Slider ( either supported or not )
d. support is available for IAR and/or GCC compiler tool chain
e. support for specific number of rotors sliders.
3) Define the constants and symbol names required
a. The next step is to define certain constants and symbols required in the host
application files where the touch API is going to be used. These values are
derived from the parameters defined in step 2 for your application
b. The constant/symbol names are as listed in the table below
c. The constant/symbol definitions can be placed in any of the following
i. In the user’s ‘C’ file prior to include touch_api.h in the file
ii. Modifying the defines in a touch_config.h available in the project folder57
Table 4 :List of configurable parameters for touch library usage.
Symbol / Constant
name
Range of values Comments
_QMATRIX_ Symbol defined to indicate
QMatrix acquisition method is
required
Define this symbol to indicate QMatrix
acquisition method is required
QT_NUM_CHANNELS The number of channels the
library supports.( Possible
values:4,8,16,32,56,64).
Note: 56 channel for only
ATxmega Devices.
Value should be same as the number of
channels that the library supports
NUM_X_LINES The number of X lines the
library supports.( Possible
values:4,8)
Value should be same as the number of X
lines that the library supports. Refer to
library selection guide
NUM_Y_LINES The number of Y lines the
library supports.( Possible
values:1,2,4,7,8)
Note: 7 Y-lines for only
ATxmega Devices)
Value should be same as the number of Y
lines that the library supports. Refer to
library selection guide
_ROTOR_SLIDER_ Symbol defined if Rotor and/or
slider is required
Needs to be added in case user needs to
configure ROTOR/SLIDER
Needs to be removed for ALL KEYS
configuration
QT_MAX_NUM_ROTO
RS_SLIDERS
Maximum number of
rotors/sliders the library
supports( possible
values:0,2,4,8)
Subject to support for rotors/sliders in the
library selected.
QT_DELAY_CYCLES Possible values
:1,2,3,4,5,10,25,50
Please refer to section 5.6.8
NUM_X_PORTS Number of ports on which the
X lines needs to be spread.
(Possible values 1,2,3)
Maximum number of ports that the X lines
can spread is 3.
Note: Code memory required increases
with the increase in NUM_X_PORTS
PORT_X_1 First IO port for configuring the
X lines.Any IO port available
with the device.
Drive electrode for touch sensing using
QMatrix acquisition
Valid when NUM_X_PORTS =1,2,3
PORT_NUM_1 1 Please donot edit this macro
Valid when NUM_X_PORTS =1,2,3
PORT_X_2 Second IO port for configuring
the X lines. Any IO port
available with the device.
Drive electrode for touch sensing using
QMatrix acquisition
Valid when NUM_X_PORTS =2,3
PORT_NUM_2 2 Please donot edit this macro
Valid when NUM_X_PORTS =2,3
PORT_X_3 Third IO port for configuring
the X lines. Any IO port
available with the device.
Drive electrode for touch sensing using
QMatrix acquisition
Valid when NUM_X_PORTS =3
PORT_NUM_3 3 Please donot edit this macro
Valid when NUM_X_PORTS =3
PORT_YA Any IO port available with the
device.
Receive electrode for touch sensing using
QMatrix acquisition
PORT_YB ADC port available for the
device.
Receive electrode for touch sensing using
QMatrix acquisition
PORT_SMP Any IO port available with the
device.
Port of the Sampling pin for touch sensing
using QMatrix acquisition
SMP_PIN Any IO port available with the
device.
Sampling pin for touch sensing using
QMatrix acquisition
_ATXMEGA_ Symbol defined if an ATxmega
Device is used for QMatrix
sensing technology
Needs to be added if the device to be
supported is ATxmegaxxxx58 8207L-AT42-05/12
SHARED_YAYB Possible values:
0 or 1.
#define SHARED_YAYB 1 in case YA and
YB are on same port else 0.
Once you have selected the right library variant and configuration parameters for the application,
follow the steps outlined below to integrate the library variant in your application.
4) Fill in the arrays x_line_info_t x_line_info[NUM_X_LINES] y_line_info_t
ya_line_info[NUM_Y_LINES] and y_line_info_t yb_line_info[NUM_Y_LINES] using the
pin configuration wizard provided by the QTouch Studio.
5) Copy the library variant that was selected in step one to your project’s working directory
or update your project to point to the library selected.
Include the “touch_api.h” header file and assembler source file from the QTouch library in
your application. The touch_api.h can be found in the release package at C:\Program
Files\Atmel\Atmel_QTouch_Libraries_5.x\ Generic_QTouch_Libraries
\AVR_Tiny_Mega_XMega\QMatrix\common_files. The assembler files mentioned below
could be found at the location C:\Program Files\Atmel\Atmel_QTouch_Libraries_5.x\
Generic_QTouch_Libraries \AVR_Tiny_Mega_XMega\QMatrix\common_ files
a. qm_asm_tiny_mega.S in case of ATtiny and ATmega devices.
b. qm_asm_xmega.S in case of ATxmega devices.
c. qm_asm_m8535_m16.S in case of ATmega8535 and ATmega16 devices.
6) Initialize/create and use the touch api’s in your application
a. In your application, create, initialize and configure the sensors.
a. The APIs of interest are qt_enable_key/rotor/slider().see sections 5.6.5.2,
5.6.5.3 and 5.6.5.4
b. configure the global configuration parameters valid for all the sensors in the
library
c. Provide timing for the QTouch libraries to operate. i,e. the QTouch libraries do
not use any timer resources of the microcontroller. The Host application has to
provide the required timing and also call the API’s at the appropriate intervals to
perform touch sense detect operations
7) General application notes
a. The clock, host application and other peripherals needed by the host application
needs to be initialized.
b. The QMatrix acquisition method libraries internally use TIMER1 for their
operation.
c. Ensure that there are no conflicts between the resources used by the touch
library and the host application
d. Ensure that the stack size is adjusted to factor in the stack depth required for the
operation of the touch libraries.
5.6.10.3.1.1 Example
The example below will explain in detail the steps to follow for library selection.
Criteria Selection Notes
Microcontroller ATTiny88 List of supported devices can be
found at
Library_Selection_Guide.xls
Number of
channels required
for the application
6 number channels available for a
Tiny88 is listed in
Library_Selection_Guide.xls
Number of X lines Based on the number of channels, Since 3 X- lines (6 channels ) are 59
needed since 8 channels is needed, 4 X lines
are supported.
NUM_X_LINES is 4
used, Do not initialize 4th element
in x_line_info[NUM_X_LINES].
Hence channel6, channel7 need
not be used.
Number of Y lines
needed
Based on the number of channels,
since 8 channels is needed, 2 Y lines
are supported
NUM_Y_LINES is 2.
Rotors and sliders
required and
Number of
ROTOR/SLIDERS
Yes
2
Library variants supported for
ATTiny88 is listed in the
Library_Selection_Guide.xls
X_LINES on pins
as below(4-X lines)
X0- B0, X1- D2,X3
– B7, X4 – B5
FILL_OUT_X_LINE_INFO(1,0),
FILL_OUT_X_LINE_INFO(2,2),
FILL_OUT_X_LINE_INFO(1,7),
Main file has to be edited based
on the configuration. Refer to
section 5.8.2.1 . Refer channel
numbering from the
section5.6.6.1.2
Or
This can be filled from the output
of the pin configurator tool in
QTouch Studio. Please refer to
section 5.8.2
Y_LINES on pins
as below (2 YLines)
Y0A- D0, Y0B- C1,
Y1A-D5, Y1B-C4,
FILL_OUT_YA_LINE_INFO(0),
FILL_OUT_YA_LINE_INFO(5),
FILL_OUT_YB_LINE_INFO(1),
FILL_OUT_YB_LINE_INFO(4),
Main file has to be edited based
on the configuration. Refer to
section 5.8.2.1
Or
This can be filled from the output
of the pin configurator tool in
QTouch Studio. Please refer to
section 5.8.2
NUM_X_PORTS 2 Since X lines are spread on a
multiple(2) ports: PORTB, PORTD
Compiler tool chain IAR Supported compiler tool chains
listed in 5.7.2.2
Choice of ports
available for the
design
PORT_X_1 = B
PORT_X_2 = D
Any pins that are not conflicting
with the host application and
follow the configuration supported
by library can be used.
YA Line on PORTD
YB Line on PORTC60 8207L-AT42-05/12
SMP Pin on PORTD pin 7 Or
This can be filled from the output
of the pin configurator tool in
QTouch Studio. Please refer to
section 5.8.2
QT_DELAY_CYCLES of 4
Choice of Shared
Ya and Yb on same
port
SHARED_YAYB This should be defined as 0 if YA
and YB not shared on same port
else 1 if shared on same port.
Given the above requirements for the applications, the first step is to select the right library
variant required.
Step 1:
Select the Device that suits the requirements based on the touch sensing channels needed from
the library selection guide available at C:\ Program Files\Atmel\ Atmel_QTouch_Libaries_5.x\
Library_Selection_Guide.xls
Step 2:
From the Library_selection_Guide.xls list,, we see that there are a few variants of libraries
supported for AT Tiny device. Since the application requires 6 channels and rotor slider support,
one has to select a library variant which supports at least 6 channels or more. Hence we select
the 8 channel library which supports the required Port combination and the delay cycle preferred
which works out to be the variant
• libv1g1s1_8qm_4x_2y_krs_2rs.r90
Step 3:
Defining the constants / symbols in the project space or modifying in touch_config.h
In the host application file (say main.c), define the following constants and symbols
#define _QMATRIX_
#define QT_NUM_CHANNELS 8
#define NUM_X_LINES 4
#define NUM_Y_LINES 2
#define NUM_X_PORTS 2
#define PORT_X_1 B
#define PORT_NUM_1 1
#define PORT_X_2 D
#define PORT_NUM_2 2
#define PORT_YA D
#define PORT_YB C
#define PORT_SMP D
#define SMP_PIN 7
#define QT_DELAY_CYCLES 4
#define ROTOR_SLIDER_
#define QT_MAX_NUM_ROTORS_SLIDERS 2
#define SHARED_YAYB 0
NOTE: The above definitions are available in touch_config.h file. Alternatively, you can
define these in your IDE’s project options or have them defined in a separate header file.
Note:
1. Some of these macro’s can be taken from the output of the Pin configurator tool from
QTouch Studio. Refer to section 5.8.261
2. These can also be modified in the touch_config.h, after defining the _QMATRIX_ in the
project space.
3. In case XMEGA device is used for QMatrix the symbol __ATXMEGA_ has to be included
in the Project space along with the symbols mentioned above.
Step 4:
Filling Arrays in the main.c file
According to the pin availability for the touch sensing, initialize the arrays in the main.c file as
below:
x_line_info_t x_line_info[NUM_X_LINES]= {
FILL_OUT_X_LINE_INFO( 1,0u ),
FILL_OUT_X_LINE_INFO( 2,2u ),
FILL_OUT_X_LINE_INFO( 1,7u ),
};
y_line_info_t ya_line_info[NUM_Y_LINES]= {
FILL_OUT_YA_LINE_INFO( 0u ),
FILL_OUT_YA_LINE_INFO( 5u ),
};
y_line_info_t yb_line_info[NUM_Y_LINES]= {
FILL_OUT_YB_LINE_INFO( 0u ),
FILL_OUT_YB_LINE_INFO( 5u ),
};
Note:
1. This part of the snippet can be taken from the output of the Pin configurator tool from
QTouch Studio.
Step 5:
Usage of libraries
Now, you can use the touch API’s to create, initialize and perform touch sensing. Please refer to
the sample applications in section 5.6.11.3 for reference. These sample applications illustrate the
usage of the API’s and the sequence of operation
5.6.10.3.1.2 Resources used by QMatrix acquisition method libraries
The following additional resources are used by the QMatrix acquisition method libraries.
• One Analog Comparator
• One internal Timer ( Usually Timer1 depending on the availability on particular
microcontroller)
• One ADC Multiplexer( The critical section of the touch sensing library disables the use of
ADC as conversion unit and enables the same ADC as a multiplexer, but the user can
use the ADC for conversion in rest of his application code )
• The ADCMUX is used by the library during the touch sensing acquisition, however it is
restored with the value from host application before exiting the qt_measure_sensors().
Such that the ADC is available to the host application for conversion.
In case of XMega devices, the resources are used internal to the library and hence cannot be
used by the host application62 8207L-AT42-05/12
o Analog Comparator0 on PORTA (AC0 on PORTA)
o Timer/Counter1 on PORTC (TCC1)
o Event System Channel0 (EVSYS_CH0)
5.6.10.3.2 Example for 32bit AVR
Based on the application design, the user needs to select the right library variant and the
configuration to be used along with the variant. This section illustrates the steps required to select
the right QMatrix acquisition method library variant and configuration for your application.
For your design, you would need the following information to select the correct library variant
a. Device to be used for the design(only AT32UC3C0512 supported)
b. The number of touch sensing channels needed by the application – Then identify the
Maximum number of channels required for the design that are supported by the library.
c. Number of X lines to be used in the design
a. The port on which your design permits to have the X lines
b. The X lines can be spread on a single port.
d. Number of Y lines to be used in the design
c. The port-pins ports on which your design permits to have the Y lines
e. Do you need support for Rotors and/or Sliders in your design
d. If yes, how many rotors/sliders would be needed?
e. Based on a) above, identify the maximum number of rotors sliders that the library
supports
f. Which compiler platform you intend to use to integrate the libraries – IAR or AVR -GCC
After selecting the right library variant, following steps are to be performed
1) Define the constants and symbol names required
a. The next step is to define certain constants and symbols required in the host
application files where the touch API is going to be used. These values are
derived from the parameters defined in step 2 for your application
b. The constant/symbol names are as listed in the table below
c. The constant/symbol definitions can be placed in any of the following
iii. In the user’s ‘C’ file prior to include touch_api.h in the file
iv. Defined user’s project options.
v. Modify the defines in a touch_config.h
Symbol / Constant
name
Range of values Comments
_QMATRIX_ Symbol defined to indicate
QMatrix acquisition method
is required
Define this symbol to indicate QMatrix
acquisition method is required
QT_NUM_CHANNEL
S
The number of channels
the library supports.(
Possible
values:4,8,16,24,32,64).
Value should be same as the number
of channels that the library supports
NUM_X_LINES The number of X lines the
library supports.( Possible
values:4,8)
Value should be same as the number
of X lines that the library supports.
Refer to library selection guide
NUM_Y_LINES The number of Y lines the
library supports.( Possible
values:1,2,3,4,8)
Value should be same as the number
of Y lines that the library supports.
Refer to library selection guide
_ROTOR_SLIDER_ Symbol defined if Rotor Needs to be added in case user 63
and/or slider is required needs to configure ROTOR/SLIDER
Needs to be removed for ALL KEYS
configuration
QT_MAX_NUM_ROT
ORS_SLIDERS
Maximum number of
rotors/sliders the library
supports( possible
values:0,2,3,4,8)
Subject to support for rotors/sliders in
the library selected.
QT_DELAY_CYCLES Possible values
:1,2,3,4,5,10,25,50
Please refer to section 5.6.8
PORT_X_1 First IO port for configuring
the X lines.Any IO port
available with the device.
Drive electrode for touch sensing
using QMatrix acquisition
PORT_YA Any IO port available with
the device.
Receive electrode for touch sensing
using QMatrix acquisition
PORT_YB Analog Comparator port
available for the device.
Receive electrode for touch sensing
using QMatrix acquisition
PORT_SMP Any IO port available with
the device.
Port of the Sampling pin for touch
sensing using QMatrix acquisition
SMP_PIN Any IO port available with
the device.
Sampling pin for touch sensing using
QMatrix acquisition
Once you have selected the right library variant and configuration parameters for the application,
follow the steps outlined below to integrate the library variant in your application.
1) Fill in the arrays x_line_info_t x_line_info[NUM_X_LINES] y_line_info_t
ya_line_info[NUM_Y_LINES] and y_line_info_t yb_line_info[NUM_Y_LINES] as given in
main.c file.
Filling Arrays in the main.c file
According to the pin availability for the touch sensing, initialize the arrays in the main.c
file as below:
x_line_info_t x_line_info[NUM_X_LINES]= {
FILL_OUT_X_LINE_INFO( 1,0u ),
FILL_OUT_X_LINE_INFO( 1,2u ),
FILL_OUT_X_LINE_INFO( 1,7u ),
FILL_OUT_X_LINE_INFO( 1,15u ),
};
First argument of FILL_OUT_X_LINE_INFO should always be 1 as X port is only on one
port.Second arguments denotes the pins on that particular port.
y_line_info_t ya_line_info[NUM_Y_LINES]= {
FILL_OUT_YA_LINE_INFO( 0u ),
FILL_OUT_YA_LINE_INFO( 5u ),
};
y_line_info_t yb_line_info[NUM_Y_LINES]= {
FILL_OUT_YB_LINE_INFO( 7u ),
FILL_OUT_YB_LINE_INFO( 22u ),
};
Yb lines are one of the inputs of the Analog Comparators. 64 8207L-AT42-05/12
2) Copy the library variant that was selected in step 1 to your project’s working directory or
update your project to point to the library selected.
Include the “touch_api.h” header file and assembler source file from the QTouch library in
your application. The touch_api.h can be found in the release package at C:\Program
Files\Atmel\Atmel_QTouch_Libraries_5.x\Generic_QTouch_Libraries\include. The
assembler files mentioned below could be found at the location C:\Program
Files\Atmel\Atmel_QTouch_Libraries_5.x\Generic_QTouch_Libraries\32bit_AVR\UC3\Q
Matrix\common_files
e. qm_asm_uc3c_gcc.x in case of GCC compiler
f. qm_asm_uc3c_iar.s82 in case of IAR compiler.
3) Initialize/create and use the touch api’s in your application
d. In your application, create, initialize and configure the sensors.
a. The APIs of interest are qt_enable_key/rotor/slider().see sections 5.6.5.2,
5.6.5.3 and 5.6.5.4
e. configure the global configuration parameters valid for all the sensors in the
library
f. Provide timing for the QTouch libraries to operate. i,e. the QTouch libraries do
not use any timer resources of the microcontroller. The Host application has to
provide the required timing and also call the API’s at the appropriate intervals to
perform touch sense detect operations
4) General application notes
g. The clock, host application and other peripherals needed by the host application
needs to be initialized.
h. The QMatrix acquisition method libraries for 32 Bit devices internally use TIMER0
with channel0 for their operation.
i. Ensure that there are no conflicts between the resources used by the touch
library and the host application
5.6.10.3.2.1 Resources used by QMatrix acquisition method libraries for 32 Bit device
Devices supported by 32 Bit Qmatrix Acquisition libraries are:
1. AT32UC3C0512
The following additional resources are used by the QMatrix acquisition method libraries.
• Four Analog Comparator
• One internal Timer ( Timer0 with channel0 )
• Two Analog Comparator Interface ACIFA0/1.
• Event System Channel 16 is used.
The device has two Analog comparator interfaces ACIFA0 and ACIFA1 .Each interface
provides the flexibility to configure two analog comparators ACA and ACB comparators..UC3C
has Four Comparators (AC0A , AC1A , AC0B , AC1B), So there are 10 Possible Yb lines as
given in table below.
User has flexibility to configure maximum 8 Yb lines for maximum 64 channel libraries.Below
table states the Yblines which can be configured
Yb LInes of the Four Port A 65
Analog Comparators Pins
AC0AN0(AC0A Comparator) PA22
AC0AN1(AC0A Comparator) PA27
AC0BP0(AC0A Comparator) PA23
AC1AN0(AC1A Comparator) PA13
AC1AN1(AC1A Comparator) PA07
AC1BP0(AC1A Comparator) PA14
AC0BN0(AC0B Comparator) PA21
AC0BN1(AC0B Comparator) PA29
AC1BN0(AC1B Comparator) PA15
AC1BN1(AC1B Comparator) PA09
These Yb lines are the negative input pins of the analog comparator.To use the library, the below
table shows the lines which are externally grounded for Proper Qmatrix operation
Positive Input Pins of the Four
Analog Comparators
Port A
Pins
AC0AP0(AC0A Comparator) PA20
AC0BP1(AC0B Comparator) PA28
AC1AP0(AC1A Comparator) PA12
AC1BP1(AC1B Comparator) PA08
If only one comparator is used , then the corresponding pin of that comparator is properly
externally grounded.Above table shows the Analog comparator usage and the corresponding
lines which needs to be grounded.
The Port pin configurability is provided in the library to select any port for Ya or X lines.The
Port for Yb lines is fixed which is PORTA as these lines are inputs of the Analog comparators
which are fixed pins of PORTA.
X,YA,YB,SMP
Configurations
Ports on UC3C
PORTA PORTB PORTC PORTD
X Yes Yes Yes Yes
YA Yes Yes Yes Yes
YB Yes(only few
pins of PortA
can be
configured as
Yb Lines)
No No No
SMP Yes Yes Yes Yes66 8207L-AT42-05/12
The configurability is provided to select X,SMP and YA lines on Same Port ,X,SMP and
YB lines on same port.
Number of X ports should be 1 means the X lines should be connected to a single port.
Note: YA and YB cannot be on the same port.
SMP Pin should be less than equal to 19th pin of any Port.
5.6.10.3.3 Checklist of items for integrating QMatrix Capacitive sensing libraries
When integrating QMatrix acquisition method libraries, ensure the following
Check that the CLKPR register is available for the selected device. If not remove the
CLKPR statements.
Ensure that the configuration for the QMatrix is done in touch_config.h and the arrays of
the x_line_info and y_line info are filled as indicated section 5.8.2
MCUCR register is available and if so disable pullups
Check if the timer registers and bit fields used are correct and change them if necessary.
The above settings can be modified by the user by changing the API’s that are available
to the user. The API’s include
o qt_set_parameters ( )
The host application must provide the current time.
This information is passed to the library as an argument to the function
qt_measure_sensors()”. This is used for time-based library operations such as drift
compensation.
The GPIO internal pull-ups must be disabled for all port pins used for touch sensing when
calling the library.
For 8-bit AVR devices, this can be done by
b. Setting the “PUD” bit in the “MCUCR” register or
c. Setting the “PUD” bit in the “SFIOR” register.
• Setting the JTD bit in the “MCUCR” register to disable JTAG Interface in MCU ( if
available ). This can be done only when the JTAG lines are in conflict with the desired
touch sensing lines.
• The library must be called often enough to provide a reasonable response time to user
touches. The typical time to call the library is from 25 ms to 50 ms.
• Care should be taken while using the ADC conversion logic and QMatrix library such that
the host application waits for approximately 1msec before actually calling the
qt_measure_sensors() API depending upon the ADC clock.
5.6.10.4 Common checklist items
5.6.10.4.1 Configuring the stack size for the application
The stack requirements for the QTouch library should be accounted for and the stack size
adjusted in the user’s project for proper operation of the software when using the IAR IDE. This
section lists the stack usage for the different variants of the QTouch and QMatrix acquisition
method libraries applicable to the IAR compiler tool chain.
Note: When using the IAR IDE / compiler tool chain, the map file generated for the application will
list total CSTACK & RSTACK requirements. Please adjust the total CSTACK and RSTACK
values in the IAR project options to be greater than the values listed in the map file. Refer to
section 5.6.11.4 which illustrates how to change the settings in IAR IDE.
Table 5 : Stack requirements of the QTouch capacitive sensing libraries when using IAR IDE
projects67
QTouch Acquisition method Libraries : Stack usage for IAR compiler tool chain
Configuration CSTACK size RSTACK size
Single port pair - only keys ( 4 / 8 channels ) 0x30 0x28
Single port pair – keys/ rotors/ sliders (4/8 channel) 0x40 0x2C
Two port pairs - only keys keys (16 channel) 0x50 0x28
Two port pairs – keys/ rotors/ sliders (16 channel) 0x60 0x2C
Table 6 : Stack requirements of the QMatrix capacitive sensing libraries when using IAR IDE
projects
QMatrix Acquisition method Libraries : Stack usage for IAR compiler tool chain
Number of
channels
Configuration CSTACK size RSTACK size
4 ONLY KEYS 0x20 0x20
4 KEYS/ROTOR/SLIDER 0x30 0x20
8 ONLY KEYS 0x25 0x20
8 KEYS/ROTOR/SLIDER 0x35 0x20
16 ONLY KEYS 0x30 0x20
16 KEYS/ROTOR/SLIDER 0x40 0x20
32 ONLY KEYS 0x35 0x25
32 KEYS/ROTOR/SLIDER 0x45 0x25
56 ONLY KEYS 0x45 0x25
56 KEYS/ROTOR/SLIDER 0x55 0x25
64 ONLY KEYS 0x45 0x25
64 KEYS/ROTOR/SLIDER 0x55 0x25
5.6.11 Example project files
The QTouch library is shipped with various example projects to illustrate the usage of the touch
API’s to add touch sensing to an application across various devices
Sample applications are also provided for the following kits
1 TS2080A, QT600_ATtiny88_QT8, QT600_ATxmega128a1_QT16 : QTouch Technology
evaluation Kits
2 TS2080B, QT600_ATmega324_QM64 : QMatrix Technology evaluation Kits
Note: Example projects must be built in the installed folder, and if moved/copied elsewhere then
paths must be edited appropriately.68 8207L-AT42-05/12
5.6.11.1 Using the Sample projects
The sample applications are shipped with the complete set of files required to configure, build and
download the application for both IAR-workbench and AVR Studio IDE.
Since more than one device may use the same library (applicable for QTouch acquisition method
libraries), example project files and applications have been provided only for select devices which
use these libraries.
5.6.11.2 Example applications for QTouch acquisition method libraries
5.6.11.2.1 Selecting the right configuration
Each example project for a device can support multiple configurations (i.e a. keys only, b. with
rotors and sliders c.16 channel etc…). The configuration sets determine the configuration options
for using the library and also the right library variant to link with the project.
The configuration sets for IAR IDE are named according to the convention listed below
Configuration set for IAR IDE
Naming convention : g_qt_k_rs
Field
Name
Values Comments
vP v1, v3, xmega, uc3a,
uc3b, uc3c
VersionP of the core AVR device supported by this library variant
Q 1 to 6 GroupQ of the core AVR device supported by this library variant
CH 4, 8, 12, 16, 32 Total number of channels supported by each library.
RS 1, 2, 3, 4, 8 Total number of rotors / sliders supported for the respective channel
counts mentioned in previous row.
The configuration sets for AVR Studio IDE are named according to the convention listed below
Configuration set for AVR Studio IDE
g_qt_k_rs
Field
Name
Values Comments
avrP avr25, avr4, avr 51, avr5,
xmega, uc3a, uc3b, uc3c
VersionP of the core AVR device supported by this library
variant
Q 1 to 6 GroupQ of the core AVR device supported by this library
variant
CH 4, 8, 12, 16, 32 Total number of channels supported by each library.
RS 1, 2, 3, 4, 8 Total number of rotors / sliders supported for the respective
channel counts mentioned in previous row.
Depending on your need, you need to select the right configuration required and build the project.69
Figure 5-11: Selecting the right configuration in the QTouch acquisition method example
applications in IAR –IDE
Figure 5-12 : Selecting the right configuration in QTouch acquisition method example
applications in AVR-6 IDE
5.6.11.2.2 Changing the settings to match your device
5.6.11.2.2.1 Processor settings
Once you have selected the appropriate example project and the configuration, you need to
ensure that the settings in the project are configured to reflect the correct device. The settings
include
• Device type ( CPU type ) for the project70 8207L-AT42-05/12
Figure 5-13 : Changing the processor settings for the examples in IAR IDE
Figure 5-14 : Changing the processor settings for the examples in AVR-Studio 6
5.6.11.2.3 Changing the library configuration parameters
The configuration parameters required for the library are specified in the touch_config.h file of the
examples under the custom user configuration section. Please refer to the example projects
provided with the QTouch libraries release for more information. The mandatory constants to be
defined are as listed below.71
Symbol / Constant name Range of values Comments
_QTOUCH_ This macro has to be
defined in order to use
QTouch libraries.
SNS & SNSK Section 5.7.1.5 provides
details on the range of
values allowed.
To be used if only single port pair is
needed for the design
SNS1 – SNSK1 & SNS2 –
SNSK2
Section 5.7.1.5.2 has
details on the range of
values allowed
To be used if two port pairs are needed for
the design
QT_NUM_CHANNELS 4, 8, 12, 16 for tinyAVR,
megaAVR and XMEGA
device libraries and 8, 16,
32 for UC3 device libraries.
_ROTOR_SLIDER_ Rotor / slider can be added
to the design, if this symbol
is defined
A library with rotor / slider functionality
already available needs to be selected if
this macro is to be enabled
_DEBUG_INTERFACE_ The debug interface code in
the example application will
be enabled if this macro is
enabled.
This will enable the application to output
QTouch measurement values to GPIO
pins, which can be used by a USB bridge
to view the output on Hawkeye or QTouch
Studio. This feature is currently supported
by EVK/TS 2080A and QT600 boards.
QT_DELAY_CYCLES 1 to 255 Please refer to section
QTOUCH_STUDIO_MASKS This macro needs to be
defined if QTouch Studio
Pin Configurator Wizard.is
used to generate the SNS
and SNSK masks.
Please refer to section 5.8.1
_STATIC_PORT_PIN_CONF_ This macro needs to be
defined only in case of 4
and 8 channel libraries with
interport configuration and
pin configurability.
Please refer to section 5.8.172 8207L-AT42-05/12
Figure 5-15 : Specifying the QTouch acquisition method library configuration parameters
for QTouch example projects
5.6.11.2.4 Using the example projects
The sample applications are shipped with the complete set of files required to configure, build,
execute and test the application for both IAR-workbench and AVR Studio IDEs.
The sample applications are provided for the evaluation kits and a few configurations for select
devices. The user can use the sample applications as a reference or baseline to configure
different configurations. Please ensure to change the configuration settings in the project options
to match the device selected.
To change the configuration settings of the sample applications,
1. Select the configuration from the list of configurations available.
2. If the user wishes to have a new name for the configuration to be used, a new
configuration can be added to the project.
3. If a different variant of the library needs to be used, remove the existing library in that
particular configuration and add the library variant that you require. Please refer to
5.7.1.4 for details on the different library variants. Update the linker options to specify
the library to be linked.
4. Specify the tunable configuration parameters for the project as illustrated in sections
5.6.11.2.2 and 5.6.11.2.3.73
5.6.11.3 Example applications for QMatrix acquisition method libraries
The QMatrix acquisition method libraries include example projects for some of the supported
devices. Example projects for both IAR IDE and AVR Studio IDE along with example applications
are provided for select devices using the QMatrix acquisition libraries. These sample applications
demonstrate the usage of the touch API’s to add touch sensing to an application. Refer to the
library selection guide for details on the example projects and sample applications supported for
the release.
5.6.11.3.1 Selecting the right configuration
The sample applications are built to support a maximum channel support configuration available
for that particular device for both IAR & AVR IDEs.
Internally there are two configurations for each device.
• ALL KEYS configuration : Supports only keys
• KEYS/ROTORS/SLIDERS configuration : Supports keys or rotors or sliders
concurrently
These configurations enable a set of stored options and a specific library to be selected in order
to build application using the specific library.
Figure 5-16 : Selecting the right configuration in the QMatrix acquisition method example
applications in IAR –IDE74 8207L-AT42-05/12
Figure 5-17 : Selecting the right configuration in the QMatrix acquisition method example
applications in AVR Studio IDE
5.6.11.3.2 Changing the library configuration parameters
The configuration parameters required for the library are specified in the touch_config.h file of the
examples. Please refer to the example projects provided with the QTouch libraries release for
more information. 75
Figure 5-18 : Specifying QMatrix acquisition library parameters in touch_config.h for
QMatrix projects
5.6.11.3.3 Using the example projects
The sample applications are shipped with the complete set of files required to configure, build,
execute and test the application for both IAR-workbench and AVR Studio IDEs.
The sample applications are provided for the evaluation kits and a few configurations for select
devices.
The user can use the sample applications as a reference or baseline to configure different
configurations. Please ensure to change the configuration settings in the project options to match
the device selected
To change the configuration settings of the sample applications,
1) Select the configuration from the list of configurations available as shown in section
5.6.11.3.1
2) If the user wishes to have a new name for the configuration to be used, a new
configuration can be added to the project
3) If a different variant of the library needs to be used, remove the existing library in that
particular configuration and add the library variant that you require. Please refer to library 76 8207L-AT42-05/12
selection guide for details on the different library variants. Update the linker options to
specify the library to be linked
4) Specify the tunable configuration parameters for the project as illustrated in 5.6.11.3.2
5) For QMatrix on XMEGA devices, please check if the pre-processor symbol _ATXMEGA_
is added in the project space or not.
5.6.11.4 Adjusting the Stack size when using IAR IDE
The example projects for IAR IDE, the CSTACK and RSTACK values are configured to account
for the requirements of the QTouch libraries and the included main.c file which illustrates the
usage of the touch API.
• Adjust the CSTACK and RSTACK values appropriately based on additional software
integrated or added to the examples.
Figure 5-19 : Modifying the stack size in IAR IDE
5.6.11.5 Optimization levels
The default configuration settings in sample projects which ship with the library are set to the
highest level of optimization for IAR and GCC variants of the libraries. The user might be required
to change this setting for debugging purposes
• In case of IAR, The optimizations tab in project configuration options specifies High.
• In case of GCC, the libraries are compiled with the –Os which signifies that the
Optimization for generating the library is maximum.77
Figure 5-20 : Specifying the optimization level in IAR IDE
5.6.11.6 Debug Support in Example applications
The EVK2080 and QT600 applications provide output debug information on standard GPIO pins
through the USB Bridge IC to PC software for display by AVR QTouch Studio. Similarly for
ATMEL devices that are not supported through EVK or QT600 kits, the output measurement
values can be viewed through AVR QTouch Studio using the same QDebug protocol and QT600
USB bridge.
If a QT600 bridge is not available, please refer to section 5.6.11.6.3 for more information on
observing the output touch measurement data without the use of a USB bridge or AVR QTouch
Studio.
5.6.11.6.1 Debug Support in the sample applications for EVK2080 and QT600 boards
The sample applications provided for the EVK2080 boards, QT600 boards and the other example
projects output debug information which is captured by a USB bridge chip and then routed to the
QTouch Studio for display.
Note:
The port and pins assigned for the QDebug protocol with the example projects are arbitrary and
have to be changed based on the project configuration chosen and pin availability.
A separate App note is available on the Atmel website (in QTouch libraries webpage) explaining
the QT600 debug protocol.
5.6.11.6.2 How to turn on the debug option
In the project options, the symbol definition _DEBUG_INTERFACE_ is used to enable reporting
the debug data. You can enable the debug interface by enabling the debug macro in
touch_config.h file.78 8207L-AT42-05/12
Figure 5-21 : Enabling and configuring the Debug Support
5.6.11.6.3 Debug Interface if USB Bridge board is not available
For the sample applications using the devices that are not supported on EVK2080 and QT600 the
debug interface code is not provided. This is because a separate USB bridge board is required to
read the data and display it on QTouch studio. However in this case the output touch
measurement data can still be viewed using the IAR or AVR Studio IDE when running the code in
debug mode using debug wire or emulator.
extern qt_touch_lib_measure_data_t qt_measure_data;
The qt_measure_data global variable contains the output touch measurement data. Refer to
section 5.6.4.3 for more information on the data type.
For GCC generated libraries the output touch measurement data can be observed on the watch
window through the pointer pqt_measure_data.
qt_touch_lib_measure_data_t *pqt_measure_data = &qt_measure_data;79
5.7 Library Variants
5.7.1 QTouch Acquisition method library variants
5.7.1.1 Introduction
Variants of the ATMEL QTouch Library based on QTouch Technology are available for a range of
ATMEL Microcontrollers. This section lists the different variants available. By following a simple
series of steps, the user can identify the right library variant to use in his application.
5.7.1.2 Support for different compiler tool chains
The QTouch acquisition method libraries are supported for the following compiler tool chains.
Table 7 Compiler tool chains supported for QTouch acquisition method libraries
Tool Version
IAR Compiler for 8bit AVR 6.10.0
IAR Embedded Workbench for AVR 6.10
Atmel Studio 6.0.x
IAR Compiler 32bit AVR 4.10.1
GCC – GNU Toolchain for AVR 8bit 3.4.0.1028
GCC – GCC Toolchain AVR 32bit 3.4.0.1028
IAR Embedded Workbench for ARM 6.30
GCC for ARM Sourcery G++ Lite for ARM EABI
V 2011.3.0.42
5.7.1.3 QTouch Acquisition method library naming conventions
The libraries are named according the convention listed below
5.7.1.3.1 Naming convention for libraries to be used with GCC tool chain
libg1_qt_k_rs.a
Field
name
Possible
values
Comments
coreP avr25
avr 35
avr 4
avr 51
avr 5
avrxmega2
avrxmega3
avrxmega4
avrxmega5
avrxmega6
avrxmega7
uc3a
uc3b
uc3c
sam3s
sam3u
VersionP of the core for AVR/ATSAM devices supported by this library variant
for tinyAVR and megaAVR devices. 80 8207L-AT42-05/12
sam3n
sam4s
CH 4, 8, 12, 16,
32
Total number of channels supported by each library.
RS 1, 2, 3, 4, 8 Total number of rotors / sliders supported for the respective channel counts
mentioned in previous row.
For example, the library variant “libavr25g1_8qt_k_2rs.a” supports the following configuration
• Device : tinyAVR or megaAVR device belonging to core version avr25
• Belongs to a set of devices of group 1 supported by this library
• Support a maximum of 8 channels
• Supports a maximum of up to 2 rotors / sliders.
5.7.1.3.2 Naming convention for libraries to be used with IAR Embedded Workbench
The libraries are named according the naming convention listed below
libg_qt_k_rs.r90
Field
name
Possible
values
Comments
coreP v1
v3
v3xmsf
v3xm
v4xm
v5xm
v6xm
uc3a
uc3b
uc3c
sam3s
sam3u
sam3n
VersionP of the for AVR/ATSAM devices supported by this library variant
variant for tinyAVR and megaAVR devices.
Q 1 to 3 GroupQ of the core AVR device supported by this library variant
CH 4, 8, 12, 16,
32
Total number of channels supported by each library.
RS 1, 2, 3, 4, 8 Total number of rotors / sliders supported for the respective channel counts
mentioned in previous row.
For example, the library variant “libv3g2_4qt_k_1rs.r90” supports the following configuration
• Device : tinyAVR or megaAVR device belonging to core version v3
• Belongs to a set of devices of group 2 supported by this library
• Supports a maximum of 4 channels
• Supports 1 rotor/slider
5.7.1.4 QTouch acquisition method library variants
lists the different QTouch acquisition method library variants supported for AVRs. Use this table
to select the correct library variant to be used in your application. Each row in the table below
indicates
• the corresponding Ports available for SNS and SNSK pins
• Compilers used for generating the libraries
• The library names to be selected for the requirements
Note: The libraries that are supported as listed in the table are only supported provided the
device memory requirements are also satisfied.81
Naming convention of the library
Maximum channels supported by the library.
Device Range
tinyAVR, megaAVR, XMEGA 4,8,12,16
UC3 8,16,32
ATSAM 32
Maximum number of rotor / sliders supported
NOTE:
• For 8-bit devices, ports which have less than 8 pins cannot be used by the QTouch
acquisition method libraries. Check the data sheet to determine the number of pins
supported for each port
5.7.1.5 Port combinations supported for SNS and SNSK pin configurations
For the list of all ports supported for each device please refer to the library selection guide. There
are no limitations for AVR devices (8bit and 32 bit) on the combination of SNS and SNSK port to
be used from QTouch libraries 4.0 release onwards.
For ATSAM devices the one port pair combinations supported are given below in the table.
One port pair supported combinations for
ATSAM
AA, BB, CC, AB, BA, AC, CA, BC, CB
5.7.1.5.1 Tips on pin assignments for the sensor design using one pair of SNS/SNSK
ports
This section lists tips on selecting the pin assignments when using a single port pair for the SNS
and SNSK Pins.
Design choice for the sensor Example Port configuration with pin assignments
SNSK & SNS pins are on different
ports, number of channels = 4
• If the SNS1(C) and SNSK1(B) pins are on two different ports, the
user should mount the sensors onto the corresponding pins such
as (PC0,PB0), (PC1,PB1), (PC2,PB2) and (PC3,PB3), when pin
configurability is not used.
• In case of pin configurability, sensors should be mounted on the
pins as selected based on rules illustrated in section 5.8.1
SNSK & SNS pins are on different
ports, number of channels = 8
• If the SNS1(C) and SNSK1(B) pins are on two different ports, the
user should mount the sensors onto the corresponding pins such
as (PC0,PB0), (PC1,PB1), (PC2,PB2) and so on, When pin
configurability is not used.
• When using pin configurability, sensors should be mounted on the
pins as selected based on rules illustrated in section 5.8.1
• When pin configurability is not used, channel 0 will be on (PC0,
PB0) pins, channel 1 will be on (PC1, PB1) pins and so on up to
channel 7 will be on (PC7, PB7) pins.
• When using pin configurability, channel should be assigned as
given in section 5.6.6.1.1.282 8207L-AT42-05/12
•
SNSK & SNS pins are on different
ports, number of channels = 32
when using UC3 device
• If the SNS1(B) and SNSK1(A) pins are on two different ports, the
user should mount the sensors onto the corresponding pins such
as (PB0,PA0), (PB1,PA1), (PB2,PA2)..
• In this case channel 0 will be on (PB0, PA0) pins, channel 1 will be
on (PB1, PA1) pins and so on up to channel 31 will be on (PB31,
PA31) pins.
SNSK & SNS pins are on the
same port, number of channels =
2
• If the use of SNS1(A) and SNSK1(A) pins are on the same port,
the user should always have the configuration (PA0, PA1) & (PA2,
PA3). In this case channel 0 will be on (PA0, PA1) pins; channel 1
will be on (PA2, PA3) pins. The even pins of the port are used as
SNS1 pins and odd pins of the port are used as SNSK1 pins
• When pin configurability is used, sensors should be mounted on
the pins as selected as per the rules illustrated in section 5.8.1 and
channels should be assigned as given in section 5.6.6.1.1.4
SNSK & SNS pins are on the
same port, number of channels =
4
• If the use of SNS1(A) and SNSK1(A) pins are on the same port,
the user should always have the configuration (PA0, PA1), (PA2,
PA3), (PA4, PA5) & (PA6, PA7). In this case channel 0 will be on
(PA0, PA1) pins, channel 1 will be on (PA2, PA3) pins and so on
up to channel 4 will be on (PA6, PA7) pins. The even pins of the
port are used as SNS1 pins and odd pins of the port are used as
SNSK1 pins, when pin configurability is not being used.
• When using pin configurability, sensors should be mounted on the
pins as selected as per the rules illustrated in section 5.8.1 and
channels should be assigned as given in section 5.6.6.1.1.4
SNSK & SNS pins are on the
same port, number of channels =
16
( Available only for UC3 devices if
more than 4 channels are to be
used on a single port. For
tinyAVR, megaAVR, XMEGA
devices up to 8 channels with
SNS and SNSK on same ports
refer to section 5.7.1.5.2 )
• This configuration is available only for UC3 library variants.
• In the use of SNS(A) and SNSK(A) pins are on the same port, the
user should always have the configuration (PA0, PA1), (PA2,
PA3), (PA4, PA5) & so on. In this case channel 0 will be on (PA0,
PA1) pins, channel 1 will be on (PA2, PA3) pins and so on up to
channel 15 will be on (PA30, PA31) pins. The even pins of the port
are used as SNS pins and odd pins of the port are used as SNSK
pins
SNSK & SNS pins are on the
same port, number of channels =
16
( Available only for SAM devices)
• If the use of SNS(A) and SNSK(A) pins are on the same port, the
user should always have the configuration (PA0, PA1), (PA2,
PA3), (PA4, PA5), (PA6, PA7) and so on.
• In this case channel 0 will be on (PA0, PA1) pins, channel 1 will be
on (PA2, PA3) pins and so on up to channel 15 will be on (PA30,
PA31) pins.
• The even pins of the port are used as SNS pins and odd pins of
the port are used as SNSK pins83
5.7.1.5.2 Port combinations supported for two port pair SNS and SNSK pin
configurations
For the list of all ports supported for each device please refer to the library selection guide. There
are no limitations on the combination of SNS and SNSK port to be used from QTouch libraries 4.0
release onwards.
For ATSAM devices the total two port pairs supported combinations are given below in the table.
Two port pairs supported combinations for
ATSAM
AA_BB, BB_AA, AA_CC, CC_AA, BB_CC,
CC_BB, AA_BC, AA_CB, BB_AC, BB_CA,
CC_BA, CC_AB
5.7.1.5.2.1 Tips on pin assignments for the sensor design using two pairs of SNS / SNSK
ports
This section lists tips on selecting the pin assignments when using a single port pair for the SNS
and SNSK Pins.
Design choice for the sensor Example Port configuration with pin assignments
SNSK1-SNS1 & SNSK2-SNS2 pins
are all on different ports, number of
channels = 16
(Use the 16channel library in this
case. Ensure the port definitions for
SNS1,SNSK1,SNS2,SNSK2 are all in
place)
• E. g. SNS1(D), SNSK1(B) & SNS2(C), SNSK2(A)
• Recommended configuration: (PD0, PB0), (PD1, PB1),..(PD7,
PB7), (PC0,PA0).. to (PC7, PA7). In this case channel 0 will be
on (PD0, PB0) pins, channel 1 will be on (PD1, PB1) pins,
channel 8 will be on (PC0, PA0), channel 9 will be on (PC1,
PA1) and so on up to channel 15 will be on (PC7, PA7) pins.
• However, the user can mount the sensors on pins as selected
as per the rules illustrated in section 5.8.1 and channels
should be assigned as given in section 5.6.6.1.1.2
SNSK1-SNS1 are on same port &
SNSK2-SNS2 pins are on same port,
number of channels = 8
(Use the 8channel library in this case.
Ensure the port definitions for
SNS1,SNSK1,SNS2,SNSK2 are all in
place)
• E.g. SNS1(K), SNSK1(K) & SNS2(H), SNSK2(H) on same
ports,
• Recommended configuration: In case Pin configurability is not
used, (PK0, PK1), (PK2, PK3),..(PK6, PK7), (PH0,PH1).. to
(PH6, PH7).In this case channel 0 will be on (PK0, PK1) pins,
channel 1 will be on (PK2, PK3) pins, channel 4 will be on
(PH0, PH1), channel 5 will be on (PH2, PH3) and so on up to
channel 7 will be on (PH6, PH7) pins. The even pins of the port
are used as SNS pins and odd pins of the port are used as
SNSK pins.
• When pin configurability is used, sensors should be mounted
on the pins as selected as per the rules illustrated in section
5.8.1 and channels should be assigned as given in section
5.6.6.1.1.2
SNSK1-SNS1 are on different ports &
SNSK2-SNS2 pins are on same port,
number of channels = 12
(Use the 12channel library in this
case. Ensure the port definitions for
SNS1,SNSK1,SNS2,SNSK2 are all in
place)
• E.g. SNS1(H), SNSK1(F) on different ports & SNS2(E),
SNSK2(E) on same ports.
• Recommended configuration : In case Pin configurability is not
used, (PH0, PF0), (PH1, PF1),..(PH7, PF7), (PE0,PE1).. to
(PE6, PE7). In this case channel 0 will be on (PH0, PF0) pins,
channel 1 will be on (PH1, PF1) pins... channel 8 will be on
(PE0,PE1), channel 9 will be on (PE2,PE3) and so on up to
channel 11 will be on (PH6, PH7) pins. The even pins of the
port E are used as SNS pins and odd pins of the port E are
used as SNSK pins.
• When pin configurability is used, sensors should be mounted
on the pins as selected as per rules illustrated in section 5.8.1
and channels should be assigned as given in section 84 8207L-AT42-05/12
5.6.6.1.1.2 and section 5.6.6.1.1.4
SNSK1-SNS1 are on same port &
SNSK2-SNS2 pins are on different
ports, number of channels = 12
(Use the 12channel library in this
case. Ensure the port definitions for
SNS1,SNSK1,SNS2,SNSK2 are all in
place)
• E.g. SNS1(G), SNSK1(G) on different ports & SNS2(B),
SNSK2(D) on same ports
• Recommended configuration: In case Pin configurability is not
used, (PG0, PG1), (PG2, PG3),..(PG6, PG7), (PB0,PD0)... to
(PB7, PD7). In this case channel 0 will be on (PG0, PG1) pins,
channel 1 will be on (PG2, PG3) pins... channel 3 will be on
(PG6, PG7), channel 4 will be on (PB0,PD0) and so on up to
channel 11 will be on (PB7, PD7) pins. The even pins of the
port G are used as SNS pins and odd pins of the port G are
used as SNSK pins
• When pin configurability is used, sensors should be mounted
on the pins as selected as per rules illustrated in section 5.8.1
and channels should be assigned as given in section
5.6.6.1.1.2 and section 5.6.6.1.1.4
5.7.1.6 Sample applications and Memory requirements for QTouch acquisition method
libraries
Refer to the library selection guide for memory requirements for each of the libraries supported in
the release.
5.7.2 QMatrix acquisition method library variants
5.7.2.1 Introduction
Variants of the ATMEL QTouch Library based on Matrix™ acquisition technology are available for
a range of ATMEL Microcontrollers. Refer to the library selection guide (C:\ Program Files\Atmel\
Atmel_QTouch_Libaries_5.x\Library_Selection_Guide.xls) for the list of devices currently
supported for QMatrix.
5.7.2.2 Support for different compiler tool chains
The QMatrix acquisition method libraries are supported for the following compiler tool chains.
Tool Version
IAR Compiler 6.10
IAR Embedded Workbench 6.10
Atmel Studio 6 6.0.x
GCC – GNU Toolchain for AVR 3.4.0.1028
IAR Compiler 32bit AVR 4.10.1
GCC – GNU Toolchain for AVR32 3.4.0.1028
5.7.2.3 QMatrix Acquisition method library naming conventions
The libraries are named according the naming convention listed below
Tool Chain Naming convention
GCC Tool Chain lib_qm_x_y__rs.a
IAR –EWAR lib_qm_x_y__rs.r9085
Field
name
Possible values Comments
D Common for IAR & GCC:
ATtiny167,
ATmega128rfa1,
ATmega8535
Specific to IAR:
v1g1s0 (ATtiny44,
ATtiny84)
v1g1s1 (ATtiny48,
ATtiny88)
v1g1s2(ATtiny461,
ATtiny861)
ATmega16a
v1g2s1 (ATmega48PA,
ATmega88PA)
v3xmsf (ATxmega16A4,
ATxmega16D4,
ATxmega32A4,
ATxmega32D4)
v3xm (ATxmega64A3)
v4xm(ATxmega64A1)
v5xm(ATxmega128A3,
ATxmega192A3,
ATxmega256A3,
ATxmega256A3B)
v6xm(ATxmega128A1)
v3g3 (ATmega165P,
ATmega325P,
ATmega645,
ATmega164p,
ATmega324p,
ATmega324pa,
ATmega644p,
ATmega168p,
ATmega328p,
AT90CAN32,
AT90CAN64
)
v3g5 ( AT90CAN128,
AT90USB1286,
AT90USB1287,
ATmega1280,
ATmega1281
)
v3g6 ( AT90USB162
)
v3g7 ( AT90USB646,
Indicates the device / core group name in short form.
For XMEGA Devices, Core groups are taken which
follows
As below for both GCC and IAR
Supported XMEGA Devices
ATxmega16A4,
ATxmega16D4,
ATxmega32A4,
ATxmega32D4,
ATxmega64A1
ATxmega128A1
ATxmega64A3
ATxmega128A3,
ATxmega192A3,
ATxmega256A3,
ATxmega256A3B)86 8207L-AT42-05/12
AT90USB647
)
Specific to GCC:
avr25g1s0 (ATtiny44,
ATtiny84)
avr25g1s1 (ATtiny48,
ATtiny88)
avr25g1s2(ATtiny461,
ATtiny861)
ATmega16
avr4g1s1 (ATmega48P,
ATmega88P)
avr5g4 ( AT90USB646,
AT90USB647
)
avr5g6 ( AT90USB162
)
avrxmega2 (ATxmega16A4,
ATxmega16D4,
ATxmega32D4)
avrxmega3 (ATxmega32A4)
avrxmega4 (ATxmega64A3)
avrxmega5(ATxmega64A1)
avrxmega6(ATxmega128A3,
ATxmega192A3,
ATxmega256A3,
ATxmega256A3B)
avrxmega7(ATxmega128A1)
avr5g3 (ATmega165P,
ATmega325P,
ATmega645,
ATmega164p,
ATmega324p,
ATmega324p,
ATmega644p,
ATmega168p,
ATmega328p,
AT90CAN32,
AT90CAN64
)
avr51g2 ( AT90CAN128,
AT90USB1286,
AT90USB1287,
ATmega1280,
ATmega1281
)
AT32UC3C0512
NC 4,8,16,24,32,56,64 Indicates the maximum number of channels that the 87
library supports
56 (8 x 7) support only for ATXmega Devices.
24((8 x 3) support only for 32 Bit Devices.
NX 4,8 Indicates the number of X-Lines that the library needs
for supporting the listed number of channels.
The X lines on a PORT always start with Least
Significant Bit of the PORT.
Ex: #define PORT_X_1 B in case of a 4x2
QMatrix library means
X0,X1,X2,X3 are on PB0,PB1,PB2,PB3
NY 1,2,3,4,7,8 Indicates the number of Y-Lines that the library needs
for supporting the listed number of channels
NY=7 support only for ATXmega Devices
NY=3 support only for 32Bit Devices
CFG k
krs
k – library variant supports only keys
krs – library variant supports keys, Rotors and Sliders
NRS 0,1,2,3,4,8 Maximum number of rotor sliders that the library
supports.
NRS=3 support only for 32Bit Devices
The table below provides a few examples of the naming convention.
Example Library name Configuration supported
libavr51g2_8qm_4x_2y_krs_2rs.a • Compiler tool chain : GCC
• Device : ATMega164P
• 8 Channels
• 4 X lines
• 2 Y lines
• Supports Keys, Rotors and Sliders ( krs )
• 2 Rotors and Sliders
libavr25g1s1_16qm_8x_2y_k_0rs.r90 • Compiler tool chain : IAR
• Device : ATTiny88
• 16 Channels
• 8 X lines
• 2 Y lines
• Supports only keys ( k)
• 0 Rotors and Sliders
5.7.2.4 QMatrix acquisition method library variants
5.7.2.4.1 Devices supported for QMatrix Acquisition
Refer to the Library_selection_guide.xls for the list of devices supported for QMatrix for this
release.
5.8 PIN Configuration for QTouch Libraries
5.8.1 Pin Configuration for QTouch Acquisition Method
Pin configurability for QTouch acquisition method is provided for 8Bit AVR’s. QTouch
acquisition method libraries can be used to configure SNS and SNSK on any pins of the
port. But few rules should be followed while assigning the SNS and SNSK on particular
pins. These rules are internal to the library. But QTouch Studio –Pin Configuration Wizard 88 8207L-AT42-05/12
can be used to assign SNS and SNSK on the pins and rules are internally taken care in the
QTouch Studio Pin Configuration Wizard.
By default, for 4 and 8 channel QTouch acquisition libraries, the channel numbering follows
the pin number of the port.
To use the pin configurability, enable the macro _STATIC_PORT_PIN_CONF_ in the
project options or define the macro in the touch_config.h file.
To use the pin configurability feature, the SNS_array and SNSK_array masks are exported
for the user, which needs to be initialized. These SNS_array and SNSK_array masks can
be taken from the QTouch Studio Pin Configuration Wizard and can be copied at
appropriate place in the main.c file as explained in the example projects provided.
QTOUCH_STUDIO_MASKS macro is used for providing pin configurability feature for
QTouch Acquisition method libraries.
In case the macro QTOUCH_STUDIO_MASKS enabled in project space,
SNS_array and SNSK_array takes values that are supplied by the user in main.c files.
This will reduce the code memory foot print of the library.
In case the macro QTOUCH_STUDIO_MASKS is not enabled in project space,
SNS_array and SNSK_array are calculated internal to the library according to the
configured sensors.
Note:
1. Port pin configurability is enabled for the following configurations,
4- channel intraport configuration
8-channel intraport configuration
12-channel configuration
16- channel configuration
2. In case, the user wants to use the pin configurability for the other supported
configurations, (4- channel interport and 8-channel interport), the user has to enable the
macro _STATIC_PORT_PIN_CONF_ in his project space.
5.8.1.1 Rules for configurable SNS-SNSK Mask Generation
X X X
SNS1=PORTA
PORT PAIR 1 Ch2 Ch1 Ch0
X X X
SNSK1=PORTB89
X X X
SNS2=PORTC
PORT PAIR 2 Ch5 Ch4 Ch3
X X X
SNSK2=PORTD
1. The channel numbers are allocated based on enabled SNS pins starting from LSBit of
port 1(SNS1) and ending with MSBit of port 2(SNS2).
2. The number of SNS pins in a port pair should be equal to the SNSK pins in the same port
pair so it can form a pair.
3. The first SNS port pin should always be mapped to the first SNSK port pin in any port
pair. Similarly the second SNS port pin should always be mapped to second SNSK pin
and so on.
4. Even sensors with in a port pair should be placed in one mask and odd sensors with-in a
port pair should be placed in the second mask. In case of interport, first channel should
always start with odd masks and then even masks is filled .
5. All the three channels for ROTORS and SLIDERS should be placed within the same
mask. And should be in the same port pair.
6. Keys on adjacent channels should be placed on different masks.
7. For 8 channel case when 2 ports are enabled, the pins for the 8 channels can be spread
on the 2 ports. The pin configuration is done based on the rules mentioned above.
8. For 16 channel case when 2 ports are enabled, all the pins for the 16 channels are
allocated among the pins of the 2 ports.
5.8.1.1.1 Example for 8 channel interport mask Calculation with one port pair
X X X
SNS1=PORTA
Ch2 Ch1 Ch0
X X X
SNSK1=PORTB
This example is for interport 8 channel library with only one port pair used.
Channel0 is A0B2,Channel1 is A3B5 and Channel2 is A6B7 are enabled for the 8
channel library.
The SNS_array and SNSK_array masks are calculated by the Qtouch Studio with rules
mentioned above.
In this case, the SNS_array and SNSK_array values will be as mentioned below:90 8207L-AT42-05/12
SNS_array[0][0]=0x41; (SNS even mask for port pair 1)
SNS_array[0][1]=0x08; (SNS odd mask for port pair 1)
SNS_array[1][0]=0x00; (SNS even mask for port pair 2)
SNS_array[1][1]=0x00; (SNS odd mask for port pair 2)
SNSK_array[0][0]=0x84; (SNSK even mask for port pair 1)
SNSK_array[0][1]=0x20; (SNSK odd mask for port pair 1)
SNSK_array[1][0]=0x00; (SNSK even mask for port pair 2)
SNSK_array[1][1]=0x00; (SNSK odd mask for port pair 2)
As there is no second port pair used for this, so that’s why SNS_array[1][0],
SNS_array[1][1], SNSK_array[0][1] and SNSK_array[1][1] are having value zero.
5.8.1.1.2 Example for 8 channel intraport mask Calculation with two port pairs
X X X
SNS1=PORTA
Ch2 Ch1 Ch0
X X X
SNSK1=PORTA
X X X
SNS2=PORTB
Ch5 Ch4 Ch3
X X X
SNSK2=PORTB
This example is for intraport 8 channel library with two port pair used.
Channel0 is A1A3,Channel1 is A4A5 and Channel2 is A6A7 are enabled in the first port
pair. Channel3 is B1B2,Channel4 is B3B4 and Channel5 is B5B6 are enabled in the
second port pair.
The SNS_array and SNSK_array masks are calculated by the Qtouch Studio with rules
mentioned above.
In this case, the SNS_array and SNSK_array values will be as mentioned below:91
SNS_array[0][0]=0x52; (SNS even mask for port pair 1)
SNS_array[0][1]=0x00; (SNS odd mask for port pair 1)
SNS_array[1][0]=0x2a; (SNS even mask for port pair 2)
SNS_array[1][1]=0x00; (SNS odd mask for port pair 2)
SNSK_array[0][0]=0xa8; (SNSK even mask for port pair 1)
SNSK_array[0][1]=0x00; (SNSK odd mask for port pair 1)
SNSK_array[1][0]=0x54; (SNSK even mask for port pair 2)
SNSK_array[1][1]=0x00; (SNSK odd mask for port pair 2)
In case of Intraport, odd SNS_array and SNSK_array masks are always zero.So that’s
why SNS_array[0][1] ,SNS_array[1][1], SNSK_array[0][1] and SNSK_array[1][1] are zero
for both the port pairs.
5.8.1.1.3 Example for 12 channel intraport-interport mask Calculation with two port
pairs
X X X
SNS1=PORTA
Ch2 Ch1 Ch0
X X X
SNSK1=PORTA
X X X
SNS2=PORTB
Ch5 Ch4 Ch3
X X X
SNSK2=PORTD
This example is for intraport-interport 12 channel library with two port pair used.
Channel0 is A1A3,Channel1 is A4A5 and Channel2 is A6A7 are enabled in the first port
pair. Channel3 is B1D2,Channel4 is B3D4 and Channel5 is B5D6 are enabled in the
second port pair.
The SNS_array and SNSK_array masks are calculated by the Qtouch Studio with rules
mentioned above.
In this case, the SNS_array and SNSK_array values will be as mentioned below:92 8207L-AT42-05/12
SNS_array[0][0]=0x52; (SNS even mask for port pair 1)
SNS_array[0][1]=0x00; (SNS odd mask for port pair 1)
SNS_array[1][0]=0x22; (SNS even mask for port pair 2)
SNS_array[1][1]=0x08; (SNS odd mask for port pair 2)
SNSK_array[0][0]=0xa8; (SNSK even mask for port pair 1)
SNSK_array[0][1]=0x00; (SNSK odd mask for port pair 1)
SNSK_array[1][0]=0x44; (SNSK even mask for port pair 2)
SNSK_array[1][1]=0x10; (SNSK odd mask for port pair 2)
As the first port pair is intraport, so that’s why SNS_array[0][1] and SNSK_array[0][1] are
zero as odd masks are always zero in case of Intraport.
5.8.1.1.4 Example for 16 channel intreport-interport mask Calculation with two port
pairs
X X X
SNS1=PORTA
PORT PAIR 1 Ch2 Ch1 Ch0
X X X
SNSK1=PORTB
X X X
SNS2=PORTC
PORT PAIR 2 Ch5 Ch4 Ch3
X X X
SNSK2=PORTD
This example is for interport-interport 16 channel library with two port pair used.
Channel0 is A2B0,Channel1 is A4B3 and Channel2 is A5B6 are enabled in the first port
pair. Channel3 is C1D2,Channel4 is C3D3 and Channel5 is C5D4 are enabled in the
second port pair.
The SNS_array and SNSK_array masks are calculated by the Qtouch Studio with rules
mentioned above.93
In this case, the SNS_array and SNSK_array values will be as mentioned below:
SNS_array[0][0]=0x24; (SNS even mask for port pair 1)
SNS_array[0][1]=0x10; (SNS odd mask for port pair 1)
SNS_array[1][0]=0x22; (SNS even mask for port pair 2)
SNS_array[1][1]=0x08; (SNS odd mask for port pair 2)
SNSK_array[0][0]=0x41; (SNSK even mask for port pair 1)
SNSK_array[0][1]=0x08; (SNSK odd mask for port pair 1)
SNSK_array[1][0]=0x14; (SNSK even mask for port pair 2)
SNSK_array[1][1]=0x08; (SNSK odd mask for port pair 2)
5.8.1.2 How to Use QTouch Studio For Pin Configurability
Note: The Qtouch Composer is available for few select set of devices.But user can use Qtouch
Studio 4.4 for the devices which are not supported in Qtouch Composer.
The following steps describe the details on how to use pin configurability for QTouch
Acquisition method:
1. Open AVR QTouch Studio .Enable the Design Mode Radio button on the left hand side of
the screen.
Figure 5-22 Selecting the Design mode in the AVR QTouch Studio
1. Go to File Menu option and click New Design.94 8207L-AT42-05/12
Figure 5-23 Selecting the New Design in the AVR QTouch Studio
2. In the Create New Design Window, give the Project name and Kit Technology (QTouch in
this case) and and Number of sensors (Keys/Rotors/Sliders) and click Create Design.
Figure 5-24: Creating New Design in the AVR QTouch Studio
3. After Creating Design, the new screen pops up which shows all the sensors which have
been created.95
Figure 5-25: New Design Sensors in the AVR QTouch Studio virtual kit
4. Now Go to Tools->Pin Configuration Wizard.Pin configuration
Figure 5-26: Selecting the pin configuration wizard for theDesign
5. Pin configuration Window will pop up with the information on the usage of the tool.
Click Next to proceed to the configuration.96 8207L-AT42-05/12
Figure 5-27: : Start page of the wizard
6. Select the MCU and click Next as shown below.97
Figure 5-28: Selecting the MCU for the New Design
7. Select the SNS and SNSK ports needs for the design and click Next.
Figure 5-29: Selecting SNS and SNSK ports in the New Design98 8207L-AT42-05/12
8. Select the pins used for the design and click Next
If there is error in the selection of the pins (Ex: conflictin pins used), a red marker will be
appear and the user cannot proceed to next step in configuration until the user has done the
correct pin selection.
Now once the selection is done without errors, Click Next
Figure 5-30: Selecting the SNS and SNSK Port Pins in the new Design( With Error)99
Figure 5-31: Selecting the SNS and SNSK Port Pins in the new Design( Without Error)
Once the pins are selected, Pin Wizard will provide the summary report .Check whether details
are correct as specified.Click Next
Figure 5-32: Summary report100 8207L-AT42-05/12
Figure 5-33: Code Generation tab in Pin Configuration wizard
9. In the New Window Screen, the code is shown on the
screen.QTOUCH_STUDIO_MASKS needs to be enabled in the project option or in
touch_ config.h file. And in the main.c file, this code SNS_array and SNSK_array needs
to be copied from here and put under QTOUCH_STUDIO_MASKS macro as shown
below in the main.c file:
#ifdef QTOUCH_STUDIO_MASKS
SNS_array[0][0]=0x09;
SNS_array[0][1]=0x22;
SNS_array[1][0]=0x00;
SNS_array[1][1]=0x00;
SNSK_array[0][0]=0x14;
SNSK_array[0][1]=0x88;
SNSK_array[1][0]=0x00;
SNSK_array[1][1]=0x00;
#endif
Note:
1. To use 4 and 8 channel libraries(interport case) for pin configurability ,
_STATIC_PORT_PIN_CONF_ macro needs to be enabled in the touch_config.h file.101
2. QTOUCH_STUDIO_MASKS needs to be enabled if using pin configurability .If not enabled
then, static pin mapping will work same as in the earlier versions of the libraries
5.8.2 Pin Configuration for QMatrix Acquisition Method
The QMatrix acquisition method libraries needs to be used after configuring X and YA and
YB lines on IO pins of the port as described in the configuration rules described in the
section below. The QTouch Studio Pin Configurator Wizard can be used to assign X, YA,
YB, SMP lines on the pins and rules are internally taken care in the Qtouch Studio Pin
Configurator Wizard.
The snippets can be taken from the QTouch Studio Pin Configurator Wizard and copied to
appropriate places in the main.c and touch_ config.h files in the example projects provided.
5.8.2.1 Configuration Rules:
1. The X lines can be configured on different ports up to a maximum of 3 ports
Ex: NUM_X_PORTS = 3 (maximum value supported). However the possible values
are NUM_X_PORTS = 1 or NUM_X_PORTS = 2 or NUM_X_PORTS = 3
2. The X lines can be configured on the three different ports.
3. The X lines can be configured on any pins of the ports selected above
Ex: X0 on PB2, X1 on PD5, X2 on PE0, X3 on PD1( when NUM_X_LINES= 4),
Provided that these pins do not conflict with the other pins for touch sensing or with the
host application usage.
4. The Y lines can be configured on the any of the pins of the ports selected
Ex: Any pins on the PORT_YA and PORT_YB selected.
Suppose, PORT_YA is D, and PORT_YB is C
Since, pin 5 and pin 1 PORTD are already used for X lines(X1, X3), the user can select
any of the remaining pins for Y0A lines. Suppose that Y0 is on pin2 and Y1 is on pin6
Hence, Y0A – PD2, Y0B – PC2, Y1A – PD6, Y1B – PC6,
5. All the Qmatrix usage Pins X lines,YA lines, YB lines and SMP line can be on same
port.Both YA and YB lines can share the same port. And the YA and YB need not be on
same corresponding pins of the ports.The Macro SHARED_YAYB should be defined as 1
if YA and YB are on same port else should be defined as 0.
6. The PORT_YB is fixed for each device and should be same as the PORT on which the
ADC input pins are available.
7. The SMP pin can be configured on any of the IO PORT pins available.
Ex: PORT_SMP = D
SMP_PIN = 7 as this pin is not being used by touch sensing.
Note:
Please take care that the touch sensing pins do not conflict with other IO pins used by host
application 102 8207L-AT42-05/12
5.8.2.2 How to use QTouch Studio for Pin Configurability:
Note: The Qtouch Composer is available for few select set of devices.But user can use Qtouch
Studio 4.4 for the devices which are not supported in Qtouch Composer. Also YA,YB shared on
same port feature is available in Qtouch Composer and not available in Qtouch Studio
4.4.Please refer section 5.6.10.3
The following steps describe the details on how to use pin configurability for QMatix
Acquisition method:
1. Open AVR Qtouch Studio .Enable the Design Mode Radio button on the left hand
side of the screen..
Figure 5-34: Selecting the Design mode in the AVR QTouch Studio
2. Go to File Menu option and click New Design103
Figure 5-35: Selecting New Design
3. In the Create New Design Window, give the Project name and Kit Technology
(QMatrix in this case) and Number of sensors (Keys/Rotors/Sliders) and click Create
Design.
Figure 5-36 Creating New Design in the AVR QTouch Studio104 8207L-AT42-05/12
After Creating Design , the new design mode shows the virtual kit view with sensors that
have been created in some order.
Figure 5-37: New Design Sensors in the AVR QTouch Studio
4. Now Go to Tools->Pin Configuration Wizard as shown below.
Figure 5-38: Selecting the pin configuration wizard
5. Pin configuration Window will pop up with the information on the usage of the tool.
Click Next to proceed.105
Figure 5-39: Start window of the configuration wizard
6. .Select the MCU and click Next as shown below.
Figure 5-40: MCU selection window from the configuration wizard.
7. Select the Channels needed for the design from the list provided and click Next.106 8207L-AT42-05/12
If 6 channels are needed, the next immediate value that suits the design needs to be
selected. Ie., 8 channels (4 x 2 ) configuration.
Figure 5-41: Selecting channels and configuration in the New Design
8. Select the pins used for the design and click Next.
If there is error in the selection of the pins (Ex: conflictin pins used), a red marker will be
appear and the user cannot proceed to next step in configuration until the user has done the
correct pin selection.
Now once the selection is done without errors, Click Next.107
Figure 5-42: Selecting the X,YA,YB,SMP Pins in the new Design with errors.
Figure 5-43: Selecting the X,YA,YB,SMP Pins in the new Design without errors.
Once the pins are selected, Pin Wizard will provide the summary report .Check whether details
are correct as specified.Click Next.108 8207L-AT42-05/12
If there are some errors that are found in the summary report, the user can click “back” button
and modify the changes needed.
Figure 5-44: Summary report
Figure 5-45: Code Generation tab in Pin Configuration wizard
9. The code is shown in the New Window Screen.
Note: Use FILL_OUT_YA_LINE_INFO and FILL_OUT_YB_LINE_INFO code instead of 109
FILL_OUT_Y_LINE_INFO as now YA and YB can be shared on same port.
The code can be copied using the “copy code” and pasted in the main.c and touch_config
.h file,
a. In touch _config.h,
Copy the following header definitions as part of the preprocessor directives in
the project space or in the beginning of the file
#define NUM_X_PORTS 2
#define PORT_X_1 B
#define PORT_X_2 D
#define PORT_YA D
#define PORT_YB C
#define SMP_PORT D
#define SMP_PIN 7
#define SHARED_YAYB 0
b. In main.c ,
Copy the code as below
x_line_info_t x_line_info[NUM_X_LINES]= {
FILL_OUT_X_LINE_INFO(1,1);
FILL_OUT_X_LINE_INFO(2,2);
FILL_OUT_X_LINE_INFO(1,3);
FILL_OUT_X_LINE_INFO(2,0);
};
y_line_info_t ya_line_info[NUM_Y_LINES]= {
FILL_OUT_YA_LINE_INFO(1);
FILL_OUT_YA_LINE_INFO(3);
};
y_line_info_t yb_line_info[NUM_Y_LINES]= {
FILL_OUT_YB_LINE_INFO(1);
FILL_OUT_YB_LINE_INFO(3);
};
Note: If YA,YB shared on same port feature is needed , then apart from the above Macros
#define SHARED_YAYB needs to be enabled as 1.
5.9 MISRA Compliance Report
This section lists the compliance and deviations for MISRA standards of coding practice for the
QTouch and QMatrix acquisition method libraries.110 8207L-AT42-05/12
5.9.1 What is covered
The QTouch and QMatrix acquisition method libraries adhere to the MISRA standards. The
additional reference code provided in the form of sample applications is not guaranteed to be
MISRA compliant.
5.9.2 Target Environment
Development Environment IAR Embedded Workbench
MISRA Checking software The MISRA C Compliance has been performed for the library
using MISRA C 2004 Rules in IAR Workbench development
environment.
MISRA Rule set applied MISRAC 2004 Rule Set
5.9.3 Deviations from MISRA C Standards
5.9.3.1 QTouch acquisition method libraries
The QTouch acquisition method libraries were subject to the above mentioned MISRA
compliance rules. The following exceptions have not been fixed as they are required for the
implementation of the library.
Applicable
Release
QTouch libraries version
5.0
Rule No Rule Description Exception noted / How it is addressed
1.1 Rule states that all code
shall conform to ISO 9899
standard C, with no
extensions permitted.
This Rule is not supported as the library
implementation requires IAR extensions like
__interrupt. These intrinsic functions relate to
device hardware functionality, and cannot
practically be avoided.
10.1 Rule states that implicit
conversion from Underlying
long to unsigned long
The library uses macros to combine symbol
definitions to form a unique expanded symbol
name and in this, the usage of unsigned qualifiers
for numeric constants (e.g. 98u) causes name
mangling. This is the only occurrence of this error
in the library.
10.6 This Rule says that a 'U'
suffix shall be applied to all
constants of 'unsigned' type
The library uses macros to combine symbol
definitions to form a unique expanded symbol
name and in this, the usage of unsigned qualifiers
for numeric constants (e.g. 98u) causes name
mangling. This is the only occurrence of this error
in the library.
14.4 Rule states that go-to
statement should not be
used.
The library uses conditional jump instructions to
reduce the code footprint at a few locations and
this is localized to small snippets of code. Hence
this rule is not supported.
19.10
Rule states that In the
definition of a function-like
macro, each instance of a
parameter shall be enclosed
in parenthesis
There is one instance where the library breaks this
rule where two macro definitions are combined to
form a different symbol name. Usage of
parenthesis cannot be used in this scenario.
19.12 Rule states that there shall
be at most one occurrence
of the # or ## preprocessor
operator in a single macro
definition
There is one instance in the library where this rule
is violated where the library concatenates two
macro definitions to arrive at a different definition. 111
5.9.3.2 QMatrix acquisition method libraries
The QMatrix acquisition method software was subject to the above mentioned MISRA compliance
rules. The following exceptions have not been fixed as they are required for the implementation of
the library.
Applicable
release
QTouch libraries ver 5.0
Rule No Rule Description Exceptions Reason
1.1 Rule states that all code
shall conform to ISO 9899
standard C, with no
extensions permitted.
This Rule is not supported as the library
implementation requires IAR extensions like
__interrupt. These intrinsic functions relates to
device hardware functionality, and cannot
practically be avoided
10.1 Rule states that Illegal
implicit conversion from
Underlying long to unsigned
long
The library uses macros to combine symbol
definitions to form a unique expanded symbol
name and in this, the usage of unsigned qualifiers
for numeric constants (e.g. 98u) causes name
mangling. This is the only occurrence of this error
in the library.
10.6 This Rule says that a 'U'
suffix shall be applied to all
constants of 'unsigned' type
The library uses macros to combine symbol
definitions to form a unique expanded symbol
name and in this, the usage of unsigned qualifiers
for numeric constants (e.g. 98u) causes name
mangling. This is the only occurrence of this error
in the library.
19.10
Rule states that In the
definition of a function-like
macro, each instance of a
parameter shall be enclosed
in parenthesis
There is one instance where the library breaks this
rule where two macro definitions are combined to
form a different symbol name. Usage of
parenthesis cannot be used in this scenario.
19.12 Rule states that there shall
be at most one occurrence
of the # or ## preprocessor
operator in a single macro
definition
There is one instance in the library where this rule
is violated where the library concatenates two
macro definitions to arrive at a different definition.
5.10Known Issues
Issue Cause Remedy / workaround
Buiding QTouch Libraries Release 5.0 with
WinAVR Compiler results in Linker Error.
(Skipping Library libavrxxx.a, File not found).
QTouch Libraries
Release 5.0 are
build with Atmel
Studio6 Native
Toolchain Flavor.
Always use Native Toolchain Flavor
(Advanced Tab in Project properties)
setting in Atmel Studio6 for Building
QTouch Library Release.
The GCC example projects for QMatrix does not
compile the delay cycles
(QT_DELAY_CYCLES) above a value of 5
because of the preprocessor expansions.
Recommended to remove UL from
the preprocessor constants and in
the chain of macros used for
QT_DELAY_CYCLES. Valid for
QT_DELAY_CYCLES = 5,10,25,50.
Compiling QT600 project files throws These variables are available in 112 8207L-AT42-05/12
unused variable warning. the debug protocol for future use.
When using IAR workbench for ATSAM to
integrate the touch libraries, the linker
would generate a warning indicating:
Warning[Lp005]: placement includes a mix
of sections with content (example "ro data
section .data_init in xfiles.o(dl7M_tl_if.a)")
and sections without content (example "rw
data section .data in xfiles.o(dl7M_tl_if.a)")
Warning[Lp006]: placement includes a mix
of writable sections (example "rw data
section .data in xfiles.o(dl7M_tl_if.a)") and
non-writable sections (example "ro data
section .data_init in xfiles.o(dl7M_tl_if.a)")
This is because
we link the
library in RW
data section.
5.11Checklist
This section lists troubleshooting tips and common configuration tips.
Symptom Cause Action
Sensors do not go into detect or
have unknown results
Multiplexing pins
used by QTouch
libraries in your
design
Check the Pins used for QTouch or
QMatrix acquisition methods do not
overlap with the applications usage
of the ports
Signal values report arbitrary
values Stray capacitance
Check the sensor design and
minimize stray capacitance
interference in your design
Waveforms of charging /
discharging of channels do not
show up properly in oscilloscopes
JTAG ICE connected
to the board
Try disconnecting the JTAG ICE
completely from the kit
When using the example
applications, the debug values for
some of the channels does not
display appropriate values
JTAG Pins are
enabled in the target.
JTAG Pins are explicitly needs to
be disabled in the main.c file
/* disable JTAG pins */
MCUCR |= (1u << JTD);
MCUCR |= (1u << JTD)113
6 Device Specific Libraries
6.1 Introduction
This section provides an overview of the usage of Device specific QTouch Libraries. Device
Specific Libraries have been provided for special devices, which are not covered as part of
Generic Libraries.
6.2 Devices supported
The following devices are covered by the Device Specific QTouch Libraries.
1. AT32UC3L0, AT32UCL3U/L4U family devices.
2. ATtiny10, ATtiny20 and ATtiny40 devices.
6.3 QTouch Library for AT32UC3L devices
ATMEL QTouch Library for UC3L can be used for embedding capacitive touch buttons, sliders
and wheels functionality into UC3L application. The QTouch Library for UC3L uses the Capacitive
Touch Module (CAT) that senses touch on external capacitive touch sensors.
This Section describes the QTouch Library Application Programming Interface (API) for QMatrix
and QTouch method acquisition using the AT32UC3L devices.
6.3.1 Salient Features of QTouch Library for UC3L
6.3.1.1 QMatrix method sensor
• N Touch Channels formed by an X by Y matrix require (X+2Y+1) physical pins (when
using internal discharge mode), N=X*Y. Please refer Figure 37 for pin requirements in
different modes.
• 1 to 136 Touch Channels can be configured.
• Max X Lines = 17, Max Y Lines = 8.
• Button is formed using 1 Touch Channel.
• Slider is formed using 3 to 8 Touch Channels.
• Wheel is formed using 3 to 8 Touch Channels.
6.3.1.2 QTouch method sensor
• 2 Physical pins per Touch Channel.
• QTouch Sensors can be divided into two groups Group A and Group B.
• Each QTouch group can be configured with different properties.
• 1 to 17 Touch Channels can be configured.
• Button is formed using 1 Touch Channel.
• Slider is formed using 3 Touch Channels.114 8207L-AT42-05/12
• Wheel is formed using 3 Touch Channels.
6.3.1.3 Autonomous QTouch sensor
• A Single QTouch sensor that is capable of detecting touch or proximity without CPU
intervention.
• Allows proximity or activation detection in low-power sleep modes.
6.3.1.4 Additional Features
• Standalone QMatrix, QTouch Group A/B or Autonomous QTouch operation.
• Support for operation of two or more methods at the same time.
o Scenario 1: QMatrix and Autonomous QTouch method at the same time.
o Scenario 2: QTouch Group A, QTouch Group B & Autonomous QTouch at the
same time.
o Scenario 3: QMatrix, QTouch Group A/B and Autonomous QTouch at the same
time.
• Disable/Re-enable Sensors at any given time for reduced power consumption.
• Raw data acquisition mode without any post-processing of data.
• External synchronization to reduce 50 or 60 Hz mains interference.
• Spread spectrum sensor drive capability.
• QTouch Studio-Touch Analyzer support to fine tune touch implementation.
• IAR and GCC Tool chain support.
• MISRA Compliant, MISRAC 2004 Rule Set.
• Single Library for QMatrix, QTouch Group A/B and Autonomous QTouch methods.
6.3.2 Device variants supported for UC3L
Below is the list of different devices in AT32UC3L family that is supported by the QTouch library.
1. AT32UC3L016, AT32UC3L032, AT32UC3L064
2. ATUC64L3U, ATUC128L3U, ATUC256L3U (Studio 6 Support only.)
3. ATUC64L4U, ATUC128L4U, ATUC256L4U (Studio 6 Support only.)
For capacitive touch sensing module related information Refer to, “Capacitive touch module
(CAT)” of the datasheet.
6.3.3 Development tool support for UC3L
The QTouch libraries for AT32UC3L devices are supported for the following development tools.
Tool Version
IAR Embedded Workbench for Atmel AVR32.
IAR32 Compiler. 4.1
Atmel Studio 6. GCC Compiler 6.0
Table 8 Development tool support for UC3L QTouch Library115
6.3.4 Overview of QTouch Library API for UC3L
The diagram below captures the high level arrangement of the QTouch Library for UC3L API.
The QTouch Library for UC3L API can be used for Sensor configuration, Sensor Acquisition
parameter setting and Sensor Enable/Disable operations. Based on this input Sensor
configuration, the QTouch Library takes care of the initialization, configuration and acquisition
data capture operations using the CAT module. The UC3L CAT module interfaces with the
external capacitive touch sensors and is capable of performing QTouch and QMatrix method
acquisition. For an Overview of QMatrix and QTouch Capacitive Touch acquisition, refer Section
5.2.
The raw acquisition data from the CAT module is processed by the QTouch Library. The
Adjacent Key Suppression (AKS), Detect Integration mechanism, Drift compensation and
Automatic Recalibration components of the Touch Library aid in providing a robust Touch
performance. Once the raw acquisition data is processed, the individual Sensor Status and
Wheel/Slider position information is provided to the user by means of a measurement complete
callback operation.
Figure 35 Overview diagram of QTouch Library for UC3L116 8207L-AT42-05/12
6.3.5 Acquisition method support for UC3L
With the QTouch Library for UC3L, it is possible for a user to configure the following types of
Sensors.
• QMatrix method sensors.
• QTouch Group A method sensors.
• QTouch Group B method sensors.
• Autonomous QTouch sensor.
The QTouch Library for UC3L API has been arranged such that it is possible for the user
application either to use any of the above method Standalone or two or more methods combined
together. The Table below captures the different API available under each method. For normal
operation, it is only required to use the Regular API set for each method. By using only the
Regular API set, it is possible to achieve reduced code memory usage when using the QTouch
Library. The Helper API is provided for added flexibility to the user application.
Acquisition method Regular API Helper API
QMatrix method API
touch_qm_sensors_init
touch_qm_sensor_config
touch_qm_sensors_calibrate
touch_qm_sensors_start_acquisition
touch_event_dispatcher
touch_qm_sensor_update_config
touch_qm_sensor_get_config
touch_qm_channel_update_burstlen
touch_qm_update_global_param
touch_qm_get_global_param
touch_qm_get_libinfo
touch_qm_sensor_get_delta
touch_deinit
QTouch Group A/B
method API
(The first parameter to the
QTouch API, allows to
distinguish between QTouch
Group A and QTouch Group
B.)
touch_qt_sensors_init
touch_qt_sensor_config
touch_qt_sensors_calibrate
touch_qt_sensors_start_acquisition
touch_event_dispatcher
touch_qt_sensor_update_config
touch_qt_sensor_get_config
touch_qt_update_global_param
touch_qt_get_global_param
touch_qt_get_libinfo
touch_qt_sensor_get_delta
touch_qt _sensor_disable
touch_qt _sensor_reenable
touch_deinit
Autonomous QTouch API touch_at_sensor_init
touch_at_sensor_enable
touch_at_sensor_disable
touch_at_sensor_update_config
touch_at_sensor_get_config
touch_at_get_libinfo
touch_deinit
Table 9 Acquisition method specific API
6.3.6 API State machine for UC3L
The QTouch Library State machine diagram captures the different library States, Events that are
allowed in each State and Event transition from one State to the other. The QTouch Library
maintains the States of QMatrix, QTouch Group A and QTouch Group B methods independently.
This means that QMatrix can be in a state that is different from the state of QTouch Group A or B
and vice versa.
117
For the case of Autonomous QTouch, only the TOUCH_STATE_NULL and TOUCH_STATE_INIT
states apply in the State diagram.
• The touch_at_sensor_init event causes a transition from TOUCH_STATE_NULL to
TOUCH_STATE_INIT.
• The touch_deinit event causes a transition from TOUCH_STATE_INIT to
TOUCH_STATE_NULL.
Figure 36 State Diagram of QTouch Library for UC3L
6.3.7 QMatrix method sensor operation for UC3L
6.3.7.1 QMatrix method pin selection for UC3L
Please refer AT32UC3L datasheet Table 28-2 Pin Selection Guide and Table 3-1 GPIO
Controller Function multiplexing, for mapping between the QMatrix method pin name and the
GPIO pin. It is possible to configure a maximum of 17 X Lines and 8 Y-Yk pairs. The X Line X8
(PA16) cannot be used for the QMatrix method as it is required to use this pin for the ACREFN
function.
The CAT module provides an option to enable a nominal output resistance of 1kOhm on specific
CAT module pins during the burst phase. The Table below captures the different QMatrix method
pin wherein a Resistive Drive can be optionally enabled. The rows marked with Grey indicate
that Resistive Drive option is not available on that pin. By carefully choosing the QMatrix method
TOUCH_
STATE_INIT
TOUCH_
STATE_ NULL
TOUCH_
STATE_
READY
TOUCH_
STATE_BUSY
touch_xx_sensors_init
touch_xx_sensors_calibrate
touch_xx_sensor_config
touch_xx_sensor_get_config
touch_xx_get_global_param
touch_xx_get_libinfo
touch_xx_sensor_update_config
touch_xx_sensor_get_config
touch_xx_update_global_param
touch_xx_get_global_param
touch_xx_get_sensor_delta
touch_xx_get_libinfo
touch_xx_get_libinfo
QTouch Library for UC3L State Diagram
TOUCH_
STATE_
CALIBRATE
touch_deinit
touch_deinit
touch_deinit
touch_qm_channel_udpate_burstlen
touch_qt_sensor_disable
touch_qt_sensor_reenable
touch_qm_channel_udpate_burstlen
touch_qt_sensor_disable
touch_qt_sensor_reenable
touch_xx_sensor_update_config
touch_xx_sensor_get_config
touch_xx_update_global_param
touch_xx_get_global_param
touch_xx_get_libinfo
touch_xx_sensors_calibrate
touch_xx_sensors_start_acquisition
measure_complete_callback
(provide measured data and
touch status)
touch_deinit
xx = qm, qt
Sensor state machine for QMatrix
and QTouch GroupA/B118 8207L-AT42-05/12
X and Yk pins wherein Resistive Drive can be enabled, saving on external components is
possible.
Section 6.3.1.1 provides detail on the number of Pin and Touch channels required for different
QMatrix method sensor. The hardware arrangement for Wheel or Slider must be such that all
Touch channels corresponding to the Wheel or Slider belong to the same Yk Line.
Also, Section 6.3.11 indicates the various Pin Configuration options for the QTouch Library that
can be used to specify a user defined configuration.
CAT Module Pin Name QMatrix method Pin Name
CSA0 X0
CSB0 X1
CSA1 Y0
CSB1 YK0
CSA2 X2
CSB2 X3
CSA3 Y1
CSB3 YK1
CSA4 X4
CSB4 X5
CSA5 Y2
CSB5 YK2
CSA6 X6
CSB6 X7
CSA7 Y3
CSB7 YK3
CSA8 X8
CSB8 X9
CSA9 Y4
CSB9 YK4
CSA10 X10
CSB10 X11
CSA11 Y5
CSB11 YK5
CSA12 X12
CSB12 X13
CSA13 Y6
CSB13 YK6
CSA14 X14
CSB14 X15
CSA15 Y7
CSB15 YK7
CSA16 X16
CSB16 X17
Table 10 QMatrix Resistive drive pin option
(The rows marked with Grey indicate that Resistive Drive option is not available on that pin)
6.3.7.2 QMatrix method Schematic for UC3L
6.3.7.2.1 Internal Discharge mode
The CAT module provides an internal discharge arrangement for QMatrix method. When this
arrangement is used along with the Resistive drive capability, minimal external component is
required as shown in the case A of Figure 27. When the Resistive drive is option is not enabled,
it is recommended to use 1kOhm resistors on X and Yk Lines external to the UC3L device. This
hardware arrangement is shown in case B.119
6.3.7.2.2 External Discharge mode
When the External Discharge arrangement is used, a logic-level (DIS) pin is connected to an
external resistor (Rdis) that can be used to control the discharge of the Capacitors. A typical
value for Rdis is 100 kOhm. This value of Rdis will give a discharge current of approximately
1.1V/(100 kOhm) = 11 microAmp. The case C shows this arrangement. The Resistive drive
option on the X and Yk lines can be optionally enabled or disabled with this arrangement. When
the Resistive drive is option is not enabled, it is recommended to use 1kOhm resistors on X and
Yk Lines external to the UC3L device.
6.3.7.2.3 SMP Discharge Mode
When the SMP Discharge mode arrangement is used, a logic-level (SMP) pin is connected to the
capacitors through external high value resistors for the discharge of the capacitors. The case D
shows this arrangement. The Resistive drive option on the X and Yk lines can be optionally
enabled or disabled with this arrangement. When the Resistive drive is option is not enabled, it is
recommended to use 1kOhm resistors on X and Yk Lines external to the UC3L device.
6.3.7.2.4 VDIVEN Voltage Divider Enable option
The VDIV pin provides an option to make ACREFN a small positive voltage if required. The VDIV
pin is driven when the analog comparators are in use, and this signal can be used along with a
voltage divider arrangement to create a small positive offset on the ACREFN pin. The VDIVEN
option can be used optionally with any of the QMatrix modes discussed in the previous sections.
Typical values for Ra and Rb are Ra=8200 ohm and Rb = 50 ohm. Assuming a 3.3V I/O supply,
this will shift the comparator threshold by 3.3V*(Rb/(Ra+Rb)) which is 20 mV. The VDIVEN pin
option usage in the Internal Discharge mode scenario is shown in case E.
6.3.7.2.5 SYNC pin option
In order to prevent interference from the 50 or 60 Hz mains line the CAT can optionally trigger
QMatrix acquisition on the external SYNC input signal. The SYNC signal should be derived from
the mains line and the acquisition will trigger on a falling edge of this signal. The SYNC pin
option can be used with any of the QMatrix modes discussed in the previous sections. The
SYNC pin usage in the Internal Discharge mode scenario is shown in case F.
For QMatrix method SMP, DIS, VDIV and SYNC pin options discussed in this Section, Refer to
Section 6.3.15.2.13. 120 8207L-AT42-05/12
Figure 37 QMatrix method schematic
Atmel
AT32UC3L
Atmel
AT32UC3L
Atmel
AT32UC3L
Atmel
AT32UC3L
Atmel
AT32UC3L
Atmel
AT32UC3L
Sensors
X, Y
CAT CS0
Module
ACIFBACREFN
YmA
Y0A
Xn
X2
Sensor
n, 0
Sensor
0, m
Sensor
n, m
Sensor
0, 0
CSm
YmB
Y0B
Typical Values:
CS:4.7nF
n - number of X Lines
m - number of Y Lines
I/O Pin requirements:
X: QMatrix method X Line
YA: QMatrix method Yk Line
YB: QMatrix method Y Line
ACIFB-ACREFN: PA16 I/O pin
...
...
A. QMatrix Internal Discharge mode arrangement.
Resistive drive enabled on X and Yk Lines
Sensors
X, Y
CS0
CAT
Module
ACIFBACREFN
YmA
Y0A
Xn
RXn
X0
RX0
Sensor
n, 0
Sensor
0, m
Sensor
n, m
Sensor
0, 0
CSm
YmB
Y0B
RXn
RX0
...
...
...
B. QMatrix Internal Discharge mode arrangement.
Resistive drive disabled on X and Yk Lines
Sensors
X, Y
CS0 CAT
Module
ACIFBACREFN
YmA
Y0A
Xn
X2
Sensor
n, 0
Sensor
0, m
Sensor
n, m
Sensor
0, 0
CSm
YmB
Y0B
DIS
...
Rdis
C. QMatrix External Discharge mode arrangement.
Resistive drive enabled on X and Yk Lines
...
Sensors
X, Y
CS0
CAT
Module
ACIFBACREFN
YmA
Y0A
Xn
RXn
X0
RX0
Sensor
n, 0
Sensor
0, m
Sensor
n, m
Sensor
0, 0
CSm
YmB
Y0B
RXn
RX0
RYB0 RYBm
SMP
...
...
...
D. QMatrix SMP Discharge mode arrangement.
Resistive drive disabled on X and Yk Lines
Sensors
X, Y
CS0
CAT
Module
ACIFBACREFN
YmA
Y0A
Xn
X2
Sensor
n, 0
Sensor
0, m
Sensor
n, m
Sensor
0, 0
CSm
YmB
Y0B
...
...
VDIVEN
Ra
Rb
E. QMatrix Internal Discharge mode arrangement
with Volage Divider option enabled.
Resistive drive enabled on X and Yk Lines Sensors
X, Y
CS0
CAT
Module
ACIFBACREFN
YmA
Y0A
Xn
X2
Sensor
n, 0
Sensor
0, m
Sensor
n, m
Sensor
0, 0
CSm
YmB
Y0B
...
...
SYNC Synchronize
signal
F. QMatrix Internal Discharge mode arrangement
with External Sync option enabled.
Resistive drive enabled on X and Yk Lines
Typical Values:
CS:4.7nF
RX: 1kOhm
n - number of X Lines
m - number of Y Lines
I/O Pin requirements:
X: QMatrix method X Line
YA: QMatrix method Yk Line
YB: QMatrix method Y Line
ACIFB-ACREFN: PA16 I/O pin
Typical Values:
CS:4.7nF
Rdis: 100kOhm
n - number of X Lines
m - number of Y Lines
I/O Pin requirements:
X: QMatrix method X Line
YA: QMatrix method Yk Line
YB: QMatrix method Y Line
DIS: CAT-DIS IO pin
ACIFB-ACREFN: PA16 I/O pin
Typical Values:
CS:4.7nF
RX: 1kOhm
RYB: 1kOhm
n - number of X Lines
m - number of Y Lines
I/O Pin requirements:
X: QMatrix method X Line
YA: QMatrix method Yk Line
YB: QMatrix method Y Line
SMP: CAT-SMP IO pin
ACIFB-ACREFN: PA16 I/O pin
Typical Values:
CS:4.7nF
Ra: 16500 Ohm
Rb: 50 Ohm
n - number of X Lines
m - number of Y Lines
I/O Pin requirements:
X: QMatrix method X Line
YA: QMatrix method Yk Line
YB: QMatrix method Y Line
VDIVEN: CAT-VDIVEN IO pin
ACIFB-ACREFN: PA16 I/O pin
Typical Values:
CS:4.7nF
n - number of X Lines
m - number of Y Lines
I/O Pin requirements:
X: QMatrix method X Line
YA: QMatrix method Yk Line
YB: QMatrix method Y Line
SYNC: CAT-SYNC IO pin
ACIFB-ACREFN: PA16 I/O pin121
6.3.7.3 QMatrix method hardware resource requirement for UC3L
The clock for the CAT module, CLK_CAT, is generated by the Power Manager (PM). This clock is
turned on by default, and can be enabled and disabled in the PM. The user must ensure that
CLK_CAT is enabled before initializing the QTouch Library.
QMatrix operations also require the CAT generic clock, GCLK_CAT. This generic clock is
generated by the System Control Interface (SCIF), and is shared between the CAT and the
Analog Comparator Interface. The user must ensure that the GCLK_CAT is enabled in the SCIF
before using QMatrix functionality. For proper QMatrix operation, the frequency of GCLK_CAT
must be less than one fourth the frequency of CLK_CAT.
For QMatrix operation, the Analog comparators channels are used (using the ACIFB interface)
depending on the Y Lines enabled. See Note 4 in Section 6.3.7.4.
The QMatrix method acquisition using the CAT module requires two Peripheral DMA channels
that must be provided by the application.
6.3.7.4 QMatrix method Channel and Sensor numbering for UC3L
Sensor
4
Sensor
3
Sensor
2
Sensor
1
Ch 0
X0
X3
X2
X1
Yk0 Yk1 Yk2 Yk3
KEY
ROTOR/
SLIDER
Ch 1
Ch 2
Ch 3
Ch 4
Ch 5
Ch 6
Ch 7
Ch 8
Ch 9
Ch 10
Ch 11
Ch 12
Ch 13
Ch 14
Ch 15
Sensor 0
Sensor 5
Sensor 6
Figure 38 QMatrix channel numbering for UC3L
The above figure represents a typical 4 X 4 matrix of QMatrix sensor arrangement along with the
channel numbers. The Channel numbering starts with Channel 0 (Ch0) and increase sequentially
from Ch0 to Ch15. Similarly the Sensor numbering starts with Sensor 0. The Channel number
signifies the order in which the QTouch Library stores the acquisition data in the memory.
Note: The touch_qm_sensor_config API must follow the above Channel and Sensor numbering
when configuring the Sensors.
6.3.7.5 QMatrix method API Flow for UC3L
For the QMatrix operation, the CAT_CLK and GCLK_CAT clocks must be setup appropriately as
a first step. The QMatrix and Common configuration parameters in the touch_config_at32uc3l.h
configuration must then be set up.122 8207L-AT42-05/12
Figure 39 QMatrix API Flow diagram for UC3L
touch_qm_sensors_init()
Configure multiple
QMatrix sensors
Using the init_clock() in main.c and clock.c files,
Set the CAT_CLK Clock to appropriate value.
Set the GCLK_CAT Clock to appropriate value.
touch_qm_sensors_config()
Using the touch_config_at32uc3l.h configuration file,
Set DEF_TOUCH_QMATRIX = 1.
Set all QM_xx and TOUCH_xx macros to appropriate values.
(This includes 2 peripheral DMA Channels required for QMatrix operation.)
In the main.c file,
Set appropriate qm_burst_length[] values corresponding to all Touch channels .
Set the desired measurement_period_ms for Touch measurement.
touch_qm_sensors_calibrate()
touch_event_dispatcher()
touch_qm_sensors_start_
acquisition(NORMAL_ACQ_MODE)
Call in loop
time_to_
measure_touch
filter_callback(), if enabled
measure_complete_callback(),
measured data and Touch Status
Host Application code123
The burst length values of each Touch channel must be specified using the qm_burst_length[]
array in the main.c file. The burst length must be specified in the same order of Touch Channel
numbering.
The touch_qm_sensors_init API initializes the QTouch Library as well as the CAT module and
does the QMatrix method specific pin, register and Global Sensor configuration. The
touch_qm_sensor_config API is used to configure individual sensor. The Sensor specific
configuration parameter can be provided as input to this API.
The touch_qm_sensors_calibrate API is used to calibrate all the configured sensors thereby
preparing the sensors for acquisition. The touch_qm_sensors_start_acquisition API initiates a
QMatrix method measurement on all the configured Sensors. This API takes the peripheral DMA
channels as an input. When a filter_callback function is enabled, the touch_event_dispatcher
function calls the filter_callback function as soon as the raw acquisition data from the Sensors is
available. The user can now optionally apply any filtering routine on the raw acquisition data
before the QTouch Library does any processing on this data. (For an overview of Filter callback
usage, refer Section 5.6.6.4 Example code). Once the QTouch Library has finished processing
the acquisition data from Sensors, the touch_event_dispatcher function calls the
measure_complete_callback function indicating the end of a single Touch measurement
operation. The measure_complete_callback provides the measured data and Touch status
information. The measured data is available in the same order of Touch Channel numbering.
Note 1: The Host Application code can execute once a QMatrix acquisition is initiated with the
touch_qm_sensors_start_acqusition API. Care must be taken in the Host Application such that
the touch_event_dispatcher function is called frequently in order to process the acquired data.
For a single Touch measurement operation (between a touch_qm_sensors_start_acquisition API
call and the measure_complete_callback function being called), the touch_event_dispatcher
function may execute multiple times in order to resolve the Touch status of Sensors. Failing to
call the touch_event_dispatcher frequently can adversely impact the Touch Sensitivity.
Note 2: Once the Touch Library has been initialized for QMatrix method using the
touch_qm_sensors_init API, a new qm_burst_length[x] value of a Touch channel must be
updated only using the touch_qm_channel_update_burstlen API. It is recommended to have
qm_burst_length array as global variable as the Touch Library updates this array when the
touch_qm_channel_update_burstlen API is called.
Note 3: QMatrix burst length setting recommendation.
For a given X Line, the burst length value of ALL enabled Y Lines MUST be the same or set to
0x01(disabled). For example, the burst length value corresponding to (X0,Y1),(X0,Y2)...(X0,Yn)
must be the same. In case of a scenario, wherein it is required to have a different a burst length,
then the following option can be tried out - Enable the 1k ohm drive resistors on all the enabled Y
lines by setting the corresponding bit in the CSARES register.
Note 4: For QMatrix operation, the Analog comparators channels are used (using the ACIFB
interface) depending on the Y Lines enabled. For example, when Y lines Y2 and Y7 are enabled
the Analog comparator channels 2 and 7 are used by the CAT module for QMatrix operation.
The user can uses the rest of the Analog comparator channels in the main application. The
QTouch Library enables the ACIFB using the Control register (if not already enabled by the main
application) when the touch_qm_sensors_init API is called.124 8207L-AT42-05/12
6.3.7.6 QMatrix method Disable and Re-enable Sensor for UC3L
The touch_qm_channel_update_burstlen API can be used for Disabling and Re-enabling of
QMatrix Sensors. In order to Disable a sensor, the QMatrix burst length value of all the Touch
Channels corresponding to the Sensor must be set to 1. For Example, when a Wheel or Slider is
composed of 4 Touch Channels, the touch_qm_channel_update_burstlen API should be used to
set the burst length of all the 4 Touch Channels to 1. For the case of a Button,
touch_qm_channel_update_burstlen API should be used to set burst length of the corresponding
single Touch Channel of the Button to 1. Similarly, when re-enabling a Sensor, appropriate burst
length must be set to all the Touch channels corresponding to the Sensor.
When a QMatrix Sensor is Disabled or re-enabled, it is mandatory to force Calibration on all
Sensors. The Calibration of all Sensors is done using the touch_qm_sensors_calibrate API.
Note: When disabling a Wheel or Slider, care must be taken to set the burst length of all the
Touch channels corresponding to the Wheel or Slider to 1. If any of the Touch channels are
missed out, it may result in undesired behavior of the Wheel or Slider. Similarly when re-enabling
a Wheel or Slider, burst length of all the Touch channels corresponding to the Wheel or Slider
must be set to an appropriate value. If any of the Touch Channels are left disabled with a burst
length value 1, it may result in undesired behavior of Wheel or Slider.
6.3.8 QTouch Group A/B method sensor operation for UC3L
6.3.8.1 QTouch Group A/B method pin selection for UC3L
Please refer AT32UC3L datasheet Table 28-2 Pin Selection Guide and Table 3-1 GPIO
Controller Function multiplexing, for mapping between the QTouch method pin name
(SNS/SNSK) and the GPIO pin. The CAT module provides an option to enable a nominal output
resistance of 1kOhm on specific CAT module pins during the burst phase. The Table below
captures the different QTouch method pin wherein a Resistive Drive can be optionally enabled.
The rows marked with Grey indicate that Resistive Drive option is not available on that pin. By
carefully choosing the QTouch method SNSK pins wherein Resistive Drive can be enabled,
saving on external components is possible. Section 6.3.1.2 provides detail on the number of Pin
and Touch channels required for different QTouch method sensor. Also, Section 6.3.11 indicates
the various Pin Configuration options for the QTouch Library that can be used to specify a user
defined configuration. 125
CAT Module Pin Name QTouch method Pin Name
CSA0 SNS0
CSB0 SNSK0
CSA1 SNS1
CSB1 SNSK1
CSA2 SNS2
CSB2 SNSK2
CSA3 SNS3
CSB3 SNSK3
CSA4 SNS4
CSB4 SNSK4
CSA5 SNS5
CSB5 SNSK5
CSA6 SNS6
CSB6 SNSK6
CSA7 SNS7
CSB7 SNSK7
CSA8 SNS8
CSB8 SNSK8
CSA9 SNS9
CSB9 SNSK9
CSA10 SNS10
CSB10 SNSK10
CSA11 SNS11
CSB11 SNSK11
CSA12 SNS12
CSB12 SNSK12
CSA13 SNS13
CSB13 SNSK13
CSA14 SNS14
CSB14 SNSK14
CSA15 SNS15
CSB15 SNSK15
CSA16 SNS16
CSB16 SNSK16
Table 11 QTouch Resistive drive pin option
(The rows marked with Grey indicate that Resistive Drive option is not available on that pin.)
6.3.8.2 QTouch Group A/B method Schematic for UC3L
6.3.8.2.1 Resistive Drive option
The cases A and B of the Figure provide the schematic arrangement of QTouch Group A/B and
Autonomous QTouch Sensors. In option A, Resistive drive is enabled on SNSK line. In case B,
Resistive drive is disabled on the SNSK line and in this case, it is recommended to use 1kOhm
resistors on SNSK Line external to the UC3L device.
6.3.8.2.2 SYNC pin option
In order to prevent interference from the 50 or 60 Hz mains line the CAT can optionally trigger
QTouch Group A/B and Autonomous QTouch acquisition on the external SYNC input signal. The
SYNC signal should be derived from the mains line and the acquisition will trigger on a falling
edge of this signal. The SYNC pin usage in the Internal Discharge mode scenario is shown in
case C. For QTouch method SYNC pin options Refer to Section 6.3.15.2.13.126 8207L-AT42-05/12
Figure 40 QTouch Group A/B and Autonomous QTouch schematic arrangement
6.3.8.3 QTouch Group A/B method hardware resource requirement for UC3L
The clock for the CAT module, CLK_CAT, is generated by the Power Manager (PM). This clock is
turned on by default, and can be enabled and disabled in the PM. The user must ensure that
CLK_CAT is enabled before initializing the QTouch Library.
The QTouch method acquisition using the CAT module requires one Peripheral DMA channel
that must be provided by the application.
Atmel
AT32UC3L
CAT
Module
A. QTouch Group A/B and Autonomous QTouch arrangement.
Resistive drive enabled on SNSK Line.
Sensor
Cs
Typical Values:
Cs: 22nF
Pin requirements:
SNS: CAT QTouch method I/O pin
SNSK: CAT QTouch method I/O pin
SNSK
SNS
Atmel
AT32UC3L
CAT
Module
Sensor
Cs
Typical Values:
Cs: 22nF
Pin requirements:
SNS: CAT QTouch method I/O pin
SNSK: CAT QTouch method I/O pin
SYNC: CAT-SYNC I/O pin
SNSK
SNS
C. QTouch Group A/B and Autonomous QTouch arrangement.
Resistive drive enabled on SNSK Line.
External Synchronization enabled.
Sync
signal
SYNC
Atmel
AT32UC3L
CAT
Module
Sensor
Cs
Typical Values:
Cs: 22nF, Rs:1kOhm
Pin requirements:
SNS: CAT QTouch method I/O pin
SNSK: CAT QTouch method I/O pin
SNSK
SNS
Rs
B. QTouch Group A/B and Autonomous QTouch arrangement.
Resistive drive disabled on SNSK Line.127
6.3.8.4 QTouch Group A/B method Channel and Sensor numbering for UC3L
Figure 41 QTouch method Channel/Sensor numbering
The above Figure represents an example 4 Channel QTouch sensor arrangement along with the
channel numbers. The Channel numbering starts with the lowest SNS-SNSK QTouch method
pair number (SNS2-SNSK2 being the least in this case) and increases as the SNS-SNSK pair
number increases. Similarly the Sensor numbering starts with Sensor 0. The Channel number
signifies the order in which the QTouch Library stores the acquisition data in the memory.
Figure 42 QTouch method Channel/Sensor numbering when Group A and B are used
together
When both QTouch Group A and QTouch Group B method are used at the same time, the SNSSNSK
pairs associated with the individual group alone must be taken into consideration when
determining the Channel number.
Note: The touch_qt_sensor_config API must follow the above Channel and Sensor numbering
when configuring the Sensors.
channel 0
Sensor 0
Sensor 1
ATMEL
AT32UC3L
SNSK2
SNS2
SNSK3
SNS3
SNSK5
SNS5
SNSK9
SNS9
channel 1
channel 2
channel 3
QTouch Grp A Channel 0
QTouch Grp A
Sensor 0
QTouch Grp B
Sensor 0
ATMEL
AT32UC3L
SNSK2
SNS2
SNSK3
SNS3
SNSK5
SNS5
SNSK6
SNS6
QTouch Grp A
Sensor 1
SNSK7
SNS7
SNSK9
SNS9
QTouch Grp B
Sensor 1
QTouch Grp A Channel 1
QTouch Grp A Channel 2
QTouch Grp B Channel 0
QTouch Grp A Channel 3
QTouch Grp B Channel 1 128 8207L-AT42-05/12
6.3.8.5 QTouch Group A/B method API Flow for UC3L
For the QTouch operation, the CAT_CLK must be setup appropriately as a first step. Depending
on QTouch Group that need to be used, the QTouch Group A, QTouch Group B and Common
configuration parameters in the touch_config_at32uc3l.h configuration must then be set up.
The first input argument to the QTouch API, TOUCH_QT_GRP_A or TOUCH_QT_GRP_B
indicates if the QTouch API must perform the necessary operation on Group A Sensors or Group
B Sensors. The touch_qt_sensors_init API initializes the QTouch Library as well as the CAT
module and does the QTouch method specific pin, register and Global Sensor configuration. The
touch_qt_sensor_config API is used to configure individual sensor. The Sensor specific
configuration parameter can be provided as input to this API.
The touch_qt_sensors_calibrate API is used to calibrate all the configured sensors thereby
preparing the sensors for acquisition. The touch_qt_sensors_start_acquisition API initiates a
QTouch method measurement on all the configured Sensors (corresponding to the input Touch
Group A or B). This API takes the peripheral DMA channels as an input. When a filter_callback
function is enabled, the touch_event_dispatcher function calls the filter_callback function as soon
as the raw acquisition data from the Sensors is available. The user can now optionally apply any
filtering routine on the raw acquisition data before the QTouch Library does any processing on
this data. (For an overview of Filter callback usage, refer Section 5.6.6.4 Example code). Once
the QTouch Library has finished processing the acquisition data from Sensors, the
touch_event_dispatcher function calls the measure_complete_callback function indicating the end
of a single Touch measurement operation. The measure_complete_callback provides the
measured data and Touch status information. The measured data is available in the same order
of Touch Channel numbering. Separate Filter and Measure complete callback functions must be
provided for Group A and Group B Sensors.
Note: The Host Application code can execute once a QTouch acquisition is initiated with the
touch_qt_sensors_start_acqusition API. Care must be taken in the Host Application such that the
touch_event_dispatcher function is called frequently in order to process the acquired data. For a
single Touch measurement operation (between a touch_qt_sensors_start_acquisition API call
and the measure_complete_callback function being called), the touch_event_dispatcher function
may execute multiple times in order to resolve the Touch status of Sensors. Failing to call the
touch_event_dispatcher frequently can adversely impact the Touch Sensitivity. 129
Figure 43 QTouch method API Flow diagram
touch_qt_sensors_init()
Configure multiple
QTouch sensors
Using the init_clock() in main.c and clock.c files,
Set the CAT_CLK Clock to appropriate value.
touch_qt_sensors_config()
Using the touch_config_at32uc3l.h configuration file,
Set DEF_TOUCH_QTOUCH_GRP_A = 1, if QTouch Group A is to be used.
Set DEF_TOUCH_QTOUCH_GRP_B = 1, if QTouch Group B is to be used.
Set all QTA_xx (if Group A is enabled) to appropriate values.
Set all QTB_xx (if Group B is enabled) to appropriate values.
Set all TOUCH_xx macros to appropriate values.
(This includes 1 peripheral DMA Channels required for QTouch operation.)
In the main.c file,
Set the desired measurement_period_ms for Touch measurement.
The API Sequence below must be repeated for Group A and Group B when both the
Groups are used at the same time. The first argument to the API
TOUCH_QT_GRP_A or TOUCH_QT_GRP_B distinguishes between Group A and
Group B operations. Separate Filter and Measurement complete callback functions
must be provided for Group A and Group B Sensors.
touch_qt_sensors_calibrate()
touch_event_dispatcher()
touch_qt_sensors_start_
acquisition(NORMAL_ACQ_MODE)
Call in loop
time_to_
measure_touch
filter_callback(), if enabled
measure_complete_callback(),
measured data and Touch Status
Host Application code130 8207L-AT42-05/12
6.3.8.6 QTouch Group A/B method Disable and Re-enable Sensor for UC3L
The touch_qt_sensor_disable and touch_qt_sensor_reenable API can be used for Disabling and
Re-enabling of QTouch Group A and Group B Sensors. In order to Disable or re-enable a
sensor, the API must be called with the corresponding sensor_id. Disabling a Sensor disables
the measurement process on all the Touch Channels corresponding to Sensor.
When a QTouch Sensor is Disabled or re-enabled, it is mandatory to force Calibration on all
Sensors. The Calibration of all Sensors is done using the touch_qt_sensors_calibrate API.
6.3.9 Autonomous QTouch sensor operation for UC3L
6.3.9.1 Autonomous QTouch Sensor pin selection for UC3L
The Autonomous QTouch Sensor pin selection is similar to selection of pin for QTouch Group A/B
as indicated in Section 6.3.8.1. Any one SNS-SNSK pair between SNS0-SNSK0 and SNS16-
SNSK16 can be chosen to function as an Autonomous QTouch sensor.
6.3.9.2 Autonomous QTouch sensor Schematic for UC3L
The Autonomous QTouch Sensor Sensor schematic is similar QTouch schematic as indicated in
Section 6.3.8.2.
6.3.9.3 Autonomous QTouch method hardware resource requirement for UC3L
The clock for the CAT module, CLK_CAT, is generated by the Power Manager (PM). This clock is
turned on by default, and can be enabled and disabled in the PM. The user must ensure that
CLK_CAT is enabled before initializing the QTouch Library for Autonomous QTouch.
For the Autonomous QTouch Sensor, the complete detection algorithm is implemented within the
CAT module. This allows detection of proximity or touch without CPU intervention. Since the
Autonomous QTouch Sensor operates without software interaction, this Sensor can be used to
wakeup from sleep modes when activated. The Autonomous QTouch Status change interrupt
can be used to wakeup from any of the Sleep modes shown in the Table. The ‘Static’ Sleep
mode being the deepest possible Sleep mode from which a wake up from Sleep is possible using
the Autonomous QTouch. Both an IN_TOUCH status change and OUT_OF_TOUCH status
change indication is available when using Autonomous QTouch.
The Autonomous QTouch method acquisition using the CAT module does not require any
Peripheral DMA channel for operation.
Sleep
Mode CPU HSB PBA,B
GCLK
Clock
sources Osc32 RCSYS BOD &
Bandgap
Voltage
Regulator
Idle Stop Run Run Run Run Run On Full power
Frozen Stop Stop Run Run Run Run On Full power
Standby Stop Stop Stop Run Run Run On Full power
Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop Run Run On Low power
DeepStop Stop Stop Stop Stop Run Run Off Low power
Static Stop Stop Stop Stop Run Stop Off Low power
Table 12 Sleep mode support for Autonomous QTouch131
6.3.9.4 Autonomous QTouch Sensor API Flow for UC3L
For the Autonomous QTouch operation, the CAT_CLK must be setup appropriately as a first step.
The Autonomous QTouch and Common configuration parameters in the touch_config_at32uc3l.h
configuration must then be set up.
The touch_at_sensors_init API initializes the QTouch Library as well as the CAT module for the
Autonomous QTouch sensor related pin, register and Global Sensor configuration. The
Autonomous QTouch Sensor can be enabled at any time by the Host Application. Once the
Autonomous QTouch Sensor is enabled, the CAT module performs measurements on this sensor
continuously to detect a Touch Status. When an IN_TOUCH or OUT_OF_TOUCH status is
detected, the QTouch Library calls the touch_at_status_change_interrupt_callback function to
indicate the status to the Host application. It is possible to enable and disable Autonomous
QTouch sensor multiple times in the Host application by using the touch_at_sensor_enable and
touch_at_sensor_disable API.
Figure 44 Autonomous QTouch API Flow diagram
6.3.9.5 Autonomous QTouch method Enable and Disable Sensor for UC3L
The touch_at_sensor_enable and touch_at_sensor_disable API can be used for Enabling and
Disabling and the Autonomous QTouch Sensor. Once the Autonomous QTouch sensor is
enabled, the CAT module performs continuous Touch Measurements on the Sensor in order to
detect the Touch Status.
touch_at_sensor_init()
Using the init_clock() in main.c and clock.c files,
Set the CAT_CLK Clock to appropriate value.
touch_at_sensor_enable()
Using the touch_config_at32uc3l.h configuration file,
Set DEF_TOUCH_AUTONOMOUS_QTOUCH = 1.
Set all AT_xx and TOUCH_xx macros to appropriate values.
touch_at_status_change_interrupt_callback(),
Autonomous QTouch Status
touch_at_sensor_disable()
Disable Autonomous
QTouch Sensor if required
The callback is called as long
as Autonomous QTouch
sensor is not disabled
Re-enable Autonomous
QTouch Sensor if required132 8207L-AT42-05/12
6.3.10 Raw acquisition mode support for UC3L
The QTouch Library Raw acquisition mode can be used with QMatrix, QTouch Group A and
QTouch Group B methods. When raw data acquisition mode is used, once the raw acquisition
data is available from the CAT module for all the sensors, the measure_complete_callback
function is immediately called with acquisition data (channel_signals). The channel_references,
sensor_states and rotor_slider_values data are not updated by the Touch Library in this mode.
Figure 45 Raw acquisition mode API Flow diagram
touch_xx_sensors_init()
Configure multiple
sensors
touch_xx_sensors_config()
touch_xx_sensors_calibrate()
touch_event_dispatcher()
touch_xx_sensors_start_
acquisition(RAW_ACQ_MODE)
Call in loop
time_to_
measure_touch
measure_complete_callback(),
Raw acquisition data.
Host Application code133
6.3.11 Library Configuration parameters for UC3L
The QTouch Library for UC3L provides a single configuration header file touch_config_at32uc3l.h
file for setting the various configuration parameters for each method. The different configuration
parameters corresponding to QMatrix, QTouch Group A/B and Autononmous QTouch sensors
are listed in the Table below.
Paramete
r
QMatrix QTouch Group A/B Autonomous
QTouch
Sensor
Configuration
QM_NUM_X_LINES
QM_NUM_Y_LINES
QM_NUM_SENSORS
QM_NUM_ROTORS_SLIDERS
QTx_NUM_SENSORS
QTx_NUM_ROTORS_SLIDERS None
Pin
Configuration QM_X_PINS_SELECTED
QM_Y_PAIRS_SELECTED
QM_SMP_DIS_PIN_OPTION
QM_VDIV_PIN_OPTION
QTx_SP_SELECTED AT_SP_SELECTED
Clock and
Register
Configuration
QM_GCLK_CAT_DIV
QM_CAT_CLK_DIV
QM_CHLEN
QM_SELEN
QM_CXDILEN
QM_DILEN
QM_DISHIFT
QM_MAX_ACQ_COUNT
QM_CONSEN
QM_INTREFSEL
QM_INTVREFSEL
QM_ENABLE_SPREAD_SPECTRU
M
QM_ENABLE_EXTERNAL_SYNC
QM_SYNC_TIM
QTx_CAT_CLK_DIV
QTx_CHLEN
QTx_SELEN
QTx_DILEN
QTx_DISHIFT
QTx_MAX_ACQ_COUNT
QTx_ENABLE_SPREAD_SPECTRU
M
QTx_ENABLE_EXTERNAL_SYNC
AT_CAT_CLK_DIV
AT_CHLEN
AT_SELEN
AT_DILEN
AT_DISHIFT
AT_MAX_ACQ_COUN
T
AT_ENABLE_SPREAD
_ SPECTRUM
AT_ENABLE_
EXTERNAL_SYNC
AT_FILTER
AT_OUTSENS
AT_SENSE
AT_PTHR
AT_PDRIFT
AT_NDRIFT
Peripheral
DMA
Channel
Configuration
QM_DMA_CHANNEL_0
QM_DMA_CHANNEL_1 QTx_DMA_CHANNEL_0 None
Global
acquisition
parameter
Configuration
QM_DI
QM_NEG_DRIFT_RATE
QM_POS_DRIFT_RATE
QM_MAX_ON_DURATION
QM_DRIFT_HOLD_TIME
QM_POS_ RECAL_DELAY
QM_RECAL_THRESHOLD
QTx_DI
QTx_NEG_DRIFT_RATE
QTx_POS_DRIFT_RATE
QTx_MAX_ON_DURATION
QTx_DRIFT_HOLD_TIME
QTx_ POS_RECAL_DELAY
QTx_RECAL_THRESHOLD
None
Callback
Function
Configuration
QM_FILTER_CALLBACK QTx_FILTER_CALLBACK None
Common
Configuration
Options
TOUCH_SYNC_PIN_OPTION, TOUCH_SPREAD_SPECTRUM_MAX_DEV,
TOUCH_CSARES, TOUCH_CSBRES
Table 13 QTouch Library for UC3L Configuration parameters134 8207L-AT42-05/12
For an overview of the Global acquisition configuration parameters and Sensor specific
parameters, refer Section 5.3 and Section 5.4. The detailed information on other parameters is
available in the configuration header file. For QMatrix method Design guidelines regarding
Sensor parameters refer Section 5.6.7.3.
6.3.12 Example projects for QTouch Library for UC3L
6.3.12.1 Example Project usage
The GNU Example projects can be used along with Atmel Studio 6.
Figure 46 GNU Example project usage with AVR32 Studio
The IAR Example Projects can be used with IAR Embedded Workbench for AVR32 v4.1
Figure 47 IAR Example project usage with IAR Embedded Workbench for AVR32135
6.3.12.2 QMatrix Example Project
The QMatrix method GNU and IAR Example projects can be found in the following path.
\Device_Specific_Libraries\32bit_AVR\UCxx\example_projects\uc3l_gnu_qm_ek_example and
\Device_Specific_Libraries\32bit_AVR\UCxx\example_projects\uc3l_iar_qm_ek_example
The QMatrix Example projects demonstrate the QMatrix operation on the UC3L Evaluation Kit
(Rev 2). QMatrix SMP discharge mode hardware arrangement is used for the UC3L Evaluation
Kit with 6 X Lines and 2 Y Lines. Using the 12 Touch Channels (6x2), 6 Touch Sensors are
formed that include a Rotor (that uses six Touch Channels) and 5 keys (each using one Touch
channel).
The Example projects demonstrate the QMatrix measured data and Touch Status usage using
the LED Demo application. The onboard LED0, LED1, LED2 and LED3 are set when the Touch
Position of the Rotor position varies from 0 to 255. By Touching the up key (^), left key (<),
play/pause key (>/||) and right key (>), the LED0, LED1, LED2 and LED3 can be individually
cleared. When the down key (v) is touched, it clears all LEDs.
Additionally QMatrix Example projects are also available for QT600 and STK600 boards.
6.3.12.3 QTouch Group A Example Project
The QTouch Group A method GNU and IAR Example projects can be found in the following path.
\Device_Specific_Libraries\32bit_AVR\UCxx\example_projects\uc3l_gnu_qt_grp_a_example and
\Device_Specific_Libraries\32bit_AVR\UCxx\example_projects\uc3l_iar_qt_grp_a_example
The QTouch Group A Example projects demonstrate the QTouch method API usage with a
Rotor, Slider and two keys Sensor configuration.
6.3.12.4 Autonomous QTouch Example Project
The Autonomous QTouch Sensor GNU and IAR Example projects can be found in the following
path.
\Device_Specific_Libraries\32bit_AVR\UCxx\example_projects\
uc3l_gnu_autonomous_qt_example and
\Device_Specific_Libraries\32bit_AVR\UCxx\example_projects\
uc3l_iar_autonomous_qt_example
The Autonomous QTouch Example projects demonstrate the Autonomous QTouch Sensor API
usage. The Example projects also demonstrate wake up from Sleep mode using the
Asynchronous Timer peripheral event.
Note 1: The Example Projects also support relaying the Touch Sensor debug information to the
“QTouch Studio – Touch Analyzer” PC Software. The QTouch Studio can also be used for
setting the Sensor and Global configuration parameters of the QTouch Library at run-time.
The QTouch Studio can be downloaded from the following path.
The QDebug two-way debug protocol used by the Example project to communicate (transmit or
receive touch debug data) with the QTouch Studio can be found in the following installation path.
http://www.atmel.com/products/touchsoftware/qtouchsuite.asp?family_id=702
\Device_Specific_Libraries\32bit_AVR\UCxx\qdebug136 8207L-AT42-05/12
• For the UC3L Evaluation kit (uc3l_xx_qm_ek_example Example project) to connect with
the QTouch Studio using the USB interface, the UC3B MCU on the UC3L Evaluation kit
must be Flashed with ISP and Program binaries. The procedure to flash the binaries is
available in the readme note in the following path.
\Device_Specific_Libraries\32bit_AVR\UC3L\example_projects\uc3l_gnu_qm_ek_exampl
e\ uc3b\readme.txt or
\Device_Specific_Libraries\32bit_AVR\UC3L\example_projects\uc3l_iar_qm_ek_example
\ uc3b\readme.txt
• For the case of QTouch Group A and Autonomous QTouch Example projects, the
‘QT600-USB Bridge’ board can be use to capture the QDebug debug data in the QTouch
Studio.
Note 2: In order to flash the generated elf binary file for GNU and IAR, the following command
can be used from the Command Line.
avr32program --part UC3L064 program -finternal@0x80000000 -e --run -R -cint
uc3l_gnu_qm_ek_example.elf
6.3.13 Code and Data Memory requirements for UC3L
6.3.13.1 QMatrix method memory requirement
The Table below captures the Typical Code & Data Memory requirement for the QTouch Library
when QMatrix method is used standalone.
In addition to the Data memory captured in the Table, the QMatrix method requires additional
Data Memory that must be provided to the Touch Library for storing the Signals, References,
Sensor information and Touch status. This data memory is provided by the Host Application to
the QTouch Library as QMatrix data block. The size of this Data memory block depends on the
Number of Sensors and the Number of Wheel or Slider configured. The
PRIV_QM_DATA_BLK_SIZE macro in touch_api_at32uc3l.h calculates the size of this data
memory block. For example, for the UC3L Evaluation kit Rev2 that has 6 Sensors including 1
Wheel and 5 Buttons, the QMatrix data block memory size is 236 bytes.
Library Typical Code
with Keys Only
Typical Code when
one or more
Wheel/Sliders is
used
Typical
Data
Memory
libuc3l-qtouch-iar.r82 5882 7296 278
libuc3l-qtouch-gnu.a 6228 8080 278
Table 14 Typical Code and Data memory for Standalone QMatrix operation
Note: This Typical Code memory usage is achieved when only QMatrix Regular API is used in
the application. Usage of QMatrix Helper API would consume additional Code memory. Also,
the Code and Data memory indicated in the Table do not account for Example QMatrix
application.
6.3.13.2 QTouch Group A/B method memory requirement
The Table below captures the Typical Code & Data Memory requirement for the QTouch Library
when QTouch Group A or QTouch Group B Sensor is used standalone. (Additional Data memory
will be required when both Group A and Group B are used at the same time.)
In addition to the Data memory captured in the Table, the QTouch Group A/B method requires
additional Data Memory that must be provided to the Touch Library for storing the Signals, 137
References, Sensor information and Touch status. This data memory is provided by the Host
Application to the QTouch Library as QTouch data block. The size of this Data memory block
depends on the Number of Sensors and the Number of Wheel or Slider configured. Refer
PRIV_QTx_DATA_BLK_SIZE macro in touch_api_at32uc3l.h. For example, when 6 Sensors are
used that include 1 Wheel, 1 Slider and 2 Button, the QTouch GroupA/B data block memory size
is 184 bytes.
Library Typical Code
with Keys Only
Typical Code when
one or more
Wheel/Sliders is
used
Typical
Data
Memory
libuc3l-qtouch-iar.r82 5198 6450 358
libuc3l-qtouch-gnu.a 5290 6774 358
Table 15 Typical Code and Data memory for Standalone QTouch Group A/B operation
Note: This Typical Code memory usage is achieved when only the QTouch Group A/B Regular
API is used in the application. Usage of QTouch Group A/B Helper API would consume
additional Code memory. Also, the Code and Data memory indicated in the Table do not account
for Example QTouch application.
6.3.13.3 Autonomous QTouch memory requirement
The Table below captures the Typical Code & Data Memory requirement for the QTouch Library
when Autonomous Touch Sensor is used standalone.
Library Typical Code with
Keys Only
Typical Data
Memory
libuc3l-qtouch-iar.r82 1184 22
libuc3l-qtouch-gnu.a 966 16
Table 16 Minimum Code and Data for Standalone Autonomous QTouch sensor
Note: This Typical Code memory usage is achieved when only the Autonomous QTouch Regular
API is used in the application. Usage of Autonomous QTouch Helper API would consume
additional Code memory. Also, the Code and Data memory indicated in the Table do not account
for Example Autonomous QTouch application.
6.3.14 Public header files of QTouch Library for UC3L
Following are the public header files which need to be included in user’s application and these
have the type definitions and function prototypes of the APIs listed in the following sections
1. touch_api_at32uc3l.h - QTouch Library API and Data structures file.
2. touch_config_at32uc3l.h - QTouch Library configuration file.
6.3.15 Type Definitions and enumerations used in the library
6.3.15.1 Typedefs
This section lists the type definitions used in the library.
Typedef Notes
uint8_t unsigned 8-bit integer.
int8_t signed 8 bit integer.
uint16_t unsigned 16-bit integer.
int16_t signed 16-bit integer.138 8207L-AT42-05/12
uint32_t unsigned 32 bit integer.
int32_t signed 32 bit integer.
channel_t unsigned 8 bit integer that represents the channel number, starts from 0.
threshold_t unsigned 8 bit integer to set sensor detection threshold.
sensor_id_t unsigned 8 bit integer that represents the sensor ID, starts from 0.
touch_time_t unsigned 16 bit integer that represents current time maintained by the
library.
touch_bl_t unsigned 8 bit integer that represents the burst length of a QMatrix
channel.
touch_delta_t signed 16 bit integer that represents the delta value of a channel.
touch_acq_status_t unsigned 16 bit Status of Touch measurement.
touch_qt_grp_t unsigned 8 bit QTouch Group type.
touch_qt_dma_t unsigned 8 bit QTouch Group A/ Group B DMA channel type..
6.3.15.1.1 touch_acq_status_t
uint16_t touch_acq_status_t
Use Indicates the result of the last acquisition & processing for a specific touch
acquisition method.
Values Bitmask Comment
TOUCH_NO_ACTIVITY 0x0000u No Touch activity.
TOUCH_IN_DETECT 0x0001u At least one Touch channel is in detect.
TOUCH_STATUS_CHANGE 0x0002u Status change in at least one channel.
TOUCH_ROTOR_SLIDER_POS_CHANGE 0x0004u At least one rotor or slider has changed
position.
TOUCH_CHANNEL_REF_CHANGE 0x0008u Reference values of at least one of the
channel has changed.
TOUCH_BURST_AGAIN 0x0100u Indicates that reburst is required to
resolve Filtering or Calibration state.
TOUCH_RESOLVE_CAL 0x0200u Indicates that reburst is needed to
resolve Calibration.
TOUCH_RESOLVE_FILTERIN 0x0400u Indicates that reburst is needed to
resolve Filtering.
TOUCH_RESOLVE_DI 0x0800u Indicates that reburst is needed to
resolve Detect Integration.
TOUCH_RESOLVE_POS_RECAL 0x1000u Indicates that reburst is needed to
resolve Recalibration.
6.3.15.1.2 touch_qt_grp_t
uint8_t touch_qt_grp_t
Use QTouch Group type.
Values Value Comment
TOUCH_QT_GRP_A 0u QTouch Group A.
TOUCH_QT_GRP_B 1u QTouch Group B.
6.3.15.2 Enumerations
This section lists the enumerations used in the QTouch Library.139
6.3.15.2.1 touch_ret_t
Enumeration touch_ret_t
Use Indicates the Touch Library error code.
Values Comment
TOUCH_SUCCESS Successful completion of operation.
TOUCH_ACQ_INCOMPLETE Touch Library is busy with pending previous
Touch measurement.
TOUCH_INVALID_INPUT_PARAM Invalid input parameter.
TOUCH_INVALID_LIB_STATE Operation not allowed in the current Touch
Library state.
TOUCH_INVALID_QM_CONFIG_PARAM Invalid QMatrix config input parameter.
TOUCH_INVALID_AT_CONFIG_PARAM Invalid Autonomous Touch config input
parameter.
TOUCH_INVALID_QT_CONFIG_PARAM Invalid QTouch config input parameter.
TOUCH_INVALID_GENERAL_CONFIG_PARAM Invalid General config input parameter.
TOUCH_INVALID_QM_NUM_X_LINES Mismatch between number of X lines
specified as QM_NUM_X_LINES and
number of X lines enabled in QMatrix pin
configuration touch_qm_pin_t x_lines.
TOUCH_INVALID_QM_NUM_Y_LINES Mismatch between number of Y lines
specified as QM_NUM_Y_LINES and
number of Y lines enabled in QMatrix pin
configuration touch_qm_pin_t y_yk_lines.
TOUCH_INVALID_QM_NUM_SENSORS Number of Sensors specified is greater than
(Number of X Lines * Number of Y Lines).
TOUCH_INVALID_MAXDEV_VALUE Spread spectrum MAXDEV value should not
exceed (2*DIV + 1).
TOUCH_INVALID_RECAL_THRESHOLD Invalid Recalibration threshold input value.
TOUCH_INVALID_CHANNEL_NUM Channel number parameter exceeded total
number of channels configured.
TOUCH_INVALID_SENSOR_TYPE Invalid sensor type. Sensor type can NOT be
SENSOR_TYPE_UNASSIGNED.
TOUCH_INVALID_SENSOR_ID Invalid Sensor number parameter.
TOUCH_INVALID_DMA_PARAM DMA Channel numbers are out of range.
TOUCH_FAILURE_ANALOG_COMP Analog comparator configuration error.
TOUCH_INVALID_RS_NUM Number of Rotor/Sliders set as 0, when trying
to configure a rotor/slider.
6.3.15.2.2 touch_lib_state_t
Enumeration touch_lib_state_t
Use Indicates the current state of the library with respect to a specific acquisition
method
Values Comment
TOUCH_LIB_STATE_NULL Library is not yet initialized for the specific acquisition
method
TOUCH_LIB_STATE_INIT Library is initialized, sensor configuration and calibration is
not yet done.
TOUCH_LIB_STATE_READY Library is ready for a new acquisition in the specific method
TOUCH_LIB_STATE_CALIBRATE Library requires re-calibration before acquisition can be 140 8207L-AT42-05/12
done for the specific acquisition method
TOUCH_LIB_STATE_BUSY Library is busy with acquisition & processing for the specific
acquisition method
6.3.15.2.3 touch_acq_mode_t
Enumeration touch_acq_mode_t
Use Touch library acquisition mode type.
Values Comment
RAW_ACQ_MODE When Raw acquisition mode is used, the measure_complete_callback
function is called immediately once fresh values of Signals are
available. In this mode, the Touch Library does not do any processing
on the Signals. So, the references, Sensor states or Rotor/Slider
position values are not updated in this mode.
NORMAL_ACQ_MODE When Nomal acquisition mode is used, the
measure_complete_callback function is called only after the Touch
Library completes processing of the Signal values obtained. The
References, Sensor states and Rotor/Slider position values are
updated in this mode.
6.3.15.2.4 sensor_type_t
Enumeration sensor_type_t
Use Define the type of the sensor
Values Comment
SENSOR_TYPE_UNASSIGNED Channel is not assigned to any sensor
SENSOR_TYPE_KEY Sensor is a key
SENSOR_TYPE_ROTOR Sensor is a rotor
SENSOR_TYPE_SLIDER Sensor is a slider
6.3.15.2.5 aks_group_t
Enumeration aks_group_t
Use Defines the Adjacent Key Suppression (AKS) groups that each sensor may be
associated with
AKS™ is selectable by the system designer
7 AKS groups are supported by the library
Values Comment
NO_AKS_GROUP No AKS group is selected for the sensor
AKS_GROUP_1 AKS Group number 1
AKS_GROUP_2 AKS Group number 2
AKS_GROUP_3 AKS Group number 3
AKS_GROUP_4 AKS Group number 4
AKS_GROUP_5 AKS Group number 5
AKS_GROUP_6 AKS Group number 6
AKS_GROUP_7 AKS Group number 7
6.3.15.2.6 hysteresis_t
Enumeration Hysteresis_t
Use Defines the sensor detection hysteresis value. This is expressed as a
percentage of the sensor detection threshold.141
This is configurable per sensor.
HYST_x = hysteresis value is x percent of detection threshold value (rounded
down).
Note that a minimum value of 2 is used as a hard limit. Example: if detection
threshold = 20, then:
HYST_50 = 10 (50 percent of 20)
HYST_25 = 5 (25 percent of 20)
HYST_12_5 = 2 (12.5 percent of 20)
HYST_6_25 = 2 (6.25 percent of 20 = 1, but set to the hard limit of 2)
Values Comment
HYST_50 50% Hysteresis
HYST_25 25% Hysteresis
HYST_12_5 12.5% Hysteresis
HYST_6_25 6.25% Hysteresis
6.3.15.2.7 recal_threshold_t
Enumeration recal_threshold_t
Use A sensor recalibration threshold. This is expressed as a percentage of the
sensor detection threshold.
This is for automatic recovery from false conditions, such as a calibration while
sensors were touched, or a significant step change in power supply voltage.
If the false condition persists the library will recalibrate according to the settings
of the recalibration threshold.
This setting is applicable to all the configured sensors.
Usage :
RECAL_x = recalibration threshold is x percent of detection threshold value
(rounded down).
Note: a minimum value of 4 is used.
Example: if detection threshold = 40, then:
RECAL_100 = 40 ( 100 percent of 40)
RECAL_50 = 20 ( 50 percent of 40)
RECAL_25 = 10 ( 25 percent of 40)
RECAL_12_5 = 5 ( 12.5 percent of 40)
RECAL_6_25 = 4 ( 6.25 percent of 40 = 2, but value is limited to 4)
Values Comment
RECAL_100 100% recalibration threshold
RECAL_50 50% recalibration threshold
RECAL_25 25% recalibration threshold
RECAL_12_5 12.5% recalibration threshold
RECAL_6_25 6.25% recalibration threshold
6.3.15.2.8 resolution_t
Enumeration resolution_t
Use For rotors and sliders, the resolution of the reported angle or position.
RES_x_BIT = rotor/slider reports x-bit values.
Example: if slider resolution is RES_7_BIT, then reported positions are in the
range 0..127.142 8207L-AT42-05/12
Values Comment
RES_1_BIT 1 bit resolution : reported positions range 0 – 1
RES_2_BIT 2 bit resolution : reported positions range 0 – 3
RES_3_BIT 3 bit resolution : reported positions range 0 – 7
RES_4_BIT 4 bit resolution : reported positions range 0 – 15
RES_5_BIT 5 bit resolution : reported positions range 0 – 31
RES_6_BIT 6 bit resolution : reported positions range 0 – 63
RES_7_BIT 7 bit resolution : reported positions range 0 – 127
RES_8_BIT 8 bit resolution : reported positions range 0 – 255
6.3.15.2.9 at_status_change_t
Enumeration at_status_change_t
Use Indicates the current status of autonomous QTouch sensor
Values Comment
OUT_OF_TOUCH Currently the autonomous QTouch channel is out of touch
IN_TOUCH Currently the autonomous QTouch channel is in detect
6.3.15.2.10x_pin_options_t
Enumeration x_pin_options_t
Use Options for various pins to be assigned as X lines in QMatrix
Values Comment
Xn Use Pin Xn for QMatrix, n ranges from 0 to 17.
Note: X8 pin must NOT be used as X Line and it is recommended to be used as
ACREFN pin for QMatrix.
6.3.15.2.11y_pin_options_t
Enumeration y_pin_options_t
Use Options for various pins to be assigned as Y lines in QMatrix
Values Comment
Yn_YKn Use Pin Yn & YKn for QMatrix, n ranges from 0 to 7
6.3.15.2.12qt_pin_options_t
Enumeration qt_pin_options_t
Use Options for various pins to be assigned as Sense pair for Autonomous QTouch,
QTouch Group A and QTouch Group B acquisition methods.
Values Comment
SPn Use Sense Pair ‘n’ , n ranges from 0 to 16.
6.3.15.2.13general_pin_options_t
Enumeration general_pin_options_t
Use Options of various pins to be used for SMP, Discharge, SYNC & VDIV.
Values Comment
USE_NO_PIN No Pin is to be assigned for this purpose143
USE_PIN_PA12_AS_SMP Use Pin PA12 as SMP for QMatrix
USE_PIN_PA13_AS_SMP Use Pin PA13 as SMP for QMatrix
USE_PIN_PA14_AS_SMP Use Pin PA14 as SMP for QMatrix
USE_PIN_PA17_AS_SMP Use Pin PA17 as SMP for QMatrix
USE_PIN_PA21_AS_SMP Use Pin PA21 as SMP for QMatrix
USE_PIN_PA22_AS_SMP Use Pin PA22 as SMP for QMatrix
USE_PIN_PA17_AS_DIS Use Pin PA17 as Discharge current control for QMatrix
USE_PIN_PB11_AS_VDIV Use Pin PB11 as Voltage divider enable (VDIVEN) for QMatrix
USE_PIN_PA15_AS_SYNC Use Pin PA15 as external synchronization input signal (SYNC)
USE_PIN_PA18_AS_SYNC Use Pin PA18 as external synchronization input signal (SYNC)
USE_PIN_PA19_AS_SYNC Use Pin PA19 as external synchronization input signal (SYNC)
USE_PIN_PB08_AS_SYNC Use Pin PB08 as external synchronization input signal (SYNC)
USE_PIN_PB12_AS_SYNC Use Pin PB12 as external synchronization input signal (SYNC)
6.3.16 Data structures
This section lists the data structures that hold sensor status, settings, and diagnostics
information.
6.3.16.1 sensor_t
structure sensor_t
Input / Output Output from the library
Use Data structure which holds the sensor state variables used by the library.
Fields Type Comment
state uint8_t internal sensor state
general_counter uint8_t general purpose counter: used for calibration, drifting, etc
ndil_counter uint8_t drift Integration counter
threshold uint8_t sensor detection threshold
type_aks_pos_hyst uint8_t holds information for sensor type, AKS group, positive
recalibration flag, and hysteresis value
Bit fields Use
B1 : B0 Hysteresis
B2 positive recalibration flag
B5:B3 AKS group
B7:B6 sensor type
from_channel uint8_t starting channel number for sensor
to_channel uint8_t ending channel number for sensor
Index uint8_t index for array of rotor/slider values
6.3.16.2 touch_global_param_t
structure touch_global_param_t
Input / Output Input to the Library
Use Holds the sensor acquisition parameters for a specific acquisition method
Fields Type Comment
di uint8_t Sensor detect integration (DI) limit.144 8207L-AT42-05/12
neg_drift_rate uint8_t Sensor negative drift rate in units of 200 ms.
pos_drift_rate uint8_t Sensor positive drift rate in units of 200 ms.
max_on_duration uint8_t Sensor maximum on duration in units of 200ms.
drift_hold_time uint8_t Sensor drift hold time in units of 200 ms.
pos_recal_delay uint8_t Sensor Positive recalibration delay.
recal_threshold recal_threshold_t Sensor recalibration threshold.
Refer Section 5.3 for Overview of Global configuration parameters.
6.3.16.3 touch_filter_data_t
structure touch_filter_data_t
Input / Output Output from the Library
Use Touch Filter Callback data type.
Fields Type Comment
num_channel_signals uint8_t Length of the measured signal values list.
p_channel_signals uint16_t* Pointer to measured signal values for each channel.
6.3.16.4 touch_measure_data_t
structure touch_measure_data_t
Input / Output Output from the Library
Use This structure provides updated measure data values each time the measure
complete callback function is called.
Fields Type Comment
p_acq_status touch_acq_status_t Acquisition status for the specific acquisition
method.
num_channel_signals uint8_t Length of the measured signal values list
p_channel_signals uint16_t* Pointer to the sequential list of measured
signal values of all channels
num_channel_references uint8_t Length of the measured reference values list.
p_channel_references uint16_t* Pointer to the sequential list of reference
values of all channels
num_sensor_states uint8_t Number of sensor state bytes.
p_sensor_states uint8_t* Pointer to the sequential list of touch status of
all sensors
num_rotor_slider_values uint8_t Length of the Rotor and Slider position values list.
p_rotor_slider_values uint8_t* Pointer to the sequential list of position of all
rotors & sliders
num_sensors uint8_t Length of the sensors data list.
p_sensor sensor_t* Pointer to the sequential list of data of all
sensors.
6.3.16.5 touch_qm_param_t
structure touch_qm_param_t
Input / Output Passed as input to touch_qm_sensor_update_config API & got as output from
touch_qm_sensor_get_config API
Use Data structure which holds the configuration parameters for a specific QMatrix
sensor145
Fields Type Comment
aks_group aks_group_t AKS group to which the sensor belong.
detect_threshold threshold_t Detection threshold for the sensor
detect_hysteresis hysteresis_t Detect hysteresis for the sensor.
position_resolution resolution_t Resolution required for the sensor.
position_hysteresis uint8_t Position hysteresis for the sensor
6.3.16.6 touch_at_param_t
structure touch_at_param_t
Input / Output Passed as input to touch_at_sensor_update_config API & got as output from
touch_at_sensor_get_config API
Use Data structure which holds the configuration parameters for the autonomous
QTouch sensor
Structure field Type Corresponds to the device
register
Register Field
filter uint8 t ATCFG2 FILTER
outsens uint8 t ATCFG2 OUTSENS
sense uint8 t ATCFG2 SENSE
pthr uint8 t ATCFG3 PTHR
pdrift uint8 t ATCFG3 PDRIFT
ndrift uint8 t ATCFG3 NDRIFT
Refer Section 5.3 for an overview of FILTER (Detect Integration), PTHR (Positive Recalibration
threshold), PDRIFT (Positive Drift rate) and NDRIFT (Negative Drift rate).
OUTSENS - Autonomous Touch Out-of-Touch Sensitivity.
For the autonomous QTouch sensor, specifies how sensitive the out-of-touch detector should be.
When the sensor is not touched, the Autonomous Touch Current count register is same as the
Autonomous Touch Base count register. When the sensor is touched the Autonomous Touch
Current count register decreases. When using the Autonomous QTouch in proximity mode, the
Autonomous Touch Base count register decreases as we move towards proximity of the sensor.
The OUTSENS value can be arrived at by watching the CAT Autonomous Touch Base Count
Register(at memory location 0xFFFF686Cu) and Autonomous Touch Current Count Register(at
memory location 0xFFFF6870u) during a sensor touch/proximity and not in touch/proximity. A
smaller difference between the Autonomous Touch Base count and Autonomous Touch Current
count register can be chosen as the OUTSENS value. Range: 0u to 255u.
SENSE - Autonomous Touch Sensitivity.
For the autonomous QTouch sensor, specifies how sensitive the touch detector should be.
When the sensor is not touched, the Autonomous Touch Current count register is same as the
Autonomous Touch Base count register. When the sensor is touched the Autonomous Touch
Current count register decreases. When using the Autonomous QTouch in proximity mode, the
Autonomous Touch Base count register decreases as we move towards proximity of the sensor.
The SENSE value can be arrived at by watching the CAT Autonomous Touch Base Count
Register(at memory location 0xFFFF686Cu) and Autonomous Touch Current Count Register(at
memory location 0xFFFF6870u) during a sensor touch/proximity and not in touch/proximity. A
larger difference between the Autonomous Touch Base count and Autonomous Touch Current
count register can be chosen as the SENSE value. Range: 0u to 255u.146 8207L-AT42-05/12
6.3.16.7 touch_qt_param_t
structure touch_qt_param_t
Input / Output Passed as input to touch_qt_sensor_update_config API & got as output from
touch_qt_sensor_get_config API
Use Data structure which holds the status parameters for the QTouch Group A or
Group B sensor.
Fields Type Comment
aks_group aks_group_t AKS group to which the sensor belong.
detect_threshold threshold_t Detection threshold for the sensor
detect_hysteresis hysteresis_t Detect hysteresis for the sensor.
position_resolution resolution_t Resolution required for the sensor.
6.3.16.8 touch_at_status
structure touch_at_status
Input / Output Output structure received as part of the Autonomous QTouch Interrupt callback
function.
Use Data structure which holds the status parameters for the autonomous QTouch
sensor.
Structure
field
Type Comment
status change at status change t Autonomous QTouch Status change.
base_count uint16_t The base count currently stored by the autonomous touch
sensor. This is useful for autonomous touch debugging
purposes.
current_count uint16_t The current count acquired by the autonomous touch
sensor. This is useful for autonomous touch debugging
purposes.
6.3.16.9 touch_qm_dma_t
structure touch_qm_dma_t
Input / Output Input to the touch_qm_sensors_start_acquisition() API.
Use Data structure which holds the DMA channel information for touch acquisition
data transfer
Fields Type Comment
dma_ch1 uint8_t Indicates the DMA channel 1. Can take values from 0 – 11, but should not
be same as dma_ch2
dma_ch2 uint8_t Indicates the DMA channel 2. Can take values from 0 – 11, but should not
be same as dma_ch1
6.3.16.10 touch_qm_pin_t
structure touch_qm_pin_t
Input / Output Input to the library
Use Data structure which holds the Pin configuration information for QMatrix147
Fields Type Comment
x_lines uint32_t Bitmask that indicates the selected X pins for QMatrix. If bit n is set, Xn is
enabled for QMatrix; n can be 0 to 17. Any other bits set are ignored. Note:
For QMatrix operation, X8 is not available as it must be used for ACREFN
function.
Bit 18
-
31
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
X
Line
- X
17
X
16
X
15
X
14
X
13
X
12
X
11
X
10
X
9
X
8
X
7
X
6
X
5
X
4
X
3
X
2
y_yk_lin
es
uint8_t Bitmask that indicates the selected Y pins for QMatrix. If bit n is set, Yn &
Ykn is enabled for QMatrix; n can be 0 to 7.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Y
Line
Y7 &
YK7
Y6 &
YK6
Y5 &
YK5
Y4 &
YK4
Y3 &
YK3
Y2 &
YK2
Y1 &
YK1
Y0 &
YK0
smp_di
s_pin
general
_pin_op
tions_t
Specify one of the following
USE_NO_PIN
USE_PIN_PA12_AS_SMP
USE_PIN_PA13_AS_SMP
USE_PIN_PA14_AS_SMP
USE_PIN_PA17_AS_SMP
USE_PIN_PA21_AS_SMP
USE_PIN_PA22_AS_SMP
USE_PIN_PA17_AS_DIS
vdiv_pi
n
general
_pin_op
tions_t
Specify either USE_NO_PIN or USE_PIN_PB11_AS_VDIV
6.3.16.11 touch_at_pin_t
structure touch_at_pin_t
Input / Output Input to the library
Use Data structure which holds the Pin configuration for Autonomous QTouch
sensor
Fields Type Comment
atsp uint8_t Sense pair to be used for autonomous QTouch detection. Choose any one
sense pair from SP0 to SP16 using the qt_pin_options_t enum.
For example, if atsp is set as SP7, Sense pair 7 (CSA7, CSB7) will be assigned
for autonomous QTouch detection
6.3.16.12 touch_qt_pin_t
structure touch_at_pin_t
Input / Output Input to the library
Use Data structure which holds the Pin configuration for QTouch sensor.
Fiel
ds
Type Comment148 8207L-AT42-05/12
sp uint3
2_t
Bit n indicates Sense Pair SP[n] is selected. Choose sense pairs from SP0 to
SP16.
Bit 1
7-
3
1
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SP
n
- X1
6
X1
5
X1
4
X1
3
X1
2
X1
1
X1
0
X
9
X
8
X
7
X
6
X
5
X
4
X
3
X
2
X
1
X
0
6.3.16.13 touch_qm_reg_t
structure touch_qm_reg_t
Input / Output Input to the library
Use Data structure which holds the Register configuration information for QMatrix
This structure contains the data fields that correspond to specific fields in different registers. For a
more detailed explanation of the register fields, refer to the device datasheet.
For example, CHLEN field of MCCFG0 is 8 bits wide (bit 8-15 of MGCFG0 register). The user
needs to set values from 0 to 255 (0xFF) in the chlen field of this structure. The library will take
care of writing this to the appropriate bit position of MCCFG0 register.
Fields Type Corresponds to Register Register Field
div uint16 t MGCFG0 DIV
chlen uint8 t MGCFG0 CHLEN
selen uint8 t MGCFG0 SELEN
dishift uint8 t MGCFG1 DISHIFT
sync uint8 t MGCFG1 SYNC
spread uint8 t MGCFG1 SPREAD
dilen uint8 t MGCFG1 DILEN
max uint16 t MGCFG1 MAX
acctrl uint8 t MGCFG2 ACCTRL
consen uint8 t MGCFG2 CONSEN
cxdilen uint8 t MGCFG2 CXDILEN
synctim uint16 t MGCFG2 SYNCTIM
fsources uint8 t DICS FSOURCES
glen uint8 t DICS GLEN
intvrefsel uint8 t DICS INTVREFSEL
Intrefsel uint8 t DICS INTREFSEL
trim uint8 t DICS TRIM
sources uint8 t DICS SOURCES
shival0 uint16 t ACSHI0 SHIVAL
shival1 uint16 t ACSHI1 SHIVAL
shival2 uint16 t ACSHI2 SHIVAL
shival3 uint16 t ACSHI3 SHIVAL
shival4 uint16 t ACSHI4 SHIVAL
shival5 uint16 t ACSHI5 SHIVAL
shival6 uint16 t ACSHI6 SHIVAL
shival7 uint16 t ACSHI7 SHIVAL149
6.3.16.14 touch_at_reg_t
structure touch_at_reg_t
Input / Output Input to the library
Use Data structure which holds the Register configuration information for
Autonomous QTouch
This structure contains the data fields that correspond to specific fields in different registers. For a
more detailed explanation of the register fields, refer to the device datasheet.
For example, DISHIFT field of ATCFG1 is 2 bits wide (bit 28-29 of ATCFG1 register). The user
needs to set values from 0 to 3 in the dishift field of this structure. The library will take care of
writing this to the appropriate bit position of ATCFG1 register.
Fields Type Corresponds to Register Register Field
div uint16 t ATCFG0 DIV
chlen uint8 t ATCFG0 CHLEN
selen uint8 t ATCFG0 SELEN
dishift uint8 t ATCFG1 DISHIFT
sync uint8 t ATCFG1 SYNC
spread uint8 t ATCFG1 SPREAD
dilen uint8 t ATCFG1 DILEN
max uint16 t ATCFG1 MAX
at_param touch_at_param_t Autonomous Touch Sensor
parameters corresponding to
ATCFG2 and ATCFG3.
FILTER, OUTSENS,
SENSE, PTHR,
PDRIFT, NDRIFT
6.3.16.15 touch_qt_reg_t
structure touch_qt_reg_t
Input / Output Input to the library
Use Data structure which holds the Register configuration information for QTouch
Group A/B.
Fields Type Corresponds to Register Register Field
div uint16 t TGxCFG0 DIV
chlen uint8 t TGxCFG0 CHLEN
selen uint8 t TGxCFG0 SELEN
dishift uint8 t TGxCFG1 DISHIFT
sync uint8 t TGxCFG1 SYNC
spread uint8 t TGxCFG1 SPREAD
dilen uint8 t TGxCFG1 DILEN
max uint16 t TGxCFG1 MAX
6.3.16.16 touch_qm_config_t
structure touch_qm_config_t
Input / Output Input to the library
Use Data structure which holds all configuration information pertaining to QMatrix
Fields Type Comment
num_channels uint8_t Indicates the number of QMatrix channels
required by the user150 8207L-AT42-05/12
num_sensors uint8_t Indicates the number of QMatrix sensors
required by the user.
num_rotors_and_slider
s
uint8_t Indicates the number of QMatrix rotors /
sliders required by the user.
num_x_lines uint8_t Number of QMatrix X lines required by the
user.
num_y_lines uint8_t Number of QMatrix Y lines required by the
user.
num_x_sp uint8_t Number of X sense pairs used. This is a
private variable to the Touch library. The user
must provide
PRIV_QM_NUM_X_SENSE_PAIRS for this
input field.
bl_write_count uint8_t Burst length write count. This is a private
variable to the Touch library. The user must
provide the
PRIV_QM_BURST_LENGTH_WRITE_COUN
T macro for this input field.
pin touch_qm_pin_t Holds the QMatrix Pin configuration
information as filled by the user.
reg touch_qm_reg_t Holds the QMatrix register configuration
information as filled by the user.
global_param touch_global_param_
t
Holds the global parameters for QMatrix as
filled by the user.
p_data_blk uint8_t* Pointer to the data block allocated by the user
buffer_size uint16_t Size of the data block pointed to by
p_data_blk. The user must provide the
PRIV_QM_DATA_BLK_SIZE macro for this
input field.
p_burst_length uint8_t* Pointer to an array of 8-bit Burst lengths,
where each 8-bit value correspond to the burst
length of each channel starting from channel 0
to number of channels.
filter_callback Pointer to a function Pointer to callback function that will be called
before processing the signals
6.3.16.17 touch_at_config_t
structure touch_at_config_t
Input / Output Input to the library
Use Data structure which holds the configuration parameters & register values for
autonomous QTouch acquisition
Fields Type Comment
pin touch_at_pin_t Holds the autonomous QTouch
configuration information as filled by the
user.
reg touch_at_reg_t Holds the autonomous QTouch register
configuration information as filled by the
user.
touch_at_status_change_callback Pointer to a
function
Pointer to callback function that will be
called by the library whenever there is a
touch status change in the autonomous
QTouch sensor151
6.3.16.18 touch_qt_config_t
structure touch_qm_config_t
Input / Output Input to the library
Use Data structure which holds all configuration information pertaining to QMatrix
Fields Type Comment
num_channels uint8_t Indicates the number of QTouch Group A/B
channels required by the user
num_sensors uint8_t Indicates the number of QTouch Group A/B
sensors required by the user.
num_rotors_and_sliders uint8_t Indicates the number of QTouch Group A/B
rotors / sliders required by the user.
pin touch_qt_pin_t Holds the QTouch Group A/B Pin
configuration information as filled by the user.
reg touch_qt_reg_t Holds the QTouch Group A/B register
configuration information as filled by the user.
global_param touch_global_param_t Holds the global parameters for QTouch
Group A/B as filled by the user.
p_data_blk uint8_t* Pointer to the data block allocated by the user
buffer_size uint16_t Size of the data block pointed to by
p_data_blk. The user must provide the
PRIV_QTA_DATA_BLK_SIZE or
PRIV_QTB_DATA_BLK_SIZE macro for this
input field.
filter_callback Pointer to a function Pointer to callback function that will be called
before processing the signals
6.3.16.19 touch_general_config_t
structure touch_general_config_t
Input / Output Input to the library
Use Data structure which holds the configuration parameters & register values
common to all acquisition methods.
Fields Type Comment
sync_pin general_pin_options_t Specify one of the following values indicating the pin to be
assigned as SYNC pin. Refer to the device datasheet for
more details.
USE_NO_PIN
USE_PIN_PA15_AS_SYNC
USE_PIN_PA18_AS_SYNC
USE_PIN_PA19_AS_SYNC
USE_PIN_PB08_AS_SYNC
USE_PIN_PB12_AS_SYNC
maxdev uint8_t Corresponds to MAXDEV field of SSCFG register that
indicates the maximum deviation when spread spectrum is
enabled.
Ensure that maxdev is always less than or equal to (2*div +
1).
div represents div field in touch_qm_reg_t & touch_at_reg_t
structures.152 8207L-AT42-05/12
csares uint32_t Corresponds to RES field of CSARES register.
csbres uint32_t Corresponds to RES field of CSBRES register.
6.3.16.20 touch_config_t
structure touch_config_t
Input / Output Input to the library
Use Pointer to this structure is passed as input to touch_qm_sensors_init &
touch_at_sensor_init APIs
Fields Type Comment
p_qm_config touch_qm_config_t* Pointer to the QMatrix configuration structure.
p_at_config touch_at_config_t* Pointer to the autonomous QTouch configuration
structure.
p_qta_config touch_qt_config_t* Pointer to the QTouch Group A configuration
structure.
p_qtb_config touch_qt_config_t* Pointer to the QTouch Group B configuration
structure.
p_general_config touch_general_config_t* Pointer to the general configuration structure.
6.3.16.21 touch_info_t
structure touch_info_t
Input / Output Output from the library
Use Pointer to this structure is passed as input to touch_qm_get_libinfo &
touch_at_get_libinfo APIs
Fields Type Comment
num_channels_in_use uint8_t Number of channels in use
num_sensors_in_use uint8_t Number of sensors in use
num_rotors_sliders_in_use uint8_t Number of rotor/sliders in use
max_channels_per_rotor_slider uint8_t Maximum number of channels per rotor/slider
allowed by the library
hw_version uint32_t CAT module hardware revision as per VERSION
register in CAT module.
fw_version uint16_t QTouch Library version with MSB indicating the
major version & LSB indicating the minor version.
6.3.17 Public Functions of QTouch Library for UC3L
This section lists the public functions available in the QTouch™ libraries for AT32UC3L devices.
6.3.17.1 QMatrix API
This section lists the functions that are specific to QMatrix method of acquisition.
6.3.17.1.1 touch_qm_sensors_init
touch_ret_t touch_qm_sensors_init (touch_config_t *p_touch_config)
Arguments Type Comment
p_touch_config touch_config_t* Pointer to Touch Library input configuration structure. The
touch_qm_config_t and touch_general_config_t members of
the Structure should be non-NULL.153
• This API initializes the Touch library for QMatrix method acquisition. This API has to be
called before calling any other QMatrix API.
• Based on the input parameters, the CAT module is initialized with QMatrix method Pin
and Register configuration.
• The Analog comparators necessary for QMatrix operation are initialized by this API.
• Both p_qm_config & p_general_config members of the input configuration structure must
point to valid configuration data.
• The General configuration data provided by the p_general_config pointer is common to
both QMatrix, QTouch Group A, QTouch Group B and Autonomous Touch sensors.
6.3.17.1.2 touch_qm_sensor_config
touch_ret_t touch_qm_sensor_config(
sensor_type_t sensor_type,
channel_t from_channel,
channel_t to_channel,
aks_group_t aks_group,
threshold_t detect_threshold,
hysteresis_t detect_hysteresis,
resolution_t position_resolution,
uint8_t position_hysteresis,
sensor_id_t *p_sensor_id)
Arguments Type Comment
sensor_type sensor_type_t Specifies sensor type – SENSOR_TYPE_KEY or
SENSOR_TYPE_ROTOR or
SENSOR_TYPE_SLIDER.
The SENSOR_TYPE_UNASSIGNED enum is not a valid
input to this API.
from_channel channel_t Start channel of the Sensor (rotor, slider or key).
to_channel channel_t End channel of the Sensor (rotor, slider or key). For a key,
the start and end channels must be the same.
aks_group aks_group_t AKS group of this sensor.
detect_threshold threshold_t Touch Detect threshold level for Sensor.
detect_hysteresis hysteresis_t Value for detection hysteresis.
position_resolution resolution_t Position resolution when configuring rotor / slider
position_hysteresis uint8_t Position hysteresis when configuring rotor / slider
p_sensor_id sensor_id_t* The Sensor ID is updated by the Touch Library upon
successful sensor configuration. The Sensor ID starts with
0.
• This API configures a single QMatrix Key, Rotor or Slider.
• The user must provide all the sensor specific settings as input to this API.
• Rotor / Slider sensor will occupy contiguous channels from from_channel to to_channel.154 8207L-AT42-05/12
• For QMatrix acquisition method, 3 to 8 Touch channels per rotor / slider are supported.
Keys are always formed using 1 Touch channel.
6.3.17.1.3 touch_qm_sensor_update_config
touch_ret_t touch_qm_sensor_update_config(
sensor_id_t sensor_id,
touch_qm_param_t *p_touch_sensor_param)
Arguments Type Comment
sensor_id sensor_id_t Sensor ID for which the configuration
needs to be updated.
p_touch_sensor_param touch_qm_param_t* Pointer to the user sensor configuration
structure.
• This API updates the configuration of a QMatrix sensor with values different from the
ones initialized by the touch_qm_sensor_config API. If the sensor was not configured
already, the API will return error.
• The user must populate the structure pointed by p_touch_sensor_param with required
settings before calling this API.
6.3.17.1.4 touch_qm_sensor_get_config
touch_ret_t touch_qm_sensor_get_config(
sensor_id_t sensor_id,
touch_qm_param_t *p_touch_sensor_param)
Arguments Type Comment
sensor_id sensor_id_t Sensor ID for which the configuration
needs to be updated.
p_touch_sensor_param touch_sensor_param_t* Pointer to the user sensor configuration
structure.
• This API copies the current configuration of a QMatrix sensor into the user configuration
structure.
6.3.17.1.5 touch_qm_channel_udpate_burstlen
touch_ret_t touch_qm_channel_udpate _burstlen(
channel_t channel,
touch_bl_t qm_burst_length)
Arguments Type Comment
channel uint8_t Channel number for which the burst length is to be set.
qm_burst_length touch_bl_t QMatrix burst length. The burst length value can be 1 to
255. A value of 1 can be used to disable bursting on
a given channel.
• This API updates the burst length of the specified QMatrix channel
• This API can also be used to disable Touch measurement on a Sensor. 155
• In order to disable a Sensor, the burst length value of all the channels corresponding to
the Sensor must be set to 1. A Sensor can then be re-enabled by setting the appropriate
burst length for all channels using this API.
Note: When disabling a sensor care must be taken such that all channels of the Sensor
are set to 1. If any of the channels are missed out, it will result in undesired behavior of
the Sensor. Similarly when re-enabling a Sensor, if one or more channels are left
disabled with a burst length value of 1, it will result in undesired behavior of the Sensor.
• The touch_qm_sensors_calibrate API needs to be called whenever burst length is
updated for one or more channels before starting a new Touch measurement using the
touch_qm_sensors_start_acquisition API.
6.3.17.1.6 touch_qm_update_global_param
touch_ret_t touch_qm_update_global_param( touch_global_param_t *p_global_param )
Arguments Type Comment
p_global_param touch_global_param_t Pointer to user global parameters structure for
QMatrix.
• This API can be used to update the QMatrix global parameters, with values different from
the ones initialized using touch_qm_sensors_init API.
6.3.17.1.7 touch_qm_get_global_param
touch_ret_t touch_qm_get_global_param( touch_global_param_t *p_global_param )
Arguments Type Comment
p_global_param touch_global_param_t Pointer to user global parameters structure for
QMatrix.
• This API can be called to retrieve the QMatrix global parameters.
6.3.17.1.8 touch_qm_sensors_calibrate
touch_ret_t touch_qm_sensors_calibrate( void )
Arguments Type Comment
Void -
• This API can be used to calibrate all configured Sensors.
• Calibration of all Sensors must be performed when –
o All the Sensors have been configured using touch_sensor_config API after
initialization of the Touch Library.
o A sensor or a group of Sensors have been disabled or re-enabled. 156 8207L-AT42-05/12
6.3.17.1.9 touch_qm_sensors_start_acquisition
touch_ret_t touch_qm_sensors_start_acquisition(
touch_time_t current_time_ms,
touch_qm_dma_t *p_touch_dma,
touch_acq_mode_t qm_acq_mode,
void (*measure_complete_callback)( touch_measure_data_t *p_measure_data ))
Arguments Type Comment
current_time_ms touch_time_t Current time in ms
p_touch_dma touch_qm_dma_t* DMA channels to be
used for transfer to burst
length & acquisition
count
qm_acq_mode touch_acq_mode_t Specify whether Normal
acquisition mode or
Raw acquisition mode
should be done.
void
(*measure_complete_callback)(
void )
void
(*measure_complete_callback)(
touch_measure_data_t
*p_measure_data)
QMatrix Measure
complete callback
function pointer
• This API initiates a capacitive measurement on all enabled QMatrix sensors.
• When normal acquisition mode is used, once the Touch measurement is completed on all
the QMatrix sensors, before processing the raw acquisition data (channel_signals), a
filter_callback function is optionally called by the Touch Library.
• Once the filter_callback is completed, the signal values will be processed by the Touch
Library. The measure_complete_callback function is then called with touch data
(channel_signals, channel_references, sensor_states, sensors structure) as well as the
Touch Status (sensor_states) and Rotor/Slider position (rotor_slider_values).
• The touch_event_dispatcher API needs to be called as frequently as possible for the
Touch Library to process the raw acquisition data.
• When raw data acquisition mode is used, once the raw acquisition data is available from
the CAT module for all the sensors, the measure_complete_callback function is
immediately called with acquisition data (channel_signals). The channel_references,
sensor_states and rotor_slider_values data are not updated by the Touch Library in this
mode.
• This API will return error if a Touch measurement is already in progress.
• Two peripheral DMA channels must be provided using p_touch_dma for QMatrix
operation.
6.3.17.1.10 touch_qm_get_libinfo
touch_ret_t touch_qm_get_libinfo( touch_info_t *p_touch_info)
Arguments Type Comment
p_
touch_info
touch_info_t* User passes the memory address at which the library information
is to be stored by the library.157
• The touch_info_t structure is filled by the library with information like number of QMatrix
channels, number of QMatrix sensors, number of QMatrix rotors/slider, CAT hardware
version, and library version.
• The QMatrix number of channels, sensors and rotors/slider indicate the total number of
channels, sensors and rotor/slider in use irrespective of Touch measured being disabled
or enabled. (Disabling and Re-enabling of a Sensor using the
touch_qm_sensor_upate_burstlen API does not alter these values).
6.3.17.1.11touch_qm_sensor_get_delta
touch_ret_t touch_qm_sensor_get_delta(
sensor_id_t sensor_id,
touch_delta_t *p_delta)
Arguments Type Comment
sensor_id sensor_id_t Sensor ID for which the delta needs to be retrieved.
p_delta touch_delta_t* Pointer to Delta variable, that will be update by the Touch Library
• This API retrieves the delta information associated with a specific QMatrix sensor. Delta
is the difference between the current signal value and reference value.
• The user must provide the sensor ID whose delta is sought along with a valid pointer to a
Delta variable.
• The API updates the delta variable associated with the requested sensor.
6.3.17.2 QTouch Group A and QTouch Group B API
This section lists the functions that are specific to QTouch Group A/B method of acquisition.
6.3.17.2.1 touch_qt_sensors_init
touch_ret_t touch_qt_sensors_init (touch_qt_grp_t touch_qt_grp,
touch_config_t *p_touch_config)
Arguments Type Comment
touch_qt_grp touch_qt_grp_t Specify if the operation is to be performed on Group A
Sensors or Group B Sensors.
p_touch_config touch_config_t* Pointer to Touch Library input configuration structure. The
p_qta_config/p_qtb_config (based on whether Group A is
used or Group B is used) and p_general_config members of
the Structure should be non-NULL.
• This API initializes the Touch library for QTouch Group A or QTouch Group B method
acquisition. This API has to be called before calling any other QTouch API.
• Based on the input parameters, the CAT module is initialized with QTouch method Pin
and Register configuration.
• The p_qta_config/p_qta_config (based on whether Group A is used or Group B is used)
and p_general_config members of the input configuration structure must point to valid
configuration data.158 8207L-AT42-05/12
• The General configuration data provided by the p_general_config pointer is common to
both QMatrix, QTouch Group A, QTouch Group B and Autonomous Touch sensors.
6.3.17.2.2 touch_qt_sensor_config
touch_ret_t touch_qt_sensor_config(touch_qt_grp_t touch_qt_grp,
sensor_type_t sensor_type,
channel_t from_channel,
channel_t to_channel,
aks_group_t aks_group,
threshold_t detect_threshold,
hysteresis_t detect_hysteresis,
resolution_t position_resolution
sensor_id_t *p_sensor_id)
Arguments Type Comment
touch_qt_grp touch_qt_grp_t Specify if the operation is to be performed on Group A
Sensors or Group B Sensors.
sensor_type sensor_type_t Specifies sensor type – SENSOR_TYPE_KEY or
SENSOR_TYPE_ROTOR or
SENSOR_TYPE_SLIDER.
The SENSOR_TYPE_UNASSIGNED enum is not a valid
input to this API.
from_channel channel_t Start channel of the Sensor (rotor, slider or key).
to_channel channel_t End channel of the Sensor (rotor, slider or key). For a
key, the start and end channels must be the same.
aks_group aks_group_t AKS group of this sensor.
detect_threshold threshold_t Touch Detect threshold level for Sensor.
detect_hysteresis hysteresis_t Value for detection hysteresis.
position_resolution resolution_t Position resolution when configuring rotor / slider
p_sensor_id sensor_id_t* The Sensor ID is updated by the Touch Library upon
successful sensor configuration. The Sensor ID starts with
0.
• This API configures a single QTouch Key, Rotor or Slider.
• The user must provide all the sensor specific settings as input to this API.
• Rotor / Slider sensor will occupy contiguous channels from from_channel to to_channel.
• For QTouch acquisition method, 3 Touch channels per rotor / slider are supported. Keys
are always formed using 1 Touch channel.
6.3.17.2.3 touch_qt_sensor_update_config
touch_ret_t touch_qt_sensor_update_config(touch_qt_grp_t touch_qt_grp,
sensor_id_t sensor_id,
touch_qt_param_t *p_touch_sensor_param)
Arguments Type Comment
touch_qt_grp touch_qt_grp_t Specify if the operation is to be
performed on Group A Sensors or
Group B Sensors.159
sensor_id sensor_id_t Sensor ID for which the configuration
needs to be updated.
p_touch_sensor_param touch_qt_param_t * Pointer to the user sensor configuration
structure.
• This API updates the configuration of a QTouch sensor with values different from the
ones initialized by the touch_qt_sensor_config API. If the sensor was not configured
already, the API will return error.
• The user must populate the structure pointed by p_touch_sensor_param with required
settings before calling this API.
6.3.17.2.4 touch_qt_sensor_get_config
touch_ret_t touch_qt_sensor_get_config(touch_qt_grp_t touch_qt_grp,
sensor_id_t sensor_id,
touch_qt_param_t *p_touch_sensor_param)
Arguments Type Comment
touch_qt_grp touch_qt_grp_t Specify if the operation is to be
performed on Group A Sensors or
Group B Sensors.
sensor_id sensor_id_t Sensor ID for which the configuration
needs to be updated.
p_touch_sensor_param touch_qt_param_t* Pointer to the user sensor configuration
structure.
• This API copies the current configuration of a QTouch sensor into the user configuration
structure.
6.3.17.2.5 touch_qt_update_global_param
touch_ret_t touch_qt_update_global_param(touch_qt_grp_t touch_qt_grp,
touch_global_param_t *p_global_param )
Arguments Type Comment
touch_qt_grp touch_qt_grp_t Specify if the operation is to be performed on Group A
Sensors or Group B Sensors.
p_global_param touch_global_param_t Pointer to user global parameters structure for
QTouch Group A/B.
• This API can be used to update the QTouch A or QTouch B global parameters, with
values different from the ones initialized using touch_qt_sensors_init API.
6.3.17.2.6 touch_qt_get_global_param
touch_ret_t touch_qt_get_global_param(touch_qt_grp_t touch_qt_grp,
touch_global_param_t *p_global_param )
Arguments Type Comment
touch_qt_grp touch_qt_grp_t Specify if the operation is to be performed on Group A
Sensors or Group B Sensors.160 8207L-AT42-05/12
p_global_param touch_global_param_t Pointer to user global parameters structure for
QTouch Group A/B.
• This API can be called to retrieve the QTouch Group A or Group B global parameters.
6.3.17.2.7 touch_qt_sensors_calibrate
touch_ret_t touch_qt_sensors_calibrate(touch_qt_grp_t touch_qt_grp )
Arguments Type Comment
touch_qt_grp touch_qt_grp_t Specify if the operation is to be
performed on Group A Sensors or
Group B Sensors.
• This API can be used to calibrate all configured Sensors.
• Calibration of all Sensors must be performed when –
o All the Sensors have been configured using touch_sensor_config API after
initialization of the Touch Library.
o A sensor or a group of Sensors have been disabled or re-enabled.
6.3.17.2.8 touch_qt_sensors_start_acquisition
touch_ret_t touch_qt_sensors_start_acquisition(touch_qt_grp_t touch_qt_grp,
touch_time_t current_time_ms,
touch_qt_dma_t *p_touch_dma,
touch_acq_mode_t qt_acq_mode,
void (*measure_complete_callback)( touch_measure_data_t *p_measure_data ))
Arguments Type Comment
touch_qt_grp touch_qt_grp_t Specify if the operation
is to be performed on
Group A Sensors or
Group B Sensors.
current_time_ms touch_time_t Current time in ms
p_touch_dma touch_qt_dma_t* DMA channels to be
used for transfer to burst
length & acquisition
count
qt_acq_mode touch_acq_mode_t Specify whether Normal
acquisition mode or
Raw acquisition mode
should be done.
void
(*measure_complete_callback)(
void )
void
(*measure_complete_callback)(
touch_measure_data_t
*p_measure_data)
QTouch Group A or
Group B Measure
complete callback
function pointer
• This API initiates a capacitive measurement on all enabled QTouch Group A or Group B
sensors depending on the touch_qt_grp specified.161
• When normal acquisition mode is used, once the Touch measurement is completed on all
the QTouch sensors, before processing the raw acquisition data (channel_signals), a
filter_callback function is optionally called by the Touch Library.
• Once the filter_callback is completed, the signal values will be processed by the Touch
Library. The measure_complete_callback function is then called with touch data
(channel_signals, channel_references, sensor_states, sensors structure) as well as the
Touch Status (sensor_states) and Rotor/Slider position (rotor_slider_values).
• The touch_event_dispatcher API needs to be called as frequently as possible for the
Touch Library to process the raw acquisition data.
• When raw data acquisition mode is used, once the raw acquisition data is available from
the CAT module for all the sensors, the measure_complete_callback function is
immediately called with acquisition data (channel_signals). The channel_references,
sensor_states and rotor_slider_values data are not updated by the Touch Library in this
mode.
• This API will return error if a Touch measurement is already in progress.
• One peripheral DMA channels must be provided using p_touch_dma for QTouch
operation.
6.3.17.2.9 touch_qt _sensor_ disable
touch_ret_t touch_qt_ sensor_disable(touch_qt_grp_t touch_qt_grp,
sensor_id_t sensor_id)
Arguments Type Comment
touch_qt_grp touch_qt_grp_t Specify if the operation is to be performed on Group A Sensors
or Group B Sensors.
sensor_id sensor_id_t Sensor ID of the Sensor to be disabled.
• This API can be used to disable Touch measurement on a QTouch Sensor.
• The touch_qt_sensors_calibrate API needs to be called whenever one or more Sensors
are disabled before starting a new Touch measurement using the
touch_qt_sensors_start_acquisition API.
• Note: Care must be taken such that a valid Sensor ID corresponding to a QTouch Group
A sensor or QTouch Group B Sensor is provided.
6.3.17.2.10 touch_qt _sensor_ reenable
touch_ret_t touch_qt _sensor_reenable(touch_qt_grp_t touch_qt_grp,
sensor_id_t sensor_id)
Arguments Type Comment
touch_qt_grp touch_qt_grp_t Specify if the operation is to be performed on Group A Sensors
or Group B Sensors.
sensor_id sensor_id_t Sensor ID of the Sensor to be disabled.
• This API can be used to reenable a disabled QTouch Sensor. 162 8207L-AT42-05/12
• The touch_qt_sensors_calibrate API needs to be called whenever one or more Sensors
are reenabled before starting a new Touch measurement using the
touch_qt_sensors_start_acquisition API.
• Note: Care must be taken such that a valid Sensor ID corresponding to a QTouch Group
A sensor or QTouch Group B Sensor is provided.
6.3.17.2.11 touch_qt_get_libinfo
touch_ret_t touch_qt_get_libinfo(touch_qt_grp_t touch_qt_grp,
touch_info_t *p_touch_info)
Arguments Type Comment
touch_qt_grp touch_qt_grp_t Specify if the operation is to be performed on Group A Sensors
or Group B Sensors.
p_
touch_info
touch_info_t* User passes the memory address at which the library
information is to be stored by the library.
• The touch_info_t structure is filled by the library with the Group specific (based on
touch_qt_grp input) information like number of QTouch channels, number of QTouch
sensors, number of QTouch rotors/slider, CAT hardware version, and library version.
• The QTouch number of channels, sensors and rotors/slider indicate the total number of
channels, sensors and rotor/slider in use irrespective of Touch measured being disabled
or enabled. (Disabling and Re-enabling of a Sensor using the touch_qt_sensor_disable
and touch_qt_sensor_reenable API does not alter these values).
6.3.17.2.12touch_qt_sensor_get_delta
touch_ret_t touch_qt_sensor_get_delta(touch_qt_grp_t touch_qt_grp,
sensor_id_t sensor_id,
touch_delta_t *p_delta)
Arguments Type Comment
sensor_id sensor_id_t Sensor ID for which the delta needs to be retrieved.
p_delta touch_delta_t* Pointer to Delta variable, that will be update by the Touch Library
• This API retrieves the delta information associated with a specific QTouch sensor. Delta
is the difference between the current signal value and reference value.
• The user must provide the sensor ID whose delta is sought along with a valid pointer to a
Delta variable.
• The API updates the delta variable associated with the requested sensor.
6.3.18 Autonomous touch API
This section lists the functions that are specific to Autonomous QTouch sensor.
6.3.18.1.1 touch_at_sensor_init
touch_ret_t touch_at_sensor_init( touch_config_t *p_touch_config )163
Arguments Type Comment
p_touch_config touch_config_t* Pointer to Touch Library input configuration structure. The
p_at_config and p_general_config members of the input
configuration structure must be non-NULL.
• This API initializes the touch library Autonomous touch sensor. This API has to be called
before calling any other Autonomous touch API function.
• Based on the input parameters, the CAT module is initialized with Autonomous Sensor
Pin and Register configuration.
• The General configuration data provided by the p_general_config pointer is common to
both QMatrix, QTouch Group A, QTouch Group B and Autonomous Touch sensors.
6.3.18.1.2 touch_at_sensor_enable
touch_ret_t touch_at_sensor_enable( void)
Arguments Type Comment
void
(*touch_at_status_change_interrupt_
callback) (touch_at_status
*p_at_status)
void
(*touch_at_status_change_interrupt
_callback) (touch_at_status
*p_at_status)
Autonomous
QTouch Callback
function.
• This API enables the autonomous touch sensor and initiates continuous Touch
measurement on the Autonomous QTouch sensor.
• When there is a change in the autonomous QTouch sensor status, the callback function
as specified in touch_at_status_change_interrupt_callback will be called. The callback
function lets the user know whether the autonomous QTouch sensor is currently in touch
or out of touch.
Note that this callback function will be called from an interrupt service routine. Hence it is
recommended to have as minimal code as possible in the callback function.
• This API should be called only after touch_at_sensor_init API is called.
6.3.18.1.3 touch_at_sensor_disable
touch_ret_t touch_at_sensor_disable( void)
Arguments Type Comment
void -
• This API disables the Touch measurement on the Autonomous QTouch sensor. The
status change callback function is not called when the Sensor is disabled.
6.3.18.1.4 touch_at_sensor_update_config
touch_ret_t touch_at_sensor_update_config( touch_at_param_t *p_at_param )
Arguments Type Comment164 8207L-AT42-05/12
p_at_param touch_at_param_t* Pointer to autonomous QTouch sensor configuration
structure.
• This API updates the configuration of autonomous QTouch sensor with a setting that is
different from the one configured by calling touch_at_sensor_init API.
• The user must populate the structure pointed by p_at_param with required settings
before calling this API.
6.3.18.1.5 touch_at_sensor_get_config
touch_ret_t touch_at_sensor_get_config( touch_at_param_t *p_at_param )
Arguments Type Comment
p_at_param touch_at_param_t* Pointer to autonomous QTouch sensor configuration
structure.
• This API retrieves the current configuration of the autonomous QTouch sensor.
6.3.18.1.6 touch_at_get_libinfo
touch_ret_t touch_at_get_libinfo( touch_info_t *p_touch_info)
Arguments Type Comment
p_touch_info touch_info_t* User passes the memory address at which the library information
is to be updated.
• The touch_info_t structure is filled by the library with information on the number of
autonomous QTouch channels (Fixed value of 1), number of autonomous QTouch
sensors (Fixed value of 1), number of autonomous QTouch rotors/slider (Fixed value of
0), CAT hardware version and library version.
6.3.18.2 Common API
This section lists the functions that are common to QMatrix, QTouch Group A/B and Autonomous
QTouch acquisition methods.
6.3.18.2.1 touch_event_dispatcher
void touch_event_dispatcher ( void )
Arguments Type Comment
Void -
• This API needs to be called by the user application to allow the library to process the raw
acquisition data from the sensors.
• Once touch_qm_sensors_start_acquisition is called, touch_event_dispatcher API needs
to be called as frequently as possible by the Host application.
• The signals_callback and measure_complete_callback functions are called from the
touch_event_dispatcher API context.
6.3.18.2.2 touch_deinit
void touch_deinit (void)165
Arguments Type Comment
void -
• This API can be used to de-initalize the Touch Library and disable the CAT module.
• Calling this API de-initializes the Touch Library for Sensors corresponding to all methods
of acquisition (QMatrix, QTouch Group A, QTouch Group B and Autonomous QTouch).
6.3.19 Integrating QTouch libraries for AT32UC3L in your application
This section illustrates the key steps required in integrating the QTouch™ library in your
application.
a. For your design, you would need the following information to select the correct library
variant
• Device to be used for the design – Current library supports AT32UC3L064,
AT32UC3L032, AT32UC3L016 device variants.
• Compiler platform you intend to use to integrate the libraries.
b. Copy the library variant that was selected in step one to your project’s working directory
or update your project to point to the library selected.
c. Include touch_api_at32uc3l.h & touch_config_at32uc3l.h header files of the QTouch™
library in your application. The header files can be found in the library installation folder.
d. Initialize/create and use the Touch APIs in your application
• Set the various configuration options using the touch_config_at32uc3l.h file.
• Initialize and configure the sensors in the Host application.
• The Host application also has to provide the required timing so as to perform
Touch measurement at regular intervals.
e. General application notes
• Ensure that there are no conflicts between the resources used by the Touch
library and the host application
• Ensure that the stack size is adjusted to factor in the stack depth required for the
operation of the touch libraries.
6.3.20 MISRA Compliance Report of QTouch Library for UC3L
This section lists the compliance and deviations for MISRA standards of coding practice for the
UC3L QTouch libraries.
6.3.21 What is covered
The MISRA compliance covers the QTouch library for AT32UC3L devices. The Example projects
and associated code provided is not guaranteed to be MISRA compliant.
6.3.22 Target Environment
Development Environment IAR Embedded Workbench for Atmel AVR32
MISRA Checking software The MISRA C Compliance has been performed for the library
using MISRA C 2004 Rules in IAR Workbench for Atmel AVR32
MISRA Rule set applied MISRAC 2004 Rule Set, All including advisory
6.3.23 Deviations from MISRA C Standards
The QTouch library was subjected to the above mentioned MISRA compliance rules. The
following table lists the exceptions in the AT32UC3L QTouch library source code and also
provides explanation for these exceptions.166 8207L-AT42-05/12
Apart from these, there were many exceptions in the standard header files supplied by the tool
chain and those are not captured here.
Rule Rule Description Advisory/
Required
Exception noted / How it is
addressed
1.1 All code shall conform to ISO 9899
standard C, with no extensions
permitted.
Required This Rule is not supported as the
library implementation requires IAR
extensions like __interrupt. These
intrinsic functions relate to device
hardware functionality, and cannot
practically be avoided.
5.4 A tag name shall be a unique
identifier
Required This is violated as for the reason that
enumerated types are mixed with
other types. This is caused by
integers being assigned to
enumerated types in some places to
save code space
6.3 The basic types of char, int, short,
long, float, and double should not
be used, but specific-length
equivalents should be typedef'd for
the specific compiler, and these
type names used in the code
Advisory The type bool supported by the
compiler violate this rule.
10.3 The value of a complex expression
of integer type shall only be cast to
a type that is not wider and of the
same signedness as the
underlying type of the expression
Required This is required in the code to do
align some pointers in the data block
memory. Cannot be avoided.
11.3 A cast should not be done
between a pointer type and an
integral type
Advisory This is required in the code to do
align some pointers in the data block
memory. Cannot be avoided.
17.4 Array indexing shall be the only
allowed form of pointer arithmetic
Required Pointer increment has been done in
some places for sequential access of
signals, references, etc.
19.13 The # and ## preprocessor
operators should not be used
Advisory This is required for implementation of
a macro for ease of use &
abstraction
6.3.24 Known Issues with QTouch Library for UC3L
• When the IAR Example Project is build, the IAR32 compiler reports the following Warning
- Warning[Pe047]: incompatible redefinition of macro "AVR32_PM_PPCR_MASK"
(declared at line 607 of "C:\Program Files\IAR Systems\Embedded C:\Program Files\IAR
Systems\Embedded Workbench 5.6\avr32\INC\avr32\pm_400.h 467 Workbench
5.6\avr32\INC\avr32/uc3l064.h").
In order to avoid this, this warning (Pe047) has been disabled using the Diagnostics
option in the IAR32 Project.167
6.4 QTouch Library for ATtiny20 device
ATMEL QTouch Library for ATtiny20 can be used for embedding capacitive touch buttons
functionality into ATtiny20 device application.
This Section describes the QTouch Library Application Programming API and Configuration
interface for QTouch method acquisition using the ATtiny20 devices.
6.4.1 Salient Features of QTouch Library for ATtiny20
6.4.1.1 QTouch method sensor
• 1 Physical pin per Touch Button.
• 1 to 5 Touch Buttons can be configured.
• Individual Sensor Threshold, Sensor Hysteresis and Sensor Global acquisition
parameters can be configured.
• Adjacent Key Supression (AKS) support.
• QTouch Studio support for Touch data analysis.
• ‘C’ Programming interface for easy inclusion of User application.
6.4.2 Compiler tool chain support for ATtiny20
The QTouch libraries for ATtiny20 devices are supported for the following compiler tool chains.
Tool Version
IAR Embedded Workbench for Atmel AVR.
IAR Compiler. 5.5
Table 17 Compiler tool chains support for ATtiny20 QTouch Library
6.4.3 Overview of QTouch Library for ATtiny20
For an overview of QTouch method based capacitive touch acquisition, refer Section 5.2.1
QTouch Acquistion method.
The QTouch Library for ATtiny20 device allows for Sensor configuration and Sensor Acquisition
parameter setting. Based on the input Sensor configuration, the QTouch Library takes care of the
capacitive touch acquisition data capture operations on the external capacitive touch sensors.
The captured Touch Data and Touch Button ON/OFF Status information is then available for user
application.
The diagram below indicates a Typical Sensor arrangement using the Tiny20 device. The
QTouch Library uses the ATtiny20 ADC Module to peform capacitive Touch measurements. The
ADC module must be enabled by the Host Application and configured in Free running mode for
QTouch Library to function correctly. The PA0 pin must be configured as Output pin and should
be in HIGH state before the qt_measure_sensors API is called. Port pins PA1 to PA7 can be
used to support upto 5 Touch Buttons. The Touch Buttons must be connected to sequential Port
pins. However, it is not necessary to start the first Touch Button on Port pin PA1. For Example,
when 3 Touch Buttons are required, they can by connected to pins PA5, PA6 and PA7.
The Sensor numbering is always in the increasing order of Port pin.168 8207L-AT42-05/12
Figure 48 Schematic overview of QTouch on Tiny20
6.4.4 API Flow diagram for ATtiny20
For the QTouch Libraries, the timing information is provided by the Host Application by updating
the ‘time_current_ms’ variable in the Timer ISR. The QTouch Library uses this variable to
calculate the necessary timing for Max ON Duration, Drift and Recalibration functionality. Before
using the QTouch Libraries, the Timer ISR must be configured appropriately. Also, the Timer
Interrupt is used to update the ‘time_to_measure_touch’ variable inorder to start a capacitive
touch measurement. It is recommended to call qt_measure_sensors within 100ms each time to
avoid error in QTouch Library timing.
The touch_config_tiny20.h configuration header file can be used to set the desired number of
Touch Sensors (Buttons) as well as individual sensor Threshold, Hysteresis and Recalibration
parameters. The Sensor Global Configuration parameters must be specified using the IAR Linker
define options.
Figure 49 Linker configuration options for Tiny20
ATtiny20
PA0
PA1
PA2
PA3
PA4
PA5
PA6
PA7
1Kohm
1Kohm
1Kohm
1Kohm
1Kohm
Touch Button 1
Touch Button 2
Touch Button 3
Touch Button 4
Touch Button 5
VCC
No Connection
GND169
Figure 50 QTouch method for Tiny20 API Flow diagram
6.4.5 QTouch Library configuration parameters for ATtiny20
The Table below describes the various configuration parameters corresponding to the ATtiny20.
qt_init_sensing()
Setup the desired device clock using the init_system() in main.c
Using the init_timer(), setup the Timer ISR such that the Timer Interrupt occurs every
20ms . Enable the ADC and configure in Free running mode.
Using the touch_config_tiny20.h configuration file,
1. Set the desired number of Sensors.
2. Set the Individual sensor Threshold, Hysteresis, Recalibration Threshold and Delay
cycle values.
3. Set the desired Sensor Global acquisition parameters using the
IAR Project->Linker options.
4. The DEF_QT_ADC_CHANNEL_START_INDEX Linker option can be used to set
the starting ADC Channel.
Add any Host Application
(a Sample LED application is available with the Tin20 EK IAR Example project).
qt_measure_sensors()
Call in loop
time_to_
measure_touch
Measured data and Touch Status
Host Application code170 8207L-AT42-05/12
Parameter Description
DEF_QT_QDEBUG_ENABLE Enable/Disable QDebug debug data communication to QTouch
Studio.
DEF_QT_NUM_SENSORS QTouch number of Sensors. Range: 1u to 5u.
DEF_QT_SENSOR_0_THRESHOLD,
DEF_QT_SENSOR_1_THRESHOLD,
DEF_QT_SENSOR_2_THRESHOLD,
DEF_QT_SENSOR_3_THRESHOLD,
DEF_QT_SENSOR_4_THRESHOLD
Sensor detection threshold value.
Range: 1u to 255u.
DEF_QT_SENSOR_0_HYSTERESIS,
DEF_QT_SENSOR_1_HYSTERESIS,
DEF_QT_SENSOR_2_HYSTERESIS,
DEF_QT_SENSOR_3_HYSTERESIS,
DEF_QT_SENSOR_4_HYSTERESIS
Sensor detection hysteresis value. Refer hysteresis_t in
touch_api_tiny20.h
HYST_50 = (50% of Sensor detection threshold value)
HYST_25 = (25% of Sensor detection threshold value)
HYST_12_5 = (12.5% of Sensor detection threshold value)
HYST_6_25 = (6.25%, but value is hardlimited to 2)
DEF_QT_SENSOR_0_RECAL_THRESHOLD,
DEF_QT_SENSOR_1_RECAL_THRESHOLD,
DEF_QT_SENSOR_2_RECAL_THRESHOLD,
DEF_QT_SENSOR_3_RECAL_THRESHOLD,
DEF_QT_SENSOR_4_RECAL_THRESHOLD
Sensor recalibration threshold value. Refer recal_threshold_t in
touch_api_tiny20.h
RECAL_100 = (100% of Sensor detection threshold value)
RECAL_50 = (50% of Sensor detection threshold value)
RECAL_25 = (25% of Sensor detection threshold value)
RECAL_12_5 = (12.5% of Sensor detection threshold value)
RECAL_6_25 = (6.25%, but value is hardlimited to 4)
DEF_QT_DELAY_CYCLES Delay cycles that determine the capacitance charge transfer time.
Range: 1, 2, 4, 8 or 10 internal System Clock cycles.
DEF_QT_ADC_CHANNEL_START_INDEX ADC Channel starting index. Range: 1u to 7u.
DEF_QT_AKS_ENABLE Enable/Disable Adjacent Key suppression (AKS) on all channels.
DEF_QT_DI Sensor detect integration (DI) limit.Range: 0u to 255u.
Refer Section 5.3 and Section 5.4 for more info.
DEF_QT_NEG_DRIFT_RATE*(See Note 1) Sensor negative drift rate. Units: 100ms, Range: 1u to 127u.
Refer Section 5.3 and Section 5.4 for more info.
DEF_QT_POS_DRIFT_RATE*(See Note 1) Sensor positive drift rate. Units: 100ms, Range: 1u to 127u.
Refer Section 5.3 and Section 5.4 for more info.
DEF_QT_MAX_ON_DURATION Sensor maximum on duration. Units: 100ms, Range: 0u to 255u.
Refer Section 5.3 and Section 5.4 for more info.
DEF_QT_DRIFT_HOLD_TIME Sensor drift hold time. Units: 100ms, Range: 1u to 255u.
Refer Section 5.3 and Section 5.4 for more info.
DEF_QT_POS_RECAL_DELAY Positive Recalibration delay. Range: 1u to 255u.
Refer Section 5.3 and Section 5.4 for more info.
DEF_QT_NUM_SENSORS_SYM QTouch number of Sensors Symbol for QTouch Library.
MUST be the same as DEF_QT_NUM_SENSORS.
DEF_QT_BURST_LENGTH
Specifies the no:of burst sequence required for a sensor. Multiple
burst for adjusting sensitivity by increasing the resolution of the Signal
measured.Use higher value for increasing sensitivity.
Values: 1u, 4u and 16u, 32u. With a setting of 32u, the Touch
Response time would be sluggish.
DEF_CHARGE_SHARE_DELAY
Defines the Charging Share Delay time as an additional Number of
CPU Cycles delay to be introduced during the Charge transfer.
Values:0 to 255.
Table 18 QTouch Library for ATtiny20 Configuration parameters171
Note1:
For the case of ATtiny20 devices, a ‘touch’ causes the Signal value measured on the Sensor to
increase above the Sensor Reference value (In the case of Generic Library devices, a ‘touch’
causes the Signal value to decrease below the Reference value).
However, the Negative drift rate and Positive drift rate functionality for the case of Tiny20 devices
shall be consistent with the Generic Library case.
So, it is recommended to have a ‘Slower’ Negative Drift rate (4 seconds is the default setting) and
a ‘Faster’ Positive Drift rate (1 second is the default setting) for the Tiny20 device.
6.4.6 QTouch Library ATtiny20 Example projects
The QTouch method IAR Example project for the Tiny20 Evaluation Kit can be found in the
following path.
\Device_Specific_Libraries\8bit_AVR\AVR_Tiny_Mega_XMega\ATtiny20\
tiny20_ek_iar_qt_example
The Example projects demonstrate the 5 button sensor configuration with a Sample LED
application. The Example projects also support QDebug data transfer to QTouch Studio – Touch
Analyzer PC Application.
It is possible to configure the number of Sensors in the Example project from 1 to 5 for testing on
the ATtiny20 Evaluation kit.
6.4.7 QTouch Library ATtiny20 code and data memory requirements
The code and data memory requirements for QTouch Library for ATtiny20 devices is captured in
the Table below. The Table indicates these values for the standalone library and not for the
entire Example Project application.
Library Number of
Sensors
Code Memory Data
memory
CStack/RStack
libtiny20-5qt-k-
0rs 5 1231 + 15 bytes
Const data 70
CStack= 0x1C bytes
RStack= 10
(16 bytes) is the
Recommended setting.
libtiny20-5qt-k-
0rs 4 1231 + 12 bytes
Const data 60
CStack= 0x1C bytes
RStack= 10
(16 bytes) is the
Recommended setting.
libtiny20-5qt-k-
0rs 3 1231 + 9 bytes
Const data 50
CStack= 0x1C bytes
RStack= 10
(16 bytes) is the
Recommended setting.
libtiny20-5qt-k-
0rs 2 1231+ 6 bytes
Const data 40
CStack= 0x1C bytes
RStack= 10
(16 bytes) is the
Recommended setting.
libtiny20-5qt-k-
0rs
1 1231 + 3 bytes
Const data 30
CStack= 0x1C bytes
RStack= 10
(16 bytes) is the
Recommended setting.
Table 19 QTouch Library for ATtiny20 Memory requirements172 8207L-AT42-05/12
Data memory for ATtiny20 QTouch Library include the following.
10. QTouch Library data memory – 19 bytes, allocated inside the Library.
11. channel_signals – 2 bytes per Sensor, allocated in main.c
12. channel_references – 2 bytes per Sensor, allocated in main.c
13. sensor_delta – 2 bytes per Sensor, allocated in main.c
14. sensor_general_counter – 2 bytes per Sensor, allocated in main.c
15. sensor_state – 1 byte per Sensor, allocated in main.c
16. sensor_ndil_counter – 1 byte per Sensor, allocated in main.c
17. sensor_states – 1 byte, allocated in main.c
Const Data memory for ATtiny20 QTouch Library include the following.
1. sensor_threshold, 1 byte per Sensor, allocated in main.c
2. sensor_hyst_threshold, 1 byte per Sensor, allocated in main.c
3. sensor_recal_threshold, 1 byte per Sensor, allocated in main.c
6.5 QTouch Library for ATtiny40 device
ATMEL QTouch Library for ATtiny40 can be used for embedding capacitive touch buttons
functionality into ATtiny40 device application.
This Section describes the QTouch Library Application Programming API and Configuration
interface for QTouch method acquisition using the ATtiny40 devices.
6.5.1 Salient Features of QTouch Library for ATtiny40
6.5.1.1 QTouch method sensor
• One Physical pin per Touch Button.
• 1 to 12 Touch Buttons can be configured.
• Individual Sensor Threshold, Sensor Hysteresis and Sensor Global acquisition
parameters can be configured.
• Signal resolution can be configured.
• Charge Share Delay can be configured.
• Adjacent Key Supression (AKS) support.
• QTouch Studio support for Touch data analysis.
• ‘C’ Programming interface for easy inclusion of User application.173
6.5.2 Compiler tool chain support for ATtiny40
The QTouch libraries for ATtiny40 devices are supported for the following compiler tool chains.
Tool Version
IAR Embedded Workbench for Atmel AVR.
IAR Compiler. 6.10
Table 20 Compiler tool chains support for ATtiny40 QTouch Library
6.5.3 Overview of QTouch Library for ATtiny40
For an overview of QTouch method based capacitive touch acquisition, refer Section 5.2.1
QTouch Acquistion method.
The QTouch Library for ATtiny40 device allows for Sensor configuration and Sensor Acquisition
parameter setting. Based on the input Sensor configuration, the QTouch Library takes care of the
capacitive touch acquisition data capture operations on the external capacitive touch sensors.
The captured Touch Data and Touch Button ON/OFF Status information is then available for user
application.
The diagram below indicates a Typical Sensor arrangement using the Tiny40 device. For one
channel configuration, two ADC pins are used for acquisition. For number of touch buttons
greater than one, no extra ADC pins are used. Port pins PA0 to PA7 and PB0 to PB3 can be
used to support upto 12 Touch Buttons. The Touch Buttons may be connected anywhere on the
said port pins.
The Sensor numbering is always in the increasing order of Port pin.
Figure 51 Schematic overview of QTouch on Tiny40
ATtiny40
PA0
PA1
PA2
PA3
PA4
PA5
PA6
PA7
1Kohm
Touch Button 1
VCC
GND
Touch Button 0
PB0
PB1
PB2
PB3
1Kohm
1Kohm
Touch Button 3
Touch Button 2
1Kohm
Touch Button 5
Touch Button 4
1Kohm
1Kohm
Touch Button 7
Touch Button 6
1Kohm
Touch Button 9
Touch Button 8
1Kohm
1Kohm
Touch Button 11
Touch Button 10
1Kohm
1Kohm
1Kohm174 8207L-AT42-05/12
6.5.4 API Flow diagram for ATtiny40
For the QTouch Libraries, the timing information is provided by the Host Application by updating
the ‘time_current_ms’ variable in the Timer ISR. The QTouch Library uses this variable to
calculate the necessary timing for Max ON Duration, Drift and Recalibration functionality. Before
using the QTouch Libraries, the Timer ISR must be configured appropriately. Also, the Timer
Interrupt is used to update the ‘time_to_measure_touch’ variable inorder to start a capacitive
touch measurement.
The touch_config_dp.h configuration header file must be used to set the number of channels
based on the library used. For example, if the library used is a 12 channel library then
QT_NUM_CHANNELS must be specified as 12 in the touch_config_dp.h. This information must
be provided irrespective of the number of channels actually used.
The desired number of touch buttons used can be enabled using the qt_enable_key() routine.
The channel numbers are sequential from Port A through Port B. Also, individual sensor
Threshold, Hysteresis, AKS group and Recalibration parameters can be set using this function
call. The Sensor Global Configuration parameters can also be set by the user by directly
accessing the global configuration data structure.
When developing a Host application for ATtiny40 device, ensure that the ADC prescalar is set in
such a way that it is in the range of 50 KHz to 250 KHz. For example, if the main clock is running
at 8MHz then set the ADC prescalar to 32 or more. This must be done to ensure proper touch
sensing acquisition.175
Figure 52 QTouch method for Tiny40 API Flow diagram
6.5.5 QTouch Library configuration parameters for ATtiny40
The Table below describes the various configuration parameters corresponding to the ATtiny40
QTouch Library.176 8207L-AT42-05/12
Parameter Description
DEF_QT_DI Sensor detect integration (DI) limit.Range: 0u to 255u.
Refer Section 5.3 and Section 5.4 for more info.
DEF_QT_NEG_DRIFT_RATE*(See Note 1) Sensor negative drift rate. Units: 100ms, Range: 1u to 127u.
Refer Section 5.3 and Section 5.4 for more info.
DEF_QT_POS_DRIFT_RATE*(See Note 1) Sensor positive drift rate. Units: 100ms, Range: 1u to 127u.
Refer Section 5.3 and Section 5.4 for more info.
DEF_QT_MAX_ON_DURATION Sensor maximum on duration. Units: 100ms, Range: 0u to 255u.
Refer Section 5.3 and Section 5.4 for more info.
DEF_QT_DRIFT_HOLD_TIME Sensor drift hold time. Units: 100ms, Range: 1u to 255u.
Refer Section 5.3 and Section 5.4 for more info.
DEF_QT_RECAL_THRESHOLD
• Setting of 0 = 100% of detect threshold
• Setting of 1 = 50% of detect threshold
• Setting of 2 = 25% of detect threshold
• Setting of 3 = 12.5% of detect threshold
• Setting of 4 = 6.25% of detect threshold
Refer Section 5.3 and Section 5.4 for more info.
DEF_QT_POS_RECAL_DELAY Positive Recalibration delay. Range: 1u to 255u.
Refer Section 5.3 and Section 5.4 for more info.
DEF_QT_PULSE_SCALE
Default value is 0x0 means 1 oversamples and scaling/averaging
factor 1.
Refer Note on using Pulse Scale Value:
DEF_QT_CHARGE_SHARE_DELAY
Charge Share Delay. Range: 1u – 255u. This value needs to be
increased if we use high value of series resistor on sensor pin to
ensure proper charge time.
Table 21 QTouch Library for ATtiny40 Configuration parameters
Note1:
For the case of ATtiny40 devices, a ‘touch’ causes the Signal value measured on the Sensor to
increase above the Sensor Reference value (In the case of Generic Library devices, a ‘touch’
causes the Signal value to decrease below the Reference value).
However, the Negative drift rate and Positive drift rate functionality for the case of Tiny40 devices
shall be consistent with the Generic Library case.
So, it is recommended to have a ‘Slower’ Negative Drift rate (4 seconds is the default setting) and
a ‘Faster’ Positive Drift rate (1 second is the default setting) for the Tiny40 device.
Note on using Pulse Scale Value:
This variable is used to increase the resolution of the signal. qt_pulse_scale variable is available
to change the oversampling and scaling factor.This is available for all the channels and now with
this one should increase the gain for each channel individually.
Function set_qt_pulse_scale is provided in main.c file for reference which will change the values
of pulse scale variable.
This variable is divided into higher(pulse/oversamples) and lower(scaling/averaging) nibble.The
higher nibble corresponds to number of oversamples and lower nibble corresponds to
scaling/averaging. The Pulse value is the power of 2 number of pulses which will accumulate their
results.The Scale value is the power of 2 number which will divide the accumulated result from
the pulse measurements.
The maximum value of higher nibble possible is 0xA and maximum value of lower nibble is 0xA.177
Consideration should be taken on the overall effect on timing when setting Pulse values.
A high gain setting will add considerably time taken to acquire all channels.
6.5.6 QTouch Library ATtiny40 Example projects
The QTouch method IAR Example project for the Tiny40 Evaluation Kit can be found in the
following path.
\Device_Specific_Libraries\8bit_AVR\AVR_Tiny_Mega_XMega\ATtiny40\tiny40_qt_example_iar
The Example projects demonstrate the 12 button sensor configuration. The Example projects
also support QDebug data transfer to QTouch Studio – Touch Analyzer PC Application.
It is possible to configure the number of Sensors in the Example project from 1 to 12 for testing
on the ATtiny40 Evaluation kit.
6.5.7 QTouch Library ATtiny40 code and data memory requirements
The code and data memory requirements for QTouch Library for ATtiny40 devices is captured in
the Table below. The Table indicates these values for the standalone library and not for the
entire Example Project application.
Library Number of
Sensors
Code Memory Data
memory
CStack/RStack
libtiny40_4qt_k_0rs 4 2400 149 CStack= 40 bytes
RStack= 24 bytes
libtiny40_8qt_k_0rs 8 2400 193 CStack= 40 bytes
RStack= 24 bytes
libtiny40_12qt_k_0rs 12 2500 235 CStack= 40 bytes
RStack= 24 bytes
Table 22 QTouch Library for ATtiny40 Memory requirements
6.5.8 Interrupt Handling in QTouch ADC
In case of ATtiny40, the Interrupts are disabled for each acquisition sample means once per
charge transfers cycle and typically this is 1184 Instruction cycles.
Depending on number of oversamples and channels, the total number of times the interrupts are
disabled will vary.
Total number of times interrupts disabled = No of oversamples * No of channels.
The Touch measurement will not be affected by longer ISR execution, only the response time will
get affected.
The acquisition time is a lot more predictable since a fixed amount of pulses/oversamples are
used. The time to execute one measurement will depend on various software parameters like no
of oversamples, Charge share delay and CPU Frequency.
For one button to execute with following below parameters, QTouch ADC takes around 0.7
msec.
CPU Freq=4 MHZ, Number of oversamples=1, Charge Share Delay =1.178 8207L-AT42-05/12
7 Generic QTouch Libraries for 2K Devices
7.1 Introduction
This section provides information about the QTouch library Acquisition Support for Tiny devices
with 2K Flash memory. These libraries have the same API’s as Generic libraries, except for a few
which are not supported.Information about the API’s are provided in touch_api_2kdevice.h file
which is placed at location mentioned in section 5.6.10.1
7.2 Devices supported
The list of different devices that are supported by the QTouch library for 2K devices is given
below:
1. ATtiny2313A
2. ATtiny261A
3. ATtiny24A
4. ATtiny25A
Complete information is available in Library_Selection_Guide.xls.
7.3 Salient Features of QTouch Library for 2K Devices
• 1 to 4 Touch Buttons can be configured. Supports maximum of 4 Buttons.
• Libraries in variants of 1, 2 and 4 channels are provided.
• 2K device libraries are supported only for IAR.
• Library API’s are same as Generic QTouch libraries.
• Support for more than one pair of SNS and SNSK ports are not available for 2K tiny
devices.
NOTE:
No AKS, no Power Optimization and no pin configurability support in case of 2K device
libraries.
The change information like library status flags which reflects if there is any change in
Reference values, rotor slider position change status flags etc are not part of the 2K device
libraries except burst again flag.
7.4 Library Variants
For Different library variants available for 2K Devices, please refer Library_Selection_Guide.xls
7.5 QTouch API for 2K Devices and Usage
This section describes the different API’s used during touch sensing. Using the API, Touch
sensors and the associated channels can be defined. Once touch sensing has been initiated by
the user, the host application can use the API to make touch measurements and determine the
status of the sensors.Refer section 5.6.6 and Figure 5.6 for API usage
7.5.1 touch_api_2kdevice.h - public header file179
The touch_api_2kdevice.h header file is the public header file which needs to be included in
user’s application. The type definitions and function prototypes of the API’s listed in sections 5.6.3
, 5.6.4 and 5.6.5
The touch_api_2kdevice.h header file is located in the library distribution in the following
directory.
• ..\Atmel_QTouch_Libraries_5.x\Generic_QTouch_Libraries\include
The constant/symbol definitions can be placed in any of the following.
Defined user’s project options. All the constants/symbols must be defined for both the
compiler and assembler preprocessing definitions.
As an alternative, it is also declared in the touch_qt_config_2kdevice.h file. The user
may modify these defined values based on the requirements.
Global settings common to all sensors and sensor specific settings are listed in sections 5.3 and
5.4 respectively
7.5.2 Sequence of Operations and Using the API
Figure 5-6 illustrates the sequence of operations required to be performed to add touch to an end
application. By using the simple API’s as illustrated in the sequence flowchart, the user can add
touch sensing in his design.
7.5.2.1 Channel Numbering
• 1-channel library – supports 1 channel using 1 consecutive pins on different SNS and
SNSK ports (or) supports 1 channel using 2 consecutive pins on the same port used for
both SNS and SNSK lines. This library requires 1 or 2 port.
• 2-channel library – supports up to 2 channels using 2 consecutive pins on different SNS
and SNSK ports (or) supports up to 2 channels using 4 consecutive pins on the same
port used for both SNS and SNSK lines. This library requires 1 or 2 ports.
• 4-channel library – supports up to 4 channels using 4 consecutive pins on different SNS
and SNSK ports (or) supports up to 4 channels using 8 consecutive pins on the same
port used for both SNS and SNSK lines. This library requires 1 or 2 ports.
7.5.2.1.1 Channel numbering when routing SNS and SNSK pins to different ports
When SNS and SNSK pins are available on different ports, the channel numbering follows the pin
numbering in the ports selected.
• The channel numbers follow the pin numbers starting with the LSB (pin 0 is channel 0
and pin 3 is channel 3).
• Since the channel numbers are fixed to the pins of the SNS and SNSK ports, if the
design calls for use of a subset of the pins available in the SNS and SNSK ports, the user
has to skip the channel numbers of the unused SNS and SNSK pins.
For example, on a 4 channel configuration using SNS and SNSK ports, if pin 2 is not
used for touch sensing ( on both SNS and SNSK ports), channel number 2 is
unavailable and care should be taken while configuring the channels and sensors to
avoid using this channel. Also, the SNS and SNSK masks are assigned properly as
explained in section 7.5.2.2180 8207L-AT42-05/12
7.5.2.1.2 Channel numbering when routing SNS and SNSK pins to the same port
When SNS and SNSK pins are connected to the same port, the even pin numbers will be used as
SNS pins and the odd pins will be used as the SNSK pins.
• The number of channels supported will be limited 4 channels
• For e.g., for a 4 channel configuration where the SNS and SNSK pins are connected to
Port B, the port pins 0&1 are used for channel 0.
• The channel number is derived from the position of the pins used for SNS and SNSK
lines for any channel.
channel number = floor( [SNS(or SNSK) pin number] / 2 )
o For e.g., pins 4 and 5 are connected to a SNS/SNSK pair and the channel number
associated with the SNS/SNSK pin is 2.
7.5.2.2 Rules For Configuring SNS and SNSK masks for 2K Devices
The libraries internally need SNS_array and SNSK_array masks. These masks need to be
defined under Macro QTOUCH_STUDIO_MASKS as per the following rules given below:
1. In case of Interport, SNS_array[0] and SNSK_array[0] mask is used for configuring the
Channel0 and Channel2.And SNS_array[1] and SNSK_array[1] mask is used for configuring the
Channel1 and Channel3.And In case of Intraport SNS_array[0] and SNSK-array[0] are used for
all the four channels configured based on enabled bits in SNS_array[0] and SNSK-array[0].
2. The channel numbers are allocated based on enabled SNS pins starting from LSBBit.
In case of Interport, Keys on adjacent channels should be placed on different masks. Channel0
and Channel1 should be on different SNS/SNSK masks ie channel0 on
SNS_array[0]/SNSK_array[0] and channel1 on SNS_array[1]/ SNSK_array[1].
But in case of Intraport, Keys on adjacent channels should be placed on same masks. Channel0
and Channel2 should be on same mask ie SNS_array[0]/SNSK_array[0] and Channel1 and
Channel3 on SNS_array[1]/ SNSK_array[1].
7.5.2.2.1 Configuring SNS and SNSK masks in case of Interport:
1. Enable the Bit0 in SNS_array[0] and Bit0 in SNSK_array[0] mask when enabling Channel0.
2. Enable the Bit1 in SNS_array[1] and Bit1 in SNSK_array[1] mask when enabling Channel1.
3. Enable the Bit2 in SNS_array[0] and Bit2 in SNSK_array[0] mask when enabling Channel2.
4. Enable the Bit3 in SNS_array[1] and Bit3 in SNSK_array[1] mask when enabling Channel3.
Example 1:
In a 4 channel library, two keys on channel 0 and 3 are enabled.SNS on Port A and SNSK on
Port B .Channel0 will A0B0 and Channel3 will be A3B3.
The SNS and SNSK masks will be
SNS_array[0]=0x01;
SNS_array[1]=0x08;
SNSK_array[0]=0x01;
SNSK_array[1]=0x08;181
7.5.2.2.2 Configuring SNS and SNSK masks in case of Intraport:
1. Enable the Bit0 in SNS_array[0] and Bit1 in SNSK_array[0] mask when enabling Channel0.
2. Enable the Bit2 in SNS_array[0] and Bit3 in SNSK_array[0] mask when enabling Channel1.
3. Enable the Bit4 in SNS_array[0] and Bit5 in SNSK_array[0] mask when enabling Channel2.
4. Enable the Bit6 in SNS_array[0] and Bit7 in SNSK_array[0] mask when enabling Channel3.
Example 1:
In a 4 channel library, two keys on channel 0 and 3 are enabled.SNS and SNSK on Port B
.Channel0 will B0B1 and Channel3 will be B6B7.
The SNS and SNSK masks will be
SNS_array[0]=0x41;
SNS_array[1]=0x00;
SNSK_array[0]=0x82;
SNSK_array[1]=0x00;
7.5.3 Integrating QTouch libraries for 2K Devices in your application
In order to Integrate QTouch libraries for 2K devices, the constants and symbol names listed in
Table 1 below need to be defined in the user application. These can be defined in either the
compiler/assembler preprocessing definitions or in the touch_t_config_2kdegice.h file. Example
projects are provided for all the four devices supported.Refer 5.6.10.1 for directory structure of all
the files.
Table 1: Constant and symbol name definitions required to use the QTouch
acquisition method libraries for 2K device libraries
Symbol / Constant name Range of values Comments
_QTOUCH_ This macro has to be defined in order to
use QTouch libraries.
SNS & SNSK Refer to library selection guide.
_SNS_SNSK_SAME_PORT_ Comment/uncomment define To be enabled if the
same port is used for
SNSK and SNS pins
for QTouch. If SNSK
and SNS pins are on
different ports then
this definition is not
required.
QT_NUM_CHANNELS 1, 2 and 4 for 2K device libraries.
QT_DELAY_CYCLES 1 to 255 Please refer to section
5.6.8.
QTOUCH_STUDIO_MASKS This macro has to be defined in order to
use QTouch libraries for 2K devices.
SNS_array and
SNSK_array masks
variablesare initialized
under this Macro in
main file.Refer section
7.5.2.2182 8207L-AT42-05/12
The following files are to be added along with the touch library and user application
before compilation:
• For ATtiny 2K devices - touch_api_2kdevice.h, touch_qt_config_2kdevice.h and
qt_asm_tiny_mega_2kdevice.S
7.6 MISRA Compliance Report
This section lists the compliance and deviations for MISRA standards of coding practice for the
QTouch acquisition method libraries for 2K devices
7.6.1 What is covered
The QTouch acquisition method libraries for 2K devices adhere to the MISRA standards. The
additional reference code provided in the form of sample applications is not guaranteed to be
MISRA compliant.
7.6.2 Target Environment
Development Environment IAR Embedded Workbench
MISRA Checking software The MISRA C Compliance has been performed for the library
using MISRA C 2004 Rules in IAR Workbench development
environment.
MISRA Rule set applied MISRAC 2004 Rule Set
7.6.3 Deviations from MISRA C Standards
7.6.3.1 QTouch acquisition method libraries for 2K devices
The QTouch acquisition method libraries were subject to the above mentioned MISRA
compliance rules. The following exceptions have not been fixed as they are required for the
implementation of the library.
Applicable
Release
QTouch libraries
Rule No Rule Description Exception noted / How it is addressed
1.1 Rule states that all code
shall conform to ISO 9899
standard C, with no
extensions permitted.
This Rule is not supported as the library
implementation requires IAR extensions like
__interrupt. These intrinsic functions relate to
device hardware functionality, and cannot
practically be avoided.
10.1 Rule states that implicit
conversion from Underlying
long to unsigned long
The library uses macros to combine symbol
definitions to form a unique expanded symbol
name and in this, the usage of unsigned qualifiers
for numeric constants (e.g. 98u) causes name
mangling. This is the only occurrence of this error
in the library.
10.6 This Rule says that a 'U'
suffix shall be applied to all
constants of 'unsigned' type
The library uses macros to combine symbol
definitions to form a unique expanded symbol
name and in this, the usage of unsigned qualifiers
for numeric constants (e.g. 98u) causes name
mangling. This is the only occurrence of this error
in the library.
14.4 Rule states that go-to
statement should not be
The library uses conditional jump instructions to
reduce the code footprint at a few locations and 183
used. this is localized to small snippets of code. Hence
this rule is not supported.
19.10
Rule states that In the
definition of a function-like
macro, each instance of a
parameter shall be enclosed
in parenthesis
There is one instance where the library breaks this
rule where two macro definitions are combined to
form a different symbol name. Usage of
parenthesis cannot be used in this scenario.
19.12 Rule states that there shall
be at most one occurrence
of the # or ## preprocessor
operator in a single macro
definition
There is one instance in the library where this rule
is violated where the library concatenates two
macro definitions to arrive at a different definition.
8 Revision History
The table below lists the revision history for chapters in the user guide.
QTouch Library User guide Revision History
Date/Version Chapter Change notes
May 2009
Ver2.0
All 2nd release of QTouch library users guide
Sep 2009
Ver. 3.0
All Re-structured user guide with new and expanded sections
Nov 2009
Ver. 3.1
6.3, 6.9, 6.10,
7, 10
• Updated API changes
• Updated new libraries and device support information
• Updated debug interface information supported by the
QTouch libraries
• Updated known issues table
Dec 2009
Ver. 3.2
6.10.4, 7.1.2,
7.1.5, 7.1.6,
10,
7.2.4.2.2,
7.2.4.3.7,
7.2.4.3.2,
7.2.4.3.5,
7.2.4.3.7,
• Added section about configuring unused pins in user
application
• Added more information to some sections to clear
ambiguity
• Updated Memory footprint information for IAR and GCC
compiled QTouch libraries.
• Updated known issues table
• Added the device support, port combinations, memory
requirements
• QMatrix IAR and GCC libraries to support ATmega325P,
ATmega645, and ATtiny167.
• Modified port combinations for the 165P for QMatrix
libraries.
• Few Port combinations added in case of ATmega88
libraries.
Feb 2010
Ver 4.0
All chapters
changed
• A separate library selection guide is provided external to
the user guide. All sections included in the library selection
guide have been removed from the user guide.
• All sections have been updated to account for the improved
configurability of the libraries.
Apr 2010
Ver 4.1
• Added sections related to Positive Recalibration Delay,
Position Hysteresis, and Position Resolution. 184 8207L-AT42-05/12
• Device support extended for QMatrix for the release has
been added in section 5.7.2.4.1 and 5.7.2.3
• In case of QMatrix, 4 ( 4x1) channel has been added
wherever needed and in case of ATxmega devices 56
(8x7) channel has been added according to the changes
• QTouch Library for UC3L API Device Specific Libraries
Section has been added.
May 2010
Ver 4.2
• Qtouch acquisition libraries support will be available for
ATSAM3U and ATSAM3S devices.
• Qdebug protocol support will be extended for all example
projects.
• Analog comparator usage and burst length setting
recommendation Note added for UC3L QMatrix method.
• QMatrix device support added for AT90USB82 / 162 / 646 /
647 / 1286
July 2010
Ver 4.3
Section 5.8,
Section 5.7.2.4
• Device support added for Tiny44/84/461/861
• Added the details on Pin configuration support for both
QTouch and QMatrix libraries.
• Added section related to the usage of the pin configurator
tool on QTouch Studio.(section 5.8)
• Added sections for Tiny20 and Tiny40 Devices.
Jan 2011
Ver 4.3.1
Chapter 7,
Section
5.6.11.2.1,
Section
5.7.11.2.1
• Device support added for QTouch 2K devices
ATtiny2313A/261A/24A/25A.
• Added Chapter 7 on 2K Device libraries.
• QTouch Support added for UC3C family devices.
• QTouch Support added for ATtiny87 device
• Tiny20 code memory requirement section updated.
Aug 2011
Ver 4.4
Chapter 2
Section
5.6.10.3
Section 6.5
Section 5.5.3
• Added Feature Comparison Table
• Section 5.6.10 changed and updated for Support for
QMatrix AT32UC3C0512 Device
• Section 6.5 changed and updated for ATtiny40 libraries
• Section 5.5.3 added for Guard Channel
April 2012
Ver 5.0
Section 6.5.5
Section 6.5.8
• Section 6.5.5 changed and updated for ATtiny40 libraries
• Section 6.5.8 changed and updated for ATtiny40 libraries
• Section 5.6.10.3.1 changed and updated for 8-bit Qmatrix
libraries related to Shared YA/YB.
• Sections 5.6.10.1, 5.6.10.2, 5.7.1.2, 5.7.1.3.1 updated for
sam4s addition185
Disclaimer
Headquarters International
ATMEL Corporation
2325 Orchard
Parkway
San Jose, CA 95131
USA
Tel: 1(408) 441-0311
Fax: 1(408) 487-2600
ATMEL Asia
Unit 1-5 & 16, 19/F
BEA Tower, Millennium
City 5
418 Kwun Tong Road
Kwun Tong, Kowloon
Hong Kong
Tel: (852) 2245-6100
Fax: (852) 2722-1369
Product Contact
ATMEL Europe
Le Krebs
8, Rue Jean-Pierre
Timbaud
BP 309
78054 Saint-Quentin-enYvelines
Cedex
France
Tel: (33) 1-30-60-70-00
Fax: (33) 1-30-60-71-11
ATMEL Japan
9F, Tonetsu Shinkawa Bldg.
1-24-8 Shinkawa
Chuo-ku, Tokyo 104-0033
Japan
Tel: (81) 3-3523-3551
Fax: (81) 3-3523-7581
Web Site
http://www.atmel.com/
Technical Support
AVR Libraries:
touch@atmel.com
SAM Libraries:
at91support@atmel.com
Sales Contact
www.atmel.com/contacts
Literature Request
www.atmel.com/literature
Disclaimer: The information in this document is provided in connection with ATMEL products. No license, express or implied, by
estoppel or otherwise, to any intellectual property right is granted by this document or in connection with the sale of ATMEL products.
EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN ATMEL’S TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALE LOCATED ON ATMEL’S WEB SITE, ATMEL
ASSUMES NO LIABILITY WHATSOEVER AND DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY WARRANTY RELATING
TO ITS PRODUCTS INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL ATMEL BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR
LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR LOSS OF INFORMATION) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO
USE THIS DOCUMENT, EVEN IF ATMEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. ATMEL makes no
representations or warranties with respect to the accuracy or completeness of the contents of this document and reserves the right to
make changes to specifications and product descriptions at any time without notice. ATMEL does not make any commitment to update
the information contained herein. Unless specifically provided otherwise, ATMEL products are not suitable for, and shall not be used in,
automotive applications. ATMEL’s products are not intended, authorized, or warranted for use as components in applications intended
to support or sustain life.
© 2012 ATMEL Corporation. All rights reserved. ATMEL®, ATMEL logo and combinations thereof, AVR®, AVR
Studio®, megaAVR®, tinyAVR® , QTouch®, QMatrix®, ®, XMEGA®,, and others are registered trademarks, others
are trademarks of ATMEL Corporation or its subsidiaries. Other terms and product names may be trademarks of
others.
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Features
• High Performance, Low Power AVR® 8-Bit Microcontroller
• Advanced RISC Architecture
– 120 Powerful Instructions – Most Single Clock Cycle Execution
– 32 x 8 General Purpose Working Registers
– Fully Static Operation
• Non-volatile Program and Data Memories
– 2/4/8K Bytes of In-System Programmable Program Memory Flash
• Endurance: 10,000 Write/Erase Cycles
– 128/256/512 Bytes In-System Programmable EEPROM
• Endurance: 100,000 Write/Erase Cycles
– 128/256/512 Bytes Internal SRAM
– Programming Lock for Self-Programming Flash Program and EEPROM Data Security
• Peripheral Features
– 8-bit Timer/Counter with Prescaler and Two PWM Channels
– 8-bit High Speed Timer/Counter with Separate Prescaler
• 2 High Frequency PWM Outputs with Separate Output Compare Registers
• Programmable Dead Time Generator
– USI – Universal Serial Interface with Start Condition Detector
– 10-bit ADC
• 4 Single Ended Channels
• 2 Differential ADC Channel Pairs with Programmable Gain (1x, 20x)
• Temperature Measurement
– Programmable Watchdog Timer with Separate On-chip Oscillator
– On-chip Analog Comparator
• Special Microcontroller Features
– debugWIRE On-chip Debug System
– In-System Programmable via SPI Port
– External and Internal Interrupt Sources
– Low Power Idle, ADC Noise Reduction, and Power-down Modes
– Enhanced Power-on Reset Circuit
– Programmable Brown-out Detection Circuit
– Internal Calibrated Oscillator
• I/O and Packages
– Six Programmable I/O Lines
– 8-pin PDIP, 8-pin SOIC, 20-pad QFN/MLF, and 8-pin TSSOP (only ATtiny45/V)
• Operating Voltage
– 1.8 - 5.5V for ATtiny25V/45V/85V
– 2.7 - 5.5V for ATtiny25/45/85
• Speed Grade
– ATtiny25V/45V/85V: 0 – 4 MHz @ 1.8 - 5.5V, 0 - 10 MHz @ 2.7 - 5.5V
– ATtiny25/45/85: 0 – 10 MHz @ 2.7 - 5.5V, 0 - 20 MHz @ 4.5 - 5.5V
• Industrial Temperature Range
• Low Power Consumption
– Active Mode:
• 1 MHz, 1.8V: 300 µA
– Power-down Mode:
• 0.1 µA at 1.8V
Atmel 8-bit AVR Microcontroller with 2/4/8K
Bytes In-System Programmable Flash
ATtiny25/V / ATtiny45/V / ATtiny85/V
Rev. 2586Q–AVR–08/2013ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 2
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
1. Pin Configurations
Figure 1-1. Pinout ATtiny25/45/85
1.1 Pin Descriptions
1.1.1 VCC
Supply voltage.
1.1.2 GND
Ground.
1.1.3 Port B (PB5:PB0)
Port B is a 6-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The Port B output buffers
have symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source capability. As inputs, Port B pins that are
externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up resistors are activated. The Port B pins are tri-stated when a
reset condition becomes active, even if the clock is not running.
1
2
3
4
8
7
6
5
(PCINT5/RESET/ADC0/dW) PB5
(PCINT3/XTAL1/CLKI/OC1B/ADC3) PB3
(PCINT4/XTAL2/CLKO/OC1B/ADC2) PB4
GND
VCC
PB2 (SCK/USCK/SCL/ADC1/T0/INT0/PCINT2)
PB1 (MISO/DO/AIN1/OC0B/OC1A/PCINT1)
PB0 (MOSI/DI/SDA/AIN0/OC0A/OC1A/AREF/PCINT0)
PDIP/SOIC/TSSOP
1
2
3
4
5
QFN/MLF
15
14
13
12
11
20
19
18
17
16
6
7
8
9
10
DNC
DNC
GND
DNC
DNC
DNC
DNC
DNC
DNC
DNC
NOTE: Bottom pad should be soldered to ground.
DNC: Do Not Connect
NOTE: TSSOP only for ATtiny45/V
(PCINT5/RESET/ADC0/dW) PB5
(PCINT3/XTAL1/CLKI/OC1B/ADC3) PB3
DNC
DNC
(PCINT4/XTAL2/CLKO/OC1B/ADC2) PB4
VCC
PB2 (SCK/USCK/SCL/ADC1/T0/INT0/PCINT2)
DNC
PB1 (MISO/DO/AIN1/OC0B/OC1A/PCINT1)
PB0 (MOSI/DI/SDA/AIN0/OC0A/OC1A/AREF/PCINT0)ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 3
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Port B also serves the functions of various special features of the ATtiny25/45/85 as listed in “Alternate Functions
of Port B” on page 60.
On ATtiny25, the programmable I/O ports PB3 and PB4 (pins 2 and 3) are exchanged in ATtiny15 Compatibility
Mode for supporting the backward compatibility with ATtiny15.
1.1.4 RESET
Reset input. A low level on this pin for longer than the minimum pulse length will generate a reset, even if the clock
is not running and provided the reset pin has not been disabled. The minimum pulse length is given in Table 21-4
on page 165. Shorter pulses are not guaranteed to generate a reset.
The reset pin can also be used as a (weak) I/O pin.ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 4
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
2. Overview
The ATtiny25/45/85 is a low-power CMOS 8-bit microcontroller based on the AVR enhanced RISC architecture. By
executing powerful instructions in a single clock cycle, the ATtiny25/45/85 achieves throughputs approaching 1
MIPS per MHz allowing the system designer to optimize power consumption versus processing speed.
2.1 Block Diagram
Figure 2-1. Block Diagram
The AVR core combines a rich instruction set with 32 general purpose working registers. All 32 registers are
directly connected to the Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU), allowing two independent registers to be accessed in one
single instruction executed in one clock cycle. The resulting architecture is more code efficient while achieving
throughputs up to ten times faster than conventional CISC microcontrollers.
PROGRAM
COUNTER
CALIBRATED
INTERNAL
OSCILLATOR
WATCHDOG
TIMER
STACK
POINTER
PROGRAM
FLASH SRAM
MCU CONTROL
REGISTER
GENERAL
PURPOSE
REGISTERS
INSTRUCTION
REGISTER
TIMER/
COUNTER0
SERIAL
UNIVERSAL
INTERFACE
TIMER/
COUNTER1
INSTRUCTION
DECODER
DATA DIR.
REG.PORT B
DATA REGISTER
PORT B
PROGRAMMING
LOGIC
TIMING AND
CONTROL
MCU STATUS
REGISTER
STATUS
REGISTER
ALU
PORT B DRIVERS
PB[0:5]
VCC
GND
CONTROL
LINES
8-BIT DATABUS
Z
ADC /
ANALOG COMPARATOR
INTERRUPT
UNIT
DATA
EEPROM OSCILLATORS
Y
X
RESETATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 5
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
The ATtiny25/45/85 provides the following features: 2/4/8K bytes of In-System Programmable Flash, 128/256/512
bytes EEPROM, 128/256/256 bytes SRAM, 6 general purpose I/O lines, 32 general purpose working registers, one
8-bit Timer/Counter with compare modes, one 8-bit high speed Timer/Counter, Universal Serial Interface, Internal
and External Interrupts, a 4-channel, 10-bit ADC, a programmable Watchdog Timer with internal Oscillator, and
three software selectable power saving modes. Idle mode stops the CPU while allowing the SRAM, Timer/Counter,
ADC, Analog Comparator, and Interrupt system to continue functioning. Power-down mode saves the register contents,
disabling all chip functions until the next Interrupt or Hardware Reset. ADC Noise Reduction mode stops the
CPU and all I/O modules except ADC, to minimize switching noise during ADC conversions.
The device is manufactured using Atmel’s high density non-volatile memory technology. The On-chip ISP Flash
allows the Program memory to be re-programmed In-System through an SPI serial interface, by a conventional
non-volatile memory programmer or by an On-chip boot code running on the AVR core.
The ATtiny25/45/85 AVR is supported with a full suite of program and system development tools including: C Compilers,
Macro Assemblers, Program Debugger/Simulators and Evaluation kits.ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 6
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
3. About
3.1 Resources
A comprehensive set of development tools, application notes and datasheets are available for download on
http://www.atmel.com/avr.
3.2 Code Examples
This documentation contains simple code examples that briefly show how to use various parts of the device. These
code examples assume that the part specific header file is included before compilation. Be aware that not all C
compiler vendors include bit definitions in the header files and interrupt handling in C is compiler dependent.
Please confirm with the C compiler documentation for more details.
For I/O Registers located in the extended I/O map, “IN”, “OUT”, “SBIS”, “SBIC”, “CBI”, and “SBI” instructions must
be replaced with instructions that allow access to extended I/O. Typically, this means “LDS” and “STS” combined
with “SBRS”, “SBRC”, “SBR”, and “CBR”. Note that not all AVR devices include an extended I/O map.
3.3 Capacitive Touch Sensing
Atmel QTouch Library provides a simple to use solution for touch sensitive interfaces on Atmel AVR microcontrollers.
The QTouch Library includes support for QTouch® and QMatrix® acquisition methods.
Touch sensing is easily added to any application by linking the QTouch Library and using the Application Programming
Interface (API) of the library to define the touch channels and sensors. The application then calls the API to
retrieve channel information and determine the state of the touch sensor.
The QTouch Library is free and can be downloaded from the Atmel website. For more information and details of
implementation, refer to the QTouch Library User Guide – also available from the Atmel website.
3.4 Data Retention
Reliability Qualification results show that the projected data retention failure rate is much less than 1 PPM over 20
years at 85°C or 100 years at 25°C.ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 7
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
4. AVR CPU Core
4.1 Introduction
This section discusses the AVR core architecture in general. The main function of the CPU core is to ensure correct
program execution. The CPU must therefore be able to access memories, perform calculations, control
peripherals, and handle interrupts.
4.2 Architectural Overview
Figure 4-1. Block Diagram of the AVR Architecture
In order to maximize performance and parallelism, the AVR uses a Harvard architecture – with separate memories
and buses for program and data. Instructions in the Program memory are executed with a single level pipelining.
While one instruction is being executed, the next instruction is pre-fetched from the Program memory. This concept
enables instructions to be executed in every clock cycle. The Program memory is In-System Reprogrammable
Flash memory.
The fast-access Register File contains 32 x 8-bit general purpose working registers with a single clock cycle
access time. This allows single-cycle Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU) operation. In a typical ALU operation, two operFlash
Program
Memory
Instruction
Register
Instruction
Decoder
Program
Counter
Control Lines
32 x 8
General
Purpose
Registrers
ALU
Status
and Control
I/O Lines
EEPROM
Data Bus 8-bit
Data
SRAM
Direct Addressing
Indirect Addressing
Interrupt
Unit
Watchdog
Timer
Analog
Comparator
I/O Module 2
I/O Module1
I/O Module nATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 8
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
ands are output from the Register File, the operation is executed, and the result is stored back in the Register File
– in one clock cycle.
Six of the 32 registers can be used as three 16-bit indirect address register pointers for Data Space addressing –
enabling efficient address calculations. One of the these address pointers can also be used as an address pointer
for look up tables in Flash Program memory. These added function registers are the 16-bit X-, Y-, and Z-register,
described later in this section.
The ALU supports arithmetic and logic operations between registers or between a constant and a register. Single
register operations can also be executed in the ALU. After an arithmetic operation, the Status Register is updated
to reflect information about the result of the operation.
Program flow is provided by conditional and unconditional jump and call instructions, able to directly address the
whole address space. Most AVR instructions have a single 16-bit word format, but there are also 32-bit
instructions.
During interrupts and subroutine calls, the return address Program Counter (PC) is stored on the Stack. The Stack
is effectively allocated in the general data SRAM, and consequently the Stack size is only limited by the total
SRAM size and the usage of the SRAM. All user programs must initialize the SP in the Reset routine (before subroutines
or interrupts are executed). The Stack Pointer (SP) is read/write accessible in the I/O space. The data
SRAM can easily be accessed through the five different addressing modes supported in the AVR architecture.
The memory spaces in the AVR architecture are all linear and regular memory maps.
A flexible interrupt module has its control registers in the I/O space with an additional Global Interrupt Enable bit in
the Status Register. All interrupts have a separate Interrupt Vector in the Interrupt Vector table. The interrupts have
priority in accordance with their Interrupt Vector position. The lower the Interrupt Vector address, the higher the
priority.
The I/O memory space contains 64 addresses for CPU peripheral functions as Control Registers, SPI, and other
I/O functions. The I/O memory can be accessed directly, or as the Data Space locations following those of the Register
File, 0x20 - 0x5F.
4.3 ALU – Arithmetic Logic Unit
The high-performance AVR ALU operates in direct connection with all the 32 general purpose working registers.
Within a single clock cycle, arithmetic operations between general purpose registers or between a register and an
immediate are executed. The ALU operations are divided into three main categories – arithmetic, logical, and bitfunctions.
Some implementations of the architecture also provide a powerful multiplier supporting both
signed/unsigned multiplication and fractional format. See the “Instruction Set” section for a detailed description.
4.4 Status Register
The Status Register contains information about the result of the most recently executed arithmetic instruction. This
information can be used for altering program flow in order to perform conditional operations. Note that the Status
Register is updated after all ALU operations, as specified in the Instruction Set Reference. This will in many cases
remove the need for using the dedicated compare instructions, resulting in faster and more compact code.
The Status Register is not automatically stored when entering an interrupt routine and restored when returning
from an interrupt. This must be handled by software.ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 9
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
4.4.1 SREG – AVR Status Register
The AVR Status Register – SREG – is defined as:
• Bit 7 – I: Global Interrupt Enable
The Global Interrupt Enable bit must be set for the interrupts to be enabled. The individual interrupt enable control
is then performed in separate control registers. If the Global Interrupt Enable Register is cleared, none of the interrupts
are enabled independent of the individual interrupt enable settings. The I-bit is cleared by hardware after an
interrupt has occurred, and is set by the RETI instruction to enable subsequent interrupts. The I-bit can also be set
and cleared by the application with the SEI and CLI instructions, as described in the instruction set reference.
• Bit 6 – T: Bit Copy Storage
The Bit Copy instructions BLD (Bit LoaD) and BST (Bit STore) use the T-bit as source or destination for the operated
bit. A bit from a register in the Register File can be copied into T by the BST instruction, and a bit in T can be
copied into a bit in a register in the Register File by the BLD instruction.
• Bit 5 – H: Half Carry Flag
The Half Carry Flag H indicates a Half Carry in some arithmetic operations. Half Carry is useful in BCD arithmetic.
See the “Instruction Set Description” for detailed information.
• Bit 4 – S: Sign Bit, S = N V
The S-bit is always an exclusive or between the Negative Flag N and the Two’s Complement Overflow Flag V. See
the “Instruction Set Description” for detailed information.
• Bit 3 – V: Two’s Complement Overflow Flag
The Two’s Complement Overflow Flag V supports two’s complement arithmetics. See the “Instruction Set Description”
for detailed information.
• Bit 2 – N: Negative Flag
The Negative Flag N indicates a negative result in an arithmetic or logic operation. See the “Instruction Set
Description” for detailed information.
• Bit 1 – Z: Zero Flag
The Zero Flag Z indicates a zero result in an arithmetic or logic operation. See the “Instruction Set Description” for
detailed information.
• Bit 0 – C: Carry Flag
The Carry Flag C indicates a carry in an arithmetic or logic operation. See the “Instruction Set Description” for
detailed information.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x3F I T H S V N Z C SREG
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 10
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
4.5 General Purpose Register File
The Register File is optimized for the AVR Enhanced RISC instruction set. In order to achieve the required performance
and flexibility, the following input/output schemes are supported by the Register File:
• One 8-bit output operand and one 8-bit result input
• Two 8-bit output operands and one 8-bit result input
• Two 8-bit output operands and one 16-bit result input
• One 16-bit output operand and one 16-bit result input
Figure 4-2 shows the structure of the 32 general purpose working registers in the CPU.
Figure 4-2. AVR CPU General Purpose Working Registers
Most of the instructions operating on the Register File have direct access to all registers, and most of them are single
cycle instructions.
As shown in Figure 4-2, each register is also assigned a Data memory address, mapping them directly into the first
32 locations of the user Data Space. Although not being physically implemented as SRAM locations, this memory
organization provides great flexibility in access of the registers, as the X-, Y- and Z-pointer registers can be set to
index any register in the file.
4.5.1 The X-register, Y-register, and Z-register
The registers R26..R31 have some added functions to their general purpose usage. These registers are 16-bit
address pointers for indirect addressing of the data space. The three indirect address registers X, Y, and Z are
defined as described in Figure 4-3.
7 0 Addr.
R0 0x00
R1 0x01
R2 0x02
…
R13 0x0D
General R14 0x0E
Purpose R15 0x0F
Working R16 0x10
Registers R17 0x11
…
R26 0x1A X-register Low Byte
R27 0x1B X-register High Byte
R28 0x1C Y-register Low Byte
R29 0x1D Y-register High Byte
R30 0x1E Z-register Low Byte
R31 0x1F Z-register High ByteATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 11
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Figure 4-3. The X-, Y-, and Z-registers
In the different addressing modes these address registers have functions as fixed displacement, automatic increment,
and automatic decrement (see the instruction set reference for details).
4.6 Stack Pointer
The Stack is mainly used for storing temporary data, for storing local variables and for storing return addresses
after interrupts and subroutine calls. The Stack Pointer Register always points to the top of the Stack. Note that the
Stack is implemented as growing from higher memory locations to lower memory locations. This implies that a
Stack PUSH command decreases the Stack Pointer.
The Stack Pointer points to the data SRAM Stack area where the Subroutine and Interrupt Stacks are located. This
Stack space in the data SRAM must be defined by the program before any subroutine calls are executed or interrupts
are enabled. The Stack Pointer must be set to point above 0x60. The Stack Pointer is decremented by one
when data is pushed onto the Stack with the PUSH instruction, and it is decremented by two when the return
address is pushed onto the Stack with subroutine call or interrupt. The Stack Pointer is incremented by one when
data is popped from the Stack with the POP instruction, and it is incremented by two when data is popped from the
Stack with return from subroutine RET or return from interrupt RETI.
The AVR Stack Pointer is implemented as two 8-bit registers in the I/O space. The number of bits actually used is
implementation dependent. Note that the data space in some implementations of the AVR architecture is so small
that only SPL is needed. In this case, the SPH Register will not be present.
4.6.1 SPH and SPL — Stack Pointer Register
4.7 Instruction Execution Timing
This section describes the general access timing concepts for instruction execution. The AVR CPU is driven by the
CPU clock clkCPU, directly generated from the selected clock source for the chip. No internal clock division is used.
Figure 4-4 shows the parallel instruction fetches and instruction executions enabled by the Harvard architecture
and the fast access Register File concept. This is the basic pipelining concept to obtain up to 1 MIPS per MHz with
the corresponding unique results for functions per cost, functions per clocks, and functions per power-unit.
15 XH XL 0
X-register 7 0 7 0
R27 (0x1B) R26 (0x1A)
15 YH YL 0
Y-register 7 0 7 0
R29 (0x1D) R28 (0x1C)
15 ZH ZL 0
Z-register 7 0 7 0
R31 (0x1F) R30 (0x1E)
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
0x3E SP15 SP14 SP13 SP12 SP11 SP10 SP9 SP8 SPH
0x3D SP7 SP6 SP5 SP4 SP3 SP2 SP1 SP0 SPL
76543210
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value RAMEND RAMEND RAMEND RAMEND RAMEND RAMEND RAMEND RAMEND
Initial Value RAMEND RAMEND RAMEND RAMEND RAMEND RAMEND RAMEND RAMENDATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 12
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Figure 4-4. The Parallel Instruction Fetches and Instruction Executions
Figure 4-5 shows the internal timing concept for the Register File. In a single clock cycle an ALU operation using
two register operands is executed, and the result is stored back to the destination register.
Figure 4-5. Single Cycle ALU Operation
4.8 Reset and Interrupt Handling
The AVR provides several different interrupt sources. These interrupts and the separate Reset Vector each have a
separate Program Vector in the Program memory space. All interrupts are assigned individual enable bits which
must be written logic one together with the Global Interrupt Enable bit in the Status Register in order to enable the
interrupt.
The lowest addresses in the Program memory space are by default defined as the Reset and Interrupt Vectors.
The complete list of vectors is shown in “Interrupts” on page 48. The list also determines the priority levels of the
different interrupts. The lower the address the higher is the priority level. RESET has the highest priority, and next
is INT0 – the External Interrupt Request 0.
When an interrupt occurs, the Global Interrupt Enable I-bit is cleared and all interrupts are disabled. The user software
can write logic one to the I-bit to enable nested interrupts. All enabled interrupts can then interrupt the current
interrupt routine. The I-bit is automatically set when a Return from Interrupt instruction – RETI – is executed.
There are basically two types of interrupts. The first type is triggered by an event that sets the Interrupt Flag. For
these interrupts, the Program Counter is vectored to the actual Interrupt Vector in order to execute the interrupt
handling routine, and hardware clears the corresponding Interrupt Flag. Interrupt Flags can also be cleared by writing
a logic one to the flag bit position(s) to be cleared. If an interrupt condition occurs while the corresponding
interrupt enable bit is cleared, the Interrupt Flag will be set and remembered until the interrupt is enabled, or the
flag is cleared by software. Similarly, if one or more interrupt conditions occur while the Global Interrupt Enable bit
is cleared, the corresponding Interrupt Flag(s) will be set and remembered until the Global Interrupt Enable bit is
set, and will then be executed by order of priority.
clk
1st Instruction Fetch
1st Instruction Execute
2nd Instruction Fetch
2nd Instruction Execute
3rd Instruction Fetch
3rd Instruction Execute
4th Instruction Fetch
T1 T2 T3 T4
CPU
Total Execution Time
Register Operands Fetch
ALU Operation Execute
Result Write Back
T1 T2 T3 T4
clkCPUATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 13
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
The second type of interrupts will trigger as long as the interrupt condition is present. These interrupts do not necessarily
have Interrupt Flags. If the interrupt condition disappears before the interrupt is enabled, the interrupt will
not be triggered.
When the AVR exits from an interrupt, it will always return to the main program and execute one more instruction
before any pending interrupt is served.
Note that the Status Register is not automatically stored when entering an interrupt routine, nor restored when
returning from an interrupt routine. This must be handled by software.
When using the CLI instruction to disable interrupts, the interrupts will be immediately disabled. No interrupt will be
executed after the CLI instruction, even if it occurs simultaneously with the CLI instruction. The following example
shows how this can be used to avoid interrupts during the timed EEPROM write sequence.
When using the SEI instruction to enable interrupts, the instruction following SEI will be executed before any pending
interrupts, as shown in this example.
4.8.1 Interrupt Response Time
The interrupt execution response for all the enabled AVR interrupts is four clock cycles minimum. After four clock
cycles the Program Vector address for the actual interrupt handling routine is executed. During this four clock cycle
period, the Program Counter is pushed onto the Stack. The vector is normally a jump to the interrupt routine, and
this jump takes three clock cycles. If an interrupt occurs during execution of a multi-cycle instruction, this instruction
is completed before the interrupt is served. If an interrupt occurs when the MCU is in sleep mode, the interrupt execution
response time is increased by four clock cycles. This increase comes in addition to the start-up time from the
selected sleep mode.
Assembly Code Example
in r16, SREG ; store SREG value
cli ; disable interrupts during timed sequence
sbi EECR, EEMPE ; start EEPROM write
sbi EECR, EEPE
out SREG, r16 ; restore SREG value (I-bit)
C Code Example
char cSREG;
cSREG = SREG; /* store SREG value */
/* disable interrupts during timed sequence */
_CLI();
EECR |= (1< ; Address 0x000F
...ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 50
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
the Start-up Time, the MCU will still wake up, but no interrupt will be generated. The start-up time is defined by the
SUT and CKSEL Fuses as described in “System Clock and Clock Options” on page 23.
If the low level on the interrupt pin is removed before the device has woken up then program execution will not be
diverted to the interrupt service routine but continue from the instruction following the SLEEP command.
9.2.2 Pin Change Interrupt Timing
An example of timing of a pin change interrupt is shown in Figure 9-1.
Figure 9-1. Timing of pin change interrupts
clk
PCINT(0)
pin_lat
pin_sync
pcint_in_(0)
pcint_syn
pcint_setflag
PCIF
PCINT(0)
pin_sync
pcint_syn pin_lat D Q
LE
pcint_setflag
PCIF
clk
clk PCINT(0) in PCMSK(x)
pcint_in_(0) 0
xATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 51
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
9.3 Register Description
9.3.1 MCUCR – MCU Control Register
The External Interrupt Control Register A contains control bits for interrupt sense control.
• Bits 1:0 – ISC0[1:0]: Interrupt Sense Control 0 Bit 1 and Bit 0
The External Interrupt 0 is activated by the external pin INT0 if the SREG I-flag and the corresponding interrupt
mask are set. The level and edges on the external INT0 pin that activate the interrupt are defined in Table 9-2. The
value on the INT0 pin is sampled before detecting edges. If edge or toggle interrupt is selected, pulses that last longer
than one clock period will generate an interrupt. Shorter pulses are not guaranteed to generate an interrupt. If
low level interrupt is selected, the low level must be held until the completion of the currently executing instruction
to generate an interrupt.
9.3.2 GIMSK – General Interrupt Mask Register
• Bits 7, 4:0 – Res: Reserved Bits
These bits are reserved bits in the ATtiny25/45/85 and will always read as zero.
• Bit 6 – INT0: External Interrupt Request 0 Enable
When the INT0 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register (SREG) is set (one), the external pin interrupt is
enabled. The Interrupt Sense Control0 bits 1/0 (ISC01 and ISC00) in the MCU Control Register (MCUCR) define
whether the external interrupt is activated on rising and/or falling edge of the INT0 pin or level sensed. Activity on
the pin will cause an interrupt request even if INT0 is configured as an output. The corresponding interrupt of External
Interrupt Request 0 is executed from the INT0 Interrupt Vector.
• Bit 5 – PCIE: Pin Change Interrupt Enable
When the PCIE bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register (SREG) is set (one), pin change interrupt is
enabled. Any change on any enabled PCINT[5:0] pin will cause an interrupt. The corresponding interrupt of Pin
Change Interrupt Request is executed from the PCI Interrupt Vector. PCINT[5:0] pins are enabled individually by
the PCMSK0 Register.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x35 BODS PUD SE SM1 SM0 BODSE ISC01 ISC00 MCUCR
Read/Write R R/W R/W R/W R/W R R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Table 9-2. Interrupt 0 Sense Control
ISC01 ISC00 Description
0 0 The low level of INT0 generates an interrupt request.
0 1 Any logical change on INT0 generates an interrupt request.
1 0 The falling edge of INT0 generates an interrupt request.
1 1 The rising edge of INT0 generates an interrupt request.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x3B – INT0 PCIE – – – – – GIMSK
Read/Write R R/W R/W R R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 52
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
9.3.3 GIFR – General Interrupt Flag Register
• Bits 7, 4:0 – Res: Reserved Bits
These bits are reserved bits in the ATtiny25/45/85 and will always read as zero.
• Bit 6 – INTF0: External Interrupt Flag 0
When an edge or logic change on the INT0 pin triggers an interrupt request, INTF0 becomes set (one). If the I-bit in
SREG and the INT0 bit in GIMSK are set (one), the MCU will jump to the corresponding Interrupt Vector. The flag
is cleared when the interrupt routine is executed. Alternatively, the flag can be cleared by writing a logical one to it.
This flag is always cleared when INT0 is configured as a level interrupt.
• Bit 5 – PCIF: Pin Change Interrupt Flag
When a logic change on any PCINT[5:0] pin triggers an interrupt request, PCIF becomes set (one). If the I-bit in
SREG and the PCIE bit in GIMSK are set (one), the MCU will jump to the corresponding Interrupt Vector. The flag
is cleared when the interrupt routine is executed. Alternatively, the flag can be cleared by writing a logical one to it.
9.3.4 PCMSK – Pin Change Mask Register
• Bits 7:6 – Res: Reserved Bits
These bits are reserved bits in the ATtiny25/45/85 and will always read as zero.
• Bits 5:0 – PCINT[5:0]: Pin Change Enable Mask 5:0
Each PCINT[5:0] bit selects whether pin change interrupt is enabled on the corresponding I/O pin. If PCINT[5:0] is
set and the PCIE bit in GIMSK is set, pin change interrupt is enabled on the corresponding I/O pin. If PCINT[5:0] is
cleared, pin change interrupt on the corresponding I/O pin is disabled.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x3A – INTF0 PCIF – – – – – GIFR
Read/Write R R/W R/W R R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x15 – – PCINT5 PCINT4 PCINT3 PCINT2 PCINT1 PCINT0 PCMSK
Read/Write R R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 53
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
10. I/O Ports
10.1 Introduction
All AVR ports have true Read-Modify-Write functionality when used as general digital I/O ports. This means that
the direction of one port pin can be changed without unintentionally changing the direction of any other pin with the
SBI and CBI instructions. The same applies when changing drive value (if configured as output) or enabling/disabling
of pull-up resistors (if configured as input). Each output buffer has symmetrical drive characteristics with
both high sink and source capability. The pin driver is strong enough to drive LED displays directly. All port pins
have individually selectable pull-up resistors with a supply-voltage invariant resistance. All I/O pins have protection
diodes to both VCC and Ground as indicated in Figure 10-1. Refer to “Electrical Characteristics” on page 161 for a
complete list of parameters.
Figure 10-1. I/O Pin Equivalent Schematic
All registers and bit references in this section are written in general form. A lower case “x” represents the numbering
letter for the port, and a lower case “n” represents the bit number. However, when using the register or bit
defines in a program, the precise form must be used. For example, PORTB3 for bit no. 3 in Port B, here documented
generally as PORTxn. The physical I/O Registers and bit locations are listed in “Register Description” on
page 64.
Three I/O memory address locations are allocated for each port, one each for the Data Register – PORTx, Data
Direction Register – DDRx, and the Port Input Pins – PINx. The Port Input Pins I/O location is read only, while the
Data Register and the Data Direction Register are read/write. However, writing a logic one to a bit in the PINx Register,
will result in a toggle in the corresponding bit in the Data Register. In addition, the Pull-up Disable – PUD bit
in MCUCR disables the pull-up function for all pins in all ports when set.
Using the I/O port as General Digital I/O is described in “Ports as General Digital I/O” on page 53. Most port pins
are multiplexed with alternate functions for the peripheral features on the device. How each alternate function interferes
with the port pin is described in “Alternate Port Functions” on page 57. Refer to the individual module sections
for a full description of the alternate functions.
Note that enabling the alternate function of some of the port pins does not affect the use of the other pins in the port
as general digital I/O.
10.2 Ports as General Digital I/O
The ports are bi-directional I/O ports with optional internal pull-ups. Figure 10-2 shows a functional description of
one I/O-port pin, here generically called Pxn.
Logic
Rpu
See Figure
"General Digital I/O" for
Details
PxnATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 54
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Figure 10-2. General Digital I/O(1)
Note: 1. WRx, WPx, WDx, RRx, RPx, and RDx are common to all pins within the same port. clkI/O, SLEEP, and PUD are
common to all ports.
10.2.1 Configuring the Pin
Each port pin consists of three register bits: DDxn, PORTxn, and PINxn. As shown in “Register Description” on
page 64, the DDxn bits are accessed at the DDRx I/O address, the PORTxn bits at the PORTx I/O address, and
the PINxn bits at the PINx I/O address.
The DDxn bit in the DDRx Register selects the direction of this pin. If DDxn is written logic one, Pxn is configured
as an output pin. If DDxn is written logic zero, Pxn is configured as an input pin.
If PORTxn is written logic one when the pin is configured as an input pin, the pull-up resistor is activated. To switch
the pull-up resistor off, PORTxn has to be written logic zero or the pin has to be configured as an output pin. The
port pins are tri-stated when reset condition becomes active, even if no clocks are running.
If PORTxn is written logic one when the pin is configured as an output pin, the port pin is driven high (one). If
PORTxn is written logic zero when the pin is configured as an output pin, the port pin is driven low (zero).
10.2.2 Toggling the Pin
Writing a logic one to PINxn toggles the value of PORTxn, independent on the value of DDRxn. Note that the SBI
instruction can be used to toggle one single bit in a port.
10.2.3 Switching Between Input and Output
When switching between tri-state ({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b00) and output high ({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b11), an intermediate
state with either pull-up enabled {DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b01) or output low ({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b10) must
occur. Normally, the pull-up enabled state is fully acceptable, as a high-impedant environment will not notice the
clk
RPx
RRx
RDx
WDx
PUD
SYNCHRONIZER
WDx: WRITE DDRx
WRx: WRITE PORTx
RRx: READ PORTx REGISTER
RPx: READ PORTx PIN
PUD: PULLUP DISABLE
clkI/O: I/O CLOCK
RDx: READ DDRx
D
L
Q
Q
RESET
RESET
Q
D Q
Q
Q D
CLR
PORTxn
Q
Q D
CLR
DDxn
PINxn
DATA BUS
SLEEP
SLEEP: SLEEP CONTROL
Pxn
I/O
WPx
0
1
WRx
WPx: WRITE PINx REGISTERATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 55
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
difference between a strong high driver and a pull-up. If this is not the case, the PUD bit in the MCUCR Register
can be set to disable all pull-ups in all ports.
Switching between input with pull-up and output low generates the same problem. The user must use either the tristate
({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b00) or the output high state ({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b10) as an intermediate step.
Table 10-1 summarizes the control signals for the pin value.
10.2.4 Reading the Pin Value
Independent of the setting of Data Direction bit DDxn, the port pin can be read through the PINxn Register bit. As
shown in Figure 10-2, the PINxn Register bit and the preceding latch constitute a synchronizer. This is needed to
avoid metastability if the physical pin changes value near the edge of the internal clock, but it also introduces a
delay. Figure 10-3 shows a timing diagram of the synchronization when reading an externally applied pin value.
The maximum and minimum propagation delays are denoted tpd,max and tpd,min respectively.
Figure 10-3. Synchronization when Reading an Externally Applied Pin value
Consider the clock period starting shortly after the first falling edge of the system clock. The latch is closed when
the clock is low, and goes transparent when the clock is high, as indicated by the shaded region of the “SYNC
LATCH” signal. The signal value is latched when the system clock goes low. It is clocked into the PINxn Register at
the succeeding positive clock edge. As indicated by the two arrows tpd,max and tpd,min, a single signal transition
on the pin will be delayed between ½ and 1½ system clock period depending upon the time of assertion.
When reading back a software assigned pin value, a nop instruction must be inserted as indicated in Figure 10-4.
The out instruction sets the “SYNC LATCH” signal at the positive edge of the clock. In this case, the delay tpd
through the synchronizer is one system clock period.
Table 10-1. Port Pin Configurations
DDxn PORTxn
PUD
(in MCUCR) I/O Pull-up Comment
0 0 X Input No Tri-state (Hi-Z)
0 1 0 Input Yes Pxn will source current if ext. pulled low.
0 1 1 Input No Tri-state (Hi-Z)
1 0 X Output No Output Low (Sink)
1 1 X Output No Output High (Source)
XXX in r17, PINx
0x00 0xFF
INSTRUCTIONS
SYNC LATCH
PINxn
r17
XXX
SYSTEM CLK
tpd, max
tpd, minATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 56
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Figure 10-4. Synchronization when Reading a Software Assigned Pin Value
The following code example shows how to set port B pins 0 and 1 high, 2 and 3 low, and define the port pins from
4 to 5 as input with a pull-up assigned to port pin 4. The resulting pin values are read back again, but as previously
discussed, a nop instruction is included to be able to read back the value recently assigned to some of the pins.
Note: 1. For the assembly program, two temporary registers are used to minimize the time from pull-ups are set on pins 0, 1
and 4, until the direction bits are correctly set, defining bit 2 and 3 as low and redefining bits 0 and 1 as strong high
drivers.
Assembly Code Example(1)
...
; Define pull-ups and set outputs high
; Define directions for port pins
ldi r16,(1< CS0[2:0] > 1). The number of system clock cycles from when the timer is
enabled to the first count occurs can be from 1 to N+1 system clock cycles, where N equals the prescaler divisor
(8, 64, 256, or 1024).
It is possible to use the Prescaler Reset for synchronizing the Timer/Counter to program execution.
Table 11-1. Definitions
Constant Description
BOTTOM The counter reaches BOTTOM when it becomes 0x00
MAX The counter reaches its MAXimum when it becomes 0xFF (decimal 255)
TOP
The counter reaches the TOP when it becomes equal to the highest value in the count
sequence. The TOP value can be assigned to be the fixed value 0xFF (MAX) or the
value stored in the OCR0A Register. The assignment depends on the mode of operationATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 67
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
11.3.3 External Clock Source
An external clock source applied to the T0 pin can be used as timer/counter clock (clkT0). The T0 pin is sampled
once every system clock cycle by the pin synchronization logic. The synchronized (sampled) signal is then passed
through the edge detector. Figure 11-2 shows a functional equivalent block diagram of the T0 synchronization and
edge detector logic. The registers are clocked at the positive edge of the internal system clock (clkI/O). The latch is
transparent in the high period of the internal system clock.
The edge detector generates one clkT0 pulse for each positive (CS0[2:0] = 7) or negative (CS0[2:0] = 6) edge it
detects.
Figure 11-2. T0 Pin Sampling
The synchronization and edge detector logic introduces a delay of 2.5 to 3.5 system clock cycles from an edge has
been applied to the T0 pin to the counter is updated.
Enabling and disabling of the clock input must be done when T0 has been stable for at least one system clock
cycle, otherwise it is a risk that a false timer/counter clock pulse is generated.
Each half period of the external clock applied must be longer than one system clock cycle to ensure correct sampling.
The external clock must be guaranteed to have less than half the system clock frequency (fExtClk < fclk_I/O/2)
given a 50/50% duty cycle. Since the edge detector uses sampling, the maximum frequency of an external clock it
can detect is half the sampling frequency (following the Nyquist sampling theorem). However, due to variation of
the system clock frequency and duty cycle caused by oscillator source (crystal, resonator, and capacitors) tolerances,
it is recommended that maximum frequency of an external clock source is less than fclk_I/O/2.5.
An external clock source can not be prescaled.
Tn_sync
(To Clock
Select Logic)
Synchronization Edge Detector
D Q D Q
LE
Tn D Q
clkI/OATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 68
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Figure 11-3. Timer/Counter0 Prescaler
The synchronization logic on the input pins (T0) in Figure 11-3 is shown in Figure 11-2 on page 67.
11.4 Counter Unit
The main part of the 8-bit Timer/Counter is the programmable bi-directional counter unit. Figure 11-4 shows a
block diagram of the counter and its surroundings.
Figure 11-4. Counter Unit Block Diagram
Signal description (internal signals):
count Increment or decrement TCNT0 by 1.
direction Select between increment and decrement.
clear Clear TCNT0 (set all bits to zero).
clkTn Timer/Counter clock, referred to as clkT0 in the following.
top Signalize that TCNT0 has reached maximum value.
bottom Signalize that TCNT0 has reached minimum value (zero).
Depending of the mode of operation used, the counter is cleared, incremented, or decremented at each timer clock
(clkT0). clkT0 can be generated from an external or internal clock source, selected by the Clock Select bits
(CS0[2:0]). When no clock source is selected (CS0[2:0] = 0) the timer is stopped. However, the TCNT0 value can
PSR10
Clear
clkT0
T0
clkI/O
Synchronization
DATA BUS
TCNTn Control Logic
count
TOVn
(Int.Req.)
Clock Select
top
Tn Edge
Detector
( From Prescaler )
clkTn
bottom
direction
clearATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 69
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
be accessed by the CPU, regardless of whether clkT0 is present or not. A CPU write overrides (has priority over) all
counter clear or count operations.
The counting sequence is determined by the setting of the WGM01 and WGM00 bits located in the Timer/Counter
Control Register (TCCR0A) and the WGM02 bit located in the Timer/Counter Control Register B (TCCR0B). There
are close connections between how the counter behaves (counts) and how waveforms are generated on the Output
Compare output OC0A. For more details about advanced counting sequences and waveform generation, see
“Modes of Operation” on page 71.
The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV0) is set according to the mode of operation selected by the WGM0[1:0]
bits. TOV0 can be used for generating a CPU interrupt.
11.5 Output Compare Unit
The 8-bit comparator continuously compares TCNT0 with the Output Compare Registers (OCR0A and OCR0B).
Whenever TCNT0 equals OCR0A or OCR0B, the comparator signals a match. A match will set the Output Compare
Flag (OCF0A or OCF0B) at the next timer clock cycle. If the corresponding interrupt is enabled, the Output
Compare Flag generates an Output Compare interrupt. The Output Compare Flag is automatically cleared when
the interrupt is executed. Alternatively, the flag can be cleared by software by writing a logical one to its I/O bit location.
The Waveform Generator uses the match signal to generate an output according to operating mode set by the
WGM0[2:0] bits and Compare Output mode (COM0x[1:0]) bits. The max and bottom signals are used by the Waveform
Generator for handling the special cases of the extreme values in some modes of operation (See “Modes of
Operation” on page 71.).
Figure 11-5 shows a block diagram of the Output Compare unit.
Figure 11-5. Output Compare Unit, Block Diagram
The OCR0x Registers are double buffered when using any of the Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) modes. For the
normal and Clear Timer on Compare (CTC) modes of operation, the double buffering is disabled. The double buffering
synchronizes the update of the OCR0x Compare Registers to either top or bottom of the counting sequence.
The synchronization prevents the occurrence of odd-length, non-symmetrical PWM pulses, thereby making the
output glitch-free.
OCFnx (Int.Req.)
= (8-bit Comparator )
OCRnx
OCnx
DATA BUS
TCNTn
WGMn[1:0]
Waveform Generator
top
FOCn
COMnX[1:0]
bottomATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 70
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
The OCR0x Register access may seem complex, but this is not case. When the double buffering is enabled, the
CPU has access to the OCR0x Buffer Register, and if double buffering is disabled the CPU will access the OCR0x
directly.
11.5.1 Force Output Compare
In non-PWM waveform generation modes, the match output of the comparator can be forced by writing a one to
the Force Output Compare (FOC0x) bit. Forcing Compare Match will not set the OCF0x Flag or reload/clear the
timer, but the OC0x pin will be updated as if a real Compare Match had occurred (the COM0x[1:0] bits settings
define whether the OC0x pin is set, cleared or toggled).
11.5.2 Compare Match Blocking by TCNT0 Write
All CPU write operations to the TCNT0 Register will block any Compare Match that occur in the next timer clock
cycle, even when the timer is stopped. This feature allows OCR0x to be initialized to the same value as TCNT0
without triggering an interrupt when the Timer/Counter clock is enabled.
11.5.3 Using the Output Compare Unit
Since writing TCNT0 in any mode of operation will block all Compare Matches for one timer clock cycle, there are
risks involved when changing TCNT0 when using the Output Compare Unit, independently of whether the
Timer/Counter is running or not. If the value written to TCNT0 equals the OCR0x value, the Compare Match will be
missed, resulting in incorrect waveform generation. Similarly, do not write the TCNT0 value equal to BOTTOM
when the counter is down-counting.
The setup of the OC0x should be performed before setting the Data Direction Register for the port pin to output.
The easiest way of setting the OC0x value is to use the Force Output Compare (FOC0x) strobe bits in Normal
mode. The OC0x Registers keep their values even when changing between Waveform Generation modes.
Be aware that the COM0x[1:0] bits are not double buffered together with the compare value. Changing the
COM0x[1:0] bits will take effect immediately.
11.6 Compare Match Output Unit
The Compare Output mode (COM0x[1:0]) bits have two functions. The Waveform Generator uses the COM0x[1:0]
bits for defining the Output Compare (OC0x) state at the next Compare Match. Also, the COM0x[1:0] bits control
the OC0x pin output source. Figure 11-6 shows a simplified schematic of the logic affected by the COM0x[1:0] bit
setting. The I/O Registers, I/O bits, and I/O pins in the figure are shown in bold. Only the parts of the general I/O
Port Control Registers (DDR and PORT) that are affected by the COM0x[1:0] bits are shown. When referring to the
OC0x state, the reference is for the internal OC0x Register, not the OC0x pin. If a system reset occur, the OC0x
Register is reset to “0”.ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 71
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Figure 11-6. Compare Match Output Unit, Schematic
The general I/O port function is overridden by the Output Compare (OC0x) from the Waveform Generator if either
of the COM0x[1:0] bits are set. However, the OC0x pin direction (input or output) is still controlled by the Data
Direction Register (DDR) for the port pin. The Data Direction Register bit for the OC0x pin (DDR_OC0x) must be
set as output before the OC0x value is visible on the pin. The port override function is independent of the Waveform
Generation mode.
The design of the Output Compare pin logic allows initialization of the OC0x state before the output is enabled.
Note that some COM0x[1:0] bit settings are reserved for certain modes of operation. See “Register Description” on
page 77.
11.6.1 Compare Output Mode and Waveform Generation
The Waveform Generator uses the COM0x[1:0] bits differently in Normal, CTC, and PWM modes. For all modes,
setting the COM0x[1:0] = 0 tells the Waveform Generator that no action on the OC0x Register is to be performed
on the next Compare Match. For compare output actions in the non-PWM modes refer to Table 11-2 on page 78.
For fast PWM mode, refer to Table 11-3 on page 78, and for phase correct PWM refer to Table 11-4 on page 78.
A change of the COM0x[1:0] bits state will have effect at the first Compare Match after the bits are written. For nonPWM
modes, the action can be forced to have immediate effect by using the FOC0x strobe bits.
11.7 Modes of Operation
The mode of operation, i.e., the behavior of the Timer/Counter and the Output Compare pins, is defined by the
combination of the Waveform Generation mode (WGM0[2:0]) and Compare Output mode (COM0x[1:0]) bits. The
Compare Output mode bits do not affect the counting sequence, while the Waveform Generation mode bits do.
The COM0x[1:0] bits control whether the PWM output generated should be inverted or not (inverted or noninverted
PWM). For non-PWM modes the COM0x[1:0] bits control whether the output should be set, cleared, or
toggled at a Compare Match (See “Compare Match Output Unit” on page 70.).
PORT
DDR
D Q
D Q
OCn
OCnx Pin
D Q Waveform
Generator
COMnx1
COMnx0
0
1
DATA BU
S
FOCn
clkI/OATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 72
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
For detailed timing information refer to Figure 11-10, Figure 11-11, Figure 11-12 and Figure 11-13 in “Timer/Counter
Timing Diagrams” on page 76.
11.7.1 Normal Mode
The simplest mode of operation is the Normal mode (WGM0[2:0] = 0). In this mode the counting direction is always
up (incrementing), and no counter clear is performed. The counter simply overruns when it passes its maximum 8-
bit value (TOP = 0xFF) and then restarts from the bottom (0x00). In normal operation the Timer/Counter Overflow
Flag (TOV0) will be set in the same timer clock cycle as the TCNT0 becomes zero. The TOV0 Flag in this case
behaves like a ninth bit, except that it is only set, not cleared. However, combined with the timer overflow interrupt
that automatically clears the TOV0 Flag, the timer resolution can be increased by software. There are no special
cases to consider in the Normal mode, a new counter value can be written anytime.
The Output Compare Unit can be used to generate interrupts at some given time. Using the Output Compare to
generate waveforms in Normal mode is not recommended, since this will occupy too much of the CPU time.
11.7.2 Clear Timer on Compare Match (CTC) Mode
In Clear Timer on Compare or CTC mode (WGM0[2:0] = 2), the OCR0A Register is used to manipulate the counter
resolution. In CTC mode the counter is cleared to zero when the counter value (TCNT0) matches the OCR0A. The
OCR0A defines the top value for the counter, hence also its resolution. This mode allows greater control of the
Compare Match output frequency. It also simplifies the operation of counting external events.
The timing diagram for the CTC mode is shown in Figure 11-7. The counter value (TCNT0) increases until a Compare
Match occurs between TCNT0 and OCR0A, and then counter (TCNT0) is cleared.
Figure 11-7. CTC Mode, Timing Diagram
An interrupt can be generated each time the counter value reaches the TOP value by using the OCF0A Flag. If the
interrupt is enabled, the interrupt handler routine can be used for updating the TOP value. However, changing TOP
to a value close to BOTTOM when the counter is running with none or a low prescaler value must be done with
care since the CTC mode does not have the double buffering feature. If the new value written to OCR0A is lower
than the current value of TCNT0, the counter will miss the Compare Match. The counter will then have to count to
its maximum value (0xFF) and wrap around starting at 0x00 before the Compare Match can occur.
For generating a waveform output in CTC mode, the OC0A output can be set to toggle its logical level on each
Compare Match by setting the Compare Output mode bits to toggle mode (COM0A[1:0] = 1). The OC0A value will
not be visible on the port pin unless the data direction for the pin is set to output. The waveform generated will have
a maximum frequency of fOC0 = fclk_I/O/2 when OCR0A is set to zero (0x00). The waveform frequency is defined by
the following equation:
TCNTn
OCn
(Toggle)
OCnx Interrupt Flag Set
Period 1 2 3 4
(COMnx[1:0] = 1)
f
OCnx
f
clk_I/O
2 N 1 OCRnx + = --------------------------------------------------ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 73
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024).
As for the Normal mode of operation, the TOV0 Flag is set in the same timer clock cycle that the counter counts
from MAX to 0x00.
11.7.3 Fast PWM Mode
The fast Pulse Width Modulation or fast PWM mode (WGM0[2:0] = 3 or 7) provides a high frequency PWM waveform
generation option. The fast PWM differs from the other PWM option by its single-slope operation. The counter
counts from BOTTOM to TOP then restarts from BOTTOM. TOP is defined as 0xFF when WGM0[2:0] = 3, and
OCR0A when WGM0[2:0] = 7.
In non-inverting Compare Output mode, the Output Compare (OC0x) is cleared on the Compare Match between
TCNT0 and OCR0x, and set at BOTTOM. In inverting Compare Output mode, the output is set on Compare Match
and cleared at BOTTOM.
Due to the single-slope operation, the operating frequency of the fast PWM mode can be twice as high as the
phase correct PWM mode that use dual-slope operation. This high frequency makes the fast PWM mode well
suited for power regulation, rectification, and DAC applications. High frequency allows physically small sized external
components (coils, capacitors), and therefore reduces total system cost.
In fast PWM mode, the counter is incremented until the counter value matches the TOP value. The counter is then
cleared at the following timer clock cycle. The timing diagram for the fast PWM mode is shown in Figure 11-8. The
TCNT0 value is in the timing diagram shown as a histogram for illustrating the single-slope operation. The diagram
includes non-inverted and inverted PWM outputs. The small horizontal line marks on the TCNT0 slopes represent
Compare Matches between OCR0x and TCNT0.
Figure 11-8. Fast PWM Mode, Timing Diagram
The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV0) is set each time the counter reaches TOP. If the interrupt is enabled, the
interrupt handler routine can be used for updating the compare value.
In fast PWM mode, the compare unit allows generation of PWM waveforms on the OC0x pins. Setting the
COM0x[1:0] bits to two will produce a non-inverted PWM and an inverted PWM output can be generated by setting
the COM0x[1:0] to three: Setting the COM0A[1:0] bits to one allowes the AC0A pin to toggle on Compare Matches
if the WGM02 bit is set. This option is not available for the OC0B pin (See Table 11-3 on page 78). The actual
OC0x value will only be visible on the port pin if the data direction for the port pin is set as output. The PWM waveTCNTn
OCRnx Update and
TOVn Interrupt Flag Set
Period 1 2 3
OCn
OCn
(COMnx[1:0] = 2)
(COMnx[1:0] = 3)
OCRnx Interrupt Flag Set
4 5 6 7ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 74
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
form is generated by setting (or clearing) the OC0x Register at the Compare Match between OCR0x and TCNT0,
and clearing (or setting) the OC0x Register at the timer clock cycle the counter is cleared (changes from TOP to
BOTTOM).
The PWM frequency for the output can be calculated by the following equation:
The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024).
The extreme values for the OCR0A Register represents special cases when generating a PWM waveform output in
the fast PWM mode. If the OCR0A is set equal to BOTTOM, the output will be a narrow spike for each MAX+1
timer clock cycle. Setting the OCR0A equal to MAX will result in a constantly high or low output (depending on the
polarity of the output set by the COM0A[1:0] bits.)
A frequency (with 50% duty cycle) waveform output in fast PWM mode can be achieved by setting OC0x to toggle
its logical level on each Compare Match (COM0x[1:0] = 1). The waveform generated will have a maximum frequency
of fOC0 = fclk_I/O/2 when OCR0A is set to zero. This feature is similar to the OC0A toggle in CTC mode,
except the double buffer feature of the Output Compare unit is enabled in the fast PWM mode.
11.7.4 Phase Correct PWM Mode
The phase correct PWM mode (WGM0[2:0] = 1 or 5) provides a high resolution phase correct PWM waveform generation
option. The phase correct PWM mode is based on a dual-slope operation. The counter counts repeatedly
from BOTTOM to TOP and then from TOP to BOTTOM. TOP is defined as 0xFF when WGM0[2:0] = 1, and
OCR0A when WGM0[2:0] = 5. In non-inverting Compare Output mode, the Output Compare (OC0x) is cleared on
the Compare Match between TCNT0 and OCR0x while upcounting, and set on the Compare Match while downcounting.
In inverting Output Compare mode, the operation is inverted. The dual-slope operation has lower maximum
operation frequency than single slope operation. However, due to the symmetric feature of the dual-slope
PWM modes, these modes are preferred for motor control applications.
In phase correct PWM mode the counter is incremented until the counter value matches TOP. When the counter
reaches TOP, it changes the count direction. The TCNT0 value will be equal to TOP for one timer clock cycle. The
timing diagram for the phase correct PWM mode is shown on Figure 11-9. The TCNT0 value is in the timing diagram
shown as a histogram for illustrating the dual-slope operation. The diagram includes non-inverted and
inverted PWM outputs. The small horizontal line marks on the TCNT0 slopes represent Compare Matches
between OCR0x and TCNT0.
f
OCnxPWM
f
clk_I/O
N 256 = ------------------ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 75
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Figure 11-9. Phase Correct PWM Mode, Timing Diagram
The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV0) is set each time the counter reaches BOTTOM. The Interrupt Flag can
be used to generate an interrupt each time the counter reaches the BOTTOM value.
In phase correct PWM mode, the compare unit allows generation of PWM waveforms on the OC0x pins. Setting
the COM0x[1:0] bits to two will produce a non-inverted PWM. An inverted PWM output can be generated by setting
the COM0x[1:0] to three: Setting the COM0A0 bits to one allows the OC0A pin to toggle on Compare Matches if
the WGM02 bit is set. This option is not available for the OC0B pin (See Table 11-4 on page 78). The actual OC0x
value will only be visible on the port pin if the data direction for the port pin is set as output. The PWM waveform is
generated by clearing (or setting) the OC0x Register at the Compare Match between OCR0x and TCNT0 when the
counter increments, and setting (or clearing) the OC0x Register at Compare Match between OCR0x and TCNT0
when the counter decrements. The PWM frequency for the output when using phase correct PWM can be calculated
by the following equation:
The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024).
The extreme values for the OCR0A Register represent special cases when generating a PWM waveform output in
the phase correct PWM mode. If the OCR0A is set equal to BOTTOM, the output will be continuously low and if set
equal to MAX the output will be continuously high for non-inverted PWM mode. For inverted PWM the output will
have the opposite logic values.
At the very start of period 2 in Figure 11-9 OCn has a transition from high to low even though there is no Compare
Match. The point of this transition is to guaratee symmetry around BOTTOM. There are two cases that give a transition
without Compare Match, as follows:
• OCR0A changes its value from MAX, like in Figure 11-9. When the OCR0A value is MAX the OCn pin value is
the same as the result of a down-counting Compare Match. To ensure symmetry around BOTTOM the OCn
value at MAX must correspond to the result of an up-counting Compare Match.
TOVn Interrupt Flag Set
OCnx Interrupt Flag Set
1 2 3
TCNTn
Period
OCn
OCn
(COMnx[1:0] = 2)
(COMnx[1:0] = 3)
OCRnx Update
f
OCnxPCPWM
f
clk_I/O
N 510 = ------------------ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 76
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
• The timer starts counting from a value higher than the one in OCR0A, and for that reason misses the Compare
Match and hence the OCn change that would have happened on the way up.
11.8 Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams
The Timer/Counter is a synchronous design and the timer clock (clkT0) is therefore shown as a clock enable signal
in the following figures. The figures include information on when Interrupt Flags are set. Figure 11-10 contains timing
data for basic Timer/Counter operation. The figure shows the count sequence close to the MAX value in all
modes other than phase correct PWM mode.
Figure 11-10. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, no Prescaling
Figure 11-11 shows the same timing data, but with the prescaler enabled.
Figure 11-11. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, with Prescaler (fclk_I/O/8)
Figure 11-12 shows the setting of OCF0B in all modes and OCF0A in all modes except CTC mode and PWM
mode, where OCR0A is TOP.
Figure 11-12. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, Setting of OCF0x, with Prescaler (fclk_I/O/8)
clkTn
(clkI/O/1)
TOVn
clkI/O
TCNTn MAX - 1 MAX BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1
TOVn
TCNTn MAX - 1 MAX BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1
clkI/O
clkTn
(clkI/O/8)
OCFnx
OCRnx
TCNTn
OCRnx Value
OCRnx - 1 OCRnx OCRnx + 1 OCRnx + 2
clkI/O
clkTn
(clkI/O/8)ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 77
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Figure 11-13 shows the setting of OCF0A and the clearing of TCNT0 in CTC mode and fast PWM mode where
OCR0A is TOP.
Figure 11-13. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, Clear Timer on Compare Match mode, with Prescaler (fclk_I/O/8)
11.9 Register Description
11.9.1 GTCCR – General Timer/Counter Control Register
• Bit 7 – TSM: Timer/Counter Synchronization Mode
Writing the TSM bit to one activates the Timer/Counter Synchronization Mode. In this mode, the value written to
PSR0 is kept, hence keeping the Prescaler Reset signal asserted. This ensures that the timer/counter is halted and
can be configured without the risk of advancing during configuration. When the TSM bit is written to zero, the PSR0
bit is cleared by hardware, and the timer/counter start counting.
• Bit 0 – PSR0: Prescaler Reset Timer/Counter0
When this bit is one, the Timer/Counter0 prescaler will be Reset. This bit is normally cleared immediately by hardware,
except if the TSM bit is set.
11.9.2 TCCR0A – Timer/Counter Control Register A
• Bits 7:6 – COM0A[1:0]: Compare Match Output A Mode
• Bits 5:4 – COM0B[1:0]: Compare Match Output B Mode
The COM0A[1:0] and COM0B[1:0] bits control the behaviour of Output Compare pins OC0A and OC0B, respectively.
If any of the COM0A[1:0] bits are set, the OC0A output overrides the normal port functionality of the I/O pin it
is connected to. Similarly, if any of the COM0B[1:0] bits are set, the OC0B output overrides the normal port functionality
of the I/O pin it is connected to. However, note that the Data Direction Register (DDR) bit corresponding to
the OC0A and OC0B pins must be set in order to enable the output driver.
OCFnx
OCRnx
TCNTn
(CTC)
TOP
TOP - 1 TOP BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1
clkI/O
clkTn
(clkI/O/8)
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x2C TSM PWM1B COM1B1 COM1B0 FOC1B FOC1A PSR1 PSR0 GTCCR
Read/Write R/W R R R R R R R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x2A COM0A1 COM0A0 COM0B1 COM0B0 – – WGM01 WGM00 TCCR0A
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R R R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 78
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
When OC0A/OC0B is connected to the I/O pin, the function of the COM0A[1:0]/COM0B[1:0] bits depend on the
WGM0[2:0] bit setting. Table 11-2 shows the COM0x[1:0] bit functionality when the WGM0[2:0] bits are set to a
normal or CTC mode (non-PWM).
Table 11-3 shows the COM0x[1:0] bit functionality when the WGM0[2:0] bits are set to fast PWM mode.
Note: 1. A special case occurs when OCR0A or OCR0B equals TOP and COM0A1/COM0B1 is set. In this case, the compare
match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at BOTTOM. See “Fast PWM Mode” on page 73 for more details.
Table 11-4 shows the COM0x[1:0] bit functionality when the WGM0[2:0] bits are set to phase correct PWM mode.
Note: 1. A special case occurs when OCR0A or OCR0B equals TOP and COM0A1/COM0B1 is set. In this case, the Compare
Match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See “Phase Correct PWM Mode” on page 74 for more
details.
• Bits 3:2 – Res: Reserved Bits
These bits are reserved bits in the ATtiny25/45/85 and will always read as zero.
Table 11-2. Compare Output Mode, non-PWM Mode
COM0A1
COM0B1
COM0A0
COM0B0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC0A/OC0B disconnected.
0 1 Toggle OC0A/OC0B on Compare Match
1 0 Clear OC0A/OC0B on Compare Match
1 1 Set OC0A/OC0B on Compare Match
Table 11-3. Compare Output Mode, Fast PWM Mode(1)
COM0A1
COM0B1
COM0A0
COM0B0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC0A/OC0B disconnected.
0 1 Reserved
1 0 Clear OC0A/OC0B on Compare Match, set OC0A/OC0B at BOTTOM
(non-inverting mode)
1 1 Set OC0A/OC0B on Compare Match, clear OC0A/OC0B at BOTTOM
(inverting mode)
Table 11-4. Compare Output Mode, Phase Correct PWM Mode(1)
COM0A1
COM0B1
COM0A0
COM0B0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC0A/OC0B disconnected.
0 1 Reserved
1 0 Clear OC0A/OC0B on Compare Match when up-counting.
Set OC0A/OC0B on Compare Match when down-counting.
1 1 Set OC0A/OC0B on Compare Match when up-counting.
Clear OC0A/OC0B on Compare Match when down-counting.ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 79
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
• Bits 1:0 – WGM0[1:0]: Waveform Generation Mode
Combined with the WGM02 bit found in the TCCR0B Register, these bits control the counting sequence of the
counter, the source for maximum (TOP) counter value, and what type of waveform generation to be used, see
Table 11-5. Modes of operation supported by the Timer/Counter unit are: Normal mode (counter), Clear Timer on
Compare Match (CTC) mode, and two types of Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) modes (see “Modes of Operation”
on page 71).
Notes: 1. MAX = 0xFF
2. BOTTOM = 0x00
11.9.3 TCCR0B – Timer/Counter Control Register B
• Bit 7 – FOC0A: Force Output Compare A
The FOC0A bit is only active when the WGM bits specify a non-PWM mode.
However, for ensuring compatibility with future devices, this bit must be set to zero when TCCR0B is written when
operating in PWM mode. When writing a logical one to the FOC0A bit, an immediate Compare Match is forced on
the Waveform Generation unit. The OC0A output is changed according to its COM0A[1:0] bits setting. Note that
the FOC0A bit is implemented as a strobe. Therefore it is the value present in the COM0A[1:0] bits that determines
the effect of the forced compare.
A FOC0A strobe will not generate any interrupt, nor will it clear the timer in CTC mode using OCR0A as TOP.
The FOC0A bit is always read as zero.
• Bit 6 – FOC0B: Force Output Compare B
The FOC0B bit is only active when the WGM bits specify a non-PWM mode.
However, for ensuring compatibility with future devices, this bit must be set to zero when TCCR0B is written when
operating in PWM mode. When writing a logical one to the FOC0B bit, an immediate Compare Match is forced on
the Waveform Generation unit. The OC0B output is changed according to its COM0B[1:0] bits setting. Note that
the FOC0B bit is implemented as a strobe. Therefore it is the value present in the COM0B[1:0] bits that determines
the effect of the forced compare.
A FOC0B strobe will not generate any interrupt, nor will it clear the timer in CTC mode using OCR0B as TOP.
Table 11-5. Waveform Generation Mode Bit Description
Mode
WGM
02
WGM
01
WGM
00
Timer/Counter Mode
of Operation TOP
Update of
OCRx at
TOV Flag
Set on
0 0 0 0 Normal 0xFF Immediate MAX(1)
1 0 0 1 PWM, Phase Correct 0xFF TOP BOTTOM(2)
2 0 1 0 CTC OCRA Immediate MAX(1)
3 0 1 1 Fast PWM 0xFF BOTTOM(2) MAX(1)
4 1 0 0 Reserved – – –
5 1 0 1 PWM, Phase Correct OCRA TOP BOTTOM(2)
6 1 1 0 Reserved – – –
7 1 1 1 Fast PWM OCRA BOTTOM(2) TOP
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x33 FOC0A FOC0B – – WGM02 CS02 CS01 CS00 TCCR0B
Read/Write W W R R R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 80
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
The FOC0B bit is always read as zero.
• Bits 5:4 – Res: Reserved Bits
These bits are reserved bits in the ATtiny25/45/85 and will always read as zero.
• Bit 3 – WGM02: Waveform Generation Mode
See the description in the “TCCR0A – Timer/Counter Control Register A” on page 77.
• Bits 2:0 – CS0[2:0]: Clock Select
The three Clock Select bits select the clock source to be used by the Timer/Counter.
If external pin modes are used for the Timer/Counter0, transitions on the T0 pin will clock the counter even if the
pin is configured as an output. This feature allows software control of the counting.
11.9.4 TCNT0 – Timer/Counter Register
The Timer/Counter Register gives direct access, both for read and write operations, to the Timer/Counter unit 8-bit
counter. Writing to the TCNT0 Register blocks (removes) the Compare Match on the following timer clock. Modifying
the counter (TCNT0) while the counter is running, introduces a risk of missing a Compare Match between
TCNT0 and the OCR0x Registers.
11.9.5 OCR0A – Output Compare Register A
The Output Compare Register A contains an 8-bit value that is continuously compared with the counter value
(TCNT0). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare interrupt, or to generate a waveform output on the
OC0A pin.
Table 11-6. Clock Select Bit Description
CS02 CS01 CS00 Description
0 0 0 No clock source (Timer/Counter stopped)
0 0 1 clkI/O/(No prescaling)
0 1 0 clkI/O/8 (From prescaler)
0 1 1 clkI/O/64 (From prescaler)
1 0 0 clkI/O/256 (From prescaler)
1 0 1 clkI/O/1024 (From prescaler)
1 1 0 External clock source on T0 pin. Clock on falling edge.
1 1 1 External clock source on T0 pin. Clock on rising edge.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x32 TCNT0[7:0] TCNT0
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x29 OCR0A[7:0] OCR0A
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 81
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
11.9.6 OCR0B – Output Compare Register B
The Output Compare Register B contains an 8-bit value that is continuously compared with the counter value
(TCNT0). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare interrupt, or to generate a waveform output on the
OC0B pin.
11.9.7 TIMSK – Timer/Counter Interrupt Mask Register
• Bits 7, 0 – Res: Reserved Bits
These bits are reserved bits and will always read as zero.
• Bit 4 – OCIE0A: Timer/Counter0 Output Compare Match A Interrupt Enable
When the OCIE0A bit is written to one, and the I-bit in the Status Register is set, the Timer/Counter0 Compare
Match A interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed if a Compare Match in Timer/Counter0
occurs, i.e., when the OCF0A bit is set in the Timer/Counter 0 Interrupt Flag Register – TIFR0.
• Bit 3 – OCIE0B: Timer/Counter Output Compare Match B Interrupt Enable
When the OCIE0B bit is written to one, and the I-bit in the Status Register is set, the Timer/Counter Compare
Match B interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed if a Compare Match in Timer/Counter occurs,
i.e., when the OCF0B bit is set in the Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register – TIFR0.
• Bit 1 – TOIE0: Timer/Counter0 Overflow Interrupt Enable
When the TOIE0 bit is written to one, and the I-bit in the Status Register is set, the Timer/Counter0 Overflow interrupt
is enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed if an overflow in Timer/Counter0 occurs, i.e., when the
TOV0 bit is set in the Timer/Counter 0 Interrupt Flag Register – TIFR0.
11.9.8 TIFR – Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register
• Bits 7, 0 – Res: Reserved Bits
These bits are reserved bits and will always read as zero.
• Bit 4 – OCF0A: Output Compare Flag 0 A
The OCF0A bit is set when a Compare Match occurs between the Timer/Counter0 and the data in OCR0A – Output
Compare Register0. OCF0A is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling
vector. Alternatively, OCF0A is cleared by writing a logic one to the flag. When the I-bit in SREG, OCIE0A
(Timer/Counter0 Compare Match Interrupt Enable), and OCF0A are set, the Timer/Counter0 Compare Match Interrupt
is executed.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x28 OCR0B[7:0] OCR0B
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x39 – OCIE1A OCIE1B OCIE0A OCIE0B TOIE1 TOIE0 – TIMSK
Read/Write R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x38 – OCF1A OCF1B OCF0A OCF0B TOV1 TOV0 – TIFR
Read/Write R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 82
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
• Bit 3 – OCF0B: Output Compare Flag 0 B
The OCF0B bit is set when a Compare Match occurs between the Timer/Counter and the data in OCR0B – Output
Compare Register0 B. OCF0B is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector.
Alternatively, OCF0B is cleared by writing a logic one to the flag. When the I-bit in SREG, OCIE0B (Timer/Counter
Compare B Match Interrupt Enable), and OCF0B are set, the Timer/Counter Compare Match Interrupt is executed.
• Bit 1 – TOV0: Timer/Counter0 Overflow Flag
The bit TOV0 is set when an overflow occurs in Timer/Counter0. TOV0 is cleared by hardware when executing the
corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, TOV0 is cleared by writing a logic one to the flag. When the
SREG I-bit, TOIE0 (Timer/Counter0 Overflow Interrupt Enable), and TOV0 are set, the Timer/Counter0 Overflow
interrupt is executed.
The setting of this flag is dependent of the WGM0[2:0] bit setting. Refer to Table 11-5, “Waveform Generation
Mode Bit Description” on page 79.ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 83
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
12. 8-bit Timer/Counter1
The Timer/Counter1 is a general purpose 8-bit Timer/Counter module that has a separate prescaling selection
from the separate prescaler.
12.1 Timer/Counter1 Prescaler
Figure 12-1 shows the Timer/Counter1 prescaler that supports two clocking modes, a synchronous clocking mode
and an asynchronous clocking mode. The synchronous clocking mode uses the system clock (CK) as the clock
timebase and asynchronous mode uses the fast peripheral clock (PCK) as the clock time base. The PCKE bit from
the PLLCSR register enables the asynchronous mode when it is set (‘1’).
Figure 12-1. Timer/Counter1 Prescaler
In the asynchronous clocking mode the clock selections are from PCK to PCK/16384 and stop, and in the synchronous
clocking mode the clock selections are from CK to CK/16384 and stop. The clock options are described in
Table 12-5 on page 89 and the Timer/Counter1 Control Register, TCCR1. Setting the PSR1 bit in GTCCR register
resets the prescaler. The PCKE bit in the PLLCSR register enables the asynchronous mode. The frequency of the
fast peripheral clock is 64 MHz (or 32 MHz in Low Speed Mode).
12.2 Counter and Compare Units
The Timer/Counter1 general operation is described in the asynchronous mode and the operation in the synchronous
mode is mentioned only if there are differences between these two modes. Figure 12-2 shows Timer/Counter
1 synchronization register block diagram and synchronization delays in between registers. Note that all clock gating
details are not shown in the figure. The Timer/Counter1 register values go through the internal synchronization
registers, which cause the input synchronization delay, before affecting the counter operation. The registers
TCCR1, GTCCR, OCR1A, OCR1B, and OCR1C can be read back right after writing the register. The read back
values are delayed for the Timer/Counter1 (TCNT1) register and flags (OCF1A, OCF1B, and TOV1), because of
the input and output synchronization.
The Timer/Counter1 features a high resolution and a high accuracy usage with the lower prescaling opportunities.
It can also support two accurate, high speed, 8-bit Pulse Width Modulators using clock speeds up to 64 MHz (or 32
MHz in Low Speed Mode). In this mode, Timer/Counter1 and the output compare registers serve as dual standalone
PWMs with non-overlapping non-inverted and inverted outputs. Refer to page 86 for a detailed description
on this function. Similarly, the high prescaling opportunities make this unit useful for lower speed functions or exact
timing functions with infrequent actions.
TIMER/COUNTER1 COUNT ENABLE
PSR1
CS10
CS11
CS12
PCK 64/32 MHz
0
CS13
14-BIT
T/C PRESCALER
T1CK
T1CK/2
T1CK/4
T1CK/8
T1CK/16
T1CK/32
T1CK/64
T1CK/128
T1CK/256
T1CK/512
T1CK/1024
T1CK/2048
T1CK/4096
T1CK/8192
T1CK/16384
CK
PCKE
T1CKATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 84
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Figure 12-2. Timer/Counter 1 Synchronization Register Block Diagram.
Timer/Counter1 and the prescaler allow running the CPU from any clock source while the prescaler is operating on
the fast 64 MHz (or 32 MHz in Low Speed Mode) PCK clock in the asynchronous mode.
Note that the system clock frequency must be lower than one third of the PCK frequency. The synchronization
mechanism of the asynchronous Timer/Counter1 needs at least two edges of the PCK when the system clock is
high. If the frequency of the system clock is too high, it is a risk that data or control values are lost.
The following Figure 12-3 shows the block diagram for Timer/Counter1.
8-BIT DATABUS
OCR1A OCR1A_SI
OCR1B OCR1B_SI TCNT_SO
OCR1C OCR1C_SI
TCCR1 TCCR1_SI
GTCCR GTCCR_SI
TCNT1 TCNT1_SI
OCF1A OCF1A_SI
OCF1B OCF1B_SI
TOV1 TOV1_SI TOV1_SO
OCF1B_SO
OCF1A_SO
TCNT1
S
A
S
A
PCKE
CK
PCK
IO-registers Input synchronization
registers
Timer/Counter1 Output synchronization
registers
SYNC
MODE
ASYNC
MODE
1 CK Delay
1 PCK Delay No Delay ~1 CK Delay
TCNT1
OCF1A
OCF1B
TOV1
1/2 CK Delay 1 CK Delay 1/2 CK Delay
1..2 PCK DelayATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 85
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Figure 12-3. Timer/Counter1 Block Diagram
Three status flags (overflow and compare matches) are found in the Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register - TIFR.
Control signals are found in the Timer/Counter Control Registers TCCR1 and GTCCR. The interrupt enable/disable
settings are found in the Timer/Counter Interrupt Mask Register - TIMSK.
The Timer/Counter1 contains three Output Compare Registers, OCR1A, OCR1B, and OCR1C as the data source
to be compared with the Timer/Counter1 contents. In normal mode the Output Compare functions are operational
with all three output compare registers. OCR1A determines action on the OC1A pin (PB1), and it can generate
Timer1 OC1A interrupt in normal mode and in PWM mode. Likewise, OCR1B determines action on the OC1B pin
(PB4) and it can generate Timer1 OC1B interrupt in normal mode and in PWM mode. OCR1C holds the
Timer/Counter maximum value, i.e. the clear on compare match value. In the normal mode an overflow interrupt
(TOV1) is generated when Timer/Counter1 counts from $FF to $00, while in the PWM mode the overflow interrupt
is generated when Timer/Counter1 counts either from $FF to $00 or from OCR1C to $00. The inverted PWM outputs
OC1A and OC1B are not connected in normal mode.
In PWM mode, OCR1A and OCR1B provide the data values against which the Timer Counter value is compared.
Upon compare match the PWM outputs (OC1A, OC1A, OC1B, OC1B) are generated. In PWM mode, the Timer
Counter counts up to the value specified in the output compare register OCR1C and starts again from $00. This
feature allows limiting the counter “full” value to a specified value, lower than $FF. Together with the many prescaler
options, flexible PWM frequency selection is provided. Table 12-3 on page 88 lists clock selection and
OCR1C values to obtain PWM frequencies from 20 kHz to 250 kHz in 10 kHz steps and from 250 kHz to 500 kHz
in 50 kHz steps. Higher PWM frequencies can be obtained at the expense of resolution.
8-BIT DATABUS
TIMER INT. FLAG
REGISTER (TIFR)
TIMER/COUNTER1
8-BIT COMPARATOR
T/C1 OUTPUT
COMPARE REGISTER
TIMER INT. MASK
REGISTER (TIMSK)
TIMER/COUNTER1
(TCNT1) T/C CLEAR T/C1 CONTROL
LOGIC
TOV1
OCF1B
OCIE1A
OCIE1B
TOIE1
TOIE0
OCF1A
OCF1B
TOV1
OCF1A
CK
PCK
T/C1 OVERFLOW
IRQ
T/C1 COMPARE
MATCH B IRQ
OC1A
(PB1)
T/C1 COMPARE
MATCH A IRQ
T/C CONTROL
REGISTER 1 (TCCR1) PWM1A
COM1B1
PWM1B
COM1B0
FOC1B
FOC1A
(OCR1A) (OCR1B) (OCR1C)
8-BIT COMPARATOR
T/C1 OUTPUT
COMPARE REGISTER TOV0
COM1A1
COM1A0
8-BIT COMPARATOR
T/C1 OUTPUT
COMPARE REGISTER
GLOBAL T/C CONTROL
REGISTER (GTCCR)
CS12
CS11
CS10
PSR1
CTC1
CS13
OC1A
(PB0)
OC1B
(PB4)
OC1B
(PB3)
DEAD TIME GENERATOR DEAD TIME GENERATORATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 86
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
12.2.1 Timer/Counter1 Initialization for Asynchronous Mode
To set Timer/Counter1 in asynchronous mode first enable PLL and then wait 100 µs for PLL to stabilize. Next, poll
the PLOCK bit until it is set and then set the PCKE bit.
12.2.2 Timer/Counter1 in PWM Mode
When the PWM mode is selected, Timer/Counter1 and the Output Compare Register C - OCR1C form a dual 8-bit,
free-running and glitch-free PWM generator with outputs on the PB1(OC1A) and PB4(OC1B) pins and inverted
outputs on pins PB0(OC1A) and PB3(OC1B). As default non-overlapping times for complementary output pairs are
zero, but they can be inserted using a Dead Time Generator (see description on page 100).
Figure 12-4. The PWM Output Pair
When the counter value match the contents of OCR1A or OCR1B, the OC1A and OC1B outputs are set or cleared
according to the COM1A1/COM1A0 or COM1B1/COM1B0 bits in the Timer/Counter1 Control Register A - TCCR1,
as shown in Table 12-1.
Timer/Counter1 acts as an up-counter, counting from $00 up to the value specified in the output compare register
OCR1C, and starting from $00 up again. A compare match with OC1C will set an overflow interrupt flag (TOV1)
after a synchronization delay following the compare event.
Note that in PWM mode, writing to the Output Compare Registers OCR1A or OCR1B, the data value is first transferred
to a temporary location. The value is latched into OCR1A or OCR1B when the Timer/Counter reaches
OCR1C. This prevents the occurrence of odd-length PWM pulses (glitches) in the event of an unsynchronized
OCR1A or OCR1B. See Figure 12-5 for an example.
Table 12-1. Compare Mode Select in PWM Mode
COM1x1 COM1x0 Effect on Output Compare Pins
0 0 OC1x not connected.
OC1x not connected.
0 1 OC1x cleared on compare match. Set whenTCNT1 = $00.
OC1x set on compare match. Cleared when TCNT1 = $00.
1 0 OC1x cleared on compare match. Set when TCNT1 = $00.
OC1x not connected.
1 1 OC1x Set on compare match. Cleared when TCNT1= $00.
OC1x not connected.
PWM1x
PWM1x
t non-overlap=0 t non-overlap=0 x = A or BATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 87
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Figure 12-5. Effects of Unsynchronized OCR Latching
During the time between the write and the latch operation, a read from OCR1A or OCR1B will read the contents of
the temporary location. This means that the most recently written value always will read out of OCR1A or OCR1B.
When OCR1A or OCR1B contain $00 or the top value, as specified in OCR1C register, the output PB1(OC1A) or
PB4(OC1B) is held low or high according to the settings of COM1A1/COM1A0. This is shown in Table 12-2.
In PWM mode, the Timer Overflow Flag - TOV1 is set when the TCNT1 counts to the OCR1C value and the
TCNT1 is reset to $00. The Timer Overflow Interrupt1 is executed when TOV1 is set provided that Timer Overflow
Interrupt and global interrupts are enabled. This also applies to the Timer Output Compare flags and interrupts.
The frequency of the PWM will be Timer Clock 1 Frequency divided by (OCR1C value + 1). See the following
equation:
Resolution shows how many bits are required to express the value in the OCR1C register and can be calculated
using the following equation:
Table 12-2. PWM Outputs OCR1x = $00 or OCR1C, x = A or B
COM1x1 COM1x0 OCR1x Output OC1x Output OC1x
0 1 $00 L H
0 1 OCR1C H L
1 0 $00 L Not connected.
1 0 OCR1C H Not connected.
1 1 $00 H Not connected.
1 1 OCR1C L Not connected.
PWM Output OC1x
PWM Output OC1x
Unsynchronized OC1x Latch
Synchronized OC1x Latch
Counter Value
Compare Value
Counter Value
Compare Value
Compare Value changes
Glitch
Compare Value changes
f
PWM
f
TCK1
OCR1C + 1 = ------------------------------------
R = log2 OCR1C 1 ( ) +ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 88
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Table 12-3. Timer/Counter1 Clock Prescale Select in the Asynchronous Mode
PWM Frequency Clock Selection CS1[3:0] OCR1C RESOLUTION
20 kHz PCK/16 0101 199 7.6
30 kHz PCK/16 0101 132 7.1
40 kHz PCK/8 0100 199 7.6
50 kHz PCK/8 0100 159 7.3
60 kHz PCK/8 0100 132 7.1
70 kHz PCK/4 0011 228 7.8
80 kHz PCK/4 0011 199 7.6
90 kHz PCK/4 0011 177 7.5
100 kHz PCK/4 0011 159 7.3
110 kHz PCK/4 0011 144 7.2
120 kHz PCK/4 0011 132 7.1
130 kHz PCK/2 0010 245 7.9
140 kHz PCK/2 0010 228 7.8
150 kHz PCK/2 0010 212 7.7
160 kHz PCK/2 0010 199 7.6
170 kHz PCK/2 0010 187 7.6
180 kHz PCK/2 0010 177 7.5
190 kHz PCK/2 0010 167 7.4
200 kHz PCK/2 0010 159 7.3
250 kHz PCK 0001 255 8.0
300 kHz PCK 0001 212 7.7
350 kHz PCK 0001 182 7.5
400 kHz PCK 0001 159 7.3
450 kHz PCK 0001 141 7.1
500 kHz PCK 0001 127 7.0ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 89
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
12.3 Register Description
12.3.1 TCCR1 – Timer/Counter1 Control Register
• Bit 7 – CTC1 : Clear Timer/Counter on Compare Match
When the CTC1 control bit is set (one), Timer/Counter1 is reset to $00 in the CPU clock cycle after a compare
match with OCR1C register value. If the control bit is cleared, Timer/Counter1 continues counting and is unaffected
by a compare match.
• Bit 6 – PWM1A: Pulse Width Modulator A Enable
When set (one) this bit enables PWM mode based on comparator OCR1A in Timer/Counter1 and the counter
value is reset to $00 in the CPU clock cycle after a compare match with OCR1C register value.
• Bits 5:4 – COM1A[1:0]: Comparator A Output Mode, Bits 1 and 0
The COM1A1 and COM1A0 control bits determine any output pin action following a compare match with compare
register A in Timer/Counter1. Since the output pin action is an alternative function to an I/O port, the corresponding
direction control bit must be set (one) in order to control an output pin.
In Normal mode, the COM1A1 and COM1A0 control bits determine the output pin actions that affect pin PB1
(OC1A) as described in Table 12-4. Note that OC1A is not connected in normal mode.
In PWM mode, these bits have different functions. Refer to Table 12-1 on page 86 for a detailed description.
• Bits 3:0 - CS1[3:0]: Clock Select Bits 3, 2, 1, and 0
The Clock Select bits 3, 2, 1, and 0 define the prescaling source of Timer/Counter1.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x30 CTC1 PWM1A COM1A1 COM1A0 CS13 CS12 CS11 CS10 TCCR1
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Table 12-4. Comparator A Mode Select in Normal Mode
COM1A1 COM1A0 Description
0 0 Timer/Counter Comparator A disconnected from output pin OC1A.
0 1 Toggle the OC1A output line.
1 0 Clear the OC1A output line.
1 1 Set the OC1A output line
Table 12-5. Timer/Counter1 Prescale Select
CS13 CS12 CS11 CS10
Asynchronous
Clocking Mode
Synchronous
Clocking Mode
0 0 0 0 T/C1 stopped T/C1 stopped
0 0 0 1 PCK CK
0 0 1 0 PCK/2 CK/2
0 0 1 1 PCK/4 CK/4
0 1 0 0 PCK/8 CK/8
0 1 0 1 PCK/16 CK/16
0 1 1 0 PCK/32 CK/32ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 90
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
The Stop condition provides a Timer Enable/Disable function.
12.3.2 GTCCR – General Timer/Counter1 Control Register
• Bit 6 – PWM1B: Pulse Width Modulator B Enable
When set (one) this bit enables PWM mode based on comparator OCR1B in Timer/Counter1 and the counter
value is reset to $00 in the CPU clock cycle after a compare match with OCR1C register value.
• Bits 5:4 – COM1B[1:0]: Comparator B Output Mode, Bits 1 and 0
The COM1B1 and COM1B0 control bits determine any output pin action following a compare match with compare
register B in Timer/Counter1. Since the output pin action is an alternative function to an I/O port, the corresponding
direction control bit must be set (one) in order to control an output pin.
In Normal mode, the COM1B1 and COM1B0 control bits determine the output pin actions that affect pin PB4
(OC1B) as described in Table 12-6. Note that OC1B is not connected in normal mode.
In PWM mode, these bits have different functions. Refer to Table 12-1 on page 86 for a detailed description.
• Bit 3 – FOC1B: Force Output Compare Match 1B
Writing a logical one to this bit forces a change in the compare match output pin PB4 (OC1B) according to the values
already set in COM1B1 and COM1B0. If COM1B1 and COM1B0 written in the same cycle as FOC1B, the new
settings will be used. The Force Output Compare bit can be used to change the output pin value regardless of the
timer value. The automatic action programmed in COM1B1 and COM1B0 takes place as if a compare match had
0 1 1 1 PCK/64 CK/64
1 0 0 0 PCK/128 CK/128
1 0 0 1 PCK/256 CK/256
1 0 1 0 PCK/512 CK/512
1 0 1 1 PCK/1024 CK/1024
1 1 0 0 PCK/2048 CK/2048
1 1 0 1 PCK/4096 CK/4096
1 1 1 0 PCK/8192 CK/8192
1 1 1 1 PCK/16384 CK/16384
Table 12-5. Timer/Counter1 Prescale Select (Continued)
CS13 CS12 CS11 CS10
Asynchronous
Clocking Mode
Synchronous
Clocking Mode
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x2C TSM PWM1B COM1B1 COM1B0 FOC1B FOC1A PSR1 PSR0 GTCCR
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W W W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Table 12-6. Comparator B Mode Select in Normal Mode
COM1B1 COM1B0 Description
0 0 Timer/Counter Comparator B disconnected from output pin OC1B.
0 1 Toggle the OC1B output line.
1 0 Clear the OC1B output line.
1 1 Set the OC1B output lineATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 91
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
occurred, but no interrupt is generated. The FOC1B bit always reads as zero. FOC1B is not in use if PWM1B bit is
set.
• Bit 2 – FOC1A: Force Output Compare Match 1A
Writing a logical one to this bit forces a change in the compare match output pin PB1 (OC1A) according to the values
already set in COM1A1 and COM1A0. If COM1A1 and COM1A0 written in the same cycle as FOC1A, the new
settings will be used. The Force Output Compare bit can be used to change the output pin value regardless of the
timer value. The automatic action programmed in COM1A1 and COM1A0 takes place as if a compare match had
occurred, but no interrupt is generated. The FOC1A bit always reads as zero. FOC1A is not in use if PWM1A bit is
set.
• Bit 1 – PSR1 : Prescaler Reset Timer/Counter1
When this bit is set (one), the Timer/Counter prescaler (TCNT1 is unaffected) will be reset. The bit will be cleared
by hardware after the operation is performed. Writing a zero to this bit will have no effect. This bit will always read
as zero.
12.3.3 TCNT1 – Timer/Counter1
This 8-bit register contains the value of Timer/Counter1.
Timer/Counter1 is realized as an up counter with read and write access. Due to synchronization of the CPU,
Timer/Counter1 data written into Timer/Counter1 is delayed by one and half CPU clock cycles in synchronous
mode and at most one CPU clock cycles for asynchronous mode.
12.3.4 OCR1A –Timer/Counter1 Output Compare RegisterA
The output compare register A is an 8-bit read/write register.
The Timer/Counter Output Compare Register A contains data to be continuously compared with Timer/Counter1.
Actions on compare matches are specified in TCCR1. A compare match does only occur if Timer/Counter1 counts
to the OCR1A value. A software write that sets TCNT1 and OCR1A to the same value does not generate a compare
match.
A compare match will set the compare interrupt flag OCF1A after a synchronization delay following the compare
event.
12.3.5 OCR1B – Timer/Counter1 Output Compare RegisterB
The output compare register B is an 8-bit read/write register.
The Timer/Counter Output Compare Register B contains data to be continuously compared with Timer/Counter1.
Actions on compare matches are specified in TCCR1. A compare match does only occur if Timer/Counter1 counts
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x2F MSB LSB TCNT1
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x2E MSB LSB OCR1A
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x2B MSB LSB OCR1B
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 92
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
to the OCR1B value. A software write that sets TCNT1 and OCR1B to the same value does not generate a compare
match.
A compare match will set the compare interrupt flag OCF1B after a synchronization delay following the compare
event.
12.3.6 OCR1C – Timer/Counter1 Output Compare RegisterC
The output compare register C is an 8-bit read/write register.
The Timer/Counter Output Compare Register C contains data to be continuously compared with Timer/Counter1.
A compare match does only occur if Timer/Counter1 counts to the OCR1C value. A software write that sets TCNT1
and OCR1C to the same value does not generate a compare match. If the CTC1 bit in TCCR1 is set, a compare
match will clear TCNT1.
This register has the same function in normal mode and PWM mode.
12.3.7 TIMSK – Timer/Counter Interrupt Mask Register
• Bit 7 – Res: Reserved Bit
This bit is a reserved bit in the ATtiny25/45/85 and always reads as zero.
• Bit 6 – OCIE1A: Timer/Counter1 Output Compare Interrupt Enable
When the OCIE1A bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the Timer/Counter1 Compare
MatchA, interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt at vector $003 is executed if a compare matchA occurs.
The Compare Flag in Timer/Counter1 is set (one) in the Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register.
• Bit 5 – OCIE1B: Timer/Counter1 Output Compare Interrupt Enable
When the OCIE1B bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the Timer/Counter1 Compare
MatchB, interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt at vector $009 is executed if a compare matchB occurs.
The Compare Flag in Timer/Counter1 is set (one) in the Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register.
• Bit 2 – TOIE1: Timer/Counter1 Overflow Interrupt Enable
When the TOIE1 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the Timer/Counter1 Overflow interrupt
is enabled. The corresponding interrupt (at vector $004) is executed if an overflow in Timer/Counter1 occurs.
The Overflow Flag (Timer1) is set (one) in the Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register - TIFR.
• Bit 0 – Res: Reserved Bit
This bit is a reserved bit in the ATtiny25/45/85 and always reads as zero.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x2D MSB LSB OCR1C
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x39 – OCIE1A OCIE1B OCIE0A OCIE0B TOIE1 TOIE0 – TIMSK
Read/Write R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 93
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
12.3.8 TIFR – Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register
• Bit 7 – Res: Reserved Bit
This bit is a reserved bit in the ATtiny25/45/85 and always reads as zero.
• Bit 6 – OCF1A: Output Compare Flag 1A
The OCF1A bit is set (one) when compare match occurs between Timer/Counter1 and the data value in OCR1A -
Output Compare Register 1A. OCF1A is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling
vector. Alternatively, OCF1A is cleared, after synchronization clock cycle, by writing a logic one to the flag. When
the I-bit in SREG, OCIE1A, and OCF1A are set (one), the Timer/Counter1 A compare match interrupt is executed.
• Bit 5 – OCF1B: Output Compare Flag 1B
The OCF1B bit is set (one) when compare match occurs between Timer/Counter1 and the data value in OCR1B -
Output Compare Register 1A. OCF1B is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling
vector. Alternatively, OCF1B is cleared, after synchronization clock cycle, by writing a logic one to the flag. When
the I-bit in SREG, OCIE1B, and OCF1B are set (one), the Timer/Counter1 B compare match interrupt is executed.
• Bit 2 – TOV1: Timer/Counter1 Overflow Flag
In normal mode (PWM1A=0 and PWM1B=0) the bit TOV1 is set (one) when an overflow occurs in Timer/Counter1.
The bit TOV1 is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively,
TOV1 is cleared, after synchronization clock cycle, by writing a logical one to the flag.
In PWM mode (either PWM1A=1 or PWM1B=1) the bit TOV1 is set (one) when compare match occurs between
Timer/Counter1 and data value in OCR1C - Output Compare Register 1C.
When the SREG I-bit, and TOIE1 (Timer/Counter1 Overflow Interrupt Enable), and TOV1 are set (one), the
Timer/Counter1 Overflow interrupt is executed.
• Bit 0 – Res: Reserved Bit
This bit is a reserved bit in the ATtiny25/45/85 and always reads as zero.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x38 – OCF1A OCF1B OCF0A OCF0B TOV1 TOV0 – TIFR
Read/Write R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 94
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
12.3.9 PLLCSR – PLL Control and Status Register
• Bit 7 – LSM: Low Speed Mode
The high speed mode is enabled as default and the fast peripheral clock is 64 MHz, but the low speed mode can
be set by writing the LSM bit to one. Then the fast peripheral clock is scaled down to 32 MHz. The low speed mode
must be set, if the supply voltage is below 2.7 volts, because the Timer/Counter1 is not running fast enough on low
voltage levels. It is highly recommended that Timer/Counter1 is stopped whenever the LSM bit is changed.
Note, that LSM can not be set if PLLCLK is used as system clock.
• Bit 6:3 – Res : Reserved Bits
These bits are reserved bits in the ATtiny25/45/85 and always read as zero.
• Bit 2 – PCKE: PCK Enable
The PCKE bit change the Timer/Counter1 clock source. When it is set, the asynchronous clock mode is enabled
and fast 64 MHz (or 32 MHz in Low Speed Mode) PCK clock is used as Timer/Counter1 clock source. If this bit is
cleared, the synchronous clock mode is enabled, and system clock CK is used as Timer/Counter1 clock source.
This bit can be set only if PLLE bit is set. It is safe to set this bit only when the PLL is locked i.e the PLOCK bit is 1.
The bit PCKE can only be set, if the PLL has been enabled earlier.
• Bit 1 – PLLE: PLL Enable
When the PLLE is set, the PLL is started and if needed internal RC-oscillator is started as a PLL reference clock. If
PLL is selected as a system clock source the value for this bit is always 1.
• Bit 0 – PLOCK: PLL Lock Detector
When the PLOCK bit is set, the PLL is locked to the reference clock. The PLOCK bit should be ignored during initial
PLL lock-in sequence when PLL frequency overshoots and undershoots, before reaching steady state. The
steady state is obtained within 100 µs. After PLL lock-in it is recommended to check the PLOCK bit before enabling
PCK for Timer/Counter1.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x27 LSM - - - - PCKE PLLE PLOCK PLLCSR
Read/Write R/W R R R R R/W R/W R
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0/1 0ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 95
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
13. 8-bit Timer/Counter1 in ATtiny15 Mode
The ATtiny15 compatibility mode is selected by writing the code “0011” to the CKSEL fuses (if any other code is
written, the Timer/Counter1 is working in normal mode). When selected the ATtiny15 compatibility mode provides
an ATtiny15 backward compatible prescaler and Timer/Counter. Furthermore, the clocking system has same clock
frequencies as in ATtiny15.
13.1 Timer/Counter1 Prescaler
Figure 13-1 shows an ATtiny15 compatible prescaler. It has two prescaler units, a 10-bit prescaler for the system
clock (CK) and a 3-bit prescaler for the fast peripheral clock (PCK). The clocking system of the Timer/Counter1 is
always synchronous in the ATtiny15 compatibility mode, because the same RC Oscillator is used as a PLL clock
source (generates the input clock for the prescaler) and the AVR core.
Figure 13-1. Timer/Counter1 Prescaler
The same clock selections as in ATtiny15 can be chosen for Timer/Counter1 from the output multiplexer, because
the frequency of the fast peripheral clock is 25.6 MHz and the prescaler is similar in the ATtiny15 compatibility
mode. The clock selections are PCK, PCK/2, PCK/4, PCK/8, CK, CK/2, CK/4, CK/8, CK/16, CK/32, CK/64,
CK/128, CK/256, CK/512, CK/1024 and stop.
13.2 Counter and Compare Units
Figure 13-2 shows Timer/Counter 1 synchronization register block diagram and synchronization delays in between
registers. Note that all clock gating details are not shown in the figure. The Timer/Counter1 register values go
through the internal synchronization registers, which cause the input synchronization delay, before affecting the
counter operation. The registers TCCR1, GTCCR, OCR1A and OCR1C can be read back right after writing the
register. The read back values are delayed for the Timer/Counter1 (TCNT1) register and flags (OCF1A and TOV1),
because of the input and output synchronization.
The Timer/Counter1 features a high resolution and a high accuracy usage with the lower prescaling opportunities.
It can also support an accurate, high speed, 8-bit Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) using clock speeds up to 25.6
MHz. In this mode, Timer/Counter1 and the Output Compare Registers serve as a stand-alone PWM. Refer to
“Timer/Counter1 in PWM Mode” on page 97 for a detailed description on this function. Similarly, the high prescaling
opportunities make this unit useful for lower speed functions or exact timing functions with infrequent actions.
TIMER/COUNTER1 COUNT ENABLE
PSR1
CS10
CS11
CS12
PCK (25.6 MHz)
0
CS13
3-BIT T/C PRESCALER PCK PCK/2 PCK/4 PCK/8
CK/2
CK/4
CK/8
CK/16
CK/32
CK/64
CK/128
CK/256
CK/512
CK/1024
10-BIT T/C PRESCALER
CK (1.6 MHz)
CK
CLEAR CLEARATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 96
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Figure 13-2. Timer/Counter 1 Synchronization Register Block Diagram.
Timer/Counter1 and the prescaler allow running the CPU from any clock source while the prescaler is operating on
the fast 25.6 MHz PCK clock in the asynchronous mode.
The following Figure 13-3 shows the block diagram for Timer/Counter1.
8-BIT DATABUS
OCR1A OCR1A_SI
OCR1C OCR1C_SI TCNT_SO
TCCR1 TCCR1_SI
GTCCR GTCCR_SI
TCNT1 TCNT1_SI
OCF1A OCF1A_SI
TOV1 TOV1_SI TOV1_SO
OCF1A_SO
TCNT1
S
A
S
A
PCKE
CK
PCK
IO-registers Input synchronization
registers
Timer/Counter1 Output synchronization
registers
SYNC
MODE
ASYNC
MODE
1 PCK Delay No Delay ~1 CK Delay
1PCK Delay No Delay
TCNT1
OCF1A
TOV1
1..2 PCK Delay
1..2 PCK Delay ~1 CK DelayATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 97
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Figure 13-3. Timer/Counter1 Block Diagram
Two status flags (overflow and compare match) are found in the Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register - TIFR.
Control signals are found in the Timer/Counter Control Registers TCCR1 and GTCCR. The interrupt enable/disable
settings are found in the Timer/Counter Interrupt Mask Register - TIMSK.
The Timer/Counter1 contains two Output Compare Registers, OCR1A and OCR1C as the data source to be compared
with the Timer/Counter1 contents. In normal mode the Output Compare functions are operational with
OCR1A only. OCR1A determines action on the OC1A pin (PB1), and it can generate Timer1 OC1A interrupt in normal
mode and in PWM mode. OCR1C holds the Timer/Counter maximum value, i.e. the clear on compare match
value. In the normal mode an overflow interrupt (TOV1) is generated when Timer/Counter1 counts from $FF to
$00, while in the PWM mode the overflow interrupt is generated when the Timer/Counter1 counts either from $FF
to $00 or from OCR1C to $00.
In PWM mode, OCR1A provides the data values against which the Timer Counter value is compared. Upon compare
match the PWM outputs (OC1A) is generated. In PWM mode, the Timer Counter counts up to the value
specified in the output compare register OCR1C and starts again from $00. This feature allows limiting the counter
“full” value to a specified value, lower than $FF. Together with the many prescaler options, flexible PWM frequency
selection is provided. Table 12-3 on page 88 lists clock selection and OCR1C values to obtain PWM frequencies
from 20 kHz to 250 kHz in 10 kHz steps and from 250 kHz to 500 kHz in 50 kHz steps. Higher PWM frequencies
can be obtained at the expense of resolution.
13.2.1 Timer/Counter1 in PWM Mode
When the PWM mode is selected, Timer/Counter1 and the Output Compare Register A - OCR1A form an 8-bit,
free-running and glitch-free PWM generator with output on the PB1(OC1A).
8-BIT DATABUS
TIMER INT. FLAG
REGISTER (TIFR)
TIMER/COUNTER1
8-BIT COMPARATOR
T/C1 OUTPUT
COMPARE REGISTER
TIMER INT. MASK
REGISTER (TIMSK)
TIMER/COUNTER1
(TCNT1) T/C CLEAR T/C1 CONTROL
LOGIC
TOV1
OCIE1A
TOIE1
TOIE0
OCF1A
TOV1
OCF1A
CK
PCK
T/C1 OVERFLOW
IRQ
OC1A
(PB1)
T/C1 COMPARE
MATCH A IRQ
GLOBAL T/C CONTROL
REGISTER 2 (GTCCR)
PWM1A
FOC1A
(OCR1A) (OCR1C)
8-BIT COMPARATOR
T/C1 OUTPUT
COMPARE REGISTER TOV0
COM1A1
COM1A0
T/C CONTROL
REGISTER 1 (TCCR1)
CTC1
CS13
CS12
CS11
CS10
PSR1ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 98
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
When the counter value match the content of OCR1A, the OC1A and output is set or cleared according to the
COM1A1/COM1A0 bits in the Timer/Counter1 Control Register A - TCCR1, as shown in Table 13-1.
Timer/Counter1 acts as an up-counter, counting from $00 up to the value specified in the output compare register
OCR1C, and starting from $00 up again. A compare match with OCR1C will set an overflow interrupt flag (TOV1)
after a synchronization delay following the compare event.
Note that in PWM mode, writing to the Output Compare Register OCR1A, the data value is first transferred to a
temporary location. The value is latched into OCR1A when the Timer/Counter reaches OCR1C. This prevents the
occurrence of odd-length PWM pulses (glitches) in the event of an unsynchronized OCR1A. See Figure 13-4 for an
e xample.
Figure 13-4. Effects of Unsynchronized OCR Latching
During the time between the write and the latch operation, a read from OCR1A will read the contents of the temporary
location. This means that the most recently written value always will read out of OCR1A.
When OCR1A contains $00 or the top value, as specified in OCR1C register, the output PB1(OC1A) is held low or
high according to the settings of COM1A1/COM1A0. This is shown in Table 13-2.
Table 13-1. Compare Mode Select in PWM Mode
COM1A1 COM1A0 Effect on Output Compare Pin
0 0 OC1A not connected.
0 1 OC1A not connected.
1 0 OC1A cleared on compare match. Set when TCNT1 = $00.
1 1 OC1A set on compare match. Cleared when TCNT1 = $00.
Table 13-2. PWM Outputs OCR1A = $00 or OCR1C
COM1A1 COM1A0 OCR1A Output OC1A
0 1 $00 L
0 1 OCR1C H
1 0 $00 L
PWM Output OC1A
PWM Output OC1A
Unsynchronized OC1A Latch
Synchronized OC1A Latch
Counter Value
Compare Value
Counter Value
Compare Value
Compare Value changes
Glitch
Compare Value changesATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 99
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
In PWM mode, the Timer Overflow Flag - TOV1 is set when the TCNT1 counts to the OCR1C value and the
TCNT1 is reset to $00. The Timer Overflow Interrupt1 is executed when TOV1 is set provided that Timer Overflow
Interrupt and global interrupts are enabled. This also applies to the Timer Output Compare flags and interrupts.
The PWM frequency can be derived from the timer/counter clock frequency using the following equation:
The duty cycle of the PWM waveform can be calculated using the following equation:
...where TPCK is the period of the fast peripheral clock (1/25.6 MHz = 39.1 ns).
Resolution indicates how many bits are required to express the value in the OCR1C register. It can be calculated
using the following equation:
1 0 OCR1C H
1 1 $00 H
1 1 OCR1C L
Table 13-3. Timer/Counter1 Clock Prescale Select in the Asynchronous Mode
PWM Frequency Clock Selection CS1[3:0] OCR1C RESOLUTION
20 kHz PCK/16 0101 199 7.6
30 kHz PCK/16 0101 132 7.1
40 kHz PCK/8 0100 199 7.6
50 kHz PCK/8 0100 159 7.3
60 kHz PCK/8 0100 132 7.1
70 kHz PCK/4 0011 228 7.8
80 kHz PCK/4 0011 199 7.6
90 kHz PCK/4 0011 177 7.5
100 kHz PCK/4 0011 159 7.3
110 kHz PCK/4 0011 144 7.2
120 kHz PCK/4 0011 132 7.1
130 kHz PCK/2 0010 245 7.9
140 kHz PCK/2 0010 228 7.8
150 kHz PCK/2 0010 212 7.7
Table 13-2. PWM Outputs OCR1A = $00 or OCR1C
COM1A1 COM1A0 OCR1A Output OC1A
f f
TCK1
OCR1C + 1 = -----------------------------------
D OCR1A 1 + TTCK1 TPCK –
OCR1C 1 + TTCK1 = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
R = log2 OCR1C 1 ( ) +ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 100
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
13.3 Register Description
13.3.1 TCCR1 – Timer/Counter1 Control Register
• Bit 7 – CTC1 : Clear Timer/Counter on Compare Match
When the CTC1 control bit is set (one), Timer/Counter1 is reset to $00 in the CPU clock cycle after a compare
match with OCR1A register. If the control bit is cleared, Timer/Counter1 continues counting and is unaffected by a
compare match.
• Bit 6 – PWM1A: Pulse Width Modulator A Enable
When set (one) this bit enables PWM mode based on comparator OCR1A in Timer/Counter1 and the counter
value is reset to $00 in the CPU clock cycle after a compare match with OCR1C register value.
• Bits 5:4 – COM1A[1:0]: Comparator A Output Mode, Bits 1 and 0
The COM1A1 and COM1A0 control bits determine any output pin action following a compare match with compare
register A in Timer/Counter1. Output pin actions affect pin PB1 (OC1A). Since this is an alternative function to an
I/O port, the corresponding direction control bit must be set (one) in order to control an output pin.
In PWM mode, these bits have different functions. Refer to Table 13-1 on page 98 for a detailed description.
160 kHz PCK/2 0010 199 7.6
170 kHz PCK/2 0010 187 7.6
180 kHz PCK/2 0010 177 7.5
190 kHz PCK/2 0010 167 7.4
200 kHz PCK/2 0010 159 7.3
250 kHz PCK 0001 255 8.0
300 kHz PCK 0001 212 7.7
350 kHz PCK 0001 182 7.5
400 kHz PCK 0001 159 7.3
450 kHz PCK 0001 141 7.1
500 kHz PCK 0001 127 7.0
Table 13-3. Timer/Counter1 Clock Prescale Select in the Asynchronous Mode (Continued)
PWM Frequency Clock Selection CS1[3:0] OCR1C RESOLUTION
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x30 CTC1 PWM1A COM1A1 COM1A0 CS13 CS12 CS11 CS10 TCCR1A
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Table 13-4. Comparator A Mode Select
COM1A1 COM1A0 Description
0 0 Timer/Counter Comparator A disconnected from output pin OC1A.
0 1 Toggle the OC1A output line.
1 0 Clear the OC1A output line.
1 1 Set the OC1A output lineATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 101
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
• Bits 3:0 – CS1[3:0]: Clock Select Bits 3, 2, 1, and 0
The Clock Select bits 3, 2, 1, and 0 define the prescaling source of Timer/Counter1.
The Stop condition provides a Timer Enable/Disable function.
13.3.2 GTCCR – General Timer/Counter1 Control Register
• Bit 2 – FOC1A: Force Output Compare Match 1A
Writing a logical one to this bit forces a change in the compare match output pin PB1 (OC1A) according to the values
already set in COM1A1 and COM1A0. If COM1A1 and COM1A0 written in the same cycle as FOC1A, the new
settings will be used. The Force Output Compare bit can be used to change the output pin value regardless of the
timer value. The automatic action programmed in COM1A1 and COM1A0 takes place as if a compare match had
occurred, but no interrupt is generated. The FOC1A bit always reads as zero. FOC1A is not in use if PWM1A bit is
set.
• Bit 1 – PSR1 : Prescaler Reset Timer/Counter1
When this bit is set (one), the Timer/Counter prescaler (TCNT1 is unaffected) will be reset. The bit will be cleared
by hardware after the operation is performed. Writing a zero to this bit will have no effect. This bit will always read
as zero.
Table 13-5. Timer/Counter1 Prescale Select
CS13 CS12 CS11 CS10 T/C1 Clock
0 0 0 0 T/C1 stopped
0 0 0 1 PCK
0 0 1 0 PCK/2
0 0 1 1 PCK/4
0 1 0 0 PCK/8
0 1 0 1 CK
0 1 1 0 CK/2
0 1 1 1 CK/4
1 0 0 0 CK/8
1 0 0 1 CK/16
1 0 1 0 CK/32
1 0 1 1 CK/64
1 1 0 0 CK/128
1 1 0 1 CK/256
1 1 1 0 CK/512
1 1 1 1 CK/1024
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x2C TSM PWM1B COM1B1 COM1B0 FOC1B FOC1A PSR1 PSR0 GTCCR
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W W W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 102
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
13.3.3 TCNT1 – Timer/Counter1
This 8-bit register contains the value of Timer/Counter1.
Timer/Counter1 is realized as an up counter with read and write access. Due to synchronization of the CPU,
Timer/Counter1 data written into Timer/Counter1 is delayed by one CPU clock cycle in synchronous mode and at
most two CPU clock cycles for asynchronous mode.
13.3.4 OCR1A – Timer/Counter1 Output Compare RegisterA
The output compare register A is an 8-bit read/write register.
The Timer/Counter Output Compare Register A contains data to be continuously compared with Timer/Counter1.
Actions on compare matches are specified in TCCR1. A compare match does only occur if Timer/Counter1 counts
to the OCR1A value. A software write that sets TCNT1 and OCR1A to the same value does not generate a compare
match.
A compare match will set the compare interrupt flag OCF1A after a synchronization delay following the compare
event.
13.3.5 OCR1C – Timer/Counter1 Output Compare Register C
The Output Compare Register B - OCR1B from ATtiny15 is replaced with the output compare register C - OCR1C
that is an 8-bit read/write register. This register has the same function as the Output Compare Register B in
ATtiny15.
The Timer/Counter Output Compare Register C contains data to be continuously compared with Timer/Counter1.
A compare match does only occur if Timer/Counter1 counts to the OCR1C value. A software write that sets TCNT1
and OCR1C to the same value does not generate a compare match. If the CTC1 bit in TCCR1 is set, a compare
match will clear TCNT1.
13.3.6 TIMSK – Timer/Counter Interrupt Mask Register
• Bit 7 – Res: Reserved Bit
This bit is a reserved bit in the ATtiny25/45/85 and always reads as zero.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x2F MSB LSB TCNT1
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x2E MSB LSB OCR1A
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x2D MSB LSB OCR1C
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x39 – OCIE1A OCIE1B OCIE0A OCIE0B TOIE1 TOIE0 – TIMSK
Read/Write R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 103
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
• Bit 6 – OCIE1A: Timer/Counter1 Output Compare Interrupt Enable
When the OCIE1A bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the Timer/Counter1 Compare
MatchA, interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt at vector $003 is executed if a compare matchA occurs.
The Compare Flag in Timer/Counter1 is set (one) in the Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register.
• Bit 2 – TOIE1: Timer/Counter1 Overflow Interrupt Enable
When the TOIE1 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the Timer/Counter1 Overflow interrupt
is enabled. The corresponding interrupt (at vector $004) is executed if an overflow in Timer/Counter1 occurs.
The Overflow Flag (Timer1) is set (one) in the Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register - TIFR.
• Bit 0 – Res: Reserved Bit
This bit is a reserved bit in the ATtiny25/45/85 and always reads as zero.
13.3.7 TIFR – Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register
• Bit 7 – Res: Reserved Bit
This bit is a reserved bit in the ATtiny25/45/85 and always reads as zero.
• Bit 6 – OCF1A: Output Compare Flag 1A
The OCF1A bit is set (one) when compare match occurs between Timer/Counter1 and the data value in OCR1A -
Output Compare Register 1A. OCF1A is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling
vector. Alternatively, OCF1A is cleared, after synchronization clock cycle, by writing a logic one to the flag. When
the I-bit in SREG, OCIE1A, and OCF1A are set (one), the Timer/Counter1 A compare match interrupt is executed.
• Bit 2 – TOV1: Timer/Counter1 Overflow Flag
The bit TOV1 is set (one) when an overflow occurs in Timer/Counter1. TOV1 is cleared by hardware when executing
the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, TOV1 is cleared, after synchronization clock cycle,
by writing a logical one to the flag. When the SREG I-bit, and TOIE1 (Timer/Counter1 Overflow Interrupt Enable),
and TOV1 are set (one), the Timer/Counter1 Overflow interrupt is executed.
• Bit 0 – Res: Reserved Bit
This bit is a reserved bit in the ATtiny25/45/85 and always reads as zero.
13.3.8 PLLCSR – PLL Control and Status Register
• Bits 6:3 – Res : Reserved Bits
These bits are reserved bits in the ATtiny25/45/85 and always read as zero.
• Bit 2 – PCKE: PCK Enable
The bit PCKE is always set in the ATtiny15 compatibility mode.
• Bit 1 – PLLE: PLL Enable
The PLL is always enabled in the ATtiny15 compatibility mode.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x38 – OCF1A OCF1B OCF0A OCF0B TOV1 TOV0 – TIFR
Read/Write R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x27 LSM – – – – PCKE PLLE PLOCK PLLCSR
Read/Write R/W R R R R R/W R/W R
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0/1 0ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 104
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
• Bit 0 – PLOCK: PLL Lock Detector
When the PLOCK bit is set, the PLL is locked to the reference clock. The PLOCK bit should be ignored during initial
PLL lock-in sequence when PLL frequency overshoots and undershoots, before reaching steady state. The
steady state is obtained within 100 µs. After PLL lock-in it is recommended to check the PLOCK bit before enabling
PCK for Timer/Counter1.ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 105
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
14. Dead Time Generator
The Dead Time Generator is provided for the Timer/Counter1 PWM output pairs to allow driving external power
control switches safely. The Dead Time Generator is a separate block that can be connected to Timer/Counter1
and it is used to insert dead times (non-overlapping times) for the Timer/Counter1 complementary output pairs
(OC1A-OC1A and OC1B-OC1B). The sharing of tasks is as follows: the timer/counter generates the PWM output
and the Dead Time Generator generates the non-overlapping PWM output pair from the timer/counter PWM signal.
Two Dead Time Generators are provided, one for each PWM output. The non-overlap time is adjustable and the
PWM output and it’s complementary output are adjusted separately, and independently for both PWM outputs.
Figure 14-1. Timer/Counter1 & Dead Time Generators
The dead time generation is based on the 4-bit down counters that count the dead time, as shown in Figure 46.
There is a dedicated prescaler in front of the Dead Time Generator that can divide the Timer/Counter1 clock (PCK
or CK) by 1, 2, 4 or 8. This provides for large range of dead times that can be generated. The prescaler is controlled
by two control bits DTPS1[1:0] from the I/O register at address 0x23. The block has also a rising and falling
edge detector that is used to start the dead time counting period. Depending on the edge, one of the transitions on
the rising edges, OC1x or OC1x is delayed until the counter has counted to zero. The comparator is used to compare
the counter with zero and stop the dead time insertion when zero has been reached. The counter is loaded
with a 4-bit DT1xH or DT1xL value from DT1x I/O register, depending on the edge of the PWM generator output
when the dead time insertion is started.
Figure 14-2. Dead Time Generator
The length of the counting period is user adjustable by selecting the dead time prescaler setting in 0x23 register,
and selecting then the dead time value in I/O register DT1x. The DT1x register consists of two 4-bit fields, DT1xH
and DT1xL that control the dead time periods of the PWM output and its’ complementary output separately. Thus
TIMER/COUNTER1
OC1A OC1A OC1B OC1B
DEAD TIME GENERATOR
PWM GENERATOR
PCKE
T15M
PCK
CK
DT1AH DT1BH
DEAD TIME GENERATOR
PWM1A PWM1B
DT1AL DT1BL
CLOCK CONTROL
OC1x
OC1x
T/C1 CLOCK
PWM1x
4-BIT COUNTER
COMPARATOR
DT1xH
DT1xL
DT1x
I/O REGISTER
DEAD TIME
PRESCALER
DTPS1[1:0]ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 106
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
the rising edge of OC1x and OC1x can have different dead time periods. The dead time is adjusted as the number
of prescaled dead time generator clock cycles.
Figure 14-3. The Complementary Output Pair
14.1 Register Description
14.1.1 DTPS1 – Timer/Counter1 Dead Time Prescaler Register 1
The dead time prescaler register, DTPS1 is a 2-bit read/write register.
• Bits 1:0 – DTPS1[1:0]: Dead Time Prescaler
The dedicated Dead Time prescaler in front of the Dead Time Generator can divide the Timer/Counter1 clock (PCK
or CK) by 1, 2, 4 or 8 providing a large range of dead times that can be generated. The Dead Time prescaler is
controlled by two bits DTPS1[1:0] from the Dead Time Prescaler register. These bits define the division factor of
the Dead Time prescaler. The division factors are given in table 46.
OC1x
x = A or B
t non-overlap / rising edge t non-overlap / falling edge
OC1x
PWM1x
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x23 DTPS11 DTPS10 DTPS1
Read/Write R R R R R R R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Table 14-1. Division factors of the Dead Time prescaler
DTPS11 DTPS10 Prescaler divides the T/C1 clock by
0 0 1x (no division)
0 1 2x
1 0 4x
1 1 8xATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 107
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
14.1.2 DT1A – Timer/Counter1 Dead Time A
The dead time value register A is an 8-bit read/write register.
The dead time delay of is adjusted by the dead time value register, DT1A. The register consists of two fields,
DT1AH[3:0] and DT1AL[3:0], one for each complementary output. Therefore a different dead time delay can be
adjusted for the rising edge of OC1A and the rising edge of OC1A.
• Bits 7:4 – DT1AH[3:0]: Dead Time Value for OC1A Output
The dead time value for the OC1A output. The dead time delay is set as a number of the prescaled timer/counter
clocks. The minimum dead time is zero and the maximum dead time is the prescaled time/counter clock period
multiplied by 15.
• Bits 3:0 – DT1AL[3:0]: Dead Time Value for OC1A Output
The dead time value for the OC1A output. The dead time delay is set as a number of the prescaled timer/counter
clocks. The minimum dead time is zero and the maximum dead time is the prescaled time/counter clock period
multiplied by 15.
14.1.3 DT1B – Timer/Counter1 Dead Time B
The dead time value register Bis an 8-bit read/write register.
The dead time delay of is adjusted by the dead time value register, DT1B. The register consists of two fields,
DT1BH[3:0] and DT1BL[3:0], one for each complementary output. Therefore a different dead time delay can be
adjusted for the rising edge of OC1A and the rising edge of OC1A.
• Bits 7:4 – DT1BH[3:0]: Dead Time Value for OC1B Output
The dead time value for the OC1B output. The dead time delay is set as a number of the prescaled timer/counter
clocks. The minimum dead time is zero and the maximum dead time is the prescaled time/counter clock period
multiplied by 15.
• Bits 3:0 – DT1BL[3:0]: Dead Time Value for OC1B Output
The dead time value for the OC1B output. The dead time delay is set as a number of the prescaled timer/counter
clocks. The minimum dead time is zero and the maximum dead time is the prescaled time/counter clock period
multiplied by 15.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x25 DT1AH3 DT1AH2 DT1AH1 DT1AH0 DT1AL3 DT1AL2 DT1AL1 DT1AL0 DT1A
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x24 DT1BH3 DT1BH2 DT1BH1 DT1BH0 DT1BL3 DT1BL2 DT1BL1 DT1BL0 DT1B
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 108
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
15. USI – Universal Serial Interface
15.1 Features
• Two-wire Synchronous Data Transfer (Master or Slave)
• Three-wire Synchronous Data Transfer (Master or Slave)
• Data Received Interrupt
• Wakeup from Idle Mode
• Wake-up from All Sleep Modes In Two-wire Mode
• Two-wire Start Condition Detector with Interrupt Capability
15.2 Overview
The Universal Serial Interface (USI), provides the basic hardware resources needed for serial communication.
Combined with a minimum of control software, the USI allows significantly higher transfer rates and uses less code
space than solutions based on software only. Interrupts are included to minimize the processor load.
A simplified block diagram of the USI is shown in Figure 15-1 For actual placement of I/O pins refer to “Pinout
ATtiny25/45/85” on page 2. Device-specific I/O Register and bit locations are listed in the “Register Descriptions”
on page 115.
Figure 15-1. Universal Serial Interface, Block Diagram
The 8-bit USI Data Register (USIDR) contains the incoming and outgoing data. It is directly accessible via the data
bus but a copy of the contents is also placed in the USI Buffer Register (USIBR) where it can be retrieved later. If
reading the USI Data Register directly, the register must be read as quickly as possible to ensure that no data is
lost.
The most significant bit of the USI Data Register is connected to one of two output pins (depending on the mode
configuration, see “USICR – USI Control Register” on page 116). There is a transparent latch between the output
of the USI Data Register and the output pin, which delays the change of data output to the opposite clock edge of
the data input sampling. The serial input is always sampled from the Data Input (DI) pin independent of the
configuration. DATA BUS
USIPF
USICS1
USICS0
USICLK
USITC
USIOIF USIOIE
USISIF
USIDC
USISIE Bit7
USIWM1
USIWM0
Two-wire
Clock
Control Unit
DO (Output only)
DI/SDA (Input/Open Drain)
USCK/SCL (Input/Open Drain)
4-bit Counter
USIDR
USISR
D Q
LE
USICR
CLOCK
HOLD
TIM0 COMP
Bit0
[1]
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
0
1
2
USIBRATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 109
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
The 4-bit counter can be both read and written via the data bus, and it can generate an overflow interrupt. Both the
USI Data Register and the counter are clocked simultaneously by the same clock source. This allows the counter
to count the number of bits received or transmitted and generate an interrupt when the transfer is complete. Note
that when an external clock source is selected the counter counts both clock edges. This means the counter registers
the number of clock edges and not the number of data bits. The clock can be selected from three different
sources: The USCK pin, Timer/Counter0 Compare Match or from software.
The two-wire clock control unit can be configured to generate an interrupt when a start condition has been detected
on the two-wire bus. It can also be set to generate wait states by holding the clock pin low after a start condition is
detected, or after the counter overflows.
15.3 Functional Descriptions
15.3.1 Three-wire Mode
The USI three-wire mode is compliant to the Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) mode 0 and 1, but does not have the
slave select (SS) pin functionality. However, this feature can be implemented in software, if required. Pin names
used in this mode are DI, DO, and USCK.
Figure 15-2. Three-wire Mode Operation, Simplified Diagram
Figure 15-2 shows two USI units operating in three-wire mode, one as Master and one as Slave. The two USI Data
Registers are interconnected in such way that after eight USCK clocks, the data in each register has been interchanged.
The same clock also increments the USI’s 4-bit counter. The Counter Overflow (interrupt) Flag, or
USIOIF, can therefore be used to determine when a transfer is completed. The clock is generated by the Master
device software by toggling the USCK pin via the PORTB register or by writing a one to bit USITC bit in USICR.
SLAVE
MASTER
Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
DO
DI
USCK
Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
DO
DI
USCK
PORTxnATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 110
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Figure 15-3. Three-Wire Mode, Timing Diagram
The three-wire mode timing is shown in Figure 15-3 At the top of the figure is a USCK cycle reference. One bit is
shifted into the USI Data Register (USIDR) for each of these cycles. The USCK timing is shown for both external
clock modes. In external clock mode 0 (USICS0 = 0), DI is sampled at positive edges, and DO is changed (USI
Data Register is shifted by one) at negative edges. In external clock mode 1 (USICS0 = 1) the opposite edges with
respect to mode 0 are used. In other words, data is sampled at negative and changes the output at positive edges.
The USI clock modes corresponds to the SPI data mode 0 and 1.
Referring to the timing diagram (Figure 15-3), a bus transfer involves the following steps:
1. The slave and master devices set up their data outputs and, depending on the protocol used, enable their
output drivers (mark A and B). The output is set up by writing the data to be transmitted to the USI Data
Register. The output is enabled by setting the corresponding bit in the Data Direction Register of Port B.
Note that there is not a preferred order of points A and B in the figure, but both must be at least one half
USCK cycle before point C, where the data is sampled. This is in order to ensure that the data setup
requirement is satisfied. The 4-bit counter is reset to zero.
2. The master software generates a clock pulse by toggling the USCK line twice (C and D). The bit values on
the data input (DI) pins are sampled by the USI on the first edge (C), and the data output is changed on
the opposite edge (D). The 4-bit counter will count both edges.
3. Step 2. is repeated eight times for a complete register (byte) transfer.
4. After eight clock pulses (i.e., 16 clock edges) the counter will overflow and indicate that the transfer has
been completed. If USI Buffer Registers are not used the data bytes that have been transferred must now
be processed before a new transfer can be initiated. The overflow interrupt will wake up the processor if it
is set to Idle mode. Depending of the protocol used the slave device can now set its output to high
impedance.
15.3.2 SPI Master Operation Example
The following code demonstrates how to use the USI as an SPI Master:
SPITransfer:
out USIDR,r16
ldi r16,(1< 2 CPU clock cycles for fck < 12 MHz, 3 CPU clock cycles for fck >= 12 MHz
High: > 2 CPU clock cycles for fck < 12 MHz, 3 CPU clock cycles for fck >= 12 MHz
20.5.1 Serial Programming Algorithm
When writing serial data to the ATtiny25/45/85, data is clocked on the rising edge of SCK.
When reading data from the ATtiny25/45/85, data is clocked on the falling edge of SCK. See Figure 21-4 and Figure
21-5 for timing details.
Table 20-10. Pin Mapping Serial Programming
Symbol Pins I/O Description
MOSI PB0 I Serial Data in
MISO PB1 O Serial Data out
SCK PB2 I Serial Clock
VCC
GND
SCK
MISO
MOSI
RESET
+1.8 - 5.5VATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 152
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
To program and verify the ATtiny25/45/85 in the Serial Programming mode, the following sequence is recommended
(see four byte instruction formats in Table 20-12):
1. Power-up sequence: apply power between VCC and GND while RESET and SCK are set to “0”
– In some systems, the programmer can not guarantee that SCK is held low during power-up. In this
case, RESET must be given a positive pulse after SCK has been set to '0'. The duration of the pulse
must be at least tRST plus two CPU clock cycles. See Table 21-4 on page 165 for minimum pulse width
on RESET pin, tRST
2. Wait for at least 20 ms and enable serial programming by sending the Programming Enable serial instruction
to pin MOSI.
3. The serial programming instructions will not work if the communication is out of synchronization. When in
sync. the second byte (0x53), will echo back when issuing the third byte of the Programming Enable
instruction. Whether the echo is correct or not, all four bytes of the instruction must be transmitted. If the
0x53 did not echo back, give RESET a positive pulse and issue a new Programming Enable command.
4. The Flash is programmed one page at a time. The memory page is loaded one byte at a time by supplying
the 5 LSB of the address and data together with the Load Program memory Page instruction. To ensure
correct loading of the page, the data low byte must be loaded before data high byte is applied for a given
address. The Program memory Page is stored by loading the Write Program memory Page instruction
with the 6 MSB of the address. If polling (RDY/BSY) is not used, the user must wait at least tWD_FLASH
before issuing the next page. (See Table 20-11.) Accessing the serial programming interface before the
Flash write operation completes can result in incorrect programming.
5. A: The EEPROM array is programmed one byte at a time by supplying the address and data together with
the appropriate Write instruction. An EEPROM memory location is first automatically erased before new
data is written. If polling (RDY/BSY) is not used, the user must wait at least tWD_EEPROM before issuing the
next byte. (See Table 20-11.) In a chip erased device, no 0xFFs in the data file(s) need to be programmed.
B: The EEPROM array is programmed one page at a time. The Memory page is loaded one byte at a time
by supplying the 2 LSB of the address and data together with the Load EEPROM Memory Page instruction.
The EEPROM Memory Page is stored by loading the Write EEPROM Memory Page Instruction with
the 6 MSB of the address. When using EEPROM page access only byte locations loaded with the Load
EEPROM Memory Page instruction is altered. The remaining locations remain unchanged. If polling
(RDY/BSY) is not used, the used must wait at least tWD_EEPROM before issuing the next page (See Table
20-9). In a chip erased device, no 0xFF in the data file(s) need to be programmed.
6. Any memory location can be verified by using the Read instruction which returns the content at the
selected address at serial output MISO.
7. At the end of the programming session, RESET can be set high to commence normal operation.
8. Power-off sequence (if needed):
Set RESET to “1”.
Turn VCC power off.ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 153
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
20.5.2 Serial Programming Instruction set
Table 20-12 on page 153 and Figure 20-2 on page 154 describes the Instruction set.
Notes: 1. Not all instructions are applicable for all parts.
Table 20-11. Minimum Wait Delay Before Writing the Next Flash or EEPROM Location
Symbol Minimum Wait Delay
tWD_FLASH 4.5 ms
tWD_EEPROM 4.0 ms
tWD_ERASE 9.0 ms
tWD_FUSE 4.5 ms
Table 20-12. Serial Programming Instruction Set
Instruction/Operation
Instruction Format
Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte4
Programming Enable $AC $53 $00 $00
Chip Erase (Program Memory/EEPROM) $AC $80 $00 $00
Poll RDY/BSY $F0 $00 $00 data byte out
Load Instructions
Load Extended Address byte(1) $4D $00 Extended adr $00
Load Program Memory Page, High byte $48 adr MSB adr LSB high data byte in
Load Program Memory Page, Low byte $40 adr MSB adr LSB low data byte in
Load EEPROM Memory Page (page access) $C1 $00 0000 000aa data byte in
Read Instructions
Read Program Memory, High byte $28 adr MSB adr LSB high data byte out
Read Program Memory, Low byte $20 adr MSB adr LSB low data byte out
Read EEPROM Memory $A0 $00 00aa aaaa data byte out
Read Lock bits $58 $00 $00 data byte out
Read Signature Byte $30 $00 0000 000aa data byte out
Read Fuse bits $50 $00 $00 data byte out
Read Fuse High bits $58 $08 $00 data byte out
Read Extended Fuse Bits $50 $08 $00 data byte out
Read Calibration Byte $38 $00 $00 data byte out
Write Instructions(6)
Write Program Memory Page $4C adr MSB adr LSB $00
Write EEPROM Memory $C0 $00 00aa aaaa data byte in
Write EEPROM Memory Page (page access) $C2 $00 00aa aa00 $00
Write Lock bits $AC $E0 $00 data byte in
Write Fuse bits $AC $A0 $00 data byte in
Write Fuse High bits $AC $A8 $00 data byte in
Write Extended Fuse Bits $AC $A4 $00 data byte inATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 154
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
2. a = address
3. Bits are programmed ‘0’, unprogrammed ‘1’.
4. To ensure future compatibility, unused Fuses and Lock bits should be unprogrammed (‘1’) .
5. Refer to the correspondig section for Fuse and Lock bits, Calibration and Signature bytes and Page size.
6. Instructions accessing program memory use a word address. This address may be random within the page range.
7. See htt://www.atmel.com/avr for Application Notes regarding programming and programmers.
If the LSB in RDY/BSY data byte out is ‘1’, a programming operation is still pending. Wait until this bit returns ‘0’
before the next instruction is carried out.
Within the same page, the low data byte must be loaded prior to the high data byte.
After data is loaded to the page buffer, program the EEPROM page, see Figure 20-2 on page 154.
Figure 20-2. Serial Programming Instruction example
Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4
Adr MSB Adr LSB
Bit 15 B 0
Serial Programming Instruction
Program Memory/
EEPROM Memory
Page 0
Page 1
Page 2
Page N-1
Page Buffer
Write Program Memory Page/
Write EEPROM Memory Page
Load Program Memory Page (High/Low Byte)/
Load EEPROM Memory Page (page access)
Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4
Bit 15 B 0
Adr MSB Adr LSB
Page Offset
Page Number
Adr MSB Adr LSBATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 155
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
20.6 High-voltage Serial Programming
This section describes how to program and verify Flash Program memory, EEPROM Data memory, Lock bits and
Fuse bits in the ATtiny25/45/85.
Figure 20-3. High-voltage Serial Programming
The minimum period for the Serial Clock Input (SCI) during High-voltage Serial Programming is 220 ns.
20.7 High-voltage Serial Programming Algorithm
To program and verify the ATtiny25/45/85 in the High-voltage Serial Programming mode, the following sequence is
recommended (See instruction formats in Table 20-16):
Table 20-13. Pin Name Mapping
Signal Name in High-voltage
Serial Programming Mode Pin Name I/O Function
SDI PB0 I Serial Data Input
SII PB1 I Serial Instruction Input
SDO PB2 O Serial Data Output
SCI PB3 I Serial Clock Input (min. 220ns period)
Table 20-14. Pin Values Used to Enter Programming Mode
Pin Symbol Value
SDI Prog_enable[0] 0
SII Prog_enable[1] 0
SDO Prog_enable[2] 0
VCC
GND
SDO
SII
SDI
(RESET)
+4.5 - 5.5V
PB0
PB1
PB2
PB5
+11.5 - 12.5V
SCI PB3ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 156
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
20.7.1 Enter High-voltage Serial Programming Mode
The following algorithm puts the device in High-voltage Serial Programming mode:
1. Set Prog_enable pins listed in Table 20-14 to “000”, RESET pin and VCC to 0V.
2. Apply 4.5 - 5.5V between VCC and GND. Ensure that VCC reaches at least 1.8V within the next 20 µs.
3. Wait 20 - 60 µs, and apply 11.5 - 12.5V to RESET.
4. Keep the Prog_enable pins unchanged for at least 10 µs after the High-voltage has been applied to
ensure the Prog_enable Signature has been latched.
5. Release the Prog_enable[2] pin to avoid drive contention on the Prog_enable[2]/SDO pin.
6. Wait at least 300 µs before giving any serial instructions on SDI/SII.
7. Exit Programming mode by power the device down or by bringing RESET pin to 0V.
If the rise time of the VCC is unable to fulfill the requirements listed above, the following alternative algorithm can be
used:
1. Set Prog_enable pins listed in Table 20-14 to “000”, RESET pin and VCC to 0V.
2. Apply 4.5 - 5.5V between VCC and GND.
3. Monitor VCC, and as soon as VCC reaches 0.9 - 1.1V, apply 11.5 - 12.5V to RESET.
4. Keep the Prog_enable pins unchanged for at least 10 µs after the High-voltage has been applied to
ensure the Prog_enable Signature has been latched.
5. Release the Prog_enable[2] pin to avoid drive contention on the Prog_enable[2]/SDO pin.
6. Wait until VCC actually reaches 4.5 - 5.5V before giving any serial instructions on SDI/SII.
7. Exit Programming mode by power the device down or by bringing RESET pin to 0V.
20.7.2 Considerations for Efficient Programming
The loaded command and address are retained in the device during programming. For efficient programming, the
following should be considered.
• The command needs only be loaded once when writing or reading multiple memory locations.
• Skip writing the data value 0xFF that is the contents of the entire EEPROM (unless the EESAVE Fuse is
programmed) and Flash after a Chip Erase.
• Address High byte needs only be loaded before programming or reading a new 256 word window in Flash or
256 byte EEPROM. This consideration also applies to Signature bytes reading.
20.7.3 Chip Erase
The Chip Erase will erase the Flash and EEPROM(1) memories plus Lock bits. The Lock bits are not reset until the
Program memory has been completely erased. The Fuse bits are not changed. A Chip Erase must be performed
before the Flash and/or EEPROM are re-programmed.
Note: 1. The EEPROM memory is preserved during Chip Erase if the EESAVE Fuse is programmed.
Table 20-15. High-voltage Reset Characteristics
Supply Voltage RESET Pin High-voltage Threshold
Minimum High-voltage Period for
Latching Prog_enable
VCC VHVRST tHVRST
4.5V 11.5V 100 ns
5.5V 11.5V 100 nsATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 157
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
1. Load command “Chip Erase” (see Table 20-16).
2. Wait after Instr. 3 until SDO goes high for the “Chip Erase” cycle to finish.
3. Load Command “No Operation”.
20.7.4 Programming the Flash
The Flash is organized in pages, see Table 20-12 on page 153. When programming the Flash, the program data is
latched into a page buffer. This allows one page of program data to be programmed simultaneously. The following
procedure describes how to program the entire Flash memory:
1. Load Command “Write Flash” (see Table 20-16).
2. Load Flash Page Buffer.
3. Load Flash High Address and Program Page. Wait after Instr. 3 until SDO goes high for the “Page Programming”
cycle to finish.
4. Repeat 2 through 3 until the entire Flash is programmed or until all data has been programmed.
5. End Page Programming by Loading Command “No Operation”.
When writing or reading serial data to the ATtiny25/45/85, data is clocked on the rising edge of the serial clock, see
Figure 20-5, Figure 21-6 and Table 21-12 for details.
Figure 20-4. Addressing the Flash which is Organized in Pages
Figure 20-5. High-voltage Serial Programming Waveforms
PROGRAM MEMORY
WORD ADDRESS
WITHIN A PAGE
PAGE ADDRESS
WITHIN THE FLASH
INSTRUCTION WORD
PAGE PCWORD[PAGEMSB:0]:
00
01
02
PAGEEND
PAGE
PCPAGE PCWORD
PCMSB PAGEMSB
PROGRAM
COUNTER
MSB
MSB
MSB LSB
LSB
LSB
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SDI
PB0
SII
PB1
SDO
PB2
SCI
PB3ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 158
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
20.7.5 Programming the EEPROM
The EEPROM is organized in pages, see Table 21-11 on page 170. When programming the EEPROM, the data is
latched into a page buffer. This allows one page of data to be programmed simultaneously. The programming algorithm
for the EEPROM Data memory is as follows (refer to Table 20-16):
1. Load Command “Write EEPROM”.
2. Load EEPROM Page Buffer.
3. Program EEPROM Page. Wait after Instr. 2 until SDO goes high for the “Page Programming” cycle to
finish.
4. Repeat 2 through 3 until the entire EEPROM is programmed or until all data has been programmed.
5. End Page Programming by Loading Command “No Operation”.
20.7.6 Reading the Flash
The algorithm for reading the Flash memory is as follows (refer to Table 20-16):
1. Load Command "Read Flash".
2. Read Flash Low and High Bytes. The contents at the selected address are available at serial output SDO.
20.7.7 Reading the EEPROM
The algorithm for reading the EEPROM memory is as follows (refer to Table 20-16):
1. Load Command “Read EEPROM”.
2. Read EEPROM Byte. The contents at the selected address are available at serial output SDO.
20.7.8 Programming and Reading the Fuse and Lock Bits
The algorithms for programming and reading the Fuse Low/High bits and Lock bits are shown in Table 20-16.
20.7.9 Reading the Signature Bytes and Calibration Byte
The algorithms for reading the Signature bytes and Calibration byte are shown in Table 20-16.
20.7.10 Power-off sequence
Set SCI to “0”. Set RESET to “1”. Turn VCC power off.
Table 20-16. High-voltage Serial Programming Instruction Set for ATtiny25/45/85
Instruction
Instruction Format
Instr.1/5 Instr.2/6 Instr.3 Instr.4 Operation Remarks
Chip Erase
SDI
SII
SDO
0_1000_0000_00
0_0100_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_0100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
Wait after Instr.3 until SDO
goes high for the Chip Erase
cycle to finish.
Load “Write
Flash”
Command
SDI
SII
SDO
0_0001_0000_00
0_0100_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
Enter Flash Programming
code.
Load Flash
Page Buffer
SDI
SII
SDO
0_bbbb_bbbb _00
0_0000_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_eeee_eeee_00
0_0010_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_dddd_dddd_00
0_0011_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0111_1101_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
Repeat after Instr. 1 - 5 until
the entire page buffer is filled
or until all data within the
page is filled.(2)
SDI
SII
SDO
0_0000_0000_00
0_0111_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
Instr 5.ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 159
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Load Flash
High Address
and Program
Page
SDI
SII
SDO
0_0000_000a_00
0_0001_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_0100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
Wait after Instr 3 until SDO
goes high. Repeat Instr. 2 - 3
for each loaded Flash Page
until the entire Flash or all
data is programmed. Repeat
Instr. 1 for a new 256 byte
page.(2)
Load “Read
Flash”
Command
SDI
SII
SDO
0_0000_0010_00
0_0100_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
Enter Flash Read mode.
Read Flash
Low and High
Bytes
SDI
SII
SDO
0_bbbb_bbbb_00
0_0000_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_000a_00
0_0001_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_1000_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_1100_00
q_qqqq_qqqx_xx
Repeat Instr. 1, 3 - 6 for each
new address. Repeat Instr. 2
for a new 256 byte page.
SDI
SII
SDO
0_0000_0000_00
0_0111_1000_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0111_1100_00
p_pppp_pppx_xx
Instr 5 - 6.
Load “Write
EEPROM”
Command
SDI
SII
SDO
0_0001_0001_00
0_0100_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
Enter EEPROM Programming
mode.
Load
EEPROM
Page Buffer
SDI
SII
SDO
0_00bb_bbbb_00
0_0000_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_aaaa_aaaa_00
0_0001_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_eeee_eeee_00
0_0010_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_1101_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
Repeat Instr. 1 - 5 until the
entire page buffer is filled or
until all data within the page is
filled.(3)
SDI
SII
SDO
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
Instr. 5
Program
EEPROM
Page
SDI
SII
SDO
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_0100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
Wait after Instr. 2 until SDO
goes high. Repeat Instr. 1 - 2
for each loaded EEPROM
page until the entire
EEPROM or all data is
programmed.
Write
EEPROM
Byte
SDI
SII
SDO
0_bbbb_bbbb_00
0_0000_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_aaaa_aaaa_00
0_0001_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_eeee_eeee_00
0_0010_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_1101_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
Repeat Instr. 1 - 6 for each
new address. Wait after Instr.
6 until SDO goes high.(4)
SDI
SII
SDO
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_0100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
Instr. 6
Load “Read
EEPROM”
Command
SDI
SII
SDO
0_0000_0011_00
0_0100_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
Enter EEPROM Read mode.
Read
EEPROM
Byte
SDI
SII
SDO
0_bbbb_bbbb_00
0_0000_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_aaaa_aaaa_00
0_0001_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_1000_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_1100_00
q_qqqq_qqq0_00
Repeat Instr. 1, 3 - 4 for each
new address. Repeat Instr. 2
for a new 256 byte page.
Write Fuse
Low Bits
SDI
SII
SDO
0_0100_0000_00
0_0100_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_A987_6543_00
0_0010_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_0100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
Wait after Instr. 4 until SDO
goes high. Write A - 3 = “0” to
program the Fuse bit.
Table 20-16. High-voltage Serial Programming Instruction Set for ATtiny25/45/85 (Continued)
Instruction
Instruction Format
Instr.1/5 Instr.2/6 Instr.3 Instr.4 Operation RemarksATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 160
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Notes: 1. a = address high bits, b = address low bits, d = data in high bits, e = data in low bits, p = data out high bits, q = data out low
bits, x = don’t care, 1 = Lock Bit1, 2 = Lock Bit2, 3 = CKSEL0 Fuse, 4 = CKSEL1 Fuse, 5 = CKSEL2 Fuse, 6 = CKSEL3
Fuse, 7 = SUT0 Fuse, 8 = SUT1 Fuse, 9 = CKOUT Fuse, A = CKDIV8 Fuse, B = BODLEVEL0 Fuse, C = BODLEVEL1
Fuse, D = BODLEVEL2 Fuse, E = EESAVE Fuse, F = WDTON Fuse, G = SPIEN Fuse, H = DWEN Fuse, I = RSTDISBL
Fuse, J = SELFPRGEN Fuse
2. For page sizes less than 256 words, parts of the address (bbbb_bbbb) will be parts of the page address.
3. For page sizes less than 256 bytes, parts of the address (bbbb_bbbb) will be parts of the page address.
4. The EEPROM is written page-wise. But only the bytes that are loaded into the page are actually written to the EEPROM.
Page-wise EEPROM access is more efficient when multiple bytes are to be written to the same page. Note that auto-erase
of EEPROM is not available in High-voltage Serial Programming, only in SPI Programming.
Write Fuse
High Bits
SDI
SII
SDO
0_0100_0000_00
0_0100_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_IHGF_EDCB_00
0_0010_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0111_0100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0111_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
Wait after Instr. 4 until SDO
goes high. Write I - B = “0” to
program the Fuse bit.
Write Fuse
Extended Bits
SDI
SII
SDO
0_0100_0000_00
0_0100_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_000J_00
0_0010_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_0110_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_1110_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
Wait after Instr. 4 until SDO
goes high. Write J = “0” to
program the Fuse bit.
Write Lock
Bits
SDI
SII
SDO
0_0010_0000_00
0_0100_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0021_00
0_0010_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_0100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
Wait after Instr. 4 until SDO
goes high. Write 2 - 1 = “0” to
program the Lock bit.
Read Fuse
Low Bits
SDI
SII
SDO
0_0000_0100_00
0_0100_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_1000_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_1100_00
A_9876_543x_xx
Reading A - 3 = “0” means
the Fuse bit is programmed.
Read Fuse
High Bits
SDI
SII
SDO
0_0000_0100_00
0_0100_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0111_1010_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0111_1110_00
I_HGFE_DCBx_xx
Reading I - B = “0” means the
Fuse bit is programmed.
Read Fuse
Extended Bits
SDI
SII
SDO
0_0000_0100_00
0_0100_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_1010_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_1110_00
x_xxxx_xxJx_xx
Reading J = “0” means the
Fuse bit is programmed.
Read Lock
Bits
SDI
SII
SDO
0_0000_0100_00
0_0100_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0111_1000_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0111_1100_00
x_xxxx_x21x_xx
Reading 2, 1 = “0” means the
Lock bit is programmed.
Read
Signature
Bytes
SDI
SII
SDO
0_0000_1000_00
0_0100_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_00bb_00
0_0000_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_1000_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0110_1100_00
q_qqqq_qqqx_xx
Repeats Instr 2 4 for each
signature byte address.
Read
Calibration
Byte
SDI
SII
SDO
0_0000_1000_00
0_0100_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0000_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0111_1000_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
0_0000_0000_00
0_0111_1100_00
p_pppp_pppx_xx
Load “No
Operation”
Command
SDI
SII
SDO
0_0000_0000_00
0_0100_1100_00
x_xxxx_xxxx_xx
Table 20-16. High-voltage Serial Programming Instruction Set for ATtiny25/45/85 (Continued)
Instruction
Instruction Format
Instr.1/5 Instr.2/6 Instr.3 Instr.4 Operation RemarksATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 161
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
21. Electrical Characteristics
21.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings*
21.2 DC Characteristics
Operating Temperature.................................. -55C to +125C *NOTICE: Stresses beyond those listed under “Absolute
Maximum Ratings” may cause permanent damage
to the device. This is a stress rating only and
functional operation of the device at these or
other conditions beyond those indicated in the
operational sections of this specification is not
implied. Exposure to absolute maximum rating
conditions for extended periods may affect
device reliability.
Storage Temperature ..................................... -65°C to +150°C
Voltage on any Pin except RESET
with respect to Ground ................................-0.5V to VCC+0.5V
Voltage on RESET with respect to Ground......-0.5V to +13.0V
Maximum Operating Voltage ............................................ 6.0V
DC Current per I/O Pin ............................................... 40.0 mA
DC Current VCC and GND Pins................................ 200.0 mA
Table 21-1. DC Characteristics. TA = -40C to +85C
Symbol Parameter Condition Min. Typ.(1) Max. Units
VIL
Input Low-voltage, except
XTAL1 and RESET pin
VCC = 1.8V - 2.4V
VCC = 2.4V - 5.5V
-0.5
-0.5
0.2VCC(3)
0.3VCC(3)
V
V
VIH
Input High-voltage, except
XTAL1 and RESET pin
VCC = 1.8V - 2.4V
VCC = 2.4V - 5.5V
0.7VCC(2)
0.6VCC(2)
VCC +0.5
VCC +0.5
V
V
VIL1
Input Low-voltage, XTAL1 pin,
External Clock Selected VCC = 1.8V - 5.5V -0.5 0.1VCC(3) V
VIH1
Input High-voltage, XTAL1 pin,
External Clock Selected
VCC = 1.8V - 2.4V
VCC = 2.4V - 5.5V
0.8VCC(2)
0.7VCC(2)
VCC +0.5
VCC +0.5
V
V
VIL2
Input Low-voltage,
RESET pin VCC = 1.8V - 5.5V -0.5 0.2VCC(3) V
V
VIH2
Input High-voltage,
RESET pin VCC = 1.8V - 5.5V 0.9VCC(2) VCC +0.5 V
VIL3
Input Low-voltage,
RESET pin as I/O
VCC = 1.8V - 2.4V
VCC = 2.4V - 5.5V
-0.5
-0.5
0.2VCC(3)
0.3VCC(3)
V
V
VIH3
Input High-voltage,
RESET pin as I/O
VCC = 1.8V - 2.4V
VCC = 2.4V - 5.5V
0.7VCC(2)
0.6VCC(2)
VCC +0.5
VCC +0.5
V
V
VOL
Output Low-voltage,(4)
Port B (except RESET) (6)
IOL = 10 mA, VCC = 5V
IOL = 5 mA, VCC = 3V
0.6
0.5
V
V
VOH
Output High-voltage, (5)
Port B (except RESET) (6)
IOH = -10 mA, VCC = 5V
IOH = -5 mA, VCC = 3V
4.3
2.5
V
V
IIL
Input Leakage
Current I/O Pin
VCC = 5.5V, pin low
(absolute value) < 0.05 1 µA
IIH
Input Leakage
Current I/O Pin
VCC = 5.5V, pin high
(absolute value) < 0.05 1 µA
RRST Reset Pull-up Resistor VCC = 5.5V, input low 30 60 kATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 162
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Notes: 1. Typical values at 25C.
2. “Min” means the lowest value where the pin is guaranteed to be read as high.
3. “Max” means the highest value where the pin is guaranteed to be read as low.
4. Although each I/O port can sink more than the test conditions (10 mA at VCC = 5V, 5 mA at VCC = 3V) under steady state
conditions (non-transient), the following must be observed:
1] The sum of all IOL, for all ports, should not exceed 60 mA.
If IOL exceeds the test condition, VOL may exceed the related specification. Pins are not guaranteed to sink current greater
than the listed test condition.
5. Although each I/O port can source more than the test conditions (10 mA at VCC = 5V, 5 mA at VCC = 3V) under steady state
conditions (non-transient), the following must be observed:
1] The sum of all IOH, for all ports, should not exceed 60 mA.
If IOH exceeds the test condition, VOH may exceed the related specification. Pins are not guaranteed to source current
greater than the listed test condition.
6. The RESET pin must tolerate high voltages when entering and operating in programming modes and, as a consequence,
has a weak drive strength as compared to regular I/O pins. See Figure 22-23, Figure 22-24, Figure 22-25, and Figure 22-26
(starting on page 184).
7. Values are with external clock using methods described in “Minimizing Power Consumption” on page 36. Power Reduction
is enabled (PRR = 0xFF) and there is no I/O drive.
8. Brown-Out Detection (BOD) disabled.
Rpu I/O Pin Pull-up Resistor VCC = 5.5V, input low 20 50 k
ICC
Power Supply Current (7)
Active 1 MHz, VCC = 2V 0.3 0.55 mA
Active 4 MHz, VCC = 3V 1.5 2.5 mA
Active 8 MHz, VCC = 5V 5 8 mA
Idle 1 MHz, VCC = 2V 0.1 0.2 mA
Idle 4 MHz, VCC = 3V 0.35 0.6 mA
Idle 8 MHz, VCC = 5V 1.2 2 mA
Power-down mode (8) WDT enabled, VCC = 3V 10 µA
WDT disabled, VCC = 3V 2 µA
Table 21-1. DC Characteristics. TA = -40C to +85C (Continued)
Symbol Parameter Condition Min. Typ.(1) Max. UnitsATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 163
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
21.3 Speed
Figure 21-1. Maximum Frequency vs. VCC
Figure 21-2. Maximum Frequency vs. VCC
10 MHz
4 MHz
1.8V 2.7V 5.5V
Safe Operating Area
20 MHz
10 MHz
2.7V 4.5V 5.5V
Safe Operating AreaATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 164
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
21.4 Clock Characteristics
21.4.1 Calibrated Internal RC Oscillator Accuracy
It is possible to manually calibrate the internal oscillator to be more accurate than default factory calibration. Please
note that the oscillator frequency depends on temperature and voltage. Voltage and temperature characteristics
can be found in Figure 22-40 on page 193 and Figure 22-41 on page 193.
Notes: 1. Accuracy of oscillator frequency at calibration point (fixed temperature and fixed voltage).
2. ATtiny25/V, only: 6.4 MHz in ATtiny15 Compatibility Mode.
3. Voltage range for ATtiny25V/45V/85V.
4. Voltage range for ATtiny25/45/85.
21.4.2 External Clock Drive
Figure 21-3. External Clock Drive Waveforms
Table 21-2. Calibration Accuracy of Internal RC Oscillator
Calibration
Method Target Frequency VCC Temperature
Accuracy at given Voltage
& Temperature (1)
Factory
Calibration 8.0 MHz (2) 3V 25C ±10%
User
Calibration
Fixed frequency within:
6 – 8 MHz
Fixed voltage within:
1.8V - 5.5V (3)
2.7V - 5.5V (4)
Fixed temperature
within:
-40C to +85C
±1%
VIL1
VIH1
Table 21-3. External Clock Drive Characteristics
Symbol Parameter
VCC = 1.8 - 5.5V VCC = 2.7 - 5.5V VCC = 4.5 - 5.5V
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Units
1/tCLCL Clock Frequency 0 4 0 10 0 20 MHz
tCLCL Clock Period 250 100 50 ns
tCHCX High Time 100 40 20 ns
tCLCX Low Time 100 40 20 ns
tCLCH Rise Time 2.0 1.6 0.5 µs
tCHCL Fall Time 2.0 1.6 0.5 µs
t
CLCL Change in period from one clock cycle to the next 2 2 2 %ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 165
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
21.5 System and Reset Characteristics
Note: 1. Values are guidelines only.
Two versions of power-on reset have been implemented, as follows.
21.5.1 Standard Power-On Reset
This implementation of power-on reset existed in early versions of ATtiny25/45/85. The table below describes the
characteristics of this power-on reset and it is valid for the following devices, only:
• ATtiny25, revision D, and older
• ATtiny45, revision F, and older
• ATtiny85, revision B, and newer
Note: Revisions are marked on the package (packages 8P3 and 8S2: bottom, package 20M1: top)
Note: 1. Values are guidelines, only
2. Threshold where device is released from reset when voltage is rising
3. The power-on reset will not work unless the supply voltage has been below VPOA
21.5.2 Enhanced Power-On Reset
This implementation of power-on reset exists in newer versions of ATtiny25/45/85. The table below describes the
characteristics of this power-on reset and it is valid for the following devices, only:
• ATtiny25, revision E, and newer
Table 21-4. Reset, Brown-out and Internal Voltage Characteristics
Symbol Parameter Condition Min(1) Typ(1) Max(1) Units
VRST RESET Pin Threshold Voltage VCC = 3V 0.2 VCC 0.9 VCC V
tRST
Minimum pulse width on
RESET Pin VCC = 3V 2.5 µs
VHYST Brown-out Detector Hysteresis 50 mV
tBOD
Min Pulse Width on
Brown-out Reset 2 µs
VBG
Bandgap reference
voltage
VCC = 5.5V
TA = 25°C 1.0 1.1 1.2 V
tBG
Bandgap reference
start-up time
VCC = 2.7V
TA = 25°C 40 70 µs
IBG
Bandgap reference
current consumption
VCC = 2.7V
TA = 25°C 15 µA
Table 21-5. Characteristics of Standard Power-On Reset. TA = -40 to +85C
Symbol Parameter Min(1) Typ(1) Max(1) Units
VPOR Release threshold of power-on reset (2) 0.7 1.0 1.4 V
VPOA Activation threshold of power-on reset (3) 0.05 0.9 1.3 V
SRON Power-on slope rate 0.01 4.5 V/msATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 166
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
• ATtiny45, revision G, and newer
• ATtiny85, revision C, and newer
Note: 1. Values are guidelines, only
2. Threshold where device is released from reset when voltage is rising
3. The Power-on Reset will not work unless the supply voltage has been below VPOT (falling)
21.6 Brown-Out Detection
Note: 1. VBOT may be below nominal minimum operating voltage for some devices. For devices where this is the case, the
device is tested down to VCC = VBOT during the production test. This guarantees that a Brown-out Reset will occur
before VCC drops to a voltage where correct operation of the microcontroller is no longer guaranteed.
Table 21-6. Characteristics of Enhanced Power-On Reset. TA = -40C to +85C
Symbol Parameter Min(1) Typ(1) Max(1) Units
VPOR Release threshold of power-on reset (2) 1.1 1.4 1.6 V
VPOA Activation threshold of power-on reset (3) 0.6 1.3 1.6 V
SRON Power-On Slope Rate 0.01 V/ms
Table 21-7. BODLEVEL Fuse Coding. TA = -40C to +85C
BODLEVEL[2:0] Fuses Min(1) Typ(1) Max(1) Units
111 BOD Disabled
110 1.7 1.8 2.0
101 2.5 2.7 2.9 V
100 4.1 4.3 4.5
0XX ReservedATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 167
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
21.7 ADC Characteristics
Note: 1. Values are guidelines only.
Table 21-8. ADC Characteristics, Single Ended Channels. TA = -40C to +85C
Symbol Parameter Condition Min Typ Max Units
Resolution 10 Bits
Absolute accuracy
(Including INL, DNL, and
Quantization, Gain and
Offset errors)
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
ADC clock = 200 kHz 2 LSB
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
ADC clock = 1 MHz 3 LSB
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
ADC clock = 200 kHz
Noise Reduction Mode
1.5 LSB
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
ADC clock = 1 MHz
Noise Reduction Mode
2.5 LSB
Integral Non-linearity (INL)
(Accuracy after offset and gain
calibration)
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
ADC clock = 200 kHz 1 LSB
Differential Non-linearity (DNL) VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
ADC clock = 200 kHz 0.5 LSB
Gain Error VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
ADC clock = 200 kHz 2.5 LSB
Offset Error VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
ADC clock = 200 kHz 1.5 LSB
Conversion Time Free Running Conversion 14 280 µs
Clock Frequency 50 1000 kHz
VIN Input Voltage GND VREF V
Input Bandwidth 38.4 kHz
AREF External Reference Voltage 2.0 VCC V
VINT
Internal Voltage Reference 1.0 1.1 1.2 V
Internal 2.56V Reference (1) VCC > 3.0V 2.3 2.56 2.8 V
RREF 32 k
RAIN Analog Input Resistance 100 M
ADC Output 0 1023 LSBATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 168
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Note: 1. Values are guidelines only.
Table 21-9. ADC Characteristics, Differential Channels (Unipolar Mode). TA = -40C to +85C
Symbol Parameter Condition Min Typ Max Units
Resolution
Gain = 1x 10 Bits
Gain = 20x 10 Bits
Absolute accuracy
(Including INL, DNL, and
Quantization, Gain and Offset
Errors)
Gain = 1x
VREF = 4V, VCC = 5V
ADC clock = 50 - 200 kHz
10.0 LSB
Gain = 20x
VREF = 4V, VCC = 5V
ADC clock = 50 - 200 kHz
20.0 LSB
Integral Non-Linearity (INL)
(Accuracy after Offset and
Gain Calibration)
Gain = 1x
VREF = 4V, VCC = 5V
ADC clock = 50 - 200 kHz
4.0 LSB
Gain = 20x
VREF = 4V, VCC = 5V
ADC clock = 50 - 200 kHz
10.0 LSB
Gain Error
Gain = 1x 10.0 LSB
Gain = 20x 15.0 LSB
Offset Error
Gain = 1x
VREF = 4V, VCC = 5V
ADC clock = 50 - 200 kHz
3.0 LSB
Gain = 20x
VREF = 4V, VCC = 5V
ADC clock = 50 - 200 kHz
4.0 LSB
Conversion Time Free Running Conversion 70 280 µs
Clock Frequency 50 200 kHz
VIN Input Voltage GND VCC V
VDIFF Input Differential Voltage VREF/Gain V
Input Bandwidth 4 kHz
AREF External Reference Voltage 2.0 VCC - 1.0 V
VINT
Internal Voltage Reference 1.0 1.1 1.2 V
Internal 2.56V Reference (1) VCC > 3.0V 2.3 2.56 2.8 V
RREF Reference Input Resistance 32 k
RAIN Analog Input Resistance 100 M
ADC Conversion Output 0 1023 LSBATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 169
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Note: 1. Values are guidelines only.
Table 21-10. ADC Characteristics, Differential Channels (Bipolar Mode). TA = -40C to +85C
Symbol Parameter Condition Min Typ Max Units
Resolution
Gain = 1x 10 Bits
Gain = 20x 10 Bits
Absolute accuracy
(Including INL, DNL, and
Quantization, Gain and Offset
Errors)
Gain = 1x
VREF = 4V, VCC = 5V
ADC clock = 50 - 200 kHz
8.0 LSB
Gain = 20x
VREF = 4V, VCC = 5V
ADC clock = 50 - 200 kHz
8.0 LSB
Integral Non-Linearity (INL)
(Accuracy after Offset and
Gain Calibration)
Gain = 1x
VREF = 4V, VCC = 5V
ADC clock = 50 - 200 kHz
4.0 LSB
Gain = 20x
VREF = 4V, VCC = 5V
ADC clock = 50 - 200 kHz
5.0 LSB
Gain Error
Gain = 1x 4.0 LSB
Gain = 20x 5.0 LSB
Offset Error
Gain = 1x
VREF = 4V, VCC = 5V
ADC clock = 50 - 200 kHz
3.0 LSB
Gain = 20x
VREF = 4V, VCC = 5V
ADC clock = 50 - 200 kHz
4.0 LSB
Conversion Time Free Running Conversion 70 280 µs
Clock Frequency 50 200 kHz
VIN Input Voltage GND VCC V
VDIFF Input Differential Voltage VREF/Gain V
Input Bandwidth 4 kHz
AREF External Reference Voltage 2.0 VCC - 1.0 V
VINT
Internal Voltage Reference 1.0 1.1 1.2 V
Internal 2.56V Reference (1) VCC > 3.0V 2.3 2.56 2.8 V
RREF Reference Input Resistance 32 k
RAIN Analog Input Resistance 100 M
ADC Conversion Output -512 511 LSBATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 170
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
21.8 Serial Programming Characteristics
Figure 21-4. Serial Programming Waveforms
Figure 21-5. Serial Programming Timing
Note: 1. 2 tCLCL for fck < 12 MHz, 3 tCLCL for fck >= 12 MHz
Table 21-11. Serial Programming Characteristics, TA = -40C to +85C, VCC = 1.8 - 5.5V (Unless Otherwise
Noted)
Symbol Parameter Min Typ Max Units
1/tCLCL Oscillator Frequency (VCC = 1.8 - 5.5V) 0 4 MHz
tCLCL Oscillator Period (VCC = 1.8 - 5.5V) 250 ns
1/tCLCL Oscillator Frequency (VCC = 2.7 - 5.5V) 0 10 MHz
t
CLCL Oscillator Period (VCC = 2.7 - 5.5V) 100 ns
1/tCLCL Oscillator Frequency (VCC = 4.5V - 5.5V) 0 20 MHz
t
CLCL Oscillator Period (VCC = 4.5V - 5.5V) 50 ns
t
SHSL SCK Pulse Width High 2 tCLCL* ns
t
SLSH SCK Pulse Width Low 2 tCLCL* ns
t
OVSH MOSI Setup to SCK High tCLCL ns
t
SHOX MOSI Hold after SCK High 2 tCLCL ns
tSLIV SCK Low to MISO Valid 100 ns
MSB
MSB
LSB
LSB
SERIAL CLOCK INPUT
(SCK)
SERIAL DATA INPUT
(MOSI)
(MISO)
SAMPLE
SERIAL DATA OUTPUT
MOSI
MISO
SCK
t
OVSH
t
SHSL
t t
SHOX SLSH
t
SLIVATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 171
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
21.9 High-voltage Serial Programming Characteristics
Figure 21-6. High-voltage Serial Programming Timing
Table 21-12. High-voltage Serial Programming Characteristics TA = 25C ± 10%, VCC = 5.0V ± 10% (Unless otherwise
noted)
Symbol Parameter Min Typ Max Units
tSHSL SCI (PB3) Pulse Width High 125 ns
tSLSH SCI (PB3) Pulse Width Low 125 ns
tIVSH SDI (PB0), SII (PB1) Valid to SCI (PB3) High 50 ns
t
SHIX SDI (PB0), SII (PB1) Hold after SCI (PB3) High 50 ns
t
SHOV SCI (PB3) High to SDO (PB2) Valid 16 ns
tWLWH_PFB Wait after Instr. 3 for Write Fuse Bits 2.5 ms
SDI (PB0), SII (PB1)
SDO (PB2)
SCI (PB3)
t
IVSH
t
SHSL
t t
SHIX SLSH
t
SHOVATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 172
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
22. Typical Characteristics
The data contained in this section is largely based on simulations and characterization of similar devices in the
same process and design methods. Thus, the data should be treated as indications of how the part will behave.
The following charts show typical behavior. These figures are not tested during manufacturing. All current consumption
measurements are performed with all I/O pins configured as inputs and with internal pull-ups enabled. A
sine wave generator with rail-to-rail output is used as clock source.
The power consumption in Power-down mode is independent of clock selection.
The current consumption is a function of several factors such as: operating voltage, operating frequency, loading of
I/O pins, switching rate of I/O pins, code executed and ambient temperature. The dominating factors are operating
voltage and frequency.
The current drawn from capacitive loaded pins may be estimated (for one pin) as CL*VCC*f where CL = load capacitance,
VCC = operating voltage and f = average switching frequency of I/O pin.
The parts are characterized at frequencies higher than test limits. Parts are not guaranteed to function properly at
frequencies higher than the ordering code indicates.
The difference between current consumption in Power-down mode with Watchdog Timer enabled and Power-down
mode with Watchdog Timer disabled represents the differential current drawn by the Watchdog Timer.
22.1 Active Supply Current
Figure 22-1. Active Supply Current vs. Low frequency (0.1 - 1.0 MHz)
ACTIVE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. LOW FREQUENCY
0.1 -1.0 MHz
5.5 V
5.0 V
4.5 V
4.0 V
3.3 V
2.7 V
1.8 V
0
0,2
0,4
0,6
0,8
1
1,2
0 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1
Frequency (MHz)
ICC (mA)ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 173
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Figure 22-2. Active Supply Current vs. Frequency (1 - 20 MHz)
Figure 22-3. Active Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal RC oscillator, 8 MHz)
ACTIVE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. FREQUENCY
1 - 20 MHz
5.5 V
5.0 V
4.5 V
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
Frequency (MHz)
ICC (mA)
1.8V
2.7V
3.3V
4.0V
ACTIVE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC
INTERNAL RC OSCILLATOR, 8 MHz
85 ˚C
25 ˚C
-40 ˚C
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1,5 2 2,5 3 3,5 4 4,5 5 5,5
VCC (V)
ICC (mA)ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 174
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Figure 22-4. Active Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 1 MHz)
Figure 22-5. Active Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 128 kHz)
ACTIVE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC
INTERNAL RC OSCILLATOR, 1 MHz
85 ˚C
25 ˚C
-40 ˚C
0
0,2
0,4
0,6
0,8
1
1,2
1,4
1,6
1,5 2 2,5 3 3,5 4 4,5 5 5,5
VCC (V)
ICC (mA)
ACTIVE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC
INTERNAL RC OSCILLATOR, 128 KHz
85 ˚C
25 ˚C
-40 ˚C
0
0,05
0,1
0,15
0,2
0,25
1,5 2 2,5 3 3,5 4 4,5 5 5,5
VCC (V)
ICC (mA)ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 175
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
22.2 Idle Supply Current
Figure 22-6. Idle Supply Current vs. low Frequency (0.1 - 1.0 MHz)
Figure 22-7. Idle Supply Current vs. Frequency (1 - 20 MHz)
IDLE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. LOW FREQUENCY
0.1 - 1.0 MHz
5.5 V
5.0 V
4.5 V
4.0 V
3.3 V
2.7 V
1.8 V
0
0,05
0,1
0,15
0,2
0,25
0 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1
Frequency (MHz)
ICC (mA)
IDLE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. FREQUENCY
1 - 20 MHz
5.5 V
5.0 V
4.5 V
0
0,5
1
1,5
2
2,5
3
3,5
4
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
Frequency (MHz)
ICC (mA)
1.8V
2.7V
3.3V
4.0VATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 176
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Figure 22-8. Idle Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 8 MHz)I
Figure 22-9. Idle Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal RC Oscilllator, 1 MHz)
IDLE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC
INTERNAL RC OSCILLATOR, 8 MHz
85 ˚C
25 ˚C
-40 ˚C
0
0,2
0,4
0,6
0,8
1
1,2
1,4
1,6
1,8
1,5 2 2,5 3 3,5 4 4,5 5 5,5
VCC (V)
ICC (mA)
IDLE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC
INTERNAL RC OSCILLATOR, 1 MHz
85 ˚C
25 ˚C
-40 ˚C
0
0,05
0,1
0,15
0,2
0,25
0,3
0,35
0,4
0,45
0,5
1,5 2 2,5 3 3,5 4 4,5 5 5,5
VCC (V)
ICC (mA)ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 177
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Figure 22-10. Idle Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 128 kHz)
22.3 Supply Current of I/O modules
The tables and formulas below can be used to calculate the additional current consumption for the different I/O
modules in Active and Idle mode. The enabling or disabling of the I/O modules are controlled by the Power Reduction
Register. See “PRR – Power Reduction Register” on page 38 for details.
It is possible to calculate the typical current consumption based on the numbers from Table 22-2 for other VCC and
frequency settings that listed in Table 22-1.
IDLE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC
INTERNAL RC OSCILLATOR, 128 kHz
85 ˚C
25 ˚C
-40 ˚C
0
0,01
0,02
0,03
0,04
0,05
0,06
0,07
0,08
0,09
0,1
1,5 2 2,5 3 3,5 4 4,5 5 5,5
VCC (V)
ICC (mA)
Table 22-1. Additional Current Consumption for the different I/O modules (absolute values)
PRR bit Typical numbers
VCC = 2V, f = 1 MHz VCC = 3V, f = 4 MHz VCC = 5V, f = 8 MHz
PRTIM1 45 uA 300 uA 1100 uA
PRTIM0 5 uA 30 uA 110 uA
PRUSI 5 uA 25 uA 100 uA
PRADC 15 uA 85 uA 340 uA
Table 22-2. Additional Current Consumption (percentage) in Active and Idle mode
PRR bit
Additional Current consumption
compared to Active with external clock
(see Figure 22-1 and Figure 22-2)
Additional Current consumption
compared to Idle with external clock
(see Figure 22-6 and Figure 22-7)
PRTIM1 20 % 80 %
PRTIM0 2 % 10 %
PRUSI 2 % 10 %
PRADC 5 % 25 %ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 178
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
22.3.1 Example
Calculate the expected current consumption in idle mode with USI, TIMER0, and ADC enabled at VCC = 2.0V and f
= 1 MHz. From Table 22-2 on page 177, third column, we see that we need to add 10% for the USI, 25% for the
ADC, and 10% for the TIMER0 module. Reading from Figure 22-9, we find that the idle current consumption is
~0,18 mA at VCC = 2.0V and f = 1 MHz. The total current consumption in idle mode with USI, TIMER0, and ADC
enabled, gives:
22.4 Power-down Supply Current
Figure 22-11. Power-down Supply Current vs. VCC (Watchdog Timer Disabled)
ICC = 0 18 , mA 1 01 ++ + , 0 25 , 0 1, 0 261 , mA
POWER-DOWN SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC
WATCHDOG TIMER DISABLED
85 ˚C
25 ˚C
-40 ˚C
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
1.2
1.4
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (uA)ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 179
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Figure 22-12. Power-down Supply Current vs. VCC (Watchdog Timer Enabled)
22.5 Pin Pull-up
Figure 22-13. I/O Pin Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Input Voltage (VCC = 1.8V)
POWER-DOWN SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC
WATCHDOG TIMER ENABLED
85 ˚C
25 ˚C
-40 ˚C
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (uA)
I/O PIN PULL-UP RESISTOR CURRENT vs. INPUT VOLTAGE
VCC = 1.8V
85 ˚C
25 ˚C
0 -40 ˚C
10
20
30
40
50
60
0 0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8 1 1,2 1,4 1,6 1,8 2
VOP (V)
IOP (uA)ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 180
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Figure 22-14. I/O Pin Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Input Voltage (VCC = 2.7V)
Figure 22-15. I/O Pin Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Input Voltage (VCC = 5V)
I/O PIN PULL-UP RESISTOR CURRENT vs. INPUT VOLTAGE
VCC = 2.7V
85 ˚C
25 ˚C
-40 ˚C
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
0 0,5 1 1,5 2 2,5 3
VOP (V)
IOP (uA)
I/O PIN PULL-UP RESISTOR CURRENT vs. INPUT VOLTAGE
VCC = 5V
85 ˚C
25 ˚C
-40 ˚C
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
0123456
VOP (V)
IOP (uA)ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 181
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Figure 22-16. Reset Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Reset Pin Voltage (VCC = 1.8V)
Figure 22-17. Reset Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Reset Pin Voltage (VCC = 2.7V)
RESET PULL-UP RESISTOR CURRENT vs. RESET PIN VOLTAGE
VCC = 1.8V
85 ˚C
25 ˚C
-40 ˚C
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
0 0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8 1 1,2 1,4 1,6 1,8 2
VRESET (V)
IRESET (uA)
RESET PULL-UP RESISTOR CURRENT vs. RESET PIN VOLTAGE
VCC =2.7V
85 ˚C
25 ˚C
-40 ˚C
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
0 0,5 1 1,5 2 2,5 3
VRESET (V)
IRESET (uA)ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 182
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Figure 22-18. Reset Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Reset Pin Voltage (VCC = 5V)
22.6 Pin Driver Strength
Figure 22-19. I/O Pin Output Voltage vs. Sink Current (VCC = 3V)
RESET PULL-UP RESISTOR CURRENT vs. RESET PIN VOLTAGE
VCC = 5V
85 ˚C
25 ˚C
-40 ˚C
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
0123456
VRESET (V)
IRESET (uA)
I/O PIN OUTPUT VOLTAGE vs. SINK CURRENT
VCC = 3V
85
25
-40
0
0,2
0,4
0,6
0,8
1
1,2
0 5 10 15 20 25
IOL (mA)
VOL (V)ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 183
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Figure 22-20. I/O Pin Output Voltage vs. Sink Current (VCC = 5V)
Figure 22-21. I/O Pin Output Voltage vs. Source Current (VCC = 3V)
I/O PIN OUTPUT VOLTAGE vs. SINK CURRENT
VCC = 5V
85
25
-40
0
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0 5 10 15 20 25
IOL (mA)
VOL (V)
I/O PIN OUTPUT VOLTAGE vs. SOURCE CURRENT
VCC = 3V
85
25
-40
0
0,5
1
1,5
2
2,5
3
3,5
0 5 10 15 20 25
IOH (mA)
VOH (V)ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 184
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Figure 22-22. I/O Pin Output Voltage vs. Source Current (VCC = 5V)
Figure 22-23. Reset Pin Output Voltage vs. Sink Current (VCC = 3V)
I/O PIN OUTPUT VOLTAGE vs. SOURCE CURRENT
VCC = 5V
85
25
-40
4,4
4,5
4,6
4,7
4,8
4,9
5
5,1
0 5 10 15 20 25
IOH (mA)
VOH (V)
RESET AS I/O PIN OUTPUT VOLTAGE vs. SINK CURRENT
VCC = 3V
-45 °C
0 °C
85 °C
0
0.5
1
1.5
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3
IOL (mA)
VOL (V)ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 185
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Figure 22-24. Reset Pin Output Voltage vs. Sink Current (VCC = 5V)
Figure 22-25. Reset Pin Output Voltage vs. Source Current (VCC = 3V)
RESET AS I/O PIN OUTPUT VOLTAGE vs. SINK CURRENT
VCC = 5V
-45 °C
0 °C
85 °C
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3
IOL (mA)
VOL (V)
RESET AS I/O PIN OUTPUT VOLTAGE vs. SOURCE CURRENT
VCC = 3V
-45 °C
25 °C
85 °C
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
0 0.5 1 1.5 2
IOH (mA)
VOH (V)ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 186
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Figure 22-26. Reset Pin Output Voltage vs. Source Current (VCC = 5V)
22.7 Pin Threshold and Hysteresis
Figure 22-27. I/O Pin Input Threshold Voltage vs. VCC (VIH, IO Pin Read as ‘1’)
RESET AS I/O PIN OUTPUT VOLTAGE vs. SOURCE CURRENT
VCC = 5V
-45 °C
25 °C
2.5 85 °C
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
0 0.5 1 1.5 2
IOH (mA)
VOH (V)
I/O PIN INPUT THRESHOLD VOLTAGE vs. VCC
VIH, IO PIN READ AS '1'
85 ˚C
25 ˚C
-40 ˚C
0
0,5
1
1,5
2
2,5
3
1,5 2 2,5 3 3,5 4 4,5 5 5,5
VCC (V)
Threshold (V)ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 187
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Figure 22-28. I/O Pin Input Threshold Voltage vs. VCC (VIL, IO Pin Read as ‘0’)
Figure 22-29. I/O Pin Input Hysteresis vs. VCC
I/O PIN INPUT THRESHOLD VOLTAGE vs. VCC
VIL, IO PIN READ AS '0'
85 ˚C
25 ˚C
-40 ˚C
0
0,5
1
1,5
2
2,5
3
1,5 2 2,5 3 3,5 4 4,5 5 5,5
VCC (V)
Threshold (V)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
1,5 2 2,5 3 3,5 4 4,5 5 5,5
Input Hysteresis (V)
V CC (V)
I/O PIN INPUT HYSTERESIS vs. VCCATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 188
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Figure 22-30. Reset Input Threshold Voltage vs. VCC (VIH, IO Pin Read as ‘1’)
Figure 22-31. Reset Input Threshold Voltage vs. VCC (VIL, IO Pin Read as ‘0’)
RESET INPUT THRESHOLD VOLTAGE vs. VCC
VIH, IO PIN READ AS '1'
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0,5
1
1,5
2
2,5
1,5 2 2,5 3 3,5 4 4,5 5 5,5
VCC (V)
Threshold (V)
RESET INPUT THRESHOLD VOLTAGE vs. VCC
VIL, IO PIN READ AS '0'
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0,5
1
1,5
2
2,5
1,5 2 2,5 3 3,5 4 4,5 5 5,5
VCC (V)
Threshold (V)ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 189
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Figure 22-32. Reset Pin Input Hysteresis vs. VCC
22.8 BOD Threshold
Figure 22-33. BOD Threshold vs. Temperature (BOD Level is 4.3V)
RESET PIN INPUT HYSTERESIS vs. VCC
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0,05
0,1
0,15
0,2
0,25
0,3
0,35
0,4
0,45
0,5
1,5 2 2,5 3 3,5 4 4,5 5 5,5
VCC (V)
Input Hysteresis (V)
BOD THRESHOLDS vs. TEMPERATURE
Rising VCC
Falling VCC
4,26
4,28
4,3
4,32
4,34
4,36
4,38
4,4
-50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Temperature (C)
Threshold (V)ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 190
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Figure 22-34. BOD Threshold vs. Temperature (BOD Level is 2.7V)
Figure 22-35. BOD Threshold vs. Temperature (BOD Level is 1.8V)
BOD THRESHOLDS vs. TEMPERATURE
Rising VCC
Falling VCC
2,68
2,7
2,72
2,74
2,76
2,78
2,8
-50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Temperature (C)
Threshold (V)
BOD THRESHOLDS vs. TEMPERATURE
Rising VCC
Falling VCC
1,795
1,8
1,805
1,81
1,815
1,82
1,825
1,83
1,835
1,84
1,845
1,85
-50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Temperature (C)
Threshold (V)ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 191
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Figure 22-36. Bandgap Voltage vs. Supply Voltage
Figure 22-37. Bandgap Voltage vs. Temperature
BANDGAP VOLTAGE vs. VCC
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
1
1,02
1,04
1,06
1,08
1,1
1,12
1,14
1,16
1,18
1,2
1,5 2 2,5 3 3,5 4 4,5 5 5,5
Vcc (V)
Bandgap Voltage (V)
BANDGAP VOLTAGE vs. Temperature
5 V
3 V
1.8 V
1
1,02
1,04
1,06
1,08
1,1
1,12
1,14
1,16
1,18
1,2
-40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100
Temperature
Bandgap Voltage (V)ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 192
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
22.9 Internal Oscillator Speed
Figure 22-38. Watchdog Oscillator Frequency vs. VCC
Figure 22-39. Watchdog Oscillator Frequency vs. Temperature
WATCHDOG OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY vs. VCC
85 ˚C
25 ˚C
-40 ˚C
0,112
0,114
0,116
0,118
0,12
0,122
0,124
0,126
0,128
2 2,5 3 3,5 4 4,5 5 5,5
VCC (V)
FRC (MHz)
WATCHDOG OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY vs. TEMPERATURE
5.5 V
4.0 V
3.3 V
2.7 V
1.8 V
0,108
0,11
0,112
0,114
0,116
0,118
0,12
-40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Temperature
FRC (MHz)ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 193
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Figure 22-40. Calibrated 8 MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. VCC
Figure 22-41. Calibrated 8 MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. Temperature
CALIBRATED 8 MHz RC OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY vs. VCC
85 ˚C
25 ˚C
-40 ˚C
7,5
7,6
7,7
7,8
7,9
8
8,1
8,2
1,5 2 2,5 3 3,5 4 4,5 5 5,5
VCC (V)
FRC (MHz)
CALIBRATED 8 MHz RC OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY vs. TEMPERATURE
5.0 V
3.0 V
7,7
7,75
7,8
7,85
7,9
7,95
8
8,05
8,1
8,15
-60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100
Temperature
FRC (MHz)ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 194
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Figure 22-42. Calibrated 8 MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. OSCCAL Value
Figure 22-43. Calibrated 1.6 MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. VCC
CALIBRATED 8 MHz RC OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY vs. OSCCAL VALUE
85 ˚C
25 ˚C
-40 ˚C
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
0 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240
OSCCAL (X1)
FRC (MHz)
CALIBRATED 1.6 MHz RC OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY vs. VCC
85 ˚C
25 ˚C
-40 ˚C
1,4
1,45
1,5
1,55
1,6
1,65
1,5 2 2,5 3 3,5 4 4,5 5 5,5
VCC (V)
FRC (MHz)ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 195
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Figure 22-44. Calibrated 1.6 MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. Temperature
Figure 22-45. Calibrated 1.6 MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. OSCCAL Value
CALIBRATED 1.6MHz RC OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY vs. TEMPERATURE
5.0 V
3.0 V
1,5
1,52
1,54
1,56
1,58
1,6
1,62
1,64
-60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100
Temperature
FRC (MHz)
CALIBRATED 1.6 MHz RC OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY vs. OSCCAL VALUE
85 ˚C
25 ˚C
-40 ˚C
0
0,5
1
1,5
2
2,5
3
3,5
4
4,5
0 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240
OSCCAL (X1)
FRC (MHz)ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 196
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
22.10 Current Consumption of Peripheral Units
Figure 22-46. Brownout Detector Current vs. VCC
Figure 22-47. ADC Current vs. VCC (AREF = AVCC)
BROWNOUT DETECTOR CURRENT vs. VCC
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
1,5 2 2,5 3 3,5 4 4,5 5 5,5
VCC (V)
ICC (uA)
ADC CURRENT vs. VCC
AREF = AVCC
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
50
100
150
200
250
1,5 2 2,5 3 3,5 4 4,5 5 5,5
VCC (V)
ICC (uA)ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 197
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Figure 22-48. Analog Comparator Current vs. VCC
Figure 22-49. Programming Current vs. VCC
ANALOG COMPARATOR CURRENT vs. VCC
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
1,5 2 2,5 3 3,5 4 4,5 5 5,5
VCC (V)
ICC (uA)
PROGRAMMING CURRENT vs. Vcc
Ext Clk
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
1,5 2 2,5 3 3,5 4 4,5 5 5,5
VCC (V)
ICC (mA)ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 198
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
22.11 Current Consumption in Reset and Reset Pulsewidth
Figure 22-50. Reset Supply Current vs. VCC (0.1 - 1.0 MHz, Excluding Current Through The Reset Pull-up)
Figure 22-51. Reset Supply Current vs. VCC (1 - 20 MHz, Excluding Current Through The Reset Pull-up)
RESET SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC
0.1 - 1.0 MHz, EXCLUDING CURRENT THROUGH THE RESET PULLUP
5.5 V
5.0 V
4.5 V
4.0 V
3.3 V
2.7 V
1.8 V
0
0,02
0,04
0,06
0,08
0,1
0,12
0,14
0,16
0 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1
Frequency (MHz)
ICC (mA)
RESET SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC
1 - 20 MHz, EXCLUDING CURRENT THROUGH THE RESET PULLUP
5.5 V
5.0 V
4.5 V
0
0,5
1
1,5
2
2,5
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
Frequency (MHz)
ICC (mA)
1.8V
2.7V
3.3V
4.0VATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 199
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Figure 22-52. Minimum Reset Pulse Width vs. VCC
MINIMUM RESET PULSE WIDTH vs. VCC
85 ˚C
25 ˚C
-40 ˚C
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
1,5 2 2,5 3 3,5 4 4,5 5 5,5
VCC (V)
Pulsewidth (ns)ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 200
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
23. Register Summary
Note: 1. For compatibility with future devices, reserved bits should be written to zero if accessed. Reserved I/O memory addresses
Address Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Page
0x3F SREG I T H S V N Z C page 8
0x3E SPH – – – – – – SP9 SP8 page 11
0x3D SPL SP7 SP6 SP5 SP4 SP3 SP2 SP1 SP0 page 11
0x3C Reserved –
0x3B GIMSK – INT0 PCIE – – – – – page 51
0x3A GIFR – INTF0 PCIF – – – – – page 52
0x39 TIMSK – OCIE1A OCIE1B OCIE0A OCIE0B TOIE1 TOIE0 – pages 81, 102
0x38 TIFR – OCF1A OCF1B OCF0A OCF0B TOV1 TOV0 – page 81
0x37 SPMCSR – – RSIG CTPB RFLB PGWRT PGERS SPMEN page 145
0x36 Reserved –
0x35 MCUCR BODS PUD SE SM1 SM0 BODSE ISC01 ISC00 pages 37, 51, 64
0x34 MCUSR – – – – WDRF BORF EXTRF PORF page 44,
0x33 TCCR0B FOC0A FOC0B – – WGM02 CS02 CS01 CS00 page 79
0x32 TCNT0 Timer/Counter0 page 80
0x31 OSCCAL Oscillator Calibration Register page 31
0x30 TCCR1 CTC1 PWM1A COM1A1 COM1A0 CS13 CS12 CS11 CS10 pages 89, 100
0x2F TCNT1 Timer/Counter1 pages 91, 102
0x2E OCR1A Timer/Counter1 Output Compare Register A pages 91, 102
0x2D OCR1C Timer/Counter1 Output Compare Register C pages 91, 102
0x2C GTCCR TSM PWM1B COM1B1 COM1B0 FOC1B FOC1A PSR1 PSR0 pages 77, 90, 101
0x2B OCR1B Timer/Counter1 Output Compare Register B page 92
0x2A TCCR0A COM0A1 COM0A0 COM0B1 COM0B0 – WGM01 WGM00 page 77
0x29 OCR0A Timer/Counter0 – Output Compare Register A page 80
0x28 OCR0B Timer/Counter0 – Output Compare Register B page 81
0x27 PLLCSR LSM – – – – PCKE PLLE PLOCK pages 94, 103
0x26 CLKPR CLKPCE – – – CLKPS3 CLKPS2 CLKPS1 CLKPS0 page 32
0x25 DT1A DT1AH3 DT1AH2 DT1AH1 DT1AH0 DT1AL3 DT1AL2 DT1AL1 DT1AL0 page 107
0x24 DT1B DT1BH3 DT1BH2 DT1BH1 DT1BH0 DT1BL3 DT1BL2 DT1BL1 DT1BL0 page 107
0x23 DTPS1 - - - - - - DTPS11 DTPS10 page 106
0x22 DWDR DWDR[7:0] page 140
0x21 WDTCR WDIF WDIE WDP3 WDCE WDE WDP2 WDP1 WDP0 page 45
0x20 PRR – PRTIM1 PRTIM0 PRUSI PRADC page 36
0x1F EEARH EEAR8 page 20
0x1E EEARL EEAR7 EEAR6 EEAR5 EEAR4 EEAR3 EEAR2 EEAR1 EEAR0 page 21
0x1D EEDR EEPROM Data Register page 21
0x1C EECR – – EEPM1 EEPM0 EERIE EEMPE EEPE EERE page 21
0x1B Reserved –
0x1A Reserved –
0x19 Reserved –
0x18 PORTB – – PORTB5 PORTB4 PORTB3 PORTB2 PORTB1 PORTB0 page 64
0x17 DDRB – – DDB5 DDB4 DDB3 DDB2 DDB1 DDB0 page 64
0x16 PINB – – PINB5 PINB4 PINB3 PINB2 PINB1 PINB0 page 64
0x15 PCMSK – – PCINT5 PCINT4 PCINT3 PCINT2 PCINT1 PCINT0 page 52
0x14 DIDR0 – – ADC0D ADC2D ADC3D ADC1D AIN1D AIN0D pages 121, 138
0x13 GPIOR2 General Purpose I/O Register 2 page 10
0x12 GPIOR1 General Purpose I/O Register 1 page 10
0x11 GPIOR0 General Purpose I/O Register 0 page 10
0x10 USIBR USI Buffer Register page 115
0x0F USIDR USI Data Register page 115
0x0E USISR USISIF USIOIF USIPF USIDC USICNT3 USICNT2 USICNT1 USICNT0 page 115
0x0D USICR USISIE USIOIE USIWM1 USIWM0 USICS1 USICS0 USICLK USITC page 116
0x0C Reserved –
0x0B Reserved –
0x0A Reserved –
0x09 Reserved –
0x08 ACSR ACD ACBG ACO ACI ACIE – ACIS1 ACIS0 page 120
0x07 ADMUX REFS1 REFS0 ADLAR REFS2 MUX3 MUX2 MUX1 MUX0 page 134
0x06 ADCSRA ADEN ADSC ADATE ADIF ADIE ADPS2 ADPS1 ADPS0 page 136
0x05 ADCH ADC Data Register High Byte page 137
0x04 ADCL ADC Data Register Low Byte page 137
0x03 ADCSRB BIN ACME IPR – – ADTS2 ADTS1 ADTS0 pages 120, 137
0x02 Reserved –
0x01 Reserved –
0x00 Reserved –ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 201
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
should never be written.
2. I/O Registers within the address range 0x00 - 0x1F are directly bit-accessible using the SBI and CBI instructions. In these
registers, the value of single bits can be checked by using the SBIS and SBIC instructions.
3. Some of the Status Flags are cleared by writing a logical one to them. Note that, unlike most other AVRs, the CBI and SBI
instructions will only operation the specified bit, and can therefore be used on registers containing such Status Flags. The
CBI and SBI instructions work with registers 0x00 to 0x1F only.ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 202
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
24. Instruction Set Summary
Mnemonics Operands Description Operation Flags #Clocks
ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC INSTRUCTIONS
ADD Rd, Rr Add two Registers Rd Rd + Rr Z,C,N,V,H 1
ADC Rd, Rr Add with Carry two Registers Rd Rd + Rr + C Z,C,N,V,H 1
ADIW Rdl,K Add Immediate to Word Rdh:Rdl Rdh:Rdl + K Z,C,N,V,S 2
SUB Rd, Rr Subtract two Registers Rd Rd - Rr Z,C,N,V,H 1
SUBI Rd, K Subtract Constant from Register Rd Rd - K Z,C,N,V,H 1
SBC Rd, Rr Subtract with Carry two Registers Rd Rd - Rr - C Z,C,N,V,H 1
SBCI Rd, K Subtract with Carry Constant from Reg. Rd Rd - K - C Z,C,N,V,H 1
SBIW Rdl,K Subtract Immediate from Word Rdh:Rdl Rdh:Rdl - K Z,C,N,V,S 2
AND Rd, Rr Logical AND Registers Rd Rd Rr Z,N,V 1
ANDI Rd, K Logical AND Register and Constant Rd Rd K Z,N,V 1
OR Rd, Rr Logical OR Registers Rd Rd v Rr Z,N,V 1
ORI Rd, K Logical OR Register and Constant Rd Rd v K Z,N,V 1
EOR Rd, Rr Exclusive OR Registers Rd Rd Rr Z,N,V 1
COM Rd One’s Complement Rd 0xFF Rd Z,C,N,V 1
NEG Rd Two’s Complement Rd 0x00 Rd Z,C,N,V,H 1
SBR Rd,K Set Bit(s) in Register Rd Rd v K Z,N,V 1
CBR Rd,K Clear Bit(s) in Register Rd Rd (0xFF - K) Z,N,V 1
INC Rd Increment Rd Rd + 1 Z,N,V 1
DEC Rd Decrement Rd Rd 1 Z,N,V 1
TST Rd Test for Zero or Minus Rd Rd Rd Z,N,V 1
CLR Rd Clear Register Rd Rd Rd Z,N,V 1
SER Rd Set Register Rd 0xFF None 1
BRANCH INSTRUCTIONS
RJMP k Relative Jump PC PC + k + 1 None 2
IJMP Indirect Jump to (Z) PC Z None 2
RCALL k Relative Subroutine Call PC PC + k + 1 None 3
ICALL Indirect Call to (Z) PC Z None 3
RET Subroutine Return PC STACK None 4
RETI Interrupt Return PC STACK I 4
CPSE Rd,Rr Compare, Skip if Equal if (Rd = Rr) PC PC + 2 or 3 None 1/2/3
CP Rd,Rr Compare Rd Rr Z, N,V,C,H 1
CPC Rd,Rr Compare with Carry Rd Rr C Z, N,V,C,H 1
CPI Rd,K Compare Register with Immediate Rd K Z, N,V,C,H 1
SBRC Rr, b Skip if Bit in Register Cleared if (Rr(b)=0) PC PC + 2 or 3 None 1/2/3
SBRS Rr, b Skip if Bit in Register is Set if (Rr(b)=1) PC PC + 2 or 3 None 1/2/3
SBIC P, b Skip if Bit in I/O Register Cleared if (P(b)=0) PC PC + 2 or 3 None 1/2/3
SBIS P, b Skip if Bit in I/O Register is Set if (P(b)=1) PC PC + 2 or 3 None 1/2/3
BRBS s, k Branch if Status Flag Set if (SREG(s) = 1) then PCPC+k + 1 None 1/2
BRBC s, k Branch if Status Flag Cleared if (SREG(s) = 0) then PCPC+k + 1 None 1/2
BREQ k Branch if Equal if (Z = 1) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRNE k Branch if Not Equal if (Z = 0) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRCS k Branch if Carry Set if (C = 1) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRCC k Branch if Carry Cleared if (C = 0) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRSH k Branch if Same or Higher if (C = 0) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRLO k Branch if Lower if (C = 1) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRMI k Branch if Minus if (N = 1) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRPL k Branch if Plus if (N = 0) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRGE k Branch if Greater or Equal, Signed if (N V= 0) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRLT k Branch if Less Than Zero, Signed if (N V= 1) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRHS k Branch if Half Carry Flag Set if (H = 1) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRHC k Branch if Half Carry Flag Cleared if (H = 0) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRTS k Branch if T Flag Set if (T = 1) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRTC k Branch if T Flag Cleared if (T = 0) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRVS k Branch if Overflow Flag is Set if (V = 1) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRVC k Branch if Overflow Flag is Cleared if (V = 0) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRIE k Branch if Interrupt Enabled if ( I = 1) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRID k Branch if Interrupt Disabled if ( I = 0) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BIT AND BIT-TEST INSTRUCTIONS
SBI P,b Set Bit in I/O Register I/O(P,b) 1 None 2
CBI P,b Clear Bit in I/O Register I/O(P,b) 0 None 2
LSL Rd Logical Shift Left Rd(n+1) Rd(n), Rd(0) 0 Z,C,N,V 1
LSR Rd Logical Shift Right Rd(n) Rd(n+1), Rd(7) 0 Z,C,N,V 1
ROL Rd Rotate Left Through Carry Rd(0)C,Rd(n+1) Rd(n),CRd(7) Z,C,N,V 1
ROR Rd Rotate Right Through Carry Rd(7)C,Rd(n) Rd(n+1),CRd(0) Z,C,N,V 1
ASR Rd Arithmetic Shift Right Rd(n) Rd(n+1), n=0..6 Z,C,N,V 1ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 203
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
SWAP Rd Swap Nibbles Rd(3..0)Rd(7..4),Rd(7..4)Rd(3..0) None 1
BSET s Flag Set SREG(s) 1 SREG(s) 1
BCLR s Flag Clear SREG(s) 0 SREG(s) 1
BST Rr, b Bit Store from Register to T T Rr(b) T 1
BLD Rd, b Bit load from T to Register Rd(b) T None 1
SEC Set Carry C 1 C1
CLC Clear Carry C 0 C 1
SEN Set Negative Flag N 1 N1
CLN Clear Negative Flag N 0 N 1
SEZ Set Zero Flag Z 1 Z1
CLZ Clear Zero Flag Z 0 Z 1
SEI Global Interrupt Enable I 1 I1
CLI Global Interrupt Disable I 0 I 1
SES Set Signed Test Flag S 1 S1
CLS Clear Signed Test Flag S 0 S 1
SEV Set Twos Complement Overflow. V 1 V1
CLV Clear Twos Complement Overflow V 0 V 1
SET Set T in SREG T 1 T1
CLT Clear T in SREG T 0 T 1
SEH Set Half Carry Flag in SREG H 1 H1
CLH Clear Half Carry Flag in SREG H 0 H 1
DATA TRANSFER INSTRUCTIONS
MOV Rd, Rr Move Between Registers Rd Rr None 1
MOVW Rd, Rr Copy Register Word Rd+1:Rd Rr+1:Rr None 1
LDI Rd, K Load Immediate Rd K None 1
LD Rd, X Load Indirect Rd (X) None 2
LD Rd, X+ Load Indirect and Post-Inc. Rd (X), X X + 1 None 2
LD Rd, - X Load Indirect and Pre-Dec. X X - 1, Rd (X) None 2
LD Rd, Y Load Indirect Rd (Y) None 2
LD Rd, Y+ Load Indirect and Post-Inc. Rd (Y), Y Y + 1 None 2
LD Rd, - Y Load Indirect and Pre-Dec. Y Y - 1, Rd (Y) None 2
LDD Rd,Y+q Load Indirect with Displacement Rd (Y + q) None 2
LD Rd, Z Load Indirect Rd (Z) None 2
LD Rd, Z+ Load Indirect and Post-Inc. Rd (Z), Z Z+1 None 2
LD Rd, -Z Load Indirect and Pre-Dec. Z Z - 1, Rd (Z) None 2
LDD Rd, Z+q Load Indirect with Displacement Rd (Z + q) None 2
LDS Rd, k Load Direct from SRAM Rd (k) None 2
ST X, Rr Store Indirect (X) Rr None 2
ST X+, Rr Store Indirect and Post-Inc. (X) Rr, X X + 1 None 2
ST - X, Rr Store Indirect and Pre-Dec. X X - 1, (X) Rr None 2
ST Y, Rr Store Indirect (Y) Rr None 2
ST Y+, Rr Store Indirect and Post-Inc. (Y) Rr, Y Y + 1 None 2
ST - Y, Rr Store Indirect and Pre-Dec. Y Y - 1, (Y) Rr None 2
STD Y+q,Rr Store Indirect with Displacement (Y + q) Rr None 2
ST Z, Rr Store Indirect (Z) Rr None 2
ST Z+, Rr Store Indirect and Post-Inc. (Z) Rr, Z Z + 1 None 2
ST -Z, Rr Store Indirect and Pre-Dec. Z Z - 1, (Z) Rr None 2
STD Z+q,Rr Store Indirect with Displacement (Z + q) Rr None 2
STS k, Rr Store Direct to SRAM (k) Rr None 2
LPM Load Program Memory R0 (Z) None 3
LPM Rd, Z Load Program Memory Rd (Z) None 3
LPM Rd, Z+ Load Program Memory and Post-Inc Rd (Z), Z Z+1 None 3
SPM Store Program Memory (z) R1:R0 None
IN Rd, P In Port Rd P None 1
OUT P, Rr Out Port P Rr None 1
PUSH Rr Push Register on Stack STACK Rr None 2
POP Rd Pop Register from Stack Rd STACK None 2
MCU CONTROL INSTRUCTIONS
NOP No Operation None 1
SLEEP Sleep (see specific descr. for Sleep function) None 1
WDR Watchdog Reset (see specific descr. for WDR/Timer) None 1
BREAK Break For On-chip Debug Only None N/A
Mnemonics Operands Description Operation Flags #ClocksATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 204
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
25. Ordering Information
Notes: 1. For speed vs. supply voltage, see section 21.3 “Speed” on page 163.
2. All Pb-free, halide-free, fully green, and comply with European directive for Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS).
3. Code indicators: H = NiPdAu lead finish, U/N = matte tin, R = tape & reel.
4. Can also be supplied in wafer form. Contact your local Atmel sales office for ordering information and minimum quantities.
5. For characteristics, see “Appendix A – Specification at 105C”.
6. For characteristics, see “Appendix B – Specification at 125C”.
25.1 ATtiny25
Speed (MHz) (1) Supply Voltage (V) Temperature Range Package (2) Ordering Code (3)
10 1.8 – 5.5
Industrial
(-40C to +85C) (4)
8P3 ATtiny25V-10PU
8S2
ATtiny25V-10SU
ATtiny25V-10SUR
ATtiny25V-10SH
ATtiny25V-10SHR
S8S1
ATtiny25V-10SSU
ATtiny25V-10SSUR
ATtiny25V-10SSH
ATtiny25V-10SSHR
20M1 ATtiny25V-10MU
ATtiny25V-10MUR
Industrial
(-40C to +105C) (5)
8S2 ATtiny25V-10SN
ATtiny25V-10SNR
S8S1 ATtiny25V-10SSN
ATtiny25V-10SSNR
Industrial (-40C to +125C) (6) 20M1 ATtiny25V-10MF
ATtiny25V-10MFR
20 2.7 – 5.5
Industrial
(-40C to +85C) (4)
8P3 ATtiny25-20PU
8S2
ATtiny25-20SU
ATtiny25-20SUR
ATtiny25-20SH
ATtiny25-20SHR
S8S1
ATtiny25-20SSU
ATtiny25-20SSUR
ATtiny25-20SSH
ATtiny25-20SSHR
20M1 ATtiny25-20MU
ATtiny25-20MUR
Industrial
(-40C to +105C) (5)
8S2 ATtiny25-20SN
ATtiny25-20SNR
S8S1 ATtiny25-20SSN
ATtiny25-20SSNR
Industrial (-40C to +125C) (6) 20M1 ATtiny25-20MF
ATtiny25-20MFR
Package Types
8P3 8-lead, 0.300" Wide, Plastic Dual Inline Package (PDIP)
8S2 8-lead, 0.208" Wide, Plastic Gull-Wing Small Outline (EIAJ SOIC)
S8S1 8-lead, 0.150" Wide, Plastic Gull-Wing Small Outline (JEDEC SOIC)
20M1 20-pad, 4 x 4 x 0.8 mm Body, Quad Flat No-Lead/Micro Lead Frame Package (QFN/MLF)ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 205
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Notes: 1. For speed vs. supply voltage, see section 21.3 “Speed” on page 163.
2. All packages are Pb-free, halide-free and fully green and they comply with the European directive for Restriction of Hazardous
Substances (RoHS).
3. Code indicators:
– H: NiPdAu lead finish
– U: matte tin
– R: tape & reel
4. These devices can also be supplied in wafer form. Please contact your local Atmel sales office for detailed ordering information
and minimum quantities.
25.2 ATtiny45
Speed (MHz) (1) Supply Voltage (V) Temperature Range Package (2) Ordering Code (3)
10 1.8 – 5.5 Industrial
(-40C to +85C) (4)
8P3 ATtiny45V-10PU
8S2
ATtiny45V-10SU
ATtiny45V-10SUR
ATtiny45V-10SH
ATtiny45V-10SHR
8X ATtiny45V-10XU
ATtiny45V-10XUR
20M1 ATtiny45V-10MU
ATtiny45V-10MUR
20 2.7 – 5.5 Industrial
(-40C to +85C) (4)
8P3 ATtiny45-20PU
8S2
ATtiny45-20SU
ATtiny45-20SUR
ATtiny45-20SH
ATtiny45-20SHR
8X ATtiny45-20XU
ATtiny45-20XUR
20M1 ATtiny45-20MU
ATtiny45-20MUR
Package Types
8P3 8-lead, 0.300" Wide, Plastic Dual Inline Package (PDIP)
8S2 8-lead, 0.208" Wide, Plastic Gull-Wing Small Outline (EIAJ SOIC)
8X 8-lead, 4.4 mm Wide, Plastic Thin Shrink Small Outline Package (TSSOP)
20M1 20-pad, 4 x 4 x 0.8 mm Body, Quad Flat No-Lead/Micro Lead Frame Package (QFN/MLF)ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 206
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Notes: 1. For speed vs. supply voltage, see section 21.3 “Speed” on page 163.
2. All packages are Pb-free, halide-free and fully green and they comply with the European directive for Restriction of Hazardous
Substances (RoHS).
3. Code indicators:
– H: NiPdAu lead finish
– U: matte tin
– R: tape & reel
4. These devices can also be supplied in wafer form. Please contact your local Atmel sales office for detailed ordering information
and minimum quantities.
25.3 ATtiny85
Speed (MHz) (1) Supply Voltage (V) Temperature Range Package (2) Ordering Code (3)
10 1.8 – 5.5 Industrial
(-40C to +85C) (4)
8P3 ATtiny85V-10PU
8S2
ATtiny85V-10SU
ATtiny85V-10SUR
ATtiny85V-10SH
ATtiny85V-10SHR
20M1 ATtiny85V-10MU
ATtiny85V-10MUR
20 2.7 – 5.5 Industrial
(-40C to +85C) (4)
8P3 ATtiny85-20PU
8S2
ATtiny85-20SU
ATtiny85-20SUR
ATtiny85-20SH
ATtiny85-20SHR
20M1 ATtiny85-20MU
ATtiny85-20MUR
Package Types
8P3 8-lead, 0.300" Wide, Plastic Dual Inline Package (PDIP)
8S2 8-lead, 0.208" Wide, Plastic Gull-Wing Small Outline (EIAJ SOIC)
20M1 20-pad, 4 x 4 x 0.8 mm Body, Quad Flat No-Lead/Micro Lead Frame Package (QFN/MLF)ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 207
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
26. Packaging Information
26.1 8P3
2325 Orchard Parkway
San Jose, CA 95131
TITLE DRAWING NO.
R
REV.
8P3, 8-lead, 0.300" Wide Body, Plastic Dual
In-line Package (PDIP)
01/09/02
8P3 B
D
D1
E
E1
e
b2 L
b
A2 A
1
N
eA
c
b3
4 PLCS
Top View
Side View
End View
COMMON DIMENSIONS
(Unit of Measure = inches)
SYMBOL MIN NOM MAX NOTE
Notes: 1. This drawing is for general information only; refer to JEDEC Drawing MS-001, Variation BA for additional information.
2. Dimensions A and L are measured with the package seated in JEDEC seating plane Gauge GS-3.
3. D, D1 and E1 dimensions do not include mold Flash or protrusions. Mold Flash or protrusions shall not exceed 0.010 inch.
4. E and eA measured with the leads constrained to be perpendicular to datum.
5. Pointed or rounded lead tips are preferred to ease insertion.
6. b2 and b3 maximum dimensions do not include Dambar protrusions. Dambar protrusions shall not exceed 0.010 (0.25 mm).
A 0.210 2
A2 0.115 0.130 0.195
b 0.014 0.018 0.022 5
b2 0.045 0.060 0.070 6
b3 0.030 0.039 0.045 6
c 0.008 0.010 0.014
D 0.355 0.365 0.400 3
D1 0.005 3
E 0.300 0.310 0.325 4
E1 0.240 0.250 0.280 3
e 0.100 BSC
eA 0.300 BSC 4
L 0.115 0.130 0.150 2ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 208
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
26.2 8S2
TITLE GPC DRAWING NO. REV.
Package Drawing Contact:
packagedrawings@atmel.com STN F 8S2
8S2, 8-lead, 0.208” Body, Plastic Small
Outline Package (EIAJ)
4/15/08
COMMON DIMENSIONS
(Unit of Measure = mm)
SYMBOL MIN NOM MAX NOTE
Notes: 1. This drawing is for general information only; refer to EIAJ Drawing EDR-7320 for additional information.
2. Mismatch of the upper and lower dies and resin burrs aren't included.
3. Determines the true geometric position.
4. Values b,C apply to plated terminal. The standard thickness of the plating layer shall measure between 0.007 to .021 mm.
A 1.70 2.16
A1 0.05 0.25
b 0.35 0.48 4
C 0.15 0.35 4
D 5.13 5.35
E1 5.18 5.40 2
E 7.70 8.26
L 0.51 0.85
θ 0° 8°
e 1.27 BSC 3
θ
1
N
E
TOP VIEW TOP VIEW
C
E1
END VIEW END VIEW
A
b
L
A1
e
D
SIDE VIEW SIDE VIEWATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 209
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
26.3 S8S1
2325 Orchard Parkway
San Jose, CA 95131
TITLE DRAWING NO.
R
REV.
S8S1, 8-lead, 0.150" Wide Body, Plastic Gull Wing Small
Outline (JEDEC SOIC)
7/28/03
S8S1 A
COMMON DIMENSIONS
(Unit of Measure = mm)
SYMBOL MIN NOM MAX NOTE
Notes: 1. This drawing is for general information only; refer to JEDEC Drawing MS-012 for proper dimensions, tolerances, datums,etc.
E 5.79 6.20
E1 3.81 3.99
A 1.35 1.75
A1 0.1 0.25
D 4.80 4.98
C 0.17 0.25
b 0.31 0.51
L 0.4 1.27
e 1.27 BSC
0o
8o
Top View
Side View
End View
1
N
C
A
A1
b
L
e
D
E1 EATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 210
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
26.4 8X
TITLE DRAWING NO.
R
REV.
Note: These drawings are for general information only. Refer to JEDEC Drawing MO-153AC.
2325 Orchard Parkway
San Jose, CA 95131
4/14/05
8X, 8-lead, 4.4 mm Body Width, Plastic Thin Shrink
Small Outline Package (TSSOP) 8X A
COMMON DIMENSIONS
(Unit of Measure = mm)
SYMBOL MIN NOM MAX NOTE
A 1.05 1.10 1.20
A1 0.05 0.10 0.15
b 0.25 – 0.30
C – 0.127 –
D 2.90 3.05 3.10
E1 4.30 4.40 4.50
E 6.20 6.40 6.60
e 0.65 TYP
L 0.50 0.60 0.70
Ø 0o – 8o
C
A
b
L
A1
D
Side View
Top View
End View
E
1
E1
e
ØATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 211
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
26.5 20M1
2325 Orchard Parkway
San Jose, CA 95131
TITLE DRAWING NO.
R
REV.
20M1, 20-pad, 4 x 4 x 0.8 mm Body, Lead Pitch 0.50 mm, 20M1 B
10/27/04
2.6 mm Exposed Pad, Micro Lead Frame Package (MLF)
A 0.70 0.75 0.80
A1 – 0.01 0.05
A2 0.20 REF
b 0.18 0.23 0.30
D 4.00 BSC
D2 2.45 2.60 2.75
E 4.00 BSC
E2 2.45 2.60 2.75
e 0.50 BSC
L 0.35 0.40 0.55
SIDE VIEW
Pin 1 ID
Pin #1
Notch
(0.20 R)
BOTTOM VIEW
TOP VIEW
Note: Reference JEDEC Standard MO-220, Fig. 1 (SAW Singulation) WGGD-5.
COMMON DIMENSIONS
(Unit of Measure = mm)
SYMBOL MIN NOM MAX NOTE
D
E
e
A2
A1
A
D2
E2
0.08 C
L
1
2
3
b
1
2
3ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 212
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
27. Errata
27.1 Errata ATtiny25
The revision letter in this section refers to the revision of the ATtiny25 device.
27.1.1 Rev D – F
No known errata.
27.1.2 Rev B – C
• EEPROM read may fail at low supply voltage / low clock frequency
1. EEPROM read may fail at low supply voltage / low clock frequency
Trying to read EEPROM at low clock frequencies and/or low supply voltage may result in invalid data.
Problem Fix/Workaround
Do not use the EEPROM when clock frequency is below 1MHz and supply voltage is below 2V. If operating frequency
can not be raised above 1MHz then supply voltage should be more than 2V. Similarly, if supply voltage
can not be raised above 2V then operating frequency should be more than 1MHz.
This feature is known to be temperature dependent but it has not been characterised. Guidelines are given for
room temperature, only.
27.1.3 Rev A
Not sampled.
27.2 Errata ATtiny45
The revision letter in this section refers to the revision of the ATtiny45 device.
27.2.1 Rev F – G
No known errata
27.2.2 Rev D – E
• EEPROM read may fail at low supply voltage / low clock frequency
1. EEPROM read may fail at low supply voltage / low clock frequency
Trying to read EEPROM at low clock frequencies and/or low supply voltage may result in invalid data.
Problem Fix/Workaround
Do not use the EEPROM when clock frequency is below 1MHz and supply voltage is below 2V. If operating frequency
can not be raised above 1MHz then supply voltage should be more than 2V. Similarly, if supply voltage
can not be raised above 2V then operating frequency should be more than 1MHz.
This feature is known to be temperature dependent but it has not been characterised. Guidelines are given for
room temperature, only.ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 213
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
27.2.3 Rev B – C
• PLL not locking
• EEPROM read from application code does not work in Lock Bit Mode 3
• EEPROM read may fail at low supply voltage / low clock frequency
• Timer Counter 1 PWM output generation on OC1B- XOC1B does not work correctly
1. PLL not locking
When at frequencies below 6.0 MHz, the PLL will not lock
Problem fix / Workaround
When using the PLL, run at 6.0 MHz or higher.
2. EEPROM read from application code does not work in Lock Bit Mode 3
When the Memory Lock Bits LB2 and LB1 are programmed to mode 3, EEPROM read does not work from the
application code.
Problem Fix/Work around
Do not set Lock Bit Protection Mode 3 when the application code needs to read from EEPROM.
3. EEPROM read may fail at low supply voltage / low clock frequency
Trying to read EEPROM at low clock frequencies and/or low supply voltage may result in invalid data.
Problem Fix/Workaround
Do not use the EEPROM when clock frequency is below 1MHz and supply voltage is below 2V. If operating frequency
can not be raised above 1MHz then supply voltage should be more than 2V. Similarly, if supply voltage
can not be raised above 2V then operating frequency should be more than 1MHz.
This feature is known to be temperature dependent but it has not been characterised. Guidelines are given for
room temperature, only.
4. Timer Counter 1 PWM output generation on OC1B – XOC1B does not work correctly
Timer Counter1 PWM output OC1B-XOC1B does not work correctly. Only in the case when the control bits,
COM1B1 and COM1B0 are in the same mode as COM1A1 and COM1A0, respectively, the OC1B-XOC1B output
works correctly.
Problem Fix/Work around
The only workaround is to use same control setting on COM1A[1:0] and COM1B[1:0] control bits, see table 14-
4 in the data sheet. The problem has been fixed for Tiny45 rev D.
27.2.4 Rev A
• Too high power down power consumption
• DebugWIRE looses communication when single stepping into interrupts
• PLL not locking
• EEPROM read from application code does not work in Lock Bit Mode 3
• EEPROM read may fail at low supply voltage / low clock frequency
1. Too high power down power consumption
Three situations will lead to a too high power down power consumption. These are:
– An external clock is selected by fuses, but the I/O PORT is still enabled as an output.
– The EEPROM is read before entering power down.
– VCC is 4.5 volts or higher.
Problem fix / WorkaroundATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 214
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
– When using external clock, avoid setting the clock pin as Output.
– Do not read the EEPROM if power down power consumption is important.
– Use VCC lower than 4.5 Volts.
2. DebugWIRE looses communication when single stepping into interrupts
When receiving an interrupt during single stepping, debugwire will loose
communication.
Problem fix / Workaround
– When singlestepping, disable interrupts.
– When debugging interrupts, use breakpoints within the interrupt routine, and run into the interrupt.
3. PLL not locking
When at frequencies below 6.0 MHz, the PLL will not lock
Problem fix / Workaround
When using the PLL, run at 6.0 MHz or higher.
4. EEPROM read from application code does not work in Lock Bit Mode 3
When the Memory Lock Bits LB2 and LB1 are programmed to mode 3, EEPROM read does not work from the
application code.
Problem Fix/Work around
Do not set Lock Bit Protection Mode 3 when the application code needs to read from EEPROM.
5. EEPROM read may fail at low supply voltage / low clock frequency
Trying to read EEPROM at low clock frequencies and/or low supply voltage may result in invalid data.
Problem Fix/Workaround
Do not use the EEPROM when clock frequency is below 1MHz and supply voltage is below 2V. If operating frequency
can not be raised above 1MHz then supply voltage should be more than 2V. Similarly, if supply voltage
can not be raised above 2V then operating frequency should be more than 1MHz.
This feature is known to be temperature dependent but it has not been characterized. Guidelines are given for
room temperature, only.ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 215
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
27.3 Errata ATtiny85
The revision letter in this section refers to the revision of the ATtiny85 device.
27.3.1 Rev B – C
No known errata.
27.3.2 Rev A
• EEPROM read may fail at low supply voltage / low clock frequency
1. EEPROM read may fail at low supply voltage / low clock frequency
Trying to read EEPROM at low clock frequencies and/or low supply voltage may result in invalid data.
Problem Fix/Workaround
Do not use the EEPROM when clock frequency is below 1MHz and supply voltage is below 2V. If operating frequency
can not be raised above 1MHz then supply voltage should be more than 2V. Similarly, if supply voltage
can not be raised above 2V then operating frequency should be more than 1MHz.
This feature is known to be temperature dependent but it has not been characterised. Guidelines are given for
room temperature, only.ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 216
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
28. Datasheet Revision History
28.1 Rev. 2586Q-08/13
28.2 Rev. 2586P-06/13
28.3 Rev. 2586O-02/13
Updated ordering codes on page 204, page 205, and page 206.
28.4 Rev. 2586N-04/11
1. Added:
– Section “Capacitive Touch Sensing” on page 6.
2. Updated:
– Document template.
– Removed “Preliminary” on front page. All devices now final and in production.
– Section “Limitations” on page 36.
– Program example on page 49.
– Section “Overview” on page 122.
– Table 17-4 on page 135.
– Section “Limitations of debugWIRE” on page 140.
– Section “Serial Programming Algorithm” on page 151.
– Table 21-7 on page 166.
– EEPROM errata on pages 212, 212, 213, 214, and 215
– Ordering information on pages 204, 205, and 206.
28.5 Rev. 2586M-07/10
1. Clarified Section 6.4 “Clock Output Buffer” on page 31.
2. Added Ordering Codes -SN and -SNR for ATtiny25 extended temperature.
28.6 Rev. 2586L-06/10
1. Added:
– TSSOP for ATtiny45 in “Features” on page 1, Pinout Figure 1-1 on page 2, Ordering Information in
Section 25.2 “ATtiny45” on page 205, and Packaging Information in Section 26.4 “8X” on page 210
– Table 6-11, “Capacitance of Low-Frequency Crystal Oscillator,” on page 29
– Figure 22-36 on page 191 and Figure 22-37 on page 191, Typical Characteristics plots for Bandgap
Voltage vs. VCC and Temperature
– Extended temperature in Section 25.1 “ATtiny25” on page 204, Ordering Information
– Tape & reel part numbers in Ordering Information, in Section 25.1 “ATtiny25” on page 204 and Section
25.2 “ATtiny45” on page 205
1. “Bit 3 – FOC1B: Force Output Compare Match 1B” description in “GTCCR – General Timer/Counter1 Control
Register” on page 90 updated: PB3 in “compare match output pin PB3 (OC1B)” corrected to PB4.
1. Updated description of “EEARH – EEPROM Address Register” and “EEARL – EEPROM Address Register” on page
20.ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 217
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
2. Updated:
– “Features” on page 1, removed Preliminary from ATtiny25
– Section 8.4.2 “Code Example” on page 44
– “PCMSK – Pin Change Mask Register” on page 52, Bit Descriptions
– “TCCR1 – Timer/Counter1 Control Register” on page 89 and “GTCCR – General Timer/Counter1
Control Register” on page 90, COM bit descriptions clarified
– Section 20.3.2 “Calibration Bytes” on page 150, frequencies (8 MHz, 6.4 MHz)
– Table 20-11, “Minimum Wait Delay Before Writing the Next Flash or EEPROM Location,” on page 153,
value for tWD_ERASE
– Table 20-16, “High-voltage Serial Programming Instruction Set for ATtiny25/45/85,” on page 158
– Table 21-1, “DC Characteristics. TA = -40°C to +85°C,” on page 161, notes adjusted
– Table 21-11, “Serial Programming Characteristics, TA = -40°C to +85°C, VCC = 1.8 - 5.5V (Unless
Otherwise Noted),” on page 170, added tSLIV
– Bit syntax throughout the datasheet, e.g. from CS02:0 to CS0[2:0].
28.7 Rev. 2586K-01/08
1. Updated Document Template.
2. Added Sections:
– “Data Retention” on page 6
– “Low Level Interrupt” on page 49
– “Device Signature Imprint Table” on page 149
3. Updated Sections:
– “Internal PLL for Fast Peripheral Clock Generation - clkPCK” on page 24
– “System Clock and Clock Options” on page 23
– “Internal PLL in ATtiny15 Compatibility Mode” on page 24
– “Sleep Modes” on page 34
– “Software BOD Disable” on page 35
– “External Interrupts” on page 49
– “Timer/Counter1 in PWM Mode” on page 97
– “USI – Universal Serial Interface” on page 108
– “Temperature Measurement” on page 133
– “Reading Lock, Fuse and Signature Data from Software” on page 143
– “Program And Data Memory Lock Bits” on page 147
– “Fuse Bytes” on page 148
– “Signature Bytes” on page 150
– “Calibration Bytes” on page 150
– “System and Reset Characteristics” on page 165
4. Added Figures:
– “Reset Pin Output Voltage vs. Sink Current (VCC = 3V)” on page 184
– “Reset Pin Output Voltage vs. Sink Current (VCC = 5V)” on page 185
– “Reset Pin Output Voltage vs. Source Current (VCC = 3V)” on page 185
– “Reset Pin Output Voltage vs. Source Current (VCC = 5V)” on page 186ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 218
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
5. Updated Figure:
– “Reset Logic” on page 39
6. Updated Tables:
– “Start-up Times for Internal Calibrated RC Oscillator Clock” on page 28
– “Start-up Times for Internal Calibrated RC Oscillator Clock (in ATtiny15 Mode)” on page 28
– “Start-up Times for the 128 kHz Internal Oscillator” on page 28
– “Compare Mode Select in PWM Mode” on page 86
– “Compare Mode Select in PWM Mode” on page 98
– “DC Characteristics. TA = -40°C to +85°C” on page 161
– “Calibration Accuracy of Internal RC Oscillator” on page 164
– “ADC Characteristics” on page 167
7. Updated Code Example in Section:
– “Write” on page 17
8. Updated Bit Descriptions in:
– “MCUCR – MCU Control Register” on page 37
– “Bits 7:6 – COM0A[1:0]: Compare Match Output A Mode” on page 77
– “Bits 5:4 – COM0B[1:0]: Compare Match Output B Mode” on page 77
– “Bits 2:0 – ADTS[2:0]: ADC Auto Trigger Source” on page 138
– “SPMCSR – Store Program Memory Control and Status Register” on page 145.
9. Updated description of feature “EEPROM read may fail at low supply voltage / low clock frequency” in
Sections:
– “Errata ATtiny25” on page 212
– “Errata ATtiny45” on page 212
– “Errata ATtiny85” on page 215
10. Updated Package Description in Sections:
– “ATtiny25” on page 204
– “ATtiny45” on page 205
– “ATtiny85” on page 206
11. Updated Package Drawing:
– “S8S1” on page 209
12. Updated Order Codes for:
– “ATtiny25” on page 204
28.8 Rev. 2586J-12/06
1. Updated “Low Power Consumption” on page 1.
2. Updated description of instruction length in “Architectural Overview” .
3. Updated Flash size in “In-System Re-programmable Flash Program Memory” on
page 15.
4. Updated cross-references in sections “Atomic Byte Programming” , “Erase” and
“Write” , starting on page 17.
5. Updated “Atomic Byte Programming” on page 17.
6. Updated “Internal PLL for Fast Peripheral Clock Generation - clkPCK” on page 24.
7. Replaced single clocking system figure with two: Figure 6-2 and Figure 6-3.ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 219
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
8. Updated Table 6-1 on page 25, Table 6-13 on page 30 and Table 6-6 on page 27.
9. Updated “Calibrated Internal Oscillator” on page 27.
10. Updated Table 6-5 on page 26.
11. Updated “OSCCAL – Oscillator Calibration Register” on page 31.
12. Updated “CLKPR – Clock Prescale Register” on page 32.
13. Updated “Power-down Mode” on page 35.
14. Updated “Bit 0” in “PRR – Power Reduction Register” on page 38.
15. Added footnote to Table 8-3 on page 46.
16. Updated Table 10-5 on page 63.
17. Deleted “Bits 7, 2” in “MCUCR – MCU Control Register” on page 64.
18. Updated and moved section “Timer/Counter0 Prescaler and Clock Sources”, now
located on page 66.
19. Updated “Timer/Counter1 Initialization for Asynchronous Mode” on page 86.
20. Updated bit description in “PLLCSR – PLL Control and Status Register” on page 94
and “PLLCSR – PLL Control and Status Register” on page 103.
21. Added recommended maximum frequency in“Prescaling and Conversion Timing” on
page 125.
22. Updated Figure 17-8 on page 129 .
23. Updated “Temperature Measurement” on page 133.
24. Updated Table 17-3 on page 134.
25. Updated bit R/W descriptions in:
“TIMSK – Timer/Counter Interrupt Mask Register” on page 81,
“TIFR – Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register” on page 81,
“TIMSK – Timer/Counter Interrupt Mask Register” on page 92,
“TIFR – Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register” on page 93,
“PLLCSR – PLL Control and Status Register” on page 94,
“TIMSK – Timer/Counter Interrupt Mask Register” on page 102,
“TIFR – Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register” on page 103,
“PLLCSR – PLL Control and Status Register” on page 103 and
“DIDR0 – Digital Input Disable Register 0” on page 138.
26. Added limitation to “Limitations of debugWIRE” on page 140.
27. Updated “DC Characteristics” on page 161.
28. Updated Table 21-7 on page 166.
29. Updated Figure 21-6 on page 171.
30. Updated Table 21-12 on page 171.
31. Updated Table 22-1 on page 177.
32. Updated Table 22-2 on page 177.
33. Updated Table 22-30, Table 22-31 and Table 22-32, starting on page 188.
34. Updated Table 22-33, Table 22-34 and Table 22-35, starting on page 189.
35. Updated Table 22-39 on page 192.
36. Updated Table 22-46, Table 22-47, Table 22-48 and Table 22-49.ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 220
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
28.9 Rev. 2586I-09/06
28.10 Rev. 2586H-06/06
28.11 Rev. 2586G-05/06
28.12 Rev. 2586F-04/06
1. All Characterization data moved to “Electrical Characteristics” on page 161.
2. All Register Descriptions are gathered up in seperate sections in the end of each
chapter.
3. Updated Table 11-3 on page 78, Table 11-5 on page 79, Table 11-6 on page 80 and
Table 20-4 on page 148.
4. Updated “Calibrated Internal Oscillator” on page 27.
5. Updated Note in Table 7-1 on page 34.
6. Updated “System Control and Reset” on page 39.
7. Updated Register Description in “I/O Ports” on page 53.
8. Updated Features in “USI – Universal Serial Interface” on page 108.
9. Updated Code Example in “SPI Master Operation Example” on page 110 and “SPI
Slave Operation Example” on page 111.
10. Updated “Analog Comparator Multiplexed Input” on page 119.
11. Updated Figure 17-1 on page 123.
12. Updated “Signature Bytes” on page 150.
13. Updated “Electrical Characteristics” on page 161.
1. Updated “Calibrated Internal Oscillator” on page 27.
2. Updated Table 6.5.1 on page 31.
3. Added Table 21-2 on page 164.
1. Updated “Internal PLL for Fast Peripheral Clock Generation - clkPCK” on page 24.
2. Updated “Default Clock Source” on page 30.
3. Updated “Low-Frequency Crystal Oscillator” on page 29.
4. Updated “Calibrated Internal Oscillator” on page 27.
5. Updated “Clock Output Buffer” on page 31.
6. Updated “Power Management and Sleep Modes” on page 34.
7. Added “Software BOD Disable” on page 35.
8. Updated Figure 16-1 on page 119.
9. Updated “Bit 6 – ACBG: Analog Comparator Bandgap Select” on page 120.
10. Added note for Table 17-2 on page 125.
11. Updated “Register Summary” on page 200.
1. Updated “Digital Input Enable and Sleep Modes” on page 57.
2. Updated Table 20-16 on page 158.
3. Updated “Ordering Information” on page 204.ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 221
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
28.13 Rev. 2586E-03/06
28.14 Rev. 2586D-02/06
28.15 Rev. 2586C-06/05
28.16 Rev. 2586B-05/05
28.17 Rev. 2586A-02/05
Initial revision.
1. Updated Features in “Analog to Digital Converter” on page 122.
2. Updated Operation in “Analog to Digital Converter” on page 122.
3. Updated Table 17-2 on page 133.
4. Updated Table 17-3 on page 134.
5. Updated “Errata” on page 212.
1. Updated Table 6-13 on page 30, Table 6-10 on page 29, Table 6-3 on page 26,
Table 6-9 on page 28, Table 6-5 on page 26, Table 9-1 on page 48,Table 17-4 on
page 135, Table 20-16 on page 158, Table 21-8 on page 167.
2. Updated “Timer/Counter1 in PWM Mode” on page 86.
3. Updated text “Bit 2 – TOV1: Timer/Counter1 Overflow Flag” on page 93.
4. Updated values in “DC Characteristics” on page 161.
5. Updated “Register Summary” on page 200.
6. Updated “Ordering Information” on page 204.
7. Updated Rev B and C in “Errata ATtiny45” on page 212.
8. All references to power-save mode are removed.
9. Updated Register Adresses.
1. Updated “Features” on page 1.
2. Updated Figure 1-1 on page 2.
3. Updated Code Examples on page 18 and page 19.
4. Moved “Temperature Measurement” to Section 17.12 page 133.
5. Updated “Register Summary” on page 200.
6. Updated “Ordering Information” on page 204.
1. CLKI added, instances of EEMWE/EEWE renamed EEMPE/EEPE, removed some
TBD.
Removed “Preliminary Description” from “Temperature Measurement” on page 133.
2. Updated “Features” on page 1.
3. Updated Figure 1-1 on page 2 and Figure 8-1 on page 39.
4. Updated Table 7-2 on page 38, Table 10-4 on page 63, Table 10-5 on page 63
5. Updated “Serial Programming Instruction set” on page 153.
6. Updated SPH register in “Instruction Set Summary” on page 202.
7. Updated “DC Characteristics” on page 161.
8. Updated “Ordering Information” on page 204.
9. Updated “Errata” on page 212.ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 222
2586Q–AVR–08/2013ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 223
2586Q–AVR–08/2013ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 224
2586Q–AVR–08/2013ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 225
2586Q–AVR–08/2013ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] 226
2586Q–AVR–08/2013ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] i
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Table of Contents
Features .....................................................................................................1
1 Pin Configurations ...................................................................................2
1.1 Pin Descriptions .................................................................................................2
2 Overview ...................................................................................................4
2.1 Block Diagram ...................................................................................................4
3 About .........................................................................................................6
3.1 Resources .........................................................................................................6
3.2 Code Examples .................................................................................................6
3.3 Capacitive Touch Sensing .................................................................................6
3.4 Data Retention ...................................................................................................6
4 AVR CPU Core ..........................................................................................7
4.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................7
4.2 Architectural Overview .......................................................................................7
4.3 ALU – Arithmetic Logic Unit ...............................................................................8
4.4 Status Register ..................................................................................................8
4.5 General Purpose Register File ........................................................................10
4.6 Stack Pointer ...................................................................................................11
4.7 Instruction Execution Timing ...........................................................................11
4.8 Reset and Interrupt Handling ...........................................................................12
5 AVR Memories ........................................................................................15
5.1 In-System Re-programmable Flash Program Memory ....................................15
5.2 SRAM Data Memory ........................................................................................15
5.3 EEPROM Data Memory ..................................................................................16
5.4 I/O Memory ......................................................................................................19
5.5 Register Description ........................................................................................20
6 System Clock and Clock Options .........................................................23
6.1 Clock Systems and their Distribution ...............................................................23
6.2 Clock Sources .................................................................................................25
6.3 System Clock Prescaler ..................................................................................31
6.4 Clock Output Buffer .........................................................................................31
6.5 Register Description ........................................................................................31
7 Power Management and Sleep Modes .................................................34
7.1 Sleep Modes ....................................................................................................34ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] ii
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
7.2 Software BOD Disable .....................................................................................35
7.3 Power Reduction Register ...............................................................................36
7.4 Minimizing Power Consumption ......................................................................36
7.5 Register Description ........................................................................................37
8 System Control and Reset .....................................................................39
8.1 Resetting the AVR ...........................................................................................39
8.2 Reset Sources .................................................................................................39
8.3 Internal Voltage Reference ..............................................................................42
8.4 Watchdog Timer ..............................................................................................42
8.5 Register Description ........................................................................................44
9 Interrupts .................................................................................................48
9.1 Interrupt Vectors in ATtiny25/45/85 .................................................................48
9.2 External Interrupts ...........................................................................................49
9.3 Register Description ........................................................................................51
10 I/O Ports ..................................................................................................53
10.1 Introduction ......................................................................................................53
10.2 Ports as General Digital I/O .............................................................................53
10.3 Alternate Port Functions ..................................................................................57
10.4 Register Description ........................................................................................64
11 8-bit Timer/Counter0 with PWM ............................................................65
11.1 Features ..........................................................................................................65
11.2 Overview ..........................................................................................................65
11.3 Timer/Counter0 Prescaler and Clock Sources ................................................66
11.4 Counter Unit ....................................................................................................68
11.5 Output Compare Unit .......................................................................................69
11.6 Compare Match Output Unit ............................................................................70
11.7 Modes of Operation .........................................................................................71
11.8 Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams ......................................................................76
11.9 Register Description ........................................................................................77
12 8-bit Timer/Counter1 ..............................................................................83
12.1 Timer/Counter1 Prescaler ...............................................................................83
12.2 Counter and Compare Units ............................................................................83
12.3 Register Description ........................................................................................89
13 8-bit Timer/Counter1 in ATtiny15 Mode ...............................................95
13.1 Timer/Counter1 Prescaler ...............................................................................95ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] iii
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
13.2 Counter and Compare Units ............................................................................95
13.3 Register Description ......................................................................................100
14 Dead Time Generator ...........................................................................105
14.1 Register Description ......................................................................................106
15 USI – Universal Serial Interface ..........................................................108
15.1 Features ........................................................................................................108
15.2 Overview ........................................................................................................108
15.3 Functional Descriptions .................................................................................109
15.4 Alternative USI Usage ...................................................................................114
15.5 Register Descriptions ....................................................................................115
16 Analog Comparator ..............................................................................119
16.1 Analog Comparator Multiplexed Input ...........................................................119
16.2 Register Description ......................................................................................120
17 Analog to Digital Converter .................................................................122
17.1 Features ........................................................................................................122
17.2 Overview ........................................................................................................122
17.3 Operation .......................................................................................................123
17.4 Starting a Conversion ....................................................................................124
17.5 Prescaling and Conversion Timing ................................................................125
17.6 Changing Channel or Reference Selection ...................................................128
17.7 ADC Noise Canceler .....................................................................................128
17.8 Analog Input Circuitry ....................................................................................129
17.9 Noise Canceling Techniques .........................................................................129
17.10 ADC Accuracy Definitions .............................................................................130
17.11 ADC Conversion Result .................................................................................132
17.12 Temperature Measurement ...........................................................................133
17.13 Register Description ......................................................................................134
18 debugWIRE On-chip Debug System ...................................................139
18.1 Features ........................................................................................................139
18.2 Overview ........................................................................................................139
18.3 Physical Interface ..........................................................................................139
18.4 Software Break Points ...................................................................................140
18.5 Limitations of debugWIRE .............................................................................140
18.6 Register Description ......................................................................................140
19 Self-Programming the Flash ...............................................................141ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] iv
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
19.1 Performing Page Erase by SPM ....................................................................141
19.2 Filling the Temporary Buffer (Page Loading) .................................................141
19.3 Performing a Page Write ...............................................................................142
19.4 Addressing the Flash During Self-Programming ...........................................142
19.5 EEPROM Write Prevents Writing to SPMCSR ..............................................142
19.6 Reading Lock, Fuse and Signature Data from Software ...............................143
19.7 Preventing Flash Corruption ..........................................................................144
19.8 Programming Time for Flash when Using SPM .............................................145
19.9 Register Description ......................................................................................145
20 Memory Programming .........................................................................147
20.1 Program And Data Memory Lock Bits ...........................................................147
20.2 Fuse Bytes .....................................................................................................148
20.3 Device Signature Imprint Table .....................................................................149
20.4 Page Size ......................................................................................................150
20.5 Serial Downloading ........................................................................................151
20.6 High-voltage Serial Programming ..................................................................155
20.7 High-voltage Serial Programming Algorithm ..................................................155
21 Electrical Characteristics ....................................................................161
21.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings* .........................................................................161
21.2 DC Characteristics .........................................................................................161
21.3 Speed ............................................................................................................163
21.4 Clock Characteristics .....................................................................................164
21.5 System and Reset Characteristics ................................................................165
21.6 Brown-Out Detection .....................................................................................166
21.7 ADC Characteristics ......................................................................................167
21.8 Serial Programming Characteristics ..............................................................170
21.9 High-voltage Serial Programming Characteristics .........................................171
22 Typical Characteristics ........................................................................172
22.1 Active Supply Current ....................................................................................172
22.2 Idle Supply Current ........................................................................................175
22.3 Supply Current of I/O modules ......................................................................177
22.4 Power-down Supply Current ..........................................................................178
22.5 Pin Pull-up .....................................................................................................179
22.6 Pin Driver Strength ........................................................................................182
22.7 Pin Threshold and Hysteresis ........................................................................186
22.8 BOD Threshold ..............................................................................................189ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] v
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
22.9 Internal Oscillator Speed ...............................................................................192
22.10 Current Consumption of Peripheral Units ......................................................196
22.11 Current Consumption in Reset and Reset Pulsewidth ...................................198
23 Register Summary ................................................................................200
24 Instruction Set Summary .....................................................................202
25 Ordering Information ...........................................................................204
25.1 ATtiny25 ........................................................................................................204
25.2 ATtiny45 ........................................................................................................205
25.3 ATtiny85 ........................................................................................................206
26 Packaging Information .........................................................................207
26.1 8P3 ................................................................................................................207
26.2 8S2 ................................................................................................................208
26.3 S8S1 ..............................................................................................................209
26.4 8X ..................................................................................................................210
26.5 20M1 ..............................................................................................................211
27 Errata .....................................................................................................212
27.1 Errata ATtiny25 ..............................................................................................212
27.2 Errata ATtiny45 ..............................................................................................212
27.3 Errata ATtiny85 ..............................................................................................215
28 Datasheet Revision History .................................................................216
28.1 Rev. 2586Q-08/13 .........................................................................................216
28.2 Rev. 2586P-06/13 ..........................................................................................216
28.3 Rev. 2586O-02/13 .........................................................................................216
28.4 Rev. 2586N-04/11 .........................................................................................216
28.5 Rev. 2586M-07/10 .........................................................................................216
28.6 Rev. 2586L-06/10 ..........................................................................................216
28.7 Rev. 2586K-01/08 ..........................................................................................217
28.8 Rev. 2586J-12/06 ..........................................................................................218
28.9 Rev. 2586I-09/06 ...........................................................................................220
28.10 Rev. 2586H-06/06 .........................................................................................220
28.11 Rev. 2586G-05/06 .........................................................................................220
28.12 Rev. 2586F-04/06 ..........................................................................................220
28.13 Rev. 2586E-03/06 ..........................................................................................221
28.14 Rev. 2586D-02/06 .........................................................................................221
28.15 Rev. 2586C-06/05 .........................................................................................221ATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] vi
2586Q–AVR–08/2013
28.16 Rev. 2586B-05/05 ..........................................................................................221
28.17 Rev. 2586A-02/05 ..........................................................................................221
Table of Contents.......................................................................................iATtiny25/45/85 [DATASHEET] vii
2586Q–AVR–08/2013Atmel Corporation
1600 Technology Drive
San Jose, CA 95110
USA
Tel: (+1) (408) 441-0311
Fax: (+1) (408) 487-2600
www.atmel.com
Atmel Asia Limited
Unit 01-5 & 16, 19F
BEA Tower, Millennium City 5
418 Kwun Tong Roa
Kwun Tong, Kowloon
HONG KONG
Tel: (+852) 2245-6100
Fax: (+852) 2722-1369
Atmel Munich GmbH
Business Campus
Parkring 4
D-85748 Garching b. Munich
GERMANY
Tel: (+49) 89-31970-0
Fax: (+49) 89-3194621
Atmel Japan G.K.
16F Shin-Osaki Kangyo Bldg
1-6-4 Osaki, Shinagawa-ku
Tokyo 141-0032
JAPAN
Tel: (+81) (3) 6417-0300
Fax: (+81) (3) 6417-0370
© 2013 Atmel Corporation. All rights reserved. / Rev.: 2586Q–AVR–08/2013
Disclaimer: The information in this document is provided in connection with Atmel products. No license, express or implied, by estoppel or otherwise, to any intellectual property right is granted by this
document or in connection with the sale of Atmel products. EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE ATMEL TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALES LOCATED ON THE ATMEL WEBSITE, ATMEL ASSUMES
NO LIABILITY WHATSOEVER AND DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY WARRANTY RELATING TO ITS PRODUCTS INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL ATMEL BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS AND PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR LOSS OF
INFORMATION) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS DOCUMENT, EVEN IF ATMEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Atmel makes no
representations or warranties with respect to the accuracy or completeness of the contents of this document and reserves the right to make changes to specifications and products descriptions at any time
without notice. Atmel does not make any commitment to update the information contained herein. Unless specifically provided otherwise, Atmel products are not suitable for, and shall not be used in,
automotive applications. Atmel products are not intended, authorized, or warranted for use as components in applications intended to support or sustain life.
Atmel®, Atmel logo and combinations thereof, Enabling Unlimited Possibilities®, AVR®, tinyAVR® and others are registered trademarks or trademarks of Atmel
Corporation or its subsidiaries. Other terms and product names may be trademarks of others.
42330A-MCU-07/2014
USER GUIDE
Atmel-ICE
The Atmel-ICE Debugger
Atmel-ICE is a powerful development tool for debugging and programming
ARM®
Cortex®
-M based Atmel®
SAM and Atmel AVR
®
microcontrollers with OnChip
Debug capability.
It supports:
● Programming and on-chip debugging of all Atmel AVR 32-bit
microcontrollers on both JTAG and aWire interfaces
● Programming and on-chip debugging of all Atmel AVR XMEGA
®
family
devices on both JTAG and PDI 2-wire interfaces
● Programming (JTAG and SPI) and debugging of all Atmel AVR 8-bit
microcontrollers with OCD support on either JTAG or debugWIRE interfaces
● Programming and debugging of all Atmel SAM ARM Cortex-M based
microcontrollers on both SWD and JTAG interfaces
● Programming (TPI) of all Atmel tinyAVR
®
8-bit microcontrollers with support
for this interface
Consult the supported devices list in the Atmel Studio User Guide for a full list of
devices and interfaces supported by this firmware release.Atmel-ICE [USER GUIDE]
42330A-MCU-07/2014
2
Table of Contents
The Atmel-ICE Debugger ............................................................. 1
1. Introduction .............................................................................. 4
1.1. Introduction to the Atmel-ICE ................................................... 4
1.2. Atmel-ICE Features ............................................................... 4
1.3. System Requirements ............................................................ 4
2. Getting Started with the Atmel-ICE ......................................... 6
2.1. Full Kit Contents ................................................................... 6
2.2. Basic Kit Contents ................................................................. 6
2.3. PCBA Kit Contents ................................................................ 7
2.4. Spare Parts Kits .................................................................... 7
2.5. Kit Overview ......................................................................... 8
2.6. Assembling the Atmel-ICE ...................................................... 8
2.7. Opening the Atmel-ICE ......................................................... 10
2.8. Powering the Atmel-ICE ........................................................ 12
2.9. Connecting to the Host Computer ........................................... 12
2.10. USB Driver Installation ......................................................... 12
2.10.1. Windows ................................................................ 12
3. Connecting the Atmel-ICE .................................................... 13
3.1. Overview: Connecting to AVR and SAM Target Devices .............. 13
3.2. Connecting to a JTAG Target ................................................. 13
3.3. Connecting to an aWire Target ............................................... 14
3.4. Connecting to a PDI Target ................................................... 15
3.5. Connecting to a debugWIRE Target ........................................ 15
3.6. Connecting to a SPI Target ................................................... 16
3.7. Connecting to a TPI Target .................................................... 17
3.8. Connecting to a SWD Target ................................................. 17
4. On-Chip Debugging .............................................................. 19
4.1. Introduction to On-Chip Debugging (OCD) ................................ 19
4.2. Physical Interfaces ............................................................... 19
4.2.1. JTAG ..................................................................... 19
4.2.2. aWire .................................................................... 21
4.2.3. PDI Physical ........................................................... 22
4.2.4. debugWIRE ............................................................ 22
4.2.5. SPI ....................................................................... 22
4.2.6. TPI ....................................................................... 23
4.2.7. SWD ..................................................................... 23
4.3. Atmel OCD Implementations .................................................. 23
4.3.1. Atmel AVR UC3 OCD (JTAG and aWire) ...................... 23
4.3.2. Atmel AVR XMEGA OCD (JTAG and PDI Physical) ........ 24
4.3.3. Atmel megaAVR OCD (JTAG) .................................... 24
4.3.4. Atmel megaAVR / tinyAVR OCD (debugWIRE) .............. 24
4.3.5. ARM Coresight Components ..................................... 24
5. Hardware Description ............................................................ 25
5.1. LEDs ................................................................................. 25
5.2. Rear Panel ......................................................................... 25
5.3. Bottom Panel ...................................................................... 25
5.4. Architecture Description ........................................................ 26
5.4.1. Atmel-ICE Mainboard ............................................... 26
5.4.2. Atmel-ICE Target Connectors ..................................... 27
5.4.3. Atmel-ICE target Connectors Part Numbers .................. 27
6. Software Integration .............................................................. 28
6.1. Atmel Studio ....................................................................... 28
6.1.1. Software Integration in Atmel Studio ............................ 28
6.1.2. Programming Options ............................................... 28
6.1.3. Debug Options ........................................................ 28Atmel-ICE [USER GUIDE]
42330A-MCU-07/2014
3
7. Command Line Utility ............................................................ 30
8. Advanced Debugging Techniques ........................................ 31
8.1. Atmel AVR UC3 Targets ....................................................... 31
8.1.1. EVTI / EVTO Usage ................................................. 31
8.2. debugWIRE Targets ............................................................. 31
8.2.1. Software Breakpoints ............................................... 31
9. Special Considerations ......................................................... 32
9.1. Atmel AVR XMEGA OCD ...................................................... 32
9.2. Atmel megaAVR OCD and debugWIRE OCD ............................ 32
9.2.1. Atmel megaAVR OCD (JTAG) .................................... 33
9.2.2. debugWIRE OCD .................................................... 34
9.3. Atmel AVR UC3 OCD ........................................................... 35
9.4. SAM / Coresight OCD .......................................................... 35
10. Firmware Upgrade ................................................................ 37
11. Release History and Known issues ...................................... 38
11.1. What's New ........................................................................ 38
11.2. Firmware Release History ..................................................... 38
11.2.1. Atmel Studio 6.2 ..................................................... 38
11.2.2. Atmel Studio 6.2 (beta)2 ........................................... 38
11.3. Known Issues Concerning the Atmel-ICE ................................. 38
11.3.1. Atmel AVR XMEGA OCD Specific Issues ..................... 38
11.3.2. Atmel megaAVR OCD and Atmel tinyAVR OCD
Specific Issues ........................................................ 38
11.4. Device Support ................................................................... 38
12. Product Compliance .............................................................. 39
12.1. RoHS and WEEE ................................................................ 39
12.2. CE and FCC ...................................................................... 39
13. Document Revisions ............................................................. 40Atmel-ICE [USER GUIDE]
42330A-MCU-07/2014
4
1. Introduction
1.1 Introduction to the Atmel-ICE
Atmel-ICE is a powerful development tool for debugging and programming ARM Cortex-M based Atmel SAM
and Atmel AVR microcontrollers with On-Chip Debug capability.
It supports:
● Programming and on-chip debugging of all Atmel AVR UC3 microcontrollers on both JTAG and aWire
interfaces
● Programming and on-chip debugging of all AVR XMEGA family devices on both JTAG and PDI 2-wire
interfaces
● Programming (JTAG and SPI) and debugging of all AVR 8-bit microcontrollers with OCD support on both
JTAG or debugWIRE interfaces
● Programming and debugging of all Atmel SAM ARM Cortex-M based microcontrollers on both SWD and
JTAG interfaces
● Programming (TPI) of all Atmel tinyAVR 8-bit microcontrollers with support for this interface
1.2 Atmel-ICE Features
● Fully compatible with Atmel Studio
● Supports programming and debugging of all Atmel AVR UC3 32-bit microcontrollers
● Supports programming and debugging of all 8-bit AVR XMEGA devices
● Supports programming and debugging of all 8-bit Atmel megaAVR
®
and tinyAVR devices with OCD
● Supports programming and debugging of all SAM ARM Cortex-M based microcontrollers
● Target operating voltage range of 1.62V to 5.5V
● Draws less than 3mA from target VTref when using debugWIRE interface and less than 1mA for all other
interfaces
● Supports JTAG clock frequencies from 32kHz to 7.5MHz
● Supports PDI clock frequencies from 32kHz to 7.5MHz
● Supports debugWIRE baud rates from 4kbit/s to 0.5Mbit/s
● Supports aWire baud rates from 7.5kbit/s to 7Mbit/s
● Supports SPI clock frequencies from 8kHz to 5MHz
● Supports SWD clock frequencies from 32kHz to 2MHz
● USB 2.0 high-speed host interface
● ITM serial trace capture at up to 3MB/s
● Supports 10-pin 50-mil JTAG connector with both AVR and Cortex pinouts. The standard probe cable
supports AVR 6-pin ISP/PDI/TPI 100-mil headers as well as 10-pin 50-mil. An adapter is available to
support 6-pin 50-mil, 10-pin 100-mil and 20-pin 100-mil headers. Several kit options are available with
different cabling and adapters.
1.3 System Requirements
The Atmel-ICE unit requires that a front-end debugging environment Atmel Studio version 6.2 or later is
installed on your computer.Atmel-ICE [USER GUIDE]
42330A-MCU-07/2014
5
The Atmel-ICE should be connected to the host computer using the USB cable provided, or a certified USBmicro
cable.Atmel-ICE [USER GUIDE]
42330A-MCU-07/2014
6
2. Getting Started with the Atmel-ICE
2.1 Full Kit Contents
The Atmel-ICE full kit contains these items:
● Atmel-ICE unit
● USB cable (1.8m, high-speed, micro-B)
● Adapter board containing 50-mil AVR, 100-mil AVR/SAM and 100-mil 20-pin SAM adapters
● IDC flat cable with 10-pin 50-mil connector and 6-pin 100-mil connector
● 50-mil 10-pin mini squid cable with 10 x 100-mil sockets
Figure 2-1. Atmel-ICE Full Kit Contents
2.2 Basic Kit Contents
The Atmel-ICE basic kit contains these items:
● Atmel-ICE unit
● USB cable (1.8m, high-speed, micro-B)
● IDC flat cable with 10-pin 50-mil connector and 6-pin 100-mil connectorAtmel-ICE [USER GUIDE]
42330A-MCU-07/2014
7
Figure 2-2. Atmel-ICE Basic Kit Contents
2.3 PCBA Kit Contents
The Atmel-ICE PCBA kit contains these items:
● Atmel-ICE unit without plastic encaptulation
Figure 2-3. Atmel-ICE PCBA Kit Contents
2.4 Spare Parts Kits
The following spare parts kits are available:
● Adapter kit
● Cable kitAtmel-ICE [USER GUIDE]
42330A-MCU-07/2014
8
Figure 2-4. Atmel-ICE Adapter Kit Contents
Figure 2-5. Atmel-ICE Cable Kit Contents
2.5 Kit Overview
The Atmel-ICE kit options are shown diagrammatically here:
Figure 2-6. Atmel-ICE Kit Overview
PCBA
PCBA kit
basic kit
adapter kit
full kit
SAM AVR
cable kit
2.6 Assembling the Atmel-ICE
The Atmel-ICE unit is shipped with no cables attached. Two cable options are provided in the full kit:
● 50-mil 10-pin IDC flat cable with 6-pin ISP and 10-pin connectorsAtmel-ICE [USER GUIDE]
42330A-MCU-07/2014
9
● 50-mil 10-pin mini-squid cable with 10 x 100-mil sockets
Figure 2-7. Atmel-ICE Cables
For most purposes, the 50-mil 10-pin IDC flat cable can be used, connecting either natively to its 10-pin or 6-
pin connectors, or connecting via the adapter board. Three adapters are provided on one small PCBA. The
following adapters are included:
● 100-mil 10-pin JTAG/SWD adapter
● 100-mil 20-pin SAM JTAG/SWD adapter
● 50-mil 6-pin SPI/debugWIRE/PDI/aWire adapter
Figure 2-8. Atmel-ICE Adapters
Note A 50-mil JTAG adapter has not been provided - this is because the 50-mil 10-pin IDC cable can
be used to connect directly to a 50-mil JTAG header. For the part number of the component used
for the 50-mil 10-pin connector, see “Atmel-ICE target Connectors Part Numbers” on page 27.
The 6-pin ISP/PDI header is included as part of the 10-pin IDC cable. This termination can be cut off if it is not
required.
To assemble your Atmel-ICE into its default configuration, connect the 10-pin 50-mil IDC cable to the unit as
shown below. Be sure to orient the cable so that the red wire (pin 1) on the cable aligns with the triangular
indicator on the blue belt of the enclosure. The cable should connect upwards from the unit. Be sure to connect
to the port corresponding to the pinout of your target - AVR or SAM.
Figure 2-9. Atmel-ICE Cable ConnectionAtmel-ICE [USER GUIDE]
42330A-MCU-07/2014
10
Figure 2-10. Atmel-ICE AVR Probe Connection
Figure 2-11. Atmel-ICE SAM Probe Connection
2.7 Opening the Atmel-ICE
Note For normal operation, the Atmel-ICE unit must not be opened. Opening the unit is done at your
own risk. Anti-static precautions should be taken.
The Atmel-ICE enclosure consists of three separate plastic components - top cover, bottom cover and blue
belt - which are snapped together during assembly. To open the unit, simply insert a large flat screwdriver into
the openings in the blue belt, apply some inward pressure and twist gently. Repeat the process on the other
snapper holes, and the top cover will pop off.Atmel-ICE [USER GUIDE]
42330A-MCU-07/2014
11
Figure 2-12. Opening the Atmel-ICE (1)
Figure 2-13. Opening the Atmel-ICE (2)Atmel-ICE [USER GUIDE]
42330A-MCU-07/2014
12
Figure 2-14. Opening the Atmel-ICE(3)
To close the unit again, simply align the top and bottom covers correctly, and press together firmly.
2.8 Powering the Atmel-ICE
The Atmel-ICE is powered by the USB bus voltage. It requires less than 100mA to operate, and can therefore
be powered through a USB hub. The power LED will illuminate when the unit is plugged in. When not
connected in an active programming or debugging session, the unit will enter low-power consumption mode to
preserve your computer's battery. The Atmel-ICE cannot be powered down - it should be unplugged when not
in use.
2.9 Connecting to the Host Computer
The Atmel-ICE communicates primarily using a standard HID interface, and does not require a special driver on
the host computer. To use the advanced data gateway functionality of the Atmel-ICE, be sure to install the USB
driver on the host computer. This is done automatically when installing the front-end software provided free by
Atmel. See www.atmel.com
1
for further information or to download the latest front-end software.
The Atmel-ICE must be connected to an available USB port on the host computer using the USB cable
provided, or suitable USB certified micro cable. The Atmel-ICE contains a USB 2.0 compliant controller, and
can operate in both full-speed and high-speed modes. For best results, connect the Atmel-ICE directly to a
USB 2.0 compliant high-speed hub on the host computer using the cable provided.
2.10 USB Driver Installation
2.10.1 Windows
When installing the Atmel-ICE on a computer running Microsoft®
Windows®
, the USB driver is loaded when the
Atmel-ICE is first plugged in.
Note Be sure to install the front-end software packages before plugging the unit in for the first time.
Once successfully installed, the Atmel-ICE will appear in the device manager as a "Human Interface Device".
1
http://www.atmel.com/Atmel-ICE [USER GUIDE]
42330A-MCU-07/2014
13
3. Connecting the Atmel-ICE
3.1 Overview: Connecting to AVR and SAM Target Devices
The Atmel-ICE probe has two 50-mil 10-pin JTAG connectors accessible on the front of the tool's enclosure.
Both connectors are directly electrically connected, but conform to two different pinouts - the AVR JTAG header
and the ARM Cortex Debug header. The connector should be selected based on the pinout of the target board,
and not the target MCU type - for example a SAM device mounted in a AVR STK600 stack should use the AVR
header.
Various cabling and adapters are available in the different Atmel-ICE kits. An overview of connection options is
shown.
Figure 3-1. Atmel-ICE Connection Options
6-pin 100-mil AVR ISP/
debugWIRE/PDI/aWire/
TPI header
10-pin 100-mil AVR
JTAG header
10-pin 50-mil AVR
JTAG header
SAM AVR
20-pin 100-mil SAM
header
(for EVKs etc)
10-pin 100-mil
JTAG/SWD header
10-pin 50-mil JTAG/SWD
(Cortex debug header)
SAM AVR
6-pin 50-mil AVR ISP/
debugWIRE/PDI/aWire/
TPI header
3.2 Connecting to a JTAG Target
The Atmel-ICE probe has two 50-mil 10-pin JTAG connectors accessible on the front of the tool's enclosure.
Both connectors are directly electrically connected, but conform to two different pinouts - the AVR JTAG header
and the ARM Cortex Debug header. The connector should be selected based on the pinout of the target board,
and not the target MCU type - for example a SAM device mounted in a AVR STK600 stack should use the AVR
header.
The recommended pinout for the 10-pin AVR JTAG connector is shown in Figure 4-2, “AVR JTAG Header
Pinout” on page 20.
The recommended pinout for the 10-pin ARM Cortex Debug connector is shown in Figure 4-3, “SAM JTAG
Header Pinout” on page 20.
Direct connection to a standard 10-pin 50-mil header
Use the 50-mil 10-pin flat cable (included in some kits) to connect directly to a board supporting this header
type. Use the AVR connector port on the Atmel-ICE for headers layed out in the AVR pinout, and the SAM
connector port for headers complying with the ARM Cortex Debug header pinout.
The pinouts for both 10-pin connector ports are shown below.
Connection to a standard 10-pin 100-mil header
Use a standard 50-mil to 100-mil adapter to connect to 100-mil headers. An adapter board (included in some
kits) can be used for this purpose, or alternatively the JTAGICE3 adapter can be used for AVR targets.Atmel-ICE [USER GUIDE]
42330A-MCU-07/2014
14
Note The JTAGICE3 100-mil adapter cannot be used with the SAM connector port, since pins 2 and 10
(AVR GND) on the adapter are connected.
Connection to a custom 100-mil header
If your target board does not have a compliant 10-pin JTAG header in 50- or 100-mil, you can map to a custom
pinout using the 10-pin "mini-squid" cable (included in some kits), which gives access to ten individual 100-mil
sockets.
Connection to a 20-pin 100-mil header
Use the adapter board (included in some kits) to connect to targets with a 20-pin 100-mil header.
Table 3-1. Atmel-ICE JTAG Pin Description
Name AVR
port
pin
SAM
port
pin
Description
TCK 1 4 Test Clock (clock signal from the Atmel-ICE into the target device).
TMS 5 2 Test Mode Select (control signal from the Atmel-ICE into the target device).
TDI 9 8 Test Data In (data transmitted from the Atmel-ICE into the target device).
TDO 3 6 Test Data Out (data transmitted from the target device into the Atmel-ICE).
nTRST 8 - Test Reset (optional, only on some AVR devices). Used to reset the JTAG
TAP controller.
nSRST 6 10 Reset (optional) Used to reset the target device. Connecting this pin is
recommended since it allows the Atmel-ICE to hold the target device in a
reset state, which can be essential to debugging in certain scenarios.
VTG 4 1 Target voltage reference. The Atmel-ICE samples the target voltage on this
pin in order to power the level converters correctly. The Atmel-ICE draws
less than 3mA from this pin in debugWIRE mode and less than 1mA in other
modes.
GND 2, 10 3, 5, 9 Ground. All must be connected to ensure that the Atmel-ICE and the target
device share the same ground reference.
3.3 Connecting to an aWire Target
The aWire interface only requires one data line in addition to Vcc and GND. On the target this line is the
nRESET line, although the debugger uses the JTAG TDO line as the data line.
The recommended pinout for the 6-pin aWire connector is shown in Figure 4-5, “aWire Header
Pinout” on page 22.
Connection to a 6-pin 100-mil aWire header
Use the 6-pin 100-mil tap on the flat cable (included in some kits) to connect to a standard 100-mil aWire
header.
Connection to a 6-pin 50-mil aWire header
Use the adapter board (included in some kits) to connect to a standard 50-mil aWire header.
Connection to a custom 100-mil header
The 10-pin mini-squid cable should be used to connect between the Atmel-ICE AVR connector port and the
target board. Three connections are required, as described in the table below.
Table 3-2. Atmel-ICE aWire Pin Mapping
Atmel-ICE AVR port
pins
Target pins Mini-squid pin aWire pinout
Pin 1 (TCK) 1
Pin 2 (GND) GND 2 6Atmel-ICE [USER GUIDE]
42330A-MCU-07/2014
15
Atmel-ICE AVR port
pins
Target pins Mini-squid pin aWire pinout
Pin 3 (TDO) DATA 3 1
Pin 4 (VTG) VTG 4 2
Pin 5 (TMS) 5
Pin 6 (nSRST) 6
Pin 7 (Not connected) 7
Pin 8 (nTRST) 8
Pin 9 (TDI) 9
Pin 10 (GND) 0
3.4 Connecting to a PDI Target
The recommended pinout for the 6-pin PDI connector is shown in Figure 4-6, “PDI Header
Pinout” on page 22.
Connection to a 6-pin 100-mil PDI header
Use the 6-pin 100-mil tap on the flat cable (included in some kits) to connect to a standard 100-mil PDI header.
Connection to a 6-pin 50-mil PDI header
Use the adapter board (included in some kits) to connect to a standard 50-mil PDI header.
Connection to a custom 100-mil header
The 10-pin mini-squid cable should be used to connect between the Atmel-ICE AVR connector port and the
target board. Four connections are required, as described in the table below.
Note There is a difference from the JTAGICE mkII JTAG probe, where PDI_DATA is connected to pin 9.
The Atmel-ICE is compatible with the pinout used by the JTAGICE3, AVR ONE! and AVR Dragon
products.
Table 3-3. Atmel-ICE PDI Pin Mapping
Atmel-ICE AVR port
pin
Target pins Mini-squid pin Atmel STK600 PDI
pinout
Pin 1 (TCK) 1
Pin 2 (GND) GND 2 6
Pin 3 (TDO) PDI_DATA 3 1
Pin 4 (VTG) VTG 4 2
Pin 5 (TMS) 5
Pin 6 (nSRST) PDI_CLK 6 5
Pin 7 (Not connected) 7
Pin 8 (nTRST) 8
Pin 9 (TDI) 9
Pin 10 (GND) 0
3.5 Connecting to a debugWIRE Target
The recommended pinout for the 6-pin debugWIRE (SPI) connector is shown in Figure 4-7, “debugWIRE (SPI)
Header Pinout” on page 22.
Connection to a 6-pin 100-mil SPI header
Use the 6-pin 100-mil tap on the flat cable (included in some kits) to connect to a standard 100-mil SPI header.Atmel-ICE [USER GUIDE]
42330A-MCU-07/2014
16
Connection to a 6-pin 50-mil SPI header
Use the adapter board (included in some kits) to connect to a standard 50-mil SPI header.
Connection to a custom 100-mil header
The 10-pin mini-squid cable should be used to connect between the Atmel-ICE AVR connector port and
the target board. Three connections are required, as described in Table 3-4, “Atmel-ICE debugWIRE Pin
Mapping” on page 16.
Although the debugWIRE interface only requires one signal line (RESET), Vcc and GND to operate correctly,
it is advised to have access to the full SPI connector so that the debugWIRE interface can be enabled and
disabled using SPI programming.
When the DWEN fuse is enabled the SPI interface is overridden internally in order for the OCD module to have
control over the RESET pin. The debugWIRE OCD is capable of disabling itself temporarily (using the button
on the debugging tab in the properties dialog in Atmel Studio), thus releasing control of the RESET line. The
SPI interface is then available again (only if the SPIEN fuse is programmed), allowing the DWEN fuse to be
un-programmed using the SPI interface. If power is toggled before the DWEN fuse is un-programmed, the
debugWIRE module will again take control of the RESET pin.
Note It is highly advised to simply let Atmel Studio handle setting and clearing of the DWEN fuse.
It is not possible to use the debugWIRE interface if the lockbits on the target AVR device are programmed.
Always be sure that the lockbits are cleared before programming the DWEN fuse and never set the lockbits
while the DWEN fuse is programmed. If both the debugWIRE enable fuse (DWEN) and lockbits are set,
one can use High Voltage Programming to do a chip erase, and thus clear the lockbits. When the lockbits
are cleared the debugWIRE interface will be re-enabled. The SPI Interface is only capable of reading fuses,
reading signature and performing a chip erase when the DWEN fuse is un-programmed.
Table 3-4. Atmel-ICE debugWIRE Pin Mapping
Atmel-ICE AVR port pin Target pins Mini-squid pin
Pin 1 (TCK) 1
Pin 2 (GND) GND 2
Pin 3 (TDO) 3
Pin 4 (VTG) VTG 4
Pin 5 (TMS) 5
Pin 6 (nSRST) RESET 6
Pin 7 (Not connected) 7
Pin 8 (nTRST) 8
Pin 9 (TDI) 9
Pin 10 (GND) 0
3.6 Connecting to a SPI Target
The recommended pinout for the 6-pin SPI connector is shown in Figure 4-8, “SPI Header
Pinout” on page 23.
Connection to a 6-pin 100-mil SPI header
Use the 6-pin 100-mil tap on the flat cable (included in some kits) to connect to a standard 100-mil SPI header.
Connection to a 6-pin 50-mil SPI header
Use the adapter board (included in some kits) to connect to a standard 50-mil SPI header.
Connection to a custom 100-mil header
The 10-pin mini-squid cable should be used to connect between the Atmel-ICE AVR connector port and the
target board. Six connections are required, as described in the table below.Atmel-ICE [USER GUIDE]
42330A-MCU-07/2014
17
Note The SPI interface is effectively disabled when the debugWIRE enable fuse (DWEN) is
programmed, even if SPIEN fuse is also programmed. To re-enable the SPI interface, the 'disable
debugWIRE' command must be issued while in a debugWIRE debugging session. Disabling
debugWIRE in this manner requires that the SPIEN fuse is already programmed. If Atmel Studio
fails to disable debugWIRE, it is probable that the SPIEN fuse is NOT programmed. If this is the
case, it is necessary to use a high-voltage programming interface to program the SPIEN fuse.
Table 3-5. Atmel-ICE SPI Pin Mapping
Atmel-ICE AVR port
pins
Target pins Mini-squid pin SPI pinout
Pin 1 (TCK) SCK 1 3
Pin 2 (GND) GND 2 6
Pin 3 (TDO) MISO 3 1
Pin 4 (VTG) VTG 4 2
Pin 5 (TMS) 5
Pin 6 (nSRST) /RESET 6 5
Pin 7 (Not connected) 7
Pin 8 (nTRST) 8
Pin 9 (TDI) MOSI 9 4
Pin 10 (GND) 0
3.7 Connecting to a TPI Target
The recommended pinout for the 6-pin TPI connector is shown in Figure 4-9, “TPI Header
Pinout” on page 23.
Connection to a 6-pin 100-mil TPI header
Use the 6-pin 100-mil tap on the flat cable (included in some kits) to connect to a standard 100-mil TPI header.
Connection to a 6-pin 50-mil TPI header
Use the adapter board (included in some kits) to connect to a standard 50-mil TPI header.
Connection to a custom 100-mil header
The 10-pin mini-squid cable should be used to connect between the Atmel-ICE AVR connector port
and the target board. Six connections are required, as described in Table 3-6, “Atmel-ICE TPI Pin
Mapping” on page 17.
Table 3-6. Atmel-ICE TPI Pin Mapping
Atmel-ICE AVR port
pins
Target pins Mini-squid pin TPI pinout
Pin 1 (TCK) CLOCK 1 3
Pin 2 (GND) GND 2 6
Pin 3 (TDO) DATA 3 1
Pin 4 (VTG) VTG 4 2
Pin 5 (TMS) 5
Pin 6 (nSRST) /RESET 6 5
Pin 7 (Not connected) 7
Pin 8 (nTRST) 8
Pin 9 (TDI) 9
Pin 10 (GND) 0
3.8 Connecting to a SWD TargetAtmel-ICE [USER GUIDE]
42330A-MCU-07/2014
18
The ARM SWD interface is s subset of the JTAG interface, making use of TCK and TMS pins, which means
that when connecting to an SWD device, the 10-pin JTAG connector can technically be used. The ARM JTAG
and AVR JTAG connectors are however not pin-compatible, so this depends upon the layout of the target board
in use. When using STK600 or a board making use of the AVR JTAG pinout, the AVR connector port on the
Atmel-ICE must be used. When connecting to a board which makes use of the ARM JTAG pinout, the SAM
connector port on the Atmel-ICE must be used.
The recommended pinout for the 10-pin Cortex Debug connector is shown in Figure 4-10, “Recommended
ARM SWD/JTAG Header Pinout” on page 23.
Connection to a 10-pin 50-mil Cortex header
Use the flat cable (included in some kits) to connect to a standard 50-mil Cortex header.
Connection to a 10-pin 100-mil Cortex-layout header
Use the adapter board (included in some kits) to connect to a 100-mil Cortex-pinout header.
Connection to a 20-pin 100-mil SAM header
Use the adapter board (included in some kits) to connect to a 20-pin 100-mil SAM header.
Connection to a custom 100-mil header
The 10-pin mini-squid cable should be used to connect between the Atmel-ICE AVR or SAM connector port
and the target board. Six connections are required, as described in the table below.
Table 3-7. Atmel-ICE SWD Pin Mapping
Name AVR
port
pin
SAM
port
pin
Description
SWDCLK 1 4 Serial Wire Debug Clock.
SWDIO 5 2 Serial Wire Debug Data Input/Output.
SWO 3 6 Serial Wire Output (optional- not implemented on all devices).
nSRST 6 10 Reset.
VTG 4 1 Target voltage reference.
GND 2, 10 3, 5 Ground.Atmel-ICE [USER GUIDE]
42330A-MCU-07/2014
19
4. On-Chip Debugging
4.1 Introduction to On-Chip Debugging (OCD)
A traditional Emulator is a tool which tries to imitate the exact behaviour of a target device. The closer this
behaviour is to the actual device’s behaviour, the better the emulation will be.
The Atmel-ICE is not a traditional Emulator. Instead, the Atmel-ICE interfaces with the internal On-Chip Debug
system inside the target device, providing a mechanism for monitoring and controlling its execution. In this way
the application being debugged is not emulated, but actually executed on the real target device.
With an OCD system, the application can be executed whilst maintaining exact electrical and timing
characteristics in the target system – something not technically realisable with a traditional emulator.
Run Mode
When in Run mode, the execution of code is completely independent of the Atmel-ICE. The Atmel-ICE will
continuously monitor the target device to see if a break condition has occurred. When this happens the OCD
system will interrogate the device through its debug interface, allowing the user to view the internal state of the
device.
Stopped Mode
When a breakpoint is reached, program execution is halted, but all I/O will continue to run as if no breakpoint
had occurred. For example assume that a USART transmit has just been initiated when a breakpoint is
reached. In this case the USART continues to run at full speed completing the transmission, even though the
core is in stopped mode.
Hardware Breakpoints
The target OCD module contains a number of program counter comparators implemented in hardware. When
the program counter matches the value stored in one of the comparator registers, the OCD enters stopped
mode. Since hardware breakpoints require dedicated hardware on the OCD module, the number of breakpoints
available depends upon the size of the OCD module implemented on the target. Usually one such hardware
comparator is ‘reserved’ by the debugger for internal use. For more information on the hardware breakpoints
available in the various OCD modules, see “Atmel OCD Implementations” on page 23 .
Software Breakpoints
A software breakpoint is a BREAK instruction placed in program memory on the target device. When this
instruction is loaded, program execution will break and the OCD enters stopped mode. To continue execution
a "start" command has to be given from the OCD. Not all AVR devices have OCD modules supporting the
BREAK instruction. For more information on the software breakpoints available in the various OCD modules,
see “Atmel OCD Implementations” on page 23.
For further information on the considerations and restrictions when using an OCD system, see “Special
Considerations” on page 32.
4.2 Physical Interfaces
The Atmel-ICE supports several hardware interfaces as described in the following sections.
4.2.1 JTAG
The JTAG interface consists of a 4-wire Test Access Port (TAP) controller that is compliant with the IEEE
1149.1 standard. The IEEE standard was developed to provide an industry-standard way to efficiently test
circuit board connectivity (Boundary Scan). Atmel AVR and SAM devices have extended this functionality to
include full Programming and On-Chip Debugging support.
Figure 4-1. JTAG Interface Basics
Atmel
target device
Atmel-ICE
Vcc
TMS
TDI
TDO
TCKAtmel-ICE [USER GUIDE]
42330A-MCU-07/2014
20
When designing an application PCB which includes an Atmel AVR with the JTAG interface, it is recommended
to use the pinout as shown in Figure 4-2, “AVR JTAG Header Pinout” on page 20. The Atmel-ICE can
connect to both 100-mil and 50-mil variants of this pinout.
Figure 4-2. AVR JTAG Header Pinout
GND
VCC
/RESET
(TRST)
GND
TCK
TDO
TMS
TDI
1 2
AVR JTAG
(NC)
Table 4-1. AVR JTAG Pin Description
Name Pin Description
TCK 1 Test Clock (clock signal from the Atmel-ICE into the target device).
TMS 5 Test Mode Select (control signal from the Atmel-ICE into the target device).
TDI 9 Test Data In (data transmitted from the Atmel-ICE into the target device).
TDO 3 Test Data Out (data transmitted from the target device into the Atmel-ICE).
nTRST 8 Test Reset (optional, only on some AVR devices). Used to reset the JTAG TAP
controller.
nSRST 6 Reset (optional) Used to reset the target device. Connecting this pin is recommended
since it allows the Atmel-ICE to hold the target device in a reset state, which can be
essential to debugging in certain scenarios.
VTG 4 Target voltage reference. The Atmel-ICE samples the target voltage on this pin in
order to power the level converters correctly. The Atmel-ICE draws less than 3mA
from this pin in debugWIRE mode and less than 1mA in other modes.
GND 2, 10 Ground. Both must be connected to ensure that the Atmel-ICE and the target device
share the same ground reference.
Tip Remember to include a decoupling capacitor between pin 4 and GND.
When designing an application PCB which includes an Atmel SAM with the JTAG interface, it is recommended
to use the pinout as shown in Figure 4-3, “SAM JTAG Header Pinout” on page 20. The Atmel-ICE can
connect to both 100-mil and 50-mil variants of this pinout.
Figure 4-3. SAM JTAG Header Pinout
TMS
TCK
TDO
TDI
nRESET
VCC
GND
GND
(KEY)
GND
1 2
SAM JTAG
Table 4-2. SAM JTAG pin description
Name Pin Description
TCK 4 Test Clock (clock signal from the Atmel-ICE into the target device).
TMS 3 Test Mode Select (control signal from the Atmel-ICE into the target device).
TDI 8 Test Data In (data transmitted from the Atmel-ICE into the target device).
TDO 6 Test Data Out (data transmitted from the target device into the Atmel-ICE).
nRESET 10 Reset (optional) Used to reset the target device. Connecting this pin is recommended
since it allows the Atmel-ICE to hold the target device in a reset state, which can be
essential to debugging in certain scenarios.Atmel-ICE [USER GUIDE]
42330A-MCU-07/2014
21
Name Pin Description
VTG 1 Target voltage reference. The Atmel-ICE samples the target voltage on this pin in
order to power the level converters correctly. The Atmel-ICE draws less than 3mA
from this pin in debugWIRE mode and less than 1mA in other modes.
GND 3, 5, 9 Ground. All must be connected to ensure that the Atmel-ICE and the target device
share the same ground reference.
KEY 7 Connected internally to TRST pin on the AVR connector. Recommended as not
connected.
Tip Remember to include a decoupling capacitor between pin 4 and GND.
The JTAG interface allows for several devices to be connected to a single interface in a daisy-chain
configuration. The target devices must all be powered by the same supply voltage, share a common ground
node, and must be connected as shown in Figure 4-4, “JTAG Daisy-Chain” on page 21.
Figure 4-4. JTAG Daisy-Chain
target
device
1
Atmel-ICE
TMS
TDI
TDO
TCK
target
device
2
target
device
3
When connecting devices in a daisy-chain, the following points must be considered:
● All devices must share a common ground, connected to GND on the Atmel-ICE probe
● All devices must be operating on the same target voltage. VTG on the Atmel-ICE must be connected to this
voltage
● TMS and TCK are connected in parallel; TDI and TDO are connected in a serial chain
● nSRST on the Atmel-ICE probe must be connected to RESET on the devices if any one of the devices in
the chain disables its JTAG port
● "Devices before" refers to the number of JTAG devices that the TDI signal has to pass through in the daisy
chain before reaching the target device. Similarly "devices after" is the number of devices that the signal
has to pass through after the target device before reaching the Atmel-ICE TDO pin
● "Instruction bits before" and "after" refers to the sum total of all JTAG devices' instruction register lengths
which are connected before and after the target device in the daisy chain
● The total IR length (instruction bits before + Atmel AVR IR length + instruction bits after) is limited to a
maximum of 256 bits. The number of devices in the chain is limited to 15 before and 15 after
Tip Daisy chaining example: TDI → ATmega1280 → ATxmega128A1 → ATUC3A0512 → TDO
In order to connect to the Atmel AVR XMEGA device, the daisy chain settings are:
● Devices before: 1
● Devices after: 1
● Instruction bits before: 4 (8-bit AVR devices have 4 IR bits)
● Instruction bits after: 5 (32-bit AVR devices have 5 IR bits)
4.2.2 aWireAtmel-ICE [USER GUIDE]
42330A-MCU-07/2014
22
The aWire interface makes use the RESET wire of the AVR device to allow programming and debugging
functions. A special enable sequence is transmitted by the Atmel-ICE which disables the default RESET
functionality of the pin.
When designing an application PCB which includes an Atmel AVR with the aWire interface, it is recommended
to use the pinout as shown in Figure 4-5, “aWire Header Pinout” on page 22. The Atmel-ICE ships with both
100-mil and 50-mil adapters supporting this pinout.
Figure 4-5. aWire Header Pinout
(RESET_N) DATA VCC
GND
1 2
aWire
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
Tip Since aWire is a half-duplex interface, a pull-up resistor on the RESET line in the order of 47k is
recommended to avoid false start-bit detection when changing direction.
The aWire interface can be used as both a programming and debugging interface, all features of the OCD
system available through the 10-pin JTAG interface can also be accessed using aWire.
4.2.3 PDI Physical
The Program and Debug Interface (PDI) is an Atmel proprietary interface for external programming and onchip
debugging of a device. PDI Physical is a 2-pin interface providing a bi-directional half-duplex synchronous
communication with the target device.
When designing an application PCB which includes an Atmel AVR with the PDI interface, the pinout shown in
Figure 4-6, “PDI Header Pinout” on page 22 should be used. One of the 6-pin adapters provided with the
Atmel-ICE kit can then be used to connect the Atmel-ICE probe to the application PCB.
Figure 4-6. PDI Header Pinout
PDI_DATA
PDI_CLK
VCC
GND
1 2
PDI
(NC) (NC)
4.2.4 debugWIRE
The debugWIRE interface was developed by Atmel for use on low pin-count devices. Unlike the JTAG interface
which uses four pins, debugWIRE makes use of just a single pin (RESET) for bi-directional half-duplex
asynchronous communication with the debugger tool.
When designing an application PCB which includes an Atmel AVR with the debugWIRE interface, the pinout
shown in Figure 4-7, “debugWIRE (SPI) Header Pinout” on page 22 should be used.
Figure 4-7. debugWIRE (SPI) Header Pinout
PDO/MISO
SCK
/RESET
VCC
PDI/MOSI
GND
1 2
SPI
Note The debugWIRE interface can not be used as a programming interface. This means that the SPI
interface must also be available (as shown in Figure 4-8, “SPI Header Pinout” on page 23) in
order to program the target.
When the debugWIRE enable (DWEN) fuse is programmed and lock-bits are un-programmed, the debugWIRE
system within the target device is activated. The RESET pin is configured as a wire-AND (open-drain)
bi-directional I/O pin with pull-up enabled and becomes the communication gateway between target and
debugger.
4.2.5 SPIAtmel-ICE [USER GUIDE]
42330A-MCU-07/2014
23
In-System Programming uses the target Atmel AVR’s internal SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) to
download code into the flash and EEPROM memories. It is not a debugging interface. When designing an
application PCB which includes an AVR with the SPI interface, the pinout shown in Figure 4-8, “SPI Header
Pinout” on page 23 should be used.
Figure 4-8. SPI Header Pinout
PDO/MISO
SCK
/RESET
VCC
PDI/MOSI
GND
1 2
SPI
4.2.6 TPI
TPI is a programming-only interface for some AVR ATtiny devices. It is not a debugging interface, and these
devices to not have OCD capability. When designing an application PCB which includes an AVR with the TPI
interface, the pinout shown in Figure 4-9, “TPI Header Pinout” on page 23 should be used.
Figure 4-9. TPI Header Pinout
TPIDATA
TPICLK
/RESET
VCC
GND
1 2
TPI
(NC)
4.2.7 SWD
The ARM SWD interface is a subset of the JTAG interface, making use of TCK and TMS pins. The ARM JTAG
and AVR JTAG connectors are however not pin-compatible, so when designing an application PCB which uses
a SAM device with SWD or JTAG interface, it is recommended to use the ARM pinout shown in Figure 4-10,
“Recommended ARM SWD/JTAG Header Pinout” on page 23. The SAM connector port on the Atmel-ICE
can connect directly to this pinout.
Figure 4-10. Recommended ARM SWD/JTAG Header Pinout
SWDIO
SWDCLK
SWO
nRESET
VCC
GND
GND
(KEY)
GND
1 2
SAM SWD
(NC)
The Atmel-ICE is capable of streaming UART-format ITM trace to the host computer. Trace is captured on the
TRACE/SWO pin of the 10-pin header (JTAG TDO pin). Data is buffered internally on the Atmel-ICE and is sent
over the HID interface to the host computer. The maximum reliable data rate is about 3MB/s.
4.3 Atmel OCD Implementations
4.3.1 Atmel AVR UC3 OCD (JTAG and aWire)
The Atmel AVR UC3 OCD system is designed in accordance with the Nexus 2.0 standard (IEEE-ISTO
5001™-2003), which is a highly flexible and powerful open on-chip debug standard for 32-bit microcontrollers.
It supports the following features:
● Nexus compliant debug solution
● OCD supports any CPU speed
● Six program counter hardware breakpoints
● Two data breakpoints
● Breakpoints can be configured as watchpoints
● Hardware breakpoints can be combined to give break on rangesAtmel-ICE [USER GUIDE]
42330A-MCU-07/2014
24
● Unlimited number of user program breakpoints (using BREAK)
● Real-time program counter branch tracing, data trace, process trace (not supported by Atmel-ICE)
For special considerations regarding this debug interface, see “Atmel AVR UC3 OCD” on page 35.
For more information regarding the UC3 OCD system, consult the AVR32UC Technical Reference Manuals,
located on www.atmel.com/uc3
1
.
4.3.2 Atmel AVR XMEGA OCD (JTAG and PDI Physical)
The Atmel AVR XMEGA OCD is otherwise known as PDI (Program and Debug Interface). Two physical
interfaces (JTAG and PDI physical) provide access to the same OCD implementation within the device. It
supports the following features:
● Complete program flow control
● One dedicated program address comparator or symbolic breakpoint (reserved)
● Four hardware comparators
● Unlimited number of user program breakpoints (using BREAK)
● No limitation on system clock frequency
For special considerations regarding this debug interface, see “Special Considerations” on page 32.
4.3.3 Atmel megaAVR OCD (JTAG)
The Atmel megaAVR OCD is based on the JTAG physical interface. It supports the following features:
● Complete program flow control
● Four program memory (hardware) breakpoints (one is reserved)
● Hardware breakpoints can be combined to form data breakpoints
● Unlimited number of program breakpoints (using BREAK) (except ATmega128[A])
For special considerations regarding this debug interface, see “Atmel megaAVR OCD (JTAG)” on page 33.
4.3.4 Atmel megaAVR / tinyAVR OCD (debugWIRE)
The debugWIRE OCD is a specialised OCD module with a limited feature set specially designed for Atmel AVR
devices with low pin-count. It supports the following features:
● Complete program flow control
● Unlimited Number of User Program Breakpoints (using BREAK)
● Automatic baud configuration based on target clock
For special considerations regarding this debug interface, see “Atmel megaAVR OCD (JTAG)” on page 33.
4.3.5 ARM Coresight Components
Atmel ARM Cortex-M based microcontrollers implement Coresight™ compliant OCD components. The features
of these components can vary from device to device. For further information consult the device's datasheet.
1
http://www.atmel.com/uc3Atmel-ICE [USER GUIDE]
42330A-MCU-07/2014
25
5. Hardware Description
5.1 LEDs
The Atmel-ICE top panel has three LEDs which indicate the status of current debug or programming sessions.
Table 5-1. LEDs
LED Function Description
Left Target power GREEN when target power is OK. Flashing indicates a target power
error. Does not light up until a programming/debugging session
connection is started.
Middle Main power RED when main-board power is OK.
Right Status GREEN when the target is running. ORANGE when target is
stopped.
5.2 Rear Panel
The rear panel of the Atmel-ICE houses the micro-B USB connector.
5.3 Bottom Panel
The bottom panel of the Atmel-ICE has a sticker which shows the serial number and date of manufacture.
When seeking technical support, include these details.Atmel-ICE [USER GUIDE]
42330A-MCU-07/2014
26
5.4 Architecture Description
The Atmel-ICE architecture is shown in the block diagram in Figure 5-1, “Atmel-ICE block
diagram” on page 26.
Figure 5-1. Atmel-ICE block diagram
5.4.1 Atmel-ICE Mainboard
Power is supplied to the Atmel-ICE from the USB bus, regulated to 3.3V by a step-down switchmode regulator.
The VTG pin is used as a reference input only, and a separate power supply feeds the variable-voltage side of
the on-board level converters At the heart of the Atmel-ICE mainboard is the Atmel AVR UC3 microcontroller
AT32UC3A4256, which runs at between 1MHz and 60MHz depending on the tasks being processed. The
microcontroller includes an on-chip USB 2.0 high-speed module, allowing high data throughput to and from the
debugger.
Communication between the Atmel-ICE and the target device is done through a bank of level converters that
shift signals between the target's operating voltage and the internal voltage level on the Atmel-ICE. Also in
the signal path are zener overvoltage protection diodes, series termination resistors, inductive filters and ESD
protection diodes. All signal channels can be operated in the range 1.62V to 5.5V, although the Atmel-ICE
hardware can not drive out a higher voltage than 5.0V. Maximum operating frequency varies according to the
target interface in use.Atmel-ICE [USER GUIDE]
42330A-MCU-07/2014
27
5.4.2 Atmel-ICE Target Connectors
The Atmel-ICE does not have an active probe. A 50-mil IDC cable is used to connect to the target application
either directly, or through the adapters included in some kits. For more information on the cabling and adapters,
see section Assembling the Atmel-ICE
5.4.3 Atmel-ICE target Connectors Part Numbers
In order to connect the Atmel-ICE 50-mil IDC cable directly to a target board, any standard 50-mil 10-pin
header should suffice. It is advised to use keyed headers to ensure correct orientation when connecting to the
target, such as those used on the adapter board included with the kit.
The part number for this header is: FTSH-105-01-L-DV-K-A-P from SAMTEC.Atmel-ICE [USER GUIDE]
42330A-MCU-07/2014
28
6. Software Integration
6.1 Atmel Studio
6.1.1 Software Integration in Atmel Studio
Atmel Studio is an Integrated Development Environment (IDE) for writing and debugging Atmel AVR and Atmel
SAM applications in Windows environments. Atmel Studio provides a project management tool, source file
editor, simulator, assembler and front-end for C/C++, programming, emulation and on-chip debugging.
Atmel Studio version 6.2 or later must be used in conjunction with the Atmel-ICE.
6.1.2 Programming Options
Atmel Studio supports programming of Atmel AVR and Atmel SAM ARM devices using the Atmel-ICE. The
programming dialog can be configured to use JTAG, aWire, SPI, PDI, TPI or SWD modes, according to the
target device selected.
When configuring the clock frequency, different rules apply for different interfaces and target families:
● SPI programming makes use of the target clock. Configure the clock frequency to be lower than one fourth
the frequency at which the target device is currently running
● JTAG programming on Atmel megaAVR devices is clocked by the programmer. This means that the
programming clock frequency is limited to the maximum operating frequency of the device itself. (Usually
16MHz)
● AVR XMEGA programming on both JTAG and PDI interfaces is clocked by the programmer. This means
that the programming clock frequency is limited to the maximum operating frequency of the device itself.
(Usually 32MHz)
● AVR UC3 programming on JTAG interface is clocked by the programmer. This means that the
programming clock frequency is limited to the maximum operating frequency of the device itself. (Limited to
33MHz)
● AVR UC3 programming on aWire interface is clocked by the programmer. The optimal frequency is given
by the SAB bus speed in the target device. The Atmel-ICE debugger will automatically tune the aWire baud
rate to meet this criteria. Although it's usually not necessary the user can limit the maximum baud rate if
needed (e.g. in noisy environments)
● SAM device programming on SWD interface is clocked by the programmer. The maximum frequency
supported by Atmel-ICE is 2MHz. The frequency should not exceed the target CPU frequency times 10,
.
6.1.3 Debug Options
When debugging an Atmel AVR device using Atmel Studio, the 'Tool' tab in the project properties view contains
some important configuration options. Those options which need further explanation are:
● Target Clock Frequency
Accurately setting the target clock frequency is vital to achieve reliable debugging of Atmel megaAVR
device over the JTAG interface. This setting should be less than one fourth of the lowest operating
frequency of your AVR target device in the application being debugged. See “Atmel megaAVR OCD
(JTAG)” on page 33 for more information.
Debug sessions on debugWIRE target devices are clocked by the target device itself, and thus
no frequency setting is required. The Atmel-ICE will automatically select the correct baud rate for
communicating at the start of a debug session. However, if you are experiencing reliability problems
related to a noisy debug environment, it is possible to force the debugWIRE speed to a fraction of its
"recommended" setting.
Debug sessions on AVR XMEGA target devices can be clocked at up to the maximum speed of the device
itself (usually 32MHz).
Debug sessions on AVR UC3 target devices over the JTAG interface can be clocked at up to the maximum
speed of the device itself (limited to 33MHz). However the optimal frequency will be slightly below the
current SAB clock on the target device.Atmel-ICE [USER GUIDE]
42330A-MCU-07/2014
29
Debug sessions on UC3 target devices over the aWire interface will be automatically tuned to the optimal
baud rate by the Atmel-ICE itself. However, if you are experiencing reliability problems related to a noisy
debug environment, it is possible to force the aWire speed below a configurable limit.
Debug sessions on SAM target devices over the SWD interface can be clocked at up to ten times the CPU
clock (but limited to 2MHz max).
● Preserve EEPROM
Select this option to avoid erasing the EEPROM during reprogramming of the target before a debug
session.
● Use external reset
If your target application disables the JTAG interface, the external reset must be pulled low during
programming. Selecting this option avoids repeatedly being asked whether to use the external reset.Atmel-ICE [USER GUIDE]
42330A-MCU-07/2014
30
7. Command Line Utility
Atmel Studio comes with a command line utility called atprogram that can be used to program targets using
the Atmel Atmel-ICE. During the Atmel Studio installation a shortcut called Atmel Studio 6.2 Command Prompt
were created in the Atmel folder on the Start menu. By double clicking this shortcut a command prompt will be
opened and programming commands can be entered. The command line utility is installed in the Atmel Studio
installation path in the folder Atmel/Atmel Studio 6.2/atbackend/.
To get more help on the command line utility type the command: atprogram --help.Atmel-ICE [USER GUIDE]
42330A-MCU-07/2014
31
8. Advanced Debugging Techniques
8.1 Atmel AVR UC3 Targets
8.1.1 EVTI / EVTO Usage
The EVTI and EVTO pins are not accessible on the Atmel-ICE. However, they can still be used in conjunction
with other external equipment.
EVTI can be used for the following purposes:
● The target can be forced to stop execution in response to an external event. If the Event In Control (EIC)
bits in the DC register are written to 0b01, high-to-low transition on the EVTI pin will generate a breakpoint
condition. EVTI must remain low for one CPU clock cycle to guarantee that a breakpoint is triggered. The
External Breakpoint bit (EXB) in DS is set when this occurs
● Generating trace synchronisation messages. Not used by the Atmel-ICE
EVTO can be used for the following purposes:
● Indicating that the CPU has entered debug mode. Setting the EOS bits in DC to 0b01 causes the EVTO
pin to be pulled low for one CPU clock cycle when the target device enters debug mode. This signal can be
used as a trigger source for an external oscilloscope
● Indicating that the CPU has reached a breakpoint or watchpoint. By setting the EOC bit in a corresponding
Breakpoint / Watchpoint Control Register, breakpoint or watchpoint status is indicated on the EVTO pin.
The EOS bits in DC must be set to 0xb10 to enable this feature. The EVTO pin can then be connected to
an external oscilloscope in order to examine watchpoint timing
● Generating trace timing signals. Not used by the Atmel-ICE
8.2 debugWIRE Targets
8.2.1 Software Breakpoints
The debugWIRE OCD is drastically scaled down when compared to the Atmel megaAVR (JTAG) OCD. This
means that it does not have any program counter breakpoint comparators available to the user for debugging
purposes. One such comparator does exist for purposes of run-to-cursor and single-step operations, but user
breakpoints are not supported in hardware
Instead, the debugger must make use of the Atmel AVR BREAK instruction. This instruction can be placed
in FLASH, and when it is loaded for execution will cause the AVR CPU to enter stopped mode. To support
breakpoints during debugging, the debugger must insert a BREAK instruction into FLASH at the point at which
the users requests a breakpoint. The original instruction must be cached for later replacement. When single
stepping over a BREAK instruction, the debugger has to execute the original cached instruction in order to
preserve program behaviour. In extreme cases, the BREAK has to be removed from FLASH and replaced
later. All these scenarios can cause apparent delays when single stepping from breakpoints, which will be
exacerbated when the target clock frequency is very low.
It is thus recommended to observe the following guidelines, where possible:
● Always run the target at as high a frequency as possible during debugging. The debugWIRE physical
interface is clocked from the target clock
● Try to minimise on the number of breakpoint additions and removals, as each one require a FLASH page
to be replaced on the target
● Try to add or remove a small number of breakpoints at a time, to minimise the number of FLASH page
write operations
● If possible, avoid placing breakpoints on double-word instructionsAtmel-ICE [USER GUIDE]
42330A-MCU-07/2014
32
9. Special Considerations
9.1 Atmel AVR XMEGA OCD
OCD and clocking
When the MCU enters stopped mode, the OCD clock is used as MCU clock. The OCD clock is either the JTAG
TCK if the JTAG interface is being used, or the PDI_CLK if the PDI interface is being used.
I/O modules in stopped mode
In contrast to earlier Atmel megaAVR devices, in XMEGA the I/O modules are stopped in stop mode. This
means that USART transmissions will be interrupted, timers (and PWM) will be stopped.
Hardware breakpoints
There are four hardware breakpoint comparators - two address comparators and two value comparators. They
have certain restrictions:
● All breakpoints must be of the same type (program or data)
● All data breakpoints must be in the same memory area (IO, SRAM or XRAM)
● There can only be one breakpoint if address range is used
Here are the different combinations that can be set:
● Two single data or program address breakpoints
● One data or program address range breakpoint
● Two single data address breakpoints with single value compare
● One data breakpoint with address range, value range or both
Atmel Studio will tell you if the breakpoint can't be set, and why. Data breakpoints have priority over program
breakpoints, if software breakpoints are available.
External reset and PDI physical
The PDI physical interface uses the reset line as clock. While debugging, the reset pullup should be 10k
or more or be removed. Any reset capacitors should be removed. Other external reset sources should be
disconnected.
Debugging with sleep for ATxmegaA1 rev H and earlier
There was a bug in the early versions of the ATxmegaA1 family that prevented the OCD to be enabled while
the device was in certain sleep modes. There are two methods to use to get back on the debugging:
● Go into the Atmel-ICE Options in the Tools menu and enable "Always activate external reset when
reprogramming device"
● Perform a chip erase
The sleep modes that trigger this bug are:
● Power-down
● Power-save
● Standby
● Extended standby
9.2 Atmel megaAVR OCD and debugWIRE OCD
IO Peripherals
Most I/O peripherals will continue to run even though the program execution is stopped by a breakpoint.
Example: If a breakpoint is reached during a UART transmission, the transmission will be completed andAtmel-ICE [USER GUIDE]
42330A-MCU-07/2014
33
corresponding bits set. The TXC (transmit complete) flag will be set and will be available on the next single step
of the code even though it normally would happen later in an actual device.
All I/O modules will continue to run in stopped mode with the following two exceptions:
● Timer/Counters (configurable using the software front-end)
● Watchdog Timer (always stopped to prevent resets during debugging)
Single Stepping I/O access
Since the I/O continues to run in stopped mode, care should be taken to avoid certain timing issues. For
example, the code:
OUT PORTB, 0xAA<
IN TEMP, PINB
When running this code normally, the TEMP register would not read back 0xAA because the data would not yet
have been latched physically to the pin by the time it is sampled by the IN operation. A NOP instruction must be
placed between the OUT and the IN instruction to ensure that the correct value is present in the PIN register.
However, when single stepping this function through the OCD, this code will always give 0xAA in the PIN
register since the I/O is running at full speed even when the core is stopped during the single stepping.
Single stepping and timing
Certain registers need to be read or written within a given number of cycles after enabling a control signal.
Since the I/O clock and peripherals continue to run at full speed in stopped mode, single stepping through such
code will not meet the timing requirements. Between two single steps, the I/O clock may have run millions of
cycles. To successfully read or write registers with such timing requirements, the whole read or write sequence
should be performed as an atomic operation running the device at full speed. This can be done by using a
macro or a function call to execute the code, or use the run-to-cursor function in the debugging environment.
Accessing 16-bit Registers
The Atmel AVR peripherals typically contain several 16-bit registers that can be accessed via the 8-bit data bus
(eg: TCNTn of a 16-bit timer). The 16-bit register must be byte accessed using two read or write operations.
Breaking in the middle of a 16-bit access or single stepping through this situation may result in erroneous
values.
Restricted I/O registeraccess
Certain registers cannot be read without affecting their contents. Such registers include those which contain
flags which are cleared by reading, or buffered data registers (eg: UDR). The software front-end will prevent
reading these registers when in stopped mode to preserve the intended non-intrusive nature of OCD
debugging. In addition, some registers cannot safely be written without side-effects occurring - these registers
are read-only. For example:
● Flag registers, where a flag is cleared by writing '1' to any bit. These registers are read-only
● UDR and SPDR registers cannot be read without affecting the state of the module. These registers are not
accessible
9.2.1 Atmel megaAVR OCD (JTAG)
Software breakpoints
Since it contains an early version of the OCD module, ATmega128[A] does not support the use of the BREAK
instruction for software breakpoints.
JTAG clock
The target clock frequency must be accurately specified in the software front-end before starting a debug
session. For synchronisation reasons, the JTAG TCK signal must be less than one fourth of the target clock
frequency for reliable debugging. When programming via the JTAG interface, the TCK frequency is limited by
the maximum frequency rating of the target device, and not the actual clock frequency being used.
When using the internal RC oscillator, be aware that the frequency may vary from device to device and is
affected by temperature and VCC changes. Be conservative when specifying the target clock frequency.Atmel-ICE [USER GUIDE]
42330A-MCU-07/2014
34
See “Debug Options” on page 28 for details on how to set the target clock frequency using the software frontend.
JTAGEN and OCDEN fuses
The JTAG interface is enabled using the JTAGEN fuse, which is programmed by default. This allows access to
the JTAG programming interface. Through this mechanism, the OCDEN fuse can be programmed (by default
OCDEN is un-programmed). This allows access to the OCD in order to facilitate debugging the device. The
software front-end will always ensure that the OCDEN fuse is left un-programmed when terminating a session,
thereby restricting unnecessary power consumption by the OCD module. If the JTAGEN fuse is unintentionally
disabled, it can only be re-enabled using SPI or PP programming methods.
If the JTAGEN fuse is programmed, the JTAG interface can still be disabled in firmware by setting the JTD bit.
This will render code un-debuggable, and should not be done when attempting a debug session. If such code
is already executing on the Atmel AVR device when starting a debug session, the Atmel-ICE will assert the
RESET line while connecting. If this line is wired correctly, it will force the target AVR device into reset, thereby
allowing a JTAG connection.
If the JTAG interface is enabled, the JTAG pins cannot be used for alternative pin functions. They will remain
dedicated JTAG pins until either the JTAG interface is disabled by setting the JTD bit from the program code, or
by clearing the JTAGEN fuse through a programming interface.
Note Be sure to check the "use external reset" checkbox in both the programming dialog and debug
options dialog in order to allow the Atmel-ICE to assert the RESET line and re-enable the JTAG
interface on devices which are running code which disables the JTAG interface by setting the JTD
bit.
IDR events
When the application program writes a byte of data to the OCDR register of the AVR device being debugged,
the Atmel-ICE reads this value out and displays it in the message window of the software front-end. The IDR
register is polled every 50ms, so writing to it at a higher frequency will NOT yield reliable results. When the
AVR device loses power while it is being debugged, spurious IDR events may be reported. This happens
because the Atmel-ICE may still poll the device as the target voltage drops below the AVR’s minimum operating
voltage.
9.2.2 debugWIRE OCD
The debugWIRE communication pin (dW) is physically located on the same pin as the external reset (RESET).
An external reset source is therefore not supported when the debugWIRE interface is enabled.
The debugWIRE Enable fuse (DWEN) must be set on the target device in order for the debugWIRE interface
to function. This fuse is by default un-programmed when the Atmel AVR device is shipped from the factory. The
debugWIRE interface itself cannot be used to set this fuse. In order to set the DWEN fuse, SPI mode must be
used. The software front-end handles this automatically provided that the necessary SPI pins are connected. It
can also be set using SPI programming from the Atmel Studio programming dialog.
● Either:
Attempt to start a debug session on the debugWIRE part. If the debugWIRE interface is not enabled, Atmel
Studio will offer to retry, or attempt to enable debugWIRE using SPI programming. If you have the full SPI
header connected, debugWIRE will be enabled, and you will be asked to toggle power on the target - this
is required for the fuse changes to be effective.
● Or:
Open the programming dialog in SPI mode, and verify that the signature matches the correct device.
Check the DWEN fuse to enable debugWIRE.
Note It is important to leave the SPIEN fuse programmed, the RSTDISBL fuse unprogrammed! Not
doing this will render the device stuck in debugWIRE mode, and high-voltage programming
will be required to revert the DWEN setting.
To disable the debugWIRE interface, use high-voltage programming to unprogram the DWEN fuse. Alternately,
use the debugWIRE interface itself to temporarily disable itself, which will allow SPI programming to take place,
provided that the SPIEN fuse is set.Atmel-ICE [USER GUIDE]
42330A-MCU-07/2014
35
Note If the SPIEN fuse was NOT left programmed, Atmel Studio will not be able to complete this
operation, and high-voltage programming must be used.
● During a debug session, select the 'Disable debugWIRE and Close' menu option from the 'Debug' menu.
DebugWIRE will be temporarily disabled, and Atmel Studio will use SPI programming to unprogram the
DWEN fuse
Having the DWEN fuse programmed enables some parts of the clock system to be running in all sleep modes.
This will increase the power consumption of the AVR while in sleep modes. The DWEN Fuse should therefore
always be disabled when debugWIRE is not used.
When designing a target application PCB where debugWIRE will be used, the following considerations must be
made for correct operation:
● Pull-up resistors on the dW/(RESET) line must not be smaller (stronger) than 10kΩ. The pull-up resistor is
not required for debugWIRE functionality, since the debugger tool provides this
● Connecting the RESET pin directly to VCC will cause the debugWIRE interface to fail, and may result in
hardware damage to the Atmel-ICE
● Any stabilising capacitor connected to the RESET pin must be disconnected when using debugWIRE,
since they will interfere with correct operation of the interface
● All external reset sources or other active drivers on the RESET line must be disconnected, since they may
interfere with the correct operation of the interface
Never program the lock-bits on the target device. The debugWIRE interface requires that lock-bits are cleared
in order to function correctly.
9.3 Atmel AVR UC3 OCD
JTAG interface
On some Atmel AVR UC3 devices the JTAG port is not enabled by default. When using these devices it is
essential to connect the RESET line so that the Atmel-ICE can enable the JTAG interface.
aWire interface
The baud rate of aWire communications depends upon the frequency of the system clock, since data must
be synchronised between these two domains. The Atmel-ICE will automatically detect that the system clock
has been lowered, and re-calibrate its baud rate accordingly. The automatic calibration only works down to a
system clock frequency of 8kHz. Switching to a lower system clock during a debug session may cause contact
with the target to be lost.
If required, the aWire baud rate can be restricted by setting the aWire clock parameter. Automatic detection will
still work, but a ceiling value will be imposed on the results.
Any stabilising capacitor connected to the RESET pin must be disconnected when using aWire since it
will interfere with correct operation of the interface. A weak external pullup (10kΩ or higher) on this line is
recommended.
Shutdown sleep mode
Some AVR UC3 devices have an internal regulator that can be used in 3.3V supply mode with 1.8V regulated
I/O lines. This means that the internal regulator powers both the core and most of the I/O. The Atmel-ICE does
not support the Shutdown sleep mode were this regulator is shut off. In other words this sleep mode cannot be
used during debugging. If it is a requirement to use this sleep mode during debugging, use an Atmel AVR ONE!
debugger instead.
9.4 SAM / Coresight OCD
Some SAM devices include an ERASE pin which is asserted to perform a complete chip erase and unlock
devices on which the security bit is set. This pin is NOT routed to any debug header, and thus the Atmel-ICE is
unable to unlock a device. In such cases the user should perform the erase before starting a debug session.
JTAG interface
The RESET line should always be connected so that the Atmel-ICE can enable the JTAG interface.Atmel-ICE [USER GUIDE]
42330A-MCU-07/2014
36
SWD interface
The RESET line should always be connected so that the Atmel-ICE can enable the SWD interface.Atmel-ICE [USER GUIDE]
42330A-MCU-07/2014
37
10. Firmware Upgrade
For information on how to upgrade the firmware, see the Atmel Studio user guide in Atmel Studio (USER
GUIDE).Atmel-ICE [USER GUIDE]
42330A-MCU-07/2014
38
11. Release History and Known issues
11.1 What's New
Atmel-ICE is new!
11.2 Firmware Release History
11.2.1 Atmel Studio 6.2
Table 11-1. New in this Release
Release platform Atmel Studio 6.2 (final)
Firmware version 1.13
New features None
Fixes ● Fixed oscillator calibration command
● Improved debugWIRE reliability
11.2.2 Atmel Studio 6.2 (beta)2
Table 11-2. New in this Release
Release platform Atmel Studio 6.2 (beta)
Firmware version 1.09
New features First release of Atmel-ICE
Fixes N/A
11.3 Known Issues Concerning the Atmel-ICE
11.3.1 Atmel AVR XMEGA OCD Specific Issues
● For the ATxmegaA1 family, only revision G or later is supported
11.3.2 Atmel megaAVR OCD and Atmel tinyAVR OCD Specific Issues
● Cycling power on ATmega32U6 during a debug session may cause a loss of contact with the device
11.4 Device Support
For a full device support table for all Atmel Tools, see the “Supported Devices” in Atmel Studio (USER GUIDE).Atmel-ICE [USER GUIDE]
42330A-MCU-07/2014
39
12. Product Compliance
12.1 RoHS and WEEE
The Atmel-ICE (all kits) and its accessories are manufactured in accordance to both the RoHS Directive
(2002/95/EC) and the WEEE Directive (2002/96/EC).
12.2 CE and FCC
The Atmel-ICE unit has been tested in accordance to the essential requirements and other relevant provisions
of Directives:
● Directive 2004/108/EC (class B)
● FCC part 15 subpart B
● 2002/95/EC (RoHS, WEEE)
The following standards are used for evaluation:
● EN 61000-6-1 (2007)
● EN 61000-6-3 (2007) + A1(2011)
● FCC CFR 47 Part 15 (2013)
The Technical Construction File is located at:
Atmel Norway
Vestre Rosten 79
7075 Tiller
Norway
Every effort has been made to minimise electromagnetic emissions from this product. However, under
certain conditions, the system (this product connected to a target application circuit) may emit individual
electromagnetic component frequencies which exceed the maximum values allowed by the abovementioned
standards. The frequency and magnitude of the emissions will be determined by several factors, including
layout and routing of the target application with which the product is used.Atmel-ICE [USER GUIDE]
42330A-MCU-07/2014
40
13. Document Revisions
Document
revision
Date Comment
42330A 06/2014 Initial document for release.Atmel Corporation 1600 Technology Drive, San Jose, CA 95110 USA T: (+1)(408) 441.0311 F: (+1)(408) 436.4200 | www.atmel.com
© 2014 Atmel Corporation. / Rev.: 42330A-MCU-07/2014
Atmel®
, Atmel logo and combinations thereof, Enabling Unlimited Possibilities®
, AVR
®
, AVR Studio
®
, megaAVR
®
, tinyAVR
®
, XMEGA®
, and others are registered
trademarks or trademarks of Atmel Corporation in U.S. and other countries. ARM®
, ARM Connected®
, Cortex®
logo and others are the registered trademarks or
trademarks of ARM Ltd. Windows®
is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. Other terms and product names may be
trademarks of others.
DISCLAIMER: The information in this document is provided in connection with Atmel products. No license, express or implied, by estoppel or otherwise, to any intellectual property right is granted
by this document or in connection with the sale of Atmel products. EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE ATMEL TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALES LOCATED ON THE ATMEL WEBSITE,
ATMEL ASSUMES NO LIABILITY WHATSOEVER AND DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY WARRANTY RELATING TO ITS PRODUCTS INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL ATMEL BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS AND PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION,
OR LOSS OF INFORMATION) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS DOCUMENT, EVEN IF ATMEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Atmel makes no representations or warranties with respect to the accuracy or completeness of the contents of this document and reserves the right to make changes to specifications and products
descriptions at any time without notice. Atmel does not make any commitment to update the information contained herein. Unless specifically provided otherwise, Atmel products are not suitable
for, and shall not be used in, automotive applications. Atmel products are not intended, authorized, or warranted for use as components in applications intended to support or sustain life.
SAFETY-CRITICAL, MILITARY, AND AUTOMOTIVE APPLICATIONS DISCLAIMER: Atmel products are not designed for and will not be used in connection with any applications where the failure
of such products would reasonably be expected to result in significant personal injury or death (“Safety-Critical Applications”) without an Atmel officer's specific written consent. Safety-Critical
Applications include, without limitation, life support devices and systems, equipment or systems for the operation of nuclear facilities and weapons systems. Atmel products are not designed
nor intended for use in military or aerospace applications or environments unless specifically designated by Atmel as military- grade. Atmel products are not designed nor intended for use in
automotive applications unless specifically designated by Atmel as automotive-grade.
Features
• High Performance, Low Power Atmel® AVR® 8-Bit Microcontroller
• Advanced RISC Architecture
– 135 Powerful Instructions – Most Single Clock Cycle Execution
– 32 × 8 General Purpose Working Registers
– Fully Static Operation
– Up to 16 MIPS Throughput at 16MHz
– On-Chip 2-cycle Multiplier
• High Endurance Non-volatile Memory Segments
– 64K/128K/256KBytes of In-System Self-Programmable Flash
– 4Kbytes EEPROM
– 8Kbytes Internal SRAM
– Write/Erase Cycles:10,000 Flash/100,000 EEPROM
– Data retention: 20 years at 85°C/ 100 years at 25°C
– Optional Boot Code Section with Independent Lock Bits
• In-System Programming by On-chip Boot Program
• True Read-While-Write Operation
– Programming Lock for Software Security
• Endurance: Up to 64Kbytes Optional External Memory Space
• Atmel® QTouch® library support
– Capacitive touch buttons, sliders and wheels
– QTouch and QMatrix® acquisition
– Up to 64 sense channels
• JTAG (IEEE std. 1149.1 compliant) Interface
– Boundary-scan Capabilities According to the JTAG Standard
– Extensive On-chip Debug Support
– Programming of Flash, EEPROM, Fuses, and Lock Bits through the JTAG Interface
• Peripheral Features
– Two 8-bit Timer/Counters with Separate Prescaler and Compare Mode
– Four 16-bit Timer/Counter with Separate Prescaler, Compare- and Capture Mode
– Real Time Counter with Separate Oscillator
– Four 8-bit PWM Channels
– Six/Twelve PWM Channels with Programmable Resolution from 2 to 16 Bits
(ATmega1281/2561, ATmega640/1280/2560)
– Output Compare Modulator
– 8/16-channel, 10-bit ADC (ATmega1281/2561, ATmega640/1280/2560)
– Two/Four Programmable Serial USART (ATmega1281/2561, ATmega640/1280/2560)
– Master/Slave SPI Serial Interface
– Byte Oriented 2-wire Serial Interface
– Programmable Watchdog Timer with Separate On-chip Oscillator
– On-chip Analog Comparator
– Interrupt and Wake-up on Pin Change
• Special Microcontroller Features
– Power-on Reset and Programmable Brown-out Detection
– Internal Calibrated Oscillator
– External and Internal Interrupt Sources
– Six Sleep Modes: Idle, ADC Noise Reduction, Power-save, Power-down, Standby,
and Extended Standby
• I/O and Packages
– 54/86 Programmable I/O Lines (ATmega1281/2561, ATmega640/1280/2560)
– 64-pad QFN/MLF, 64-lead TQFP (ATmega1281/2561)
– 100-lead TQFP, 100-ball CBGA (ATmega640/1280/2560)
– RoHS/Fully Green
• Temperature Range:
– -40°C to 85°C Industrial
• Ultra-Low Power Consumption
– Active Mode: 1MHz, 1.8V: 500µA
– Power-down Mode: 0.1µA at 1.8V
• Speed Grade:
– ATmega640V/ATmega1280V/ATmega1281V:
• 0 - 4MHz @ 1.8V - 5.5V, 0 - 8MHz @ 2.7V - 5.5V
– ATmega2560V/ATmega2561V:
• 0 - 2MHz @ 1.8V - 5.5V, 0 - 8MHz @ 2.7V - 5.5V
– ATmega640/ATmega1280/ATmega1281:
• 0 - 8MHz @ 2.7V - 5.5V, 0 - 16MHz @ 4.5V - 5.5V
– ATmega2560/ATmega2561:
• 0 - 16MHz @ 4.5V - 5.5V
8-bit Atmel
Microcontroller
with
64K/128K/256K
Bytes In-System
Programmable
Flash
ATmega640/V
ATmega1280/V
ATmega1281/V
ATmega2560/V
ATmega2561/V
2549P–AVR–10/20122
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
1. Pin Configurations
Figure 1-1. TQFP-pinout ATmega640/1280/2560
GND
VCC
PA0 (AD0)
PA1 (AD1)
PA2 (AD2)
PA3 (AD3)
PA4 (AD4)
PA5 (AD5)
PA6 (AD6)
PA7 (AD7)
PG2 (ALE)
AVCC
GND
AREF
PF0 (ADC0)
PF1 (ADC1)
PF2 (ADC2)
PF3 (ADC3)
PF4 (ADC4/TCK)
PF5 (ADC5/TMS)
PF6 (ADC6/TDO)
PF7 (ADC7/TDI)
100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 PK0 (ADC8/PCINT16) PK1 (ADC9/PCINT17) PK2 (ADC10/PCINT18) PK3 (ADC11/PCINT19) PK4 (ADC12/PCINT20) PK5 (ADC13/PCINT21) PK6 (ADC14/PCINT22) PK7 (ADC15/PCINT23)
(OC2B) PH6
(TOSC2) PG3
(TOSC1) PG4
(T4) PH7
RESET
(ICP4) PL0
VCC
GND
XTAL2
XTAL1
PL6
PL7
GND
VCC
(OC0B) PG5
VCC
GND
(RXD2) PH0
(TXD2) PH1
(XCK2) PH2
(OC4A) PH3
(OC4B) PH4
(OC4C) PH5
(RXD0/PCINT8) PE0
(TXD0) PE1
(XCK0/AIN0) PE2
(OC3A/AIN1) PE3
(OC3B/INT4) PE4
(OC3C/INT5) PE5
(T3/INT6) PE6
(CLKO/ICP3/INT7) PE7
(SS/PCINT0) PB0
(SCK/PCINT1) PB1
(MOSI/PCINT2) PB2
(MISO/PCINT3) PB3
(OC2A/PCINT4) PB4
(OC1A/PCINT5) PB5
(OC1B/PCINT6) PB6
(OC0A/OC1C/PCINT7) PB7
PC7 (A15)
PC6 (A14)
PC5 (A13)
PC4 (A12)
PC3 (A11)
PC2 (A10)
PC1 (A9)
PC0 (A8)
PG1 (RD)
PG0 (WR)
(TXD1/INT3) PD3
(ICP1) PD4
(XCK1) PD5
(T1) PD6
(T0) PD7
(SCL/INT0) PD0
(SDA/INT1) PD1
(RXD1/INT2) PD2
(ICP5) PL1
(T5) PL2
(OC5A) PL3
(OC5B) PL4
PJ6 (PCINT15)
PJ5 (PCINT14)
PJ4 (PCINT13)
PJ3 (PCINT12)
PJ2 (XCK3/PCINT11)
PJ1 (TXD3/PCINT10)
PJ0 (RXD3/PCINT9)
PJ7
(OC5C) PL5
INDEX CORNER3
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Figure 1-2. CBGA-pinout ATmega640/1280/2560
Note: The functions for each pin is the same as for the 100 pin packages shown in Figure 1-1 on page 2.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Top view Bottom view
Table 1-1. CBGA-pinout ATmega640/1280/2560
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A GND AREF PF0 PF2 PF5 PK0 PK3 PK6 GND VCC
B AVCC PG5 PF1 PF3 PF6 PK1 PK4 PK7 PA0 PA2
C PE2 PE0 PE1 PF4 PF7 PK2 PK5 PJ7 PA1 PA3
D PE3 PE4 PE5 PE6 PH2 PA4 PA5 PA6 PA7 PG2
E PE7 PH0 PH1 PH3 PH5 PJ6 PJ5 PJ4 PJ3 PJ2
F VCC PH4 PH6 PB0 PL4 PD1 PJ1 PJ0 PC7 GND
G GND PB1 PB2 PB5 PL2 PD0 PD5 PC5 PC6 VCC
H PB3 PB4 RESET PL1 PL3 PL7 PD4 PC4 PC3 PC2
J PH7 PG3 PB6 PL0 XTAL2 PL6 PD3 PC1 PC0 PG1
K PB7 PG4 VCC GND XTAL1 PL5 PD2 PD6 PD7 PG04
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Figure 1-3. Pinout ATmega1281/2561
Note: The large center pad underneath the QFN/MLF package is made of metal and internally connected
to GND. It should be soldered or glued to the board to ensure good mechanical stability. If
the center pad is left unconnected, the package might loosen from the board.
(RXD0/PCINT8/PDI) PE0
(TXD0/PDO) PE1
(XCK0/AIN0) PE2
(OC3A/AIN1) PE3
(OC3B/INT4) PE4
(OC3C/INT5) PE5
(T3/INT6) PE6
(ICP3/CLKO/INT7) PE7
(SS/PCINT0) PB0
(OC0B) PG5
(SCK/PCINT1) PB1
(MOSI/PCINT2) PB2
(MISO/PCINT3) PB3
(OC2A/ PCINT4) PB4
(OC1A/PCINT5) PB5
(OC1B/PCINT6) PB6
(OC0A/OC1C/PCINT7) PB7
(TOSC2) PG3
(TOSC1) PG4
RESET
VCC
GND
XTAL2
XTAL1
(SCL/INT0) PD0
(SDA/INT1) PD1
(RXD1/INT2) PD2
(TXD1/INT3) PD3
(ICP1) PD4
(XCK1) PD5
PA3 (AD3)
PA4 (AD4)
PA5 (AD5)
PA6 (AD6)
PA7 (AD7)
PG2 (ALE)
PC7 (A15)
PC6 (A14)
PC5 (A13)
PC4 (A12)
PC3 (A11)
PC2 (A10)
PC1 (A9)
PC0 (A8)
PG1 (RD)
PG0 (WR)
AVCC
GND
AREF
PF0 (ADC0)
PF1 (ADC1)
PF2 (ADC2)
PF3 (ADC3)
PF4 (ADC4/TCK)
PF5 (ADC5/TMS)
PF6 (ADC6/TDO)
PF7 (ADC7/TDI)
GND
VCC
PA0 (AD0)
PA1 (AD1)
PA2 (AD2)
(T1) PD6
(T0) PD7
INDEX CORNER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
325
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
2. Overview
The ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561 is a low-power CMOS 8-bit microcontroller based on the
AVR enhanced RISC architecture. By executing powerful instructions in a single clock cycle, the
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561 achieves throughputs approaching 1 MIPS per MHz allowing
the system designer to optimize power consumption versus processing speed.
2.1 Block Diagram
Figure 2-1. Block Diagram
CPU
GND
VCC
RESET
Power
Supervision
POR / BOD &
RESET
Watchdog
Oscillator
Watchdog
Timer
Oscillator
Circuits /
Clock
Generation
XTAL1
XTAL2
PC7..0 PORT C (8)
PA7..0 PORT A (8)
PORT D (8)
PD7..0
PORT B (8)
PB7..0
PORT E (8)
PE7..0
PORT F (8)
PF7..0
PORT J (8)
PJ7..0
PG5..0 PORT G (6)
PORT H (8)
PH7..0
PORT K (8)
PK7..0
PORT L (8)
PL7..0
XRAM
TWI SPI
EEPROM
JTAG
8 bit T/C 0 8 bit T/C 2
16 bit T/C 1
16 bit T/C 3
FLASH SRAM
16 bit T/C 4
16 bit T/C 5
USART 2
USART 1
USART 0
Internal
Bandgap reference
Analog
Comparator
A/D
Converter
USART 3
NOTE:
Shaded parts only available
in the 100-pin version.
Complete functionality for
the ADC, T/C4, and T/C5 only
available in the 100-pin version.6
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
The Atmel® AVR® core combines a rich instruction set with 32 general purpose working registers.
All the 32 registers are directly connected to the Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU), allowing two
independent registers to be accessed in one single instruction executed in one clock cycle. The
resulting architecture is more code efficient while achieving throughputs up to ten times faster
than conventional CISC microcontrollers.
The ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561 provides the following features: 64K/128K/256K bytes of
In-System Programmable Flash with Read-While-Write capabilities, 4Kbytes EEPROM, 8
Kbytes SRAM, 54/86 general purpose I/O lines, 32 general purpose working registers, Real
Time Counter (RTC), six flexible Timer/Counters with compare modes and PWM, 4 USARTs, a
byte oriented 2-wire Serial Interface, a 16-channel, 10-bit ADC with optional differential input
stage with programmable gain, programmable Watchdog Timer with Internal Oscillator, an SPI
serial port, IEEE® std. 1149.1 compliant JTAG test interface, also used for accessing the Onchip
Debug system and programming and six software selectable power saving modes. The Idle
mode stops the CPU while allowing the SRAM, Timer/Counters, SPI port, and interrupt system
to continue functioning. The Power-down mode saves the register contents but freezes the
Oscillator, disabling all other chip functions until the next interrupt or Hardware Reset. In Powersave
mode, the asynchronous timer continues to run, allowing the user to maintain a timer base
while the rest of the device is sleeping. The ADC Noise Reduction mode stops the CPU and all
I/O modules except Asynchronous Timer and ADC, to minimize switching noise during ADC
conversions. In Standby mode, the Crystal/Resonator Oscillator is running while the rest of the
device is sleeping. This allows very fast start-up combined with low power consumption. In
Extended Standby mode, both the main Oscillator and the Asynchronous Timer continue to run.
Atmel offers the QTouch® library for embedding capacitive touch buttons, sliders and wheelsfunctionality
into AVR microcontrollers. The patented charge-transfer signal acquisition
offersrobust sensing and includes fully debounced reporting of touch keys and includes Adjacent
KeySuppression® (AKS™) technology for unambiguous detection of key events. The easy-to-use
QTouch Suite toolchain allows you to explore, develop and debug your own touch applications.
The device is manufactured using Atmel’s high-density nonvolatile memory technology. The Onchip
ISP Flash allows the program memory to be reprogrammed in-system through an SPI serial
interface, by a conventional nonvolatile memory programmer, or by an On-chip Boot program
running on the AVR core. The boot program can use any interface to download the application
program in the application Flash memory. Software in the Boot Flash section will continue to run
while the Application Flash section is updated, providing true Read-While-Write operation. By
combining an 8-bit RISC CPU with In-System Self-Programmable Flash on a monolithic chip,
the Atmel ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561 is a powerful microcontroller that provides a highly
flexible and cost effective solution to many embedded control applications.
The ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561 AVR is supported with a full suite of program and system
development tools including: C compilers, macro assemblers, program
debugger/simulators, in-circuit emulators, and evaluation kits.7
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
2.2 Comparison Between ATmega1281/2561 and ATmega640/1280/2560
Each device in the ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561 family differs only in memory size and
number of pins. Table 2-1 summarizes the different configurations for the six devices.
2.3 Pin Descriptions
2.3.1 VCC
Digital supply voltage.
2.3.2 GND
Ground.
2.3.3 Port A (PA7..PA0)
Port A is an 8-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The
Port A output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source
capability. As inputs, Port A pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up
resistors are activated. The Port A pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active,
even if the clock is not running.
Port A also serves the functions of various special features of the
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561 as listed on page 78.
2.3.4 Port B (PB7..PB0)
Port B is an 8-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The
Port B output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source
capability. As inputs, Port B pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up
resistors are activated. The Port B pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active,
even if the clock is not running.
Port B has better driving capabilities than the other ports.
Port B also serves the functions of various special features of the
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561 as listed on page 79.
2.3.5 Port C (PC7..PC0)
Port C is an 8-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The
Port C output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source
capability. As inputs, Port C pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up
Table 2-1. Configuration Summary
Device Flash EEPROM RAM
General
Purpose I/O pins
16 bits resolution
PWM channels
Serial
USARTs
ADC
Channels
ATmega640 64KB 4KB 8KB 86 12 4 16
ATmega1280 128KB 4KB 8KB 86 12 4 16
ATmega1281 128KB 4KB 8KB 54 6 2 8
ATmega2560 256KB 4KB 8KB 86 12 4 16
ATmega2561 256KB 4KB 8KB 54 6 2 88
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
resistors are activated. The Port C pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active,
even if the clock is not running.
Port C also serves the functions of special features of the ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561 as
listed on page 82.
2.3.6 Port D (PD7..PD0)
Port D is an 8-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The
Port D output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source
capability. As inputs, Port D pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up
resistors are activated. The Port D pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active,
even if the clock is not running.
Port D also serves the functions of various special features of the
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561 as listed on page 83.
2.3.7 Port E (PE7..PE0)
Port E is an 8-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The
Port E output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source
capability. As inputs, Port E pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up
resistors are activated. The Port E pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active,
even if the clock is not running.
Port E also serves the functions of various special features of the
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561 as listed on page 86.
2.3.8 Port F (PF7..PF0)
Port F serves as analog inputs to the A/D Converter.
Port F also serves as an 8-bit bi-directional I/O port, if the A/D Converter is not used. Port pins
can provide internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The Port F output buffers have symmetrical
drive characteristics with both high sink and source capability. As inputs, Port F pins
that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up resistors are activated. The Port F
pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active, even if the clock is not running. If the
JTAG interface is enabled, the pull-up resistors on pins PF7(TDI), PF5(TMS), and PF4(TCK) will
be activated even if a reset occurs.
Port F also serves the functions of the JTAG interface.
2.3.9 Port G (PG5..PG0)
Port G is a 6-bit I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The Port G output
buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source capability. As
inputs, Port G pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up resistors are
activated. The Port G pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active, even if the clock
is not running.
Port G also serves the functions of various special features of the
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561 as listed on page 90.
2.3.10 Port H (PH7..PH0)
Port H is a 8-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The
Port H output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source
capability. As inputs, Port H pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up9
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
resistors are activated. The Port H pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active,
even if the clock is not running.
Port H also serves the functions of various special features of the ATmega640/1280/2560 as
listed on page 92.
2.3.11 Port J (PJ7..PJ0)
Port J is a 8-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The
Port J output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source capability.
As inputs, Port J pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up
resistors are activated. The Port J pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active,
even if the clock is not running.
Port J also serves the functions of various special features of the ATmega640/1280/2560 as
listed on page 94.
2.3.12 Port K (PK7..PK0)
Port K serves as analog inputs to the A/D Converter.
Port K is a 8-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The
Port K output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source
capability. As inputs, Port K pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up
resistors are activated. The Port K pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active,
even if the clock is not running.
Port K also serves the functions of various special features of the ATmega640/1280/2560 as
listed on page 96.
2.3.13 Port L (PL7..PL0)
Port L is a 8-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The
Port L output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source
capability. As inputs, Port L pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up
resistors are activated. The Port L pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active,
even if the clock is not running.
Port L also serves the functions of various special features of the ATmega640/1280/2560 as
listed on page 98.
2.3.14 RESET
Reset input. A low level on this pin for longer than the minimum pulse length will generate a
reset, even if the clock is not running. The minimum pulse length is given in “System and Reset
Characteristics” on page 372. Shorter pulses are not guaranteed to generate a reset.
2.3.15 XTAL1
Input to the inverting Oscillator amplifier and input to the internal clock operating circuit.
2.3.16 XTAL2
Output from the inverting Oscillator amplifier.10
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
2.3.17 AVCC
AVCC is the supply voltage pin for Port F and the A/D Converter. It should be externally connected
to VCC, even if the ADC is not used. If the ADC is used, it should be connected to VCC
through a low-pass filter.
2.3.18 AREF
This is the analog reference pin for the A/D Converter.11
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
3. Resources
A comprehensive set of development tools and application notes, and datasheets are available
for download on http://www.atmel.com/avr.
4. About Code Examples
This documentation contains simple code examples that briefly show how to use various parts of
the device. Be aware that not all C compiler vendors include bit definitions in the header files
and interrupt handling in C is compiler dependent. Please confirm with the C compiler documentation
for more details.
These code examples assume that the part specific header file is included before compilation.
For I/O registers located in extended I/O map, "IN", "OUT", "SBIS", "SBIC", "CBI", and "SBI"
instructions must be replaced with instructions that allow access to extended I/O. Typically
"LDS" and "STS" combined with "SBRS", "SBRC", "SBR", and "CBR".
5. Data Retention
Reliability Qualification results show that the projected data retention failure rate is much less
than 1 ppm over 20 years at 85°C or 100 years at 25°C.
6. Capacitive touch sensing
The Atmel®QTouch® Library provides a simple to use solution to realize touch sensitive interfaces
on most Atmel AVR® microcontrollers. The QTouch Library includes support for the
QTouch and QMatrix® acquisition methods.
Touch sensing can be added to any application by linking the appropriate Atmel QTouch Library
for the AVR Microcontroller. This is done by using a simple set of APIs to define the touch channels
and sensors, and then calling the touch sensing API’s to retrieve the channel information
and determine the touch sensor states.
The QTouch Library is FREE and downloadable from the Atmel website at the following location:
www.atmel.com/qtouchlibrary. For implementation details and other information, refer to the
Atmel QTouch Library User Guide - also available for download from the Atmel website.12
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
7. AVR CPU Core
7.1 Introduction
This section discusses the AVR core architecture in general. The main function of the CPU core
is to ensure correct program execution. The CPU must therefore be able to access memories,
perform calculations, control peripherals, and handle interrupts.
7.2 Architectural Overview
Figure 7-1. Block Diagram of the AVR Architecture
In order to maximize performance and parallelism, the AVR uses a Harvard architecture – with
separate memories and buses for program and data. Instructions in the program memory are
executed with a single level pipelining. While one instruction is being executed, the next instruction
is pre-fetched from the program memory. This concept enables instructions to be executed
in every clock cycle. The program memory is In-System Reprogrammable Flash memory.
Flash
Program
Memory
Instruction
Register
Instruction
Decoder
Program
Counter
Control Lines
32 x 8
General
Purpose
Registers
ALU
Status
and Control
I/O Lines
EEPROM
Data Bus 8-bit
Data
SRAM
Direct Addressing
Indirect Addressing
Interrupt
Unit
SPI
Unit
Watchdog
Timer
Analog
Comparator
I/O Module 2
I/O Module1
I/O Module n13
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
The fast-access Register File contains 32 × 8-bit general purpose working registers with a single
clock cycle access time. This allows single-cycle Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU) operation. In a typical
ALU operation, two operands are output from the Register File, the operation is executed,
and the result is stored back in the Register File – in one clock cycle.
Six of the 32 registers can be used as three 16-bit indirect address register pointers for Data
Space addressing – enabling efficient address calculations. One of the these address pointers
can also be used as an address pointer for look up tables in Flash program memory. These
added function registers are the 16-bit X-, Y-, and Z-register, described later in this section.
The ALU supports arithmetic and logic operations between registers or between a constant and
a register. Single register operations can also be executed in the ALU. After an arithmetic operation,
the Status Register is updated to reflect information about the result of the operation.
Program flow is provided by conditional and unconditional jump and call instructions, able to
directly address the whole address space. Most AVR instructions have a single 16-bit word format.
Every program memory address contains a 16-bit or 32-bit instruction.
Program Flash memory space is divided in two sections, the Boot Program section and the
Application Program section. Both sections have dedicated Lock bits for write and read/write
protection. The SPM instruction that writes into the Application Flash memory section must
reside in the Boot Program section.
During interrupts and subroutine calls, the return address Program Counter (PC) is stored on the
Stack. The Stack is effectively allocated in the general data SRAM, and consequently the Stack
size is only limited by the total SRAM size and the usage of the SRAM. All user programs must
initialize the SP in the Reset routine (before subroutines or interrupts are executed). The Stack
Pointer (SP) is read/write accessible in the I/O space. The data SRAM can easily be accessed
through the five different addressing modes supported in the AVR architecture.
The memory spaces in the AVR architecture are all linear and regular memory maps.
A flexible interrupt module has its control registers in the I/O space with an additional Global
Interrupt Enable bit in the Status Register. All interrupts have a separate Interrupt Vector in the
Interrupt Vector table. The interrupts have priority in accordance with their Interrupt Vector position.
The lower the Interrupt Vector address, the higher the priority.
The I/O memory space contains 64 addresses for CPU peripheral functions as Control Registers,
SPI, and other I/O functions. The I/O Memory can be accessed directly, or as the Data
Space locations following those of the Register File, 0x20 - 0x5F. In addition, the
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561 has Extended I/O space from 0x60 - 0x1FF in SRAM where
only the ST/STS/STD and LD/LDS/LDD instructions can be used.
7.3 ALU – Arithmetic Logic Unit
The high-performance AVR ALU operates in direct connection with all the 32 general purpose
working registers. Within a single clock cycle, arithmetic operations between general purpose
registers or between a register and an immediate are executed. The ALU operations are divided
into three main categories – arithmetic, logical, and bit-functions. Some implementations of the
architecture also provide a powerful multiplier supporting both signed/unsigned multiplication
and fractional format. See the “Instruction Set Summary” on page 416 for a detailed description.14
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
7.4 Status Register
The Status Register contains information about the result of the most recently executed arithmetic
instruction. This information can be used for altering program flow in order to perform
conditional operations. Note that the Status Register is updated after all ALU operations, as
specified in the “Instruction Set Summary” on page 416. This will in many cases remove the
need for using the dedicated compare instructions, resulting in faster and more compact code.
The Status Register is not automatically stored when entering an interrupt routine and restored
when returning from an interrupt. This must be handled by software.
7.4.1 SREG – AVR Status Register
The AVR Status Register – SREG – is defined as:
• Bit 7 – I: Global Interrupt Enable
The Global Interrupt Enable bit must be set for the interrupts to be enabled. The individual interrupt
enable control is then performed in separate control registers. If the Global Interrupt Enable
Register is cleared, none of the interrupts are enabled independent of the individual interrupt
enable settings. The I-bit is cleared by hardware after an interrupt has occurred, and is set by
the RETI instruction to enable subsequent interrupts. The I-bit can also be set and cleared by
the application with the SEI and CLI instructions, as described in the “Instruction Set Summary”
on page 416.
• Bit 6 – T: Bit Copy Storage
The Bit Copy instructions BLD (Bit LoaD) and BST (Bit STore) use the T-bit as source or destination
for the operated bit. A bit from a register in the Register File can be copied into T by the
BST instruction, and a bit in T can be copied into a bit in a register in the Register File by the
BLD instruction.
• Bit 5 – H: Half Carry Flag
The Half Carry Flag H indicates a Half Carry in some arithmetic operations. Half Carry Is useful
in BCD arithmetic. See the “Instruction Set Summary” on page 416 for detailed information.
• Bit 4 – S: Sign Bit, S = N ⊕ V
The S-bit is always an exclusive or between the Negative Flag N and the Two’s Complement
Overflow Flag V. See the “Instruction Set Summary” on page 416 for detailed information.
• Bit 3 – V: Two’s Complement Overflow Flag
The Two’s Complement Overflow Flag V supports two’s complement arithmetics. See the
“Instruction Set Summary” on page 416 for detailed information.
• Bit 2 – N: Negative Flag
The Negative Flag N indicates a negative result in an arithmetic or logic operation. See the
“Instruction Set Summary” on page 416 for detailed information.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x3F (0x5F) I T H S V N Z C SREG
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 015
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
• Bit 1 – Z: Zero Flag
The Zero Flag Z indicates a zero result in an arithmetic or logic operation. See the “Instruction
Set Summary” on page 416 for detailed information.
• Bit 0 – C: Carry Flag
The Carry Flag C indicates a carry in an arithmetic or logic operation. See the “Instruction Set
Summary” on page 416 for detailed information.
7.5 General Purpose Register File
The Register File is optimized for the AVR Enhanced RISC instruction set. In order to achieve
the required performance and flexibility, the following input/output schemes are supported by the
Register File:
• One 8-bit output operand and one 8-bit result input
• Two 8-bit output operands and one 8-bit result input
• Two 8-bit output operands and one 16-bit result input
• One 16-bit output operand and one 16-bit result input
Figure 7-2 shows the structure of the 32 general purpose working registers in the CPU.
Figure 7-2. AVR CPU General Purpose Working Registers
Most of the instructions operating on the Register File have direct access to all registers, and
most of them are single cycle instructions.
As shown in Figure 7-2, each register is also assigned a data memory address, mapping them
directly into the first 32 locations of the user Data Space. Although not being physically implemented
as SRAM locations, this memory organization provides great flexibility in access of the
registers, as the X-, Y- and Z-pointer registers can be set to index any register in the file.
7.5.1 The X-register, Y-register, and Z-register
The registers R26..R31 have some added functions to their general purpose usage. These registers
are 16-bit address pointers for indirect addressing of the data space. The three indirect
address registers X, Y, and Z are defined as described in Figure 7-3 on page 16.
7 0 Addr.
R0 0x00
R1 0x01
R2 0x02
…
R13 0x0D
General R14 0x0E
Purpose R15 0x0F
Working R16 0x10
Registers R17 0x11
…
R26 0x1A X-register Low Byte
R27 0x1B X-register High Byte
R28 0x1C Y-register Low Byte
R29 0x1D Y-register High Byte
R30 0x1E Z-register Low Byte
R31 0x1F Z-register High Byte16
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Figure 7-3. The X-, Y-, and Z-registers
In the different addressing modes these address registers have functions as fixed displacement,
automatic increment, and automatic decrement (see the “Instruction Set Summary” on page 416
for details).
7.6 Stack Pointer
The Stack is mainly used for storing temporary data, for storing local variables and for storing
return addresses after interrupts and subroutine calls. The Stack Pointer Register always points
to the top of the Stack. Note that the Stack is implemented as growing from higher memory locations
to lower memory locations. This implies that a Stack PUSH command decreases the Stack
Pointer.
The Stack Pointer points to the data SRAM Stack area where the Subroutine and Interrupt
Stacks are located. This Stack space in the data SRAM must be defined by the program before
any subroutine calls are executed or interrupts are enabled. The Stack Pointer must be set to
point above 0x0200. The initial value of the stack pointer is the last address of the internal
SRAM. The Stack Pointer is decremented by one when data is pushed onto the Stack with the
PUSH instruction, and it is decremented by two for ATmega640/1280/1281 and three for
ATmega2560/2561 when the return address is pushed onto the Stack with subroutine call or
interrupt. The Stack Pointer is incremented by one when data is popped from the Stack with the
POP instruction, and it is incremented by two for ATmega640/1280/1281 and three for
ATmega2560/2561 when data is popped from the Stack with return from subroutine RET or
return from interrupt RETI.
The AVR Stack Pointer is implemented as two 8-bit registers in the I/O space. The number of
bits actually used is implementation dependent. Note that the data space in some implementations
of the AVR architecture is so small that only SPL is needed. In this case, the SPH Register
will not be present.
15 XH XL 0
X-register 7 07 0
R27 (0x1B) R26 (0x1A)
15 YH YL 0
Y-register 7 07 0
R29 (0x1D) R28 (0x1C)
15 ZH ZL 0
Z-register 70 7 0
R31 (0x1F) R30 (0x1E)
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
0x3E (0x5E) SP15 SP14 SP13 SP12 SP11 SP10 SP9 SP8 SPH
0x3D (0x5D) SP7 SP6 SP5 SP4 SP3 SP2 SP1 SP0 SPL
76543210
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
1111111117
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
7.6.1 RAMPZ – Extended Z-pointer Register for ELPM/SPM
For ELPM/SPM instructions, the Z-pointer is a concatenation of RAMPZ, ZH, and ZL, as shown
in Figure 7-4. Note that LPM is not affected by the RAMPZ setting.
Figure 7-4. The Z-pointer used by ELPM and SPM
The actual number of bits is implementation dependent. Unused bits in an implementation will
always read as zero. For compatibility with future devices, be sure to write these bits to zero.
7.6.2 EIND – Extended Indirect Register
For EICALL/EIJMP instructions, the Indirect-pointer to the subroutine/routine is a concatenation
of EIND, ZH, and ZL, as shown in Figure 7-5. Note that ICALL and IJMP are not affected by the
EIND setting.
Figure 7-5. The Indirect-pointer used by EICALL and EIJMP
The actual number of bits is implementation dependent. Unused bits in an implementation will
always read as zero. For compatibility with future devices, be sure to write these bits to zero.
7.7 Instruction Execution Timing
This section describes the general access timing concepts for instruction execution. The AVR
CPU is driven by the CPU clock clkCPU, directly generated from the selected clock source for the
chip. No internal clock division is used.
Figure 7-6 on page 18 shows the parallel instruction fetches and instruction executions enabled
by the Harvard architecture and the fast-access Register File concept. This is the basic pipelining
concept to obtain up to 1 MIPS per MHz with the corresponding unique results for functions
per cost, functions per clocks, and functions per power-unit.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x3B (0x5B) RAMPZ7 RAMPZ6 RAMPZ5 RAMPZ4 RAMPZ3 RAMPZ2 RAMPZ1 RAMPZ0 RAMPZ
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit
(Individually)
7 0 7 07 0
RAMPZ ZH ZL
Bit (Z-pointer) 23 16 15 8 7 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x3C (0x5C) EIND7 EIND6 EIND5 EIND4 EIND3 EIND2 EIND1 EIND0 EIND
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit
(Individually)
7 07 07 0
EIND ZH ZL
Bit (Indirectpointer)
23 16 15 8 7 018
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Figure 7-6. The Parallel Instruction Fetches and Instruction Executions
Figure 7-7 shows the internal timing concept for the Register File. In a single clock cycle an ALU
operation using two register operands is executed, and the result is stored back to the destination
register.
Figure 7-7. Single Cycle ALU Operation
7.8 Reset and Interrupt Handling
The AVR provides several different interrupt sources. These interrupts and the separate Reset
Vector each have a separate program vector in the program memory space. All interrupts are
assigned individual enable bits which must be written logic one together with the Global Interrupt
Enable bit in the Status Register in order to enable the interrupt. Depending on the Program
Counter value, interrupts may be automatically disabled when Boot Lock bits BLB02 or BLB12
are programmed. This feature improves software security. See the section “Memory Programming”
on page 335 for details.
The lowest addresses in the program memory space are by default defined as the Reset and
Interrupt Vectors. The complete list of vectors is shown in “Interrupts” on page 105. The list also
determines the priority levels of the different interrupts. The lower the address the higher is the
priority level. RESET has the highest priority, and next is INT0 – the External Interrupt Request
0. The Interrupt Vectors can be moved to the start of the Boot Flash section by setting the IVSEL
bit in the MCU Control Register (MCUCR). Refer to “Interrupts” on page 105 for more information.
The Reset Vector can also be moved to the start of the Boot Flash section by programming
the BOOTRST Fuse, see “Memory Programming” on page 335.
When an interrupt occurs, the Global Interrupt Enable I-bit is cleared and all interrupts are disabled.
The user software can write logic one to the I-bit to enable nested interrupts. All enabled
interrupts can then interrupt the current interrupt routine. The I-bit is automatically set when a
Return from Interrupt instruction – RETI – is executed.
clk
1st Instruction Fetch
1st Instruction Execute
2nd Instruction Fetch
2nd Instruction Execute
3rd Instruction Fetch
3rd Instruction Execute
4th Instruction Fetch
T1 T2 T3 T4
CPU
Total Execution Time
Register Operands Fetch
ALU Operation Execute
Result Write Back
T1 T2 T3 T4
clkCPU19
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
There are basically two types of interrupts. The first type is triggered by an event that sets the
Interrupt Flag. For these interrupts, the Program Counter is vectored to the actual Interrupt Vector
in order to execute the interrupt handling routine, and hardware clears the corresponding
Interrupt Flag. Interrupt Flags can also be cleared by writing a logic one to the flag bit position(s)
to be cleared. If an interrupt condition occurs while the corresponding interrupt enable bit is
cleared, the Interrupt Flag will be set and remembered until the interrupt is enabled, or the flag is
cleared by software. Similarly, if one or more interrupt conditions occur while the Global Interrupt
Enable bit is cleared, the corresponding Interrupt Flag(s) will be set and remembered until the
Global Interrupt Enable bit is set, and will then be executed by order of priority.
The second type of interrupts will trigger as long as the interrupt condition is present. These
interrupts do not necessarily have Interrupt Flags. If the interrupt condition disappears before the
interrupt is enabled, the interrupt will not be triggered.
When the AVR exits from an interrupt, it will always return to the main program and execute one
more instruction before any pending interrupt is served.
Note that the Status Register is not automatically stored when entering an interrupt routine, nor
restored when returning from an interrupt routine. This must be handled by software.
When using the CLI instruction to disable interrupts, the interrupts will be immediately disabled.
No interrupt will be executed after the CLI instruction, even if it occurs simultaneously with the
CLI instruction. The following example shows how this can be used to avoid interrupts during the
timed EEPROM write sequence.
When using the SEI instruction to enable interrupts, the instruction following SEI will be executed
before any pending interrupts, as shown in this example.
Assembly Code Example
in r16, SREG ; store SREG value
cli ; disable interrupts during timed sequence
sbi EECR, EEMPE ; start EEPROM write
sbi EECR, EEPE
out SREG, r16 ; restore SREG value (I-bit)
C Code Example
char cSREG;
cSREG = SREG; /* store SREG value */
/* disable interrupts during timed sequence */
__disable_interrupt();
EECR |= (1< xxx
;
.org 0x1F002
0x1F002 jmp EXT_INT0 ; IRQ0 Handler
0x1F004 jmp EXT_INT1 ; IRQ1 Handler
... ... ... ;
0x1FO70 jmp USART3_TXC ; USART3 TX Complete Handler
0x0040 jmp TIM3_COMPA ; Timer3 CompareA Handler
0x0042 jmp TIM3_COMPB ; Timer3 CompareB Handler
0x0044 jmp TIM3_COMPC ; Timer3 CompareC Handler
0x0046 jmp TIM3_OVF ; Timer3 Overflow Handler
0x0048 jmp USART1_RXC ; USART1 RX Complete Handler
0x004A jmp USART1_UDRE ; USART1,UDR Empty Handler
0x004C jmp USART1_TXC ; USART1 TX Complete Handler
0x004E jmp TWI ; 2-wire Serial Handler
0x0050 jmp SPM_RDY ; SPM Ready Handler
0x0052 jmp TIM4_CAPT ; Timer4 Capture Handler
0x0054 jmp TIM4_COMPA ; Timer4 CompareA Handler
0x0056 jmp TIM4_COMPB ; Timer4 CompareB Handler
0x0058 jmp TIM4_COMPC ; Timer4 CompareC Handler
0x005A jmp TIM4_OVF ; Timer4 Overflow Handler
0x005C jmp TIM5_CAPT ; Timer5 Capture Handler
0x005E jmp TIM5_COMPA ; Timer5 CompareA Handler
0x0060 jmp TIM5_COMPB ; Timer5 CompareB Handler
0x0062 jmp TIM5_COMPC ; Timer5 CompareC Handler
0x0064 jmp TIM5_OVF ; Timer5 Overflow Handler
0x0066 jmp USART2_RXC ; USART2 RX Complete Handler
0x0068 jmp USART2_UDRE ; USART2,UDR Empty Handler
0x006A jmp USART2_TXC ; USART2 TX Complete Handler
0x006C jmp USART3_RXC ; USART3 RX Complete Handler
0x006E jmp USART3_UDRE ; USART3,UDR Empty Handler
0x0070 jmp USART3_TXC ; USART3 TX Complete Handler
;
0x0072 RESET: ldi r16, high(RAMEND) ; Main program start
0x0073 out SPH,r16 ; Set Stack Pointer to top of RAM
0x0074 ldi r16, low(RAMEND)
0x0075 out SPL,r16
0x0076 sei ; Enable interrupts
0x0077 xxx
... ... ... ...109
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
When the BOOTRST Fuse is programmed and the Boot section size set to 8Kbytes, the most
typical and general program setup for the Reset and Interrupt Vector Addresses is:
Address Labels Code Comments
.org 0x0002
0x00002 jmp EXT_INT0 ; IRQ0 Handler
0x00004 jmp EXT_INT1 ; IRQ1 Handler
... ... ... ;
0x00070 jmp USART3_TXC ; USART3 TX Complete Handler
;
.org 0x1F000
0x1F000 RESET: ldi r16,high(RAMEND); Main program start
0x1F001 out SPH,r16 ; Set Stack Pointer to top of RAM
0x1F002 ldi r16,low(RAMEND)
0x1F003 out SPL,r16
0x1F004 sei ; Enable interrupts
0x1F005 xxx
When the BOOTRST Fuse is programmed, the Boot section size set to 8Kbytes and the IVSEL
bit in the MCUCR Register is set before any interrupts are enabled, the most typical and general
program setup for the Reset and Interrupt Vector Addresses is:
Address Labels Code Comments
;
.org 0x1F000
0x1F000 jmp RESET ; Reset handler
0x1F002 jmp EXT_INT0 ; IRQ0 Handler
0x1F004 jmp EXT_INT1 ; IRQ1 Handler
... ... ... ;
0x1F070 jmp USART3_TXC ; USART3 TX Complete Handler
;
0x1F072 RESET: ldi r16,high(RAMEND) ; Main program start
0x1F073 out SPH,r16 ; Set Stack Pointer to top of RAM
0x1F074 ldi r16,low(RAMEND)
0x1F075 out SPL,r16
0x1F076 sei ; Enable interrupts
0x1FO77 xxx
14.3 Moving Interrupts Between Application and Boot Section
The MCU Control Register controls the placement of the Interrupt Vector table, see Code Example
below. For more details, see “Reset and Interrupt Handling” on page 18.110
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
14.4 Register Description
14.4.1 MCUCR – MCU Control Register
• Bit 1 – IVSEL: Interrupt Vector Select
When the IVSEL bit is cleared (zero), the Interrupt Vectors are placed at the start of the Flash
memory. When this bit is set (one), the Interrupt Vectors are moved to the beginning of the Boot
Loader section of the Flash. The actual address of the start of the Boot Flash Section is determined
by the BOOTSZ Fuses. Refer to the section “Memory Programming” on page 335 for
details. To avoid unintentional changes of Interrupt Vector tables, a special write procedure must
be followed to change the IVSEL bit (see “Moving Interrupts Between Application and Boot Section”
on page 109):
1. Write the Interrupt Vector Change Enable (IVCE) bit to one.
2. Within four cycles, write the desired value to IVSEL while writing a zero to IVCE.
Assembly Code Example
Move_interrupts:
; Get MCUCR
in r16, MCUCR
mov r17, r16
; Enable change of Interrupt Vectors
ori r16, (1< CSn2:0 > 1). The number of system clock cycles from
when the timer is enabled to the first count occurs can be from 1 to N+1 system clock cycles,
where N equals the prescaler divisor (8, 64, 256, or 1024).
It is possible to use the prescaler reset for synchronizing the Timer/Counter to program execution.
However, care must be taken if the other Timer/Counter that shares the same prescaler
also uses prescaling. A prescaler reset will affect the prescaler period for all Timer/Counters it is
connected to.
18.3 External Clock Source
An external clock source applied to the Tn pin can be used as Timer/Counter clock (clkTn). The
Tn pin is sampled once every system clock cycle by the pin synchronization logic. The synchronized
(sampled) signal is then passed through the edge detector. Figure 18-1 shows a functional
equivalent block diagram of the Tn synchronization and edge detector logic. The registers are
clocked at the positive edge of the internal system clock (clkI/O). The latch is transparent in the
high period of the internal system clock.
The edge detector generates one clkTn pulse for each positive (CSn2:0 = 7) or negative (CSn2:0
= 6) edge it detects.
Figure 18-1. Tn/T0 Pin Sampling
Tn_sync
(To Clock
Select Logic)
Synchronization Edge Detector
D Q D Q
LE
Tn D Q
clkI/O170
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
The synchronization and edge detector logic introduces a delay of 2.5 to 3.5 system clock cycles
from an edge has been applied to the Tn pin to the counter is updated.
Enabling and disabling of the clock input must be done when Tn has been stable for at least one
system clock cycle, otherwise it is a risk that a false Timer/Counter clock pulse is generated.
Each half period of the external clock applied must be longer than one system clock cycle to
ensure correct sampling. The external clock must be guaranteed to have less than half the system
clock frequency (fExtClk < fclk_I/O/2) given a 50/50% duty cycle. Since the edge detector uses
sampling, the maximum frequency of an external clock it can detect is half the sampling frequency
(Nyquist sampling theorem). However, due to variation of the system clock frequency
and duty cycle caused by Oscillator source (crystal, resonator, and capacitors) tolerances, it is
recommended that maximum frequency of an external clock source is less than fclk_I/O/2.5.
An external clock source can not be prescaled.
Figure 18-2. Prescaler for synchronous Timer/Counters
18.4 Register Description
18.4.1 GTCCR – General Timer/Counter Control Register
• Bit 7 – TSM: Timer/Counter Synchronization Mode
Writing the TSM bit to one activates the Timer/Counter Synchronization mode. In this mode, the
value that is written to the PSRASY and PSRSYNC bits is kept, hence keeping the corresponding
prescaler reset signals asserted. This ensures that the corresponding Timer/Counters are
halted and can be configured to the same value without the risk of one of them advancing during
configuration. When the TSM bit is written to zero, the PSRASY and PSRSYNC bits are cleared
by hardware, and the Timer/Counters start counting simultaneously.
PSR10
Clear
Tn
Tn
clkI/O
Synchronization
Synchronization
TIMER/COUNTERn CLOCK SOURCE
clkTn
TIMER/COUNTERn CLOCK SOURCE
clkTn
CSn0
CSn1
CSn2
CSn0
CSn1
CSn2
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x23 (0x43) TSM – – – – – PSRASY PSRSYNC GTCCR
Read/Write R/W R R R R R R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0171
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
• Bit 0 – PSRSYNC: Prescaler Reset for Synchronous Timer/Counters
When this bit is one, Timer/Counter0, Timer/Counter1, Timer/Counter3, Timer/Counter4 and
Timer/Counter5 prescaler will be Reset. This bit is normally cleared immediately by hardware,
except if the TSM bit is set. Note that Timer/Counter0, Timer/Counter1, Timer/Counter3,
Timer/Counter4 and Timer/Counter5 share the same prescaler and a reset of this prescaler will
affect all timers.172
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
19. Output Compare Modulator (OCM1C0A)
19.1 Overview
The Output Compare Modulator (OCM) allows generation of waveforms modulated with a carrier
frequency. The modulator uses the outputs from the Output Compare Unit C of the 16-bit
Timer/Counter1 and the Output Compare Unit of the 8-bit Timer/Counter0. For more details
about these Timer/Counters see “Timer/Counter 0, 1, 3, 4, and 5 Prescaler” on page 169 and “8-
bit Timer/Counter2 with PWM and Asynchronous Operation” on page 174.
Figure 19-1. Output Compare Modulator, Block Diagram
When the modulator is enabled, the two output compare channels are modulated together as
shown in the block diagram (see Figure 19-1).
19.2 Description
The Output Compare unit 1C and Output Compare unit 2 shares the PB7 port pin for output. The
outputs of the Output Compare units (OC1C and OC0A) overrides the normal PORTB7 Register
when one of them is enabled (that is, when COMnx1:0 is not equal to zero). When both OC1C
and OC0A are enabled at the same time, the modulator is automatically enabled.
The functional equivalent schematic of the modulator is shown on Figure 19-2. The schematic
includes part of the Timer/Counter units and the port B pin 7 output driver circuit.
Figure 19-2. Output Compare Modulator, Schematic
OC1C
Pin
OC1C /
OC0A / PB7
Timer/Counter 1
Timer/Counter 0 OC0A
PORTB7 DDRB7
D Q D Q
Pin
COMA01
COMA00
DATABUS
OC1C /
OC0A/ PB7
COM1C1
COM1C0
Modulator
1
0
OC1C
D Q
OC0A
D Q
( From Waveform Generator )
( From Waveform Generator )
0
1
Vcc173
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
When the modulator is enabled the type of modulation (logical AND or OR) can be selected by
the PORTB7 Register. Note that the DDRB7 controls the direction of the port independent of the
COMnx1:0 bit setting.
19.2.1 Timing example
Figure 19-3 illustrates the modulator in action. In this example the Timer/Counter1 is set to operate
in fast PWM mode (non-inverted) and Timer/Counter0 uses CTC waveform mode with toggle
Compare Output mode (COMnx1:0 = 1).
Figure 19-3. Output Compare Modulator, Timing Diagram
In this example, Timer/Counter2 provides the carrier, while the modulating signal is generated
by the Output Compare unit C of the Timer/Counter1.
The resolution of the PWM signal (OC1C) is reduced by the modulation. The reduction factor is
equal to the number of system clock cycles of one period of the carrier (OC0A). In this example
the resolution is reduced by a factor of two. The reason for the reduction is illustrated in Figure
19-3 at the second and third period of the PB7 output when PORTB7 equals zero. The period 2
high time is one cycle longer than the period 3 high time, but the result on the PB7 output is
equal in both periods.
1 2
OC0A
(CTC Mode)
OC1C
(FPWM Mode)
PB7
(PORTB7 = 0)
PB7
(PORTB7 = 1)
(Period) 3
clk I/O174
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
20. 8-bit Timer/Counter2 with PWM and Asynchronous Operation
Timer/Counter2 is a general purpose, single channel, 8-bit Timer/Counter module. The main
features are:
• Single Channel Counter
• Clear Timer on Compare Match (Auto Reload)
• Glitch-free, Phase Correct Pulse Width Modulator (PWM)
• Frequency Generator
• 10-bit Clock Prescaler
• Overflow and Compare Match Interrupt Sources (TOV2, OCF2A and OCF2B)
• Allows Clocking from External 32kHz Watch Crystal Independent of the I/O Clock
20.1 Overview
A simplified block diagram of the 8-bit Timer/Counter is shown in Figure 17-12. For the actual
placement of I/O pins, see “Pin Configurations” on page 2. CPU accessible I/O Registers, including
I/O bits and I/O pins, are shown in bold. The device-specific I/O Register and bit locations
are listed in the “Register Description” on page 187.
The Power Reduction Timer/Counter2 bit, PRTIM2, in “PRR0 – Power Reduction Register 0” on
page 56 must be written to zero to enable Timer/Counter2 module.
Figure 20-1. 8-bit Timer/Counter Block Diagram
Timer/Counter
DATA BUS
OCRnA
OCRnB
=
=
TCNTn
Waveform
Generation
Waveform
Generation
OCnA
OCnB
=
Fixed
TOP
Value
Control Logic
= 0
TOP BOTTOM
Count
Clear
Direction
TOVn
(Int.Req.)
OCnA
(Int.Req.)
OCnB
(Int.Req.)
TCCRnA TCCRnB
clkTn
ASSRn
Synchronization Unit
Prescaler
T/C Oscillator
clkI/O
clkASY
asynchronous mode
select (ASn)
Synchronized Status flags
TOSC1
TOSC2
Status flags
clkI/O175
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
20.1.1 Registers
The Timer/Counter (TCNT2) and Output Compare Register (OCR2A and OCR2B) are 8-bit registers.
Interrupt request (abbreviated to Int.Req.) signals are all visible in the Timer Interrupt Flag
Register (TIFR2). All interrupts are individually masked with the Timer Interrupt Mask Register
(TIMSK2). TIFR2 and TIMSK2 are not shown in the figure.
The Timer/Counter can be clocked internally, via the prescaler, or asynchronously clocked from
the TOSC1/2 pins, as detailed later in this section. The asynchronous operation is controlled by
the Asynchronous Status Register (ASSR). The Clock Select logic block controls which clock
source the Timer/Counter uses to increment (or decrement) its value. The Timer/Counter is inactive
when no clock source is selected. The output from the Clock Select logic is referred to as the
timer clock (clkT2).
The double buffered Output Compare Register (OCR2A and OCR2B) are compared with the
Timer/Counter value at all times. The result of the compare can be used by the Waveform Generator
to generate a PWM or variable frequency output on the Output Compare pins (OC2A and
OC2B). See “Output Compare Unit” on page 180 for details. The compare match event will also
set the Compare Flag (OCF2A or OCF2B) which can be used to generate an Output Compare
interrupt request.
20.1.2 Definitions
Many register and bit references in this document are written in general form. A lower case “n”
replaces the Timer/Counter number, in this case 2. However, when using the register or bit
defines in a program, the precise form must be used, that is, TCNT2 for accessing
Timer/Counter2 counter value and so on.
The definitions in Table 20-1 are also used extensively throughout the section.
20.2 Timer/Counter Clock Sources
The Timer/Counter can be clocked by an internal synchronous or an external asynchronous
clock source. The clock source clkT2 is by default equal to the MCU clock, clkI/O. When the AS2
bit in the ASSR Register is written to logic one, the clock source is taken from the Timer/Counter
Oscillator connected to TOSC1 and TOSC2. For details on asynchronous operation, see “Asynchronous
Operation of Timer/Counter2” on page 184. For details on clock sources and
prescaler, see “Timer/Counter Prescaler” on page 186.
20.3 Counter Unit
The main part of the 8-bit Timer/Counter is the programmable bi-directional counter unit. Figure
20-2 on page 176 shows a block diagram of the counter and its surrounding environment.
Table 20-1. Definitions
BOTTOM The counter reaches the BOTTOM when it becomes zero (0x00)
MAX The counter reaches its MAXimum when it becomes 0xFF (decimal 255)
TOP The counter reaches the TOP when it becomes equal to the highest value in the count
sequence. The TOP value can be assigned to be the fixed value 0xFF (MAX) or the
value stored in the OCR2A Register. The assignment is dependent on the mode of
operation176
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Figure 20-2. Counter Unit Block Diagram
Signal description (internal signals):
count Increment or decrement TCNT2 by 1.
direction Selects between increment and decrement.
clear Clear TCNT2 (set all bits to zero).
clkTn Timer/Counter clock, referred to as clkT2 in the following.
top Signalizes that TCNT2 has reached maximum value.
bottom Signalizes that TCNT2 has reached minimum value (zero).
Depending on the mode of operation used, the counter is cleared, incremented, or decremented
at each timer clock (clkT2). clkT2 can be generated from an external or internal clock source,
selected by the Clock Select bits (CS22:0). When no clock source is selected (CS22:0 = 0) the
timer is stopped. However, the TCNT2 value can be accessed by the CPU, regardless of
whether clkT2 is present or not. A CPU write overrides (has priority over) all counter clear or
count operations.
The counting sequence is determined by the setting of the WGM21 and WGM20 bits located in
the Timer/Counter Control Register (TCCR2A) and the WGM22 located in the Timer/Counter
Control Register B (TCCR2B). There are close connections between how the counter behaves
(counts) and how waveforms are generated on the Output Compare outputs OC2A and OC2B.
For more details about advanced counting sequences and waveform generation, see “Modes of
Operation” on page 176.
The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV2) is set according to the mode of operation selected by
the WGM22:0 bits. TOV2 can be used for generating a CPU interrupt.
20.4 Modes of Operation
The mode of operation, that is, the behavior of the Timer/Counter and the Output Compare pins,
is defined by the combination of the Waveform Generation mode (WGM22:0) and Compare Output
mode (COM2x1:0) bits. The Compare Output mode bits do not affect the counting sequence,
while the Waveform Generation mode bits do. The COM2x1:0 bits control whether the PWM output
generated should be inverted or not (inverted or non-inverted PWM). For non-PWM modes
the COM2x1:0 bits control whether the output should be set, cleared, or toggled at a compare
match. See “Compare Match Output Unit” on page 182.
For detailed timing information refer to “Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams” on page 183.
DATA BUS
TCNTn Control Logic
count
TOVn
(Int.Req.)
bottom top
direction
clear
TOSC1
T/C
Oscillator
TOSC2
Prescaler
clkI/O
clk Tn177
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
20.4.1 Normal Mode
The simplest mode of operation is the Normal mode (WGM22:0 = 0). In this mode the counting
direction is always up (incrementing), and no counter clear is performed. The counter simply
overruns when it passes its maximum 8-bit value (TOP = 0xFF) and then restarts from the bottom
(0x00). In normal operation the Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV2) will be set in the same
timer clock cycle as the TCNT2 becomes zero. The TOV2 Flag in this case behaves like a ninth
bit, except that it is only set, not cleared. However, combined with the timer overflow interrupt
that automatically clears the TOV2 Flag, the timer resolution can be increased by software.
There are no special cases to consider in the Normal mode, a new counter value can be written
anytime.
The Output Compare unit can be used to generate interrupts at some given time. Using the Output
Compare to generate waveforms in Normal mode is not recommended, since this will
occupy too much of the CPU time.
20.4.2 Clear Timer on Compare Match (CTC) Mode
In Clear Timer on Compare or CTC mode (WGM22:0 = 2), the OCR2A Register is used to
manipulate the counter resolution. In CTC mode the counter is cleared to zero when the counter
value (TCNT2) matches the OCR2A. The OCR2A defines the top value for the counter, hence
also its resolution. This mode allows greater control of the compare match output frequency. It
also simplifies the operation of counting external events.
The timing diagram for the CTC mode is shown in Figure 20-3. The counter value (TCNT2)
increases until a compare match occurs between TCNT2 and OCR2A, and then counter
(TCNT2) is cleared.
Figure 20-3. CTC Mode, Timing Diagram
An interrupt can be generated each time the counter value reaches the TOP value by using the
OCF2A Flag. If the interrupt is enabled, the interrupt handler routine can be used for updating
the TOP value. However, changing TOP to a value close to BOTTOM when the counter is running
with none or a low prescaler value must be done with care since the CTC mode does not
have the double buffering feature. If the new value written to OCR2A is lower than the current
value of TCNT2, the counter will miss the compare match. The counter will then have to count to
its maximum value (0xFF) and wrap around starting at 0x00 before the compare match can
occur.
For generating a waveform output in CTC mode, the OC2A output can be set to toggle its logical
level on each compare match by setting the Compare Output mode bits to toggle mode
(COM2A1:0 = 1). The OC2A value will not be visible on the port pin unless the data direction for
TCNTn
OCnx
(Toggle)
OCnx Interrupt Flag Set
Period 1 2 3 4
(COMnx1:0 = 1)178
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
the pin is set to output. The waveform generated will have a maximum frequency of fOC2A =
fclk_I/O/2 when OCR2A is set to zero (0x00). The waveform frequency is defined by the following
equation:
The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 32, 64, 128, 256, or 1024).
As for the Normal mode of operation, the TOV2 Flag is set in the same timer clock cycle that the
counter counts from MAX to 0x00.
20.4.3 Fast PWM Mode
Figure 20-4. Fast PWM Mode, Timing Diagram
The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV2) is set each time the counter reaches TOP. If the interrupt
is enabled, the interrupt handler routine can be used for updating the compare value.
In fast PWM mode, the compare unit allows generation of PWM waveforms on the OC2x pin.
Setting the COM2x1:0 bits to two will produce a non-inverted PWM and an inverted PWM output
can be generated by setting the COM2x1:0 to three. TOP is defined as 0xFF when WGM2:0 = 3,
and OCR2A when WGM2:0 = 7 (see Table 20-3 on page 187). The actual OC2x value will only
be visible on the port pin if the data direction for the port pin is set as output. The PWM waveform
is generated by setting (or clearing) the OC2x Register at the compare match between
OCR2x and TCNT2, and clearing (or setting) the OC2x Register at the timer clock cycle the
counter is cleared (changes from TOP to BOTTOM).
The PWM frequency for the output can be calculated by the following equation:
The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 32, 64, 128, 256, or 1024).
The extreme values for the OCR2A Register represent special cases when generating a PWM
waveform output in the fast PWM mode. If the OCR2A is set equal to BOTTOM, the output will
be a narrow spike for each MAX+1 timer clock cycle. Setting the OCR2A equal to MAX will result
f
OCnx
f
clk_I/O
2 ⋅ ⋅ N ( ) 1 + OCRnx = -------------------------------------------------
TCNTn
OCRnx Update and
TOVn Interrupt Flag Set
Period 1 2 3
OCnx
OCnx
(COMnx1:0 = 2)
(COMnx1:0 = 3)
OCRnx Interrupt Flag Set
4 5 6 7
f
OCnxPWM
f
clk_I/O
N ⋅ 256 = ------------------179
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
in a constantly high or low output (depending on the polarity of the output set by the COM2A1:0
bits).
A frequency (with 50% duty cycle) waveform output in fast PWM mode can be achieved by setting
OC2x to toggle its logical level on each compare match (COM2x1:0 = 1). The waveform
generated will have a maximum frequency of foc2 = fclk_I/O/2 when OCR2A is set to zero. This feature
is similar to the OC2A toggle in CTC mode, except the double buffer feature of the Output
Compare unit is enabled in the fast PWM mode.
20.4.4 Phase Correct PWM Mode
The phase correct PWM mode (WGM22:0 = 1 or 5) provides a high resolution phase correct
PWM waveform generation option. The phase correct PWM mode is based on a dual-slope
operation. The counter counts repeatedly from BOTTOM to TOP and then from TOP to BOTTOM.
TOP is defined as 0xFF when WGM22:0 = 1, and OCR2A when MGM22:0 = 5. In noninverting
Compare Output mode, the Output Compare (OC2x) is cleared on the compare match
between TCNT2 and OCR2x while upcounting, and set on the compare match while downcounting.
In inverting Output Compare mode, the operation is inverted. The dual-slope operation has
lower maximum operation frequency than single slope operation. However, due to the symmetric
feature of the dual-slope PWM modes, these modes are preferred for motor control
applications.
In phase correct PWM mode the counter is incremented until the counter value matches TOP.
When the counter reaches TOP, it changes the count direction. The TCNT2 value will be equal
to TOP for one timer clock cycle. The timing diagram for the phase correct PWM mode is shown
on Figure 20-5. The TCNT2 value is in the timing diagram shown as a histogram for illustrating
the dual-slope operation. The diagram includes non-inverted and inverted PWM outputs. The
small horizontal line marks on the TCNT2 slopes represent compare matches between OCR2x
and TCNT2.
Figure 20-5. Phase Correct PWM Mode, Timing Diagram
TOVn Interrupt Flag Set
OCnx Interrupt Flag Set
1 2 3
TCNTn
Period
OCnx
OCnx
(COMnx1:0 = 2)
(COMnx1:0 = 3)
OCRnx Update180
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV2) is set each time the counter reaches BOTTOM. The
Interrupt Flag can be used to generate an interrupt each time the counter reaches the BOTTOM
value.
In phase correct PWM mode, the compare unit allows generation of PWM waveforms on the
OC2x pin. Setting the COM2x1:0 bits to two will produce a non-inverted PWM. An inverted PWM
output can be generated by setting the COM2x1:0 to three. TOP is defined as 0xFF when
WGM2:0 = 3, and OCR2A when MGM2:0 = 7 (see Table 20-4 on page 188). The actual OC2x
value will only be visible on the port pin if the data direction for the port pin is set as output. The
PWM waveform is generated by clearing (or setting) the OC2x Register at the compare match
between OCR2x and TCNT2 when the counter increments, and setting (or clearing) the OC2x
Register at compare match between OCR2x and TCNT2 when the counter decrements. The
PWM frequency for the output when using phase correct PWM can be calculated by the following
equation:
The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 32, 64, 128, 256, or 1024).
The extreme values for the OCR2A Register represent special cases when generating a PWM
waveform output in the phase correct PWM mode. If the OCR2A is set equal to BOTTOM, the
output will be continuously low and if set equal to MAX the output will be continuously high for
non-inverted PWM mode. For inverted PWM the output will have the opposite logic values.
At the very start of period 2 in Figure 20-5 on page 179 OCnx has a transition from high to low
even though there is no Compare Match. The point of this transition is to guarantee symmetry
around BOTTOM. There are two cases that give a transition without Compare Match.
• OCR2A changes its value from MAX, like in Figure 20-5 on page 179. When the OCR2A
value is MAX the OCn pin value is the same as the result of a down-counting compare
match. To ensure symmetry around BOTTOM the OCn value at MAX must correspond to the
result of an up-counting Compare Match.
• The timer starts counting from a value higher than the one in OCR2A, and for that reason
misses the Compare Match and hence the OCn change that would have happened on the
way up.
20.5 Output Compare Unit
The 8-bit comparator continuously compares TCNT2 with the Output Compare Register
(OCR2A and OCR2B). Whenever TCNT2 equals OCR2A or OCR2B, the comparator signals a
match. A match will set the Output Compare Flag (OCF2A or OCF2B) at the next timer clock
cycle. If the corresponding interrupt is enabled, the Output Compare Flag generates an Output
Compare interrupt. The Output Compare Flag is automatically cleared when the interrupt is executed.
Alternatively, the Output Compare Flag can be cleared by software by writing a logical
one to its I/O bit location. The Waveform Generator uses the match signal to generate an output
according to operating mode set by the WGM22:0 bits and Compare Output mode (COM2x1:0)
bits. The max and bottom signals are used by the Waveform Generator for handling the special
cases of the extreme values in some modes of operation (see “Modes of Operation” on page
176).
Figure 20-6 on page 181 shows a block diagram of the Output Compare unit.
f
OCnxPCPWM
f
clk_I/O
N ⋅ 510 = ------------------181
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Figure 20-6. Output Compare Unit, Block Diagram
The OCR2x Register is double buffered when using any of the Pulse Width Modulation (PWM)
modes. For the Normal and Clear Timer on Compare (CTC) modes of operation, the double
buffering is disabled. The double buffering synchronizes the update of the OCR2x Compare
Register to either top or bottom of the counting sequence. The synchronization prevents the
occurrence of odd-length, non-symmetrical PWM pulses, thereby making the output glitch-free.
The OCR2x Register access may seem complex, but this is not case. When the double buffering
is enabled, the CPU has access to the OCR2x Buffer Register, and if double buffering is disabled
the CPU will access the OCR2x directly.
20.5.1 Force Output Compare
In non-PWM waveform generation modes, the match output of the comparator can be forced by
writing a one to the Force Output Compare (FOC2x) bit. Forcing compare match will not set the
OCF2x Flag or reload/clear the timer, but the OC2x pin will be updated as if a real compare
match had occurred (the COM2x1:0 bits settings define whether the OC2x pin is set, cleared or
toggled).
20.5.2 Compare Match Blocking by TCNT2 Write
All CPU write operations to the TCNT2 Register will block any compare match that occurs in the
next timer clock cycle, even when the timer is stopped. This feature allows OCR2x to be initialized
to the same value as TCNT2 without triggering an interrupt when the Timer/Counter clock is
enabled.
20.5.3 Using the Output Compare Unit
Since writing TCNT2 in any mode of operation will block all compare matches for one timer clock
cycle, there are risks involved when changing TCNT2 when using the Output Compare channel,
independently of whether the Timer/Counter is running or not. If the value written to TCNT2
equals the OCR2x value, the compare match will be missed, resulting in incorrect waveform
generation. Similarly, do not write the TCNT2 value equal to BOTTOM when the counter is
downcounting.
OCFnx (Int.Req.)
= (8-bit Comparator )
OCRnx
OCnx
DATA BUS
TCNTn
WGMn1:0
Waveform Generator
top
FOCn
COMnX1:0
bottom182
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
The setup of the OC2x should be performed before setting the Data Direction Register for the
port pin to output. The easiest way of setting the OC2x value is to use the Force Output Compare
(FOC2x) strobe bit in Normal mode. The OC2x Register keeps its value even when
changing between Waveform Generation modes.
Be aware that the COM2x1:0 bits are not double buffered together with the compare value.
Changing the COM2x1:0 bits will take effect immediately.
20.6 Compare Match Output Unit
The Compare Output mode (COM2x1:0) bits have two functions. The Waveform Generator uses
the COM2x1:0 bits for defining the Output Compare (OC2x) state at the next compare match.
Also, the COM2x1:0 bits control the OC2x pin output source. Figure 20-7 shows a simplified
schematic of the logic affected by the COM2x1:0 bit setting. The I/O Registers, I/O bits, and I/O
pins in the figure are shown in bold. Only the parts of the general I/O Port Control Registers
(DDR and PORT) that are affected by the COM2x1:0 bits are shown. When referring to the
OC2x state, the reference is for the internal OC2x Register, not the OC2x pin.
Figure 20-7. Compare Match Output Unit, Schematic
The general I/O port function is overridden by the Output Compare (OC2x) from the Waveform
Generator if either of the COM2x1:0 bits are set. However, the OC2x pin direction (input or output)
is still controlled by the Data Direction Register (DDR) for the port pin. The Data Direction
Register bit for the OC2x pin (DDR_OC2x) must be set as output before the OC2x value is visible
on the pin. The port override function is independent of the Waveform Generation mode.
The design of the Output Compare pin logic allows initialization of the OC2x state before the output
is enabled. Note that some COM2x1:0 bit settings are reserved for certain modes of
operation. See “Register Description” on page 187.
PORT
DDR
D Q
D Q
OCnx
OCnx Pin
D Q Waveform
Generator
COMnx1
COMnx0
0
1
DATA BU
S
FOCnx
clkI/O183
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
20.6.1 Compare Output Mode and Waveform Generation
The Waveform Generator uses the COM2x1:0 bits differently in normal, CTC, and PWM modes.
For all modes, setting the COM2x1:0 = 0 tells the Waveform Generator that no action on the
OC2x Register is to be performed on the next compare match. For compare output actions in the
non-PWM modes refer to Table 20-5 on page 188. For fast PWM mode, refer to Table 20-6 on
page 188, and for phase correct PWM refer to Table 20-7 on page 189.
A change of the COM2x1:0 bits state will have effect at the first compare match after the bits are
written. For non-PWM modes, the action can be forced to have immediate effect by using the
FOC2x strobe bits.
20.7 Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams
The following figures show the Timer/Counter in synchronous mode, and the timer clock (clkT2)
is therefore shown as a clock enable signal. In asynchronous mode, clkI/O should be replaced by
the Timer/Counter Oscillator clock. The figures include information on when Interrupt Flags are
set. Figure 20-8 contains timing data for basic Timer/Counter operation. The figure shows the
count sequence close to the MAX value in all modes other than phase correct PWM mode.
Figure 20-8. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, no Prescaling
Figure 20-9 shows the same timing data, but with the prescaler enabled.
Figure 20-9. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, with Prescaler (fclk_I/O/8)
clkTn
(clkI/O/1)
TOVn
clkI/O
TCNTn MAX - 1 MAX BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1
TOVn
TCNTn MAX - 1 MAX BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1
clkI/O
clkTn
(clkI/O/8)184
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Figure 20-10 shows the setting of OCF2A in all modes except CTC mode.
Figure 20-10. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, Setting of OCF2A, with Prescaler (fclk_I/O/8)
Figure 20-11 shows the setting of OCF2A and the clearing of TCNT2 in CTC mode.
Figure 20-11. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, Clear Timer on Compare Match mode, with Prescaler
(fclk_I/O/8)
20.8 Asynchronous Operation of Timer/Counter2
When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously, some considerations must be taken.
• Warning: When switching between asynchronous and synchronous clocking of
Timer/Counter2, the Timer Registers TCNT2, OCR2x, and TCCR2x might be corrupted. A
safe procedure for switching clock source is:
1. Disable the Timer/Counter2 interrupts by clearing OCIE2x and TOIE2.
2. Select clock source by setting AS2 as appropriate.
3. Write new values to TCNT2, OCR2x, and TCCR2x.
4. To switch to asynchronous operation: Wait for TCN2UB, OCR2xUB, and TCR2xUB.
5. Clear the Timer/Counter2 Interrupt Flags.
6. Enable interrupts, if needed.
OCFnx
OCRnx
TCNTn
OCRnx Value
OCRnx - 1 OCRnx OCRnx + 1 OCRnx + 2
clkI/O
clkTn
(clkI/O/8)
OCFnx
OCRnx
TCNTn
(CTC)
TOP
TOP - 1 TOP BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1
clkI/O
clkTn
(clkI/O/8)185
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
• The CPU main clock frequency must be more than four times the Oscillator frequency.
• When writing to one of the registers TCNT2, OCR2x, or TCCR2x, the value is transferred to
a temporary register, and latched after two positive edges on TOSC1. The user should not
write a new value before the contents of the temporary register have been transferred to its
destination. Each of the five mentioned registers have their individual temporary register,
which means that, for example, writing to TCNT2 does not disturb an OCR2x write in
progress. To detect that a transfer to the destination register has taken place, the
Asynchronous Status Register – ASSR has been implemented.
• When entering Power-save or ADC Noise Reduction mode after having written to TCNT2,
OCR2x, or TCCR2x, the user must wait until the written register has been updated if
Timer/Counter2 is used to wake up the device. Otherwise, the MCU will enter sleep mode
before the changes are effective. This is particularly important if any of the Output
Compare2 interrupt is used to wake up the device, since the Output Compare function is
disabled during writing to OCR2x or TCNT2. If the write cycle is not finished, and the MCU
enters sleep mode before the corresponding OCR2xUB bit returns to zero, the device will
never receive a compare match interrupt, and the MCU will not wake up.
• If Timer/Counter2 is used to wake the device up from Power-save or ADC Noise Reduction
mode, precautions must be taken if the user wants to re-enter one of these modes: The
interrupt logic needs one TOSC1 cycle to be reset. If the time between wake-up and reentering
sleep mode is less than one TOSC1 cycle, the interrupt will not occur, and the
device will fail to wake up. If the user is in doubt whether the time before re-entering Powersave
or ADC Noise Reduction mode is sufficient, the following algorithm can be used to
ensure that one TOSC1 cycle has elapsed:
1. Write a value to TCCR2x, TCNT2, or OCR2x.
2. Wait until the corresponding Update Busy Flag in ASSR returns to zero.
3. Enter Power-save or ADC Noise Reduction mode.
• When the asynchronous operation is selected, the 32.768kHz Oscillator for Timer/Counter2
is always running, except in Power-down and Standby modes. After a Power-up Reset or
wake-up from Power-down or Standby mode, the user should be aware of the fact that this
Oscillator might take as long as one second to stabilize. The user is advised to wait for at
least one second before using Timer/Counter2 after power-up or wake-up from Power-down
or Standby mode. The contents of all Timer/Counter2 Registers must be considered lost
after a wake-up from Power-down or Standby mode due to unstable clock signal upon startup,
no matter whether the Oscillator is in use or a clock signal is applied to the TOSC1 pin.
• Description of wake up from Power-save or ADC Noise Reduction mode when the timer is
clocked asynchronously: When the interrupt condition is met, the wake up process is started
on the following cycle of the timer clock, that is, the timer is always advanced by at least one
before the processor can read the counter value. After wake-up, the MCU is halted for four
cycles, it executes the interrupt routine, and resumes execution from the instruction
following SLEEP.
• Reading of the TCNT2 Register shortly after wake-up from Power-save may give an
incorrect result. Since TCNT2 is clocked on the asynchronous TOSC clock, reading TCNT2
must be done through a register synchronized to the internal I/O clock domain.
Synchronization takes place for every rising TOSC1 edge. When waking up from Powersave
mode, and the I/O clock (clkI/O) again becomes active, TCNT2 will read as the previous
value (before entering sleep) until the next rising TOSC1 edge. The phase of the TOSC
clock after waking up from Power-save mode is essentially unpredictable, as it depends on
the wake-up time. The recommended procedure for reading TCNT2 is thus as follows:
1. Write any value to either of the registers OCR2x or TCCR2x.
2. Wait for the corresponding Update Busy Flag to be cleared.
3. Read TCNT2.186
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
• During asynchronous operation, the synchronization of the Interrupt Flags for the
asynchronous timer takes three processor cycles plus one timer cycle. The timer is therefore
advanced by at least one before the processor can read the timer value causing the setting
of the Interrupt Flag. The Output Compare pin is changed on the timer clock and is not
synchronized to the processor clock.
20.9 Timer/Counter Prescaler
Figure 20-12. Prescaler for Timer/Counter2
The clock source for Timer/Counter2 is named clkT2S. clkT2S is by default connected to the main
system I/O clock clkIO. By setting the AS2 bit in ASSR, Timer/Counter2 is asynchronously
clocked from the TOSC1 pin. This enables use of Timer/Counter2 as a Real Time Counter
(RTC). When AS2 is set, pins TOSC1 and TOSC2 are disconnected from Port C. A crystal can
then be connected between the TOSC1 and TOSC2 pins to serve as an independent clock
source for Timer/Counter2. The Oscillator is optimized for use with a 32.768kHz crystal. By setting
the EXCLK bit in the ASSR, a 32kHz external clock can be applied. See “ASSR –
Asynchronous Status Register” on page 192 for details.
For Timer/Counter2, the possible prescaled selections are: clkT2S/8, clkT2S/32, clkT2S/64,
clkT2S/128, clkT2S/256, and clkT2S/1024. Additionally, clkT2S as well as 0 (stop) may be selected.
Setting the PSRASY bit in GTCCR resets the prescaler. This allows the user to operate with a
predictable prescaler.
10-BIT T/C PRESCALER
TIMER/COUNTER2 CLOCK SOURCE
clkI/O clkT2S
TOSC1
AS2
CS20
CS21
CS22
clkT2S/8
clkT2S/64
clkT2S/128
clkT2S/1024
clkT2S/256
clkT2S/32
0 PSRASY
Clear
clkT2187
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
20.10 Register Description
20.10.1 TCCR2A –Timer/Counter Control Register A
• Bits 7:6 – COM2A1:0: Compare Match Output A Mode
These bits control the Output Compare pin (OC2A) behavior. If one or both of the COM2A1:0
bits are set, the OC2A output overrides the normal port functionality of the I/O pin it is connected
to. However, note that the Data Direction Register (DDR) bit corresponding to the OC2A pin
must be set in order to enable the output driver.
When OC2A is connected to the pin, the function of the COM2A1:0 bits depends on the
WGM22:0 bit setting. Table 20-2 shows the COM2A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM22:0 bits
are set to a normal or CTC mode (non-PWM).
Table 20-3 shows the COM2A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM21:0 bits are set to fast PWM
mode.
Note: 1. A special case occurs when OCR2A equals TOP and COM2A1 is set. In this case, the Compare
Match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at BOTTOM. See “Fast PWM Mode” on
page 178 for more details.
Table 20-4 on page 188 shows the COM2A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM22:0 bits are set
to phase correct PWM mode.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(0xB0) COM2A1 COM2A0 COM2B1 COM2B0 – – WGM21 WGM20 TCCR2A
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R R R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Table 20-2. Compare Output Mode, non-PWM Mode
COM2A1 COM2A0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC2A disconnected
0 1 Toggle OC2A on Compare Match
1 0 Clear OC2A on Compare Match
1 1 Set OC2A on Compare Match
Table 20-3. Compare Output Mode, Fast PWM Mode(1)
COM2A1 COM2A0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC2A disconnected
0 1 WGM22 = 0: Normal Port Operation, OC2A Disconnected
WGM22 = 1: Toggle OC2A on Compare Match
1 0 Clear OC2A on Compare Match, set OC2A at BOTTOM
(non-inverting mode)
1 1 Set OC2A on Compare Match, clear OC2A at BOTTOM
(inverting mode)188
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Note: 1. A special case occurs when OCR2A equals TOP and COM2A1 is set. In this case, the Compare
Match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See “Phase Correct PWM Mode” on
page 179 for more details.
• Bits 5:4 – COM2B1:0: Compare Match Output B Mode
These bits control the Output Compare pin (OC2B) behavior. If one or both of the COM2B1:0
bits are set, the OC2B output overrides the normal port functionality of the I/O pin it is connected
to. However, note that the Data Direction Register (DDR) bit corresponding to the OC2B pin
must be set in order to enable the output driver.
When OC2B is connected to the pin, the function of the COM2B1:0 bits depends on the
WGM22:0 bit setting. Table 20-5 shows the COM2B1:0 bit functionality when the WGM22:0 bits
are set to a normal or CTC mode (non-PWM).
Table 20-6 shows the COM2B1:0 bit functionality when the WGM22:0 bits are set to fast PWM
mode.
Note: 1. A special case occurs when OCR2B equals TOP and COM2B1 is set. In this case, the Compare
Match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at BOTTOM. See “Fast PWM Mode” on
page 178 for more details.
Table 20-4. Compare Output Mode, Phase Correct PWM Mode(1)
COM2A1 COM2A0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC2A disconnected
0 1 WGM22 = 0: Normal Port Operation, OC2A Disconnected
WGM22 = 1: Toggle OC2A on Compare Match
1 0 Clear OC2A on Compare Match when up-counting
Set OC2A on Compare Match when down-counting
1 1 Set OC2A on Compare Match when up-counting
Clear OC2A on Compare Match when down-counting
Table 20-5. Compare Output Mode, non-PWM Mode
COM2B1 COM2B0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC2B disconnected
0 1 Toggle OC2B on Compare Match
1 0 Clear OC2B on Compare Match
1 1 Set OC2B on Compare Match
Table 20-6. Compare Output Mode, Fast PWM Mode(1)
COM2B1 COM2B0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC2B disconnected
0 1 Reserved
1 0 Clear OC2B on Compare Match, set OC2B at BOTTOM
(non-inverting mode)
1 1 Set OC2B on Compare Match, clear OC2B at BOTTOM
(inverting mode)189
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Table 20-7 shows the COM2B1:0 bit functionality when the WGM22:0 bits are set to phase correct
PWM mode.
Note: 1. A special case occurs when OCR2B equals TOP and COM2B1 is set. In this case, the Compare
Match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See “Phase Correct PWM Mode” on
page 179 for more details.
• Bits 3, 2 – Res: Reserved Bits
These bits are reserved bits and will always read as zero.
• Bits 1:0 – WGM21:0: Waveform Generation Mode
Combined with the WGM22 bit found in the TCCR2B Register, these bits control the counting
sequence of the counter, the source for maximum (TOP) counter value, and what type of waveform
generation to be used, see Table 20-8. Modes of operation supported by the Timer/Counter
unit are: Normal mode (counter), Clear Timer on Compare Match (CTC) mode, and two types of
Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) modes (see “Modes of Operation” on page 176).
Notes: 1. MAX = 0xFF.
2. BOTTOM = 0x00.
Table 20-7. Compare Output Mode, Phase Correct PWM Mode(1)
COM2B1 COM2B0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC2B disconnected
0 1 Reserved
1 0 Clear OC2B on Compare Match when up-counting
Set OC2B on Compare Match when down-counting
1 1 Set OC2B on Compare Match when up-counting
Clear OC2B on Compare Match when down-counting
Table 20-8. Waveform Generation Mode Bit Description
Mode WGM2 WGM1 WGM0
Timer/Counter
Mode of
Operation TOP
Update of
OCRx at
TOV Flag
Set on(1)(2)
00 0 0 Normal 0xFF Immediate MAX
10 0 1 PWM, Phase
Correct 0xFF TOP BOTTOM
2 0 1 0 CTC OCRA Immediate MAX
3 0 1 1 Fast PWM 0xFF BOTTOM MAX
4 1 0 0 Reserved – – –
51 0 1 PWM, Phase
Correct OCRA TOP BOTTOM
6 1 1 0 Reserved – – –
7 1 1 1 Fast PWM OCRA BOTTOM TOP190
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
20.10.2 TCCR2B – Timer/Counter Control Register B
• Bit 7 – FOC2A: Force Output Compare A
The FOC2A bit is only active when the WGM bits specify a non-PWM mode.
However, for ensuring compatibility with future devices, this bit must be set to zero when
TCCR2B is written when operating in PWM mode. When writing a logical one to the FOC2A bit,
an immediate Compare Match is forced on the Waveform Generation unit. The OC2A output is
changed according to its COM2A1:0 bits setting. Note that the FOC2A bit is implemented as a
strobe. Therefore it is the value present in the COM2A1:0 bits that determines the effect of the
forced compare.
A FOC2A strobe will not generate any interrupt, nor will it clear the timer in CTC mode using
OCR2A as TOP.
The FOC2A bit is always read as zero.
• Bit 6 – FOC2B: Force Output Compare B
The FOC2B bit is only active when the WGM bits specify a non-PWM mode.
However, for ensuring compatibility with future devices, this bit must be set to zero when
TCCR2B is written when operating in PWM mode. When writing a logical one to the FOC2B bit,
an immediate Compare Match is forced on the Waveform Generation unit. The OC2B output is
changed according to its COM2B1:0 bits setting. Note that the FOC2B bit is implemented as a
strobe. Therefore it is the value present in the COM2B1:0 bits that determines the effect of the
forced compare.
A FOC2B strobe will not generate any interrupt, nor will it clear the timer in CTC mode using
OCR2B as TOP.
The FOC2B bit is always read as zero.
• Bits 5:4 – Res: Reserved Bits
These bits are reserved bits and will always read as zero.
• Bit 3 – WGM22: Waveform Generation Mode
See the description in the “TCCR2A –Timer/Counter Control Register A” on page 187.
• Bit 2:0 – CS22:0: Clock Select
The three Clock Select bits select the clock source to be used by the Timer/Counter, see Table
20-9 on page 191.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(0xB1) FOC2A FOC2B – – WGM22 CS22 CS21 CS20 TCCR2B
Read/Write W W R R R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0191
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
If external pin modes are used for the Timer/Counter0, transitions on the T0 pin will clock the
counter even if the pin is configured as an output. This feature allows software control of the
counting.
20.10.3 TCNT2 – Timer/Counter Register
The Timer/Counter Register gives direct access, both for read and write operations, to the
Timer/Counter unit 8-bit counter. Writing to the TCNT2 Register blocks (removes) the Compare
Match on the following timer clock. Modifying the counter (TCNT2) while the counter is running,
introduces a risk of missing a Compare Match between TCNT2 and the OCR2x Registers.
20.10.4 OCR2A – Output Compare Register A
The Output Compare Register A contains an 8-bit value that is continuously compared with the
counter value (TCNT2). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare interrupt, or to
generate a waveform output on the OC2A pin.
20.10.5 OCR2B – Output Compare Register B
The Output Compare Register B contains an 8-bit value that is continuously compared with the
counter value (TCNT2). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare interrupt, or to
generate a waveform output on the OC2B pin.
Table 20-9. Clock Select Bit Description
CS22 CS21 CS20 Description
000 No clock source (Timer/Counter stopped)
0 0 1 clkT2S/(No prescaling)
0 1 0 clkT2S/8 (From prescaler)
0 1 1 clkT2S/32 (From prescaler)
1 0 0 clkT2S/64 (From prescaler)
1 0 1 clkT2S/128 (From prescaler)
1 1 0 clkT2S/256 (From prescaler)
1 1 1 clkT2S/1024 (From prescaler)
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(0xB2) TCNT2[7:0] TCNT2
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(0xB3) OCR2A[7:0] OCR2A
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(0xB4) OCR2B[7:0] OCR2B
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0192
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
20.10.6 ASSR – Asynchronous Status Register
• Bit 6 – EXCLK: Enable External Clock Input
When EXCLK is written to one, and asynchronous clock is selected, the external clock input buffer
is enabled and an external clock can be input on Timer Oscillator 1 (TOSC1) pin instead of a
32kHz crystal. Writing to EXCLK should be done before asynchronous operation is selected.
Note that the crystal Oscillator will only run when this bit is zero.
• Bit 5 – AS2: Asynchronous Timer/Counter2
When AS2 is written to zero, Timer/Counter2 is clocked from the I/O clock, clkI/O. When AS2 is
written to one, Timer/Counter2 is clocked from a crystal Oscillator connected to the Timer Oscillator
1 (TOSC1) pin. When the value of AS2 is changed, the contents of TCNT2, OCR2A,
OCR2B, TCCR2A and TCCR2B might be corrupted.
• Bit 4 – TCN2UB: Timer/Counter2 Update Busy
When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously and TCNT2 is written, this bit becomes set.
When TCNT2 has been updated from the temporary storage register, this bit is cleared by hardware.
A logical zero in this bit indicates that TCNT2 is ready to be updated with a new value.
• Bit 3 – OCR2AUB: Output Compare Register2 Update Busy
When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously and OCR2A is written, this bit becomes set.
When OCR2A has been updated from the temporary storage register, this bit is cleared by hardware.
A logical zero in this bit indicates that OCR2A is ready to be updated with a new value.
• Bit 2 – OCR2BUB: Output Compare Register2 Update Busy
When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously and OCR2B is written, this bit becomes set.
When OCR2B has been updated from the temporary storage register, this bit is cleared by hardware.
A logical zero in this bit indicates that OCR2B is ready to be updated with a new value.
• Bit 1 – TCR2AUB: Timer/Counter Control Register2 Update Busy
When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously and TCCR2A is written, this bit becomes set.
When TCCR2A has been updated from the temporary storage register, this bit is cleared by
hardware. A logical zero in this bit indicates that TCCR2A is ready to be updated with a new
value.
• Bit 0 – TCR2BUB: Timer/Counter Control Register2 Update Busy
When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously and TCCR2B is written, this bit becomes set.
When TCCR2B has been updated from the temporary storage register, this bit is cleared by
hardware. A logical zero in this bit indicates that TCCR2B is ready to be updated with a new
value.
If a write is performed to any of the five Timer/Counter2 Registers while its update busy flag is
set, the updated value might get corrupted and cause an unintentional interrupt to occur.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(0xB6) – EXCLK AS2 TCN2UB OCR2AUB OCR2BUB TCR2AUB TCR2BUB ASSR
Read/Write R R/W R/W RR R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0193
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
The mechanisms for reading TCNT2, OCR2A, OCR2B, TCCR2A and TCCR2B are different.
When reading TCNT2, the actual timer value is read. When reading OCR2A, OCR2B, TCCR2A
and TCCR2B the value in the temporary storage register is read.
20.10.7 TIMSK2 – Timer/Counter2 Interrupt Mask Register
• Bit 2 – OCIE2B: Timer/Counter2 Output Compare Match B Interrupt Enable
When the OCIE2B bit is written to one and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the
Timer/Counter2 Compare Match B interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed
if a compare match in Timer/Counter2 occurs, that is, when the OCF2B bit is set in the
Timer/Counter 2 Interrupt Flag Register – TIFR2.
• Bit 1 – OCIE2A: Timer/Counter2 Output Compare Match A Interrupt Enable
When the OCIE2A bit is written to one and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the
Timer/Counter2 Compare Match A interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed
if a compare match in Timer/Counter2 occurs, that is, when the OCF2A bit is set in the
Timer/Counter 2 Interrupt Flag Register – TIFR2.
• Bit 0 – TOIE2: Timer/Counter2 Overflow Interrupt Enable
When the TOIE2 bit is written to one and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the
Timer/Counter2 Overflow interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed if an
overflow in Timer/Counter2 occurs, that is, when the TOV2 bit is set in the Timer/Counter2 Interrupt
Flag Register – TIFR2.
20.10.8 TIFR2 – Timer/Counter2 Interrupt Flag Register
• Bit 2 – OCF2B: Output Compare Flag 2 B
The OCF2B bit is set (one) when a compare match occurs between the Timer/Counter2 and the
data in OCR2B – Output Compare Register2. OCF2B is cleared by hardware when executing
the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, OCF2B is cleared by writing a logic
one to the flag. When the I-bit in SREG, OCIE2B (Timer/Counter2 Compare match Interrupt
Enable), and OCF2B are set (one), the Timer/Counter2 Compare match Interrupt is executed.
• Bit 1 – OCF2A: Output Compare Flag 2 A
The OCF2A bit is set (one) when a compare match occurs between the Timer/Counter2 and the
data in OCR2A – Output Compare Register2. OCF2A is cleared by hardware when executing
the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, OCF2A is cleared by writing a logic
one to the flag. When the I-bit in SREG, OCIE2A (Timer/Counter2 Compare match Interrupt
Enable), and OCF2A are set (one), the Timer/Counter2 Compare match Interrupt is executed.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(0x70) – – – – – OCIE2B OCIE2A TOIE2 TIMSK2
Read/Write R R R R R R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x17 (0x37) – – – – – OCF2B OCF2A TOV2 TIFR2
Read/Write R R R R R R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0194
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
• Bit 0 – TOV2: Timer/Counter2 Overflow Flag
The TOV2 bit is set (one) when an overflow occurs in Timer/Counter2. TOV2 is cleared by hardware
when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, TOV2 is cleared
by writing a logic one to the flag. When the SREG I-bit, TOIE2A (Timer/Counter2 Overflow Interrupt
Enable), and TOV2 are set (one), the Timer/Counter2 Overflow interrupt is executed. In
PWM mode, this bit is set when Timer/Counter2 changes counting direction at 0x00.
20.10.9 GTCCR – General Timer/Counter Control Register
• Bit 1 – PSRASY: Prescaler Reset Timer/Counter2
When this bit is one, the Timer/Counter2 prescaler will be reset. This bit is normally cleared
immediately by hardware. If the bit is written when Timer/Counter2 is operating in asynchronous
mode, the bit will remain one until the prescaler has been reset. The bit will not be cleared by
hardware if the TSM bit is set. Refer to the description of the “Bit 7 – TSM: Timer/Counter Synchronization
Mode” on page 170 for a description of the Timer/Counter Synchronization mode.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x23 (0x43) TSM – – – – – PSRASY PSRSYNC GTCCR
Read/Write R/W R R R R R R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0195
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
21. SPI – Serial Peripheral Interface
The Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) allows high-speed synchronous data transfer between the
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561 and peripheral devices or between several AVR devices.
The ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561 SPI includes the following features:
• Full-duplex, Three-wire Synchronous Data Transfer
• Master or Slave Operation
• LSB First or MSB First Data Transfer
• Seven Programmable Bit Rates
• End of Transmission Interrupt Flag
• Write Collision Flag Protection
• Wake-up from Idle Mode
• Double Speed (CK/2) Master SPI Mode
USART can also be used in Master SPI mode, see “USART in SPI Mode” on page 232.
The Power Reduction SPI bit, PRSPI, in “PRR0 – Power Reduction Register 0” on page 56 on
page 50 must be written to zero to enable SPI module.
Figure 21-1. SPI Block Diagram(1)
Note: 1. Refer to Figure 1-1 on page 2, and Table 13-6 on page 79 for SPI pin placement.
The interconnection between Master and Slave CPUs with SPI is shown in Figure 21-2 on page
196. The system consists of two shift Registers, and a Master clock generator. The SPI Master
initiates the communication cycle when pulling low the Slave Select SS pin of the desired Slave. SPI2X SPI2X
DIVIDER
/2/4/8/16/32/64/128196
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Master and Slave prepare the data to be sent in their respective shift Registers, and the Master
generates the required clock pulses on the SCK line to interchange data. Data is always shifted
from Master to Slave on the Master Out – Slave In, MOSI, line, and from Slave to Master on the
Master In – Slave Out, MISO, line. After each data packet, the Master will synchronize the Slave
by pulling high the Slave Select, SS, line.
When configured as a Master, the SPI interface has no automatic control of the SS line. This
must be handled by user software before communication can start. When this is done, writing a
byte to the SPI Data Register starts the SPI clock generator, and the hardware shifts the eight
bits into the Slave. After shifting one byte, the SPI clock generator stops, setting the end of
Transmission Flag (SPIF). If the SPI Interrupt Enable bit (SPIE) in the SPCR Register is set, an
interrupt is requested. The Master may continue to shift the next byte by writing it into SPDR, or
signal the end of packet by pulling high the Slave Select, SS line. The last incoming byte will be
kept in the Buffer Register for later use.
When configured as a Slave, the SPI interface will remain sleeping with MISO tri-stated as long
as the SS pin is driven high. In this state, software may update the contents of the SPI Data
Register, SPDR, but the data will not be shifted out by incoming clock pulses on the SCK pin
until the SS pin is driven low. As one byte has been completely shifted, the end of Transmission
Flag, SPIF is set. If the SPI Interrupt Enable bit, SPIE, in the SPCR Register is set, an interrupt
is requested. The Slave may continue to place new data to be sent into SPDR before reading
the incoming data. The last incoming byte will be kept in the Buffer Register for later use.
Figure 21-2. SPI Master-slave Interconnection
The system is single buffered in the transmit direction and double buffered in the receive direction.
This means that bytes to be transmitted cannot be written to the SPI Data Register before
the entire shift cycle is completed. When receiving data, however, a received character must be
read from the SPI Data Register before the next character has been completely shifted in. Otherwise,
the first byte is lost.
In SPI Slave mode, the control logic will sample the incoming signal of the SCK pin. To ensure
correct sampling of the clock signal, the minimum low and high periods should be:
Low period: longer than 2 CPU clock cycles.
High period: longer than 2 CPU clock cycles.
When the SPI is enabled, the data direction of the MOSI, MISO, SCK, and SS pins is overridden
according to Table 21-1. For more details on automatic port overrides, refer to “Alternate Port
SHIFT
ENABLE197
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Functions” on page 75.
Note: 1. See “Alternate Functions of Port B” on page 79 for a detailed description of how to define the
direction of the user defined SPI pins.
The following code examples show how to initialize the SPI as a Master and how to perform a
simple transmission. DDR_SPI in the examples must be replaced by the actual Data Direction
Register controlling the SPI pins. DD_MOSI, DD_MISO and DD_SCK must be replaced by the
actual data direction bits for these pins. For example, if MOSI is placed on pin PB5, replace
DD_MOSI with DDB5 and DDR_SPI with DDRB.
Table 21-1. SPI Pin Overrides(1)
Pin Direction, Master SPI Direction, Slave SPI
MOSI User Defined Input
MISO Input User Defined
SCK User Defined Input
SS User Defined Input198
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Note: 1. See “About Code Examples” on page 11.
Assembly Code Example(1)
SPI_MasterInit:
; Set MOSI and SCK output, all others input
ldi r17,(1<>8);
UBRRL = (unsigned char)ubrr;
/* Enable receiver and transmitter */
UCSRB = (1<> 1) & 0x01;
return ((resh << 8) | resl);
}217
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
buffer is empty (that is, does not contain any unread data). If the Receiver is disabled (RXENn =
0), the receive buffer will be flushed and consequently the RXCn bit will become zero.
When the Receive Complete Interrupt Enable (RXCIEn) in UCSRnB is set, the USART Receive
Complete interrupt will be executed as long as the RXCn Flag is set (provided that global interrupts
are enabled). When interrupt-driven data reception is used, the receive complete routine
must read the received data from UDRn in order to clear the RXCn Flag, otherwise a new interrupt
will occur once the interrupt routine terminates.
22.6.4 Receiver Error Flags
The USART Receiver has three Error Flags: Frame Error (FEn), Data OverRun (DORn) and
Parity Error (UPEn). All can be accessed by reading UCSRnA. Common for the Error Flags is
that they are located in the receive buffer together with the frame for which they indicate the
error status. Due to the buffering of the Error Flags, the UCSRnA must be read before the
receive buffer (UDRn), since reading the UDRn I/O location changes the buffer read location.
Another equality for the Error Flags is that they can not be altered by software doing a write to
the flag location. However, all flags must be set to zero when the UCSRnA is written for upward
compatibility of future USART implementations. None of the Error Flags can generate interrupts.
The Frame Error (FEn) Flag indicates the state of the first stop bit of the next readable frame
stored in the receive buffer. The FEn Flag is zero when the stop bit was correctly read (as one),
and the FEn Flag will be one when the stop bit was incorrect (zero). This flag can be used for
detecting out-of-sync conditions, detecting break conditions and protocol handling. The FEn
Flag is not affected by the setting of the USBSn bit in UCSRnC since the Receiver ignores all,
except for the first, stop bits. For compatibility with future devices, always set this bit to zero
when writing to UCSRnA.
The Data OverRun (DORn) Flag indicates data loss due to a receiver buffer full condition. A
Data OverRun occurs when the receive buffer is full (two characters), it is a new character waiting
in the Receive Shift Register, and a new start bit is detected. If the DORn Flag is set there
was one or more serial frame lost between the frame last read from UDRn, and the next frame
read from UDRn. For compatibility with future devices, always write this bit to zero when writing
to UCSRnA. The DORn Flag is cleared when the frame received was successfully moved from
the Shift Register to the receive buffer.
The Parity Error (UPEn) Flag indicates that the next frame in the receive buffer had a Parity
Error when received. If Parity Check is not enabled the UPEn bit will always be read zero. For
compatibility with future devices, always set this bit to zero when writing to UCSRnA. For more
details see “Parity Bit Calculation” on page 210 and “Parity Checker” on page 217.
22.6.5 Parity Checker
The Parity Checker is active when the high USART Parity mode (UPMn1) bit is set. Type of Parity
Check to be performed (odd or even) is selected by the UPMn0 bit. When enabled, the Parity
Checker calculates the parity of the data bits in incoming frames and compares the result with
the parity bit from the serial frame. The result of the check is stored in the receive buffer together
with the received data and stop bits. The Parity Error (UPEn) Flag can then be read by software
to check if the frame had a Parity Error.
The UPEn bit is set if the next character that can be read from the receive buffer had a Parity
Error when received and the Parity Checking was enabled at that point (UPMn1 = 1). This bit is
valid until the receive buffer (UDRn) is read.218
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
22.6.6 Disabling the Receiver
In contrast to the Transmitter, disabling of the Receiver will be immediate. Data from ongoing
receptions will therefore be lost. When disabled (that is, the RXENn is set to zero) the Receiver
will no longer override the normal function of the RxDn port pin. The Receiver buffer FIFO will be
flushed when the Receiver is disabled. Remaining data in the buffer will be lost.
22.6.7 Flushing the Receive Buffer
The receiver buffer FIFO will be flushed when the Receiver is disabled, that is, the buffer will be
emptied of its contents. Unread data will be lost. If the buffer has to be flushed during normal
operation, due to for instance an error condition, read the UDRn I/O location until the RXCn Flag
is cleared. The following code example shows how to flush the receive buffer.
Note: 1. See “About Code Examples” on page 11.
22.7 Asynchronous Data Reception
The USART includes a clock recovery and a data recovery unit for handling asynchronous data
reception. The clock recovery logic is used for synchronizing the internally generated baud rate
clock to the incoming asynchronous serial frames at the RxDn pin. The data recovery logic samples
and low pass filters each incoming bit, thereby improving the noise immunity of the
Receiver. The asynchronous reception operational range depends on the accuracy of the internal
baud rate clock, the rate of the incoming frames, and the frame size in number of bits.
22.7.1 Asynchronous Clock Recovery
The clock recovery logic synchronizes internal clock to the incoming serial frames. Figure 22-5
on page 219 illustrates the sampling process of the start bit of an incoming frame. The sample
rate is 16 times the baud rate for Normal mode, and eight times the baud rate for Double Speed
mode. The horizontal arrows illustrate the synchronization variation due to the sampling process.
Note the larger time variation when using the Double Speed mode (U2Xn = 1) of
operation. Samples denoted zero are samples done when the RxDn line is idle (that is, no communication
activity).
Assembly Code Example(1)
USART_Flush:
sbis UCSRnA, RXCn
ret
in r16, UDRn
rjmp USART_Flush
C Code Example(1)
void USART_Flush( void )
{
unsigned char dummy;
while ( UCSRnA & (1< 2 CPU clock cycles for fck < 12MHz, 3 CPU clock cycles for fck >= 12MHz
High: > 2 CPU clock cycles for fck < 12MHz, 3 CPU clock cycles for fck >= 12MHz
30.8.2 Serial Programming Algorithm
When writing serial data to the ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561, data is clocked on the rising
edge of SCK.
When reading data from the ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561, data is clocked on the falling
edge of SCK. See Figure 30-12 on page 353 for timing details.
To program and verify the ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561 in the serial programming mode,
the following sequence is recommended (see four byte instruction formats in Table 30-17 on
Table 30-15. Pin Mapping Serial Programming
Symbol
Pins
(TQFP-100)
Pins
(TQFP-64) I/O Description
PDI PB2 PE0 I Serial Data in
PDO PB3 PE1 O Serial Data out
SCK PB1 PB1 I Serial Clock
VCC
GND
XT AL1
SCK
PDO
PDI
RESET
+1.8V - 5.5V
AVCC
+1.8V - 5.5V(2)351
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
page 352):
1. Power-up sequence:
Apply power between VCC and GND while RESET and SCK are set to “0”. In some systems,
the programmer can not guarantee that SCK is held low during power-up. In this
case, RESET must be given a positive pulse of at least two CPU clock cycles duration
after SCK has been set to “0”.
2. Wait for at least 20ms and enable serial programming by sending the Programming
Enable serial instruction to pin PDI.
3. The serial programming instructions will not work if the communication is out of synchronization.
When in sync. the second byte (0x53), will echo back when issuing the third
byte of the Programming Enable instruction. Whether the echo is correct or not, all four
bytes of the instruction must be transmitted. If the 0x53 did not echo back, give RESET a
positive pulse and issue a new Programming Enable command.
4. The Flash is programmed one page at a time. The memory page is loaded one byte at a
time by supplying the 7 LSB of the address and data together with the Load Program
Memory Page instruction. To ensure correct loading of the page, the data low byte must
be loaded before data high byte is applied for a given address. The Program Memory
Page is stored by loading the Write Program Memory Page instruction with the address
lines 15:8. Before issuing this command, make sure the instruction Load Extended
Address Byte has been used to define the MSB of the address. The extended address
byte is stored until the command is re-issued, that is, the command needs only be issued
for the first page, and when crossing the 64KWord boundary. If polling (RDY/BSY) is not
used, the user must wait at least tWD_FLASH before issuing the next page (see Table 30-
16). Accessing the serial programming interface before the Flash write operation completes
can result in incorrect programming.
5. The EEPROM array is programmed one byte at a time by supplying the address and data
together with the appropriate Write instruction. An EEPROM memory location is first
automatically erased before new data is written. If polling is not used, the user must wait
at least tWD_EEPROM before issuing the next byte (see Table 30-16). In a chip erased
device, no 0xFFs in the data file(s) need to be programmed.
6. Any memory location can be verified by using the Read instruction which returns the content
at the selected address at serial output PDO. When reading the Flash memory, use
the instruction Load Extended Address Byte to define the upper address byte, which is
not included in the Read Program Memory instruction. The extended address byte is
stored until the command is re-issued, that is, the command needs only be issued for the
first page, and when crossing the 64KWord boundary.
7. At the end of the programming session, RESET can be set high to commence normal
operation.
8. Power-off sequence (if needed):
Set RESET to “1”.
Turn VCC power off.
Table 30-16. Minimum Wait Delay Before Writing the Next Flash or EEPROM Location
Symbol Minimum Wait Delay
tWD_FLASH 4.5ms
tWD_EEPROM 3.6ms
tWD_ERASE 9.0ms352
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
30.8.3 Serial Programming Instruction set
Table 30-17 and Figure 30-11 on page 353 describes the Instruction set.
Notes: 1. Not all instructions are applicable for all parts.
2. a = address.
3. Bits are programmed ‘0’, unprogrammed ‘1’.
4. To ensure future compatibility, unused Fuses and Lock bits should be unprogrammed (‘1’).
5. Refer to the correspondig section for Fuse and Lock bits, Calibration and Signature bytes and
Page size.
6. See htt://www.atmel.com/avr for Application Notes regarding programming and programmers.
If the LSB in RDY/BSY data byte out is ‘1’, a programming operation is still pending. Wait until
this bit returns ‘0’ before the next instruction is carried out.
Table 30-17. Serial Programming Instruction Set
Instruction/Operation
Instruction Format
Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4
Programming Enable $AC $53 $00 $00
Chip Erase (Program Memory/EEPROM) $AC $80 $00 $00
Poll RDY/BSY $F0 $00 $00 data byte out
Load Instructions
Load Extended Address byte(1) $4D $00 Extended adr $00
Load Program Memory Page, High byte $48 $00 adr LSB high data byte in
Load Program Memory Page, Low byte $40 $00 adr LSB low data byte in
Load EEPROM Memory Page (page access) $C1 $00 0000 000aa data byte in
Read Instructions
Read Program Memory, High byte $28 adr MSB adr LSB high data byte out
Read Program Memory, Low byte $20 adr MSB adr LSB low data byte out
Read EEPROM Memory $A0 0000 aaaa aaaa aaaa data byte out
Read Lock bits $58 $00 $00 data byte out
Read Signature Byte $30 $00 0000 000aa data byte out
Read Fuse bits $50 $00 $00 data byte out
Read Fuse High bits $58 $08 $00 data byte out
Read Extended Fuse Bits $50 $08 $00 data byte out
Read Calibration Byte $38 $00 $00 data byte out
Write Instructions
Write Program Memory Page $4C adr MSB adr LSB $00
Write EEPROM Memory $C0 0000 aaaa aaaa aaaa data byte in
Write EEPROM Memory Page (page access) $C2 0000 aaaa aaaa 00 $00
Write Lock bits $AC $E0 $00 data byte in
Write Fuse bits $AC $A0 $00 data byte in
Write Fuse High bits $AC $A8 $00 data byte in
Write Extended Fuse Bits $AC $A4 $00 data byte in353
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Within the same page, the low data byte must be loaded prior to the high data byte.
After data is loaded to the page buffer, program the EEPROM page, see Figure 30-11.
Figure 30-11. Serial Programming Instruction example
30.8.4 Serial Programming Characteristics
For characteristics of the Serial Programming module, see “SPI Timing Characteristics” on page
375.
Figure 30-12. Serial Programming Waveforms
Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4
Adr LSB
Bit 15 B 0
Serial Programming Instruction
Program Memory/
EEPROM Memory
Page 0
Page 1
Page 2
Page N-1
Page Buffer
Write Program Memory Page/
Write EEPROM Memory Page
Load Program Memory Page (High/Low Byte)/
Load EEPROM Memory Page (page access)
Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4
Bit 15 B 0
Adr MSB
Page Offset
Page Number
Adr MSB Adr LSB
MSB
MSB
LSB
LSB
SERIAL CLOCK INPUT
(SCK)
SERIAL DATA INPUT
(MOSI)
(MISO)
SAMPLE
SERIAL DATA OUTPUT354
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
30.9 Programming via the JTAG Interface
Programming through the JTAG interface requires control of the four JTAG specific pins: TCK,
TMS, TDI, and TDO. Control of the reset and clock pins is not required.
To be able to use the JTAG interface, the JTAGEN Fuse must be programmed. The device is
default shipped with the fuse programmed. In addition, the JTD bit in MCUCR must be cleared.
Alternatively, if the JTD bit is set, the external reset can be forced low. Then, the JTD bit will be
cleared after two chip clocks, and the JTAG pins are available for programming. This provides a
means of using the JTAG pins as normal port pins in Running mode while still allowing In-System
Programming via the JTAG interface. Note that this technique can not be used when using
the JTAG pins for Boundary-scan or On-chip Debug. In these cases the JTAG pins must be dedicated
for this purpose.
During programming the clock frequency of the TCK Input must be less than the maximum frequency
of the chip. The System Clock Prescaler can not be used to divide the TCK Clock Input
into a sufficiently low frequency.
As a definition in this datasheet, the LSB is shifted in and out first of all Shift Registers.
30.9.1 Programming Specific JTAG Instructions
The Instruction Register is 4-bit wide, supporting up to 16 instructions. The JTAG instructions
useful for programming are listed below.
The OPCODE for each instruction is shown behind the instruction name in hex format. The text
describes which Data Register is selected as path between TDI and TDO for each instruction.
The Run-Test/Idle state of the TAP controller is used to generate internal clocks. It can also be
used as an idle state between JTAG sequences. The state machine sequence for changing the
instruction word is shown in Figure 30-13 on page 355.355
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Figure 30-13. State Machine Sequence for Changing the Instruction Word
30.9.2 AVR_RESET (0xC)
The AVR specific public JTAG instruction for setting the AVR device in the Reset mode or taking
the device out from the Reset mode. The TAP controller is not reset by this instruction. The one
bit Reset Register is selected as Data Register. Note that the reset will be active as long as there
is a logic “one” in the Reset Chain. The output from this chain is not latched.
The active states are:
• Shift-DR: The Reset Register is shifted by the TCK input
30.9.3 PROG_ENABLE (0x4)
The AVR specific public JTAG instruction for enabling programming via the JTAG port. The 16-
bit Programming Enable Register is selected as Data Register. The active states are the
following:
• Shift-DR: The programming enable signature is shifted into the Data Register
• Update-DR: The programming enable signature is compared to the correct value, and
Programming mode is entered if the signature is valid
Test-Logic-Reset
Run-Test/Idle
Shift-DR
Exit1-DR
Pause-DR
Exit2-DR
Update-DR
Select-IR Scan
Capture-IR
Shift-IR
Exit1-IR
Pause-IR
Exit2-IR
Update-IR
Select-DR Scan
Capture-DR
0
1
0 11 1
0 0
0 0
1 1
1 0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1 0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0 0
1 1356
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
30.9.4 PROG_COMMANDS (0x5)
The AVR specific public JTAG instruction for entering programming commands via the JTAG
port. The 15-bit Programming Command Register is selected as Data Register. The active
states are the following:
• Capture-DR: The result of the previous command is loaded into the Data Register
• Shift-DR: The Data Register is shifted by the TCK input, shifting out the result of the
previous command and shifting in the new command
• Update-DR: The programming command is applied to the Flash inputs
• Run-Test/Idle: One clock cycle is generated, executing the applied command
30.9.5 PROG_PAGELOAD (0x6)
The AVR specific public JTAG instruction to directly load the Flash data page via the JTAG port.
An 8-bit Flash Data Byte Register is selected as the Data Register. This is physically the 8 LSBs
of the Programming Command Register. The active states are the following:
• Shift-DR: The Flash Data Byte Register is shifted by the TCK input.
• Update-DR: The content of the Flash Data Byte Register is copied into a temporary register.
A write sequence is initiated that within 11 TCK cycles loads the content of the temporary
register into the Flash page buffer. The AVR automatically alternates between writing the low
and the high byte for each new Update-DR state, starting with the low byte for the first
Update-DR encountered after entering the PROG_PAGELOAD command. The Program
Counter is pre-incremented before writing the low byte, except for the first written byte. This
ensures that the first data is written to the address set up by PROG_COMMANDS, and
loading the last location in the page buffer does not make the program counter increment
into the next page.
30.9.6 PROG_PAGEREAD (0x7)
The AVR specific public JTAG instruction to directly capture the Flash content via the JTAG port.
An 8-bit Flash Data Byte Register is selected as the Data Register. This is physically the 8 LSBs
of the Programming Command Register. The active states are the following:
• Capture-DR: The content of the selected Flash byte is captured into the Flash Data Byte
Register. The AVR automatically alternates between reading the low and the high byte for
each new Capture-DR state, starting with the low byte for the first Capture-DR encountered
after entering the PROG_PAGEREAD command. The Program Counter is post-incremented
after reading each high byte, including the first read byte. This ensures that the first data is
captured from the first address set up by PROG_COMMANDS, and reading the last location
in the page makes the program counter increment into the next page.
• Shift-DR: The Flash Data Byte Register is shifted by the TCK input.
30.9.7 Data Registers
The Data Registers are selected by the JTAG instruction registers described in section “Programming
Specific JTAG Instructions” on page 354. The Data Registers relevant for
programming operations are:
• Reset Register
• Programming Enable Register
• Programming Command Register
• Flash Data Byte Register357
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
30.9.8 Reset Register
The Reset Register is a Test Data Register used to reset the part during programming. It is
required to reset the part before entering Programming mode.
A high value in the Reset Register corresponds to pulling the external reset low. The part is reset
as long as there is a high value present in the Reset Register. Depending on the Fuse settings
for the clock options, the part will remain reset for a Reset Time-out period (refer to “Clock
Sources” on page 41) after releasing the Reset Register. The output from this Data Register is
not latched, so the reset will take place immediately, as shown in Figure 28-2 on page 304.
30.9.9 Programming Enable Register
The Programming Enable Register is a 16-bit register. The contents of this register is compared
to the programming enable signature, binary code 0b1010_0011_0111_0000. When the contents
of the register is equal to the programming enable signature, programming via the JTAG
port is enabled. The register is reset to 0 on Power-on Reset, and should always be reset when
leaving Programming mode.
Figure 30-14. Programming Enable Register
30.9.10 Programming Command Register
The Programming Command Register is a 15-bit register. This register is used to serially shift in
programming commands, and to serially shift out the result of the previous command, if any. The
JTAG Programming Instruction Set is shown in Table 30-18 on page 359. The state sequence
when shifting in the programming commands is illustrated in Figure 30-16 on page 362.
TDI
TDO
D
A
T
A
= D Q
ClockDR & PROG_ENABLE
Programming Enable
0xA370358
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Figure 30-15. Programming Command Register
TDI
TDO
S
T
R
O
B
E
S
A
D
D
R
E
S
S
/
D
A
T
A
Flash
EEPROM
Fuses
Lock Bits359
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Table 30-18. JTAG Programming Instruction
Set a = address high bits, b = address low bits, c = address extended bits, H = 0 - Low byte, 1 - High Byte, o = data out,
i = data in, x = don’t care
Instruction TDI Sequence TDO Sequence Notes
1a. Chip Erase
0100011_10000000
0110001_10000000
0110011_10000000
0110011_10000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
1b. Poll for Chip Erase Complete 0110011_10000000 xxxxxox_xxxxxxxx (2)
2a. Enter Flash Write 0100011_00010000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
2b. Load Address Extended High Byte 0001011_cccccccc xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (10)
2c. Load Address High Byte 0000111_aaaaaaaa xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
2d. Load Address Low Byte 0000011_bbbbbbbb xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
2e. Load Data Low Byte 0010011_iiiiiiii xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
2f. Load Data High Byte 0010111_iiiiiiii xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
2g. Latch Data
0110111_00000000
1110111_00000000
0110111_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
(1)
2h. Write Flash Page
0110111_00000000
0110101_00000000
0110111_00000000
0110111_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
(1)
2i. Poll for Page Write Complete 0110111_00000000 xxxxxox_xxxxxxxx (2)
3a. Enter Flash Read 0100011_00000010 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
3b. Load Address Extended High Byte 0001011_cccccccc xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (10)
3c. Load Address High Byte 0000111_aaaaaaaa xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
3d. Load Address Low Byte 0000011_bbbbbbbb xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
3e. Read Data Low and High Byte
0110010_00000000
0110110_00000000
0110111_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_oooooooo
xxxxxxx_oooooooo
Low byte
High byte
4a. Enter EEPROM Write 0100011_00010001 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
4b. Load Address High Byte 0000111_aaaaaaaa xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (10)
4c. Load Address Low Byte 0000011_bbbbbbbb xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
4d. Load Data Byte 0010011_iiiiiiii xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
4e. Latch Data
0110111_00000000
1110111_00000000
0110111_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
(1)
4f. Write EEPROM Page
0110011_00000000
0110001_00000000
0110011_00000000
0110011_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
(1)360
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
4g. Poll for Page Write Complete 0110011_00000000 xxxxxox_xxxxxxxx (2)
5a. Enter EEPROM Read 0100011_00000011 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
5b. Load Address High Byte 0000111_aaaaaaaa xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (10)
5c. Load Address Low Byte 0000011_bbbbbbbb xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
5d. Read Data Byte
0110011_bbbbbbbb
0110010_00000000
0110011_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_oooooooo
6a. Enter Fuse Write 0100011_01000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
6b. Load Data Low Byte(6) 0010011_iiiiiiii xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (3)
6c. Write Fuse Extended Byte
0111011_00000000
0111001_00000000
0111011_00000000
0111011_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
(1)
6d. Poll for Fuse Write Complete 0110111_00000000 xxxxxox_xxxxxxxx (2)
6e. Load Data Low Byte(7) 0010011_iiiiiiii xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (3)
6f. Write Fuse High Byte
0110111_00000000
0110101_00000000
0110111_00000000
0110111_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
(1)
6g. Poll for Fuse Write Complete 0110111_00000000 xxxxxox_xxxxxxxx (2)
6h. Load Data Low Byte(7) 0010011_iiiiiiii xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (3)
6i. Write Fuse Low Byte
0110011_00000000
0110001_00000000
0110011_00000000
0110011_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
(1)
6j. Poll for Fuse Write Complete 0110011_00000000 xxxxxox_xxxxxxxx (2)
7a. Enter Lock Bit Write 0100011_00100000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
7b. Load Data Byte(9) 0010011_11iiiiii xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (4)
7c. Write Lock Bits
0110011_00000000
0110001_00000000
0110011_00000000
0110011_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
(1)
7d. Poll for Lock Bit Write complete 0110011_00000000 xxxxxox_xxxxxxxx (2)
8a. Enter Fuse/Lock Bit Read 0100011_00000100 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
8b. Read Extended Fuse Byte(6) 0111010_00000000
0111011_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_oooooooo
8c. Read Fuse High Byte(7) 0111110_00000000
0111111_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_oooooooo
Table 30-18. JTAG Programming Instruction (Continued)
Set (Continued) a = address high bits, b = address low bits, c = address extended bits, H = 0 - Low byte, 1 - High Byte,
o = data out, i = data in, x = don’t care
Instruction TDI Sequence TDO Sequence Notes361
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Notes: 1. This command sequence is not required if the seven MSB are correctly set by the previous command sequence (which is
normally the case).
2. Repeat until o = “1”.
3. Set bits to “0” to program the corresponding Fuse, “1” to unprogram the Fuse.
4. Set bits to “0” to program the corresponding Lock bit, “1” to leave the Lock bit unchanged.
5. “0” = programmed, “1” = unprogrammed.
6. The bit mapping for Fuses Extended byte is listed in Table 30-3 on page 336.
7. The bit mapping for Fuses High byte is listed in Table 30-4 on page 337.
8. The bit mapping for Fuses Low byte is listed in Table 30-5 on page 337.
9. The bit mapping for Lock bits byte is listed in Table 30-1 on page 335.
10. Address bits exceeding PCMSB and EEAMSB (Table 30-7 on page 338 and Table 30-8 on page 338) are don’t care.
11. All TDI and TDO sequences are represented by binary digits (0b...).
8d. Read Fuse Low Byte(8) 0110010_00000000
0110011_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_oooooooo
8e. Read Lock Bits(9) 0110110_00000000
0110111_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxoooooo (5)
8f. Read Fuses and Lock Bits
0111010_00000000
0111110_00000000
0110010_00000000
0110110_00000000
0110111_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_oooooooo
xxxxxxx_oooooooo
xxxxxxx_oooooooo
xxxxxxx_oooooooo
(5)
Fuse Ext. byte
Fuse High byte
Fuse Low byte
Lock bits
9a. Enter Signature Byte Read 0100011_00001000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
9b. Load Address Byte 0000011_bbbbbbbb xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
9c. Read Signature Byte 0110010_00000000
0110011_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_oooooooo
10a. Enter Calibration Byte Read 0100011_00001000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
10b. Load Address Byte 0000011_bbbbbbbb xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
10c. Read Calibration Byte 0110110_00000000
0110111_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_oooooooo
11a. Load No Operation Command 0100011_00000000
0110011_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
Table 30-18. JTAG Programming Instruction (Continued)
Set (Continued) a = address high bits, b = address low bits, c = address extended bits, H = 0 - Low byte, 1 - High Byte,
o = data out, i = data in, x = don’t care
Instruction TDI Sequence TDO Sequence Notes362
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Figure 30-16. State Machine Sequence for Changing/Reading the Data Word
30.9.11 Flash Data Byte Register
The Flash Data Byte Register provides an efficient way to load the entire Flash page buffer
before executing Page Write, or to read out/verify the content of the Flash. A state machine sets
up the control signals to the Flash and senses the strobe signals from the Flash, thus only the
data words need to be shifted in/out.
The Flash Data Byte Register actually consists of the 8-bit scan chain and a 8-bit temporary register.
During page load, the Update-DR state copies the content of the scan chain over to the
temporary register and initiates a write sequence that within 11 TCK cycles loads the content of
the temporary register into the Flash page buffer. The AVR automatically alternates between
writing the low and the high byte for each new Update-DR state, starting with the low byte for the
first Update-DR encountered after entering the PROG_PAGELOAD command. The Program
Counter is pre-incremented before writing the low byte, except for the first written byte. This
ensures that the first data is written to the address set up by PROG_COMMANDS, and loading
the last location in the page buffer does not make the Program Counter increment into the next
page.
During Page Read, the content of the selected Flash byte is captured into the Flash Data Byte
Register during the Capture-DR state. The AVR automatically alternates between reading the
low and the high byte for each new Capture-DR state, starting with the low byte for the first CapTest-Logic-Reset
Run-Test/Idle
Shift-DR
Exit1-DR
Pause-DR
Exit2-DR
Update-DR
Select-IR Scan
Capture-IR
Shift-IR
Exit1-IR
Pause-IR
Exit2-IR
Update-IR
Select-DR Scan
Capture-DR
0
1
0 11 1
0 0
0 0
1 1
1 0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1 0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0 0
1 1363
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
ture-DR encountered after entering the PROG_PAGEREAD command. The Program Counter is
post-incremented after reading each high byte, including the first read byte. This ensures that
the first data is captured from the first address set up by PROG_COMMANDS, and reading the
last location in the page makes the program counter increment into the next page.
Figure 30-17. Flash Data Byte Register
The state machine controlling the Flash Data Byte Register is clocked by TCK. During normal
operation in which eight bits are shifted for each Flash byte, the clock cycles needed to navigate
through the TAP controller automatically feeds the state machine for the Flash Data Byte Register
with sufficient number of clock pulses to complete its operation transparently for the user.
However, if too few bits are shifted between each Update-DR state during page load, the TAP
controller should stay in the Run-Test/Idle state for some TCK cycles to ensure that there are at
least 11 TCK cycles between each Update-DR state.
30.9.12 Programming Algorithm
All references below of type “1a”, “1b”, and so on, refer to Table 30-18 on page 359.
30.9.13 Entering Programming Mode
1. Enter JTAG instruction AVR_RESET and shift 1 in the Reset Register.
2. Enter instruction PROG_ENABLE and shift 0b1010_0011_0111_0000 in the Programming
Enable Register.
30.9.14 Leaving Programming Mode
1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
2. Disable all programming instructions by using no operation instruction 11a.
3. Enter instruction PROG_ENABLE and shift 0b0000_0000_0000_0000 in the programming
Enable Register.
4. Enter JTAG instruction AVR_RESET and shift 0 in the Reset Register.
TDI
TDO
D
A
T
A
Flash
EEPROM
Fuses
Lock Bits
STROBES
ADDRESS
State
Machine364
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
30.9.15 Performing Chip Erase
1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
2. Start Chip Erase using programming instruction 1a.
3. Poll for Chip Erase complete using programming instruction 1b, or wait for tWLRH_CE (refer
to Table 30-14 on page 348).
30.9.16 Programming the Flash
Before programming the Flash a Chip Erase must be performed, see “Performing Chip Erase”
on page 364.
1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
2. Enable Flash write using programming instruction 2a.
3. Load address Extended High byte using programming instruction 2b.
4. Load address High byte using programming instruction 2c.
5. Load address Low byte using programming instruction 2d.
6. Load data using programming instructions 2e, 2f and 2g.
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 for all instruction words in the page.
8. Write the page using programming instruction 2h.
9. Poll for Flash write complete using programming instruction 2i, or wait for tWLRH (refer to
Table 30-14 on page 348).
10. Repeat steps 3 to 9 until all data have been programmed.
A more efficient data transfer can be achieved using the PROG_PAGELOAD instruction:
1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
2. Enable Flash write using programming instruction 2a.
3. Load the page address using programming instructions 2b, 2c and 2d. PCWORD (refer
to Table 30-7 on page 338) is used to address within one page and must be written as 0.
4. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_PAGELOAD.
5. Load the entire page by shifting in all instruction words in the page byte-by-byte, starting
with the LSB of the first instruction in the page and ending with the MSB of the last
instruction in the page. Use Update-DR to copy the contents of the Flash Data Byte Register
into the Flash page location and to auto-increment the Program Counter before
each new word.
6. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
7. Write the page using programming instruction 2h.
8. Poll for Flash write complete using programming instruction 2i, or wait for tWLRH (refer to
Table 30-14 on page 348).
9. Repeat steps 3 to 8 until all data have been programmed.
30.9.17 Reading the Flash
1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
2. Enable Flash read using programming instruction 3a.
3. Load address using programming instructions 3b, 3c and 3d.
4. Read data using programming instruction 3e.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all data have been read.365
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
A more efficient data transfer can be achieved using the PROG_PAGEREAD instruction:
1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
2. Enable Flash read using programming instruction 3a.
3. Load the page address using programming instructions 3b, 3c and 3d. PCWORD (refer
to Table 30-7 on page 338) is used to address within one page and must be written as 0.
4. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_PAGEREAD.
5. Read the entire page (or Flash) by shifting out all instruction words in the page (or Flash),
starting with the LSB of the first instruction in the page (Flash) and ending with the MSB
of the last instruction in the page (Flash). The Capture-DR state both captures the data
from the Flash, and also auto-increments the program counter after each word is read.
Note that Capture-DR comes before the shift-DR state. Hence, the first byte which is
shifted out contains valid data.
6. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
7. Repeat steps 3 to 6 until all data have been read.
30.9.18 Programming the EEPROM
Before programming the EEPROM a Chip Erase must be performed, see “Performing Chip
Erase” on page 364.
1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
2. Enable EEPROM write using programming instruction 4a.
3. Load address High byte using programming instruction 4b.
4. Load address Low byte using programming instruction 4c.
5. Load data using programming instructions 4d and 4e.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for all data bytes in the page.
7. Write the data using programming instruction 4f.
8. Poll for EEPROM write complete using programming instruction 4g, or wait for tWLRH
(refer to Table 30-14 on page 348).
9. Repeat steps 3 to 8 until all data have been programmed.
Note that the PROG_PAGELOAD instruction can not be used when programming the EEPROM.
30.9.19 Reading the EEPROM
1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
2. Enable EEPROM read using programming instruction 5a.
3. Load address using programming instructions 5b and 5c.
4. Read data using programming instruction 5d.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all data have been read.
Note that the PROG_PAGEREAD instruction can not be used when reading the EEPROM.
30.9.20 Programming the Fuses
1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
2. Enable Fuse write using programming instruction 6a.
3. Load data high byte using programming instructions 6b. A bit value of “0” will program the
corresponding fuse, a “1” will unprogram the fuse.
4. Write Fuse High byte using programming instruction 6c.366
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
5. Poll for Fuse write complete using programming instruction 6d, or wait for tWLRH (refer to
Table 30-14 on page 348).
6. Load data low byte using programming instructions 6e. A “0” will program the fuse, a “1”
will unprogram the fuse.
7. Write Fuse low byte using programming instruction 6f.
8. Poll for Fuse write complete using programming instruction 6g, or wait for tWLRH (refer to
Table 30-14 on page 348).
30.9.21 Programming the Lock Bits
1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
2. Enable Lock bit write using programming instruction 7a.
3. Load data using programming instructions 7b. A bit value of “0” will program the corresponding
lock bit, a “1” will leave the lock bit unchanged.
4. Write Lock bits using programming instruction 7c.
5. Poll for Lock bit write complete using programming instruction 7d, or wait for tWLRH (refer
to Table 30-14 on page 348).
30.9.22 Reading the Fuses and Lock Bits
1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
2. Enable Fuse/Lock bit read using programming instruction 8a.
3. To read all Fuses and Lock bits, use programming instruction 8e.
To only read Fuse High byte, use programming instruction 8b.
To only read Fuse Low byte, use programming instruction 8c.
To only read Lock bits, use programming instruction 8d.
30.9.23 Reading the Signature Bytes
1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
2. Enable Signature byte read using programming instruction 9a.
3. Load address 0x00 using programming instruction 9b.
4. Read first signature byte using programming instruction 9c.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 with address 0x01 and address 0x02 to read the second and third
signature bytes, respectively.
30.9.24 Reading the Calibration Byte
1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
2. Enable Calibration byte read using programming instruction 10a.
3. Load address 0x00 using programming instruction 10b.
4. Read the calibration byte using programming instruction 10c.367
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
31. Electrical Characteristics
Absolute Maximum Ratings*
31.1 DC Characteristics
Operating Temperature.................................. -55°C to +125°C *NOTICE: Stresses beyond those listed under “Absolute
Maximum Ratings” may cause permanent damage
to the device. This is a stress rating only and
functional operation of the device at these or
other conditions beyond those indicated in the
operational sections of this specification is not
implied. Exposure to absolute maximum rating
conditions for extended periods may affect
device reliability.
Storage Temperature ..................................... -65°C to +150°C
Voltage on any Pin except RESET
with respect to Ground ................................-0.5V to VCC+0.5V
Voltage on RESET with respect to Ground......-0.5V to +13.0V
Maximum Operating Voltage ............................................ 6.0V
DC Current per I/O Pin ................................................ 40.0mA
DC Current VCC and GND Pins................................. 200.0mA
TA = -40°C to 85°C, VCC = 1.8V to 5.5V (unless otherwise noted)
Symbol Parameter Condition Min. Typ. Max. Units
VIL
Input Low Voltage, Except
XTAL1 and Reset pin
VCC = 1.8V - 2.4V
VCC = 2.4V - 5.5V
-0.5
-0.5
0.2VCC(1)
0.3VCC(1)
V
VIL1
Input Low Voltage,
XTAL1 pin VCC = 1.8V - 5.5V -0.5 0.1VCC(1)
VIL2
Input Low Voltage,
RESET pin VCC = 1.8V - 5.5V -0.5 0.1VCC(1)
VIH
Input High Voltage,
Except XTAL1 and
RESET pins
VCC = 1.8V - 2.4V
VCC = 2.4V - 5.5V
0.7VCC(2)
0.6VCC(2)
VCC + 0.5
VCC + 0.5
VIH1
Input High Voltage,
XTAL1 pin
VCC = 1.8V - 2.4V
VCC = 2.4V - 5.5V
0.8VCC(2)
0.7VCC(2)
VCC + 0.5
VCC + 0.5
VIH2
Input High Voltage,
RESET pin VCC = 1.8V - 5.5V 0.9VCC(2) VCC + 0.5
VOL
Output Low Voltage(3),
Except RESET pin
I
OL = 20mA, VCC = 5V
IOL = 10mA, VCC = 3V
0.9
0.6
VOH
Output High Voltage(4),
Except RESET pin
IOH = -20mA, VCC = 5V
IOH = -10mA, VCC = 3V
4.2
2.3
I
IL
Input Leakage
Current I/O Pin
VCC = 5.5V, pin low
(absolute value) 1
µA
IIH
Input Leakage
Current I/O Pin
VCC = 5.5V, pin high
(absolute value) 1
RRST Reset Pull-up Resistor 30 60
kΩ
RPU I/O Pin Pull-up Resistor 20 50368
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Notes: 1. "Max" means the highest value where the pin is guaranteed to be read as low.
2. "Min" means the lowest value where the pin is guaranteed to be read as high.
3. Although each I/O port can sink more than the test conditions (20mA at VCC = 5V, 10mA at VCC = 3V) under steady state
conditions (non-transient), the following must be observed:
ATmega1281/2561:
1.)The sum of all IOL, for ports A0-A7, G2, C4-C7 should not exceed 100mA.
2.)The sum of all IOL, for ports C0-C3, G0-G1, D0-D7 should not exceed 100mA.
3.)The sum of all IOL, for ports G3-G5, B0-B7, E0-E7 should not exceed 100mA.
4.)The sum of all IOL, for ports F0-F7 should not exceed 100mA.
ATmega640/1280/2560:
1.)The sum of all IOL, for ports J0-J7, A0-A7, G2 should not exceed 200mA.
2.)The sum of all IOL, for ports C0-C7, G0-G1, D0-D7, L0-L7 should not exceed 200mA.
3.)The sum of all IOL, for ports G3-G4, B0-B7, H0-B7 should not exceed 200mA.
4.)The sum of all IOL, for ports E0-E7, G5 should not exceed 100mA.
5.)The sum of all IOL, for ports F0-F7, K0-K7 should not exceed 100mA.
If IOL exceeds the test condition, VOL may exceed the related specification. Pins are not guaranteed to sink current greater
than the listed test condition.
4. Although each I/O port can source more than the test conditions (20mA at VCC = 5V, 10mA at VCC = 3V) under steady
state conditions (non-transient), the following must be observed:
ATmega1281/2561:
1)The sum of all IOH, for ports A0-A7, G2, C4-C7 should not exceed 100mA.
2)The sum of all IOH, for ports C0-C3, G0-G1, D0-D7 should not exceed 100mA.
3)The sum of all IOH, for ports G3-G5, B0-B7, E0-E7 should not exceed 100mA.
4)The sum of all IOH, for ports F0-F7 should not exceed 100mA.
ATmega640/1280/2560:
1)The sum of all IOH, for ports J0-J7, G2, A0-A7 should not exceed 200mA.
2)The sum of all IOH, for ports C0-C7, G0-G1, D0-D7, L0-L7 should not exceed 200mA.
3)The sum of all IOH, for ports G3-G4, B0-B7, H0-H7 should not exceed 200mA.
4)The sum of all IOH, for ports E0-E7, G5 should not exceed 100mA.
ICC
Power Supply Current(5)
Active 1MHz, VCC = 2V
(ATmega640/1280/2560/1V) 0.5 0.8
mA
Active 4MHz, VCC = 3V
(ATmega640/1280/2560/1L) 3.2 5
Active 8MHz, VCC = 5V
(ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561) 10 14
Idle 1MHz, VCC = 2V
(ATmega640/1280/2560/1V) 0.14 0.22
Idle 4MHz, VCC = 3V
(ATmega640/1280/2560/1L) 0.7 1.1
Idle 8MHz, VCC = 5V
(ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561) 2.7 4
Power-down mode
WDT enabled, VCC = 3V <5 15
µA
WDT disabled, VCC = 3V <1 7.5
VACIO
Analog Comparator
Input Offset Voltage
VCC = 5V
Vin = VCC/2 <10 40 mV
I
ACLK
Analog Comparator
Input Leakage Current
VCC = 5V
Vin = VCC/2 -50 50 nA
t
ACID
Analog Comparator
Propagation Delay
VCC = 2.7V
VCC = 4.0V
750
500 ns
TA = -40°C to 85°C, VCC = 1.8V to 5.5V (unless otherwise noted) (Continued)
Symbol Parameter Condition Min. Typ. Max. Units369
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
5)The sum of all IOH, for ports F0-F7, K0-K7 should not exceed 100mA.
If IOH exceeds the test condition, VOH may exceed the related specification. Pins are not guaranteed to source current
greater than the listed test condition.
5. Values with “PRR1 – Power Reduction Register 1” enabled (0xFF).
31.2 Speed Grades
Maximum frequency is depending on VCC. As shown in Figure 31-1 trough Figure 31-4 on page
370, the Maximum Frequency vs. VCC curve is linear between 1.8V < VCC < 2.7V and between
2.7V < VCC < 4.5V.
31.2.1 8MHz
Figure 31-1. Maximum Frequency vs. VCC, ATmega640V/1280V/1281V/2560V/2561V
Figure 31-2. Maximum Frequency vs. VCC when also No-Read-While-Write Section(1),
ATmega2560V/ATmega2561V, is used
Note: 1. When only using the Read-While-Write Section of the program memory, a higher speed can
be achieved at low voltage, see “Read-While-Write and No Read-While-Write Flash Sections”
on page 317 for addresses.
8 MHz
4 MHz
1.8V 2.7V 5.5V
Safe Operating Area
8 MHz
2 MHz
1.8V 2.7V 5.5V
Safe Operating Area370
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
31.2.2 16 MHz
Figure 31-3. Maximum Frequency vs. VCC, ATmega640/ATmega1280/ATmega1281
Figure 31-4. Maximum Frequency vs. VCC, ATmega2560/ATmega2561
16 MHz
8 MHz
2.7V 4.5V 5.5V
Safe Operating Area
16 MHz
4.5V 5.5V
Safe Operating Area371
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
31.3 Clock Characteristics
31.3.1 Calibrated Internal RC Oscillator Accuracy
Notes: 1. Voltage range for ATmega640V/1281V/1280V/2561V/2560V.
2. Voltage range for ATmega640/1281/1280/2561/2560.
31.3.2 External Clock Drive Waveforms
Figure 31-5. External Clock Drive Waveforms
31.4 External Clock Drive
Table 31-1. Calibration Accuracy of Internal RC Oscillator
Frequency VCC Temperature Calibration Accuracy
Factory Calibration 8.0MHz 3V 25°C ±10%
User Calibration 7.3MHz - 8.1MHz 1.8V - 5.5V(1)
2.7V - 5.5V(2) -40°C - 85°C ±1%
VIL1
VIH1
Table 31-2. External Clock Drive
Symbol Parameter
VCC = 1.8V - 5.5V VCC = 2.7V - 5.5V VCC = 4.5V - 5.5V
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Units
1/tCLCL
Oscillator
Frequency 0 2 0 8 0 16 MHz
tCLCL Clock Period 500 125 62.5
tCHCX High Time 200 50 25 ns
t
CLCX Low Time 200 50 25
t
CLCH Rise Time 2.0 1.6 0.5
μs
tCHCL Fall Time 2.0 1.6 0.5
ΔtCLCL
Change in period
from one clock
cycle to the next
2 2 2%372
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
31.5 System and Reset Characteristics
Note: 1. The Power-on Reset will not work unless the supply voltage has been below VPOT (falling).
31.5.1 Standard Power-On Reset
This implementation of power-on reset existed in early versions of
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561. The table below describes the characteristics of this poweron
reset and it is valid for the following devices only:
• ATmega640: revision A
• ATmega1280: revision A
• ATmega1281: revision A
• ATmega2560: revision A to E
• ATmega2561: revision A to E
Table 31-4. Characteristics of Standard Power-On Reset. TA= -40 to +85°C.
Notes: 1. Values are guidelines only.
2. Threshold where device is released from reset when voltage is rising.
3. The power-on reset threshold voltage (falling) will not work unless the supply voltage has been
below VPOT.
Table 31-3. Reset, Brown-out and Internal voltage CharacteristicsCharacteristics
Symbol Parameter Condition Min Typ Max Units
VRST RESET Pin Threshold Voltage 0.2VCC 0.9VCC V
tRST Minimum pulse width on RESET Pin 2.5 µs
VHYST Brown-out Detector Hysteresis 50 mV
tBOD Min Pulse Width on Brown-out Reset 2 µs
VBG Bandgap reference voltage VCC=2.7V, TA= 25°C 1.0 1.1 1.2 V
t
BG Bandgap reference start-up time VCC=2.7V, TA= 25°C 40 70 µs
I
BG Bandgap reference current consumption VCC=2.7V, TA= 25°C 10 µA
Symbol Parameter Min.(1) Typ.(1) Max.(1) Units
VPOT
Power-on Reset Threshold Voltage (rising)(2) 0.7 1.0 1.4 V
Power-on Reset Threshold Voltage (falling)(3) 0.05 0.9 1.3 V
VPSR Power-on slope rate 0.01 4.5 V/ms373
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
31.5.2 Enhanced Power-On Reset
This implementation of power-on reset exists in newer versions of
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561. The table below describes the characteristics of this poweron
reset and it is valid for the following devices only:
• ATmega640: revision B and newer
• ATmega1280: revision B and newer
• ATmega1281: revision B and newer
• ATmega2560: revision F and newer
• ATmega2561: revision F and newer
Table 31-5. Characteristics of Enhanced Power-On Reset. TA= -40 to +85°C.
Notes: 1. Values are guidelines only.
2. Threshold where device is released from reset when voltage is rising.
3. The power-on reset threshold voltage (falling) will not work unless the supply voltage has been
below VPOT.
Note: 1. VBOT may be below nominal minimum operating voltage for some devices. For devices where this is the case, the device is
tested down to VCC = VBOT during the production test. This guarantees that a Brown-Out Reset will occur before VCC drops to
a voltage where correct operation of the microcontroller is no longer guaranteed. The test is performed using
BODLEVEL = 110 for 4MHz operation of ATmega640V/1280V/1281V/2560V/2561V, BODLEVEL = 101 for 8MHz operation
of ATmega640V/1280V/1281V/2560V/2561V and ATmega640/1280/1281, and BODLEVEL = 100 for 16MHz operation of
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561.
31.6 2-wire Serial Interface Characteristics
Table 31-7 on page 374 describes the requirements for devices connected to the 2-wire Serial
Bus. The ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561 2-wire Serial Interface meets or exceeds these
requirements under the noted conditions.
Timing symbols refer to Figure 31-6 on page 375.
Symbol Parameter Min.(1) Typ.(1) Max.(1) Units
VPOT
Power-on Reset Threshold Voltage (rising)(2) 1.1 1.4 1.6 V
Power-on Reset Threshold Voltage (falling)(3) 0.6 1.3 1.6 V
VPSR Power-On Slope Rate 0.01 V/ms
Table 31-6. BODLEVEL Fuse Coding(1)
BODLEVEL 2:0 Fuses Min VBOT Typ VBOT Max VBOT Units
111 BOD Disabled
110 1.7 1.8 2.0
101 2.5 2.7 2.9 V
100 4.1 4.3 4.5
011
Reserved
010
001
000374
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Notes: 1. In ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561, this parameter is characterized and not 100% tested.
2. Required only for fSCL > 100kHz.
3. Cb = capacitance of one bus line in pF.
4. fCK = CPU clock frequency.
Table 31-7. 2-wire Serial Bus Requirements
Symbol Parameter Condition Min Max Units
VIL Input Low-voltage -0.5 0.3 VCC
V
VIH Input High-voltage 0.7 VCC VCC + 0.5
Vhys(1) Hysteresis of Schmitt Trigger Inputs 0.05 VCC(2) –
VOL(1) Output Low-voltage 3mA sink current 0 0.4
tr
(1) Rise Time for both SDA and SCL 20 +
0.1Cb
(3)(2) 300
ns tof
(1) Output Fall Time from VIHmin to VILmax 10pF < Cb < 400pF(3) 20 +
0.1Cb
(3)(2) 250
tSP(1) Spikes Suppressed by Input Filter 0 50(2)
Ii Input Current each I/O Pin 0.1VCC < Vi
< 0.9VCC -10 10 µA
Ci
(1) Capacitance for each I/O Pin – 10 pF
fSCL SCL Clock Frequency fCK(4) > max(16fSCL,
250kHz)(5) 0 400 kHz
Rp Value of Pull-up resistor
fSCL ≤ 100kHz
fSCL > 100kHz
tHD;STA Hold Time (repeated) START Condition
fSCL ≤ 100kHz 4.0 –
µs
fSCL > 100kHz 0.6 –
tLOW Low Period of the SCL Clock
fSCL ≤ 100kHz(6) 4.7 –
fSCL > 100kHz(7) 1.3 –
tHIGH High period of the SCL clock
fSCL ≤ 100kHz 4.0 –
fSCL > 100kHz 0.6 –
tSU;STA Set-up time for a repeated START condition
fSCL ≤ 100kHz 4.7 –
fSCL > 100kHz 0.6 –
tHD;DAT Data hold time
fSCL ≤ 100kHz 0 3.45
fSCL > 100kHz 0 0.9
tSU;DAT Data setup time
fSCL ≤ 100kHz 250 –
fSCL > 100kHz 100 –
tSU;STO Setup time for STOP condition
fSCL ≤ 100kHz 4.0 –
fSCL > 100kHz 0.6 –
tBUF
Bus free time between a STOP and START
condition
fSCL ≤ 100kHz 4.7 –
fSCL > 100kHz 1.3 –
VCC – 0.4V
3mA ---------------------------- 1000ns
Cb
-------------------
Ω
VCC – 0.4V
3mA ---------------------------- 300 ns
Cb
-----------------375
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
5. This requirement applies to all ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561 2-wire Serial Interface operation. Other devices connected
to the 2-wire Serial Bus need only obey the general fSCL requirement.
6. The actual low period generated by the ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561 2-wire Serial Interface is (1/fSCL - 2/fCK), thus fCK
must be greater than 6MHz for the low time requirement to be strictly met at fSCL = 100kHz.
7. The actual low period generated by the ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561 2-wire Serial Interface is (1/fSCL - 2/fCK), thus the
low time requirement will not be strictly met for fSCL > 308kHz when fCK = 8MHz. Still, ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
devices connected to the bus may communicate at full speed (400kHz) with other ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
devices, as well as any other device with a proper tLOW acceptance margin.
Figure 31-6. 2-wire Serial Bus Timing
31.7 SPI Timing Characteristics
See Figure 31-7 on page 376 and Figure 31-8 on page 376 for details.
Note: 1. In SPI Programming mode the minimum SCK high/low period is:
- 2 tCLCL for fCK < 12MHz
- 3 tCLCL for fCK > 12MHz
t
SU;STA
t
LOW
t
HIGH
t
LOW
t
of
t
HD;STA t
HD;DAT t
SU;DAT t
SU;STO
t
BUF
SCL
SDA
t
r
Table 31-8. SPI Timing Parameters
Description Mode Min Typ Max
1 SCK period Master See Table 21-5 on
page 203
ns
2 SCK high/low Master 50% duty cycle
3 Rise/Fall time Master 3.6
4 Setup Master 10
5 Hold Master 10
6 Out to SCK Master 0.5 • tsck
7 SCK to out Master 10
8 SCK to out high Master 10
9 SS low to out Slave 15
10 SCK period Slave 4 • tck
11 SCK high/low(1) Slave 2 • tck
12 Rise/Fall time Slave 1600
13 Setup Slave 10
14 Hold Slave tck
15 SCK to out Slave 15
16 SCK to SS high Slave 20
17 SS high to tri-state Slave 10
18 SS low to SCK Slave 20376
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Figure 31-7. SPI Interface Timing Requirements (Master Mode)
Figure 31-8. SPI Interface Timing Requirements (Slave Mode)
MOSI
(Data Output)
SCK
(CPOL = 1)
MISO
(Data Input)
SCK
(CPOL = 0)
SS
MSB LSB
MSB LSB
...
...
6 1
2 2
4 5 3
7 8
MISO
(Data Output)
SCK
(CPOL = 1)
MOSI
(Data Input)
SCK
(CPOL = 0)
SS
MSB LSB
MSB LSB
...
...
10
11 11
13 14 12
15 17
9
X
16377
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
31.8 ADC Characteristics – Preliminary Data
Note: 1. Values are guidelines only.
Table 31-9. ADC Characteristics, Singel Ended Channels
Symbol Parameter Condition Min(1) Typ(1) Max(1) Units
Resolution Single Ended Conversion 10 Bits
Absolute accuracy (Including
INL, DNL, quantization error,
gain and offset error)
Single Ended Conversion
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
CLKADC= 200kHz
2.25 2.5
LSB
Single Ended Conversion
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
CLKADC = 1MHz
3
Single Ended Conversion
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
CLKADC = 200kHz
Noise Reduction Mode
2
Single Ended Conversion
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
CLKADC = 1MHz
Noise Reduction Mode
3
Integral Non-Linearity (INL)
Single Ended Conversion
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
CLKADC = 200kHz
1.25
Differential Non-Linearity (DNL)
Single Ended Conversion
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
CLKADC = 200kHz
0.5
Gain Error
Single Ended Conversion
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
CLKADC= 200kHz
2
Offset Error
Single Ended Conversion
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
CLKADC = 200kHz
-2
Conversion Time Free Running Conversion 13 260 µs
Clock Frequency Single Ended Conversion 50 1000 kHz
AVCC Analog Supply Voltage VCC - 0.3 VCC + 0.3
VREF Reference Voltage 1.0 AVCC V
VIN Input Voltage GND VREF
Input Bandwidth 38,5 kHz
VINT1 Internal Voltage Reference 1.1V 1.0 1.1 1.2
V
VINT2 Internal Voltage Reference 2.56V 2.4 2.56 2.8
RREF Reference Input Resistance 32 kΩ
RAIN Analog Input Resistance 100 MΩ378
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Table 31-10. ADC Characteristics, Differential Channels
Symbol Parameter Condition Min(1) Typ(1) Max(1) Units
Resolution
Gain = 1× 8
Gain = 10× 8 Bits
Gain = 200× 7
Absolute Accuracy(Including INL, DNL,
Quantization Error, Gain and Offset Error)
Gain = 1×
VREF = 4V, VCC = 5V
CLKADC = 50 - 200kHz
18
LSB
Gain = 10×
VREF = 4V, VCC = 5V
CLKADC = 50 - 200kHz
17
Gain = 200×
VREF = 4V, VCC = 5V
CLKADC = 50 - 200kHz
9
Integral Non-Linearity (INL)
Gain = 1×
VREF = 4V, VCC = 5V
CLKADC = 50 - 200kHz
2.5
Gain = 10×
VREF = 4V, VCC = 5V
CLKADC = 50 - 200kHz
5
Gain = 200×
VREF = 4V, VCC = 5V
CLKADC = 50 - 200kHz
9
Differential Non-Linearity (DNL)
Gain = 1×
VREF = 4V, VCC = 5V
CLKADC = 50 - 200kHz
0.75
Gain = 10×
VREF = 4V, VCC = 5V
CLKADC = 50 - 200kHz
1.5
Gain = 200×
VREF = 4V, VCC = 5V
CLKADC = 50 - 200kHz
10
Gain Error
Gain = 1× 1.7
Gain = 10× 1.7 %
Gain = 200× 0.5
Offset Error
Gain = 1×
VREF = 4V, VCC = 5V
CLKADC = 50 - 200kHz
2
LSB
Gain = 10×
VREF = 4V, VCC = 5V
CLKADC = 50 - 200kHz
2
Gain = 200×
VREF = 4V, VCC = 5V
CLKADC = 50 - 200kHz
3
Clock Frequency 50 200 kHz
Conversion Time 65 260 µs379
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Note: Values are guidelines only.
31.9 External Data Memory Timing
Notes: 1. This assumes 50% clock duty cycle. The half period is actually the high time of the external clock, XTAL1.
2. This assumes 50% clock duty cycle. The half period is actually the low time of the external clock, XTAL1.
AVCC Analog Supply Voltage VCC - 0.3 VCC + 0.3
V
VREF Reference Voltage 2.7 AVCC - 0.5
VIN Input Voltage GND VCC
VDIFF Input Differential Voltage -VREF/Gain VREF/Gain
ADC Conversion Output -511 511 LSB
Input Bandwidth 4 kHz
VINT Internal Voltage Reference 2.3 2.56 2.8 V
RREF Reference Input Resistance 32 kΩ
RAIN Analog Input Resistance 100 MΩ
Table 31-11. External Data Memory Characteristics, 4.5 to 5.5 Volts, No Wait-state
Symbol Parameter
8MHz Oscillator Variable Oscillator
Min Max Min Max Unit
0 1/tCLCL Oscillator Frequency 0.0 16 MHz
1 tLHLL ALE Pulse Width 115 1.0tCLCL-10
ns
2 tAVLL Address Valid A to ALE Low 57.5 0.5tCLCL-5(1)
3a tLLAX_ST
Address Hold After ALE Low,
write access 5 5
3b tLLAX_LD
Address Hold after ALE Low,
read access 5 5
4 tAVLLC Address Valid C to ALE Low 57.5 0.5tCLCL-5(1)
5 tAVRL Address Valid to RD Low 115 1.0tCLCL-10
6 tAVWL Address Valid to WR Low 115 1.0tCLCL-10
7 tLLWL ALE Low to WR Low 47.5 67.5 0.5tCLCL-15(2) 0.5tCLCL+5(2)
8 tLLRL ALE Low to RD Low 47.5 67.5 0.5tCLCL-15(2) 0.5tCLCL+5(2)
9 tDVRH Data Setup to RD High 40 40
10 tRLDV Read Low to Data Valid 75 1.0tCLCL-50
11 tRHDX Data Hold After RD High 0 0
12 tRLRH RD Pulse Width 115 1.0tCLCL-10
13 tDVWL Data Setup to WR Low 42.5 0.5tCLCL-20(1)
14 tWHDX Data Hold After WR High 115 1.0tCLCL-10
15 tDVWH Data Valid to WR High 125 1.0tCLCL
16 tWLWH WR Pulse Width 115 1.0tCLCL-10
Table 31-10. ADC Characteristics, Differential Channels (Continued)
Symbol Parameter Condition Min(1) Typ(1) Max(1) Units380
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Table 31-12. External Data Memory Characteristics, 4.5 to 5.5 Volts, 1 Cycle Wait-state
Symbol Parameter
8MHz Oscillator Variable Oscillator
Min Max Min Max Unit
0 1/tCLCL Oscillator Frequency 0.0 16 MHz
10 tRLDV Read Low to Data Valid 200 2.0tCLCL-50
ns
12 tRLRH RD Pulse Width 240 2.0tCLCL-10
15 tDVWH Data Valid to WR High 240 2.0tCLCL
16 tWLWH WR Pulse Width 240 2.0tCLCL-10
Table 31-13. External Data Memory Characteristics, 4.5 to 5.5 Volts, SRWn1 = 1, SRWn0 = 0
Symbol Parameter
4MHz Oscillator Variable Oscillator
Min Max Min Max Unit
0 1/tCLCL Oscillator Frequency 0.0 16 MHz
10 tRLDV Read Low to Data Valid 325 3.0tCLCL-50
ns
12 tRLRH RD Pulse Width 365 3.0tCLCL-10
15 tDVWH Data Valid to WR High 375 3.0tCLCL
16 tWLWH WR Pulse Width 365 3.0tCLCL-10
Table 31-14. External Data Memory Characteristics, 4.5 to 5.5 Volts, SRWn1 = 1, SRWn0 = 1
Symbol Parameter
4MHz Oscillator Variable Oscillator
Min Max Min Max Unit
0 1/tCLCL Oscillator Frequency 0.0 16 MHz
10 tRLDV Read Low to Data Valid 325 3.0tCLCL-50
ns
12 tRLRH RD Pulse Width 365 3.0tCLCL-10
14 tWHDX Data Hold After WR High 240 2.0tCLCL-10
15 tDVWH Data Valid to WR High 375 3.0tCLCL
16 tWLWH WR Pulse Width 365 3.0tCLCL-10
Table 31-15. External Data Memory Characteristics, 2.7 to 5.5 Volts, No Wait-state
Symbol Parameter
4MHz Oscillator Variable Oscillator
Min Max Min Max Unit
0 1/tCLCL Oscillator Frequency 0.0 8 MHz381
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Notes: 1. This assumes 50% clock duty cycle. The half period is actually the high time of the external clock, XTAL1.
2. This assumes 50% clock duty cycle. The half period is actually the low time of the external clock, XTAL1.
1 tLHLL ALE Pulse Width 235 tCLCL-15
ns
2 tAVLL Address Valid A to ALE Low 115 0.5tCLCL-10(1)
3a tLLAX_ST
Address Hold After ALE Low,
write access 5 5
3b tLLAX_LD
Address Hold after ALE Low,
read access 5 5
4 tAVLLC Address Valid C to ALE Low 115 0.5tCLCL-10(1)
5 tAVRL Address Valid to RD Low 235 1.0tCLCL-15
6 tAVWL Address Valid to WR Low 235 1.0tCLCL-15
7 tLLWL ALE Low to WR Low 115 130 0.5tCLCL-10(2) 0.5tCLCL+5(2)
8 tLLRL ALE Low to RD Low 115 130 0.5tCLCL-10(2) 0.5tCLCL+5(2)
9 tDVRH Data Setup to RD High 45 45
10 tRLDV Read Low to Data Valid 190 1.0tCLCL-60
11 tRHDX Data Hold After RD High 0 0
12 tRLRH RD Pulse Width 235 1.0tCLCL-15
13 tDVWL Data Setup to WR Low 105 0.5tCLCL-20(1)
14 tWHDX Data Hold After WR High 235 1.0tCLCL-15
15 tDVWH Data Valid to WR High 250 1.0tCLCL
16 tWLWH WR Pulse Width 235 1.0tCLCL-15
Table 31-15. External Data Memory Characteristics, 2.7 to 5.5 Volts, No Wait-state (Continued)
Symbol Parameter
4MHz Oscillator Variable Oscillator
Min Max Min Max Unit
Table 31-16. External Data Memory Characteristics, 2.7 to 5.5 Volts, SRWn1 = 0, SRWn0 = 1
Symbol Parameter
4MHz Oscillator Variable Oscillator
Min Max Min Max Unit
0 1/tCLCL Oscillator Frequency 0.0 8 MHz
10 tRLDV Read Low to Data Valid 440 2.0tCLCL-60
ns
12 tRLRH RD Pulse Width 485 2.0tCLCL-15
15 tDVWH Data Valid to WR High 500 2.0tCLCL
16 tWLWH WR Pulse Width 485 2.0tCLCL-15382
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Figure 31-9. External Memory Timing (SRWn1 = 0, SRWn0 = 0
Table 31-17. External Data Memory Characteristics, 2.7 to 5.5 Volts, SRWn1 = 1, SRWn0 = 0
Symbol Parameter
4MHz Oscillator Variable Oscillator
Min Max Min Max Unit
0 1/tCLCL Oscillator Frequency 0.0 8 MHz
10 tRLDV Read Low to Data Valid 690 3.0tCLCL-60
ns
12 tRLRH RD Pulse Width 735 3.0tCLCL-15
15 tDVWH Data Valid to WR High 750 3.0tCLCL
16 tWLWH WR Pulse Width 735 3.0tCLCL-15
Table 31-18. External Data Memory Characteristics, 2.7 to 5.5 Volts, SRWn1 = 1, SRWn0 = 1
Symbol Parameter
4MHz Oscillator Variable Oscillator
Min Max Min Max Unit
0 1/tCLCL Oscillator Frequency 0.0 8 MHz
10 tRLDV Read Low to Data Valid 690 3.0tCLCL-60
ns
12 tRLRH RD Pulse Width 735 3.0tCLCL-15
14 tWHDX Data Hold After WR High 485 2.0tCLCL-15
15 tDVWH Data Valid to WR High 750 3.0tCLCL
16 tWLWH WR Pulse Width 735 3.0tCLCL-15
ALE
T1 T2 T3
Write Read
WR
T4
A15:8 Prev. addr. Address
DA7:0 Prev. data Address Data XX
RD
DA7:0 (XMBK = 0) Address Data
System Clock (CLKCPU)
1
4
2
7
6
3a
3b
5
8 12
16
13
10
11
14
15
9383
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Figure 31-10. External Memory Timing (SRWn1 = 0, SRWn0 = 1)
Figure 31-11. External Memory Timing (SRWn1 = 1, SRWn0 = 0)
ALE
T1 T2 T3
Write Read
WR
T5
A15:8 Prev. addr. Address
DA7:0 Prev. data Address XX Data
RD
DA7:0 (XMBK = 0) Address Data
System Clock (CLKCPU)
1
4
2
7
6
3a
3b
5
8 12
16
13
10
11
14
15
9
T4
ALE
T1 T2 T3
Write Read
WR
T6
A15:8 Prev. addr. Address
DA7:0 Prev. data Address Data XX
RD
DA7:0 (XMBK = 0) Address Data
System Clock (CLKCPU)
1
4
2
7
6
3a
3b
5
8 12
16
13
10
11
14
15
9
T4 T5384
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Figure 31-12. External Memory Timing (SRWn1 = 1, SRWn0 = 1)()
The ALE pulse in the last period (T4-T7) is only present if the next instruction accesses the RAM
(internal or external).
ALE
T1 T2 T3
Write Read
WR
T7
A15:8 Prev. addr. Address
DA7:0 Prev. data Address Data XX
RD
DA7:0 (XMBK = 0) Address Data
System Clock (CLKCPU)
1
4
2
7
6
3a
3b
5
8 12
16
13
10
11
14
15
9
T4 T5 T6385
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
32. Typical Characteristics
The following charts show typical behavior. These figures are not tested during manufacturing.
All current consumption measurements are performed with all I/O pins configured as inputs and
with internal pull-ups enabled. A sine wave generator with rail-to-rail output is used as clock
source.
All Active- and Idle current consumption measurements are done with all bits in the PRR registers
set and thus, the corresponding I/O modules are turned off. Also the Analog Comparator is
disabled during these measurements. Table 32-1 on page 390 and Table 32-2 on page 391
show the additional current consumption compared to ICC Active and ICC Idle for every I/O module
controlled by the Power Reduction Register. See “Power Reduction Register” on page 54 for
details.
The power consumption in Power-down mode is independent of clock selection.
The current consumption is a function of several factors such as: operating voltage, operating
frequency, loading of I/O pins, switching rate of I/O pins, code executed and ambient temperature.
The dominating factors are operating voltage and frequency.
The current drawn from capacitive loaded pins may be estimated (for one pin) as CL × VCC × f
where CL = load capacitance, VCC = operating voltage and f = average switching frequency of I/O
pin.
The parts are characterized at frequencies higher than test limits. Parts are not guaranteed to
function properly at frequencies higher than the ordering code indicates.
The difference between current consumption in Power-down mode with Watchdog Timer
enabled and Power-down mode with Watchdog Timer disabled represents the differential current
drawn by the Watchdog Timer.
32.1 Active Supply Current
Figure 32-1. Active Supply Current vs. frequency (0.1MHz - 1.0MHz)
5.5V
5.0V
4.5V
4.0V
3.3V
2.7V
1.8V
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Frequency (MHz)
ICC (m
A)386
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Figure 32-2. Active Supply Current vs. Frequency (1MHz - 16MHz)
Figure 32-3. Active Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 8MHz)
5.5V
5.0V
4.5V
0
5
10
15
20
25
0246 8 10 12 14 16
Frequency (MHz)
ICC (m A)
4.0V
3.3V
2.7V
1.8V
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (mA)387
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Figure 32-4. Active Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 1MHz)
Figure 32-5. Active Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 128kHz)
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (mA)
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (mA)388
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
32.2 Idle Supply Current
Figure 32-6. Idle Supply Current vs. Low Frequency (0.1MHz - 1.0MHz)
Figure 32-7. Idle Supply Current vs. Frequency (1MHz - 16MHz)
5.5V
5.0V
4.5V
4.0V
3.3V
2.7V
1.8V
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Frequency (MHz)
ICC (mA)
5.5V
5.0V
4.5V
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0246 8 10 12 14 16
Frequency (MHz)
ICC (mA)
4.0V
3.3V
2.7V
1.8V389
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Figure 32-8. Idle Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 8MHz)
Figure 32-9. Idle Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 1MHz)
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (mA)
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (mA)390
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Figure 32-10. Idle Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 128kHz)I
32.2.1 Supply Current of IO modules
The tables and formulas below can be used to calculate the additional current consumption for
the different I/O modules in Active and Idle mode. The enabling or disabling of the I/O modules
are controlled by the Power Reduction Register. See “Power Reduction Register” on page 54 for
details.
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
0.05
0.1
0.15
0.2
0.25
0.3
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (m A )
Table 32-1. Additional Current Consumption for the different I/O modules (absolute values)
PRR bit Typical numbers
VCC = 2V, F = 1MHz VCC = 3V, F = 4MHz VCC = 5V, F = 8MHz
PRUSART3 8.0µA 51µA 220µA
PRUSART2 8.0µA 51µA 220µA
PRUSART1 8.0µA 51µA 220µA
PRUSART0 8.0µA 51µA 220µA
PRTWI 12µA 75µA 315µA
PRTIM5 6.0µA 39µA 150µA
PRTIM4 6.0µA 39µA 150µA
PRTIM3 6.0µA 39µA 150µA
PRTIM2 11µA 72µA 300µA
PRTIM1 6.0µA 39µA 150µA
PRTIM0 4.0µA 24µA 100µA
PRSPI 15µA 95µA 400µA
PRADC 12µA 75µA 315µA391
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
It is possible to calculate the typical current consumption based on the numbers from Table 32-1
on page 390 for other VCC and frequency settings than listed in Table 32-2.
32.2.1.1 Example 1
Calculate the expected current consumption in idle mode with USART0, TIMER1, and TWI
enabled at VCC = 2.0V and F = 1MHz. From Table 32-2, third column, we see that we need to
add 17% for the USART0, 24% for the TWI, and 10% for the TIMER1 module. Reading from Figure
32-6 on page 388, we find that the idle current consumption is ~0.15mA at VCC = 2.0V and F
= 1MHz. The total current consumption in idle mode with USART0, TIMER1, and TWI enabled,
gives:
Table 32-2. Additional Current Consumption (percentage) in Active and Idle mode
PRR bit
Additional Current consumption
compared to Active with external clock
Additional Current consumption
compared to Idle with external clock
PRUSART3 3.0% 17%
PRUSART2 3.0% 17%
PRUSART1 3.0% 17%
PRUSART0 3.0% 17%
PRTWI 4.4% 24%
PRTIM5 1.8% 10%
PRTIM4 1.8% 10%
PRTIM3 1.8% 10%
PRTIM2 4.3% 23%
PRTIM1 1.8% 10%
PRTIM0 1.5% 8.0%
PRSPI 3.3% 18%
PRADC 4.5% 24%
ICCtotal ≈ ≈ 0.15mA • ( ) 1 0.17 0.24 0.10 +++ 0.227mA392
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
32.3 Power-down Supply Current
Figure 32-11. Power-down Supply Current vs. VCC (Watchdog Timer Disabled)
Figure 32-12. Power-down Supply Current vs. VCC (Watchdog Timer Enabled)
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (µA)
25°C
-40°C
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (µA)
85°C393
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
32.4 Power-save Supply Current
Figure 32-13. Power-save Supply Current vs. VCC (Watchdog Timer Disabled)
Figure 32-14. Power-save Supply Current vs. VCC (Watchdog Timer Enabled)
25°C
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC(µA)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (µA)
25°C394
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
32.5 Standby Supply Current
Figure 32-15. Standby Supply Current vs. VCC (Watchdog Timer Disabled)
32.6 Pin Pull-up
Figure 32-16. I/O Pin Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Input Voltage (VCC = 1.8V)
6MHz xtal
6MHz res
4MHz xtal
4MHz res
455kHz res
32kHz xtal
2MHz xtal
2MHz res
1MHz res
0
0.02
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.1
0.12
0.14
0.16
0.18
0.2
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (mA)
85°C
25°C
-40°C 0
10
20
30
40
50
60
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2
VOP (V)
IOP (µA)395
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Figure 32-17. I/O Pin Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Input Voltage (VCC = 2.7V)
Figure 32-18. I/O Pin Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Input Voltage (VCC = 5V)
85°C
25°C
0 -40°C
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3
VOP (V)
IOP (µA)
85°C
25°C
0 -40°C
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
0123456
VOP (V)
IOP (µA)396
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Figure 32-19. Reset Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Reset Pin Voltage (VCC = 1.8V)
Figure 32-20. Reset pull-up Resistor Current vs. Reset Pin Voltage (VCC = 2.7V)
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2
VRESET (V)
IRESET (µA)
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3
VRESET (V)
IRESET (µA)397
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Figure 32-21. Reset Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Reset Pin Voltage (VCC = 5V)
32.7 Pin Driver Strength
Figure 32-22. I/O Pin output Voltage vs.Sink Current (VCC = 3V)
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
0123 456
VRESET (V)
IRESET (µA)
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1
0 5 10 15 20 25
IOL (mA)
VOL (V)398
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Figure 32-23. I/O Pin Output Voltage vs. Sink Current (VCC = 5V)
Figure 32-24. I/O Pin Output Voltage vs. Source Current (VCC = 3V)
25°C
-40°C
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0 5 10 15 20 25
IOL (mA)
VOL (V)
85°C
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
0 5 10 15 20 25
IOH (mA)
VOH (V)399
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Figure 32-25. I/O Pin Output Voltage vs. Source Current (VCC = 5V)
32.8 Pin Threshold and Hysteresis
Figure 32-26. I/O Pin Input Threshold Voltage vs. VCC (VIH, IO Pin Read as “1“)
85°C
25°C
-40°C
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
5
5.1
0 5 10 15 20 25
IOH (mA)
VOH (V)
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
Threshold (V)400
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Figure 32-27. I/O Pin Input Threshold Voltage vs. VCC (VIL, IO Pin Read as “0“)
Figure 32-28. I/O Pin Input Hysteresis
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
Threshold (V)
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
Input Hysteresis (mV)401
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Figure 32-29. Reset Input Threshold Voltage vs. VCC (VIH, IO Pin Read as “1“)
Figure 32-30. Reset Input Threshold Voltage vs. VCC (VIL, IO Pin Read as “0“)
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
Threshold (V)
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
Threshold (V)402
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Figure 32-31. Reset Pin Input Hysteresis vs. VCC
32.9 BOD Threshold and Analog Comparator Offset
Figure 32-32. BOD Threshold vs. Temperature (BOD Level is 4.3V)
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
Input Hysteresis (mV)
Rising Vcc
Falling Vcc
4.2
4.25
4.3
4.35
4.4
-60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100
Temperature (°C)
Threshold (V)403
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Figure 32-33. BOD Threshold vs. Temperature (BOD Level is 2.7V)
Figure 32-34. BOD Threshold vs. Temperature (BOD Level is 1.8V)
Rising Vcc
Falling Vcc
2.6
2.65
2.7
2.75
2.8
-60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100
Temperature (°C)
Threshold (V)
Rising Vcc
Fallling Vcc
1.7
1.75
1.8
1.85
1.9
-60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100
Temperature (°C)
T hre shold (V )404
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
32.10 Internal Oscillator Speed
Figure 32-35. Watchdog Oscillator Frequency vs. VCC
Figure 32-36. Watchdog Oscillator Frequency vs. Temperature
85°C
25°C
-40°C
114
116
118
120
122
124
126
128
2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
FRC (kHz)
5.5V
4.0V
3.3V
2.7V
2.1V
114
116
118
120
122
124
126
128
-60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100
Temperature (°C)
FRC (kHz)405
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Figure 32-37. Calibrated 8MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. VCC
Figure 32-38. Calibrated 8MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. Temperature
85°C
25°C
-40°C
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
8
8.1
8.2
8.3
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
FRC (MHz)
5.0V
3.0V
7.9
8
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
-60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100
Temperature (°C)
FRC (MHz)406
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Figure 32-39. Calibrated 8MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. Osccal Value
32.11 Current Consumption of Peripheral Units
Figure 32-40. Brownout Detector Current vs. VCC
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
0 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240 256
OSCCAL (X1)
FRC (MHz)
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (µA)407
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Figure 32-41. ADC Current vs. VCC (AREF = AVCC)
Figure 32-42. AREF External Reference Current vs. VCC
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (µA)
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
50
100
150
200
250
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (µA)408
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Figure 32-43. Watchdog Timer Current vs. VCC
Figure 32-44. Analog Comparator Current vs. VCC
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (µA)
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (µA)409
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Figure 32-45. Programming Current vs. VCC
32.12 Current Consumption in Reset and Reset Pulsewidth
Figure 32-46. Reset Supply Current vs VCC (0.1MHz - 1.0MHz, Excluding Current Through The
Reset Pull-up)
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (mA)
5.5V
5.0V
4.5V
4.0V
3.3V
2.7V
1.8V
0
0.05
0.1
0.15
0.2
0.25
0.3
0.35
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Frequency (MHz)
ICC (mA)410
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Figure 32-47. Reset Supply Current vs. VCC (1MHz - 16MHz, Excluding Current Through The
Reset Pull-up)
Figure 32-48. Minimum Reset Pulse Width vs. VCC
5.5V
5.0V
4.5V
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
0246 8 10 12 14 16
Frequency (MHz)
ICC (mA)
4.0V
3.3V
2.7V
1.8V
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
Pu lsewidth (ns)411
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
33. Register Summary
Address Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Page
(0x1FF) Reserved - - - - - - - -
... Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x13F) Reserved
(0x13E) Reserved
(0x13D) Reserved
(0x13C) Reserved
(0x13B) Reserved
(0x13A) Reserved
(0x139) Reserved
(0x138) Reserved
(0x137) Reserved
(0x136) UDR3 USART3 I/O Data Register 222
(0x135) UBRR3H - - - - USART3 Baud Rate Register High Byte 227
(0x134) UBRR3L USART3 Baud Rate Register Low Byte 227
(0x133) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x132) UCSR3C UMSEL31 UMSEL30 UPM31 UPM30 USBS3 UCSZ31 UCSZ30 UCPOL3 239
(0x131) UCSR3B RXCIE3 TXCIE3 UDRIE3 RXEN3 TXEN3 UCSZ32 RXB83 TXB83 238
(0x130) UCSR3A RXC3 TXC3 UDRE3 FE3 DOR3 UPE3 U2X3 MPCM3 238
(0x12F) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x12E) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x12D) OCR5CH Timer/Counter5 - Output Compare Register C High Byte 165
(0x12C) OCR5CL Timer/Counter5 - Output Compare Register C Low Byte 165
(0x12B) OCR5BH Timer/Counter5 - Output Compare Register B High Byte 165
(0x12A) OCR5BL Timer/Counter5 - Output Compare Register B Low Byte 165
(0x129) OCR5AH Timer/Counter5 - Output Compare Register A High Byte 164
(0x128) OCR5AL Timer/Counter5 - Output Compare Register A Low Byte 164
(0x127) ICR5H Timer/Counter5 - Input Capture Register High Byte 165
(0x126) ICR5L Timer/Counter5 - Input Capture Register Low Byte 165
(0x125) TCNT5H Timer/Counter5 - Counter Register High Byte 163
(0x124) TCNT5L Timer/Counter5 - Counter Register Low Byte 163
(0x123) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x122) TCCR5C FOC5A FOC5B FOC5C - - - - - 162
(0x121) TCCR5B ICNC5 ICES5 - WGM53 WGM52 CS52 CS51 CS50 160
(0x120) TCCR5A COM5A1 COM5A0 COM5B1 COM5B0 COM5C1 COM5C0 WGM51 WGM50 158
(0x11F) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x11E) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x11D) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x11C) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x11B) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x11A) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x119) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x118) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x117) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x116) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x115) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x114) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x113) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x112) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x111) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x110) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x10F) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x10E) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x10D) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x10C) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x10B) PORTL PORTL7 PORTL6 PORTL5 PORTL4 PORTL3 PORTL2 PORTL1 PORTL0 104
(0x10A) DDRL DDL7 DDL6 DDL5 DDL4 DDL3 DDL2 DDL1 DDL0 104
(0x109) PINL PINL7 PINL6 PINL5 PINL4 PINL3 PINL2 PINL1 PINL0 104
(0x108) PORTK PORTK7 PORTK6 PORTK5 PORTK4 PORTK3 PORTK2 PORTK1 PORTK0 103
(0x107) DDRK DDK7 DDK6 DDK5 DDK4 DDK3 DDK2 DDK1 DDK0 103
(0x106) PINK PINK7 PINK6 PINK5 PINK4 PINK3 PINK2 PINK1 PINK0 103
(0x105) PORTJ PORTJ7 PORTJ6 PORTJ5 PORTJ4 PORTJ3 PORTJ2 PORTJ1 PORTJ0 103
(0x104) DDRJ DDJ7 DDJ6 DDJ5 DDJ4 DDJ3 DDJ2 DDJ1 DDJ0 103
(0x103) PINJ PINJ7 PINJ6 PINJ5 PINJ4 PINJ3 PINJ2 PINJ1 PINJ0 103
(0x102) PORTH PORTH7 PORTH6 PORTH5 PORTH4 PORTH3 PORTH2 PORTH1 PORTH0 102
(0x101) DDRH DDH7 DDH6 DDH5 DDH4 DDH3 DDH2 DDH1 DDH0 103412
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
(0x100) PINH PINH7 PINH6 PINH5 PINH4 PINH3 PINH2 PINH1 PINH0 103
(0xFF) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xFE) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xFD) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xFC) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xFB) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xFA) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xF9) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xF8) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xF7) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xF6) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xF5) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xF4) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xF3) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xF2) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xF1) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xF0) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xEF) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xEE) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xED) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xEC) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xEB) Reserved - - - - - - -
(0xEA) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xE9) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xE8) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xE7) Reserved - - - - - - -
(0xE6) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xE5) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xE4) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xE3) Reserved - - - - - - -
(0xE2) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xE1) Reserved - - - - - - -
(0xE0) Reserved - - - - - - -
(0xDF) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xDE) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xDD) Reserved - - - - - - -
(0xDC) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xDB) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xDA) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xD9) Reserved - - - - - - -
(0xD8) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xD7) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xD6) UDR2 USART2 I/O Data Register 222
(0xD5) UBRR2H - - - - USART2 Baud Rate Register High Byte 227
(0xD4) UBRR2L USART2 Baud Rate Register Low Byte 227
(0xD3) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xD2) UCSR2C UMSEL21 UMSEL20 UPM21 UPM20 USBS2 UCSZ21 UCSZ20 UCPOL2 239
(0xD1) UCSR2B RXCIE2 TXCIE2 UDRIE2 RXEN2 TXEN2 UCSZ22 RXB82 TXB82 238
(0xD0) UCSR2A RXC2 TXC2 UDRE2 FE2 DOR2 UPE2 U2X2 MPCM2 238
(0xCF) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xCE) UDR1 USART1 I/O Data Register 222
(0xCD) UBRR1H - - - - USART1 Baud Rate Register High Byte 227
(0xCC) UBRR1L USART1 Baud Rate Register Low Byte 227
(0xCB) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xCA) UCSR1C UMSEL11 UMSEL10 UPM11 UPM10 USBS1 UCSZ11 UCSZ10 UCPOL1 239
(0xC9) UCSR1B RXCIE1 TXCIE1 UDRIE1 RXEN1 TXEN1 UCSZ12 RXB81 TXB81 238
(0xC8) UCSR1A RXC1 TXC1 UDRE1 FE1 DOR1 UPE1 U2X1 MPCM1 238
(0xC7) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xC6) UDR0 USART0 I/O Data Register 222
(0xC5) UBRR0H - - - - USART0 Baud Rate Register High Byte 227
(0xC4) UBRR0L USART0 Baud Rate Register Low Byte 227
(0xC3) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xC2) UCSR0C UMSEL01 UMSEL00 UPM01 UPM00 USBS0 UCSZ01 UCSZ00 UCPOL0 239
(0xC1) UCSR0B RXCIE0 TXCIE0 UDRIE0 RXEN0 TXEN0 UCSZ02 RXB80 TXB80 238
(0xC0) UCSR0A RXC0 TXC0 UDRE0 FE0 DOR0 UPE0 U2X0 MPCM0 238
(0xBF) Reserved - - - - - - - -
Address Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Page413
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
(0xBE) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xBD) TWAMR TWAM6 TWAM5 TWAM4 TWAM3 TWAM2 TWAM1 TWAM0 - 269
(0xBC) TWCR TWINT TWEA TWSTA TWSTO TWWC TWEN - TWIE 266
(0xBB) TWDR 2-wire Serial Interface Data Register 268
(0xBA) TWAR TWA6 TWA5 TWA4 TWA3 TWA2 TWA1 TWA0 TWGCE 269
(0xB9) TWSR TWS7 TWS6 TWS5 TWS4 TWS3 - TWPS1 TWPS0 268
(0xB8) TWBR 2-wire Serial Interface Bit Rate Register 266
(0xB7) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xB6) ASSR - EXCLK AS2 TCN2UB OCR2AUB OCR2BUB TCR2AUB TCR2BUB 184
(0xB5) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xB4) OCR2B Timer/Counter2 Output Compare Register B 191
(0xB3) OCR2A Timer/Counter2 Output Compare Register A 191
(0xB2) TCNT2 Timer/Counter2 (8 Bit) 191
(0xB1) TCCR2B FOC2A FOC2B - - WGM22 CS22 CS21 CS20 190
(0xB0) TCCR2A COM2A1 COM2A0 COM2B1 COM2B0 - - WGM21 WGM20 191
(0xAF) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xAE) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xAD) OCR4CH Timer/Counter4 - Output Compare Register C High Byte 164
(0xAC) OCR4CL Timer/Counter4 - Output Compare Register C Low Byte 164
(0xAB) OCR4BH Timer/Counter4 - Output Compare Register B High Byte 164
(0xAA) OCR4BL Timer/Counter4 - Output Compare Register B Low Byte 164
(0xA9) OCR4AH Timer/Counter4 - Output Compare Register A High Byte 164
(0xA8) OCR4AL Timer/Counter4 - Output Compare Register A Low Byte 164
(0xA7) ICR4H Timer/Counter4 - Input Capture Register High Byte 165
(0xA6) ICR4L Timer/Counter4 - Input Capture Register Low Byte 165
(0xA5) TCNT4H Timer/Counter4 - Counter Register High Byte 163
(0xA4) TCNT4L Timer/Counter4 - Counter Register Low Byte 163
(0xA3) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0xA2) TCCR4C FOC4A FOC4B FOC4C - - - - - 162
(0xA1) TCCR4B ICNC4 ICES4 - WGM43 WGM42 CS42 CS41 CS40 160
(0xA0) TCCR4A COM4A1 COM4A0 COM4B1 COM4B0 COM4C1 COM4C0 WGM41 WGM40 158
(0x9F) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x9E) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x9D) OCR3CH Timer/Counter3 - Output Compare Register C High Byte 164
(0x9C) OCR3CL Timer/Counter3 - Output Compare Register C Low Byte 164
(0x9B) OCR3BH Timer/Counter3 - Output Compare Register B High Byte 164
(0x9A) OCR3BL Timer/Counter3 - Output Compare Register B Low Byte 164
(0x99) OCR3AH Timer/Counter3 - Output Compare Register A High Byte 163
(0x98) OCR3AL Timer/Counter3 - Output Compare Register A Low Byte 163
(0x97) ICR3H Timer/Counter3 - Input Capture Register High Byte 165
(0x96) ICR3L Timer/Counter3 - Input Capture Register Low Byte 165
(0x95) TCNT3H Timer/Counter3 - Counter Register High Byte 162
(0x94) TCNT3L Timer/Counter3 - Counter Register Low Byte 162
(0x93) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x92) TCCR3C FOC3A FOC3B FOC3C - - - - - 162
(0x91) TCCR3B ICNC3 ICES3 - WGM33 WGM32 CS32 CS31 CS30 160
(0x90) TCCR3A COM3A1 COM3A0 COM3B1 COM3B0 COM3C1 COM3C0 WGM31 WGM30 158
(0x8F) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x8E) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x8D) OCR1CH Timer/Counter1 - Output Compare Register C High Byte 163
(0x8C) OCR1CL Timer/Counter1 - Output Compare Register C Low Byte 163
(0x8B) OCR1BH Timer/Counter1 - Output Compare Register B High Byte 163
(0x8A) OCR1BL Timer/Counter1 - Output Compare Register B Low Byte 163
(0x89) OCR1AH Timer/Counter1 - Output Compare Register A High Byte 163
(0x88) OCR1AL Timer/Counter1 - Output Compare Register A Low Byte 163
(0x87) ICR1H Timer/Counter1 - Input Capture Register High Byte 165
(0x86) ICR1L Timer/Counter1 - Input Capture Register Low Byte 165
(0x85) TCNT1H Timer/Counter1 - Counter Register High Byte 162
(0x84) TCNT1L Timer/Counter1 - Counter Register Low Byte 162
(0x83) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x82) TCCR1C FOC1A FOC1B FOC1C - - - - - 161
(0x81) TCCR1B ICNC1 ICES1 - WGM13 WGM12 CS12 CS11 CS10 160
(0x80) TCCR1A COM1A1 COM1A0 COM1B1 COM1B0 COM1C1 COM1C0 WGM11 WGM10 158
(0x7F) DIDR1 - - - - - - AIN1D AIN0D 274
(0x7E) DIDR0 ADC7D ADC6D ADC5D ADC4D ADC3D ADC2D ADC1D ADC0D 295
(0x7D) DIDR2 ADC15D ADC14D ADC13D ADC12D ADC11D ADC10D ADC9D ADC8D 295
Address Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Page414
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
(0x7C) ADMUX REFS1 REFS0 ADLAR MUX4 MUX3 MUX2 MUX1 MUX0 289
(0x7B) ADCSRB - ACME - - MUX5 ADTS2 ADTS1 ADTS0 272, 290, 294
(0x7A) ADCSRA ADEN ADSC ADATE ADIF ADIE ADPS2 ADPS1 ADPS0 292
(0x79) ADCH ADC Data Register High byte 294
(0x78) ADCL ADC Data Register Low byte 294
(0x77) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x76) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x75) XMCRB XMBK - - - - XMM2 XMM1 XMM0 38
(0x74) XMCRA SRE SRL2 SRL1 SRL0 SRW11 SRW10 SRW01 SRW00 37
(0x73) TIMSK5 - - ICIE5 - OCIE5C OCIE5B OCIE5A TOIE5 166
(0x72) TIMSK4 - - ICIE4 - OCIE4C OCIE4B OCIE4A TOIE4 166
(0x71) TIMSK3 - - ICIE3 - OCIE3C OCIE3B OCIE3A TOIE3 166
(0x70) TIMSK2 - - - - - OCIE2B OCIE2A TOIE2 193
(0x6F) TIMSK1 - - ICIE1 - OCIE1C OCIE1B OCIE1A TOIE1 166
(0x6E) TIMSK0 - - - - - OCIE0B OCIE0A TOIE0 134
(0x6D) PCMSK2 PCINT23 PCINT22 PCINT21 PCINT20 PCINT19 PCINT18 PCINT17 PCINT16 116
(0x6C) PCMSK1 PCINT15 PCINT14 PCINT13 PCINT12 PCINT11 PCINT10 PCINT9 PCINT8 116
(0x6B) PCMSK0 PCINT7 PCINT6 PCINT5 PCINT4 PCINT3 PCINT2 PCINT1 PCINT0 117
(0x6A) EICRB ISC71 ISC70 ISC61 ISC60 ISC51 ISC50 ISC41 ISC40 114
(0x69) EICRA ISC31 ISC30 ISC21 ISC20 ISC11 ISC10 ISC01 ISC00 113
(0x68) PCICR - - - - - PCIE2 PCIE1 PCIE0 115
(0x67) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x66) OSCCAL Oscillator Calibration Register 50
(0x65) PRR1 - - PRTIM5 PRTIM4 PRTIM3 PRUSART3 PRUSART2 PRUSART1 57
(0x64) PRR0 PRTWI PRTIM2 PRTIM0 - PRTIM1 PRSPI PRUSART0 PRADC 56
(0x63) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x62) Reserved - - - - - - - -
(0x61) CLKPR CLKPCE - - - CLKPS3 CLKPS2 CLKPS1 CLKPS0 50
(0x60) WDTCSR WDIF WDIE WDP3 WDCE WDE WDP2 WDP1 WDP0 67
0x3F (0x5F) SREG I T H S V N Z C 14
0x3E (0x5E) SPH SP15 SP14 SP13 SP12 SP11 SP10 SP9 SP8 16
0x3D (0x5D) SPL SP7 SP6 SP5 SP4 SP3 SP2 SP1 SP0 16
0x3C (0x5C) EIND - - - - - - - EIND0 17
0x3B (0x5B) RAMPZ - - - - - - RAMPZ1 RAMPZ0 17
0x3A (0x5A) Reserved - - - - - - - -
0x39 (0x59) Reserved - - - - - - - -
0x38 (0x58) Reserved - - - - - - - -
0x37 (0x57) SPMCSR SPMIE RWWSB SIGRD RWWSRE BLBSET PGWRT PGERS SPMEN 332
0x36 (0x56) Reserved - - - - - - - -
0x35 (0x55) MCUCR JTD - - PUD - - IVSEL IVCE 67, 110, 100, 308
0x34 (0x54) MCUSR - - - JTRF WDRF BORF EXTRF PORF 308
0x33 (0x53) SMCR - - - - SM2 SM1 SM0 SE 52
0x32 (0x52) Reserved - - - - - - - -
0x31 (0x51) OCDR OCDR7 OCDR6 OCDR5 OCDR4 OCDR3 OCDR2 OCDR1 OCDR0 301
0x30 (0x50) ACSR ACD ACBG ACO ACI ACIE ACIC ACIS1 ACIS0 272
0x2F (0x4F) Reserved - - - - - - - -
0x2E (0x4E) SPDR SPI Data Register 204
0x2D (0x4D) SPSR SPIF WCOL - - - - - SPI2X 203
0x2C (0x4C) SPCR SPIE SPE DORD MSTR CPOL CPHA SPR1 SPR0 202
0x2B (0x4B) GPIOR2 General Purpose I/O Register 2 37
0x2A (0x4A) GPIOR1 General Purpose I/O Register 1 37
0x29 (0x49) Reserved - - - - - - - -
0x28 (0x48) OCR0B Timer/Counter0 Output Compare Register B 133
0x27 (0x47) OCR0A Timer/Counter0 Output Compare Register A 133
0x26 (0x46) TCNT0 Timer/Counter0 (8 Bit) 133
0x25 (0x45) TCCR0B FOC0A FOC0B - - WGM02 CS02 CS01 CS00 132
0x24 (0x44) TCCR0A COM0A1 COM0A0 COM0B1 COM0B0 - - WGM01 WGM00 129
0x23 (0x43) GTCCR TSM - - - - - PSRASY PSRSYNC 170, 194
0x22 (0x42) EEARH - - - - EEPROM Address Register High Byte 35
0x21 (0x41) EEARL EEPROM Address Register Low Byte 35
0x20 (0x40) EEDR EEPROM Data Register 35
0x1F (0x3F) EECR - - EEPM1 EEPM0 EERIE EEMPE EEPE EERE 35
0x1E (0x3E) GPIOR0 General Purpose I/O Register 0 37
0x1D (0x3D) EIMSK INT7 INT6 INT5 INT4 INT3 INT2 INT1 INT0 115
0x1C (0x3C) EIFR INTF7 INTF6 INTF5 INTF4 INTF3 INTF2 INTF1 INTF0 115
0x1B (0x3B) PCIFR - - - - - PCIF2 PCIF1 PCIF0 116
Address Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Page415
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Notes: 1. For compatibility with future devices, reserved bits should be written to zero if accessed. Reserved I/O memory addresses
should never be written.
2. I/O registers within the address range $00 - $1F are directly bit-accessible using the SBI and CBI instructions. In these registers,
the value of single bits can be checked by using the SBIS and SBIC instructions.
3. Some of the status flags are cleared by writing a logical one to them. Note that the CBI and SBI instructions will operate on
all bits in the I/O register, writing a one back into any flag read as set, thus clearing the flag. The CBI and SBI instructions
work with registers 0x00 to 0x1F only.
4. When using the I/O specific commands IN and OUT, the I/O addresses $00 - $3F must be used. When addressing I/O registers
as data space using LD and ST instructions, $20 must be added to these addresses. The
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561 is a complex microcontroller with more peripheral units than can be supported within the
64 location reserved in Opcode for the IN and OUT instructions. For the Extended I/O space from $60 - $1FF in SRAM, only
the ST/STS/STD and LD/LDS/LDD instructions can be used.
0x1A (0x3A) TIFR5 - - ICF5 - OCF5C OCF5B OCF5A TOV5 166
0x19 (0x39) TIFR4 - - ICF4 - OCF4C OCF4B OCF4A TOV4 167
0x18 (0x38) TIFR3 - - ICF3 - OCF3C OCF3B OCF3A TOV3 167
0x17 (0x37) TIFR2 - - - - - OCF2B OCF2A TOV2 193
0x16 (0x36) TIFR1 - - ICF1 - OCF1C OCF1B OCF1A TOV1 167
0x15 (0x35) TIFR0 - - - - - OCF0B OCF0A TOV0 134
0x14 (0x34) PORTG - - PORTG5 PORTG4 PORTG3 PORTG2 PORTG1 PORTG0 102
0x13 (0x33) DDRG - - DDG5 DDG4 DDG3 DDG2 DDG1 DDG0 102
0x12 (0x32) PING - - PING5 PING4 PING3 PING2 PING1 PING0 102
0x11 (0x31) PORTF PORTF7 PORTF6 PORTF5 PORTF4 PORTF3 PORTF2 PORTF1 PORTF0 101
0x10 (0x30) DDRF DDF7 DDF6 DDF5 DDF4 DDF3 DDF2 DDF1 DDF0 102
0x0F (0x2F) PINF PINF7 PINF6 PINF5 PINF4 PINF3 PINF2 PINF1 PINF0 102
0x0E (0x2E) PORTE PORTE7 PORTE6 PORTE5 PORTE4 PORTE3 PORTE2 PORTE1 PORTE0 101
0x0D (0x2D) DDRE DDE7 DDE6 DDE5 DDE4 DDE3 DDE2 DDE1 DDE0 101
0x0C (0x2C) PINE PINE7 PINE6 PINE5 PINE4 PINE3 PINE2 PINE1 PINE0 102
0x0B (0x2B) PORTD PORTD7 PORTD6 PORTD5 PORTD4 PORTD3 PORTD2 PORTD1 PORTD0 101
0x0A (0x2A) DDRD DDD7 DDD6 DDD5 DDD4 DDD3 DDD2 DDD1 DDD0 101
0x09 (0x29) PIND PIND7 PIND6 PIND5 PIND4 PIND3 PIND2 PIND1 PIND0 101
0x08 (0x28) PORTC PORTC7 PORTC6 PORTC5 PORTC4 PORTC3 PORTC2 PORTC1 PORTC0 101
0x07 (0x27) DDRC DDC7 DDC6 DDC5 DDC4 DDC3 DDC2 DDC1 DDC0 101
0x06 (0x26) PINC PINC7 PINC6 PINC5 PINC4 PINC3 PINC2 PINC1 PINC0 101
0x05 (0x25) PORTB PORTB7 PORTB6 PORTB5 PORTB4 PORTB3 PORTB2 PORTB1 PORTB0 100
0x04 (0x24) DDRB DDB7 DDB6 DDB5 DDB4 DDB3 DDB2 DDB1 DDB0 100
0x03 (0x23) PINB PINB7 PINB6 PINB5 PINB4 PINB3 PINB2 PINB1 PINB0 100
0x02 (0x22) PORTA PORTA7 PORTA6 PORTA5 PORTA4 PORTA3 PORTA2 PORTA1 PORTA0 100
0x01 (0x21) DDRA DDA7 DDA6 DDA5 DDA4 DDA3 DDA2 DDA1 DDA0 100
0x00 (0x20) PINA PINA7 PINA6 PINA5 PINA4 PINA3 PINA2 PINA1 PINA0 100
Address Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Page416
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
34. Instruction Set Summary
Mnemonics Operands Description Operation Flags #Clocks
ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC INSTRUCTIONS
ADD Rd, Rr Add two Registers Rd ← Rd + Rr Z, C, N, V, H 1
ADC Rd, Rr Add with Carry two Registers Rd ← Rd + Rr + C Z, C, N, V, H 1
ADIW Rdl,K Add Immediate to Word Rdh:Rdl ← Rdh:Rdl + K Z, C, N, V, S 2
SUB Rd, Rr Subtract two Registers Rd ← Rd - Rr Z, C, N, V, H 1
SUBI Rd, K Subtract Constant from Register Rd ← Rd - K Z, C, N, V, H 1
SBC Rd, Rr Subtract with Carry two Registers Rd ← Rd - Rr - C Z, C, N, V, H 1
SBCI Rd, K Subtract with Carry Constant from Reg. Rd ← Rd - K - C Z, C, N, V, H 1
SBIW Rdl,K Subtract Immediate from Word Rdh:Rdl ← Rdh:Rdl - K Z, C, N, V, S 2
AND Rd, Rr Logical AND Registers Rd ← Rd • Rr Z, N, V 1
ANDI Rd, K Logical AND Register and Constant Rd ← Rd • K Z, N, V 1
OR Rd, Rr Logical OR Registers Rd ← Rd v Rr Z, N, V 1
ORI Rd, K Logical OR Register and Constant Rd ← Rd v K Z, N, V 1
EOR Rd, Rr Exclusive OR Registers Rd ← Rd ⊕ Rr Z, N, V 1
COM Rd One’s Complement Rd ← 0xFF − Rd Z, C, N, V 1
NEG Rd Two’s Complement Rd ← 0x00 − Rd Z, C, N, V, H 1
SBR Rd,K Set Bit(s) in Register Rd ← Rd v K Z, N, V 1
CBR Rd,K Clear Bit(s) in Register Rd ← Rd • (0xFF - K) Z, N, V 1
INC Rd Increment Rd ← Rd + 1 Z, N, V 1
DEC Rd Decrement Rd ← Rd − 1 Z, N, V 1
TST Rd Test for Zero or Minus Rd ← Rd • Rd Z, N, V 1
CLR Rd Clear Register Rd ← Rd ⊕ Rd Z, N, V 1
SER Rd Set Register Rd ← 0xFF None 1
MUL Rd, Rr Multiply Unsigned R1:R0 ← Rd x Rr Z, C 2
MULS Rd, Rr Multiply Signed R1:R0 ← Rd x Rr Z, C 2
MULSU Rd, Rr Multiply Signed with Unsigned R1:R0 ← Rd x Rr Z, C 2
FMUL Rd, Rr Fractional Multiply Unsigned R1:R0 ← (Rd x Rr) << 1 Z, C 2
FMULS Rd, Rr Fractional Multiply Signed R1:R0 ← (Rd x Rr) << 1 Z, C 2
FMULSU Rd, Rr Fractional Multiply Signed with Unsigned R1:R0 ← (Rd x Rr) << 1 Z, C 2
BRANCH INSTRUCTIONS
RJMP k Relative Jump PC ← PC + k + 1 None 2
IJMP Indirect Jump to (Z) PC ← Z None 2
EIJMP Extended Indirect Jump to (Z) PC ←(EIND:Z) None 2
JMP k Direct Jump PC ← k None 3
RCALL k Relative Subroutine Call PC ← PC + k + 1 None 4
ICALL Indirect Call to (Z) PC ← Z None 4
EICALL Extended Indirect Call to (Z) PC ←(EIND:Z) None 4
CALL k Direct Subroutine Call PC ← k None 5
RET Subroutine Return PC ← STACK None 5
RETI Interrupt Return PC ← STACK I 5
CPSE Rd,Rr Compare, Skip if Equal if (Rd = Rr) PC ← PC + 2 or 3 None 1/2/3
CP Rd,Rr Compare Rd − Rr Z, N, V, C, H 1
CPC Rd,Rr Compare with Carry Rd − Rr − C Z, N, V, C, H 1
CPI Rd,K Compare Register with Immediate Rd − K Z, N, V, C, H 1
SBRC Rr, b Skip if Bit in Register Cleared if (Rr(b)=0) PC ← PC + 2 or 3 None 1/2/3
SBRS Rr, b Skip if Bit in Register is Set if (Rr(b)=1) PC ← PC + 2 or 3 None 1/2/3
SBIC P, b Skip if Bit in I/O Register Cleared if (P(b)=0) PC ← PC + 2 or 3 None 1/2/3
SBIS P, b Skip if Bit in I/O Register is Set if (P(b)=1) PC ← PC + 2 or 3 None 1/2/3
BRBS s, k Branch if Status Flag Set if (SREG(s) = 1) then PC←PC+k + 1 None 1/2
BRBC s, k Branch if Status Flag Cleared if (SREG(s) = 0) then PC←PC+k + 1 None 1/2
BREQ k Branch if Equal if (Z = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRNE k Branch if Not Equal if (Z = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRCS k Branch if Carry Set if (C = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRCC k Branch if Carry Cleared if (C = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRSH k Branch if Same or Higher if (C = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRLO k Branch if Lower if (C = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRMI k Branch if Minus if (N = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRPL k Branch if Plus if (N = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRGE k Branch if Greater or Equal, Signed if (N ⊕ V= 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRLT k Branch if Less Than Zero, Signed if (N ⊕ V= 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRHS k Branch if Half Carry Flag Set if (H = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRHC k Branch if Half Carry Flag Cleared if (H = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRTS k Branch if T Flag Set if (T = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRTC k Branch if T Flag Cleared if (T = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2417
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
BRVS k Branch if Overflow Flag is Set if (V = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRVC k Branch if Overflow Flag is Cleared if (V = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRIE k Branch if Interrupt Enabled if ( I = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRID k Branch if Interrupt Disabled if ( I = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BIT AND BIT-TEST INSTRUCTIONS
SBI P,b Set Bit in I/O Register I/O(P,b) ← 1 None 2
CBI P,b Clear Bit in I/O Register I/O(P,b) ← 0 None 2
LSL Rd Logical Shift Left Rd(n+1) ← Rd(n), Rd(0) ← 0 Z, C, N, V 1
LSR Rd Logical Shift Right Rd(n) ← Rd(n+1), Rd(7) ← 0 Z, C, N, V 1
ROL Rd Rotate Left Through Carry Rd(0)←C,Rd(n+1)← Rd(n),C←Rd(7) Z, C, N, V 1
ROR Rd Rotate Right Through Carry Rd(7)←C,Rd(n)← Rd(n+1),C←Rd(0) Z, C, N, V 1
ASR Rd Arithmetic Shift Right Rd(n) ← Rd(n+1), n=0..6 Z, C, N, V 1
SWAP Rd Swap Nibbles Rd(3..0)←Rd(7..4),Rd(7..4)←Rd(3..0) None 1
BSET s Flag Set SREG(s) ← 1 SREG(s) 1
BCLR s Flag Clear SREG(s) ← 0 SREG(s) 1
BST Rr, b Bit Store from Register to T T ← Rr(b) T 1
BLD Rd, b Bit load from T to Register Rd(b) ← T None 1
SEC Set Carry C ← 1 C1
CLC Clear Carry C ← 0 C 1
SEN Set Negative Flag N ← 1 N 1
CLN Clear Negative Flag N ← 0 N 1
SEZ Set Zero Flag Z ← 1 Z1
CLZ Clear Zero Flag Z ← 0 Z 1
SEI Global Interrupt Enable I ← 1 I1
CLI Global Interrupt Disable I ← 0 I 1
SES Set Signed Test Flag S ← 1 S1
CLS Clear Signed Test Flag S ← 0 S 1
SEV Set Twos Complement Overflow. V ← 1 V1
CLV Clear Twos Complement Overflow V ← 0 V 1
SET Set T in SREG T ← 1 T1
CLT Clear T in SREG T ← 0 T 1
SEH Set Half Carry Flag in SREG H ← 1 H1
CLH Clear Half Carry Flag in SREG H ← 0 H 1
DATA TRANSFER INSTRUCTIONS
MOV Rd, Rr Move Between Registers Rd ← Rr None 1
MOVW Rd, Rr Copy Register Word Rd+1:Rd ← Rr+1:Rr None 1
LDI Rd, K Load Immediate Rd ← K None 1
LD Rd, X Load Indirect Rd ← (X) None 2
LD Rd, X+ Load Indirect and Post-Inc. Rd ← (X), X ← X + 1 None 2
LD Rd, - X Load Indirect and Pre-Dec. X ← X - 1, Rd ← (X) None 2
LD Rd, Y Load Indirect Rd ← (Y) None 2
LD Rd, Y+ Load Indirect and Post-Inc. Rd ← (Y), Y ← Y + 1 None 2
LD Rd, - Y Load Indirect and Pre-Dec. Y ← Y - 1, Rd ← (Y) None 2
LDD Rd,Y+q Load Indirect with Displacement Rd ← (Y + q) None 2
LD Rd, Z Load Indirect Rd ← (Z) None 2
LD Rd, Z+ Load Indirect and Post-Inc. Rd ← (Z), Z ← Z+1 None 2
LD Rd, -Z Load Indirect and Pre-Dec. Z ← Z - 1, Rd ← (Z) None 2
LDD Rd, Z+q Load Indirect with Displacement Rd ← (Z + q) None 2
LDS Rd, k Load Direct from SRAM Rd ← (k) None 2
ST X, Rr Store Indirect (X) ← Rr None 2
ST X+, Rr Store Indirect and Post-Inc. (X) ← Rr, X ← X + 1 None 2
ST - X, Rr Store Indirect and Pre-Dec. X ← X - 1, (X) ← Rr None 2
ST Y, Rr Store Indirect (Y) ← Rr None 2
ST Y+, Rr Store Indirect and Post-Inc. (Y) ← Rr, Y ← Y + 1 None 2
ST - Y, Rr Store Indirect and Pre-Dec. Y ← Y - 1, (Y) ← Rr None 2
STD Y+q,Rr Store Indirect with Displacement (Y + q) ← Rr None 2
ST Z, Rr Store Indirect (Z) ← Rr None 2
ST Z+, Rr Store Indirect and Post-Inc. (Z) ← Rr, Z ← Z + 1 None 2
ST -Z, Rr Store Indirect and Pre-Dec. Z ← Z - 1, (Z) ← Rr None 2
STD Z+q,Rr Store Indirect with Displacement (Z + q) ← Rr None 2
STS k, Rr Store Direct to SRAM (k) ← Rr None 2
LPM Load Program Memory R0 ← (Z) None 3
LPM Rd, Z Load Program Memory Rd ← (Z) None 3
LPM Rd, Z+ Load Program Memory and Post-Inc Rd ← (Z), Z ← Z+1 None 3
ELPM Extended Load Program Memory R0 ← (RAMPZ:Z) None 3
ELPM Rd, Z Extended Load Program Memory Rd ← (RAMPZ:Z) None 3
Mnemonics Operands Description Operation Flags #Clocks418
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Note: EICALL and EIJMP do not exist in ATmega640/1280/1281.
ELPM does not exist in ATmega640.
ELPM Rd, Z+ Extended Load Program Memory Rd ← (RAMPZ:Z), RAMPZ:Z ←RAMPZ:Z+1 None 3
SPM Store Program Memory (Z) ← R1:R0 None -
IN Rd, P In Port Rd ← P None 1
OUT P, Rr Out Port P ← Rr None 1
PUSH Rr Push Register on Stack STACK ← Rr None 2
POP Rd Pop Register from Stack Rd ← STACK None 2
MCU CONTROL INSTRUCTIONS
NOP No Operation None 1
SLEEP Sleep (see specific descr. for Sleep function) None 1
WDR Watchdog Reset (see specific descr. for WDR/timer) None 1
BREAK Break For On-chip Debug Only None N/A
Mnemonics Operands Description Operation Flags #Clocks419
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
35. Ordering Information
Notes: 1. This device can also be supplied in wafer form. Please contact your local Atmel sales office for detailed ordering information
and minimum quantities.
2. See “Speed Grades” on page 369.
3. Pb-free packaging, complies to the European Directive for Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS directive). Also
Halide free and fully Green.
4. Tape & Reel.
35.1 ATmega640
Speed (MHz)(2) Power Supply Ordering Code Package(1)(3) Operation Range
8 1.8 - 5.5V
ATmega640V-8AU
ATmega640V-8AUR(4)
ATmega640V-8CU
ATmega640V-8CUR(4)
100A
100A
100C1
100C1
Industrial (-40°C to 85°C)
16 2.7 - 5.5V
ATmega640-16AU
ATmega640-16AUR(4)
ATmega640-16CU
ATmega640-16CUR(4)
100A
100A
100C1
100C1
Package Type
100A 100-lead, Thin (1.0mm) Plastic Gull Wing Quad Flat Package (TQFP)
100C1 100-ball, Chip Ball Grid Array (CBGA)420
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Notes: 1. This device can also be supplied in wafer form. Please contact your local Atmel sales office for detailed ordering information
and minimum quantities.
2. See “Speed Grades” on page 369.
3. Pb-free packaging, complies to the European Directive for Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS directive). Also
Halide free and fully Green.
4. Tape & Reel.
35.2 ATmega1280
Speed (MHz)(2) Power Supply Ordering Code Package(1)(3) Operation Range
8 1.8V - 5.5V
ATmega1280V-8AU
ATmega1280V-8AUR(4)
ATmega1280V-8CU
ATmega1280V-8CUR(4)
100A
100A
100C1
100C1
Industrial (-40°C to 85°C)
16 2.7V - 5.5V
ATmega1280-16AU
ATmega1280-16AUR(4)
ATmega1280-16CU
ATmega1280-16CUR(4)
100A
100A
100C1
100C1
Package Type
100A 100-lead, Thin (1.0mm) Plastic Gull Wing Quad Flat Package (TQFP)
100C1 100-ball, Chip Ball Grid Array (CBGA)421
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Notes: 1. This device can also be supplied in wafer form. Please contact your local Atmel sales office for detailed ordering information
and minimum quantities.
2. See “Speed Grades” on page 369.
3. Pb-free packaging, complies to the European Directive for Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS directive). Also
Halide free and fully Green.
4. Tape & Reel.
35.3 ATmega1281
Speed (MHz)(2) Power Supply Ordering Code Package(1)(3) Operation Range
8 1.8 - 5.5V
ATmega1281V-8AU
ATmega1281V-8AUR(4)
ATmega1281V-8MU
ATmega1281V-8MUR(4)
64A
64A
64M2
64M2 Industrial
(-40°C to 85°C)
16 2.7 - 5.5V
ATmega1281-16AU
ATmega1281-16AUR(4)
ATmega1281-16MU
ATmega1281-16MUR(4)
64A
64A
64M2
64M2
Package Type
64A 64-lead, Thin (1.0mm) Plastic Gull Wing Quad Flat Package (TQFP)
64M2 64-pad, 9mm × 9mm × 1.0mm Body, Quad Flat No-lead/Micro Lead Frame Package (QFN/MLF)422
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Notes: 1. This device can also be supplied in wafer form. Please contact your local Atmel sales office for detailed ordering information
and minimum quantities.
2. See “Speed Grades” on page 369.
3. Pb-free packaging, complies to the European Directive for Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS directive). Also
Halide free and fully Green.
4. Tape & Reel.
35.4 ATmega2560
Speed (MHz)(2) Power Supply Ordering Code Package(1)(3) Operation Range
8 1.8V - 5.5V
ATmega2560V-8AU
ATmega2560V-8AUR(4)
ATmega2560V-8CU
ATmega2560V-8CUR(4)
100A
100A
100C1
100C1
Industrial (-40°C to 85°C)
16 4.5V - 5.5V
ATmega2560-16AU
ATmega2560-16AUR(4)
ATmega2560-16CU
ATmega2560-16CUR(4)
100A
100A
100C1
100C1
Package Type
100A 100-lead, Thin (1.0mm) Plastic Gull Wing Quad Flat Package (TQFP)
100C1 100-ball, Chip Ball Grid Array (CBGA)423
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Notes: 1. This device can also be supplied in wafer form. Please contact your local Atmel sales office for detailed ordering information
and minimum quantities.
2. See “Speed Grades” on page 369.
3. Pb-free packaging, complies to the European Directive for Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS directive). Also
Halide free and fully Green.
4. Tape & Reel.
35.5 ATmega2561
Speed (MHz)(2) Power Supply Ordering Code Package(1)(3) Operation Range
8 1.8V - 5.5V
ATmega1281V-8AU
ATmega1281V-8AUR(4)
ATmega1281V-8MU
ATmega1281V-8MUR(4)
64A
64A
64M2
64M2 Industrial
(-40°C to 85°C)
16 4.5V - 5.5V
ATmega1281-16AU
ATmega1281-16AUR(4)
ATmega1281-16MU
ATmega1281-16MUR(4)
64A
64A
64M2
64M2
Package Type
64A 64-lead, Thin (1.0mm) Plastic Gull Wing Quad Flat Package (TQFP)
64M2 64-pad, 9mm × 9mm × 1.0mm Body, Quad Flat No-lead/Micro Lead Frame Package (QFN/MLF)424
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
36. Packaging Information
36.1 100A
2325 Orchard Parkway
San Jose, CA 95131
TITLE DRAWING NO.
R
REV.
100A, 100-lead, 14 x 14mm Body Size, 1.0mm Body Thickness,
0.5mm Lead Pitch, Thin Profile Plastic Quad Flat Package (TQFP) 100A D
2010-10-20
PIN 1 IDENTIFIER
0°~7°
PIN 1
L
C
A1 A2 A
D1
D
e E1 E
B
A – – 1.20
A1 0.05 – 0.15
A2 0.95 1.00 1.05
D 15.75 16.00 16.25
D1 13.90 14.00 14.10 Note 2
E 15.75 16.00 16.25
E1 13.90 14.00 14.10 Note 2
B 0.17 – 0.27
C 0.09 – 0.20
L 0.45 – 0.75
e 0.50 TYP
Notes:
1. This package conforms to JEDEC reference MS-026, Variation AED.
2. Dimensions D1 and E1 do not include mold protrusion. Allowable
protrusion is 0.25mm per side. Dimensions D1 and E1 are maximum
plastic body size dimensions including mold mismatch.
3. Lead coplanarity is 0.08mm maximum.
COMMON DIMENSIONS
(Unit of Measure = mm)
SYMBOL MIN NOM MAX NOTE425
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
36.2 100C1
2325 Orchard Parkway
San Jose, CA 95131
TITLE DRAWING NO.
R
REV.
100C1, 100-ball, 9 x 9 x 1.2 mm Body, Ball Pitch 0.80 mm
Chip Array BGA Package (CBGA) 100C1 A
5/25/06
TOP VIEW
SIDE VIEW
BOTTOM VIEW
COMMON DIMENSIONS
(Unit of Measure = mm)
SYMBOL MIN NOM MAX NOTE
A 1.10 – 1.20
A1 0.30 0.35 0.40
D 8.90 9.00 9.10
E 8.90 9.00 9.10
D1 7.10 7.20 7.30
E1 7.10 7.20 7.30
Øb 0.35 0.40 0.45
e 0.80 TYP
Marked A1 Identifier
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
A
B
C
D
E
9
F
G
H
I
J
10
0.90 TYP
0.90 TYP
A1 Corner
0.12 Z
E
D
e
e
Øb
A
A1
E1
D1426
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
36.3 64A
2325 Orchard Parkway
San Jose, CA 95131
TITLE DRAWING NO.
R
REV.
64A, 64-lead, 14 x 14mm Body Size, 1.0mm Body Thickness,
0.8mm Lead Pitch, Thin Profile Plastic Quad Flat Package (TQFP) 64A C
2010-10-20
PIN 1 IDENTIFIER
0°~7°
PIN 1
L
C
A1 A2 A
D1
D
e
E1 E
B
COMMON DIMENSIONS
(Unit of measure = mm)
SYMBOL MIN NOM MAX NOTE
Notes:
1.This package conforms to JEDEC reference MS-026, Variation AEB.
2. Dimensions D1 and E1 do not include mold protrusion. Allowable
protrusion is 0.25mm per side. Dimensions D1 and E1 are maximum
plastic body size dimensions including mold mismatch.
3. Lead coplanarity is 0.10mm maximum.
A – – 1.20
A1 0.05 – 0.15
A2 0.95 1.00 1.05
D 15.75 16.00 16.25
D1 13.90 14.00 14.10 Note 2
E 15.75 16.00 16.25
E1 13.90 14.00 14.10 Note 2
B 0.30 – 0.45
C 0.09 – 0.20
L 0.45 – 0.75
e 0.80 TYP427
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
36.4 64M2
2325 Orchard Parkway
San Jose, CA 95131
TITLE DRAWING NO.
R
REV.
64M2, 64-pad, 9 x 9 x 1.0mm Bod y, Lead Pitch 0.50mm , 64M2 E
2010-10-20
COMMON DIMENSIONS
(Unit of measure = mm)
SYMBOL MIN NOM MAX NOTE
A 0.80 0.90 1.00
A1 – 0.02 0.05
b 0.18 0.25 0.30
D
D2 7.50 7.65 7.80
8.90 9.00 9.10
E 8.90 9.00 9.10
E2 7.50 7.65 7.80
e
0.50 BSC
L 0.35 0.40 0.45
TOP VIEW
SIDE VIEW
BOTTOM VIEW
D
E
Marked pin# 1 ID
SEATING PLANE
A1
C
A
0.08 C
1
2
3
K 0.20 0.27 0.40
2. Dimension and tolerance conform to ASMEY14.5M-1994.
A3 0.20 REF
A3
E2
D2
b e
Pin #1 Corner L
Pin #1
Triangle
Pin #1
Chamfer
(C 0.30)
Option A
Option B
Pin #1
Notch
(0.20 R)
Option C
K
K
Notes: 1. JEDEC Standard MO-220, (SAW Singulation) fig . 1, VMMD.
7.65mm Exposed Pad, Micro Lead Frame Package (MLF) 428
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
37. Errata
37.1 ATmega640 rev. B
• Inaccurate ADC conversion in differential mode with 200× gain
• High current consumption in sleep mode
1. Inaccurate ADC conversion in differential mode with 200× gain
With AVCC <3.6V, random conversions will be inaccurate. Typical absolute accuracy may
reach 64 LSB.
Problem Fix/Workaround
None.
2. High current consumption in sleep mode
If a pending interrupt cannot wake the part up from the selected sleep mode, the current
consumption will increase during sleep when executing the SLEEP instruction directly after
a SEI instruction.
Problem Fix/Workaround
Before entering sleep, interrupts not used to wake the part from the sleep mode should be
disabled.
37.2 ATmega640 rev. A • Inaccurate ADC conversion in differential mode with 200× gain
• High current consumption in sleep mode
1. Inaccurate ADC conversion in differential mode with 200× gain
With AVCC <3.6V, random conversions will be inaccurate. Typical absolute accuracy may
reach 64 LSB.
Problem Fix/Workaround
None.
2. High current consumption in sleep mode
If a pending interrupt cannot wake the part up from the selected sleep mode, the current
consumption will increase during sleep when executing the SLEEP instruction directly after
a SEI instruction.
Problem Fix/Workaround
Before entering sleep, interrupts not used to wake the part from the sleep mode should be
disabled.
37.3 ATmega1280 rev. B • Inaccurate ADC conversion in differential mode with 200× gain
• High current consumption in sleep mode
1. Inaccurate ADC conversion in differential mode with 200× gain
With AVCC <3.6V, random conversions will be inaccurate. Typical absolute accuracy may
reach 64 LSB.429
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Problem Fix/Workaround
None.
2. High current consumption in sleep mode
If a pending interrupt cannot wake the part up from the selected sleep mode, the current
consumption will increase during sleep when executing the SLEEP instruction directly after
a SEI instruction.
Problem Fix/Workaround
Before entering sleep, interrupts not used to wake the part from the sleep mode should be
disabled.
37.4 ATmega1280 rev. A
• Inaccurate ADC conversion in differential mode with 200× gain
• High current consumption in sleep mode
1. Inaccurate ADC conversion in differential mode with 200× gain
With AVCC <3.6V, random conversions will be inaccurate. Typical absolute accuracy may
reach 64 LSB.
Problem Fix/Workaround
None.
2. High current consumption in sleep mode
If a pending interrupt cannot wake the part up from the selected sleep mode, the current
consumption will increase during sleep when executing the SLEEP instruction directly after
a SEI instruction.
Problem Fix/Workaround
Before entering sleep, interrupts not used to wake the part from the sleep mode should be
disabled.
37.5 ATmega1281 rev. B
• Inaccurate ADC conversion in differential mode with 200× gain
• High current consumption in sleep mode
1. Inaccurate ADC conversion in differential mode with 200× gain
With AVCC <3.6V, random conversions will be inaccurate. Typical absolute accuracy may
reach 64 LSB.
Problem Fix/Workaround
None.
2. High current consumption in sleep mode
If a pending interrupt cannot wake the part up from the selected sleep mode, the current
consumption will increase during sleep when executing the SLEEP instruction directly after
a SEI instruction.
Problem Fix/Workaround
Before entering sleep, interrupts not used to wake the part from the sleep mode should be
disabled.430
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
37.6 ATmega1281 rev. A
• Inaccurate ADC conversion in differential mode with 200× gain
• High current consumption in sleep mode
1. Inaccurate ADC conversion in differential mode with 200× gain
With AVCC <3.6V, random conversions will be inaccurate. Typical absolute accuracy may
reach 64 LSB.
Problem Fix/Workaround
None.
2. High current consumption in sleep mode
If a pending interrupt cannot wake the part up from the selected sleep mode, the current
consumption will increase during sleep when executing the SLEEP instruction directly after
a SEI instruction.
Problem Fix/Workaround
Before entering sleep, interrupts not used to wake the part from the sleep mode should be
disabled.
37.7 ATmega2560 rev. F
Not sampled.
37.8 ATmega2560 rev. E
No known errata.
37.9 ATmega2560 rev. D
Not sampled.
37.10 ATmega2560 rev. C
• High current consumption in sleep mode
1. High current consumption in sleep mode
If a pending interrupt cannot wake the part up from the selected sleep mode, the current
consumption will increase during sleep when executing the SLEEP instruction directly after
a SEI instruction.
Problem Fix/Workaround
Before entering sleep, interrupts not used to wake the part from the sleep mode should be
disabled.
37.11 ATmega2560 rev. B
Not sampled.431
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
37.12 ATmega2560 rev. A
• Non-Read-While-Write area of flash not functional
• Part does not work under 2.4 volts
• Incorrect ADC reading in differential mode
• Internal ADC reference has too low value
• IN/OUT instructions may be executed twice when Stack is in external RAM
• EEPROM read from application code does not work in Lock Bit Mode 3
1. Non-Read-While-Write area of flash not functional
The Non-Read-While-Write area of the flash is not working as expected. The problem is
related to the speed of the part when reading the flash of this area.
Problem Fix/Workaround
- Only use the first 248K of the flash.
- If boot functionality is needed, run the code in the Non-Read-While-Write area at maximum
1/4th of the maximum frequency of the device at any given voltage. This is done by writing
the CLKPR register before entering the boot section of the code.
2. Part does not work under 2.4 volts
The part does not execute code correctly below 2.4 volts.
Problem Fix/Workaround
Do not use the part at voltages below 2.4 volts.
3. Incorrect ADC reading in differential mode
The ADC has high noise in differential mode. It can give up to 7 LSB error.
Problem Fix/Workaround
Use only the 7 MSB of the result when using the ADC in differential mode.
4. Internal ADC reference has too low value
The internal ADC reference has a value lower than specified.
Problem Fix/Workaround
- Use AVCC or external reference.
- The actual value of the reference can be measured by applying a known voltage to the
ADC when using the internal reference. The result when doing later conversions can then be
calibrated.
5. IN/OUT instructions may be executed twice when Stack is in external RAM
If either an IN or an OUT instruction is executed directly before an interrupt occurs and the
stack pointer is located in external ram, the instruction will be executed twice. In some cases
this will cause a problem, for example:
- If reading SREG it will appear that the I-flag is cleared.
- If writing to the PIN registers, the port will toggle twice.
- If reading registers with interrupt flags, the flags will appear to be cleared.432
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Problem Fix/Workaround
There are two application work-arounds, where selecting one of them, will be omitting the
issue:
- Replace IN and OUT with LD/LDS/LDD and ST/STS/STD instructions.
- Use internal RAM for stack pointer.
6. EEPROM read from application code does not work in Lock Bit Mode 3
When the Memory Lock Bits LB2 and LB1 are programmed to mode 3, EEPROM read does
not work from the application code.
Problem Fix/Workaround
Do not set Lock Bit Protection Mode 3 when the application code needs to read from
EEPROM.
37.13 ATmega2561 rev. F
Not sampled.
37.14 ATmega2561 rev. E
No known errata.
37.15 ATmega2561 rev. D
Not sampled.
37.16 ATmega2561 rev. C
• High current consumption in sleep mode.
1. High current consumption in sleep mode
If a pending interrupt cannot wake the part up from the selected sleep mode, the current
consumption will increase during sleep when executing the SLEEP instruction directly after
a SEI instruction.
Problem Fix/Workaround
Before entering sleep, interrupts not used to wake the part from the sleep mode should be
disabled.
37.17 ATmega2561 rev. B
Not sampled.
37.18 ATmega2561 rev. A
• Non-Read-While-Write area of flash not functional
• Part does not work under 2.4 Volts
• Incorrect ADC reading in differential mode
• Internal ADC reference has too low value
• IN/OUT instructions may be executed twice when Stack is in external RAM
• EEPROM read from application code does not work in Lock Bit Mode 3433
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
1. Non-Read-While-Write area of flash not functional
The Non-Read-While-Write area of the flash is not working as expected. The problem is
related to the speed of the part when reading the flash of this area.
Problem Fix/Workaround
- Only use the first 248K of the flash.
- If boot functionality is needed, run the code in the Non-Read-While-Write area at maximum
1/4th of the maximum frequency of the device at any given voltage. This is done by writing
the CLKPR register before entering the boot section of the code.
2. Part does not work under 2.4 volts
The part does not execute code correctly below 2.4 volts.
Problem Fix/Workaround
Do not use the part at voltages below 2.4 volts.
3. Incorrect ADC reading in differential mode
The ADC has high noise in differential mode. It can give up to 7 LSB error.
Problem Fix/Workaround
Use only the 7 MSB of the result when using the ADC in differential mode.
4. Internal ADC reference has too low value
The internal ADC reference has a value lower than specified.
Problem Fix/Workaround
- Use AVCC or external reference.
- The actual value of the reference can be measured by applying a known voltage to the
ADC when using the internal reference. The result when doing later conversions can then be
calibrated.
5. IN/OUT instructions may be executed twice when Stack is in external RAM
If either an IN or an OUT instruction is executed directly before an interrupt occurs and the
stack pointer is located in external ram, the instruction will be executed twice. In some cases
this will cause a problem, for example:
- If reading SREG it will appear that the I-flag is cleared.
- If writing to the PIN registers, the port will toggle twice.
- If reading registers with interrupt flags, the flags will appear to be cleared.
Problem Fix/Workaround
There are two application workarounds, where selecting one of them, will be omitting the
issue:
- Replace IN and OUT with LD/LDS/LDD and ST/STS/STD instructions.
- Use internal RAM for stack pointer.
6. EEPROM read from application code does not work in Lock Bit Mode 3
When the Memory Lock Bits LB2 and LB1 are programmed to mode 3, EEPROM read does
not work from the application code.434
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Problem Fix/Workaround
Do not set Lock Bit Protection Mode 3 when the application code needs to read from
EEPROM.435
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
38. Datasheet Revision History
Please note that the referring page numbers in this section are referring to this document.The
referring revision in this section are referring to the document revision.
38.1 Rev. 2549P-10/2012
38.2 Rev. 2549O-05/12
38.3 Rev. 2549N-05/11
38.4 Rev. 2549M-09/10
1. Replaced drawing in 36.4 “64M2” on page 427.
2. Former page 439 has been deleted as the content of this page did not belong there (same page
as the last page).
3. Some small correction made in the setup.
1. The datasheet changed status from Preliminary to Complete. Removed “Preliminary” from the
front page.
2. Replaced Figure 10-3 on page 46 by a new one.
3. Updated the last page to include the new address for Atmel Japan site.
1. Added Atmel QTouch Library Support and QTouch Sensing Capablity Features
2. Updated Cross-reference in “Bit 5, 2:0 - WDP3:0: Watchdog Timer Prescaler 3, 2, 1 and 0” on
page 68
3. Updated Assembly codes in section “USART Initialization” on page 210
4. Added “Standard Power-On Reset” on page 372.
5. Added “Enhanced Power-On Reset” on page 373.
6. Updated Figure 32-13 on page 393
7. Updated “Ordering Information” on page 419 to include Tape & Reel devices.
1. Updated typos in Figure 26-9 on page 285 and in Figure 26-10 on page 285.
2. Note is added below Table 1-1 on page 3.
3. The values for “typical characteristics” in Table 31-9 on page 377 and Table 31-10 on page 378,
has been rounded.
4. Units for tRST and tBOD in Table 31-3 on page 372 have been changed from “ns” to “µs”.
5. The figure text for Table 31-2 on page 371 has been changed.
6. Text in first column in Table 30-3 on page 336 has been changed from “Fuse Low Byte” to
“Extended Fuse Byte”.
7. The text in “Power Reduction Register” on page 54 has been changed.
8. The value of the inductor in Figure 26-9 on page 285 and Figure 26-10 on page 285 has been
changed to 10µH.
9. “Port A” has been changed into “Port K” in the first paragraph of “Features” on page 275.436
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
38.5 Rev. 2549L-08/07
38.6 Rev. 2549K-01/07
38.7 Rev. 2549J-09/06
10. Minimum wait delay for tWD_EEPROM in Table 30-16 on page 351 has been changed from
9.0ms to 3.6ms
11. Dimension A3 is added in “64M2” on page 427.
12. Several cross-references are corrected.
13. “COM0A1:0” on page 130 is corrected to “COM0B1:0”.
14. Corrected some Figure and Table numbering.
15. Updated Section 10.6 “Low Frequency Crystal Oscillator” on page 45.
1. Updated note in Table 10-11 on page 47.
2. Updated Table 10-3 on page 43, Table 10-5 on page 44, Table 10-9 on page 47.
3. Updated typos in “DC Characteristics” on page 367
4. Updated “Clock Characteristics” on page 371
5. Updated “External Clock Drive” on page 371.
6. Added “System and Reset Characteristics” on page 372.
7. Updated “SPI Timing Characteristics” on page 375.
8. Updated “ADC Characteristics – Preliminary Data” on page 377.
9. Updated ordering code in “ATmega640” on page 419.
1. Updated Table 1-1 on page 3.
2. Updated “Pin Descriptions” on page 7.
3. Updated “Stack Pointer” on page 16.
4. Updated “Bit 1 – EEPE: EEPROM Programming Enable” on page 36.
5. Updated Assembly code example in “Thus, when the BOD is not enabled, after setting the ACBG
bit or enabling the ADC, the user must always allow the reference to start up before the output
from the Analog Comparator or ADC is used. To reduce power consumption in Power-down
mode, the user can avoid the three conditions above to ensure that the reference is turned off
before entering Power-down mode.” on page 63.
6: Updated “EIMSK – External Interrupt Mask Register” on page 115.
7. Updated Bit description in “PCIFR – Pin Change Interrupt Flag Register” on page 116.
8. Updated code example in “USART Initialization” on page 210.
9. Updated Figure 26-8 on page 284.
10. Updated “DC Characteristics” on page 367.
1. Updated “” on page 46.
2. Updated code example in “Moving Interrupts Between Application and Boot Section” on page
109.
3. Updated “Timer/Counter Prescaler” on page 186.
4. Updated “Device Identification Register” on page 303.
5. Updated “Signature Bytes” on page 338.
6. Updated “Instruction Set Summary” on page 416.437
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
38.8 Rev. 2549I-07/06
38.9 Rev. 2549H-06/06
38.10 Rev. 2549G-06/06
38.11 Rev. 2549F-04/06
38.12 Rev. 2549E-04/06
1. Added “Data Retention” on page 11.
2. Updated Table 16-3 on page 129, Table 16-6 on page 130, Table 16-8 on page 131, Table 17-2
on page 148, Table 17-4 on page 159, Table 17-5 on page 160, Table 20-3 on page 187, Table
20-6 on page 188 and Table 20-8 on page 189.
3. Updated “Fast PWM Mode” on page 150.
1. Updated “” on page 46.
2. Updated “OSCCAL – Oscillator Calibration Register” on page 50.
3. Added Table 31-1 on page 371.
1. Updated “Features” on page 1.
2. Added Figure 1-2 on page 3, Table 1-1 on page 3.
3. Updated “” on page 46.
4. Updated “Power Management and Sleep Modes” on page 52.
5. Updated note for Table 12-1 on page 68.
6. Updated Figure 26-9 on page 285 and Figure 26-10 on page 285.
7. Updated “Setting the Boot Loader Lock Bits by SPM” on page 324.
8. Updated “Ordering Information” on page 419.
9. Added Package information “100C1” on page 425.
10. Updated “Errata” on page 428.
1. Updated Figure 9-3 on page 31, Figure 9-4 on page 31 and Figure 9-5 on page 32.
2. Updated Table 20-2 on page 187 and Table 20-3 on page 187.
3. Updated Features in “ADC – Analog to Digital Converter” on page 275.
4. Updated “Fuse Bits” on page 336.
1. Updated “Features” on page 1.
2. Updated Table 12-1 on page 62.
3. Updated note for Table 12-1 on page 62.
4. Updated “Bit 6 – ACBG: Analog Comparator Bandgap Select” on page 273.
5. Updated “Prescaling and Conversion Timing” on page 278.
5. Updated “Maximum speed vs. VCC” on page 373.
6. Updated “Ordering Information” on page 419.438
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
38.13 Rev. 2549D-12/05
38.14 Rev. 2549C-09/05
38.15 Rev. 2549B-05/05
38.16 Rev. 2549A-03/05
1. Advanced Information Status changed to Preliminary.
2. Changed number of I/O Ports from 51 to 54.
3. Updatet typos in “TCCR0A – Timer/Counter Control Register A” on page 129.
4. Updated Features in “ADC – Analog to Digital Converter” on page 275.
5. Updated Operation in“ADC – Analog to Digital Converter” on page 275
6. Updated Stabilizing Time in “Changing Channel or Reference Selection” on page 282.
7. Updated Figure 26-1 on page 276, Figure 26-9 on page 285, Figure 26-10 on page 285.
8. Updated Text in “ADCSRB – ADC Control and Status Register B” on page 290.
9. Updated Note for Table 4 on page 43, Table 13-15 on page 86, Table 26-3 on page 289 and
Table 26-6 on page 295.
10. Updated Table 31-9 on page 377 and Table 31-10 on page 378.
11. Updated “Filling the Temporary Buffer (Page Loading)” on page 323.
12. Updated “Typical Characteristics” on page 385.
13. Updated “Packaging Information” on page 424.
14. Updated “Errata” on page 428.
1. Updated Speed Grade in section “Features” on page 1.
2. Added “Resources” on page 11.
3. Updated “SPI – Serial Peripheral Interface” on page 195. In Slave mode, low and high period SPI
clock must be larger than 2 CPU cycles.
4. Updated “Bit Rate Generator Unit” on page 247.
5. Updated “Maximum speed vs. VCC” on page 373.
6. Updated “Ordering Information” on page 419.
7. Updated “Packaging Information” on page 424. Package 64M1 replaced by 64M2.
8. Updated “Errata” on page 428.
1. JTAG ID/Signature for ATmega640 updated: 0x9608.
2. Updated Table 13-7 on page 81.
3. Updated “Serial Programming Instruction set” on page 352.
4. Updated “Errata” on page 428.
1. Initial version.i
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
Table of Contents
Features ..................................................................................................... 1
1 Pin Configurations ................................................................................... 2
2 Overview ................................................................................................... 5
2.1 Block Diagram ...................................................................................................5
2.2 Comparison Between ATmega1281/2561 and ATmega640/1280/2560 ...........7
2.3 Pin Descriptions .................................................................................................7
3 Resources ............................................................................................... 11
4 About Code Examples ........................................................................... 11
5 Data Retention ........................................................................................ 11
6 Capacitive touch sensing ...................................................................... 11
7 AVR CPU Core ........................................................................................ 12
7.1 Introduction ......................................................................................................12
7.2 Architectural Overview .....................................................................................12
7.3 ALU – Arithmetic Logic Unit .............................................................................13
7.4 Status Register ................................................................................................14
7.5 General Purpose Register File ........................................................................15
7.6 Stack Pointer ...................................................................................................16
7.7 Instruction Execution Timing ...........................................................................17
7.8 Reset and Interrupt Handling ...........................................................................18
8 AVR Memories ........................................................................................ 21
8.1 In-System Reprogrammable Flash Program Memory .....................................21
8.2 SRAM Data Memory ........................................................................................21
8.3 EEPROM Data Memory ..................................................................................23
8.4 I/O Memory ......................................................................................................27
9 External Memory Interface .................................................................... 28
9.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................28
9.2 Register Description ........................................................................................35
9.3 General Purpose registers ...............................................................................37
9.4 External Memory registers ...............................................................................37
10 System Clock and Clock Options ......................................................... 40
10.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................40ii
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
10.2 Clock Systems and their Distribution ...............................................................40
10.3 Clock Sources .................................................................................................41
10.4 Low Power Crystal Oscillator ...........................................................................42
10.5 Full Swing Crystal Oscillator ............................................................................44
10.6 Low Frequency Crystal Oscillator ....................................................................45
10.7 Calibrated Internal RC Oscillator .....................................................................47
10.8 128 kHz Internal Oscillator ..............................................................................47
10.9 External Clock .................................................................................................48
10.10 Clock Output Buffer .........................................................................................49
10.11 Timer/Counter Oscillator ..................................................................................49
10.12 System Clock Prescaler ..................................................................................49
10.13 Register Description ........................................................................................50
11 Power Management and Sleep Modes ................................................. 52
11.1 Sleep Modes ....................................................................................................52
11.2 Idle Mode .........................................................................................................52
11.3 ADC Noise Reduction Mode ............................................................................53
11.4 Power-down Mode ...........................................................................................53
11.5 Power-save Mode ............................................................................................53
11.6 Standby Mode .................................................................................................54
11.7 Extended Standby Mode .................................................................................54
11.8 Power Reduction Register ...............................................................................54
11.9 Minimizing Power Consumption ......................................................................54
11.10 Register Description ........................................................................................56
12 System Control and Reset .................................................................... 59
12.1 Resetting the AVR ...........................................................................................59
12.2 Reset Sources .................................................................................................59
12.3 Internal Voltage Reference ..............................................................................62
12.4 Watchdog Timer ..............................................................................................63
12.5 Register Description ........................................................................................67
13 I/O-Ports .................................................................................................. 70
13.1 Introduction ......................................................................................................70
13.2 Ports as General Digital I/O .............................................................................71
13.3 Alternate Port Functions ..................................................................................75
13.4 Register Description for I/O-Ports ..................................................................100
14 Interrupts .............................................................................................. 105iii
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
14.1 Interrupt Vectors in ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561 ................................105
14.2 Reset and Interrupt Vector placement ...........................................................107
14.3 Moving Interrupts Between Application and Boot Section .............................109
14.4 Register Description ......................................................................................110
15 External Interrupts ............................................................................... 112
15.1 Pin Change Interrupt Timing ..........................................................................112
15.2 Register Description ......................................................................................113
16 8-bit Timer/Counter0 with PWM .......................................................... 118
16.1 Features ........................................................................................................118
16.2 Overview ........................................................................................................118
16.3 Timer/Counter Clock Sources .......................................................................119
16.4 Counter Unit ..................................................................................................119
16.5 Output Compare Unit .....................................................................................120
16.6 Compare Match Output Unit ..........................................................................122
16.7 Modes of Operation .......................................................................................123
16.8 Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams ...................................................................127
16.9 Register Description ......................................................................................129
17 16-bit Timer/Counter (Timer/Counter 1, 3, 4, and 5) .......................... 136
17.1 Features ........................................................................................................136
17.2 Overview ........................................................................................................136
17.3 Accessing 16-bit Registers ............................................................................138
17.4 Timer/Counter Clock Sources .......................................................................141
17.5 Counter Unit ..................................................................................................142
17.6 Input Capture Unit .........................................................................................143
17.7 Output Compare Units ...................................................................................145
17.8 Compare Match Output Unit ..........................................................................147
17.9 Modes of Operation .......................................................................................148
17.10 Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams ...................................................................156
17.11 Register Description ......................................................................................158
18 Timer/Counter 0, 1, 3, 4, and 5 Prescaler ........................................... 169
18.1 Internal Clock Source ....................................................................................169
18.2 Prescaler Reset .............................................................................................169
18.3 External Clock Source ...................................................................................169
18.4 Register Description ......................................................................................170iv
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
19 Output Compare Modulator (OCM1C0A) ........................................... 172
19.1 Overview ........................................................................................................172
19.2 Description .....................................................................................................172
20 8-bit Timer/Counter2 with PWM and Asynchronous Operation ...... 174
20.1 Overview ........................................................................................................174
20.2 Timer/Counter Clock Sources .......................................................................175
20.3 Counter Unit ..................................................................................................175
20.4 Modes of Operation .......................................................................................176
20.5 Output Compare Unit .....................................................................................180
20.6 Compare Match Output Unit ..........................................................................182
20.7 Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams ...................................................................183
20.8 Asynchronous Operation of Timer/Counter2 .................................................184
20.9 Timer/Counter Prescaler ...............................................................................186
20.10 Register Description ......................................................................................187
21 SPI – Serial Peripheral Interface ......................................................... 195
21.1 SS Pin Functionality ......................................................................................200
21.2 Register Description ......................................................................................202
22 USART ................................................................................................... 205
22.1 Features ........................................................................................................205
22.2 Clock Generation ...........................................................................................206
22.3 Frame Formats ..............................................................................................209
22.4 USART Initialization .......................................................................................210
22.5 Data Transmission – The USART Transmitter ..............................................212
22.6 Data Reception – The USART Receiver .......................................................214
22.7 Asynchronous Data Reception ......................................................................218
22.8 Multi-processor Communication Mode ..........................................................221
22.9 Register Description ......................................................................................222
22.10 Examples of Baud Rate Setting .....................................................................227
23 USART in SPI Mode ............................................................................. 232
23.1 Overview ........................................................................................................232
23.2 USART MSPIM vs. SPI .................................................................................232
23.3 SPI Data Modes and Timing ..........................................................................233
23.4 Frame Formats ..............................................................................................234
23.5 Data Transfer .................................................................................................236
23.6 USART MSPIM Register Description ............................................................237v
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
24 2-wire Serial Interface .......................................................................... 241
24.1 Features ........................................................................................................241
24.2 2-wire Serial Interface Bus Definition ............................................................241
24.3 Data Transfer and Frame Format ..................................................................242
24.4 Multi-master Bus Systems, Arbitration and Synchronization .........................245
24.5 Overview of the TWI Module .........................................................................246
24.6 Using the TWI ................................................................................................249
24.7 Transmission Modes .....................................................................................252
24.8 Multi-master Systems and Arbitration ............................................................265
24.9 Register Description ......................................................................................266
25 AC – Analog Comparator .................................................................... 271
25.1 Analog Comparator Multiplexed Input ...........................................................271
25.2 Register Description ......................................................................................272
26 ADC – Analog to Digital Converter ..................................................... 275
26.1 Features ........................................................................................................275
26.2 Operation .......................................................................................................276
26.3 Starting a Conversion ....................................................................................277
26.4 Prescaling and Conversion Timing ................................................................278
26.5 Changing Channel or Reference Selection ...................................................282
26.6 ADC Noise Canceler .....................................................................................283
26.7 ADC Conversion Result .................................................................................288
26.8 Register Description ......................................................................................289
27 JTAG Interface and On-chip Debug System ..................................... 296
27.1 Features ........................................................................................................296
27.2 Overview ........................................................................................................296
27.3 TAP - Test Access Port .................................................................................297
27.4 Using the Boundary-scan Chain ....................................................................299
27.5 Using the On-chip Debug System .................................................................299
27.6 On-chip Debug Specific JTAG Instructions ...................................................300
27.7 Using the JTAG Programming Capabilities ...................................................301
27.8 Bibliography ...................................................................................................301
27.9 On-chip Debug Related Register in I/O Memory ...........................................301
28 IEEE 1149.1 (JTAG) Boundary-scan ................................................... 302
28.1 Features ........................................................................................................302
28.2 System Overview ...........................................................................................302vi
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
28.3 Data Registers ...............................................................................................302
28.4 Boundary-scan Specific JTAG Instructions ...................................................304
28.5 Boundary-scan Chain ....................................................................................305
28.6 Boundary-scan Related Register in I/O Memory ...........................................308
28.7 ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561 Boundary-scan Order ............................308
28.8 Boundary-scan Description Language Files ..................................................308
29 Boot Loader Support – Read-While-Write Self-Programming ......... 317
29.1 Features ........................................................................................................317
29.2 Application and Boot Loader Flash Sections .................................................317
29.3 Read-While-Write and No Read-While-Write Flash Sections ........................317
29.4 Boot Loader Lock Bits ...................................................................................320
29.5 Addressing the Flash During Self-Programming ...........................................322
29.6 Self-Programming the Flash ..........................................................................323
29.7 Register Description ......................................................................................332
30 Memory Programming ......................................................................... 335
30.1 Program And Data Memory Lock Bits ...........................................................335
30.2 Fuse Bits ........................................................................................................336
30.3 Signature Bytes .............................................................................................338
30.4 Calibration Byte .............................................................................................338
30.5 Page Size ......................................................................................................338
30.6 Parallel Programming Parameters, Pin Mapping, and Commands ...............338
30.7 Parallel Programming ....................................................................................341
30.8 Serial Downloading ........................................................................................349
30.9 Programming via the JTAG Interface ............................................................354
31 Electrical Characteristics .................................................................... 367
31.1 DC Characteristics .........................................................................................367
31.2 Speed Grades ...............................................................................................369
31.3 Clock Characteristics .....................................................................................371
31.4 External Clock Drive ......................................................................................371
31.5 System and Reset Characteristics ................................................................372
31.6 2-wire Serial Interface Characteristics ...........................................................373
31.7 SPI Timing Characteristics ............................................................................375
31.8 ADC Characteristics – Preliminary Data ........................................................377
31.9 External Data Memory Timing .......................................................................379
32 Typical Characteristics ........................................................................ 385vii
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
32.1 Active Supply Current ....................................................................................385
32.2 Idle Supply Current ........................................................................................388
32.3 Power-down Supply Current ..........................................................................392
32.4 Power-save Supply Current ...........................................................................393
32.5 Standby Supply Current ................................................................................394
32.6 Pin Pull-up .....................................................................................................394
32.7 Pin Driver Strength ........................................................................................397
32.8 Pin Threshold and Hysteresis ........................................................................399
32.9 BOD Threshold and Analog Comparator Offset ............................................402
32.10 Internal Oscillator Speed ...............................................................................404
32.11 Current Consumption of Peripheral Units ......................................................406
32.12 Current Consumption in Reset and Reset Pulsewidth ..................................409
33 Register Summary ............................................................................... 411
34 Instruction Set Summary .................................................................... 416
35 Ordering Information ........................................................................... 419
35.1 ATmega640 ...................................................................................................419
35.2 ATmega1280 .................................................................................................420
35.3 ATmega1281 .................................................................................................421
35.4 ATmega2560 .................................................................................................422
35.5 ATmega2561 .................................................................................................423
36 Packaging Information ........................................................................ 424
36.1 100A ..............................................................................................................424
36.2 100C1 ............................................................................................................425
36.3 64A ................................................................................................................426
36.4 64M2 ..............................................................................................................427
37 Errata ..................................................................................................... 428
37.1 ATmega640 rev. B .........................................................................................428
37.2 ATmega640 rev. A .........................................................................................428
37.3 ATmega1280 rev. B .......................................................................................428
37.4 ATmega1280 rev. A .......................................................................................429
37.5 ATmega1281 rev. B .......................................................................................429
37.6 ATmega1281 rev. A .......................................................................................430
37.7 ATmega2560 rev. F .......................................................................................430
37.8 ATmega2560 rev. E .......................................................................................430viii
2549P–AVR–10/2012
ATmega640/1280/1281/2560/2561
37.9 ATmega2560 rev. D ......................................................................................430
37.10 ATmega2560 rev. C ......................................................................................430
37.11 ATmega2560 rev. B .......................................................................................430
37.12 ATmega2560 rev. A .......................................................................................431
37.13 ATmega2561 rev. F .......................................................................................432
37.14 ATmega2561 rev. E .......................................................................................432
37.15 ATmega2561 rev. D ......................................................................................432
37.16 ATmega2561 rev. C ......................................................................................432
37.17 ATmega2561 rev. B .......................................................................................432
37.18 ATmega2561 rev. A .......................................................................................432
38 Datasheet Revision History ................................................................ 435
38.1 Rev. 2549P-10/2012 ......................................................................................435
38.2 Rev. 2549O-05/12 .........................................................................................435
38.3 Rev. 2549N-05/11 .........................................................................................435
38.4 Rev. 2549M-09/10 .........................................................................................435
38.5 Rev. 2549L-08/07 ..........................................................................................436
38.6 Rev. 2549K-01/07 ..........................................................................................436
38.7 Rev. 2549J-09/06 ..........................................................................................436
38.8 Rev. 2549I-07/06 ...........................................................................................437
38.9 Rev. 2549H-06/06 .........................................................................................437
38.10 Rev. 2549G-06/06 .........................................................................................437
38.11 Rev. 2549F-04/06 ..........................................................................................437
38.12 Rev. 2549E-04/06 ..........................................................................................437
38.13 Rev. 2549D-12/05 .........................................................................................438
38.14 Rev. 2549C-09/05 .........................................................................................438
38.15 Rev. 2549B-05/05 ..........................................................................................438
38.16 Rev. 2549A-03/05 ..........................................................................................438
Table of Contents....................................................................................... i2549P–AVR–10/2012
Atmel Corporation
2325 Orchard Parkway
San Jose, CA 95131
USA
Tel: (+1)(408) 441-0311
Fax: (+1)(408) 487-2600
www.atmel.com
Atmel Asia Limited
Unit 1-5 & 16, 19/F
BEA Tower, Millennium City 5
418 Kwun Tong Road
Kwun Tong, Kowloon
HONG KONG
Tel: (+852) 2245-6100
Fax: (+852) 2722-1369
Atmel Munich GmbH
Business Campus
Parkring 4
D-85748 Garching b. Munich
GERMANY
Tel: (+49) 89-31970-0
Fax: (+49) 89-3194621
Atmel Japan
16F, Shin-Osaki Kangyo Bldg.
1-6-8 Osaki Shinagawa-ku
Tokyo 141-0032
JAPAN
Tel: (+81)(3) 6417-0300
Fax: (+81)(3) 6417-0370
© 2012 Atmel Corporation. All rights reserved.
Atmel®, Atmel logo and combinations thereof, AVR®, QTouch®, QMatrix®, AVR Studio® and others are registered trademarks or trademarks
of Atmel Corporation or its subsidiaries. Windows® and others are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in U.S. and
other countries. Other terms and product names may be trademarks of others.
Disclaimer: The information in this document is provided in connection with Atmel products. No license, express or implied, by estoppel or otherwise, to
any intellectual property right is granted by this document or in connection with the sale of Atmel products. EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE ATMEL
TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALES LOCATED ON THE ATMEL WEBSITE, ATMEL ASSUMES NO LIABILITY WHATSOEVER AND DISCLAIMS ANY
EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY WARRANTY RELATING TO ITS PRODUCTS INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL ATMEL BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS AND PROFITS,
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR LOSS OF INFORMATION) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS DOCUMENT, EVEN IF ATMEL
HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Atmel makes no representations or warranties with respect to the accuracy or completeness
of the contents of this document and reserves the right to make changes to specifications and product descriptions at any time without notice.
Atmel does not make any commitment to update the information contained herein. Unless specifically provided otherwise, Atmel products are not suitable
for, and shall not be used in, automotive applications. Atmel products are not intended, authorized, or warranted for use as components in applications
intended to support or sustain life.
1. General description
The LPC81xM are an ARM Cortex-M0+ based, low-cost 32-bit MCU family operating at
CPU frequencies of up to 30 MHz. The LPC81xM support up to 16 kB of flash memory
and 4 kB of SRAM.
The peripheral complement of the LPC81xM includes a CRC engine, one I2C-bus
interface, up to three USARTs, up to two SPI interfaces, one multi-rate timer, self wake-up
timer, and state-configurable timer, one comparator, function-configurable I/O ports
through a switch matrix, an input pattern match engine, and up to 18 general-purpose I/O
pins.
2. Features and benefits
System:
ARM Cortex-M0+ processor, running at frequencies of up to 30 MHz with
single-cycle multiplier and fast single-cycle I/O port.
ARM Cortex-M0+ built-in Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC).
System tick timer.
Serial Wire Debug (SWD) and JTAG boundary scan modes supported.
Micro Trace Buffer (MTB) supported.
Memory:
Up to 16 kB on-chip flash programming memory with 64 Byte page write and erase.
Up to 4 kB SRAM.
ROM API support:
Boot loader.
USART drivers.
I2C drivers.
Power profiles.
Flash In-Application Programming (IAP) and In-System Programming (ISP).
Digital peripherals:
High-speed GPIO interface connected to the ARM Cortex-M0+ IO bus with up to 18
General-Purpose I/O (GPIO) pins with configurable pull-up/pull-down resistors,
programmable open-drain mode, input inverter, and glitch filter.
High-current source output driver (20 mA) on four pins.
High-current sink driver (20 mA) on two true open-drain pins.
GPIO interrupt generation capability with boolean pattern-matching feature on eight
GPIO inputs.
Switch matrix for flexible configuration of each I/O pin function.
LPC81xM
32-bit ARM Cortex-M0+ microcontroller; up to 16 kB flash and
4 kB SRAM
Rev. 4.3 — 22 April 2014 Product data sheetLPC81XM All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.3 — 22 April 2014 2 of 76
NXP Semiconductors LPC81xM
32-bit ARM Cortex-M0+ microcontroller
State Configurable Timer/PWM (SCTimer/PWM) with input and output functions
(including capture and match) assigned to pins through the switch matrix.
Multiple-channel multi-rate timer (MRT) for repetitive interrupt generation at up to
four programmable, fixed rates.
Self Wake-up Timer (WKT) clocked from either the IRC or a low-power,
low-frequency internal oscillator.
CRC engine.
Windowed Watchdog timer (WWDT).
Analog peripherals:
Comparator with internal and external voltage references with pin functions
assigned or enabled through the switch matrix.
Serial interfaces:
Three USART interfaces with pin functions assigned through the switch matrix.
Two SPI controllers with pin functions assigned through the switch matrix.
One I2C-bus interface with pin functions assigned through the switch matrix.
Clock generation:
12 MHz internal RC oscillator trimmed to 1.5 % accuracy that can optionally be
used as a system clock.
Crystal oscillator with an operating range of 1 MHz to 25 MHz.
Programmable watchdog oscillator with a frequency range of 9.4 kHz to 2.3 MHz.
10 kHz low-power oscillator for the WKT.
PLL allows CPU operation up to the maximum CPU rate without the need for a
high-frequency crystal. May be run from the system oscillator, the external clock
input CLKIN, or the internal RC oscillator.
Clock output function with divider that can reflect the crystal oscillator, the main
clock, the IRC, or the watchdog oscillator.
Power control:
Integrated PMU (Power Management Unit) to minimize power consumption.
Reduced power modes: Sleep mode, Deep-sleep mode, Power-down mode, and
Deep power-down mode.
Wake-up from Deep-sleep and Power-down modes on activity on USART, SPI, and
I2C peripherals.
Timer-controlled self wake-up from Deep power-down mode.
Power-On Reset (POR).
Brownout detect.
Unique device serial number for identification.
Single power supply.
Operating temperature range 40 °C to 105 °C except for the DIP8 package, which is
available for a temperature range of 40 °C to 85 °C.
Available as DIP8, TSSOP16, SO20, TSSOP20, and XSON16 package.
3. Applications
8/16-bit applications Lighting
Consumer Motor control
Climate control Fire and security applicationsLPC81XM All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.3 — 22 April 2014 3 of 76
NXP Semiconductors LPC81xM
32-bit ARM Cortex-M0+ microcontroller
4. Ordering information
4.1 Ordering options
Table 1. Ordering information
Type number Package
Name Description Version
LPC810M021FN8 DIP8 plastic dual in-line package; 8 leads (300 mil) SOT097-2
LPC811M001JDH16 TSSOP16 plastic thin shrink small outline package; 16 leads; body width 4.4 mm SOT403-1
LPC812M101JDH16 TSSOP16 plastic thin shrink small outline package; 16 leads; body width 4.4 mm SOT403-1
LPC812M101JD20 SO20 plastic small outline package; 20 leads; body width 7.5 mm SOT163-1
LPC812M101JDH20 TSSOP20 plastic thin shrink small outline package; 20 leads; body width 4.4 mm SOT360-1
LPC812M101JTB16 XSON16 plastic extremely thin small outline package; no leads; 16 terminals;
body 2.5 3.2 0.5 mm
SOT1341-1
Table 2. Ordering options
Type number Flash/kB SRAM/kB USART I
2C-bus SPI Comparator GPIO Package
LPC810M021FN8 4 1 2 1 1 1 6 DIP8
LPC811M001JDH16 8 2 2 1 1 1 14 TSSOP16
LPC812M101JDH16 16 4 3 1 2 1 14 TSSOP16
LPC812M101JD20 16 4 2 1 1 1 18 SO20
LPC812M101JDH20 16 4 3 1 2 1 18 TSSOP20
LPC812M101JTB16 16 4 3 1 2 1 14 XSON16LPC81XM All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.3 — 22 April 2014 4 of 76
NXP Semiconductors LPC81xM
32-bit ARM Cortex-M0+ microcontroller
5. Marking
The LPC81xM devices typically have the following top-side marking:
LPC81x
xxxxx
xxxxxxxx
xxYWWxR[x]
The last two letters in the last line (field ‘xR’) identify the boot code version and device
revision.
Field ‘Y’ states the year the device was manufactured. Field ‘WW’ states the week the
device was manufactured during that year.
Remark: On the TSSOP16 package, the last line includes only the date code xxYWW.
Table 3. Device revision table
Revision identifier (xR) Revision description
‘1A’ Initial device revision with boot code version 13.1
‘2A’ Device revision with boot code version 13.2
’4C’ Device revision with boot code version 13.4LPC81XM All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.3 — 22 April 2014 5 of 76
NXP Semiconductors LPC81xM
32-bit ARM Cortex-M0+ microcontroller
6. Block diagram
Fig 1. LPC81xM block diagram
65$0
N%
$50
&257(;0
7(67'(%8*
,17(5)$&(
)/$6+
N%
+,*+63(('
*3,2
$+%72$3%
%5,'*(
&/2&.
*(1(5$7,21
32:(5&21752/
6<67(0
)81&7,216
5(6(7&/.,1
FORFNVDQG
FRQWUROV
/3&[0
DDD
VODYH
VODYH VODYH
520
VODYH
&5&
VODYH
3,1,17(558376
3$77(510$7&+
$+%/,7(%86
,5&
:'2VF
%2'
325
63,
86$57
6'$
6&/
&7,1B> @
&7287B> @
[
3,2
[
::'7
,2&21
308
6(/)
:$.(837,0(5
08/7,5$7(7,0(5
63,
,
&%86
6&7,0(5
3:0
6:,7&+
0$75,;
&203$5$725
;7$/,1
;7$/287
$&03B2
6<6&21
5;'&76
7;'576
$&03B,
9''&03
6&.66(/
0,62026,
6&.66(/
0,62026,
$/:$<62132:(5'20$,1
;7$/
6&/.
86$57 5;'&76
7;'576
6&/.
86$57 5;'&76
7;'576
6&/.
&/.287
6:&/.6:'
Data Sheet: JN5148-001
IEEE802.15.4 Wireless Microcontroller
© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 1
Overview Features: Transceiver
• 2.4GHz IEEE802.15.4 compliant
• Time of Flight ranging engine
• 128-bit AES security processor
• MAC accelerator with packet
formatting, CRCs, address check,
auto-acks, timers
• 500 & 667kbps data rate modes
• Integrated sleep oscillator for low
power
• On chip power regulation for 2.0V
to 3.6V battery operation
• Deep sleep current 100nA
• Sleep current with active sleep
timer 1.25µA
• <$0.50 external component cost
• Rx current 17.5mA
• Tx current 15.0mA
• Receiver sensitivity -95dBm
• Transmit power 2.5dBm
Features: Microcontroller
• Low power 32-bit RISC CPU, 4 to
32MHz clock speed
• Variable instruction width for high
coding efficiency
• Multi-stage instruction pipeline
• 128kB ROM and 128kB RAM for
bootloaded program code & data
• JTAG debug interface
• 4-input 12-bit ADC, 2 12-bit
DACs, 2 comparators
• 3 application timer/counters,
• 2 UARTs
• SPI port with 5 selects
• 2-wire serial interface
• 4-wire digital audio interface
• Watchdog timer
• Low power pulse counters
• Up to 21 DIO
Industrial temp (-40°C to +85°C)
8x8mm 56-lead Punched QFN
Lead-free and RoHS compliant
The JN5148-001 is an ultra low power, high performance wireless
microcontroller targeted at JenNet and ZigBee PRO networking
applications. The device features an enhanced 32-bit RISC processor
offering high coding efficiency through variable width instructions, a multistage
instruction pipeline and low power operation with programmable clock
speeds. It also includes a 2.4GHz IEEE802.15.4 compliant transceiver,
128kB of ROM, 128kB of RAM, and a rich mix of analogue and digital
peripherals. The large memory footprint allows the device to run both a
network stack (e.g. ZigBee PRO) and an embedded application or in a coprocessor
mode. The operating current is below 18mA, allowing operation
direct from a coin cell.
Enhanced peripherals include low power pulse counters running in sleep
mode designed for pulse counting in AMR applications and a unique Time
of Flight ranging engine, allowing accurate location services to be
implemented on wireless sensor networks. It also includes a 4-wire I2
S
audio interface, to interface directly to mainstream audio CODECs, as well
as conventional MCU peripherals.
Block Diagram
32-bit
RISC CPU Timers
UAR Ts
12-bit ADC,
Comparators
12-bit DACs,
Temp Sensor
2-Wire Serial
RAM SPI 128kB
128-bit AES
Encryption
Accelerator
2.4GHz
Radio
ROM
128kB
Power
Management
XTAL
O-QPSK
Modem
IEEE802.15.4
MAC
Accelerator
32-byte
OTP eFuse
4-Wire Audio
Sleep Counters
Time of Flight
Engine
Watchdog
Timer
Benefits
• Single chip integrates
transceiver and
microcontroller for wireless
sensor networks
• Large memory footprint to
run ZigBee PRO or JenNet
together with an application
• Very low current solution for
long battery life
• Highly featured 32-bit RISC
CPU for high performance
and low power
• System BOM is low in
component count and cost
• Extensive user peripherals
Applications
• Robust and secure low power
wireless applications
• ZigBee PRO and JenNet
networks
• Smart metering
(e.g. AMR)
• Home and commercial building
automation
• Location Aware services – e.g.
Asset Tracking
• Industrial systems
• Telemetry
• Remote Control
• Toys and gaming peripherals2 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
Contents
1 Introduction 6
1.1 Wireless Transceiver 6
1.2 RISC CPU and Memory 6
1.3 Peripherals 7
1.4 Block Diagram 8
2 Pin Configurations 9
2.1 Pin Assignment 10
2.2 Pin Descriptions 12
2.2.1 Power Supplies 12
2.2.2 Reset 12
2.2.3 32MHz Oscillator 12
2.2.4 Radio 12
2.2.5 Analogue Peripherals 13
2.2.6 Digital Input/Output 13
3 CPU 15
4 Memory Organisation 16
4.1 ROM 16
4.2 RAM 17
4.3 OTP eFuse Memory 17
4.4 External Memory 17
4.4.1 External Memory Encryption 18
4.5 Peripherals 18
4.6 Unused Memory Addresses 18
5 System Clocks 19
5.1 16MHz System Clock 19
5.1.1 32MHz Oscillator 19
5.1.2 24MHz RC Oscillator 19
5.2 32kHz System Clock 20
5.2.1 32kHz RC Oscillator 20
5.2.2 32kHz Crystal Oscillator 20
5.2.3 32kHz External Clock 20
6 Reset 21
6.1 Internal Power-on Reset 21
6.2 External Reset 22
6.3 Software Reset 22
6.4 Brown-out Detect 23
6.5 Watchdog Timer 23
7 Interrupt System 24
7.1 System Calls 24
7.2 Processor Exceptions 24
7.2.1 Bus Error 24
7.2.2 Alignment 24
7.2.3 Illegal Instruction 24
7.2.4 Stack Overflow 24
7.3 Hardware Interrupts 25© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 3
8 Wireless Transceiver 26
8.1 Radio 26
8.1.1 Radio External Components 27
8.1.2 Antenna Diversity 27
8.2 Modem 29
8.3 Baseband Processor 30
8.3.1 Transmit 30
8.3.2 Reception 30
8.3.3 Auto Acknowledge 31
8.3.4 Beacon Generation 31
8.3.5 Security 31
8.4 Security Coprocessor 31
8.5 Location Awareness 31
8.6 Higher Data Rates 32
9 Digital Input/Output 33
10 Serial Peripheral Interface 35
11 Timers 38
11.1 Peripheral Timer/Counters 38
11.1.1 Pulse Width Modulation Mode 39
11.1.2 Capture Mode 39
11.1.3 Counter/Timer Mode 40
11.1.4 Delta-Sigma Mode 40
11.1.5 Example Timer / Counter Application 41
11.2 Tick Timer 41
11.3 Wakeup Timers 42
11.3.1 RC Oscillator Calibration 43
12 Pulse Counters 44
13 Serial Communications 45
13.1 Interrupts 46
13.2 UART Application 46
14 JTAG Debug Interface 47
15 Two-Wire Serial Interface 48
15.1 Connecting Devices 48
15.2 Clock Stretching 49
15.3 Master Two-wire Serial Interface 49
15.4 Slave Two-wire Serial Interface 50
16 Four-Wire Digital Audio Interface 51
17 Random Number Generator 53
18 Sample FIFO 54
19 Intelligent Peripheral Interface 55
19.1 Data Transfer Format 55
19.2 JN5148 (Slave) Initiated Data Transfer 56
19.3 Remote (Master) Processor Initiated Data Transfer 564 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
20 Analogue Peripherals 58
20.1 Analogue to Digital Converter 59
20.1.1 Operation 59
20.1.2 Supply Monitor 60
20.1.3 Temperature Sensor 60
20.2 Digital to Analogue Converter 60
20.2.1 Operation 60
20.3 Comparators 61
21 Power Management and Sleep Modes 62
21.1 Operating Modes 62
21.1.1 Power Domains 62
21.2 Active Processing Mode 62
21.2.1 CPU Doze 62
21.3 Sleep Mode 62
21.3.1 Wakeup Timer Event 63
21.3.2 DIO Event 63
21.3.3 Comparator Event 63
21.3.4 Pulse Counter 63
21.4 Deep Sleep Mode 63
22 Electrical Characteristics 64
22.1 Maximum Ratings 64
22.2 DC Electrical Characteristics 64
22.2.1 Operating Conditions 64
22.2.2 DC Current Consumption 65
22.2.3 I/O Characteristics 66
22.3 AC Characteristics 66
22.3.1 Reset and Voltage Brown-Out 66
22.3.2 SPI MasterTiming 68
22.3.3 Intelligent Peripheral (SPI Slave) Timing 68
22.3.4 Two-wire Serial Interface 69
22.3.5 Four-Wire Digital Audio Interface 70
22.3.6 Wakeup and Boot Load Timings 70
22.3.7 Bandgap Reference 71
22.3.8 Analogue to Digital Converters 71
22.3.9 Digital to Analogue Converters 72
22.3.10 Comparators 73
22.3.11 32kHz RC Oscillator 73
22.3.12 32kHz Crystal Oscillator 74
22.3.13 32MHz Crystal Oscillator 74
22.3.14 24MHz RC Oscillator 75
22.3.15 Temperature Sensor 75
22.3.16 Radio Transceiver 76© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 5
Appendix A Mechanical and Ordering Information 81
A.1 56-pin QFN Package Drawing 81
A.2 PCB Decal 82
A.3 Ordering Information 83
A.4 Device Package Marking 84
A.5 Tape and Reel Information 85
A.5.1 Tape Orientation and Dimensions 85
A.5.2 Reel Information: 180mm Reel 86
A.5.3 Reel Information: 330mm Reel 87
A.5.4 Dry Pack Requirement for Moisture Sensitive Material 87
Appendix B Development Support 88
B.1 Crystal Oscillators 88
B.1.1 Crystal Equivalent Circuit 88
B.1.2 Crystal Load Capacitance 88
B.1.3 Crystal ESR and Required Transconductance 89
B.2 32MHz Oscillator 90
B.3 32kHz Oscillator 92
B.4 JN5148 Module Reference Designs 94
B.4.1 Schematic Diagram 94
B.4.2 PCB Design and Reflow Profile 96
Related Documents 97
RoHS Compliance 97
Status Information 97
Disclaimers 98
Trademarks 98
Version Control 99
Contact Details 1006 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
1 Introduction
The JN5148-001 is an IEEE802.15.4 wireless microcontroller that provides a fully integrated solution for applications
using the IEEE802.15.4 standard in the 2.4 - 2.5GHz ISM frequency band [1], including JenNet and ZigBee PRO. It
includes all of the functionality required to meet the IEEE802.15.4, JenNet and ZigBee PRO specifications and has
additional processor capability to run a wide range of applications including, but not limited to Smart Energy,
Automatic Meter Reading, Remote Control, Home and Building Automation, Toys and Gaming.
Applications that transfer data wirelessly tend to be more complex than wired ones. Wireless protocols make
stringent demands on frequencies, data formats, timing of data transfers, security and other issues. Application
development must consider the requirements of the wireless network in addition to the product functionality and user
interfaces. To minimise this complexity, NXP provides a series of software libraries and interfaces that control the
transceiver and peripherals of the JN5148. These libraries and interfaces remove the need for the developer to
understand wireless protocols and greatly simplifies the programming complexities of power modes, interrupts and
hardware functionality.
In view of the above, the register details of the JN5148 are not provided in the datasheet.
The device includes a Wireless Transceiver, RISC CPU, on chip memory and an extensive range of peripherals.
Hereafter, the JN5148-001 will be referred to as JN5148.
1.1 Wireless Transceiver
The Wireless Transceiver comprises a 2.45GHz radio, a modem, a baseband controller and a security coprocessor.
In addition, the radio also provides an output to control transmit-receive switching of external devices such as power
amplifiers allowing applications that require increased transmit power to be realised very easily. Appendix B.4,
describes a complete reference design including Printed Circuit Board (PCB) design and Bill Of Materials (BOM).
The security coprocessor provides hardware-based 128-bit AES-CCM* modes as specified by the IEEE802.15.4
2006 standard. Specifically this includes encryption and authentication covered by the MIC –32/ -64/ -128, ENC and
ENC-MIC –32/ -64/ -128 modes of operation.
The transceiver elements (radio, modem and baseband) work together to provide IEEE802.15.4 Medium Access
Control (MAC) under the control of a protocol stack. Applications incorporating IEEE802.15.4 functionality can be
rapidly developed by combining user-developed application software with a protocol stack library.
1.2 RISC CPU and Memory
A 32-bit RISC CPU allows software to be run on chip, its processing power being shared between the IEEE802.15.4
MAC protocol, other higher layer protocols and the user application. The JN5148 has a unified memory architecture,
code memory, data memory, peripheral devices and I/O ports are organised within the same linear address space.
The device contains 128kbytes of ROM, 128kbytes of RAM and a 32-byte One Time Programmable (OTP) eFuse
memory. © NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 7
1.3 Peripherals
The following peripherals are available on chip:
• Master SPI port with five select outputs
• Two UARTs with support for hardware or software flow control
• Three programmable Timer/Counters – all three support Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) capability, two have
capture/compare facility
• Two programmable Sleep Timers and a Tick Timer
• Two-wire serial interface (compatible with SMbus and I2
C) supporting master and slave operation
• Four-wire digital audio interface (compatible with I²S)
• Slave SPI port for Intelligent peripheral mode (shared with digital I/O)
• Twenty-one digital I/O lines (multiplexed with peripherals such as timers and UARTs)
• Four channel, 12-bit, Analogue to Digital converter
• Two 12-bit Digital to Analogue converters
• Two programmable analogue comparators
• Internal temperature sensor and battery monitor
• Time Of Flight ranging engine
• Two low power pulse counters
• Random number generator
• Watchdog Timer and Voltage Brown-out
• Sample FIFO for digital audio interface or ADC/DAC
• JTAG hardware debug port
User applications access the peripherals using the Integrated Peripherals API. This allows applications to use a
tested and easily understood view of the peripherals allowing rapid system development. 8 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
1.4 Block Diagram
32-bit RISC CPU
Reset
SPI
Master
MUX
UART0
UART1
Wakeup
Timer1
Wakeup
Timer0
Security
Coprocessor
DIO6/TXD0/JTAG_TDO
DIO7/RXD0/JTAG_TDI
DIO4/CTS0/JTAG_TCK
DIO5/RTS0/JTAG_TMS
DIO19/TXD1/JTAG_TDO
DIO17/CTS1/IP_SEL/DAI_SCK/
JTAG_TCK
DIO18/RTS1/IP_INT/DAI_SDOUT/
JTAG_TMS
Digital
Baseband
Radio
Programmable
Interrupt
Controller
Timer0
2-wire
Interf ace
Timer1
SPICLK
DIO10/TIM0OUT/32KXTALOUT
SPIMOSI
SPIMISO
SPISEL0
DIO0/SPISEL1
DIO3/SPISEL4/RFTX
DIO2/SPISEL3/RFRX
DIO1/SPISEL2/PC0
DIO9/TIM0CAP/32KXTALIN/32KIN
DIO8/TIM0CK_GT/PC1
DIO13/TIM1OUT/ADE/DAI_SDIN
DIO11/TIM1CK_GT/TIM2OUT
DIO12/TIM1CAP/ADO/DAI_WS
DIO14/SIF_CLK/IP_CLK
DIO15/SIF_D/IP_DO
DIO16/RXD1/IP_DI/JTAG_TDI
From Peripherals
RESETN
Wireless
Transceiv er
32MHz Clock
Generator
XTAL_IN
XTAL_OUT
RF_IN
VCOTUNE
Tick Timer
Voltage
Regulators 1.8V VDD1
VDD2
Intelligent
Peripheral
IBAIS
VB_XX
Clock Divider
Multiplier
Timer2
SPISEL1
SPISEL2
SPISEL3
SPISEL4
TXD0
RXD0
RTS0
CTS0
TXD1
RXD1
RTS1
CTS1
TIM0CK_GT
TIM0CAP
TIM0OUT
TIM1CK_GT
TIM1CAP
TIM1OUT
TIM2OUT
SIF_D
SIF_CLK
IP_DO
IP_DI
IP_INT
IP_CLK
IP_SEL
4-wire
Digital
Audio
Interf ace
I2S_OUT
I2S_DIN
I2S_CLK
I2S_SYNC
Pulse
Counters
PC0
PC1
JTAG
Debug
JTAG_TDI
JTAG_TMS
JTAG_TCK
JTAG_TDO
RAM
128kB
ROM
128kB
OTP
eFuse
32kHz
RC
Osc
32kHz Clock
Select 32KIN
32kHz
Clock
Gen
32KXTALIN
32KXTALOUT
Antenna
Div ersity
ADO
ADE
Time
Of
Flight
Sample
FIFO
DIO20/RXD1/JTAG_TDI
24MHz
RC Osc
Comparator2 COMP2P
COMP2M
COMP1P/ Comparator1
EXT_PA_C
COMP1M/
EXT_PA_B
DAC1
DAC2
DAC1
DAC2
ADC
M
U ADC4 X
ADC1
ADC2
ADC3
Temperature
Sensor
Supply Monitor
CPU and 16MHz
System Clock
Watchdog
Timer
Brown-out
Detect
Figure 1: JN5148 Block Diagram
DIO 16/IP_DI© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 9
2 Pin Configurations
DIO16/RXD 1/IP_DI/JTAG_TDI
DIO17/CTS1/IP_SEL/DAI_SC K/JTAG_TCK
VSS3
DIO18/RTS1/IP_INT/DAI_SDOUT/JTAG_TMS
DIO19/TXD1/JTAG_TDO
VSS2
VSSS
XTAL_OUT
XTAL_IN
VB_SYNTH
VCOTUNE
VB_VCO
VDD1
IBIAS
VREF
VB_RF2
RF_IN
VB_RF
COMP1M
COMP1P
ADC1
ADC2
ADC3
ADC4
COMP2M
COMP2P
VB_A
NC
DAC1
DAC2
DIO20/RXD 1/JTAG_TDI
VSS1
SPICLK
SPIMISO
VB_RAM
SPIMOSI
SPISEL0
DIO0/SPISEL1
RESETN
VB_DIG
DIO1/SPISEL2/PC0
DIO2/SPISEL3/RFRX
DIO15/SIF_D/IP_DO
DIO14/SIF_C LK/IP_CLK
DIO13/T IM1OUT/ADE/DAI_SDIN
DIO12/T IM1CAP/ADO/DAI_WS
DIO11/T IM1CK_GT /TIM2OUT
DIO10/T IM0OUT/32KXT ALOUT
DIO9/TIM0CAP/32KXT ALIN/32KIN
VDD2
DIO8/TIM0CK_GT/PC 1
DIO7/RXD0/JT AG_TDI
DIO6/TXD0/JTAG_TDO
DIO5/RTS0/JTAG_TMS
DIO4/CTS0/JTAG_TCK
DIO3/SPISEL4/RFTX
VSSA
(Paddl e)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28 29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
Figure 2: 56-pin QFN Configuration (top view)
Note: Please refer to Appendix B.4 JN5148 Module Reference
Design for important applications information regarding the
connection of the PADDLE to the PCB.
DIO 16/IP_DI10 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
2.1 Pin Assignment
Pin No Power supplies Signal
Type
Description
10, 12, 16, 18, 27,
35, 40
VB_SYNTH, VB_VCO, VB_RF2, VB_RF, VB_A, VB_RAM,
VB_DIG
1.8V Regulated supply voltage
13, 49 VDD1, VDD2 3.3V Supplies: VDD1 for analogue,
VDD2 for digital
32, 6, 3, 7, Paddle VSS1, VSS2, VSS3, VSSS, VSSA 0V Grounds (see appendix A.2 for
paddle details)
28 NC No connect
General
39 RESETN CMOS Reset input
8, 9 XTAL_OUT, XTAL_IN 1.8V System crystal oscillator
Radio
11 VCOTUNE 1.8V VCO tuning RC network
14 IBIAS 1.8V Bias current control
17 RF_IN 1.8V RF antenna
Analogue Peripheral I/O
21, 22, 23, 24 ADC1, ADC2, ADC3, ADC4 3.3V ADC inputs
15 VREF 1.8V Analogue peripheral reference
voltage
29, 30 DAC1, DAC2 3.3V DAC outputs
19, 20 COMP1M/EXT_PA_B, COMP1P/EXT_PA_C 3.3V Comparator 1 inputs and
external PA control
25, 26 COMP2M, COMP2P 3.3V Comparator 2 inputs
Digital Peripheral I/O
Primary Alternate Functions
33 SPICLK CMOS SPI Clock Output
36 SPIMOSI CMOS SPI Master Out Slave In Output
34 SPIMISO CMOS SPI Master In Slave Out Input
37 SPISEL0 CMOS SPI Slave Select Output 0
38 DIO0 SPISEL1 CMOS DIO0 or SPI Slave Select Output
1
41 DIO1 SPISEL2 PC0 CMOS DIO1, SPI Slave Select Output 2
or Pulse Counter0 Input
42 DIO2 SPISEL3 RFRX CMOS DIO2, SPI Slave Select Output 3
or Radio Receive Control Output
43 DIO3 SPISEL4 RFTX CMOS DIO3, SPI Slave Select Output 4
or Radio Transmit Control Output
44 DIO4 CTS0 JTAG_TCK CMOS DIO4, UART 0 Clear To Send
Input or JTAG CLK
45 DIO5 RTS0 JTAG_TMS CMOS DIO5, UART 0 Request To Send
Output or JTAG Mode Select
46 DIO6 TXD0 JTAG_TDO CMOS DIO6, UART 0 Transmit Data
Output or JTAG Data Output
47 DIO7 RXD0 JTAG_TDI CMOS DIO7, UART 0 Receive Data
Input or JTAG Data Input
48 DIO8 TIM0CK_GT PC1 CMOS DIO8, Timer0 Clock/Gate Input
or Pulse Counter1 Input
50 DIO9 TIM0CAP 32KXTALIN 32KIN CMOS DIO9, Timer0 Capture Input, 32K
External Crystal Input or 32K
Clock Input© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 11
Pin
No
Digital Peripheral I/O Signal
Type
Description
Primary Alternate Functions
51 DIO10 TIM0OUT 32KXTALOUT CMOS DIO10, Timer0 PWM Output or
32K External Crystal Output
52 DIO11 TIM1CK_GT TIM2OUT CMOS DIO11, Timer1 Clock/Gate
Input or Timer2 PWM Output
53 DIO12 TIM1CAP ADO DAI_WS CMOS DIO12, Timer1 Capture Input,
Antenna Diversity or Digital
Audio Word Select
54 DIO13 TIM1OUT ADE DAI_SDIN CMOS DIO13, Timer1 PWM Output,
Antenna Diversity or Digital
Audio Data Input
55 DIO14 SIF_CLK IP_CLK CMOS DIO14, Serial Interface Clock
or Intelligent Peripheral Clock
Input
56 DIO15 SIF_D IP_DO CMOS DIO15, Serial Interface Data or
Intelligent Peripheral Data Out
1 DIO16 IP_DI CMOS DIO16 or Intelligent Peripheral
Data In
2 DIO17 CTS1 IP_SEL DAI_SCK JTAG_TCK CMOS DIO17, UART 1 Clear To Send
Input, Intelligent Peripheral
Device Select Input or Digital
Audio Clock or JTAG CLK
4 DIO18 RTS1 IP_INT DAI_SDOUT JTAG_TMS CMOS DIO18, UART 1 Request To
Send Output, Intelligent
Peripheral Interrupt Output or
Digital Audio Data Output or
JTAG Mode Select
5 DIO19 TXD1 JTAG_TDO CMOS DIO19 or UART 1 Transmit
Data Output or JTAG Data Out
31 DIO 20 RXD1 JTAG_TDI CMOS DIO 20, UART 1 Receive Data
Input or JTAG data In
The PCB schematic and layout rules detailed in Appendix B.4
must be followed. Failure to do so will likely result in the
JN5148 failing to meet the performance specification detailed
herein and worst case may result in device not functioning in
the end application.12 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
2.2 Pin Descriptions
2.2.1 Power Supplies
The device is powered from the VDD1 and VDD2 pins, each being decoupled with a 100nF ceramic capacitor. VDD1
is the power supply to the analogue circuitry; it should be decoupled to ground. VDD2 is the power supply for the
digital circuitry; and should also be decoupled to ground. A 10uF tantalum capacitor is required. Decoupling pins for
the internal 1.8V regulators are provided which require a 100nF capacitor located as close to the device as practical.
VB_RF, VB_A and VB_SYNTH should be decoupled with an additional 47pF capacitor, while VB_RAM and VB_DIG
require only 100nF. VB_RF and VB_RF2 should be connected together as close to the device as practical, and only
require one 100nF capacitor and one 47pF capacitor. The pin VB_VCO requires a 10nF capacitor in parallel with a
47pF capacitor. Refer to B.4.1 for schematic diagram.
VSSA, VSSS, VSS1, VSS2, VSS3 are the ground pins.
Users are strongly discouraged from connecting their own circuits to the 1.8v regulated supply pins, as the regulators
have been optimised to supply only enough current for the internal circuits.
2.2.2 Reset
RESETN is a bi-directional active low reset pin that is connected to a 40kΩ internal pull-up resistor. It may be pulled
low by an external circuit, or can be driven low by the JN5148 if an internal reset is generated. Typically, it will be
used to provide a system reset signal. Refer to section 6.2, External Reset, for more details.
2.2.3 32MHz Oscillator
A crystal is connected between XTALIN and XTALOUT to form the reference oscillator, which drives the system
clock. A capacitor to analogue ground is required on each of these pins. Refer to section 5.1 16MHz System Clock
for more details. The 32MHz reference frequency is divided down to 16MHz and this is used as the system clock
throughout the device.
2.2.4 Radio
The radio is a single ended design, requiring a capacitor and just two inductors to match to 50Ω microstrip line to the
RF_IN pin.
An external resistor (43kΩ) is required between IBIAS and analogue ground to set various bias currents and
references within the radio.© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 13
2.2.5 Analogue Peripherals
Several of the analogue peripherals require a reference voltage to use as part of their operations. They can use
either an internal reference voltage or an external reference connected to VREF. This voltage is referenced to
analogue ground and the performance of the analogue peripherals is dependant on the quality of this reference.
There are four ADC inputs, two pairs of comparator inputs and two DAC outputs. The analogue I/O pins on the
JN5148 can have signals applied up to 0.3v higher than VDD1. A schematic view of the analogue I/O cell is shown in
Figure 3: Analogue I/O Cell
In reset and deep sleep, the analogue peripherals are all off and the DAC outputs are in a high impedance state.
In sleep, the ADC and DACs are off, with the DAC outputs in high impedance state. The comparators may optionally
be used as a wakeup source.
Unused ADC and comparator inputs should be left unconnected.
VDD1
Analogue
I/O Pin
VSSA
Analogue
Peripheral
Figure 3: Analogue I/O Cell
2.2.6 Digital Input/Output
Digital I/O pins on the JN5148 can have signals applied up to 2V higher than VDD2 (with the exception of pins DIO9
and DIO10 that are 3V tolerant) and are therefore TTL-compatible with VDD2 > 3V. For other DC properties of these
pins see section 22.2.3 I/O Characteristics.
When used in their primary function all Digital Input/Output pins are bi-directional and are connected to weak internal
pull up resistors (40kΩ nominal) that can be disabled. When used in their secondary function (selected when the
appropriate peripheral block is enabled through software library calls) then their direction is fixed by the function. The
pull up resistor is enabled or disabled independently of the function and direction; the default state from reset is
enabled.
A schematic view of the digital I/O cell is in Figure 4: DIO Pin Equivalent Schematic.14 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
I
O
IE
VDD2
VSS
Pu
RPU
RPROT
OE
DIO[x] Pin
Figure 4: DIO Pin Equivalent Schematic
In reset, the digital peripherals are all off and the DIO pins are set as high-impedance inputs. During sleep and deep
sleep, the DIO pins retain both their input/output state and output level that was set as sleep commences. If the DIO
pins were enabled as inputs and the interrupts were enabled then these pins may be used to wake up the JN5148
from sleep.© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 15
3 CPU
The CPU of the JN5148 is a 32-bit load and store RISC processor. It has been architected for three key
requirements:
• Low power consumption for battery powered applications
• High performance to implement a wireless protocol at the same time as complex applications
• Efficient coding of high-level languages such as C provided with the NXP Software Developer’s Kit
It features a linear 32-bit logical address space with unified memory architecture, accessing both code and data in the
same address space. Registers for peripheral units, such as the timers, UARTs and the baseband processor are
also mapped into this space.
The CPU has access to a block of 15 32-bit General-Purpose (GP) registers together with a small number of special
purpose registers which are used to store processor state and control interrupt handling. The contents of any GP
register can be loaded from or stored to memory, while arithmetic and logical operations, shift and rotate operations,
and signed and unsigned comparisons can be performed either between two registers and stored in a third, or
between registers and a constant carried in the instruction. Operations between general or special-purpose registers
execute in one cycle while those that access memory require a further cycle to allow the memory to respond.
The instruction set manipulates 8, 16 and 32-bit data; this means that programs can use objects of these sizes very
efficiently. Manipulation of 32-bit quantities is particularly useful for protocols and high-end applications allowing
algorithms to be implemented in fewer instructions than on smaller word-size processors, and to execute in fewer
clock cycles. In addition, the CPU supports hardware Multiply that can be used to efficiently implement algorithms
needed by Digital Signal Processing applications.
The instruction set is designed for the efficient implementation of high-level languages such as C. Access to fields in
complex data structures is very efficient due to the provision of several addressing modes, together with the ability to
be able to use any of the GP registers to contain the address of objects. Subroutine parameter passing is also made
more efficient by using GP registers rather than pushing objects onto the stack. The recommended programming
method for the JN5148 is by using C, which is supported by a software developer kit comprising a C compiler, linker
and debugger.
The CPU architecture also contains features that make the processor suitable for embedded, real-time applications.
In some applications, it may be necessary to use a real-time operating system to allow multiple tasks to run on the
processor. To provide protection for device-wide resources being altered by one task and affecting another, the
processor can run in either supervisor or user mode, the former allowing access to all processor registers, while the
latter only allows the GP registers to be manipulated. Supervisor mode is entered on reset or interrupt; tasks starting
up would normally run in user mode in a RTOS environment.
Embedded applications require efficient handling of external hardware events. When using JenOS, prioritised
interrupts are supported, with 15 priority levels, and can be configured as required by the application.
To improve power consumption a number of power-saving modes are implemented in the JN5148, described more
fully in section 21 - Power Management and Sleep Modes. One of these modes is the CPU doze mode; under
software control, the processor can be shut down and on an interrupt it will wake up to service the request.
Additionally, it is possible under software control, to set the speed of the CPU to 4, 8, 16 or 32MHz. This feature can
be used to trade-off processing power against current consumption.16 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
4 Memory Organisation
This section describes the different memories found within the JN5148. The device contains ROM, RAM, OTP eFuse
memory, the wireless transceiver and peripherals all within the same linear address space.
0x00000000
0x00020000
RAM
(128kB)
0xF0000000
0xFFFFFFFF
Unpopulated
ROM
(128kB)
0xF0020000
RAM Echo
0x04000000
Peripherals
0x02000000
Figure 5: JN5148 Memory Map
4.1 ROM
The ROM is 128k bytes in size, and can be accessed by the processor in a single CPU clock cycle. The ROM
contents include bootloader to allow external Flash memory contents to be bootloaded into RAM at runtime, a default
interrupt vector table, an interrupt manager, IEEE802.15.4 MAC and APIs for interfacing on-chip peripherals. The
operation of the boot loader is described in detail in Application Note [7]. The interrupt manager routes interrupt calls
to the application’s soft interrupt vector table contained within RAM. Section 7 contains further information regarding
the handling of interrupts. ROM contents are shown in Figure 6.
Interrupt Vectors
Interrupt Manager
Boot Loader
IEEE802.15.4
Stack
0x00000000
0x00020000
APIs
Spare
Figure 6: Typical ROM contents© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 17
4.2 RAM
The JN5148 contains 128kBytes of high speed RAM. It can be used for both code and data storage and is accessed
by the CPU in a single clock cycle. At reset, a boot loader controls the loading of segments of code and data from an
external memory connected to the SPI port, into RAM. Software can control the power supply to the RAM allowing
the contents to be maintained during a sleep period when other parts of the device are un-powered. Typical RAM
contents are shown in Figure 7.
MAC Data
Interrupt Vector Table
Application
CPU Stack
(Grows Down)
0x04000000
0x04020000
MAC Address
Figure 7: Typical RAM Contents
4.3 OTP eFuse Memory
The JN5148 contains a total of 32bytes of eFuse memory; this is a One Time Programmable (OTP) memory that can
be used to support on chip 64-bit MAC ID and a 128-bit AES security key. A limited number of bits are available for
customer use for storage of configuration information; configuration of these is made through use of software APIs.
For further information on how to program and use the eFuse memory, please contact technical support via the online
tech-support system.
Alternatively, NXP can provide an eFuse programming service for customers that wish to use the eFuse but do not
wish to undertake this for themselves. For further details of this service, please contact your local NXP sales office.
4.4 External Memory
An external memory with an SPI interface may be used to provide storage for program code and data for the device
when external power is removed. The memory is connected to the SPI interface using select line SPISEL0; this
select line is dedicated to the external memory interface and is not available for use with other external devices. See
Figure 8 for connection details.
JN5148 Serial
Memory
SPISEL0
SPIMISO
SPIMOSI
SPICLK
SS
SDO
SDI
CLK
Figure 8: Connecting External Serial Memory18 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
At reset, the contents of this memory are copied into RAM by the software boot loader. The Flash memory devices
that are supported as standard through the JN5148 bootloader are given in Table 1. NXP recommends that where
possible one of these devices should be selected.
Manufacturer Device Number
SST (Silicon Storage Technology) 25VF010A (1Mbit device)
Numonyx M25P10-A (1Mbit device),
M25P40 (4Mbit device)
Table 1: Supported Flash Memories
Applications wishing to use an alternate Flash memory device should refer to application note [2] JN-AN-1038
Programming Flash devices not supported by the JN51xx ROM-based bootloader. This application note provides
guidance on developing an interface to an alternate device.
4.4.1 External Memory Encryption
The contents of the external serial memory may be encrypted. The AES security processor combined with a user
programmable 128-bit encryption key is used to encrypt the contents of the external memory. The encryption key is
stored in eFuse.
When bootloading program code from external serial memory, the JN5148 automatically accesses the encryption key
to execute the decryption process. User program code does not need to handle any of the decryption process; it is
transparent.
With encryption enabled, the time taken to boot code from external flash is increased.
4.5 Peripherals
All peripherals have their registers mapped into the memory space. Access to these registers requires 3 clock
cycles. Applications have access to the peripherals through the software libraries that present a high-level view of
the peripheral’s functions through a series of dedicated software routines. These routines provide both a tested
method for using the peripherals and allow bug-free application code to be developed more rapidly. For details, see
the JN51xx Integrated Peripherals API User Guide (JN-UG-3066)[5].
4.6 Unused Memory Addresses
Any attempt to access an unpopulated memory area will result in a bus error exception (interrupt) being generated.© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 19
5 System Clocks
Two system clocks are used to provide timing references into the on-chip subsystems of the JN5148. A 16MHz clock,
generated by a crystal-controlled 32MHz oscillator, is used by the transceiver, processor, memory and digital and
analogue peripherals. A 32kHz clock is used by the sleep timer and during the startup phase of the chip.
5.1 16MHz System Clock
The 16MHz system clock is used by the digital and analogue peripherals and the transceiver. A scaled version
(4,8,16 or 32MHz) of this clock is also used by the processor and memories. For most operations it is necessary to
source this clock from the 32MHz oscillator.
Crystal oscillators are generally slow to start. Hence to provide a faster start-up following a sleep cycle a fast RC
oscillator is provided that can be used as the source for the 16MHz system clock. The oscillator starts very quickly
and is typically 24MHz causing the system clock to run at 12MHz. Using a clock of this speed scales down the speed
of the processor and any peripherals in use. For the SPI interface this causes no functional issues as the generated
SPI clock is slightly slower and is used to clock the external SPI slave. Use of the radio is not possible when using the
24MHz RC oscillator. Additionally, timers and UARTs should not be used as the exact frequency will not be known.
The JN5148 device can be configured to wake up from sleep using the fast RC oscillator and automatically switch
over to use the 32MHz xtal as the clock source, when it has started up. This could allow application code to be
downloaded from the flash before the xtal is ready, typically improving start-up time by 550usec. Alternatively, the
switch over can be controlled by software, or the system could always use the 32MHz oscillator as the clock source.
5.1.1 32MHz Oscillator
The JN5148 contains the necessary on chip components to build a 32MHz reference oscillator with the addition of an
external crystal resonator and two tuning capacitors. The schematic of these components are shown in Figure 9.
The two capacitors, C1 and C2, should typically be 15pF and use a COG dielectric. Due to the small size of these
capacitors, it is important to keep the traces to the external components as short as possible. The on chip
transconductance amplifier is compensated for temperature variation, and is self-biasing by means of the internal
resistor R1. The electrical specification of the oscillator can be found in section 22.3.13. Please refer to Appendix B
for development support with the crystal oscillator circuit.
XTALOUT
C1 C2
R1 XTALIN
JN5148
Figure 9: 32MHz Crystal Oscillator Connections
5.1.2 24MHz RC Oscillator
An on-chip 24MHz RC oscillator is provided. No external components are required for this oscillator. The electrical
specification of the oscillator can be found in section 22.3.14.20 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
5.2 32kHz System Clock
The 32kHz system clock is used for timing the length of a sleep period (see section 21 Power Management and
Sleep Modes) and also to generate the system clock used internally during reset. The clock can be selected from
one of three sources through the application software:
• 32kHz RC Oscillator
• 32kHz Crystal Oscillator
• 32kHz External Clock
Upon a chip reset or power-up the JN5148 defaults to using the internal 32kHz RC Oscillator. If another clock source
is selected then it will remain in use for all 32kHz timing until a chip reset is performed.
5.2.1 32kHz RC Oscillator
The internal 32kHz RC oscillator requires no external components. The internal timing components of the oscillator
have a wide tolerance due to manufacturing process variation and so the oscillator runs nominally at 32kHz ±30%. To
make this useful as a timing source for accurate wakeup from sleep, a frequency calibration factor derived from the
more accurate 16MHz clock may be applied. The calibration factor is derived through software, details can be found
in section 11.3.1. For detailed electrical specifications, see section 22.3.11.
5.2.2 32kHz Crystal Oscillator
In order to obtain more accurate sleep periods, the JN5148 contains the necessary on-chip components to build a
32kHz oscillator with the addition of an external 32.768kHz crystal and two tuning capacitors. The crystal should be
connected between 32KXTALIN and 32KXTALOUT (DIO9 and DIO10), with two equal capacitors to ground, one on
each pin. Due to the small size of the capacitors, it is important to keep the traces to the external components as
short as possible.
The electrical specification of the oscillator can be found in section 22.3.12. The oscillator cell is flexible and can
operate with a range of commonly available 32.768kHz crystals with load capacitances from 6 to 12.5pF. However,
the maximum ESR of the crystal and the supply current are both functions of the actual crystal used, see appendix
B.1 for more details.
32KXTALIN 32KXTALOUT
JN5148
Figure 10: 32kHz crystal oscillator connections
5.2.3 32kHz External Clock
An externally supplied 32kHz reference clock on the 32KIN input (DIO9) may be provided to the JN5148. This would
allow the 32kHz system clock to be sourced from a very stable external oscillator module, allowing more accurate
sleep cycle timings compared to the internal RC oscillator. (See section 22.2.3 I/O Characteristics, DIO9 is a 3V
tolerant input)© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 21
6 Reset
A system reset initialises the device to a pre-defined state and forces the CPU to start program execution from the
reset vector. The reset process that the JN5148 goes through is as follows.
When power is applied, the 32kHz RC oscillator starts up and stabilises, which takes approximately 100µsec. At this
point, the 32MHz crystal oscillator is enabled and power is applied to the processor and peripheral logic. The logic
blocks are held in reset until the 32MHz crystal oscillator stabilises, typically this takes 0.75ms. Then the internal
reset is removed from the CPU and peripheral logic and the CPU starts to run code beginning at the reset vector,
consisting of initialisation code and the resident boot loader. [7] Section 22.3.1 provides detailed electrical data and
timing.
The JN5148 has five sources of reset:
• Internal Power-on Reset
• External Reset
• Software Reset
• Watchdog timer
• Brown-out detect
Note: When the device exits a reset condition, device operating
parameters (voltage, frequency, temperature, etc.) must be met to ensure
operation. If these conditions are not met, then the device must be held in
reset until the operating conditions are met. (See section 22.3)
6.1 Internal Power-on Reset
For the majority of applications the internal power-on reset is capable of generating the required reset signal. When
power is applied to the device, the power-on reset circuit monitors the rise of the VDD supply. When the VDD
reaches the specified threshold, the reset signal is generated and can be observed as a rising edge on the RESETN
pin. This signal is held internally until the power supply and oscillator stabilisation time has elapsed, when the internal
reset signal is then removed and the CPU is allowed to run.
RESETN Pin
Internal RESET
VDD
Figure 11: Internal Power-on Reset
When the supply drops below the power on reset ‘falling’ threshold, it will re-trigger the reset. Use of the external
reset circuit show in Figure 12 is suggested. 22 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
RESETN
C1
R1
JN5148
VDD
18k
470nF
Figure 12: External Reset Generation
The external resistor and capacitor provide a simple reset operation when connected to the RESETN pin.
6.2 External Reset
An external reset is generated by a low level on the RESETN pin. Reset pulses longer than the minimum pulse width
will generate a reset during active or sleep modes. Shorter pulses are not guaranteed to generate a reset. The
JN5148 is held in reset while the RESETN pin is low. When the applied signal reaches the Reset Threshold Voltage
(VRST) on its positive edge, the internal reset process starts.
Multiple devices may connect to the RESETN pin in an open-collector mode. The JN5148 has an internal pull-up
resistor connect to the RESETN pin. The pin is an input for an external reset, an output during the power-on reset
and may optionally be an output during a software reset. No devices should drive the RESETN pin high.
Internal Reset
RESETN pin
Reset
Figure 13: External Reset
6.3 Software Reset
A system reset can be triggered at any time through software control, causing a full chip reset and invalidating the
RAM contents. For example this can be executed within a user’s application upon detection of a system failure. When
performing the reset, the RESETN pin is driven low for 1µsec; depending on the external components this may or
may not be visible on the pin.
In addition, the RESETN line can be driven low by the JN5148 to provide a reset to other devices in the system (e.g.
external sensors) without resetting itself. When the RESETN line is not driven it will pull back high through either the
internal pull-up resistor or any external circuitry. It is essential to ensure that the RESETN line pulls back high within
100µsec after the JN5148 stops driving the line; otherwise a system reset will occur. Due to this, careful consideration
should be taken of any capacitance on this line. For instance, the RC values recommended in section 6.1 may need
to be replaced with a suitable reset IC© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 23
6.4 Brown-out Detect
An internal brown-out detect module is used to monitor the supply voltage to the JN5148; this can be used whilst the
device is awake or is in CPU doze mode. Dips in the supply voltage below a variable threshold can be detected and
can be used to cause the JN5148 to perform a chip reset. Equally, dips in the supply voltage can be detected and
used to cause an interrupt to the processor, when the voltage either drops below the threshold or rises above it.
The brown-out detect is enabled by default from power-up and can extend the reset during power-up. This will keep
the CPU in reset until the voltage exceeds the brown-out threshold voltage. The threshold voltage is configurable to
2.0V, 2.3V, 2.7V and 3.0V and is controllable by software. From power-up the threshold is set by eFuse settings and
the default chip configuration is for the 2.3V threshold. It is recommended that the threshold is set so that, as a
minimum, the chip is held in reset until the voltage reaches the level required by the external memory device on the
SPI interface.
6.5 Watchdog Timer
A watchdog timer is provided to guard against software lockups. It operates by counting cycles of the 32kHz system
clock. A pre-scaler is provided to allow the expiry period to be set between typically 8ms and 16.4 seconds. Failure
to restart the watchdog timer within the pre-configured timer period will cause a chip reset to be performed. A status
bit is set if the watchdog was triggered so that the software can differentiate watchdog initiated resets from other
resets, and can perform any required recovery once it restarts. If the source of the 32kHz system clock is the 32kHz
RC oscillator then the watchdog expiry periods are subject to the variation in period of the RC oscillator.
After power up, reset, start from deep sleep or start from sleep, the watchdog is always enabled with the largest
timeout period and will commence counting as if it had just been restarted. Under software control the watchdog can
be disabled. If it is enabled, the user must regularly restart the watchdog timer to stop it from expiring and causing a
reset. The watchdog runs continuously, even during doze, however the watchdog does not operate during sleep or
deep sleep, or when the hardware debugger has taken control of the CPU. It will recommence automatically if
enabled once the debugger un-stalls the CPU. 24 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
7 Interrupt System
The interrupt system on the JN5148 is a hardware-vectored interrupt system. The JN5148 provides several interrupt
sources, some associated with CPU operations (CPU exceptions) and others which are used by hardware in the
device. When an interrupt occurs, the CPU stops executing the current program and loads its program counter with a
fixed hardware address specific to that interrupt. The interrupt handler or interrupt service routine is stored at this
location and is run on the next CPU cycle. Execution of interrupt service routines is always performed in supervisor
mode. Interrupt sources and their vector locations are listed in Table 2 below:
Interrupt Source Vector Location Interrupt Definition
Bus error 0x08 Typically cause by an attempt to access an invalid address or a
disabled peripheral
Tick timer 0x0e Tick timer interrupt asserted
Alignment error 0x14 Load/store address to non-naturally-aligned location
Illegal instruction 0x1a Attempt to execute an unrecognised instruction
Hardware interrupt 0x20 interrupt asserted
System call 0x26 System call initiated by b.sys instruction
Trap 0x2c caused by the b.trap instruction or the debug unit
Reset 0x38 Caused by software or hardware reset.
Stack Overflow 0x3e Stack overflow
Table 2: Interrupt Vectors
7.1 System Calls
The b.trap and b.sys instructions allow processor exceptions to be generated by software.
A system call exception will be generated when the b.sys instruction is executed. This exception can, for example, be
used to enable a task to switch the processor into supervisor mode when a real time operating system is in use. (See
section 3 for further details.)
The b.trap instruction is commonly used for trapping errors and for debugging.
7.2 Processor Exceptions
7.2.1 Bus Error
A bus error exception is generated when software attempts to access a memory address that does not exist, or is not
populated with memory or peripheral registers or when writing to ROM.
7.2.2 Alignment
Alignment exceptions are generated when software attempts to access objects that are not aligned to natural word
boundaries. 16-bit objects must be stored on even byte boundaries, while 32-bit objects must be stored on quad byte
boundaries. For instance, attempting to read a 16-bit object from address 0xFFF1 will trigger an alignment exception
as will a read of a 32-bit object from 0xFFF1, 0xFFF2 or 0xFFF3. Examples of legal 32-bit object addresses are
0xFFF0, 0xFFF4, 0xFFF8 etc.
7.2.3 Illegal Instruction
If the CPU reads an unrecognised instruction from memory as part of its instruction fetch, it will cause an illegal
instruction exception.
7.2.4 Stack Overflow
When enabled, a stack overflow exception occurs if the stack pointer reaches a programmable location.© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 25
7.3 Hardware Interrupts
Hardware interrupts generated from the transceiver, analogue or digital peripherals and DIO pins are individually
masked using the Programmable Interrupt Controller (PIC). Management of interrupts is provided in the peripherals
library [5]. For details of the interrupts generated from each peripheral see the respective section in this datasheet.
Interrupts can be used to wake the JN5148 from sleep. The peripherals, baseband controller, security coprocessor
and PIC are powered down during sleep but the DIO interrupts and optionally the pulse counters, wake-up timers and
analogue comparator interrupts remain powered to bring the JN5148 out of sleep.
Prioritised external interrupt handling (i.e., interrupts from hardware peripherals) is provided to enable an application
to control an events priority to provide for deterministic program execution.
The priority Interrupt controller provides 15 levels of prioritised interrupts. The priority level of all interrupts can be set,
with value 0 being used to indicate that the source can never produce an external interrupt, 1 for the lowest priority
source(s) and 15 for the highest priority source(s). Note that multiple interrupt sources can be assigned the same
priority level if desired.
If while processing an interrupt, a new event occurs at the same or lower priority level, a new external interrupt will
not be triggered. However, if a new higher priority event occurs, the external interrupt will again be asserted,
interrupting the current interrupt service routine.
Once the interrupt service routine is complete, lower priority events can be serviced. 26 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
8 Wireless Transceiver
The wireless transceiver comprises a 2.45GHz radio, modem, a baseband processor, a security coprocessor and
PHY controller. These blocks, with protocol software provided as a library, implement an IEEE802.15.4 standardsbased
wireless transceiver that transmits and receives data over the air in the unlicensed 2.4GHz band.
8.1 Radio
Figure 14 shows the single ended radio architecture.
LNA
synth
PA
ADC Reference
& Bias
Switch
Radio
Calibration
Lim1
Lim2
Lim3
Lim4
sigma
delta
D-Type
Figure 14: Radio Architecture
The radio comprises a low-IF receive path and a direct modulation transmit path, which converge at the TX/RX
switch. The switch connects to the external single ended matching network, which consists of two inductors and a
capacitor, this arrangement creates a 50Ω port and removes the need for a balun. A 50Ω single ended antenna can
be connected directly to this port.
The 32MHz crystal oscillator feeds a divider, which provides the frequency synthesiser with a reference frequency.
The synthesiser contains programmable feedback dividers, phase detector, charge pump and internal Voltage
Controlled Oscillator (VCO). The VCO has no external components, and includes calibration circuitry to compensate
for differences in internal component values due to process and temperature variations. The VCO is controlled by a
Phase Locked Loop (PLL) that has an internal loop filter. A programmable charge pump is also used to tune the loop
characteristic.
The receiver chain starts with the low noise amplifier / mixer combination whose outputs are passed to a lowpass
filter, which provides the channel definition. The signal is then passed to a series of amplifier blocks forming a limiting
strip. The signal is converted to a digital signal before being passed to the Modem. The gain control for the RX path
is derived in the automatic gain control (AGC) block within the Modem, which samples the signal level at various
points down the RX chain. To improve the performance and reduce current consumption, automatic calibration is
applied to various blocks in the RX path.
In the transmit direction, the digital stream from the Modem is passed to a digital sigma-delta modulator which
controls the feedback dividers in the synthesiser, (dual point modulation). The VCO frequency now tracks the applied
modulation. The 2.4 GHz signal from the VCO is then passed to the RF Power Amplifier (PA), whose power control
can be selected from one of three settings. The output of the PA drives the antenna via the RX/TX switch© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 27
8.1.1 Radio External Components
In order to realise the full performance of the radio it is essential that the reference PCB layout and BOM are carefully
followed. See Appendix B.4.
The radio is powered from a number of internal 1.8V regulators fed from the analogue supply VDD1, in order to
provide good noise isolation between the digital logic of the JN5148 and the analogue blocks. These regulators are
also controlled by the baseband controller and protocol software to minimise power consumption. Decoupling for
internal regulators is required as described in section 2.2.1, Power Supplies
For single ended antennas or connectors, a balun is not required, however a matching network is needed.
The RF matching network requires three external components and the IBIAS pin requires one external component as
shown in schematic in B.4.1. These components are critical and should be placed close to the JN5148 pins and
analogue ground as defined in Table 8: JN5148 Printed Antenna Reference Module Components and PCB Layout
Constraints. Specifically, the output of the network comprising L2, C1 and L1 is designed to present an accurate
match to a 50 ohm resistive network as well as provide a DC path to the final output stage or antenna. Users wishing
to match to other active devices such as amplifiers should design their networks to match to 50 ohms at the output of
L1
R1 43K
IBIAS
C20 100nF
L2 2.7nH
VB_RF
VREF
VB_RF2
RF_IN C12 47pF
C3 100nF
VB_RF1
C1 47pF L1 5.6nH
To Coaxial Socket
or Integrated Antenna
VB_RF
Figure 15 External Radio Components
8.1.2 Antenna Diversity
Support is provided for antenna diversity. Antenna diversity is a technique that maximises the performance of an
antenna system. It allows the radio to switch between two antennas that have very low correlation between their
received signals. Typically, this is achieved by spacing two antennas around 0.25 wavelengths apart or by using two
orthogonal polarisations. So, if a packet is transmitted and no acknowledgement is received, the radio system can
switch to the other antenna for the retry, with a different probability of success.
The JN5148 provides an output (ADO) on DIO12 that is asserted on odd numbered retries and optionally its
complement (ADE) on DIO13, that can be used to control an antenna switch; this enables antenna diversity to be
implemented easily (see Figure 16 and Figure 17).28 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
Antenna A Antenna B
A B
COM
SEL
SELB
ADO (DIO[12])
ADE (DIO[13])
Device RF Port
RF Switch: Single-Pole, Double-Throw (SPDT)
Figure 16 Simple Antenna Diversity Implementation using External RF Switch
ADO (DIO[12])
TX Active
RX Active
ADE (DIO[13])
1st TX-RX Cycle 2nd TX-RX Cycle (1st Retry)
Figure 17 Antenna Diversity ADO Signal for TX with Acknowledgement
If two DIO pins cannot be spared, DIO13 can be configured to be a normal DIO pin, and the inverse of ADO
generated with an inverter on the PCB. © NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 29
8.2 Modem
The modem performs all the necessary modulation and spreading functions required for digital transmission and
reception of data at 250kbps in the 2450MHz radio frequency band in compliance with the IEEE802.15.4 standard. It
also provides a high data rate modes at 500 and 667kbps.
AGC Demodulation
Symbol
Detection
(Despreading)
Modulation Spreading
TX
RX
TX Data
Interface
RX Data
Interface
VCO
Sigma-Delta
Modulator
IF Signal
Gain
Figure 18 Modem Architecture
Features provided to support network channel selection algorithms include Energy Detection (ED), Link Quality
Indication (LQI) and fully programmable Clear Channel Assessment (CCA).
The Modem provides a digital Receive Signal Strength Indication (RSSI) that facilitates the implementation of the
IEEE 802.15.4 ED function and LQI function.
The ED and LQI are both related to receiver power in the same way, as shown in Fig19. LQI is associated with a
received packet, whereas ED is an indication of signal power on air at a particular moment.
The CCA capability of the Modem supports all modes of operation defined in the IEEE 802.15.4 standard, namely
Energy above ED threshold, Carrier Sense and Carrier Sense and/or energy above ED threshold.
Figure 19 Energy Detect Value vs Receive Power Level30 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
8.3 Baseband Processor
The baseband processor provides all time-critical functions of the IEEE802.15.4 MAC layer. Dedicated hardware
guarantees air interface timing is precise. The MAC layer hardware/software partitioning, enables software to
implement the sequencing of events required by the protocol and to schedule timed events with millisecond
resolution, and the hardware to implement specific events with microsecond timing resolution. The protocol software
layer performs the higher-layer aspects of the protocol, sending management and data messages between endpoint
and coordinator nodes, using the services provided by the baseband processor.
Append
Checksum
Verify
Checksum
CSMA CCA Backoff
Control
Deserialiser
Serialiser
Tx/Rx
Frame
Buffer
Tx
Bitstream
Rx
Bitstream
Protocol Timing Engine
Supervisor
Radio
Status
Control
Processor
Bus
Protocol
Timers
Security Coprocessor
Decrypt
Port
Encrypt
Port
AES
Codec
Figure 20: Baseband Processor
8.3.1 Transmit
A transmission is performed by software writing the data to be transferred into the Tx/Rx Frame Buffer, together with
parameters such as the destination address and the number of retries allowed, and programming one of the protocol
timers to indicate the time at which the frame is to be sent. This time will be determined by the software tracking the
higher-layer aspects of the protocol such as superframe timing and slot boundaries. Once the packet is prepared and
protocol timer set, the supervisor block controls the transmission. When the scheduled time arrives, the supervisor
controls the sequencing of the radio and modem to perform the type of transmission required. It can perform all the
algorithms required by IEEE802.15.4 such as CSMA/CA, GTS without processor intervention including retries and
random backoffs.
When the transmission begins, the header of the frame is constructed from the parameters programmed by the
software and sent with the frame data through the serialiser to the Modem. At the same time, the radio is prepared
for transmission. During the passage of the bitstream to the modem, it passes through a CRC checksum generator
that calculates the checksum on-the-fly, and appends it to the end of the frame.
If using slotted access, it is possible for a transmission to overrun the time in its allocated slot; the Baseband
Processor handles this situation autonomously and notifies the protocol software via interrupt, rather than requiring it
to handle the overrun explicitly.
8.3.2 Reception
During reception, the radio is set to receive on a particular channel. On receipt of data from the modem, the frame is
directed into the Tx/Rx Frame Buffer where both header and frame data can be read by the protocol software. An
interrupt may be provided on receipt of the frame header. As the frame data is being received from the modem it is
passed through a checksum generator; at the end of the reception the checksum result is compared with the
checksum at the end of the message to ensure that the data has been received correctly. An interrupt may be © NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 31
provided to indicate successful packet reception. During reception, the modem determines the Link Quality, which is
made available at the end of the reception as part of the requirements of IEEE802.15.4.
8.3.3 Auto Acknowledge
Part of the protocol allows for transmitted frames to be acknowledged by the destination sending an acknowledge
packet within a very short window after the transmitted frame has been received. The JN5148 baseband processor
can automatically construct and send the acknowledgement packet without processor intervention and hence avoid
the protocol software being involved in time-critical processing within the acknowledge sequence. The JN5148
baseband processor can also request an acknowledge for packets being transmitted and handle the reception of
acknowledged packets without processor intervention.
8.3.4 Beacon Generation
In beaconing networks, the baseband processor can automatically generate and send beacon frames; the repetition
rate of the beacons is programmed by the CPU, and the baseband then constructs the beacon contents from data
delivered by the CPU. The baseband processor schedules the beacons and transmits them without CPU
intervention.
8.3.5 Security
The transmission and reception of secured frames using the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) algorithm is
handled by the security coprocessor and the stack software. The application software must provide the appropriate
encrypt/decrypt keys for the transmission or reception. On transmission, the key can be programmed at the same
time as the rest of the frame data and setup information.
8.4 Security Coprocessor
The security coprocessor is available to the application software to perform encryption/decryption operations. A
hardware implementation of the encryption engine significantly speeds up the processing of the encrypted packets
over a pure software implementation. The AES library for the JN5148 provides operations that utilise the encryption
engine in the device and allow the contents of memory buffers to be transformed. Information such as the type of
security operation to be performed and the encrypt/decrypt key to be used must also be provided.
Processor
Interface
AES
Block
Encrpytion
Controller
AES Encoder
Key Generation
Figure 21: Security Coprocessor Architecture
8.5 Location Awareness
The JN5148 provides the ability for an application to obtain the Time Of Flight (TOF) between two network nodes.
The TOF information is an alternative metric to that of the existing Energy Detect value (RSSI) that has been typically
used for calculating the relative inter-nodal separation, for subsequent use in a location awareness system.
For short ranges RSSI will typically give a better accuracy than TOF, however for distances above 5 to 10 meters
TOF will offer significant improvements in accuracy compared to RSSI. In general, the RSSI error scales with
distance, such that if the distance doubles then the error doubles.32 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
8.6 Higher Data Rates
To support the demands of applications that require high data throughputs such as in audio or data streaming
applications, the JN5148 supports higher data rate modes that offer 500kbps or 667kbps on air transmission rates.
The switching between standard and higher data rates is controlled via software, When operating in a higher data
rate mode standard IEEE802.15.4 features, such as clear channel assessment, can still be used. This allows the
JN5148 in a higher data rate mode to co-exist in an IEEE802.15.4 based network (adhering to the correct bit rates
and frame timing etc.) whilst at the same time providing the benefit of the higher data rate where required.
When operating in a higher data rate mode, the receive sensitivity will be degraded by at least 3dB.© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 33
9 Digital Input/Output
There are 21 Digital I/O (DIO) pins, which can be configured as either an input or an output, and each has a
selectable internal pull-up resistor. Most DIO pins are multiplexed with alternate peripheral features of the device,
see section 2.1. Once a peripheral is enabled it takes precedence over the device pins. Refer to the individual
module sections for a full description of the alternate peripherals functions. Following a reset (and whilst the reset
input is held low), all peripherals are off and the DIO pins are configured as inputs with the internals pull-ups turned
on.
When a peripheral is not enabled, the DIO pins associated with it can be used as digital inputs or outputs. Each pin
can be controlled individually by setting the direction and then reading or writing to the pin.
The individual pull-up resistors, RPU, can also be enabled or disabled as needed and the setting is held through sleep
cycles. The pull-ups are generally configured once after reset depending on the external components and
functionality. For instance, outputs should generally have the pull-ups disabled. An input that is always driven should
also have the pull-up disabled.
When configured as an input each pin can be used to generate an interrupt upon a change of state (selectable
transition either from low to high or high to low); the interrupt can be enabled or disabled. When the device is
sleeping, these interrupts become events that can be used to wake the device up. Equally the status of the interrupt
may be read. See section 21 Power Management and Sleep Modes for further details on sleep and wakeup.
The state of all DIO pins can be read, irrespective of whether the DIO is configured as an input or an output.
Throughout a sleep cycle the direction of the DIO, and the state of the outputs, is held. This is based on the resultant
of the GPIO Data/ Direction registers and the effect of any enabled peripherals at the point of entering sleep.
Following a wake-up these directions and output values are maintained under control of the GPIO data / direction
registers. Any peripherals enabled before the sleep cycle are not automatically re-enabled, this must be done through
software after the wake-up.
For example, if DIO0 is configured to be SPISEL1 then it becomes an output. The output value is controlled by the
SPI functional block. If the device then enters a sleep cycle, the DIO will remain an output and hold the value being
output when entering sleep. After wake-up the DIO will still be an output with the same value but controlled from the
GPIO Data/Direction registers. It can be altered with the software functions that adjust the DIO, or the application may
re-configure it to be SPISEL1.
Unused DIO pins are recommended to be set as inputs with the pull-up enabled.
Two DIO pins can optionally be used to provide control signals for RF circuitry (eg switches and PA) in high power
range extenders.
DIO3 / RFTX is asserted when the radio is in the transmit state and similarly, DIO2 / RFRX is asserted when the radio
is in the receiver state.34 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
4-wire
Digital Audio
Interface
Antenna
Diversity
JTAG
Debug
Pulse
Counters
Intelligent
Peripheral
MUX
2-wire
Interface
Timer2
Timer1
Timer0
UART1
UART0
SPI
Master SPISEL1
SPISEL2
SPISEL3
SPISEL4
TXD0
RXD0
RTS0
CTS0
TXD1
RXD1
RTS1
CTS1
TIM0CK_GT
TIM0OUT
TIM0CAP
TIM1CK_GT
TIM1OUT
TIM1CAP
TIM2OUT
SIF_D
SIF_CLK
IP_DO
IP_DI
IP_INT
IP_CLK
IP_SEL
PC0
PC1
JTAG_TDI
JTAG_TMS
JTAG_TCK
JTAG_TDO
ADO
ADE
I2S_OUT
I2S_DIN
I2S_CLK
I2S_SYNC
SPICLK
SPIMOSI
SPIMISO
SPISEL0
DIO0/SPISEL1
DIO1/SPISEL2/PC0
DIO2/SPISEL3/RFRX
DIO3/SPISEL4/RFTX
DIO4/CTS0/JTAG_TCK
DIO5/RTS0/JTAG_TMS
DIO6/TXD0/JTAG_TDO
DIO7/RXD0/JTAG_TDI
DIO8/TIM0CK_GT/PC1
DIO9/TIM0CAP/32KXTALIN/32KIN
DIO10/TIM0OUT/32KXTALOUT
DIO11/TIM1CK_GT/TIM2OUT
DIO12/TIM1CAP/ADO/DAI_WS
DIO13/TIM1OUT/ADE/DAI_SDN
DIO14/SIF_CLK/IP_CLK
DIO15/SIF_D/IP_DO
DIO16/IP_DI
DIO17/CTS1/IP_SEL/DAI_SCK/
JTAG_TCK
DIO18/RTS1/IP_INT/DAI_SDOUT/
JTAG_TMS
DIO19/TXD1/JTAG_TDO
DIO20/RXD1/JTAG_TDI
Figure 22 DIO Block Diagram© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 35
10 Serial Peripheral Interface
The Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) allows high-speed synchronous data transfer between the JN5148 and
peripheral devices. The JN5148 operates as a master on the SPI bus and all other devices connected to the SPI are
expected to be slave devices under the control of the JN5148 CPU. The SPI includes the following features:
• Full-duplex, three-wire synchronous data transfer
• Programmable bit rates (up to 16Mbit/s)
• Programmable transaction size up to 32-bits
• Standard SPI modes 0,1,2 and 3
• Manual or Automatic slave select generation (up to 5 slaves)
• Maskable transaction complete interrupt
• LSB First or MSB First Data Transfer
• Supports delayed read edges
Clock
Divider
SPI Bus
Cycle
Controller
Data Buffer
DIV
Clock Edge
Select
Data
CHAR_LEN
LSB
SPIMISO
SPIMOSI
SPICLK
Select
Latch
SPISEL [4..0]
16 MHz
Figure 23: SPI Block Diagram
The SPI bus employs a simple shift register data transfer scheme. Data is clocked out of and into the active devices
in a first-in, first-out fashion allowing SPI devices to transmit and receive data simultaneously.
There are three dedicated pins SPICLK, SPIMOSI, SPIMISO that are shared across all devices on the bus. MasterOut-Slave-In
or Master-In-Slave-Out data transfer is relative to the clock signal SPICLK generated by the JN5148.
The JN5148 provides five slave selects, SPISEL0 to SPISEL4 to allow five SPI peripherals on the bus. SPISEL0 is a
dedicated pin; this is generally connected to a serial Flash/ EEPROM memory holding application code that is
downloaded to internal RAM via software from reset. SPISEL1 to 4, are alternate functions of pins DIO0 to 3
respectively.
The interface can transfer from 1 to 32-bits without software intervention and can keep the slave select lines asserted
between transfers when required, to enable longer transfers to be performed.
When the device reset is active, the three outputs SPISEL, SPICLK and SPI_MOSI are tri-stated and SPI_MISO is
set to be an input. The pull-up resistors associated with all four pins will be active at this time. 36 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013 SI
C
SO
SS
Slave 0
Flash/
EEPROM
Memory
JN5148
37
38
41
42
43
36
33
34
SI
C
SO
SS
Slave 1
User
Defined
SI
C
SO
SS
Slave 2
User
Defined
SI
C
SO
SS
Slave 3
User
Defined
SI
C
SO
SS
Slave 4
User
Defined
SPIMISO
SPIMOSI
SPICLK
SPISEL4
SPISEL2
SPISEL3
SPISEL1
SPISEL0
Figure 24: Typical JN5148 SPI Peripheral Connection
The data transfer rate on the SPI bus is determined by the SPICLK signal. The JN5148 supports transfers at
selectable data rates from 16MHz to 125kHz selected by a clock divider. Both SPICLK clock phase and polarity are
configurable. The clock phase determines which edge of SPICLK is used by the JN5148 to present new data on the
SPIMOSI line; the opposite edge will be used to read data from the SPIMISO line. The interface should be configured
appropriately for the SPI slave being accessed.
SPICLK
Mode Description
Polarity
(CPOL)
Phase
(CPHA)
0 0 0 SPICLK is low when idle – the first edge is positive.
Valid data is output on SPIMOSI before the first clock and changes every
negative edge. SPIMISO is sampled every positive edge.
0 1 1 SPICLK is low when idle – the first edge is positive.
Valid data is output on SPIMOSI every positive edge. SPIMISO is sampled every
negative edge.
1 0 2 SPICLK is high when idle – the first edge is negative.
Valid data is output on SPIMOSI before the first clock edge and is changed
every positive edge. SPIMISO is sampled every negative edge.
1 1 3 SPICLK is high when idle – the first edge is negative.
Valid data is output on SPIMOSI every negative edge. SPIMISO is sampled
every positive edge.
Table 3 SPI Configurations
If more than one SPISEL line is to be used in a system they must be used in numerical order starting from SPISEL0.
For instance if 3 SPI select lines are to be used, they must be SPISEL0, 1 and 2. A SPISEL line can be automatically
deasserted between transactions if required, or it may stay asserted over a number of transactions. For devices such
as memories where a large amount of data can be received by the master by continually providing SPICLK
transitions, the ability for the select line to stay asserted is an advantage since it keeps the slave enabled over the
whole of the transfer.
A transaction commences with the SPI bus being set to the correct configuration, and then the slave device is
selected. Upon commencement of transmission (1 to 32 bits) data is placed in the FIFO data buffer and clocked out,
at the same time generating the corresponding SPICLK transitions. Since the transfer is full-duplex, the same
number of data bits is being received from the slave as it transmits. The data that is received during this transmission
can be read (1 to 32 bits). If the master simply needs to provide a number of SPICLK transitions to allow data to be © NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 37
sent from a slave, it should perform transmit using dummy data. An interrupt can be generated when the transaction
has completed or alternatively the interface can be polled.
If a slave device wishes to signal the JN5148 indicating that it has data to provide, it may be connected to one of the
DIO pins that can be enabled as an interrupt.
Figure 25 shows a complex SPI transfer, reading data from a FLASH device, that can be achieved using the SPI
master interface. The slave select line must stay low for many separate SPI accesses, and therefore manual slave
select mode must be used. The required slave select can then be asserted (active low) at the start of the transfer. A
sequence 8 and 32 bit transfers can be used to issue the command and address to the FLASH device and then to
read data back. Finally, the slave select can be deselected to end the transaction.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Instruction (0x03)
23 22 21 3 2 1 0
8 9 10 28 29 30 31
24-bit Address
MSB
Instruction Transaction
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
MSB
0 1 2 3 4 5 7 8N-1
3 2 1 0
LSB
Read Data Bytes Transaction(s) 1-N
SPISEL
SPICLK
SPIMOSI
SPIMISO
SPISEL
SPICLK
SPIMOSI
SPIMISO
8 9 10
7 6 5
MSB
Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte N
value unused by peripherals
6
Figure 25: Example SPI Waveforms – Reading from FLASH device using Mode 038 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
11 Timers
11.1 Peripheral Timer/Counters
Three general-purpose timer/counter units are available that can be independently configured to operate in one of
five possible modes. Timer 0 and 1 support all 5 modes of operation and Timer 2 supports PWM and Delta-Sigma
modes only. The timers have the following:
• 5-bit prescaler, divides system clock by 2 prescale value as the clock to the timer (prescaler range is 0 to 16)
• Clocked from internal system clock (16MHz)
• 16-bit counter, 16-bit Rise and Fall (period) registers
• Timer: can generate interrupts off Rise and Fall counts. Can be gated by external signal
• Counter: counts number of transitions on external event signal. Can use low-high, high-low or both
transitions
• PWM/Single pulse: outputs repeating Pulse Width Modulation signal or a single pulse. Can set period and
mark-space ratio
• Capture: measures times between transitions of an applied signal
• Delta-Sigma: Return-To-Zero (RTZ) and Non-Return-to-Zero (NRZ) modes
• Timer usage of external IO can be controlled on a pin by pin basis
Interrupt
Generator
Rise
Fall
Delta-Sigma
Counter
Reset Generator
=
Prescaler
INT
Int Enable
SYSCLK
S/w
Reset
System
Reset
Single
Shot
=
S
R
OE
Gate
Gate
Edge
Select
Reset
PWM/DeltaSigma
Capture
Generator
Capture
Enable
PWM/∆−Σ
PWM/∆−Σ
TIMxCK_GT
TIMxOUT
TIMxCAP
Figure 26: Timer Unit Block Diagram© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 39
The clock source for the timer unit is fed from the 16MHz system clock. This clock passes to a 5-bit prescaler where a
value of 0 leaves the clock unmodified and other values divide it by 2 prescale value. For example, a prescale value of
2 applied to the 16MHz system clock source results in a timer clock of 4MHz.
The counter is optionally gated by a signal on the clock/gate input (TIMxCK_GT). If the gate function is selected,
then the counter is frozen when the clock/gate input is high.
An interrupt can be generated whenever the counter is equal to the value in either of the High or Low registers.
The internal Output Enable (OE) signal enables or disables the timer output.
The Timer 0 signals CK_GT, CAP and OUT are alternate functions of pins DIO8, 9 and 10 respectively and Timer 1
signals CK_GT, CAP and OUT are alternate functions of pins DIO11, 12, and 13 respectively. Timer 2 OUT is an
alternate function of DIO11 If operating in timer mode it is not necessary to use any of the DIO pins, allowing the
standard DIO functionality to be available to the application.
Note, timer 0 may only be used as an internal timer or in counter mode (counting events) if an external 32kHz crystal
is used. If timer 2 is used in PWM or Delta-Sigma mode then timer 1 does not have access to its clock/gate pin.
Therefore, it can not operate in counter mode (counting events) or use the gate function.
11.1.1 Pulse Width Modulation Mode
Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) mode allows the user to specify an overall cycle time and pulse length within the
cycle. The pulse can be generated either as a single shot or as a train of pulses with a repetition rate determined by
the cycle time.
In this mode, the cycle time and low periods of the PWM output signal can be set by the values of two independent
16-bit registers (Fall and Rise). The counter increments and its output is compared to the 16-bit Rise and Fall
registers. When the counter is equal to the Rise register, the PWM output is set to high; when the counter reaches
the Fall value, the output returns to low. In continuous mode, when the counter reaches the Fall value, it will reset
and the cycle repeats. The PWM waveform is available on TIMxOUT when the output driver is enabled.
Rise
Fall
Figure 27: PWM Output Timings
11.1.2 Capture Mode
The capture mode can be used to measure the time between transitions of a signal applied to the capture input
(TIMxCAP). When the capture is started, on the next low-to-high transition of the captured signal, the count value is
stored in the Rise register, and on the following high-to-low transition, the counter value is stored in the Fall register.
The pulse width is the difference in counts in the two registers multiplied by the period of the prescaled clock. Upon
reading the capture registers the counter is stopped. The values in the High and Low registers will be updated
whenever there is a corresponding transition on the capture input, and the value stored will be relative to when the
mode was started. Therefore, if multiple pulses are seen on TIMxCAP before the counter is stopped only the last
pulse width will be stored.40 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
CLK
CAPT
x 9 3
x 14
t
RISE t
RISE
t
FALL t
FALL
Rise
Fall
9 5 3 4
7
Capture Mode Enabled
Figure 28: Capture Mode
11.1.3 Counter/Timer Mode
The counter/timer can be used to generate interrupts, based on the timers or event counting, for software to use. As
a timer the clock source is from the system clock, prescaled if required. The timer period is programmed into the Fall
register and the Fall register match interrupt enabled. The timer is started as either a single-shot or a repeating timer,
and generates an interrupt when the counter reaches the Fall register value.
When used to count external events on TIMxCK_GT the clock source is selected from the input pin and the number
of events programmed into the Fall register. The Fall register match interrupt is enabled and the counter started,
usually in single shot mode. An interrupt is generated when the programmed number of transitions is seen on the
input pin. The transitions counted can configured to be rising, falling or both rising and falling edges.
Edges on the event signal must be at least 100nsec apart, i.e. pulses must be wider than 100nsec.
11.1.4 Delta-Sigma Mode
A separate delta-sigma mode is available, allowing a low speed delta-sigma DAC to be implemented with up to 16-bit
resolution. This requires that a resistor-capacitor network is placed between the output DIO pin and digital ground. A
stream of pulses with digital voltage levels is generated which is integrated by the RC network to give an analogue
voltage. A conversion time is defined in terms of a number of clock cycles. The width of the pulses generated is the
period of a clock cycle. The number of pulses output in the cycle, together with the integrator RC values, will
determine the resulting analogue voltage. For example, generating approximately half the number of pulses that
make up a complete conversion period will produce a voltage on the RC output of VDD1/2, provided the RC time
constant is chosen correctly. During a conversion, the pulses will be pseudo-randomly dispersed throughout the
cycle in order to produce a steady voltage on the output of the RC network.
The output signal is asserted for the number of clock periods defined in the High register, with the total period being
216 cycles. For the same value in the High register, the pattern of pulses on subsequent cycles is different, due to the
pseudo-random distribution.
The delta-sigma convertor output can operate in a Return-To-Zero (RTZ) or a Non-Return-to-Zero (NRZ) mode. The
NRZ mode will allow several pulses to be output next to each other. The RTZ mode ensures that each pulse is
separated from the next by at least one period. This improves linearity if the rise and fall times of the output are
different to one another. Essentially, the output signal is low on every other output clock period, and the conversion
cycle time is twice the NRZ cycle time ie 217 clocks. The integrated output will only reach half VDD2 in RTZ mode,
since even at full scale only half the cycle contains pulses. Figure 29 and Figure 30 illustrate the difference between
RTZ and NRZ for the same programmed number of pulses.© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 41
1 2 3 1 2 N
Conversion cycle 1
217
N
Conversion cycle 2
3
Figure 29: Return To Zero Mode in Operation
1 2 3 1 2 N
Conversion cycle 1
N 3
216 Conversion cycle 2
Figure 30: Non-Return to Zero Mode
11.1.5 Example Timer / Counter Application
Figure 31 shows an application of the JN5148 timers to provide closed loop speed control. Timer 0 is configured in
PWM mode to provide a variable mark-space ratio switching waveform to the gate of the NFET. This in turn controls
the power in the DC motor.
Timer 1 is configured to count the rising edge events on the clk/gate pin over a constant period. This converts the
tacho pulse stream output into a count proportional to the motor speed. This value is then used by the application
software executing the control algorithm.
If required for other functionality, then the unused IO associated with the timers could be used as general purpose
DIO.
JN5148
Timer 0
Timer 1
CLK/GATE
CLK/GATE
CAPTURE
CAPTURE
PWM
PWM
M Tacho
48
50
52
53
54
1N4007
+12V
IRF521 51
1 pulse/rev
Figure 31: Closed Loop PWM Speed Control Using JN5148 Timers
11.2 Tick Timer
The JN5148 contains a hardware timer that can be used for generating timing interrupts to software. It may be used
to implement regular events such as ticks for software timers or an operating system, as a high-precision timing
reference or can be used to implement system monitor timeouts as used in a watchdog timer. Features include:
• 32-bit counter42 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
• 28-bit match value
• Maskable timer interrupt
• Single-shot, Restartable or Continuous modes of operation
Match Value
Counter
=
Mode
Control
&
&
SysClk
Run
Match
Int
Enable
Tick Timer
Interrupt
Reset
Mode
Figure 32: Tick Timer
The Tick Timer is clocked from a continuous 16MHz clock, which is fed to a 32-bit wide resettable up-counter, gated
by a signal from the mode control block. A match register allows comparison between the counter and a
programmed value. The match value, measured in 16MHz clock cycles is programmed through software, in the
range 0 to 0x0FFFFFFF. The output of the comparison can be used to generate an interrupt if the interrupt is
enabled and used in controlling the counter in the different modes. Upon configuring the timer mode, the counter is
also reset.
If the mode is programmed as single shot, the counter begins to count from zero until the match value is reached.
The match signal will be generated which will cause an interrupt if enabled, and the counter will stop counting. The
counter is restarted by reprogramming the mode.
If the mode is programmed as restartable, the operation of the counter is the same as for the single shot mode,
except that when the match value is reached the counter is reset and begins counting from zero. An interrupt will be
generated when the match value is reached if it is enabled.
Continuous mode operation is similar to restartable, except that when the match value is reached, the counter is not
reset but continues to count. An interrupt will be generated when the match value is reached if enabled.
11.3 Wakeup Timers
Two 32-bit wakeup timers are available in the JN5148 driven from the 32kHz internal clock. They may run during
sleep periods when the majority of the rest of the device is powered down, to time sleep periods or other long period
timings that may be required by the application. The wakeup timers do not run during deep sleep and may optionally
be disabled in sleep mode through software control. When a wakeup timer expires it typically generates an interrupt,
if the device is asleep then the interrupt may be used as an event to end the sleep period. See Section 21 for further
details on how they are used during sleep periods. Features include:
• 35-bit down-counter
• Optionally runs during sleep periods
• Clocked by 32kHz system clock; either 32kHz RC oscillator, 32kHz XTAL oscillator or 32kHz clock input© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 43
A wakeup timer consists of a 35-bit down counter clocked from the selected 32 kHz clock. An interrupt or wakeup
event can be generated when the counter reaches zero. On reaching zero the counter will continue to count down
until stopped, which allows the latency in responding to the interrupt to be measured. If an interrupt or wakeup event
is required, the timer interrupt should be enabled before loading the count value for the period. Once the count value
is loaded and counter started, the counter begins to count down; the counter can be stopped at any time through
software control. The counter will remain at the value it contained when the timer was stopped and no interrupt will
be generated. The status of the timers can be read to indicate if the timers are running and/or have expired; this is
useful when the timer interrupts are masked. This operation will reset any expired status flags.
11.3.1 RC Oscillator Calibration
The RC oscillator that can be used to time sleep periods is designed to require very little power to operate and be
self-contained, requiring no external timing components and hence is lower cost. As a consequence of using on-chip
resistors and capacitors, the inherent absolute accuracy and temperature coefficient is lower than that of a crystal
oscillator, but once calibrated the accuracy approaches that of a crystal oscillator. Sleep time periods should be as
close to the desired time as possible in order to allow the device to wake up in time for important events, for example
beacon transmissions in the IEEE802.15.4 protocol. If the sleep time is accurate, the device can be programmed to
wake up very close to the calculated time of the event and so keep current consumption to a minimum. If the sleep
time is less accurate, it will be necessary to wake up earlier in order to be certain the event will be captured. If the
device wakes earlier, it will be awake for longer and so reduce battery life.
In order to allow sleep time periods to be as close to the desired length as possible, the true frequency of the RC
oscillator needs to be determined to better than the initial 30% accuracy. The calibration factor can then be used to
calculate the true number of nominal 32kHz periods needed to make up a particular sleep time. A calibration
reference counter, clocked from the 16MHz system clock, is provided to allow comparisons to be made between the
32kHz RC clock and the 16MHz system clock when the JN5148 is awake.
Wakeup timer0 counts for a set number of 32kHz clock periods during which time the reference counter runs. When
the wakeup timer reaches zero the reference counter is stopped, allowing software to read the number of 16MHz
clock ticks generated during the time represented by the number of 32kHz ticks programmed in the wakeup timer.
The true period of the 32kHz clock can thus be determined and used when programming a wakeup timer to achieve a
better accuracy and hence more accurate sleep periods
For a RC oscillator running at exactly 32,000Hz the value returned by the calibration procedure should be 10000, for
a calibration period of twenty 32,000Hz clock periods. If the oscillator is running faster than 32,000Hz the count will
be less than 10000, if running slower the value will be higher. For a calibration count of 9000, indicating that the RC
oscillator period is running at approximately 35kHz, to time for a period of 2 seconds the timer should be loaded with
71,111 ((10000/9000) x (32000 x 2)) rather than 64000.44 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
12 Pulse Counters
Two 16-bit counters are provided that can increment during all modes of operation (including sleep), based on pulses
received on 2 dedicated DIO inputs; DIO1 and DIO8. The pulses can be de-bounced using the 32kHz clock to guard
against false counting on slow or noisy edges. Increments occur from a configurable rising or falling edge on the
respective DIO input.
Each counter has an associated 16-bit reference that is loaded by the user. An interrupt (and wakeup event if
asleep) may be generated when a counter reaches its pre-configured reference value. The two counters may
optionally be cascaded together to provide a single 32-bit counter, linked to DIO1. The counters do not saturate at
65535, but naturally roll-over to 0. Additionally, the pulse counting continues when the reference value is reached
without software interaction so that pulses are not missed even if there is a long delay before an interrupt is serviced
or during the wakeup process.
The system can work with signals up to 100kHz, with no debounce, or from 5.3kHz to 1.7kHz with debounce. When
using debounce the 32kHz clock must be active, so for minimum sleep currents the debounce mode should not be
used.© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 45
13 Serial Communications
The JN5148 has two independent Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART) serial communication
interfaces. These provide similar operating features to the industry standard 16550A device operating in FIFO mode.
Each interface performs serial-to-parallel conversion on incoming serial data and parallel-to-serial conversion on
outgoing data from the CPU to external devices. In both directions, a 16-byte deep FIFO buffer allows the CPU to
read and write multiple characters on each transaction. This means that the CPU is freed from handling data on a
character-by-character basis, with the associated high processor overhead. The UARTs have the following features:
• Emulates behaviour of industry standard NS16450 and NS16550A UARTs
• 16 byte transmit and receive FIFO buffers reduce interrupts to CPU, with direct access to fill levels of each
• Adds / deletes standard start, stop and parity communication bits to or from the serial data
• Independently controlled transmit, receive, status and data sent interrupts
• Optional modem flow control signals CTS and RTS
• Fully programmable data formats: baud rate, start, stop and parity settings
• False start bit detection, parity, framing and FIFO overrun error detect and break indication
• Internal diagnostic capabilities: loop-back controls for communications link fault isolation
• Flow control by software or automatically by hardware Processor Bus
Divisor
Latch
Registers
Line
Status
Register
Line
Control
Register
FIFO
Control
Register
Receiver FIFO
Transmitter FIFO
Baud Generator
Logic
Transmitter Shift
Register
Receiver Shift
Register
Transmitter
Logic
Receiver
Logic
RXD
TXD
Modem
Control
Register
Modem
Status
Register Modem
Signals
Logic
RTS
CTS
Interrupt
ID
Register
Interrupt
Enable
Register
Interrupt
Logic
Internal
Interrupt
Figure 33: UART Block Diagram
The serial interface contains programmable fields that can be used to set number of data bits (5, 6,7 or 8), even, odd,
set-at-1, set-at-0 or no-parity detection and generation of single or multiple stop bit, (for 5 bit data, multiple is 1.5 stop
bits; for 6, 7 or 8 data bits, multiple is 2 bits).
The baud rate is programmable up to 1Mbps, standard baud rates such as 4800, 9600, 19.2k, 38.4k etc. can be
configured.
For applications requiring hardware flow control, two control signals are provided: Clear-To-Send (CTS) and RequestTo-Send
(RTS). CTS is an indication sent by an external device to the UART that it is ready to receive data. RTS is
an indication sent by the UART to the external device that it is ready to receive data. RTS is controlled from software,
while the value of CTS can be read. Monitoring and control of CTS and RTS is a software activity, normally
performed as part of interrupt processing. The signals do not control parts of the UART hardware, but simply indicate
to software the state of the UART external interface. Alternatively, the Automatic Flow Control mode can be set 46 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
where the hardware controls the value of the generated RTS (negated if the receive FIFO fill level is greater than a
programmable threshold of 8, 11, 13 or 15 bytes), and only transmits data when the incoming CTS is asserted.
Software can read characters, one byte at a time, from the Receive FIFO and can also write to the Transmit FIFO,
one byte at a time. The Transmit and Receive FIFOs can be cleared and reset independently of each other. The
status of the transmitter can be checked to see if it is empty, and if there is a character being transmitted. The status
of the receiver can also be checked, indicating if conditions such as parity error, framing error or break indication
have occurred. It also shows if an overrun error occurred (receive buffer full and another character arrives) and if
there is data held in the receive FIFO.
UART 0 signals CTS, RTS, TXD and RXD are alternate functions of pins DIO4, 5, 6 and 7 respectively and UART 1
signals CTS, RTS, TXD and RXD are alternate functions of pins DIO17, 18, 19 and 20 respectively. If CTS and RTS
are not required on the devices external pins, then they may be disabled, this allows the DIOx function to be used for
other purposes.
Note: With the automatic flow control threshold set to 15, the hardware flow control within the UART block negates
RTS when the receive FIFO is about to become full. In some instances it has been observed that remote devices that
are transmitting data do not respond quickly enough to the de-asserted CTS and continue to transmit data. In these
instances the data will be lost in a receive FIFO overflow.
13.1 Interrupts
Interrupt generation can be controlled for the UART block, and is divided into four categories:
• Received Data Available: Is set when data in the Rx FIFO queue reaches a particular level (the trigger level can
be configured as 1, 4, 8 or 14) or if no character has been received for 4 character times.
• Transmit FIFO Empty: set when the last character from the Tx FIFO is read and starts to be transmitted.
• Receiver Line Status: set when one of the following occur (1) Parity Error - the character at the head of the
receive FIFO has been received with a parity error, (2) Overrun Error - the Rx FIFO is full and another character
has been received at the Receiver shift register, (3) Framing Error - the character at the head of the receive
FIFO does not have a valid stop bit and (4) Break Interrupt – occurs when the RxD line has been held low for an
entire character.
• Modem Status: Generated when the CTS (Clear To Send) input control line changes.
13.2 UART Application
The following example shows the UART connected to a 9-pin connector compatible with a PC. As the JN5148
device pins do not provide the RS232 line voltage, a level shifter is used.
JN5148
RTS
CTS
TXD
UART0 RXD
RS232
Lev el
Shif ter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CD
RD
TD
DTR
SG
DSR
RTS
CTS
RI
PC COM Port
1 5 Pin Signal
6 9
46
47
45
44
Figure 34: JN5148 Serial Communication Link© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 47
14 JTAG Debug Interface
The JN5148 includes an IEEE1149.1 compliant JTAG port for the sole purpose of software code debug with NXP's
Software Developer’s Kit. The JTAG interface is disabled by default and is enabled under software control.
Therefore, debugging is only possible if enabled by the application. Once enabled, the application executes as
normal until the external debugger controller initiates debug activity.
The Debugger supports breakpoints and watchpoints based on four comparisons between any of program counter,
load/store effective address and load/store data. There is the ability to chain the comparisons together. There is also
the ability, under debugger control to perform the following commands: go, stop, reset, step over/into/out/next, run to
cursor and breakpoints. In addition, under control of the debugger, it is possible to:
• Read and write registers on the wishbone bus
• Read ROM and RAM, and write to RAM
• Read and write CPU internal registers
The Debugger interface is accessed, depending upon the configuration, through the pins used for UART0 or UART1.
This is enabled under software control and is dealt with in JN-AN-1118 JN5148 Application Debugging [4]. The
following table details which DIO are used for the JTAG interface depending upon the configuration.
Signal DIO Assignment
UART0 pins UART1 pins
clock (TCK) 4 17
control (TMS) 5 18
data out (TDO) 6 19
data in (TDI) 7 20
Table 4 Hardware Debugger IO
If doze mode is active when debugging is started, the processor will be woken and then respond to debugger
commands. It is not possible to wake the device from sleep using the debug interface and debugging is not available
while the device is sleeping.
When using the debug interface, program execution is halted, and control of the CPU is handed to the debugger. The
watchdog, tick timer and the three timers described in section 11 are stalled while the debugger is in control of the
CPU.
When control is handed from the CPU to the debugger or back a small number of CPU clock cycles are taken
flushing or reloading the CPU pipeline. Because of this, when a program is halted by the debugger and then restarted
again, a small number of tick timer cycles will elapse.
It is possible to prevent all hardware debugging by blowing the relevant Efuse bit.
The JTAG interface does not support boundary scan testing. It is recommended that the JN5148 is not connected as
part of the board scan chain.48 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
15 Two-Wire Serial Interface
The JN5148 includes industry standard two-wire synchronous Serial Interface operates as a Master (MSIF) or Slave
(SSIF) that provides a simple and efficient method of data exchange between devices. The system uses a serial data
line (SIF_D) and a serial clock line (SIF_CLK) to perform bi-directional data transfers and includes the following
features:
Common to both master and slave:
• Compatible with both I2
C and SMbus peripherals
• Support for 7 and 10-bit addressing modes
• Optional pulse suppression on signal inputs
Master only:
• Multi-master operation
• Software programmable clock frequency
• Clock stretching and wait state generation
• Software programmable acknowledge bit
• Interrupt or bit-polling driven byte-by-byte data-transfers
• Bus busy detection
Slave only:
• Programmable slave address
• Simple byte level transfer protocol
• Write data flow control with optional clock stretching or acknowledge mechanism
• Read data preloaded or provided as required
15.1 Connecting Devices
The clock and data lines, SIF_D and SIF_CLK, are alternate functions of DIO15 and DIO14 respectively. The serial
interface function of these pins is selected when the interface is enabled. They are both bi-directional lines,
connected internally to the positive supply voltage via weak (45kΩ) programmable pull-up resistors. However, it is
recommended that external 4.7kΩ pull-ups be used for reliable operation at high bus speeds, as shown in Figure 35.
When the bus is free, both lines are HIGH. The output stages of devices connected to the bus must have an opendrain
or open-collector in order to perform the wired-AND function. The number of devices connected to the bus is
solely dependent on the bus capacitance limit of 400pF.
SIF_CLK
SIF_D
VDD
D1_OUT
D1_IN CLK1_IN
CLK1_OUT
D2_IN CLK2_IN
CLK2_OUT
DEVICE 1 DEVICE 2
RP RP Pullup
Resistors
D2_OUT
JN5148
SIF
DIO14
DIO15
Figure 35: Connection Details© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 49
15.2 Clock Stretching
Slave devices can use clock stretching to slow down the transfer bit rate. After the master has driven SIF_CLK low,
the slave can drive SIF_CLK low for the required period and then release it. If the slave’s SIF_CLK low period is
greater than the master’s low period the resulting SIF_CLK bus signal low period is stretched thus inserting wait
states.
SIF_CLK
SIF_CLK
SIF_CLK
Master SIF_CLK
Slave SIF_CLK
Wired-AND SIF_CLK
Clock held low
by Slave
Figure 36: Clock Stretching
15.3 Master Two-wire Serial Interface
When operating as a master device, it provides the clock signal and a prescale register determines the clock rate,
allowing operation up to 400kbit/s.
Data transfer is controlled from the processor bus interface at a byte level, with the processor responsible for
indicating when start, stop, read, write and acknowledge control should be generated. Write data written into a
transmit buffer will be written out across the two-wire interface when indicated, and read data received on the
interface is made available in a receive buffer. Indication of when a particular transfer has completed may be
indicated by means of an interrupt or by polling a status bit.
The first byte of data transferred by the device after a start bit is the slave address. The JN5148 supports both 7-bit
and 10-bit slave addresses by generating either one or two address transfers. Only the slave with a matching address
will respond by returning an acknowledge bit.
The master interface provides a true multi-master bus including collision detection and arbitration that prevents data
corruption. If two or more masters simultaneously try to control the bus, a clock synchronization procedure
determines the bus clock. Because of the wired-AND connection of the interface, a high-to-low transition on the bus
affects all connected devices. This means a high-to-low transition on the SIF_CLK line causes all concerned devices
to count off their low period. Once the clock input of a device has gone low, it will hold the SIF_CLK line in that state
until the clock high state is reached when it releases the SIF_CLK line. Due to the wired-AND connection, the
SIF_CLK line will therefore be held low by the device with the longest low period, and held high by the device with the
shortest high period.
SIF_CLK1
SIF_CLK2
SIF_CLK
Master1 SIF_CLK
Master2 SIF_CLK
Wired-AND SIF_CLK
Start counting
low period
Start counting
high period
Wait
State
Figure 37: Multi-Master Clock Synchronisation
After each transfer has completed, the status of the device must be checked to ensure that the data has been
acknowledged correctly, and that there has been no loss of arbitration. (N.B. Loss of arbitration may occur at any
point during the transfer, including data cycles). An interrupt will be generated when arbitration has been lost.50 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
15.4 Slave Two-wire Serial Interface
When operating as a slave device, the interface does not provide a clock signal, although it may drive the clock signal
low if it is required to apply clock stretching.
Only transfers whose address matches the value programmed into the interface’s address register are accepted. The
interface allows both 7 and 10 bit addresses to be programmed, but only responds with an acknowledge to a single
address. Addresses defined as “reserved” will not be responded to, and should not be programmed into the address
register. A list of reserved addresses is shown in Table 5.
Address Name Behaviour
0000 000 General Call/Start Byte Ignored
0000 001 CBUS address Ignored
0000 010 Reserved Ignored
0000 011 Reserved Ignored
0000 1XX Hs-mode master code Ignored
1111 1XX Reserved Ignored
1111 0XX 10-bit address Only responded to if 10 bit address
set in address register
Table 5 : List of two-wire serial interface reserved addresses
Data transfer is controlled from the processor bus interface at a byte level, with the processor responsible for taking
write data from a receive buffer and providing read data to a transmit buffer when indicated. A series of interrupt
status bits are provided to control the flow of data.
For writes, in to the slave interface, it is important that data is taken from the receive buffer by the processor before
the next byte of data arrives. To enable this, the interface may be configured to work in two possible backoff modes:
• Not Acknowledge mode – where the interface returns a Not Acknowledge (NACK) to the master if more data
is received before the previous data has been taken. This will lead to the termination of the current data
transfer.
• Clock Stretching mode – where the interface holds the clock line low until the previous data has been taken.
This will occur after transfer of the next data but before issuing an acknowledge
For reads, from the slave interface, the data may be preloaded into the transmit buffer when it is empty (i.e. at the
start of day, or when the last data has been read), or fetched each time a read transfer is requested. When using data
preload, read data in the buffer must be replenished following a data write, as the transmit and received data is
contained in a shared buffer. The interface will hold the bus using clock stretching when the transmit buffer is empty.
Interrupts may be triggered when:
• Data Buffer read data is required – a byte of data to be read should be provided to avoid the interface from
clock stretching
• Data Buffer read data has been taken – this indicates when the next data may be preloaded into the data
buffer
• Data Buffer write data is available – a byte of data should be taken from the data buffer to avoid data backoff
as defined above
• The last data in a transfer has completed – i.e. the end of a burst of data, when a Stop or Restart is seen
• A protocol error has been spotted on the interface© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 51
16 Four-Wire Digital Audio Interface
The JN5148 includes a four-wire digital audio interface that can be used for interfacing to audio CODECs. The
following features are supported:
• Compatible with the industry standard I²S interface
• Option to support I²S, left justified and right justified modes
• Optional support for connection to mono sample FIFO with data transferred on the left or right channel
• Master only
• Transmit on falling edge and receive on rising edge
• Up to 8MHz maximum clock range
• Maximum system size of 32-bits, allowing up to 16-bits per channel (left or right channels)
• Option for pad bit insertion, allowing length of transfer per channel to be anything from 16 to 32 bits
• Data Transfer size range of 1 to 16-bits per channel
• Option to invert WS (normally 0 for left, but allow 1 for left instead)
• Continuous clock output option to support CODECs which use it as a clock source
• Separate input and output data lines
• Option to invert idle state of WS (to indicate left or right)
The Word Select (WS), Data In (SDIN), Clock (SCK) and Data Out (SDOUT) lines are alternate functions of DIO
lines 12,13,17 and 18 respectively.
Data transfer is always bidirectional. Data placed in the Data Buffer before a transfer command is issued will be
transmitted on SDOUT whilst the data received on SDIN will be placed in the Data Buffer at the end of the transfer.
Indication that a transfer has completed is by means of an interrupt or by polling a status bit.
Left channel data is always sent first, with MSB first on each channel. The interface will always transfer both left and
right channel data. For mono data transfer, the user should pad out the unused channel with 0’s, and ignore any data
returned on the unused channel.
The length of a data transfer is derived as follows:
• When padding is disabled – Data Transfer Length = 2 x Data Transfer Size
• When padding is enabled – Data Transfer Length = 2 x (16 + Extra Pad Length)
Timing of the 3 main modes is shown in Figure 38, Figure 39 and Figure 40. The Data Buffer shows how the data is
stored and how it will be transferred onto the interface. SD Max Size indicates how the maximum transfer size (16
with no additional padding) will transfer, whilst SD 3-bits indicates how 3 bits of data will be aligned when padding is
enabled. Received data in the Data Buffer will always be padded out with 0’s if the Data Transfer Size is less than 16-
bits, and any bits received beyond 16-bits when extra padding is used, will be discarded. In the examples, the polarity
of WS is shown with Left channel = 0, and the idle state is Right Channel. 52 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
Data Buffer Right R2 R1 R0 Left L2 L1 L0
SCK
WS
SD Max Size
SD 3-bits
MSB LSB MSB LSB
Left Right
L2 L1 L0 0 R2 R1 R0
MSB-1 MSB-2 MSB-1 MSB-2
0 0 0
Figure 38: I²S Mode
Data Buffer Right R2 R1 R0 Left L2 L1 L0
SCK
WS
SD Max Size
SD 3-bits
MSB LSB MSB LSB
Left Right
L2 L1 L0 0 R2 R1 R0
MSB-1 MSB-2 MSB-1 MSB-2
0 0 0
Figure 39: Left Justified Mode
Data Buffer Right R2 R1 R0 Left L2 L1 L0
SCK
WS
SD Max Size
SD 3-bits
MSB LSB MSB LSB
Left Right
0 L2 L1 L0 R2 R1 R0
MSB-1 MSB-1
0 0 0
Figure 40: Right Justified Mode© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 53
17 Random Number Generator
A random number generator is provided which creates a 16-bit random number each time it is invoked. Consecutive
calls can be made to build up any length of random number required. Each call takes approximately 0.25msec to
complete. Alternatively, continuous generation mode can be used where a new number is generated approximately
every 0.25msec. In either mode of operation an interrupt can be generated to indicate when the number is available,
or a status bit can be polled.
The random bits are generated by sampling the state of the 32MHz clock every 32kHz system clock edge. As these
clocks are asynchronous to each other, each sampled bit is unpredictable and hence random.54 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
18 Sample FIFO
A 10 deep FIFO is provided to buffer data between the CPU and either the four-wire digital audio interface or the
DAC/ ADC. It supports single channel input and output data, up to 16 bits wide. When used it can reduce the rate at
which the processor has to generate/process data, and this may allow more efficient operation. Interrupts can be
generated based on fill levels and also FIFO empty and full conditions. Normal configuration of the digital audio
interface or the DAC/ ADC is still required when accessing the data via the FIFO.
When used with the DAC / ADC functions a timing signal is generated by the DAC/ ADC functions to control the
transfer of data to and from the FIFO and the analogue peripherals. The transfers will occur at the sample rate
configured within the DAC / ADC functions.
When the FIFO is linked to the four-wire digital audio interface, timer 2 must be used to generate an internal timing
signal to control the flow of data across the interface. The timer does not require any external pins to be enabled. The
timer should be set up to produce a PWM output with a rising edge generated every time a digital audio transfer is
required. The transfer rate is typically configured to be the audio sample rate, e.g. 8kHz. If the transfer rate is too fast
or slow data will be transferred correctly between the FIFO and the digital audio block.© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 55
19 Intelligent Peripheral Interface
The Intelligent Peripheral (IP) Interface is provided for systems that are more complex, where there is a processor
that requires a wireless peripheral. As an example, the JN5148 may provide a complete JenNet or ZigBee PRO
wireless network interface to a phone, computer, PDA, set-top box or games console. No resources are required from
the main processor compared to a transceiver as the complete wireless protocol may be run on the internal JN5148
CPU. The wireless peripheral may be controlled via one of the UARTs but the IP interface is intended to provide a
high-speed, low-processor-overhead interface.
The intelligent peripheral interface is a SPI slave interface and uses pins shared with other DIO signals. The
interface is designed to allow message passing and data transfer. Data received and transmitted on the IP interface
is copied directly to and from a dedicated area of memory without intervention from the CPU. This memory area, the
intelligent peripheral memory block, contains 64 32-bit word receive and transmit buffers.
JN5148
Intelligent
Peripheral
Interface SPI
MASTER
System Processor
(e.g. in cellphone, computer)
CPU
IP_DO SPIMISO
IP_INT SPIINT
IP_DI SPIMOSI
IP_SEL SPISEL
IP_CLK SPICLK
Figure 41: Intelligent Peripheral Connection
The interface functions as a SPI slave. It is possible to select the clock edge of IP_CLK on which data on the IP_DIN
line of the interface is sampled, and the state of data output IP_DOUT is changed. The order of transmission is MSB
first. The IP_DO data output is tri-stated when the device is inactive, i.e. the device is not selected via IP_SEL. An
interrupt output line IP_INT is available so that the JN5148 can indicate to an external master that it has data to
transfer. The interface can be clocked at up to 8MHz
The IP interface signals IP_CLK, IP_DO, IP_DI, IP_SEL, IP_INT are alternate functions of pins DIO14 to 18
respectively.
19.1 Data Transfer Format
Transfers are started by the remote processor asserting the IP_SEL line and terminated by the remote processor deasserting
IP_SEL.
Data transfers are bi-directional and traffic in both directions has a format of status byte, data length byte (of the
number of 32-bit words to transfer) and data packet (from the receive and transmit buffers), as shown in Figure 42
The first byte transferred into the JN5148 is a status byte with the format shown in Table 6. This is followed by a
padding byte that should be set to zero. The first byte output by the JN5148 is a padding byte, that should be ignored,
followed by a status byte with the format shown in Table 6
Bit Field Description
7:2 RSVD Reserved, set to 0
1 TXQ 1: Data queued for transmission
0 RXRDY 1: Buffer ready to receive data
Table 6: IP Status Byte Format56 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
If data is queued for transmission and the recipient has indicated that they are ready for it (RXRDY in incoming status
byte was 1), the next byte to be transmitted is the data length in words (N). If either the JN5148 or the remote
processor has no data to transfer, then the data length should be set to zero. The transaction can be terminated by
the master after the status and padding bytes have been sent if it is not possible to send data in either direction. This
may be because neither party has data to send or because the receiver does not have a buffer available. If the data
length is non-zero, the data in the JN5148 transmit memory buffer is sent, beginning at the start of the buffer. At the
same time that data bytes are being sent from the transmit buffer, the JN5148 receive buffer is being filled with
incoming data, beginning from the start of the buffer.
The remote processor, acting as the master, must determine the larger of its incoming or outgoing data transfers and
deassert IP_SEL when all of the transmit and receive data has been transferred. The data is transferred into or out of
the buffers starting from the lowest address in the buffer, and each word is assembled with the MSB first on the serial
data lines. Following a transaction, IP_SEL must be high (deasserted) for at least 400nsec before a further
transaction can begin.
IP_SEL
IP_CLK
IP_DI Status (8-bit) N words of data
IP_DO
data length or 0s (8-bit)
padding (8-bit) Status (8-bit) data length or 0s (8-bit) N words of data
padding (8-bit)
Figure 42: Intelligent Peripheral Data Transfer Waveforms
The N words of data transferred on the interface are also formatted. The first three bytes, of the first word, must be
zero. These are followed by a one byte length field that must be one less than the data length shown in the data
length field in Figure 42, i.e. N-1. Following this are the (N-1) words of data.
The application running on the JN5148 has high level software functions for sending and receiving data on this
interface. The function of generating and interpreting the individual bytes on the interface is handled by hardware
within the device. The remote processor must generate, and interpret, the signals in the interface. For instance, this
may be done with a configurable SPI master interface.
19.2 JN5148 (Slave) Initiated Data Transfer
To send data, the data is written into either buffer 0 or 1 of the intelligent peripheral memory area. Then the buffer
number is written together with the data length. If the call is successful, the interrupt line IP_INT will signal to the
remote processor that there is a message ready to be sent from the JN5148. When a remote processor starts a
transfer to the JN5148 by deasserting IP_SEL, then IP_INT is deasserted. If the transfer is unsuccessful and the
data is not output then IP_INT is reasserted after the transfer to indicate that data is still waiting to be sent.
The interface can be configured to generate an internal interrupt whenever a transaction completes (for example
IP_SEL becomes inactive after a transfer starts). It is also possible to mask the interrupt. The end of the
transmission can be signalled by an interrupt, or the interface can be polled.
To receive data the interface must be firstly initialised and when this is done, the bit RXRDY sent in the status byte
from the IP block will show that data can be received by the JN5148. Successful data arrival can be indicated by an
interrupt, or the interface can be polled. IP_INT is asserted if the JN5148 is configured to be able to receive, and the
remote processor has previously attempted to send data but the RXRDY indicated that it could not be sent.
To send and receive at the same time, the transmit and receive buffers must be set to be different.
19.3 Remote (Master) Processor Initiated Data Transfer
The remote processor (master) must initiate a transfer to send data to the JN5148 (slave) by asserting the slave
select pin, IP_SEL, and generating its status byte on IP_DI with TXRDY set. After receiving the status byte from the
JN5148, the master should check that the JN5148 has a buffer ready by reading the RXRDY bit of the received
status byte. If the RXRDY bit is 0 indicating that the JN5148 cannot accept data, it must terminate the transfer by
deasserting IP_SEL unless it is receiving data from the JN5148. If the RXRDY bit is 1, indicating that the JN5148 can
accept data, then the master should generate a further 8 clocks on IP_CLK in order to transfer its own message
length on IP_DI. The master must continue clocking the interface until sufficient clocks have been generated to send © NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 57
all the data specified in the length field to the JN5148. The master must then deassert IP_SEL to show the transfer
is complete.
The master may initiate a transfer to read data from the JN5148 by asserting the slave select pin, IP_SEL, and
generating its status byte on IP_DI with RXRDY set. After receiving the status byte from the JN5148, it should check
that the JN5148 has a buffer ready by reading the TXRDY bit of the received status byte. If the TXRDY bit is 0,
indicating that the JN5148 does not have data to send, it must terminate the transfer by deasserting IP_SEL unless it
is transmitting data to the JN5148. If the TXRDY bit is 1, indicating that the JN5148 can send data, then the master
must generate a further 8 clocks on IP_CLK in order to receive the message length on IP_DO. The master must
continue clocking the interface until sufficient clocks have been generated to receive all the data specified in the
length field from the JN5148. The master should then deassert IP_SEL to show the transfer is complete.
Data can be sent in both directions at once and the master must ensure both transfers have completed before
deasserting IP_SEL.58 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
20 Analogue Peripherals
The JN5148 contains a number of analogue peripherals allowing the direct connection of a wide range of external
sensors, switches and actuators.
ADC
DAC1
DAC2
VREF
Chip
Boundary
Internal Reference
Processor Bus
Supply Voltage
(VDD1)
Vref select
Temp
Sensor
Comparator 2
Comparator 1
COMP2M
COMP1M
COMP1P
COMP2P
DAC1
DAC2
ADC1
ADC2
ADC3
ADC4
Vref
Figure 43: Analogue Peripherals
In order to provide good isolation from digital noise, the analogue peripherals are powered by a separate regulator,
supplied from the analogue supply VDD1 and referenced to analogue ground VSSA.
A common reference Vref for the ADC and DAC can be selected between an internal bandgap reference or an
external voltage reference supplied to the VREF pin. Gain settings for the ADC and DAC are independent of each
other.
The ADC and DAC are clocked from a common clock source derived from the 16MHz clock© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 59
20.1 Analogue to Digital Converter
The 12-bit analogue to digital converter (ADC) uses a successive approximation design to perform high accuracy
conversions as typically required in wireless sensor network applications. It has six multiplexed single-ended input
channels: four available externally, one connected to an internal temperature sensor, and one connected to an
internal supply monitoring circuit.
20.1.1 Operation
The input range of the ADC can be set between 0V to either the reference voltage or twice the reference voltage.
The reference can be either taken from the internal voltage reference or from the external voltage applied to the
VREF pin. For example, an external reference of 1.2V supplied to VREF may be used to set the ADC range between
0V and 2.4V.
VREF Gain Setting Maximum Input Range Supply Voltage Range (VDD)
1.2V
1.6V
1.2V
1.6V
0
0
1
1
1.2V
1.6V
2.4V
3.2V
2.2V - 3.6V
2.2V - 3.6V
2.6V - 3.6V
3.4V - 3.6V
Table 7 ADC/DAC Maximum Input Range
The input clock to the ADC is 16MHz and can be divided down to 2MHz, 1MHz, 500kHz and 250kHz. During an ADC
conversion the selected input channel is sampled for a fixed period and then held. This sampling period is defined as
a number of ADC clock periods and can be programmed to 2, 4, 6 or 8. The conversion rate is ((3 x Sample period)
+ 14) clock periods. For example for 500kHz conversion with sample period of 2 will be (3 x 2) + 14 = 20 clock
periods, 40usecs or 25kHz. . The ADC can be operated in either a single conversion mode or alternatively a new
conversion can be started as soon as the previous one has completed, to give continuous conversions.
If the source resistance of the input voltage is 1kΩ or less, then the default sampling time of 2 clocks should be used.
The input to the ADC can be modelled as a resistor of 5kΩ(typ) and 10kΩ (max) to represent the on-resistance of the
switches and the sampling capacitor 8pF. The sampling time required can then be calculated, by adding the sensor
source resistance to the switch resistance, multiplying by the capacitance giving a time constant. Assuming normal
exponential RC charging, the number of time constants required to give an acceptable error can be calculated, 7 time
constants gives an error of 0.1%, so for 12-bit accuracy 10 time constants should be the target. For a source with
zero resistance, 10 time constants is 800 nsecs, hence the smallest sampling window of 2 clock periods can be used.
ADC
pin
5 K
8 pF
Sample
Switch
ADC
front
end
Figure 44 ADC Input Equivalent Circuit
The ADC sampling period, input range and mode (single shot or continuous) are controlled through software.
When the ADC conversion is complete, an interrupt is generated. Alternatively the conversion status can be polled.
When operating in continuous mode, it is recommended that the interrupt is used to signal the end of a conversion,
since conversion times may range from 10 to 152 µsecs. Polling over this period would be wasteful of processor
bandwidth.
To facilitate averaging of the ADC values, which is a common practice in microcontrollers, a dedicated accumulator
has been added, the user can define the accumulation to occur over 2,4,8 or 16 samples. The end of conversion 60 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
interrupt can be modified to occur at the end of the chosen accumulation period, alternatively polling can still be used.
Software can then be used to apply the appropriate rounding and shifting to generate the average value, as well as
setting up the accumulation function.
For detailed electrical specifications, see section 22.3.8.
20.1.2 Supply Monitor
The internal supply monitor allows the voltage on the analogue supply pin VDD1 to be measured. This is achieved
with a potential divider that reduces the voltage by a factor of 0.666, allowing it to fall inside the input range of the
ADC when set with an input range twice the internal voltage reference. The resistor chain that performs the voltage
reduction is disabled until the measurement is made to avoid a continuous drain on the supply.
20.1.3 Temperature Sensor
The on chip temperature sensor can be used either to provide an absolute measure of the device temperature or to
detect changes in the ambient temperature. In common with most on chip temperature sensors, it is not trimmed and
so the absolute accuracy variation is large; the user may wish to calibrate the sensor prior to use. The sensor forces
a constant current through a forward biased diode to provide a voltage output proportional to the chip die temperature
which can then be measured using the ADC. The measured voltage has a linear relationship to temperature as
described in section 22.3.15.
Because this sensor is on chip, any measurements taken must account for the thermal time constants. For example,
if the device just came out of sleep mode the user application should wait until the temperature has stabilised before
taking a measurement.
20.2 Digital to Analogue Converter
The Digital to Analogue Converter (DAC) provides two output channels and is capable of producing voltages of 0 to
Vref or 0 to 2Vref where Vref is selected between the internal reference and the VREF pin, with a resolution of 12-bits
and a minimum conversion time of 10µsecs (2MHz clock).
20.2.1 Operation
The output range of each DAC can be set independently to swing between 0V to either the reference voltage or twice
the reference voltage. The reference voltage is selected from the internal reference or the VREF pin. For example,
an external reference of 0.8V supplied to VREF may be used to set DAC1 maximum output of 0.8V and DAC2
maximum output of 1.6V.
The DAC output amplifier is capable of driving a capacitive load up to that specified in section 22.3.9
Programmable clock periods allow a trade-off between conversion speed and resolution. The full 12-bit resolution is
achieved with the 250kHz clock rate. See section 22.3.9 electrical characteristics, for more details.
The conversion period of the DACs are given by the same formula as the ADC conversion time and so can vary
between 10 and 152uS. The DAC values may be updated at the same time as the ADC is active.
The clock divider ratio, interrupt enable and reference voltage select are all controlled through software, options
common to both the ADC and DAC. The DAC output range and initial value can be set and the subsequent updates
provided by updating only the DAC value. Polling is available to determine if a DAC channel is busy performing a
conversion. The DAC can be disabled which will power down the DAC cell.
Simultaneous conversions with DAC1 and DAC2 are possible. To use both DACs at the same time it is only
necessary to enable them and supply the digital values via the software. The DACs should not be used in single shot
mode, but continuous conversion mode only, in order to maintain a steady output voltage. © NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 61
20.3 Comparators
The JN5148 contains two analogue comparators COMP1 and COMP2 that are designed to have true rail-to-rail
inputs and operate over the full voltage range of the analogue supply VDD1. The hysteresis level (common to both
comparators) can be set to a nominal value of 0mV, 10mV, 20mV or 40mV. In addition, the source of the negative
input signal for each comparator (COMP1M and COMP2M) can be set to the internal voltage reference, the output of
DAC1 or DAC2 (COMP1 or COMP2 respectively) or the appropriate external pin. The comparator outputs are routed
to internal registers and can be polled, or can be used to generate interrupts. The comparators can be disabled to
reduce power consumption.
The comparators have a low power mode where the response time of the comparator is slower than normal and is
specified in section 22.3.10. This mode may be used during non-sleep operation however it is particularly useful in
sleep mode to wake up the JN5148 from sleep where low current consumption is important. The wakeup action and
the configuration for which edge of the comparator output will be active are controlled through software. In sleep
mode the negative input signal source, must be configured to be driven from the external pins.62 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
21 Power Management and Sleep Modes
21.1 Operating Modes
Three operating modes are provided in the JN5148 that enable the system power consumption to be controlled
carefully to maximise battery life.
• Active Processing Mode
• Sleep Mode
• Deep Sleep Mode
The variation in power consumption of the three modes is a result of having a series of power domains within the chip
that may be controllably powered on or off.
21.1.1 Power Domains
The JN5148 has the following power domains:
• VDD Supply Domain: supplies the wake-up timers and controller, DIO blocks, Comparators, 32kHz RC and
crystal oscillators. This domain is driven from the external supply (battery) and is always powered. The wake-up
timers and controller, and the 32kHz RC and crystal oscillators may be powered on or off in sleep mode through
software control.
• Digital Logic Domain: supplies the digital peripherals, CPU, ROM, Baseband controller, Modem and Encryption
processor. It is powered off during sleep mode.
• Analogue Domain: supplies the ADC, DACs and the temperature sensor. It is powered off during sleep mode
and may be powered on or off in active processing mode through software control.
• RAM Domain: supplies the RAM during sleep mode to retain the memory contents. It may be powered on or off
for sleep mode through software control.
• Radio Domain: supplies the radio interface. It is powered during transmit and receive and controlled by the
baseband processor. It is powered off during sleep mode.
The current consumption figures for the different modes of operation of the device is given in section 22.2.2.
21.2 Active Processing Mode
Active processing mode in the JN5148 is where all of the application processing takes place. By default, the CPU will
execute at the selected clock speed executing application firmware. All of the peripherals are available to the
application, as are options to actively enable or disable them to control power consumption; see specific peripheral
sections for details.
Whilst in Active processing mode there is the option to doze the CPU but keep the rest of the chip active; this is
particularly useful for radio transmit and receive operations, where the CPU operation is not required therefore saving
power.
21.2.1 CPU Doze
Whilst in doze mode, CPU operation is stopped but the chip remains powered and the digital peripherals continue to
run. Doze mode is entered through software and is terminated by any interrupt request. Once the interrupt service
routine has been executed, normal program execution resumes. Doze mode uses more power than sleep and deep
sleep modes but requires less time to restart and can therefore be used as a low power alternative to an idle loop.
Whilst in CPU doze the current associated with the CPU is not consumed, therefore the basic device current is
reduced as shown in the figures in section 22.2.2.1.
21.3 Sleep Mode
The JN5148 enters sleep mode through software control. In this mode most of the internal chip functions are
shutdown to save power, however the state of DIO pins are retained, including the output values and pull-up enables, © NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 63
and this therefore preserves any interface to the outside world. The DAC outputs are placed into a high impedance
state.
When entering into sleep mode, there is an option to retain the RAM contents throughout the sleep period. If the
wakeup timers are not to be used for a wakeup event and the application does not require them to run continually,
then power can be saved by switching off the 32kHz oscillator if selected as the system clock through software
control. The oscillator will be restarted when a wakeup event occurs.
Whilst in sleep mode one of four possible events can cause a wakeup to occur: transitions on DIO inputs, expiry of
wakeup timers, pulse counters maturing or comparator events. If any of these events occur, and the relevant
interrupt is enabled, then an interrupt is generated that will cause a wakeup from sleep. It is possible for multiple
wakeup sources to trigger an event at the same instant and only one of them will be accountable for the wakeup
period. It is therefore necessary in software to remove all other pending wakeup events prior to requesting entry back
into sleep mode; otherwise, the device will re-awaken immediately.
When wakeup occurs, a similar sequence of events to the reset process described in section 6.1 happens, including
the checking of the supply voltage by the Brown Out Detector 6.4. The 32MHz oscillator is started up, once stable
the power to CPU system is enabled and the reset is removed. Software determines that this is a reset from sleep
and so commences with the wakeup process. If RAM contents were held through sleep, wakeup is quicker as the
application program does not have to be reloaded from Flash memory. See section 22.3.6 for wake-up timings.
21.3.1 Wakeup Timer Event
The JN5148 contains two 35-bit wakeup timers that are counters clocked from the 32kHz oscillator, and can be
programmed to generate a wake-up event. Following a wakeup event, the timers continue to run. These timers are
described in section 11.3.
Timer events can be generated from both of the two timers; one is intended for use by the 802.15.4 protocol, the
other being available for use by the Application running on the CPU. These timers are available to run at any time,
even during sleep mode.
21.3.2 DIO Event
Any DIO pin when used as an input has the capability, by detecting a transition, to generate a wake-up event. Once
this feature has been enabled the type of transition can be specified (rising or falling edge). Even when groups of
DIO lines are configured as alternative functions such as the UARTs or Timers etc, any input line in the group can still
be used to provide a wakeup event. This means that an external device communicating over the UART can wakeup
a sleeping device by asserting its RTS signal pin (which is the CTS input of the JN5148).
21.3.3 Comparator Event
The comparator can generate a wakeup interrupt when a change in the relative levels of the positive and negative
inputs occurs. The ability to wakeup when continuously monitoring analogue signals is useful in ultra-low power
applications. For example, the JN5148 can remain in sleep mode until the voltage drops below a threshold and then
be woken up to deal with the alarm condition.
21.3.4 Pulse Counter
The JN5148 contains two 16 bit pulse counters that can be programmed to generate a wake-up event. Following the
wakeup event the counters will continue to operate and therefore no pulse will be missed during the wake-up
process. These counters are described in section 12.
To minimise sleep current it is possible to disable the 32K RC oscillator and still use the pulse counters to cause a
wake-up event, provided debounce mode is not required.
21.4 Deep Sleep Mode
Deep sleep mode gives the lowest power consumption. All switchable power domains are off and certain functions in
the VDD supply power domain, including the 32kHz oscillator are stopped. This mode can be exited by a power
down, a hardware reset on the RESETN pin, or a DIO event. The DIO event in this mode causes a chip reset to
occur.64 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
22 Electrical Characteristics
22.1 Maximum Ratings
Exceeding these conditions may result in damage to the device.
Parameter Min Max
Device supply voltage VDD1, VDD2 -0.3V 3.6V
Supply voltage at voltage regulator bypass pins
VB_xxx
-0.3V 1.98V
Voltage on analogue pins XTALOUT, XTALIN,
VCOTUNE, RF_IN.
-0.3V VB_xxx + 0.3V
Voltage on analogue pins VREF, ADC1-4, DAC1-2,
COMP1M, COMP1P, COMP2M, COMP2P, IBIAS
-0.3V VDD1 + 0.3V
Voltage on 5v tolerant digital pins SPICLK,
SPIMOSI, SPIMISO, SPISEL0, DIO0-8 & DIO11-20,
RESETN
-0.3V Lower of (VDD2 + 2V)
and 5.5V
Voltage on 3v tolerant digital pins DIO9, DIO10 -0.3V VDD2 + 0.3V
Storage temperature -40ºC 150ºC
Reflow soldering temperature according to
IPC/JEDEC J-STD-020C
260ºC
ESD rating 4 Human Body Model 1 2.0kV
Charged Device Model 2 500V
1) Testing for Human Body Model discharge is performed as specified in JEDEC Standard JESD22-A114.
2) Testing for Charged Device Model discharge is performed as specified in JEDEC Standard JESD22-C101.
22.2 DC Electrical Characteristics
22.2.1 Operating Conditions
Supply Min Max
VDD1, VDD2 2.0V 3.6V
Ambient temperature range -40ºC 85ºC© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 65
22.2.2 DC Current Consumption
VDD = 2.0 to 3.6V, -40 to +85º C
22.2.2.1 Active Processing
Mode: Min Typ Max Unit Notes
CPU processing
32,16,8 or 4MHz
1600 +
280/MHz
µA SPI, GPIOs enabled. When in
CPU doze the current related to
CPU speed is not consumed.
Radio transmit 15.0 mA CPU in software doze – radio
transmitting
Radio receive 17.5 mA CPU in software doze – radio in
receive mode
The following current figures should be added to those above if the feature is being used
ADC 655 µA Temperature sensor and battery
measurements require ADC
DAC 215 / 235 µA One / both
Comparator 73 / 0.8 µA Normal / low-power
UART 90 µA For each UART
Timer 30 µA For each Timer
2-wire serial interface 70 µA
22.2.2.2 Sleep Mode
Mode: Min Typ Max Unit Notes
Sleep mode with I/O wakeup 0.12 µA Waiting on I/O event
Sleep mode with I/O and RC
Oscillator timer wakeup –
measured at 25ºC
1.25 µA As above, but also waiting on timer
event. If both wakeup timers are
enabled then add another 0.05µA
32kHz crystal oscillator 1.5 µA As alternative sleep timer
The following current figures should be added to those above if the feature is being used
RAM retention– measured at
25ºC
2.2 µA For full 128kB retained
Comparator (low-power mode) 0.8 µA Reduced response time
22.2.2.3 Deep Sleep Mode
Mode: Min Typ Max Unit Notes
Deep sleep mode– measured
at 25ºC
100 nA Waiting on chip RESET or I/O
event66 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
22.2.3 I/O Characteristics
VDD = 2.0 to 3.6V, -40 to +85º C
Parameter Min Typ Max Unit Notes
Internal DIO pullup
resistors
22
24
31
35
34
40
56
63
53
63
92
104
kΩ VDD2 = 3.6V, 25C
VDD2 = 3.0V, 25C
VDD2 = 2.2V, 25C
VDD2 = 2.0V, 25C
Digital I/O High Input
(except DIO9, DIO10)
VDD2 x 0.7 Lower of (VDD2 + 2V)
and 5.5V
V 5V Tolerant I/O only
Digital I/O High Input
( DIO9, DIO10)
VDD2 x 0.7 VDD2 V
Digital I/O low Input -0.3 VDD2 x 0.27 V
Digital I/O input hysteresis 140 230 310 mV
DIO High O/P (2.7-3.6V) VDD2 x 0.8 VDD2 V With 4mA load
DIO Low O/P (2.7-3.6V) 0 0.4 V With 4mA load
DIO High O/P (2.2-2.7V) VDD2 x 0.8 VDD2 V With 3mA load
DIO Low O/P (2.2-2.7V) 0 0.4 V With 3mA load
DIO High O/P (2.0-2.2V) VDD2 x 0.8 VDD2 V With 2.5mA load
DIO Low O/P (2.0-2.2V) 0 0.4 V With 2.5mA load
Current sink/source
capability
4
3
2.5
mA VDD2 = 2.7V to 3.6V
VDD2 = 2.2V to 2.7V
VDD2 = 2.0V to 2.2V
IIL - Input Leakage Current 50 nA Vcc = 3.6V, pin low
IIH - Input Leakage Current 50 nA Vcc = 3.6V, pin high
22.3 AC Characteristics
22.3.1 Reset and Voltage Brown-Out
RESETN
Internal RESET
VDD
VPOT
t
STAB
Figure 45: Internal Power-on Reset without showing Brown-Out© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 67
Internal RESET
RESETN VRST
t
STAB
t
RST
Figure 46: Externally Applied Reset
VDD = 2.0 to 3.6V, -40 to +85º C
Parameter Min Typ Max Unit Notes
External Reset pulse width
to initiate reset sequence
(tRST)
1 µs Assumes internal pullup
resistor value of 100K
worst case and ~5pF
external capacitance
External Reset threshold
voltage (VRST)
VDD2 x 0.7 V Minimum voltage to
avoid being reset
Internal Power-on Reset
threshold voltage (VPOT)
1.47
1.42
V Rising
Falling
Reset stabilisation time
(tSTAB)
0.84 ms Note 1
Brown-out Threshold
Voltage (VTH)
1.87
2.16
2.54
2.83
1.95
2.25
2.65
2.95
2.01
2.32
2.73
3.04
V Configurable threshold
with 4 levels
Brown-out Hysteresis
(VHYS)
45
60
85
100
mV Corresponding to the 4
threshold levels
1 Time from release of reset to start of executing ROM code. Loading program from Flash occurs in addition to this.
VTH + VHYS
VTH
DVDD
Internal POR
Internal BOReset
VPOT
Figure 47: Power on Reset followed by Brown-out Detect68 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
22.3.2 SPI MasterTiming
t t SSH SSS
t
CK
t
SI
t
HI
MOSI
(mode=1,3)
SS
MOSI
(mode=0,2)
MISO
(mode=0,2)
MISO
(mode=1,3)
t
VO
t
VO
CLK
(mode=0,1)
t
SI
t
HI
CLK
(mode=2,3)
Figure 48: SPI Timing (Master)
Parameter Symbol Min Max Unit
Clock period tCK 62.5 - ns
Data setup time tSI 16.7 @ 3.3V
18.2 @ 2.7V
21.0 @ 2.0V
- ns
Data hold time tHI 0 ns
Data invalid period tVO - 15 ns
Select set-up period tSSS 60 - ns
Select hold period tSSH 30 (SPICLK = 16MHz)
0 (SPICLK<16MHz, mode=0 or 2)
60 (SPICLK<16MHz, mode=1 or 3)
- ns
22.3.3 Intelligent Peripheral (SPI Slave) Timing
IP_SEL
IP_CLK
IP_DI
IP_DO
t
si t
hi
t
vo
t
sss
t t ssh ck
t
lz t
hz
Figure 49: Intelligent Peripheral (SPI Slave) Timing© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 69
Parameter Symbol Min Max Unit
Clock period tck 125.0 - ns
Data setup time tsi 15 - ns
Data hold time thi 15 ns
Data invalid period tvo - 40 ns
Select set-up period tsss 15 - ns
Select hold period tssh 15 - ns
Select asserted to output data driven tlz 20 ns
Select negated to data output tri-stated thz 20 ns
22.3.4 Two-wire Serial Interface
t
BUF
S Sr P S
t
LOW
t
HD;STA
t
F t
R
t
HD;DAT
t
HIGH
t
SU;DAT
t
SU;STA
t
HD;STA
t
SU;STO
t
SP t
R
t
F
SIF_D
SIF_CLK
Figure 50: Two-wire Serial Interface Timing
Parameter Symbol
Standard Mode Fast Mode
Unit
Min Max Min Max
SIF_CLK clock frequency fSCL 0 100 0 400 kHz
Hold time (repeated) START condition.
After this period, the first clock pulse is
generated
tHD:STA 4 - 0.6 - µs
LOW period of the SIF_CLK clock tLOW 4.7 - 1.3 - µs
HIGH period of the SIF_CLK clock tHIGH 4 - 0.6 - µs
Set-up time for repeated START condition tSU:STA 4.7 - 0.6 - µs
Data setup time SIF_D tSU:DAT 0.25 - 0.1 - µs
Rise Time SIF_D and SIF_CLK tR - 1000 20+0.1Cb 300 ns
Fall Time SIF_D and SIF_CLK tF - 300 20+0.1Cb 300 ns
Set-up time for STOP condition tSU:STO 4 - 0.6 - µs
Bus free time between a STOP and START
condition
tBUF 4.7 - 1.3 - µs
Pulse width of spikes that will be
suppressed by input filters (Note 1)
tSP - 60 - 60 ns
Capacitive load for each bus line Cb - 400 - 400 pF
Noise margin at the LOW level for each
connected device (including hysteresis)
Vnl 0.1VDD - 0.1VDD - V
Noise margin at the HIGH level for each
connected device (including hysteresis)
Vnh 0.2VDD - 0.2VDD - V
Note 1: This figure indicates the pulse width that is guaranteed to be suppressed. Pulse with widths up to 125nsec
may alos get suppressed.70 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
22.3.5 Four-Wire Digital Audio Interface
SCK
WS/SDOUT
SDIN
t
ck
t
dtr
t
sr t
hr
t
hc t
lc
Parameter Symbol
Maximum
Frequency (8MHz) Generic
Unit
Min Max Min Max
DAI_SCK clock period tck 125 - 125 - ns
LOW period of the DAI_SCK clock tlc 43 - 0.35tck - ns
HIGH period of the DAI_SCK clock thc 43 - 0.35tck - ns
Transmit delay time tdtr - 50 - 0.4tck ns
Receive set-up time tsr 25 - 0.2tck - ns
Receive hold time thr 0 - 0 - ns
22.3.6 Wakeup and Boot Load Timings
Parameter Min Typ Max Unit Notes
Time for crystal to stabilise
ready for Boot Load
0.84 ms Reached oscillator
amplitude threshold
Time for crystal to stabilise
ready for radio activity
1.0 ms
Wake up from Deep Sleep
or from Sleep (memory not
held)
0.84 + 0.5*
program size in
kBytes
ms Assumes SPI clock to
external Flash is
16MHz
Wake up from Sleep
(memory held)
0.84 ms
Wake up from CPU Doze
mode
0.2 µs
Wake up from Sleep using
24MHz RC oscillator
(memory held)
0.29 ms© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 71
22.3.7 Bandgap Reference
VDD = 2.0 to 3.6V, -40 to +85ºC
Parameter Min Typ Max Unit Notes
Voltage 1.156 1.192 1.216 V
DC power supply rejection 58 dB at 25ºC
Temperature coefficient -35
+30
ppm/ºC 20 to 85ºC
-40ºC to 20ºC
Point of inflexion +25 ºC
22.3.8 Analogue to Digital Converters
VDD = 3.0V, VREF = 1.2V, -40 to +85ºC
Parameter Min Typ Max Unit Notes
Resolution 12 bits 500kHz Clock
Current consumption 655 µA
Integral nonlinearity ± 5 LSB 0 to Vref range
Differential nonlinearity -1 +2 LSB Guaranteed monotonic
Offset error + 10 mV
Gain error - 20 mV
Internal clock 500 kHz 16MHz input clock, ÷32
No. internal clock periods
to sample input
2, 4, 6 or 8 Programmable
Conversion time 40 µs 500kHz Clock with
sample period of 2
Input voltage range 0.04 Vref
or 2*Vref
V Switchable. Refer to
20.1.1
Vref (Internal) See Section 22.3.7 Bandgap Reference
Vref (External) 1.15 1.2 1.6 V Allowable range into
VREF pin
Input capacitance 8 pF In series with 5K ohms72 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
22.3.9 Digital to Analogue Converters
VDD = 3.0V, VREF = 1.2V, -40 to +85ºC
Parameter Min Typ Max Unit Notes
Resolution 12 bits
Current consumption 215 (single)
235 (both)
µA
Integral nonlinearity ± 2 LSB
Differential nonlinearity -1 +1 LSB Guaranteed monotonic
Offset error ± 10 mV
Gain error ± 10 mV
Internal clock 2MHz,
1MHz,
500kHz,
250kHz
16MHz input clock,
programmable
prescaler
Output settling time to
0.5LSB
5 µs With 10k ohms & 20pF
load
Minimum Update time 10 µs 2MHz Clock with
sample period of 2
Output voltage swing 0 Lower of Vdd-1.2 and Vref V Output voltage swing
Gain =0
Output voltage swing 0 Lower of 2x(Vdd-1.2 ) and
Vdd-0.2 and 2xVref
V Output voltage swing
Gain =1
Vref (Internal) See Section 22.3.7 Bandgap Reference
VREF (External) 0.8 1.2 1.6 V Allowable range into
VREF pin
Resistive load 10 kΩ To ground
Capacitive load 20 pF
Digital input coding Binary© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 73
22.3.10 Comparators
VDD = 2.0 to 3.6V -40 to +85ºC
Parameter Min Typ Max Unit Notes
Analogue response time
(normal)
80 125 ns +/- 250mV overdrive
10pF load
Total response time
(normal) including delay to
Interrupt controller
105 + 125 ns Digital delay can be
up to a max. of two
16MHz clock periods
Analogue response time
(low power)
2.4 µs +/- 250mV overdrive
No digital delay
Hysteresis 4
12
28
10
20
40
16
26
50
mV Programmable in 3
steps and zero
Vref (Internal) See Section 22.3.7 Bandgap Reference V
Common Mode input range 0 Vdd V
Current (normal mode) 54 73 102 µA
Current (low power mode) 0.8 µA
22.3.11 32kHz RC Oscillator
VDD = 2.0 to 3.6V, -40 to +85 ºC
Parameter Min Typ Max Unit Notes
Current consumption of cell
and counter logic
1.45
1.25
1.05
µA 3.6V
3.0V
2.0V
32kHz clock native
accuracy
-30% 32kHz +30% Typical is at 3.0V 25°C
Calibrated 32kHz accuracy ±250 ppm For a 1 second sleep
period calibrating over
20 x 32kHz clock
periods
Variation with temperature -0.010 %/°C
Variation with VDD2 -1.1 %/V74 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
22.3.12 32kHz Crystal Oscillator
VDD = 2.0 to 3.6V, -40 to +85ºC
Parameter Min Typ Max Unit Notes
Current consumption of cell
and counter logic
1.5 µA This is sensitive to the ESR
of the crystal,Vdd and total
capacitance at each pin
Start – up time 0.8 s Assuming xtal with ESR of
less than 40kohms and
CL= 9pF External caps =
15pF
(Vdd/2mV pk-pk) see
Appendix B
Input capacitance 1.4 pF Bondpad and package
Transconductance 17 uA/V
External Capacitors
(CL=9pF)
15 pF Total external capacitance
needs to be 2*CL, allowing
for stray capacitance from
chip, package and PCB
Amplitude at Xout Vdd-0.2 Vp-p
22.3.13 32MHz Crystal Oscillator
VDD = 2.0 to 3.6V, -40 to +85ºC
Parameter Min Typ Max Unit Notes
Current consumption 300 375 450 µA Excluding bandgap ref.
Start – up time 0.84 ms Assuming xtal with ESR of
less than 40ohms and CL=
9pF External caps = 15pF
see Appendix B
Input capacitance 1.4 pF Bondpad and package
Transconductance 3.65 4.30 5.16 mA/V
DC voltages, XTALIN /
XTALOUT
390/425 425/465 470/520 mV
External Capacitors
(CL=9pF)
15 pF Total external capacitance
needs to be 2*CL, allowing
for stray capacitance from
chip, package and PCB
Amplitude detect threshold 320 mVp-p Threshold detection
accessible via API© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 75
22.3.14 24MHz RC Oscillator
VDD = 2.0 to 3.6V, -40 to +85ºC
Parameter Min Typ Max Unit Notes
Current consumption of cell 160 µA
Clock native accuracy -22% 24MHz +28%
Calibrated centre frequency
accuracy
-7% 24MHz +7%
Variation with temperature -0.015 %/°C
Variation with VDD2 0.15 %/V
Startup time 1 us
22.3.15 Temperature Sensor
VDD = 2.0 to 3.6V, -40 to +85ºC
Parameter Min Typ Max Unit Notes
Operating Range -40 - 85 °C
Sensor Gain -1.44 -1.55 -1.66 mV/°C
Accuracy - - ±10 °C
Non-linearity - - 2.5 °C
Output Voltage 630 855 mV Includes absolute variation
due to manufacturing & temp
Typical Voltage 745 mV Typical at 3.0V 25°C
Resolution 0.154 0.182 0.209 °C/LSB 0 to Vref ADC I/P Range76 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
22.3.16 Radio Transceiver
This JN5148 meets all the requirements of the IEEE802.15.4 standard over 2.0 - 3.6V and offers the following
improved RF characteristics. All RF characteristics are measured single ended.
This part also meets the following regulatory body approvals, when used with NXP’s Module Reference Designs.
Compliant with FCC part 15, rules, IC Canada, ETSI ETS 300-328 and Japan ARIB STD-T66
The PCB schematic and layout rules detailed in Appendix
B.4 must be followed. Failure to do so will likely result in the
JN5148 failing to meet the performance specification detailed
herein and worst case may result in device not functioning in the
end application.
Parameter Min Typical Max Notes
RF Port Characteristics
Type Single Ended
Impedance 1 50ohm 2.4-2.5GHz
Frequency range 2.400 GHz 2.485GHz
ESD levels (pin 17) TDB
1) With external matching inductors and assuming PCB layout as in Appendix B.4.© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 77
Radio Parameters: 2.0-3.6V, +25ºC
Parameter Min Typical Max Unit Notes
Receiver Characteristics
Receive sensitivity -92 -95 dBm Nominal for 1% PER, as per
802.15.4 section 6.5.3.3
Maximum input signal +5 dBm For 1% PER, measured as
sensitivity
Adjacent channel
rejection (-1/+1 ch)
[CW Interferer]
19/34
[27/49]
dBc For 1% PER, with wanted signal
3dB, above sensitivity. (Note1,2)
(modulated interferer)
Alternate channel
rejection (-2 / +2 ch)
[CW Interferer]
40/45
[54/54]
dBc For 1% PER, with wanted signal
3dB, above sensitivity. (Note1,2)
(modulated interferer)
Other in band rejection
2.4 to 2.4835 GHz,
excluding adj channels
48 dBc For 1% PER with wanted signal
3dB above sensitivity. (Note1)
Out of band rejection 52 dBc For 1% PER with wanted signal
3dB above sensitivity. All
frequencies except wanted/2 which
is 8dB lower. (Note1)
Spurious emissions
(RX)
-61
<-70
-58
dBm Measured conducted into 50ohms
30MHz to 1GHz
1GHz to 12GHz
Intermodulation
protection
40 dB For 1% PER at with wanted signal
3dB above sensitivity. Modulated
Interferers at 2 & 4 channel
separation (Note1)
RSSI linearity -4 +4 dB -95 to -10dBm.
Available through Hardware API
Transmitter Characteristics
Transmit power +0.5 +2.5 dBm
Output power control
range
-35 dB In three 12dB steps (Note3)
Spurious emissions
(TX)
-40
<-70
<-70
dBm Measured conducted into 50ohms
30MHz to 1GHz,
1GHz to12.5GHz,
The following exceptions apply
1.8 to 1.9GHz & 5.15 to 5.3GHz
EVM [Offset] 10 [2.0] 15 % At maximum output power
Transmit Power
Spectral Density
-38 -20 dBc At greater than 3.5MHz offset, as
per 802.15.4, section 6.5.3.178 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
Radio Parameters: 2.0-3.6V, -40ºC
Parameter Min Typical Max Unit Notes
Receiver Characteristics
Receive sensitivity -93.5 -96.5 dBm Nominal for 1% PER, as per
802.15.4 section 6.5.3.3
Maximum input signal +9 dBm For 1% PER, measured as
sensitivity
Adjacent channel
rejection (-1/+1 ch)
[CW Interferer]
19/34
[TBC]
dBc For 1% PER, with wanted signal
3dB, above sensitivity. (Note1,2)
(modulated interferer)
Alternate channel
rejection (-2 / +2 ch)
[CW Interferer]
40/45
[TBC]
dBc For 1% PER, with wanted signal
3dB, above sensitivity. (Note1,2)
(modulated interferer)
Other in band rejection
2.4 to 2.4835 GHz,
excluding adj channels
47 dBc For 1% PER with wanted signal
3dB above sensitivity. (Note1)
Out of band rejection 49 dBc For 1% PER with wanted signal
3dB above sensitivity. All
frequencies except wanted/2 which
is 8dB lower. (Note1)
Spurious emissions
(RX)
-60
<-70
-57
dBm Measured conducted into 50ohms
30MHz to 1GHz
1GHz to 12GHz
Intermodulation
protection
39 dB For 1% PER at with wanted signal
3dB above sensitivity. Modulated
Interferers at 2 & 4 channel
separation (Note1)
RSSI linearity -4 +4 dB -95 to -10dBm.
Available through Hardware API
Transmitter Characteristics
Transmit power +0.75 +2.75 dBm
Output power control
range
-35 dB In three 12dB steps (Note3)
Spurious emissions
(TX)
-38
<-70
<-70
dBm Measured conducted into 50ohms
30MHz to 1GHz,
1GHz to12.5GHz,
The following exceptions apply
1.8 to 1.9GHz & 5.15 to 5.3GHz
EVM [Offset] 9 [2.0] 15 % At maximum output power
Transmit Power
Spectral Density
-38 -20 dBc At greater than 3.5MHz offset, as
per 802.15.4, section 6.5.3.1© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 79
Radio Parameters: 2.0-3.6V, +85ºC
Parameter Min Typical Max Unit Notes
Receiver Characteristics
Receive sensitivity -90 -93 dBm Nominal for 1% PER, as per
802.15.4 section 6.5.3.3
Maximum input signal +3 dBm For 1% PER, measured as
sensitivity
Adjacent channel
rejection (-1/+1 ch)
[CW Interferer]
19/34
[TBC]
dBc For 1% PER, with wanted signal
3dB, above sensitivity. (Note1,2)
(modulated interferer)
Alternate channel
rejection (-2 / +2 ch)
[CW Interferer]
40/45
[TBC]
dBc For 1% PER, with wanted signal
3dB, above sensitivity. (Note1,2)
(modulated interferer)
Other in band rejection
2.4 to 2.4835 GHz,
excluding adj channels
49 dBc For 1% PER with wanted signal
3dB above sensitivity. (Note1)
Out of band rejection 53 dBc For 1% PER with wanted signal
3dB above sensitivity. All
frequencies except wanted/2 which
is 8dB lower. (Note1)
Spurious emissions
(RX)
-62
<-70
-59
dBm Measured conducted into 50ohms
30MHz to 1GHz
1GHz to 12GHz
Intermodulation
protection
41 dB For 1% PER at with wanted signal
3dB above sensitivity. Modulated
Interferers at 2 & 4 channel
separation (Note1)
RSSI linearity -4 +4 dB -95 to -10dBm.
Available through Hardware API
Transmitter Characteristics
Transmit power -0.2 +1.8 dBm
Output power control
range
-35 dB In three 12dB steps (Note3)
Spurious emissions
(TX)
-42
<-70
<-70
dBm Measured conducted into 50ohms
30MHz to 1GHz,
1GHz to12.5GHz,
The following exceptions apply
1.8 to 1.9GHz & 5.15 to 5.3GHz
EVM [Offset] 10 [2.0] 15 % At maximum output power
Transmit Power
Spectral Density
-38 -20 dBc At greater than 3.5MHz offset, as
per 802.15.4, section 6.5.3.180 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
Note1: Blocker rejection is defined as the value, when 1% PER is seen with the wanted signal 3dB above sensitivity,
as per 802.15.4 section 6.5.3.4
Note2: Channels 11,17,24 low/high values reversed.
Note3: Up to an extra 2.5dB of attenuation is available if required.© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 81
Appendix A Mechanical and Ordering Information
A.1 56-pin QFN Package Drawing
Figure 51: 56-pin QFN Package Drawings
Controlling Dimension: mm
Symbol
millimetres
Min. Nom. Max.
A ------ ------ 0.9
A1 0.00 0.01 0.05
A2 ------ 0.65 0.7
A3 0.20 Ref.
b 0.2 0.25 0.3
D 8.00 bsc
D1 7.75 bsc
D2 6.20 6.40 6.60
E 8.00 bsc
E1 7.75 bsc
E2 6.20 6.40 6.60
L 0.30 0.40 0.50
e 0.50 bsc
υ1 0° ------ 12°
R 0.09 ------ ------
Tolerances of Form and Position
aaa 0.10
bbb 0.10
ccc 0.0582 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
A.2 PCB Decal
The following PCB decal is recommended; all dimensions are in millimetres (mm).
Figure 52: PCB Decal
The PCB schematic and layout rules detailed in Appendix B.4 must
be followed. Failure to do so will likely result in the JN5148 failing
to meet the performance specification detailed herein and worst
case may result in device not functioning in the end application.© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 83
A.3 Ordering Information
The standard qualification for the JN5148 is Industrial temperature range: -40ºC to +85ºC, packaged in a 56-pin QFN
package.
Ordering Code Format:
JN5148/XXX
XXX: ROM Variant
001 Supports all available networking stacks
Ordering Codes:
Part Number Ordering Code Description
JN5148-001 JN5148/001 JN5148 microcontroller
The chip is available in three different reel quantities:
• 500 on 180mm reel
• 1000 on 180mm reel
• 2500 on 330mm reel
Where this Data Sheet is denoted as “Advanced” or “Preliminary”, devices will be either Engineering Samples or
Prototypes. Devices of this status are marked with an Rx suffix after the ROM identifier to identify the revision of
silicon during these product phases - for example JN5148-001R1-T.
The Standard Supply Multiple (SSM) for Engineering Samples or Prototypes is 50 units with a maximum of 250 units.
If the quantity of Engineering Samples or Prototypes ordered is less than a reel quantity, then these will be shipped in
tape form only, with no reel and will not be dry packaged in a moisture sensitive environment.
The SSM for Production status devices is one reel, all reels are dry packaged in a moisture sensitive bag see A.5.3.84 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
A.4 Device Package Marking
The diagram below shows the package markings for JN5148. The package on the left along with the legend
information below it, shows the general format of package marking. The package on the right shows the specific
markings for a JN5148-001 device, that came from assembly build number 1000135 and was manufactured week 12
of 2008.
Jennic
JNXXXX-SSS
FFFFFFF
YYWW
Jennic
JN5148-001
0812
1000135
Figure 53: Device Package Marking
Legend:
JN Jennic
XXXX 4 digit part number
SSS 3 digit software ROM identifier
FFFFFFF 7 digit assembly build number
YY 2 digit year number
WW 2 digit week number
Where this Data Sheet is denoted as “Advanced” or “Preliminary”, devices will be either Engineering Samples or
Prototypes. Devices of this status have an Rx suffix after the software ROM identifier, for example JN5148-001R1.© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 85
A.5 Tape and Reel Information
A.5.1 Tape Orientation and Dimensions
The general orientation of the 56QFN package in the tape is as shown in Figure 54.
Figure 54: Tape and Reel Orientation
Figure 55 shows the detailed dimensions of the tape used for 8x8mm 56QFN devices.
ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED
Reference Dimensions (mm)
Ao 8.30 ±0.10
Bo 8.30 ±0.10
Ko 1.10 ±0.10
F 7.50 ±0.10
P1 12.00 ±0.10
W 16.00 ±0.30
(I) Measured from centreline of sprocket hole to centreline of pocket
(II) Cumulative tolerance of 10 sprocket holes is ±0.20mm
(III) Measured from centreline of sprocket hole to centreline of pocket
(IV) Other material available
Figure 55: Tape Dimensions86 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
A.5.2 Reel Information: 180mm Reel
Surface Resistivity Between 10e9 – 10e11 Ohms Square
Material High Impact Polystyrene, environmentally friendly, recyclable
All dimensions and tolerances are fully compliant with EIA-481-B and are specified in millimetres.
6 window design with one window on each side blanked to allow adequate labelling space.
Figure 56: 180mm Reel Dimensions© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 87
A.5.3 Reel Information: 330mm Reel
Surface Resistivity Between 10e9 – 10e11 Ohms Square
Material High Impact Polystyrene with Antistatic Additive
All dimensions and tolerances are fully compliant with EIA-481-B and are specified in millimetres.
3 window design to allow adequate labelling space.
Figure 57: 330mm Reel Dimensions
A.5.4 Dry Pack Requirement for Moisture Sensitive Material
Moisture sensitive material, as classified by JEDEC standard J-STD-033, must be dry packed. The 56 lead QFN
package is MSL2A/260°
C, and is dried before sealing in a moisture barrier bag (MBB) with desiccant bag weighing at
67.5 grams of activated clay and a humidity indicator card (HIC) meeting MIL-L-8835 specification. The MBB has a
moisture-sensitivity caution label to indicate the moisture-sensitive classification of the enclosed devices.88 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
Appendix B Development Support
B.1 Crystal Oscillators
This section covers some of the general background to crystal oscillators, to help the user make informed decisions
concerning the choice of crystal and the associated capacitors.
B.1.1 Crystal Equivalent Circuit
Cs
Lm Rm Cm
C1 C2
Where Cm is the motional capacitance
Lm is the motional inductance. This together with Cm defines the oscillation frequency (series)
Rm is the equivalent series resistance ( ESR ).
CS is the shunt or package capacitance and this is a parasitic
B.1.2 Crystal Load Capacitance
The crystal load capacitance is the total capacitance seen at the crystal pins, from all sources. As the load
capacitance (CL) affects the oscillation frequency by a process known as ‘pulling’, crystal manufacturers specify the
frequency for a given load capacitance only. A typical pulling coefficient is 15ppm/pF, to put this into context the
maximum frequency error in the IEEE802.15.4 specification is +/-40ppm for the transmitted signal. Therefore, it is
important for resonance at 32MHz exactly, that the specified load capacitance is provided.
The load capacitance can be calculated using:
CL =
1 2
1 2
T T
T T
C C
C C
+
×
Total capacitance CT1 = C1 + C1P + C1in
Where C1 is the capacitor component
C1P is the PCB parasitic capacitance. With the recommended layout this is about 1.6pF
C1in is the on-chip parasitic capacitance and is about 1.4pF typically.
Similarly for CT 2
Hence for a 9pF load capacitance, and a tight layout the external capacitors should be 15pF© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 89
B.1.3 Crystal ESR and Required Transconductance
The resistor in the crystal equivalent circuit represents the energy lost. To maintain oscillation, power must be
supplied by the amplifier, but how much? Firstly, the Pi connected capacitors C1 and C2 with CS from the crystal,
apply an impedance transformation to Rm, when viewed from the amplifier. This new value is given by:
2
ˆ
+ = L
S L m m
C
C C R R
The amplifier is a transconductance amplifier, which takes a voltage and produces an output current. The amplifier
together with the capacitors C1 and C2, form a circuit, which provides a negative resistance, when viewed from the
crystal. The value of which is given by:
2
1× 2 ×ω = T T
m
NEG
C C
g R
Where gm is the transconductance
ω is the frequency in rad/s
Derivations of these formulas can be easily found in textbooks.
In order to give quick and reliable oscillator start-up, a common rule of thumb is to set the amplifier negative
resistance to be a minimum of 4 times the effective crystal resistance. This gives
2
T1× T 2 ×ω
m
C C
g ≥
2
4
+
L
S L m
C
C C R
This can be used to give an equation for the required transconductance.
1 2
2 1 2 1 2 2 4 [ ( ) ]
T T
m S T T T T m C C
R C C C C C
g ×
× + + × ≥ ω
Example: Using typical 32MHz crystal parameters of Rm =40Ω, CS =1pF and CT1 =CT 2 =18pF ( for a load
capacitance of 9pF), the equation above gives the required transconductance ( gm ) as 2.59mA/V. The JN5148 has a
typical value for transconductance of 4.3mA/V
The example and equation illustrate the trade-off that exists between the load capacitance and crystal ESR. For
example, a crystal with a higher load capacitance can be used, but the value of max. ESR that can be tolerated is
reduced. Also note, that the circuit sensitivity to external capacitance [ C1 , C2 ] is a square law.
Meeting the criteria for start-up is only one aspect of the way these parameters affect performance, they also affect
the time taken during start-up to reach a given, (or full), amplitude. Unfortunately, there is no simple mathematical
model for this, but the trend is the same. Therefore, both a larger load capacitance and larger crystal ESR will give a
longer start-up time, which has the disadvantages of reduced battery life and increased latency. 90 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
B.2 32MHz Oscillator
The JN5148 contains the necessary on-chip components to build a 32 MHz reference oscillator with the addition of
an external crystal resonator, two tuning capacitors. The schematic of these components are shown in Figure 58.
The two capacitors, C1 and C2, will typically be 15pF ±5% and use a COG dielectric. For a detailed specification of
the crystal required and factors affecting C1 and C2 see Appendix B.1. As with all crystal oscillators the PCB layout is
especially important, both to keep parasitic capacitors to a minimum and to reduce the possibility of PCB noise being
coupled into the oscillator.
XTALOUT
C1 C2
XTALIN R1
JN5148
Figure 58: Crystal oscillator connections
The clock generated by this oscillator provides the reference for most of the JN5148 subsystems, including the
transceiver, processor, memory and digital and analogue peripherals.
32MHz Crystal Requirements
Parameter Min Typ Max Notes
Crystal Frequency 32MHz
Crystal Tolerance 40ppm Including temperature
and ageing
Crystal ESR Range (Rm) 10Ω 60Ω See below for more
details
Crystal Load Capacitance
Range (CL) 6pF 9pF 12pF See below for more
details
Not all Combinations of Crystal Load Capacitance and ESR are Valid
Recommended Crystal Load Capacitance 9pF and max ESR 40 Ω
External Capacitors (C1 & C2)
For recommended Crystal
15pF CL = 9pF, total external
capacitance needs to be
2*CL. , allowing for stray
capacitance from chip,
package and PCB © NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 91
As is stated above, not all combinations of crystal load capacitance and ESR are valid, and as explained in Appendix
B.1.3 there is a trade-off that exists between the load capacitance and crystal ESR to achieve reliable performance.
For this reason, we recommend that for a 9pF load capacitance crystals be specified with a maximum ESR of 40
ohms. For lower load capacitances the recommended maximum ESR rises, for example, CL=7pF the max ESR is 61
ohms. For the lower cost crystals in the large HC49 package, a load capacitance of 9 or 10pF is widely available and
the max ESR of 30 ohms specified by many manufacturers is acceptable. Also available in this package style, are
crystals with a load capacitance of 12pF, but in this case the max ESR required is 25 ohms or better.
Below is measurement data showing the variation of the crystal oscillator amplifier transconductance with
temperature and supply voltage, notice how small the variation is. Circuit techniques have been used to apply
compensation, such that the user need only design for nominal conditions.
32MHz Crystal Oscillator
4.1
4.15
4.2
4.25
4.3
4.35
-40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100
Temperature (C)
Transconductance (mA/V)
32MHz Crystal Oscillator
4.28
4.29
4.3
4.31
2 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3 3.2 3.4 3.6
Supply Voltage (VDD)
Transconductance (mA/V)92 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
B.3 32kHz Oscillator
In order to obtain more accurate sleep periods, the JN5148 contains the necessary on-chip components to build an
optional 32kHz oscillator with the addition of an external 32.768kHz crystal and two tuning capacitors. The crystal
should be connected between XTAL32K_IN and XTAL32K_OUT (DIO9 and DIO10), with two equal capacitors to
ground, one on each pin. The schematic of these components are shown in Figure 59. The two capacitors, C1 and
C2, will typically be in the range 10 to 22pF ±5% and use a COG dielectric. As with all crystal oscillators the PCB
layout is especially important, both to keep parasitic capacitors to a minimum and to reduce the possibility of PCB
noise being coupled into the oscillator.
XTAL32K_IN XTAL32K_OUT
JN5148
Figure 59: 32kHz crystal oscillator connections
The electrical specification of the oscillator can be found in 22.3.12. The oscillator cell is flexible and can operate with
a range of commonly available 32kHz crystals with load capacitances from 6 to 12.5p, and ESR up to 80KΩ. It
achieves this by using automatic gain control (AGC), which senses the signal swing. As explained in Appendix B.1.3
there is a trade-off that exists between the load capacitance and crystal ESR to achieve reliable performance. The
use of an AGC function allows a wider range of crystal load capacitors and ESR’s to be accommodated than would
otherwise be possible. However, this benefit does mean the supply current varies with the supply voltage (VDD),
value of the total capacitance at each pin, and the crystal ESR. This is described in the table and graphs below.
32kHz Crystal Requirements
Parameter Min Typ Max Notes
Crystal Frequency 32kHz
Supply Current 1.6uA Vdd=3v, temp=25 C, load
cap =9pF, Rm=25K
Supply Current Temp. Coeff. 0.1%/ C Vdd=3v
Crystal ESR Range (Rm) 10KΩ 25KΩ 80KΩ See below for more details
Crystal Load Capacitance
Range (CL)
6pF 9pF 12.5pF See below for more details
Not all Combinations of Crystal Load Capacitance and ESR are Valid © NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 93
Three examples of typical crystals are given, each with the value of external capacitors to use, plus the likely supply
current and start-up time that can be expected. Also given is the maximum recommended ESR based on the start-up
criteria given in Appendix B.1.3. The values of the external capacitors can be calculated using the equation in
Appendix B.1.2 .
Load Capacitance Ext Capacitors Current Start-up Time Max ESR
9pF 15pF 1.6uA 0.8Sec 70KΩ
6pF 9pF 1.4uA 0.6sec 80KΩ
12.5pF 22pF 2.4uA 1.1sec 35KΩ
Below is measurement data showing the variation of the crystal oscillator supply current with voltage and with crystal
ESR, for two load capacitances.
32KHz Crystal Oscillator Current
0.6
0.8
1
1.2
1.4
1.6
2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3 3.2 3.4 3.6
Supply Voltage (VDD)
Normalised Current (IDD)
32KHz Crystal Oscillator Current
0.6
0.8
1
1.2
1.4
1.6
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Crystal ESR (K ohm)
Normalised Current (IDD)
9pF
12.5pF94 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
B.4 JN5148 Module Reference Designs
For customers wishing to integrate the JN5148 device directly into their system, NXP provide a range of Module
Reference Designs, covering standard and high-power modules fitted with different Antennae
To ensure the correct performance, it is strongly recommended that where possible the design details provided by the
reference designs, are used in their exact form for all end designs, this includes component values, pad dimensions,
track layouts etc. In order to minimise all risks, it is recommended that the entire layout of the appropriate reference
module, if possible, be replicated in the end design.
For full details, consult the Standard Module Reference Design JN-RD-6015 [6].
B.4.1 Schematic Diagram
A schematic diagram of the JN5148 PCB antenna reference module is shown in Figure 60. Details of component
values and PCB layout constraints can be found in Table 8.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43
SPI Selects
Analogue IO
UART0/JTAG
Timers
Two Wire
Serial Port
RXD1
UART1/JTAG
DIO16
CTS1
VSS3
RTS1
TXD1
VSS2
VSSS
XTAL_OUT
XTAL_IN
VB_SYNTH
VCOTUNE (NC)
VB_VCOR1 43K
IBIAS
C16 100nF
VDD1
C14 100nF
VDD
C13 10uF
C24 47pF
C18 47pF
C2 10nF
C15 100nF
Y1
C11 15pF
C10 15pF
C20 100nF
L2 2.7nH
VB_RF
VREF
VB_RF2
RF_IN
VB_RF
C12 47pF
C3 100nF
VB_RF1
C1M
C1P
ADC1
ADC2
ADC3
ADC4
C2M
C2P
VB_A
C9 47pF
C8 100nF NC
VDD
VDD
RXD1
SPIMOSI
SPIMOSI
SPICLK SPICLK
C6 100nF
C7 100nF
SPISEL3
SPISEL2
VB_DIG
RESETN
SPISEL1
SPISEL0
VB_RAM
SPIMISO
VSS1
DAC2
DAC1
1
2
3
4
8
7
6
5
SS
SD0
WP
VSS SDI
CLK
HOLD
VCC
Serial
Flash
Memory
RXD0
TXD0
RTS0
CTS0
SPISEL4
VDD
SIF_D
SIF_CLK
TIM1OUT
TIM1CAP
TIM1CK_GT
TIM0OUT
TIM0CAP
VDD2
TIM0CK_GT
VSSA
JN5148
C1 47pF L1 5.6nH
To Coaxial Socket
Or Integrated Antenna
Figure 60: JN5148 Printed Antenna Reference Module Schematic Diagram© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 95
Component
Designator
Value/Type Function PCB Layout Constraints
C13 10uF Power source decoupling
C14 100nF Analogue Power decoupling Adjacent to U1 pin 13
C16 100nF Digital power decoupling Adjacent to U1 pin 49
C15 100nF VB Synth decoupling Less than 5mm from U1 pin 10
C18 47pF VB Synth decoupling Less than 5mm from U1 pin 10
C2 10nF VB VCO decoupling Less than 5mm from U1 pin 12
C24 47pF VB VCO decoupling Less than 5mm from U1 pin 12
C3 100nF VB RF decoupling Less than 5mm from U1 pin 16 and U1 pin 18
C12 47pF VB RF decoupling Less than 5mm from U1 pin 16 and U1 pin 18
C8 100nF VB A decoupling Less than 5mm from U1 pin 27
C9 47pF VB A decoupling Less than 5mm from U1 pin 27
C6 100nF VB RAM decoupling Less than 5mm from U1 pin 35
C7 100nF VB Dig decoupling Less than 5mm from U1 pin 40
R1 43k I Bias Resistor Less than 5mm from U1 pin 14
C20 100nF Vref decoupling Less than 5mm from U1 pin 15
U2 4Mbit Serial Flash Memory (Numonyx M25P40)
Y1 32MHz Crystal (AEL X32M000000S025) (CL = 9pF, Max ESR 40R)
C10 15pF +/-5% COG Crystal Load Capacitor Adjacent to pin 8 and Y1 pin 1
C11 15pF +/-5% COG Crystal Load Capacitor Adjacent to pin 9 and Y1 pin 3
R2 Not fitted
C1 47pF AC Coupling
Phycomp 2238-869-15479
Must be copied directly from the reference design.
L1 5.6nH RF Matching Inductor
MuRata LQP15MN5N6B02
L2 2.7nH Load Inductor
MuRata LQP15MN2N7B02
Table 8: JN5148 Printed Antenna Reference Module Components and PCB Layout Constraints
The paddle should be connected directly to ground. Any pads that requiring connection to ground should do so by
connecting directly to the paddle.96 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
B.4.2 PCB Design and Reflow Profile
PCB and land pattern designs are key to the reliability of any electronic circuit design.
The Institute for Interconnecting and Packaging Electronic Circuits (IPC) defines a number of standards for electronic
devices. One of these is the "Surface Mount Design and Land Pattern Standard" IPC-SM-782 [3], commonly referred
to as “IPC782". This specification defines the physical packaging characteristics and land patterns for a range of
surface mounted devices. IPC782 is also a useful reference document for general surface mount design techniques,
containing sections on design requirements, reliability and testability. NXP strongly recommends that this be referred
to when designing the PCB.
The suggested reflow profile is shown in Figure 61. The specific paste manufacturers guidelines on peak flow
temperature, soak times, time above liquidus and ramp rates should also be referenced.
Figure 61: Recommended Reflow Profile for Lead-free Solder Paste or PPF lead frame© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 97
Related Documents
[1] IEEE Std 802.15.4-2003 IEEE Standard for Information Technology – Part 15.4 Wireless Medium Access Control
(MAC) and Physical Layer (PHY) Specifications for Low-Rate Wireless Personal Area Networks (LR-WPANs).
[2] JN-AN-1038 Programming Flash devices not supported by the JN51xx ROM-based bootloader
[3] IPC-SM-782 Surface Mount Design and Land Pattern Standard
[4] JN-AN-1118 JN5148 Application Debugging
[5] JN-UG-3066 JN51xx Integrated Peripherals API User Guide
[6] JN-RD-6015 Standard Module Reference Design
[7] JN-AN-1003 Boot Loader Operation
RoHS Compliance
JN5148 devices meet the requirements of Directive 2002/95/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council on
the Restriction of Hazardous Substance (RoHS) and of the China RoHS (SJ/T11363 – 2006) requirements which
came into force on 1st March 2007.
Status Information
The status of this Data Sheet is. Production
NXP products progress according to the following format:
Advance
The Data Sheet shows the specification of a product in planning or in development.
The functionality and electrical performance specifications are target values of the design and may be used as a
guide to the final specification. Integrated circuits are identified with an Rx suffix, for example JN5148-001R1.
NXP reserves the right to make changes to the product specification at anytime without notice.
Preliminary
The Data Sheet shows the specification of a product that is commercially available, but is not yet fully qualified.
The functionality of the product is final. The electrical performance specifications are target values and may used as a
guide to the final specification. Integrated circuits are identified with an Rx suffix, for example JN5148-001R1.
NXP reserves the right to make changes to the product specification at anytime without notice.
Production
This is the production Data Sheet for the product.
All functional and electrical performance specifications, where included, including min and max values are derived
from detailed product characterization.
This Data Sheet supersedes all previous document versions.
NXP reserves the right to make changes to the product specification at anytime.98 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
Disclaimers
Limited warranty and liability — Information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, NXP Semiconductors does not give
any representations or warranties, expressed or implied, as to the accuracy or completeness of such information and shall have no liability for the
consequences of use of such information. NXP Semiconductors takes no responsibility for the content in this document if provided by an information
source outside of NXP Semiconductors.
In no event shall NXP Semiconductors be liable for any indirect, incidental, punitive, special or consequential damages (including - without limitation -
lost profits, lost savings, business interruption, costs related to the removal or replacement of any products or rework charges) whether or not such
damages are based on tort (including negligence), warranty, breach of contract or any other legal theory.
Notwithstanding any damages that customer might incur for any reason whatsoever, NXP Semiconductors’ aggregate and cumulative liability towards
customer for the products described herein shall be limited in accordance with the Terms and conditions of commercial sale of NXP Semiconductors.
Right to make changes — NXP Semiconductors reserves the right to make changes to information published in this document, including without
limitation specifications and product descriptions, at any time and without notice. This document supersedes and replaces all information supplied prior
to the publication hereof.
Suitability for use — NXP Semiconductors products are not designed, authorized or warranted to be suitable for use in life support, life-critical or
safety-critical systems or equipment, nor in applications where failure or malfunction of an NXP Semiconductors product can reasonably be expected to
result in personal injury, death or severe property or environmental damage. NXP Semiconductors and its suppliers accept no liability for inclusion
and/or use of NXP Semiconductors products in such equipment or applications and therefore such inclusion and/or use is at the customer’s own risk.
Applications — Applications that are described herein for any of these products are for illustrative purposes only. NXP Semiconductors makes no
representation or warranty that such applications will be suitable for the specified use without further testing or modification.
Customers are responsible for the design and operation of their applications and products using NXP Semiconductors products, and NXP
Semiconductors accepts no liability for any assistance with applications or customer product design. It is customer’s sole responsibility to determine
whether the NXP Semiconductors product is suitable and fit for the customer’s applications and products planned, as well as for the planned
application and use of customer’s third party customer(s). Customers should provide appropriate design and operating safeguards to minimize the risks
associated with their applications and products.
NXP Semiconductors does not accept any liability related to any default, damage, costs or problem which is based on any weakness or default in the
customer’s applications or products, or the application or use by customer’s third party customer(s). Customer is responsible for doing all necessary
testing for the customer’s applications and products using NXP Semiconductors products in order to avoid a default of the applications and the
products or of the application or use by customer’s third party customer(s). NXP does not accept any liability in this respect.
Export control — This document as well as the item(s) described herein may be subject to export control regulations. Export might require a prior
authorization from competent authorities.
Limiting values — Stress above one or more limiting values (as defined in the Absolute Maximum Ratings System of IEC 60134) will cause
permanent damage to the device. Limiting values are stress ratings only and (proper) operation of the device at these or any other conditions above
those given in the Operating Conditions section or the Electrical Characteristics sections of this document is not warranted. Constant or repeated
exposure to limiting values will permanently and irreversibly affect the quality and reliability of the device.
AEC unqualified products — This product has not been qualified to the appropriate Automotive Electronics Council (AEC) standard Q100 or Q101
and should not be used in automotive applications, including but not limited to applications where failure or malfunction of an NXP Semiconductors
product can reasonably be expected to result in personal injury, death or severe property or environmental damage. NXP Semiconductors accepts no
liability for inclusion and/or use of NXP Semiconductors products in such equipment or applications and therefore such inclusion and/or use is for the
customer’s own risk.
Product specification — The information and data provided in a Product data sheet shall define the specification of the product as agreed between
NXP Semiconductors and its customer, unless NXP Semiconductors and customer have explicitly agreed otherwise in writing. In no event however,
shall an agreement be valid in which the NXP Semiconductors product is deemed to offer functions and qualities beyond those described in the
Product data sheet
All products are sold subject to NXP Semiconductors’ terms and conditions of sale, supplied at the time of order acknowledgment and published at
http://www.nxp.com/profile/terms.
Trademarks
All trademarks are the property of their respective owners.© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 99
Version Control
Version Notes
1.0 12th December 2008 – First issue, released as Advance Information
1.1 15th May 2009 – Major revision
1.2 15th July – Released as Preliminary and revised Electrical Parameters section
1.3 20th January 2010 – Revision to sections 1.1, 2.2.1 & 8.1 – 8.4 and figs 1,2,22 & 47. Also, the bill of
materials and reference design number have been updated.
1.4 2nd April 2010 – Released as Production with revised Electrical Parameters section
1.5 14th September 2010 – Logo updated and support for JenNet added
1.6 24th November 2010 – Ordering information changed
1.7 5th May 2011 – Tape and reel information updated
1.8 12th September 2012 – NXP branding applied
1.9 6th September 2013 – Modified description of interrupts within the CPU in Chapter 3100 JN-DS-JN5148-001 1v9 © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
Contact Details
NXP Laboratories UK Ltd
(Formerly Jennic Ltd)
Furnival Street
Sheffield
S1 4QT
United Kingdom
Tel: +44 (0)114 281 2655
Fax: +44 (0) 114 281 2951
For the contact details of your local NXP office or distributor, refer to the NXP web site:
www.nxp.com
Data Sheet: JN516x
IEEE802.15.4 Wireless Microcontroller
© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production 1
Overview Features: Radio
• 2.4GHz IEEE802.15.4 compliant
• 128-bit AES security processor
• MAC accelerator with packet
formatting, CRCs, address check,
auto-acks, timers
• Integrated ultra low power sleep
oscillator – 0.6µA
• 2.0V to 3.6V battery operation
• Deep sleep current 0.12µA (Wake-up
from IO)
• <$0.15 external component cost
• RX current 17mA , TX 15mA
• Receiver sensitivity -95dBm
• Transmit power 2.5dBm
• Time of Flight engine for ranging
• Antenna Diversity (Auto RX)
Features: Microcontroller
• 32-bit RISC CPU, 1 to 32MHz clock
speed
• Variable instruction width for high
coding efficiency
• Multi-stage instruction pipeline
• JN5161: 64kB/8kB/4kB
• JN5164: 160kB/32kB/4kB
• JN5168: 256kB/32kB/4kB
(Flash/RAM/EEPROM)
• Data EEPROM with guaranteed 100k
write operations.
• RF4CE, JenNet-IP, ZigBee SE and
ZigBee Light Link stacks
• 2-wire I2C compatible serial interface.
Can operate as either master or slave
• 5xPWM (4x timer & 1 timer/counter)
• 2 low power sleep counters
• 2x UART
• SPI Master & Slave port, 3 selects
• Supply voltage monitor with 8
programmable thresholds
• 4-input 10-bit ADC, comparator
• Battery and temperature sensors
• Watchdog & Brown Out Reset
• Up to 20 Digital IO Pins (DIO)
• Infra-red remote control transmitter
Temp range (-40°C to +125°C)
6x6mm 40-lead
Lead-free and RoHS compliant
The JN516x series is a range of ultra low power, high performance wireless
microcontrollers supporting JenNet-IP, ZigBee PRO or RF4CE networking
stacks to facilitate the development of Home Automation, Smart Energy,
Light Link and Remote control applications. They feature an enhanced 32-
bit RISC processor with embedded Flash and EEPROM memory, offering
high coding efficiency through variable width instructions, a multi-stage
instruction pipeline and low power operation with programmable clock
speeds. They also include a 2.4GHz IEEE802.15.4 compliant transceiver
and a comprehensive mix of analogue and digital peripherals. Three
memory configurations are available to suit different applications. The best
in class operating current of 15mA, with a 0.6uA sleep timer mode, gives
excellent battery life allowing operation direct from a coin cell.
The peripherals support a wide range of applications. They include a 2-wire
I
2
C, and SPI ports which can operate as either master or slave, a four
channel ADC with battery and a temperature sensor. It can support a large
switch matrix of up to 100 elements, or alternatively a 20 key capacitive
touch pad.
Block Diagram
32-bit
RISC CPU 4xPWM + Timer
2xUART
10-bit ADC
Battery and
Temp Sensors
2-Wire Serial
(Master/Slave)
SPI
Master & Slave RAM
128-bit AES
Hardware
2.4GHz
Including
Diversity
Flash
Power
Management
XTAL
O-QPSK
Modem
4kB
EEPROM
20 DIO
Sleep Counter
Watchdog
Timer
Voltage Brownout
8/32K 64/160/256K
Radio
4-Channel
IEEE 802.15.4
Baseband
Processor
Encryption
Benefits
• Single chip device to run
stack and application
• Very low current solution for
long battery life – over 10 yrs
• Supports multiple network
stacks
• Highly featured 32-bit RISC
CPU for high performance
and low power
• System BOM is low in
component count and cost
• Flexible sensor interfacing
options
Applications
• Robust and secure low power
wireless applications
• RF4CE Remote Controls
• JenNet-IP networks
• ZigBee SE networks
• ZigBee Light Link networks
• Lighting & Home automation
• Toys and gaming peripherals
• Smart Energy
• Energy harvesting, for
example self powered light
switch2 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
Contents
Benefits 1
Applications 1
1 Introduction 6
1.1 Wireless Transceiver 6
1.2 RISC CPU and Memory 6
1.3 Peripherals 7
1.4 Block Diagram – JN516x 8
2 Pin Configurations 9
2.1 Pin Assignment 10
2.2 Pin Descriptions 12
2.2.1 Power Supplies 12
2.2.2 Reset 12
2.2.3 32MHz Oscillator 12
2.2.4 Radio 12
2.2.5 Analogue Peripherals 13
2.2.6 Digital Input/Output 13
3 CPU 15
4 Memory Organisation 16
4.1 FLASH 16
4.2 RAM 16
4.3 OTP Configuration Memory 16
4.4 EEPROM 17
4.5 External Memory 17
4.6 Peripherals 17
4.7 Unused Memory Addresses 17
5 System Clocks 18
5.1 High-Speed (32MHz) System Clock 18
5.1.1 32MHz Crystal Oscillator 18
5.1.2 High-Speed RC Oscillator 19
5.2 Low-speed (32kHz) System Clock 19
5.2.1 32kHz RC Oscillator 19
5.2.2 32kHz Crystal Oscillator 20
5.2.3 32kHz External Clock 20
6 Reset 21
6.1 Internal Power-On / Brown-out Reset (BOR) 21
6.2 External Reset 22
6.3 Software Reset 22
6.4 Supply Voltage Monitor (SVM) 22
6.5 Watchdog Timer 23
7 Interrupt System 24
7.1 System Calls 24
7.2 Processor Exceptions 24
7.2.1 Bus Error 24© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production 3
7.2.2 Alignment 24
7.2.3 Illegal Instruction 24
7.2.4 Stack Overflow 24
7.3 Hardware Interrupts 25
8 Wireless Transceiver 26
8.1 Radio 26
8.1.1 Radio External Components 27
8.1.2 Antenna Diversity 27
8.2 Modem 29
8.3 Baseband Processor 30
8.3.1 Transmit 30
8.3.2 Reception 30
8.3.3 Auto Acknowledge 31
8.3.4 Beacon Generation 31
8.3.5 Security 31
8.4 Security Coprocessor 31
8.5 Time of Flight Engine 31
9 Digital Input/Output 32
10 Serial Peripheral Interface 34
10.1 Serial Peripheral Interface Master 34
10.2 Serial Peripheral Interface Slave 37
11 Timers 38
11.1 Peripheral Timer/Counters 38
11.1.1 Pulse Width Modulation Mode 39
11.1.2 Capture Mode 39
11.1.3 Counter/Timer Mode 40
11.1.4 Delta-Sigma Mode 40
11.1.5 Infra-Red Transmission Mode 41
11.1.6 Example Timer/Counter Application 41
11.2 Tick Timer 42
11.3 Wakeup Timers 42
11.3.1 32 KHZ RC Oscillator Calibration 43
12 Pulse Counters 44
13 Serial Communications 45
13.1 Interrupts 46
13.2 UART Application 46
14 JTAG Test Interface 48
15 Two-Wire Serial Interface (I2
C) 49
15.1 Connecting Devices 49
15.2 Clock Stretching 50
15.3 Master Two-wire Serial Interface 50
15.4 Slave Two-wire Serial Interface 52
16 Random Number Generator 534 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
17 Analogue Peripherals 54
17.1 Analogue to Digital Converter 54
17.1.1 Operation 55
17.1.2 Supply Monitor 56
17.1.3 Temperature Sensor 56
17.1.4 ADC Sample Buffer Mode 56
17.2 Comparator 56
18 Power Management and Sleep Modes 57
18.1 Operating Modes 57
18.1.1 Power Domains 57
18.2 Active Processing Mode 57
18.2.1 CPU Doze 57
18.3 Sleep Mode 57
18.3.1 Wakeup Timer Event 58
18.3.2 DIO Event 58
18.3.3 Comparator Event 58
18.3.4 Pulse Counter 58
18.4 Deep Sleep Mode 58
19 Electrical Characteristics 59
19.1 Maximum Ratings 59
19.2 DC Electrical Characteristics 59
19.2.1 Operating Conditions 59
19.2.2 DC Current Consumption 60
19.2.3 I/O Characteristics 61
19.3 AC Characteristics 61
19.3.1 Reset and Supply Voltage Monitor 61
19.3.2 SPI Master Timing 63
19.3.3 SPI Slave Timing 64
19.3.4 Two-wire Serial Interface 65
19.3.5 Wakeup Timings 65
19.3.6 Bandgap Reference 66
19.3.7 Analogue to Digital Converters 66
19.3.8 Comparator 67
19.3.9 32kHz RC Oscillator 67
19.3.10 32kHz Crystal Oscillator 68
19.3.11 32MHz Crystal Oscillator 68
19.3.12 High-Speed RC Oscillator 69
19.3.13 Temperature Sensor 69
19.3.14 Non-Volatile Memory 69
19.3.15 Radio Transceiver 70
Appendix A Mechanical and Ordering Information 76
A.1 SOT618-1 HVQFN40 40-pin QFN Package Drawing 76
A.2 Footprint Information 77
A.3 Ordering Information 78
A.4 Device Package Marking 79
A.5 Tape and Reel Information 80
A.5.1 Tape Orientation and Dimensions 80
A.5.2 Reel Information: 180mm Reel 81
A.5.3 Reel Information: 330mm Reel 82© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production 5
A.5.4 Dry Pack Requirement for Moisture Sensitive Material 82
Appendix B Development Support 83
B.1 Crystal Oscillators 83
B.1.1 Crystal Equivalent Circuit 83
B.1.2 Crystal Load Capacitance 83
B.1.3 Crystal ESR and Required Transconductance 84
B.2 32MHz Oscillator 85
B.3 32kHz Oscillator 87
B.4 JN516x Module Reference Designs 89
B.4.1 Schematic Diagram 89
B.4.2 PCB Design and Reflow Profile 91
B.4.3 Moisture Sensitivity Level (MSL) 91
Related Documents 92
RoHS Compliance 92
Status Information 92
Disclaimers 93
Trademarks 93
Version Control 93
Contact Details 946 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
1 Introduction
The JN516x is an IEEE802.15.4 wireless microcontroller that provides a fully integrated solution for applications using
the IEEE802.15.4 standard in the 2.4 - 2.5GHz ISM frequency band [1], including Zigbee PRO, ZigBee Smart Energy,
ZigBee LightLink, RF4CE and JenNet-IP. There are 3 versions in the range, differing only by memory configuration
JN5161-001: 64kB Flash, 8kB RAM, 4 kB EEPROM, suitable for IEEE802.15.4 and RF4CE applications
JN5164-001: 160kB Flash, 32kB RAM, 4 kB EEPROM suitable for Jennet-IP, IEEE802.15.4 and RF4CE applications
JN5168-001: 256kB Flash, 32kB RAM, 4 kB EEPROM suitable for all applications
Applications that transfer data wirelessly tend to be more complex than wired ones. Wireless protocols make
stringent demands on frequencies, data formats, timing of data transfers, security and other issues. Application
development must consider the requirements of the wireless network in addition to the product functionality and user
interfaces. To minimise this complexity, NXP provides a series of software libraries and interfaces that control the
transceiver and peripherals of the JN516x. These libraries and interfaces remove the need for the developer to
understand wireless protocols and greatly simplifies the programming complexities of power modes, interrupts and
hardware functionality.
In view of the above, it is not necessary to provide the register details of the JN516x in the datasheet.
The device includes a Wireless Transceiver, RISC CPU, on chip memory and an extensive range of peripherals.
1.1 Wireless Transceiver
The Wireless Transceiver comprises a 2.45GHz radio, a modem, a baseband controller and a security coprocessor.
In addition, the radio also provides an output to control transmit-receive switching of external devices such as power
amplifiers allowing applications that require increased transmit power to be realised very easily. Appendix B.4,
describes a complete reference design including Printed Circuit Board (PCB) design and Bill Of Materials (BOM).
The security coprocessor provides hardware-based 128-bit AES-CCM* modes as specified by the IEEE802.15.4
2006 standard. Specifically this includes encryption and authentication covered by the MIC –32/-64/-128, ENC and
ENC-MIC –32/-64/-128 modes of operation.
The transceiver elements (radio, modem and baseband) work together to provide IEEE802.15.4 (2006) MAC and
PHY functionality under the control of a protocol stack. Applications incorporating IEEE802.15.4 functionality can be
developed rapidly by combining user-developed application software with a protocol stack library.
1.2 RISC CPU and Memory
A 32-bit RISC CPU allows software to be run on-chip, its processing power being shared between the IEEE802.15.4
MAC protocol, other higher layer protocols and the user application. The JN516x has a unified memory architecture,
code memory, data memory, peripheral devices and I/O ports are organised within the same linear address space.
The device contains up to 256kbytes of Flash, up to 32kbytes of RAM and 4kbytes EEPROM . © NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production 7
1.3 Peripherals
The following peripherals are available on chip:
• Master SPI port with three select outputs
• Slave SPI port
• Two UART’s, one capable of hardware flow control (4-wire, includes RTS/CTS), and the other just 2-wire
(RX/TX)
• One programmable Timer/Counter which supports Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) and capture/compare, plus
four PWM timers which support PWM and Timer modes only.
• Two programmable Sleep Timers and a Tick Timer
• Two-wire serial interface (compatible with SMbus and I2
C) supporting master and slave operation
• Twenty digital I/O lines (multiplexed with peripherals such as timers, SPI and UARTs)
• Two digital outputs (multiplexed with SPI port)
• 10-bit, Analogue to Digital converter with up to four input channels. Autonomous multi-channel sampling
• Programmable analogue comparator
• Internal temperature sensor and battery monitor
• Two low power pulse counters
• Random number generator
• Watchdog Timer and Supply Voltage Monitor
• JTAG hardware debug port
• Infra-red remote control transmitter, supported by one of the PWM timers
• Transmit and receive antenna diversity with automatic receive switching based on received energy detection
• Time of Flight engine for ranging
User applications access the peripherals using the Integrated Peripherals API. This allows applications to use a
tested and easily understood view of the peripherals allowing rapid system development. 8 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
1.4 Block Diagram – JN516x
Wireless
Transceiver
32-bit RISC CPU
MUX
Security
Processor
Digital Baseband
Radio
Programmable
Interrupt
Controller
From Peripherals
RF_IN
VCOTUNE
Tick Timer
Voltage
Regulators 1.8V VDD1
VDD2
IBIAS
VB_XX
EEPROM
4KB
CPU and 16MHz
System Clock
32MHz Xtal
Clock
Generator
XTAL_IN
XTAL_OUT
Clock
Source &
Rate
Select
Highspeed
RC
Osc
Watchdog
Timer
Supply Voltage
Monitor
Reset
Wakeup
Timer1
Wakeup Timer0
RESETN
32kHz Clock
Select 32KIN
Comparator1
COMP1P
COMP1M
ADC
M
U
ADC4 X
ADC1
VREF/ADC2
ADC3
Temperature
Sensor
Supply Monitor
32kHz
RC
Osc
32kHz
Xtal
Osc
32KXTALIN
32KXTALOUT
SPI Slave
DIO0
DIO1
DIO2
DIO3
DIO4
DIO5
DIO6
DIO7
DIO8
DIO9
DIO10
DIO11
DIO12
DIO13
DIO14
DIO15
DIO16
DIO17
DIO18
DIO19
DO0
DO1
TXD0
SPI
Master
UART0
UART1
RXD0
RTS0
CTS0
TxD1
RxD1
TIM0CK_GT
TIM0OUT
TIM0CAP
PWM1
PWM2
PWM3
PWM4
SIF_D
SIF_CLK
PC0
PC1
JTAG_TDI
JTAG_TMS
JTAG_TCK
JTAG_TDO
ADO
ADE
Timer0
PWMs
2-wire
Interface
Pulse
Counters
JTAG
Debug
Antenna
Diversity
SPICLK
SPIMOSI
SPIMISO
SPISEL0
SPICLK
SPIMOSI
SPIMISO
SPISEL0
SPISEL1
SPISEL2
FLASH
256/160/64KB
RAM
32/32/8KB
Figure 1: JN516x Block Diagram© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production 9
2 Pin Configurations
1
40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31
VSSA
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
DIO16
DIO17
RESETN
XTAL_OUT
XTAL_IN
VB_SYNTH
VCOTUNE
VB_VCO
VDD1
IBIAS
VREF/ADC2
VB_RF2
RF_IN
VB_RF1
ADC1
DIO0
DIO1
DIO2
DIO3
DO0
VSS1
DO1
DIO18
DIO19
VB_RAM
DIO4
DIO5
DIO6
DIO7
VDD2
DIO15
VSS2
DIO14
DIO13
DIO12
VB_DIG
DIO11
DIO10
DIO9
DIO8
Figure 2: 40-pin QFN Configuration (top view)
Note: Please refer to Appendix B.4 JN516x Module Reference
Design for important applications information regarding the
connection of the PADDLE to the PCB. 10 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
2.1 Pin Assignment
Pin No Power supplies Signal
Type
Description
6, 8,
12, 14,
25, 35
VB_SYNTH, VB_VCO, VB_RF2, VB_RF1, VB_RAM, VB_DIG 1.8V Regulated supply voltage
9, 30 VDD1, VDD2 3.3V Supplies: VDD1 for
analogue, VDD2 for digital
21, 39,
Paddle
VSS1, VSS2, VSSA 0V Grounds (see appendix A.2
for paddle details)
General
3 RESETN CMOS Reset input
4,5 XTAL_OUT, XTAL_IN 1.8V System crystal oscillator
Radio
7 VCOTUNE 1.8V VCO tuning RC network
10 IBIAS 1.8V Bias current control
13 RF_IN 1.8V RF antenna
Analogue Peripheral I/O
15, 16,
17
ADC1, DIO0 (ADC3), DIO1 (ADC4) 3.3V ADC inputs
11 VREF/ADC2 1.8V Analogue peripheral
reference voltage or ADC
input 2
1, 2 DIO16 (COMP1P), DIO17 (COMP1M) 3.3V Comparator inputs
Digital Peripheral I/O
Primary Alternate Functions
16 DIO0 SPISEL1 ADC3 CMOS DIO0, SPI Master Select
Output 1 or ADC input 3
17 DIO1 SPISEL2 ADC4 PC0 CMOS DIO1, SPI Master Select
Output 2, ADC input 4 or
Pulse Counter 0 Input
18 DIO2 RFRX TIM0CK_GT CMOS DIO2, Radio Receive Control
Output or Timer0 Clock/Gate
Input
19 DIO3 RFTX TIM0CAP CMOS DIO3, Radio Transmit
Control Output or Timer0
Capture Input
26 DIO4 CTS0 JTAG_TCK TIM0OUT PC0 CMOS DIO4, UART 0 Clear To
Send Input, JTAG CLK Input,
Timer0 PWM Output, or
Pulse Counter 0 input
27 DIO5 RTS0 JTAG_TMS PWM1 PC1 CMOS DIO5, UART 0 Request To
Send Output, JTAG Mode
Select Input, PWM1 Output
or Pulse Counter 1 Input
28 DIO6 TXD0 JTAG_TDO PWM2 CMOS DIO6, UART 0 Transmit Data
Output, JTAG Data Output or
PWM2 Output
29 DIO7 RXD0 JTAG_TDI PWM3 CMOS DIO7, UART 0 Receive Data
Input, JTAG Data Input or
PWM 3 Output
31 DIO8 TIM0CK_GT PC1 PWM4 CMOS DIO8, Timer0 Clock/Gate
Input, Pulse Counter1 Input
or PWM 4 Output© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production 11
32 DIO9 TIM0CAP 32KXTALIN RXD1 32KIN CMOS DIO9, Timer0 Capture Input,
32K External Crystal Input,
UART 1 Receive Data Input
or 32K external clock Input
33 DIO10 TIM0OUT 32KXTALOUT CMOS DIO10, Timer0 PWM Output
or 32K External Crystal
Output
34 DIO11 PWM1 TXD1 CMOS DIO11, PWM1 Output or
UART 1 Transmit Data
Output
36 DIO12 PWM2 CTS0 JTAG_TCK ADO SPISMO
SI
CMOS DIO12, PWM2 Output, UART
0 Clear To Send Input, JTAG
CLK Input, Antenna Diversity
Odd Output or SPI Slave
Master Out Slave In Input
37 DIO13 PWM3 RTS0 JTAG_TMS ADE SPISMI
SO
CMOS DIO13, PWM3 Output, UART
0 Request To Send Output,
JTAG Mode Select Input,
Antenna Diversity Even
output or SPI Slave Master In
Slave Out Output
38 DIO14 SIF_CLK TXD0 TXD1 JTAG_TDO SPISEL
1
SPISSE
L
CMOS DIO14, Serial Interface
Clock, UART 0 Transmit
Data Output, UART 1
Transmit Data Output, JTAG
Data Output, SPI Master
Select Output 1 or SPI Slave
Select Input
40 DIO15 SIF_D RXD0 RXD1 JTAG_TDI SPISEL
2
SPISCL
K
CMOS DIO15, Serial Interface Data,
UART 0 Receive Data Input,
UART 1 Receive Data Input,
JTAG Data Input, SPI Master
Select Output 2 or SPI Slave
Clock Input
1 DIO16 COMP1P SIF_CLK SPISMOSI CMOS DIO16, Comparator Positive
Input, Serial Interface clock
or SPI Slave Master Out
Slave In Input
2 DIO17 COMP1M SIF_D SPISMISO CMOS DIO17, Comparator Negative
Input, Serial Interface Data or
SPI Slave Master In Slave
Out Output
23 DIO18 SPIMOSI CMOS SPI Master Out Slave In
Output
24 DIO19 SPISEL0 CMOS SPI Master Select Output 0
20 DO0 SPICLK PWM2 CMOS SPI Master Clock Output or
PWM2 Output
22 DO1 SPIMISO PWM3 CMOS SPI Master In Slave Out
Input or PWM3 Output
The PCB schematic and layout rules detailed in Appendix B.4
must be followed. Failure to do so will likely result in the
JN516x failing to meet the performance specification detailed
herein and worst case may result in device not functioning in
the end application.12 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
2.2 Pin Descriptions
2.2.1 Power Supplies
The device is powered from the VDD1 and VDD2 pins, each being decoupled with a 100nF ceramic capacitor. VDD1
is the power supply to the analogue circuitry; it should be decoupled to ground. VDD2 is the power supply for the
digital circuitry; and should also be decoupled to ground. In addition, a common 10µF tantalum capacitor is required
for low frequencies. Decoupling pins for the internal 1.8V regulators are provided which each require a100nF
capacitor located as close to the device as practical. VB_SYNTH, VB_RAM and VB_DIG require only a 100nF
capacitor. VB_RF and VB_RF2 should be connected together as close to the device as practical, and require one
100nF capacitor and one 47pF capacitor. The pin VB_VCO requires a 10nF capacitor. Refer to B.4.1 for schematic
diagram.
VSSA (paddle), VSS1, VSS2 are the ground pins.
Users are strongly discouraged from connecting their own circuits to the 1.8v regulated supply pins, as the regulators
have been optimised to supply only enough current for the internal circuits.
2.2.2 Reset
RESETN is an active low reset input pin that is connected to a 500kΩ internal pull-up resistor. It may be pulled low
by an external circuit. Refer to Section 6.2 for more details.
2.2.3 32MHz Oscillator
A crystal is connected between XTAL_IN and XTAL_OUT to form the reference oscillator, which drives the system
clock. A capacitor to analogue ground is required on each of these pins. Refer to Section 5.1 for more details. The
32MHz reference frequency is divided down to 16MHz and this is used as the system clock throughout the device.
2.2.4 Radio
The radio is a single ended design, requiring a capacitor and just two inductors to match to 50Ω microstrip line to the
RF_IN pin.
An external resistor (43kΩ) is required between IBIAS and analogue ground (paddle) to set various bias currents and
references within the radio.© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production 13
2.2.5 Analogue Peripherals
The ADC requires a reference voltage to use as part of its operation. It can use either an internal reference voltage
or an external reference connected to VREF. This voltage is referenced to analogue ground and the performance of
the analogue peripherals is dependent on the quality of this reference.
There are four ADC inputs and a pair of comparator inputs. ADC1 has a designated input pin but ADC2 uses the
same pin as VREF, invalidating its use as an ADC pin when an external reference voltage is required. The remaining
2 ADC channels are shared with the digital I/Os DIO0 and DIO1 and connect to pins 16 and 17. When these two
ADC channels are selected, the corresponding DIOs must be configured as Inputs with their pull-ups disabled.
Similarly, the comparator shares pins 1 and 2 with DIO16 and DIO17, so when the comparator is selected these pins
must be configured as Inputs with their pull-ups disabled. The analogue I/O pins on the JN516x can have signals
applied up to 0.3v higher than VDD1. A schematic view of the analogue I/O cell is shown in Figure 3. Figure 4
demonstrates a special case, where a digital I/O pin doubles as an input to analogue devices. This applies to ADC3,
ADC4, COMP1P and COMP1M.
In reset, sleep and deep sleep, the analogue peripherals are all off. In sleep, the comparator may optionally be used
as a wakeup source.
Unused ADC and comparator inputs should not be left unconnected, for example connected to analogue ground.
VDD1
Analogue
I/O Pin
VSSA
Analogue
Peripheral
Figure 3: Analogue I/O Cell
2.2.6 Digital Input/Output
For the DC properties of these pins see Section 19.2.3.
When used in their primary function all Digital Input/Output pins are bi-directional and are connected to weak internal
pull up resistors (50kΩ nominal) that can be disabled. When used in their secondary function (selected when the
appropriate peripheral block is enabled through software library calls), their direction is fixed by the function. The pull
up resistor is enabled or disabled independently of the function and direction; the default state from reset is enabled.
A schematic view of the digital I/O cell is in Figure 4. The dotted lines through resistor RESD represent a path that
exists only on DIO0, DIO1, DIO16 and DIO17 which are also inputs to the ADC (ADC3, ADC4) and Comparator
(COMP1P, COMP1M) respectively. To use these DIO pins for their analogue functions, the DIO must be set as an
Input with its pull-up resistor, RPU, disabled.14 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
O
VDD2
Pu
RPU
OE
DIO[x] Pin
RESD
ADC or
COMP1 Input
I
IE
RPROT
VSS VSS
Figure 4: DIO Pin Equivalent Schematic
In reset, the digital peripherals are all off and the DIO pins are set as high-impedance inputs. During sleep and deep
sleep, the DIO pins retain both their input/output state and output level that was set as sleep commences. If the DIO
pins were enabled as inputs and the interrupts were enabled then these pins may be used to wake up the JN516x
from sleep.© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production 15
3 CPU
The CPU of the JN516x is a 32-bit load and store RISC processor. It has been architected for three key
requirements:
• Low power consumption for battery powered applications
• High performance to implement a wireless protocol at the same time as complex applications
• Efficient coding of high-level languages such as C provided with the Software Developers Kit
It features a linear 32-bit logical address space with unified memory architecture, accessing both code and data in the
same address space. Registers for peripheral units, such as the timers, UART and the baseband processor are also
mapped into this space.
The CPU has access to a block of 15 32-bit General-Purpose (GP) registers together with a small number of special
purpose registers which are used to store processor state and control interrupt handling. The contents of any GP
register can be loaded from or stored to memory, while arithmetic and logical operations, shift and rotate operations,
and signed and unsigned comparisons can be performed either between two registers and stored in a third, or
between registers and a constant carried in the instruction. Operations between general or special-purpose registers
execute in one cycle while those that access memory require a further cycle to allow the memory to respond.
The instruction set manipulates 8, 16 and 32-bit data; this means that programs can use objects of these sizes very
efficiently. Manipulation of 32-bit quantities is particularly useful for protocols and high-end applications allowing
algorithms to be implemented in fewer instructions than on smaller word-size processors, and to execute in fewer
clock cycles. In addition, the CPU supports hardware Multiply that can be used to efficiently implement algorithms
needed by Digital Signal Processing applications.
The instruction set is designed for the efficient implementation of high-level languages such as C. Access to fields in
complex data structures is very efficient due to the provision of several addressing modes, together with the ability to
be able to use any of the GP registers to contain the address of objects. Subroutine parameter passing is also made
more efficient by using GP registers rather than pushing objects onto the stack. The recommended programming
method for the JN516x is by using C, which is supported by a software developer kit comprising a C compiler, linker
and debugger.
The CPU architecture also contains features that make the processor suitable for embedded, real-time applications.
In some applications, it may be necessary to use a real-time operating system to allow multiple tasks to run on the
processor. To provide protection for device-wide resources being altered by one task and affecting another, the
processor can run in either supervisor or user mode, the former allowing access to all processor registers, while the
latter only allows the GP registers to be manipulated. Supervisor mode is entered on reset or interrupt; tasks starting
up would normally run in user mode in a RTOS environment.
Embedded applications require efficient handling of external hardware events. Exception processing (including reset
and interrupt handling) is enhanced by the inclusion of a number of special-purpose registers into which the PC and
status register contents are copied as part of the operation of the exception hardware. This means that the essential
registers for exception handling are stored in one cycle, rather than the slower method of pushing them onto the
processor stack. The PC is also loaded with the vector address for the exception that occurred, allowing the handler
to start executing in the next cycle.
To improve power consumption a number of power-saving modes are implemented in the JN516x, described more
fully in Section 18. One of these modes is the CPU doze mode; under software control, the processor can be shut
down and on an interrupt it will wake up to service the request. Additionally, it is possible under software control, to
set the speed of the CPU to 1, 2, 4, 8, 16 or 32MHz. This feature can be used to trade-off processing power against
current consumption.16 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
4 Memory Organisation
This section describes the different memories found within the JN516x. The device contains Flash, RAM, and
EEPROM memory, the wireless transceiver and peripherals all within the same linear address space.
0xFFFFFFFF
Unpopulated
0xF0008000
RAM
0x04000000
0x02000000
FLASH Boot Code 8K
0x000C0000
0x00000000
0x00080000
Flash & EEPROM Registers
0x01000000
Peripherals
FLASH
Applications
Code
(256KB)
Figure 5: JN5168 Memory Map
4.1 FLASH
The embedded Flash consists of 2 parts: an 8K region used for holding boot code, and a 256K region (JN5168) used
for application code. The sector size of the application code is always 32K, for any size of Flash memory. The
maximum number of write cycles or endurance is, 10k guaranteed and typically 100k, while the data retention is
guaranteed for at least 10 years. The boot code region is pre-programmed by NXP on supplied parts, and contains
code to handle reset, interrupts and other events (see section 7). It also contains a Flash Programming Interface to
allow interaction with the PC-based Flash Programming Utility which allows user code compiled using the supplied
SDK to be programmed into the Application space. For further information, refer to the Flash Programmer User
Guide.[9]. The memory can be erased by a single or multiple sectors and written to in units of 256 bytes, known as
pagewords.
4.2 RAM
The JN516x devices contain up to 32Kbytes of high speed RAM, which can be accessed by the CPU in a single clock
cycle. It is primarily used to hold the CPU Stack together with program variables and data. If necessary, the CPU can
execute code contained within the RAM (although it would normally just execute code directly from the embedded
Flash). Software can control the power supply to the RAM allowing the contents to be maintained during a sleep
period when other parts of the device are un-powered, allowing a quicker resumption of processing once woken.
4.3 OTP Configuration Memory
The JN516x devices contain a quantity of One Time Programmable (OTP) memory as part of the embedded Flash
(Index Sector). This can be used to securely hold such things as a user 64-bit MAC address and a 128-bit AES
security key. By default the 64-bit MAC address is pre-programmed by NXP on supplied parts; however customers © NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production 17
can use their own MAC address and override the default one. The user MAC address and other data can be written
to the OTP memory using the Flash programmer [9]. Details on how to obtain and install MAC addresses can be
found in the Flash Programmer User Guide. In addition 384bits are available, organised as three 128bit words, for
customer use for storage of configuration or other information.
4.4 EEPROM
The JN516x devices contain 4Kbytes of EEPROM. The maximum number of write cycles or endurance is, 100k
guaranteed and 1M typically while the data retention is guaranteed for at least 20 years. (The Persistent Data
Manager, includes a wear-levelling algorithm which can help to extend the endurance.) This non-volatile memory is
primarily used to hold persistent data generated from such things as the Network Stack software component (e.g.
network topology, routing tables). As the EEPROM holds its contents through sleep and reset events, this means
more stable operation and faster recovery is possible after outages. Access to the EEPROM is via registers mapped
into the Flash and EEPROM Registers region of the address map. The memory can be erased by a single or multiple
pages of 64 bytes. It can be written to in single or multiple bytes up to 64 bytes. The customer may use part of the
EEPROM to store its own data if desired by interfacing with the Persistent Data Manager. Optionally the PDM can
also store data in an external memory. For further information, please read - JenOS User Guide [12].
4.5 External Memory
An optional external serial non-volatile memory (eg Flash or EEPROM) with a SPI interface may be used to provide
additional storage for program code, such as a new code image or further data for the device when external power is
removed. The memory can be connected to the SPI Master interface using select line SPISEL0 (see fig 6 for details)
JN516x
Serial
Memory
SPISEL0
SPIMISO
SPIMOSI
SPICLK
SS
SDO
SDI
CLK
Figure 6: Connecting External Serial Memory
The contents of the external serial memory may be encrypted. The AES security processor combined with a user
programmable 128-bit encryption key is used to encrypt the contents of the external memory. The encryption key is
stored in the flash memory index section. When bootloading program code from external serial memory, the JN516x
automatically accesses the encryption key to execute the decryption process, user program code does not need to
handle any of the decryption process; it is transparent. For more details, including the how the program code encrypts
data for the external memory, see the application note Boot Loader Operation. [8]
4.6 Peripherals
All peripherals have their registers mapped into the memory space. Access to these registers requires 3 peripheral
clock cycles. Applications have access to the peripherals through the software libraries that present a high-level view
of the peripheral’s functions through a series of dedicated software routines. These routines provide both a tested
method for using the peripherals and allow bug-free application code to be developed more rapidly. For details, see
Peripherals API User Guide [4].
4.7 Unused Memory Addresses
Any attempt to access an unpopulated memory area will result in a bus error exception (interrupt) being generated.18 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
5 System Clocks
Two system clocks are used to drive the on-chip subsystems of the JN516x. The wake-up timers are driven from a
low frequency clock (notionally 32kHz). All other subsystems (transceiver, processor, memory and digital and
analogue peripherals) are driven by a high-speed clock (notionally 32MHz), or a divided-down version of it.
The high-speed clock is either generated by the accurate crystal-controlled oscillator (32MHz) or the less accurate
high-speed RC oscillator ( 27-32MHz calibrated). The low-speed clock is either generated by the accurate crystalcontrolled
oscillator (32.768kHz), the less accurate RC oscillator (centered on 32kHz) or can be supplied externally
5.1 High-Speed (32MHz) System Clock
The selected high-speed system clock is used directly by the radio subsystem, whereas a divided-by-two version is
used by the remainder of the transceiver and the digital and analogue peripherals. The direct or divided down version
of the clock is used to drive the processor and memories (32, 16, 8, 4, 2 or 1MHz).
High Speed
RC Oscillator
32MHz Crystal
Oscillator
Div by 1,2,4,8,16 or 32
Div by 2
PERIPHERAL SYSTEM CLOCK
CPU CLOCK
Figure 7 System and CPU Clocks
Crystal oscillators are generally slow to start. Hence to provide a fast start-up following a sleep cycle or reset, the fast
RC oscillator is always used as the initial source for the high-speed system clock. The oscillator starts very quickly
and will run at 25-32MHz (uncalibrated) or 32MHz +/-5% (calibrated). Although this means that the system clock will
be running at an undefined frequency (slightly slower or faster than nominal), this does not prevent the CPU and
Memory subsystems operating normally, so the program code can execute. However, it is not possible to use the
radio or UARTs, as even after calibration (initiated by the user software calling an API function) there is still a +/-5%
tolerance in the clock rate over voltage and temperature. Other digital peripherals can be used (eg SPI Master/Slave),
but care must be taken if using Timers due to the clock frequency inaccuracy.
Further details of the High-Speed RC Oscillator can be found in section 19.3.11.
On wake-up from sleep, the JN516x uses the Fast RC oscillator. It can then either:
• Automatically switch over to use the 32MHz clock source when it has started up.
• Continue to use the fast RC oscillator until software triggers the switch-over to the 32MHz clock source, for
example when the radio is required.
• Continue to use the RC oscillator until the device goes back into one of the sleep modes.
The use of the fast RC Oscillator at wake-up means there is no need to wait for the 32MHz crystal oscillator to
stabilise Consequently, the application code will start executing quickly using the clock from the high-speed RC
oscillator.
5.1.1 32MHz Crystal Oscillator
The JN516x contains the necessary on chip components to build a 32MHz reference oscillator with the addition of an
external crystal resonator and two tuning capacitors. The schematic of these components are shown in Figure 8.
The two capacitors, C1 and C2, should typically be 15pF and use a COG dielectric. Due to the small size of these
capacitors, it is important to keep the traces to the external components as short as possible. The on chip
transconductance amplifier is compensated for temperature variation, and is self-biasing by means of the internal
resistor R1. This oscillator provides the frequency reference for the radio and therefore it is essential that the
reference PCB layout and BOM are carefully followed. The electrical specification of the oscillator can be found in © NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production 19
Section 19.3.11. Please refer to Appendix B for development support with the crystal oscillator circuit. The oscillator
includes a function which flags when the amplitude of oscillation has reached a satisfactory level for full operation,
and this is checked before the source of the high-speed system clock is changed to the 32MHz crystal oscillator
XTALOUT
C1 C2
XTALIN R1
JN516x
Figure 8: 32MHz Crystal Oscillator Connections
For operation over the extended temperature range, 85 to 125 deg C, special care is required; this is because the
temperature characteristics of crystal resonators are generally in excess of +/-40ppm frequency tolerance defined by
the IEEE802.15.4 standard. The oscillator cell contains additional circuitry to compensate for the poor performance of
the crystal resonators above 100 deg C. Full details, including the software API function, can be found in the
application note JN516x Temperature-dependent Operating Guidelines [2]
5.1.2 High-Speed RC Oscillator
An on-chip High-Speed RC oscillator is provided in addition to the 32MHz crystal oscillator for two purposes, to allow
a fast start-up from reset or sleep and to provide a lower current alternative to the crystal oscillator for non-timing
critical applications. By default the oscillator will run at 27MHz typically with a wide tolerance. It can be calibrated,
using a software API function, which will result in a nominal frequency of 32MHz with a +/-1.6% tolerance at 3v and
25 deg C. However, it should be noted that over the full operating range of voltage and temperature this will increase
to +/-5%. The calibration information is retained through speed cycles and when the oscillator is disabled, so typically
the calibration function only needs to be called once. No external components are required for this oscillator. The
electrical specification of the oscillator can be found in Section 19.3.12.
5.2 Low-speed (32kHz) System Clock
The 32kHz system clock is used for timing the length of a sleep period (see Section 18). The clock can be selected
from one of three sources through the application software:
• 32kHz RC Oscillator
• 32kHz Crystal Oscillator
• 32kHz External Clock
Upon a chip reset or power-up the JN516x defaults to using the internal 32kHz RC Oscillator. If another clock source
is selected then it will remain in use for all 32kHz timing until a chip reset is performed.
5.2.1 32kHz RC Oscillator
The internal 32kHz RC oscillator requires no external components. The internal timing components of the oscillator
have a wide tolerance due to manufacturing process variation and so the oscillator runs nominally at 32kHz -10%
/+40%. To make this useful as a timing source for accurate wakeup from sleep, a frequency calibration factor derived
from the more accurate 16MHz clock may be applied. The calibration factor is derived through software, details can
be found in Section 11.3.1. Software must check that the 32kHz RC oscillator is running before using it. The oscillator
has a default current consumption of around 0.5uA, optionally this can be reduced to 0.375uA, however, the 20 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
calibrated accuracy and temperature coefficient will be worse as a consequence. For detailed electrical
specifications, see Section 19.3.9.
5.2.2 32kHz Crystal Oscillator
In order to obtain more accurate sleep periods, the JN516x contains the necessary on-chip components to build a
32kHz oscillator with the addition of an external 32.768kHz crystal and two tuning capacitors. The crystal should be
connected between 32KXTALIN and 32KXTALOUT (DIO9 and DIO10), with two equal capacitors to ground, one on
each pin. Due to the small size of the capacitors, it is important to keep the traces to the external components as
short as possible.
The electrical specification of the oscillator can be found in Section 19.3.10. The oscillator cell is flexible and can
operate with a range of commonly available 32.768kHz crystals with load capacitances from 6 to 12.5pF. However,
the maximum ESR of the crystal and the supply current are both functions of the actual crystal used, see Appendix
B.1 for more details.
32KXTALIN 32KXTALOUT
JN516x
Figure 9: 32kHz Crystal Oscillator Connections
5.2.3 32kHz External Clock
An externally supplied 32kHz reference clock on the 32KXTALIN input (DIO9) may be provided to the JN516x. This
would allow the 32kHz system clock to be sourced from a very stable external oscillator module, allowing more
accurate sleep cycle timings compared to the internal RC oscillator. (See Section 19.2.3)© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production 21
6 Reset
A system reset initialises the device to a pre-defined state and forces the CPU to start program execution from the
reset vector. The reset process that the JN516x goes through is as follows.
When power is first applied or when the external reset is released, the High-Speed RC oscillator and 32MHz crystal
oscillator are activated. After a short wait period (13µsec approx) while the High-Speed RC starts up, and so long as
the supply voltage satisfies the default Supply Voltage Monitor (SVM) threshold (2.0V+0.045V hysteresis), the
internal 1.8V regulators are turned on to power the processor and peripheral logic. The regulators are allowed to
stabilise (about 15us) followed by a further wait (150usec approx) to allow the Flash and EEPROM bandgaps to
stabilise and allow their initialisation, including reading the user SVM threshold from the Flash. This is applied to the
SVM and, after a brief pause (approx 2.5usec), the SVM is checked again. If the supply is above the new SVM
threshold, the CPU and peripheral logic is released from reset and the CPU starts to run code beginning at the reset
vector. This runs the bootloader code contained within the flash, which looks for a valid application to run, first from
the internal flash and then from any connected external serial memory over the SPI Master interface. Once found,
required variables are initialised in RAM before the application is called at its AppColdStart entry point. More details
on the bootloader can be found in the application note - Boot Loader Operation. [8]
The JN516x has five sources of reset:
• Internal Power-on / Brown-out Reset (BOR)
• External Reset
• Software Reset
• Watchdog timer
• Supply Voltage detect
Note: When the device exits a reset condition, device operating
parameters (voltage, frequency, temperature, etc.) must be met to ensure
operation. If these conditions are not met, then the device must be held in
reset until the operating conditions are met. (See Section 19.3)
6.1 Internal Power-On / Brown-out Reset (BOR)
For the majority of applications the internal power-on reset is capable of generating the required reset signal. When
power is applied to the device, the power-on reset circuit monitors the rise of the VDD supply. When the VDD
reaches the specified threshold, the reset signal is generated. This signal is held internally until the power supply and
oscillator stabilisation time has elapsed, when the internal reset signal is then removed and the CPU is allowed to
run.
The BOR circuit has the ability to reject spikes on the VDD rail to avoid false triggering of the reset module. Typically
for a negative going square pulse of duration 1uS, the voltage must fall to 1.2v before a reset is generated. Similarly
for a triangular wave pulse of 10us width, the voltage must fall to 1.3v before causing a reset. The exact
characteristics are complex and these are only examples.
Internal RESET
VDD
Figure 10: Internal Power-on Reset
When the supply drops below the power on reset ‘falling’ threshold, it will re-trigger the reset. If necessary, use of the
external reset circuit show in Figure 11 is suggested. 22 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
RESETN
C1
R1
JN516x
VDD
18k
470nF
Figure 11: External Reset Generation
The external resistor and capacitor provide a simple reset operation when connected to the RESETN pin but are not
neccessary.
6.2 External Reset
An external reset is generated by a low level on the RESETN pin. Reset pulses longer than the minimum pulse width
will generate a reset during active or sleep modes. Shorter pulses are not guaranteed to generate a reset. The
JN516x is held in reset while the RESETN pin is low. When the applied signal reaches the Reset Threshold Voltage
(VRST) on its positive edge, the internal reset process starts.
The JN516x has an internal 500kΩ pull-up resistor connect to the RESETN pin. The pin is an input for an external
reset only. By holding the RESETN pin low, the JN516x is held in reset, resulting in a typical current of 6uA.
Internal Reset
RESETN pin
Reset
Figure 12: External Reset
6.3 Software Reset
A system reset can be triggered at any time through software control, causing a full chip reset and invalidating the
RAM contents. For example this can be executed within a user’s application upon detection of a system failure.
6.4 Supply Voltage Monitor (SVM)
An internal Supply Voltage Monitor (SVM) is used to monitor the supply voltage to the JN516x; this can be used
whilst the device is awake or is in CPU doze mode. Dips in the supply voltage below a variable threshold can be
detected and can be used to cause the JN516x to perform a chip reset. Equally, dips in the supply voltage can be © NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production 23
detected and used to cause an interrupt to the processor, when the voltage either drops below the threshold or rises
above it.
The supply voltage detect is enabled by default from power-up and can extend the reset during power-up. This will
keep the CPU in reset until the voltage exceeds the SVM threshold voltage. The threshold voltage is configurable to
1.95V, 2.0V, 2.1V, 2.2V, 2.3V, 2.4V, 2.7V and 3.0V and is controllable by software. From power-up the threshold is
set by a setting within the flash and the default chip configuration is for the 2.0V threshold. It is expected that the
threshold is set to the minimum needed by the system..
6.5 Watchdog Timer
A watchdog timer is provided to guard against software lockups. It operates by counting cycles of the high-speed RC
system clock. A pre-scaler is provided to allow the expiry period to be set between typically 8ms and 16.4 seconds
(dependent on high-speed RC accuracy: +30%, -15%). Failure to restart the watchdog timer within the pre-configured
timer period will cause a chip reset to be performed. A status bit is set if the watchdog was triggered so that the
software can differentiate watchdog initiated resets from other resets, and can perform any required recovery once it
restarts. Optionally, the watchdog can cause an exception rather than a reset, this preserves the state of the memory
and is useful for debugging.
After power up, reset, start from deep sleep or start from sleep, the watchdog is always enabled with the largest
timeout period and will commence counting as if it had just been restarted. Under software control the watchdog can
be disabled. If it is enabled, the user must regularly restart the watchdog timer to stop it from expiring and causing a
reset. The watchdog runs continuously, even during doze, however the watchdog does not operate during sleep or
deep sleep, or when the hardware debugger has taken control of the CPU. It will recommence automatically if
enabled once the debugger un-stalls the CPU. 24 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
7 Interrupt System
The interrupt system on the JN516x is a hardware-vectored interrupt system. The JN516x provides several interrupt
sources, some associated with CPU operations (CPU exceptions) and others which are used by hardware in the
device. When an interrupt occurs, the CPU stops executing the current program and loads its program counter with a
fixed hardware address specific to that interrupt. The interrupt handler or interrupt service routine is stored at this
location and is run on the next CPU cycle. Execution of interrupt service routines is always performed in supervisor
mode. Interrupt sources and their vector locations are listed in Table 1 below:
Interrupt Source Vector Location Interrupt Definition
Bus error 0x08 Typically cause by an attempt to access an invalid address or a
disabled peripheral
Tick timer 0x0e Tick timer interrupt asserted
Alignment error 0x14 Load/store address to non-naturally-aligned location
Illegal instruction 0x1a Attempt to execute an unrecognised instruction
Hardware interrupt 0x20 interrupt asserted
System call 0x26 System call initiated by b.sys instruction
Trap 0x2c caused by the b.trap instruction or the debug unit
Reset 0x38 Caused by software or hardware reset.
Stack Overflow 0x3e Stack overflow
Table 1: Interrupt Vectors
7.1 System Calls
The b.trap and b.sys instructions allow processor exceptions to be generated by software.
A system call exception will be generated when the b.sys instruction is executed. This exception can, for example, be
used to enable a task to switch the processor into supervisor mode when a real time operating system is in use. (See
Section 3 for further details.)
The b.trap instruction is commonly used for trapping errors and for debugging.
7.2 Processor Exceptions
7.2.1 Bus Error
A bus error exception is generated when software attempts to access a memory address that does not exist, or is not
populated with memory or peripheral registers.
7.2.2 Alignment
Alignment exceptions are generated when software attempts to access objects that are not aligned to natural word
boundaries. 16-bit objects must be stored on even byte boundaries, while 32-bit objects must be stored on quad byte
boundaries. For instance, attempting to read a 16-bit object from address 0xFFF1 will trigger an alignment exception
as will a read of a 32-bit object from 0xFFF1, 0xFFF2 or 0xFFF3. Examples of legal 32-bit object addresses are
0xFFF0, 0xFFF4, 0xFFF8 etc.
7.2.3 Illegal Instruction
If the CPU reads an unrecognised instruction from memory as part of its instruction fetch, it will cause an illegal
instruction exception.
7.2.4 Stack Overflow
When enabled, a stack overflow exception occurs if the stack pointer reaches a programmable location.© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production 25
7.3 Hardware Interrupts
Hardware interrupts generated from the transceiver, analogue or digital peripherals and DIO pins are individually
masked using the Programmable Interrupt Controller (PIC). Management of interrupts is provided in the Peripherals
API User Guide [4]. For details of the interrupts generated from each peripheral see the respective section in this
datasheet.
Interrupts can be used to wake the JN516x from sleep. The peripherals, baseband controller, security coprocessor
and PIC are powered down during sleep but the DIO interrupts and optionally the pulse counters, wake-up timers and
analogue comparator interrupts remain powered to bring the JN516x out of sleep.
Prioritised external interrupt handling (i.e., interrupts from hardware peripherals) is provided to enable an application
to control an events priority to provide for deterministic program execution.
The priority Interrupt controller provides 15 levels of prioritised interrupts. The priority level of all interrupts can be set,
with value 0 being used to indicate that the source can never produce an external interrupt, 1 for the lowest priority
source(s) and 15 for the highest priority source(s). Note that multiple interrupt sources can be assigned the same
priority level if desired.
If while processing an interrupt, a new event occurs at the same or lower priority level, a new external interrupt will
not be triggered. However, if a new higher priority event occurs, the external interrupt will again be asserted,
interrupting the current interrupt service routine.
Once the interrupt service routine is complete, lower priority events can be serviced. 26 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
8 Wireless Transceiver
The wireless transceiver comprises a 2.45GHz radio, modem, a baseband processor, a security coprocessor and
PHY controller. These blocks, with protocol software provided as a library, implement an IEEE802.15.4 standardsbased
wireless transceiver that transmits and receives data over the air in the unlicensed 2.4GHz band.
8.1 Radio
Figure 13 shows the single ended radio architecture.
LNA
synth
PA
ADC Reference
& Bias
Switch
Radio
Calibration
Lim1
Lim2
Lim3
Lim4
sigma
delta
D-Type
Figure 13: Radio Architecture
The radio comprises a low-IF receive path and a direct modulation transmit path, which converge at the TX/RX
switch. The switch connects to the external single ended matching network, which consists of two inductors and a
capacitor, this arrangement creates a 50Ω port and removes the need for a balun. A 50Ω single ended antenna can
be connected directly to this port.
The 32MHz crystal oscillator feeds a divider, which provides the frequency synthesiser with a reference frequency.
The synthesiser contains programmable feedback dividers, phase detector, charge pump and internal Voltage
Controlled Oscillator (VCO). The VCO has no external components, and includes calibration circuitry to compensate
for differences in internal component values due to process and temperature variations. The VCO is controlled by a
Phase Locked Loop (PLL) that has an internal loop filter. A programmable charge pump is also used to tune the loop
characteristic.
The receiver chain starts with the low noise amplifier/mixer combination whose outputs are passed to a low pass
filter, which provides the channel definition. The signal is then passed to a series of amplifier blocks forming a limiting
strip. The signal is converted to a digital signal before being passed to the Modem. The gain control for the RX path
is derived in the automatic gain control (AGC) block within the Modem, which samples the signal level at various
points down the RX chain. To improve the performance and reduce current consumption, automatic calibration is
applied to various blocks in the RX path.
In the transmit direction, the digital stream from the Modem is passed to a digital sigma-delta modulator which
controls the feedback dividers in the synthesiser, (dual point modulation). The VCO frequency now tracks the applied
modulation. The 2.4 GHz signal from the VCO is then passed to the RF Power Amplifier (PA), whose power control
can be selected from one of three settings. The output of the PA drives the antenna via the RX/TX switch© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production 27
The JN516x radio when enabled is automatically calibrated for optimum performance. In operating environments with
a significant variation in temperature (e.g. greater than 20 deg C) due to diurnal or ambient temperature variation, it is
recommended to recalibrate the radio to maintain performance. Recalibration is only required on Routers and End
Devices that never sleep. End Devices that sleep when idle are automatically recalibrated when they wake. An
Application Note JN516x Temperature-dependent Operating Guidelines [2] describes this in detail and includes a
software API function which can be used to test the temperature using the on-chip temperature sensor and trigger a
recalibration if there has been a significant temperature change since the previous calibration.
8.1.1 Radio External Components
In order to realise the full performance of the radio it is essential that the reference PCB layout and BOM are carefully
followed. See Appendix B.4.
The radio is powered from a number of internal 1.8V regulators fed from the analogue supply VDD1, in order to
provide good noise isolation between the digital logic of the JN516x and the analogue blocks. These regulators are
also controlled by the baseband controller and protocol software to minimise power consumption. Decoupling for
internal regulators is required as described in Section 2.2.1.
For single ended antennas or connectors, a balun is not required, however a matching network is needed.
The RF matching network requires three external components and the IBIAS pin requires one external component as
shown in schematic in B.4.1. These components are critical and should be placed close to the JN516x pins and
analogue ground as defined in Table 12. Specifically, the output of the network comprising L2, C1 and L1 is
designed to present an accurate match to a 50 ohm resistive network as well as provide a DC path to the final output
stage or antenna. Users wishing to match to other active devices such as amplifiers should design their networks to
match to 50 ohms at the output of L1
R1 43K
IBIAS
C20 100nF
L2 3.9nH
VB_RF
VREF
VB_RF2
RF_IN
C3 100nF
C12 47pF
VB_RF1
C1 47pF L1 5.1nH
To Coaxial Socket
or Integrated Antenna
VB_RF
Figure 14: External Radio Components
8.1.2 Antenna Diversity
Support is provided for antenna diversity. Antenna diversity is a technique that maximises the performance of an
antenna system. It allows the radio to switch between two antennas that have very low correlation between their
received signals. Typically, this is achieved by spacing two antennae around 0.25 wavelengths apart or by using two
orthogonal polarisations. So, if a packet is transmitted and no acknowledgement is received, the radio system can
switch to the other antenna for the retry, with a different probability of success.28 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
Additionally antenna diversity can be enabled whilst in receive mode waiting for a packet. The JN516x measures the
received energy in the relevant radio channel every 40μs and the measured energy level is compared with a pre-set
energy threshold, which can be set by the application program. The JN516x device will automatically switch the
antennae if the measurement is below this threshold, except if waiting for an acknowledgement from a previous
transmission or if the process of receiving a packet, when it will wait until this has finished. Also, it will not switch if a
preamble symbol having a signal quality above a minimum specified threshold has not been detected in the last 40μs
Both modes can be used at once and use the same ADO and ADE outputs to control the switch.
The JN516x provides an output (ADO) on DIO12 that is asserted on odd numbered retries and optionally its
complement (ADE) on DIO13, that can be used to control an antenna switch; this enables antenna diversity to be
implemented easily (see Figure 15 and Figure 16).
Antenna A Antenna B
A B
COM
SEL
SELB
ADO (DIO[12])
ADE (DIO[13])
Device RF Port
RF Switch: Single-Pole, Double-Throw (SPDT)
Figure 15: Simple Antenna Diversity Implementation using External RF Switch
ADO (DIO[12])
TX Active
RX Active
ADE (DIO[13])
1st TX-RX Cycle 2nd TX-RX Cycle (1st Retry)
Figure 16: Antenna Diversity ADO Signal for TX with Acknowledgement
If two DIO pins cannot be spared, DIO13 can be configured to be a normal DIO pin, and the inverse of ADO
generated with an inverter on the PCB. © NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production 29
8.2 Modem
The modem performs all the necessary modulation and spreading functions required for digital transmission and
reception of data at 250kbps in the 2450MHz radio frequency band in compliance with the IEEE802.15.4 standard.
AGC Demodulation
Symbol
Detection
(Despreading)
Modulation Spreading
TX
RX
TX Data
Interface
RX Data
Interface
VCO
Sigma-Delta
Modulator
IF Signal
Gain
Figure 17: Modem Architecture
Features provided to support network channel selection algorithms include Energy Detection (ED), Link Quality
Indication (LQI) and fully programmable Clear Channel Assessment (CCA).
The Modem provides a digital Receive Signal Strength Indication (RSSI) that facilitates the implementation of the
IEEE 802.15.4 ED function and LQI function.
The ED and LQI are both related to receiver power in the same way, as shown in Figure 18. LQI is associated with a
received packet, whereas ED is an indication of signal power on air at a particular moment.
The CCA capability of the Modem supports all modes of operation defined in the IEEE 802.15.4 standard, namely
Energy above ED threshold, Carrier Sense and Carrier Sense and/or energy above ED threshold.
Figure 18: Energy Detect Value vs Receive Power Level30 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
8.3 Baseband Processor
The baseband processor provides all time-critical functions of the IEEE802.15.4 MAC layer. Dedicated hardware
guarantees air interface timing is precise. The MAC layer hardware/software partitioning, enables software to
implement the sequencing of events required by the protocol and to schedule timed events with millisecond
resolution, and the hardware to implement specific events with microsecond timing resolution. The protocol software
layer performs the higher-layer aspects of the protocol, sending management and data messages between endpoint
and coordinator nodes, using the services provided by the baseband processor.
Supervisor
Append
Checksum Serialiser
DMA
Engine
TX
Stream
Radio
Protocol Timing Engine
CSMA CCA Backoff
Control
Control
RX
Stream Verify
Checksum Deserialiser
Protocol
Timers
Security Coprocessor
AES
Codec
Encrypt
Port
Decrypt
Port
Status
Processor
Bus
Figure 19: Baseband Processor
8.3.1 Transmit
A transmission is performed by software writing the data to be transferred into the Tx Frame Buffer in RAM, together
with parameters such as the destination address and the number of retries allowed, and programming one of the
protocol timers to indicate the time at which the frame is to be sent. This time will be determined by the software
tracking the higher-layer aspects of the protocol such as superframe timing and slot boundaries. Once the packet is
prepared and protocol timer set, the supervisor block controls the transmission. When the scheduled time arrives,
the supervisor controls the sequencing of the radio and modem to perform the type of transmission required, fetching
the packet data directly from RAM. It can perform all the algorithms required by IEEE802.15.4 such as CSMA/CA
without processor intervention including retries and random backoffs.
When the transmission begins, the header of the frame is constructed from the parameters programmed by the
software and sent with the frame data through the serialiser to the Modem. At the same time, the radio is prepared
for transmission. During the passage of the bitstream to the modem, it passes through a CRC checksum generator
that calculates the checksum on-the-fly, and appends it to the end of the frame.
8.3.2 Reception
During reception, the radio is set to receive on a particular channel. On receipt of data from the modem, the frame is
directed into the Rx Frame Buffer in RAM where both header and frame data can be read by the protocol software.
An interrupt may be provided on receipt of the frame header. As the frame data is being received from the modem it
is passed through a checksum generator; at the end of the reception the checksum result is compared with the
checksum at the end of the message to ensure that the data has been received correctly. An interrupt may be
provided to indicate successful packet reception. During reception, the modem determines the Link Quality, which is
made available at the end of the reception as part of the requirements of IEEE802.15.4.© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production 31
8.3.3 Auto Acknowledge
Part of the protocol allows for transmitted frames to be acknowledged by the destination sending an acknowledge
packet within a very short window after the transmitted frame has been received. The JN516x baseband processor
can automatically construct and send the acknowledgement packet without processor intervention and hence avoid
the protocol software being involved in time-critical processing within the acknowledge sequence. The JN516x
baseband processor can also request an acknowledge for packets being transmitted and handle the reception of
acknowledged packets without processor intervention.
8.3.4 Beacon Generation
In beaconing networks, the baseband processor can automatically generate and send beacon frames; the repetition
rate of the beacons is programmed by the CPU, and the baseband then constructs the beacon contents from data
delivered by the CPU. The baseband processor schedules the beacons and transmits them without CPU
intervention.
8.3.5 Security
The transmission and reception of secured frames using the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) algorithm is
handled by the security coprocessor and the stack software. The application software must provide the appropriate
encrypt/decrypt keys for the transmission or reception. On transmission, the key can be programmed at the same
time as the rest of the frame data and setup information.
8.4 Security Coprocessor
The security coprocessor is available to the application software to perform encryption/decryption operations. A
hardware implementation of the encryption engine significantly speeds up the processing of the encrypted packets
over a pure software implementation. The AES library for the JN516x provides operations that utilise the encryption
engine in the device and allow the contents of memory buffers to be transformed. Information such as the type of
security operation to be performed and the encrypt/decrypt key to be used must also be provided.
Processor
Interface
AES
Block
Encryption
Controller
AES
Encoder
Key Generation
Figure 20: Security Coprocessor Architecture
8.5 Time of Flight Engine
The JN516x family includes unique hardware functions to enable measurement of the distance between two nodes
using a “Time of Flight” (ToF) function. This function uses dedicated timers and interpolation of the timing of
correlation peaks in the demodulator to measure the delays introduced by the time taken for the radio signals to travel
between nodes. It is also possible to use the received signal strength (RSSI) to indicate the distance. Due to the
characteristics of the transmitted signal and the baseband circuitry, ToF offers a significant improvement in accuracy
for distance measurements above 10m compared with RSSI, while RSSI provides better ranging results below 10m.
Hence, ToF is best suited to long range distance measurement. The raw timing results are made available through
an API function, but the responsibility for converting these into location information lies with the user.
For more information, see the Time-of-flight API User Guide [10]32 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
9 Digital Input/Output
There are 20 Digital I/O (DIO) pins which when used as general-purpose pins can be configured as either an input or
an output, with each having a selectable internal pull-up resistor. In addition, there are 2 Digital Output (DO) pins.
Most DIO pins are shared with the digital and analogue peripherals of the device. When a peripheral is enabled, it
takes control over the device pins allocated to it. However, note that most peripherals have 2 alternative pin
allocations to alleviate clashes between uses, and many peripherals can disable the use of specific pins if not
required. Refer to Section 2.1 and the individual peripheral descriptions for full details of the available pinout
arrangements.
Following a reset (and whilst the RESETN input is held low), all peripherals are forced off and the DIO pins are
configured as inputs with the internal pull-ups turned on.When a peripheral is not enabled, the DIO pins associated
with it can be used as digital inputs or outputs. Each pin can be controlled individually by setting the direction and
then reading or writing to the pin.
The individual pull-up resistors, RPU, can also be enabled or disabled as needed and the setting is held through sleep
cycles. The pull-ups are generally configured once after reset depending on the external components and
functionality. For instance, outputs should generally have the pull-ups disabled. An input that is always driven should
also have the pull-up disabled.
When configured as an input each pin can be used to generate an interrupt upon a change of state (selectable
transition either from low to high or high to low); the interrupt can be enabled or disabled. When the device is
sleeping, these interrupts become events that can be used to wake the device up. Equally the status of the interrupt
may be read. See Section 18 for further details on sleep and wakeup.
The state of all DIO pins can be read, irrespective of whether the DIO is configured as an input or an output.
Throughout a sleep cycle the direction of the DIO, and the state of the outputs, is held. This is based on the resultant
of the GPIO Data/Direction registers and the effect of any enabled peripherals at the point of entering sleep.
Following a wake-up these directions and output values are maintained under control of the GPIO data/direction
registers. Any peripherals enabled before the sleep cycle are not automatically re-enabled, this must be done through
software after the wake-up.
For example, if DIO0 is configured to be SPISEL1 then it becomes an output. The output value is controlled by the
SPI functional block. If the device then enters a sleep cycle, the DIO will remain an output and hold the value being
output when entering sleep. After wake-up the DIO will still be an output with the same value but controlled from the
GPIO Data/Direction registers. It can be altered with the software functions that adjust the DIO, or the application may
re-configure it to be SPISEL1.
Unused DIO pins are recommended to be set as inputs with the pull-up enabled.
Two DIO pins can optionally be used to provide control signals for RF circuitry (e.g. switches and PA) in high power
range extenders.
DIO3/RFTX is asserted when the radio is in the transmit state and similarly, DIO2/RFRX is asserted when the radio is
in the receiver state.© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production 33
MUX
SPI Slave
DIO0/SPISEL1/ADC3
DIO1/SPISEL2/ADC4/PC0
DIO2/RFRX/TIM0CK_GT
DIO3/RFTX/TIM0CAP
DIO4/CTS0/TIM0OUT/PC0
DIO5/RTS0/PWM1/PC1
DIO6/TXD0/PWM2
DIO7/RXD0/PWM3
DIO8/TIM0CK_GT/PC1/PWM4
DIO9/TIM0CAP/32KXTALIN/RXD1/32KIN
DIO10/TIM0OUT/32KXTALOUT
DIO11/PWM1/TXD1
DIO12/PWM2/CTS0/ADO/SPISMOSI
DIO13/PWM3/RTS0/ADE/SPISMISO
DIO14/SIF_CLK/TXD0/TXD1/SPISEL1/SPISSEL
DIO15/SIF_D/RXD0/RXD1/SPISEL2/SPISCLK
DIO16/COMP1P/SIF_CLK/SPISMOSI
DIO17/COMP1M/SIF_D/SPISMISO
DIO18/SPIMOSI
DIO19/SPISEL0
DO0/SPICLK/PWM2
DO1/SPIMISO/PWM3
TXD0
SPI
Master
UART0
UART1
RXD0
RTS0
CTS0
TxD1
RxD1
TIM0CK_GT
TIM0OUT
TIM0CAP
PWM1
PWM2
PWM3
PWM4
SIF_D
SIF_CLK
PC0
PC1
JTAG_TDI
JTAG_TMS
JTAG_TCK
JTAG_TDO
ADO
ADE
Timer0
PWMs
2-wire
Interface
Pulse
Counters
JTAG
Debug
Antenna
Diversity
SPICLK
SPIMOSI
SPIMISO
SPISEL0
SPICLK
SPIMOSI
SPIMISO
SPISEL0
SPISEL1
SPISEL2
Figure 21 DIO Block Diagram34 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
10 Serial Peripheral Interface
10.1 Serial Peripheral Interface Master
The Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) allows high-speed synchronous data transfer between the JN516x and
peripheral devices. The JN516x operates as a master on the SPI bus and all other devices connected to the SPI are
expected to be slave devices under the control of the JN516x CPU. The SPI includes the following features:
• Full-duplex, three-wire synchronous data transfer
• Programmable bit rates (up to 16Mbit/s)
• Programmable transaction size up to 32-bits
• Standard SPI modes 0,1,2 and 3
• Manual or Automatic slave select generation (up to 3 slaves)
• Maskable transaction complete interrupt
• LSB First or MSB First Data Transfer
• Supports delayed read edges
Clock
Divider
SPI Bus
Cycle
Controller
Data Buffer
DIV
Clock Edge
Select
Data
CHAR_LEN
LSB
SPIMISO
SPIMOSI
SPICLK
Select
Latch
SPISEL [2..0]
16 MHz
Figure 22: SPI Master Block Diagram
The SPI bus employs a simple shift register data transfer scheme. Data is clocked out of and into the active devices
in a first-in, first-out fashion allowing SPI devices to transmit and receive data simultaneously. Master-Out-Slave-In or
Master-In-Slave-Out data transfer is relative to the clock signal SPICLK generated by the JN516x.
The JN516x provides three slave selects, SPISEL0 to SPISEL2 to allow three SPI peripherals on the bus. SPISEL0
is accessed on DI019. SPISEL1 is accessed, depending upon the configuration, on DIO0 or DIO14. SPISEL2 is
accessed on DIO1 or DIO15. This is enabled under software control. The following table details which DIO are used
for the SPISEL signals depending upon the configuration.
Signal DIO Assignment
Standard pins Alternative pins
SPISEL1 DIO0 DIO14
SPISEL2 DIO1 DIO15
SPICLK DO0
SPIMISO DO1
SPIMOSI DIO18
SPISEL0 DIO19
Table 2: SPI Master IO© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production 35
The interface can transfer from 1 to 32-bits without software intervention and can keep the slave select lines asserted
between transfers when required, to enable longer transfers to be performed.
When the device reset is active, all the SPI Master pins are configured as inputs with their pull-up resistors active.
The pins stay in this state until the SPI Master block is enabled, or the pins are configured for some other use. SS
Slave 0
Flash/
EEPROM
Memory
JN5142 SPISE L0 SPISE L1
SPIMOSI
SPICLK
SPIMISO SS
Slave 1
User
Defined
SS
Slave 2
User
Defined
SPISE L2
SI
C
SO
SI
C
SO
SI
C
SO
JN516X
Figure 23: Typical JN516x SPI Peripheral Connection
The data transfer rate on the SPI bus is determined by the SPICLK signal. The JN516x supports transfers at
selectable data rates from 16MHz to 125kHz selected by a clock divider. Both SPICLK clock phase and polarity are
configurable. The clock phase determines which edge of SPICLK is used by the JN516x to present new data on the
SPIMOSI line; the opposite edge will be used to read data from the SPIMISO line. The interface should be configured
appropriately for the SPI slave being accessed.
SPICLK
Polarity Mode Description
(CPOL)
Phase
(CPHA)
0 0 0 SPICLK is low when idle – the first edge is positive.
Valid data is output on SPIMOSI before the first clock and changes every
negative edge. SPIMISO is sampled every positive edge.
0 1 1 SPICLK is low when idle – the first edge is positive.
Valid data is output on SPIMOSI every positive edge. SPIMISO is sampled every
negative edge.
1 0 2 SPICLK is high when idle – the first edge is negative.
Valid data is output on SPIMOSI before the first clock edge and is changed
every positive edge. SPIMISO is sampled every negative edge.
1 1 3 SPICLK is high when idle – the first edge is negative.
Valid data is output on SPIMOSI every negative edge. SPIMISO is sampled
every positive edge.
Table 3: SPI Configurations36 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
If more than one SPISEL line is to be used in a system they must be used in numerical order starting from SPISEL0.
A SPISEL line can be automatically de-asserted between transactions if required, or it may stay asserted over a
number of transactions. For devices such as memories where a large amount of data can be received by the master
by continually providing SPICLK transitions, the ability for the select line to stay asserted is an advantage since it
keeps the slave enabled over the whole of the transfer.
A transaction commences with the SPI bus being set to the correct configuration, and then the slave device is
selected. Upon commencement of transmission (1 to 32 bits) data is placed in the FIFO data buffer and clocked out,
at the same time generating the corresponding SPICLK transitions. Since the transfer is full-duplex, the same
number of data bits is being received from the slave as it transmits. The data that is received during this transmission
can be read (1 to 32 bits). If the master simply needs to provide a number of SPICLK transitions to allow data to be
sent from a slave, it should perform transmit using dummy data. An interrupt can be generated when the transaction
has completed or alternatively the interface can be polled.
If a slave device wishes to signal the JN516x indicating that it has data to provide, it may be connected to one of the
DIO pins that can be enabled as an interrupt.
Figure 24 shows a complex SPI transfer, reading data from a FLASH device that can be achieved using the SPI
master interface. The slave select line must stay low for many separate SPI accesses, and therefore manual slave
select mode must be used. The required slave select can then be asserted (active low) at the start of the transfer. A
sequence 8 and 32 bit transfers can be used to issue the command and address to the FLASH device and then to
read data back. Finally, the slave select can be deselected to end the transaction.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Instruction (0x03)
23 22 21 3 2 1 0
8 9 10 28 29 30 31
24-bit Address
MSB
Instruction Transaction
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
MSB
0 1 2 3 4 5 7 8N-1
3 2 1 0
LSB
Read Data Bytes Transaction(s) 1-N
SPISEL
SPICLK
SPIMOSI
SPIMISO
SPISEL
SPICLK
SPIMOSI
SPIMISO
8 9 10
7 6 5
MSB
Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte N
value unused by peripherals
6
Figure 24: Example SPI Waveforms – Reading from FLASH Device using Mode 0© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production 37
10.2 Serial Peripheral Interface Slave
The Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) Slave Interface allows high-speed synchronous data transfer between the
JN516x and a peripheral device. The JN516x operates as a slave on the SPI bus and an external device connected
to the SPI bus operates as the master. The pins are different from the SPI master interface and are shown in the
following table.
Signal DIO Assignment
Standard pins Alternative pins
SPISCLK DIO15
SPISMISO DIO13 DIO17
SPISMOSI DIO12 DIO16
SPISSEL DIO14
Table 4: SPI Slave IO
The SPI bus employs a simple shift register data transfer scheme, with SPISSEL acting as the active low select
control. Data is clocked out of and into the active devices in a first-in, first-out fashion allowing SPI devices to
transmit and receive data simultaneously. Master-Out-Slave-In or Master-In-Slave-Out data transfer is relative to the
clock signal SPISCLK generated by the external master.
The SPI slave includes the following features:
• Full-duplex synchronous data transfer
• Slaves to external clock up to 8MHz
• Supports 8 bit transfers (MSB or LSB first configurable), with SPISSEL deselected between each transfer
• Internal FIFO up to 255 bytes for transmit and receive
• Standard SPI mode 0, data is sampled on positive clock edge
• Maskable interrupts for receive FIFO not empty, transmit FIFO empty, receive FIFO fill level above
threshold, transmit FIFO fill level below threshold, transmit FIFO overflow, receive FIFO overflow, receive
FIFO underflow, transmit FIFO underflow, receive timeout
• Programmable receive timeout period allows an interrupt to be generated to prompt the receive FIFO to
be read if no further data arrives within the timeout period38 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
11 Timers
11.1 Peripheral Timer/Counters
A general-purpose timer/counter unit, Timer0, is available that can be configured to operate in one of five possible
modes. This has:
• Clocked from internal system clock (16MHz)
• 5-bit prescaler, divides system clock by 2 prescale value as the clock to the timer (prescaler range is 0 to 16)
• 16-bit counter, 16-bit Rise and Fall (period) registers
• Timer: can generate interrupts off Rise and Fall counts. Can be gated by external signal
• Counter: counts number of transitions on external event signal. Can use low-high, high-low or both
transitions
• PWM/Single pulse: outputs repeating Pulse Width Modulation signal or a single pulse. Can set period and
mark-space ratio
• Capture: measures times between transitions of an applied signal
• Delta-Sigma: Return-To-Zero (RTZ) and Non-Return-to-Zero (NRZ) modes
• Timer usage of external IO can be controlled on a pin by pin basis
Four further timers are also available that support the same functionality but have no Counter or Capture mode.
These are referred to as PWM timers. Additionally, is not possible to gate these four timers with an external signal.
>= D Q
Rise
=
<
Fall
Delta Sigma
Interrupt
Generator
Counter
Interrupt Enable
Capture
Generator
Prescaler SYSCLK
TIMxCK_GT
TIMxCAP
Interrupt
PWM/∆Σ
PWM/∆Σ
PWM/∆Σ
Reset
Generator
Edge
Select
EN
EN
TIMxOut
Sw
Reset
System
Reset
Single
Shot
-1
Figure 25: Timer Unit Block Diagram© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production 39
The clock source for the Timer0 unit is fed from the 16MHz system clock. This clock passes to a 5-bit prescaler
where a value of 0 leaves the clock unmodified and other values divide it by 2 prescale value. For example, a prescale
value of 2 applied to the 16MHz system clock source results in a timer clock of 4MHz.
The counter is optionally gated by a signal on the clock/gate input (TIM0CK_GT). If the gate function is selected,
then the counter is frozen when the clock/gate input is high.
An interrupt can be generated whenever the counter is equal to the value in either of the High or Low registers.
The following table details which DIO are used for timer0 and the PWM depending upon the configuration.
Signal DIO Assignment
Standard pins Alternative pins
TIM0CK_GT DIO8 DIO2
TIM0CAP DIO9 DIO3
TIM0OUT DIO10 DIO4
PWM1 DIO11 DIO5
PWM2 DIO12 DIO6
PWM3 DIO13 DIO7
PWM4 DIO17 DIO8
Table 5: Timer and PWM IO
The alternative pin locations can be configured separately for each counter/timer under software control, without
affecting the operation or location of the others If operating in timer mode, it is not necessary to use any of the DIO
pins, allowing the standard DIO functionality to be available to the application.
11.1.1 Pulse Width Modulation Mode
Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) mode, as used by PWM timers 1,2 3 and 4 and optionally by Timer0, allows the user
to specify an overall cycle time and pulse length within the cycle. The pulse can be generated either as a single shot
or as a train of pulses with a repetition rate determined by the cycle time.
In this mode, the cycle time and low periods of the PWM output signal can be set by the values of two independent
16-bit registers (Fall and Rise). The counter increments and its output is compared to the 16-bit Rise and Fall
registers. When the counter is equal to the Rise register, the PWM output is set to high; when the counter reaches
the Fall value, the output returns to low. In continuous mode, when the counter reaches the Fall value, it will reset
and the cycle repeats. If either the cycle time or low periods are changed while in continuous mode, the new values
are not used until a full cycle has completed. The PWM waveform is available on PWM1,2,3,4 or TIM0OUT when the
output driver is enabled.
Rise
Fall
Figure 26 PWM Output Timings
11.1.2 Capture Mode
The capture mode can be used to measure the time between transitions of a signal applied to the capture input
(TIM0CAP). When the capture is started, on the next low-to-high transition of the captured signal, the count value is
stored in the Rise register, and on the following high-to-low transition, the counter value is stored in the Fall register.
The pulse width is the difference in counts in the two registers multiplied by the period of the prescaled clock. Upon
reading the capture registers the counter is stopped. The values in the High and Low registers will be updated
whenever there is a corresponding transition on the capture input, and the value stored will be relative to when the
mode was started. Therefore, if multiple pulses are seen on TIM0CAP before the counter is stopped only the last
pulse width will be stored. 40 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
CLK
CAPT
x 9 3
x 14
t
RISE t
RISE
t
FALL t
FALL
Rise
Fall
9 5 3 4
7
Capture Mode Enabled
Figure 27: Capture Mode
11.1.3 Counter/Timer Mode
The counter/timer can be used to generate interrupts, based on the timers or event counting, for software to use. As
a timer the clock source is from the system clock, prescaled if required. The timer period is programmed into the fall
register and the Fall register match interrupt enabled. The timer is started as either a single-shot or a repeating timer,
and generates an interrupt when the counter reaches the Fall register value.
When used to count external events on TIM0CK_GT the clock source is selected from the input pin and the number
of events programmed into the Fall register. The Fall register match interrupt is enabled and the counter started,
usually in single shot mode. An interrupt is generated when the programmed number of transitions is seen on the
input pin. The transitions counted can configured to be rising, falling or both rising and falling edges.
Edges on the event signal must be at least 100nsec apart, i.e. pulses must be wider than 100nsec.
11.1.4 Delta-Sigma Mode
A separate delta-sigma mode is available, allowing a low speed delta-sigma DAC to be implemented with up to 16-bit
resolution. This requires that a resistor-capacitor network is placed between the output DIO pin and digital ground. A
stream of pulses with digital voltage levels is generated which is integrated by the RC network to give an analogue
voltage. A conversion time is defined in terms of a number of clock cycles. The width of the pulses generated is the
period of a clock cycle. The number of pulses output in the cycle, together with the integrator RC values, will
determine the resulting analogue voltage. For example, generating approximately half the number of pulses that
make up a complete conversion period will produce a voltage on the RC output of VDD1/2, provided the RC time
constant is chosen correctly. During a conversion, the pulses will be pseudo-randomly dispersed throughout the
cycle in order to produce a steady voltage on the output of the RC network.
The output signal is asserted for the number of clock periods defined in the High register, with the total period being
216 cycles. For the same value in the High register, the pattern of pulses on subsequent cycles is different, due to the
pseudo-random distribution.
The delta-sigma converter output can operate in a Return-To-Zero (RTZ) or a Non-Return-to-Zero (NRZ) mode. The
NRZ mode will allow several pulses to be output next to each other. The RTZ mode ensures that each pulse is
separated from the next by at least one period. This improves linearity if the rise and fall times of the output are
different to one another. Essentially, the output signal is low on every other output clock period, and the conversion
cycle time is twice the NRZ cycle time i.e. 217 clocks. The integrated output will only reach half VDD2 in RTZ mode,
since even at full scale only half the cycle contains pulses. Figure 28 and Figure 29 illustrate the difference between
RTZ and NRZ for the same programmed number of pulses.© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production 41
1 2 3 1 2 N
Conversion cycle 1
217
N
Conversion cycle 2
3
Figure 28: Return To Zero Mode in Operation
1 2 3 1 2 N
Conversion cycle 1
N 3
216 Conversion cycle 2
Figure 29: Non-Return to Zero Mode
11.1.5 Infra-Red Transmission Mode
Infra-red transmission mode is a special feature of Timer 2 that is used to facilitate the generation of waveforms for
infra-red remote control transmission. Remote control protocols, such as Philips RC-6, apply On-Off Key (OOK)
modulation to a carrier signal using an encoded bit stream. The infra-red transmission mode supports a variety of
remote control protocols that have different carrier frequency, carrier duty-cycle and data bit encoding requirements.
In this mode, Timer 2 is configured to produce a carrier waveform that is OOK modulated by a programmable bit
sequence of up to 4096 bits stored in RAM. The resultant waveform is output to the associated Timer 2 output pin.
The JN516x Integrated Peripherals API User Guide [4] includes some examples.
11.1.6 Example Timer/Counter Application
Figure 30 shows an application of the JN516x timers to provide closed loop speed control. PWM1 is configured in
PWM mode to provide a variable mark-space ratio switching waveform to the gate of the NFET. This in turn controls
the power in the DC motor.
Timer 0 is configured to count the rising edge events on the clk/gate pin over a constant period. This converts the
tacho pulse stream output into a count proportional to the motor speed. This value is then used by the application
software executing the control algorithm.
If required for other functionality, then the unused IO associated with the timers could be used as general purpose
DIO.
JN516x
PWM1
Timer0
CLK/GATE
CAPTURE
PWM
M Tacho 1N4007
+12V
IRF521
1 pulse/rev
Figure 30: Closed Loop PWM Speed Control Using JN516x Timers42 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
11.2 Tick Timer
The JN516x contains a hardware timer that can be used for generating timing interrupts to software. It may be used
to implement regular events such as ticks for software timers or an operating system, as a high-precision timing
reference or can be used to implement system monitor timeouts as used in a watchdog timer. Features include:
• 32-bit counter
• 28-bit match value
• Maskable timer interrupt
• Single-shot, Restartable or Continuous modes of operation
Match Value
Counter
=
Mode
Control
&
&
SysClk
Run
Match
Int
Enable
Tick Timer
Interrupt
Reset
Mode
Figure 31 Tick Timer
The Tick Timer is clocked from a continuous 16MHz clock, which is fed to a 32-bit wide resettable up-counter, gated
by a signal from the mode control block. A match register allows comparison between the counter and a
programmed value. The match value, measured in 16MHz clock cycles is programmed through software, in the
range 0 to 0x0FFFFFFF. The output of the comparison can be used to generate an interrupt if the interrupt is
enabled and used in controlling the counter in the different modes. Upon configuring the timer mode, the counter is
also reset.
If the mode is programmed as single shot, the counter begins to count from zero until the match value is reached.
The match signal will be generated which will cause an interrupt if enabled, and the counter will stop counting. The
counter is restarted by reprogramming the mode.
If the mode is programmed as restartable, the operation of the counter is the same as for the single shot mode,
except that when the match value is reached the counter is reset and begins counting from zero. An interrupt will be
generated when the match value is reached if it is enabled.
Continuous mode operation is similar to restartable, except that when the match value is reached, the counter is not
reset but continues to count. An interrupt will be generated when the match value is reached if enabled.
11.3 Wakeup Timers
Two -41 bit wakeup timers are available in the JN516x driven from the 32kHz internal clock. They may run during
sleep periods when the majority of the rest of the device is powered down, to time sleep periods or other long period
timings that may be required by the application. The wakeup timers do not run during deep sleep and may optionally © NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production 43
be disabled in sleep mode through software control. When a wakeup timer expires it typically generates an interrupt,
if the device is asleep then the interrupt may be used as an event to end the sleep period. See Section 18 for further
details on how they are used during sleep periods. Features include:
• 41-bit down-counter
• Optionally runs during sleep periods
• Clocked by 32kHz system clock; either 32kHz RC oscillator, 32kHz XTAL oscillator or 32kHz clock input
A wakeup timer consists of a 41-bit down counter clocked from the selected 32 kHz clock. An interrupt or wakeup
event can be generated when the counter reaches zero. On reaching zero the counter will continue to count down
until stopped, which allows the latency in responding to the interrupt to be measured. If an interrupt or wakeup event
is required, the timer interrupt should be enabled before loading the count value for the period. Once the count value
is loaded and counter started, the counter begins to count down; the counter can be stopped at any time through
software control. The counter will remain at the value it contained when the timer was stopped and no interrupt will
be generated. The status of the timers can be read to indicate if the timers are running and/or have expired; this is
useful when the timer interrupts are masked. This operation will reset any expired status flags.
11.3.1 32 KHZ RC Oscillator Calibration
The 32 KHZ RC oscillator that can be used to time sleep periods is designed to require very little power to operate
and be self-contained, requiring no external timing components and hence is lower cost. As a consequence of using
on-chip resistors and capacitors, the inherent absolute accuracy and temperature coefficient is lower than that of a
crystal oscillator, but once calibrated the accuracy approaches that of a crystal oscillator. Sleep time periods should
be as close to the desired time as possible in order to allow the device to wake up in time for important events, for
example beacon transmissions in the IEEE802.15.4 protocol. If the sleep time is accurate, the device can be
programmed to wake up very close to the calculated time of the event and so keep current consumption to a
minimum. If the sleep time is less accurate, it will be necessary to wake up earlier in order to be certain the event will
be captured. If the device wakes earlier, it will be awake for longer and so reduce battery life. Please note, that
oscillator has a default current consumption of around 0.5uA, optionally this can be reduced to 0.375uA, which can
improve battery life, however, the calibrated accuracy and temperature coefficient will be worse as a consequence.
For detailed electrical specifications, see Section 19.3.9.
In order to allow sleep time periods to be as close to the desired length as possible, the true frequency of the RC
oscillator needs to be determined to better than the initial 30% accuracy. The calibration factor can then be used to
calculate the true number of nominal 32kHz periods needed to make up a particular sleep time. A calibration
reference counter, clocked from the 16MHz system clock, is provided to allow comparisons to be made between the
32kHz RC clock and the 16MHz system clock when the JN516x is awake and running from the 32MHZ crystal.
Wakeup timer0 counts for a set number of 32kHz clock periods during which time the reference counter runs. When
the wakeup timer reaches zero the reference counter is stopped, allowing software to read the number of 16MHz
clock ticks generated during the time represented by the number of 32kHz ticks programmed in the wakeup timer.
The true period of the 32kHz clock can thus be determined and used when programming a wakeup timer to achieve a
better accuracy and hence more accurate sleep periods
For a RC oscillator running at exactly 32,000Hz the value returned by the calibration procedure should be 10000, for
a calibration period of twenty 32,000Hz clock periods. If the oscillator is running faster than 32,000Hz the count will
be less than 10000, if running slower the value will be higher. For a calibration count of 9000, indicating that the RC
oscillator period is running at approximately 35kHz, to time for a period of 2 seconds the timer should be loaded with
71,111 ((10000/9000) x (32000 x 2)) rather than 64000.44 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
12 Pulse Counters
Two 16-bit counters are provided that can increment during all modes of operation (including sleep). The first, PC0,
increments from pulses received on DIO1 or DIO4. The other pulse counter, PC1 operates from DIO5 or DIO8
depending upon the configuration. This is enabled under software control. The pulses can be de-bounced using the
32kHz clock to guard against false counting on slow or noisy edges. Increments occur from a configurable rising or
falling edge on the respective DIO input.
Each counter has an associated 16-bit reference that is loaded by the user. An interrupt (and wakeup event if
asleep) may be generated when a counter reaches its pre-configured reference value. The two counters may
optionally be cascaded together to provide a single 32-bit counter, linked to any of the four DIO’s. The counters do
not saturate at 65535, but naturally roll-over to 0. Additionally, the pulse counting continues when the reference value
is reached without software interaction so that pulses are not missed even if there is a long delay before an interrupt
is serviced or during the wakeup process.
The system can work with signals up to 100kHz, with no debounce, or from 5.3kHz to 1.7kHz with debounce. When
using debounce the 32kHz clock must be active, so for minimum sleep currents the debounce mode should not be
used.© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production 45
13 Serial Communications
The JN516x has two Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART) serial communication interfaces. These
provide similar operating features to the industry standard 16550A device operating in FIFO mode. The interfaces
perform serial-to-parallel conversion on incoming serial data and parallel-to-serial conversion on outgoing data from
the CPU to external devices. In both directions, a configurable FIFO buffer (with a default depth of 16-bytes) allows
the CPU to read and write multiple characters on each transaction. This means that the CPU is freed from handling
data on a character-by-character basis, with the associated high processor overhead. The UARTs have the following
features:
• Emulates behaviour of industry standard NS16450 and NS16550A UARTs
• Configurable transmit and receive FIFO buffers (with default depths of 16-bytes for each), with direct access
to fill levels of each. Adds/deletes standard start, stop and parity bits to or from the serial data
• Independently controlled transmit, receive, status and data sent interrupts
• Optional modem flow control signals CTS and RTS on UART0.
• Fully programmable data formats: baud rate, start, stop and parity settings
• False start bit detection, parity, framing and FIFO overrun error detect and break indication
• Internal diagnostic capabilities: loop-back controls for communications link fault isolation
• Flow control by software or automatically by hardware Processor Bus
Divisor
Latch
Registers
Line
Status
Register
Line
Control
Register
FIFO
Control
Register
Receiver FIFO
Transmitter FIFO
Baud Generator
Logic
Transmitter Shift
Register
Receiver Shift
Register
Transmitter
Logic
Receiver
Logic
RXD
TXD
Modem
Control
Register
Modem
Status
Register Modem
Signals
Logic
RTS
CTS
Interrupt
ID
Register
Interrupt
Enable
Register
Interrupt
Logic
Internal
Interrupt
Figure 32: UART Block Diagram
The serial interfaces contain programmable fields that can be used to set number of data bits (5, 6,7 or 8), even, odd,
set-at-1, set-at-0 or no-parity detection and generation of single or multiple stop bit, (for 5 bit data, multiple is 1.5 stop
bits; for 6, 7 or 8 data bits, multiple is 2 bits).
The baud rate is programmable up to 1Mbps, standard baud rates such as 4800, 9600, 19.2k, 38.4k etc. can be
configured.
For applications requiring hardware flow control, UART0 provides two control signals: Clear-To-Send (CTS) and
Request-To-Send (RTS). CTS is an indication sent by an external device to the UART that it is ready to receive data.
RTS is an indication sent by the UART to the external device that it is ready to receive data. RTS is controlled from
software, while the value of CTS can be read. Monitoring and control of CTS and RTS is a software activity, normally
performed as part of interrupt processing. The signals do not control parts of the UART hardware, but simply indicate
to software the state of the UART external interfaces. Alternatively, the Automatic Flow Control mode can be set 46 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
where the hardware controls the value of the generated RTS (negated if the receive FIFO fill level is greater than a
programmable threshold of 8, 11, 13 or 15 bytes), and only transmits data when the incoming CTS is asserted.
Software can read characters, one byte at a time, from the Receive FIFO and can also write to the Transmit FIFO,
one byte at a time. The Transmit and Receive FIFOs can be cleared and reset independently of each other. The
status of the Transmit FIFO can be checked to see if it is empty, and if there is a character being transmitted. The
status of the Receive FIFO can also be checked, indicating if conditions such as parity error, framing error or break
indication have occurred. It also shows if an overrun error occurred (receive buffer full and another character arrives)
and if there is data held in the receive FIFO.
UART0 and UART1 can both be configured to use standard or alternative DIO lines, as shown in Table 5.
Additionally, UART0 can be configured to be used in 2-wire mode (where CTS0 and RTS0 are not configured), and
UART1 can be configured in 1-wire mode (where RXD1 is not configured). These freed up DIO pins can then be used
for other purposes.
Signal DIO Assignment
Standard pins Alternative pins
CTS0 DIO4 DIO12
RTS0 DIO5 DIO13
TXD0 DIO6 DIO14
RXD0 DIO7 DIO15
TXD1 DIO14 DIO11
RXD1 DIO15 DIO9
Table 6: UART IO
.
Note: With the automatic flow control threshold set to 15, the hardware flow control within the UART’s block negates
RTS when they receive FIFO that is about to become full. In some instances it has been observed that remote
devices that are transmitting data do not respond quickly enough to the de-asserted CTS and continue to transmit
data. In these instances the data will be lost in a receive FIFO overflow.
13.1 Interrupts
Interrupt generation can be controlled for the UART’s block, and is divided into four categories:
• Received Data Available: Is set when data in the Rx FIFO queue reaches a particular level (the trigger level can
be configured as 1, 4, 8 or 14) or if no character has been received for 4 character times.
• Transmit FIFO Empty: set when the last character from the Tx FIFO is read and starts to be transmitted.
• Receiver Line Status: set when one of the following occur (1) Parity Error - the character at the head of the
receive FIFO has been received with a parity error, (2) Overrun Error - the Rx FIFO is full and another character
has been received at the Receiver shift register, (3) Framing Error - the character at the head of the receive
FIFO does not have a valid stop bit and (4) Break Interrupt – occurs when the RxD line has been held low for an
entire character.
• Modem Status: Generated when the CTS (Clear To Send) input control line changes.
13.2 UART Application
The following example shows the UART0 connected to a 9-pin connector compatible with a PC. As the JN516x
device pins do not provide the RS232 line voltage, a level shifter is used.© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production 47
JN516x
RTS
CTS
TXD
RXD UART0
RS232
Level
Shifter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CD
RD
TD
DTR
SG
DSR
RTS
CTS
RI
PC COM
Port
1 5 Pin Signal
6 9
Figure 33: JN516x Serial Communication Link48 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
14 JTAG Test Interface
The JN516x includes an IEEE1149.1 compliant JTAG port for the purpose of manufacturing test. The software
debugger is not supported with this product.
The JTAG interface does not support boundary scan testing. It is recommended that the JN516x is not connected as
part of the board scan chain.© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production 49
15 Two-Wire Serial Interface (I2
C)
The JN516x includes industry standard I
2
C two-wire synchronous Serial Interface operates as a Master (MSIF) or
Slave (SSIF) that provides a simple and efficient method of data exchange between devices. The system uses a
serial data line (SIF_D) and a serial clock line (SIF_CLK) to perform bi-directional data transfers and includes the
following features:
Common to both master and slave:
• Compatible with both I2
C and SMbus peripherals
• Support for 7 and 10-bit addressing modes
• Optional pulse suppression on signal inputs (60ns guaranteed, 125ns typical)
Master only:
• Multi-master operation
• Software programmable clock frequency
• Supports Slave clock stretching
• Software programmable acknowledge bit
• Interrupt or bit-polling driven byte-by-byte data-transfers
• Bus busy detection
Slave only:
• Programmable slave address
• Simple byte level transfer protocol
• Write data flow control using acknowledge mechanism
• Read data flow control using clock stretching
• Read data preloaded or provided as required
The Serial Interface is accessed, depending upon the configuration, DIO14 and DIO15 or DIO16 and DIO17. This is
enabled under software control. The following table details which DIO are used for the Serial Interface depending
upon the configuration.
Signal DIO Assignment
Standard pins Alternative pins
SIF_CLK DIO14 DIO16
SIF_D DIO15 DIO17
Table 7: Two-Wire Serial Interface IO
15.1 Connecting Devices
The clock and data lines, SIF_D and SIF_CLK, are alternate functions of DIO15 and DIO14 respectively. The serial
interface function of these pins is selected when the interface is enabled. They are both bi-directional lines,
connected internally to the positive supply voltage via weak (50kΩ) programmable pull-up resistors. However, it is
recommended that external 4.7kΩ pull-ups be used for reliable operation at high bus speeds, as shown in Figure 34.
When the bus is free, both lines are HIGH. The output stages of devices connected to the bus must have an opendrain
or open-collector in order to perform the wired-AND function. The number of devices connected to the bus is
solely dependent on the bus capacitance limit of 400pF.
As this is an optional interface with two alternate positions, the DIO cells have not been customised for I
2
C operation.
In particular, note that there are ESD diodes to the nominal 3 volt supply (VDD2) from the SIF_CLK and SIF_D pins.
Therefore, if the VDD supply is removed from the JN5168 and this then discharges to ground, a path would exist that
could pull down the bus lines (see 2.2.6).50 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
SIF_CLK
SIF_D
VDD
D1_OUT
D1_I
N
CLK1_I
N
CLK1_OUT
D2_I
N
CLK2_I
N
CLK2_OUT
DEVICE 1 DEVICE 2
RP RP Pullup
Resistors
D2_OUT
JN516x
SI
F
DIO14
DIO15
Figure 34: Connection Details
15.2 Clock Stretching
Slave devices can use clock stretching to slow down the read transfer bit rate. After the master has driven SIF_CLK
low, the slave can drive SIF_CLK low for the required period and then release it. If the slave’s SIF_CLK low period is
greater than the master’s low period the resulting SIF_CLK bus signal low period is stretched thus inserting wait
states – see section 15.4 for further details.
SIF_CLK
SIF_CLK
SIF_CLK
Master SIF_CLK
Slave SIF_CLK
Wired-AND SIF_CLK
Clock held low
by Slave
Figure 35: Clock Stretching
15.3 Master Two-wire Serial Interface
When operating as a master device, it provides the clock signal and a prescale register determines the clock rate,
allowing operation up to 400kbit/s.
Data transfer is controlled from the processor bus interface at a byte level, with the processor responsible for
indicating when start, stop, read, write and acknowledge control should be generated. Write data written into a
transmit buffer will be written out across the two-wire interface when indicated, and read data received on the
interface is made available in a receive buffer. Indication of when a particular transfer has completed may be
indicated by means of an interrupt or by polling a status bit.
The first byte of data transferred by the device after a start bit is the slave address. The JN516x supports both 7-bit
and 10-bit slave addresses by generating either one or two address transfers. Only the slave with a matching address
will respond by returning an acknowledge bit.
The master interface provides a true multi-master bus including collision detection and arbitration that prevents data
corruption. If two or more masters simultaneously try to control the bus, a clock synchronization procedure
determines the bus clock. Because of the wired-AND connection of the interface, a high-to-low transition on the bus
affects all connected devices. This means a high-to-low transition on the SIF_CLK line causes all concerned devices
to count off their low period. Once the clock input of a device has gone low, it will hold the SIF_CLK line in that state
until the clock high state is reached when it releases the SIF_CLK line. Due to the wired-AND connection, the
SIF_CLK line will therefore be held low by the device with the longest low period, and held high by the device with the
shortest high period.© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production 51
SIF_CLK1
SIF_CLK2
SIF_CLK
Master1 SIF_CLK
Master2 SIF_CLK
Wired-AND SIF_CLK
Start counting
low period
Start counting
high period
Wait
State
Figure 36: Multi-Master Clock Synchronisation
After each transfer has completed, the status of the device must be checked to ensure that the data has been
acknowledged correctly, and that there has been no loss of arbitration. (N.B. Loss of arbitration may occur at any
point during the transfer, including data cycles). An interrupt will be generated when arbitration has been lost.52 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
15.4 Slave Two-wire Serial Interface
When operating as a slave device, the interface does not provide a clock signal, although it may drive the clock signal
low if it is required to apply clock stretching during read transfers.
Only transfers whose address matches the value programmed into the interface’s address register are accepted. The
interface allows both 7 and 10 bit addresses to be programmed, but only responds with an acknowledge to a single
address. Addresses defined as “reserved” will not be responded to, and should not be programmed into the address
register. A list of reserved addresses is shown in Table 8.
Address Name Behaviour
0000 000 General Call/Start Byte Ignored
0000 001 CBUS address Ignored
0000 010 Reserved Ignored
0000 011 Reserved Ignored
0000 1XX Hs-mode master code Ignored
1111 1XX Reserved Ignored
1111 0XX 10-bit address Only responded to if 10 bit address
set in address register
Table 8 : List of two-wire serial interface reserved addresses
Data transfer is controlled from the processor bus interface at a byte level, with the processor responsible for taking
write data from a receive buffer and providing read data to a transmit buffer when indicated. A series of interrupt
status bits are provided to control the flow of data.
For writes, in to the slave interface, it is important that data is taken from the receive buffer by the processor before
the next byte of data arrives. To enable this, the interface returns a Not Acknowledge (NACK) to the master if more
data is received before the previous data has been taken. This will lead to the termination of the current data transfer.
For reads, from the slave interface, the data may be preloaded into the transmit buffer when it is empty (i.e. at the
start of day, or when the last data has been read), or fetched each time a read transfer is requested. When using data
preload, read data in the buffer must be replenished following a data write, as the transmit and received data is
contained in a shared buffer. The interface will hold the bus using clock stretching when the transmit buffer is empty.
Interrupts may be triggered when:
• Data Buffer read data is required – a byte of data to be read should be provided to avoid the interface from
clock stretching
• Data Buffer read data has been taken – this indicates when the next data may be preloaded into the data
buffer
• Data Buffer write data is available – a byte of data should be taken from the data buffer to avoid data backoff
as defined above
• The last data in a transfer has completed – i.e. the end of a burst of data, when a Stop or Restart is seen
• A protocol error has been spotted on the interface© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production 53
16 Random Number Generator
A random number generator is provided which creates a 16-bit random number each time it is invoked. Consecutive
calls can be made to build up any length of random number required. Each call takes approximately 0.25msec to
complete. Alternatively, continuous generation mode can be used where a new number is generated approximately
every 0.25msec. In either mode of operation an interrupt can be generated to indicate when the number is available,
or a status bit can be polled.
The random bits are generated by sampling the state of the 32MHz clock every 32kHz system clock edge. As these
clocks are asynchronous to each other, each sampled bit is unpredictable and hence random.54 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
17 Analogue Peripherals
The JN516x contains a number of analogue peripherals allowing the direct connection of a wide range of external
sensors and switches.
ADC
Supply Voltage
(VDD1)
COMP1M (DIO17) Comparator 1
COMP1P (DIO16)
ADC1
VREF/ADC2
ADC3 (DIO0)
ADC4 (DIO1)
Vref
Internal Reference
Vref Select
Chip Boundary
Temp
Sensor
Figure 37: Analogue Peripherals
In order to provide good isolation from digital noise, the analogue peripherals and radio are powered by the radio
regulator, which is supplied from the analogue supply VDD1 and referenced to analogue ground VSSA.
A reference signal Vref for the ADC can be selected between an internal bandgap reference or an external voltage
reference supplied to the VREF pin. ADC input 2 cannot be used if an external reference is required, as this uses the
same pin as VREF. Note also that ADC3 and ADC4 use the same pins as DIO0 and DIO1 respectively. These pins
can only be used for the ADC if they are not required for any of their alternative functions. Similarly, the comparator
inputs are shared with DIO16 and DIO17. If used for their analogue functions, these DIOs must be put into a passive
state by setting them to Inputs with their pull-ups disabled.
The ADC is clocked from a common clock source derived from the 16MHz clock.
17.1 Analogue to Digital Converter
The 10-bit analogue to digital converter (ADC) uses a successive approximation design to perform high accuracy
conversions as typically required in wireless sensor network applications. It has six multiplexed single-ended input
channels: four available externally, one connected to an internal temperature sensor, and one connected to an
internal supply monitoring circuit.© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production 55
17.1.1 Operation
The input range of the ADC can be set between 0V to either the reference voltage or twice the reference voltage.
The reference can be either taken from the internal voltage reference or from the external voltage applied to the
VREF pin. For example, an external reference of 1.2V supplied to VREF may be used to set the ADC range between
0V and 2.4V.
VREF Gain Setting Maximum Input Range Supply Voltage Range (VDD)
1.2V
1.6V
1.2V
1.6V
0
0
1
1
1.2V
1.6V
2.4V
3.2V
2.2V - 3.6V
2.2V - 3.6V
2.6V - 3.6V
3.4V - 3.6V
Table 9: ADC Maximum Input Range
The input clock to the ADC is 16MHz and can be divided down to 2MHz, 1MHz, 500kHz and 250kHz. During an ADC
conversion the selected input channel is sampled for a fixed period and then held. This sampling period is defined as
a number of ADC clock periods and can be programmed to 2, 4, 6 or 8. The conversion rate is ((3 x Sample period)
+ 13) clock periods. For example for 500kHz conversion with sample period of 2 will be (3 x 2) + 13 = 19 clock
periods, 38µsecs or 26.32kHz. The ADC can be operated in either a single conversion mode or alternatively a new
conversion can be started as soon as the previous one has completed, to give continuous conversions.
If the source resistance of the input voltage is 1kΩ or less, then the default sampling time of 2 clocks should be used.
The input to the ADC can be modelled as a resistor of 5kΩ(typ) and 10kΩ (max) to represent the on-resistance of the
switches and the sampling capacitor 8pF. The sampling time required can then be calculated, by adding the sensor
source resistance to the switch resistance, multiplying by the capacitance giving a time constant. Assuming normal
exponential RC charging, the number of time constants required to give an acceptable error can be calculated, 7 time
constants gives an error of 0.091%, so for 10-bit accuracy 7 time constants should be the target. For a source with
zero resistance, 7 time constants is 640 nsecs, hence the smallest sampling window of 2 clock periods can be used.
ADC
pin
5 K
8 pF
Sample
Switch
ADC
front
end
Figure 38: ADC Input Equivalent Circuit
The ADC sampling period, input range and mode (single shot or continuous) are controlled through software.
When the ADC conversion is complete, an interrupt is generated. Alternatively the conversion status can be polled.
When operating in continuous mode, it is recommended that the interrupt is used to signal the end of a conversion,
since conversion times may range from 9.5 to 148 µsecs. Polling over this period would be wasteful of processor
bandwidth.
To facilitate averaging of the ADC values, which is a common practice in microcontrollers, a dedicated accumulator
has been added, the user can define the accumulation to occur over 2,4,8 or 16 samples. The end of conversion
interrupt can be modified to occur at the end of the chosen accumulation period, alternatively polling can still be used.
Software can then be used to apply the appropriate rounding and shifting to generate the average value, as well as
setting up the accumulation function.
For detailed electrical specifications, see Section 19.3.7.56 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
17.1.2 Supply Monitor
The internal supply monitor allows the voltage on the analogue supply pin VDD1 to be measured. This is achieved
with a potential divider that reduces the voltage by a factor of 0.666, allowing it to fall inside the input range of the
ADC when set with an input range twice the internal voltage reference. The resistor chain that performs the voltage
reduction is disabled until the measurement is made to avoid a continuous drain on the supply.
17.1.3 Temperature Sensor
The on chip temperature sensor can be used either to provide an absolute measure of the device temperature or to
detect changes in the ambient temperature. In common with most on chip temperature sensors, it is not trimmed and
so the absolute accuracy variation is large; the user may wish to calibrate the sensor prior to use. The sensor forces
a constant current through a forward biased diode to provide a voltage output proportional to the chip die temperature
which can then be measured using the ADC. The measured voltage has a linear relationship to temperature as
described in Section 19.3.13.
Because this sensor is on chip, any measurements taken must account for the thermal time constants. For example,
if the device just came out of sleep mode the user application should wait until the temperature has stabilised before
taking a measurement.
17.1.4 ADC Sample Buffer Mode
In this mode, the ADC operates in conjunction with a DMA (Direct Memory Access) engine as follows:
• ADC sampling is triggered at a configurable rate using one of the on-chip Timers (Timer 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4)
• ADC samples are automatically stored in a buffer located in RAM using a DMA mechanism
• ADC inputs may be multiplexed between different analogue sources
The 10-bit ADC data samples are transferred into the buffer in RAM as 16-bit words. The maximum number of 16-bit
words that may allocated in RAM for ADC sample storage is 2047.
The buffer may be configured to automatically wrap around to the start when full. Interrupts may be configured to
indicate when the buffer is half-full, full and has overflowed.
The CPU may perform other tasks while the data transfer and storage is being managed independently by the DMA
engine - the CPU only needs to configure the ADC sample buffer mode and deal with the stored samples in the buffer
when an interrupt occurs.
ADC sample buffer mode allows up to six analogue inputs to be multiplexed in combination. These inputs comprise
four external inputs (ADC1-4, corresponding to IO pins), an on-chip temperature sensor and an internal voltage
monitor. Samples from all the selected inputs will be produced on each timer trigger and stored in consecutive RAM
locations.
17.2 Comparator
The JN516x contains one analogue comparator, COMP1, that is designed to have true rail-to-rail inputs and operate
over the full voltage range of the analogue supply VDD1. The hysteresis level can be set to a nominal value of 0mV,
10mV, 20mV or 40mV. The source of the negative input signal for the comparator can be set to the internal voltage
reference, the negative external pin (COMP1M, which uses the same pin as DIO17) or the positive external pin
(COMP1P, on the same pin as DIO16). The source of the positive input signal can be COMP1P or COMP1M.
DIO16 and DIO17 cannot be used if the external comparator inputs are needed. The comparator output is routed to
an internal register and can be polled, or can be used to generate interrupts. The comparator can be disabled to
reduce power consumption. DIO16 and DIO17 should be set to inputs with pull-ups disabled, when using the
comparator.
The comparator also has a low power mode where the response time of the comparator is slower than the normal
mode, but the current required is greatly reduced. These figures are specified in Section 19.3.8. It is the only mode
that may be used during sleep, where a transition of the comparator output will wake the device. The wakeup action
and the configuration for which edge of the comparator output will be active are controlled through software. In sleep
mode the negative input signal source must be configured to be driven from the external pins.© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production 57
18 Power Management and Sleep Modes
18.1 Operating Modes
Three operating modes are provided in the JN516x that enable the system power consumption to be controlled
carefully to maximise battery life.
• Active Processing Mode
• Sleep Mode
• Deep Sleep Mode
The variation in power consumption of the three modes is a result of having a series of power domains within the chip
that may be controllably powered on or off.
18.1.1 Power Domains
The JN516x has the following power domains:
• VDD Supply Domain: supplies the wake-up timers and controller, DIO blocks, Comparator, SVM and BOR plus
Fast RC, 32kHz RC and crystal oscillators. This domain is driven from the external supply (battery) and is
always powered. The wake-up timers and controller, and the 32kHz RC and crystal oscillators may be powered
on or off in sleep mode through software control.
• Digital Logic Domain: supplies the digital peripherals, CPU, Flash, RAM when in Active Processing Mode,
Baseband controller, Modem and Encryption processor. It is powered off during sleep mode.
• RAM Domain: supplies the RAM when in Active Processing Mode. Also supplies the Ram during sleep mode to
retain the memory contents. It may be powered on or off for sleep mode through software control.
• Radio Domain: supplies the radio interface, ADCs and temperature sensor. It is powered during transmit and
receive and when the analogue peripherals are enabled. It is controlled by the baseband processor and is
powered off during sleep mode.
The current consumption figures for the different modes of operation of the device is given in Section 19.2.2.
18.2 Active Processing Mode
Active processing mode in the JN516x is where all of the application processing takes place. By default, the CPU will
execute at the selected clock speed executing application firmware. All of the peripherals are available to the
application, as are options to actively enable or disable them to control power consumption; see specific peripheral
sections for details.
Whilst in Active processing mode there is the option to doze the CPU but keep the rest of the chip active; this is
particularly useful for radio transmit and receive operations, where the CPU operation is not required therefore saving
power.
18.2.1 CPU Doze
Whilst in doze mode, CPU operation is stopped but the chip remains powered and the digital peripherals continue to
run. Doze mode is entered through software and is terminated by any interrupt request. Once the interrupt service
routine has been executed, normal program execution resumes. Doze mode uses more power than sleep and deep
sleep modes but requires less time to restart and can therefore be used as a low power alternative to an idle loop.
Whilst in CPU doze the current associated with the CPU is not consumed, therefore the basic device current is
reduced as shown in the figures in Section 19.2.2.1.
18.3 Sleep Mode
The JN516x enters sleep mode through software control. In this mode most of the internal chip functions are
shutdown to save power, however the state of DIO pins are retained, including the output values and pull-up enables,
and this therefore preserves any interface to the outside world. 58 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
When entering into sleep mode, there is an option to retain the RAM contents throughout the sleep period. If the
wakeup timers are not to be used for a wakeup event and the application does not require them to run continually,
then power can be saved by switching off the 32kHz oscillator if selected as the 32kHz system clock through software
control. The oscillator will be restarted when a wakeup event occurs.
Whilst in sleep mode one of four possible events can cause a wakeup to occur: transitions on DIO inputs, expiry of
wakeup timers, pulse counters maturing or comparator events. If any of these events occur, and the relevant
interrupt is enabled, then an interrupt is generated that will cause a wakeup from sleep. It is possible for multiple
wakeup sources to trigger an event at the same instant and only one of them will be accountable for the wakeup
period. It is therefore necessary in software to remove all other pending wakeup events prior to requesting entry back
into sleep mode; otherwise, the device will re-awaken immediately.
When wakeup occurs, a similar sequence of events to the reset process described in Section 6.1 happens, including
the checking of the supply voltage by the Supply Voltage Monitor 6.4. The High-Speed RC oscillator is started up,
once stable the power to CPU system is enabled and the reset is removed. Software determines that this is a reset
from sleep and so commences with the wakeup process. If RAM contents were held through sleep, wakeup is quicker
as the software does not have to initialise RAM contents meaning the application can recommence more quickly. See
Section 19.3.5 for wake-up timings.
18.3.1 Wakeup Timer Event
The JN516x contains two 41-bit wakeup timers that are counters clocked from the 32kHz oscillator, and can be
programmed to generate a wake-up event. Following a wakeup event, the timers continue to run. These timers are
described in Section 11.3.
Timer events can be generated from both of the two timers; one is intended for use by the 802.15.4 protocol, the
other being available for use by the Application running on the CPU. These timers are available to run at any time,
even during sleep mode.
18.3.2 DIO Event
Any DIO pin when used as an input has the capability, by detecting a transition, to generate a wake-up event. Once
this feature has been enabled the type of transition can be specified (rising or falling edge). Even when groups of
DIO lines are configured as alternative functions such as the UARTs or Timers etc, any input line in the group can still
be used to provide a wakeup event. This means that an external device communicating over the UART can wakeup
a sleeping device by asserting its RTS signal pin (which is the CTS input of the JN516x).
18.3.3 Comparator Event
The comparator can generate a wakeup interrupt when a change in the relative levels of the positive and negative
inputs occurs. The ability to wakeup when continuously monitoring analogue signals is useful in ultra-low power
applications. For example, the JN516x can remain in sleep mode until the voltage drops below a threshold and then
be woken up to deal with the alarm condition and the comparator has a low current mode to facilitate this.
18.3.4 Pulse Counter
The JN516x contains two 16 bit pulse counters that can be programmed to generate a wake-up event. Following the
wakeup event the counters will continue to operate and therefore no pulse will be missed during the wake-up
process. These counters are described in Section 12.To minimize sleep current it is possible to disable the 32K RC
oscillator and still use the pulse counters to cause a wake-up event, provided debounce mode is not required.
18.4 Deep Sleep Mode
Deep sleep mode gives the lowest power consumption. All switchable power domains are off and most functions in
the VDD supply power domain are stopped, including the 32kHz RC oscillator. However, the Brown-Out Reset
remains active as well as all the DIO cells. This mode can be exited by a hardware reset on the RESETN pin, or an
enabled DIO or comparator wakeup event. In all cases, the wakeup sequence is equivalent to a power-up sequence,
with no knowledge retained from the previous time the device was awake.© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production 59
19 Electrical Characteristics
19.1 Maximum Ratings
Exceeding these conditions may result in damage to the device.
Parameter Min Max
Device supply voltage VDD1, VDD2 -0.3V 3.6V
Supply voltage at voltage regulator bypass pins
VB_xxx
-0.3V 1.98V
Voltage on analogue pins XTALOUT, XTALIN,
VCOTUNE, RF_IN.
-0.3V VB_xxx + 0.3V
Voltage on analogue pins VREF, ADC1, IBIAS -0.3V VDD1 + 0.3V
Voltage on any digital pin -0.3V VDD2 + 0.3V
Storage temperature -40ºC 150ºC
Reflow soldering temperature according to
IPC/JEDEC J-STD-020C
260ºC
ESD rating Human Body Model 1 2.0kV
Charged Device Model 2 500V
1) Testing for Human Body Model discharge is performed as specified in JEDEC Standard JESD22-A114.
2) Testing for Charged Device Model discharge is performed as specified in JEDEC Standard JESD22-C101.
19.2 DC Electrical Characteristics
19.2.1 Operating Conditions
Supply Min Max
VDD1, VDD2 2.0V 3.6V
Standard Ambient temperature range -40ºC 85ºC
Extended Ambient temperature range -40ºC 125ºC
In the following sections typical is defined as 25ºC and VDD1,2 = 3V
Most parameter values cover the extended temperature range up to 125 ºC, where this is not the case, two values
are given, the value in italics type face is for standard temperature range up to 85ºC and the value in bold is for the
extended range.60 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
19.2.2 DC Current Consumption
VDD = 2.0 to 3.6V, -40 to +125º C
19.2.2.1 Active Processing
Mode: Min Typ Max Unit Notes
CPU processing
32,16,8,4,2 or 1MHz
1700 +
205/MHz
µA GPIOs enabled. When in CPU
doze the current related to CPU
speed is not consumed.
Radio transmit 15.3 mA CPU in software doze – radio
transmitting
Radio receive 17.0 mA CPU in software doze – radio in
receive mode
The following current figures should be added to those above if the feature is being used
ADC 550 µA Temperature sensor and battery
measurements require ADC
Comparator 73/0.8 µA Normal/low-power
UART 60 µA For each UART
Timer 21 µA For each Timer
2-wire serial interface (I2
C) 46 µA
19.2.2.2 Sleep Mode
Mode: Min Typ Max Unit Notes
Sleep mode with I/O wakeup 0.12 µA Waiting on I/O event
Sleep mode with I/O and RC
Oscillator timer wakeup –
measured at 25ºC
0.64 µA As above, but also waiting on timer
event. If both wakeup timers are
enabled then add another 0.05µA
32kHz crystal oscillator 1.4 µA As alternative sleep timer
The following current figures should be added to those above if the feature is being used
RAM retention– measured at
25ºC
0.9 µA
Comparator (low-power mode) 0.8 µA Reduced response time
19.2.2.3 Deep Sleep Mode
Mode: Min Typ Max Unit Notes
Deep sleep mode– measured
at 25ºC
100 nA Waiting on chip RESET or I/O
event© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production 61
19.2.3 I/O Characteristics
VDD = 2.0 to 3.6V, -40 to +125º C, italic +85 ºC Bold +125 ºC
Parameter Min Typ Max Unit Notes
Internal DIO pullup
resistors 40 50 60 kΩ
Internal RESETN pullup
resistor
267
325
455
605
410
500
700
930
615. 636
750, 775
1050, 1085
1395, 1441
kΩ VDD2 = 3.6V
VDD2 = 3.0V
VDD2 = 2.2V
VDD2 = 2.0V
Digital I/O High Input VDD2 x 0.7 VDD2 V
Digital I/O low Input -0.3 VDD2 x 0.27 V
Digital I/O input hysteresis 200 310 400 mV
DIO High O/P (2.7-3.6V) VDD2 x 0.8 VDD2 V With 4mA load
DIO Low O/P (2.7-3.6V) 0 0.4 V With 4mA load
DIO High O/P (2.2-2.7V) VDD2 x 0.8 VDD2 V With 3mA load
DIO Low O/P (2.2-2.7V) 0 0.4 V With 3mA load
DIO High O/P (2.0-2.2V) VDD2 x 0.8 VDD2 V With 2.5mA load
DIO Low O/P (2.0-2.2V) 0 0.4 V With 2.5mA load
Current sink/source
capability
4
3
2.5
mA VDD2 = 2.7V to 3.6V
VDD2 = 2.2V to 2.7V
VDD2 = 2.0V to 2.2V
IIL - Input Leakage Current 20, 30 nA Vcc = 3.6V, pin low
IIH - Input Leakage Current 20, 60 nA Vcc = 3.6V, pin high
19.3 AC Characteristics
19.3.1 Reset and Supply Voltage Monitor
Internal RESET
VDD
VPOT
t
STAB
Figure 39: Internal Power-on Reset without Showing Brown-Out62 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
Internal RESET
RESETN VRST
t
STAB
t
RST
Figure 40: Externally Applied Reset
VDD = 2.0 to 3.6V, -40 to +125º C
Parameter Min Typ Max Unit Notes
External Reset pulse width
to initiate reset sequence
(tRST)
1 µs Assumes internal pullup
resistor value of 100K
worst case and ~5pF
external capacitance
External Reset threshold
voltage (VRST)
VDD2 x
0.7
V Minimum voltage to
avoid being reset
Internal Power-on Reset
threshold voltage (VPOT)
Rise/fall time > 10mS
1.44
1.41
V Rising
Falling
Spike Rejection
Square wave pulse 1us
Triangular wave pulse 10us
1.2
1.3
V Depth of pulse to trigger
reset
Reset stabilisation time
(tSTAB)
180 µs Note 1
Chip current when held in
reset (IRESET)
6 uA
Brown-Out Reset
Current Consumption
80 nA
Supply Voltage Monitor
Threshold Voltage (VTH)
1.86
1.92
2.02
2.11
2.21
2.30
2.59
2.88
1.94
2.00
2.10
2.20
2.30
2.40
2.70
3.00
2.00
2.06
2.16
2.27
2.37
2.47
2.78
3.09
V Configurable threshold
with 8 levels
Supply Voltage Monitor
Hysteresis (VHYS)
37
38
45
52
58
65
82
100
mV Corresponding to the 8
threshold levels
1 Time from release of reset to start of executing of bootloader code from internal flash. An extra 15us is incurred if
the BOR circuit has been activated (e.g., if the supply voltage has been ramped up from 0V)".© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production 63
VTH + VHYS
VTH
DVDD
Internal BORest
Internal SVM
VPOT
Figure 41 Brown-out Reset Followed By Supply Voltage Montior trigger
19.3.2 SPI Master Timing
t t SSH SSS
t
CK
t
SI
t
HI
MOSI
(mode=1,3)
SS
MOSI
(mode=0,2)
MISO
(mode=0,2)
MISO
(mode=1,3)
t
VO
t
VO
CLK
(mode=0,1)
t
SI
t
HI
CLK
(mode=2,3)
Figure 42: SPI Master Timing
Parameter Symbol Min Max Unit
Clock period tCK 62.5 - ns
Data setup time tSI 16.7 @ 3.3V
18.2 @ 2.7V
21.0 @ 2.0V
- ns
Data hold time tHI 0 ns
Data invalid period tVO - 15 ns
Select set-up period tSSS 60 - ns
Select hold period tSSH 30 (SPICLK = 16MHz)
0 (SPICLK<16MHz, mode=0 or 2)
60 (SPICLK<16MHz, mode=1 or 3)
- ns64 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
19.3.3 SPI Slave Timing
Parameter Symbol Min Max Unit
Clock period tCK 125 - ns
Idle time tIDLE 125 - ns
Data input setup time tSI 10 - ns
Data input hold time tHI 10 - ns
Data output invalid period from SPISCLK falling edge tCKVO - 30 ns
Data output invalid period from SPISSEL falling edge tSELVO 30 ns
Delay from SPISSEL falling edge to SPISCLK rising edge tSELA 30 - ns
Delay from SPISCLK falling edge to SPISSEL rising edge tSELN 30 - ns
…
…
SPISCLK
SPISSEL
SPISMOSI
SPISMISO
…
…
t tSELN IDLE
tSI tHI
tSELA tCK
tSELVO tCKVO
Figure 43: SPI Slave Timing© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production 65
19.3.4 Two-wire Serial Interface
t
BUF
S Sr P S
t
LOW
t
HD;STA
t
F t
R
t
HD;DAT
t
HIGH
t
SU;DAT
t
SU;STA
t
HD;STA
t
SU;STO
t
SP t
R
t
F
SIF_D
SIF_CLK
Figure 44: Two-wire Serial Interface Timing
Parameter Symbol
Standard Mode Fast Mode
Unit
Min Max Min Max
SIF_CLK clock frequency fSCL 0 100 0 400 kHz
Hold time (repeated) START condition.
After this period, the first clock pulse is
generated
tHD:STA 4 - 0.6 - µs
LOW period of the SIF_CLK clock tLOW 4.7 - 1.3 - µs
HIGH period of the SIF_CLK clock tHIGH 4 - 0.6 - µs
Set-up time for repeated START condition tSU:STA 4.7 - 0.6 - µs
Data setup time SIF_D tSU:DAT 0.25 - 0.1 - µs
Rise Time SIF_D and SIF_CLK tR - 1000 20+0.1Cb 300 ns
Fall Time SIF_D and SIF_CLK tF - 300 20+0.1Cb 300 ns
Set-up time for STOP condition tSU:STO 4 - 0.6 - µs
Bus free time between a STOP and START
condition
tBUF 4.7 - 1.3 - µs
Pulse width of spikes that will be
suppressed by input filters (Note 1)
tSP - 60 - 60 ns
Capacitive load for each bus line Cb - 400 - 400 pF
Noise margin at the LOW level for each
connected device (including hysteresis)
Vnl 0.1VDD - 0.1VDD - V
Noise margin at the HIGH level for each
connected device (including hysteresis)
Vnh 0.2VDD - 0.2VDD - V
Note 1: This figure indicates the pulse width that is guaranteed to be suppressed. Pulse with widths up to 125nsec
may also get suppressed.
19.3.5 Wakeup Timings
Parameter Min Typ Max Unit Notes
Time for crystal to stabilise
ready to run CPU
0.74 ms Reached oscillator amplitude
threshold. Default bias current
Time for crystal to stabilise
ready for radio activity
1.0 ms
Wake up from Deep Sleep
or from Sleep
170 µs Time to CPU release
Start-up time from reset
RESETN pin, BOR or
SVM
180 µs Time to CPU release
Wake up from CPU Doze
mode
0.2 µs 66 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
19.3.6 Bandgap Reference
VDD = 2.0 to 3.6V, -40 to +125ºC, italic +85 ºC Bold +125 ºC
Parameter Min Typ Max Unit Notes
Voltage 1.198 1.235 1.260 V
DC power supply rejection 58 dB at 25ºC
Temperature coefficient +40
+135
+65
+93
ppm/ºC 20 to 85ºC
-40ºC to 20ºC
20 to 125 ºC
-40ºC to 85ºC
Point of inflexion +80 ºC
19.3.7 Analogue to Digital Converters
VDD = 3.0V, VREF = 1.2V, -40 to +125ºC, italic +85 ºC Bold +125 ºC
Parameter Min Typ Max Unit Notes
Resolution 10 bits 500kHz Clock
Current consumption 550 µA
Integral nonlinearity ± 1.6, 1.8 LSB
Differential nonlinearity -0.5 +0.5 LSB Guaranteed monotonic
Offset error -10
-20
mV 0 to Vref range
0 to 2Vref range
Gain error +10
+20
mV 0 to Vref range
0 to 2Vref range
Internal clock 0.25,0.5 or
1.0
MHz 16MHz input clock,
÷16,32or 64
No. internal clock periods
to sample input
2, 4, 6 or 8 Programmable
Conversion time 9.5 148 µs Programmable
Input voltage range 0.04 Vref
or 2*Vref
V Switchable. Refer to
17.1.1
Vref (Internal) See Section 19.3.6
Vref (External) 1.15 1.2 1.6 V Allowable range into
VREF pin
Input capacitance 8 pF In series with 5K ohms© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production 67
19.3.8 Comparator
VDD = 2.0 to 3.6V -40 to +125ºC, italic +85 ºC Bold +125 ºC
Parameter Min Typ Max Unit Notes
Analogue response time
(normal)
90 125,130 ns +/- 250mV overdrive
10pF load
Total response time
(normal) including delay to
Interrupt controller
125
+ 125,130
ns Digital delay can be
up to a max. of two
16MHz clock periods
Analogue response time
(low power)
2.2 2.8 µs +/- 250mV overdrive
No digital delay
Hysteresis 7
14
28
10
20
40
16, 17
28, 30
53, 57
mV Programmable in 3
steps and zero
Vref (Internal) See Section 19.3.6 V
Common Mode input range 0 Vdd V
Current (normal mode) 56 73 96, 100 µA
Current (low power mode) 0.8 1.0, 1.1 µA
19.3.9 32kHz RC Oscillator
VDD = 2.0 to 3.6V, -40 to +125 ºC, italic +85 ºC Bold +125 ºC
Parameter Min Typ Max Unit Notes
Current consumption of cell
and counter logic (default)
590
520
465
720, 800
660, 740
600, 650
nA 3.6V
3.0V
2.0V
Current consumption of cell
and counter logic (low power)
465
375
290
500,550
425,460
330,370
nA 3.6V
3.0V
2.0V
32kHz clock un-calibrated
accuracy
-10% 32kHz +40% Without temperature &
voltage variation (note1)
Calibrated 32kHz accuracy
(default)
Low power
±300
±600
ppm For a 1 second sleep
period calibrating over
20 x 32kHz clock
periods
Variation with temperature -0.010
-0.020
%/°C Default
Low power
Variation with VDD2 -3.0 %/V
Note1: Measured at 3v and 25 deg C 68 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
19.3.10 32kHz Crystal Oscillator
VDD = 2.0 to 3.6V, -40 to +125ºC, italic +85 ºC Bold +125 ºC
Parameter Min Typ Max Unit Notes
Current consumption of cell
and counter logic
1.4 1.75, 2.0 µA This is sensitive to the ESR
of the crystal, Vdd and total
capacitance at each pin
Start – up time 0.6 s Assuming xtal with ESR of
less than 40kohms and
CL= 9pF External caps =
15pF
(Vdd/2mV pk-pk) see
Appendix B
Input capacitance 1.4 pF Bondpad and package
Transconductance 18.5 µA/V
External Capacitors
(CL=9pF)
15 pF Total external capacitance
needs to be 2*CL, allowing
for stray capacitance from
chip, package and PCB
Amplitude at Xout Vdd-0.2 Vp-p
19.3.11 32MHz Crystal Oscillator
VDD = 2.0 to 3.6V, -40 to +125ºC, italic +85 ºC Bold +125 ºC
Parameter Min Typ Max Unit Notes
Current consumption 300 375 450, 500 µA Excluding bandgap ref.
Start – up time 0.74 ms Assuming xtal with ESR of
less than 40ohms and CL=
9pF External caps = 15pF
see Appendix B
Input capacitance 1.4 pF Bondpad and package
Transconductance 3.65, 3.55 4.30 5.16 mA/V
DC voltages,
XTALIN/XTALOUT
390/432
375/412
425/472 470/527 mV
External Capacitors
(CL=9pF)
15 pF Total external capacitance
needs to be 2*CL, allowing
for stray capacitance from
chip, package and PCB
Amplitude detect threshold 320 mVp-p Threshold detection
accessible via API© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production 69
19.3.12 High-Speed RC Oscillator
VDD = 2.0 to 3.6V, -40 to +125ºC, italic +85 ºC Bold +125 ºC
Parameter Min Typ Max Unit Notes
Current consumption of cell 81 145 250, 275 µA
Clock native accuracy -16% +18%
Un-calibrated frequency 26.1 MHz
Calibrated centre frequency
accuracy
-1.6% 32.1 +1.6% MHz Without temperature &
voltage variation
Calibrated centre frequency
accuracy
-4% 32.1 +5% MHz Including temperature &
voltage variation
Variation with temperature -0.024, -0.015 +0.009,
+0.006
%/°C
Variation with VDD2 -0.25 +0.25 +0.5, +0.6 %/V
Startup time 2.4 us
19.3.13 Temperature Sensor
VDD = 2.0 to 3.6V, -40 to +125ºC, italic +85 ºC Bold +125 ºC
Parameter Min Typ Max Unit Notes
Operating Range -40 - 125 °C
Sensor Gain -1.56 -1.66 -1.76 mV/°C
Accuracy - - ±7 °C
Non-linearity - - 2.0, 3.0 °C
Output Voltage 610, 540 840 mV Includes absolute variation
due to manufacturing & temp
Typical Voltage 730 mV Typical at 3.0V 25°C
Resolution 0.666 0.706 0.751 °C/LSB 0 to Vref ADC I/P Range
19.3.14 Non-Volatile Memory
VDD = 2.0 to 3.6V, -40 to +125ºC, italic +85 ºC Bold +125 ºC
Parameter Min Typ Max Unit Notes
Flash endurance 10K 100/50K Cycle Program/erase
Flash erase time 100 ms One or more sectors
Flash programming time 1.0 ms 256 bytes
EEPROM endurance 100K 1M/500K °C Program/erase (see 4.4 )
EEPROM erase time 1.8 ms One 64 bytes page
EEPROM programming time 1.1 ms Between 1 & 64 bytes
Retention time powered
unpowered
10
20
Years Flash & EEPROM70 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
19.3.15 Radio Transceiver
This JN516x meets all the requirements of the IEEE802.15.4 standard over 2.0 - 3.6V and offers the following
improved RF characteristics. All RF characteristics are measured single ended.
This part also meets the following regulatory body approvals, when used with NXP’s Module Reference Designs.
Compliant with FCC part 15, rules, IC Canada, ETSI ETS 300-328 and Japan ARIB STD-T66
The PCB schematic and layout rules detailed in Appendix B.4
must be followed. Failure to do so will likely result in the JN516x
failing to meet the performance specification detailed herein and
worst case may result in device not functioning in the end
application.
Parameter Min Typical Max Notes
RF Port Characteristics
Type Single Ended
Impedance 1 50ohm 2.4-2.5GHz
Frequency range 2.400 GHz 2.485GHz
ESD levels (pin 17) 2KV (HBM)
500v (CDM)
1) With external matching inductors and assuming PCB layout as in Appendix B.4.© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production 71
Radio Parameters: 2.0-3.6V, +25ºC
Parameter Min Typical Max Unit Notes
Receiver Characteristics
Receive sensitivity -92 -95 dBm Nominal for 1% PER, as per
802.15.4 Section 6.5.3.3
Maximum input signal +10 dBm For 1% PER, measured as
sensitivity
Adjacent channel
rejection (-1/+1 ch)
[CW Interferer]
19/34
[27/49]
dBc For 1% PER, with wanted signal
3dB, above sensitivity. (Note1,2)
(modulated interferer)
Alternate channel
rejection (-2/+2 ch)
[CW Interferer]
40/44
[54/54]
dBc For 1% PER, with wanted signal
3dB, above sensitivity. (Note1,2)
(modulated interferer)
Other in band rejection
2.4 to 2.4835 GHz,
excluding adj channels
48 dBc For 1% PER with wanted signal
3dB above sensitivity. (Note1)
Out of band rejection 52 dBc For 1% PER with wanted signal
3dB above sensitivity. All
frequencies except wanted/2 which
is 8dB lower. (Note1)
Spurious emissions
(RX)
-65
<-70
-60
dBm Measured conducted into 50ohms
30MHz to 1GHz
1GHz to 12GHz
Intermodulation
protection
40 dB For 1% PER at with wanted signal
3dB above sensitivity. Modulated
Interferers at 2 & 4 channel
separation (Note1)
RSSI linearity -4 +4 dB -95 to -10dBm.
Available through Hardware API
Transmitter Characteristics
Transmit power +0.5 +2.5 dBm
Output power control
range
-35 dB In three 12dB steps (Note3)
Spurious emissions
(TX)
-40
<-70
<-70
dBm Measured conducted into 50ohms
30MHz to 1GHz,
1GHz to12.5GHz,
The following exceptions apply
1.8 to 1.9GHz & 5.15 to 5.3GHz
EVM [Offset] 3.0 4.5 % At maximum output power
Transmit Power
Spectral Density
-38 -20 dBc At greater than 3.5MHz offset, as
per 802.15.4, Section 6.5.3.172 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
Radio Parameters: 2.0-3.6V, -40ºC
Parameter Min Typical Max Unit Notes
Receiver Characteristics
Receive sensitivity -93.0 -96.0 dBm Nominal for 1% PER, as per
802.15.4 Section 6.5.3.3
Maximum input signal +10 dBm For 1% PER, measured as
sensitivity
Adjacent channel
rejection (-1/+1 ch)
[CW Interferer]
19/34
[TBC]
dBc For 1% PER, with wanted signal
3dB, above sensitivity. (Note1,2)
(modulated interferer)
Alternate channel
rejection (-2/+2 ch)
[CW Interferer]
40/44
[TBC]
dBc For 1% PER, with wanted signal
3dB, above sensitivity. (Note1,2)
(modulated interferer)
Other in band rejection
2.4 to 2.4835 GHz,
excluding adj channels
47 dBc For 1% PER with wanted signal
3dB above sensitivity. (Note1)
Out of band rejection 49 dBc For 1% PER with wanted signal
3dB above sensitivity. All
frequencies except wanted/2 which
is 8dB lower. (Note1)
Spurious emissions
(RX)
-64
<-70
-60
dBm Measured conducted into 50ohms
30MHz to 1GHz
1GHz to 12GHz
Intermodulation
protection
39 dB For 1% PER at with wanted signal
3dB above sensitivity. Modulated
Interferers at 2 & 4 channel
separation (Note1)
RSSI linearity -4 +4 dB -95 to -10dBm.
Available through Hardware API
Transmitter Characteristics
Transmit power 0 +2.00 dBm
Output power control
range
-35 dB In three 12dB steps (Note3)
Spurious emissions
(TX)
-40
<-70
<-70
dBm Measured conducted into 50ohms
30MHz to 1GHz,
1GHz to12.5GHz,
The following exceptions apply
1.8 to 1.9GHz & 5.15 to 5.3GHz
EVM [Offset] 3.0 4.5 % At maximum output power
Transmit Power
Spectral Density
-38 -20 dBc At greater than 3.5MHz offset, as
per 802.15.4, Section 6.5.3.1© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production 73
Radio Parameters: 2.0-3.6V, +85ºC
Parameter Min Typical Max Unit Notes
Receiver Characteristics
Receive sensitivity -90 -93 dBm Nominal for 1% PER, as per
802.15.4 Section 6.5.3.3
Maximum input signal +10 dBm For 1% PER, measured as
sensitivity
Adjacent channel
rejection (-1/+1 ch)
[CW Interferer]
19/34
[TBC]
dBc For 1% PER, with wanted signal
3dB, above sensitivity. (Note1,2)
(modulated interferer)
Alternate channel
rejection (-2/+2 ch)
[CW Interferer]
40/44
[TBC]
dBc For 1% PER, with wanted signal
3dB, above sensitivity. (Note1,2)
(modulated interferer)
Other in band rejection
2.4 to 2.4835 GHz,
excluding adj channels
49 dBc For 1% PER with wanted signal
3dB above sensitivity. (Note1)
Out of band rejection 53 dBc For 1% PER with wanted signal
3dB above sensitivity. All
frequencies except wanted/2 which
is 8dB lower. (Note1)
Spurious emissions
(RX)
-66
<-70
-61
dBm Measured conducted into 50ohms
30MHz to 1GHz
1GHz to 12GHz
Intermodulation
protection
41 dB For 1% PER at with wanted signal
3dB above sensitivity. Modulated
Interferers at 2 & 4 channel
separation (Note1)
RSSI linearity -4 +4 dB -95 to -10dBm.
Available through Hardware API
Transmitter Characteristics
Transmit power 0 +2.0 dBm
Output power control
range
-35 dB In three 12dB steps (Note3)
Spurious emissions
(TX)
-40
<-70
<-70
dBm Measured conducted into 50ohms
30MHz to 1GHz,
1GHz to12.5GHz,
The following exceptions apply
1.8 to 1.9GHz & 5.15 to 5.3GHz
EVM [Offset] 3.0 4.5 % At maximum output power
Transmit Power
Spectral Density
-38 -20 dBc At greater than 3.5MHz offset, as
per 802.15.4, Section 6.5.3.174 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
Radio Parameters: 2.0-3.6V, +125ºC
Parameter Min Typical Max Unit Notes
Receiver Characteristics
Receive sensitivity -89 -92 dBm Nominal for 1% PER, as per
802.15.4 Section 6.5.3.3
Maximum input signal +5 dBm For 1% PER, measured as
sensitivity
Adjacent channel
rejection (-1/+1 ch)
[CW Interferer]
20/34
[TBC]
dBc For 1% PER, with wanted signal
3dB, above sensitivity. (Note1,2)
(modulated interferer)
Alternate channel
rejection (-2/+2 ch)
[CW Interferer]
40/44
[TBC]
dBc For 1% PER, with wanted signal
3dB, above sensitivity. (Note1,2)
(modulated interferer)
Other in band rejection
2.4 to 2.4835 GHz,
excluding adj channels
49 dBc For 1% PER with wanted signal
3dB above sensitivity. (Note1)
Out of band rejection 53 dBc For 1% PER with wanted signal
3dB above sensitivity. All
frequencies except wanted/2 which
is 8dB lower. (Note1)
Spurious emissions
(RX)
-66
<-70
-61
dBm Measured conducted into 50ohms
30MHz to 1GHz
1GHz to 12GHz
Intermodulation
protection
41 dB For 1% PER at with wanted signal
3dB above sensitivity. Modulated
Interferers at 2 & 4 channel
separation (Note1)
RSSI linearity -4 +4 dB -95 to -10dBm.
Available through Hardware API
Transmitter Characteristics
Transmit power -0.5 +1.5 dBm
Output power control
range
-35 dB In three 12dB steps (Note3)
Spurious emissions
(TX)
-40
<-70
<-70
dBm Measured conducted into 50ohms
30MHz to 1GHz,
1GHz to12.5GHz,
The following exceptions apply
1.8 to 1.9GHz & 5.15 to 5.3GHz
EVM [Offset] 3.0 4.5 % At maximum output power
Transmit Power
Spectral Density
-38 -20 dBc At greater than 3.5MHz offset, as
per 802.15.4, Section 6.5.3.1© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production 75
Note1: Blocker rejection is defined as the value, when 1% PER is seen with the wanted signal 3dB above sensitivity,
as per 802.15.4 Section 6.5.3.4
Note2: Channels 11,17,24 low/high values reversed.
Note3: Up to an extra 2.5dB of attenuation is available if required.76 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
Appendix A Mechanical and Ordering Information
A.1 SOT618-1 HVQFN40 40-pin QFN Package Drawing
Figure 45: 40-pin QFN Package Drawings
UNIT A
max.
A1 b c D Dh E Eh e e1 e2 L v w y y1
mm 1 0.05
0.00
0.30
0.18 0.2 6.1
5.9
4.75
4.45
6.1
5.9
4.75
4.45 0.5 4.5 4.5 0.5
0.3 0.1 0.05 0.05 0.1
Table 10: Package Dimensions
Plastic or metal protrusions of 0.075 mm maximum per side are
not included.© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production 77
A.2 Footprint Information
Information for reflow soldering. All dimensions are given in the table underneath and are in millimeters
Solder land
Solder land plus solder paste
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Figure 46: PCB Decal
The PCB schematic and layout rules detailed in Appendix B.4 must
be followed. Failure to do so will likely result in the JN516x failing
to meet the performance specification detailed herein and worst
case may result in device not functioning in the end application.
A B C D E F G
0.5 0.45 0.3 0.25 1.53x1.53 4.1x4.1 1.0x0.25
Table 11: Footprint Dimensions78 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
A.3 Ordering Information
The standard qualification for the JN516x is extended industrial temperature range: -40ºC to +125ºC, packaged in a
40-pin QFN package.
The device is available in two different reel quantities
• Tape mounted 4000 devices on a 330mm reel
• Tape mounted 1000 devices on a 180mm reel
Order Codes:
Part Number Ordering Code Description
JN5161-001 JN5161/001 JN5161 microcontroller
JN5164-001 JN5164/001 JN5164 microcontroller
JN5168-001 JN5168/001 JN5168 microcontroller
The Standard Supply Multiple (SSM) for Engineering Samples or Prototypes is 50 units with a maximum of 250 units.
If the quantity of Engineering Samples or Prototypes ordered is less than a reel quantity, then these will be shipped in
tape form only, with no reel and will not be dry packaged in a moisture sensitive environment.
The SSM for Production status devices is one reel, all reels are dry packaged in a moisture barrier bag see A.5.3.© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production 79
A.4 Device Package Marking
The diagram below shows the package markings for JN516x. The package on the left along with the legend
information below it, shows the general format of package marking. The package on the right shows the specific
markings for a JN5168 device, that came from assembly build number 01 and was manufactured week 25 of 2011.
J N 5168 A
XXXXXX
XXXXFF
XXXYWWXX
J N 5168 A
RUL 280
0 0 Y U 0 1
qSD 125 -X
NXP
NXP
Figure 47: Device Package Marking
Legend:
JN Family part code
XXXX 4 digit part number
FF 2 digit assembly build number
Y 1 digit year number
WW 2 digit week number
Ordering Code Part Marking
JN5161/001 JN5161A
JN5164/001 JN5164A
JN5168/001 JN5168A80 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
A.5 Tape and Reel Information
A.5.1 Tape Orientation and Dimensions
The general orientation of the 40QFN package in the tape is as shown in Figure 48.
Figure 48: Tape and Reel Orientation
Figure 49 shows the detailed dimensions of the tape used for 6x6mm 40QFN devices.
Reference Dimensions (mm)
Ao 6.30 ±0.10
Bo 6.30 ±0.10
Ko 1.10 ±0.10
F 7.500 ±0.10
P1 12.0 ±0.10
W 16.00 +0.30/-0.3
(I) Measured from centreline of sprocket hole to centreline of pocket
(II) Cumulative tolerance of 10 sprocket holes is ±0.20mm
(III) Measured from centreline of sprocket hole to centreline of pocket
(IV) Other material available
Figure 49: Tape Dimensions© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production 81
A.5.2 Reel Information: 180mm Reel
Surface Resistivity Between 1x1010 – 1x1012 Ohms Square
Material High Impact Polystyrene, environmentally friendly, recyclable
All dimensions and tolerances are fully compliant with EIA-481-B and are specified in millimetres.
6 window design with one window on each side blanked to allow adequate labelling space.
Figure 50: Reel Dimensions82 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
A.5.3 Reel Information: 330mm Reel
Surface Resistivity Between 10e9 – 10e11 Ohms Square
Material High Impact Polystyrene with Antistatic Additive
All dimensions and tolerances are fully compliant with EIA-481-B and are specified in millimetres.
3 window design to allow adequate labelling space.
Figure 51: 330mm Reel Dimensions
A.5.4 Dry Pack Requirement for Moisture Sensitive Material
Moisture sensitive material, as classified by JEDEC standard J-STD-033, must be dry packed. The 40 lead QFN
package is MSL2A/260°
C, and is dried before sealing in a moisture barrier bag (MBB) with desiccant bag weighing at
67.5 grams of activated clay and a humidity indicator card (HIC) meeting MIL-L-8835 specification. The MBB has a
moisture-sensitivity caution label to indicate the moisture-sensitive classification of the enclosed devices.© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production 83
Appendix B Development Support
B.1 Crystal Oscillators
This Section covers some of the general background to crystal oscillators, to help the user make informed decisions
concerning the choice of crystal and the associated capacitors.
B.1.1 Crystal Equivalent Circuit
Cs
Lm Rm Cm
C1 C2
Where Cm is the motional capacitance
Lm is the motional inductance. This together with Cm defines the oscillation frequency (series)
Rm is the equivalent series resistance ( ESR ).
CS is the shunt or package capacitance and this is a parasitic
B.1.2 Crystal Load Capacitance
The crystal load capacitance is the total capacitance seen at the crystal pins, from all sources. As the load
capacitance (CL) affects the oscillation frequency by a process known as ‘pulling’, crystal manufacturers specify the
frequency for a given load capacitance only. A typical pulling coefficient is 15ppm/pF, to put this into context the
maximum frequency error in the IEEE802.15.4 specification is +/-40ppm for the transmitted signal. Therefore, it is
important for resonance at 32MHz exactly, that the specified load capacitance is provided.
The load capacitance can be calculated using:
CL =
1 2
1 2
T T
T T
C C
C C
+
×
Total capacitance CT1 = C1 + C1P + C1in
Where C1 is the capacitor component
C1P is the PCB parasitic capacitance. With the recommended layout this is about 1.6pF
C1in is the on-chip parasitic capacitance and is about 1.4pF typically.
Similarly for CT 2
Hence for a 9pF load capacitance, and a tight layout the external capacitors should be 15pF84 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
B.1.3 Crystal ESR and Required Transconductance
The resistor in the crystal equivalent circuit represents the energy lost. To maintain oscillation, power must be
supplied by the amplifier, but how much? Firstly, the Pi connected capacitors C1 and C2 with CS from the crystal,
apply an impedance transformation to Rm, when viewed from the amplifier. This new value is given by:
2
ˆ
+ = L
S L m m
C
C C R R
The amplifier is a transconductance amplifier, which takes a voltage and produces an output current. The amplifier
together with the capacitors C1 and C2, form a circuit, which provides a negative resistance, when viewed from the
crystal. The value of which is given by:
2
1× 2 ×ω = T T
m
NEG
C C
g R
Where gm is the transconductance
ω is the frequency in rad/s
Derivations of these formulas can be easily found in textbooks.
In order to give quick and reliable oscillator start-up, a common rule of thumb is to set the amplifier negative
resistance to be a minimum of 4 times the effective crystal resistance. This gives
2
T1× T 2 ×ω
m
C C
g ≥
2
4
+
L
S L m
C
C C R
This can be used to give an equation for the required transconductance.
1 2
2 1 2 1 2 2 4 [ ( ) ]
T T
m S T T T T m C C
R C C C C C
g ×
× + + × ≥ ω
Example: Using typical 32MHz crystal parameters of Rm =40Ω, CS =1pF and CT1 =CT 2 =18pF ( for a load
capacitance of 9pF), the equation above gives the required transconductance ( gm ) as 2.59mA/V. The JN516x has a
typical value for transconductance of 4.4mA/V
The example and equation illustrate the trade-off that exists between the load capacitance and crystal ESR. For
example, a crystal with a higher load capacitance can be used, but the value of max. ESR that can be tolerated is
reduced. Also note, that the circuit sensitivity to external capacitance [ C1 , C2 ] is a square law.
Meeting the criteria for start-up is only one aspect of the way these parameters affect performance, they also affect
the time taken during start-up to reach a given, (or full), amplitude. Unfortunately, there is no simple mathematical
model for this, but the trend is the same. Therefore, both a larger load capacitance and larger crystal ESR will give a
longer start-up time, which has the disadvantages of reduced battery life and increased latency. © NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production 85
B.2 32MHz Oscillator
The JN516x contains the necessary on-chip components to build a 32 MHz reference oscillator with the addition of an
external crystal resonator, two tuning capacitors. The schematic of these components are shown in Figure 52. The
two capacitors, C1 and C2, will typically be 15pF ±5% and use a COG dielectric. For a detailed specification of the
crystal required and factors affecting C1 and C2 see Appendix B.1. As with all crystal oscillators the PCB layout is
especially important, both to keep parasitic capacitors to a minimum and to reduce the possibility of PCB noise being
coupled into the oscillator.
XTALOUT
C1 C2
XTALIN R1
JN516x
Figure 52: Crystal Oscillator Connections
The clock generated by this oscillator provides the reference for most of the JN516x subsystems, including the
transceiver, processor, memory and digital and analogue peripherals.
32MHz Crystal Requirements
Parameter Min Typ Max Notes
Crystal Frequency 32MHz
Crystal Tolerance 40ppm Including temperature
and ageing
Crystal ESR Range (Rm) 10Ω 60Ω See below for more
details
Crystal Load Capacitance
Range (CL) 6pF 9pF 12pF See below for more
details
Not all Combinations of Crystal Load Capacitance and ESR are Valid
Recommended Crystal Load Capacitance 9pF and max ESR 40 Ω
External Capacitors (C1 & C2)
For recommended Crystal
15pF CL = 9pF, total external
capacitance needs to be
2*CL. , allowing for stray
capacitance from chip,
package and PCB 86 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
As is stated above, not all combinations of crystal load capacitance and ESR are valid, and as explained in Appendix
B.1.3 there is a trade-off that exists between the load capacitance and crystal ESR to achieve reliable performance.
For this reason, we recommend that for a 9pF load capacitance crystals be specified with a maximum ESR of 40
ohms. For lower load capacitances the recommended maximum ESR rises, for example, CL=7pF the max ESR is 61
ohms. For the lower cost crystals in the large HC49 package, a load capacitance of 9 or 10pF is widely available and
the max ESR of 30 ohms specified by many manufacturers is acceptable. Also available in this package style, are
crystals with a load capacitance of 12pF, but in this case the max ESR required is 25 ohms or better.
Below is measurement data showing the variation of the crystal oscillator amplifier transconductance with
temperature and supply voltage, notice how small the variation is. Circuit techniques have been used to apply
compensation, such that the user need only design for nominal conditions.
4.15
4.20
4.25
4.30
4.35
-40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
Transconductance (mA/V)
Temperature (C)
32MHz Crystal Oscillator
4.27
4.28
4.29
4.3
4.31
4.32
4.33
4.34
4.35
2 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3 3.2 3.4 3.6
Transconductance (mA/V)
Supply Voltage (VDD)
32MHz Crystal Oscillator © NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production 87
B.3 32kHz Oscillator
In order to obtain more accurate sleep periods, the JN516x contains the necessary on-chip components to build an
optional 32kHz oscillator with the addition of an external 32.768kHz crystal and two tuning capacitors. The crystal
should be connected between XTAL32K_IN and XTAL32K_OUT (DIO9 and DIO10), with two equal capacitors to
ground, one on each pin. The schematic of these components are shown in Figure 53. The two capacitors, C1 and
C2, will typically be in the range 10 to 22pF ±5% and use a COG dielectric. As with all crystal oscillators the PCB
layout is especially important, both to keep parasitic capacitors to a minimum and to reduce the possibility of PCB
noise being coupled into the oscillator.
32KXTALIN 32KXTALOUT
JN516x
Figure 53: 32kHz Crystal Oscillator Connections
The electrical specification of the oscillator can be found in 19.3.10. The oscillator cell is flexible and can operate with
a range of commonly available 32kHz crystals with load capacitances from 6 to 12.5p, and ESR up to 80KΩ. It
achieves this by using automatic gain control (AGC), which senses the signal swing. As explained in Appendix B.1.3
there is a trade-off that exists between the load capacitance and crystal ESR to achieve reliable performance. The
use of an AGC function allows a wider range of crystal load capacitors and ESR’s to be accommodated than would
otherwise be possible. However, this benefit does mean the supply current varies with the supply voltage (VDD),
value of the total capacitance at each pin, and the crystal ESR. This is described in the table and graphs below.
32kHz Crystal Requirements
Parameter Min Typ Max Notes
Crystal Frequency 32kHz
Supply Current 1.4µA Vdd=3v, temp=25 C, load
cap =9pF, Rm=25K
Supply Current Temp. Coeff. 0.1%/C Vdd=3v
Crystal ESR Range (Rm) 10KΩ 25KΩ 80KΩ See below for more details
Crystal Load Capacitance
Range (CL)
6pF 9pF 12.5pF See below for more details
Not all Combinations of Crystal Load Capacitance and ESR are Valid 88 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
Three examples of typical crystals are given, each with the value of external capacitors to use, plus the likely supply
current and start-up time that can be expected. Also given is the maximum recommended ESR based on the start-up
criteria given in Appendix B.1.3. The values of the external capacitors can be calculated using the equation in
Appendix B.1.2 .
Load Capacitance Ext Capacitors Current Start-up Time Max ESR
9pF 15pF 1.4µA 0.5sec 70KΩ
6pF 9pF 1.1µA 0.4sec 80KΩ
12.5pF 22pF 2.2µA 1.0sec 35KΩ
Below is measurement data showing the variation of the crystal oscillator supply current with voltage and with crystal
ESR, for two load capacitances.
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
2 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3 3.2 3.4 3.6
Current (uA)
Supply Voltage (VDD)
32kHz Crystal Oscillator
0.6
0.8
1
1.2
1.4
1.6
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Normalised Current (IDD)
Crystal ESR (K ohm)
32KHz Crystal Oscillator Current
9pF
12.5pF© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production 89
B.4 JN516x Module Reference Designs
For customers wishing to integrate the JN516x device directly into their system, NXP provide a range of Module
Reference Designs, covering standard, medium and high-power modules fitted with different Antennae
To ensure the correct performance, it is strongly recommended that where possible the design details provided by the
reference designs, are used in their exact form for all end designs, this includes component values, pad dimensions,
track layouts etc. In order to minimise all risks, it is recommended that the entire layout of the appropriate reference
module, if possible, be replicated in the end design.
For full details, see [5]. Please contact technical support.
B.4.1 Schematic Diagram
A schematic diagram of the JN516x PCB antenna reference module is shown in figure 53. Details of component
values and PCB layout constraints can be found in Table 12.
1
40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31
VSSA
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
COMP1P
COMP1M
RESETN
XTAL_OUT
XTAL_IN
VB_SYNTH
VCOTUNE (NC)
VB_VCO
VDD1
IBIAS
VREF
VB_RF2
RF_IN
VB_RF
ADC1
SPISEL1
SPISEL2
DIO2
DIO3
DO0
VSS1
DO1
DIO18
DIO19
VB_RAM
CTS0
RTS0
TXD0
RXD0
VDD2
SIF_D
VSS2
SIF_CLK
DIO13
DIO12
VB_DIG
DIO11
TIM0OUT
TIM0CAP
TIM0CK_GT
C7: 100nF
2-wire Serial Port Timer0
C16: 100nF UART0/JTAG
C6: 100nF
SPI Select
Analogue IO
C1: 47pF C3: 100nF L1: 5.1nH
L2: 3.9nH
VB_RF
R1: 43kΩ
To coaxial socket
or integrated antenna
C20: 100nF
C13: 10µF C14: 100nF
VDD
C2: 10nF
C15: 100nF
C10: 15pF
C11: 15pF
Y1
Analogue IO
C4: 47pF
Figure 54 JN516x PCB Antenna Module Reference Design 90 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
Component
Designator Value/Type Function PCB Layout Constraints
C13 10µF Power source decoupling
C14 100nF Analogue Power decoupling Adjacent to U1 pin 9
C16 100nF Digital power decoupling Adjacent to U1 pin 30
C15 100nF VB Synth decoupling Less than 5mm from U1 pin 6
C2 10nF VB VCO decoupling Less than 5mm from U1 pin 8
C3 100nF VB RF decoupling Less than 5mm from U1 pin 12 and U1 pin 14
C4 47pF VB RF decoupling Less than 5mm from U1 pin 12 and U1 pin 14
C6 100nF VB RAM decoupling Less than 5mm from U1 pin 25
C7 100nF VB Dig decoupling Less than 5mm from U1 pin 35
R1 43k Current Bias Resistor Less than 5mm from U1 pin 10
C20 100nF Vref decoupling (optional) Less than 5mm from U1 pin 11
Y1 32MHz Crystal (AEL X32M000000S039 or Epson Toyocom X1E000021016700)
(CL = 9pF, Max ESR 40R)
C10 15pF +/-5% COG Crystal Load Capacitor Adjacent to pin 4 and Y1 pin 1
C11 15pF +/-5% COG Crystal Load Capacitor Adjacent to pin 5 and Y1 pin 3
C1 47pF AC Coupling
Phycomp 2238-869-15479
Must be copied directly from the reference design.
L1 5.1nH RF Matching Inductor
MuRata LQP15MN5N1B02
L2 3.9nH Load Inductor
MuRata LQP15MN3N9B02
Table 12: JN516x Printed Antenna Reference Module Components and PCB Layout Constraints
Note1: For extended temperature operation please contact technical support.
The paddle should be connected directly to ground. Any pads that require connection to ground should do so by
connecting directly to the paddle.© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production 91
B.4.2 PCB Design and Reflow Profile
PCB and land pattern designs are key to the reliability of any electronic circuit design.
The Institute for Interconnecting and Packaging Electronic Circuits (IPC) defines a number of standards for electronic
devices. One of these is the "Surface Mount Design and Land Pattern Standard" IPC-SM-782 [3], commonly referred
to as “IPC782". This specification defines the physical packaging characteristics and land patterns for a range of
surface mounted devices. IPC782 is also a useful reference document for general surface mount design techniques,
containing sections on design requirements, reliability and testability. NXP strongly recommends that this be referred
to when designing the PCB.
NXP also provide application note AN10366, “HVQFN application information” [6], which describes the reflow
soldering process. The suggested reflow profile, from that application note, is shown in Figure 55. The specific paste
manufacturers guidelines on peak flow temperature, soak times, time above liquids and ramp rates should also be
referenced.
Figure 55: Recommended Reflow Profile for Lead-free Solder Paste (SNAgCu) or PPF Lead Frame
B.4.3 Moisture Sensitivity Level (MSL)
If there is moisture trapped inside a package, and the package is exposed to a reflow temperature profile, the
moisture may turn into steam, which expands rapidly. This may cause damage to the inside of the package
(delamination), and it may result in a cracked semiconductor package body (the popcorn effect). A package’s MSL
depends on the package characteristics and on the temperature it is exposed to during reflow soldering. This is
explained in more detail in [7].
Depending on the damage after this test, an MSL of 1 (not sensitive to moisture) to 6 (very sensitive to moisture) is
attached to the semiconductor package.92 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
Related Documents
[1] IEEE Std 802.15.4-2006 IEEE Standard for Information Technology – Part 15.4 Wireless Medium Access Control
(MAC) and Physical Layer (PHY) Specifications for Low-Rate Wireless Personal Area Networks (LR-WPANs).
[2] JN-AN-1186 JN516x Temperature Dependent Operating Guidelines
[3] IPC-SM-782 Surface Mount Design and Land Pattern Standard
[4] JN-UG-3087 JN516x Integrated Peripherals API User Guide
[5] JN-RD-6038 Module Reference Design
[6] http://ics.nxp.com/support/documents/logic/pdf/an10366.pdf
[7] http://www.nxp.com/documents/application_note/AN10365.pdf
[8] JN-AN-1003 Boot Loader Operation
[9] JN-UG-3007 Flash Programmer User Guide
[10] JN-UG-3068 Time-of-flight API User Guide
[11] JN-AN-1143 Time-of-flight
[12] JN-UG-3075-JenOS User Guide
RoHS Compliance
JN516x devices meet the requirements of Directive 2002/95/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council on
the Restriction of Hazardous Substance (RoHS) and of the China RoHS (SJ/T11363 – 2006) requirements which
came into force on 1st March 2007.
Status Information
The status of this Data Sheet is. Production
NXP Low Power RF products progress according to the following format:
Advance
The Data Sheet shows the specification of a product in planning or in development.
The functionality and electrical performance specifications are target values of the design and may be used as a
guide to the final specification.
NXP reserves the right to make changes to the product specification at anytime without notice.
Preliminary
The Data Sheet shows the specification of a product that is commercially available, but is not yet fully qualified.
The functionality of the product is final. The electrical performance specifications are target values and may used as a
guide to the final specification.
NXP reserves the right to make changes to the product specification at anytime without notice.
Production
This is the production Data Sheet for the product.
All functional and electrical performance specifications, where included, including min and max values are derived
from detailed product characterization. This Data Sheet supersedes all previous document versions.
NXP reserves the right to make changes to the product specification at anytime without notice.© NXP Laboratories UK 2013 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production 93
Disclaimers
Limited warranty and liability — Information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, NXP Semiconductors does not give
any representations or warranties, expressed or implied, as to the accuracy or completeness of such information and shall have no liability for the
consequences of use of such information. NXP Semiconductors takes no responsibility for the content in this document if provided by an information
source outside of NXP Semiconductors.
In no event shall NXP Semiconductors be liable for any indirect, incidental, punitive, special or consequential damages (including - without limitation -
lost profits, lost savings, business interruption, costs related to the removal or replacement of any products or rework charges) whether or not such
damages are based on tort (including negligence), warranty, breach of contract or any other legal theory.
Notwithstanding any damages that customer might incur for any reason whatsoever, NXP Semiconductors’ aggregate and cumulative liability towards
customer for the products described herein shall be limited in accordance with the Terms and conditions of commercial sale of NXP Semiconductors.
Right to make changes — NXP Semiconductors reserves the right to make changes to information published in this document, including without
limitation specifications and product descriptions, at any time and without notice. This document supersedes and replaces all information supplied prior
to the publication hereof.
Suitability for use — NXP Semiconductors products are not designed, authorized or warranted to be suitable for use in life support, life-critical or
safety-critical systems or equipment, nor in applications where failure or malfunction of an NXP Semiconductors product can reasonably be expected to
result in personal injury, death or severe property or environmental damage. NXP Semiconductors and its suppliers accept no liability for inclusion
and/or use of NXP Semiconductors products in such equipment or applications and therefore such inclusion and/or use is at the customer’s own risk.
Applications — Applications that are described herein for any of these products are for illustrative purposes only. NXP Semiconductors makes no
representation or warranty that such applications will be suitable for the specified use without further testing or modification.
Customers are responsible for the design and operation of their applications and products using NXP Semiconductors products, and NXP
Semiconductors accepts no liability for any assistance with applications or customer product design. It is customer’s sole responsibility to determine
whether the NXP Semiconductors product is suitable and fit for the customer’s applications and products planned, as well as for the planned
application and use of customer’s third party customer(s). Customers should provide appropriate design and operating safeguards to minimize the risks
associated with their applications and products.
NXP Semiconductors does not accept any liability related to any default, damage, costs or problem which is based on any weakness or default in the
customer’s applications or products, or the application or use by customer’s third party customer(s). Customer is responsible for doing all necessary
testing for the customer’s applications and products using NXP Semiconductors products in order to avoid a default of the applications and the
products or of the application or use by customer’s third party customer(s). NXP does not accept any liability in this respect.
Export control — This document as well as the item(s) described herein may be subject to export control regulations. Export might require a prior
authorization from competent authorities.
Limiting values — Stress above one or more limiting values (as defined in the Absolute Maximum Ratings System of IEC 60134) will cause
permanent damage to the device. Limiting values are stress ratings only and (proper) operation of the device at these or any other conditions above
those given in the Operating Conditions section or the Electrical Characteristics sections of this document is not warranted. Constant or repeated
exposure to limiting values will permanently and irreversibly affect the quality and reliability of the device.
AEC unqualified products — This product has not been qualified to the appropriate Automotive Electronics Council (AEC) standard Q100 or Q101
and should not be used in automotive applications, including but not limited to applications where failure or malfunction of an NXP Semiconductors
product can reasonably be expected to result in personal injury, death or severe property or environmental damage. NXP Semiconductors accepts no
liability for inclusion and/or use of NXP Semiconductors products in such equipment or applications and therefore such inclusion and/or use is for the
customer’s own risk.
Product specification — The information and data provided in a Product data sheet shall define the specification of the product as agreed between
NXP Semiconductors and its customer, unless NXP Semiconductors and customer have explicitly agreed otherwise in writing. In no event however,
shall an agreement be valid in which the NXP Semiconductors product is deemed to offer functions and qualities beyond those described in the
Product data sheet
All products are sold subject to NXP Semiconductors’ terms and conditions of sale, supplied at the time of order acknowledgment and published at
http://www.nxp.com/profile/terms.
Trademarks
All trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
“JenNet” and “JenNet-IP” are trademarks of NXP B.V..
Version Control
Version Notes
1.0 07-01-13 First public version, released as Production
1.1 14-01-13 Minor corrections made
1.2 25-04-13 Additional features included and more information on non-volatile memory
1.3 12-06-13 Minor correction to front page and format of PCB decal diagram94 JN-DS-JN516x v1.3 Production © NXP Laboratories UK 2013
Contact Details
NXP Laboratories UK Ltd
Furnival Street
Sheffield
S1 4QT
United Kingdom
Tel: +44 (0)114 281 2655
Fax: +44 (0) 114 281 2951
For the contact details of your local NXP office or distributor, refer to the NXP web site:
www.nxp.com
1. General description
The LPC178x/7x is an ARM Cortex-M3 based microcontroller for embedded applications
requiring a high level of integration and low power dissipation.
The ARM Cortex-M3 is a next generation core that offers better performance than the
ARM7 at the same clock rate and other system enhancements such as modernized
debug features and a higher level of support block integration. The ARM Cortex-M3 CPU
incorporates a 3-stage pipeline and has a Harvard architecture with separate local
instruction and data buses, as well as a third bus with slightly lower performance for
peripherals. The ARM Cortex-M3 CPU also includes an internal prefetch unit that
supports speculative branches.
The LPC178x/7x adds a specialized flash memory accelerator to accomplish optimal
performance when executing code from flash. The LPC178x/7x operates at up to
120 MHz CPU frequency.
The peripheral complement of the LPC178x/7x includes up to 512 kB of flash program
memory, up to 96 kB of SRAM data memory, up to 4032 byte of EEPROM data memory,
External Memory Controller (EMC), LCD (LPC178x only), Ethernet, USB
Device/Host/OTG, a General Purpose DMA controller, five UARTs, three SSP controllers,
three I2C-bus interfaces, a Quadrature Encoder Interface, four general purpose timers,
two general purpose PWMs with six outputs each and one motor control PWM, an
ultra-low power RTC with separate battery supply and event recorder, a windowed
watchdog timer, a CRC calculation engine, up to 165 general purpose I/O pins, and more.
The analog peripherals include one eight-channel 12-bit ADC and a 10-bit DAC.
The pinout of LPC178x/7x is intended to allow pin function compatibility with the LPC24xx
and LPC23xx.
For additional documentation, see Section 18 “References”.
2. Features and benefits
Functional replacement for the LPC23xx and LPC24xx family devices.
System:
ARM Cortex-M3 processor, running at frequencies of up to 120 MHz. A Memory
Protection Unit (MPU) supporting eight regions is included.
ARM Cortex-M3 built-in Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC).
LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller; up to 512 kB flash and
96 kB SRAM; USB Device/Host/OTG; Ethernet; LCD; EMC
Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 Product data sheetLPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 2 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
Multilayer AHB matrix interconnect provides a separate bus for each AHB master.
AHB masters include the CPU, USB, Ethernet, and the General Purpose DMA
controller. This interconnect provides communication with no arbitration delays
unless two masters attempt to access the same slave at the same time.
Split APB bus allows for higher throughput with fewer stalls between the CPU and
DMA. A single level of write buffering allows the CPU to continue without waiting for
completion of APB writes if the APB was not already busy.
Cortex-M3 system tick timer, including an external clock input option.
Standard JTAG test/debug interface as well as Serial Wire Debug and Serial
WireTrace Port options.
Embedded Trace Macrocell (ETM) module supports real-time trace.
Boundary scan for simplified board testing.
Non-maskable Interrupt (NMI) input.
Memory:
Up to 512 kB on-chip flash program memory with In-System Programming (ISP)
and In-Application Programming (IAP) capabilities. The combination of an
enhanced flash memory accelerator and location of the flash memory on the CPU
local code/data bus provides high code performance from flash.
Up to 96 kB on-chip SRAM includes:
64 kB of main SRAM on the CPU with local code/data bus for high-performance
CPU access.
Two 16 kB peripheral SRAM blocks with separate access paths for higher
throughput. These SRAM blocks may be used for DMA memory as well as for
general purpose instruction and data storage.
Up to 4032 byte on-chip EEPROM.
LCD controller, supporting both Super-Twisted Nematic (STN) and Thin-Film
Transistors (TFT) displays.
Dedicated DMA controller.
Selectable display resolution (up to 1024 768 pixels).
Supports up to 24-bit true-color mode.
External Memory Controller (EMC) provides support for asynchronous static memory
devices such as RAM, ROM and flash, as well as dynamic memories such as single
data rate SDRAM with an SDRAM clock of up to 80 MHz.
Eight channel General Purpose DMA controller (GPDMA) on the AHB multilayer
matrix that can be used with the SSP, I2S, UART, CRC engine, Analog-to-Digital and
Digital-to-Analog converter peripherals, timer match signals, GPIO, and for
memory-to-memory transfers.
Serial interfaces:
Ethernet MAC with MII/RMII interface and associated DMA controller. These
functions reside on an independent AHB.
USB 2.0 full-speed dual-port device/host/OTG controller with on-chip PHY and
associated DMA controller.
Five UARTs with fractional baud rate generation, internal FIFO, DMA support, and
RS-485/EIA-485 support. One UART (UART1) has full modem control I/O, and one
UART (USART4) supports IrDA, synchronous mode, and a smart card mode
conforming to ISO7816-3.
Three SSP controllers with FIFO and multi-protocol capabilities. The SSP
controllers can be used with the GPDMA.LPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 3 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
Three enhanced I2C-bus interfaces, one with a true open-drain output supporting
the full I2C-bus specification and Fast-mode Plus with data rates of 1 Mbit/s, two
with standard port pins. Enhancements include multiple address recognition and
monitor mode.
I
2S-bus (Inter-IC Sound) interface for digital audio input or output. It can be used
with the GPDMA.
CAN controller with two channels.
Digital peripherals:
SD/MMC memory card interface.
Up to 165 General Purpose I/O (GPIO) pins depending on the packaging with
configurable pull-up/down resistors, open-drain mode, and repeater mode. All
GPIOs are located on an AHB bus for fast access and support Cortex-M3
bit-banding. GPIOs can be accessed by the General Purpose DMA Controller. Any
pin of ports 0 and 2 can be used to generate an interrupt.
Two external interrupt inputs configurable as edge/level sensitive. All pins on port 0
and port 2 can be used as edge sensitive interrupt sources.
Four general purpose timers/counters with a total of eight capture inputs and ten
compare outputs. Each timer block has an external count input. Specific timer
events can be selected to generate DMA requests.
Quadrature encoder interface that can monitor one external quadrature encoder.
Two standard PWM/timer blocks with external count input option.
One motor control PWM with support for three-phase motor control.
Real-Time Clock (RTC) with a separate power domain. The RTC is clocked by a
dedicated RTC oscillator. The RTC block includes 20 bytes of battery-powered
backup registers, allowing system status to be stored when the rest of the chip is
powered off. Battery power can be supplied from a standard 3 V lithium button cell.
The RTC will continue working when the battery voltage drops to as low as 2.1 V.
An RTC interrupt can wake up the CPU from any reduced power mode.
Event Recorder that can capture the clock value when an event occurs on any of
three inputs. The event identification and the time it occurred are stored in
registers. The Event Recorder is located in the RTC power domain and can
therefore operate as long as there is RTC power.
Windowed Watchdog Timer (WWDT). Windowed operation, dedicated internal
oscillator, watchdog warning interrupt, and safety features.
CRC Engine block can calculate a CRC on supplied data using one of three
standard polynomials. The CRC engine can be used in conjunction with the DMA
controller to generate a CRC without CPU involvement in the data transfer.
Analog peripherals:
12-bit Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) with input multiplexing among eight pins,
conversion rates up to 400 kHz, and multiple result registers. The 12-bit ADC can
be used with the GPDMA controller.
10-bit Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) with dedicated conversion timer and
GPDMA support.
Power control:
Four reduced power modes: Sleep, Deep-sleep, Power-down, and Deep
power-down.LPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 4 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
The Wake-up Interrupt Controller (WIC) allows the CPU to automatically wake up
from any priority interrupt that can occur while the clocks are stopped in
Deep-sleep, Power-down, and Deep power-down modes.
Processor wake-up from Power-down mode via any interrupt able to operate
during Power-down mode (includes external interrupts, RTC interrupt, PORT0/2
pin interrupt, and NMI).
Brownout detect with separate threshold for interrupt and forced reset.
On-chip Power-On Reset (POR).
Clock generation:
Clock output function that can reflect the main oscillator clock, IRC clock, RTC
clock, CPU clock, USB clock, or the watchdog timer clock.
On-chip crystal oscillator with an operating range of 1 MHz to 25 MHz.
12 MHz Internal RC oscillator (IRC) trimmed to 1% accuracy that can optionally be
used as a system clock.
An on-chip PLL allows CPU operation up to the maximum CPU rate without the
need for a high-frequency crystal. May be run from the main oscillator or the
internal RC oscillator.
A second, dedicated PLL may be used for USB interface in order to allow added
flexibility for the Main PLL settings.
Versatile pin function selection feature allows many possibilities for using on-chip
peripheral functions.
Unique device serial number for identification purposes.
Single 3.3 V power supply (2.4 V to 3.6 V). Temperature range of 40 C to 85 C.
Available as LQFP208, TFBGA208, TFBGA180, and LQFP144 package.
3. Applications
Communications:
Point-of-sale terminals, web servers, multi-protocol bridges
Industrial/Medical:
Automation controllers, application control, robotics control, HVAC, PLC, inverters,
circuit breakers, medical scanning, security monitoring, motor drive, video intercom
Consumer/Appliance:
Audio, MP3 decoders, alarm systems, displays, printers, scanners, small
appliances, fitness equipment
Automotive:
After-market, car alarms, GPS/fleet monitorsLPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 5 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
4. Ordering information
Table 1. Ordering information
Type number Package
Name Description Version
LPC1788
LPC1788FBD208 LQFP208 plastic low profile quad flat package; 208 leads; body 28 28 1.4 mm SOT459-1
LPC1788FET208 TFBGA208 plastic thin fine-pitch ball grid array package; 208 balls; body
15 ´ 15 ´ 0.7 mm
SOT950-1
LPC1788FET180 TFBGA180 thin fine-pitch ball grid array package; 180 balls; body 12 ´ 12 ´ 0.8 mm SOT570-3
LPC1788FBD144 LQFP144 plastic low profile quad flat package; 144 leads; body 20 20 1.4 mm SOT486-1
LPC1787
LPC1787FBD208 LQFP208 plastic low profile quad flat package; 208 leads; body 28 28 1.4 mm SOT459-1
LPC1786
LPC1786FBD208 LQFP208 plastic low profile quad flat package; 208 leads; body 28 28 1.4 mm SOT459-1
LPC1785
LPC1785FBD208 LQFP208 plastic low profile quad flat package; 208 leads; body 28 28 1.4 mm SOT459-1
LPC1778
LPC1778FBD208 LQFP208 plastic low profile quad flat package; 208 leads; body 28 28 1.4 mm SOT459-1
LPC1778FET208 TFBGA208 plastic thin fine-pitch ball grid array package; 208 balls; body
15 ´ 15 ´ 0.7 mm
SOT950-1
LPC1778FET180 TFBGA180 thin fine-pitch ball grid array package; 180 balls; body 12 ´ 12 ´ 0.8 mm SOT570-3
LPC1778FBD144 LQFP144 plastic low profile quad flat package; 144 leads; body 20 20 1.4 mm SOT486-1
LPC1777
LPC1777FBD208 LQFP208 plastic low profile quad flat package; 208 leads; body 28 28 1.4 mm SOT459-1
LPC1776
LPC1776FBD208 LQFP208 plastic low profile quad flat package; 208 leads; body 28 28 1.4 mm SOT459-1
LPC1776FET180 TFBGA180 thin fine-pitch ball grid array package; 180 balls; body 12 ´ 12 ´ 0.8 mm SOT570-3
LPC1774
LPC1774FBD208 LQFP208 plastic low profile quad flat package; 208 leads; body 28 28 1.4 mm SOT459-1
LPC1774FBD144 LQFP144 plastic low profile quad flat package; 144 leads; body 20 20 1.4 mm SOT486-1LPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 6 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
[1] Maximum data bus width of the External Memory Controller (EMC) depends on package size. Smaller widths may be used.
[2] USART4 not available.
Table 2. LPC178x/7x ordering options
All parts include two CAN channels, three SSP interfaces, three I2C interfaces, one I2S interface, DAC, and an 8-channel
12-bit ADC.
Type number Flash
(kB)
Main
SRAM
(kB)
Peripheral
SRAM
(kB)
Total
SRAM
(kB)
EEPROM
(byte)
Ethernet USB UART EMC
bus
width
(bit)
[1]
LCD QEI SD/
MMC
LPC178x
LPC1788FBD208 512 64 16 2 96 4032 Y H/O/D 5 32 Y Y Y
LPC1788FET208 512 64 16 2 96 4032 Y H/O/D 5 32 Y Y Y
LPC1788FET180 512 64 16 2 96 4032 Y H/O/D 5 16 Y Y Y
LPC1788FBD144 512 64 16 2 96 4032 Y H/O/D 5 8 Y Y Y
LPC1787FBD208 512 64 16 2 96 4032 N H/O/D 5 32 Y Y Y
LPC1786FBD208 256 64 16 80 4032 Y H/O/D 5 32 Y Y Y
LPC1785FBD208 256 64 16 80 4032 N H/O/D 5 32 Y N Y
LPC177x
LPC1778FBD208 512 64 16 2 96 4032 Y H/O/D 5 32 N Y Y
LPC1778FET208 512 64 16 2 96 4032 Y H/O/D 5 32 N Y Y
LPC1778FET180 512 64 16 2 96 4032 Y H/O/D 5 16 N Y Y
LPC1778FBD144 512 64 16 2 96 4032 Y H/O/D 5 8 N Y Y
LPC1777FBD208 512 64 16 2 96 4032 N H/O/D 5 32 N Y Y
LPC1776FBD208 256 64 16 80 4032 Y H/O/D 5 32 N Y Y
LPC1776FET180 256 64 16 80 4032 Y H/O/D 5 16 N Y Y
LPC1774FBD208 128 32 8 40 2048 N D 5 32 N N N
LPC1774FBD144 128 32 8 40 2048 N D 4[2] 8 N N NLPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 7 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
5. Block diagram
(1) Not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Fig 1. Block diagram
SRAM
96/80/40 kB
ARM
CORTEX-M3
TEST/DEBUG
INTERFACE
EMULATION
TRACE MODULE
FLASH
ACCELERATOR
FLASH
512/256/128/64 kB
GPDMA
CONTROLLER
I-code
bus
D-code
bus
system
bus
AHB TO
APB
BRIDGE 0
HIGH-SPEED
GPIO AHB TO
APB
BRIDGE 1
4032 B/
2048 B
EEPROM
CLOCK
GENERATION,
POWER CONTROL,
SYSTEM
FUNCTIONS
clocks and
controls
JTAG
interface
debug
port
SSP0/2
USART4(1)
UART2/3
SYSTEM CONTROL
SSP1
UART0/1
I
2C0/1
CAN 0/1
TIMER 0/1
WINDOWED WDT
12-bit ADC
PWM0/1
PIN CONNECT
GPIO INTERRUPT CONTROL
RTC
BACKUP REGISTERS
EVENT RECORDER
32 kHz
OSCILLATOR
APB slave group 1
APB slave group 0
RTC POWER DOMAIN
LPC178x/7x
master
ETHERNET(1)
master
USB
DEVICE/
HOST(1)/OTG(1)
master
002aaf528
slave slave
CRC
slave slave slave
slave
EMC ROM
slave slave
LCD(1)
slave
MULTILAYER AHB MATRIX
I
2C2
TIMER2/3
DAC
I
2S
QUADRATURE ENCODER(1)
MOTOR CONTROL PWM
MPU
SD/MMC(1)
= connected to GPDMALPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 8 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
6. Pinning information
6.1 Pinning
Fig 2. Pin configuration (LQFP208)
Fig 3. Pin configuration (TFBGA208)
LPC178x/7xFBD208
156
53
104
208
157
105
1
52
002aaf518
002aaf529
LPC178x/7x
Transparent top view
ball A1
index area
U
T
R
P
N
M
K
H
L
J
G
F
E
D
C
A
B
2 4 6 8 10 12
13
14
15 17
16
1 3 5 7 9 11LPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 9 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
6.2 Pin description
I/O pins on the LPC178x/7x are 5 V tolerant and have input hysteresis unless otherwise
indicated in the table below. Crystal pins, power pins, and reference voltage pins are not
5 V tolerant. In addition, when pins are selected to be ADC inputs, they are no longer 5 V
tolerant and the input voltage must be limited to the voltage at the ADC positive reference
pin (VREFP).
All port pins Pn[m] are multiplexed, and the multiplexed functions appear in Table 3 in the
order defined by the FUNC bits of the corresponding IOCON register up to the highest
used function number. Each port pin can support up to eight multiplexed functions.
IOCON register FUNC values which are reserved are noted as ‘R’ in the pin configuration
table.
Fig 4. Pin configuration (TFBGA180)
Fig 5. Pin configuration (LQFP144)
002aaf519
LPC178x/7x
1 3 5 7 9 11 2 4 6 8 10 12 13 14
ball A1
index area
P
N
M
L
K
J
G
E
H
F
D
C
B
A
Transparent top view
LPC178x/7x
108
37
72
144
109
73
1
36
002aaf520LPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 10 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
Table 3. Pin description
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, DAC pins) and Table 7 (EMC
pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
Description
P0[0] to
P0[31]
I/O Port 0: Port 0 is a 32-bit I/O port with individual direction
controls for each bit. The operation of port 0 pins depends upon
the pin function selected via the pin connect block.
P0[0] 94 U15 M10 66 [3] I;
PU
I/O P0[0] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I CAN_RD1 — CAN1 receiver input.
O U3_TXD — Transmitter output for UART3.
I/O I2C1_SDA — I
2C1 data input/output (this pin does not use a
specialized I2C pad).
O U0_TXD — Transmitter output for UART0.
P0[1] 96 T14 N11 67 [3] I;
PU
I/O P0[1] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O CAN_TD1 — CAN1 transmitter output.
I U3_RXD — Receiver input for UART3.
I/O I2C1_SCL — I
2C1 clock input/output (this pin does not use a
specialized I2C pad).
I U0_RXD — Receiver input for UART0.
P0[2] 202 C4 D5 141 [3] I;
PU
I/O P0[2] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O U0_TXD — Transmitter output for UART0.
O U3_TXD — Transmitter output for UART3.
P0[3] 204 D6 A3 142 [3] I;
PU
I/O P0[3] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I U0_RXD — Receiver input for UART0.
I U3_RXD — Receiver input for UART3.
P0[4] 168 B12 A11 116 [3] I;
PU
I/O P0[4] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O I2S_RX_SCK — I
2S Receive clock. It is driven by the master
and received by the slave. Corresponds to the signal SCK in the
I
2S-bus specification.
I CAN_RD2 — CAN2 receiver input.
I T2_CAP0 — Capture input for Timer 2, channel 0.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_VD[0] — LCD data.LPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 11 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
P0[5] 166 C12 B11 115 [3] I;
PU
I/O P0[5] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O I2S_RX_WS — I
2S Receive word select. It is driven by the
master and received by the slave. Corresponds to the signal WS
in the I
2S-bus specification.
O CAN_TD2 — CAN2 transmitter output.
I T2_CAP1 — Capture input for Timer 2, channel 1.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_VD[1] — LCD data.
P0[6] 164 D13 D11 113 [3] I;
PU
I/O P0[6] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O I2S_RX_SDA — I
2S Receive data. It is driven by the transmitter
and read by the receiver. Corresponds to the signal SD in the
I
2S-bus specification.
I/O SSP1_SSEL — Slave Select for SSP1.
O T2_MAT0 — Match output for Timer 2, channel 0.
O U1_RTS — Request to Send output for UART1. Can also be
configured to be an RS-485/EIA-485 output enable signal for
UART1.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_VD[8] — LCD data.
P0[7] 162 C13 B12 112 [4] I; IA I/O P0[7] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O I2S_TX_SCK — I
2S transmit clock. It is driven by the master
and received by the slave. Corresponds to the signal SCK in the
I
2S-bus specification.
I/O SSP1_SCK — Serial Clock for SSP1.
O T2_MAT1 — Match output for Timer 2, channel 1.
I RTC_EV0 — Event input 0 to Event Monitor/Recorder.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_VD[9] — LCD data.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, DAC pins) and Table 7 (EMC
pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
DescriptionLPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 12 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
P0[8] 160 A15 C12 111 [4] I; IA I/O P0[8] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O I2S_TX_WS — I
2S Transmit word select. It is driven by the
master and received by the slave. Corresponds to the signal WS
in the I
2S-bus specification.
I/O SSP1_MISO — Master In Slave Out for SSP1.
O T2_MAT2 — Match output for Timer 2, channel 2.
I RTC_EV1 — Event input 1 to Event Monitor/Recorder.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_VD[16] — LCD data.
P0[9] 158 C14 A13 109 [4] I; IA I/O P0[9] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O I2S_TX_SDA — I
2S transmit data. It is driven by the transmitter
and read by the receiver. Corresponds to the signal SD in the
I
2S-bus specification.
I/O SSP1_MOSI — Master Out Slave In for SSP1.
O T2_MAT3 — Match output for Timer 2, channel 3.
I RTC_EV2 — Event input 2 to Event Monitor/Recorder.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_VD[17] — LCD data.
P0[10] 98 T15 L10 69 [3] I;
PU
I/O P0[10] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O U2_TXD — Transmitter output for UART2.
I/O I2C2_SDA — I
2C2 data input/output (this pin does not use a
specialized I2C pad).
O T3_MAT0 — Match output for Timer 3, channel 0.
P0[11] 100 R14 P12 70 [3] I;
PU
I/O P0[11] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I U2_RXD — Receiver input for UART2.
I/O I2C2_SCL — I
2C2 clock input/output (this pin does not use a
specialized I2C pad).
O T3_MAT1 — Match output for Timer 3, channel 1.
P0[12] 41 R1 J4 29 [5] I;
PU
I/O P0[12] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O USB_PPWR2 — Port Power enable signal for USB port 2.
I/O SSP1_MISO — Master In Slave Out for SSP1.
I ADC0_IN[6] — A/D converter 0, input 6. When configured as an
ADC input, the digital function of the pin must be disabled.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, DAC pins) and Table 7 (EMC
pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
DescriptionLPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 13 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
P0[13] 45 R2 J5 32 [5] I;
PU
I/O P0[13] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O USB_UP_LED2 — USB port 2 GoodLink LED indicator. It is
LOW when the device is configured (non-control endpoints
enabled), or when the host is enabled and has detected a
device on the bus. It is HIGH when the device is not configured,
or when host is enabled and has not detected a device on the
bus, or during global suspend. It transitions between LOW and
HIGH (flashes) when the host is enabled and detects activity on
the bus.
I/O SSP1_MOSI — Master Out Slave In for SSP1.
I ADC0_IN[7] — A/D converter 0, input 7. When configured as an
ADC input, the digital function of the pin must be disabled.
P0[14] 69 T7 M5 48 [3] I;
PU
I/O P0[14] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O USB_HSTEN2 — Host Enabled status for USB port 2.
I/O SSP1_SSEL — Slave Select for SSP1.
O USB_CONNECT2 — SoftConnect control for USB port 2.
Signal used to switch an external 1.5 k resistor under software
control. Used with the SoftConnect USB feature.
P0[15] 128 J16 H13 89 [3] I;
PU
I/O P0[15] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O U1_TXD — Transmitter output for UART1.
I/O SSP0_SCK — Serial clock for SSP0.
P0[16] 130 J14 H14 90 [3] I;
PU
I/O P0[16] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I U1_RXD — Receiver input for UART1.
I/O SSP0_SSEL — Slave Select for SSP0.
P0[17] 126 K17 J12 87 [3] I;
PU
I/O P0[17] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I U1_CTS — Clear to Send input for UART1.
I/O SSP0_MISO — Master In Slave Out for SSP0.
P0[18] 124 K15 J13 86 [3] I;
PU
I/O P0[18] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I U1_DCD — Data Carrier Detect input for UART1.
I/O SSP0_MOSI — Master Out Slave In for SSP0.
P0[19] 122 L17 J10 85 [3] I;
PU
I/O P0[19] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I U1_DSR — Data Set Ready input for UART1.
O SD_CLK — Clock output line for SD card interface.
I/O I2C1_SDA — I
2C1 data input/output (this pin does not use a
specialized I2C pad).
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, DAC pins) and Table 7 (EMC
pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
DescriptionLPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 14 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
P0[20] 120 M17 K14 83 [3] I;
PU
I/O P0[20] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O U1_DTR — Data Terminal Ready output for UART1. Can also
be configured to be an RS-485/EIA-485 output enable signal for
UART1.
I/O SD_CMD — Command line for SD card interface.
I/O I2C1_SCL — I
2C1 clock input/output (this pin does not use a
specialized I2C pad).
P0[21] 118 M16 K11 82 [3] I;
PU
I/O P0[21] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I U1_RI — Ring Indicator input for UART1.
O SD_PWR — Power Supply Enable for external SD card power
supply.
O U4_OE — RS-485/EIA-485 output enable signal for UART4.
I CAN_RD1 — CAN1 receiver input.
I/O U4_SCLK — USART 4 clock input or output in synchronous
mode.
P0[22] 116 N17 L14 80 [6] I;
PU
I/O P0[22] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O U1_RTS — Request to Send output for UART1. Can also be
configured to be an RS-485/EIA-485 output enable signal for
UART1.
I/O SD_DAT[0] — Data line 0 for SD card interface.
O U4_TXD — Transmitter output for USART4 (input/output in
smart card mode).
O CAN_TD1 — CAN1 transmitter output.
P0[23] 18 H1 F5 13 [5] I;
PU
I/O P0[23] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I ADC0_IN[0] — A/D converter 0, input 0. When configured as an
ADC input, the digital function of the pin must be disabled.
I/O I2S_RX_SCK — Receive Clock. It is driven by the master and
received by the slave. Corresponds to the signal SCK in the
I
2S-bus specification.
I T3_CAP0 — Capture input for Timer 3, channel 0.
P0[24] 16 G2 E1 11 [5] I;
PU
I/O P0[24] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I ADC0_IN[1] — A/D converter 0, input 1. When configured as an
ADC input, the digital function of the pin must be disabled.
I/O I2S_RX_WS — Receive Word Select. It is driven by the master
and received by the slave. Corresponds to the signal WS in the
I
2S-bus specification.
I T3_CAP1 — Capture input for Timer 3, channel 1.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, DAC pins) and Table 7 (EMC
pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
DescriptionLPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 15 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
P0[25] 14 F1 E4 10 [5] I;
PU
I/O P0[25] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I ADC0_IN[2] — A/D converter 0, input 2. When configured as an
ADC input, the digital function of the pin must be disabled.
I/O I2S_RX_SDA — Receive data. It is driven by the transmitter
and read by the receiver. Corresponds to the signal SD in the
I
2S-bus specification.
O U3_TXD — Transmitter output for UART3.
P0[26] 12 E1 D1 8 [7] I;
PU
I/O P0[26] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I ADC0_IN[3] — A/D converter 0, input 3. When configured as an
ADC input, the digital function of the pin must be disabled.
O DAC_OUT — D/A converter output. When configured as the
DAC output, the digital function of the pin must be disabled.
I U3_RXD — Receiver input for UART3.
P0[27] 50 T1 L3 35 [8] I I/O P0[27] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O I2C0_SDA — I
2C0 data input/output (this pin uses a specialized
I2C pad).
I/O USB_SDA1 — I2C serial data for communication with an
external USB transceiver.
P0[28] 48 R3 M1 34 [8] I I/O P0[28] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O I2C0_SCL — I
2C0 clock input/output (this pin uses a
specialized I2C pad).
I/O USB_SCL1 — I2C serial clock for communication with an
external USB transceiver.
P0[29] 61 U4 K5 42 [9] I I/O P0[29] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O USB_D+1 — USB port 1 bidirectional D+ line.
I EINT0 — External interrupt 0 input.
P0[30] 62 R6 N4 43 [9] I I/O P0[30] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O USB_D1 — USB port 1 bidirectional D line.
I EINT1 — External interrupt 1 input.
P0[31] 51 T2 N1 36 [9] I I/O P0[31] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O USB_D+2 — USB port 2 bidirectional D+ line.
P1[0] to
P1[31]
I/O Port 1: Port 1 is a 32 bit I/O port with individual direction
controls for each bit. The operation of port 1 pins depends upon
the pin function selected via the pin connect block
P1[0] 196 A3 B5 136 [3] I;
PU
I/O P1[0] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O ENET_TXD0 — Ethernet transmit data 0 (RMII/MII interface).
- R — Function reserved.
I T3_CAP1 — Capture input for Timer 3, channel 1.
I/O SSP2_SCK — Serial clock for SSP2.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, DAC pins) and Table 7 (EMC
pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
DescriptionLPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 16 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
P1[1] 194 B5 A5 135 [3] I;
PU
I/O P1[1] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O ENET_TXD1 — Ethernet transmit data 1 (RMII/MII interface).
- R — Function reserved.
O T3_MAT3 — Match output for Timer 3, channel 3.
I/O SSP2_MOSI — Master Out Slave In for SSP2.
P1[2] 185 D9 B7 - [3] I;
PU
I/O P1[2] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O ENET_TXD2 — Ethernet transmit data 2 (MII interface).
O SD_CLK — Clock output line for SD card interface.
O PWM0[1] — Pulse Width Modulator 0, output 1.
P1[3] 177 A10 A9 - [3] I;
PU
I/O P1[3] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O ENET_TXD3 — Ethernet transmit data 3 (MII interface).
I/O SD_CMD — Command line for SD card interface.
O PWM0[2] — Pulse Width Modulator 0, output 2.
P1[4] 192 A5 C6 133 [3] I;
PU
I/O P1[4] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O ENET_TX_EN — Ethernet transmit data enable (RMII/MII
interface).
- R — Function reserved.
O T3_MAT2 — Match output for Timer 3, channel 2.
I/O SSP2_MISO — Master In Slave Out for SSP2.
P1[5] 156 A17 B13 - [3] I;
PU
I/O P1[5] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O ENET_TX_ER — Ethernet Transmit Error (MII interface).
O SD_PWR — Power Supply Enable for external SD card power
supply.
O PWM0[3] — Pulse Width Modulator 0, output 3.
P1[6] 171 B11 B10 - [3] I;
PU
I/O P1[6] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I ENET_TX_CLK — Ethernet Transmit Clock (MII interface).
I/O SD_DAT[0] — Data line 0 for SD card interface.
O PWM0[4] — Pulse Width Modulator 0, output 4.
P1[7] 153 D14 C13 - [3] I;
PU
I/O P1[7] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I ENET_COL — Ethernet Collision detect (MII interface).
I/O SD_DAT[1] — Data line 1 for SD card interface.
O PWM0[5] — Pulse Width Modulator 0, output 5.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, DAC pins) and Table 7 (EMC
pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
DescriptionLPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 17 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
P1[8] 190 C7 B6 132 [3] I;
PU
I/O P1[8] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I ENET_CRS (ENET_CRS_DV) — Ethernet Carrier Sense (MII
interface) or Ethernet Carrier Sense/Data Valid (RMII interface).
- R — Function reserved.
O T3_MAT1 — Match output for Timer 3, channel 1.
I/O SSP2_SSEL — Slave Select for SSP2.
P1[9] 188 A6 D7 131 [3] I;
PU
I/O P1[9] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I ENET_RXD0 — Ethernet receive data 0 (RMII/MII interface).
- R — Function reserved.
O T3_MAT0 — Match output for Timer 3, channel 0.
P1[10] 186 C8 A7 129 [3] I;
PU
I/O P1[10] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I ENET_RXD1 — Ethernet receive data 1 (RMII/MII interface).
- R — Function reserved.
I T3_CAP0 — Capture input for Timer 3, channel 0.
P1[11] 163 A14 A12 - [3] I;
PU
I/O P1[11] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I ENET_RXD2 — Ethernet Receive Data 2 (MII interface).
I/O SD_DAT[2] — Data line 2 for SD card interface.
O PWM0[6] — Pulse Width Modulator 0, output 6.
P1[12] 157 A16 A14 - [3] I;
PU
I/O P1[12] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I ENET_RXD3 — Ethernet Receive Data (MII interface).
I/O SD_DAT[3] — Data line 3 for SD card interface.
I PWM0_CAP0 — Capture input for PWM0, channel 0.
P1[13] 147 D16 D14 - [3] I;
PU
I/O P1[13] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I ENET_RX_DV — Ethernet Receive Data Valid (MII interface).
P1[14] 184 A7 D8 128 [3] I;
PU
I/O P1[14] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I ENET_RX_ER — Ethernet receive error (RMII/MII interface).
- R — Function reserved.
I T2_CAP0 — Capture input for Timer 2, channel 0.
P1[15] 182 A8 A8 126 [3] I;
PU
I/O P1[15] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I ENET_RX_CLK (ENET_REF_CLK) — Ethernet Receive Clock
(MII interface) or Ethernet Reference Clock (RMII interface).
- R — Function reserved.
I/O I2C2_SDA — I
2C2 data input/output (this pin does not use a
specialized I2C pad).
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, DAC pins) and Table 7 (EMC
pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
DescriptionLPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 18 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
P1[16] 180 D10 B8 125 [3] I;
PU
I/O P1[16] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O ENET_MDC — Ethernet MIIM clock.
O I2S_TX_MCLK — I2S transmit master clock.
P1[17] 178 A9 C9 123 [3] I;
PU
I/O P1[17] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O ENET_MDIO — Ethernet MIIM data input and output.
O I2S_RX_MCLK — I2S receive master clock.
P1[18] 66 P7 L5 46 [3] I;
PU
I/O P1[18] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O USB_UP_LED1 — It is LOW when the device is configured
(non-control endpoints enabled), or when the host is enabled
and has detected a device on the bus. It is HIGH when the
device is not configured, or when host is enabled and has not
detected a device on the bus, or during global suspend. It
transitions between LOW and HIGH (flashes) when the host is
enabled and detects activity on the bus.
O PWM1[1] — Pulse Width Modulator 1, channel 1 output.
I T1_CAP0 — Capture input for Timer 1, channel 0.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SSP1_MISO — Master In Slave Out for SSP1.
P1[19] 68 U6 P5 47 [3] I;
PU
I/O P1[19] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O USB_TX_E1 — Transmit Enable signal for USB port 1 (OTG
transceiver).
O USB_PPWR1 — Port Power enable signal for USB port 1.
I T1_CAP1 — Capture input for Timer 1, channel 1.
O MC_0A — Motor control PWM channel 0, output A.
I/O SSP1_SCK — Serial clock for SSP1.
O U2_OE — RS-485/EIA-485 output enable signal for UART2.
P1[20] 70 U7 K6 49 [3] I;
PU
I/O P1[20] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O USB_TX_DP1 — D+ transmit data for USB port 1 (OTG
transceiver).
O PWM1[2] — Pulse Width Modulator 1, channel 2 output.
I QEI_PHA — Quadrature Encoder Interface PHA input.
I MC_FB0 — Motor control PWM channel 0 feedback input.
I/O SSP0_SCK — Serial clock for SSP0.
O LCD_VD[6] — LCD data.
O LCD_VD[10] — LCD data.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, DAC pins) and Table 7 (EMC
pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
DescriptionLPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 19 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
P1[21] 72 R8 N6 50 [3] I;
PU
I/O P1[21] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O USB_TX_DM1 — D transmit data for USB port 1 (OTG
transceiver).
O PWM1[3] — Pulse Width Modulator 1, channel 3 output.
I/O SSP0_SSEL — Slave Select for SSP0.
I MC_ABORT — Motor control PWM, active low fast abort.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_VD[7] — LCD data.
O LCD_VD[11] — LCD data.
P1[22] 74 U8 M6 51 [3] I;
PU
I/O P1[22] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I USB_RCV1 — Differential receive data for USB port 1 (OTG
transceiver).
I USB_PWRD1 — Power Status for USB port 1 (host power
switch).
O T1_MAT0 — Match output for Timer 1, channel 0.
O MC_0B — Motor control PWM channel 0, output B.
I/O SSP1_MOSI — Master Out Slave In for SSP1.
O LCD_VD[8] — LCD data.
O LCD_VD[12] — LCD data.
P1[23] 76 P9 N7 53 [3] I;
PU
I/O P1[23] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I USB_RX_DP1 — D+ receive data for USB port 1 (OTG
transceiver).
O PWM1[4] — Pulse Width Modulator 1, channel 4 output.
I QEI_PHB — Quadrature Encoder Interface PHB input.
I MC_FB1 — Motor control PWM channel 1 feedback input.
I/O SSP0_MISO — Master In Slave Out for SSP0.
O LCD_VD[9] — LCD data.
O LCD_VD[13] — LCD data.
P1[24] 78 T9 P7 54 [3] I;
PU
I/O P1[24] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I USB_RX_DM1 — D receive data for USB port 1 (OTG
transceiver).
O PWM1[5] — Pulse Width Modulator 1, channel 5 output.
I QEI_IDX — Quadrature Encoder Interface INDEX input.
I MC_FB2 — Motor control PWM channel 2 feedback input.
I/O SSP0_MOSI — Master Out Slave in for SSP0.
O LCD_VD[10] — LCD data.
O LCD_VD[14] — LCD data.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, DAC pins) and Table 7 (EMC
pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
DescriptionLPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 20 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
P1[25] 80 T10 L7 56 [3] I;
PU
I/O P1[25] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O USB_LS1 — Low Speed status for USB port 1 (OTG
transceiver).
O USB_HSTEN1 — Host Enabled status for USB port 1.
O T1_MAT1 — Match output for Timer 1, channel 1.
O MC_1A — Motor control PWM channel 1, output A.
O CLKOUT — Selectable clock output.
O LCD_VD[11] — LCD data.
O LCD_VD[15] — LCD data.
P1[26] 82 R10 P8 57 [3] I;
PU
I/O P1[26] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O USB_SSPND1 — USB port 1 Bus Suspend status (OTG
transceiver).
O PWM1[6] — Pulse Width Modulator 1, channel 6 output.
I T0_CAP0 — Capture input for Timer 0, channel 0.
O MC_1B — Motor control PWM channel 1, output B.
I/O SSP1_SSEL — Slave Select for SSP1.
O LCD_VD[12] — LCD data.
O LCD_VD[20] — LCD data.
P1[27] 88 T12 M9 61 [3] I;
PU
I/O P1[27] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I USB_INT1 — USB port 1 OTG transceiver interrupt (OTG
transceiver).
I USB_OVRCR1 — USB port 1 Over-Current status.
I T0_CAP1 — Capture input for Timer 0, channel 1.
O CLKOUT — Selectable clock output.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_VD[13] — LCD data.
O LCD_VD[21] — LCD data.
P1[28] 90 T13 P10 63 [3] I;
PU
I/O P1[28] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O USB_SCL1 — USB port 1 I2C serial clock (OTG transceiver).
I PWM1_CAP0 — Capture input for PWM1, channel 0.
O T0_MAT0 — Match output for Timer 0, channel 0.
O MC_2A — Motor control PWM channel 2, output A.
I/O SSP0_SSEL — Slave Select for SSP0.
O LCD_VD[14] — LCD data.
O LCD_VD[22] — LCD data.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, DAC pins) and Table 7 (EMC
pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
DescriptionLPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 21 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
P1[29] 92 U14 N10 64 [3] I;
PU
I/O P1[29] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O USB_SDA1 — USB port 1 I2C serial data (OTG transceiver).
I PWM1_CAP1 — Capture input for PWM1, channel 1.
O T0_MAT1 — Match output for Timer 0, channel 1.
O MC_2B — Motor control PWM channel 2, output B.
O U4_TXD — Transmitter output for USART4 (input/output in
smart card mode).
O LCD_VD[15] — LCD data.
O LCD_VD[23] — LCD data.
P1[30] 42 P2 K3 30 [5] I;
PU
I/O P1[30] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I USB_PWRD2 — Power Status for USB port 2.
I USB_VBUS — Monitors the presence of USB bus power.
This signal must be HIGH for USB reset to occur.
I ADC0_IN[4] — A/D converter 0, input 4. When configured as an
ADC input, the digital function of the pin must be disabled.
I/O I2C0_SDA — I
2C0 data input/output (this pin does not use a
specialized I2C pad).
O U3_OE — RS-485/EIA-485 output enable signal for UART3.
P1[31] 40 P1 K2 28 [5] I;
PU
I/O P1[31] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I USB_OVRCR2 — Over-Current status for USB port 2.
I/O SSP1_SCK — Serial Clock for SSP1.
I ADC0_IN[5] — A/D converter 0, input 5. When configured as an
ADC input, the digital function of the pin must be disabled.
I/O I2C0_SCL — I
2C0 clock input/output (this pin does not use a
specialized I2C pad).
P2[0] to
P2[31]
I/O Port 2: Port 2 is a 32 bit I/O port with individual direction
controls for each bit. The operation of port 1 pins depends upon
the pin function selected via the pin connect block.
P2[0] 154 B17 D12 107 [3] I;
PU
I/O P2[0] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O PWM1[1] — Pulse Width Modulator 1, channel 1 output.
O U1_TXD — Transmitter output for UART1.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_PWR — LCD panel power enable.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, DAC pins) and Table 7 (EMC
pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
DescriptionLPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 22 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
P2[1] 152 E14 C14 106 [3] I;
PU
I/O P2[1] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O PWM1[2] — Pulse Width Modulator 1, channel 2 output.
I U1_RXD — Receiver input for UART1.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_LE — Line end signal.
P2[2] 150 D15 E11 105 [3] I;
PU
I/O P2[2] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O PWM1[3] — Pulse Width Modulator 1, channel 3 output.
I U1_CTS — Clear to Send input for UART1.
O T2_MAT3 — Match output for Timer 2, channel 3.
- R — Function reserved.
O TRACEDATA[3] — Trace data, bit 3.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_DCLK — LCD panel clock.
P2[3] 144 E16 E13 100 [3] I;
PU
I/O P2[3] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O PWM1[4] — Pulse Width Modulator 1, channel 4 output.
I U1_DCD — Data Carrier Detect input for UART1.
O T2_MAT2 — Match output for Timer 2, channel 2.
- R — Function reserved.
O TRACEDATA[2] — Trace data, bit 2.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_FP — Frame pulse (STN). Vertical synchronization pulse
(TFT).
P2[4] 142 D17 E14 99 [3] I;
PU
I/O P2[4] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O PWM1[5] — Pulse Width Modulator 1, channel 5 output.
I U1_DSR — Data Set Ready input for UART1.
O T2_MAT1 — Match output for Timer 2, channel 1.
- R — Function reserved.
O TRACEDATA[1] — Trace data, bit 1.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_ENAB_M — STN AC bias drive or TFT data enable
output.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, DAC pins) and Table 7 (EMC
pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
DescriptionLPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 23 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
P2[5] 140 F16 F12 97 [3] I;
PU
I/O P2[5] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O PWM1[6] — Pulse Width Modulator 1, channel 6 output.
O U1_DTR — Data Terminal Ready output for UART1. Can also
be configured to be an RS-485/EIA-485 output enable signal for
UART1.
O T2_MAT0 — Match output for Timer 2, channel 0.
- R — Function reserved.
O TRACEDATA[0] — Trace data, bit 0.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_LP — Line synchronization pulse (STN). Horizontal
synchronization pulse (TFT).
P2[6] 138 E17 F13 96 [3] I;
PU
I/O P2[6] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I PWM1_CAP0 — Capture input for PWM1, channel 0.
I U1_RI — Ring Indicator input for UART1.
I T2_CAP0 — Capture input for Timer 2, channel 0.
O U2_OE — RS-485/EIA-485 output enable signal for UART2.
O TRACECLK — Trace clock.
O LCD_VD[0] — LCD data.
O LCD_VD[4] — LCD data.
P2[7] 136 G16 G11 95 [3] I;
PU
I/O P2[7] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I CAN_RD2 — CAN2 receiver input.
O U1_RTS — Request to Send output for UART1. Can also be
configured to be an RS-485/EIA-485 output enable signal for
UART1.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_VD[1] — LCD data.
O LCD_VD[5] — LCD data.
P2[8] 134 H15 G14 93 [3] I;
PU
I/O P2[8] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O CAN_TD2 — CAN2 transmitter output.
O U2_TXD — Transmitter output for UART2.
I U1_CTS — Clear to Send input for UART1.
O ENET_MDC — Ethernet MIIM clock.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_VD[2] — LCD data.
O LCD_VD[6] — LCD data.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, DAC pins) and Table 7 (EMC
pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
DescriptionLPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 24 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
P2[9] 132 H16 H11 92 [3] I;
PU
I/O P2[9] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O USB_CONNECT1 — USB1 SoftConnect control. Signal used to
switch an external 1.5 k resistor under the software control.
Used with the SoftConnect USB feature.
I U2_RXD — Receiver input for UART2.
I U4_RXD — Receiver input for USART4.
I/O ENET_MDIO — Ethernet MIIM data input and output.
- R — Function reserved.
I LCD_VD[3] — LCD data.
I LCD_VD[7] — LCD data.
P2[10] 110 N15 M13 76 [10] I;
PU
I/O P2[10] — General purpose digital input/output pin. This pin
includes a 10 ns input .
A LOW on this pin while RESET is LOW forces the on-chip boot
loader to take over control of the part after a reset and go into
ISP mode.
I EINT0 — External interrupt 0 input.
I NMI — Non-maskable interrupt input.
P2[11] 108 T17 M12 75 [10] I;
PU
I/O P2[11] — General purpose digital input/output pin. This pin
includes a 10 ns input glitch filter.
I EINT1 — External interrupt 1 input.
I/O SD_DAT[1] — Data line 1 for SD card interface.
I/O I2S_TX_SCK — Transmit Clock. It is driven by the master and
received by the slave. Corresponds to the signal SCK in the
I
2S-bus specification.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_CLKIN — LCD clock.
P2[12] 106 N14 N14 73 [10] I;
PU
I/O P2[12] — General purpose digital input/output pin. This pin
includes a 10 ns input glitch filter.
I EINT2 — External interrupt 2 input.
I/O SD_DAT[2] — Data line 2 for SD card interface.
I/O I2S_TX_WS — Transmit Word Select. It is driven by the master
and received by the slave. Corresponds to the signal WS in the
I
2S-bus specification.
O LCD_VD[4] — LCD data.
O LCD_VD[3] — LCD data.
O LCD_VD[8] — LCD data.
O LCD_VD[18] — LCD data.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, DAC pins) and Table 7 (EMC
pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
DescriptionLPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 25 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
P2[13] 102 T16 M11 71 [10] I;
PU
I/O P2[13] — General purpose digital input/output pin. This pin
includes a 10 ns input glitch filter.
I EINT3 — External interrupt 3 input.
I/O SD_DAT[3] — Data line 3 for SD card interface.
I/O I2S_TX_SDA — Transmit data. It is driven by the transmitter
and read by the receiver. Corresponds to the signal SD in the
I
2S-bus specification.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_VD[5] — LCD data.
O LCD_VD[9] — LCD data.
O LCD_VD[19] — LCD data.
P2[14] 91 R12 - - [3] I;
PU
I/O P2[14] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_CS2 — LOW active Chip Select 2 signal.
I/O I2C1_SDA — I
2C1 data input/output (this pin does not use a
specialized I2C pad).
I T2_CAP0 — Capture input for Timer 2, channel 0.
P2[15] 99 P13 - - [3] I;
PU
I/O P2[15] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_CS3 — LOW active Chip Select 3 signal.
I/O I2C1_SCL — I
2C1 clock input/output (this pin does not use a
specialized I2C pad).
I T2_CAP1 — Capture input for Timer 2, channel 1.
P2[16] 87 R11 P9 - [3] I;
PU
I/O P2[16] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_CAS — LOW active SDRAM Column Address Strobe.
P2[17] 95 R13 P11 - [3] I;
PU
I/O P2[17] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_RAS — LOW active SDRAM Row Address Strobe.
P2[18] 59 U3 P3 - [6] I;
PU
I/O P2[18] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_CLK[0] — SDRAM clock 0.
P2[19] 67 R7 N5 - [6] I;
PU
I/O P2[19] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_CLK[1] — SDRAM clock 1.
P2[20] 73 T8 P6 - [3] I;
PU
I/O P2[20] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_DYCS0 — SDRAM chip select 0.
P2[21] 81 U11 N8 - [3] I;
PU
I/O P2[21] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_DYCS1 — SDRAM chip select 1.
P2[22] 85 U12 - - [3] I;
PU
I/O P2[22] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_DYCS2 — SDRAM chip select 2.
I/O SSP0_SCK — Serial clock for SSP0.
I T3_CAP0 — Capture input for Timer 3, channel 0.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, DAC pins) and Table 7 (EMC
pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
DescriptionLPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 26 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
P2[23] 64 U5 - - [3] I;
PU
I/O P2[23] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_DYCS3 — SDRAM chip select 3.
I/O SSP0_SSEL — Slave Select for SSP0.
I T3_CAP1 — Capture input for Timer 3, channel 1.
P2[24] 53 P5 P1 - [3] I;
PU
I/O P2[24] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_CKE0 — SDRAM clock enable 0.
P2[25] 54 R4 P2 - [3] I;
PU
I/O P2[25] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_CKE1 — SDRAM clock enable 1.
P2[26] 57 T4 - - [3] I;
PU
I/O P2[26] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_CKE2 — SDRAM clock enable 2.
I/O SSP0_MISO — Master In Slave Out for SSP0.
O T3_MAT0 — Match output for Timer 3, channel 0.
P2[27] 47 P3 - - [3] I;
PU
I/O P2[27] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_CKE3 — SDRAM clock enable 3.
I/O SSP0_MOSI — Master Out Slave In for SSP0.
O T3_MAT1 — Match output for Timer 3, channel 1.
P2[28] 49 P4 M2 - [3] I;
PU
I/O P2[28] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_DQM0 — Data mask 0 used with SDRAM and static
devices.
P2[29] 43 N3 L1 - [3] I;
PU
I/O P2[29] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_DQM1 — Data mask 1 used with SDRAM and static
devices.
P2[30] 31 L4 - - [3] I;
PU
I/O P2[30] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_DQM2 — Data mask 2 used with SDRAM and static
devices.
I/O I2C2_SDA — I
2C2 data input/output (this pin does not use a
specialized I2C pad).
O T3_MAT2 — Match output for Timer 3, channel 2.
P2[31] 39 N2 - - [3] I;
PU
I/O P2[31] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_DQM3 — Data mask 3 used with SDRAM and static
devices.
I/O I2C2_SCL — I
2C2 clock input/output (this pin does not use a
specialized I2C pad).
O T3_MAT3 — Match output for Timer 3, channel 3.
P3[0] to
P3[31]
I/O Port 3: Port 3 is a 32-bit I/O port with individual direction
controls for each bit. The operation of port 3 pins depends upon
the pin function selected via the pin connect block.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, DAC pins) and Table 7 (EMC
pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
DescriptionLPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 27 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
P3[0] 197 B4 D6 137 [3] I;
PU
I/O P3[0] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[0] — External memory data line 0.
P3[1] 201 B3 E6 140 [3] I;
PU
I/O P3[1] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[1] — External memory data line 1.
P3[2] 207 B1 A2 144 [3] I;
PU
I/O P3[2] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[2] — External memory data line 2.
P3[3] 3 E4 G5 2 [3] I;
PU
I/O P3[3] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[3] — External memory data line 3.
P3[4] 13 F2 D3 9 [3] I;
PU
I/O P3[4] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[4] — External memory data line 4.
P3[5] 17 G1 E3 12 [3] I;
PU
I/O P3[5] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[5] — External memory data line 5.
P3[6] 23 J1 F4 16 [3] I;
PU
I/O P3[6] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[6] — External memory data line 6.
P3[7] 27 L1 G3 19 [3] I;
PU
I/O P3[7] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[7] — External memory data line 7.
P3[8] 191 D8 A6 - [3] I;
PU
I/O P3[8] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[8] — External memory data line 8.
P3[9] 199 C5 A4 - [3] I;
PU
I/O P3[9] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[9] — External memory data line 9.
P3[10] 205 B2 B3 - [3] I;
PU
I/O P3[10] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[10] — External memory data line 10.
P3[11] 208 D5 B2 - [3] I;
PU
I/O P3[11] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[11] — External memory data line 11.
P3[12] 1 D4 A1 - [3] I;
PU
I/O P3[12] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[12] — External memory data line 12.
P3[13] 7 C1 C1 - [3] I;
PU
I/O P3[13] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[13] — External memory data line 13.
P3[14] 21 H2 F1 - [3] I;
PU
I/O P3[14] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[14] — External memory data line 14.
P3[15] 28 M1 G4 - [3] I;
PU
I/O P3[15] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[15] — External memory data line 15.
P3[16] 137 F17 - - [3] I;
PU
I/O P3[16] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[16] — External memory data line 16.
O PWM0[1] — Pulse Width Modulator 0, output 1.
O U1_TXD — Transmitter output for UART1.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, DAC pins) and Table 7 (EMC
pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
DescriptionLPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 28 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
P3[17] 143 F15 - - [3] I;
PU
I/O P3[17] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[17] — External memory data line 17.
O PWM0[2] — Pulse Width Modulator 0, output 2.
I U1_RXD — Receiver input for UART1.
P3[18] 151 C15 - - [3] I;
PU
I/O P3[18] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[18] — External memory data line 18.
O PWM0[3] — Pulse Width Modulator 0, output 3.
I U1_CTS — Clear to Send input for UART1.
P3[19] 161 B14 - - [3] I;
PU
I/O P3[19] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[19] — External memory data line 19.
O PWM0[4] — Pulse Width Modulator 0, output 4.
I U1_DCD — Data Carrier Detect input for UART1.
P3[20] 167 A13 - - [3] I;
PU
I/O P3[20] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[20] — External memory data line 20.
O PWM0[5] — Pulse Width Modulator 0, output 5.
I U1_DSR — Data Set Ready input for UART1.
P3[21] 175 C10 - - [3] I;
PU
I/O P3[21] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[21] — External memory data line 21.
O PWM0[6] — Pulse Width Modulator 0, output 6.
O U1_DTR — Data Terminal Ready output for UART1. Can also
be configured to be an RS-485/EIA-485 output enable signal for
UART1.
P3[22] 195 C6 - - [3] I;
PU
I/O P3[22] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[22] — External memory data line 22.
I PWM0_CAP0 — Capture input for PWM0, channel 0.
I U1_RI — Ring Indicator input for UART1.
P3[23] 65 T6 M4 45 [3] I;
PU
I/O P3[23] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[23] — External memory data line 23.
I PWM1_CAP0 — Capture input for PWM1, channel 0.
I T0_CAP0 — Capture input for Timer 0, channel 0.
P3[24] 58 R5 N3 40 [3] I;
PU
I/O P3[24] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[24] — External memory data line 24.
O PWM1[1] — Pulse Width Modulator 1, output 1.
I T0_CAP1 — Capture input for Timer 0, channel 1.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, DAC pins) and Table 7 (EMC
pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
DescriptionLPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 29 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
P3[25] 56 U2 M3 39 [3] I;
PU
I/O P3[25] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[25] — External memory data line 25.
O PWM1[2] — Pulse Width Modulator 1, output 2.
O T0_MAT0 — Match output for Timer 0, channel 0.
P3[26] 55 T3 K7 38 [3] I;
PU
I/O P3[26] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[26] — External memory data line 26.
O PWM1[3] — Pulse Width Modulator 1, output 3.
O T0_MAT1 — Match output for Timer 0, channel 1.
I STCLK — System tick timer clock input. The maximum STCLK
frequency is 1/4 of the ARM processor clock frequency CCLK.
P3[27] 203 A1 - - [3] I;
PU
I/O P3[27] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[27] — External memory data line 27.
O PWM1[4] — Pulse Width Modulator 1, output 4.
I T1_CAP0 — Capture input for Timer 1, channel 0.
P3[28] 5 D2 - - [3] I;
PU
I/O P3[28] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[28] — External memory data line 28.
O PWM1[5] — Pulse Width Modulator 1, output 5.
I T1_CAP1 — Capture input for Timer 1, channel 1.
P3[29] 11 F3 - - [3] I;
PU
I/O P3[29] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[29] — External memory data line 29.
O PWM1[6] — Pulse Width Modulator 1, output 6.
O T1_MAT0 — Match output for Timer 1, channel 0.
P3[30] 19 H3 - - [3] I;
PU
I/O P3[30] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[30] — External memory data line 30.
O U1_RTS — Request to Send output for UART1. Can also be
configured to be an RS-485/EIA-485 output enable signal for
UART1.
O T1_MAT1 — Match output for Timer 1, channel 1.
P3[31] 25 J3 - - [3] I;
PU
I/O P3[31] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_D[31] — External memory data line 31.
- R — Function reserved.
O T1_MAT2 — Match output for Timer 1, channel 2.
P4[0] to
P4[31]
I/O Port 4: Port 4 is a 32-bit I/O port with individual direction
controls for each bit. The operation of port 4 pins depends upon
the pin function selected via the pin connect block.
P4[0] 75 U9 L6 52 [3] I;
PU
I/O P4[0] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[0] — External memory address line 0.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, DAC pins) and Table 7 (EMC
pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
DescriptionLPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 30 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
P4[1] 79 U10 M7 55 [3] I;
PU
I/O P4[1] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[1] — External memory address line 1.
P4[2] 83 T11 M8 58 [3] I;
PU
I/O P4[2] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[2] — External memory address line 2.
P4[3] 97 U16 K9 68 [3] I;
PU
I/O P4[3] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[3] — External memory address line 3.
P4[4] 103 R15 P13 72 [3] I;
PU
I/O P4[4] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[4] — External memory address line 4.
P4[5] 107 R16 H10 74 [3] I;
PU
I/O P4[5] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[5] — External memory address line 5.
P4[6] 113 M14 K10 78 [3] I;
PU
I/O P4[6] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[6] — External memory address line 6.
P4[7] 121 L16 K12 84 [3] I;
PU
I/O P4[7] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[7] — External memory address line 7.
P4[8] 127 J17 J11 88 [3] I;
PU
I/O P4[8] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[8] — External memory address line 8.
P4[9] 131 H17 H12 91 [3] I;
PU
I/O P4[9] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[9] — External memory address line 9.
P4[10] 135 G17 G12 94 [3] I;
PU
I/O P4[10] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[10] — External memory address line 10.
P4[11] 145 F14 F11 101 [3] I;
PU
I/O P4[11] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[11] — External memory address line 11.
P4[12] 149 C16 F10 104 [3] I;
PU
I/O P4[12] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[12] — External memory address line 12.
P4[13] 155 B16 B14 108 [3] I;
PU
I/O P4[13] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[13] — External memory address line 13.
P4[14] 159 B15 E8 110 [3] I;
PU
I/O P4[14] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[14] — External memory address line 14.
P4[15] 173 A11 C10 120 [3] I;
PU
I/O P4[15] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[15] — External memory address line 15.
P4[16] 101 U17 N12 - [3] I;
PU
I/O P4[16] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[16] — External memory address line 16.
P4[17] 104 P14 N13 - [3] I;
PU
I/O P4[17] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[17] — External memory address line 17.
P4[18] 105 P15 P14 - [3] I;
PU
I/O P4[18] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[18] — External memory address line 18.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, DAC pins) and Table 7 (EMC
pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
DescriptionLPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 31 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
P4[19] 111 P16 M14 - [3] I;
PU
I/O P4[19] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[19] — External memory address line 19.
P4[20] 109 R17 - - [3] I;
PU
I/O P4[20] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[20] — External memory address line 20.
I/O I2C2_SDA — I
2C2 data input/output (this pin does not use a
specialized I2C pad).
I/O SSP1_SCK — Serial Clock for SSP1.
P4[21] 115 M15 - - [3] I;
PU
I/O P4[21] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[21] — External memory address line 21.
I/O I2C2_SCL — I
2C2 clock input/output (this pin does not use a
specialized I2C pad).
I/O SSP1_SSEL — Slave Select for SSP1.
P4[22] 123 K14 - - [3] I;
PU
I/O P4[22] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[22] — External memory address line 22.
O U2_TXD — Transmitter output for UART2.
I/O SSP1_MISO — Master In Slave Out for SSP1.
P4[23] 129 J15 - - [3] I;
PU
I/O P4[23] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[23] — External memory address line 23.
I U2_RXD — Receiver input for UART2.
I/O SSP1_MOSI — Master Out Slave In for SSP1.
P4[24] 183 B8 C8 127 [3] I;
PU
I/O P4[24] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_OE — LOW active Output Enable signal.
P4[25] 179 B9 D9 124 [3] I;
PU
I/O P4[25] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_WE — LOW active Write Enable signal.
P4[26] 119 L15 K13 - [3] I;
PU
I/O P4[26] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_BLS0 — LOW active Byte Lane select signal 0.
P4[27] 139 G15 F14 - [3] I;
PU
I/O P4[27] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_BLS1 — LOW active Byte Lane select signal 1.
P4[28] 170 C11 D10 118 [3] I;
PU
I/O P4[28] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_BLS2 — LOW active Byte Lane select signal 2.
O U3_TXD — Transmitter output for UART3.
O T2_MAT0 — Match output for Timer 2, channel 0.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_VD[6] — LCD data.
O LCD_VD[10] — LCD data.
O LCD_VD[2] — LCD data.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, DAC pins) and Table 7 (EMC
pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
DescriptionLPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 32 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
P4[29] 176 B10 B9 122 [3] I;
PU
I/O P4[29] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_BLS3 — LOW active Byte Lane select signal 3.
I U3_RXD — Receiver input for UART3.
O T2_MAT1 — Match output for Timer 2, channel 1.
I/O I2C2_SCL — I
2C2 clock input/output (this pin does not use a
specialized I2C pad).
O LCD_VD[7] — LCD data.
O LCD_VD[11] — LCD data.
O LCD_VD[3] — LCD data.
P4[30] 187 B7 C7 130 [3] I;
PU
I/O P4[30] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_CS0 — LOW active Chip Select 0 signal.
P4[31] 193 A4 E7 134 [3] I;
PU
I/O P4[31] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_CS1 — LOW active Chip Select 1 signal.
P5[0] to P5[4] I/O Port 5: Port 5 is a 5-bit I/O port with individual direction controls
for each bit. The operation of port 5 pins depends upon the pin
function selected via the pin connect block.
P5[0] 9 F4 E5 6 [3] I;
PU
I/O P5[0] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[24] — External memory address line 24.
I/O SSP2_MOSI — Master Out Slave In for SSP2.
O T2_MAT2 — Match output for Timer 2, channel 2.
P5[1] 30 J4 H1 21 [3] I;
PU
I/O P5[1] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O EMC_A[25] — External memory address line 25.
I/O SSP2_MISO — Master In Slave Out for SSP2.
O T2_MAT3 — Match output for Timer 2, channel 3.
P5[2] 117 L14 L12 81 [11] I I/O P5[2] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O T3_MAT2 — Match output for Timer 3, channel 2.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O I2C0_SDA — I
2C0 data input/output (this pin uses a specialized
I
2C pad that supports I2C Fast Mode Plus).
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, DAC pins) and Table 7 (EMC
pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
DescriptionLPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 33 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
P5[3] 141 G14 G10 98 [11] I I/O P5[3] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I U4_RXD — Receiver input for USART4.
I/O I2C0_SCL — I
2C0 clock input/output (this pin uses a
specialized I2C pad that supports I2C Fast Mode Plus).
P5[4] 206 C3 C4 143 [3] I;
PU
I/O P5[4] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O U0_OE — RS-485/EIA-485 output enable signal for UART0.
- R — Function reserved.
O T3_MAT3 — Match output for Timer 3, channel 3.
O U4_TXD — Transmitter output for USART4 (input/output in
smart card mode).
JTAG_TDO
(SWO)
2 D3 B1 1 [3] O O Test Data Out for JTAG interface. Also used as Serial wire trace
output.
JTAG_TDI 4 C2 C3 3 [3] I;
PU
I Test Data In for JTAG interface.
JTAG_TMS
(SWDIO)
6 E3 C2 4 [3] I;
PU
I Test Mode Select for JTAG interface. Also used as Serial wire
debug data input/output.
JTAG_TRST 8 D1 D4 5 [3] I;
PU
I Test Reset for JTAG interface.
JTAG_TCK
(SWDCLK)
10 E2 D2 7 [3] i I Test Clock for JTAG interface. This clock must be slower than
1/6 of the CPU clock (CCLK) for the JTAG interface to operate.
Also used as serial wire clock.
RESET 35 M2 J1 24 [12] I;
PU
I External reset input with 20 ns glitch filter. A LOW-going pulse
as short as 50 ns on this pin resets the device, causing I/O ports
and peripherals to take on their default states, and processor
execution to begin at address 0. This pin also serves as the
debug select input. LOW level selects the JTAG boundary scan.
HIGH level selects the ARM SWD debug mode.
RSTOUT 29 K3 H2 20 [3] OH O Reset status output. A LOW output on this pin indicates that the
device is in the reset state for any reason. This reflects the
RESET input pin and all internal reset sources.
RTC_ALARM 37 N1 H5 26 [13] OL O RTC controlled output. This pin has a low drive strength and is
powered by VBAT. It is driven HIGH when an RTC alarm is
generated.
RTCX1 34 K2 J2 23 [14]
[15]
- I Input to the RTC 32 kHz ultra-low power oscillator circuit.
RTCX2 36 L2 J3 25 [14]
[15]
- O Output from the RTC 32 kHz ultra-low power oscillator circuit.
USB_D2 52 U1 N2 37 [9] - I/O USB port 2 bidirectional D line.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, DAC pins) and Table 7 (EMC
pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
DescriptionLPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 34 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
VBAT 38 M3 K1 27 - I RTC power supply: 3.0 V on this pin supplies power to the RTC.
VDD(REG)(3V3) 26,
86,
174
H4,
P11,
D11
G1,
N9,
E9
18,
60,
121
- S 3.3 V regulator supply voltage: This is the power supply for the
on-chip voltage regulator that supplies internal logic.
VDDA 20 G4 F2 14 - S Analog 3.3 V pad supply voltage: This can be connected to the
same supply as VDD(3V3) but should be isolated to minimize
noise and error. This voltage is used to power the ADC and
DAC. Note: This pin should be tied to 3.3 V if the ADC and
DAC are not used.
VDD(3V3) 15,
60,
71,
89,
112,
125,
146,
165,
181,
198
G3,
P6,
P8,
U13,
P17,
K16,
C17,
B13,
C9,
D7
E2,
L4,
K8,
L11,
J14,
E12,
E10,
C5
41,
62,
77,
102,
114,
138
- S 3.3 V supply voltage: This is the power supply voltage for I/O
other than pins in the VBAT domain.
VREFP 24 K1 G2 17 - S ADC positive reference voltage: This should be the same
voltage as VDDA, but should be isolated to minimize noise and
error. The voltage level on this pin is used as a reference for
ADC and DAC. Note: This pin should be tied to 3.3 V if the
ADC and DAC are not used.
VSS 33,
63,
77,
93,
114,
133,
148,
169,
189,
200
L3,
T5,
R9,
P12,
N16,
H14,
E15,
A12,
B6,
A2
H4,
P4,
L9,
L13,
G13,
D13,
C11,
B4
44,
65,
79,
103,
117,
139
- G Ground: 0 V reference for digital IO pins.
VSSREG 32,
84,
172
D12,
K4,
P10
H3,
L8,
A10
22,
59,
119
- G Ground: 0 V reference for internal logic.
VSSA 22 J2 F3 15 - G Analog ground: 0 V power supply and reference for the ADC
and DAC. This should be the same voltage as VSS, but should
be isolated to minimize noise and error.
XTAL1 44 M4 L2 31 [14]
[16]
- I Input to the oscillator circuit and internal clock generator circuits.
XTAL2 46 N4 K4 33 [14]
[16]
- O Output from the oscillator amplifier.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 (Ethernet, USB, LCD, QEI, SD/MMC, DAC pins) and Table 7 (EMC
pins).
Symbol
Pin LQFP208
Ball TFBGA208
Ball TFBGA180
Pin LQFP144
Reset state[1]
Type[2]
DescriptionLPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 35 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
[1] PU = internal pull-up enabled (for VDD(REG)(3V3) = 3.3 V, pulled up to 3.3 V); IA = inactive, no pull-up/down enabled; F = floating; floating
pins, if not used, should be tied to ground or power to minimize power consumption.
[2] I = Input; O = Output; OL = Output driving LOW; G = Ground; S = Supply.
[3] 5 V tolerant pad (5 V tolerant if VDD(3V3) present; if VDD(3V3) not present, do not exceed 3.6 V) providing digital I/O functions with TTL
levels and hysteresis.
[4] 5 V tolerant standard pad (5 V tolerant if VDD(3V3) present; if VDD(3V3) not present, do not exceed 3.6 V) providing digital I/O functions with
TTL levels and hysteresis. This pad can be powered by VBAT.
[5] 5 V tolerant pad (5 V tolerant if VDD(3V3) present; if VDD(3V3) not present or configured for an analog function, do not exceed 3.6 V)
providing digital I/O functions with TTL levels and hysteresis and analog input. When configured as a ADC input, digital section of the
pad is disabled.
[6] 5 V tolerant fast pad (5 V tolerant if VDD(3V3) present; if VDD(3V3) not present, do not exceed 3.6 V) providing digital I/O functions with TTL
levels and hysteresis.
[7] 5 V tolerant pad (5 V tolerant if VDD(3V3) present; if VDD(3V3) not present or configured for an analog function, do not exceed 3.6 V)
providing digital I/O with TTL levels and hysteresis and analog output function. When configured as the DAC output, digital section of the
pad is disabled.
[8] Open-drain 5 V tolerant digital I/O pad, compatible with I2C-bus 400 kHz specification. It requires an external pull-up to provide output
functionality. When power is switched off, this pin connected to the I2C-bus is floating and does not disturb the I2C lines. Open-drain
configuration applies to all functions on this pin.
[9] Not 5 V tolerant. Pad provides digital I/O and USB functions. It is designed in accordance with the USB specification, revision 2.0
(Full-speed and Low-speed mode only).
[10] 5 V tolerant pad (5 V tolerant if VDD(3V3) present; if VDD(3V3) not present, do not exceed 3.6 V) with 5 ns glitch filter providing digital I/O
functions with TTL levels and hysteresis.
[11] Open-drain 5 V tolerant digital I/O pad, compatible with I2C-bus 1 MHz specification. It requires an external pull-up to provide output
functionality. When power is switched off, this pin connected to the I2C-bus is floating and does not disturb the I2C lines. Open-drain
configuration applies to all functions on this pin.
[12] 5 V tolerant pad (5 V tolerant if VDD(3V3) present; if VDD(3V3) not present, do not exceed 3.6 V) with 20 ns glitch filter providing digital I/O
function with TTL levels and hysteresis.
[13] This pad can be powered from VBAT.
[14] Pad provides special analog functionality. A 32 kHz crystal oscillator must be used with the RTC. An external clock (32 kHz) can’t be
used to drive the RTCX1 pin.
[15] If the RTC is not used, these pins can be left floating.
[16] When the main oscillator is not used, connect XTAL1 and XTAL2 as follows: XTAL1 can be left floating or can be grounded (grounding
is preferred to reduce susceptibility to noise). XTAL2 should be left floating.
Table 4. Pin allocation table TFBGA208
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 and Table 7 (EMC pins).
Ball Symbol Ball Symbol Ball Symbol Ball Symbol
Row A
1 P3[27] 2 VSS 3 P1[0] 4 P4[31]
5 P1[4] 6 P1[9] 7 P1[14] 8 P1[15]
9 P1[17] 10 P1[3] 11 P4[15] 12 VSS
13 P3[20] 14 P1[11] 15 P0[8] 16 P1[12]
17 P1[5] - - -
Row B
1 P3[2] 2 P3[10] 3 P3[1] 4 P3[0]
5 P1[1] 6 VSS 7 P4[30] 8 P4[24]
9 P4[25] 10 P4[29] 11 P1[6] 12 P0[4]
13 VDD(3V3) 14 P3[19] 15 P4[14] 16 P4[13]
17 P2[0] - - -
Row CLPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 36 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
1 P3[13] 2 JTAG_TDI 3 P5[4] 4 P0[2]
5 P3[9] 6 P3[22] 7 P1[8] 8 P1[10]
9 VDD(3V3) 10 P3[21] 11 P4[28] 12 P0[5]
13 P0[7] 14 P0[9] 15 P3[18] 16 P4[12]
17 VDD(3V3)- - -
Row D
1 JTAG_TRST 2 P3[28] 3 JTAG_TDO (SWO) 4 P3[12]
5 P3[11] 6 P0[3] 7 VDD(3V3) 8 P3[8]
9 P1[2] 10 P1[16] 11 VDD(REG)(3V3) 12 VSSREG
13 P0[6] 14 P1[7] 15 P2[2] 16 P1[13]
17 P2[4] - - -
Row E
1 P0[26] 2 JTAG_TCK
(SWDCLK)
3 JTAG_TMS (SWDIO) 4 P3[3]
5 - 6- 7 - 8 -
9 - 10 - 11 - 12 -
13 - 14 P2[1] 15 VSS 16 P2[3]
17 P2[6] - - -
Row F
1 P0[25] 2 P3[4] 3 P3[29] 4 P5[0]
5 - 6- 7 - 8 -
9 - 10 - 11 - 12 -
13 - 14 P4[11] 15 P3[17] 16 P2[5]
17 P3[16] - - -
Row G
1 P3[5] 2 P0[24] 3 VDD(3V3) 4 VDDA
5 - 6 - 7 - 8 -
9 - 10 - 11 - 12 -
13 - 14 P5[3] 15 P4[27] 16 P2[7]
17 P4[10] - - -
Row H
1 P0[23] 2 P3[14] 3 P3[30] 4 VDD(REG)(3V3)
5 - 6 - 7 - 8 -
9 - 10 - 11 - 12 -
13 - 14 VSS 15 P2[8] 16 P2[9]
17 P4[9] - - -
Row J
1 P3[6] 2 VSSA 3 P3[31] 4 P5[1]
5 - 6 - 7 - 8 -
9 - 10 - 11 - 12 -
Table 4. Pin allocation table TFBGA208
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 and Table 7 (EMC pins).
Ball Symbol Ball Symbol Ball Symbol Ball SymbolLPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 37 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
13 14 P0[16] 15 P4[23] 16 P0[15]
17 P4[8] - - -
Row K
1 VREFP 2 RTCX1 3 RSTOUT 4 VSSREG
13 - 14 P4[22] 15 P0[18] 16 VDD(3V3)
17 P0[17] - - -
Row L
1 P3[7] 2 RTCX2 3 VSS 4 P2[30]
5 - 6- 7 - 8 -
9 - 10 - 11 - 12 -
13 - 14 P5[2] 15 P4[26] 16 P4[7]
17 P0[19] - - -
Row M
1 P3[15] 2 RESET 3 VBAT 4 XTAL1
5 - 6 - 7 - 8 -
9 - 10 - 11 - 12 -
13 - 14 P4[6] 15 P4[21] 16 P0[21]
17 P0[20] - - -
Row N
1 RTC_ALARM 2 P2[31] 3 P2[29] 4 XTAL2
5 - 6 - 7 - 8 -
9 - 10 - 11 - 12 -
13 - 14 P2[12 15 P2[10] 16 VSS
17 P0[22] - - -
Row P
1 P1[31] 2 P1[30] 3 P2[27] 4 P2[28]
5 P2[24] 6 VDD(3V3) 7 P1[18] 8 VDD(3V3)
9 P1[23] 10 VSSREG 11 VDD(REG)(3V3) 12 VSS
13 P2[15] 14 P4[17] 15 P4[18] 16 P4[19]
17 VDD(3V3) ---
Row R
1 P0[12] 2 P0[13] 3 P0[28] 4 P2[25]
5 P3[24] 6 P0[30] 7 P2[19] 8 P1[21]
9 VSS 10 P1[26] 11 P2[16] 12 P2[14]
13 P2[17] 14 P0[11] 15 P4[4] 16 P4[5]
17 P4[20] - - -
Row T
1 P0[27] 2 P0[31] 3 P3[26] 4 P2[26]
5 VSS 6 P3[23] 7 P0[14] 8 P2[20]
9 P1[24] 10 P1[25] 11 P4[2] 12 P1[27]
Table 4. Pin allocation table TFBGA208
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 and Table 7 (EMC pins).
Ball Symbol Ball Symbol Ball Symbol Ball SymbolLPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 38 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
13 P1[28] 14 P0[1] 15 P0[10] 16 P2[13]
17 P2[11] - - -
Row U
1 USB_D-2 2 P3[25] 3 P2[18] 4 P0[29]
5 P2[23] 6 P1[19] 7 P1[20] 8 P1[22]
9 P4[0] 10 P4[1] 11 P2[21] 12 P2[22]
13 VDD(3V3) 14 P1[29] 15 P0[0] 16 P4[3]
17 P4[16] - - -
Table 4. Pin allocation table TFBGA208
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 and Table 7 (EMC pins).
Ball Symbol Ball Symbol Ball Symbol Ball Symbol
Table 5. Pin allocation table TFBGA180
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 and Table 7 (EMC pins).
Ball Symbol Ball Symbol Ball Symbol Ball Symbol
Row A
5 P1[1] 6 P3[8] 7 P1[10] 8 P1[15]
9 P1[3] 10 VSSREG 11 P0[4] 12 P1[11]
13 P0[9] 14 P1[12] - -
Row B
1 JTAG_TDO (SWO) 2 P3[11] 3 P3[10] 4 VSS
5 P1[0] 6 P1[8] 7 P1[2] 8 P1[16]
9 P4[29] 10 P1[6] 11 P0[5] 12 P0[7]
13 P1[5] 14 P4[13] - -
Row C
1 P3[13] 2 JTAG_TMS (SWDIO) 3 JTAG_TDI 4 P5[4]
5 VDD(3V3) 6 P1[4] 7 P4[30] 8 P4[24]
9 P1[17] 10 P4[15] 11 VSS 12 P0[8]
13 P1[7] 14 P2[1] - -
Row D
1 P0[26] 2 JTAG_TCK
(SWDCLK)
3 P3[4] 4 JTAG_TRST
5 P0[2] 6 P3[0] 7 P1[9] 8 P1[14]
9 P4[25] 10 P4[28] 11 P0[6] 12 P2[0]
13 VSS 14 P1[13] - -
Row E
1 P0[24] 2 VDD(3V3) 3 P3[5] 4 P0[25]
5 P5[0] 6 P3[1] 7 P4[31] 8 P4[14]
9 VDD(REG)(3V3) 10 VDD(3V3) 11 P2[2] 12 VDD(3V3)
13 P2[3] 14 P2[4] - -
Row F
1 P3[14] 2 VDDA 3 VSSA 4 P3[6]
5 P0[23] 6 - 7 - 8 -
9 - 10 P4[12] 11 P4[11] 12 P2[5]LPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 39 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
13 P2[6] 14 P4[27] - -
Row G
1 VDD(REG)(3V3) 2 VREFP 3 P3[7] 4 P3[15]
5 P3[3] 6 - 7 - 8 -
9 - 10 P5[3] 11 P2[7] 12 P4[10]
13 VSS 14 P2[8] - -
Row H
1 P5[1] 2 RSTOUT 3 VSSREG 4 VSS
5 RTC_ALARM 6 - 7 - 8 -
9 - 10 P4[5] 11 P2[9] 12 P4[9]
13 P0[15] 14 P0[16] - -
Table 5. Pin allocation table TFBGA180
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 and Table 7 (EMC pins).
Ball Symbol Ball Symbol Ball Symbol Ball SymbolLPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 40 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
7. Functional description
7.1 Architectural overview
The ARM Cortex-M3 includes three AHB-Lite buses: the system bus, the I-code bus, and
the D-code bus. The I-code and D-code core buses are faster than the system bus and
are used similarly to Tightly Coupled Memory (TCM) interfaces: one bus dedicated for
instruction fetch (I-code) and one bus for data access (D-code). The use of two core
buses allows for simultaneous operations if concurrent operations target different devices.
Row J
1 RESET 2 RTCX1 3 RTCX2 4 P0[12]
5 P0[13] 6 - 7 - 8 -
9 - 10 P0[19] 11 P4[8] 12 P0[17]
13 P0[18] 14 VDD(3V3) - -
Row K
1 VBAT 2 P1[31] 3 P1[30] 4 XTAL2
5 P0[29] 6 P1[20] 7 P3[26] 8 VDD(3V3)
9 P4[3] 10 P4[6] 11 P0[21] 12 P4[7]
13 P4[26] 14 P0[20] - -
Row L
1 P2[29] 2 XTAL1 3 P0[27] 4 VDD(3V3)
5 P1[18] 6 P4[0] 7 P1[25] 8 VSSREG
9 VSS 10 P0[10] 11 VDD(3V3) 12 P5[2]
13 VSS 14 P0[22] - -
Row M
1 P0[28] 2 P2[28] 3 P3[25] 4 P3[23]
5 P0[14] 6 P1[22] 7 P4[1] 8 P4[2]
9 P1[27] 10 P0[0] 11 P2[13] 12 P2[11]
13 P2[10] 14 P4[19] - -
Row N
1 P0[31] 2 USB_D-2 3 P3[24] 4 P0[30]
5 P2[19] 6 P1[21] 7 P1[23] 8 P2[21]
9 VDD(REG)(3V3) 10 P1[29] 11 P0[1] 12 P4[16]
13 P4[17] 14 P2[12] - -
Row P
1 P2[24] 2 P2[25] 3 P2[18] 4 VSS
5 P1[19] 6 P2[20] 7 P1[24] 8 P1[26]
9 P2[16] 10 P1[28] 11 P2[17] 12 P0[11]
13 P4[4] 14 P4[18] - -
Table 5. Pin allocation table TFBGA180
Not all functions are available on all parts. See Table 2 and Table 7 (EMC pins).
Ball Symbol Ball Symbol Ball Symbol Ball SymbolLPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 41 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
The LPC178x/7x use a multi-layer AHB matrix to connect the ARM Cortex-M3 buses and
other bus masters to peripherals in a flexible manner that optimizes performance by
allowing peripherals that are on different slaves ports of the matrix to be accessed
simultaneously by different bus masters.
7.2 ARM Cortex-M3 processor
The ARM Cortex-M3 is a general purpose, 32-bit microprocessor, which offers high
performance and very low power consumption. The ARM Cortex-M3 offers many new
features, including a Thumb-2 instruction set, low interrupt latency, hardware division,
hardware single-cycle multiply, interruptable/continuable multiple load and store
instructions, automatic state save and restore for interrupts, tightly integrated interrupt
controller with wake-up interrupt controller, and multiple core buses capable of
simultaneous accesses.
Pipeline techniques are employed so that all parts of the processing and memory systems
can operate continuously. Typically, while one instruction is being executed, its successor
is being decoded, and a third instruction is being fetched from memory.
The ARM Cortex-M3 processor is described in detail in the Cortex-M3 Technical
Reference Manual that can be found on official ARM website.
7.3 On-chip flash program memory
The LPC178x/7x contain up to 512 kB of on-chip flash program memory. A new two-port
flash accelerator maximizes performance for use with the two fast AHB-Lite buses.
7.4 EEPROM
The LPC178x/7x contains up to 4032 byte of on-chip byte-erasable and
byte-programmable EEPROM data memory.
7.5 On-chip SRAM
The LPC178x/7x contain a total of up to 96 kB on-chip static RAM data memory. This
includes the main 64 kB SRAM, accessible by the CPU and DMA controller on a
higher-speed bus, and up to two additional 16 kB each SRAM blocks situated on a
separate slave port on the AHB multilayer matrix.
This architecture allows CPU and DMA accesses to be spread over three separate RAMs
that can be accessed simultaneously.
7.6 Memory Protection Unit (MPU)
The LPC178x/7x have a Memory Protection Unit (MPU) which can be used to improve the
reliability of an embedded system by protecting critical data within the user application.
The MPU allows separating processing tasks by disallowing access to each other's data,
disabling access to memory regions, allowing memory regions to be defined as read-only
and detecting unexpected memory accesses that could potentially break the system.LPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 42 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
The MPU separates the memory into distinct regions and implements protection by
preventing disallowed accesses. The MPU supports up to eight regions each of which can
be divided into eight subregions. Accesses to memory locations that are not defined in the
MPU regions, or not permitted by the region setting, will cause the Memory Management
Fault exception to take place.
7.7 Memory map
The LPC178x/7x incorporate several distinct memory regions, shown in the following
figures. Figure 6 shows the overall map of the entire address space from the user
program viewpoint following reset. The interrupt vector area supports address remapping.
The AHB peripheral area is 2 MB in size, and is divided to allow for up to 128 peripherals.
The APB peripheral area is 1 MB in size and is divided to allow for up to 64 peripherals.
Each peripheral of either type is allocated 16 kB of space. This allows simplifying the
address decoding for each peripheral.
Table 6. LPC178x/177x memory usage and details
Address range General Use Address range details and description
0x0000 0000 to
0x1FFF FFFF
On-chip non-volatile
memory
0x0000 0000 - 0x0007 FFFF For devices with 512 kB of flash memory.
0x0000 0000 - 0x0003 FFFF For devices with 256 kB of flash memory.
0x0000 0000 - 0x0001 FFFF For devices with 128 kB of flash memory.
0x0000 0000 - 0x0000 FFFF For devices with 64 kB of flash memory.
On-chip main SRAM 0x1000 0000 - 0x1000 FFFF For devices with 64 kB of main SRAM.
0x1000 0000 - 0x1000 7FFF For devices with 32 kB of main SRAM.
0x1000 0000 - 0x1000 3FFF For devices with 16 kB of main SRAM.
Boot ROM 0x1FFF 0000 - 0x1FFF 1FFF 8 kB Boot ROM with flash services.
0x2000 0000 to
0x3FFF FFFF
On-chip SRAM
(typically used for
peripheral data)
0x2000 0000 - 0x2000 1FFF Peripheral RAM - bank 0 (first 8 kB)
0x2000 2000 - 0x2000 3FFF Peripheral RAM - bank 0 (second 8 kB)
0x2000 4000 - 0x2000 7FFF Peripheral RAM - bank 1 (16 kB)
AHB peripherals 0x2008 0000 - 0x200B FFFF See Figure 6 for details
0x4000 0000 to
0x7FFF FFFF
APB Peripherals 0x4000 0000 - 0x4007 FFFF APB0 Peripherals, up to 32 peripheral blocks of
16 kB each.
0x4008 0000 - 0x400F FFFF APB1 Peripherals, up to 32 peripheral blocks of
16 kB each.
0x8000 0000 to
0xDFFF FFFF
Off-chip Memory via
the External Memory
Controller
Four static memory chip selects:
0x8000 0000 - 0x83FF FFFF Static memory chip select 0 (up to 64 MB)
0x9000 0000 - 0x93FF FFFF Static memory chip select 1 (up to 64 MB)
0x9800 0000 - 0x9BFF FFFF Static memory chip select 2 (up to 64 MB)
0x9C00 0000 - 0x9FFF FFFF Static memory chip select 3 (up to 64 MB)
Four dynamic memory chip selects:
0xA000 0000 - 0xAFFF FFFF Dynamic memory chip select 0 (up to 256MB)
0xB000 0000 - 0xBFFF FFFF Dynamic memory chip select 1 (up to 256MB)
0xC000 0000 - 0xCFFF FFFF Dynamic memory chip select 2 (up to 256MB)
0xD000 0000 - 0xDFFF FFFF Dynamic memory chip select 3 (up to 256MB)
0xE000 0000 to
0xE00F FFFF
Cortex-M3 Private
Peripheral Bus
0xE000 0000 - 0xE00F FFFF Cortex-M3 related functions, includes the NVIC
and System Tick Timer.xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
LPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 43 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller (1) Not available on all parts. See Table 2 and Table 6. Fig 6. LPC178x/7x memory map
0x4000 4000
0x4000 8000
0x4000 C000
0x4001 0000
0x4001 8000
0x4002 0000
0x4002 8000
0x4002 C000
0x4003 4000
0x4003 0000
0x4003 8000
0x4003 C000
0x4004 0000
0x4004 4000
0x4004 8000
0x4004 C000
0x4005 C000
0x4006 0000
0x4008 0000
0x4002 4000
0x4001 C000
0x4001 4000
0x4000 0000
APB1 peripherals
0x4008 0000
0x4008 8000
0x4008 C000
0x4009 0000
0x4009 4000
0x4009 8000
0x4009 C000
0x400A 0000
0x400A 4000
0x400A 8000
0x400A C000
0x400B 0000
0x400B 4000
0x400B 8000
0x400B C000
0x400C 0000
0x400F C000
0x4010 0000
SSP0
DAC
timer 2
timer 3
UART2
UART3
USART4(1)
I
2C2
1 - 0 reserved
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
SSP2
I
2S
11
12
reserved
motor control PWM
reserved
30 - 17 reserved
13
14
15
16
31 system control
reserved
reserved
64 kB main static RAM(1)
EMC 4 x static chip select(1)
EMC 4 x dynamic chip select(1)
reserved
private peripheral bus
0 GB 0x0000 0000
0.5 GB
4 GB
1 GB
0x1000 0000
0x1001 0000
0x1FFF 0000
0x2000 0000
0x2000 8000
0x2008 0000
0x2200 0000
0x200A 0000
0x2400 0000
0x2800 0000
0x4000 0000
0x4008 0000
0x4010 0000
0x4200 0000
0x4400 0000
0x8000 0000
0xA000 0000
0xE000 0000
0xE010 0000
0xFFFF FFFF
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
APB0 peripherals
0xE004 0000
AHB peripherals
APB1 peripherals
peripheral
SRAM bit-band alias addressing
peripheral bit-band alias addressing
16 kB peripheral SRAM1(1) 0x2000 4000
16 kB peripheral SRAM0(1)
LPC178x/7x
0x0008 0000
512 kB on-chip flash(1)
QEI(1)
SD/MMC(1)
APB0 peripherals
WWDT
timer 0
timer 1
UART0
UART1
reserved
reserved
CAN AF RAM
CAN common
CAN1
CAN2
CAN AF registers
PWM0
I
2C0
RTC/event recorder
+ backup registers
GPIO interrupts
pin connect
SSP1
ADC
22 - 19 reserved
I
2C1
31 - 24 reserved
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
23
PWM1
8 kB boot ROM
0x0000 0000
0x0000 0400
active interrupt vectors
+ 256 words
I-code/D-code
memory space
002aaf574
reserved 0x1FFF 2000
0x2900 0000 reserved
reserved
0x2008 0000
0x2008 4000
0x2008 8000
0x2008 C000
0x200A 0000
0x2009 C000
AHB peripherals
LCD(1)
USB(1)
Ethernet(1)
0 GPDMA controller
1
2
3
0x2009 0000 4 CRC engine
0x2009 4000 5
0x2009 8000 GPIO
EMC registers
6
7LPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 44 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
7.8 Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC)
The NVIC is an integral part of the Cortex-M3. The tight coupling to the CPU allows for low
interrupt latency and efficient processing of late arriving interrupts.
7.8.1 Features
• Controls system exceptions and peripheral interrupts.
• On the LPC178x/7x, the NVIC supports 40 vectored interrupts.
• 32 programmable interrupt priority levels, with hardware priority level masking.
• Relocatable vector table.
• Non-Maskable Interrupt (NMI).
• Software interrupt generation.
7.8.2 Interrupt sources
Each peripheral device has one interrupt line connected to the NVIC but may have several
interrupt flags. Individual interrupt flags may also represent more than one interrupt
source.
Any pin on port 0 and port 2 regardless of the selected function can be programmed to
generate an interrupt on a rising edge, a falling edge, or both.
7.9 Pin connect block
The pin connect block allows selected pins of the microcontroller to have more than one
function. Configuration registers control the multiplexers to allow connection between the
pin and the on-chip peripherals.
Peripherals should be connected to the appropriate pins prior to being activated and prior
to any related interrupt(s) being enabled. Activity of any enabled peripheral function that is
not mapped to a related pin should be considered undefined.
Most pins can also be configured as open-drain outputs or to have a pull-up, pull-down, or
no resistor enabled.
7.10 External memory controller
Remark: Supported memory size and type and EMC bus width vary for different parts
(see Table 2). The EMC pin configuration for each part is shown in Table 7.LPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 45 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
Table 7. External memory controller pin configuration
Part Data bus pins Address bus
pins
Control pins
SRAM SDRAM
LPC1788FBD208 EMC_D[31:0] EMC_A[25:0] EMC_BLS[3:0],
EMC_CS[3:0],
EMC_OE, EMC_WE
EMC_RAS, EMC_CAS, EMC_DYCS[3:0],
EMC_CLK[1:0], EMC_CKE[3:0],
EMC_DQM[3:0]
LPC1788FET208 EMC_D[31:0] EMC_A[25:0] EMC_BLS[3:0],
EMC_CS[3:0],
EMC_OE, EMC_WE
EMC_RAS, EMC_CAS, EMC_DYCS[3:0],
EMC_CLK[1:0], EMC_CKE[3:0],
EMC_DQM[3:0]
LPC1788FET180 EMC_D[15:0] EMC_A[19:0] EMC_BLS[1:0],
EMC_CS[1:0],
EMC_OE, EMC_WE
EMC_RAS, EMC_CAS, EMC_DYCS[1:0],
EMC_CLK[1:0], EMC_CKE[1:0],
EMC_DQM[1:0]
LPC1788FBD144 EMC_D[7:0] EMC_A[15:0] EMC_BLS[3:2],
EMC_CS[1:0],
EMC_OE, EMC_WE
not available
LPC1787FBD208 EMC_D[31:0] EMC_A[25:0] EMC_BLS[3:0],
EMC_CS_[3:0],
EMC_OE, EMC_WE
EMC_RAS, EMC_CAS, EMC_DYCS[3:0],
EMC_CLK[1:0], EMC_CKE[3:0],
EMC_DQM[3:0]
LPC1786FBD208 EMC_D[31:0] EMC_A[25:0] EMC_BLS[3:0],
EMC_CS[3:0],
EMC_OE, EMC_WE
EMC_RAS, EMC_CAS, EMC_DYCS[3:0],
EMC_CLK[1:0], EMC_CKE[3:0],
EMC_DQM[3:0]
LPC1785FBD208 EMC_D[31:0] EMC_A[25:0] EMC_BLS[3:0],
EMC_CS[3:0],
EMC_OE, EMC_WE
EMC_RAS, EMC_CAS, EMC_DYCS[3:0],
EMC_CLK[1:0], EMC_CKE[3:0],
EMC_DQM[3:0]
LPC1778FBD208 EMC_D[31:0] EMC_A[25:0] EMC_BLS[3:0],
EMC_CS[3:0],
EMC_OE, EMC_WE
EMC_RAS, EMC_CAS, EMC_DYCS[3:0],
EMC_CLK[1:0], EMC_CKE[3:0],
EMC_DQM[3:0]
LPC1778FET208 EMC_D[31:0] EMC_A[25:0] EMC_BLS[3:0],
EMC_CS[3:0],
EMC_OE, EMC_WE
EMC_RAS, EMC_CAS, EMC_DYCS[3:0],
EMC_CLK[1:0], EMC_CKE[3:0],
EMC_DQM[3:0]
LPC1778FET180 EMC_D[15:0] EMC_A[19:0] EMC_BLS[1:0],
EMC_CS[1:0],
EMC_OE, EMC_WE
EMC_RAS, EMC_CAS, EMC_DYCS[1:0],
EMC_CLK[1:0], EMC_CKE[1:0],
EMC_DQM[1:0]
LPC1778FBD144 EMC_D[7:0] EMC_A[15:0] EMC_CS[1:0],
EMC_OE, EMC_WE
not available
LPC1777FBD208 EMC_D[31:0] EMC_A[25:0] EMC_BLS[3:0],
EMC_CS[3:0],
EMC_OE, EMC_WE
EMC_RAS, EMC_CAS, EMC_DYCS[3:0],
EMC_CLK[1:0], EMC_CKE[3:0],
EMC_DQM[3:0]
LPC1776FBD208 EMC_D[31:0] EMC_A[25:0] EMC_BLS[3:0],
EMC_CS[3:0],
EMC_OE, EMC_WE
EMC_RAS, EMC_CAS, EMC_DYCS[3:0],
EMC_CLK[1:0], EMC_CKE[3:0],
EMC_DQM[3:0]
LPC1776FET180 EMC_D[15:0] EMC_A[19:0] EMC_BLS[3:0],
EMC_CS[3:0],
EMC_OE, EMC_WE
EMC_RAS, EMC_CAS, EMC_DYCS[1:0],
EMC_CLK[1:0], EMC_CKE[1:0],
EMC_DQM[1:0]
LPC1774FBD208 EMC_D[31:0] EMC_A[25:0] EMC_BLS[3:0],
EMC_CS[3:0],
EMC_OE, EMC_WE
EMC_RAS, EMC_CAS, EMC_DYCS[3:0],
EMC_CLK[1:0], EMC_CKE[3:0],
EMC_DQM[3:0]
LPC1774FBD144 EMC_D[7:0] EMC_A[15:0] EMC_CS[1:0],
EMC_OE, EMC_WE
not availableLPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 46 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
The LPC178x/7x EMC is an ARM PrimeCell MultiPort Memory Controller peripheral
offering support for asynchronous static memory devices such as RAM, ROM, and flash.
In addition, it can be used as an interface with off-chip memory-mapped devices and
peripherals. The EMC is an Advanced Microcontroller Bus Architecture (AMBA) compliant
peripheral.
See Table 6 for EMC memory access.
7.10.1 Features
• Dynamic memory interface support including single data rate SDRAM.
• Asynchronous static memory device support including RAM, ROM, and flash, with or
without asynchronous page mode.
• Low transaction latency.
• Read and write buffers to reduce latency and to improve performance.
• 8/16/32 data and 16/20/26 address lines wide static memory support.
• 16 bit and 32 bit wide chip select SDRAM memory support.
• Static memory features include:
– Asynchronous page mode read.
– Programmable Wait States.
– Bus turnaround delay.
– Output enable and write enable delays.
– Extended wait.
• Four chip selects for synchronous memory and four chip selects for static memory
devices.
• Power-saving modes dynamically control EMC_CKE and EMC_CLK outputs to
SDRAMs.
• Dynamic memory self-refresh mode controlled by software.
• Controller supports 2048 (A0 to A10), 4096 (A0 to A11), and 8192 (A0 to A12) row
address synchronous memory parts. That is typical 512 MB, 256 MB, and 128 MB
parts, with 4, 8, 16, or 32 data bits per device.
• Separate reset domains allow the for auto-refresh through a chip reset if desired.
Note: Synchronous static memory devices (synchronous burst mode) are not supported.
7.11 General purpose DMA controller
The GPDMA is an AMBA AHB compliant peripheral allowing selected peripherals to have
DMA support.
The GPDMA enables peripheral-to-memory, memory-to-peripheral,
peripheral-to-peripheral, and memory-to-memory transactions. The source and
destination areas can each be either a memory region or a peripheral and can be
accessed through the AHB master. The GPDMA controller allows data transfers between
the various on-chip SRAM areas and supports the SD/MMC card interface, all SSPs, the
I
2S, all UARTs, the A/D Converter, and the D/A Converter peripherals. DMA can also be
triggered by selected timer match conditions. Memory-to-memory transfers and transfers
to or from GPIO are supported. LPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 47 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
7.11.1 Features
• Eight DMA channels. Each channel can support an unidirectional transfer.
• 16 DMA request lines.
• Single DMA and burst DMA request signals. Each peripheral connected to the DMA
Controller can assert either a burst DMA request or a single DMA request. The DMA
burst size is set by programming the DMA Controller.
• Memory-to-memory, memory-to-peripheral, peripheral-to-memory, and
peripheral-to-peripheral transfers are supported.
• Scatter or gather DMA is supported through the use of linked lists. This means that
the source and destination areas do not have to occupy contiguous areas of memory.
• Hardware DMA channel priority.
• AHB slave DMA programming interface. The DMA Controller is programmed by
writing to the DMA control registers over the AHB slave interface.
• One AHB bus master for transferring data. The interface transfers data when a DMA
request goes active.
• 32-bit AHB master bus width.
• Incrementing or non-incrementing addressing for source and destination.
• Programmable DMA burst size. The DMA burst size can be programmed to more
efficiently transfer data.
• Internal four-word FIFO per channel.
• Supports 8, 16, and 32-bit wide transactions.
• Big-endian and little-endian support. The DMA Controller defaults to little-endian
mode on reset.
• An interrupt to the processor can be generated on a DMA completion or when a DMA
error has occurred.
• Raw interrupt status. The DMA error and DMA count raw interrupt status can be read
prior to masking.
7.12 CRC engine
The Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) generator with programmable polynomial settings
supports several CRC standards commonly used. To save system power and bus
bandwidth, the CRC engine supports DMA transfers.
7.12.1 Features
• Supports three common polynomials CRC-CCITT, CRC-16, and CRC-32.
– CRC-CCITT: x16 + x12 + x5 + 1
– CRC-16: x16 + x15 + x2 + 1
– CRC-32: x32 + x26 + x23 + x22 + x16 + x12 + x11 + x10 + x8 + x7 + x5 + x4 + x2 + x + 1
• Bit order reverse and 1’s complement programmable setting for input data and CRC
sum.
• Programmable seed number setting.
• Supports CPU PIO or DMA back-to-back transfer.LPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 48 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
• Accept any size of data width per write: 8, 16 or 32-bit.
– 8-bit write: 1-cycle operation.
– 16-bit write: 2-cycle operation (8-bit x 2-cycle).
– 32-bit write: 4-cycle operation (8-bit x 4-cycle).
7.13 LCD controller
Remark: The LCD controller is available on parts LPC1788/87/86/85.
The LCD controller provides all of the necessary control signals to interface directly to a
variety of color and monochrome LCD panels. Both STN (single and dual panel) and TFT
panels can be operated. The display resolution is selectable and can be up to 1024 768
pixels. Several color modes are provided, up to a 24-bit true-color non-palettized mode.
An on-chip 512-byte color palette allows reducing bus utilization (i.e. memory size of the
displayed data) while still supporting a large number of colors.
The LCD interface includes its own DMA controller to allow it to operate independently of
the CPU and other system functions. A built-in FIFO acts as a buffer for display data,
providing flexibility for system timing. Hardware cursor support can further reduce the
amount of CPU time needed to operate the display.
7.13.1 Features
• AHB master interface to access frame buffer.
• Setup and control via a separate AHB slave interface.
• Dual 16-deep programmable 64-bit wide FIFOs for buffering incoming display data.
• Supports single and dual-panel monochrome Super Twisted Nematic (STN) displays
with 4-bit or 8-bit interfaces.
• Supports single and dual-panel color STN displays.
• Supports Thin Film Transistor (TFT) color displays.
• Programmable display resolution including, but not limited to: 320 200, 320 240,
640 200, 640 240, 640 480, 800 600, and 1024 768.
• Hardware cursor support for single-panel displays.
• 15 gray-level monochrome, 3375 color STN, and 32 K color palettized TFT support.
• 1, 2, or 4 bits-per-pixel (bpp) palettized displays for monochrome STN.
• 1, 2, 4, or 8 bpp palettized color displays for color STN and TFT.
• 16 bpp true-color non-palettized, for color STN and TFT.
• 24 bpp true-color non-palettized, for color TFT.
• Programmable timing for different display panels.
• 256 entry, 16-bit palette RAM, arranged as a 128 32-bit RAM.
• Frame, line, and pixel clock signals.
• AC bias signal for STN, data enable signal for TFT panels.
• Supports little and big-endian, and Windows CE data formats.
• LCD panel clock may be generated from the peripheral clock, or from a clock input
pin.LPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 49 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
7.14 Ethernet
Remark: The Ethernet block is available on parts LPC1788/86 and LPC1778/76.
The Ethernet block contains a full featured 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s Ethernet MAC
designed to provide optimized performance through the use of DMA hardware
acceleration. Features include a generous suite of control registers, half or full duplex
operation, flow control, control frames, hardware acceleration for transmit retry, receive
packet filtering and wake-up on LAN activity. Automatic frame transmission and reception
with scatter-gather DMA off-loads many operations from the CPU.
The Ethernet block and the CPU share the ARM Cortex-M3 D-code and system bus
through the AHB-multilayer matrix to access the various on-chip SRAM blocks for
Ethernet data, control, and status information.
The Ethernet block interfaces between an off-chip Ethernet PHY using the Media
Independent Interface (MII) or Reduced MII (RMII) protocol and the on-chip Media
Independent Interface Management (MIIM) serial bus.
7.14.1 Features
• Ethernet standards support:
– Supports 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s PHY devices including 10 Base-T, 100 Base-TX,
100 Base-FX, and 100 Base-T4.
– Fully compliant with IEEE standard 802.3.
– Fully compliant with 802.3x Full Duplex Flow Control and Half Duplex back
pressure.
– Flexible transmit and receive frame options.
– Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) frame support
– .
• Memory management:
– Independent transmit and receive buffers memory mapped to shared SRAM.
– DMA managers with scatter/gather DMA and arrays of frame descriptors.
– Memory traffic optimized by buffering and pre-fetching.
• Enhanced Ethernet features:
– Receive filtering.
– Multicast and broadcast frame support for both transmit and receive.
– Optional automatic Frame Check Sequence (FCS) insertion with Circular
Redundancy Check (CRC) for transmit.
– Selectable automatic transmit frame padding.
– Over-length frame support for both transmit and receive allows any length frames.
– Promiscuous receive mode.
– Automatic collision back-off and frame retransmission.
– Includes power management by clock switching.
– Wake-on-LAN power management support allows system wake-up: using the
receive filters or a magic frame detection filter.LPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 50 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
• Physical interface:
– Attachment of external PHY chip through standard MII or RMII interface.
– PHY register access is available via the MIIM interface.
7.15 USB interface
Remark: The USB Device/Host/OTG controller is available on parts LPC1788/87/86/85
and LPC1778/77/76. The USB Device-only controller is available on parts LPC1774.
The Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a 4-wire bus that supports communication between a
host and one or more (up to 127) peripherals. The host controller allocates the USB
bandwidth to attached devices through a token-based protocol. The bus supports hot
plugging and dynamic configuration of the devices. All transactions are initiated by the
host controller.
Details on typical USB interfacing solutions can be found in Section 14.1.
7.15.1 USB device controller
The device controller enables 12 Mbit/s data exchange with a USB host controller. It
consists of a register interface, serial interface engine, endpoint buffer memory, and a
DMA controller. The serial interface engine decodes the USB data stream and writes data
to the appropriate endpoint buffer. The status of a completed USB transfer or error
condition is indicated via status registers. An interrupt is also generated if enabled. When
enabled, the DMA controller transfers data between the endpoint buffer and the USB
RAM.
7.15.1.1 Features
• Fully compliant with USB 2.0 Specification (full speed).
• Supports 32 physical (16 logical) endpoints with a 4 kB endpoint buffer RAM.
• Supports Control, Bulk, Interrupt and Isochronous endpoints.
• Scalable realization of endpoints at run time.
• Endpoint Maximum packet size selection (up to USB maximum specification) by
software at run time.
• Supports SoftConnect and GoodLink features.
• While USB is in the Suspend mode, the LPC178x/7x can enter one of the reduced
power modes and wake up on USB activity.
• Supports DMA transfers with all on-chip SRAM blocks on all non-control endpoints.
• Allows dynamic switching between CPU-controlled and DMA modes.
• Double buffer implementation for Bulk and Isochronous endpoints.
7.15.2 USB host controller
The host controller enables full- and low-speed data exchange with USB devices attached
to the bus. It consists of register interface, serial interface engine and DMA controller. The
register interface complies with the Open Host Controller Interface (OHCI) specification.
7.15.2.1 Features
• OHCI compliant.LPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 51 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
• Two downstream ports.
• Supports per-port power switching.
7.15.3 USB OTG controller
USB OTG is a supplement to the USB 2.0 Specification that augments the capability of
existing mobile devices and USB peripherals by adding host functionality for connection to
USB peripherals.
The OTG Controller integrates the host controller, device controller, and a master-only I2C
interface to implement OTG dual-role device functionality. The dedicated I2C interface
controls an external OTG transceiver.
7.15.3.1 Features
• Fully compliant with On-The-Go supplement to the USB 2.0 Specification, Revision
1.0a.
• Hardware support for Host Negotiation Protocol (HNP).
• Includes a programmable timer required for HNP and Session Request Protocol
(SRP).
• Supports any OTG transceiver compliant with the OTG Transceiver Specification
(CEA-2011), Rev. 1.0.
7.16 SD/MMC card interface
Remark: The SD/MMC card interface is available on parts LPC1788/87/86/85 and parts
LPC1778/77/76.
The Secure Digital and Multimedia Card Interface (MCI) allows access to external SD
memory cards. The SD card interface conforms to the SD Multimedia Card Specification
Version 2.11.
7.16.1 Features
• The MCI provides all functions specific to the SD/MMC memory card. These include
the clock generation unit, power management control, and command and data
transfer.
• Conforms to Multimedia Card Specification v2.11.
• Conforms to Secure Digital Memory Card Physical Layer Specification, v0.96.
• Can be used as a multimedia card bus or a secure digital memory card bus host. The
SD/MMC can be connected to several multimedia cards or a single secure digital
memory card.
• DMA supported through the GPDMA controller.
7.17 Fast general purpose parallel I/O
Device pins that are not connected to a specific peripheral function are controlled by the
GPIO registers. Pins may be dynamically configured as inputs or outputs. Separate
registers allow setting or clearing any number of outputs simultaneously. The value of the
output register may be read back as well as the current state of the port pins.
LPC178x/7x use accelerated GPIO functions:LPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 52 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
• GPIO registers are accessed through the AHB multilayer bus so that the fastest
possible I/O timing can be achieved.
• Mask registers allow treating sets of port bits as a group, leaving other bits
unchanged.
• All GPIO registers are byte and half-word addressable.
• Entire port value can be written in one instruction.
• Support for Cortex-M3 bit banding.
• Support for use with the GPDMA controller.
Additionally, any pin on Port 0 and Port 2 providing a digital function can be programmed
to generate an interrupt on a rising edge, a falling edge, or both. The edge detection is
asynchronous, so it may operate when clocks are not present such as during Power-down
mode. Each enabled interrupt can be used to wake up the chip from Power-down mode.
7.17.1 Features
• Bit level set and clear registers allow a single instruction to set or clear any number of
bits in one port.
• Direction control of individual bits.
• All I/O default to inputs after reset.
• Pull-up/pull-down resistor configuration and open-drain configuration can be
programmed through the pin connect block for each GPIO pin.
7.18 12-bit ADC
The LPC178x/7x contain one ADC. It is a single 12-bit successive approximation ADC
with eight channels and DMA support.
7.18.1 Features
• 12-bit successive approximation ADC.
• Input multiplexing among eight pins.
• Power-down mode.
• Measurement range VSS to VREFP.
• 12-bit conversion rate: up to 400 kHz.
• Individual channels can be selected for conversion.
• Burst conversion mode for single or multiple inputs.
• Optional conversion on transition of input pin or Timer Match signal.
• Individual result registers for each ADC channel to reduce interrupt overhead.
• DMA support.
7.19 10-bit DAC
The LPC178x/7x contain one DAC. The DAC allows to generate a variable analog output.
The maximum output value of the DAC is VREFP.LPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 53 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
7.19.1 Features
• 10-bit DAC.
• Resistor string architecture.
• Buffered output.
• Power-down mode.
• Selectable output drive.
• Dedicated conversion timer.
• DMA support.
7.20 UARTs
Remark: USART4 is not available on part LPC1774FBD144.
The LPC178x/7x contain five UARTs. In addition to standard transmit and receive data
lines, UART1 also provides a full modem control handshake interface and support for
RS-485/9-bit mode allowing both software address detection and automatic address
detection using 9-bit mode.
The UARTs include a fractional baud rate generator. Standard baud rates such as
115200 Bd can be achieved with any crystal frequency above 2 MHz.
7.20.1 Features
• Maximum UART data bit rate of 7.5 MBit/s.
• 16 B Receive and Transmit FIFOs.
• Register locations conform to 16C550 industry standard.
• Receiver FIFO trigger points at 1 B, 4 B, 8 B, and 14 B.
• Built-in fractional baud rate generator covering wide range of baud rates without a
need for external crystals of particular values.
• Auto-baud capability.
• Fractional divider for baud rate control, auto baud capabilities and FIFO control
mechanism that enables software flow control implementation.
• Support for RS-485/9-bit/EIA-485 mode and multiprocessor addressing.
• All UARTs have DMA support for both transmit and receive.
• UART1 equipped with standard modem interface signals. This module also provides
full support for hardware flow control (auto-CTS/RTS).
• USART4 includes an IrDA mode to support infrared communication.
• USART4 supports synchronous mode and a smart card mode conforming to
ISO7816-3.
7.21 SSP serial I/O controller
The LPC178x/7x contain three SSP controllers. The SSP controller is capable of
operation on a SPI, 4-wire SSI, or Microwire bus. It can interact with multiple masters and
slaves on the bus. Only a single master and a single slave can communicate on the bus LPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 54 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
during a given data transfer. The SSP supports full duplex transfers, with frames of 4 bits
to 16 bits of data flowing from the master to the slave and from the slave to the master. In
practice, often only one of these data flows carries meaningful data.
7.21.1 Features
• Maximum SSP speed of 33 Mbit/s (master) or 10 Mbit/s (slave).
• Compatible with Motorola SPI, 4-wire Texas Instruments SSI, and National
Semiconductor Microwire buses.
• Synchronous serial communication.
• Master or slave operation.
• 8-frame FIFOs for both transmit and receive.
• 4-bit to 16-bit frame.
• DMA transfers supported by GPDMA.
7.22 I2C-bus serial I/O controllers
The LPC178x/7x contain three I2C-bus controllers.
The I2C-bus is bidirectional for inter-IC control using only two wires: a Serial Clock Line
(SCL) and a Serial Data Line (SDA). Each device is recognized by a unique address and
can operate as either a receiver-only device (e.g., an LCD driver) or a transmitter with the
capability to both receive and send information (such as memory). Transmitters and/or
receivers can operate in either master or slave mode, depending on whether the chip has
to initiate a data transfer or is only addressed. The I2C is a multi-master bus and can be
controlled by more than one bus master connected to it.
7.22.1 Features
• All I2C-bus controllers can use standard GPIO pins with bit rates of up to 400 kbit/s
(Fast I2C-bus). The I2C0-bus interface uses special open-drain pins with bit rates of
up to 400 kbit/s.
• The I2C-bus interface supports Fast-mode Plus with bit rates up to 1 Mbit/s for I2C0
using pins P5[2] and P5[3].
• Easy to configure as master, slave, or master/slave.
• Programmable clocks allow versatile rate control.
• Bidirectional data transfer between masters and slaves.
• Multi-master bus (no central master).
• Arbitration between simultaneously transmitting masters without corruption of serial
data on the bus.
• Serial clock synchronization allows devices with different bit rates to communicate via
one serial bus.
• Serial clock synchronization can be used as a handshake mechanism to suspend and
resume serial transfer.
• The I2C-bus can be used for test and diagnostic purposes.
• Both I2C-bus controllers support multiple address recognition and a bus monitor
mode.LPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 55 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
7.23 I2S-bus serial I/O controllers
The LPC178x/7x contain one I2S-bus interface. The I2S-bus provides a standard
communication interface for digital audio applications.
The I2S-bus specification defines a 3-wire serial bus using one data line, one clock line,
and one word select signal. The basic I2S connection has one master, which is always the
master, and one slave. The I2S interface on the LPC178x/7x provides a separate transmit
and receive channel, each of which can operate as either a master or a slave.
7.23.1 Features
• The interface has separate input/output channels each of which can operate in master
or slave mode.
• Capable of handling 8-bit, 16-bit, and 32-bit word sizes.
• Mono and stereo audio data supported.
• The sampling frequency can range from 16 kHz to 48 kHz (16, 22.05, 32, 44.1,
48) kHz.
• Configurable word select period in master mode (separately for I2S input and output).
• Two 8 word FIFO data buffers are provided, one for transmit and one for receive.
• Generates interrupt requests when buffer levels cross a programmable boundary.
• Two DMA requests, controlled by programmable buffer levels. These are connected
to the GPDMA block.
• Controls include reset, stop and mute options separately for I2S input and I2S output.
7.24 CAN controller and acceptance filters
The LPC178x/7x contain one CAN controller with two channels.
The Controller Area Network (CAN) is a serial communications protocol which efficiently
supports distributed real-time control with a very high level of security. Its domain of
application ranges from high-speed networks to low cost multiplex wiring.
The CAN block is intended to support multiple CAN buses simultaneously, allowing the
device to be used as a gateway, switch, or router between two of CAN buses in industrial
or automotive applications.
Each CAN controller has a register structure similar to the NXP SJA1000 and the PeliCAN
Library block, but the 8-bit registers of those devices have been combined in 32-bit words
to allow simultaneous access in the ARM environment. The main operational difference is
that the recognition of received Identifiers, known in CAN terminology as Acceptance
Filtering, has been removed from the CAN controllers and centralized in a global
Acceptance Filter.
7.24.1 Features
• Two CAN controllers and buses.
• Data rates to 1 Mbit/s on each bus.
• 32-bit register and RAM access.
• Compatible with CAN specification 2.0B, ISO 11898-1.LPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 56 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
• Global Acceptance Filter recognizes 11-bit and 29-bit receive identifiers for all CAN
buses.
• Acceptance Filter can provide FullCAN-style automatic reception for selected
Standard Identifiers.
• FullCAN messages can generate interrupts.
7.25 General purpose 32-bit timers/external event counters
The LPC178x/7x include four 32-bit timer/counters.
The timer/counter is designed to count cycles of the system derived clock or an
externally-supplied clock. It can optionally generate interrupts, generate timed DMA
requests, or perform other actions at specified timer values, based on four match
registers. Each timer/counter also includes two capture inputs to trap the timer value when
an input signal transitions, optionally generating an interrupt.
7.25.1 Features
• A 32-bit timer/counter with a programmable 32-bit prescaler.
• Counter or timer operation.
• Two 32-bit capture channels per timer, that can take a snapshot of the timer value
when an input signal transitions. A capture event may also generate an interrupt.
• Four 32-bit match registers that allow:
– Continuous operation with optional interrupt generation on match.
– Stop timer on match with optional interrupt generation.
– Reset timer on match with optional interrupt generation.
• Up to four external outputs corresponding to match registers, with the following
capabilities:
– Set LOW on match.
– Set HIGH on match.
– Toggle on match.
– Do nothing on match.
• Up to two match registers can be used to generate timed DMA requests.
7.26 Pulse Width Modulator (PWM)
The LPC178x/7x contain two standard PWMs.
The PWM is based on the standard Timer block and inherits all of its features, although
only the PWM function is pinned out on the LPC178x/7x. The Timer is designed to count
cycles of the system derived clock and optionally switch pins, generate interrupts or
perform other actions when specified timer values occur, based on seven match registers.
The PWM function is in addition to these features, and is based on match register events.
The ability to separately control rising and falling edge locations allows the PWM to be
used for more applications. For instance, multi-phase motor control typically requires
three non-overlapping PWM outputs with individual control of all three pulse widths and
positions.LPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 57 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
Two match registers can be used to provide a single edge controlled PWM output. One
match register (PWMMR0) controls the PWM cycle rate, by resetting the count upon
match. The other match register controls the PWM edge position. Additional single edge
controlled PWM outputs require only one match register each, since the repetition rate is
the same for all PWM outputs. Multiple single edge controlled PWM outputs will all have a
rising edge at the beginning of each PWM cycle, when an PWMMR0 match occurs.
Three match registers can be used to provide a PWM output with both edges controlled.
Again, the PWMMR0 match register controls the PWM cycle rate. The other match
registers control the two PWM edge positions. Additional double edge controlled PWM
outputs require only two match registers each, since the repetition rate is the same for all
PWM outputs.
With double edge controlled PWM outputs, specific match registers control the rising and
falling edge of the output. This allows both positive going PWM pulses (when the rising
edge occurs prior to the falling edge), and negative going PWM pulses (when the falling
edge occurs prior to the rising edge).
7.26.1 Features
• LPC178x/7x has two PWM blocks with Counter or Timer operation (may use the
peripheral clock or one of the capture inputs as the clock source).
• Seven match registers allow up to 6 single edge controlled or 3 double edge
controlled PWM outputs, or a mix of both types. The match registers also allow:
– Continuous operation with optional interrupt generation on match.
– Stop timer on match with optional interrupt generation.
– Reset timer on match with optional interrupt generation.
• Supports single edge controlled and/or double edge controlled PWM outputs. Single
edge controlled PWM outputs all go high at the beginning of each cycle unless the
output is a constant low. Double edge controlled PWM outputs can have either edge
occur at any position within a cycle. This allows for both positive going and negative
going pulses.
• Pulse period and width can be any number of timer counts. This allows complete
flexibility in the trade-off between resolution and repetition rate. All PWM outputs will
occur at the same repetition rate.
• Double edge controlled PWM outputs can be programmed to be either positive going
or negative going pulses.
• Match register updates are synchronized with pulse outputs to prevent generation of
erroneous pulses. Software must ‘release’ new match values before they can become
effective.
• May be used as a standard 32-bit timer/counter with a programmable 32-bit prescaler
if the PWM mode is not enabled.
7.27 Motor control PWM
The LPC178x/7x contain one motor control PWM.
The motor control PWM is a specialized PWM supporting 3-phase motors and other
combinations. Feedback inputs are provided to automatically sense rotor position and use
that information to ramp speed up or down. An abort input is also provided that causes the LPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 58 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
PWM to immediately release all motor drive outputs. At the same time, the motor control
PWM is highly configurable for other generalized timing, counting, capture, and compare
applications.
The maximum PWM speed is determined by the PWM resolution (n) and the operating
frequency f: PWM speed = f/2n (see Table 8).
7.28 Quadrature Encoder Interface (QEI)
Remark: The QEI is available on parts LPC1788/87/86 and LPC1778/77/76
A quadrature encoder, also known as a 2-channel incremental encoder, converts angular
displacement into two pulse signals. By monitoring both the number of pulses and the
relative phase of the two signals, the user can track the position, direction of rotation, and
velocity. In addition, a third channel, or index signal, can be used to reset the position
counter. The quadrature encoder interface decodes the digital pulses from a quadrature
encoder wheel to integrate position over time and determine direction of rotation. In
addition, the QEI can capture the velocity of the encoder wheel.
7.28.1 Features
• Tracks encoder position.
• Increments/decrements depending on direction.
• Programmable for 2 or 4 position counting.
• Velocity capture using built-in timer.
• Velocity compare function with “less than” interrupt.
• Uses 32-bit registers for position and velocity.
• Three position compare registers with interrupts.
• Index counter for revolution counting.
• Index compare register with interrupts.
• Can combine index and position interrupts to produce an interrupt for whole and
partial revolution displacement.
• Digital filter with programmable delays for encoder input signals.
• Can accept decoded signal inputs (clk and direction).
• Connected to APB.
7.29 ARM Cortex-M3 system tick timer
The ARM Cortex-M3 includes a system tick timer (SYSTICK) that is intended to generate
a dedicated SYSTICK exception at a 10 ms interval. In the LPC178x/7x, this timer can be
clocked from the internal AHB clock or from a device pin.
Table 8. PWM speed at operating frequency 120 MHz
PWM resolution PWM speed
6 bit 1.875 MHz
8 bit 0.468 MHz
10 bit 0.117 MHzLPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 59 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
7.30 Windowed WatchDog Timer (WWDT)
The purpose of the watchdog is to reset the controller if software fails to periodically
service it within a programmable time window.
7.30.1 Features
• Internally resets chip if not periodically reloaded during the programmable time-out
period.
• Optional windowed operation requires reload to occur between a minimum and
maximum time period, both programmable.
• Optional warning interrupt can be generated at a programmable time prior to
watchdog time-out.
• Enabled by software but requires a hardware reset or a watchdog reset/interrupt to be
disabled.
• Incorrect feed sequence causes reset or interrupt if enabled.
• Flag to indicate watchdog reset.
• Programmable 24-bit timer with internal prescaler.
• Selectable time period from (Tcy(WDCLK) 256 4) to (Tcy(WDCLK) 224 4) in
multiples of Tcy(WDCLK) 4.
• The Watchdog Clock (WDCLK) source is a dedicated watchdog oscillator, which is
always running if the watchdog timer is enabled.
7.31 RTC and backup registers
The RTC is a set of counters for measuring time when system power is on, and optionally
when it is off. The RTC on the LPC178x/7x is designed to have very low power
consumption. The RTC will typically run from the main chip power supply conserving
battery power while the rest of the device is powered up. When operating from a battery,
the RTC will continue working down to 2.1 V. Battery power can be provided from a
standard 3 V lithium button cell.
An ultra-low power 32 kHz oscillator provides a 1 Hz clock to the time counting portion of
the RTC, moving most of the power consumption out of the time counting function.
The RTC includes a calibration mechanism to allow fine-tuning the count rate in a way
that will provide less than 1 second per day error when operated at a constant voltage and
temperature.
The RTC contains a small set of backup registers (20 bytes) for holding data while the
main part of the LPC178x/7x is powered off.
The RTC includes an alarm function that can wake up the LPC178x/7x from all reduced
power modes with a time resolution of 1 s.
7.31.1 Features
• Measures the passage of time to maintain a calendar and clock.
• Ultra low power design to support battery powered systems.
• Provides Seconds, Minutes, Hours, Day of Month, Month, Year, Day of Week, and
Day of Year.LPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 60 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
• Dedicated power supply pin can be connected to a battery or to the main 3.3 V.
• Periodic interrupts can be generated from increments of any field of the time registers.
• Backup registers (20 bytes) powered by VBAT.
• RTC power supply is isolated from the rest of the chip.
7.32 Event monitor/recorder
The event monitor/recorder allows recording of tampering events in sealed product
enclosures. Sensors report any attempt to open the enclosure, or to tamper with the
device in any other way. The event monitor/recorder stores records of such events when
the device is powered only by the backup battery.
7.32.1 Features
• Supports three digital event inputs in the VBAT power domain.
• An event is defined as a level change at the digital event inputs.
• For each event channel, two timestamps mark the first and the last occurrence of an
event. Each channel also has a dedicated counter tracking the total number of events.
Timestamp values are taken from the RTC.
• Runs in VBAT power domain, independent of system power supply. The
event/recorder/monitor can therefore operate in Deep power-down mode.
• Very low power consumption.
• Interrupt available if system is running.
• A qualified event can be used as a wake-up trigger.
• State of event interrupts accessible by software through GPIO.
7.33 Clocking and power control
7.33.1 Crystal oscillators
The LPC178x/7x include four independent oscillators. These are the main oscillator, the
IRC oscillator, the watchdog oscillator, and the RTC oscillator.
Following reset, the LPC178x/7x will operate from the Internal RC oscillator until switched
by software. This allows systems to operate without any external crystal and the boot
loader code to operate at a known frequency.
See Figure 7 for an overview of the LPC178x/7x clock generation.LPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 61 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
7.33.1.1 Internal RC oscillator
The IRC may be used as the clock that drives the PLL and subsequently the CPU. The
nominal IRC frequency is 12 MHz. The IRC is trimmed to 1 % accuracy over the entire
voltage and temperature range.
Upon power-up or any chip reset, the LPC178x/7x use the IRC as the clock source.
Software may later switch to one of the other available clock sources.
7.33.1.2 Main oscillator
The main oscillator can be used as the clock source for the CPU, with or without using the
PLL. The main oscillator also provides the clock source for the alternate PLL1.
The main oscillator operates at frequencies of 1 MHz to 25 MHz. This frequency can be
boosted to a higher frequency, up to the maximum CPU operating frequency, by the main
PLL. The clock selected as the PLL input is PLLCLKIN. The ARM processor clock
frequency is referred to as CCLK elsewhere in this document. The frequencies of
PLLCLKIN and CCLK are the same value unless the PLL is active and connected. The
clock frequency for each peripheral can be selected individually and is referred to as
PCLK. Refer to Section 7.33.2 for additional information.
Fig 7. LPC178x/7x clock generation block diagram
MAIN PLL0
IRC oscillator
main oscillator
(osc_clk)
CLKSRCSEL
(system clock select)
sysclk
pll_clk
CCLKSEL
(CPU clock select)
002aaf531
pll_clk
ALT PLL1
CPU CLOCK
DIVIDER
alt_pll_clk
cclk
PERIPHERAL
CLOCK DIVIDER pclk
EMC
CLOCK DIVIDER emc_clk
sysclk
alt_pll_clk
pll_clk
USBCLKSEL
(USB clock select)
USB
CLOCK DIVIDER usb_clk
sysclk
LPC178x/7xLPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 62 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
7.33.1.3 RTC oscillator
The RTC oscillator provides a 1 Hz clock to the RTC and a 32 kHz clock output that can
be output on the CLKOUT pin in order to allow trimming the RTC oscillator without
interference from a probe.
7.33.1.4 Watchdog oscillator
The Watchdog Timer has a dedicated watchdog oscillator that provides a 500 kHz clock to
the Watchdog Timer. The watchdog oscillator is always running if the Watchdog Timer is
enabled. The Watchdog oscillator clock can be output on the CLKOUT pin in order to
allow observe its frequency.
In order to allow Watchdog Timer operation with minimum power consumption, which can
be important in reduced power modes, the Watchdog oscillator frequency is not tightly
controlled. The Watchdog oscillator frequency will vary over temperature and power
supply within a particular part, and may vary by processing across different parts. This
variation should be taken into account when determining Watchdog reload values.
Within a particular part, temperature and power supply variations can produce up to a
17 % frequency variation. Frequency variation between devices under the same
operating conditions can be up to 30 %.
7.33.2 Main PLL (PLL0) and Alternate PLL (PLL1)
PLL0 (also called the Main PLL) and PLL1 (also called the Alternate PLL) are functionally
identical but have somewhat different input possibilities and output connections. These
possibilities are shown in Figure 7. The Main PLL can receive its input from either the IRC
or the main oscillator and can potentially be used to provide the clocks to nearly
everything on the device. The Alternate PLL receives its input only from the main oscillator
and is intended to be used as an alternate source of clocking to the USB. The USB has
timing needs that may not always be filled by the Main PLL.
Both PLLs are disabled and powered off on reset. If the Alternate PLL is left disabled, the
USB clock can be supplied by PLL0 if everything is set up to provide 48 MHz to the USB
clock through that route. The source for each clock must be selected via the CLKSEL
registers and can be further reduced by clock dividers as needed.
PLL0 accepts an input clock frequency from either the IRC or the main oscillator. If only
the Main PLL is used, then its output frequency must be an integer multiple of all other
clocks needed in the system. PLL1 takes its input only from the main oscillator, requiring
an external crystal in the range of 10 to 25 MHz. In each PLL, the Current Controlled
Oscillator (CCO) operates in the range of 156 MHz to 320 MHz, so there are additional
dividers to bring the output down to the desired frequencies. The minimum output divider
value is 2, insuring that the output of the PLLs have a 50 % duty cycle.
If the USB is used, the possibilities for the CPU clock and other clocks will be limited by
the requirements that the frequency be precise and very low jitter, and that the PLL0
output must be a multiple of 48 MHz. Even multiples of 48 MHz that are within the
operating range of the PLL are 192 MHz and 288 MHz. Also, only the main oscillator in
conjunction with the PLL can meet the precision and jitter specifications for USB. It is due
to these limitations that the Alternate PLL is provided.LPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 63 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
The alternate PLL accepts an input clock frequency from the main oscillator in the range
of 10 MHz to 25 MHz only. When used as the USB clock, the input frequency is multiplied
up to a multiple of 48 MHz (192 MHz or 288 MHz as described above).
7.33.3 Wake-up timer
The LPC178x/7x begin operation at power-up and when awakened from Power-down
mode by using the 12 MHz IRC oscillator as the clock source. This allows chip operation
to resume quickly. If the main oscillator or the PLL is needed by the application, software
will need to enable these features and wait for them to stabilize before they are used as a
clock source.
When the main oscillator is initially activated, the wake-up timer allows software to ensure
that the main oscillator is fully functional before the processor uses it as a clock source
and starts to execute instructions. This is important at power on, all types of reset, and
whenever any of the aforementioned functions are turned off for any reason. Since the
oscillator and other functions are turned off during Power-down mode, any wake-up of the
processor from Power-down mode makes use of the wake-up Timer.
The wake-up timer monitors the crystal oscillator to check whether it is safe to begin code
execution. When power is applied to the chip, or when some event caused the chip to exit
Power-down mode, some time is required for the oscillator to produce a signal of sufficient
amplitude to drive the clock logic. The amount of time depends on many factors, including
the rate of VDD(3V3) ramp (in the case of power on), the type of crystal and its electrical
characteristics (if a quartz crystal is used), as well as any other external circuitry (e.g.,
capacitors), and the characteristics of the oscillator itself under the existing ambient
conditions.
7.33.4 Power control
The LPC178x/7x support a variety of power control features. There are four special
modes of processor power reduction: Sleep mode, Deep-sleep mode, Power-down mode,
and Deep power-down mode. The CPU clock rate may also be controlled as needed by
changing clock sources, reconfiguring PLL values, and/or altering the CPU clock divider
value. This allows a trade-off of power versus processing speed based on application
requirements. In addition, the peripheral power control allows shutting down the clocks to
individual on-chip peripherals, allowing fine tuning of power consumption by eliminating all
dynamic power use in any peripherals that are not required for the application. Each of the
peripherals has its own clock divider which provides even better power control.
The integrated PMU (Power Management Unit) automatically adjusts internal regulators
to minimize power consumption during Sleep, Deep-sleep, Power-down, and Deep
power-down modes.
The LPC178x/7x also implement a separate power domain to allow turning off power to
the bulk of the device while maintaining operation of the RTC and a small set of registers
for storing data during any of the power-down modes.
7.33.4.1 Sleep mode
When Sleep mode is entered, the clock to the core is stopped. Resumption from the Sleep
mode does not need any special sequence other than re-enabling the clock to the ARM
core.LPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 64 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
In Sleep mode, execution of instructions is suspended until either a Reset or interrupt
occurs. Peripheral functions continue operation during Sleep mode and may generate
interrupts to cause the processor to resume execution. Sleep mode eliminates dynamic
power used by the processor itself, memory systems and related controllers, and internal
buses.
The DMA controller can continue to work in Sleep mode and has access to the peripheral
RAMs and all peripheral registers. The flash memory and the main SRAM are not
available in Sleep mode, they are disabled in order to save power.
Wake-up from Sleep mode will occur whenever any enabled interrupt occurs.
7.33.4.2 Deep-sleep mode
In Deep-sleep mode, the oscillator is shut down and the chip receives no internal clocks.
The processor state and registers, peripheral registers, and internal SRAM values are
preserved throughout Deep-sleep mode and the logic levels of chip pins remain static.
The output of the IRC is disabled but the IRC is not powered down to allow fast wake-up.
The RTC oscillator is not stopped because the RTC interrupts may be used as the
wake-up source. The PLL is automatically turned off and disconnected. The clock divider
registers are automatically reset to zero.
The Deep-sleep mode can be terminated and normal operation resumed by either a
Reset or certain specific interrupts that are able to function without clocks. Since all
dynamic operation of the chip is suspended, Deep-sleep mode reduces chip power
consumption to a very low value. Power to the flash memory is left on in Deep-sleep
mode, allowing a very quick wake-up.
Wake-up from Deep-sleep mode can initiated by the NMI, External Interrupts EINT0
through EINT3, GPIO interrupts, the Ethernet Wake-on-LAN interrupt, Brownout Detect,
an RTC Alarm interrupt, a USB input pin transition (USB activity interrupt), a CAN input
pin transition, or a Watchdog Timer time-out, when the related interrupt is enabled.
Wake-up will occur whenever any enabled interrupt occurs.
On wake-up from Deep-sleep mode, the code execution and peripherals activities will
resume after four cycles expire if the IRC was used before entering Deep-sleep mode. If
the main external oscillator was used, the code execution will resume when 4096 cycles
expire. PLL and clock dividers need to be reconfigured accordingly.
7.33.4.3 Power-down mode
Power-down mode does everything that Deep-sleep mode does but also turns off the
power to the IRC oscillator and the flash memory. This saves more power but requires
waiting for resumption of flash operation before execution of code or data access in the
flash memory can be accomplished.
When the chip enters Power-down mode, the IRC, the main oscillator, and all clocks are
stopped. The RTC remains running if it has been enabled and RTC interrupts may be
used to wake up the CPU. The flash is forced into Power-down mode. The PLLs are
automatically turned off and the clock selection multiplexers are set to use the system
clock sysclk (the reset state). The clock divider control registers are automatically reset to
zero. If the Watchdog timer is running, it will continue running in Power-down mode.LPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 65 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
On the wake-up of Power-down mode, if the IRC was used before entering Power-down
mode, it will take IRC 60 s to start-up. After this, four IRC cycles will expire before the
code execution can then be resumed if the code was running from SRAM. In the
meantime, the flash wake-up timer then counts 12 MHz IRC clock cycles to make the
100 s flash start-up time. When it times out, access to the flash will be allowed. Users
need to reconfigure the PLL and clock dividers accordingly.
7.33.4.4 Deep power-down mode
In Deep power-down mode, power is shut off to the entire chip with the exception of the
RTC module and the RESET pin.
To optimize power conservation, the user has the additional option of turning off or
retaining power to the 32 kHz oscillator. It is also possible to use external circuitry to turn
off power to the on-chip regulator via the VDD(REG)(3V3) pins and/or the I/O power via the
VDD(3V3) pins after entering Deep Power-down mode. Power must be restored before
device operation can be restarted.
The LPC178x/7x can wake up from Deep power-down mode via the RESET pin or an
alarm match event of the RTC.
7.33.4.5 Wake-up Interrupt Controller (WIC)
The WIC allows the CPU to automatically wake up from any enabled priority interrupt that
can occur while the clocks are stopped in Deep-sleep, Power-down, and Deep
power-down modes.
The WIC works in connection with the Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC). When
the CPU enters Deep-sleep, Power-down, or Deep power-down mode, the NVIC sends a
mask of the current interrupt situation to the WIC.This mask includes all of the interrupts
that are both enabled and of sufficient priority to be serviced immediately. With this
information, the WIC simply notices when one of the interrupts has occurred and then it
wakes up the CPU.
The WIC eliminates the need to periodically wake up the CPU and poll the interrupts
resulting in additional power savings.
7.33.5 Peripheral power control
A power control for peripherals feature allows individual peripherals to be turned off if they
are not needed in the application, resulting in additional power savings.
7.33.6 Power domains
The LPC178x/7x provide two independent power domains that allow the bulk of the
device to have power removed while maintaining operation of the RTC and the backup
registers.
On the LPC178x/7x, I/O pads are powered by VDD(3V3), while VDD(REG)(3V3) powers the
on-chip voltage regulator which in turn provides power to the CPU and most of the
peripherals.
Depending on the LPC178x/7x application, a design can use two power options to
manage power consumption.LPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 66 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
The first option assumes that power consumption is not a concern and the design ties the
VDD(3V3) and VDD(REG)(3V3) pins together. This approach requires only one 3.3 V power
supply for both pads, the CPU, and peripherals. While this solution is simple, it does not
support powering down the I/O pad ring “on the fly” while keeping the CPU and
peripherals alive.
The second option uses two power supplies; a 3.3 V supply for the I/O pads (VDD(3V3)) and
a dedicated 3.3 V supply for the CPU (VDD(REG)(3V3)). Having the on-chip voltage regulator
powered independently from the I/O pad ring enables shutting down of the I/O pad power
supply “on the fly” while the CPU and peripherals stay active.
The VBAT pin supplies power only to the RTC domain. The RTC operates at very low
power, which can be supplied by an external battery. The device core power
(VDD(REG)(3V3)) is used to operate the RTC whenever VDD(REG)(3V3) is present. There is no
power drain from the RTC battery when VDD(REG)(3V3) is at nominal levels and
VDD(REG)(3V3) > VBAT.
Fig 8. Power distribution
REAL-TIME CLOCK
BACKUP REGISTERS
REGULATOR
32 kHz
OSCILLATOR
POWER
SELECTOR
ULTRA-LOW
POWER
REGULATOR
RTC POWER DOMAIN
MAIN POWER DOMAIN
002aaf530
RTCX1
VBAT
(typical 3.0 V)
VDD(REG)(3V3)
(typical 3.3 V)
RTCX2
VDD(3V3)
VSS
to memories,
peripherals,
oscillators,
PLLs
to core
to I/O pads
ADC
DAC
ADC POWER DOMAIN
VDDA
VREFP
VSSA
LPC178x/7xLPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 67 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
7.34 System control
7.34.1 Reset
Reset has four sources on the LPC178x/7x: the RESET pin, the Watchdog reset,
Power-On Reset (POR), and the BrownOut Detection (BOD) circuit. The RESET pin is a
Schmitt trigger input pin. Assertion of chip Reset by any source, once the operating
voltage attains a usable level, starts the Wake-up timer (see description in
Section 7.33.3), causing reset to remain asserted until the external Reset is de-asserted,
the oscillator is running, a fixed number of clocks have passed, and the flash controller
has completed its initialization.
When the internal Reset is removed, the processor begins executing at address 0, which
is initially the Reset vector mapped from the boot block. At that point, all of the processor
and peripheral registers have been initialized to predetermined values.
7.34.2 Brownout detection
The LPC178x/7x include 2-stage monitoring of the voltage on the VDD(REG)(3V3) pins. If this
voltage falls below 2.2 V (typical), the BOD asserts an interrupt signal to the Vectored
Interrupt Controller. This signal can be enabled for interrupt in the Interrupt Enable
Register in the NVIC in order to cause a CPU interrupt; if not, software can monitor the
signal by reading a dedicated status register.
The second stage of low-voltage detection asserts a reset to inactivate the LPC178x/7x
when the voltage on the VDD(REG)(3V3) pins falls below 1.85 V (typical). This reset prevents
alteration of the flash as operation of the various elements of the chip would otherwise
become unreliable due to low voltage. The BOD circuit maintains this reset down below
1 V, at which point the power-on reset circuitry maintains the overall reset.
Both the 2.2 V and 1.85 V thresholds include some hysteresis. In normal operation, this
hysteresis allows the 2.2 V detection to reliably interrupt, or a regularly executed event
loop to sense the condition.
7.34.3 Code security (Code Read Protection - CRP)
This feature of the LPC178x/7x allows user to enable different levels of security in the
system so that access to the on-chip flash and use of the JTAG and ISP can be restricted.
When needed, CRP is invoked by programming a specific pattern into a dedicated flash
location. IAP commands are not affected by the CRP.
There are three levels of the Code Read Protection.
CRP1 disables access to chip via the JTAG and allows partial flash update (excluding
flash sector 0) using a limited set of the ISP commands. This mode is useful when CRP is
required and flash field updates are needed but all sectors can not be erased.
CRP2 disables access to chip via the JTAG and only allows full flash erase and update
using a reduced set of the ISP commands.
Running an application with level CRP3 selected fully disables any access to chip via the
JTAG pins and the ISP. This mode effectively disables ISP override using P2[10] pin, too.
It is up to the user’s application to provide (if needed) flash update mechanism using IAP
calls or call reinvoke ISP command to enable flash update via UART0.LPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 68 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
7.34.4 APB interface
The APB peripherals are split into two separate APB buses in order to distribute the bus
bandwidth and thereby reducing stalls caused by contention between the CPU and the
GPDMA controller.
7.34.5 AHB multilayer matrix
The LPC178x/7x use an AHB multilayer matrix. This matrix connects the instruction
(I-code) and data (D-code) CPU buses of the ARM Cortex-M3 to the flash memory, the
main (64 kB) SRAM, and the Boot ROM. The GPDMA can also access all of these
memories. Additionally, the matrix connects the CPU system bus and all of the DMA
controllers to the various peripheral functions.
7.34.6 External interrupt inputs
The LPC178x/7x include up to 30 edge sensitive interrupt inputs combined with one level
sensitive external interrupt input as selectable pin function. The external interrupt input
can optionally be used to wake up the processor from Power-down mode.
7.34.7 Memory mapping control
The Cortex-M3 incorporates a mechanism that allows remapping the interrupt vector table
to alternate locations in the memory map. This is controlled via the Vector Table Offset
Register contained in the NVIC.
The vector table may be located anywhere within the bottom 1 GB of Cortex-M3 address
space. The vector table must be located on a 128 word (512 byte) boundary because the
NVIC on the LPC178x/7x is configured for 128 total interrupts.
7.35 Debug control
Debug and trace functions are integrated into the ARM Cortex-M3. Serial wire debug and
trace functions are supported in addition to a standard JTAG debug and parallel trace
functions. The ARM Cortex-M3 is configured to support up to eight breakpoints and four
watch points.
CAUTION
If level three Code Read Protection (CRP3) is selected, no future factory testing can be
performed on the device.LPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 69 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
8. Limiting values
[1] The following applies to the limiting values:
a) This product includes circuitry specifically designed for the protection of its internal devices from the damaging effects of excessive
static charge. Nonetheless, it is suggested that conventional precautions be taken to avoid applying greater than the rated
maximum.
b) Parameters are valid over operating temperature range unless otherwise specified. All voltages are with respect to VSS unless
otherwise noted.
[2] Including voltage on outputs in 3-state mode.
[3] Not to exceed 4.6 V.
[4] The maximum non-operating storage temperature is different than the temperature for required shelf life which should be determined
based on the required shelf lifetime. Please refer to the JEDEC spec for further details.
[5] Human body model: equivalent to discharging a 100 pF capacitor through a 1.5 k series resistor.
Table 9. Limiting values
In accordance with the Absolute Maximum Rating System (IEC 60134).[1]
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Max Unit
VDD(3V3) supply voltage (3.3 V) external rail 2.4 3.6 V
VDD(REG)(3V3) regulator supply voltage (3.3 V) 2.4 3.6 V
VDDA analog 3.3 V pad supply voltage 0.5 +4.6 V
Vi(VBAT) input voltage on pin VBAT for the RTC 0.5 +4.6 V
Vi(VREFP) input voltage on pin VREFP 0.5 +4.6 V
VIA analog input voltage on ADC related
pins
0.5 +5.1 V
VI input voltage 5 V tolerant digital
I/O pins;
VDD(3V3) 2.4V
[2] 0.5 +5.5 V
VDD(3V3) 0 V 0.5 +3.6 V
other I/O pins [2][3] 0.5 VDD(3V3) +
0.5
V
IDD supply current per supply pin - 100 mA
ISS ground current per ground pin - 100 mA
Ilatch I/O latch-up current (0.5VDD(3V3)) < VI
< (1.5VDD(3V3));
Tj
< 125 C
- 100 mA
Tstg storage temperature non-operating [4] 65 +150 C
Ptot(pack) total power dissipation (per package) based on package
heat transfer, not
device power
consumption
- 1.5 W
VESD electrostatic discharge voltage human body
model; all pins
[5] - 4000 VLPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 70 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
9. Thermal characteristics
The average chip junction temperature, Tj (C), can be calculated using the following
equation:
(1)
• Tamb = ambient temperature (C),
• Rth(j-a) = the package junction-to-ambient thermal resistance (C/W)
• PD = sum of internal and I/O power dissipation
Table 10. Thermal characteristics
VDD = 3.0 V to 3.6 V; Tamb = 40 C to +85 C unless otherwise specified;
Symbol Parameter Min Typ Max Unit
Tj(max) maximum junction
temperature
- - 125 C
Table 11. Thermal resistance (LQFP packages)
Tamb = 40 C to +85 C unless otherwise specified.
Symbol Conditions Thermal resistance in C/W ±15 %
LQFP208 LQFP144
ja JEDEC (4.5 in 4 in)
0 m/s 27.4 31.5
1 m/s 25.7 28.1
2.5 m/s 24.4 26.2
Single-layer (4.5 in 3 in)
0 m/s 35.4 43.2
1 m/s 31.2 35.7
2.5 m/s 29.2 32.8
jc - 8.8 7.8
jb - 15.4 13.8
Table 12. Thermal resistance value (TFBGA packages)
Tamb = 40 C to +85 C unless otherwise specified.
Symbol Conditions Thermal resistance in C/W ±15 %
TFBGA208 TFBGA180
ja JEDEC (4.5 in 4 in)
0 m/s 41 45.5
1 m/s 35 38.3
2.5 m/s 31 33.8
8-layer (4.5 in 3 in)
0 m/s 34.9 38
1 m/s 30.9 33.5
2.5 m/s 28 29.8
jc - 8.3 8.9
jb - 13.6 12
Tj Tamb PD Rth j a – += LPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 71 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
10. Static characteristics
Table 13. Static characteristics
Tamb = 40 C to +85 C, unless otherwise specified.
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ[1] Max Unit
Supply pins
VDD(3V3) supply voltage (3.3 V) external rail [2] 2.4 3.3 3.6 V
VDD(REG)(3V3) regulator supply voltage
(3.3 V)
2.4 3.3 3.6 V
VDDA analog 3.3 V pad supply
voltage
[3] 2.7 3.3 3.6 V
Vi(VBAT) input voltage on pin
VBAT
[4] 2.1 3.0 3.6 V
Vi(VREFP) input voltage on pin
VREFP
[3] 2.7 3.3 VDDA V
IDD(REG)(3V3) regulator supply current
(3.3 V)
active mode; code
while(1){}
executed from flash; all
peripherals disabled
PCLK = CCLK/4
CCLK = 12 MHz; PLL
disabled
[5][6] - 7- mA
CCLK = 120 MHz; PLL
enabled
[5][7] - 51- mA
active mode; code
while(1){}
executed from flash; all
peripherals enabled;
PCLK = CCLK/4
CCLK = 12 MHz; PLL
disabled
[5][6] 14
CCLK = 120 MHz; PLL
enabled
[5][7] 100 mA
Sleep mode [5][8] - 5- mA
Deep-sleep mode [5][9] - 550 - A
Power-down mode [5][9] - 280 - A
IBAT battery supply current RTC running;
part powered down;
VDD(REG)(3V3) =0 V;
Vi(VBAT) = 3.0 V;
VDD(3V3) = 0 V.
[10] -
1 - A
part powered;
VDD(REG)(3V3) = 3.3 V;
Vi(VBAT) = 3.0 V
[11] <10 nALPC178X_7X All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 September 2014 72 of 122
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
Standard port pins, RESET
IIL LOW-level input current VI = 0 V; on-chip pull-up
resistor disabled
- 0.5 10 nA
IIH HIGH-level input
current
VI = VDD(3V3); on-chip
pull-down resistor
disabled
- 0.5 10 nA
IOZ OFF-state output
current
VO = 0 V; VO = VDD(3V3);
on-chip pull-up/down
resistors disabled
- 0.5 10 nA
VI input voltage pin configured to provide
a digital function
[15][16]
[17]
0- 5.0 V
VO output voltage output active 0 - VDD(3V3) V
VIH HIGH-level input
voltage
0.7VDD(3V3) --V
VIL LOW-level input voltage - - 0.3VDD(3V3) V
Vhys hysteresis voltage 0.4 - - V
VOH HIGH-level output
voltage
IOH = 4 mA VDD(3V3)
0.4
--V
VOL LOW-level output
voltage
IOL = 4 mA --0.4 V
IOH HIGH-level output
current
VOH = VDD(3V3) 0.4 V 4 - - mA
IOL LOW-level output
current
VOL = 0.4 V 4- - mA
IOHS HIGH-level short-circuit
output current
VOH =0V [18] - - 45 mA
IOLS LOW-level short-circuit
output current
VOL = VDD(3V3) [18] --50 mA
Ipd pull-down current VI =5V 10 50 150 A
Ipu pull-up current VI =0V 15 50 85 A
VDD(3V3) < VI <5V 0 0 0 A
I
2C-bus pins (P0[27] and P0[28])
VIH HIGH-level input
voltage
0.7VDD(3V3) --V
VIL LOW-level input voltage - - 0.3VDD(3V3) V
Vhys hysteresis voltage - 0.05
VDD(3V3)
- V
VOL LOW-level output
voltage
IOLS = 3 mA --0.4 V
ILI input leakage current VI = VDD(3V3) [19] - 24 A
VI =5V - 10 22 A
USB pins
IOZ OFF-state output
current
0V>
NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
22. Contents
1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2 Features and benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
3 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
4 Ordering information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
5 Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
6 Pinning information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
6.1 Pinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
6.2 Pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
7 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
7.1 Architectural overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
7.2 ARM Cortex-M3 processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
7.3 On-chip flash program memory . . . . . . . . . . . 41
7.4 EEPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
7.5 On-chip SRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
7.6 Memory Protection Unit (MPU). . . . . . . . . . . . 41
7.7 Memory map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
7.8 Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC) . 44
7.8.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
7.8.2 Interrupt sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
7.9 Pin connect block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
7.10 External memory controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
7.10.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
7.11 General purpose DMA controller . . . . . . . . . . 46
7.11.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
7.12 CRC engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
7.12.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
7.13 LCD controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
7.13.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
7.14 Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
7.14.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
7.15 USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
7.15.1 USB device controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
7.15.1.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
7.15.2 USB host controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
7.15.2.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
7.15.3 USB OTG controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
7.15.3.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
7.16 SD/MMC card interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
7.16.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
7.17 Fast general purpose parallel I/O . . . . . . . . . . 51
7.17.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
7.18 12-bit ADC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
7.18.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
7.19 10-bit DAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
7.19.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
7.20 UARTs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
7.20.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
7.21 SSP serial I/O controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
7.21.1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
7.22 I2C-bus serial I/O controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
7.22.1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
7.23 I2S-bus serial I/O controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
7.23.1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
7.24 CAN controller and acceptance filters . . . . . . 55
7.24.1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
7.25 General purpose 32-bit timers/external
event counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
7.25.1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
7.26 Pulse Width Modulator (PWM). . . . . . . . . . . . 56
7.26.1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
7.27 Motor control PWM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
7.28 Quadrature Encoder Interface (QEI) . . . . . . . 58
7.28.1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
7.29 ARM Cortex-M3 system tick timer . . . . . . . . . 58
7.30 Windowed WatchDog Timer (WWDT) . . . . . . 59
7.30.1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
7.31 RTC and backup registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
7.31.1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
7.32 Event monitor/recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
7.32.1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
7.33 Clocking and power control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
7.33.1 Crystal oscillators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
7.33.1.1 Internal RC oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
7.33.1.2 Main oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
7.33.1.3 RTC oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
7.33.1.4 Watchdog oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
7.33.2 Main PLL (PLL0) and Alternate PLL (PLL1) . 62
7.33.3 Wake-up timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
7.33.4 Power control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
7.33.4.1 Sleep mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
7.33.4.2 Deep-sleep mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
7.33.4.3 Power-down mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
7.33.4.4 Deep power-down mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
7.33.4.5 Wake-up Interrupt Controller (WIC) . . . . . . . . 65
7.33.5 Peripheral power control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
7.33.6 Power domains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
7.34 System control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
7.34.1 Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
7.34.2 Brownout detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
7.34.3 Code security (Code Read Protection - CRP) 67
7.34.4 APB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
7.34.5 AHB multilayer matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
7.34.6 External interrupt inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
7.34.7 Memory mapping control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
7.35 Debug control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68NXP Semiconductors LPC178x/7x
32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 microcontroller
© NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
For more information, please visit: http://www.nxp.com
For sales office addresses, please send an email to: salesaddresses@nxp.com
Date of release: 9 September 2014
Document identifier: LPC178X_7X
Please be aware that important notices concerning this document and the product(s)
described herein, have been included in section ‘Legal information’.
8 Limiting values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
9 Thermal characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
10 Static characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
10.1 Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
10.2 Peripheral power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
10.3 Electrical pin characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
11 Dynamic characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
11.1 Flash memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
11.2 External memory interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
11.3 External clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
11.4 Internal oscillators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
11.5 I/O pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
11.6 SSP interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
11.7 I2C-bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
11.8 I2S-bus interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
11.9 LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
11.10 SD/MMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
12 ADC electrical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
13 DAC electrical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
14 Application information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
14.1 Suggested USB interface solutions . . . . . . . . 98
14.2 Crystal oscillator XTAL input and component
selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
14.3 XTAL Printed-Circuit Board (PCB) layout
guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
14.4 Standard I/O pin configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 104
14.5 Reset pin configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
14.6 Reset pin configuration for RTC operation . . 105
15 Package outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
16 Soldering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
17 Abbreviations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
18 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
19 Revision history. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
20 Legal information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
20.1 Data sheet status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
20.2 Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
20.3 Disclaimers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
20.4 Trademarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
21 Contact information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
22 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
1. General description
The LPC4350/30/20/10 are ARM Cortex-M4 based microcontrollers for embedded
applications which include an ARM Cortex-M0 coprocessor, up to 264 kB of SRAM,
advanced configurable peripherals such as the State Configurable Timer/PWM
(SCTimer/PWM) and the Serial General-Purpose I/O (SGPIO) interface, two High-speed
USB controllers, Ethernet, LCD, an external memory controller, and multiple digital and
analog peripherals. The LPC4350/30/20/10 operate at CPU frequencies of up to 204
MHz.
The ARM Cortex-M4 is a next generation 32-bit core that offers system enhancements
such as low power consumption, enhanced debug features, and a high level of support
block integration. The ARM Cortex-M4 CPU incorporates a 3-stage pipeline, uses a
Harvard architecture with separate local instruction and data buses as well as a third bus
for peripherals, and includes an internal prefetch unit that supports speculative branching.
The ARM Cortex-M4 supports single-cycle digital signal processing and SIMD
instructions. A hardware floating-point processor is integrated in the core.
The ARM Cortex-M0 coprocessor is an energy-efficient and easy-to-use 32-bit core which
is code- and tool-compatible with the Cortex-M4 core. The Cortex-M0 coprocessor offers
up to 204 MHz performance with a simple instruction set and reduced code size.
See Section 17 “References” for additional documentation.
2. Features and benefits
Cortex-M4 Processor core
ARM Cortex-M4 processor, running at frequencies of up to 204 MHz.
ARM Cortex-M4 built-in Memory Protection Unit (MPU) supporting eight regions.
ARM Cortex-M4 built-in Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC).
Hardware floating-point unit.
Non-maskable Interrupt (NMI) input.
JTAG and Serial Wire Debug (SWD), serial trace, eight breakpoints, and four watch
points.
Enhanced Trace Module (ETM) and Enhanced Trace Buffer (ETB) support.
System tick timer.
Cortex-M0 Processor core
ARM Cortex-M0 co-processor capable of off-loading the main ARM Cortex-M4
application processor.
Running at frequencies of up to 204 MHz.
JTAG and built-in NVIC.
LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 flashless MCU; up to 264 kB SRAM;
Ethernet; two HS USBs; advanced configurable peripherals
Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 Product data sheetLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 2 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
On-chip memory
Up to 264 kB SRAM for code and data use.
Multiple SRAM blocks with separate bus access. Two SRAM blocks can be
powered down individually.
64 kB ROM containing boot code and on-chip software drivers.
64 bit + 256 bit general-purpose One-Time Programmable (OTP) memory.
Clock generation unit
Crystal oscillator with an operating range of 1 MHz to 25 MHz.
12 MHz Internal RC (IRC) oscillator trimmed to 1.5 % accuracy over temperature
and voltage.
Ultra-low power Real-Time Clock (RTC) crystal oscillator.
Three PLLs allow CPU operation up to the maximum CPU rate without the need for
a high-frequency crystal. The second PLL is dedicated to the High-speed USB, the
third PLL can be used as audio PLL.
Clock output.
Configurable digital peripherals
Serial GPIO (SGPIO) interface.
State Configurable Timer (SCTimer/PWM) subsystem on AHB.
Global Input Multiplexer Array (GIMA) allows to cross-connect multiple inputs and
outputs to event driven peripherals like the timers, SCT, and ADC0/1.
Serial interfaces
Quad SPI Flash Interface (SPIFI) with 1-, 2-, or 4-bit data at rates of up to
52 MB per second.
10/100T Ethernet MAC with RMII and MII interfaces and DMA support for high
throughput at low CPU load. Support for IEEE 1588 time stamping/advanced time
stamping (IEEE 1588-2008 v2).
One High-speed USB 2.0 Host/Device/OTG interface with DMA support and
on-chip high-speed PHY (USB0).
One High-speed USB 2.0 Host/Device interface with DMA support, on-chip
full-speed PHY and ULPI interface to external high-speed PHY (USB1).
USB interface electrical test software included in ROM USB stack.
Four 550 UARTs with DMA support: one UART with full modem interface; one
UART with IrDA interface; three USARTs support UART synchronous mode and a
smart card interface conforming to ISO7816 specification.
Up to two C_CAN 2.0B controllers with one channel each. Use of C_CAN controller
excludes operation of all other peripherals connected to the same bus bridge. See
Figure 1 and Ref. 2.
Two SSP controllers with FIFO and multi-protocol support. Both SSPs with DMA
support.
One SPI controller.
One Fast-mode Plus I2C-bus interface with monitor mode and with open-drain I/O
pins conforming to the full I2C-bus specification. Supports data rates of up to
1 Mbit/s.
One standard I2C-bus interface with monitor mode and with standard I/O pins.
Two I2S interfaces, each with DMA support and with one input and one output.LPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 3 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
Digital peripherals
External Memory Controller (EMC) supporting external SRAM, ROM, NOR flash,
and SDRAM devices.
LCD controller with DMA support and a programmable display resolution of up to
1024 H 768 V. Supports monochrome and color STN panels and TFT color
panels; supports 1/2/4/8 bpp Color Look-Up Table (CLUT) and 16/24-bit direct pixel
mapping.
Secure Digital Input Output (SD/MMC) card interface.
Eight-channel General-Purpose DMA controller can access all memories on the
AHB and all DMA-capable AHB slaves.
Up to 164 General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) pins with configurable
pull-up/pull-down resistors.
GPIO registers are located on the AHB for fast access. GPIO ports have DMA
support.
Up to eight GPIO pins can be selected from all GPIO pins as edge and level
sensitive interrupt sources.
Two GPIO group interrupt modules enable an interrupt based on a programmable
pattern of input states of a group of GPIO pins.
Four general-purpose timer/counters with capture and match capabilities.
One motor control Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) for three-phase motor control.
One Quadrature Encoder Interface (QEI).
Repetitive Interrupt timer (RI timer).
Windowed watchdog timer (WWDT).
Ultra-low power Real-Time Clock (RTC) on separate power domain with 256 bytes
of battery powered backup registers.
Alarm timer; can be battery powered.
Analog peripherals
One 10-bit DAC with DMA support and a data conversion rate of 400 kSamples/s.
Two 10-bit ADCs with DMA support and a data conversion rate of 400 kSamples/s.
Up to eight input channels per ADC.
Unique ID for each device.
Power
Single 3.3 V (2.2 V to 3.6 V) power supply with on-chip internal voltage regulator for
the core supply and the RTC power domain.
RTC power domain can be powered separately by a 3 V battery supply.
Four reduced power modes: Sleep, Deep-sleep, Power-down, and Deep
power-down.
Processor wake-up from Sleep mode via wake-up interrupts from various
peripherals.
Wake-up from Deep-sleep, Power-down, and Deep power-down modes via
external interrupts and interrupts generated by battery powered blocks in the RTC
power domain.
Brownout detect with four separate thresholds for interrupt and forced reset.
Power-On Reset (POR).
Available as LBGA256, TFBGA180, and TFBGA100 packages and as LQFP144
package.LPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 4 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
3. Applications
Motor control Embedded audio applications
Power management Industrial automation
White goods e-metering
RFID readersLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 5 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
4. Ordering information
4.1 Ordering options
Table 1. Ordering information
Type number Package
Name Description Version
LPC4350FET256 LBGA256 Plastic low profile ball grid array package; 256 balls; body 17 17 1 mm SOT740-2
LPC4350FET180 TFBGA180 Thin fine-pitch ball grid array package; 180 balls SOT570-3
LPC4330FET256 LBGA256 Plastic low profile ball grid array package; 256 balls; body 17 17 1 mm SOT740-2
LPC4330FET180 TFBGA180 Thin fine-pitch ball grid array package; 180 balls SOT570-3
LPC4330FET100 TFBGA100 Plastic thin fine-pitch ball grid array package; 100 balls; body 9 9 0.7 mm SOT926-1
LPC4330FBD144 LQFP144 Plastic low profile quad flat package; 144 leads; body 20 20 1.4 mm SOT486-1
LPC4320FET100 TFBGA100 Plastic thin fine-pitch ball grid array package; 100 balls; body 9 9 0.7 mm SOT926-1
LPC4320FBD144 LQFP144 Plastic low profile quad flat package; 144 leads; body 20 20 1.4 mm SOT486-1
LPC4310FET100 TFBGA100 Plastic thin fine-pitch ball grid array package; 100 balls; body 9 9 0.7 mm SOT926-1
LPC4310FBD144 LQFP144 Plastic low profile quad flat package; 144 leads; body 20 20 1.4 mm SOT486-1
Table 2. Ordering options
Type number Total
SRAM
LCD Ethernet USB0
(Host,
Device,
OTG)
USB1
(Host,
Device)/
ULPI
interface
ADC
channels
PWM QEI GPIO Package
LPC4350FET256 264 kB yes yes yes yes/yes 8 yes yes 164 LBGA256
LPC4350FET180 264 kB yes yes yes yes/yes 8 yes yes 118 TFBGA180
LPC4330FET256 264 kB no yes yes yes/yes 8 yes yes 164 LBGA256
LPC4330FET180 264 kB no yes yes yes/yes 8 yes yes 118 TFBGA180
LPC4330FET100 264 kB no yes yes yes/no 4 no no 49 TFBGA100
LPC4330FBD144 264 kB no yes yes yes/no 8 yes no 83 LQFP144
LPC4320FET100 200 kB no no yes no 4 no no 49 TFBGA100
LPC4320FBD144 200 kB no no yes no 8 yes no 83 LQFP144
LPC4310FET100 168 kB no no no no 4 no no 49 TFBGA100
LPC4310FBD144 168 kB no no no no 8 yes no 83 LQFP144LPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 6 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
5. Block diagram
(1) Not available on all parts (see Table 2).
Fig 1. LPC4350/30/20/10 Block diagram
ARM
CORTEX-M4
TEST/DEBUG
INTERFACE I-code bus D-code bus
system bus
DMA LCD(1) SD/
MMC
ETHERNET(1)
10/100
MAC
IEEE 1588
HIGH-SPEED
USB0(1)
HOST/
DEVICE/OTG
HIGH-SPEED
USB1(1)
HOST/DEVICE
EMC
HIGH-SPEED PHY
32 kB AHB SRAM
16 +16 kB AHB SRAM
SPIFI
AES ENCRYPTION/
DECRYPTION(2)
HS GPIO
SPI
SGPIO
SCT
64 kB ROM
I
2C0
I
2S0
I
2S1
C_CAN1
MOTOR
CONTROL
PWM(1)
TIMER3
TIMER2
USART2
USART3
SSP1
RI TIMER
QEI(1)
GIMA
BRIDGE 0 BRIDGE 1 BRIDGE 2 BRIDGE 3 BRIDGE
BRIDGE
AHB MULTILAYER MATRIX
LPC4350/30/20/20/10
128 kB LOCAL SRAM
72 kB LOCAL SRAM
10-bit ADC0
10-bit ADC1
C_CAN0
I
2C1
10-bit DAC
BRIDGE
RGU
CCU2
CGU
CCU1
ALARM TIMER
CONFIGURATION
REGISTERS
OTP MEMORY
EVENT ROUTER
POWER MODE CONTROL
12 MHz IRC
RTC POWER DOMAIN
BACKUP REGISTERS
RTC RTC OSC
002aaf772
slaves
slaves
masters
ARM
CORTEX-M0
TEST/DEBUG
INTERFACE
= connected to GPDMA
GPIO
INTERRUPTS
GPIO GROUP0
INTERRUPT
GPIO GROUP1
INTERRUPT
WWDT
USART0
UART1
SSP0
TIMER0
TIMER1
SCULPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 7 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
6. Pinning information
6.1 Pinning
6.2 Pin description
On the LPC4350/30/20/10, digital pins are grouped into 16 ports, named P0 to P9 and PA
to PF, with up to 20 pins used per port. Each digital pin can support up to eight different
digital functions, including General-Purpose I/O (GPIO), selectable through the System
Configuration Unit (SCU) registers. The pin name is not indicative of the GPIO port
assigned to it.
Fig 2. Pin configuration LBGA256 package Fig 3. Pin configuration TFBGA180 package
002aaf813
LPC4350/30FET256
Transparent top view
T
R
P
N
M
L
J
G
K
H
F
E
D
C
B
A
2 4 6 8 10 12
13
14
15
16
1 3 5 7 9 11
ball A1
index area
002aag374
LPC4350/30FET180
Transparent top view
N
L
P
M
K
J
H
G
F
D
B
E
C
A
2 4 6 8 10 12
13
14
1 3 5 7 9 11
ball A1
index area
Fig 4. Pin configuration TFBGA100 package Fig 5. Pin configuration LQFP144 package
002aag375
LPC4330/20/10FET100
Transparent top view
J
G
K
H
F
E
D
C
B
A
13579 2 4 6 8 10
ball A1
index area
LPC4330/20/10FBD144
72
1
36
108
73
37
109
144
002aag377LPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 8 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
Not all functions listed in Table 3 are available on all packages. See Table 2 for availability
of USB0, USB1, Ethernet, and LCD functions.
The parts contain two 10-bit ADCs (ADC0 and ADC1). The input channels of ADC0 and
ADC1 on dedicated pins and multiplexed pins are combined in such a way that all channel
0 inputs (named ADC0_0 and ADC1_0) are tied together and connected to both, channel
0 on ADC0 and channel 0 on ADC1, channel 1 inputs (named ADC0_1 and ADC1_1) are
tied together and connected to channel 1 on ADC0 and ADC1, and so forth. There are
eight ADC channels total for the two ADCs.LPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 9 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
Table 3. Pin description
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
Description
Multiplexed digital pins
P0_0 L3 K3 G2 32 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO0[0] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O SSP1_MISO — Master In Slave Out for SSP1.
I ENET_RXD1 — Ethernet receive data 1 (RMII/MII interface).
I/O SGPIO0 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O I2S0_TX_WS — Transmit Word Select. It is driven by the
master and received by the slave. Corresponds to the signal
WS in the I
2S-bus specification.
I/O I2S1_TX_WS — Transmit Word Select. It is driven by the
master and received by the slave. Corresponds to the signal
WS in the I
2S-bus specification.
P0_1 M2 K2 G1 34 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO0[1] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O SSP1_MOSI — Master Out Slave in for SSP1.
I ENET_COL — Ethernet Collision detect (MII interface).
I/O SGPIO1 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
ENET_TX_EN — Ethernet transmit enable (RMII/MII
interface).
I/O I2S1_TX_SDA — I2S1 transmit data. It is driven by the
transmitter and read by the receiver. Corresponds to the signal
SD in the I
2S-bus specification.
P1_0 P2 L1 H1 38 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO0[4] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I CTIN_3 — SCTimer/PWM input 3. Capture input 1 of timer 1.
I/O EMC_A5 — External memory address line 5.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SSP0_SSEL — Slave Select for SSP0.
I/O SGPIO7 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.LPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 10 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
P1_1 R2 N1 K2 42 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO0[8] — General purpose digital input/output pin. Boot pin
(see Table 5).
O CTOUT_7 — SCTimer/PWM output 7. Match output 3 of timer
1.
I/O EMC_A6 — External memory address line 6.
I/O SGPIO8 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SSP0_MISO — Master In Slave Out for SSP0.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
P1_2 R3 N2 K1 43 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO0[9] — General purpose digital input/output pin. Boot pin
(see Table 5).
O CTOUT_6 — SCTimer/PWM output 6. Match output 2 of timer
1.
I/O EMC_A7 — External memory address line 7.
I/O SGPIO9 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SSP0_MOSI — Master Out Slave in for SSP0.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
P1_3 P5 M2 J1 44 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO0[10] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O CTOUT_8 — SCTimer/PWM output 8. Match output 0 of timer
2.
I/O SGPIO10 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_OE — LOW active Output Enable signal.
O USB0_IND1 — USB0 port indicator LED control
output 1.
I/O SSP1_MISO — Master In Slave Out for SSP1.
- R — Function reserved.
O SD_RST — SD/MMC reset signal for MMC4.4 card.
P1_4 T3 P2 J2 47 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO0[11] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O CTOUT_9 — SCTimer/PWM output 9. Match output 3 of timer
3.
I/O SGPIO11 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_BLS0 — LOW active Byte Lane select signal 0.
O USB0_IND0 — USB0 port indicator LED control output 0.
I/O SSP1_MOSI — Master Out Slave in for SSP1.
- R — Function reserved.
O SD_VOLT1 — SD/MMC bus voltage select output 1.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 11 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
P1_5 R5 N3 J4 48 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO1[8] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O CTOUT_10 — SCTimer/PWM output 10. Match output 3 of
timer 3.
- R — Function reserved.
O EMC_CS0 — LOW active Chip Select 0 signal.
I USB0_PWR_FAULT — Port power fault signal indicating
overcurrent condition; this signal monitors over-current on the
USB bus (external circuitry required to detect over-current
condition).
I/O SSP1_SSEL — Slave Select for SSP1.
I/O SGPIO15 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O SD_POW — SD/MMC power monitor output.
P1_6 T4 P3 K4 49 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO1[9] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I CTIN_5 — SCTimer/PWM input 5. Capture input 2 of timer 2.
- R — Function reserved.
O EMC_WE — LOW active Write Enable signal.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SGPIO14 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O SD_CMD — SD/MMC command signal.
P1_7 T5 N4 G4 50 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO1[0] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I U1_DSR — Data Set Ready input for UART1.
O CTOUT_13 — SCTimer/PWM output 13. Match output 3 of
timer 3.
I/O EMC_D0 — External memory data line 0.
O USB0_PPWR — VBUS drive signal (towards external charge
pump or power management unit); indicates that VBUS must
be driven (active HIGH).
Add a pull-down resistor to disable the power switch at reset.
This signal has opposite polarity compared to the USB_PPWR
used on other NXP LPC parts.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 12 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
P1_8 R7 M5 H5 51 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO1[1] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O U1_DTR — Data Terminal Ready output for UART1.
O CTOUT_12 — SCTimer/PWM output 12. Match output 3 of
timer 3.
I/O EMC_D1 — External memory data line 1.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O SD_VOLT0 — SD/MMC bus voltage select output 0.
P1_9 T7 N5 J5 52 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO1[2] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O U1_RTS — Request to Send output for UART1.
O CTOUT_11 — SCTimer/PWM output 11. Match output 3 of
timer 2.
I/O EMC_D2 — External memory data line 2.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SD_DAT0 — SD/MMC data bus line 0.
P1_10 R8 N6 H6 53 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO1[3] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I U1_RI — Ring Indicator input for UART1.
O CTOUT_14 — SCTimer/PWM output 14. Match output 2 of
timer 3.
I/O EMC_D3 — External memory data line 3.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SD_DAT1 — SD/MMC data bus line 1.
P1_11 T9 P8 J7 55 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO1[4] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I U1_CTS — Clear to Send input for UART1.
O CTOUT_15 — SCTimer/PWM output 15. Match output 3 of
timer 3.
I/O EMC_D4 — External memory data line 4.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SD_DAT2 — SD/MMC data bus line 2.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 13 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
P1_12 R9 P7 K7 56 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO1[5] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I U1_DCD — Data Carrier Detect input for UART1.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O EMC_D5 — External memory data line 5.
I T0_CAP1 — Capture input 1 of timer 0.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SGPIO8 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O SD_DAT3 — SD/MMC data bus line 3.
P1_13 R10 L8 H8 60 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO1[6] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O U1_TXD — Transmitter output for UART1.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O EMC_D6 — External memory data line 6.
I T0_CAP0 — Capture input 0 of timer 0.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SGPIO9 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I SD_CD — SD/MMC card detect input.
P1_14 R11 K7 J8 61 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO1[7] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I U1_RXD — Receiver input for UART1.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O EMC_D7 — External memory data line 7.
O T0_MAT2 — Match output 2 of timer 0.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SGPIO10 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
P1_15 T12 P11 K8 62 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO0[2] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O U2_TXD — Transmitter output for USART2.
I/O SGPIO2 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I ENET_RXD0 — Ethernet receive data 0 (RMII/MII interface).
O T0_MAT1 — Match output 1 of timer 0.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 14 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
P1_16 M7 L5 H9 64 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO0[3] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I U2_RXD — Receiver input for USART2.
I/O SGPIO3 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I ENET_CRS — Ethernet Carrier Sense (MII interface).
O T0_MAT0 — Match output 0 of timer 0.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I ENET_RX_DV — Ethernet Receive Data Valid (RMII/MII
interface).
P1_17 M8 L6 H10 66 [3] N;
PU
I/O GPIO0[12] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O U2_UCLK — Serial clock input/output for USART2 in
synchronous mode.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O ENET_MDIO — Ethernet MIIM data input and output.
I T0_CAP3 — Capture input 3 of timer 0.
O CAN1_TD — CAN1 transmitter output.
I/O SGPIO11 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
P1_18 N12 N10 J10 67 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO0[13] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O U2_DIR — RS-485/EIA-485 output enable/direction control for
USART2.
- R — Function reserved.
O ENET_TXD0 — Ethernet transmit data 0 (RMII/MII interface).
O T0_MAT3 — Match output 3 of timer 0.
I CAN1_RD — CAN1 receiver input.
I/O SGPIO12 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
P1_19 M11 N9 K9 68 [2] N;
PU
I ENET_TX_CLK (ENET_REF_CLK) — Ethernet Transmit
Clock (MII interface) or Ethernet Reference Clock (RMII
interface).
I/O SSP1_SCK — Serial clock for SSP1.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O CLKOUT — Clock output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
O I2S0_RX_MCLK — I2S receive master clock.
I/O I2S1_TX_SCK — Transmit Clock. It is driven by the master
and received by the slave. Corresponds to the signal SCK in
the I2S-bus specification.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 15 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
P1_20 M10 J10 K10 70 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO0[15] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O SSP1_SSEL — Slave Select for SSP1.
- R — Function reserved.
O ENET_TXD1 — Ethernet transmit data 1 (RMII/MII interface).
I T0_CAP2 — Capture input 2 of timer 0.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SGPIO13 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
P2_0 T16 N14 G10 75 [2] N;
PU
I/O SGPIO4 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O U0_TXD — Transmitter output for USART0.
I/O EMC_A13 — External memory address line 13.
O USB0_PPWR — VBUS drive signal (towards external charge
pump or power management unit); indicates that VBUS must
be driven (active HIGH).
Add a pull-down resistor to disable the power switch at reset.
This signal has opposite polarity compared to the USB_PPWR
used on other NXP LPC parts.
I/O GPIO5[0] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
I T3_CAP0 — Capture input 0 of timer 3.
O ENET_MDC — Ethernet MIIM clock.
P2_1 N15 M13 G7 81 [2] N;
PU
I/O SGPIO5 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I U0_RXD — Receiver input for USART0.
I/O EMC_A12 — External memory address line 12.
I USB0_PWR_FAULT — Port power fault signal indicating
overcurrent condition; this signal monitors over-current on the
USB bus (external circuitry required to detect over-current
condition).
I/O GPIO5[1] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
I T3_CAP1 — Capture input 1 of timer 3.
- R — Function reserved.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 16 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
P2_2 M15 L13 F5 84 [2] N;
PU
I/O SGPIO6 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O U0_UCLK — Serial clock input/output for USART0 in
synchronous mode.
I/O EMC_A11 — External memory address line 11.
O USB0_IND1 — USB0 port indicator LED control output 1.
I/O GPIO5[2] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I CTIN_6 — SCTimer/PWM input 6. Capture input 1 of timer 3.
I T3_CAP2 — Capture input 2 of timer 3.
- R — Function reserved.
P2_3 J12 G11 D8 87 [3] N;
PU
I/O SGPIO12 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O I2C1_SDA — I
2C1 data input/output (this pin does not use a
specialized I2C pad).
O U3_TXD — Transmitter output for USART3.
I CTIN_1 — SCTimer/PWM input 1. Capture input 1 of timer 0.
Capture input 1 of timer 2.
I/O GPIO5[3] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
O T3_MAT0 — Match output 0 of timer 3.
O USB0_PPWR — VBUS drive signal (towards external charge
pump or power management unit); indicates that VBUS must
be driven (active HIGH).
Add a pull-down resistor to disable the power switch at reset.
This signal has opposite polarity compared to the USB_PPWR
used on other NXP LPC parts.
P2_4 K11 L9 D9 88 [3] N;
PU
I/O SGPIO13 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O I2C1_SCL — I
2C1 clock input/output (this pin does not use a
specialized I2C pad).
I U3_RXD — Receiver input for USART3.
I CTIN_0 — SCTimer/PWM input 0. Capture input 0 of timer 0,
1, 2, 3.
I/O GPIO5[4] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
O T3_MAT1 — Match output 1 of timer 3.
I USB0_PWR_FAULT — Port power fault signal indicating
overcurrent condition; this signal monitors over-current on the
USB bus (external circuitry required to detect over-current
condition).
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 17 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
P2_5 K14 J12 D10 91 [3] N;
PU
I/O SGPIO14 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I CTIN_2 — SCTimer/PWM input 2. Capture input 2 of timer 0.
I USB1_VBUS — Monitors the presence of USB1 bus power.
Note: This signal must be HIGH for USB reset to occur.
I ADCTRIG1 — ADC trigger input 1.
I/O GPIO5[5] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
O T3_MAT2 — Match output 2 of timer 3.
O USB0_IND0 — USB0 port indicator LED control output 0.
P2_6 K16 J14 G9 95 [2] N;
PU
I/O SGPIO7 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O U0_DIR — RS-485/EIA-485 output enable/direction control for
USART0.
I/O EMC_A10 — External memory address line 10.
O USB0_IND0 — USB0 port indicator LED control
output 0.
I/O GPIO5[6] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I CTIN_7 — SCTimer/PWM input 7.
I T3_CAP3 — Capture input 3 of timer 3.
- R — Function reserved.
P2_7 H14 G12 C10 96 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO0[7] — General purpose digital input/output pin. If this pin
is pulled LOW at reset, the part enters ISP mode using
USART0.
O CTOUT_1 — SCTimer/PWM output 1. Match output 3 of timer
3.
I/O U3_UCLK — Serial clock input/output for USART3 in
synchronous mode.
I/O EMC_A9 — External memory address line 9.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O T3_MAT3 — Match output 3 of timer 3.
- R — Function reserved.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 18 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
P2_8 J16 H14 C6 98 [2] N;
PU
I/O SGPIO15 — General purpose digital input/output pin. Boot pin
(see Table 5).
O CTOUT_0 — SCTimer/PWM output 0. Match output 0 of timer
0.
I/O U3_DIR — RS-485/EIA-485 output enable/direction control for
USART3.
I/O EMC_A8 — External memory address line 8.
I/O GPIO5[7] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
P2_9 H16 G14 B10 102 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO1[10] — General purpose digital input/output pin. Boot
pin (see Table 5.
O CTOUT_3 — SCTimer/PWM output 3. Match output 3 of timer
0.
I/O U3_BAUD — Baud pin for USART3.
I/O EMC_A0 — External memory address line 0.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
P2_10 G16 F14 E8 104 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO0[14] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O CTOUT_2 — SCTimer/PWM output 2. Match output 2 of timer
0.
O U2_TXD — Transmitter output for USART2.
I/O EMC_A1 — External memory address line 1.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
P2_11 F16 E13 A9 105 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO1[11] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O CTOUT_5 — SCTimer/PWM output 5. Match output 3 of timer
3.
I U2_RXD — Receiver input for USART2.
I/O EMC_A2 — External memory address line 2.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 19 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
P2_12 E15 D13 B9 106 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO1[12] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O CTOUT_4 — SCTimer/PWM output 4. Match output 3 of timer
3.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O EMC_A3 — External memory address line 3.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O U2_UCLK — Serial clock input/output for USART2 in
synchronous mode.
P2_13 C16 E14 A10 108 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO1[13] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I CTIN_4 — SCTimer/PWM input 4. Capture input 2 of timer 1.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O EMC_A4 — External memory address line 4.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O U2_DIR — RS-485/EIA-485 output enable/direction control for
USART2.
P3_0 F13 D12 A8 112 [2] N;
PU
I/O I2S0_RX_SCK — I2S receive clock. It is driven by the master
and received by the slave. Corresponds to the signal SCK in
the I
2S-bus specification.
O I2S0_RX_MCLK — I2S receive master clock.
I/O I2S0_TX_SCK — Transmit Clock. It is driven by the master
and received by the slave. Corresponds to the signal SCK in
the I2S-bus specification.
O I2S0_TX_MCLK — I2S transmit master clock.
I/O SSP0_SCK — Serial clock for SSP0.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 20 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
P3_1 G11 D10 F7 114 [2] N;
PU
I/O I2S0_TX_WS — Transmit Word Select. It is driven by the
master and received by the slave. Corresponds to the signal
WS in the I
2S-bus specification.
I/O I2S0_RX_WS — Receive Word Select. It is driven by the
master and received by the slave. Corresponds to the signal
WS in the I
2S-bus specification.
I CAN0_RD — CAN receiver input.
O USB1_IND1 — USB1 Port indicator LED control output 1.
I/O GPIO5[8] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_VD15 — LCD data.
- R — Function reserved.
P3_2 F11 D9 G6 116 [2] OL;
PU
I/O I2S0_TX_SDA — I2S transmit data. It is driven by the
transmitter and read by the receiver. Corresponds to the signal
SD in the I
2S-bus specification.
I/O I2S0_RX_SDA — I2S Receive data. It is driven by the
transmitter and read by the receiver. Corresponds to the signal
SD in the I
2S-bus specification.
O CAN0_TD — CAN transmitter output.
O USB1_IND0 — USB1 Port indicator LED control output 0.
I/O GPIO5[9] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_VD14 — LCD data.
- R — Function reserved.
P3_3 B14 B13 A7 118 [4] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SPI_SCK — Serial clock for SPI.
I/O SSP0_SCK — Serial clock for SSP0.
O SPIFI_SCK — Serial clock for SPIFI.
O CGU_OUT1 — CGU spare clock output 1.
- R — Function reserved.
O I2S0_TX_MCLK — I2S transmit master clock.
I/O I2S1_TX_SCK — Transmit Clock. It is driven by the master
and received by the slave. Corresponds to the signal SCK in
the I2S-bus specification.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 21 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
P3_4 A15 C14 B8 119 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO1[14] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SPIFI_SIO3 — I/O lane 3 for SPIFI.
O U1_TXD — Transmitter output for UART 1.
I/O I2S0_TX_WS — Transmit Word Select. It is driven by the
master and received by the slave. Corresponds to the signal
WS in the I
2S-bus specification.
I/O I2S1_RX_SDA — I2S1 Receive data. It is driven by the
transmitter and read by the receiver. Corresponds to the signal
SD in the I
2S-bus specification.
O LCD_VD13 — LCD data.
P3_5 C12 C11 B7 121 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO1[15] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SPIFI_SIO2 — I/O lane 2 for SPIFI.
I U1_RXD — Receiver input for UART 1.
I/O I2S0_TX_SDA — I2S transmit data. It is driven by the
transmitter and read by the receiver. Corresponds to the signal
SD in the I
2S-bus specification.
I/O I2S1_RX_WS — Receive Word Select. It is driven by the
master and received by the slave. Corresponds to the signal
WS in the I
2S-bus specification.
O LCD_VD12 — LCD data.
P3_6 B13 B12 C7 122 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO0[6] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O SPI_MISO — Master In Slave Out for SPI.
I/O SSP0_SSEL — Slave Select for SSP0.
I/O SPIFI_MISO — Input 1 in SPIFI quad mode; SPIFI output IO1.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SSP0_MISO — Master In Slave Out for SSP0.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
P3_7 C11 C10 D7 123 [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SPI_MOSI — Master Out Slave In for SPI.
I/O SSP0_MISO — Master In Slave Out for SSP0.
I/O SPIFI_MOSI — Input I0 in SPIFI quad mode; SPIFI output IO0.
I/O GPIO5[10] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O SSP0_MOSI — Master Out Slave in for SSP0.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 22 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
P3_8 C10 C9 E7 124 [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
I SPI_SSEL — Slave Select for SPI. Note that this pin in an
input pin only. The SPI in master mode cannot drive the CS
input on the slave. Any GPIO pin can be used for SPI chip
select in master mode.
I/O SSP0_MOSI — Master Out Slave in for SSP0.
I/O SPIFI_CS — SPIFI serial flash chip select.
I/O GPIO5[11] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O SSP0_SSEL — Slave Select for SSP0.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
P4_0 D5 D4 - 1 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO2[0] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O MCOA0 — Motor control PWM channel 0, output A.
I NMI — External interrupt input to NMI.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_VD13 — LCD data.
I/O U3_UCLK — Serial clock input/output for USART3 in
synchronous mode.
- R — Function reserved.
P4_1 A1 D3 - 3 [5] N;
PU
I/O GPIO2[1] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O CTOUT_1 — SCTimer/PWM output 1. Match output 3 of timer
3.
O LCD_VD0 — LCD data.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_VD19 — LCD data.
O U3_TXD — Transmitter output for USART3.
I ENET_COL — Ethernet Collision detect (MII interface).
AI ADC0_1 — ADC0 and ADC1, input channel 1. Configure the
pin as GPIO input and use the ADC function select register in
the SCU to select the ADC.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 23 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
P4_2 D3 A2 - 8 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO2[2] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O CTOUT_0 — SCTimer/PWM output 0. Match output 0 of timer
0.
O LCD_VD3 — LCD data.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_VD12 — LCD data.
I U3_RXD — Receiver input for USART3.
I/O SGPIO8 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
P4_3 C2 B2 - 7 [5] N;
PU
I/O GPIO2[3] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O CTOUT_3 — SCTimer/PWM output 3. Match output 3 of timer
0.
O LCD_VD2 — LCD data.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_VD21 — LCD data.
I/O U3_BAUD — Baud pin for USART3.
I/O SGPIO9 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
AI ADC0_0 — DAC output; ADC0 and ADC1, input channel 0.
Configure the pin as GPIO input and use the ADC function
select register in the SCU to select the ADC.
P4_4 B1 A1 - 9 [5] N;
PU
I/O GPIO2[4] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O CTOUT_2 — SCTimer/PWM output 2. Match output 2 of timer
0.
O LCD_VD1 — LCD data.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_VD20 — LCD data.
I/O U3_DIR — RS-485/EIA-485 output enable/direction control for
USART3.
I/O SGPIO10 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O DAC — DAC output. Shared between 10-bit ADC0/1 and
DAC.. Configure the pin as GPIO input and use the analog
function select register in the SCU to select the DAC.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 24 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
P4_5 D2 C2 - 10 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO2[5] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O CTOUT_5 — SCTimer/PWM output 5. Match output 3 of timer
3.
O LCD_FP — Frame pulse (STN). Vertical synchronization pulse
(TFT).
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SGPIO11 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
P4_6 C1 B1 - 11 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO2[6] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O CTOUT_4 — SCTimer/PWM output 4. Match output 3 of timer
3.
O LCD_ENAB/LCDM — STN AC bias drive or TFT data enable
input.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SGPIO12 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
P4_7 H4 F4 - 14 [2] O;
PU
O LCD_DCLK — LCD panel clock.
I GP_CLKIN — General-purpose clock input to the CGU.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O I2S1_TX_SCK — Transmit Clock. It is driven by the master
and received by the slave. Corresponds to the signal SCK in
the I2S-bus specification.
I/O I2S0_TX_SCK — Transmit Clock. It is driven by the master
and received by the slave. Corresponds to the signal SCK in
the I2S-bus specification.
P4_8 E2 D2 - 15 [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
I CTIN_5 — SCTimer/PWM input 5. Capture input 2 of timer 2.
O LCD_VD9 — LCD data.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O GPIO5[12] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O LCD_VD22 — LCD data.
O CAN1_TD — CAN1 transmitter output.
I/O SGPIO13 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 25 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
P4_9 L2 J2 - 33 [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
I CTIN_6 — SCTimer/PWM input 6. Capture input 1 of timer 3.
O LCD_VD11 — LCD data.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O GPIO5[13] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O LCD_VD15 — LCD data.
I CAN1_RD — CAN1 receiver input.
I/O SGPIO14 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
P4_10 M3 L3 - 35 [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
I CTIN_2 — SCTimer/PWM input 2. Capture input 2 of timer 0.
O LCD_VD10 — LCD data.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O GPIO5[14] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O LCD_VD14 — LCD data.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SGPIO15 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
P5_0 N3 L2 - 37 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO2[9] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O MCOB2 — Motor control PWM channel 2, output B.
I/O EMC_D12 — External memory data line 12.
- R — Function reserved.
I U1_DSR — Data Set Ready input for UART 1.
I T1_CAP0 — Capture input 0 of timer 1.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
P5_1 P3 M1 - 39 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO2[10] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I MCI2 — Motor control PWM channel 2, input.
I/O EMC_D13 — External memory data line 13.
- R — Function reserved.
O U1_DTR — Data Terminal Ready output for UART 1. Can also
be configured to be an RS-485/EIA-485 output enable signal
for UART 1.
I T1_CAP1 — Capture input 1 of timer 1.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 26 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
P5_2 R4 M3 - 46 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO2[11] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I MCI1 — Motor control PWM channel 1, input.
I/O EMC_D14 — External memory data line 14.
- R — Function reserved.
O U1_RTS — Request to Send output for UART 1. Can also be
configured to be an RS-485/EIA-485 output enable signal for
UART 1.
I T1_CAP2 — Capture input 2 of timer 1.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
P5_3 T8 P6 - 54 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO2[12] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I MCI0 — Motor control PWM channel 0, input.
I/O EMC_D15 — External memory data line 15.
- R — Function reserved.
I U1_RI — Ring Indicator input for UART 1.
I T1_CAP3 — Capture input 3 of timer 1.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
P5_4 P9 N7 - 57 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO2[13] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O MCOB0 — Motor control PWM channel 0, output B.
I/O EMC_D8 — External memory data line 8.
- R — Function reserved.
I U1_CTS — Clear to Send input for UART 1.
O T1_MAT0 — Match output 0 of timer 1.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
P5_5 P10 N8 - 58 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO2[14] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O MCOA1 — Motor control PWM channel 1, output A.
I/O EMC_D9 — External memory data line 9.
- R — Function reserved.
I U1_DCD — Data Carrier Detect input for UART 1.
O T1_MAT1 — Match output 1 of timer 1.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 27 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
P5_6 T13 M11 - 63 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO2[15] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O MCOB1 — Motor control PWM channel 1, output B.
I/O EMC_D10 — External memory data line 10.
- R — Function reserved.
O U1_TXD — Transmitter output for UART 1.
O T1_MAT2 — Match output 2 of timer 1.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
P5_7 R12 N11 - 65 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO2[7] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O MCOA2 — Motor control PWM channel 2, output A.
I/O EMC_D11 — External memory data line 11.
- R — Function reserved.
I U1_RXD — Receiver input for UART 1.
O T1_MAT3 — Match output 3 of timer 1.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
P6_0 M12 M10 H7 73 [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
O I2S0_RX_MCLK — I2S receive master clock.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O I2S0_RX_SCK — Receive Clock. It is driven by the master and
received by the slave. Corresponds to the signal SCK in the
I
2S-bus specification.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
P6_1 R15 P14 G5 74 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO3[0] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_DYCS1 — SDRAM chip select 1.
I/O U0_UCLK — Serial clock input/output for USART0 in
synchronous mode.
I/O I2S0_RX_WS — Receive Word Select. It is driven by the
master and received by the slave. Corresponds to the signal
WS in the I
2S-bus specification.
- R — Function reserved.
I T2_CAP0 — Capture input 2 of timer 2.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 28 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
P6_2 L13 K11 J9 78 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO3[1] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_CKEOUT1 — SDRAM clock enable 1.
I/O U0_DIR — RS-485/EIA-485 output enable/direction control for
USART0.
I/O I2S0_RX_SDA — I2S Receive data. It is driven by the
transmitter and read by the receiver. Corresponds to the signal
SD in the I
2S-bus specification.
- R — Function reserved.
I T2_CAP1 — Capture input 1 of timer 2.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
P6_3 P15 N13 - 79 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO3[2] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O USB0_PPWR — VBUS drive signal (towards external charge
pump or power management unit); indicates that the VBUS
signal must be driven (active HIGH).
Add a pull-down resistor to disable the power switch at reset.
This signal has opposite polarity compared to the USB_PPWR
used on other NXP LPC parts.
I/O SGPIO4 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_CS1 — LOW active Chip Select 1 signal.
- R — Function reserved.
I T2_CAP2 — Capture input 2 of timer 2.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
P6_4 R16 M14 F6 80 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO3[3] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I CTIN_6 — SCTimer/PWM input 6. Capture input 1 of timer 3.
O U0_TXD — Transmitter output for USART0.
O EMC_CAS — LOW active SDRAM Column Address Strobe.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 29 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
P6_5 P16 L14 F9 82 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO3[4] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O CTOUT_6 — SCTimer/PWM output 6. Match output 2 of timer
1.
I U0_RXD — Receiver input for USART0.
O EMC_RAS — LOW active SDRAM Row Address Strobe.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
P6_6 L14 K12 - 83 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO0[5] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O EMC_BLS1 — LOW active Byte Lane select signal 1.
I/O SGPIO5 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I USB0_PWR_FAULT — Port power fault signal indicating
overcurrent condition; this signal monitors over-current on the
USB bus (external circuitry required to detect over-current
condition).
- R — Function reserved.
I T2_CAP3 — Capture input 3 of timer 2.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
P6_7 J13 H11 - 85 [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
I/O EMC_A15 — External memory address line 15.
I/O SGPIO6 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O USB0_IND1 — USB0 port indicator LED control output 1.
I/O GPIO5[15] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O T2_MAT0 — Match output 0 of timer 2.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
P6_8 H13 F12 - 86 [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
I/O EMC_A14 — External memory address line 14.
I/O SGPIO7 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O USB0_IND0 — USB0 port indicator LED control output 0.
I/O GPIO5[16] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O T2_MAT1 — Match output 1 of timer 2.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 30 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
P6_9 J15 H13 F8 97 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO3[5] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O EMC_DYCS0 — SDRAM chip select 0.
- R — Function reserved.
O T2_MAT2 — Match output 2 of timer 2.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
P6_10 H15 G13 - 100 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO3[6] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O MCABORT — Motor control PWM, LOW-active fast abort.
- R — Function reserved.
O EMC_DQMOUT1 — Data mask 1 used with SDRAM and static
devices.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
P6_11 H12 F11 C9 101 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO3[7] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O EMC_CKEOUT0 — SDRAM clock enable 0.
- R — Function reserved.
O T2_MAT3 — Match output 3 of timer 2.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
P6_12 G15 F13 - 103 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO2[8] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O CTOUT_7 — SCTimer/PWM output 7. Match output 3 of timer
1.
- R — Function reserved.
O EMC_DQMOUT0 — Data mask 0 used with SDRAM and static
devices.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 31 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
P7_0 B16 B14 - 110 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO3[8] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O CTOUT_14 — SCTimer/PWM output 14. Match output 2 of
timer 3.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_LE — Line end signal.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SGPIO4 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
P7_1 C14 C13 - 113 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO3[9] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O CTOUT_15 — SCTimer/PWM output 15. Match output 3 of
timer 3.
I/O I2S0_TX_WS — Transmit Word Select. It is driven by the
master and received by the slave. Corresponds to the signal
WS in the I
2S-bus specification.
O LCD_VD19 — LCD data.
O LCD_VD7 — LCD data.
- R — Function reserved.
O U2_TXD — Transmitter output for USART2.
I/O SGPIO5 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
P7_2 A16 A14 - 115 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO3[10] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I CTIN_4 — SCTimer/PWM input 4. Capture input 2 of timer 1.
I/O I2S0_TX_SDA — I2S transmit data. It is driven by the
transmitter and read by the receiver. Corresponds to the signal
SD in the I
2S-bus specification.
O LCD_VD18 — LCD data.
O LCD_VD6 — LCD data.
- R — Function reserved.
I U2_RXD — Receiver input for USART2.
I/O SGPIO6 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
P7_3 C13 C12 - 117 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO3[11] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I CTIN_3 — SCTimer/PWM input 3. Capture input 1 of timer 1.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_VD17 — LCD data.
O LCD_VD5 — LCD data.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 32 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
P7_4 C8 C6 - 132 [5] N;
PU
I/O GPIO3[12] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O CTOUT_13 — SCTimer/PWM output 13. Match output 3 of
timer 3.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_VD16 — LCD data.
O LCD_VD4 — LCD data.
O TRACEDATA[0] — Trace data, bit 0.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
AI ADC0_4 — ADC0 and ADC1, input channel 4. Configure the
pin as GPIO input and use the ADC function select register in
the SCU to select the ADC.
P7_5 A7 A7 - 133 [5] N;
PU
I/O GPIO3[13] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O CTOUT_12 — SCTimer/PWM output 12. Match output 3 of
timer 3.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_VD8 — LCD data.
O LCD_VD23 — LCD data.
O TRACEDATA[1] — Trace data, bit 1.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
AI ADC0_3 — ADC0 and ADC1, input channel 3. Configure the
pin as GPIO input and use the ADC function select register in
the SCU to select the ADC.
P7_6 C7 F5 - 134 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO3[14] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O CTOUT_11 — SCTimer/PWM output 1. Match output 3 of
timer 2.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_LP — Line synchronization pulse (STN). Horizontal
synchronization pulse (TFT).
- R — Function reserved.
O TRACEDATA[2] — Trace data, bit 2.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 33 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
P7_7 B6 D5 - 140 [5] N;
PU
I/O GPIO3[15] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O CTOUT_8 — SCTimer/PWM output 8. Match output 0 of timer
2.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_PWR — LCD panel power enable.
- R — Function reserved.
O TRACEDATA[3] — Trace data, bit 3.
O ENET_MDC — Ethernet MIIM clock.
I/O SGPIO7 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
AI ADC1_6 — ADC1 and ADC0, input channel 6. Configure the
pin as GPIO input and use the ADC function select register in
the SCU to select the ADC.
P8_0 E5 E4 - - [3] N;
PU
I/O GPIO4[0] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I USB0_PWR_FAULT — Port power fault signal indicating
overcurrent condition; this signal monitors over-current on the
USB bus (external circuitry required to detect over-current
condition).
- R — Function reserved.
I MCI2 — Motor control PWM channel 2, input.
I/O SGPIO8 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O T0_MAT0 — Match output 0 of timer 0.
P8_1 H5 G4 - - [3] N;
PU
I/O GPIO4[1] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O USB0_IND1 — USB0 port indicator LED control output 1.
- R — Function reserved.
I MCI1 — Motor control PWM channel 1, input.
I/O SGPIO9 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O T0_MAT1 — Match output 1 of timer 0.
P8_2 K4 J4 - - [3] N;
PU
I/O GPIO4[2] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O USB0_IND0 — USB0 port indicator LED control output 0.
- R — Function reserved.
I MCI0 — Motor control PWM channel 0, input.
I/O SGPIO10 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O T0_MAT2 — Match output 2 of timer 0.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 34 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
P8_3 J3 H3 - - [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO4[3] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O USB1_ULPI_D2 — ULPI link bidirectional data line 2.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_VD12 — LCD data.
O LCD_VD19 — LCD data.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O T0_MAT3 — Match output 3 of timer 0.
P8_4 J2 H2 - - [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO4[4] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O USB1_ULPI_D1 — ULPI link bidirectional data line 1.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_VD7 — LCD data.
O LCD_VD16 — LCD data.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I T0_CAP0 — Capture input 0 of timer 0.
P8_5 J1 H1 - - [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO4[5] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O USB1_ULPI_D0 — ULPI link bidirectional data line 0.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_VD6 — LCD data.
O LCD_VD8 — LCD data.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I T0_CAP1 — Capture input 1 of timer 0.
P8_6 K3 J3 - - [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO4[6] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I USB1_ULPI_NXT — ULPI link NXT signal. Data flow control
signal from the PHY.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_VD5 — LCD data.
O LCD_LP — Line synchronization pulse (STN). Horizontal
synchronization pulse (TFT).
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I T0_CAP2 — Capture input 2 of timer 0.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 35 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
P8_7 K1 J1 - - [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO4[7] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O USB1_ULPI_STP — ULPI link STP signal. Asserted to end or
interrupt transfers to the PHY.
- R — Function reserved.
O LCD_VD4 — LCD data.
O LCD_PWR — LCD panel power enable.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I T0_CAP3 — Capture input 3 of timer 0.
P8_8 L1 K1 - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
I USB1_ULPI_CLK — ULPI link CLK signal. 60 MHz clock
generated by the PHY.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O CGU_OUT0 — CGU spare clock output 0.
O I2S1_TX_MCLK — I2S1 transmit master clock.
P9_0 T1 P1 - - [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO4[12] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O MCABORT — Motor control PWM, LOW-active fast abort.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I ENET_CRS — Ethernet Carrier Sense (MII interface).
I/O SGPIO0 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O SSP0_SSEL — Slave Select for SSP0.
P9_1 N6 P4 - - [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO4[13] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O MCOA2 — Motor control PWM channel 2, output A.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O I2S0_TX_WS — Transmit Word Select. It is driven by the
master and received by the slave. Corresponds to the signal
WS in the I
2S-bus specification.
I ENET_RX_ER — Ethernet receive error (MII interface).
I/O SGPIO1 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O SSP0_MISO — Master In Slave Out for SSP0.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 36 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
P9_2 N8 M6 - - [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO4[14] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O MCOB2 — Motor control PWM channel 2, output B.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O I2S0_TX_SDA — I2S transmit data. It is driven by the
transmitter and read by the receiver. Corresponds to the signal
SD in the I
2S-bus specification.
I ENET_RXD3 — Ethernet receive data 3 (MII interface).
I/O SGPIO2 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O SSP0_MOSI — Master Out Slave in for SSP0.
P9_3 M6 P5 - - [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO4[15] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O MCOA0 — Motor control PWM channel 0, output A.
O USB1_IND1 — USB1 Port indicator LED control output 1.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I ENET_RXD2 — Ethernet receive data 2 (MII interface).
I/O SGPIO9 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O U3_TXD — Transmitter output for USART3.
P9_4 N10 M8 - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
O MCOB0 — Motor control PWM channel 0, output B.
O USB1_IND0 — USB1 Port indicator LED control output 0.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O GPIO5[17] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O ENET_TXD2 — Ethernet transmit data 2 (MII interface).
I/O SGPIO4 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I U3_RXD — Receiver input for USART3.
P9_5 M9 L7 - 69 [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
O MCOA1 — Motor control PWM channel 1, output A.
O USB1_PPWR — VBUS drive signal (towards external charge
pump or power management unit); indicates that VBUS must
be driven (active high).
Add a pull-down resistor to disable the power switch at reset.
This signal has opposite polarity compared to the USB_PPWR
used on other NXP LPC parts.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O GPIO5[18] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O ENET_TXD3 — Ethernet transmit data 3 (MII interface).
I/O SGPIO3 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O U0_TXD — Transmitter output for USART0.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 37 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
P9_6 L11 M9 - 72 [2] N;
PU
I/O GPIO4[11] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O MCOB1 — Motor control PWM channel 1, output B.
I USB1_PWR_FAULT — USB1 Port power fault signal
indicating over-current condition; this signal monitors
over-current on the USB1 bus (external circuitry required to
detect over-current condition).
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I ENET_COL — Ethernet Collision detect (MII interface).
I/O SGPIO8 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I U0_RXD — Receiver input for USART0.
PA_0 L12 L10 - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O I2S1_RX_MCLK — I2S1 receive master clock.
O CGU_OUT1 — CGU spare clock output 1.
- R — Function reserved.
PA_1 J14 H12 - - [3] N;
PU
I/O GPIO4[8] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I QEI_IDX — Quadrature Encoder Interface INDEX input.
- R — Function reserved.
O U2_TXD — Transmitter output for USART2.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
PA_2 K15 J13 - - [3] N;
PU
I/O GPIO4[9] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I QEI_PHB — Quadrature Encoder Interface PHB input.
- R — Function reserved.
I U2_RXD — Receiver input for USART2.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 38 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
PA_3 H11 E10 - - [3] N;
PU
I/O GPIO4[10] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I QEI_PHA — Quadrature Encoder Interface PHA input.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
PA_4 G13 E12 - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
O CTOUT_9 — SCTimer/PWM output 9. Match output 3 of timer
3.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O EMC_A23 — External memory address line 23.
I/O GPIO5[19] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
PB_0 B15 D14 - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
O CTOUT_10 — SCTimer/PWM output 10. Match output 3 of
timer 3.
O LCD_VD23 — LCD data.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O GPIO5[20] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
PB_1 A14 A13 - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
I USB1_ULPI_DIR — ULPI link DIR signal. Controls the ULP
data line direction.
O LCD_VD22 — LCD data.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O GPIO5[21] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O CTOUT_6 — SCTimer/PWM output 6. Match output 2 of timer
1.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 39 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
PB_2 B12 B11 - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
I/O USB1_ULPI_D7 — ULPI link bidirectional data line 7.
O LCD_VD21 — LCD data.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O GPIO5[22] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O CTOUT_7 — SCTimer/PWM output 7. Match output 3 of timer
1.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
PB_3 A13 A12 - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
I/O USB1_ULPI_D6 — ULPI link bidirectional data line 6.
O LCD_VD20 — LCD data.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O GPIO5[23] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O CTOUT_8 — SCTimer/PWM output 8. Match output 0 of timer
2.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
PB_4 B11 B10 - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
I/O USB1_ULPI_D5 — ULPI link bidirectional data line 5.
O LCD_VD15 — LCD data.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O GPIO5[24] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I CTIN_5 — SCTimer/PWM input 5. Capture input 2 of timer 2.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
PB_5 A12 A11 - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
I/O USB1_ULPI_D4 — ULPI link bidirectional data line 4.
O LCD_VD14 — LCD data.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O GPIO5[25] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I CTIN_7 — SCTimer/PWM input 7.
O LCD_PWR — LCD panel power enable.
- R — Function reserved.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 40 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
PB_6 A6 C5 - - [5] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
I/O USB1_ULPI_D3 — ULPI link bidirectional data line 3.
O LCD_VD13 — LCD data.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O GPIO5[26] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I CTIN_6 — SCTimer/PWM input 6. Capture input 1 of timer 3.
O LCD_VD19 — LCD data.
- R — Function reserved.
AI ADC0_6 — ADC0 and ADC1, input channel 6. Configure the
pin as GPIO input and use the ADC function select register in
the SCU to select the ADC.
PC_0 D4 - - - [5] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
I USB1_ULPI_CLK — ULPI link CLK signal. 60 MHz clock
generated by the PHY.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O ENET_RX_CLK — Ethernet Receive Clock (MII interface).
O LCD_DCLK — LCD panel clock.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SD_CLK — SD/MMC card clock.
AI ADC1_1 — ADC1 and ADC0, input channel 1. Configure the
pin as input (USB_ULPI_CLK) and use the ADC function select
register in the SCU to select the ADC.
PC_1 E4 - - - [2] N;
PU
I/O USB1_ULPI_D7 — ULPI link bidirectional data line 7.
- R — Function reserved.
I U1_RI — Ring Indicator input for UART 1.
O ENET_MDC — Ethernet MIIM clock.
I/O GPIO6[0] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
I T3_CAP0 — Capture input 0 of timer 3.
O SD_VOLT0 — SD/MMC bus voltage select output 0.
PC_2 F6 - - - [2] N;
PU
I/O USB1_ULPI_D6 — ULPI link bidirectional data line 6.
- R — Function reserved.
I U1_CTS — Clear to Send input for UART 1.
O ENET_TXD2 — Ethernet transmit data 2 (MII interface).
I/O GPIO6[1] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O SD_RST — SD/MMC reset signal for MMC4.4 card.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 41 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
PC_3 F5 - - - [5] N;
PU
I/O USB1_ULPI_D5 — ULPI link bidirectional data line 5.
- R — Function reserved.
O U1_RTS — Request to Send output for UART 1. Can also be
configured to be an RS-485/EIA-485 output enable signal for
UART 1.
O ENET_TXD3 — Ethernet transmit data 3 (MII interface).
I/O GPIO6[2] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O SD_VOLT1 — SD/MMC bus voltage select output 1.
AI ADC1_0 — DAC output; ADC1 and ADC0, input channel 0.
Configure the pin as GPIO input and use the ADC function
select register in the SCU to select the ADC.
PC_4 F4 - - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
I/O USB1_ULPI_D4 — ULPI link bidirectional data line 4.
- R — Function reserved.
ENET_TX_EN — Ethernet transmit enable (RMII/MII
interface).
I/O GPIO6[3] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
I T3_CAP1 — Capture input 1 of timer 3.
I/O SD_DAT0 — SD/MMC data bus line 0.
PC_5 G4 - - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
I/O USB1_ULPI_D3 — ULPI link bidirectional data line 3.
- R — Function reserved.
O ENET_TX_ER — Ethernet Transmit Error (MII interface).
I/O GPIO6[4] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
I T3_CAP2 — Capture input 2 of timer 3.
I/O SD_DAT1 — SD/MMC data bus line 1.
PC_6 H6 - - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
I/O USB1_ULPI_D2 — ULPI link bidirectional data line 2.
- R — Function reserved.
I ENET_RXD2 — Ethernet receive data 2 (MII interface).
I/O GPIO6[5] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
I T3_CAP3 — Capture input 3 of timer 3.
I/O SD_DAT2 — SD/MMC data bus line 2.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 42 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
PC_7 G5 - - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
I/O USB1_ULPI_D1 — ULPI link bidirectional data line 1.
- R — Function reserved.
I ENET_RXD3 — Ethernet receive data 3 (MII interface).
I/O GPIO6[6] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
O T3_MAT0 — Match output 0 of timer 3.
I/O SD_DAT3 — SD/MMC data bus line 3.
PC_8 N4 - - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
I/O USB1_ULPI_D0 — ULPI link bidirectional data line 0.
- R — Function reserved.
I ENET_RX_DV — Ethernet Receive Data Valid (RMII/MII
interface).
I/O GPIO6[7] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
O T3_MAT1 — Match output 1 of timer 3.
I SD_CD — SD/MMC card detect input.
PC_9 K2 - - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
I USB1_ULPI_NXT — ULPI link NXT signal. Data flow control
signal from the PHY.
- R — Function reserved.
I ENET_RX_ER — Ethernet receive error (MII interface).
I/O GPIO6[8] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
O T3_MAT2 — Match output 2 of timer 3.
O SD_POW — SD/MMC power monitor output.
PC_10 M5 - - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
O USB1_ULPI_STP — ULPI link STP signal. Asserted to end or
interrupt transfers to the PHY.
I U1_DSR — Data Set Ready input for UART 1.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O GPIO6[9] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
O T3_MAT3 — Match output 3 of timer 3.
I/O SD_CMD — SD/MMC command signal.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 43 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
PC_11 L5 - - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
I USB1_ULPI_DIR — ULPI link DIR signal. Controls the ULPI
data line direction.
I U1_DCD — Data Carrier Detect input for UART 1.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O GPIO6[10] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SD_DAT4 — SD/MMC data bus line 4.
PC_12 L6 - - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O U1_DTR — Data Terminal Ready output for UART 1. Can also
be configured to be an RS-485/EIA-485 output enable signal
for UART 1.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O GPIO6[11] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O SGPIO11 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O I2S0_TX_SDA — I2S transmit data. It is driven by the
transmitter and read by the receiver. Corresponds to the signal
SD in the I
2S-bus specification.
I/O SD_DAT5 — SD/MMC data bus line 5.
PC_13 M1 - - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O U1_TXD — Transmitter output for UART 1.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O GPIO6[12] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O SGPIO12 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O I2S0_TX_WS — Transmit Word Select. It is driven by the
master and received by the slave. Corresponds to the signal
WS in the I
2S-bus specification.
I/O SD_DAT6 — SD/MMC data bus line 6.
PC_14 N1 - - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I U1_RXD — Receiver input for UART 1.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O GPIO6[13] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O SGPIO13 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O ENET_TX_ER — Ethernet Transmit Error (MII interface).
I/O SD_DAT7 — SD/MMC data bus line 7.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 44 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
PD_0 N2 - - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
O CTOUT_15 — SCTimer/PWM output 15. Match output 3 of
timer 3.
O EMC_DQMOUT2 — Data mask 2 used with SDRAM and static
devices.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O GPIO6[14] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SGPIO4 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
PD_1 P1 - - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O EMC_CKEOUT2 — SDRAM clock enable 2.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O GPIO6[15] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O SD_POW — SD/MMC power monitor output.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SGPIO5 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
PD_2 R1 - - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
O CTOUT_7 — SCTimer/PWM output 7. Match output 3 of timer
1.
I/O EMC_D16 — External memory data line 16.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O GPIO6[16] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SGPIO6 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
PD_3 P4 - - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
O CTOUT_6 — SCTimer/PWM output 7. Match output 2 of timer
1.
I/O EMC_D17 — External memory data line 17.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O GPIO6[17] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SGPIO7 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 45 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
PD_4 T2 - - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
O CTOUT_8 — SCTimer/PWM output 8. Match output 0 of timer
2.
I/O EMC_D18 — External memory data line 18.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O GPIO6[18] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SGPIO8 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
PD_5 P6 - - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
O CTOUT_9 — SCTimer/PWM output 9. Match output 3 of timer
3.
I/O EMC_D19 — External memory data line 19.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O GPIO6[19] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SGPIO9 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
PD_6 R6 - - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
O CTOUT_10 — SCTimer/PWM output 10. Match output 3 of
timer 3.
I/O EMC_D20 — External memory data line 20.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O GPIO6[20] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SGPIO10 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
PD_7 T6 - - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
I CTIN_5 — SCTimer/PWM input 5. Capture input 2 of timer 2.
I/O EMC_D21 — External memory data line 21.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O GPIO6[21] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SGPIO11 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 46 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
PD_8 P8 - - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
I CTIN_6 — SCTimer/PWM input 6. Capture input 1 of timer 3.
I/O EMC_D22 — External memory data line 22.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O GPIO6[22] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SGPIO12 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
PD_9 T11 - - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
O CTOUT_13 — SCTimer/PWM output 13. Match output 3 of
timer 3.
I/O EMC_D23 — External memory data line 23.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O GPIO6[23] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SGPIO13 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
PD_10 P11 - - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
I CTIN_1 — SCTimer/PWM input 1. Capture input 1 of timer 0.
Capture input 1 of timer 2.
O EMC_BLS3 — LOW active Byte Lane select signal 3.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O GPIO6[24] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
PD_11 N9 M7 - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O EMC_CS3 — LOW active Chip Select 3 signal.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O GPIO6[25] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O USB1_ULPI_D0 — ULPI link bidirectional data line 0.
O CTOUT_14 — SCTimer/PWM output 14. Match output 2 of
timer 3.
- R — Function reserved.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 47 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
PD_12 N11 P9 - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O EMC_CS2 — LOW active Chip Select 2 signal.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O GPIO6[26] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
O CTOUT_10 — SCTimer/PWM output 10. Match output 3 of
timer 3.
- R — Function reserved.
PD_13 T14 - - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
I CTIN_0 — SCTimer/PWM input 0. Capture input 0 of timer 0,
1, 2, 3.
O EMC_BLS2 — LOW active Byte Lane select signal 2.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O GPIO6[27] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
O CTOUT_13 — SCTimer/PWM output 13. Match output 3 of
timer 3.
- R — Function reserved.
PD_14 R13 L11 - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O EMC_DYCS2 — SDRAM chip select 2.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O GPIO6[28] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
O CTOUT_11 — SCTimer/PWM output 11. Match output 3 of
timer 2.
- R — Function reserved.
PD_15 T15 P13 - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O EMC_A17 — External memory address line 17.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O GPIO6[29] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I SD_WP — SD/MMC card write protect input.
O CTOUT_8 — SCTimer/PWM output 8. Match output 0 of timer
2.
- R — Function reserved.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 48 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
PD_16 R14 P12 - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O EMC_A16 — External memory address line 16.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O GPIO6[30] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O SD_VOLT2 — SD/MMC bus voltage select output 2.
O CTOUT_12 — SCTimer/PWM output 12. Match output 3 of
timer 3.
- R — Function reserved.
PE_0 P14 N12 - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O EMC_A18 — External memory address line 18.
I/O GPIO7[0] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
O CAN1_TD — CAN1 transmitter output.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
PE_1 N14 M12 - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O EMC_A19 — External memory address line 19.
I/O GPIO7[1] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I CAN1_RD — CAN1 receiver input.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
PE_2 M14 L12 - - [2] N;
PU
I ADCTRIG0 — ADC trigger input 0.
I CAN0_RD — CAN receiver input.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O EMC_A20 — External memory address line 20.
I/O GPIO7[2] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 49 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
PE_3 K12 K10 - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
O CAN0_TD — CAN transmitter output.
I ADCTRIG1 — ADC trigger input 1.
I/O EMC_A21 — External memory address line 21.
I/O GPIO7[3] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
PE_4 K13 J11 - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
I NMI — External interrupt input to NMI.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O EMC_A22 — External memory address line 22.
I/O GPIO7[4] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
PE_5 N16 - - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
O CTOUT_3 — SCTimer/PWM output 3. Match output 3 of timer
0.
O U1_RTS — Request to Send output for UART 1. Can also be
configured to be an RS-485/EIA-485 output enable signal for
UART 1.
I/O EMC_D24 — External memory data line 24.
I/O GPIO7[5] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
PE_6 M16 - - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
O CTOUT_2 — SCTimer/PWM output 2. Match output 2 of timer
0.
I U1_RI — Ring Indicator input for UART 1.
I/O EMC_D25 — External memory data line 25.
I/O GPIO7[6] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 50 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
PE_7 F15 - - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
O CTOUT_5 — SCTimer/PWM output 5. Match output 3 of timer
3.
I U1_CTS — Clear to Send input for UART1.
I/O EMC_D26 — External memory data line 26.
I/O GPIO7[7] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
PE_8 F14 - - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
O CTOUT_4 — SCTimer/PWM output 4. Match output 3 of timer
3.
I U1_DSR — Data Set Ready input for UART 1.
I/O EMC_D27 — External memory data line 27.
I/O GPIO7[8] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
PE_9 E16 - - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
I CTIN_4 — SCTimer/PWM input 4. Capture input 2 of timer 1.
I U1_DCD — Data Carrier Detect input for UART 1.
I/O EMC_D28 — External memory data line 28.
I/O GPIO7[9] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
PE_10 E14 - - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
I CTIN_3 — SCTimer/PWM input 3. Capture input 1 of timer 1.
O U1_DTR — Data Terminal Ready output for UART 1. Can also
be configured to be an RS-485/EIA-485 output enable signal
for UART 1.
I/O EMC_D29 — External memory data line 29.
I/O GPIO7[10] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 51 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
PE_11 D16 - - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
O CTOUT_12 — SCTimer/PWM output 12. Match output 3 of
timer 3.
O U1_TXD — Transmitter output for UART 1.
I/O EMC_D30 — External memory data line 30.
I/O GPIO7[11] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
PE_12 D15 - - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
O CTOUT_11 — SCTimer/PWM output 11. Match output 3 of
timer 2.
I U1_RXD — Receiver input for UART 1.
I/O EMC_D31 — External memory data line 31.
I/O GPIO7[12] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
PE_13 G14 - - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
O CTOUT_14 — SCTimer/PWM output 14. Match output 2 of
timer 3.
I/O I2C1_SDA — I
2C1 data input/output (this pin does not use a
specialized I2C pad).
O EMC_DQMOUT3 — Data mask 3 used with SDRAM and static
devices.
I/O GPIO7[13] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
PE_14 C15 - - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O EMC_DYCS3 — SDRAM chip select 3.
I/O GPIO7[14] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 52 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
PE_15 E13 - - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
O CTOUT_0 — SCTimer/PWM output 0. Match output 0 of timer
0.
I/O I2C1_SCL — I
2C1 clock input/output (this pin does not use a
specialized I2C pad).
O EMC_CKEOUT3 — SDRAM clock enable 3.
I/O GPIO7[15] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
PF_0 D12 - - - [2] O;
PU
I/O SSP0_SCK — Serial clock for SSP0.
I GP_CLKIN — General-purpose clock input to the CGU.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O I2S1_TX_MCLK — I2S1 transmit master clock.
PF_1 E11 - - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SSP0_SSEL — Slave Select for SSP0.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O GPIO7[16] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SGPIO0 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
PF_2 D11 - - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
O U3_TXD — Transmitter output for USART3.
I/O SSP0_MISO — Master In Slave Out for SSP0.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O GPIO7[17] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SGPIO1 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 53 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
PF_3 E10 - - - [2] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
I U3_RXD — Receiver input for USART3.
I/O SSP0_MOSI — Master Out Slave in for SSP0.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O GPIO7[18] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SGPIO2 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
PF_4 D10 D6 H4 120 [2] O;
PU
I/O SSP1_SCK — Serial clock for SSP1.
I GP_CLKIN — General-purpose clock input to the CGU.
O TRACECLK — Trace clock.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O I2S0_TX_MCLK — I2S transmit master clock.
I/O I2S0_RX_SCK — I2S receive clock. It is driven by the master
and received by the slave. Corresponds to the signal SCK in
the I
2S-bus specification.
PF_5 E9 - - - [5] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
I/O U3_UCLK — Serial clock input/output for USART3 in
synchronous mode.
I/O SSP1_SSEL — Slave Select for SSP1.
O TRACEDATA[0] — Trace data, bit 0.
I/O GPIO7[19] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SGPIO4 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
AI ADC1_4 — ADC1 and ADC0, input channel 4. Configure the
pin as GPIO input and use the ADC function select register in
the SCU to select the ADC.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 54 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
PF_6 E7 - - - [5] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
I/O U3_DIR — RS-485/EIA-485 output enable/direction control for
USART3.
I/O SSP1_MISO — Master In Slave Out for SSP1.
O TRACEDATA[1] — Trace data, bit 1.
I/O GPIO7[20] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SGPIO5 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O I2S1_TX_SDA — I2S1 transmit data. It is driven by the
transmitter and read by the receiver. Corresponds to the signal
SD in the I
2S-bus specification.
AI ADC1_3 — ADC1 and ADC0, input channel 3. Configure the
pin as GPIO input and use the ADC function select register in
the SCU to select the ADC.
PF_7 B7 - - - [5] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
I/O U3_BAUD — Baud pin for USART3.
I/O SSP1_MOSI — Master Out Slave in for SSP1.
O TRACEDATA[2] — Trace data, bit 2.
I/O GPIO7[21] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SGPIO6 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
I/O I2S1_TX_WS — Transmit Word Select. It is driven by the
master and received by the slave. Corresponds to the signal
WS in the I
2S-bus specification.
AI/
O
ADC1_7 — ADC1 and ADC0, input channel 7 or band gap
output. Configure the pin as GPIO input and use the ADC
function select register in the SCU to select the ADC.
PF_8 E6 - - - [5] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
I/O U0_UCLK — Serial clock input/output for USART0 in
synchronous mode.
I CTIN_2 — SCTimer/PWM input 2. Capture input 2 of timer 0.
O TRACEDATA[3] — Trace data, bit 3.
I/O GPIO7[22] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SGPIO7 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
AI ADC0_2 — ADC0 and ADC1, input channel 2. Configure the
pin as GPIO input and use the ADC function select register in
the SCU to select the ADC.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 55 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
PF_9 D6 - - - [5] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
I/O U0_DIR — RS-485/EIA-485 output enable/direction control for
USART0.
O CTOUT_1 — SCTimer/PWM output 1. Match output 3 of timer
3.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O GPIO7[23] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SGPIO3 — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
AI ADC1_2 — ADC1 and ADC0, input channel 2. Configure the
pin as GPIO input and use the ADC function select register in
the SCU to select the ADC.
PF_10 A3 - - - [5] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
O U0_TXD — Transmitter output for USART0.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O GPIO7[24] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
I SD_WP — SD/MMC card write protect input.
- R — Function reserved.
AI ADC0_5 — ADC0 and ADC1, input channel 5. Configure the
pin as GPIO input and use the ADC function select register in
the SCU to select the ADC.
PF_11 A2 - - - [5] N;
PU
- R — Function reserved.
I U0_RXD — Receiver input for USART0.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O GPIO7[25] — General purpose digital input/output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
O SD_VOLT2 — SD/MMC bus voltage select output 2.
- R — Function reserved.
AI ADC1_5 — ADC1 and ADC0, input channel 5. Configure the
pin as GPIO input and use the ADC function select register in
the SCU to select the ADC.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 56 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
Clock pins
CLK0 N5 M4 K3 45 [4] O;
PU
O EMC_CLK0 — SDRAM clock 0.
O CLKOUT — Clock output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SD_CLK — SD/MMC card clock.
O EMC_CLK01 — SDRAM clock 0 and clock 1 combined.
I/O SSP1_SCK — Serial clock for SSP1.
I ENET_TX_CLK (ENET_REF_CLK) — Ethernet Transmit
Clock (MII interface) or Ethernet Reference Clock (RMII
interface).
CLK1 T10 - - - [4] O;
PU
O EMC_CLK1 — SDRAM clock 1.
O CLKOUT — Clock output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O CGU_OUT0 — CGU spare clock output 0.
- R — Function reserved.
O I2S1_TX_MCLK — I2S1 transmit master clock.
CLK2 D14 P10 K6 99 [4] O;
PU
O EMC_CLK3 — SDRAM clock 3.
O CLKOUT — Clock output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O SD_CLK — SD/MMC card clock.
O EMC_CLK23 — SDRAM clock 2 and clock 3 combined.
O I2S0_TX_MCLK — I2S transmit master clock.
I/O I2S1_RX_SCK — Receive Clock. It is driven by the master and
received by the slave. Corresponds to the signal SCK in the
I
2S-bus specification.
CLK3 P12 - - - [4] O;
PU
O EMC_CLK2 — SDRAM clock 2.
O CLKOUT — Clock output pin.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
- R — Function reserved.
O CGU_OUT1 — CGU spare clock output 1.
- R — Function reserved.
I/O I2S1_RX_SCK — Receive Clock. It is driven by the master and
received by the slave. Corresponds to the signal SCK in the
I
2S-bus specification.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 57 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
Debug pins
DBGEN L4 K4 A6 28 [2] I; PU I JTAG interface control signal. Also used for boundary scan. To
use the part in functional mode, connect this pin in one of the
following ways:
• Leave DBGEN open. The DBGEN pin is pulled up
internally by a 50 kΩ resistor.
• Tie DBGEN to VDDIO.
• Pull DBGEN up to VDDIO with an external pull-up resistor.
TCK/SWDCLK J5 G5 H2 27 [2] I; F I Test Clock for JTAG interface (default) or Serial Wire (SW)
clock.
TRST M4 L4 B4 29 [2] I; PU I Test Reset for JTAG interface.
TMS/SWDIO K6 K5 C4 30 [2] I; PU I Test Mode Select for JTAG interface (default) or SW debug
data input/output.
TDO/SWO K5 J5 H3 31 [2] O O Test Data Out for JTAG interface (default) or SW trace output.
TDI J4 H4 G3 26 [2] I; PU I Test Data In for JTAG interface.
USB0 pins
USB0_DP F2 E2 E1 18 [6] - I/O USB0 bidirectional D+ line.
USB0_DM G2 F2 E2 20 [6] - I/O USB0 bidirectional D line.
USB0_VBUS F1 E1 E3 21 [6]
[7]
- I/O VBUS pin (power on USB cable). This pin includes an internal
pull-down resistor of 64 kΩ (typical) 16 kΩ.
USB0_ID H2 G2 F1 22 [8] - I Indicates to the transceiver whether connected as an A-device
(USB0_ID LOW) or B-device (USB0_ID HIGH). For OTG this
pin has an internal pull-up resistor.
USB0_RREF H1 G1 F3 24 [8] - 12.0 kΩ (accuracy 1 %) on-board resistor to ground for current
reference.
USB1 pins
USB1_DP F12 D11 E9 89 [9] - I/O USB1 bidirectional D+ line.
USB1_DM G12 E11 E10 90 [9] - I/O USB1 bidirectional D line.
I
2C-bus pins
I2C0_SCL L15 K13 D6 92 [10] I; F I/O I2C clock input/output. Open-drain output (for I2C-bus
compliance).
I2C0_SDA L16 K14 E6 93 [10] I; F I/O I2C data input/output. Open-drain output (for I2C-bus
compliance).
Reset and wake-up pins
RESET D9 C7 B6 128 [11] I; IA I External reset input: A LOW-going pulse as short as 50 ns on
this pin resets the device, causing I/O ports and peripherals to
take on their default states, and processor execution to begin
at address 0. This pin does not have an internal pull-up.
WAKEUP0 A9 A9 A4 130 [11] I; IA I External wake-up input; can raise an interrupt and can cause
wake-up from any of the low-power modes. A pulse with a
duration > 45 ns wakes up the part. This pin does not have an
internal pull-up.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 58 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
WAKEUP1 A10 C8 - - [11] I; IA I External wake-up input; can raise an interrupt and can cause
wake-up from any of the low-power modes. A pulse with a
duration > 45 ns wakes up the part. This pin does not have an
internal pull-up.
WAKEUP2 C9 E5 - - [11] I; IA I External wake-up input; can raise an interrupt and can cause
wake-up from any of the low-power modes. A pulse with a
duration > 45 ns wakes up the part. This pin does not have an
internal pull-up.
WAKEUP3 D8 - - - [11] I; IA I External wake-up input; can raise an interrupt and can cause
wake-up from any of the low-power modes. A pulse with a
duration > 45 ns wakes up the part. This pin does not have an
internal pull-up.
ADC pins
ADC0_0/
ADC1_0/DAC
E3 B6 A2 6 [8] I; IA I ADC input channel 0. Shared between 10-bit ADC0/1 and
DAC.
ADC0_1/
ADC1_1
C3 C4 A1 2 [8] I; IA I ADC input channel 1. Shared between 10-bit ADC0/1.
ADC0_2/
ADC1_2
A4 B3 B3 143 [8] I; IA I ADC input channel 2. Shared between 10-bit ADC0/1.
ADC0_3/
ADC1_3
B5 B4 A3 139 [8] I; IA I ADC input channel 3. Shared between 10-bit ADC0/1.
ADC0_4/
ADC1_4
C6 A5 - 138 [8] I; IA I ADC input channel 4. Shared between 10-bit ADC0/1.
ADC0_5/
ADC1_5
B3 C3 - 144 [8] I; IA I ADC input channel 5. Shared between 10-bit ADC0/1.
ADC0_6/
ADC1_6
A5 A4 - 142 [8] I; IA I ADC input channel 6. Shared between 10-bit ADC0/1.
ADC0_7/
ADC1_7
C5 B5 - 136 [8] I; IA I ADC input channel 7. Shared between 10-bit ADC0/1.
RTC
RTC_ALARM A11 A10 C3 129 [11] O O RTC controlled output. This pin has an internal pull-up. The
reset state of this pin is LOW after POR. For all other types of
reset, the reset state depends on the state of the RTC alarm
interrupt.
RTCX1 A8 A8 A5 125 [8] - I Input to the RTC 32 kHz ultra-low power oscillator circuit.
RTCX2 B8 B7 B5 126 [8] - O Output from the RTC 32 kHz ultra-low power oscillator circuit.
Crystal oscillator pins
XTAL1 D1 C1 B1 12 [8] - I Input to the oscillator circuit and internal clock generator
circuits.
XTAL2 E1 D1 C1 13 [8] - O Output from the oscillator amplifier.
Power and ground pins
USB0_VDDA
3V3_DRIVER
F3 E3 D1 16 - - Separate analog 3.3 V power supply for driver.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 59 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
USB0
_VDDA3V3
G3 F3 D2 17 - - USB 3.3 V separate power supply voltage.
USB0_VSSA
_TERM
H3 G3 D3 19 - - Dedicated analog ground for clean reference for termination
resistors.
USB0_VSSA
_REF
G1 F1 F2 23 - - Dedicated clean analog ground for generation of reference
currents and voltages.
VDDA B4 A6 B2 137 - - Analog power supply and ADC reference voltage.
VBAT B10 B9 C5 127 - - RTC power supply: 3.3 V on this pin supplies power to the
RTC.
VDDREG F10,
F9,
L8,
L7
D8,
E8
E4,
E5,
F4
94,
131,
59,
25
- Main regulator power supply. Tie the VDDREG and VDDIO
pins to a common power supply to ensure the same ramp-up
time for both supply voltages.
VPP E8 - - - [12] - - OTP programming voltage.
VDDIO D7,
E12,
F7,
F8,
G10,
H10,
J6,
J7,
K7,
L9,
L10,
N7,
N13
H5,
H10,
K8,
G10
F10,
K5
5,
36,
41,
71,
77,
107,
111,
141
[12] - - I/O power supply. Tie the VDDREG and VDDIO pins to a
common power supply to ensure the same ramp-up time for
both supply voltages.
VDD - - - - Power supply for main regulator, I/O, and OTP.
VSS G9,
H7,
J10,
J11,
K8
F10,
D7,
E6,
E7,
E9,
K6,
K9
- - [13]
[14]
- - Ground.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 60 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
[1] N = neutral, input buffer disabled; no extra VDDIO current consumption if the input is driven midway between supplies; set the EZI bit in
the SFS register to enable the input buffer; I = input; OL = output driving LOW; OH = output driving HIGH; AI/O = analog input/output; IA
= inactive; PU = pull-up enabled (weak pull-up resistor pulls up pin to VDDIO; F = floating. Reset state reflects the pin state at reset
without boot code operation.
[2] 5 V tolerant pad with 15 ns glitch filter (5 V tolerant if VDDIO present; if VDDIO not present, do not exceed 3.6 V); provides digital I/O
functions with TTL levels and hysteresis; normal drive strength.
[3] 5 V tolerant pad with 15 ns glitch filter (5 V tolerant if VDDIO present; if VDDIO not present, do not exceed 3.6 V); provides digital I/O
functions with TTL levels, and hysteresis; high drive strength.
[4] 5 V tolerant pad with 15 ns glitch filter (5 V tolerant if VDDIO present; if VDDIO not present, do not exceed 3.6 V); provides high-speed
digital I/O functions with TTL levels and hysteresis.
[5] 5 V tolerant pad providing digital I/O functions (with TTL levels and hysteresis) and analog input or output (5 V tolerant if VDDIO present;
if VDDIO not present, do not exceed 3.6 V). When configured as an ADC input or DAC output, the pin is not 5 V tolerant and the digital
section of the pad must be disabled by setting the pin to an input function and disabling the pull-up resistor through the pin’s SFSP
register.
[6] 5 V tolerant transparent analog pad.
[7] For maximum load CL = 6.5 μF and maximum pull-down resistance Rpd = 80 kΩ, the VBUS signal takes about 2 s to fall from VBUS =
5 V to VBUS = 0.2 V when it is no longer driven.
[8] Transparent analog pad. Not 5 V tolerant.
[9] Pad provides USB functions 5 V tolerant if VDDIO present; if VDDIO not present, do not exceed 3.6 V. It is designed in accordance with
the USB specification, revision 2.0 (Full-speed and Low-speed mode only).
[10] Open-drain 5 V tolerant digital I/O pad, compatible with I2C-bus Fast Mode Plus specification. This pad requires an external pull-up to
provide output functionality. When power is switched off, this pin connected to the I2C-bus is floating and does not disturb the I2C lines.
[11] 5 V tolerant pad with 20 ns glitch filter; provides digital I/O functions with open-drain output and hysteresis.
[12] On the TFBGA100 package, VPP is internally connected to VDDIO.
[13] On the LQFP144 package, VSSIO and VSS are connected to a common ground plane.
[14] On the TFBGA100 package, VSS is internally connected to VSSIO.
VSSIO C4,
D13,
G6,
G7,
G8,
H8,
H9,
J8,
J9,
K9,
K10,
M13,
P7,
P13
- C8,
D4,
D5,
G8,
J3,
J6
4,
40,
76,
109
[13]
[14]
- - Ground.
VSSA B2 A3 C2 135 - - Analog ground.
Not connected
- B9 B8 - - - - n.c.
Table 3. Pin description …continued
LCD, Ethernet, USB0, and USB1 functions are not available on all parts. See Table 2.
Symbol
LBGA256
TFBGA180
TFBGA100
LQFP144
Reset state
[1]
Type
DescriptionLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 61 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
7. Functional description
7.1 Architectural overview
The ARM Cortex-M4 includes three AHB-Lite buses: the system bus, the I-CODE bus,
and the D-code bus. The I-CODE and D-code core buses allow for concurrent code and
data accesses from different slave ports.
The LPC4350/30/20/10 use a multi-layer AHB matrix to connect the ARM Cortex-M4
buses and other bus masters to peripherals in a flexible manner that optimizes
performance by allowing peripherals that are on different slaves ports of the matrix to be
accessed simultaneously by different bus masters.
An ARM Cortex-M0 co-processor is included in the LPC4350/30/20/10, capable of
off-loading the main ARM Cortex-M4 application processor. Most peripheral interrupts are
connected to both processors. The processors communicate with each other via an
interprocessor communication protocol.
7.2 ARM Cortex-M4 processor
The ARM Cortex-M4 CPU incorporates a 3-stage pipeline, uses a Harvard architecture
with separate local instruction and data buses as well as a third bus for peripherals, and
includes an internal prefetch unit that supports speculative branching. The ARM
Cortex-M4 supports single-cycle digital signal processing and SIMD instructions. A
hardware floating-point processor is integrated in the core. The processor includes an
NVIC with up to 53 interrupts.
7.3 ARM Cortex-M0 co-processor
The ARM Cortex-M0 is a general purpose, 32-bit microprocessor, which offers high
performance and very low-power consumption. The ARM Cortex-M0 co-processor uses a
3-stage pipeline von-Neumann architecture and a small but powerful instruction set
providing high-end processing hardware. The co-processor incorporates an NVIC with 32
interrupts.
7.4 Interprocessor communication
The ARM Cortex-M4 and ARM Cortex-M0 interprocessor communication is based on
using shared SRAM as mailbox and one processor raising an interrupt on the other
processor's NVIC, for example after it has delivered a new message in the mailbox. The
receiving processor can reply by raising an interrupt on the sending processor's NVIC to
acknowledge the message.LPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 62 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
7.5 AHB multilayer matrix
7.6 Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC)
The NVIC is an integral part of the Cortex-M4. The tight coupling to the CPU allows for low
interrupt latency and efficient processing of late arriving interrupts.
The ARM Cortex-M0 co-processor has its own NVIC with 32 vectored interrupts. Most
peripheral interrupts are shared between the Cortex-M0 and Cortex-M4 NVICs.
Fig 6. AHB multilayer matrix master and slave connections
ARM
CORTEX-M4
TEST/DEBUG
INTERFACE
ARM
CORTEX-M0
TEST/DEBUG
INTERFACE
DMA ETHERNET USB0 USB1 LCD SD/
MMC
EXTERNAL
MEMORY
CONTROLLER
APB, RTC
DOMAIN
PERIPHERALS
16 kB + 16 kB
AHB SRAM
64 kB ROM
128 kB LOCAL SRAM
72 kB LOCAL SRAM
System
bus
I-
code
bus
D-
code
bus
masters
slaves
0 1
AHB MULTILAYER MATRIX
= master-slave connection
32 kB AHB SRAM
SPIFI
SGPIO
AHB PERIPHERALS
REGISTER
INTERFACES
002aaf873
HIGH-SPEED PHYLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 63 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
7.6.1 Features
• Controls system exceptions and peripheral interrupts.
• The Cortex-M4 NVIC supports up to 53 vectored interrupts.
• Eight programmable interrupt priority levels with hardware priority level masking.
• Relocatable vector table.
• Non-Maskable Interrupt (NMI).
• Software interrupt generation.
7.6.2 Interrupt sources
Each peripheral device has one interrupt line connected to the NVIC but may have several
interrupt flags. Individual interrupt flags can represent more than one interrupt source.
7.7 System Tick timer (SysTick)
The ARM Cortex-M4 includes a system tick timer (SysTick) that is intended to generate a
dedicated SYSTICK exception at a 10 ms interval.
Remark: The SysTick is not included in the ARM Cortex-M0 core.
7.8 Event router
The event router combines various internal signals, interrupts, and the external interrupt
pins (WAKEUP[3:0]) to create an interrupt in the NVIC, if enabled. In addition, the event
router creates a wake-up signal to the ARM core and the CCU for waking up from Sleep,
Deep-sleep, Power-down, and Deep power-down modes. Individual events can be
configured as edge or level sensitive and can be enabled or disabled in the event router.
The event router can be battery powered.
The following events if enabled in the event router can create a wake-up signal from
sleep, deep-sleep, power-down, and deep power-down modes and/or create an interrupt:
• External pins WAKEUP0/1/2/3 and RESET
• Alarm timer, RTC (32 kHz oscillator running)
The following events if enabled in the event router can create a wake-up signal from sleep
mode only and/or create an interrupt:
• WWDT, BOD interrupts
• C_CAN0/1 and QEI interrupts
• Ethernet, USB0, USB1 signals
• Selected outputs of combined timers (SCTimer/PWM and timer0/1/3)
Remark: Any interrupt can wake up the ARM Cortex-M4 from sleep mode if enabled in
the NVIC.
7.9 Global Input Multiplexer Array (GIMA)
The GIMA routes signals to event-driven peripheral targets like the SCTimer/PWM,
timers, event router, or the ADCs.LPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 64 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
7.9.1 Features
• Single selection of a source.
• Signal inversion.
• Can capture a pulse if the input event source is faster than the target clock.
• Synchronization of input event and target clock.
• Single-cycle pulse generation for target.
7.10 On-chip static RAM
The LPC4350/30/20/10 support up to 200 kB local SRAM and an additional 64 kB AHB
SRAM with separate bus master access for higher throughput and individual power
control for low-power operation.
7.11 In-System Programming (ISP)
In-System Programming (ISP) means programming or reprogramming the on-chip SRAM
memory, using the boot loader software and the USART0 serial port. ISP can be
performed when the part resides in the end-user board. ISP loads data into on-chip SRAM
and execute code from on-chip SRAM.
7.12 Boot ROM
The internal ROM memory is used to store the boot code of the LPC4350/30/20/10. After
a reset, the ARM processor will start its code execution from this memory.
The boot ROM memory includes the following features:
• The ROM memory size is 64 kB.
• Supports booting from UART interfaces and external static memory such as NOR
flash, quad SPI flash, and USB0 and USB1.
• Includes API for OTP programming.
• Includes a flexible USB device stack that supports Human Interface Device (HID),
Mass Storage Class (MSC), and Device Firmware Upgrade (DFU) drivers.
Several boot modes are available depending on the values of the OTP bits BOOT_SRC. If
the OTP memory is not programmed or the BOOT_SRC bits are all zero, the boot mode is
determined by the states of the boot pins P2_9, P2_8, P1_2, and P1_1.
Table 4. Boot mode when OTP BOOT_SRC bits are programmed
Boot mode BOOT_SRC
bit 3
BOOT_SRC
bit 2
BOOT_SRC
bit 1
BOOT_SRC
bit 0
Description
Pin state 0 0 0 0 Boot source is defined by the reset state of P1_1,
P1_2, P2_8, and P2_9 pins. See Table 5.
USART0 0 0 0 1 Boot from device connected to USART0 using pins
P2_0 and P2_1.
SPIFI 0 0 1 0 Boot from Quad SPI flash connected to the SPIFI
interface using pins P3_3 to P3_8.
EMC 8-bit 0 0 1 1 Boot from external static memory (such as NOR
flash) using CS0 and an 8-bit data bus.LPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 65 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
[1] The boot loader programs the appropriate pin function at reset to boot using either SSP0 or SPIFI.
Remark: Pin functions for SPIFI and SSP0 boot are different.
[1] The boot loader programs the appropriate pin function at reset to boot using either SSP0 or SPIFI.
Remark: Pin functions for SPIFI and SSP0 boot are different.
7.13 Memory mapping
The memory map shown in Figure 7 and Figure 8 is global to both the Cortex-M4 and the
Cortex-M0 processors and all SRAM is shared between both processors. Each processor
uses its own ARM private bus memory map for the NVIC and other system functions.
EMC 16-bit 0 1 0 0 Boot from external static memory (such as NOR
flash) using CS0 and a 16-bit data bus.
EMC 32-bit 0 1 0 1 Boot from external static memory (such as NOR
flash) using CS0 and a 32-bit data bus.
USB00 1 1 0 Boot from USB0.
USB10 1 1 1 Boot from USB1.
SPI (SSP) 1 0 0 0 Boot from SPI flash connected to the SSP0
interface on P3_3 (function SSP0_SCK), P3_6
(function SSP0_SSEL), P3_7 (function
SSP0_MISO), and P3_8 (function SSP0_MOSI)[1].
USART3 1 0 0 1 Boot from device connected to USART3 using pins
P2_3 and P2_4.
Table 4. Boot mode when OTP BOOT_SRC bits are programmed …continued
Boot mode BOOT_SRC
bit 3
BOOT_SRC
bit 2
BOOT_SRC
bit 1
BOOT_SRC
bit 0
Description
Table 5. Boot mode when OPT BOOT_SRC bits are zero
Boot mode Pins Description
P2_9 P2_8 P1_2 P1_1
USART0 LOW LOW LOW LOW Boot from device connected to USART0 using pins
P2_0 and P2_1.
SPIFI LOW LOW LOW HIGH Boot from Quad SPI flash connected to the SPIFI
interface on P3_3 to P3_8[1].
EMC 8-bit LOW LOW HIGH LOW Boot from external static memory (such as NOR
flash) using CS0 and an 8-bit data bus.
EMC 16-bit LOW LOW HIGH HIGH Boot from external static memory (such as NOR
flash) using CS0 and a 16-bit data bus.
EMC 32-bit LOW HIGH LOW LOW Boot from external static memory (such as NOR
flash) using CS0 and a 32-bit data bus.
USB0 LOW HIGH LOW HIGH Boot from USB0
USB1 LOW HIGH HIGH LOW Boot from USB1.
SPI (SSP) LOW HIGH HIGH HIGH Boot from SPI flash connected to the SSP0
interface on P3_3 (function SSP0_SCK), P3_6
(function SSP0_SSEL), P3_7 (function
SSP0_MISO), and P3_8 (function SSP0_MOSI)[1].
USART3 HIGH LOW LOW LOW Boot from device connected to USART3 using pins
P2_3 and P2_4.LPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 66 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
Fig 7. LPC4350/30/20/10 Memory mapping (overview)
reserved
peripheral bit band alias region
reserved
reserved
high-speed GPIO
reserved
0 GB 0x0000 0000
1 GB
4 GB
0x2001 0000
0x2200 0000
0x2400 0000
0x2800 0000
0x1000 0000
0x3000 0000
0x4000 0000
0x4001 2000
0x4004 0000
0x4005 0000
0x4010 0000
0x4400 0000
0x6000 0000
AHB peripherals
APB peripherals #0
APB peripherals #1
reserved
reserved
reserved
RTC domain peripherals
0x4006 0000
0x4008 0000
0x4009 0000
0x400A 0000
0x400B 0000
0x400C 0000
0x400D 0000
0x400E 0000
0x400F 0000
0x400F 1000
0x400F 2000
0x400F 4000
0x400F 8000
clocking/reset peripherals
APB peripherals #2
APB peripherals #3
0x2000 8000
16 kB AHB SRAM (LPC4350/30)
16 kB AHB SRAM (LPC4350/30/20/10)
0x2000 C000
16 kB AHB SRAM (LPC4350/30)
16 kB AHB SRAM (LPC4350/30/20/10)
SGPIO
SPI
0x4010 1000
0x4010 2000
0x4200 0000
reserved
local SRAM/
external static memory banks
0x2000 0000
0x2000 4000
128 MB dynamic external memory DYCS0
256 MB dynamic external memory DYCS1
256 MB dynamic external memory DYCS2
256 MB dynamic external memory DYCS3 0x7000 0000
0x8000 0000
0x8800 0000
0xE000 0000
256 MB shadow area
LPC4350/30/20/10
0x1000 0000
0x1002 0000
0x1008 0000
0x1008 A000
0x1009 2000
0x1040 0000
0x1041 0000
0x1C00 0000
0x1D00 0000
reserved
reserved
32 MB AHB SRAM bit banding
reserved
reserved
reserved
0xE010 0000
0xFFFF FFFF
reserved
SPIFI data
ARM private bus
reserved
0x1001 8000 32 kB local SRAM (LPC4350/30/20)
96 kB local SRAM
(LPC4350/30/20/10)
32 kB + 8 kB local SRAM
(LPC4320/10)
64 kB + 8 kB local SRAM
(LPC4350/30)
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
64 kB ROM
0x1400 0000
0x1800 0000
SPIFI data
0x1E00 0000
0x1F00 0000
0x2000 0000
16 MB static external memory CS3
16 MB static external memory CS2
16 MB static external memory CS1
16 MB static external memory CS0
002aaf774xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
LPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 67 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller Fig 8. LPC4350/30/20/10 Memory mapping (peripherals)
reserved
peripheral bit band alias region
high-speed GPIO
reserved
reserved
reserved
reserved
0x4000 0000
0x0000 0000
0x4001 2000
0x4004 0000
0x4005 0000
0x4010 0000
0x4400 0000
0x6000 0000
0xFFFF FFFF
AHB peripherals
SRAM memories
external memory banks
APB0 peripherals
APB1 peripherals
reserved
reserved
reserved
RTC domain peripherals
0x4006 0000
0x4008 0000
0x4009 0000
0x400A 0000
0x400B 0000
0x400C 0000
0x400D 0000
0x400E 0000
0x400F 0000
0x400F 1000
0x400F 2000
0x400F 4000
0x400F 8000
clocking/reset peripherals
APB2 peripherals
APB3 peripherals
SGPIO
SPI
0x4010 1000
0x4010 2000
0x4200 0000
reserved
external memories and
ARM private bus
APB2
peripherals
0x400C 1000
0x400C 2000
0x400C 3000
0x400C 4000
0x400C 6000
0x400C 8000
0x400C 7000
0x400C 5000
0x400C 0000 RI timer
USART2
USART3
timer2
timer3
SSP1
QEI
APB1
peripherals
0x400A 1000
0x400A 2000
0x400A 3000
0x400A 4000
0x400A 5000
0x400B 0000
0x400A 0000 motor control PWM
I2C0
I2S0
I2S1
C_CAN1
reserved
AHB
peripherals
0x4000 1000
0x4000 0000 SCT
0x4000 2000
0x4000 3000
0x4000 4000
0x4000 6000
0x4000 8000
0x4001 0000
0x4001 2000
0x4000 9000
0x4000 7000
0x4000 5000
DMA
SD/MMC
EMC
USB1
LCD
USB0
reserved
SPIFI
ethernet
reserved
0x4008 1000
0x4008 0000 WWDT
0x4008 2000
0x4008 3000
0x4008 4000
0x4008 6000
0x4008 A000
0x4008 7000
0x4008 8000
0x4008 9000
0x4008 5000
UART1 w/ modem
SSP0
timer0
timer1
SCU
GPIO interrupts
GPIO GROUP0 interrupt
GPIO GROUP1 interrupt
USART0
RTC domain
peripherals
0x4004 1000
alarm timer 0x4004 0000
0x4004 2000
0x4004 3000
0x4004 4000
0x4004 6000
0x4004 7000
0x4004 5000
power mode control
CREG
event router
OTP controller
reserved
reserved
RTC
backup registers
clocking
reset control
peripherals
0x4005 1000
0x4005 0000 CGU
0x4005 2000
0x4005 3000
0x4005 4000
0x4006 0000
CCU2
RGU
CCU1
LPC4350/30/20/10
002aaf775
reserved
reserved
APB3
peripherals
0x400E 1000
0x400E 2000
0x400E 3000
0x400E 4000
0x400F 0000
0x400E 5000
0x400E 0000 I2C1
DAC
C_CAN0
ADC0
ADC1
reserved
GIMA
APB0
peripheralsLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 68 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
7.14 One-Time Programmable (OTP) memory
The OTP provides 64 bit + 256 bit One-Time Programmable (OTP) memory for
general-purpose use.
7.15 General-Purpose I/O (GPIO)
The LPC4350/30/20/10 provide eight GPIO ports with up to 31 GPIO pins each.
Device pins that are not connected to a specific peripheral function are controlled by the
GPIO registers. Pins may be dynamically configured as inputs or outputs. Separate
registers allow setting or clearing any number of outputs simultaneously. The value of the
output register may be read back as well as the current state of the port pins.
All GPIO pins default to inputs with pull-up resistors enabled and input buffer disabled on
reset. The input buffer must be turned on in the system control block SFS register before
the GPIO input can be read.
7.15.1 Features
• Accelerated GPIO functions:
– GPIO registers are located on the AHB so that the fastest possible I/O timing can
be achieved.
– Mask registers allow treating sets of port bits as a group, leaving other bits
unchanged.
– All GPIO registers are byte and half-word addressable.
– Entire port value can be written in one instruction.
• Bit-level set and clear registers allow a single instruction set or clear of any number of
bits in one port.
• Direction control of individual bits.
• Up to eight GPIO pins can be selected from all GPIO pins to create an edge- or
level-sensitive GPIO interrupt request (GPIO interrupts).
• Two GPIO group interrupts can be triggered by any pin or pins in each port (GPIO
group0 and group1 interrupts).
7.16 Configurable digital peripherals
7.16.1 State Configurable Timer (SCTimer/PWM) subsystem
The SCTimer/PWM allows a wide variety of timing, counting, output modulation, and input
capture operations. The inputs and outputs of the SCTimer/PWM are shared with the
capture and match inputs/outputs of the 32-bit general-purpose counter/timers.
The SCTimer/PWM can be configured as two 16-bit counters or a unified 32-bit counter. In
the two-counter case, in addition to the counter value the following operational elements
are independent for each half:
• State variable
• Limit, halt, stop, and start conditions
• Values of Match/Capture registers, plus reload or capture control valuesLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 69 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
In the two-counter case, the following operational elements are global to the
SCTimer/PWM, but the last three can use match conditions from either counter:
• Clock selection
• Inputs
• Events
• Outputs
• Interrupts
7.16.1.1 Features
• Two 16-bit counters or one 32-bit counter.
• Counters clocked by bus clock or selected input.
• Counters can be configured as up-counters or up-down counters.
• State variable allows sequencing across multiple counter cycles.
• Event combines input or output condition and/or counter match in a specified state.
• Events control outputs and interrupts.
• Selected events can limit, halt, start, or stop a counter.
• Supports:
– up to 8 inputs
– 16 outputs
– 16 match/capture registers
– 16 events
– 32 states
7.16.2 Serial GPIO (SGPIO)
The Serial GPIOs offer standard GPIO functionality enhanced with features to accelerate
serial stream processing.
7.16.2.1 Features
• Each SGPIO input/output slice can be used to perform a serial to parallel or parallel to
serial data conversion.
• 16 SGPIO input/output slices each with a 32-bit FIFO that can shift the input value
from a pin or an output value to a pin with every cycle of a shift clock.
• Each slice is double-buffered.
• Interrupt is generated on a full FIFO, shift clock, or pattern match.
• Slices can be concatenated to increase buffer size.
• Each slice has a 32-bit pattern match filter.LPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 70 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
7.17 AHB peripherals
7.17.1 General-Purpose DMA (GPDMA)
The DMA controller allows peripheral-to memory, memory-to-peripheral,
peripheral-to-peripheral, and memory-to-memory transactions. Each DMA stream
provides unidirectional serial DMA transfers for a single source and destination. For
example, a bidirectional port requires one stream for transmit and one for receives. The
source and destination areas can each be either a memory region or a peripheral for
master 1, but only memory for master 0.
7.17.1.1 Features
• Eight DMA channels. Each channel can support a unidirectional transfer.
• 16 DMA request lines.
• Single DMA and burst DMA request signals. Each peripheral connected to the DMA
Controller can assert either a burst DMA request or a single DMA request. The DMA
burst size is set by programming the DMA Controller.
• Memory-to-memory, memory-to-peripheral, peripheral-to-memory, and
peripheral-to-peripheral transfers are supported.
• Scatter or gather DMA is supported through the use of linked lists. This means that
the source and destination areas do not have to occupy contiguous areas of memory.
• Hardware DMA channel priority.
• AHB slave DMA programming interface. The DMA Controller is programmed by
writing to the DMA control registers over the AHB slave interface.
• Two AHB bus masters for transferring data. These interfaces transfer data when a
DMA request goes active. Master 1 can access memories and peripherals, master 0
can access memories only.
• 32-bit AHB master bus width.
• Incrementing or non-incrementing addressing for source and destination.
• Programmable DMA burst size. The DMA burst size can be programmed to more
efficiently transfer data.
• Internal four-word FIFO per channel.
• Supports 8, 16, and 32-bit wide transactions.
• Big-endian and little-endian support. The DMA Controller defaults to little-endian
mode on reset.
• An interrupt to the processor can be generated on a DMA completion or when a DMA
error has occurred.
• Raw interrupt status. The DMA error and DMA count raw interrupt status can be read
prior to masking.
7.17.2 SPI Flash Interface (SPIFI)
The SPI Flash Interface allows low-cost serial flash memories to be connected to the ARM
Cortex-M4 processor with little performance penalty compared to parallel flash devices
with higher pin count. LPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 71 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
After a few commands configure the interface at startup, the entire flash content is
accessible as normal memory using byte, halfword, and word accesses by the processor
and/or DMA channels. Simple sequences of commands handle erasing and
programming.
Many serial flash devices use a half-duplex command-driven SPI protocol for device setup
and initialization and then move to a half-duplex, command-driven 4-bit protocol for
normal operation. Different serial flash vendors and devices accept or require different
commands and command formats. SPIFI provides sufficient flexibility to be compatible
with common flash devices and includes extensions to help insure compatibility with future
devices.
7.17.2.1 Features
• Interfaces to serial flash memory in the main memory map.
• Supports classic and 4-bit bidirectional serial protocols.
• Half-duplex protocol compatible with various vendors and devices.
• Quad SPI Flash Interface (SPIFI) with 1-, 2-, or 4-bit data at rates of up to
52 MB per second.
• Supports DMA access.
7.17.3 SD/MMC card interface
The SD/MMC card interface supports the following modes to control:
• Secure Digital memory (SD version 3.0)
• Secure Digital I/O (SDIO version 2.0)
• Consumer Electronics Advanced Transport Architecture (CE-ATA version 1.1)
• MultiMedia Cards (MMC version 4.4)
7.17.4 External Memory Controller (EMC)
The LPC4350/30/20/10 EMC is a Memory Controller peripheral offering support for
asynchronous static memory devices such as RAM, ROM, and NOR flash. In addition, it
can be used as an interface with off-chip memory-mapped devices and peripherals.
7.17.4.1 Features
• Dynamic memory interface support including single data rate SDRAM.
• Asynchronous static memory device support including RAM, ROM, and NOR flash,
with or without asynchronous page mode.
• Low transaction latency.
• Read and write buffers to reduce latency and to improve performance.
• 8/16/32 data and 24 address lines-wide static memory support.
• 16 bit and 32 bit wide chip select SDRAM memory support.
• Static memory features include:
– Asynchronous page mode read
– Programmable Wait States
– Bus turnaround delayLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 72 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
– Output enable and write enable delays
– Extended wait
• Four chip selects for synchronous memory and four chip selects for static memory
devices.
• Power-saving modes dynamically control EMC_CKEOUT and EMC_CLK signals to
SDRAMs.
• Dynamic memory self-refresh mode controlled by software.
• Controller supports 2048 (A0 to A10), 4096 (A0 to A11), and 8192 (A0 to A12) row
address synchronous memory parts. Those are typically 512 MB, 256 MB, and
128 MB parts, with 4, 8, 16, or 32 data bits per device.
• Separate reset domains allow auto-refresh through a chip reset if desired.
• SDRAM clock can run at full or half the Cortex-M4 core frequency.
Note: Synchronous static memory devices (synchronous burst mode) are not supported.
7.17.5 High-speed USB Host/Device/OTG interface (USB0)
Remark: The USB0 controller is available on parts LPC4350/30/20. See Table 2.
The USB OTG module allows the LPC4350/30/20/10 to connect directly to a USB Host
such as a PC (in device mode) or to a USB Device in host mode.
7.17.5.1 Features
• On-chip UTMI+ compliant high-speed transceiver (PHY).
• Complies with Universal Serial Bus specification 2.0.
• Complies with USB On-The-Go supplement.
• Complies with Enhanced Host Controller Interface Specification.
• Supports auto USB 2.0 mode discovery.
• Supports all high-speed USB-compliant peripherals.
• Supports all full-speed USB-compliant peripherals.
• Supports software Host Negotiation Protocol (HNP) and Session Request Protocol
(SRP) for OTG peripherals.
• Supports interrupts.
• This module has its own, integrated DMA engine.
• USB interface electrical test software included in ROM USB stack.
7.17.6 High-speed USB Host/Device interface with ULPI (USB1)
Remark: The USB1 controller is available on parts LPC4350/30. See Table 2.
The USB1 interface can operate as a full-speed USB Host/Device interface or can
connect to an external ULPI PHY for High-speed operation.
7.17.6.1 Features
• Complies with Universal Serial Bus specification 2.0.
• Complies with Enhanced Host Controller Interface Specification.LPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 73 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
• Supports auto USB 2.0 mode discovery.
• Supports all high-speed USB-compliant peripherals if connected to external ULPI
PHY.
• Supports all full-speed USB-compliant peripherals.
• Supports interrupts.
• This module has its own, integrated DMA engine.
• USB interface electrical test software included in ROM USB stack.
7.17.7 LCD controller
Remark: The LCD controller is available on LPC4350 only. See Table 2.
The LCD controller provides all of the necessary control signals to interface directly to
various color and monochrome LCD panels. Both STN (single and dual panel) and TFT
panels can be operated. The display resolution is selectable and can be up to 1024 768
pixels. Several color modes are provided, up to a 24-bit true-color non-palettized mode.
An on-chip 512 byte color palette allows reducing bus utilization (that is, memory size of
the displayed data) while still supporting many colors.
The LCD interface includes its own DMA controller to allow it to operate independently of
the CPU and other system functions. A built-in FIFO acts as a buffer for display data,
providing flexibility for system timing. Hardware cursor support can further reduce the
amount of CPU time required to operate the display.
7.17.7.1 Features
• AHB master interface to access frame buffer.
• Setup and control via a separate AHB slave interface.
• Dual 16-deep programmable 64-bit wide FIFOs for buffering incoming display data.
• Supports single and dual-panel monochrome Super Twisted Nematic (STN) displays
with 4-bit or 8-bit interfaces.
• Supports single and dual-panel color STN displays.
• Supports Thin Film Transistor (TFT) color displays.
• Programmable display resolution including, but not limited to: 320 200, 320 240,
640 200, 640 240, 640 480, 800 600, and 1024 768.
• Hardware cursor support for single-panel displays.
• 15 gray-level monochrome, 3375 color STN, and 32 K color palettized TFT support.
• 1, 2, or 4 bits-per-pixel (bpp) palettized displays for monochrome STN.
• 1, 2, 4, or 8 bpp palettized color displays for color STN and TFT.
• 16 bpp true-color non-palettized for color STN and TFT.
• 24 bpp true-color non-palettized for color TFT.
• Programmable timing for different display panels.
• 256 entry, 16-bit palette RAM, arranged as a 128 32-bit RAM.
• Frame, line, and pixel clock signals.
• AC bias signal for STN, data enable signal for TFT panels.
• Supports little and big-endian, and Windows CE data formats.LPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 74 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
• LCD panel clock may be generated from the peripheral clock, or from a clock input
pin.
7.17.8 Ethernet
Remark: The Ethernet peripheral is available on parts LPC4350/30. See Table 2.
7.17.8.1 Features
• 10/100 Mbit/s
• DMA support
• Power management remote wake-up frame and magic packet detection
• Supports both full-duplex and half-duplex operation
– Supports CSMA/CD Protocol for half-duplex operation.
– Supports IEEE 802.3x flow control for full-duplex operation.
– Optional forwarding of received pause control frames to the user application in
full-duplex operation.
– Back-pressure support for half-duplex operation.
– Automatic transmission of zero-quanta pause frame on deassertion of flow control
input in full-duplex operation.
• Supports IEEE1588 time stamping and IEEE 1588 advanced time stamping (IEEE
1588-2008 v2).
7.18 Digital serial peripherals
7.18.1 UART1
The LPC4350/30/20/10 contain one UART with standard transmit and receive data lines.
UART1 also provides a full modem control handshake interface and support for
RS-485/9-bit mode allowing both software address detection and automatic address
detection using 9-bit mode.
UART1 includes a fractional baud rate generator. Standard baud rates such as 115200 Bd
can be achieved with any crystal frequency above 2 MHz.
7.18.1.1 Features
• Maximum UART data bit rate of 8 MBit/s.
• 16 B Receive and Transmit FIFOs.
• Register locations conform to 16C550 industry standard.
• Receiver FIFO trigger points at 1 B, 4 B, 8 B, and 14 B.
• Built-in fractional baud rate generator covering wide range of baud rates without a
need for external crystals of particular values.
• Auto baud capabilities and FIFO control mechanism that enables software flow
control implementation.
• Equipped with standard modem interface signals. This module also provides full
support for hardware flow control.
• Support for RS-485/9-bit/EIA-485 mode (UART1).LPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 75 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
• DMA support.
7.18.2 USART0/2/3
The LPC4350/30/20/10 contain three USARTs. In addition to standard transmit and
receive data lines, the USARTs support a synchronous mode.
The USARTs include a fractional baud rate generator. Standard baud rates such as
115200 Bd can be achieved with any crystal frequency above 2 MHz.
7.18.2.1 Features
• Maximum UART data bit rate of 8 MBit/s.
• 16 B Receive and Transmit FIFOs.
• Register locations conform to 16C550 industry standard.
• Receiver FIFO trigger points at 1 B, 4 B, 8 B, and 14 B.
• Built-in fractional baud rate generator covering wide range of baud rates without a
need for external crystals of particular values.
• Auto baud capabilities and FIFO control mechanism that enables software flow
control implementation.
• Support for RS-485/9-bit/EIA-485 mode.
• USART3 includes an IrDA mode to support infrared communication.
• All USARTs have DMA support.
• Support for synchronous mode at a data bit rate of up to 8 Mbit/s.
• Smart card mode conforming to ISO7816 specification
7.18.3 SPI serial I/O controller
The LPC4350/30/20/10 contain one SPI controller. SPI is a full-duplex serial interface
designed to handle multiple masters and slaves connected to a given bus. Only a single
master and a single slave can communicate on the interface during a given data transfer.
During a data transfer the master always sends 8 bits to 16 bits of data to the slave, and
the slave always sends 8 bits to 16 bits of data to the master.
7.18.3.1 Features
• Maximum SPI data bit rate 25 Mbit/s.
• Compliant with SPI specification
• Synchronous, serial, full-duplex communication
• Combined SPI master and slave
• Maximum data bit rate of one eighth of the input clock rate
• 8 bits to 16 bits per transfer
7.18.4 SSP serial I/O controller
Remark: The LPC4350/30/20/10 contain two SSP controllers.
The SSP controller can operate on a SPI, 4-wire SSI, or Microwire bus. It can interact with
multiple masters and slaves on the bus. Only a single master and a single slave can
communicate on the bus during a given data transfer. The SSP supports full-duplex LPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 76 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
transfers, with frames of 4 bit to 16 bit of data flowing from the master to the slave and
from the slave to the master. In practice, often only one of these data flows carries
meaningful data.
7.18.4.1 Features
• Maximum SSP speed in full-duplex mode of 25 Mbit/s; for transmit only 50 Mbit/s
(master) and 17 Mbit/s (slave).
• Compatible with Motorola SPI, 4-wire Texas Instruments SSI, and National
Semiconductor Microwire buses
• Synchronous serial communication
• Master or slave operation
• 8-frame FIFOs for both transmit and receive
• 4-bit to 16-bit frame
• DMA transfers supported by GPDMA
7.18.5 I2C-bus interface
Remark: The LPC4350/30/20/10 contain two I2C-bus interfaces.
The I2C-bus is bidirectional for inter-IC control using only two wires: a Serial Clock line
(SCL) and a Serial Data line (SDA). Each device is recognized by a unique address and
can operate as either a receiver-only device (for example an LCD driver) or a transmitter
with the capability to both receive and send information (such as memory). Transmitters
and/or receivers can operate in either master or slave mode, depending on whether the
chip has to initiate a data transfer or is only addressed. The I2C is a multi-master bus and
can be controlled by more than one bus master connected to it.
7.18.5.1 Features
• I
2C0 is a standard I2C-compliant bus interface with open-drain pins. I2C0 also
supports Fast mode plus with bit rates up to 1 Mbit/s.
• I
2C1 uses standard I/O pins with bit rates of up to 400 kbit/s (Fast I2C-bus).
• Easy to configure as master, slave, or master/slave.
• Programmable clocks allow versatile rate control.
• Bidirectional data transfer between masters and slaves.
• Multi-master bus (no central master).
• Arbitration between simultaneously transmitting masters without corruption of serial
data on the bus.
• Serial clock synchronization allows devices with different bit rates to communicate via
one serial bus.
• Serial clock synchronization can be used as a handshake mechanism to suspend and
resume serial transfer.
• The I2C-bus can be used for test and diagnostic purposes.
• All I2C-bus controllers support multiple address recognition and a bus monitor mode.
7.18.6 I2S interface
Remark: The LPC4350/30/20/10 contain two I2S-bus interfaces.LPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 77 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
The I2S-bus provides a standard communication interface for digital audio applications.
The I
2S-bus specification defines a 3-wire serial bus using one data line, one clock line,
and one word select signal. The basic I2S-bus connection has one master, which is
always the master, and one slave. The I2S-bus interface provides a separate transmit and
receive channel, each of which can operate as either a master or a slave.
7.18.6.1 Features
• The I2S interface has separate input/output channels, each of which can operate in
master or slave mode.
• Capable of handling 8-bit, 16-bit, and 32-bit word sizes.
• Mono and stereo audio data supported.
• The sampling frequency can range from 16 kHz to 192 kHz (16, 22.05, 32, 44.1, 48,
96, 192) kHz.
• Support for an audio master clock.
• Configurable word select period in master mode (separately for I2S-bus input and
output).
• Two 8-word FIFO data buffers are provided, one for transmit and one for receive.
• Generates interrupt requests when buffer levels cross a programmable boundary.
• Two DMA requests controlled by programmable buffer levels. The DMA requests are
connected to the GPDMA block.
• Controls include reset, stop and mute options separately for I2S-bus input and I2S-bus
output.
7.18.7 C_CAN
Remark: The LPC4350/30/20/10 contain two C_CAN controllers.
Controller Area Network (CAN) is the definition of a high performance communication
protocol for serial data communication. The C_CAN controller is designed to provide a full
implementation of the CAN protocol according to the CAN Specification Version 2.0B. The
C_CAN controller can create powerful local networks with low-cost multiplex wiring by
supporting distributed real-time control with a high level of reliability.
7.18.7.1 Features
• Conforms to protocol version 2.0 parts A and B.
• Supports bit rate of up to 1 Mbit/s.
• Supports 32 Message Objects.
• Each Message Object has its own identifier mask.
• Provides programmable FIFO mode (concatenation of Message Objects).
• Provides maskable interrupts.
• Supports Disabled Automatic Retransmission (DAR) mode for time-triggered CAN
applications.
• Provides programmable loop-back mode for self-test operation.LPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 78 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
7.19 Counter/timers and motor control
7.19.1 General purpose 32-bit timers/external event counters
The LPC4350/30/20/10 include four 32-bit timer/counters. The timer/counter is designed
to count cycles of the system derived clock or an externally-supplied clock. It can
optionally generate interrupts, generate timed DMA requests, or perform other actions at
specified timer values, based on four match registers. Each timer/counter also includes
two capture inputs to trap the timer value when an input signal transitions, optionally
generating an interrupt.
7.19.1.1 Features
• A 32-bit timer/counter with a programmable 32-bit prescaler.
• Counter or timer operation.
• Two 32-bit capture channels per timer, that can take a snapshot of the timer value
when an input signal transitions. A capture event can also generate an interrupt.
• Four 32-bit match registers that allow:
– Continuous operation with optional interrupt generation on match.
– Stop timer on match with optional interrupt generation.
– Reset timer on match with optional interrupt generation.
• Up to four external outputs corresponding to match registers, with the following
capabilities:
– Set LOW on match.
– Set HIGH on match.
– Toggle on match.
– Do nothing on match.
• Up to two match registers can be used to generate timed DMA requests.
7.19.2 Motor control PWM
The motor control PWM is a specialized PWM supporting 3-phase motors and other
combinations. Feedback inputs are provided to automatically sense rotor position and use
that information to ramp speed up or down. An abort input causes the PWM to release all
motor drive outputs immediately . At the same time, the motor control PWM is highly
configurable for other generalized timing, counting, capture, and compare applications.
7.19.3 Quadrature Encoder Interface (QEI)
A quadrature encoder, also known as a 2-channel incremental encoder, converts angular
displacement into two pulse signals. By monitoring both the number of pulses and the
relative phase of the two signals, the user code can track the position, direction of rotation,
and velocity. In addition, a third channel, or index signal, can be used to reset the position
counter. The quadrature encoder interface decodes the digital pulses from a quadrature
encoder wheel to integrate position over time and determine direction of rotation. In
addition, the QEI can capture the velocity of the encoder wheel.
7.19.3.1 Features
• Tracks encoder position.LPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 79 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
• Increments/decrements depending on direction.
• Programmable for 2 or 4 position counting.
• Velocity capture using built-in timer.
• Velocity compare function with “less than” interrupt.
• Uses 32-bit registers for position and velocity.
• Three position-compare registers with interrupts.
• Index counter for revolution counting.
• Index compare register with interrupts.
• Can combine index and position interrupts to produce an interrupt for whole and
partial revolution displacement.
• Digital filter with programmable delays for encoder input signals.
• Can accept decoded signal inputs (clk and direction).
7.19.4 Repetitive Interrupt (RI) timer
The repetitive interrupt timer provides a free-running 32-bit counter which is compared to
a selectable value, generating an interrupt when a match occurs. Any bits of the
timer/compare function can be masked such that they do not contribute to the match
detection. The repetitive interrupt timer can be used to create an interrupt that repeats at
predetermined intervals.
7.19.4.1 Features
• 32-bit counter. Counter can be free-running or be reset by a generated interrupt.
• 32-bit compare value.
• 32-bit compare mask. An interrupt is generated when the counter value equals the
compare value, after masking. This mechanism allows for combinations not possible
with a simple compare.
7.19.5 Windowed WatchDog Timer (WWDT)
The purpose of the watchdog is to reset the controller if software fails to periodically
service it within a programmable time window.
7.19.5.1 Features
• Internally resets chip if not periodically reloaded during the programmable time-out
period.
• Optional windowed operation requires reload to occur between a minimum and
maximum time period, both programmable.
• Optional warning interrupt can be generated at a programmable time prior to
watchdog time-out.
• Enabled by software but requires a hardware reset or a watchdog reset/interrupt to be
disabled.
• Incorrect feed sequence causes reset or interrupt if enabled.
• Flag to indicate watchdog reset.
• Programmable 24-bit timer with internal prescaler.LPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 80 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
• Selectable time period from (Tcy(WDCLK) 256 4) to (Tcy(WDCLK) 224 4) in
multiples of Tcy(WDCLK) 4.
• The Watchdog Clock (WDCLK) uses the IRC as the clock source.
7.20 Analog peripherals
7.20.1 Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC0/1)
7.20.1.1 Features
• 10-bit successive approximation analog to digital converter.
• Input multiplexing among 8 pins.
• Power-down mode.
• Measurement range 0 to VDDA.
• Sampling frequency up to 400 kSamples/s.
• Burst conversion mode for single or multiple inputs.
• Optional conversion on transition on ADCTRIG0 or ADCTRIG1 pins, combined timer
outputs 8 or 15, or the PWM output MCOA2.
• Individual result registers for each A/D channel to reduce interrupt overhead.
• DMA support.
7.20.2 Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC)
7.20.2.1 Features
• 10-bit resolution
• Monotonic by design (resistor string architecture)
• Controllable conversion speed
• Low-power consumption
7.21 Peripherals in the RTC power domain
7.21.1 RTC
The Real-Time Clock (RTC) is a set of counters for measuring time when system power is
on, and optionally when it is off. It uses little power when the CPU does not access its
registers, especially in the reduced power modes. A separate 32 kHz oscillator clocks the
RTC. The oscillator produces a 1 Hz internal time reference and is powered by its own
power supply pin, VBAT.
7.21.1.1 Features
• Measures the passage of time to maintain a calendar and clock. Provides seconds,
minutes, hours, day of month, month, year, day of week, and day of year.
• Ultra-low power design to support battery powered systems. Uses power from the
CPU power supply when it is present.
• Dedicated battery power supply pin.
• RTC power supply is isolated from the rest of the chip.LPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 81 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
• Calibration counter allows adjustment to better than 1 sec/day with 1 sec resolution.
• Periodic interrupts can be generated from increments of any field of the time registers.
• Alarm interrupt can be generated for a specific date/time.
7.21.2 Alarm timer
The alarm timer is a 16-bit timer and counts down at 1 kHz from a preset value generating
alarms in intervals of up to 1 min. The counter triggers a status bit when it reaches 0x00
and asserts an interrupt if enabled.
The alarm timer is part of the RTC power domain and can be battery powered.
7.22 System control
7.22.1 Configuration registers (CREG)
The following settings are controlled in the configuration register block:
• BOD trip settings
• Oscillator output
• DMA-to-peripheral muxing
• Ethernet mode
• Memory mapping
• Timer/USART inputs
• Enabling the USB controllers
In addition, the CREG block contains the part identification and part configuration
information.
7.22.2 System Control Unit (SCU)
The system control unit determines the function and electrical mode of the digital pins. By
default function 0 is selected for all pins with pull-up enabled. For pins that support a
digital and analog function, the ADC function select registers in the SCU enable the
analog function.
A separate set of analog I/Os for the ADCs and the DAC as well as most USB pins are
located on separate pads and are not controlled through the SCU.
In addition, the clock delay register for the SDRAM EMC_CLK pins and the registers that
select the pin interrupts are located in the SCU.
7.22.3 Clock Generation Unit (CGU)
The Clock Generator Unit (CGU) generates several base clocks. The base clocks can be
unrelated in frequency and phase and can have different clock sources within the CGU.
One CGU base clock is routed to the CLKOUT pins. The base clock that generates the
CPU clock is referred to as CCLK.
Multiple branch clocks are derived from each base clock. The branch clocks offer flexible
control for power-management purposes. All branch clocks are outputs of one of two
Clock Control Units (CCUs) and can be controlled independently. Branch clocks derived
from the same base clock are synchronous in frequency and phase. LPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 82 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
7.22.4 Internal RC oscillator (IRC)
The IRC is used as the clock source for the WWDT and/or as the clock that drives the
PLLs and the CPU. The nominal IRC frequency is 12 MHz. The IRC is trimmed to 1.5 %
accuracy over the entire voltage and temperature range.
Upon power-up or any chip reset, the LPC4350/30/20/10 use the IRC as the clock source.
The boot loader then configures the PLL1 to provide a 96 MHz clock for the core and the
PLL0USB or PLL0AUDIO as needed if an external boot source is selected.
7.22.5 PLL0USB (for USB0)
PLL0 is a dedicated PLL for the USB0 High-speed controller.
PLL0 accepts an input clock frequency from an external oscillator in the range of 14 kHz
to 25 MHz. The input frequency is multiplied up to a high frequency with a Current
Controlled Oscillator (CCO). The CCO operates in the range of 4.3 MHz to 550 MHz.
7.22.6 PLL0AUDIO (for audio)
The audio PLL PLL0AUDIO is a general-purpose PLL with a small step size. This PLL
accepts an input clock frequency derived from an external oscillator or internal IRC. The
input frequency is multiplied up to a high frequency with a Current Controlled Oscillator
(CCO). A sigma-delta converter modulates the PLL divider ratios to obtain the desired
output frequency. The output frequency can be set as a multiple of the sampling frequency
fs to 32fs, 64fs, 128 fs, 256 fs, 384 fs, 512 fs and the sampling frequency fs can
range from 16 kHz to 192 kHz (16, 22.05, 32, 44.1, 48, 96,192) kHz. Many other
frequencies are possible as well using the integrated fractional divider.
7.22.7 System PLL1
The PLL1 accepts an input clock frequency from an external oscillator in the range of
1 MHz to 25 MHz. The input frequency is multiplied up to a high frequency with a Current
Controlled Oscillator (CCO). The multiplier can be an integer value from 1 to 32. The CCO
operates in the range of 156 MHz to 320 MHz. This range is possible through an
additional divider in the loop to keep the CCO within its frequency range while the PLL is
providing the desired output frequency. The output divider can be set to divide by 2, 4, 8,
or 16 to produce the output clock. Since the minimum output divider value is 2, it is
insured that the PLL output has a 50 % duty cycle. The PLL is turned off and bypassed
following a chip reset. After reset, software can enable the PLL. The program must
configure and activate the PLL, wait for the PLL to lock, and then connect to the PLL as a
clock source. The PLL settling time is 100 s.
7.22.8 Reset Generation Unit (RGU)
The RGU allows generation of independent reset signals for individual blocks and
peripherals on the LPC4350/30/20/10.
7.22.9 Power control
The LPC4350/30/20/10 feature several independent power domains to control power to
the core and the peripherals (see Figure 9). The RTC and its associated peripherals (the
alarm timer, the CREG block, the OTP controller, the back-up registers, and the event
router) are located in the RTC power-domain. The main regulator or a battery supply can
power the RTC. A power selector switch ensures that the RTC block is always powered
on.LPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 83 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
7.22.10 Power Management Controller (PMC)
The PMC controls the power to the cores, peripherals, and memories.
The LPC4350/30/20/10 support the following power modes in order from highest to lowest
power consumption:
1. Active mode
2. Sleep mode
3. Power-down modes:
a. Deep-sleep mode
b. Power-down mode
c. Deep power-down mode
Fig 9. Power domains
REAL-TIME CLOCK
BACKUP REGISTERS
RESET/WAKE-UP
CONTROL
REGULATOR
32 kHz
OSCILLATOR
ALWAYS-ON/RTC POWER DOMAIN
MAIN POWER DOMAIN
RTCX1
VBAT
VDDREG
RTCX2
VDDIO
VSS
to memories,
peripherals,
oscillators,
PLLs
to cores
to I/O pads
ADC
DAC
OTP
ADC POWER DOMAIN
OTP POWER DOMAIN
USB0 POWER DOMAIN
VDDA
VSSA
VPP
USB0 USB0_VDDA3V_DRIVER
USB0_VDDA3V3
LPC43xx
ULTRA LOW-POWER
REGULATOR
ALARM
RESET
WAKEUP0/1/2/3
to RTC
domain
peripherals
002aag378
to RTC I/O
pads (Vps)LPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 84 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
Active mode and sleep mode apply to the state of the core. In a dual-core system, either
core can be in active or sleep mode independently of the other core.
If the core is in Active mode, it is fully operational and can access peripherals and
memories as configured by software. If the core is in Sleep mode, it receives no clocks,
but peripherals and memories remain running.
Either core can enter sleep mode from active mode independently of the other core and
while the other core remains in active mode or is in sleep mode.
Power-down modes apply to the entire system. In the Power-down modes, both cores and
all peripherals except for peripherals in the always-on power domain are shut down.
Memories can remain powered for retaining memory contents as defined by the individual
power-down mode.
Either core in active mode can put the part into one of the three power down modes if the
core is enabled to do so. If both cores are enabled for putting the system into power-down,
then the system enters power-down only once both cores have received a WFI or WFE
instruction.
Wake-up from sleep mode is caused by an interrupt or event in the core’s NVIC. The
interrupt is captured in the NVIC and an event is captured in the Event router. Both cores
can wake up from sleep mode independently of each other.
Wake-up from the Power-down modes, Deep-sleep, Power-down, and Deep power-down,
is caused by an event on the WAKEUP pins or an event from the RTC or alarm timer.
When waking up from Deep power-down mode, the part resets and attempts to boot.
7.23 Serial Wire Debug/JTAG
Debug and trace functions are integrated into the ARM Cortex-M4. Serial wire debug and
trace functions are supported in addition to a standard JTAG debug and parallel trace
functions. The ARM Cortex-M4 is configured to support up to eight breakpoints and four
watch points.
Remark: Serial Wire Debug is supported for the ARM Cortex-M4 only,
The ARM Cortex-M0 coprocessor supports JTAG debug. A standard ARM
Cortex-compliant debugger can debug the ARM Cortex-M4 and the ARM Cortex-M0
cores separately or both cores simultaneously.
Remark: In order to debug the ARM Cortex-M0, release the M0 reset by software in the
RGU block.LPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 85 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
Fig 10. Dual-core debug configuration
002aah448
TCK ARM Cortex-M0 ARM Cortex-M4
DBGEN = HIGH
TMS
TRST
TDI TDO TDO
TDO
DBGEN
RESET RESET = HIGH
TCK
TMS
TRST
TDI
TCK
TMS
TRST
TDI
JTAG ID = 0x0BA0 1477 JTAG ID = 0x4BA0 0477
LPC43xxLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 86 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
8. Limiting values
[1] The following applies to the limiting values:
a) This product includes circuitry designed for the protection of its internal devices from the damaging effects of excessive static
charge. Nonetheless, it is suggested that conventional precautions be taken to avoid applying greater than the rated maximum.
b) Parameters are valid over operating temperature range unless otherwise specified. All voltages are with respect to VSS unless
otherwise noted.
[2] Including voltage on outputs in 3-state mode.
[3] The peak current is limited to 25 times the corresponding maximum current.
[4] Dependent on package type.
[5] Human body model: equivalent to discharging a 100 pF capacitor through a 1.5 k series resistor.
Table 6. Limiting values
In accordance with the Absolute Maximum Rating System (IEC 60134).[1]
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Max Unit
VDD(REG)(3V3) regulator supply voltage
(3.3 V)
on pin VDDREG 0.5 3.6 V
VDD(IO) input/output supply
voltage
on pin VDDIO 0.5 3.6 V
VDDA(3V3) analog supply voltage
(3.3 V)
on pin VDDA 0.5 3.6 V
VBAT battery supply voltage on pin VBAT 0.5 3.6 V
Vprog(pf) polyfuse programming
voltage
on pin VPP 0.5 3.6 V
VI input voltage only valid when VDD(IO) 2.2 V
5 V tolerant I/O pins
[2]
0.5 5.5 V
ADC/DAC pins and digital I/O
pins configured for an analog
function
0.5 VDDA(3V3) V
USB0 pins USB0_DP;
USB0_DM;USB0_VBUS
0.3 5.25 V
USB0 pins USB0_ID;
USB0_RREF
0.3 3.6 V
USB1 pins USB1_DP and
USB1_DM
0.3 5.25 V
IDD supply current per supply pin [3] - 100 mA
ISS ground current per ground pin [3] - 100 mA
Ilatch I/O latch-up current (0.5VDD(IO)) < VI < (1.5VDD(IO));
Tj
< 125 C
- 100 mA
Tstg storage temperature [4] 65 +150 C
Ptot(pack) total power dissipation
(per package)
based on package heat transfer,
not device power consumption
- 1.5 W
VESD electrostatic discharge
voltage
human body model; all pins [5] 2000 +2000 VLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 87 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
9. Thermal characteristics
The average chip junction temperature, Tj (C), can be calculated using the following
equation:
(1)
• Tamb = ambient temperature (C),
• Rth(j-a) = the package junction-to-ambient thermal resistance (C/W)
• PD = sum of internal and I/O power dissipation
The internal power dissipation is the product of IDD and VDD. The I/O power dissipation of
the I/O pins is often small and many times can be negligible. However it can be significant
in some applications.
Tj Tamb PD Rth j a – +=
Table 7. Thermal characteristics
VDD = 2.2 V to 3.6 V; Tamb = 40 C to +85 C unless otherwise specified;
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit
Tj(max) maximum junction
temperature
- - 125 C
Table 8. Thermal resistance (LQFP packages)
Symbol Parameter Conditions Thermal resistance
in C/W ±15 %
LQFP144
Rth(j-a) thermal resistance from
junction to ambient
JEDEC (4.5 in 4 in); still air 38
Single-layer (4.5 in 3 in);
still air
50
Rth(j-c) thermal resistance from
junction to case
11
Table 9. Thermal resistance value (BGA packages)
Symbol Parameter Conditions Thermal resistance in C/W ±15 %
LBGA256 TFBGA180 TFBGA100
Rth(j-a) thermal resistance from
junction to ambient
JEDEC (4.5 in 4 in); still air 29 38 46
8-layer (4.5 in 3 in); still air 24 30 37
Rth(j-c) thermal resistance from
junction to case
14 11 11LPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 88 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
10. Static characteristics
Table 10. Static characteristics
Tamb = 40 C to +85 C, unless otherwise specified.
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ[1] Max Unit
Supply pins
VDD(IO) input/output supply
voltage
2.2 - 3.6 V
VDD(REG)(3V3) regulator supply voltage
(3.3 V)
[2] 2.2 - 3.6 V
VDDA(3V3) analog supply voltage
(3.3 V)
on pin VDDA 2.2 - 3.6 V
on pins
USB0_VDDA3V3_
DRIVER and
USB0_VDDA3V3
3.0 3.3 3.6 V
VBAT battery supply voltage [2] 2.2 - 3.6 V
Vprog(pf) polyfuse programming
voltage
on pin VPP (for OTP) [3] 2.7 - 3.6 V
Iprog(pf) polyfuse programming
current
on pin VPP; OTP
programming time
1.6 ms
- - 30 mA
IDD(REG)(3V3) regulator supply current
(3.3 V)
Active mode; M0-core in
reset; code
while(1){}
executed from RAM; all
peripherals disabled;
PLL1 enabled
CCLK = 12 MHz [4] - 6.6- mA
CCLK = 60 MHz [4] 25.3 - mA
CCLK = 120 MHz [4] - 48.4- mA
CCLK = 180 MHz [4] - 72.0- mA
CCLK = 204 MHz [4] - 81.5- mA
IDD(REG)(3V3) regulator supply current
(3.3 V)
after WFE/WFI instruction
executed from RAM; all
peripherals disabled; M0
core in reset
sleep mode [4][5] - 5.0- mA
deep-sleep mode [4] - 30 - A
power-down mode [4] - 15 - A
deep power-down
mode
[4][6] - 0.03 - A
deep power-down
mode; VBAT floating
[4]-- 2 - A
IBAT battery supply current active mode; VBAT = 3.2 V;
VDD(REG)(3V3) = 3.6 V.
[7] - 0 -nALPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 89 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
IBAT battery supply current VDD(REG)(3V3) = 3.3 V;
VBAT = 3.6 V
deep-sleep mode
[8]
- 2- A
power-down mode [8] - 2- A
deep power-down
mode
[8]
- 2- A
IDD(IO) I/O supply current deep sleep mode - - 1 - A
power-down mode - - 1 - A
deep power-down mode [9] - 0.05 - A
IDDA Analog supply current on pin VDDA;
deep sleep mode
[11] - 0.4 -
A
power-down mode [11] - 0.4 - A
deep power-down
mode
[11] - 0.007 -
A
RESET,RTC_ALARM, WAKEUPn pins
VIH HIGH-level input
voltage
[10] 0.8 (Vps
0.35)
- 5.5 V
VIL LOW-level input voltage [10] 0 - 0.3 (Vps
0.1)
V
Vhys hysteresis voltage [10] 0.05 (Vps
0.35)
--V
Vo output voltage [10] - Vps - 0.2 - V
Standard I/O pins - normal drive strength
CI input capacitance - - 2 pF
ILL LOW-level leakage
current
VI = 0 V; on-chip pull-up
resistor disabled
- 3 - nA
ILH HIGH-level leakage
current
VI = VDD(IO); on-chip
pull-down resistor
disabled
- 3 - nA
VI = 5 V --20 nA
IOZ OFF-state output
current
VO = 0 V to VDD(IO);
on-chip pull-up/down
resistors disabled;
absolute value
- 3- nA
VI input voltage pin configured to provide
a digital function;
VDD(IO) 2.2 V
0 - 5.5 V
VDD(IO) = 0 V 0 - 3.6 V
VO output voltage output active 0 - VDD(IO) V
VIH HIGH-level input
voltage
0.7
VDD(IO)
- 5.5 V
VIL LOW-level input voltage 0 - 0.3
VDD(IO)
V
Vhys hysteresis voltage 0.1
VDD(IO)
--V
Table 10. Static characteristics …continued
Tamb = 40 C to +85 C, unless otherwise specified.
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ[1] Max UnitLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 90 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
VOH HIGH-level output
voltage
IOH = 6 mA VDD(IO)
0.4
--V
VOL LOW-level output
voltage
IOL = 6 mA --0.4 V
IOH HIGH-level output
current
VOH = VDD(IO) 0.4 V 6 - - mA
IOL LOW-level output
current
VOL = 0.4 V 6- - mA
IOHS HIGH-level short-circuit
output current
drive HIGH; connected to
ground
[12] --86.5 mA
IOLS LOW-level short-circuit
output current
drive LOW; connected to
VDD(IO)
[12] --76.5 mA
Ipd pull-down current VI = 5 V [14][15]
[16]
- 93 - A
Ipu pull-up current VI =0V [14][15]
[16]
- 62 - A
VDD(IO) < VI 5 V - 10 - A
Rs series resistance on I/O pins with analog
function; analog function
enabled
200
I/O pins - high drive strength
CI input capacitance - - 5.2 pF
ILL LOW-level leakage
current
VI = 0 V; on-chip pull-up
resistor disabled
- 3 - nA
ILH HIGH-level leakage
current
VI = VDD(IO); on-chip
pull-down resistor
disabled
- 3 - nA
VI = 5 V --20 nA
IOZ OFF-state output
current
VO = 0 V to VDD(IO);
on-chip pull-up/down
resistors disabled;
absolute value
- 3 - nA
VI input voltage pin configured to provide
a digital function;
VDD(IO) 2.2 V 0 - 5.5 V
VDD(IO) = 0 V 0 - 3.6 V
VO output voltage output active 0 - VDD(IO) V
VIH HIGH-level input
voltage
0.7
VDD(IO)
- 5.5 V
VIL LOW-level input voltage 0 - 0.3
VDD(IO)
V
Vhys hysteresis voltage 0.1
VDD(IO)
--V
Ipd pull-down current VI = VDD(IO) [14][15]
[16]
- 62 - A
Table 10. Static characteristics …continued
Tamb = 40 C to +85 C, unless otherwise specified.
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ[1] Max UnitLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 91 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
Ipu pull-up current VI =0V [14][15]
[16]
- 62 - A
VDD(IO) < VI 5 V - 10 - A
I/O pins - high drive strength: standard drive mode
IOH HIGH-level output
current
VOH = VDD(IO) 0.4 V 4 - - mA
IOL LOW-level output
current
VOL = 0.4 V 4- - mA
IOHS HIGH-level short-circuit
output current
drive HIGH; connected to
ground
[12] --32 mA
IOLS LOW-level short-circuit
output current
drive LOW; connected to
VDD(IO)
[12] --32 mA
I/O pins - high drive strength: medium drive mode
IOH HIGH-level output
current
VOH = VDD(IO) 0.4 V 8 - - mA
IOL LOW-level output
current
VOL = 0.4 V 8- - mA
IOHS HIGH-level short-circuit
output current
drive HIGH; connected to
ground
[12] --65 mA
IOLS LOW-level short-circuit
output current
drive LOW; connected to
VDD(IO)
[12] --63 mA
I/O pins - high drive strength: high drive mode
IOH HIGH-level output
current
VOH = VDD(IO) 0.4 V 14 - - mA
IOL LOW-level output
current
VOL = 0.4 V 14- - mA
IOHS HIGH-level short-circuit
output current
drive HIGH; connected to
ground
[12] --113 mA
IOLS LOW-level short-circuit
output current
drive LOW; connected to
VDD(IO)
[12] --110 mA
I/O pins - high drive strength: ultra-high drive mode
IOH HIGH-level output
current
VOH = VDD(IO) 0.4 V 20 - - mA
IOL LOW-level output
current
VOL = 0.4 V 20- - mA
IOHS HIGH-level short-circuit
output current
drive HIGH; connected to
ground
[12] --165 mA
IOLS LOW-level short-circuit
output current
drive LOW; connected to
VDD(IO)
[12] --156 mA
I/O pins - high-speed
CI input capacitance - - 2 pF
ILL LOW-level leakage
current
VI = 0 V; on-chip pull-up
resistor disabled
- 3 - nA
Table 10. Static characteristics …continued
Tamb = 40 C to +85 C, unless otherwise specified.
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ[1] Max UnitLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 92 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
ILH HIGH-level leakage
current
VI = VDD(IO); on-chip
pull-down resistor
disabled
- 3 - nA
VI = 5 V --20 nA
IOZ OFF-state output
current
VO = 0 V to VDD(IO);
on-chip pull-up/down
resistors disabled;
absolute value
- 3 - nA
VI input voltage pin configured to provide
a digital function;
VDD(IO) 2.2 V 0 - 5.5 V
VDD(IO) = 0 V 0 - 3.6 V
VO output voltage output active 0 - VDD(IO) V
VIH HIGH-level input
voltage
0.7
VDD(IO)
- 5.5 V
VIL LOW-level input voltage 0 - 0.3
VDD(IO)
V
Vhys hysteresis voltage 0.1
VDD(IO)
--V
VOH HIGH-level output
voltage
IOH = 8 mA VDD(IO)
0.4
--V
VOL LOW-level output
voltage
IOL = 8 mA --0.4 V
IOH HIGH-level output
current
VOH = VDD(IO) 0.4 V 8 - - mA
IOL LOW-level output
current
VOL = 0.4 V 8- - mA
IOHS HIGH-level short-circuit
output current
drive HIGH; connected to
ground
[12] --86 mA
IOLS LOW-level short-circuit
output current
drive LOW; connected to
VDD(IO)
[12] --76 mA
Ipd pull-down current VI = VDD(IO) [14][15]
[16]
- 62 - A
Ipu pull-up current VI =0V [14][15]
[16]
- 62 - A
VDD(IO) < VI 5V - 0 - A
Open-drain I2C0-bus pins
VIH HIGH-level input
voltage
0.7
VDD(IO)
--V
VIL LOW-level input voltage 0 0.14 0.3
VDD(IO)
V
Vhys hysteresis voltage 0.1
VDD(IO)
--V
VOL LOW-level output
voltage
IOLS = 3 mA --0.4 V
Table 10. Static characteristics …continued
Tamb = 40 C to +85 C, unless otherwise specified.
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ[1] Max UnitLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 93 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
[1] Typical ratings are not guaranteed. The values listed are at room temperature (25 C), nominal supply voltages.
[2] Dynamic characteristics for peripherals are provided for VDD(REG)(3V) 2.7 V.
ILI input leakage current VI = VDD(IO) [13] - 4.5 - A
VI = 5 V --10 A
Oscillator pins
Vi(XTAL1) input voltage on pin
XTAL1
0.5 - 1.2 V
Vo(XTAL2) output voltage on pin
XTAL2
0.5 - 1.2 V
Cio input/output
capacitance
[17] --0.8 pF
USB0 pins[18]
VI input voltage on pins USB0_DP;
USB0_DM; USB0_VBUS
VDD(IO) 2.2 V 0 - 5.25 V
VDD(IO) = 0 V 0 - 3.6 V
Rpd pull-down resistance on pin USB0_VBUS 48 64 80 k
VIC common-mode input
voltage
high-speed mode 50 200 500 mV
full-speed/low-speed
mode
800 - 2500 mV
chirp mode 50 - 600 mV
Vi(dif) differential input voltage 100 400 1100 mV
USB1 pins (USB1_DP/USB1_DM)[18]
IOZ OFF-state output
current
0V 0
EMC_DYCSn,
EMC_RAS,
EMC_CAS,
EMC_WE,
EMC_CKEOUTn,
EMC_A[22:0],
EMC_DQMOUTn
th(Q)
th(Q) - td
th(D) tsu(D)
th(D) tsu(D)
EMC_D[31:0]
write
EMC_D[31:0]
read; delay = 0
EMC_D[31:0]
read; delay > 0
th(x) - td td(xV) - td
td(QV) - td
td(QV)
th(x) td(xV)
EMC_CLKn delay td; programmable CLKn_DELAYLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 123 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
11.15 USB interface
[1] Characterized but not implemented as production test. Guaranteed by design.
Table 28. Dynamic characteristics: USB0 and USB1 pins (full-speed)
CL = 50 pF; Rpu = 1.5 k on D+ to VDD(IO); 3.0 V VDD(IO) 3.6 V.
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit
tr rise time 10 % to 90 % 8.5 - 13.8 ns
tf fall time 10 % to 90 % 7.7 - 13.7 ns
tFRFM differential rise and fall time
matching
tr / tf - -109 %
VCRS output signal crossover voltage 1.3 - 2.0 V
tFEOPT source SE0 interval of EOP see Figure 36 160 - 175 ns
tFDEOP source jitter for differential transition
to SE0 transition
see Figure 36 2 - +5 ns
tJR1 receiver jitter to next transition 18.5 - +18.5 ns
tJR2 receiver jitter for paired transitions 10 % to 90 % 9 - +9 ns
tEOPR1 EOP width at receiver must reject as
EOP; see
Figure 36
[1] 40 - - ns
tEOPR2 EOP width at receiver must accept as
EOP; see
Figure 36
[1] 82 - - ns
Fig 36. Differential data-to-EOP transition skew and EOP width
002aab561
TPERIOD
differential
data lines
crossover point
source EOP width: tFEOPT
receiver EOP width: tEOPR1, tEOPR2
crossover point
extended
differential data to
SE0/EOP skew
n × TPERIOD + tFDEOPLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 124 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
[1] Characterized but not implemented as production test.
[2] Total average power consumption.
[3] The driver is active only 20 % of the time.
11.16 Ethernet
Remark: The timing characteristics of the ENET_MDC and ENET_MDIO signals comply
with the IEEE standard 802.3.
Table 29. Static characteristics: USB0 PHY pins[1]
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit
High-speed mode
Pcons power consumption [2] - 68 - mW
IDDA(3V3) analog supply current (3.3 V) on pin USB0_VDDA3V3_DRIVER;
total supply current
[3]
- 18 - mA
during transmit - 31 - mA
during receive - 14 - mA
with driver tri-stated - 14 - mA
IDDD digital supply current - 7 - mA
Full-speed/low-speed mode
Pcons power consumption [2] - 15 - mW
IDDA(3V3) analog supply current (3.3 V) on pin USB0_VDDA3V3_DRIVER;
total supply current - 3.5 - mA
during transmit - 5 - mA
during receive - 3 - mA
with driver tri-stated - 3 - mA
IDDD digital supply current - 3 - mA
Suspend mode
IDDA(3V3) analog supply current (3.3 V) - 24 - A
with driver tri-stated - 24 - A
with OTG functionality enabled - 3 - mA
IDDD digital supply current - 30 - A
VBUS detector outputs
Vth threshold voltage for VBUS valid 4.4 - - V
for session end 0.2 - 0.8 V
for A valid 0.8 - 2 V
for B valid 2 - 4 V
Vhys hysteresis voltage for session end - 150 10 mV
A valid - 200 10 mV
B valid - 200 10 mVLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 125 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
[1] Output drivers can drive a load 25 pF accommodating over 12 inch of PCB trace and the input
capacitance of the receiving device.
[2] Timing values are given from the point at which the clock signal waveform crosses 1.4 V to the valid input or
output level.
Table 30. Dynamic characteristics: Ethernet
Tamb = 40 C to 85 C; 2.2 V VDD(REG)(3V3) 3.6 V; 2.7 V VDD(IO) 3.6 V. Values guaranteed by
design.
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Max Unit
RMII mode
fclk clock frequency for ENET_RX_CLK [1] - 50 MHz
clk clock duty cycle [1] 50 50 %
tsu set-up time for ENET_TXDn, ENET_TX_EN,
ENET_RXDn, ENET_RX_ER,
ENET_RX_DV
[1][2] 4 - ns
th hold time for ENET_TXDn, ENET_TX_EN,
ENET_RXDn, ENET_RX_ER,
ENET_RX_DV
[1][2] 2 - ns
MII mode
fclk clock frequency for ENET_TX_CLK [1] - 25 MHz
clk clock duty cycle [1] 50 50 %
tsu set-up time for ENET_TXDn, ENET_TX_EN,
ENET_TX_ER
[1][2] 4 - ns
th hold time for ENET_TXDn, ENET_TX_EN,
ENET_TX_ER
[1][2] 2 - ns
fclk clock frequency for ENET_RX_CLK [1] - 25 MHz
clk clock duty cycle [1] 50 50 %
tsu set-up time for ENET_RXDn, ENET_RX_ER,
ENET_RX_DV
[1][2] 4 - ns
th hold time for ENET_RXDn, ENET_RX_ER,
ENET_RX_DV
[1][2] 2 - ns
Fig 37. Ethernet timing
002aag210
th tsu
ENET_RX_CLK
ENET_TX_CLK
ENET_RXD[n]
ENET_RX_DV
ENET_RX_ER
ENET_TXD[n]
ENET_TX_EN
ENET_TX_ERLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 126 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
11.17 SD/MMC
11.18 LCD
Table 31. Dynamic characteristics: SD/MMC
Tamb = 40 C to 85 C, 2.2 V VDD(REG)(3V3) 3.6 V; 2.7 V VDD(IO) 3.6 V, CL = 20 pF. Simulated
values. SAMPLE_DELAY = 0x8, DRV_DELAY = 0xF in the SDDELAY register (see the LPC43xx
user manual UM10430).
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Max Unit
fclk clock frequency on pin SD_CLK; data transfer mode 52 MHz
tr rise time 0.5 2 ns
tf fall time 0.5 2 ns
tsu(D) data input set-up time on pins SD_DATn as inputs 6 - ns
on pins SD_CMD as inputs 7 - ns
th(D) data input hold time on pins SD_DATn as inputs -1 - ns
on pins SD_CMD as inputs 1 ns
td(QV) data output valid delay
time
on pins SD_DATn as outputs - 17 ns
on pins SD_CMD as outputs - 18 ns
th(Q) data output hold time on pins SD_DATn as outputs 4 - ns
on pins SD_CMD as outputs 4 - ns
Fig 38. SD/MMC timing
002aag204
SD_CLK
SD_DATn (O)
SD_DATn (I)
td(QV)
th(D) tsu(D)
Tcy(clk)
th(Q)
SD_CMD (O)
SD_CMD (I)
Table 32. Dynamic characteristics: LCD
Tamb = 40 C to +85 C; 2.2 V VDD(REG)(3V3) 3.6 V; 2.7 V VDD(IO) 3.6 V; CL = 20 pF.
Simulated values.
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit
fclk clock frequency on pin LCD_DCLK - 50 - MHz
td(QV) data output valid
delay time
- 17 ns
th(Q) data output hold time 8.5 - nsLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 127 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
11.19 SPIFI
Table 33. Dynamic characteristics: SPIFI
Tamb = 40 C to 85 C; 2.2 V VDD(REG)(3V3) 3.6 V; 2.7 V VDD(IO) 3.6 V. CL = 10 pF. Simulated
values.
Symbol Parameter Min Max Unit
Tcy(clk) clock cycle time 9.6 - ns
tDS data set-up time 3.4 - ns
tDH data hold time 0 - ns
tv(Q) data output valid time - 3.2 ns
th(Q) data output hold time 0.2 - ns
Fig 39. SPIFI timing (Mode 0)
SPIFI_SCK
SPIFI data out
SPIFI data in
Tcy(clk)
tDS tDH
tv(Q)
DATA VALID DATA VALID
th(Q)
DATA VALID DATA VALID
002aah409LPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 128 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
12. ADC/DAC electrical characteristics
[1] The ADC is monotonic, there are no missing codes.
[2] The differential linearity error (ED) is the difference between the actual step width and the ideal step width. See Figure 40.
[3] The integral non-linearity (EL(adj)) is the peak difference between the center of the steps of the actual and the ideal transfer curve after
appropriate adjustment of gain and offset errors. See Figure 40.
[4] The offset error (EO) is the absolute difference between the straight line which fits the actual curve and the straight line which fits the
ideal curve. See Figure 40.
[5] The gain error (EG) is the relative difference in percent between the straight line fitting the actual transfer curve after removing offset
error, and the straight line which fits the ideal transfer curve. See Figure 40.
[6] The absolute error (ET) is the maximum difference between the center of the steps of the actual transfer curve of the non-calibrated
ADC and the ideal transfer curve. See Figure 40.
[7] Tamb = 25 C.
[8] Input resistance Ri
depends on the sampling frequency fs: Ri
= 2 k + 1 / (fs Cia).
Table 34. ADC characteristics
VDDA(3V3) over specified ranges; Tamb = 40 C to +85 C; unless otherwise specified.
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit
VIA analog input voltage 0 - VDDA(3V3) V
Cia analog input
capacitance
- - 2 pF
ED differential linearity error 2.7 V VDDA(3V3) 3.6 V [1][2] - 0.8 - LSB
2.2 V VDDA(3V3) < 2.7 V - 1.0 - LSB
EL(adj) integral non-linearity 2.7 V VDDA(3V3) 3.6 V [3] - 0.8 - LSB
2.2 V VDDA(3V3) < 2.7 V - 1.5 - LSB
EO offset error 2.7 V VDDA(3V3) 3.6 V [4] - 0.15 - LSB
2.2 V VDDA(3V3) < 2.7 V - 0.15 - LSB
EG gain error 2.7 V VDDA(3V3) 3.6 V [5] - 0.3 - %
2.2 V VDDA(3V3) < 2.7 V - 0.35 - %
ET absolute error 2.7 V VDDA(3V3) 3.6 V [6] - 3 - LSB
2.2 V VDDA(3V3) < 2.7 V - 4 - LSB
Rvsi voltage source interface
resistance
see Figure 41 - - 1/(7 fclk(ADC)
Cia)
k
Ri input resistance [7][8] - - 1.2 M
fclk(ADC) ADC clock frequency - - 4.5 MHz
fs sampling frequency 10-bit resolution; 11 clock
cycles
- - 400 kSamples/s
2-bit resolution; 3 clock
cycles
1.5 MSamples/sLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 129 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
(1) Example of an actual transfer curve.
(2) The ideal transfer curve.
(3) Differential linearity error (ED).
(4) Integral non-linearity (EL(adj)).
(5) Center of a step of the actual transfer curve.
Fig 40. 10-bit ADC characteristics
002aaf959
1023
1022
1021
1020
1019
(2)
(1)
123456 7 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1018
(5)
(4)
(3)
1 LSB
(ideal)
code
out
VDDA(3V3) − VSSA
1024
offset
error
EO
gain
error
EG
offset error
EO
VIA (LSBideal)
1 LSB =LPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 130 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
[1] In the DAC CR register, bit BIAS = 0 (see the LPC43xx user manual).
[2] Settling time is calculated within 1/2 LSB of the final value.
Rs 1/((7 fclk(ADC) Cia) 2 k
Fig 41. ADC interface to pins
LPC43xx
ADC0_n/ADC1_n
Cia = 2 pF
Rvsi
Rs
VSS
VEXT
002aag704
ADC
COMPARATOR
2 kΩ (analog pin)
2.2 kΩ (multiplexed pin)
Table 35. DAC characteristics
VDDA(3V3) over specified ranges; Tamb = 40 C to +85 C; unless otherwise specified
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit
ED differential linearity error 2.7 V VDDA(3V3) 3.6 V [1] - 0.8 - LSB
2.2 V VDDA(3V3) < 2.7 V - 1.0 - LSB
EL(adj) integral non-linearity code = 0 to 975
2.7 V VDDA(3V3) 3.6 V
[1] - 1.0 - LSB
2.2 V VDDA(3V3) < 2.7 V - 1.5 - LSB
EO offset error 2.7 V VDDA(3V3) 3.6 V [1] - 0.8 - LSB
2.2 V VDDA(3V3) < 2.7 V - 1.0 - LSB
EG gain error 2.7 V VDDA(3V3) 3.6 V [1] - 0.3 - %
2.2 V VDDA(3V3) < 2.7 V - 1.0 - %
CL load capacitance - - 200 pF
RL load resistance 1 - - k
ts settling time [2] 0.4 LPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 131 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
13. Application information
13.1 LCD panel signal usage
Table 36. LCD panel connections for STN single panel mode
External pin 4-bit mono STN single panel 8-bit mono STN single panel Color STN single panel
LPC43xx pin
used
LCD function LPC43xx pin
used
LCD function LPC43xx pin
used
LCD function
LCD_VD[23:8] - - - - - -
LCD_VD7 - - P8_4 UD[7] P8_4 UD[7]
LCD_VD6 - - P8_5 UD[6] P8_5 UD[6]
LCD_VD5 - - P8_6 UD[5] P8_6 UD[5]
LCD_VD4 - - P8_7 UD[4] P8_7 UD[4]
LCD_VD3 P4_2 UD[3] P4_2 UD[3] P4_2 UD[3]
LCD_VD2 P4_3 UD[2] P4_3 UD[2] P4_3 UD[2]
LCD_VD1 P4_4 UD[1] P4_4 UD[1] P4_4 UD[1]
LCD_VD0 P4_1 UD[0] P4_1 UD[0] P4_1 UD[0]
LCD_LP P7_6 LCDLP P7_6 LCDLP P7_6 LCDLP
LCD_ENAB/
LCDM
P4_6 LCDENAB/
LCDM
P4_6 LCDENAB/
LCDM
P4_6 LCDENAB/
LCDM
LCD_FP P4_5 LCDFP P4_5 LCDFP P4_5 LCDFP
LCD_DCLK P4_7 LCDDCLK P4_7 LCDDCLK P4_7 LCDDCLK
LCD_LE P7_0 LCDLE P7_0 LCDLE P7_0 LCDLE
LCD_PWR P7_7 CDPWR P7_7 LCDPWR P7_7 LCDPWR
GP_CLKIN PF_4 LCDCLKIN PF_4 LCDCLKIN PF_4 LCDCLKIN
Table 37. LCD panel connections for STN dual panel mode
External pin 4-bit mono STN dual panel 8-bit mono STN dual panel Color STN dual panel
LPC43xx pin
used
LCD function LPC43xx pin
used
LCD function LPC43xx pin
used
LCD function
LCD_VD[23:16] - - - - - -
LCD_VD15 - - PB_4 LD[7] PB_4 LD[7]
LCD_VD14 - - PB_5 LD[6] PB_5 LD[6]
LCD_VD13 - - PB_6 LD[5] PB_6 LD[5]
LCD_VD12 - - P8_3 LD[4] P8_3 LD[4]
LCD_VD11 P4_9 LD[3] P4_9 LD[3] P4_9 LD[3]
LCD_VD10 P4_10 LD[2] P4_10 LD[2] P4_10 LD[2]
LCD_VD9 P4_8 LD[1] P4_8 LD[1] P4_8 LD[1]
LCD_VD8 P7_5 LD[0] P7_5 LD[0] P7_5 LD[0]
LCD_VD7 - - UD[7] P8_4 UD[7]
LCD_VD6 - - P8_5 UD[6] P8_5 UD[6]
LCD_VD5 - - P8_6 UD[5] P8_6 UD[5]
LCD_VD4 - - P8_7 UD[4] P8_7 UD[4]
LCD_VD3 P4_2 UD[3] P4_2 UD[3] P4_2 UD[3]LPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 132 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
LCD_VD2 P4_3 UD[2] P4_3 UD[2] P4_3 UD[2]
LCD_VD1 P4_4 UD[1] P4_4 UD[1] P4_4 UD[1]
LCD_VD0 P4_1 UD[0] P4_1 UD[0] P4_1 UD[0]
LCD_LP P7_6 LCDLP P7_6 LCDLP P7_6 LCDLP
LCD_ENAB/
LCDM
P4_6 LCDENAB/
LCDM
P4_6 LCDENAB/
LCDM
P4_6 LCDENAB/
LCDM
LCD_FP P4_5 LCDFP P4_5 LCDFP P4_5 LCDFP
LCD_DCLK P4_7 LCDDCLK P4_7 LCDDCLK P4_7 LCDDCLK
LCD_LE P7_0 LCDLE P7_0 LCDLE P7_0 LCDLE
LCD_PWR P7_7 LCDPWR P7_7 LCDPWR P7_7 LCDPWR
GP_CLKIN PF_4 LCDCLKIN PF_4 LCDCLKIN PF_4 LCDCLKIN
Table 37. LCD panel connections for STN dual panel mode …continued
External pin 4-bit mono STN dual panel 8-bit mono STN dual panel Color STN dual panel
LPC43xx pin
used
LCD function LPC43xx pin
used
LCD function LPC43xx pin
used
LCD function
Table 38. LCD panel connections for TFT panels
External
pin
TFT 12 bit (4:4:4
mode)
TFT 16 bit (5:6:5 mode) TFT 16 bit (1:5:5:5 mode) TFT 24 bit
LPC43xx
pin used
LCD
function
LPC43xx
pin used
LCD
function
LPC43xx pin
used
LCD
function
LPC43xx
pin used
LCD
function
LCD_VD23 PB_0 BLUE3 PB_0 BLUE4 PB_0 BLUE4 PB_0 BLUE7
LCD_VD22 PB_1 BLUE2 PB_1 BLUE3 PB_1 BLUE3 PB_1 BLUE6
LCD_VD21 PB_2 BLUE1 PB_2 BLUE2 PB_2 BLUE2 PB_2 BLUE5
LCD_VD20 PB_3 BLUE0 PB_3 BLUE1 PB_3 BLUE1 PB_3 BLUE4
LCD_VD19 - - P7_1 BLUE0 P7_1 BLUE0 P7_1 BLUE3
LCD_VD18 - - - - P7_2 intensity P7_2 BLUE2
LCD_VD17 - - - - - - P7_3 BLUE1
LCD_VD16 - - - - - - P7_4 BLUE0
LCD_VD15 PB_4 GREEN3 PB_4 GREEN5 PB_4 GREEN4 PB_4 GREEN7
LCD_VD14 PB_5 GREEN2 PB_5 GREEN4 PB_5 GREEN3 PB_5 GREEN6
LCD_VD13 PB_6 GREEN1 PB_6 GREEN3 PB_6 GREEN2 PB_6 GREEN5
LCD_VD12 P8_3 GREEN0 P8_3 GREEN2 P8_3 GREEN1 P8_3 GREEN4
LCD_VD11 - - P4_9 GREEN1 P4_9 GREEN0 P4_9 GREEN3
LCD_VD10 - - P4_10 GREEN0 P4_10 intensity P4_10 GREEN2
LCD_VD9 - - - - - - P4_8 GREEN1
LCD_VD8 - - - - - - P7_5 GREEN0
LCD_VD7 P8_4 RED3 P8_4 RED4 P8_4 RED4 P8_4 RED7
LCD_VD6 P8_5 RED2 P8_5 RED3 P8_5 RED3 P8_5 RED6
LCD_VD5 P8_6 RED1 P8_6 RED2 P8_6 RED2 P8_6 RED5
LCD_VD4 P8_7 RED0 P8_7 RED1 P8_7 RED1 P8_7 RED4
LCD_VD3 - - P4_2 RED0 P4_2 RED0 P4_2 RED3
LCD_VD2 - - - - P4_3 intensity P4_3 RED2
LCD_VD1 - - - - - - P4_4 RED1LPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 133 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
13.2 Crystal oscillator
The crystal oscillator is controlled by the XTAL_OSC_CTRL register in the CGU (see
LPC43xx user manual).
The crystal oscillator operates at frequencies of 1 MHz to 25 MHz. This frequency can be
boosted to a higher frequency, up to the maximum CPU operating frequency, by the PLL.
The oscillator can operate in one of two modes: slave mode and oscillation mode.
• In slave mode, couple the input clock signal with a capacitor of 100 pF (CC in
Figure 42), with an amplitude of at least 200 mV (RMS). The XTAL2 pin in this
configuration can be left unconnected.
• External components and models used in oscillation mode are shown in Figure 43,
and in Table 39 and Table 40. Since the feedback resistance is integrated on chip,
only a crystal and the capacitances CX1 and CX2 need to be connected externally in
case of fundamental mode oscillation L, CL and RS represent the fundamental
frequency). The capacitance CP in Figure 43 represents the parallel package
capacitance and must not be larger than 7 pF. Parameters FC, CL, RS and CP are
supplied by the crystal manufacturer.
LCD_VD0 - - - - - - P4_1 RED0
LCD_LP P7_6 LCDLP P7_6 LCDLP P7_6 LCDLP P7_6 LCDLP
LCD_ENAB
/LCDM
P4_6 LCDENAB/
LCDM
P4_6 LCDENAB/
LCDM
P4_6 LCDENAB/
LCDM
P4_6 LCDENAB/
LCDM
LCD_FP P4_5 LCDFP P4_5 LCDFP P4_5 LCDFP P4_5 LCDFP
LCD_DCLK P4_7 LCDDCLK P4_7 LCDDCLK P4_7 LCDDCLK P4_7 LCDDCLK
LCD_LE P7_0 LCDLE P7_0 LCDLE P7_0 LCDLE P7_0 LCDLE
LCD_PWR P7_7 LCDPWR P7_7 LCDPWR P7_7 LCDPWR P7_7 LCDPWR
GP_CLKIN PF_4 LCDCLKIN PF_4 LCDCLKIN PF_4 LCDCLKIN PF_4 LCDCLKIN
Table 38. LCD panel connections for TFT panels …continued
External
pin
TFT 12 bit (4:4:4
mode)
TFT 16 bit (5:6:5 mode) TFT 16 bit (1:5:5:5 mode) TFT 24 bit
LPC43xx
pin used
LCD
function
LPC43xx
pin used
LCD
function
LPC43xx pin
used
LCD
function
LPC43xx
pin used
LCD
function
Table 39. Recommended values for CX1/X2 in oscillation mode (crystal and external
components parameters) low frequency mode
Fundamental oscillation
frequency
Maximum crystal series
resistance RS
External load capacitors
CX1, CX2
2 MHz < 200 33 pF, 33 pF
< 200 39 pF, 39 pF
< 200 56 pF, 56 pF
4 MHz < 200 18 pF, 18 pF
< 200 39 pF, 39 pF
< 200 56 pF, 56 pF
8 MHz < 200 18 pF, 18 pF
< 200 39 pF, 39 pFLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 134 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
12 MHz < 160 18 pF, 18 pF
< 160 39 pF, 39 pF
16 MHz < 120 18 pF, 18 pF
< 80 33 pF, 33 pF
20 MHz <100 18 pF, 18 pF
< 80 33 pF, 33 pF
Table 40. Recommended values for CX1/X2 in oscillation mode (crystal and external
components parameters) high frequency mode
Fundamental oscillation
frequency
Maximum crystal series
resistance RS
External load capacitors CX1,
Cx2
15 MHz < 80 18 pF, 18 pF
20 MHz < 80 39 pF, 39 pF
< 100 47 pF, 47 pF
Fig 42. Slave mode operation of the on-chip oscillator
Fig 43. Oscillator modes with external crystal model used for CX1/CX2 evaluation
Table 39. Recommended values for CX1/X2 in oscillation mode (crystal and external
components parameters) low frequency mode …continued
Fundamental oscillation
frequency
Maximum crystal series
resistance RS
External load capacitors
CX1, CX2
LPC43xx
XTAL1
Ci
100 pF
Cg
002aag379
002aag380
LPC43xx
XTAL1 XTAL2
CX1 CX2
XTAL
= CL CP
RS
LLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 135 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
13.3 RTC oscillator
In the RTC oscillator circuit, only the crystal (XTAL) and the capacitances CRTCX1 and
CRTCX2 need to be connected externally. Typical capacitance values for CRTCX1 and
CRTCX2 are CRTCX1/2 = 20 (typical) 4 pF.
An external clock can be connected to RTCX1 if RTCX2 is left open. The recommended
amplitude of the clock signal is Vi(RMS) = 100 mV to 200 mV with a coupling capacitance of
5 pF to 10 pF. Vi(RMS) must be lower than 450 mV. See Figure 42 for a similar slave-mode
set-up that uses the crystal oscillator.
13.4 XTAL and RTCX Printed Circuit Board (PCB) layout guidelines
Connect the crystal on the PCB as close as possible to the oscillator input and output pins
of the chip. Take care that the load capacitors Cx1, Cx2, and Cx3 in case of third overtone
crystal usage have a common ground plane. Also connect the external components to the
ground plain. To keep the noise coupled in via the PCB as small as possible, make loops
and parasitics as small as possible. Choose smaller values of Cx1 and Cx2 if parasitics
increase in the PCB layout.
Ensure that no high-speed or high-drive signals are near the RTCX1/2 signals.
13.5 Standard I/O pin configuration
Figure 45 shows the possible pin modes for standard I/O pins with analog input function:
• Digital output driver enabled/disabled
• Digital input: Pull-up enabled/disabled
• Digital input: Pull-down enabled/disabled
• Digital input: Repeater mode enabled/disabled
• Digital input: Input buffer enabled/disabled
• Analog input
The default configuration for standard I/O pins is input buffer disabled and pull-up
enabled. The weak MOS devices provide a drive capability equivalent to pull-up and
pull-down resistors.
Fig 44. RTC 32 kHz oscillator circuit
002aah148
LPC43xx
RTCX1 RTCX2
CRTCX1 CRTCX2
XTALLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 136 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
13.6 Reset pin configuration
13.7 Suggested USB interface solutions
The USB device can be connected to the USB as self-powered device (see Figure 47) or
bus-powered device (see Figure 48).
The glitch filter rejects pulses of typical 12 ns width.
Fig 45. Standard I/O pin configuration with analog input
slew rate bit EHS
pull-up enable bit EPUN
pull-down enable bit EPD
glitch
filter
analog I/O
ESD
ESD
PIN
VDDIO
VSSIO
input buffer enable bit EZI
filter select bit ZIF
data input to core
data output from core
enable output driver
002aah028
Fig 46. Reset pin configuration
VSS
reset
002aag702
Vps
Vps
Vps
Rpu ESD
ESD
20 ns RC
GLITCH FILTER PINLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 137 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
On the LPC4350/30/20/10, USBn_VBUS pins are 5 V tolerant only when VDDIO is
applied and at operating voltage level. Therefore, if the USBn_VBUS function is
connected to the USB connector and the device is self-powered, the USBn_VBUS pins
must be protected for situations when VDDIO = 0 V.
If VDDIO is always at operating level while VBUS = 5 V, the USBn_VBUS pin can be
connected directly to the VBUS pin on the USB connector.
For systems where VDDIO can be 0 V and VBUS is directly applied to the USBn_VBUS
pins, precautions must be taken to reduce the voltage to below 3.6 V, which is the
maximum allowable voltage on the USBn_VBUS pins in this case.
One method is to use a voltage divider to connect the USBn_VBUS pins to VBUS on the
USB connector. The voltage divider ratio should be such that the USB_VBUS pin will be
greater than 0.7VDDIO to indicate a logic HIGH while below the 3.6 V allowable maximum
voltage.
For the following operating conditions
VBUSmax = 5.25 V
VDDIO = 3.6 V,
the voltage divider should provide a reduction of 3.6 V/5.25 V or ~0.686 V.
For bus-powered devices, a regulator powered by USB can provide 3.3 V to VDDIO
whenever bus power is present and ensure that power to the USBn_VBUS pins is always
present when the 5 V VBUS signal is applied. See Figure 48.
Remark: Applying 5 V to the USBn_VBUS pins for a short time while the regulator ramps
up might compromise the long-term reliability of the part but does not affect its function.
Fig 47. USB interface on a self-powered device where USBn_VBUS = 5 V
LPC43xx
VDDIO
USB-B
connector
USBn_VBUS VBUS
USB
R2
R3
aaa-013458LPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 138 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
Remark: If the VBUS function of the USB1 interface is not connected, configure the pin
function for GPIO using the function control bits in the SYSCON block.
Remark: In OTG mode, it is important to be able to detect the VBUS level and to charge
and discharge VBUS. This requires adding active devices that disconnect the link when
VDDIO is not present.
Fig 48. USB interface on a bus-powered device
Fig 49. USB interface for USB operating in OTG mode
REGULATOR
USBn_VBUS VBUS
LPC43xx
VDDIO
USB-B
connector USB
aaa-013459
USBn_VBUS VBUS
LPC43xx
VDDIO
USB-B
connector USB
aaa-013460
R1
R2
R3
T2
T1LPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 139 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
14. Package outline
Fig 50. Package outline LBGA256 package
OUTLINE REFERENCES
VERSION
EUROPEAN
PROJECTION ISSUE DATE
IEC JEDEC
MO-192
JEITA
SOT740-2 - - - - - -
SOT740-2
05-06-16
05-08-04
UNIT A
max
mm 1.55 0.45
0.35
1.1
0.9
0.55
0.45
17.2
16.8
17.2
16.8
A1
DIMENSIONS (mm are the original dimensions)
LBGA256: plastic low profile ball grid array package; 256 balls; body 17 x 17 x 1 mm
X
A2 b D E e
1
e1
15
e2
15
v
0.25
w
0.1
y
0.12
y1
0.35
1/2 e
1/2 e
A
A2
A1
detail X
D
E
B A
ball A1
index area
y1 C y
C
A B
A
B
C
D
E
F
H
K
G
J
L
M
N
P
R
T
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 ball A1
index area
e
e
e1
b
e2
C
C
∅ v M
∅ w M
0 5 10 mm
scaleLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 140 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
Fig 51. Package outline of the TFBGA180 package
OUTLINE REFERENCES
VERSION
EUROPEAN
PROJECTION ISSUE DATE
IEC JEDEC JEITA
SOT570-3
SOT570-3
08-07-09
10-04-15
UNIT
mm
max
nom
min
1.20
1.06
0.95
0.40
0.35
0.30
0.50
0.45
0.40
12.1
12.0
11.9
12.1
12.0
11.9
0.8 10.4 0.15 0.12
A
DIMENSIONS (mm are the original dimensions)
TFBGA180: thin fine-pitch ball grid array package; 180 balls
0 5 10 mm
scale
A1 A2
0.80
0.71
0.65
b D E e e1
10.4
e2 v w
0.05
y y1
0.1
ball A1
index area
D B A
E
C
y1 C y
X
A
B
C
D
E
F
H
K
G
L
J
M
N
P
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 1 3 5 7 9 11 13
b
e2
e1
e
e
1/2 e
1/2 e ∅ v M AC B
∅ w M C
ball A1
index area
detail X
A
A2
A1LPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 141 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
Fig 52. Package outline of the TFBGA100 package
OUTLINE REFERENCES
VERSION
EUROPEAN
PROJECTION ISSUE DATE
IEC JEDEC JEITA
SOT926-1 - - - - - - - - -
SOT926-1
05-12-09
05-12-22
UNIT A
max
mm 1.2 0.4
0.3
0.8
0.65
0.5
0.4
9.1
8.9
9.1
8.9
A1
DIMENSIONS (mm are the original dimensions)
TFBGA100: plastic thin fine-pitch ball grid array package; 100 balls; body 9 x 9 x 0.7 mm
A2 b D E e2
7.2
e
0.8
e1
7.2
v
0.15
w
0.05
y
0.08
y1
0.1
0 2.5 5 mm
scale
b
e2
e1
e
e
1/2 e
1/2 e
∅ v M AC B
∅ w M C
ball A1
index area
A
B
C
D
E
F
H
K
G
J
13579 2 4 6 8 10
ball A1
index area
B A
E
D
C
y1 C y
X
detail X
A
A1
A2LPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 142 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
Fig 53. Package outline for the LQFP144 package
UNIT A1 A2 A3 bp c E(1) e HE L Lp ywv Z θ
OUTLINE REFERENCES
VERSION
EUROPEAN
PROJECTION ISSUE DATE
IEC JEDEC JEITA
mm 0.15
0.05
1.45
1.35 0.25 0.27
0.17
0.20
0.09
20.1
19.9 0.5 22.15
21.85
1.4
1.1
7
0
o
1 0.080.2 0.08 o
DIMENSIONS (mm are the original dimensions)
Note
1. Plastic or metal protrusions of 0.25 mm maximum per side are not included.
0.75
0.45
SOT486-1 136E23 MS-026 00-03-14
03-02-20
D(1) (1)(1)
20.1
19.9
HD
22.15
21.85
Z E
1.4
1.1
D
0 5 10 mm
scale
e bp
θ
E
A1
A
Lp
detail X
L
(A ) 3
B
c
bp
EH A2
DH v M B
D
ZD
A
ZE
e
v M A
X
y
w M
w M
A
max.
1.6
LQFP144: plastic low profile quad flat package; 144 leads; body 20 x 20 x 1.4 mm SOT486-1
108
109
pin 1 index
73
72
37
1
144
36LPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 143 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
15. Soldering
Fig 54. Reflow soldering of the LBGA256 package
DIMENSIONS in mm
P SL SP SR Hx Hy
Hx
Hy
SOT740-2
solder land plus solder paste
occupied area
Footprint information for reflow soldering of LBGA256 package
solder land
solder paste deposit
solder resist
P
P
SL
SP
SR
Generic footprint pattern
Refer to the package outline drawing for actual layout
detail X
see detail X
sot740-2_fr 1.00 0.450 0.450 0.600 17.500 17.500LPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 144 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
Fig 55. Reflow soldering of the TFBGA180 package
DIMENSIONS in mm
P SL SP SR Hx Hy
Hx
Hy
SOT570-3
solder land plus solder paste
occupied area
Footprint information for reflow soldering of TFBGA180 package
solder land
solder paste deposit
solder resist
P
P
SL
SP
SR
Generic footprint pattern
Refer to the package outline drawing for actual layout
detail X
see detail X
sot570-3_fr 0.80 0.400 0.400 0.550 12.575 12.575LPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 145 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
Fig 56. Reflow soldering of the LQFP144 package
SOT486-1
DIMENSIONS in mm
occupied area
Footprint information for reflow soldering of LQFP144 package
Ax
Bx
Gx
Hy Gy
Hx
AyBy
P2 P1
D2 (8×) D1
(0.125)
P1 P2 Ax Ay Bx By C D1 D2 Gx Gy Hx Hy
sot486-1_fr
solder land
C
Generic footprint pattern
Refer to the package outline drawing for actual layout
0.500 0.560 0.280 23.300 23.300 20.300 20.300 1.500 0.400 20.500 20.500 23.550 23.550LPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 146 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
Fig 57. Reflow soldering of the TFBGA100 package
DIMENSIONS in mm
P SL SP SR Hx Hy
Hx
Hy
SOT926-1
solder land plus solder paste
occupied area
Footprint information for reflow soldering of TFBGA100 package
solder land
solder paste deposit
solder resist
P
P
SL
SP
SR
Generic footprint pattern
Refer to the package outline drawing for actual layout
detail X
see detail X
sot926-1_fr 0.80 0.330 0.400 0.480 9.400 9.400LPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 147 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
16. Abbreviations
Table 41. Abbreviations
Acronym Description
ADC Analog-to-Digital Converter
AHB Advanced High-performance Bus
APB Advanced Peripheral Bus
API Application Programming Interface
BOD BrownOut Detection
CAN Controller Area Network
CMAC Cipher-based Message Authentication Code
CSMA/CD Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection
DAC Digital-to-Analog Converter
DC-DC Direct Current-to-Direct Current
DMA Direct Memory Access
GPIO General-Purpose Input/Output
IRC Internal RC
IrDA Infrared Data Association
JTAG Joint Test Action Group
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LSB Least Significant Bit
MAC Media Access Control
MCU MicroController Unit
MIIM Media Independent Interface Management
n.c. not connected
OHCI Open Host Controller Interface
OTG On-The-Go
PHY Physical Layer
PLL Phase-Locked Loop
PMC Power Mode Control
PWM Pulse Width Modulator
RIT Repetitive Interrupt Timer
RMII Reduced Media Independent Interface
SDRAM Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory
SIMD Single Instruction Multiple Data
SPI Serial Peripheral Interface
SSI Serial Synchronous Interface
SSP Synchronous Serial Port
UART Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter
ULPI UTMI+ Low Pin Interface
USART Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter
USB Universal Serial Bus
UTMI USB2.0 Transceiver Macrocell InterfaceLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 148 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
17. References
[1] LPC43xx User manual UM10503:
http://www.nxp.com/documents/user_manual/UM10503.pdf
[2] LPC43X0 Errata sheet:
http://www.nxp.com/documents/errata_sheet/ES_LPC43XX.pdfLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 149 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
18. Revision history
Table 42. Revision history
Document ID Release date Data sheet status Change notice Supersedes
LPC4350_30_20_10 v.4.2 20140818 Product data sheet LPC4350_30_20_10 v.4.1
Modifications: • Parameter CI corrected for high-drive pins (changed from 2 pF to 5.2 pF). See
Table 10.
• Table 18 “Dynamic characteristic: I/O pins[1]” added.
• IRC accuracy changed from 1 % to 1.5 % over the full temperature range. See Table
16 “Dynamic characteristic: IRC oscillator”.
• Description of internal pull-up resistor configuration added for RESET, WAKEUPn,
and ALARM pins.See Table 3.
• Description of DEBUG pin updated.
• Input range for PLL1 corrected: 1 MHz to 25 MHz. See Section 7.22.7 “System PLL1”.
• Section 13.7 “Suggested USB interface solutions” added.
• SSP master mode timing diagram updated with SSEL timing parameters. See Figure
30 “SSP master mode timing (SPI mode)”.
• Parameters tlead, tlag, and td added in Table 22 “Dynamic characteristics: SSP pins in
SPI mode”.
• Reset state of the RTC alarm pin RTC_ALARM added. See Table 3.
• SRAM location for parts LPC4320 corrected in Figure 7.
• IEEE standard 802.3 compliance added to Section 11.16. Covers Ethernet dynamic
characteristics of ENET_MDIO and ENET_MDC signals.\
• Signal polarity of EMC_CKEOUT and EMC_DQMOUT corrected. Both signals are
active HIGH.
• SPIFI output timing parameters in Table 33 corrected to apply to Mode 0:
– tv(Q) changed to 3.2 ns.
– th(Q) changed to 0.2 ns,
• Parameter tCSLWEL with condition PB = 1 corrected: (WAITWEN + 1) Tcy(clk) added.
See Table 25 “Dynamic characteristics: Static asynchronous external memory
interface”.
• Parameter tCSLBLSL with condition PB = 0 corrected: (WAITWEN + 1) Tcy(clk) added.
See Table 25 “Dynamic characteristics: Static asynchronous external memory
interface”.
LPC4350_30_20_10 v.4.1 20131211 Product data sheet - LPC4350_30_20_10 v.4
Modifications: • Description of RESET pin updated in Table 3.
• Layout of local SRAM at address 0x1008 0000 clarified in Figure 7
“LPC4350/30/20/10 Memory mapping (overview)”.
• Maximum value for Vi(RMS) added in Section 13.3 “RTC oscillator”.
• VO for RTC_ALARM pin added in Table 10.
• RTC_ALARM and WAKEUPn pins added to Table 10.
• Table note 9 added in Table 10.
• Timing parameters in Table 31 “Dynamic characteristics: SD/MMC” corrected.
• Band gap characteristics removed.
• OTP memory size available for general purpose use corrected.
• Part LPC4350FBD208 removed.
LPC4350_30_20_10 v.4 20130326 Product data sheet - LPC4350_30_20_10 v.3.7LPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 150 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
• Parameter ILH (High-level leakage current) for condition VI = 5 V changed to 20 nA
(max). See Table 10.
• Parameter VDDA(3V3) added for pins USB0_VDDA3V3_DRIVER and
USB0_VDDA3V3 in Table 10.
• SPI timing data added. See Table 22.
• SGPIO timing data added. See Table 23.
• SPI and SGPIO peripheral power consumption added in Table 11.
• Data sheet status changed to Product data sheet.
• Corrected max voltage on pins USB0_DP, USB0_DM, USB0_VBUS, USB1_DP, and
USB1_DM in Table 6 and Table 10 to be consistent with USB specifications.
LPC4350_30_20_10 v.3.7 20130131 Preliminary data sheet - LPC4350_30_20_10 v.3.6
Modifications: • SGPIO and SPI location corrected in Figure 1.
• SGPIO-to-DMA connection corrected in Figure 7.
• Power consumption in active mode corrected. See parameter IDD(REG)(3V3) in Table 10
and graphs Figure 12, Figure 13, and Figure 14.
• Parameter name IDD(ADC) changed to IDDA in Table 10.
• Figure 21 “Band gap voltage for different temperatures and process conditions” and
Table 13 “Band gap characteristics” corrected.
• Added note to limit data in Table 24 “Dynamic characteristics: Static asynchronous
external memory interface” to single memory accesses.
• Value of parameter IDD(REG)(3V3) in deep power-down increased to 0.03 μA in
Table 10.
• Value of parameter IDD(IO) in deep power-down increased to 0.05 μA in Table 10.
LPC4350_30_20_10 v.3.6 20121119 Preliminary data sheet - LPC4350_30_20_10 v.3.5
Modifications: • Table 13 “Band gap characteristics” added.
• Power consumption for M0 core added in Table 11 “Peripheral power consumption”.
• Section 7.22.10 “Power Management Controller (PMC)” added.
• Table 10, added Table note 2: “Dynamic characteristics for peripherals are provided
for VDD(REG)(3V3) 2.7 V.”
• Description of ADC pins on digital/analog input pins changed. Each input to the ADC
is connected to ADC0 and ADC1. See Table 3.
• Use of C_CAN peripheral restricted in Section 2.
• ADC channels limited to a total of 8 channels shared between ADC0 and ADC1.
• Minimum value for parameter VIL changed to 0 V in Table 10 “Static characteristics”.
LPC4350_30_20_10 v.3.5 20121011 Preliminary data sheet - LPC4350_30_20_10 v.3.4
Table 42. Revision history …continued
Document ID Release date Data sheet status Change notice SupersedesLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 151 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
Modifications: • Temperature range for simulated timing characteristics corrected to Tamb = 40 C to
+85 C in Section 11 “Dynamic characteristics”.
• SPIFI timing added. See Section 11.15.
• SPIFI maximum data rate changed to 52 MB per second.
• Editorial updates.
• Figure 25 and Figure 26 updated for full temperature range.
• Section 7.23 “Serial Wire Debug/JTAG” updated.
• The following changes were made on the TFBGA180 pinout in Table 3:
– P1_13 moved from ball D6 to L8.
– P7_5 moved from ball C7 to A7.
– PF_4 moved from ball L8 to D6.
– RESET moved from ball B7 to C7.
– RTCX2 moved from ball A7 to B7.
– Ball G10 changed from VSS to VDDIO.
LPC4350_30_20_10 v.3.4 20120904 Preliminary data sheet - LPC4350_30_20_10 v.3.3
Modifications: • SSP0 boot pin functions corrected in Table 5 and Table 4. Pin P3_3 = SSP0_SCK, pin
P3_6 = SSP0_SSEL, pin P3_7 = SSP0_MISO, pin P3_8 = SSP0_MOSI.
• Minimum value for all supply voltages changed to -0.5 V in Table 6.
LPC4350_30_20_10 v.3.3 20120821 Preliminary data sheet - LPC4350_30_20_10 v.3.2
Modifications: • Parameter twake updated in Table 13 for wake-up from deep power-down mode and
reset.
• Dynamic characteristics of the SD/MMC controller updated in Table 28.
• Dynamic characteristics of the LCD controller updated in Table 29.
• Dynamic characteristics of the SSP controller updated in Table 21.
• Minimum value of VI for conditions “USB0 pins USB0_DP; USB0_DM;
USB0_VBUS”,“USB0 pins USB0_ID; USB0_RREF”, and “USB1 pins USB1_DP and
USB1_DM” changed to 0.3 V in Table 6.
• Parameters IIL and IIH renamed to ILL and ILH in Table 10.
• AES removed. AES is available on parts LPC43Sxx only.
• Pin configuration diagrams corrected for LQFP packages (Figure 5 and Figure 6).
• Figure 10 updated.
• All power consumption data updated in Table 10 and Section 10.1 “Power
consumption”.
• BOD levels updated in Table 12.
• SWD debug option removed for Cortex-M0 core.
LPC4350_30_20_10 v.3.2 20120604 Preliminary data sheet - LPC4350_30_20_10 v.3.1
LPC4350_30_20_10 v.3.1 20120105 Objective data sheet - LPC4350_30_20_10 v.3
LPC4350_30_20_10 v.3 20111205 Objective data sheet - LPC4350_30_20_10 v.2.1
LPC4350_30_20_10 v.2.1 20110923 Objective data sheet - LPC4350_30_20_10 v.2
LPC4350_30_20_10 v.2 20110714 Objective data sheet - LPC4350_30_20_10 v.1
LPC4350_30_20_10 v.1 20101029 Objective data sheet - -
Table 42. Revision history …continued
Document ID Release date Data sheet status Change notice SupersedesLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 152 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
19. Legal information
19.1 Data sheet status
[1] Please consult the most recently issued document before initiating or completing a design.
[2] The term ‘short data sheet’ is explained in section “Definitions”.
[3] The product status of device(s) described in this document may have changed since this document was published and may differ in case of multiple devices. The latest product status
information is available on the Internet at URL http://www.nxp.com.
19.2 Definitions
Draft — The document is a draft version only. The content is still under
internal review and subject to formal approval, which may result in
modifications or additions. NXP Semiconductors does not give any
representations or warranties as to the accuracy or completeness of
information included herein and shall have no liability for the consequences of
use of such information.
Short data sheet — A short data sheet is an extract from a full data sheet
with the same product type number(s) and title. A short data sheet is intended
for quick reference only and should not be relied upon to contain detailed and
full information. For detailed and full information see the relevant full data
sheet, which is available on request via the local NXP Semiconductors sales
office. In case of any inconsistency or conflict with the short data sheet, the
full data sheet shall prevail.
Product specification — The information and data provided in a Product
data sheet shall define the specification of the product as agreed between
NXP Semiconductors and its customer, unless NXP Semiconductors and
customer have explicitly agreed otherwise in writing. In no event however,
shall an agreement be valid in which the NXP Semiconductors product is
deemed to offer functions and qualities beyond those described in the
Product data sheet.
19.3 Disclaimers
Limited warranty and liability — Information in this document is believed to
be accurate and reliable. However, NXP Semiconductors does not give any
representations or warranties, expressed or implied, as to the accuracy or
completeness of such information and shall have no liability for the
consequences of use of such information. NXP Semiconductors takes no
responsibility for the content in this document if provided by an information
source outside of NXP Semiconductors.
In no event shall NXP Semiconductors be liable for any indirect, incidental,
punitive, special or consequential damages (including - without limitation - lost
profits, lost savings, business interruption, costs related to the removal or
replacement of any products or rework charges) whether or not such
damages are based on tort (including negligence), warranty, breach of
contract or any other legal theory.
Notwithstanding any damages that customer might incur for any reason
whatsoever, NXP Semiconductors’ aggregate and cumulative liability towards
customer for the products described herein shall be limited in accordance
with the Terms and conditions of commercial sale of NXP Semiconductors.
Right to make changes — NXP Semiconductors reserves the right to make
changes to information published in this document, including without
limitation specifications and product descriptions, at any time and without
notice. This document supersedes and replaces all information supplied prior
to the publication hereof.
Suitability for use — NXP Semiconductors products are not designed,
authorized or warranted to be suitable for use in life support, life-critical or
safety-critical systems or equipment, nor in applications where failure or
malfunction of an NXP Semiconductors product can reasonably be expected
to result in personal injury, death or severe property or environmental
damage. NXP Semiconductors and its suppliers accept no liability for
inclusion and/or use of NXP Semiconductors products in such equipment or
applications and therefore such inclusion and/or use is at the customer’s own
risk.
Applications — Applications that are described herein for any of these
products are for illustrative purposes only. NXP Semiconductors makes no
representation or warranty that such applications will be suitable for the
specified use without further testing or modification.
Customers are responsible for the design and operation of their applications
and products using NXP Semiconductors products, and NXP Semiconductors
accepts no liability for any assistance with applications or customer product
design. It is customer’s sole responsibility to determine whether the NXP
Semiconductors product is suitable and fit for the customer’s applications and
products planned, as well as for the planned application and use of
customer’s third party customer(s). Customers should provide appropriate
design and operating safeguards to minimize the risks associated with their
applications and products.
NXP Semiconductors does not accept any liability related to any default,
damage, costs or problem which is based on any weakness or default in the
customer’s applications or products, or the application or use by customer’s
third party customer(s). Customer is responsible for doing all necessary
testing for the customer’s applications and products using NXP
Semiconductors products in order to avoid a default of the applications and
the products or of the application or use by customer’s third party
customer(s). NXP does not accept any liability in this respect.
Limiting values — Stress above one or more limiting values (as defined in
the Absolute Maximum Ratings System of IEC 60134) will cause permanent
damage to the device. Limiting values are stress ratings only and (proper)
operation of the device at these or any other conditions above those given in
the Recommended operating conditions section (if present) or the
Characteristics sections of this document is not warranted. Constant or
repeated exposure to limiting values will permanently and irreversibly affect
the quality and reliability of the device.
Terms and conditions of commercial sale — NXP Semiconductors
products are sold subject to the general terms and conditions of commercial
sale, as published at http://www.nxp.com/profile/terms, unless otherwise
agreed in a valid written individual agreement. In case an individual
agreement is concluded only the terms and conditions of the respective
agreement shall apply. NXP Semiconductors hereby expressly objects to
applying the customer’s general terms and conditions with regard to the
purchase of NXP Semiconductors products by customer.
No offer to sell or license — Nothing in this document may be interpreted or
construed as an offer to sell products that is open for acceptance or the grant,
conveyance or implication of any license under any copyrights, patents or
other industrial or intellectual property rights.
Document status[1][2] Product status[3] Definition
Objective [short] data sheet Development This document contains data from the objective specification for product development.
Preliminary [short] data sheet Qualification This document contains data from the preliminary specification.
Product [short] data sheet Production This document contains the product specification. LPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 153 of 155
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
Export control — This document as well as the item(s) described herein
may be subject to export control regulations. Export might require a prior
authorization from competent authorities.
Non-automotive qualified products — Unless this data sheet expressly
states that this specific NXP Semiconductors product is automotive qualified,
the product is not suitable for automotive use. It is neither qualified nor tested
in accordance with automotive testing or application requirements. NXP
Semiconductors accepts no liability for inclusion and/or use of
non-automotive qualified products in automotive equipment or applications.
In the event that customer uses the product for design-in and use in
automotive applications to automotive specifications and standards, customer
(a) shall use the product without NXP Semiconductors’ warranty of the
product for such automotive applications, use and specifications, and (b)
whenever customer uses the product for automotive applications beyond
NXP Semiconductors’ specifications such use shall be solely at customer’s
own risk, and (c) customer fully indemnifies NXP Semiconductors for any
liability, damages or failed product claims resulting from customer design and
use of the product for automotive applications beyond NXP Semiconductors’
standard warranty and NXP Semiconductors’ product specifications.
19.4 Trademarks
Notice: All referenced brands, product names, service names and trademarks
are the property of their respective owners.
I
2C-bus — logo is a trademark of NXP Semiconductors N.V.
20. Contact information
For more information, please visit: http://www.nxp.com
For sales office addresses, please send an email to: salesaddresses@nxp.comLPC4350_30_20_10 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet Rev. 4.2 — 18 August 2014 154 of 155
continued >>
NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
21. Contents
1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2 Features and benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
3 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
4 Ordering information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
4.1 Ordering options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
5 Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
6 Pinning information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
6.1 Pinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
6.2 Pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
7 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
7.1 Architectural overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
7.2 ARM Cortex-M4 processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
7.3 ARM Cortex-M0 co-processor . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
7.4 Interprocessor communication . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
7.5 AHB multilayer matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
7.6 Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC) . 62
7.6.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
7.6.2 Interrupt sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
7.7 System Tick timer (SysTick) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
7.8 Event router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
7.9 Global Input Multiplexer Array (GIMA) . . . . . . 63
7.9.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
7.10 On-chip static RAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
7.11 In-System Programming (ISP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
7.12 Boot ROM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
7.13 Memory mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
7.14 One-Time Programmable (OTP) memory . . . 68
7.15 General-Purpose I/O (GPIO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
7.15.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
7.16 Configurable digital peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . 68
7.16.1 State Configurable Timer (SCTimer/PWM)
subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
7.16.1.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
7.16.2 Serial GPIO (SGPIO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
7.16.2.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
7.17 AHB peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
7.17.1 General-Purpose DMA (GPDMA). . . . . . . . . . 70
7.17.1.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
7.17.2 SPI Flash Interface (SPIFI). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
7.17.2.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
7.17.3 SD/MMC card interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
7.17.4 External Memory Controller (EMC). . . . . . . . . 71
7.17.4.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
7.17.5 High-speed USB Host/Device/OTG interface
(USB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
7.17.5.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
7.17.6 High-speed USB Host/Device interface with
ULPI (USB1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
7.17.6.1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
7.17.7 LCD controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
7.17.7.1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
7.17.8 Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
7.17.8.1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
7.18 Digital serial peripherals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
7.18.1 UART1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
7.18.1.1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
7.18.2 USART0/2/3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
7.18.2.1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
7.18.3 SPI serial I/O controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
7.18.3.1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
7.18.4 SSP serial I/O controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
7.18.4.1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
7.18.5 I2C-bus interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
7.18.5.1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
7.18.6 I2S interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
7.18.6.1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
7.18.7 C_CAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
7.18.7.1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
7.19 Counter/timers and motor control . . . . . . . . . 78
7.19.1 General purpose 32-bit timers/external event
counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
7.19.1.1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
7.19.2 Motor control PWM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
7.19.3 Quadrature Encoder Interface (QEI) . . . . . . . 78
7.19.3.1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
7.19.4 Repetitive Interrupt (RI) timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
7.19.4.1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
7.19.5 Windowed WatchDog Timer (WWDT) . . . . . . 79
7.19.5.1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
7.20 Analog peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
7.20.1 Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC0/1) . . . . . . 80
7.20.1.1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
7.20.2 Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC). . . . . . . . . 80
7.20.2.1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
7.21 Peripherals in the RTC power domain . . . . . . 80
7.21.1 RTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
7.21.1.1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
7.21.2 Alarm timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
7.22 System control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
7.22.1 Configuration registers (CREG) . . . . . . . . . . . 81
7.22.2 System Control Unit (SCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
7.22.3 Clock Generation Unit (CGU) . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
7.22.4 Internal RC oscillator (IRC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
7.22.5 PLL0USB (for USB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82NXP Semiconductors LPC4350/30/20/10
32-bit ARM Cortex-M4/M0 microcontroller
© NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
For more information, please visit: http://www.nxp.com
For sales office addresses, please send an email to: salesaddresses@nxp.com
Date of release: 18 August 2014
Document identifier: LPC4350_30_20_10
Please be aware that important notices concerning this document and the product(s)
described herein, have been included in section ‘Legal information’.
7.22.6 PLL0AUDIO (for audio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
7.22.7 System PLL1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
7.22.8 Reset Generation Unit (RGU). . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
7.22.9 Power control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
7.22.10 Power Management Controller (PMC) . . . . . . 83
7.23 Serial Wire Debug/JTAG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
8 Limiting values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
9 Thermal characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
10 Static characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
10.1 Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
10.2 Peripheral power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
10.3 BOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
10.4 Electrical pin characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
11 Dynamic characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
11.1 Wake-up times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
11.2 External clock for oscillator in slave mode . . 106
11.3 Crystal oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
11.4 IRC oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
11.5 RTC oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
11.6 I/O pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
11.7 I2C-bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
11.8 I2S-bus interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
11.9 USART interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
11.10 SSP interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
11.11 SPI interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
11.12 SSP/SPI timing diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
11.13 SGPIO timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
11.14 External memory interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
11.15 USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
11.16 Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
11.17 SD/MMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
11.18 LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
11.19 SPIFI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
12 ADC/DAC electrical characteristics . . . . . . . 128
13 Application information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
13.1 LCD panel signal usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
13.2 Crystal oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
13.3 RTC oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
13.4 XTAL and RTCX Printed Circuit Board (PCB)
layout guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
13.5 Standard I/O pin configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 135
13.6 Reset pin configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
13.7 Suggested USB interface solutions . . . . . . . 136
14 Package outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
15 Soldering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
16 Abbreviations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
17 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
18 Revision history. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
19 Legal information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
19.1 Data sheet status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
19.2 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
19.3 Disclaimers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
19.4 Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
20 Contact information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
21 Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Your Electronic Engineering Resource
Legal Disclaimer: The content of the pages of this website is for your general information and use only. It is subject to change without notice. From time to time, this website may
also include links to other websites. These links are provided for your convenience to provide further information. They do not signify that we endorse the website(s). We have no
responsibility for the content of the linked website(s). Your use of any information or materials on this website is entirely at your own risk, for which we shall not be liable. It shall
be your own responsibility to ensure that any products, services or information available through this website meet your specific requirements.
7491181012: Off-line Transformer WE-UNIT
Product Description:
Würth Electronics, Inc. has a broad selection of power transformers
for the latest reference designs from some of the leading IC
manufacturers in the industry. The overall product offering contains
more than 50 transformers built for chipsets from NXP
Semiconductors, Linear Technology, ON Semiconductor, Power
Integrations, STMicroelectronics, and National Semiconductor.
Examples of these devices are a series of offline power transformers
designed for NXP's dimmable LED drivers and a full series of flyback
transformers for Linear Technology's isolated flyback converters.
They are Designed for Tiny Switch ICs from Power Integration and NCP101x or 105x of ON Semiconductor
Key Features:
Nominal input voltage: 125V DC to 375V DC Output power 3W and 9W
Operating temperature: -40°C to +125°C Clearance and creepage distance 6mm min.
Switching frequency: 132kHz Isolation voltage 4kVAC
Applications:
Designed for Tiny Switch ICs from Power
Integration and NCP101x or 105x of ON
Semiconductor
For SMPS with universal input from 85 VAC up to 265
VAC
Ordering Information:
Mfr Part # Farnell# Newark# Description
7491181012 Click Here Click Here Off-line transformer WE-UNIT
1. Introduction
This data sheet describes the functionality of the CLRC632 Integrated Circuit (IC). It
includes the functional and electrical specifications and from a system and hardware
viewpoint gives detailed information on how to design-in the device.
Remark: The CLRC632 supports all variants of the MIFARE Mini, MIFARE 1K,
MIFARE 4K and MIFARE Ultralight RF identification protocols. To aid readability
throughout this data sheet, the MIFARE Mini, MIFARE 1K, MIFARE 4K and
MIFARE Ultralight products and protocols have the generic name MIFARE.
2. General description
The CLRC632 is a highly integrated reader IC for contactless communication at
13.56 MHz. The CLRC632 reader IC provides:
• outstanding modulation and demodulation for passive contactless communication
• a wide range of methods and protocols
• a small, fully integrated package
• pin compatibility with the MFRC500, MFRC530, MFRC531 and SLRC400
All protocol layers of the ISO/IEC 14443 A and ISO/IEC 14443 B communication
standards are supported provided:
• additional components, such as the oscillator, power supply, coil etc. are correctly
applied.
• standardized protocols, such as ISO/IEC 14443-4 and/or ISO/IEC 14443 B
anticollision are correctly implemented
The CLRC632 supports contactless communication using MIFARE higher baud rates (see
Section 9.12 on page 40). The receiver module provides a robust and efficient
demodulation/decoding circuitry implementation for compatible transponder signals (see
Section 9.10 on page 34).
The digital module, manages the complete ISO/IEC 14443 standard framing and error
detection (parity and CRC). In addition, it supports the fast MIFARE security algorithm for
authenticating the MIFARE products (see Section 9.14 on page 42).
All layers of the I-CODE1 and ISO/IEC 15693 protocols are supported by the CLRC632.
The receiver module provides a robust and efficient demodulation/decoding circuitry
implementation for I-CODE1 and ISO/IEC 15693 compatible transponder signals. The
digital module handles I-CODE1 and ISO/IEC 15693 framing and error detection (CRC).
CLRC632
Standard multi-protocol reader solution
Rev. 3.7 — 27 February 2014
073937
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLICCLRC632 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.7 — 27 February 2014
073937 2 of 127
NXP Semiconductors CLRC632
Standard multi-protocol reader solution
The internal transmitter module (Section 9.9 on page 31) can directly drive an antenna
designed for a proximity operating distance up to 100 mm without any additional active
circuitry.
A parallel interface can be directly connected to any 8-bit microprocessor to ensure
reader/terminal design flexibility. In addition, Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) compatibility
is supported (see Section 9.1.4 on page 9).
3. Features and benefits
3.1 General
Highly integrated analog circuitry for demodulating and decoding card/label response
Buffered output drivers enable antenna connection using the minimum of external
components
Proximity operating distance up to 100 mm
Supports both ISO/IEC 14443 A and ISO/IEC 14443 B standards
Supports MIFARE dual-interface card ICs and the MIFARE Mini, MIFARE 1K,
MIFARE 4K protocols
Contactless communication at MIFARE higher baud rates (up to 424 kBd)
Supports both I-CODE1 and ISO/IEC 15693 protocols
Crypto1 and secure non-volatile internal key memory
Pin-compatible with the MFRC500, MFRC530, MFRC531 and the SLRC400
Parallel microprocessor interface with internal address latch and IRQ line
SPI compatibility
Flexible interrupt handling
Automatic detection of parallel microprocessor interface type
64-byte send and receive FIFO buffer
Hard reset with low power function
Software controlled Power-down mode
Programmable timer
Unique serial number
User programmable start-up configuration
Bit-oriented and byte oriented framing
Independent power supply pins for analog, digital and transmitter modules
Internal oscillator buffer optimized for low phase jitter enables 13.56 MHz quartz
connection
Clock frequency filtering
3.3 V to 5 V operation for transmitter in short range and proximity applications
3.3 V or 5 V operation for the digital module
4. Applications
Electronic payment systems
Identification systems
Access control systemsCLRC632 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.7 — 27 February 2014
073937 3 of 127
NXP Semiconductors CLRC632
Standard multi-protocol reader solution
Subscriber services
Banking systems
Digital content systems
5. Quick reference data
6. Ordering information
Table 1. Quick reference data
Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit
Tamb ambient temperature 40 - +150 C
Tstg storage temperature 40 - +150 C
VDDD digital supply voltage 0.5 5 6 V
VDDA analog supply voltage 0.5 5 6 V
VDD(TVDD) TVDD supply voltage 0.5 5 6 V
Vi
input voltage (absolute
value)
on any digital pin to DVSS 0.5 - VDDD + 0.5 V
on pin RX to AVSS 0.5 - VDDA + 0.5 V
ILI input leakage current 1.0 - 1.0 mA
IDD(TVDD) TVDD supply current continuous wave - - 150 mA
Table 2. Ordering information
Type number Package
Name Description Version
CLRC63201T/0FE SO32 plastic small outline package; 32 leads; body width 7.5 mm SOT287-1CLRC632 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.7 — 27 February 2014
073937 4 of 127
NXP Semiconductors CLRC632
Standard multi-protocol reader solution
7. Block diagram
Fig 1. CLRC632 block diagram
001aaj629
FIFO CONTROL
64-BYTE FIFO
MASTER KEY BUFFER
CRYPTO1 UNIT
CONTROL REGISTER
BANK
NWR NRD NCS ALE A0 A1 A2
10 11 9 21 22 23 24 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
AD0 to AD7/D0 to D7
STATE MACHINE
COMMAND REGISTER
PROGRAMMABLE TIMER
INTERRUPT CONTROL
CRC16/CRC8
GENERATION AND CHECK
PARALLEL/SERIAL CONVERTER
BIT COUNTER
PARITY GENERATION AND CHECK
FRAME GENERATION AND CHECK
SERIAL DATA SWITCH
BIT DECODING BIT ENCODING
32 × 16-BYTE
EEPROM
EEPROM
ACCESS
CONTROL
32-BIT PSEUDO
RANDOM GENERATOR
AMPLITUDE
RATING
CLOCK
GENERATION,
FILTERING AND
DISTRIBUTION
OSCILLATOR
LEVEL SHIFTERS
CORRELATION
AND
REFERENCE BIT DECODING
VOLTAGE
Q-CHANNEL
AMPLIFIER
Q-CHANNEL
DEMODULATOR
I-CHANNEL
ANALOG AMPLIFIER
TEST
MULTIPLEXER I-CHANNEL
DEMODULATOR
PARALLEL INTERFACE CONTROL
(INCLUDING AUTOMATIC INTERFACE DETECTION AND SYNCHRONISATION)
VOLTAGE
MONITOR
AND
POWER ON
DETECT
DVDD
RSTPD
Q-CLOCK
GENERATION
TRANSMITTER CONTROL
GND
GND
VMID AUX RX TVSS TX1 TX2 TVDD
30 27 29 8 5 7 6
V
V
POWER ON
DETECT
OSCIN
AVDD
AVSS
OSCOUT
IRQ
MFIN
MFOUT
DVSS
25
31
1
26
28
32
2
3
4
12
RESET
CONTROL
POWER DOWN
CONTROLCLRC632 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.7 — 27 February 2014
073937 5 of 127
NXP Semiconductors CLRC632
Standard multi-protocol reader solution
8. Pinning information
8.1 Pin description
Fig 2. CLRC632 pin configuration
CLRC632
OSCIN OSCOUT
IRQ RSTPD
MFIN VMID
MFOUT RX
TX1 AVSS
TVDD AUX
TX2 AVDD
TVSS DVDD
NCS A2/SCK
NWR/R/NW/nWrite A1
NRD/NDS/nDStrb A0/nWait/MOSI
DVSS ALE/AS/nAStrb/NSS
AD0/D0 D7/AD7
AD1/D1 D6/AD6
AD2/D2 D5/AD5
AD3/D3 D4/AD4
001aaj630
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
17
20
19
22
21
24
23
26
25
32
31
30
29
28
27
Table 3. Pin description
Pin Symbol Type[1] Description
1 OSCIN I oscillator/clock inputs:
crystal oscillator input to the oscillator’s inverting amplifier
externally generated clock input; fosc = 13.56 MHz
2 IRQ O interrupt request generates an output signaling an interrupt event
3 MFIN I ISO/IEC 14443 A MIFARE serial data interface input
4[2] MFOUT O interface outputs used as follows:
MIFARE: generates serial data ISO/IEC 14443 A
I-CODE: generates serial data based on I-CODE1 and ISO/IEC 15693
5 TX1 O transmitter 1 modulated carrier output; 13.56 MHz
6 TVDD P transmitter power supply for the TX1 and TX2 output stages
7 TX2 O transmitter 2 modulated carrier output; 13.56 MHz
8 TVSS G transmitter ground for the TX1 and TX2 output stages
9 NCS I not chip select input is used to select and activate the CLRC632’s microprocessor
interface
10[3] NWR I not write input generates the strobe signal for writing data to the CLRC632
registers when applied to pins D0 to D7
R/NW I read not write input is used to switch between read or write cycles
nWrite I not write input selects the read or write cycle to be performedCLRC632 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.7 — 27 February 2014
073937 6 of 127
NXP Semiconductors CLRC632
Standard multi-protocol reader solution
[1] Pin types: I = Input, O = Output, I/O = Input/Output, P = Power and G = Ground.
[2] The SLRC400 uses pin name SIGOUT for pin MFOUT. The CLRC632 functionality includes test functions for the SLRC400 using pin
MFOUT.
[3] These pins provide different functionality depending on the selected microprocessor interface type (see Section 9.1 on page 7 for
detailed information).
11[3] NRD I not read input generates the strobe signal for reading data from the CLRC632
registers when applied to pins D0 to D7
NDS I not data strobe input generates the strobe signal for the read and write cycles
nDStrb I not data strobe input generates the strobe signal for the read and write cycles
12 DVSS G digital ground
13 D0 O SPI master in, slave out output
13 to 20[3] D0 to D7 I/O 8-bit bidirectional data bus input/output on pins D0 to D7
AD0 to AD7 I/O 8-bit bidirectional address and data bus input/output on pins AD0 to AD7
21[3] ALE I address latch enable input for pins AD0 to AD5; HIGH latches the internal address
AS I address strobe input for pins AD0 to AD5; HIGH latches the internal address
nAStrb I not address strobe input for pins AD0 to AD5; LOW latches the internal address
NSS I not slave select strobe input for SPI communication
22[3] A0 I address line 0 is the address register bit 0 input
nWait O not wait output:
LOW starts an access cycle
HIGH ends an access cycle
MOSI I SPI master out, slave in
23 A1 I address line 1 is the address register bit 1 input
24[3] A2 I address line 2 is the address register bit 2 input
SCK I SPI serial clock input
25 DVDD P digital power supply
26 AVDD P analog power supply for pins OSCIN, OSCOUT, RX, VMID and AUX
27 AUX O auxiliary output is used to generate analog test signals. The output signal is
selected using the TestAnaSelect register’s TestAnaOutSel[4:0] bits
28 AVSS G analog ground
29 RX I receiver input is used as the card response input. The carrier is load modulated at
13.56 MHz, drawn from the antenna circuit
30 VMID P internal reference voltage pin provides the internal reference voltage as a supply
Remark: It must be connected to a 100 nF block capacitor connected between pin
VMID and ground
31 RSTPD I reset and power-down input:
HIGH: the internal current sinks are switched off, the oscillator is inhibited and
the input pads are disconnected
LOW (negative edge): start internal reset phase
32 OSCOUT O crystal oscillator output for the oscillator’s inverting amplifier
Table 3. Pin description …continued
Pin Symbol Type[1] DescriptionCLRC632 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.7 — 27 February 2014
073937 7 of 127
NXP Semiconductors CLRC632
Standard multi-protocol reader solution
9. Functional description
9.1 Digital interface
9.1.1 Overview of supported microprocessor interfaces
The CLRC632 supports direct interfacing to various 8-bit microprocessors. Alternatively,
the CLRC632 can be connected to a PC’s Enhanced Parallel Port (EPP). Table 4 shows
the parallel interface signals supported by the CLRC632.
9.1.2 Automatic microprocessor interface detection
After a Power-On or Hard reset, the CLRC632 resets parallel microprocessor interface
mode and detects the microprocessor interface type.
The CLRC632 identifies the microprocessor interface using the logic levels on the control
pins. This is performed using a combination of fixed pin connections and the dedicated
Initialization routine (see Section 9.7.4 on page 30).
Table 4. Supported microprocessor and EPP interface signals
Bus control signals Bus Separated address
and data bus
Multiplexed address and data bus
Separated read and
write strobes
control NRD, NWR, NCS NRD, NWR, NCS, ALE
address A0, A1, A2 AD0, AD1, AD2, AD3, AD4, AD5
data D0 to D7 AD0 to AD7
Common read and write
strobe
control R/NW, NDS, NCS R/NW, NDS, NCS, AS
address A0, A1, A2 AD0, AD1, AD2, AD3, AD4, AD5
data D0 to D7 AD0 to AD7
Common read and write
strobe with handshake
(EPP)
control - nWrite, nDStrb, nAStrb, nWait
address - AD0, AD1, AD2, AD3, AD4, AD5
data - AD0 to AD7CLRC632 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.7 — 27 February 2014
073937 8 of 127
NXP Semiconductors CLRC632
Standard multi-protocol reader solution
9.1.3 Connection to different microprocessor types
The connection to various microprocessor types is shown in Table 5.
9.1.3.1 Separate read and write strobe
Refer to Section 13.4.1 on page 102 for timing specification.
Table 5. Connection scheme for detecting the parallel interface type
CLRC632
pins
Parallel interface type and signals
Separated read/write strobe Common read/write strobe
Dedicated
address bus
Multiplexed
address
bus
Dedicated
address bus
Multiplexed
address bus
Multiplexed
address bus with
handshake
ALE HIGH ALE HIGH AS nAStrb
A2 A2 LOW A2 LOW HIGH
A1 A1 HIGH A1 HIGH HIGH
A0 A0 HIGH A0 LOW nWait
NRD NRD NRD NDS NDS nDStrb
NWR NWR NWR R/NW R/NW nWrite
NCS NCS NCS NCS NCS LOW
D7 to D0 D7 to D0 AD7 to AD0 D7 to D0 AD7 to AD0 AD7 to AD0
Fig 3. Connection to microprocessor: separate read and write strobes
001aak607
address bus (A3 to An)
NCS
A0 to A2
address bus (A0 to A2)
D0 to D7
ALE
data bus (D0 to D7)
HIGH
NRD Read strobe (NRD)
NWR Write strobe (NWR)
DEVICE
ADDRESS
DECODER
non-multiplexed address
NCS
AD0 to AD7
ALE
multiplexed address/data (AD0 to AD7)
address latch enable (ALE)
NRD Read strobe (NRD)
NWR Write strobe (NWR)
A2 LOW
A1 HIGH
A0 HIGH
DEVICE
ADDRESS
DECODERCLRC632 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.7 — 27 February 2014
073937 9 of 127
NXP Semiconductors CLRC632
Standard multi-protocol reader solution
9.1.3.2 Common read and write strobe
Refer to Section 13.4.2 on page 103 for timing specification.
9.1.3.3 Common read and write strobe: EPP with handshake
Refer to Section 13.4.3 on page 104 for timing specification.
Remark: In the EPP standard a chip select signal is not defined. To cover this situation,
the status of the NCS pin can be used to inhibit the nDStrb signal. If this inhibitor is not
used, it is mandatory that pin NCS is connected to pin DVSS.
Remark: After each Power-On or Hard reset, the nWait signal on pin A0 is
high-impedance. nWait is defined as the first negative edge applied to the nAStrb pin after
the reset phase. The CLRC632 does not support Read Address Cycle.
9.1.4 Serial Peripheral Interface
The CLRC632 provides compatibility with the 5-wire Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)
standard and acts as a slave during the SPI communication. The SPI clock signal SCK
must be generated by the master. Data communication from the master to the slave uses
the MOSI line. The MISO line sends data from the CLRC632 to the master.
Fig 4. Connection to microprocessor: common read and write strobes
001aak608
address bus (A3 to An)
NCS
A0 to A2
address bus (A0 to A2)
D0 to D7
ALE
data bus (D0 to D7)
HIGH
NRD Data strobe (NDS)
NWR Read/Write (R/NW)
DEVICE
ADDRESS
DECODER
non-multiplexed address
NCS
AD0 to AD7
ALE
multiplexed address/data (AD0 to AD7)
Address strobe (AS)
NRD Data strobe (NDS)
NWR Read/Write (R/NW)
A2 LOW
A1 HIGH
A0 LOW
DEVICE
ADDRESS
DECODER
Fig 5. Connection to microprocessor: EPP common read/write strobes and handshake
001aak609
LOW NCS
AD0 to AD7
ALE
multiplexed address/data (AD0 to AD7)
Address strobe (nAStrb)
NRD Data strobe (nDStrb)
NWR Read/Write (nWrite)
A2 HIGH
A1 HIGH
A0 nWait
DEVICECLRC632 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.7 — 27 February 2014
073937 10 of 127
NXP Semiconductors CLRC632
Standard multi-protocol reader solution
Figure 6 shows the microprocessor connection to the CLRC632 using SPI.
Remark: The SPI implementation for CLRC632 conforms to the SPI standard and
ensures that the CLRC632 can only be addressed as a slave.
9.1.4.1 SPI read data
The structure shown in Table 7 must be used to read data using SPI. It is possible to read
up to n-data bytes. The first byte sent defines both, the mode and the address.
The address byte must meet the following criteria:
• the Most Significant Bit (MSB) of the first byte sets the mode. To read data from the
CLRC632 the MSB is set to logic 1
• bits [6:1] define the address
• the Least Significant Bit (LSB) should be set to logic 0.
As shown in Table 8, all the bits of the last byte sent are set to logic 0.
Table 6. SPI compatibility
CLRC632 pins SPI pins
ALE NSS
A2 SCK
A1 LOW
A0 MOSI
NRD HIGH
NWR HIGH
NCS LOW
D7 to D1 do not connect
D0 MISO
Fig 6. Connection to microprocessor: SPI
001aak610
LOW NCS
D0
ALE
A2 SCK
A1 LOW
MOSI
NSS
A0
MISO
DEVICE
Table 7. SPI read data
Pin Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 ... Byte n Byte n + 1
MOSI address 0 address 1 address 2 ... address n 00
MISO XX data 0 data 1 ... data n 1 data nCLRC632 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.7 — 27 February 2014
073937 11 of 127
NXP Semiconductors CLRC632
Standard multi-protocol reader solution
[1] All reserved bits must be set to logic 0.
9.1.4.2 SPI write data
The structure shown in Table 9 must be used to write data using SPI. It is possible to write
up to n-data bytes. The first byte sent defines both the mode and the address.
The address byte must meet the following criteria:
• the MSB of the first byte sets the mode. To write data to the CLRC632, the MSB is set
to logic 0
• bits [6:1] define the address
• the LSB should be set to logic 0.
SPI write mode writes all data to the address defined in byte 0 enabling effective write
cycles to the FIFO buffer.
[1] All reserved bits must be set to logic 0.
Remark: The data bus pins D7 to D0 must be disconnected.
Refer to Section 13.4.4 on page 106 for the timing specification.
Table 8. SPI read address
Address
(MOSI)
Bit 7
(MSB)
Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
(LSB)
byte 0 1 address address address address address address reserved
byte 1 to byte n reserved address address address address address address reserved
byte n + 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Table 9. SPI write data
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 ... Byte n Byte n + 1
MOSI address data 0 data 1 ... data n 1 data n
MISO XX XX XX ... XX XX
Table 10. SPI write address
Address line
(MOSI)
Bit 7
(MSB)
Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
(LSB)
byte 0 0 address address address address address address reserved
byte 1 to byte
n+1
data data data data data data data dataCLRC632 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.7 — 27 February 2014
073937 12 of 127
NXP Semiconductors CLRC632
Standard multi-protocol reader solution
9.2 Memory organization of the EEPROM
Table 11. EEPROM memory organization diagram
Block Byte
address
Access Memory content Refer to
Position Address
0 0 00h to 0Fh R product
information field
Section 9.2.1 on page 13
1 1 10h to 1Fh R/W StartUp register
initialization file
Section 9.2.2.1 on page 14
2 2 20h to 2Fh R/W
3 3 30h to 3Fh R/W register
initialization file
user data or
second
initialization
Section 9.2.2.3 “Register
initialization file (read/write)”
on page 16
4 4 40h to 4Fh R/W
5 5 50h to 5Fh R/W
6 6 60h to 6Fh R/W
7 7 70h to 7Fh R/W
8 8 80h to 8Fh W keys for Crypto1 Section 9.2.3 on page 18
9 9 90h to 9Fh W
10 A A0h to AFh W
11 B B0h to BFh W
12 C C0h to CFh W
13 D D0h to DFh W
14 E E0h to EFh W
15 F F0h to FFh W
16 10 100h to 10Fh W
17 11 110h to 11Fh W
18 12 120h to 12Fh W
19 13 130h to 13Fh W
20 14 140h to 14Fh W
21 15 150h to 15Fh W
22 16 160h to 16Fh W
23 17 170h to 17Fh W
24 18 180h to 18Fh W
25 19 190h to 19Fh W
26 1A 1A0h to
1AFh
W
27 1B 1B0h to
1BFh
W
28 1C 1C0h to
1CFh
W
29 1D 1D0h to
1DFh
W
30 1E 1E0h to
1EFh
W
31 1F 1F0h to
1FFh
WCLRC632 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.7 — 27 February 2014
073937 13 of 127
NXP Semiconductors CLRC632
Standard multi-protocol reader solution
9.2.1 Product information field (read only)
[1] Byte 4 contains the current version number.
9.2.2 Register initialization files (read/write)
Register initialization from address 10h to address 2Fh is performed automatically during
the initializing phase (see Section 9.7.3 on page 30) using the StartUp register
initialization file.
In addition, the CLRC632 registers can be initialized using values from the register
initialization file when the LoadConfig command is executed (see Section 11.5.1 on
page 95).
Table 12. Product information field
Byte Symbol Access Value Description
15 CRC R - the content of the product information field
is secured using a CRC byte which is
checked during start-up
14 RsMaxP R - maximum source resistance for the
p-channel driver transistor on pins TX1 and
TX2
The source resistance of the p-channel
driver transistors of pin TX1 and TX2 can be
adjusted using the value GsCfgCW[5:0] in
the CwConductance register (see
Section 9.9.3 on page 32). The mean value
of the maximum adjustable source
resistance for pins TX1 and TX2 is stored
as an integer value in in this byte. Typical
values for RsMaxP are between 60 to
140 . This value is denoted as maximum
adjustable source resistance RS(ref)maxP and
is measured by setting the CwConductance
register’s GsCfgCW[5:0] bits to 01h.
13 to 12 Internal R - two bytes for internal trimming parameters
11 to 8 Product Serial Number R - a unique four byte serial number for the
device
7 to 5 reserved R -
4 to 0 Product Type
Identification
R - the CLRC632 is a member of a new family
of highly integrated reader ICs. Each
member of the product family has a unique
product type identification. The value of the
product type identification is shown in
Table 13.
Table 13. Product type identification definition
Definition Product type identification bytes
Byte 0 1 2 3 4[1]
Value 30h FFh FFh 0Fh XXhCLRC632 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.7 — 27 February 2014
073937 14 of 127
NXP Semiconductors CLRC632
Standard multi-protocol reader solution
Remark: The following points apply to initialization:
• the Page register (addressed using 10h, 18h, 20h, 28h) is skipped and not initialized.
• make sure that all PreSetxx registers are not changed.
• make sure that all register bits that are reserved are set to logic 0.
9.2.2.1 StartUp register initialization file (read/write)
The EEPROM memory block address 1 and 2 contents are used to automatically set the
register subaddresses 10h to 2Fh during the initialization phase. The default values stored
in the EEPROM during production are shown in Section 9.2.2.2 “Factory default StartUp
register initialization file”.
The byte assignment is shown in Table 14.
9.2.2.2 Factory default StartUp register initialization file
During the production tests, the StartUp register initialization file is initialized using the
default values shown in Table 15. During each power-up and initialization phase, these
values are written to the CLRC632’s registers.
Table 14. Byte assignment for register initialization at start-up
EEPROM byte address Register address Remark
10h (block 1, byte 0) 10h skipped
11h 11h copied
… ……
2Fh (block 2, byte 15) 2Fh copiedCLRC632 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.7 — 27 February 2014
073937 15 of 127
NXP Semiconductors CLRC632
Standard multi-protocol reader solution
Remark: The CLRC632 default configuration supports the MIFARE and ISO/IEC 14443 A
communication scheme. Memory addresses 3 to 7 may be used for user-specific
initialization files such as I-CODE1, ISO/IEC 15693 or ISO/IEC 14443 B.
Table 15. Shipment content of StartUp configuration file
EEPROM
byte
address
Register
address
Value Symbol Description
10h 10h 00h Page free for user
11h 11h 58h TxControl transmitter pins TX1 and TX2 are switched off, bridge driver
configuration, modulator driven from internal digital circuitry
12h 12h 3Fh CwConductance source resistance of TX1 and TX2 is set to minimum
13h 13h 3Fh ModConductance defines the output conductance
14h 14h 19h CoderControl ISO/IEC 14443 A coding is set
15h 15h 13h ModWidth pulse width for Miller pulse coding is set to standard configuration
16h 16h 3Fh ModWidthSOF pulse width of Start Of Frame (SOF)
17h 17h 3Bh TypeFraming ISO/IEC 14443 A framing is set
18h 18h 00h Page free for user
19h 19h 73h RxControl1 ISO/IEC 14443 A is set and internal amplifier gain is maximum
1Ah 1Ah 08h DecoderControl bit-collisions always evaluate to HIGH in the data bit stream
1Bh 1Bh ADh BitPhase BitPhase[7:0] is set to standard configuration
1Ch 1Ch FFh RxThreshold MinLevel[3:0] and CollLevel[3:0] are set to maximum
1Dh 1Dh 1Eh BPSKDemControl ISO/IEC 14443 A is set
1Eh 1Eh 41h RxControl2 use Q-clock for the receiver, automatic receiver off is switched on,
decoder is driven from internal analog circuitry
1Fh 1Fh 00h ClockQControl automatic Q-clock calibration is switched on
20h 20h 00h Page free for user
21h 21h 06h RxWait frame guard time is set to six bit-clocks
22h 22h 03h ChannelRedundancy channel redundancy is set using ISO/IEC 14443 A
23h 23h 63h CRCPresetLSB CRC preset value is set using ISO/IEC 14443 A
24h 24h 63h CRCPresetMSB CRC preset value is set using ISO/IEC 14443 A
25h 25h 00h TimeSlotPeriod defines the time for the I-CODE1 time slots
26h 26h 00h MFOUTSelect pin MFOUT is set LOW
27h 27h 00h PreSet27 -
28h 28h 00h Page free for user
29h 29h 08h FIFOLevel WaterLevel[5:0] FIFO buffer warning level is set to standard
configuration
2Ah 2Ah 07h TimerClock TPreScaler[4:0] is set to standard configuration, timer unit restart
function is switched off
2Bh 2Bh 06h TimerControl Timer is started at the end of transmission, stopped at the beginning
of reception
2Ch 2Ch 0Ah TimerReload TReloadValue[7:0]: the timer unit preset value is set to standard
configuration
2Dh 2Dh 02h IRQPinConfig pin IRQ is set to high-impedance
2Eh 2Eh 00h PreSet2E -
2Fh 2Fh 00h PreSet2F -CLRC632 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.7 — 27 February 2014
073937 16 of 127
NXP Semiconductors CLRC632
Standard multi-protocol reader solution
9.2.2.3 Register initialization file (read/write)
The EEPROM memory content from block address 3 to 7 can initialize register sub
addresses 10h to 2Fh when the LoadConfig command is executed (see Section 11.5.1 on
page 95). This command requires the EEPROM starting byte address as a two byte
argument for the initialization procedure.
The byte assignment is shown in Table 16.
The register initialization file is large enough to hold values for two initialization sets and
up to one block (16-byte) of user data. The startup configuration could be adapted to the
I-CODE1 StartUp configuration and stored in register block address 3 and 4, providing
additional flexibility.
Remark: The register initialization file can be read/written by users and these bytes can
be used to store other user data.
After each power-up, the default configuration enables the MIFARE and ISO/IEC 14443 A
protocol.
9.2.2.4 Content of I-CODE1 and ISO/IEC 15693 StartUp register values
Table 17 gives an overview of the StartUp values for I-CODE1 and ISO/IEC 15693
communication.
Table 16. Byte assignment for register initialization at startup
EEPROM byte address Register address Remark
EEPROM starting byte address 10h skipped
EEPROM + 1 starting byte address 11h copied
… …
EEPROM + 31 starting byte address 2Fh copiedCLRC632 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.7 — 27 February 2014
073937 17 of 127
NXP Semiconductors CLRC632
Standard multi-protocol reader solution
Table 17. Content of I-CODE1 startup configuration
EEPROM
byte
address
Register
address
Value Symbol Description
30h 10h 00h Page free for user
31h 11h 58h TxControl transmitter pins TX1 and TX2 switched off, bridge driver
configuration, modulator driven from internal digital circuitry
32h 12h 3Fh CwConductance source resistance (RS) of TX1 and TX2 to minimum
33h 13h 05h ModGsCfgh source resistance (RS) of TX1 and TX2 at the time of
modulation, to determine the modulation index
34h 14h 2Ch CoderControl selects the bit coding mode and the framing during
transmission
35h 15h 3Fh ModWidth pulse width for code used (1 out of 256, NRZ or 1 out of 4)
pulse coding is set to standard configuration
36h 16h 3Fh ModWidthSOF pulse width of SOF
37h 17h 00h TypeBFraming -
38h 18h 00h Page free for user
39h 19h 8Bh RxControl1 amplifier gain is maximum
3Ah 1Ah 00h DecoderControl bit-collisions always evaluate to HIGH in the data bit stream
3Bh 1Bh 54h BitPhase BitPhase[7:0] is set to standard configuration
3Ch 1Ch 68h RxThreshold: MinLevel[3:0] and CollLevel[3:0] are set to maximum
3Dh 1Dh 00h BPSKDemControl -
3Eh 1Eh 41h RxControl2 use Q-clock for the receiver, automatic receiver off is
switched on, decoder is driven from internal analog circuitry
3Fh 1Fh 00h ClockQControl automatic Q-clock calibration is switched on
40h 20h 00h Page free for user
41h 21h 08h RxWait frame guard time is set to eight bit-clocks
42h 22h 0Ch ChannelRedundancy channel redundancy is set using I-CODE1
43h 23h FEh CRCPresetLSB CRC preset value is set using I-CODE1
44h 24h FFh CRCPresetMSB CRC preset value is set using I-CODE1
45h 25h 00h TimeSlot Period defines the time for the I-CODE1 time slots
46h 26h 00h MFOUTSelect pin MFOUT is set LOW
47h 27h 00h PreSet27 -
48h 28h 00h Page free for user
49h 29h 3Eh FIFOLevel WaterLevel[5:0] FIFO buffer warning level is set to standard
configuration
4Ah 2Ah 0Bh TimerClock TPreScaler[4:0] is set to standard configuration, timer unit
restart function is switched off
4Bh 2Bh 02h TimerControl Timer is started at the end of transmission, stopped at the
beginning of reception
4Ch 2Ch 00h TimerReload the timer unit preset value is set to standard configuration
4Dh 2Dh 02h IRQPinConfig pin IRQ is set to high-impedance
4Eh 2Eh 00h PreSet2E -
4Fh 2Fh 00h PreSet2F -CLRC632 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.7 — 27 February 2014
073937 18 of 127
NXP Semiconductors CLRC632
Standard multi-protocol reader solution
9.2.3 Crypto1 keys (write only)
MIFARE security requires specific cryptographic keys to encrypt data stream
communication on the contactless interface. These keys are called Crypto1 keys.
9.2.3.1 Key format
Keys stored in the EEPROM are written in a specific format. Each key byte must be split
into lower four bits k0 to k3 (lower nibble) and the higher four bits k4 to k7 (higher nibble).
Each nibble is stored twice in one byte and one of the two nibbles is bit-wise inverted. This
format is a precondition for successful execution of the LoadKeyE2 (see Section 11.7.1 on
page 97) and LoadKey commands (see Section 11.7.2 on page 97).
Using this format, 12 bytes of EEPROM memory are needed to store a 6-byte key. This is
shown in Figure 7.
Example: The value for the key must be written to the EEPROM.
• If the key was: A0h A1h A2h A3h A4h A5h then
• 5Ah F0h 5Ah E1h 5Ah D2h 5Ah C3h 5Ah B4h 5Ah A5h would be written.
Remark: It is possible to load data for other key formats into the EEPROM key storage
location. However, it is not possible to validate card authentication with data which will
cause the LoadKeyE2 command (see Section 11.7.1 on page 97) to fail.
9.2.3.2 Storage of keys in the EEPROM
The CLRC632 reserves 384 bytes of memory in the EEPROM for the Crypto1 keys. No
memory segmentation is used to mirror the 12-byte structure of key storage. Thus, every
byte of the dedicated memory area can be the start of a key.
Example: If the key loading cycle starts at the last byte address of an EEPROM block, (for
example, key byte 0 is stored at 12Fh), the next bytes are stored in the next EEPROM
block, for example, key byte 1 is stored at 130h, byte 2 at 131h up to byte 11 at 13Ah.
Based on the 384 bytes of memory and a single key needing 12 bytes, then up to 32
different keys can be stored in the EEPROM.
Remark: It is not possible to load a key exceeding the EEPROM byte location 1FFh.
Fig 7. Key storage format
001aak640
Master key byte 0 (LSB)
Master key bits
EEPROM byte
address
Example
k7 k6 k5 k4 k7 k6 k5 k4
n
5Ah
k3 k2 k1 k0 k3 k2 k1 k0
n + 1
F0h
1
k7 k6 k5 k4 k7 k6 k5 k4
n + 2
5Ah
k3 k2 k1 k0 k3 k2 k1 k0
n + 3
E1h
5 (MSB)
k7 k6 k5 k4 k7 k6 k5 k4
n + 10
5Ah
k3 k2 k1 k0 k3 k2 k1 k0
n + 11
A5hCLRC632 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.7 — 27 February 2014
073937 19 of 127
NXP Semiconductors CLRC632
Standard multi-protocol reader solution
9.3 FIFO buffer
An 8 64 bit FIFO buffer is used in the CLRC632 to act as a parallel-to-parallel converter.
It buffers both the input and output data streams between the microprocessor and the
internal circuitry of the CLRC632. This makes it possible to manage data streams up to 64
bytes long without needing to take timing constraints into account.
9.3.1 Accessing the FIFO buffer
9.3.1.1 Access rules
The FIFO buffer input and output data bus is connected to the FIFOData register. Writing
to this register stores one byte in the FIFO buffer and increments the FIFO buffer write
pointer. Reading from this register shows the FIFO buffer contents stored at the FIFO
buffer read pointer and increments the FIFO buffer read pointer. The distance between the
write and read pointer can be obtained by reading the FIFOLength register.
When the microprocessor starts a command, the CLRC632 can still access the FIFO
buffer while the command is running. Only one FIFO buffer has been implemented which
is used for input and output. Therefore, the microprocessor must ensure that there are no
inadvertent FIFO buffer accesses. Table 18 gives an overview of FIFO buffer access
during command processing.
9.3.2 Controlling the FIFO buffer
In addition to writing to and reading from the FIFO buffer, the FIFO buffer pointers can be
reset using the FlushFIFO bit. This changes the FIFOLength[6:0] value to zero, bit
FIFOOvfl is cleared and the stored bytes are no longer accessible. This enables the FIFO
buffer to be written with another 64 bytes of data.
Table 18. FIFO buffer access
Active
command
FIFO buffer Remark
p Write p Read
StartUp - -
Idle - -
Transmit yes -
Receive - yes
Transceive yes yes the microprocessor has to know the state of the
command (transmitting or receiving)
WriteE2 yes -
ReadE2 yes yes the microprocessor has to prepare the arguments,
afterwards only reading is allowed
LoadKeyE2 yes -
LoadKey yes -
Authent1 yes -
Authent2 - -
LoadConfig yes -
CalcCRC yes -CLRC632 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.7 — 27 February 2014
073937 20 of 127
NXP Semiconductors CLRC632
Standard multi-protocol reader solution
9.3.3 FIFO buffer status information
The microprocessor can get the following FIFO buffer status data:
• the number of bytes stored in the FIFO buffer: bits FIFOLength[6:0]
• the FIFO buffer full warning: bit HiAlert
• the FIFO buffer empty warning: bit LoAlert
• the FIFO buffer overflow warning: bit FIFOOvfl.
Remark: Setting the FlushFIFO bit clears the FIFOOvfl bit.
The CLRC632 can generate an interrupt signal when:
• bit LoAlertIRq is set to logic 1 and bit LoAlert = logic 1, pin IRQ is activated.
• bit HiAlertIRq is set to logic 1 and bit HiAlert = logic 1, pin IRQ activated.
The HiAlert flag bit is set to logic 1 only when the WaterLevel[5:0] bits or less can be
stored in the FIFO buffer. The trigger is generated by Equation 1:
(1)
The LoAlert flag bit is set to logic 1 when the FIFOLevel register’s WaterLevel[5:0] bits or
less are stored in the FIFO buffer. The trigger is generated by Equation 2:
(2)
9.3.4 FIFO buffer registers and flags
Table 18 shows the related FIFO buffer flags in alphabetic order.
9.4 Interrupt request system
The CLRC632 indicates interrupt events by setting the PrimaryStatus register bit IRq (see
Section 10.5.1.4 “PrimaryStatus register” on page 51) and activating pin IRQ. The signal
on pin IRQ can be used to interrupt the microprocessor using its interrupt handling
capabilities ensuring efficient microprocessor software.
HiAlert 64 FIFOLength = – WaterLevel
LoAlert FIFOLength WaterLevel =
Table 19. Associated FIFO buffer registers and flags
Flags Register name Bit Register address
FIFOLength[6:0] FIFOLength 6 to 0 04h
FIFOOvfl ErrorFlag 4 0Ah
FlushFIFO Control 0 09h
HiAlert PrimaryStatus 1 03h
HiAlertIEn InterruptEn 1 06h
HiAlertIRq InterruptRq 1 07h
LoAlert PrimaryStatus 0 03h
LoAlertIEn InterruptEn 0 06h
LoAlertIRq InterruptRq 0 07h
WaterLevel[5:0] FIFOLevel 5 to 0 29hCLRC632 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.7 — 27 February 2014
073937 21 of 127
NXP Semiconductors CLRC632
Standard multi-protocol reader solution
9.4.1 Interrupt sources overview
Table 20 shows the integrated interrupt flags, related source and setting condition. The
interrupt TimerIRq flag bit indicates an interrupt set by the timer unit. Bit TimerIRq is set
when the timer decrements from one down to zero (bit TAutoRestart disabled) or from one
to the TReLoadValue[7:0] with bit TAutoRestart enabled.
Bit TxIRq indicates interrupts from different sources and is set as follows:
• the transmitter automatically sets the bit TxIRq interrupt when it is active and its state
changes from sending data to transmitting the end of frame pattern
• the CRC coprocessor sets the bit TxIRq after all data from the FIFO buffer has been
processed indicated by bit CRCReady = logic 1
• when EEPROM programming is finished, the bit TxIRq is set and is indicated by bit
E2Ready = logic 1
The RxIRq flag bit indicates an interrupt when the end of the received data is detected.
The IdleIRq flag bit is set when a command finishes and the content of the Command
register changes to Idle.
When the FIFO buffer reaches the HIGH-level indicated by the WaterLevel[5:0] value (see
Section 9.3.3 on page 20) and bit HiAlert = logic 1, then the HiAlertIRq flag bit is set to
logic 1.
When the FIFO buffer reaches the LOW-level indicated by the WaterLevel[5:0] value (see
Section 9.3.3 on page 20) and bit LoAlert = logic 1, then LoAlertIRq flag bit is set to
logic 1.
9.4.2 Interrupt request handling
9.4.2.1 Controlling interrupts and getting their status
The CLRC632 informs the microprocessor about the interrupt request source by setting
the relevant bit in the InterruptRq register. The relevance of each interrupt request bit as
source for an interrupt can be masked by the InterruptEn register interrupt enable bits.
Table 20. Interrupt sources
Interrupt flag Interrupt source Trigger action
TimerIRq timer unit timer counts from 1 to 0
TxIRq transmitter a data stream, transmitted to the card, ends
CRC coprocessor all data from the FIFO buffer has been processed
EEPROM all data from the FIFO buffer has been
programmed
RxIRq receiver a data stream, received from the card, ends
IdleIRq Command register command execution finishes
HiAlertIRq FIFO buffer FIFO buffer is full
LoAlertIRq FIFO buffer FIFO buffer is empty
Table 21. Interrupt control registers
Register Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
InterruptEn SetIEn reserved TimerIEn TxIEn RxIEn IdleIEn HiAlertIEn LoAlertIEn
InterruptRq SetIRq reserved TimerIRq TxIRq RxIRq IdleIRq HiAlertIRq LoAlertIRqCLRC632 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.7 — 27 February 2014
073937 22 of 127
NXP Semiconductors CLRC632
Standard multi-protocol reader solution
If any interrupt request flag is set to logic 1 (showing that an interrupt request is pending)
and the corresponding interrupt enable flag is set, the PrimaryStatus register IRq flag bit is
set to logic 1. Different interrupt sources can activate simultaneously because all interrupt
request bits are OR’ed, coupled to the IRq flag and then forwarded to pin IRQ.
9.4.2.2 Accessing the interrupt registers
The interrupt request bits are automatically set by the CLRC632’s internal state machines.
In addition, the microprocessor can also set or clear the interrupt request bits as required.
A special implementation of the InterruptRq and InterruptEn registers enables changing
an individual bit status without influencing any other bits. If an interrupt register is set to
logic 1, bit SetIxx and the specific bit must both be set to logic 1 at the same time. Vice
versa, if a specific interrupt flag is cleared, zero must be written to the SetIxx and the
interrupt register address must be set to logic 1 at the same time.
If a content bit is not changed during the setting or clearing phase, zero must be written to
the specific bit location.
Example: Writing 3Fh to the InterruptRq register clears all bits. SetIRq is set to logic 0
while all other bits are set to logic 1. Writing 81h to the InterruptRq register sets LoAlertIRq
to logic 1 and leaves all other bits unchanged.
9.4.3 Configuration of pin IRQ
The logic level of the IRq flag bit is visible on pin IRQ. The signal on pin IRQ can also be
controlled using the following IRQPinConfig register bits.
• bit IRQInv: the signal on pin IRQ is equal to the logic level of bit IRq when this bit is set
to logic 0. When set to logic 1, the signal on pin IRQ is inverted with respect to bit IRq.
• bit IRQPushPull: when set to logic 1, pin IRQ has CMOS output characteristics. When
it is set to logic 0, it is an open-drain output which requires an external resistor to
achieve a HIGH-level at pin IRQ.
Remark: During the reset phase (see Section 9.7.2 on page 29) bit IRQInv is set to
logic 1 and bit IRQPushPull is set to logic 0. This results in a high-impedance on pin IRQ.CLRC632 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.7 — 27 February 2014
073937 23 of 127
NXP Semiconductors CLRC632
Standard multi-protocol reader solution
9.4.4 Register overview interrupt request system
Table 22 shows the related interrupt request system flags in alphabetic order.
9.5 Timer unit
The timer derives its clock from the 13.56 MHz on-board chip clock. The microprocessor
can use this timer to manage timing-relevant tasks.
The timer unit may be used in one of the following configurations:
• Timeout counter
• WatchDog counter
• Stopwatch
• Programmable one shot
• Periodical trigger
The timer unit can be used to measure the time interval between two events or to indicate
that a specific timed event occurred. The timer is triggered by events but does not
influence any event (e.g. a time-out during data receiving does not automatically influence
the receiving process). Several timer related flags can be set and these flags can be used
to generate an interrupt.
Table 22. Associated Interrupt request system registers and flags
Flags Register name Bit Register address
HiAlertIEn InterruptEn 1 06h
HiAlertIRq InterruptRq 1 07h
IdleIEn InterruptEn 2 06h
IdleIRq InterruptRq 2 07h
IRq PrimaryStatus 3 03h
IRQInv IRQPinConfig 1 07h
IRQPushPull IRQPinConfig 0 07h
LoAlertIEn InterruptEn 0 06h
LoAlertIRq InterruptRq 0 07h
RxIEn InterruptEn 3 06h
RxIRq InterruptRq 3 07h
SetIEn InterruptEn 7 06h
SetIRq InterruptRq 7 07h
TimerIEn InterruptEn 5 06h
TimerIRq InterruptRq 5 07h
TxIEn InterruptEn 4 06h
TxIRq InterruptRq 4 07hCLRC632 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.7 — 27 February 2014
073937 24 of 127
NXP Semiconductors CLRC632
Standard multi-protocol reader solution
9.5.1 Timer unit implementation
9.5.1.1 Timer unit block diagram
Figure 8 shows the block diagram of the timer module.
The timer unit is designed, so that events when combined with enabling flags start or stop
the counter. For example, setting bit TStartTxBegin = logic 1 enables control of received
data with the timer unit. In addition, the first received bit is indicated by the TxBegin event.
This combination starts the counter at the defined TReloadValue[7:0].
The timer stops automatically when the counter value is equal to zero or if a defined stop
event happens.
9.5.1.2 Controlling the timer unit
The main part of the timer unit is a down-counter. As long as the down-counter value is
not zero, it decrements its value with each timer clock cycle.
If the TAutoRestart flag is enabled, the timer does not decrement down to zero. On
reaching value 1, the timer reloads the next clock function with the TReloadValue[7:0].
Fig 8. Timer module block diagram
001aak611
TxEnd Event
TAutoRestart
TRunning
TStartTxEnd
TStartNow
S
RQ
START COUNTER/
PARALLEL LOAD
STOP COUNTER
TPreScaler[4:0]
TimerValue[7:0]
Counter = 0 ?
to interrupt logic: TimerIRq
PARALLEL OUT
PARALLEL IN
TReloadValue[7:0]
CLOCK
DIVIDER
COUNTER MODULE
(x ≤ x − 1)
TStopNow
TxBegin Event
TStartTxBegin
TStopRxEnd
RxEnd Event
TStopRxBegin
13.56 MHz
to parallel interface
RxBegin Event
QCLRC632 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.7 — 27 February 2014
073937 25 of 127
NXP Semiconductors CLRC632
Standard multi-protocol reader solution
The timer is started immediately by loading a value from the TimerReload register into the
counter module.
This is activated by one of the following events:
• transmission of the first bit to the card (TxBegin event) with bit TStartTxBegin = logic 1
• transmission of the last bit to the card (TxEnd event) with bit TStartTxEnd = logic 1
• bit TStartNow is set to logic 1 by the microprocessor
Remark: Every start event reloads the timer from the TimerReload register. Thus, the
timer unit is re-triggered.
The timer can be configured to stop on one of the following events:
• receipt of the first valid bit from the card (RxBegin event) with bit
TStopRxBegin = logic 1
• receipt of the last bit from the card (RxEnd event) with bit TStopRxEnd = logic 1
• the counter module has decremented down to zero and bit TAutoRestart = logic 0
• bit TStopNow is set to logic 1 by the microprocessor.
Loading a new value, e.g. zero, into the TimerReload register or changing the timer unit
while it is counting will not immediately influence the counter. In both cases, this is
because this register only affects the counter content after a start event.
If the counter is stopped when bit TStopNow is set, no TimerIRq is flagged.
9.5.1.3 Timer unit clock and period
The timer unit clock is derived from the 13.56 MHz on-board chip clock using the
programmable divider. Clock selection is made using the TimerClock register
TPreScaler[4:0] bits based on Equation 3:
(3)
The values for the TPreScaler[4:0] bits are between 0 and 21 which results in a minimum
periodic time (TTimerClock) of between 74 ns and 150 ms.
The time period elapsed since the last start event is calculated using Equation 4:
(4)
This results in a minimum time period (tTimer) of between 74 ns and 40 s.
9.5.1.4 Timer unit status
The SecondaryStatus register’s TRunning bit shows the timer’s status. Configured start
events start the timer at the TReloadValue[7:0] and changes the status flag TRunning to
logic 1. Conversely, configured stop events stop the timer and sets the TRunning status
flag to logic 0. As long as status flag TRunning is set to logic 1, the TimerValue register
changes on the next timer unit clock cycle.
The TimerValue[7:0] bits can be read directly from the TimerValue register.
fTimerClock
1
TTimerClock
--------------------------- 2
TPreScaler
13.56 = = -------------------------- MHz
tTimer
TReLoadValue TimerValue –
fTimerClock
= ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- sCLRC632 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.7 — 27 February 2014
073937 26 of 127
NXP Semiconductors CLRC632
Standard multi-protocol reader solution
9.5.1.5 TimeSlotPeriod
When sending I-CODE1 Quit frames, it is necessary to generate the exact chronological
relationship to the start of the command frame.
If at the end of command execution TimeSlotPeriod > 0, the TimeSlotPeriod starts. If the
FIFO buffer contains data when the end of TimeSlotPeriod is reached, the data is sent. If
the FIFO buffer is empty nothing happens. As long as the TimeSlotPeriod is > 0, the
TimeSlotPeriod counter automatically starts on reaching the end.
This forms the exact time relationship between the start and finish of the command frame
used to generate and send I-CODE1 Quit frames.
When the TimeSlotPeriod > 0, the next Frame starts with exactly the same interval
TimeSlotPeriod/CoderRate delayed after each previous send frame. CoderRate defines
the clock frequency of the encoder. If TimeSlotPeriod[7:0] = 0, the send function is not
automatically triggered.
The content of the TimeSlotPeriod register can be changed while it is running but the
change is only effective after the next TimeSlotPeriod restart.
Example:
• CoderRate = 0 0.5 (~52.97 kHz)
• The interval should be 8.458 ms for I-CODE1 standard mode
Remark: The TimeSlotPeriodMSB bit is contained in the MFOUTSelect register.
Remark: Set bit TxCRCEn to logic 0 before the Quit frame is sent. If TxCRCEn is not set
to logic 0, the Quit frame is sent with a calculated CRC value. Use the CRC8 algorithm to
calculate the Quit value.
Fig 9. TimeSlotPeriod
Table 23. TimeSlotPeriod
I-CODE1 mode TimeSlotPeriod for TSP1 TimeSlotPeriod for TSP2
standard mode BFh 1BFh
fast mode 5Fh 67h
TimeSlotPeriod CoderRate Interval = = 52.97 kHz 8.458 ms – 1 447 1BFh = =
001aak612
COMMAND
RESPONSE1 RESPONSE2
TSP1 TSP2
QUIT1 QUIT2CLRC632 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.7 — 27 February 2014
073937 27 of 127
NXP Semiconductors CLRC632
Standard multi-protocol reader solution
9.5.2 Using the timer unit functions
9.5.2.1 Time-out and WatchDog counters
After starting the timer using TReloadValue[7:0], the timer unit decrements the TimerValue
register beginning with a given start event. If a given stop event occurs, such as a bit
being received from the card, the timer unit stops without generating an interrupt.
If a stop event does not occur, such as the card not answering within the expected time,
the timer unit decrements down to zero and generates a timer interrupt request. This
signals to the microprocessor the expected event has not occurred within the given time
(tTimer).
9.5.2.2 Stopwatch
The time (tTimer) between a start and stop event is measured by the microprocessor using
the timer unit. Setting the TReloadValue register triggers the timer which in turn, starts to
decrement. If the defined stop event occurs, the timer stops. The time between start and
stop is calculated by the microprocessor using Equation 5, when the timer does not
decrement down to zero.
(5)
9.5.2.3 Programmable one shot timer and periodic trigger
Programmable one shot timer: The microprocessor starts the timer unit and waits for
the timer interrupt. The interrupt occurs after the time specified by tTimer.
Periodic trigger: If the microprocessor sets the TAutoRestart bit, it generates an interrupt
request after every tTimer cycle.
9.5.3 Timer unit registers
Table 24 shows the related flags of the timer unit in alphabetical order.
t TReLoadvalue – TimerValue tTimer =
Table 24. Associated timer unit registers and flags
Flags Register name Bit Register address
TAutoRestart TimerClock 5 2Ah
TimerValue[7:0] TimerValue 7 to 0 0Ch
TReloadValue[7:0] TimerReload 7 to 0 2Ch
TPreScaler[4:0] TimerClock 4 to 0 2Ah
TRunning SecondaryStatus 7 05h
TStartNow Control 1 09h
TStartTxBegin TimerControl 0 2Bh
TStartTxEnd TimerControl 1 2Bh
TStopNow Control 2 09h
TStopRxBegin TimerControl 2 2Bh
TStopRxEnd TimerControl 3 2BhCLRC632 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.7 — 27 February 2014
073937 28 of 127
NXP Semiconductors CLRC632
Standard multi-protocol reader solution
9.6 Power reduction modes
9.6.1 Hard power-down
Hard power-down is enabled when pin RSTPD is HIGH. This turns off all internal current
sinks including the oscillator. All digital input buffers are separated from the input pads and
defined internally (except pin RSTPD itself). The output pins are frozen at a given value.
The status of all pins during a hard power-down is shown in Table 25.
9.6.2 Soft power-down mode
Soft power-down mode is entered immediately using the Control register bit PowerDown.
All internal current sinks, including the oscillator buffer, are switched off. The digital input
buffers are not separated from the input pads and keep their functionality. In addition, the
digital output pins do not change their state.
After resetting the Control register bit PowerDown, the bit indicating Soft power-down
mode is only cleared after 512 clock cycles. Resetting it does not immediately clear it. The
PowerDown bit is automatically cleared when the Soft power-down mode is exited.
Remark: When the internal oscillator is used, time (tosc) is required for the oscillator to
become stable. This is because the internal oscillator is supplied by VDDA and any clock
cycles will not be detected by the internal logic until VDDA is stable.
Table 25. Signal on pins during Hard power-down
Symbol Pin Type Description
OSCIN 1 I not separated from input, pulled to AVSS
IRQ 2 O high-impedance
MFIN 3 I separated from input
MFOUT 4 O LOW
TX1 5 O HIGH, if bit TX1RFEn = logic 1
LOW, if bit TX1RFEn = logic 0
TX2 7 O HIGH, only if bit TX2RFEn = logic 1 and bit
TX2Inv = logic 0
otherwise LOW
NCS 9 I separated from input
NWR 10 I separated from input
NRD 11 I separated from input
D0 to D7 13 to 20 I/O separated from input
ALE 21 I separated from input
A0 22 I/O separated from input
A1 23 I separated from input
A2 24 I separated from input
AUX 27 O high-impedance
RX 29 I not changed
VMID 30 A pulled to VDDA
RSTPD 31 I not changed
OSCOUT 32 O HIGHCLRC632 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.7 — 27 February 2014
073937 29 of 127
NXP Semiconductors CLRC632
Standard multi-protocol reader solution
9.6.3 Standby mode
The Standby mode is immediately entered when the Control register StandBy bit is set. All
internal current sinks, including the internal digital clock buffer are switched off. However,
the oscillator buffer is not switched off.
The digital input buffers are not separated by the input pads, keeping their functionality
and the digital output pins do not change their state. In addition, the oscillator does not
need time to wake-up.
After resetting the Control register StandBy bit, it takes four clock cycles on pin OSCIN for
Standby mode to exit. Resetting bit StandBy does not immediately clear it. It is
automatically cleared when the Standby mode is exited.
9.6.4 Automatic receiver power-down
It is a power saving feature to switch off the receiver circuit when it is not needed. Setting
bit RxAutoPD = logic 1, automatically powers down the receiver when it is not in use.
Setting bit RxAutoPD = logic 0, keeps the receiver continuously powered up.
9.7 StartUp phase
The events executed during the StartUp phase are shown in Figure 10.
9.7.1 Hard power-down phase
The hard power-down phase is active during the following cases:
• a Power-On Reset (POR) caused by power-up on pins DVDD or AVDD activated
when VDDD or VDDA is below the digital reset threshold.
• a HIGH-level on pin RSTPD which is active while pin RSTPD is HIGH. The HIGH level
period on pin RSTPD must be at least 100 s (tPD 100 s). Shorter phases will not
necessarily result in the reset phase (treset). The rising or falling edge slew rate on pin
RSTPD is not critical because pin RSTPD is a Schmitt trigger input.
9.7.2 Reset phase
The reset phase automatically follows the Hard power-down. Once the oscillator is
running stably, the reset phase takes 512 clock cycles. During the reset phase, some
register bits are preset by hardware. The respective reset values are given in the
description of each register (see Section 10.5 on page 50).
Remark: When the internal oscillator is used, time (tosc) is required for the oscillator to
become stable. This is because the internal oscillator is supplied by VDDA and any clock
cycles will not be detected by the internal logic until VDDA is stable.
Fig 10. The StartUp procedure
001aak613
StartUp phase
states
tRSTPD treset tinit
Hard powerdown
phase Reset phase Initialising
phase readyCLRC632 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.7 — 27 February 2014
073937 30 of 127
NXP Semiconductors CLRC632
Standard multi-protocol reader solution
9.7.3 Initialization phase
The initialization phase automatically follows the reset phase and takes 128 clock cycles.
During the initializing phase the content of the EEPROM blocks 1 and 2 is copied into the
register subaddresses 10h to 2Fh (see Section 9.2.2 on page 13).
Remark: During the production test, the CLRC632 is initialized with default configuration
values. This reduces the microprocessor’s configuration time to a minimum.
9.7.4 Initializing the parallel interface type
A different initialization sequence is used for each microprocessor. This enables detection
of the correct microprocessor interface type and synchronization of the microprocessor’s
and the CLRC632’s start-up. See Section 9.1.3 on page 8 for detailed information on the
different connections for each microprocessor interface type.
During StartUp phase, the command value is set to 3Fh once the oscillator attains clock
frequency stability at an amplitude of > 90 % of the nominal 13.56 MHz clock frequency. At
the end of the initialization phase, the CLRC632 automatically switches to idle and the
command value changes to 00h.
To ensure correct detection of the microprocessor interface, the following sequence is
executed:
• the Command register is read until the 6-bit register value is 00h. On reading the 00h
value, the internal initialization phase is complete and the CLRC632 is ready to be
controlled
• write 80h to the Page register to initialize the microprocessor interface
• read the Command register. If it returns a value of 00h, the microprocessor interface
was successfully initialized
• write 00h to the Page registers to activate linear addressing mode.
9.8 Oscillator circuit
The clock applied to the CLRC632 acts as a time basis for the synchronous system
encoder and decoder. The stability of the clock frequency is an important factor for correct
operation. To obtain highest performance, clock jitter must be as small as possible. This is
best achieved by using the internal oscillator buffer with the recommended circuitry.
Fig 11. Quartz clock connection
001aak614
13.56 MHz
15 pF 15 pF
OSCOUT OSCIN
DEVICECLRC632 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.7 — 27 February 2014
073937 31 of 127
NXP Semiconductors CLRC632
Standard multi-protocol reader solution
If an external clock source is used, the clock signal must be applied to pin OSCIN. In this
case, be very careful in optimizing clock duty cycle and clock jitter. Ensure the clock
quality has been verified. It must meet the specifications described in Section 13.4.5 on
page 106.
Remark: We do not recommend using an external clock source.
9.9 Transmitter pins TX1 and TX2
The signal on pins TX1 and TX2 is the 13.56 MHz energy carrier modulated by an
envelope signal. It can be used to drive an antenna directly, using minimal passive
components for matching and filtering (see Section 15.1 on page 107). To enable this, the
output circuitry is designed with a very low-impedance source resistance. The TxControl
register is used to control the TX1 and TX2 signals.
9.9.1 Configuring pins TX1 and TX2
TX1 pin configurations are described in Table 26.
TX2 pin configurations are described in Table 27.
Table 26. Pin TX1 configurations
TxControl register configuration Envelope TX1 signal
TX1RFEn FORCE100ASK
0 X X LOW (GND)
1 0 0 13.56 MHz carrier frequency modulated
1 0 1 13.56 MHz carrier frequency
1 1 0 LOW
1 1 1 13.56 MHz energy carrierCLRC632 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.7 — 27 February 2014
073937 32 of 127
NXP Semiconductors CLRC632
Standard multi-protocol reader solution
9.9.2 Antenna operating distance versus power consumption
Using different antenna matching circuits (by varying the supply voltage on the antenna
driver supply pin TVDD), it is possible to find the trade-off between maximum effective
operating distance and power consumption. Different antenna matching circuits are
described in the Application note “MIFARE Design of MFRC500 Matching Circuit and
Antennas”.
9.9.3 Antenna driver output source resistance
The output source conductance of pins TX1 and TX2 can be adjusted between 1 and
100 using the CwConductance register GsCfgCW[5:0] bits.
The output source conductance of pins TX1 and TX2 during the modulation phase can be
adjusted between 1 and 100 using the ModConductance register GsCfgMod[5:0] bits.
The values are relative to the reference resistance (RS(ref)) which is measured during the
production test and stored in the CLRC632 EEPROM. It can be read from the product
information field (see Section 9.2.1 on page 13). The electrical specification can be found
in Section 13.3.3 on page 101.
Table 27. Pin TX2 configurations
TxControl register configuration Envelope TX2 signal
TX2RFEn FORCE100ASK TX2CW TX2Inv
0 X X X X LOW
1 0 0 0 0 13.56 MHz carrier frequency
modulated
1 0 0 0 1 13.56 MHz carrier frequency
1 0 0 1 0 13.56 MHz carrier frequency
modulated, 180 phase-shift
relative to TX1
1 0 0 1 1 13.56 MHz carrier frequency,
180 phase-shift relative to TX1
1 0 1 0 X 13.56 MHz carrier frequency
1 0 1 1 X 13.56 MHz carrier frequency,
180 phase-shift relative to TX1
1 1 0 0 0 LOW
1 1 0 0 1 13.56 MHz carrier frequency
1 1 0 1 0 HIGH
1 1 0 1 1 13.56 MHz carrier frequency,
180 phase-shift relative to TX1
1 1 1 0 X 13.56 MHz carrier frequency
1 1 1 1 X 13.56 MHz carrier frequency,
180 phase-shift relative to TX1CLRC632 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.7 — 27 February 2014
073937 33 of 127
NXP Semiconductors CLRC632
Standard multi-protocol reader solution
9.9.3.1 Source resistance table
Table 28. TX1 and TX2 source resistance of n-channel driver transistor against GsCfgCW or GsCfgMod
MANT = Mantissa; EXP= Exponent.
GsCfgCW,
GsCfgMod
(decimal)
EXPGsCfgCW,
EXPGsCfgMod
(decimal)
MANTGsCfgCW,
MANTGsCfgMod
(decimal)
RS(ref)
()
GsCfgCW,
GsCfgMod
(decimal)
EXPGsCfgCW,
EXPGsCfgMod
(decimal)
MANTGsCfgCW,
MANTGsCfgMod
(decimal)
RS(ref)
()
0 0 0 - 24 1 8 0.0652
16 1 0 - 25 1 9 0.0580
32 2 0 - 37 2 5 0.0541
48 3 0 - 26 1 10 0.0522
1 0 1 1.0000 27 1 11 0.0474
17 1 1 0.5217 51 3 3 0.0467
2 0 2 0.5000 38 2 6 0.0450
3 0 3 0.3333 28 1 12 0.0435
33 2 1 0.2703 29 1 13 0.0401
18 1 2 0.2609 39 2 7 0.0386
4 0 4 0.2500 30 1 14 0.0373
5 0 5 0.2000 52 3 4 0.0350
19 1 3 0.1739 31 1 15 0.0348
6 0 6 0.1667 40 2 8 0.0338
7 0 7 0.1429 41 2 9 0.0300
49 3 1 0.1402 53 3 5 0.0280
34 2 2 0.1351 42 2 10 0.0270
20 1 4 0.1304 43 2 11 0.0246
8 0 8 0.1250 54 3 6 0.0234
9 0 9 0.1111 44 2 12 0.0225
21 1 5 0.1043 45 2 13 0.0208
10 0 10 0.1000 55 3 7 0.0200
11 0 11 0.0909 46 2 14 0.0193
35 2 3 0.0901 47 2 15 0.0180
22 1 6 0.0870 56 3 8 0.0175
12 0 12 0.0833 57 3 9 0.0156
13 0 13 0.0769 58 3 10 0.0140
23 1 7 0.0745 59 3 11 0.0127
14 0 14 0.0714 60 3 12 0.0117
50 3 2 0.0701 61 3 13 0.0108
36 2 4 0.0676 62 3 14 0.0100
15 0 15 0.0667 63 3 15 0.0093CLRC632 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.7 — 27 February 2014
073937 34 of 127
NXP Semiconductors CLRC632
Standard multi-protocol reader solution
9.9.3.2 Calculating the relative source resistance
The reference source resistance RS(ref) can be calculated using Equation 6.
(6)
The reference source resistance (RS(ref)) during the modulation phase can be calculated
using ModConductance register’s GsCfgMod[5:0].
9.9.3.3 Calculating the effective source resistance
Wiring resistance (RS(wire)): Wiring and bonding add a constant offset to the driver
resistance that is relevant when pins TX1 and TX2 are switched to low-impedance. The
additional resistance for pin TX1 (RS(wire)TX1) can be set approximately as shown in
Equation 7.
(7)
Effective resistance (RSx): The source resistances of the driver transistors (RsMaxP
byte) read from the Product Information Field (see Section 9.2.1 on page 13) are
measured during the production test with CwConductance register’s
GsCfgCW[5:0] = 01h.
To calculate the driver resistance for a specific value set in GsCfgMod[5:0], use
Equation 8.
(8)
9.9.4 Pulse width
The envelope carries the data signal information that is transmitted to the card. It is an
encoded data signal based on the Miller code. In addition, each pause of the Miller
encoded signal is again encoded as a pulse of a fixed width. The width of the pulse is
adjusted using the ModWidth register. The pulse width (tw) is calculated using Equation 9
where the frequency constant (fclk) = 13.56 MHz.
(9)
9.10 Receiver circuitry
The CLRC632 uses an integrated quadrature demodulation circuit enabling it to detect an
ISO/IEC 14443 A or ISO/IEC 14443 B compliant subcarrier signal on pin RX.
• ISO/IEC 14443 A subcarrier signal: defined as a Manchester coded ASK modulated
signal
• ISO/IEC 14443 B subcarrier signal: defined as an NRZ-L coded BPSK modulated
ISO/IEC 14443 B subcarrier signal
RS ref
1
MANTGsCfgCW
77
40
----- EXPGsCfgCW
= --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
RS wire TX1 500 m
RSx RS ref maxP RS wire TX1 – RS rel RS wire TX1 = +
tw 2ModWidth 1 +
fc
= -------------------------------------CLRC632 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.7 — 27 February 2014
073937 35 of 127
NXP Semiconductors CLRC632
Standard multi-protocol reader solution
The quadrature demodulator uses two different clocks (Q-clock and I-clock) with a
phase-shift of 90 between them. Both resulting subcarrier signals are amplified, filtered
and forwarded to the correlation circuitry. The correlation results are evaluated, digitized
and then passed to the digital circuitry. Various adjustments can be made to obtain
optimum performance for all processing units.
9.10.1 Receiver circuit block diagram
Figure 12 shows the block diagram of the receiver circuit. The receiving process can be
broken down in to several steps. Quadrature demodulation of the 13.56 MHz carrier signal
is performed. To achieve the optimum performance, automatic Q-clock calibration is
recommended (see Section 9.10.2.1 on page 35).
The demodulated signal is amplified by an adjustable amplifier. A correlation circuit
calculates the degree of similarity between the expected and the received signal. The
BitPhase register enables correlation interval position alignment with the received signal’s
bit grid. In the evaluation and digitizer circuitry, the valid bits are detected and the digital
results are sent to the FIFO buffer. Several tuning steps are possible for this circuit.
The signal can be observed on its way through the receiver as shown in Figure 12. One
signal at a time can be routed to pin AUX using the TestAnaSelect register as described in
Section 15.2.2 on page 112.
9.10.2 Receiver operation
In general, the default settings programmed in the StartUp initialization file are suitable for
use with the CLRC632 to MIFARE card data communication. However, in some
environments specific user settings will achieve better performance.
9.10.2.1 Automatic Q-clock calibration
The quadrature demodulation concept of the receiver generates a phase signal (I-clock)
and a 90 phase-shifted quadrature signal (Q-clock). To achieve the optimum
demodulator performance, the Q-clock and the I-clock must be phase-shifted by 90. After
the reset phase, a calibration procedure is automatically performed.
Fig 12. Receiver circuit block diagram
001aak615
ClkQDelay[4:0]
ClkQCalib
ClkQ180Deg
BitPhase[7:0]
CORRELATION
CIRCUITRY
EVALUATION
AND
DIGITIZER
CIRCUITRY
MinLevel[3:0]
CollLevel[3:0]
RxWait[7:0]
RcvClkSell
s_valid
s_data
s_coll
s_clock
Gain[1:0]
to
TestAnaOutSel
clock
I TO Q
CONVERSION
I-clock Q-clock
13.56 MHz
DEMODULATOR RX
VCorrDI
VCorrNI
VCorrDQ
VCorrNQ
VEvalR
VEvalL
VRxFollQ
VRxFollI VRxAmpI
VRxAmpQCLRC632 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.7 — 27 February 2014
073937 36 of 127
NXP Semiconductors CLRC632
Standard multi-protocol reader solution
Automatic calibration can be set-up to execute at the end of each Transceive command if
bit ClkQCalib = logic 0. Setting bit ClkQCalib = logic 1 disables all automatic calibrations
except after the reset sequence. Automatic calibration can also be triggered by the
software when bit ClkQCalib has a logic 0 to logic 1 transition.
Remark: The duration of the automatic Q-clock calibration is 65 oscillator periods or
approximately 4.8 s.
The ClockQControl register’s ClkQDelay[4:0] value is proportional to the phase-shift
between the Q-clock and the I-clock. The ClkQ180Deg status flag bit is set when the
phase-shift between the Q-clock and the I-clock is greater than 180.
Remark:
• The StartUp configuration file enables automatic Q-clock calibration after a reset
• If bit ClkQCalib = logic 1, automatic calibration is not performed. Leaving this bit set to
logic 1 can be used to permanently disable automatic calibration.
• It is possible to write data to the ClkQDelay[4:0] bits using the microprocessor. The
aim could be to disable automatic calibration and set the delay using the software.
Configuring the delay value using the software requires bit ClkQCalib to have been
previously set to logic 1 and a time interval of at least 4.8 s has elapsed. Each delay
value must be written with bit ClkQCalib set to logic 1. If bit ClkQCalib is logic 0, the
configured delay value is overwritten by the next automatic calibration interval.
9.10.2.2 Amplifier
The demodulated signal must be amplified by the variable amplifier to achieve the best
performance. The gain of the amplifiers can be adjusted using the RxControl1 register
Gain[1:0] bits; see Table 29.
Fig 13. Automatic Q-clock calibration
001aak616
calibration impulse
from reset sequence a rising edge initiates
Q-clock calibration
ClkQCalib bit
calibration impulse
from end of
Transceive command
Table 29. Gain factors for the internal amplifier
See Table 86 “RxControl1 register bit descriptions” on page 64 for additional information.
Register setting Gain factor [dB]
(simulation results)
00 20
01 24
10 31
11 35CLRC632 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.7 — 27 February 2014
073937 37 of 127
NXP Semiconductors CLRC632
Standard multi-protocol reader solution
9.10.2.3 Correlation circuitry
The correlation circuitry calculates the degree of matching between the received and an
expected signal. The output is a measure of the amplitude of the expected signal in the
received signal. This is done for both, the Q and I-channels. The correlator provides two
outputs for each of the two input channels, resulting in a total of four output signals.
The correlation circuitry needs the phase information for the incoming card signal for
optimum performance. This information is defined for the microprocessor using the
BitPhase register. This value defines the phase relationship between the transmitter and
receiver clock in multiples of the BitPhase time (tBitPhase) = 1 / 13.56 MHz.
9.10.2.4 Evaluation and digitizer circuitry
The correlation results are evaluated for each bit-half of the Manchester coded signal. The
evaluation and digitizer circuit decides from the signal strengths of both bit-halves, if the
current bit is valid
• If the bit is valid, its value is identified
• If the bit is not valid, it is checked to identify if it contains a bit-collision
Select the following levels for optimal using RxThreshold register bits:
• MinLevel[3:0]: defines the minimum signal strength of the stronger bit-halve’s signal
which is considered valid.
• CollLevel[3:0]: defines the minimum signal strength relative to the amplitude of the
stronger half-bit that has to be exceeded by the weaker half-bit of the Manchester
coded signal to generate a bit-collision. If the signal’s strength is below this value,
logic 1 and logic 0 can be determined unequivocally.
After data transmission, the card is not allowed to send its response before a preset time
period which is called the frame guard time in the ISO/IEC 14443 standard. The length of
this time period is set using the RxWait register’s RxWait[7:0] bits. The RxWait register
defines when the receiver is switched on after data transmission to the card in multiples of
one bit duration.
If bit RcvClkSelI is set to logic 1, the I-clock is used to clock the correlator and evaluation
circuits. If bit RcvClkSelI is set to logic 0, the Q-clock is used.
Remark: It is recommended to use the Q-clock.
9.11 Serial signal switch
The CLRC632 comprises two main blocks:
• digital circuitry: comprising the state machines, encoder and decoder logic etc.
• analog circuitry: comprising the modulator, antenna drivers, receiver and
amplification circuitry
The interface between these two blocks can be configured so that the interface signals
are routed to pins MFIN and MFOUT. This makes it possible to connect the analog part of
one CLRC632 to the digital part of another device.
The serial signal switch can be used to measure MIFARE and ISO/IEC 14443 A as well as
related I-CODE1 and ISO/IEC 15693 signals.CLRC632 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.7 — 27 February 2014
073937 38 of 127
NXP Semiconductors CLRC632
Standard multi-protocol reader solution
Remark: Pin MFIN can only be accessed at 106 kBd based on ISO/IEC 14443 A. The
Manchester signal and the Manchester signal with subcarrier can only be accessed on pin
MFOUT at 106 kBd based on ISO/IEC 14443 A.
9.11.1 Serial signal switch block diagram
Figure 14 shows the serial signal switches. Three different switches are implemented in
the serial signal switch enabling the CLRC632 to be used in different configurations.
The serial signal switch can also be used to check the transmitted and received data
during the design-in phase or for test purposes. Section 15.2.1 on page 110 describes the
analog test signals and measurements at the serial signal switch.
Remark: The SLR400 uses pin name SIGOUT for pin MFOUT. The CLRC632
functionality includes the test modes for the SLRC400 using pin MFOUT.
Section 9.11.2, Section 9.11.2.1 and Section 9.11.2.2 describe the relevant registers and
settings used to configure and control the serial signal switch.
9.11.2 Serial signal switch registers
The RxControl2 register DecoderSource[1:0] bits define the input signal for the internal
Manchester decoder and are described in Table 30.
Fig 14. Serial signal switch block diagram
3
MFIN MFOUT 001aak617
MODULATOR DRIVER
(part of)
analog circuitry
SUBCARRIER
DEMODULATOR
TX1
TX2
RX CARRIER
DEMODULATOR
2
MILLER CODER
1 OUT OF 256
NRZ OR
1 OUT OF 4
MANCHESTER
DECODER
SERIAL SIGNAL SWITCH
(part of)
serial data processing
Decoder
Source[1:0]
2
Modulator
Source[1:0]
SUBCARRIER
DEMODULATOR
serial data out
0 0
1 internal
2 Manchester with subcarrier
3
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
1
envelope
MFIN
0
1
2
3
Manchester
Manchester out
serial data in
7
0
0 1
1
envelope
transmit NRZ
Manchester with subcarrier
Manchester
reserved
reserved
MFOUTSelect[2:0]
digital test signal
signal to MFOUTCLRC632 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.7 — 27 February 2014
073937 39 of 127
NXP Semiconductors CLRC632
Standard multi-protocol reader solution
The TxControl register ModulatorSource[1:0] bits define the signal used to modulate the
transmitted 13.56 MHz energy carrier. The modulated signal drives pins TX1 and TX2.
The MFOUTSelect register MFOUTSelect[2:0] bits select the output signal which is to be
routed to pin MFOUT.
To use the MFOUTSelect[2:0] bits, the TestDigiSelect register SignalToMFOUT bit must
be logic 0.
9.11.2.1 Active antenna concept
The CLRC632 analog and digital circuitry is accessed using pins MFIN and MFOUT.
Table 33 lists the required settings.
Table 30. DecoderSource[1:0] values
See Table 96 on page 67 for additional information.
Number DecoderSource
[1:0]
Input signal to decoder
0 00 constant 0
1 01 output of the analog part. This is the default configuration
2 10 direct connection to pin MFIN; expects an 847.5 kHz subcarrier
signal modulated by a Manchester encoded signal
3 11 direct connection to pin MFIN; expects a Manchester encoded
signal
Table 31. ModulatorSource[1:0] values
See Table 96 on page 67 for additional information.
Number ModulatorSource
[1:0]
Input signal to modulator
0 00 constant 0 (energy carrier off on pins TX1 and TX2)
1 01 constant 1 (continuous energy carrier on pins TX1 and TX2)
2 10 modulation signal (envelope) from the internal encoder. This is the
default configuration.
3 11 direct connection to MFIN; expects a Miller pulse coded signal
Table 32. MFOUTSelect[2:0] values
See Table 110 on page 70 for additional information.
Number MFOUTSelect
[2:0]
Signal routed to pin MFOUT
0 000 constant LOW
1 001 constant HIGH
2 010 modulation signal (envelope) from the internal encoder
3 011 serial data stream to be transmitted; the same as for
MFOUTSelect[2:0] = 001 but not encoded by the selected pulse
encoder
4 100 output signal of the receiver circuit; card modulation signal
regenerated and delayed
5 101 output signal of the subcarrier demodulator; Manchester coded card
signal
6 110 reserved
7 111 reservedCLRC632 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.7 — 27 February 2014
073937 40 of 127
NXP Semiconductors CLRC632
Standard multi-protocol reader solution
[1] The number column refers to the value in the number column of Table 30, Table 31 and Table 32.
Two CLRC632 devices configured as described in Table 33 can be connected to each
other using pins MFOUT and MFIN.
Remark: The active antenna concept can only be used at 106 kBd based on
ISO/IEC 14443 A.
9.11.2.2 Driving both RF parts
It is possible to connect both passive and active antennas to a single IC. The passive
antenna pins TX1, TX2 and RX are connected using the appropriate filter and matching
circuit. At the same time an active antenna is connected to pins MFOUT and MFIN. In this
configuration, two RF parts can be driven, one after another, by one microprocessor.
9.12 MIFARE higher baud rates
The MIFARE system is specified with a fixed baud rate of 106 kBd for communication on
the RF interface. The current version of ISO/IEC 14443 A also defines 106 kBd for the
initial phase of a communication between Proximity Integrated Circuit Cards (PICC) and
Proximity Coupling Devices (PCD).
To cover requirements of large data transmissions and to speed up terminal to card
communication, the CLRC632 supports communication at MIFARE higher baud rates in
combination with a microcontroller IC such as the MIFARE ProX.
The MIFARE higher baud rates concept is described in the application note: MIFARE
Implementation of Higher Baud rates Ref. 5. This application covers the integration of the
MIFARE higher baud rates communication concept in current applications.
Table 33. Register settings to enable use of the analog circuitry
Register Number[1] Signal CLRC632 pin
Analog circuitry settings
ModulatorSource 3 Miller pulse encoded MFIN
MFOUTSelect 4 Manchester encoded with subcarrier MFOUT
DecoderSource X - -
Digital circuitry settings
ModulatorSource X - -
MFOUTSelect 2 Miller pulse encoded MFOUT
DecoderSource 2 Manchester encoded with subcarrier MFIN
Table 34. MIFARE higher baud rates
Communication direction Baud rates (kBd)
CLRC632 based PCD microcontroller PICC supporting higher baud rates 106, 212, 424
Microcontroller PICC supporting higher baud rates CLRC632 based PCD 106, 212, 424CLRC632 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.7 — 27 February 2014
073937 41 of 127
NXP Semiconductors CLRC632
Standard multi-protocol reader solution
9.13 ISO/IEC 14443 B communication scheme
The international standard ISO/IEC 14443 covers two communication schemes; ISO/IEC
14443 A and ISO/IEC 14443 B. The CLRC632 reader IC fully supports both ISO/IEC
14443 variants.
Table 35 describes the registers and flags covered by the ISO/IEC 14443 B
communication protocol.
As reference documentation, the international standard ISO/IEC 14443 Identification
cards - Contactless integrated circuit(s) cards - Proximity cards, part 1-4 (Ref. 4) can be
used.
Remark: NXP Semiconductors does not offer a basic function library to design-in the
ISO/IEC 14443 B protocol.
Table 35. ISO/IEC 14443 B registers and flags
Flag Register Bit Register address
CharSpacing[2:0] TypeBFraming 4 to 2 17h
CoderRate[2:0] CoderControl 5 to 3 14h
EOFWidth TypeBFraming 5 17h
FilterAmpDet BPSKDemControl 4 1Dh
Force100ASK TxControl 4 11h
GsCfgCW[5:0] CwConductance 5 to 0 12h
GsCfgMod[5:0] ModConductance 5 to 0 13h
MinLevel[3:0] RxThreshold 7 to 4 1Ch
NoTxEOF TypeBFraming 6 17h
NoTxSOF TypeBFraming 7 17h
NoRxEGT BPSKDemControl 6 1Dh
NoRxEOF BPSKDemControl 5 1Dh
NoRxSOF BPSKDemControl 7 1Dh
RxCoding DecoderControl 0 1Ah
RxFraming[1:0] DecoderControl 4 to 3 1Ah
SOFWidth[1:0] TypeBFraming 1 to 0 17h
SubCPulses[2:0] RxControl1 7 to 5 19h
TauB[1:0] BPSKDemControl 1 to 0 1Dh
TauD[1:0] BPSKDemControl 3 to 2 1Dh
TxCoding[2:0] CoderControl 2 to 0 14hCLRC632 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.7 — 27 February 2014
073937 42 of 127
NXP Semiconductors CLRC632
Standard multi-protocol reader solution
9.14 MIFARE authentication and Crypto1
The security algorithm used in the MIFARE products is called Crypto1. It is based on a
proprietary stream cipher with a 48-bit key length. To access data on MIFARE cards,
knowledge of the key format is needed. The correct key must be available in the
CLRC632 to enable successful card authentication and access to the card’s data stored in
the EEPROM.
After a card is selected as defined in ISO/IEC 14443 A standard, the user can continue
with the MIFARE protocol. It is mandatory that card authentication is performed.
Crypto1 authentication is a 3-pass authentication which is automatically performed when
the Authent1 and Authent2 commands are executed (see Section 11.7.3 on page 98 and
Section 11.7.4 on page 98).
During the card authentication procedure, the security algorithm is initialized. After a
successful authentication, communication with the MIFARE card is encrypted.
9.14.1 Crypto1 key handling
On execution of the authentication command, the CLRC632 reads the key from the key
buffer. The key is always read from the key buffer and ensures Crypto1 authentication
commands do not require addressing of a key. The user must ensure the correct key is
prepared in the key buffer before triggering card authentication.
The key buffer can be loaded from:
• the EEPROM using the LoadKeyE2 command (see Section 11.7.1 on page 97)
• the microprocessor’s FIFO buffer using the LoadKey command (see Section 11.7.2
on page 97). This is shown in Figure 15.
Fig 15. Crypto1 key handling block diagram
001aak624
FIFO BUFFER
from the microcontroller
WriteE2
LoadKey
EEPROM
KEYS
KEY BUFFER
LoadKeyE2
during
Authent1
CRYPTO1
MODULE
serial data stream in serial data stream out
(plain) (encrypted)CLRC632 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.7 — 27 February 2014
073937 43 of 127
NXP Semiconductors CLRC632
Standard multi-protocol reader solution
9.14.2 Authentication procedure
The Crypto1 security algorithm enables authentication of MIFARE cards. To obtain valid
authentication, the correct key has to be available in the key buffer of the CLRC632. This
can be ensured as follows:
1. Load the internal key buffer by using the LoadKeyE2 (see Section 11.7.1 on page 97)
or the LoadKey (see Section 11.7.2 on page 97) commands.
2. Start the Authent1 command (see Section 11.7.3 on page 98). When finished, check
the error flags to obtain the command execution status.
3. Start the Authent2 command (see Section 11.7.4 on page 98). When finished, check
the error flags and bit Crypto1On to obtain the command execution status.
10. CLRC632 registers
10.1 Register addressing modes
Three methods can be used to operate the CLRC632:
• initiating functions and controlling data by executing commands
• configuring the functional operation using a set of configuration bits
• monitoring the state of the CLRC632 by reading status flags
The commands, configuration bits and flags are accessed using the microprocessor
interface. The CLRC632 can internally address 64 registers using six address lines.
10.1.1 Page registers
The CLRC632 register set is segmented into eight pages contain eight registers each. A
Page register can always be addressed, irrespective of which page is currently selected.
10.1.2 Dedicated address bus
When using the CLRC632 with the dedicated address bus, the microprocessor defines
three address lines using address pins A0, A1 and A2. This enables addressing within a
page. To switch between registers in different pages a paging mechanism needs to be
used.
Table 36 shows how the register address is assembled.
10.1.3 Multiplexed address bus
The microprocessor may define all six address lines at once using the CLRC632 with a
multiplexed address bus. In this case either the paging mechanism or linear addressing
can be used.
Table 37 shows how the register address is assembled.
Table 36. Dedicated address bus: assembling the register address
Register bit: UsePageSelect Register address
1 PageSelect2 PageSelect1 PageSelect0 A2 A1 A0CLRC632 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.7 — 27 February 2014
073937 44 of 127
NXP Semiconductors CLRC632
Standard multi-protocol reader solution
10.2 Register bit behavior
Bits and flags for different registers behave differently, depending on their functions. In
principle, bits with same behavior are grouped in common registers. Table 38 describes
the function of the Access column in the register tables.
Table 37. Multiplexed address bus: assembling the register address
Multiplexed
address bus
type
UsePage
Select
Register address
Paging mode 1 PageSelect2 PageSelect1 PageSelect0 AD2 AD1 AD0
Linear
addressing
0 AD5 AD4 AD3 AD2 AD1 AD0
Table 38. Behavior and designation of register bits
Abbreviation Behavior Description
R/W read and write These bits can be read and written by the microprocessor.
Since they are only used for control, their content is not
influenced by internal state machines.
Example: TimerReload register may be read and written by
the microprocessor. It will also be read by internal state
machines but never changed by them.
D dynamic These bits can be read and written by the microprocessor.
Nevertheless, they may also be written automatically by
internal state machines.
Example: the Command register changes its value
automatically after the execution of the command.
R read only These registers hold flags which have a value determined by
internal states only.
Example: the ErrorFlag register cannot be written externally
but shows internal states.
W write only These registers are used for control only. They may be written
by the microprocessor but cannot be read. Reading these
registers returns an undefined value.
Example: The TestAnaSelect register is used to determine the
signal on pin AUX however, it is not possible to read its
content.CLRC632 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.7 — 27 February 2014
073937 45 of 127
NXP Semiconductors CLRC632
Standard multi-protocol reader solution
10.3 Register overview
Table 39. CLRC632 register overview
Sub
address
(Hex)
Register name Function Refer to
Page 0: Command and status
00h Page selects the page register Table 41 on page 50
01h Command starts and stops command execution Table 43 on page 50
02h FIFOData input and output of 64-byte FIFO buffer Table 45 on page 51
03h PrimaryStatus receiver and transmitter and FIFO buffer status flags Table 47 on page 51
04h FIFOLength number of bytes buffered in the FIFO buffer Table 49 on page 52
05h SecondaryStatus secondary status flags Table 51 on page 53
06h InterruptEn enable and disable interrupt request control bits Table 53 on page 53
07h InterruptRq interrupt request flags Table 55 on page 54
Page 1: Control and status
08h Page selects the page register Table 41 on page 50
09h Control control flags for timer unit, power saving etc Table 57 on page 55
0Ah ErrorFlag show the error status of the last command executed Table 59 on page 55
0Bh CollPos bit position of the first bit-collision detected on the RF interface Table 61 on page 56
0Ch TimerValue value of the timer Table 63 on page 57
0Dh CRCResultLSB LSB of the CRC coprocessor register Table 65 on page 57
0Eh CRCResultMSB MSB of the CRC coprocessor register Table 67 on page 57
0Fh BitFraming adjustments for bit oriented frames Table 69 on page 58
Page 2: Transmitter and coder control
10h Page selects the page register Table 41 on page 50
11h TxControl controls the operation of the antenna driver pins TX1 and TX2 Table 71 on page 59
12h CwConductance selects the conductance of the antenna driver pins TX1 and TX2 Table 73 on page 60
13h ModConductance defines the driver output conductance Table 75 on page 60
14h CoderControl sets the clock frequency and the encoding Table 77 on page 61
15h ModWidth selects the modulation pulse width Table 79 on page 62
16h ModWidthSOF selects the SOF pulse-width modulation (I-CODE1 fast mode) Table 81 on page 62
17h TypeBFraming defines the framing for ISO/IEC 14443 B communication Table 83 on page 63
Page 3: Receiver and decoder control
18 Page selects the page register Table 41 on page 50
19 RxControl1 controls receiver behavior Table 85 on page 64
1A DecoderControl controls decoder behavior Table 87 on page 65
1B BitPhase selects the bit-phase between transmitter and receiver clock Table 89 on page 65
1C RxThreshold selects thresholds for the bit decoder Table 91 on page 66
1D BPSKDemControl controls BPSK receiver behavior Table 93 on page 66
1Eh RxControl2 controls decoder and defines the receiver input source Table 95 on page 67
1Fh ClockQControl clock control for the 90 phase-shifted Q-channel clock Table 97 on page 67CLRC632 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP Semiconductors N.V. 2014. All rights reserved.
Product data sheet
COMPANY PUBLIC
Rev. 3.7 — 27 February 2014
073937 46 of 127
NXP Semiconductors CLRC632
Standard multi-protocol reader solution
Page 4: RF Timing and channel redundancy
20h Page selects the page register Table 41 on page 50
21h RxWait selects the interval after transmission before the receiver starts Table 99 on page 68
22h ChannelRedundancy selects the method and mode used to check data integrity on
the RF channel
Table 101 on page 68
23h CRCPresetLSB preset LSB value for the CRC register Table 103 on page 69
24h CRCPresetMSB preset MSB value for the CRC register Table 105 on page 69
25h TimeSlotPeriod selects the time between automatically transmitted frames Table 107 on page 69
26h MFOUTSelect selects internal signal applied to pin MFOUT, includes the MSB
of value TimeSlotPeriod; see Table 107 on page 69
Table 109 on page 70
27h PreSet27 these values are not changed Table 111 on page 70
Page 5: FIFO, timer and IRQ pin configuration
28h Page selects the page register Table 41 on page 50
29h FIFOLevel defines the FIFO buffer overflow and underflow warning levels Table 49 on page 52
2Ah TimerClock selects the timer clock divider Table 114 on page 71
2Bh TimerControl selects the timer start and stop conditions Table 116 on page 72
2Ch TimerReload defines the timer preset value Table 118 on page 72
2Dh IRQPinConfig configures pin IRQ output stage Table 120 on page 73
2Eh PreSet2E these values are not changed Table 122 on page 73
2Fh PreSet2F these values are not changed Table 123 on page 73
Page 6: reserved registers
30h Page selects the page register Table 41 on page 50
31h reserved reserved Table 124 on page 73
32h reserved reserved
33h reserved reserved
34h reserved reserved
35h reserved reserved
36h reserved reserved
37h reserved reserved
Page 7: Test control
38h Page selects the page register Table 41 on page 50
39h reserved reserved Table 125 on page 74
3Ah TestAnaSelect selects analog test mode Table 126 on page 74
3Bh reserved reserved Table 128 on page 75
3Ch reserved reserved Table 129 on page 75
3Dh TestDigiSelect selects digital test mode Table 130 on page 75
3Eh reserved reserved Table 132 on page 76
3Fh reserved reserved
